~ 85 GP C AERNS POTe E
et ivtea nese tnhekich ty tale inten vie teords error aria Wiaae mr ininink NS Gm IOS ern ep dene eee ee ee Re

0A RA AAD oak DP aN POD aD DRA ~F sn AARP ITs Pdashh wan aan 2 pituagnnom ¥90T eee Peon
a Ee NET ee :

> oapeeenrs .
selena settee et ores eterna So raced einer nee AIG et ee BAO em Open tam ete OTE YE erat dabea NOT Oe aD * ; Secnine be avecarroraneoeb ;
i ainee teatete oe Se Reena ceed Set oe a3
eoerntnfe ergetetinge tn eben wenin Ge Tse GeAAD Sr Spore cope satetate te terabyte fee orem ete ee eae emo hey Sea Ge ne a cn EASON NO BATS care eter ng OAR rte poe pre ea OTD pa Lae aba OO TG
mE fetta oven G4 REDE Tella Catia hin ett (mbvteierd- ue aNop artes wh Sole tee toe Gute he ish force etal tei Paees erste tek eee oe tae pe tece mae TE ape ee oe oN PURE meme ne oe Pree sn a Ne Fecha Neen eh meneame en Pra A added aie Petes eeareenasgene een
; Sut ete tent be Pe becoy so pu trat tesa tetera eNO PO NON pa wg ON peewee tee aaah eS eerie ee eee te mes NS SON Oe LEE SAO Sevens ten a-ha lbetod tie be pyokerntate teetae
wpetenn ks tencntntnteternneBatutatatehs tetel Seis aeoriwerinte fer be eiierekeeeimmnn bees Smee maemo See ng ee eT TC ND ae et ae ae a mone BS re eee ee NNT corse :

HL)

t

\
ro
>»
+

2

age lyqiies © y
an

| agers 5 S x, i
F Ny,
“Wy

1 it

ri

Br
i <

SATE
itonaneoey

ONT aR SE

Sarr ifs ae aii ne
oo AOE A %

~~

pi

I"

i,

ey

-

<a i f

e Fi A, “a

vy g c

i

Ha

<

~ oy

»o a

“aM

wy ie

af yo

“ag . “n Fl

tl

A

i

re Aioy
OO,

ft i:

by

| i,

i o%, as og

»

a

|

cs
st
Kon

Me, XS

Os

%

S
=

S
% x
<a
Be

?
Ss
fs

Mata
ISS

hes
tS,

Me mOLNS
¢ Chai

ni

ia

sae us
sage gu
S8é- ‘

235 i
ee 3\4

oT

ca

Ny,
>
»
QS

4
Oo

“ “4 iG

1341

fe.

a
OR

1 >

Rule's

Pt

Morar
& oS

te
vine
i

a
aH cm)

ca

f
oe *

ited ss

: Eve

f F

Niet

Wehiaee erate

a
A

TAR tom

Pe eh pee ces vt

Supplement to Science, January 12. 1923

SCIENCE

NEW SERIES. VOLUME LVI.

JULY-DECEMBER, 1922

J 6 AD OS

NEW YORK
THE SCIENCE PRESS
1923

b., - Ate,
v6 CONTENTS AND INDEX.

NEW SERIES. VOL. LVI.—JULY TO DECEMBRR, 1922

NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS ARE PRINTED IN SMALL CAPITALS

Asporr, A. C., Death Rate from Tuberculosis, 387

Abstracts, Analytic, G. FULCHER, 678

Acoustics, C. A. RucKMICK, 357, 506; T. Lyman,
633

Adrenal, Emergency Funetion of, F. A. Harr-
MAN, 146

Aerological Summary, L. L. Mrisincrr, 482

Agglutination and Tissue Formation, L. Loes,
237

Agriculture and Wireless Telephony in France,
70)

Agriculturists, Can. Soc. of Technical, 102

Air, Filtered, A. McAprs, 108

Albino Mutation of Fungus, L. Bonar, 226

ALEXANDER, J., Cultivation and Evaporation,
196; Physico-Chemical Mechanism of Muta-
tion and Evolution, 323; Colloidal State, 663

Alge, L. H. Tirrany, 285

ALLEN, W. E., Repositories for Scientific Publi-
cations, 197

American Association for the Advancement of
Science: Southwestern Division, 140;
and Economic Sciences, 163, 708; Section E—
Geology and Geography, EH. 8. Moorz, 174;
Section Q—Education, B. T. Batpwin, 176;
Salt Lake City Meeting, W. W. SarcEanr,
241; and American Medical Association, 305,
566; Boston Meeting, 611; Autumn Meeting
of Executive Committee, 613; Annual Report
of Permanent Seeretary, 614; Report of Com-
mittee on Convocation Week, 616; Chemistry
at Boston, 628; Hotels for Boston Meeting,
682; Medical Sciences, 707; History of Sci-
ence, 708; Railway Tickets to Boston, 709

Animal, Experiments in Great Britain, 326;
Mechanism, C. S. SHerrineTon, 345
Antiquity of Man, H. F. Osporn and C. A.

REEDS, 256
Antivivisection Legislation in California, 566
Anuran Metamorphosis, Iodine and, W. W. Swin-
GLE, 720
Archeology, Mexican, Zru1a Nutrauy, 19
ARCHIBALD, R. C., German Publishers, 45
Argy, L. B., Human Yolk Sae, 75
Astronomical Soc., Amer., J. Srespins, 459
Austrian Intellectual Workers, 743
Avian Populations in California, J. GRINNELL,
671
Azotobacter, P. L. Gatnry, 21,
BATCHELOR, 49

and | H., W.

Bascock, E. B. and J. L. Couuins, Duplicate
Genes and Inheritance of Glandular Pubes-
cence, 392

Babeock Glassware, 411

Bache Fund, Grants from, 711

Bacterial Plant Diseases in P. I., C. G. WELLES,
18

Baxer, A. C., Tingitide or Tingide, 603

Baupwin, B. T., Section Q—Edueation 176

Bananas, Disease of, M. A. CaRLEeTon, 663

Social .

Bancrort, W. D., Applied Colloid Chemistry,
EH. F. Burton, 539

Barus, C., Vacuum Gravitation Needle, 452

Basal. Glauconite and Phosphate Beds, M. I.
GOLDMAN, 171

Bassett, P. R. and L. Bett,
Carbon in Intensive Are, 512

BatcHeLor, H. W. and P. L. Gainey,
bacter, 49

Bauer, L. A., Earth Current Observations, 592

Bayer 205, 514

Bean Mosaie Virus, R. Nreuson, 342

Braumont, A. B., Soil Shifting in Conn., 279

Beef Agar, F. W. Marsu, 367

Brut, L. and P. R. Bassert,
Carbon, 512

BrngaMiIn, M., American Geology, 480, 755

Bibliography and Research, K. C. Waker, 418

Biological Societies, American, Proposed Federa-
tion of, 681, A. F. Sunt, 184, 359; Stains,
450; H. J. Conn, 156, 562, 594; Literature,
Abstracting and Indexing of, J. R. ScuramM,
495

Biology, Club of Ohio State University,
Modern, R. PEARL, 581; Experimental, 627

Bisuop, K. §., and H. M. Evans, A Dietary Es-
sential to Reproduction, 650

BisHop, W. W., Record of Science, 205

Bishop Museum Fellowships, 102

Buiumserc, H., Hobson’s Iunetions
Variable, 574

BuLUMENSTOcK, J.. and A. B. LuckHarpt, Para-
thyroid Tetany, 257

Boldyreff, W. N., V. Keuucee, 481, 664

Bonar, E., Albino Mutation of Fungus, 226

Botulinus Toxin, R. L. Steuer, 143; J. Bronren-
BRENNER, 280

Boylston Medical Prizes, 565

BrRANNER, J. C.,. How and Why Stories, D. S.
JORDAN, 46

British Association, Hull Mecting, 103, 390

BRONTFENBRENNER, J., Botulinus Toxin, 280

Brouwrr, H. A., Geology of California
Duteh EK. Indies, 388

Brown, E. W., Watchers of. the Sky, Alfred
Noyes, 717

Brown, J. H., Teaching of Evolution, 448

Bryn Mawr College, Contribution of, to Higher
Edueation of Women, W. H. Wetcy, 1

Budget, Federal, 755

Burton, E. F., Bancroft’s Applied Colloid Chem-
istry, 539

Dissociation of

Azoto-

Dissociation of

245;

of Real

and

Casori, F., Waste of Mental Effort, 355; Tang-
ent Lines, 687

California, Poppy, D. S. Jorpan, 168

CaLKINS, M. W., Russell’s Analysis of Mind, 44

Cancer, Mortality from, 652

Carbon, Dissociation of, L. Benn and P. R.
Bassett, 512

Carzny, E. J., Smooth Bladder of Dog, 226

CaRLeTON, M. A., Disease of Bananas, 663

Carr, R. H and E. G. Maury, Fat in Cream, 512

CatrrLL, J. McK., Order of Scientific Merit, 541

Ceramic Day, 303

CHanG, H. T., Geological Survey of China, 233

Chemical Foundation, 13, 137; Soc., Amer., 219;
C. L. Parsons, 21, 50, 81, 112, 393, 424, 453,
485, 518, 547, 577, 607, 681, 693, 722, 746;
Industry (British), 69; Equation, H. A. Cur-
TIS, 258; Prize, 304; Spelling, C. A. JAcosson,
368; C. E. Warmrs, 603; L. O. Howarp, 450;
H. W. Wiery, 514

Chemistry, Journal of Physical, 304; General,
W. SrGrRBLOM, 320; Society, Amer. Physical,
627; at Boston, 628; First-year College, H. N.
HOLMES, 648

Chemists, International Meeting of, at Utrecht,
270

Children and Museums, 311

Chromosomes, Heterotypic, Organization of, W.
R. Tayior, 635

Cicada, Periodical, J. N. Gowantocr, 144

Cuark, H. L., Misuse of Questionnaire, 573

CLELAND, H. F., Weathering under Constant Con-
ditions, 659

Climates, Evolution of, M. Manson, 571

Clinkertill, L. P. Dover, 338

Coal, Mining, 37; Atmospheric Dust in, W. 8S.
Guocrn, 484

CockERELL, T. D. A., Huia Onslow, 185; Mealy-
bug and Other Coccids, 308

Coelenterata, Fresh Water, H. Garman, 664

CorFIN, CHARLES A., Foundation, 653

Cole, Frank Nelson, Prize, 710

Cottins, J. L. and E. B. Bascocx, Duplicate
Genes and Inheritance of Glandular Pubes-
cence in Crepis, 392

Colloidal State, J. ALEXANDER, 663

Colorado River, F. E. Weymoura, 59; B. WILLIs,
177; C. E. Grunsxy, 521 i

Compton, A. H., Radiation Form of Matter, 717

Conn, H. J., American Biological Stains, 156,
562, 594, 689

Conservation, and Modern Life, J. H. Luss, 559;
of Resources of Pacific, 680

Coomsps, H. C., and F. H. Pixg, Respiration, 691

‘Cordilleran Region, Glaciation of, T. Laren, 335;
F. Levrrert, 388; J. T. Parprn, 686

Cost, Accounting, F. W. Frurrpacuer, 537; of
German Publications, J. L. Hows, 228

Crania, Human, R. B. Drxon, 418

Craterlets in E. Cent. Arkansas, E. T. Tuomas,
20

Cream, Fat in, H. W. Grecory, 309; EE. G.
Manin and R. H. Carr, 512

Crepis, E. B. Bascock and J. L. Coturs, 392

Cretaceous in Mongolia, H. F. Osporn, 291

Crozier, W. J., Marine Biology, 751

Cultivation and Evaporation, J. ALEXANDER, 196

Culture and Research in University, J. C. Mer-
RIAM, 263

CunnincHAm, B., N. C. Acad. of Sci., 147

Curtis, H. A., Balancing Chemical Equation, 258

Dark Room Photography, A. L. MELANDER, 536

Davenport, C. B., Alfred Goldsborough Mayor,
134

Davis, W. M., Graduate School of Geography,
121

Derruersen, J. A., Walter’s Genetics, 145

Development, Method of Initiating, E. E. Juse,

202

iv SCIENCE

ConTENTS AND
INDEX

Devonian Forest at Gilboa, N. Y., 565

Diabetes, Insulin as Cure for, 665

Dickson, L. E., Solitaire Game, 418

Dirmars, R., Reptiles of World, A. G. RurHvEN,
79

Dixon, R. B., Human Crania, 418

Dog, Smooth Bladder of, E. J. Carry,
Homing cf, W. D. Harry, 339

Dover, L. P., Clinkertill, 338

Draper, Henry, Medal, 741

Dunn, E. R., Zoogeography, 336

Dye Industry, French, 273

226;

Earth Currents and Magnetic Variations, F. San-
FORD, 464; L. A. Bausrr, 592

Kelipse, Solar, of Sept. 21, 441

Ecological Soe. of Amer., 599

Einstein, Translating, E. E. Stosson, 752

Electricity, Static, H. E. Jagurs, 252

Electro-Chem. Soc., Amer., 244, 745

Euuis, J. W., Infra-Red Absorption, 313

Emer, O. H., Cross-Inoculation and Insect
Transmission, 3870

Endowments, Controlling Research, 339

Engineers and Amer. Univ. in Europe, 71

Kosins, American, H. J. Conn, 689

Equilibration, C. R. GrirritH, 676

Eugenics, Int. Committee of, 626

Evans, H. M., and K. 8. BisHop, Dietary EHs-
sential to Reproduction, 650

Evolution, and Bible, C. V. Piper, 108; Teach-
ing of, F. L. Pickrrt, 298; J. H. Brown, 448;
in Minnesota, 530; Physico-Chemical Mechan-
ism of Mutation and, J. ALEXANDER, 323

Farr, ©. H., Damp Chamber for Microscope, 227

FENNEMAN, N. M., Division of Geol. and Geog.
of N. R. C., 620

Ferris, G. F., Green’s Coccide of Ceylon, 312

FEUERBACHER, F. W., Cost Accounting, 537

Field Museum of Natural History, 39

Fiji-New Zealand Exped. of Univ. of Iowa, 442

Fishes, Effect of Forest Fires on, 362

Fisher, Emil, Aus Meinem Leben, B. Harrow,
482

Fiscurr, M., Whither, 405

Forest under Washington, 529

Foulerton Professorship and Studentship, 161

France, Agriculture and Wireless Telephony in, 70

Frost, E. B., Russian Astronomers, 279

FuLcHer, G., Analytic Abstracts, 678

Gacrr, C. §., Financial Support of Technical
Journals, 633

Gainry, P. L., Azotobacter, 21;
BATCHELOR, 49

GarMAN, H., Fresh Water Coelenterata in Ken-
tucky, 664

Garner, W. W., Sand Drown, 341

Garter Snake, Spermatogenesis of, L. E. THATCH-
ER, 372

GartH, T. R., Intelligence of Indians, 635

Gas Generator, A. P. Harrison, 285

Geographers, Association of, American, 598

Geography, Graduate School of, W. M. Davis,
121

Geological Congress, 12th International, 329;
Excursion, New England Inter-collegiate, 442;
Society of America, 303; Survey of China,
H. T. Cuane, 233; Survey, U. S., 530

Geology of California and Dutch East Indies,
H. A. Brouwer, 388; American, M. BrngaMin,

and H. W.

New SEerigs,
Vortume LVI

480, 755; Beginnings of American, T. C. Mrn-
DENHALL, 661

GERIcKE, W. F., Water Culture Experimentation,
421

Guock, W. 8., Atmospheric Dust in Coal, 484

Guover, J. W., U. S. Life Tables, R. Praru, 756

Goitre, Prevention of, J. C. McCLENDON, 269

GotpMAN, M. I., Basal Glauconite and Phosphor-
ate Beds, 171

Good Roads Scholarship, 273

Gorpon, 8. G., Vauxite and Paravauxite, 50

Gorgas Memorial, 245; Work of, 419

GowANLock, J. N., Periodical Cieada, 144

Green, E. F., Coccide of Ceylon, G. F. Ferris,
312

Grecory, H. E., Polynesian Research, 527

GreEGoRY, H. W., Determination of Fat in Cream,
ae) 9) 5

Gregory, R., Teaching of Science, 433

GrirFriTH, C. R., Equilibration, 676

GRINNELL, J., Avian Populations in California,
671

Grunsky, C. E., Colorado River Problem, 521

GUBERLET, J. E., Lowery Lamon Lewis, 563

Guperr, E. W., Occurrence in Atlantic Ocean of
Whale Shark, 251

Guyer, M. F., Newman’s Readings in Evolution,
Genetics and Eugenics, 451

Haldane, J. S., Respiration, Y. HENDERSON, 390

Halsted, George Bruce, A. M. HumMpHreys, 160

Halsted, William Stewart, H. C., 461

Hanna, G. D., Recent Expedition to Islands off
West Coast of Lower California, 503

Harpy, G. H., Theory of Numbers, 401

Harris, J. A., and H. R. Luwis, Winter Cycle
in Fowl, 230

Harris, N. M., Daylight Meteorite, 514

Harrison, A. P., Gas Generator for Laboratory
Use, 285

Harrow, B., Emil Fischer’s Aus Meinem Leben,
482

Harry, W. D., Homing of Dog, 339

Hartman, F. A.; Emergency Function of Adre-
nal, 146

Harvey, R. B., Plants and Artificial Light, 366

Hayden Award, 746

Hepees, F., Bacterial Pustule of Soy Bean, 111

HreGner, R. W., Intestinal Protozoa, 439

Helium, Spectrum of, T. Lyman, 167; Recovery
of, 505

HENDERSON, Y., Haldane’s Respiration, 390

Henry Draper Medal, 741

Herrick, C. J., Smell, Taste and Allied Senses
in Vertebrates, G. F. Parker, 515

Herschel Centenary, Pilgrimage, 328, 381

Hicks, W. M., Analysis of Spectra, 687

Highways, Conference on, 412, 189

Hobson, E. W., Functions of Real Variable, H.
BLUMBERG, 574

HOouuanp, W. J., Tingitide or Tingide, 334, 535

HoumMEs, H. N., First-year-College Chemistry, 648

Houmes, R. M., Palladium, 201

Hornaday, W. T., Minds and Manners of Wild
Animals, R. M. YERKES, 604

Howarp, L. O., Chemical Spelling, 450

Howe, J. L., Cost of German Publications, 228

Huusert, EH. O., Sealing Quartz to Glass, 147

Humpureys, A. M., George Bruce Halsted, 160

Humpurerys, W. J., Relativity, 603

Immigration Laws, 12

SCIENCE Vv

Indians, Intelligence of, T. R. Garru, 635

Infra-Red Absorption, J. W. Exuis, 315

Insulin as Cure for Diabetes, 665

Iron and Steel Electrical Engineers, Ass. of,
244, 274

IrvinE, J. C., Organization of Research, 373

Isotopes of Tin, 19

JAcoBsoNn, C. A., Chemical Spelling, 368

Jacqugs, H. E., Statie Electricity, 252

Jenkins, J. T., History of Whale Fisheries, F.
A. Lucas, 109

Jenkins, O. P.,
JORDAN, 46

JENNESS, D., Stefansson’s Friendly Arctic, 8

JoHNSON, C. W., Muscina FPascuorum Meigen in
N. E., 604

Jounson, H. H., Centriole Derivative in Sperma-
togenesis of Oecanthus, 759

Jounson, R. H., Vacuum Tube Amplifier, 449

Jones, A. T., Meteorites, 169

Jones, L. T., and H. G. Tasker, Measurement of
Capacities and Inductances, 79

Jorpan, D. S., Natural and Unnatural History,
46; California Poppy, 168; Production of
Species, 448

Just, E. E., Effect on Development of Sperm
Boiled in Oxalated Sea Water, 202

Interesting Neighbors, D. S.

Karpinskr, L. C., Stevenson’s Terrestrial and
Celestial Globes, 199

Ketioee, V., Russian Scientific Literature, 45;
Aid for Russian Scientists, 481, 504, 634, 664,
717

KeEnpauu, J., Loeb’s Proteins and Theory of
Colloidal Behavior, 369

Keyser, C. J., Mathematical Philosophy, G. A.
MILLER, 229

Kiss, C. C. and H. K., Are Spectrum of Chro-
mium, 666

Kinestey, J. S., Swordfish, 225

Knowledge, Humanizing of, J. H. Ropinson, 89

KNow.tton, F. H., Manson’s Evolution of Cli-
mates, 254

Lace-Bugs, Names of, W. J. HoLLann, 334

Larce, T., Glaciation of Cordilleran Region, 335

Latitude, Changes of, R. H. TucKsErR, 555

Less, J. H., Iowa Academy of Science, 260;
Conservation and Modern Life, 559

LEvERET?, F., Glaciation, 588

Levirt, I., Relief for Russian Scientific Men, 387

Lewis, H. R., and J. A. Harris, Winter Cycle in
Fowl, 230

Lewis, Lowery Laymon, J. E. GuBERLET, 563

Light, Zodiacal, C. S. Osborn, 308

Lipman, C. B., Nitrification in Sea Water, 501;
and J. K. Taytor, Wheat Plant and Atmos-
pherie Nitrogen, 605

Livingston, B. E., Weaver, Jean and Crist on
Development and Activities of Roots of Crop
Plants, 283

Lors, J., Colloidal Behavior of Proteins, 369, 731

London Bird Sauctuary, 744

Lowell Institute Lectures, 443

Lower California, Expedition to Islands off Coast
of, G. D. Hanna, 503

Lucas, F. A., Jenkins’s History of Whale Fish-
eries, 109

Luckuarpt, A. B., and P. J. RosENBLoom, Para-
thyroid Tetany, 48; and J. BLUMENSTOCK,
Acute Parathyroid Tetany, 257

vi SCIENCE

Lyman, C. 8., Bust of, 361
Lyman, T., Spectrum of Helium, 167; Acoustical
Research, 633

McApir, A., Filtered Air, 1°8

McCurnpon, J. C., Iodine and the Prevention of
Goitre, 269

MacEnwanr, J. B., Seismological Evidence, 478

McFaruanp, F. M., Microscopical Technique, 43

McKernan, L. W., X-Ray Crystallometry; X-
Ray Wave Lengths; Space-Lattice Dimensions
and Atomic Masses, 757

McMorrrey, J. E., Sand Drown, 341

Macrosiphum Solanifolii and Bean Mosaic Virus,
R. NEuson, 342

Magnesite in Southern Nevada, 69

Manin, E. G., and R. H. Carr, Fat in Cream, 512

Manson, M., Evolution of Climates, 254, 571

Marine Biology, W. J. Crozimr, 751

Marsu, F. W., Beef Agar, 367

Mass. Inst. of Tech., Appointments at,
Presidency of, 444

Mathematical, Soc., Amer., R. G. D. RicHarpson,
423, 730; Association of America, 627

Marrnes, F. E., Highest Water Fall, 75

Mayor, Alfred Goldsborough, R. S. Woopwarp,
68; C. B. Davenport, 134; T. C. MENDENHALL,
198

Mealy-bug, T. D. A. CockERELL, 308

Measurement of Capacities and Inductances, H.
G. TASKER and L. T. Jongs, 79

Medicine, Clinical, F. R. Sasry, 149

Meccrs, W. F., Austrian Scientific Publications,
634

Mrisincer, L. L., Aerological Summary, 482

MetAnper, A. L., Miniature Photographie Dark
Room, 536

MELLEN, I. M., Effects of Captivity on Sex Char-
acters, 573

MENDENHALL, T. C., Alfred Goldsborough Mayor,
198; U. S. Fundamental Standards of Length
and Mass, 377; Beginnings of American Geol-
ogy, 661

Mental Effort, Waste of, F. Casort, 355

Menzies, A. W. C., Alexander Smith, 409

Merriam, J. C., Common Aims of Culture and
Research in the University, 263

Meteorites, Hunting, A. M. Miter, 249; Day-
light, N. M. Harris, 514; Temperatures of,
A. T. Jonzs, 169

Metric Standardization, 362

Mexican Archeology, Z. Nurratn, 19

Microscope, Damp Chamber for, C. H. Farr, 227

Microscopical Technique, F. M. McFaruanp, 43

Miuier, A. M., Meteorite Hunting, 249

Minter, G. A., Keyser’s Mathematical Philoso-
phy, 229; Osgood and Graustein’s Plane and
Solid Analytic Geometry, 420

Miner, J. B., Dr. Lipman’s Laboratory of Ap-
plied Psychology, 310

MitcureLt, H. H., Balancing Dietaries with Re-
spect to Vitamines, 34

Monkey, Sex Chromosomes of, T. S. PAINTER, 286

Mooniz, R. L., Paleopathology of Parasuchians,
417

Moorg, E. S., American Association, Section E.,
Geology and Geography, 174

Morean, J. L. R., Chemical Principles, 340

Mosaic, O. H. Ener, 370

Moss, E. G., Sand Drown, 341

Motorless Flight in England, 573

Mount Everest Expedition, 70, 470

383 ;

ConTENTS AND
INDEX

MurpHy, R. C., Whitney South Sea Expedition
of Amer. Museum of Natural History, 701
Muscina Pascuorum Meigen in N. E., C. W.
JOHNSON, 604

Museum of Natural History, Amer., 31; Ex-
peditions of, 182; Whitney South Sea Expedi-
tion of, R. C. MurpHy, 701

National, Research Council, 531; Academy of
Science, 531, 666; Functions of Division of
Geology and Geography of, N. M. FEnNEMAN,
620; Medical Fellowships, 624; Parks, Menace
to, W. G. Van Name, 705

Naturalists, West. Soe. of, C. Stock, 204; Am.
Soc. of, 599

Netson, R., Bean Mosaic Virus, 342

Newman, H. H., Readings in Evolution, Genetics
and Eugenies, M. F. Guyer, 451

Nitrates in Southeastern California, 471

Noyes, Alfred, Watchers of the Sky, E. W.
Brown, 717 3

Numbers, Theory of, G. H. Harpy, 401

Nurraun, Z., Mexican Archeology, 19

Oecanthus, Centriole Derivative in Spermatogene-
sis of, H. H. JoHnson, 759

Ouson, A. R., X-Rays and Chemical Reaction, 231

Onslow, Huia, T. D. A. CocKrrELL, 185

Optical, Instruments, 219; Soe. of Amer., 38, 636

Ornithologists Union, American, 381

Ossorn, C. 8., Zodiacal Light, 308

Ossorn, H. F., and C. A. Rerps, Antiquity of
Man, 256; Cretaceous and Older ‘Tertiary
Strata in Mongolia, 291

Oxygen, in Metallurgical Operations, 506

Painter, T. 8., Sex Chromosomes of Monkey, 286

Palladium, R. M. Hotmes, 201

Paper, Cabinet for Colored, C. A. Ruckmick, 76

Paraffine Paper Sereens for Showing Position of
Retinal Image, G. D. SHAFER, 252

Parasuchians, Paleopathology of, R. LL. Moopin,
417

Paravauxite, S. G. Gorpon, 50

Parper, J. T., Glaciation in Cordilleran Region,
686 2

Parker, G. H., Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in
Vertebrates, C. J. Hirrick, 515

ParsuHuey, H. M., Tingitide or Tingide, 449, 754

Parsons, C. L., Amer. Chem. Soc., 21, 50, 81, 112,
393, 424, 453, 485, 518, 547, 577, 607, 693, 722

Pasteur, as Drama, 12; on Science and Applica-
tions of Science, C. Robertson, 194; Louis, 710

Prasopy, F. W., Department of Medicine at
Peking Union Medical College, 317

Praru, R., Modern Biology, 581; Glover’s United
States Life Tables, 756

Peking Union Medical College, Dept. of Medi-
cine, F. W. Prazopy, 317, 410

Perigenesis, H. C. SANDs, 517

Prrer, A. M., Kentucky Academy of Science, 85

Philippines, Bacterial Plant Diseases in, C. G.
WELLES, 18

Photometric Standards, 186

Physiological Effects at High Altitudes, 45

Picxert, F. L., Teaching of Evolution, 298

Pirrers, A. J., Processing of Straw, 108

Pigeons and Velvet Beans, W. D. Saumon, 368

Pike, F. H., and H. C. Coomss, Respiration, 691

Piper, ©. V., Does Bible Teach Evolution, 108

Plants, Feeding Power of, E. Truoc, 294; Growth
of in Artificial Light, R. B. Harvey, 366

New SERIES,
Votume LVI

Prizst, I. G., Optical Society of America, 636

Production of Dyes in United States, 188

Proteins, Colloidal Behavior of, J. Lors, 731

Protozoa, Frog and Toad Tadpoles Seurces of
Intestinal, R. W. Hrenrr, 439

Psychological Association, American, 413

Psychology, Dr. Lipman’s Laboratory of Ap-
plied, J. B. Miner, 310

Publishers, Methods of German, R. C. ARcHIBALD,
45

Pueblo Indians, Justice for, 665

Quartz, Sealing, to Glass, E. O. HuLserr, 147
Questionnaire, Misuse of, H. L. CuarKe, 573

Radiation Form of Matter, A. H. Compron, 716

Radio, Frequencies, Precise Standardization of,
564

Ramsay Memorial, 596

Redwood Trees of California, 302

Reeps, C. A., and H. F. Oszorn, aot of
Man, 256

Relativity, W. J. HumpHreys, 603

Reproduction, Dietary Essential for, H. M.
Nvawns and K. 8. BisHop, 650

Research, Medical, 14; Funds, Administration of
by Elector Plan, C. E. Srasnorr, 66; Fellow-
ships for Medical, 188; International, 243;
and Culture in the University, J. C. Mrrriam,
263; Endowments Controlling, 339; Organ-
ization of, J. C. Irvine, 373; Work, Cost of,
409; at Tortugas Laboratory, A. A. SCHAEFER,
468; Council, National, 531, 620, 224; Poly-
nesian, H. E. Grecory, 527; Protecting at
Polls, 5388; Gifted Students and, C. E. Sra-
sHoRE, 641; in Marine Biology, W. J. Crozirr,
751

Respiration, F. H. Pixr and H. C. Coomss, 691

Ricuarpson, R. G. D., Amer. Math. Soc., 423, 730

Rintz, H. L., Veblen’s Analysis Situs, 575

Riee, G. B., Effects of Copper Wire on Trees, 687

RoBertson, C., Pasteur on Science and Applica-
tions of Science, 194

Rosinson, J. H., Humanizing of Knowledge, 89

Rockefeller, Foundation, Activities of, 363; In-
stitute for Medical Research, 14

RosrnsLoom, P. J., and A. B. Luckiarpr, Para-
thyroid Tetany, 48

Royal Sanitary Institute, 272

Rucxmicrk, C. A., Cabinet for Colored Papers,
76; Institute for Acoustic Research, 357

Russell, B., Analysis of Mind, M. W. Cauxriys, 44

Russia, American Literature for, R. Zon, 311;
V. Kettoce, 45; Aid for Scientific Men in,
717; EH. B. Frost, 279; I. Levitt, 389; V.
Kewioce, 504, 634; M. I. Wonxrorr, 144

Rouruven, A. G., Ditmar’s Reptiles of World, 79

SaBin, F. R., Teaching Clinical Medicine, 149

Sr. JOouN, C. E., Hicks’ Analysis of Spectra, 687

SALMON, W. D., "Feeding Velvet Beans to Pigeons,

Sand Drown, W. W. Garner, J. E. McMurrrey
and E. G. Moss, 341

Sanps, H. C., Perigenesis, 517.

SanForD, F., Magnetic Variations, 464

SARGEANT, W. W., Salt Lake City Meeting, A. A.
A. S., 241

Scuazrrrer, A. A., Research at Tortugas Labora-
tory, 468

ScuHzaMu, J. R., Abstracting and Indexing Bio-
logical Literature, 495

SCIENCE vil

Science, Kentucky Acad. of, A. M. Prrsr, 85;
N. C. Acad. of, B. CunnincHAM, 147; Record
of, W. W. BisHop, 205; and Tropics, 228; lowa
Acad. of, J. H. Lens, 260; Ohio Acad. of, 288;
Section Organization of, 328; California Acad.
of, 381; in Fiction, E. EH. Suosson, 419; Teach-
ing of, R. Gregory, 433; Appreciation of, 755;
News, Nos. 1456, 1457, 1458, 1459, 1460, 1461

Scientific Notes and News, 15, 39, 72, 104, 140,
164, 190, 221, 246, 274, 305, 330, 364, 383, 413,
445, 474, 507, 532, 567, 599, 629, 655, 682, 712,
747; Expedition to Islands off West Coast of
California, 135; Publications, Repositories for,
W. E. Auten, 197; Research, Protecting at
Polls, 538; Merit, Order of, J. McK. CarTE.n,
541; Publications, Austrian, W. F. MEGGERs,
634.

Sreasnorr, C. E., Elector Plan for Administration
of Research Funds, 66; Gifted Students and
Research, 641

Sea Water, Does Nitrification Oceur in? C. B.
Lipman, 501

Srers, J. W., Earth and Its Life, D. S. Jorpan,
46

SEGERBLOM, W., Course in General Chemistry, 320

Seismological Evidence, J. B. MacrLwane, 478

Series Regularities in Are Spectrum of Chromium,
C. C. and H. K. Kirss, 666

SETCHELL, W. A., Zostera Marina, 575

Sex Character, I. M. MELLEN, 573

Suarer, G. D., Position of Retinal Image, 252

Shenandoah Caverns, 240

SHERRINGTON, C. S., Animal Mechanism, 345

Suuunt, A. F., Proposed Federation of American
Biological Societies, 184; 359

Sigma Xi, Society of, 654

Stosson, E. EH., Science in Fiction, 419; Trans-
lating Hinstein, 752

Smith, Alexander, A. W. C. Mrenzims, 409; 441

Soils, Depletion of, M. Wurrney, 216

Solar Eclipse of September 21, 441

Solitaire, L. E. Dickson, 418

Soy Bean, Bacterial Pustule of, F. Hepes, 111

Species, Production of, D. S. Jorpan, 448

Spirit Photographs, 253

Standards, Bureau of, A. G. WrsstrEr, 170

STEBBINS, J., Amer. Astronomical Soc.. 459

Stefansson, V., The Friendly Arctic, D. Jrn-
NESS, 8

STEHLE, R. L., Botulinus Toxin, 143

Sterson, H. T., Stellar Diameters, 535

Stevenson, E. L., Terrestrial and Celestial Globes,
L. C. Karpinsx1, 199

Stites, C. W., Zoological Nomenclature, 690

Stocx, C., W. Soc. of Naturalists, 204

Straw, Processing of, A. J. Pieters, 108

Students, Foreign, and Federal Immigration
Laws, 12
STUHLMAN, O., JR., Extension of X-ray into

Ultra-violet Spectrum, 344

Sullivant, Joseph, Medal, 472

Swincie, W. W., Iodine and Anuran Metamor-
phosis, 720

Swordfish, C. H. TowNnsrnpD, 18; Food Habits of,
J. 8. Kinesury, 225

Tangent Lines, F. Cagzort, 687

TASKER, H. G., and L. T. Jones, Measurement of
Capacities and Inductances, 79

Taytor, J. K., and C, B. Lipman, Wheat Plant
and Atmospheric Nitrogen, 605

Vlil

Taytor, W. R., Organization of Heterotypic
Chromosomes, 635

Technical Journals, Financial Support of, C. S.
GAGER, 633

Tetany, Control and Cure of Parathyroid, A. B.
LuckHarpr and P. J. RosensLoom, 48; Acute
Parathyroid, A. B. LucKkHarpT and J. BLUMEN-
STOCK, 257

Textile Research Institute, 13

THATcHER, L. E., Spermatogenesis of Garter
Snake, 372

Tuomas, E. T., Craterlets in East Central Arkan-
sas, 20

Tirrany, L. H., Algal Statistics gleaned from
Gizzard Shad, 285

Tin, Isotopes of, 19

Tingitide or Tingide, W. J. HOLLAND, 334, 535;
H. M. Parsuury, 449, 754; A. C. Baker, 603

Tobacco, Chlorosis of, W. W. GaRNER, J. E. Mc-
Mourtrey and E. G. Moss, 341

Tortugas Laboratory, Research at, A. A.
ScHAEFFER, 468

TOWNSEND, C. H., Swordfish, 18

Traffic Systems, Colors for, 652

Trees, Effects of Copper Wire on, G. B. Rie, 687

Truoc, E., Feeding Power of Plants, 294

Tuberculosis, Death Rate from, A. C. ABBoTT, 387

Tucker, R. H., Changes of Latitude, 555

Twelve-Hour Shift, 326

Tyler, Ansel Augustus, H. B. Warp, 37

United States Fundamental Standards of Length
and Mass, T. C. MENDENHALL, 377

University, and Educational Notes, 17, 43, 75,
107, 148, 167, 194, 225, 249, 278, 307, 334, 364,
387, 416, 447, 477, 511, 534, 570, 602, 632, 659,
686, 715, 750; Stanford, 100; Johns Hopkins,
161; Buffalo, Installation of Chancellor, 443;
Lehigh, Installation of President of, 473; Col-
orado, Mountain Laboratory, Dedication of,
162; Pennsylvania, 39; Yale, 382, 472; Idaho,
Sigma Xi at, 598; Wyoming, and Dr. Nelson,
680; Wisconsin, 711.

Vacuum Tube Amplifier, R. H. Johnson, 449;
Gravitation Needle, C. Barus, 452

Vallisneria, Sperms of, R. B. Wyn, 422

Van Name, W. G., Menace to National Parks, 705

Vauxite, 8S. G. Gorpon, 50

Veblen, Q., Analysis Situs, H. L. Rrerz, 575

Ventilating Code of American Society of Heating
and Ventilating Engineers, 220

Vital Statisties, French, 187; of German cities,
301

SCIENCE

CoNTENTS AND
Index

Vitamines, Balancing Dietaries with Respect to,
H. H. Mircuenn, 34

Watker, K. C., Bibliography and Research, 418

WaANSER, H. M., Photoperiodism of Wheat, 313

Warp, H. B., Ansel Augustus Tyler, 37

Water, Culture Experimentation, W. F. Grricks,
421; Fall, EF. E. M. Marruess, 75

Waters, C. H., Chemical Spelling Match, 603

Weathering under Constant Conditions, H. F.
CLELAND, 660

Weber, Professor Max, 746

Wesster, A. G., Bureau of Standards, 170

Weights and Measures, Conference on, 232

WetcH, W. H., Bryn Mawr College and Higher
Education of Women, 1

WELLES, C. G., Bacterial Plant Diseases in Phil-
ippine Islands, 18

WeymMourH, F. E., Conservation of Waters of
Colorado River, 59 4

Whale Shark in Atlantic Ocean, E. W. GupDGER,
251

Wheat, Photoperiodism of, H. M. Wanser, 313;
Atmospheric Nitrogen, C. B. LipMawn and J. K.
TayLor, 605

Whither? M..Fiscuer, 405

Wuitney, M., Depletion of Soils, 216

Witey, H. W., Howard on Chemical Spelling, 514

Wiis, B., Geology of Colorado River Basin, 177

Willson, Robert Wheeler, Scientific Work of,
M. H. D., 651

Winter Cycle in Fowl, J. A. Harris and H. R.
LEwIis, 230

Wireless Telephony and Agriculture in France, 70

Wotkorr, M. I., Life of Russian Professors, 144

Women, Higher Edueation of and Bryn Mawr
College, W. H. WetcH, 1

Woopwakrp, R. 8., Alfred Goldsborough Mayor, 68

Work Periods, 327

Wvuiz, R. B., Sperms of Vallisneria, .422

X-Rays, A. R. Ouson, 231; Extension of, into
Ultraviolet Spectrum, O. STUHLMAN, JR., 344;
Crystallometry, L. W. McKErrHan, 757

YerrKES, R. M., Hornaday’s Minds and Manners
of Wild Animals, 604
Yolk Sac, Human, L. B. Arry, 75

Zeitschrift fiir Praktische Geologie, 597

Zon, R., American Literature for Russia, 311

Zoogeography, E. R. Dunn, 336

Zoological, Nomenclature, ©. W. STILEs,
Society of London, Aquarium of, 220

Zoologists, American Society of, 507

Zostera Marina, W. A. SETCHELL, 575

690;

New SERIES
Vou. LVI, No. 1436

SISSON—
Anatomy of Domestic Animals. By SEprti-
Mus Srsson, S. B., V. S,, Professor of Com-
parative Anatomy in Ohio State University.
Octavo of 930 pages, with 725 illustrations,
many in colors. Second Edition. Cloth,
$12.00 net.

BUCHANAN AND MURRAY—
Veterinary Bacteriology: a Treatise on the
Bacteria, Yeasts, Molds, and Protozoa Path-
ogenic for Domestic Animals. By Ros-
ERT E. BucHanan, Ph.D., Professor of
Bacteriology; and CHartes Murray, B. Sc.,
D. V. M., Associate Professor of Veteri-
nary Bacteriology, Iowa State College of
Agriculture and Mechanic Arts. Octavo of
610 pages, illustrated. Third Edition.
Cloth, $4.50 net.

HADLEY—

Veterinary Science. By FrepericK B. Hap-
LEY, D./V. M., Professor of Veterinary Sci-
ence, University of Wisconsin. 1I2mo of
420 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $3.00 net.

HADLEY—

The Horse in Health and Disease. By
Freperick B. Haptey, D. V. M,, Professor
of Veterinary Science, University of Wis-
consin. I2mo of 261 pages, illustrated.
Cloth, $1.50 net.

HEINEMAN—

Milk. By Paut G. Heineman, M. D., Wis-
consin. Octavo of 684 pages, illustrated.
Cloth, $7.00 net.

eterinarians

SineLE Corizes, 15 Ors.

KAUPP—
Anatomy of the Domestic Fowl. By B. F.
Kaupp, M. S., D. V. M., Poultry Investi-
gator and Pathologist, North Carolina Ex-
periment Station. I12mo of 373 pages, illus-
trated. Cloth, $3.50 net.

KAUPP—

Poultry Culture, Sanitation, and Hygiene.
By B. F. Kaupp, M. S., D. V, M,, Poultry
Investigator and Pathologist, North Caro-
lina Experiment Station. 1I2mo of 573
pages, with 200 illustrations. Second Edi-
tion. Cloth, $3.00 net. ~

SHARP—

Ophthalmology for Veterinarians. By Wat-
TER N. SHarp, M. D., Professor of Ophthal-
mology in the Indiana Veterinary College.
12mo of 210 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.00
net.

LYNCH—

Diseases of the Swine. By, CHartes L.
Lyncu, M. D., D. V. S. Chapter on Casitra-
tion and Spaying by Grorce R. WaHtte,
M. D., D. V. S. Octavo of 741 pages, illus-
trated. Cloth, $5.00 net.

DIETRICH—

Livestock on the Farm. By Witttam Dret-
ricH, B. S. A., M. S,, Head of the Depart-
ment of Animal and Dairy Husbandry, Uni-
versity of Minnesota, Crookston Branch.
12mo of 269 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $1.75
net.

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.

PLEASE SEND ME THE BOOKS CHECKED (\/) AND CHARGE TO MY ACCOUNT :—

Sisson’s Anatomy of Domestic Animals_-_-___—' $12.00 net
Buchanan and Murray’s Veterinary Bacteriology, $4.50 net
Hadley’s Veterinary Science. ~-$3.00 net
Hadley’s Horse in Health and Disease $1.50 net
iWeinemanjonl Milk) "22S 2es eee

INANE Seen ee cect Seen eae een en

Kaupp’s Anatomy of the Domestic Fowl_------- $3.50 net
Kaupp’s Poultry Culture._--------------
Sharp’s Ophthalmology for Veterinarians.
Lynch’s Diseases of the Swine--------

Dietrich’s Livestock on the Farm

FAD DRIES Sa ee a a ee eatery

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.60

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

AMERICAN-MADE WAVELENGTH SPECTROMETERS

THE WAVELENGTH SPECTROMETER has
become an essential adjunct to the well equipped
Laboratory. Its convenience, accuracy and sturdy
construction make the Wavelength Spectrometer
an ideal instrument for spectrum and _ color
analysis.

GAERTNER SPECTROMETERS embody the
results of upward of twenty-five years of experi-
ence gained in the construction of precision optical
instruments.

Prompt Delivery on Standard Instruments
Our Specially Designed
ULTRAVIOLET AND INFRARED SPEC-
TROMETERS
are useful for many investigations. A very valu-
able combination in conjunction with the Wave-

length Spectrometer is the improved
NUTTING PHOTOMETER

Correspondence invited.

Features:

1—DESIGN OF THE INSTRUMENT. The de-
sign of the instrument provides for greatest
rigidity and permanence of adjustment as the
composite parts have been reduced to a mini-
mum by joining as many as practicable in a
single casting, at the same time giving the Spec-
trometer a graceful appearance.

ACCURACY IN CALIBRATION. Greatest
care is taken in calibrating the wavelength drum
in order to insure the highest possible accuracy.

3—EASY READING OF DRUM. The divisions
are sufficiently heavy and distinct and the fig-
ures ample and spaced to best advantage.

4—ESSENTIAL PARTS INCLUDED:

Protection cap for prism—

Leveling screws in tripod—

rz Bilateral micrometer slit—

Extra high power eyepiece—are fur-
nished with the instrument and in-
cluded in purchase price.

bo
|

LABORATORY APPARATUS
INSTRUMENTS OF PRECISION
UNIVERSAL LABORATORY
SUPPORTS

Wm. Gaertner & Co.

5345-49 Lake Park Avenue
CHICAGO, U. S. A.

of the Mon-objective Binocular.

The optical system in this instrument is, in
all respects, identical with that employed in
our binocular microscopes except that a nega-
tive lens has been introduced to compensate as
far as possible for the increased tube length that
results from adding the binocular body to the

tube of the ordinary microscope.

The characteristic features include:

Attachable to any standard compound micro-
scope and possessing many of the advantages

SPENCER DIOCULAR NO. 449
$56.08
CATALOGUE SENT ON REQUEST

1. Convenient adjustment for pupillary distance.

Il. Dial register for individual settings.
Ill. Convergent tubes, giving normal vision.
IV. Independent focusing of oculars.

SPENCER LENS COMPANY
MANUFACTURERS

Microscopes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Glass, Telescope
Discs and Lenses, Optical Measuring Instruments, Etc.

BUFFALO, N. Y.

| BUFFALO | oO
U.S.A

SCIENC

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
1] Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00. Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

No. 1436

Vou. LVI Juuy 7,.1922

CONTENTS

Contribution of Bryn Mawr College to the
Higher Education of Women: Dr. WILLIAM

“<The Friendly Arctic’’: D. JENNESS...........--- 8

Scientific Hvents:
Pasteur as Drama; Foreign Students and
the Federal Immigration Laws; Textile Re-
search Institute; The Chemical Foundation ;
The Rockefeller Institute for Medical Re-

OURO Oy cheer SE ee a ae 12
Scientific Notes and N 6ws..--..-------0--..<ecseenennne-n- 15
University and Educational Notes..........----.---- 17
Discussion:

Bacterial Plant Diseases in the Philippine

Islands; Couin G. WELLES. Swordfish

taken on Trawl Lines: Dr. CHAS. HASKINS

TOWNSEND. Mexican Archeology: ZELIA

BINT ATeT ANT Tif one at aaa Siac nN NL 18
Quotations:

ELS VCMUSOUO DESMO Ie LQ Ti temeste cae toeie etal oe ae 19

Special Articles:
Craterlets in East-Central Arkansas, prob-
ably due to the New Madrid Earthquake:
EK. T. THomas. Azotobacter in Soils: P. L.
GAINEY

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
Tus EVARS ON Siunzssecaseseernn noe ein eae SUN 21

CONTRIBUTION OF BRYN MAWR
COLLEGE TO THE HIGHER
EDUCATION OF WOMEN!

Tue retirement of Miss Thomas from the
presidency of Bryn Mawr College, whose des-
tinies she has guided since its formal opening
thirty-seven years ago—for nine years as dean
in association with President Rhoads, and for
twenty-eight as president—and whose ideals,
policies and achievements are in so large meas-
ure the work of her creative genius, turns our
thoughts inevitably to the consideration of these
ideais and achievements and to the contribu-
tions which this college has made to the higher
education of women during her administration.
These reflections may serve to lighten in some
degree the feelings of sorrow and regret aroused
by the severance of relations so long sustained,
so rich in accomplishment and so warmly cher-
ished by the students, graduates and other
members and friends of this college.

Bryn Mawr began its work at an interesting
period in the development of higher education
in this country. The path had already been
blazed for the collegiate education of women.
Hach type of institution now recognized—the
coeducational, the affiliated and the separate col-
lege for women—had been in existence for sev-
eral years—the coeducational, indeed, for over
half a century—and with growing success. But
the hard-fought battle was still on. In order to
realize how complete has been the victory, how
great the advance, recall the changed attitude of
the public mind since those days toward college
education for girls, indeed the present wide
recognition of its vital importance for civiliza-
tion under the new social order, the many prob-
lems then open and now solyed—although there

1 Address at the commencement exercises on
June 8, 1922, upon the retirement of President
Thomas from the presidency of Bryn Mawr Col-
lege.

2 SCIENCE

will always be open problems enough in the
educational field—the many opportunities for
advanced study and research and the careers
now open to women and the large achievements
of to-day as contrasted with the relatively
meager results of those earlier years. In this
forward movement Bryn Mawr under the lead-
ership of President Thomas has held a position
in the front rank.

Certain fundamental questions, once hotly
contested, have been so completely and def-
initely settled that it is a waste of time longer
to diseuss them. My profession has at last
given its reluctant consent to the proposition
that the hhealth of girls is generally benefited
rather than impaired by the conditions of col-
lege life. The demonstration of the capacity
of young women to meet all the mental tests
of college work at least as successfully as men
students is complete and convincing. College
breeding, instead of sacrificing, enhances wom-
anly charm, attractiveness and fitness for do-
mestie happiness. Girls go to college for the
same varied reasons, aims, motives and ambi-
tions as their brothers, and seem destined to
seek it in equal numbers.

It signifies much to have these and certain
kindred questions settled by time and experi-
ence—the only way in which they could be set-
tled—and their controversial discussion rele-
gated to the popular pastime of summoning
ghosts of the departed.

The debatable questions are really no longer
strictly within the educational field. Women
now can study what they like and practically
where they like. The unsettled questions, such
as the academic, scientific and professional op-
portunities, careers and rewards available to
women, especially married women, after the
educational period, are of great importance, but
they do not fall within the subject of this
address.

President Thomas’s admirable and inspiring
address on the twenty-fifth anniversary of this
college, as well as other publications, have made
unnecessary the rehearsal on this occasion of
all the various influences and policies which
have combined to make Bryn Mawr the re-
nowned college which it is to-day. Inasmuch,
however, as the highest distinction of this college

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

is the intellectual life which it has cultivated
and engendered and the high standards of
scholarship which it has created and main-
tained I may be permitted to recall to your
attention certain salient points, familiar as they
may be to this audience.

Bryn Mawr entered fully into the heritage
of the new ideas and methods introduced in
1876 by the Johns Hopkins University into
higher education in this country, marking, as
they did, a new era of American university edu-
cation. I quote President Thomas’s own gen-
erous words, re-echoed in the introductory re-
marks to which you have just listened: “Bryn
Mawr’s debt to Johns Hopkins is too great to
be put into words. We owe it not only our
group system, but our whole conception of
what graduate and undergraduate work should
be and our ideals of research and scientific
thoroughness.” Many times over, I may add,
has Bryn Mawr repaid this debt, and most
worthily has she guarded to this day these
ideals, while adapting and expanding them in
detail to meet the special conditions of under-
graduate and graduate work of this college in
its steady and rapid growth.

It will, I think, be universally conceded, with
the fullest and most grateful recognition of the
important pioneer work and the later large
achievements of her sister colleges, that the
entrance of Bryn Mawr into the educational
world marked a new epoch in the higher edu-
cation of women.

The first and most striking evidence of this
was the emphasis, previously unexampled in
women’s colleges, placed by the Bryn Mawr
administration in selecting its faculty upon the
scholarly attainments and productive scholar-
ship of its teaching staff, and this remains a
chief distinction of this college. The excellence
of its staff of teachers is the best test of college
management and is the foundation of the repu-
tation best worth having of any college or uni-
versity.

To match the acumen and skill, the flair, one
may say, displayed by President Thomas in
searching out and securing teachers and inves-
tigators whose high promise in the glory of
their youth was later realized, one must pass
from the academic field to the manifestation of

Juny 7, 1922}

certain trained senses and qualities in the
realms of sport, racing and hunting.

I asked to be supplied with the names of
those who have taught here and later attained
high distinction. I find, as I anticipated, that
the list with the accompanying data is too
long to be recited within the limited compass
of this address, but it is so remarkable and
illustrates so completely the standards of pro-
ductive scholarship sought for the instructing
staff that I can not forbear citing the more
eminent names, some of which will be recog-
nized by those unfamiliar with the reputations
of technical scholars and men of science.

First in time comes Woodrow Wilson, who
soon after receiving the doctor of philosophy
degree at Johns Hopkins University and pub-
lishing his excellent book on Congressional
Government was called to Bryn Mawr in 1885,
where he organized the department of history
and taught for three years before accepting ap-
pointment first at Wesleyan University and
then at Princeton. In the same department of
history taught for eighteen years Charles
McLean Andrews before accepting a call to
Johns Hopkins and later to Yale, where he is
now Farnum professor of American history.

We can understand one of the reasons for
the prominent position held by the ancient
classies in the curriculum of Bryn Mawr when
we recall that here taught for many years that
brilliant Greek scholar, Paul Shorey, who left
to head the department of Greek at the Uni-
versity of Chicago; E. Washburn Hopkins,
who went to Yale as professor of Sanskrit and
comparative philology; Herbert Weir Smyth,
here for thirteen years before becoming Eliot
professor of Greek literature at Harvard; Gon-
zales Lodge, for eleven years here and now
professor of Latin at Columbia; Tenney Frank,
who taught here for fifteen years before he was
ealled to the chair of Latin of Johns Hopkins,
and Moses 8. Slaughter, who is now head of
the department of Latin at the University of
Wisconsin.

Indicative of the position accorded to the
biological and physical sciences in the scheme
of liberal education at Bryn Mawr and if pos-
sible even more remarkable than the roll of
classical scholars is that of the biologists, which

SCIENCE

Co

includes the names of Edmund B. Wilson and
Thomas Hunt Morgan, now at Columbia, and
Jacques Loeb, called here from a docentship at
Strassburg and now at the Rockefeller Insti-
tute of Medical Research, who are to-day the
most eminent biologists of America, perhaps of
the world. To these are to be added the well
known names of Frederic S. Lee, for many
years head of the department of physiology at
Columbia, and the chemists, Elmer P. Kohler,
who after teaching here for twenty years be-
came professor of chemistry at Harvard, and
Edward H. Keiser, now holding the chair of
chemistry at Washington University.

I must content myself with merely mention-
ing some of the familiar names in other de-
partments: in mathematies, Harkness; in
geology, Miller; in physics, Mackenzie; in ex-
perimental psychology, which he here founded,
Cattell; in philosophy, Bakewell and Mezes; in
English, Tinker and Upham; in Germanic phil-
ology, Collitz; in economies and sociology,
Giddings.

When to this impressive list are added the
far larger number of women graduates who
hold important teaching or administrative posi-
tions in educational institutions, including Bryn
Mawr herself, we can appreciate something of
the richness of the gift contributed by this
college in less than four decades of existence
through the training and development of teach-
ers and investigators to the education not of
women only, but of men as well, and to the
advancement of knowledge.

Should any one suppose that this continual
migration of eminent men teachers to other
colleges and universities has sapped the teach-
ing strength of Bryn Mawr, he has only to
regard the eminent women and men in her
present faculty and the well equipped depart-
ments of instruction in order to realize that
never were the educational advantages and the
intellectual life of this college so great and so
vigorous as. they are to-day.

There are, however, certain significant infer-
ences to ‘be derived from the fact that it is
mainly men and not women who have been
withdrawn from this faculty to other institu-
tions. One of these inferences doubtless points
to the preference of many of the men for chairs

4 SCIENCE

in colleges and universities not exclusively for
women students. But here an important con-
sideration has also been the inability of Bryn
Mawr until recently to compete with better en-
dowed institutions for teachers desired by both.
It is amazing that Bryn Mawr has been able to
ereate and to maintain such high academic
standards upon an endowment so slender. It
is this success which has furnished the strong-
est possible appeal to her alumne and other
benefactors of education, who have responded
so generously in recent years in increasing her
resources. But her needs still are and will con-
tinue to be great, and the record of benefits to
women’s education and thereby to mankind
here to be obtained in a measure out of all
proportion to the money invested will continue
to make its strong, public appeal.

But the most interesting and in many ways
the most important conclusion to be drawn from
the cireumstance that here women teachers stay,
whereas so many men leave to join the faculties
of other colleges, is that desirable positions in
these other colleges and universities, including
the coeducational ones, are open to women in
so small number as to be practically negligible.
This lack of wider recognition of their work by
academic promotion deprives women in large
measure of one of the most powerful incentives
and highest rewards of productive scholarly
and scientific work. Among other reasons I
find in this situation, which is not likely soon
to be remedied, a compelling argument in favor
of the existence and generous support of inde-
pendent women’s colleges in spite of the high
cost. Unquestionably coeducation is the best
solution of the problem of professional and
technical education for women, and even for
their collegiate training it will continue to be
the prevailing system throughout the larger
part of this country, particularly in the west,
but experience has abundantly demonstrated the
need and special services of separate under-
graduate colleges for women, and among the
most valuable of these services I count the
opening ot attractive academic careers to
women. Bryn Mawr has shown also the value
of adding, when it can be properly supported,
a graduate philosophical department, meeting
especially the needs of prospective teachers and
of workers in the field of social economics.

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1436

Bryn Mawr from the start laid still further
emphasis upon high academic standards and
productive scientific work and made an addi-
tional important contribution to the educa-
tional and research opportunities for women by
the establishment of her system of resident
fellowships and scholarships, open to graduates
of all colleges of good standing, supplemented
later by European traveling fellowships and
the nine graduate scholarships for foreign
women. Thereby the reputation and influence
of Bryn Mawr both here and abroad have been
greatly increased and extended. The presence
of so many graduate students—ninety-two in
the academic year now closing—engaged in ad-
vaneed work has stimulated the intellectual life
of the entire college and their example and the
opportunities have led many to pursue their
studies beyond the college period. There have
thus been afforded to members of the faculty
welcome opportunities for graduate teaching
and the conduct of research which has led to
valuable contributions to knowledge.

It is everywhere conceded that the Bryn
Mawr degree of doctor of philosophy equals
in rank that granted by any university in this ~
country. One has only to examine in the reg-
ister the lists of the ninety doctors of philoso-
phy and the one hundred and sixty-five mas-
ters of arts of Bryn Mawr and to note their
names and the positions which they hold or
have held, predominantly in the teaching pro-
fession, in order to gain some appreciation of
the immense service to education rendered by
the graduate courses in this college and the
system of fellowships and scholarships.

Permit me to quote the fine tribute paid to
this feature of Bryn Mawr at the twenty-fifth
anniversary by President Taylor of Vassar
College, the first in the field of independent
women’s colleges of truly collegiate standing:
“As I have regarded her career with intense
interest from the point of view of a fellow
worker since her second year, I am disposed to
suggest as among her chief contributions, first,
the splendid emphasis she has put upon ad-
vanced scholarship for women. I think her
fine devotion of so large a part of her income
to fellowships and scholarships perhaps with-
out parallel in our country. It has been a
steadfast devotion, too, untouched by the con-

JULY 7, 1922]

siderable variations of interest in the educa-
tional world that have sometimes forced the
question as to the present desire for these great
helps to higher scholarship. But Bryn Mawr
has been steadfast; never has it yielded an inch
of its purpose to offer women the best that can
be had. I suggest again the generosity of her
welcome to these scholarships of the graduates
of other colleges and universities. All over our
land there are women graduates of other insti-
tutions who owe to this one the encouragement
and possibility of their higher attainments.
Well may they rise up to-day and call her
blessed !”

The president and faculty of Bryn Mawr
have worked out with great care and thought
a system of liberal training which in its totality
as well as in certain special features consti-
tutes a distinct contribution to higher educa-
tion and is often referred to as the Bryn Mawr
type. The essential features are these: a fairly
uniform and sound foundation on which to
build the college courses secured by the entrance
examination in fixed subjects, certificates not
being aecepted; required courses of study, oceu-
pying half of the student’s time, in language,
letters, philosophy and science, which furnish
the essential basis of liberal culture; freedom
of choice of other subjects in accordance with
the group system, permitting seventy-one com-
binations of courses; unrestricted elective
courses for one sixth of the work, and before
graduation evidence by examination of a read-
ing knowledge of French and German (the
latter language temporarily replaced during
the war by Italian or Spanish).

The group system, so designated for the first
time by Miss Thomas, the central feature of
this plan, which in recent years has widely re-
placed the former Harvard system of unre-
stricted electives, was borrowed in 1885 from
the Johns Hopkins University by Bryn Mawr,
which, in amplifying and adapting it to the
four years’ undergraduate college course, has
had an important share in its development and
spread. This system, while securing on the one
hand the definiteness of purpose of the tradi-
tional rigid curriculum and on the other the
adaptation to the students interests and needs
claimed for the free electives, is more than a

SCIENCE 5

compromise between these two rival systems,
for it has the very real advantage not inherent
in either of prolonged thorough training in
some one branch of knowledge or group of
kindred subjects which appeals to the indi-
vidual’s interest and aptitudes or is prepara-
tory to future professional study, and this with-
out too early over-specialization.

As regards certain modern, controversial ten-
dencies in college education Bryn Mawr has
taken a conservative, although by no means
narrow position, and President Thomas has de-
fended this attitude and participated in the
lively discussions with all of her accustomed
vigor, clearness of statement and intensity of
conviction.

Bryn Mawr still stands for four years’ study
of Latin as an obligatory requirement for en-
trance and for one year’s required study of
either Latin or Greek in college. Shocking as
it may appear to some of our educational
reformers, she continues to emphasize the dis-
ciplinary and cultural value of the older, tra-
ditional subjects—the ancient classics, mathe-
matics, philosophy and history—and the stu-
dents follow suit in their electives.

That this zealous interest in the older human-
ities is compatible with the most open hospi-
tality for those modern subjects of study which
are considered to have legitimate place in a
scheme of liberal education is demonstrated by
the ample provision here made for the study
of the natural and physical sciences, psychol-
ogy, modern languages, English language and
literature, which is a particularly strong de-
partment, long inspired by the teaching of
President Thomas herself, the economic, polit-
ical and social sciences, comparative philology,
Semitic languages and literature, classical
archeology, history of art, theoretical music,
in a form somewhat reminiscent of the position
of this subject in the medieval quadrivium, and
still other branches of learning.

Even those who may prefer other types of
college courses and methods of study will, I
think, concede that Bryn Mawr’s curricula and
standards embody a noble conception of liberal
culture and knowledge—a true Studium Gene-
rale—retentive of what is good in the older
and receptive to what is best in the newer

6 SCIENCE

systems. No adverse financial conditions, no
popular clamor and no pressure from outside
have led to any sacrifice of quality to quantity,
of excellence to numbers, in the maintenance
of these ideals.

Modification of the college curriculum to
meet the supposed special intellectual needs of
women, which has been urged by men more
frequently than by women, while it has from
the beginning received the serious consideration
of educators in women’s colleges, has not found
favor here or permanently so in other better
colleges for women. The ultimate decision of
this question rests entirely with the women.

Bryn Mawr resists the transformation of the
college of liberal arts by the entrance of strictly
vocational and professional studies and frowns
upon such heresies as the bisection of the eol-
lege at the belt line into a junior and a senior
college, or the telescoping of the last year or
two of the college course into the professional
schools. In a word she stands with her sister
colleges for preservation of the educational
standards and the integrity of the American
college in essence and in spirit. To the many
who cherish the traditions of the older learning
and liberal culture as represented in the Amer-
ican college of the past it may appear that the
ark of the covenant is passing into the keeping
of the colleges for women.

President Thomas has expressed in these ad-
mirable words her conception of the aims of
college education for women: “If fifty per
cent. of college women are to marry and nearly
forty per cent. are to bear and rear children,
such women can not conceivably be given an
education too broad, too high or too deep, to
fit them to become the educated mothers of the
future race of men and women to be born of
educated parents. Somehow or other such
mothers must be made familiar with the great
mass of inherited knowledge which is handed
on from generation to generation of civilized
educated men. They must think straight, judge
wisely and reverence truth; and they must teach
such clear and wise and reverent thinking to
their children.” This was fifteen years ago.
To-day with the assumption by women of all
the responsibilities of citizenship and with the
vastly increased influence which college women

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

will exert upon the life of the community and
nation, how supremely important it is that the
college should aim to discipline intelligence, to
strengthen the ability to observe correctly and
to form sound intellectual and ethical judg-
ments, and to cultivate for the highest service
of the race that fundamental instinct of wom-
an’s nature which seeks not less than the per-
petuation of the species its safety and welfare!

To this audience it is not necessary to point
out that the brilliantly successful efforts of
President Thomas to bring to realization at
Bryn Mawr certain clear and well defined con-
ceptions of the place and functions of the col-
lege in education, as distinct from the secondary
school on the one hand and graduate, profes-
sional and technical schools on the other, imply
no lack of interest in providing opportunities
for the training of women in practical and
vocational subjects in their proper place.
Quite the contrary is of course true.

Full evidence of this is found here at Bryn
Mawr in the excellent provisions for the train-
ing of teachers and specialists in the graduate
courses, particularly in the Graduate Depart-
ment of Education, an integral part of which ©
is the Phebe Anna Thorne model school with
its primary, elementary and secondary depart-
ments, and in the Carola Woerishoffer Grad-
uate Department of Social Economy and
Social Research with its admirably conceived
theoretical and practical courses which furnish
much needed opportunities for training women
for ever widening useful and attractive careers
in the immense fields of organized social, indus-
trial and community activities and welfare, for
which women are much better fitted than men.

What eould make stronger appeal to human
sympathy and generous support than the novel
and interesting experiment, successfully
launched here last summer and to be continued
this one, of the Summer School for Women
Workers in Industry, conceived and initiated
by President Thomas?

Our Medical School at the Johns Hopkins
and all women owe an inexpressible debt of
gratitude to the vigorous efforts and persuasive
arguments of Miss Thomas and the generous
donation of Miss Mary Garrett in securing the
Women’s Endowment Fund which enabled the

JULY 7, 1922]

school to start in 1893 with its doors open to
the admission of women upon the same condi-
tions as for men, the blessing of coeducation in
medicine being more adequately appreciated
to-day than at that time. This is only one of
the many large services to the women’s cause
rendered by President Thomas outside of Bryn
Mawr College.

To that very important if not larger part
of college education which is represented by
students’ life, association in college halls of
residence and activities, here fortunately with-
out intercollegiate athletics, clubs and fraterni-
ties, and without. sacrifice of the primary col-
legiate aim, and which really creates the spirit
and personality of the college, Bryn Mawr has
made its full and delightful contribution, but
this is for those who have lived the life to tell.
Most charmingly and competently has this been
done by the pen of a gifted alumna, Mrs. Helen
Thomas Flexner, in the brochure entitled
“Bryn Mawr—a Characterisation.”

I may mention as a most notable contribu-
tion affecting the life of students the system
of students’ self-government, which was devel-
oped here in a more completely organized and
unrestricted form than existed elsewhere. It
“was born,” President Thomas tells us, “of the
temporary and wholly fortuitous coming to-

gether of marriageable men and maidens as

professors and students.”

We have only to look around us on these
lovely grounds and beautiful buildings of grey
stone in order to appreciate the significance of
the contribution made under the directing mind
and taste of President Thomas by Bryn Mawr’s
architects to the beauty of American colleges
in creating here what has been designated as
the American Collegiate Gothie style of archi-
tecture.

The best fruits of all the contributions of
Bryn Mawr which I have sketched so incom-
pletely and inadequately and of the inspiring
personal influence and instruction of President
Thomas are the lives and work of over 4,500
former and present students, of whom about
2,000 are alumne, of this college.

Who can estimate the benefits to American
homes and communities, indeed to the whole
nation, resulting from the activities and influ-

SCIENCE 7

ence of these women who received their inspira-
tion and training within these walls? Members
of the graduating class! We have every con-
fidence that these benefits are to be appreciably
increased by your admission to-day to the
goodly company of liberally educated women
who bear forth to the world the spirit and the
traditions of service of Bryn Mawr.

President Thomas! It is a great privilege
and honor for me, personally and as a repre-
sentative of the Johns Hopkins University, to
be permitted to join with these loyal alumne
of Bryn Mawr and your colleagues and with
hosts of others in paying tribute to you on this
occasion for your great and enduring work for
this college, which, as I have endeavored to
point out, has made important contributions to
higher education. It was not really necessary
to add the last two words to the title of this
address.

You brought to this task, so triumphantly
achieved, scholarly attainments and unswerving
devotion to productive scholarship, force of
character and intellectual ability of a high
order, the boundless energy and enthusiasm of
abiding youth, indomitable courage, resource-
fulness and perseverance in overcoming diffi-
culties, clear vision and steadfast loyalty to
ideals, persuasive and vigorous speech, the
inspiration of a cultured, radiant and vital
personality, an unwavering and ardent devo-
tion to the cause not of woman’s education only
but of her advancement in all ways and her
emancipation from all shackles and disabilities.

In enjoying well earned release from the
burdens of administrative responsibility and in
turning to other tasks, for we ean not think of
you as inactive, you earry with you the durable
satisfaction of great service rendered to the
great cause to which you have devoted your
life, the admiration, affection and gratitude of
the thousands of students, alumne and friends
of Bryn Mawr College, the appreciative recog-
nition and felicitations of other institutions of
learning, of scholars and of friends of eduea-
tion and of the cause of women everywhere.

We ean hardly think of Bryn Mawr without
you, President Thomas, but you are passing qn
to an able and experienced successor, a three-
fold graduate of this college, the torch of un-

8 SCIENCE

quenchable flame which here you have kindled
and which here will burn brighter and ever
brighter in the coming years to illumine the
path of women toward knowledge and wisdom,
toward the attainment of the largest and best
use of their intellectual and spiritual powers,
toward appreciation and enjoyment of the best
in life, in literature, in art, in science, in men
and women, toward understanding and further-
ing of the agencies and forces which make for
righteousness, peace and the betterment of man-
kind.
Wituam H. WeLcH
Tur JoHNS Hopkins UNIVERSITY

“THE FRIENDLY ARCTIC”

(Published by permission of the Deputy Min-
ister of Mines, Ottawa).

Any one who is in the slightest degree
familiar with the Arctic, or even with the his-
tory of Arctic expeditions, must have been
amazed at the naive review of Mr. Stefansson’s
book, “The Friendly Arctic,” that appeared in
the March 24 issue of ScieNncE for the current
year. The writer of that review, Professor
Raymond Pearl, admits that he is “in no wise
a specialist in either geography or polar ex-
ploration.” One may be permitted to wonder
why he undertook the task of reviewing a book
that is mainly concerned with those topics. His
review, indeed, would be unworthy of serious
notice were it not for the wide circulation of
the journal in which is appeared; but on that
account a reply seems called for.

The reviewer states that the importance
which the history of science will attach to Mr.
Stefansson’s work will rest primarily on his
application of a “new and strictly scientific
method” to the problem of Arctie exploration;
for, whereas earlier explorers depended for
food, heat, shelter and clothing mainly on the
supplies which they took in with them, Mr.
Stefansson, acting on scientific principles,
“carried through, over a long period of time
[nearly five years, we are told in another place]
and a wide range of area, travels in the polar
regions, living entirely off the country as the
Eskimos do.”

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

Now this statement is unjust not only to
earlier explorers, but to Mr. Stefansson him-
self. The practice of living off the country is
not a new one in polar exploration. To quote
but one example: Dr. John Rae, in 1846-7,
supported himself and his party for a whole
winter in Repulse Bay, although their only
weapons were old, muzzle-loading guns. The
method is really a very satisfactory one for a
quickly-moving traveler who can choose his own
hunting-grounds (e. g., David Hanbury in
1902), and even for a small stationary party in
certain well-favored regions; it is rarely satis-
factory in the case of a large party working
for any length of time within a prescribed area,
because the game supply rapidly becomes ex-
hausted. Hence the necessity for bases, and
caches of food, employed not only by both the
northern and southern parties of the Canadian
Arctic Expedition, but by all polar expeditions.
Hyery reader of Arctic literature knows that
while game may be plentiful in certain places
and at certain seasons, it is very scarce in other
places and at other times of the year. All ex-
plorers, therefore, including Mr. Stefansson,
have been careful to take supplies with them
whenever possible, whether they are traveling ~
by ship or by sled, in order to have something
to fall back upon when the local supply of
game fails. To do otherwise would be the
sheerest folly. To take an example. One of
the almost gameless areas in the north at the
present time is the long stretch of coast be-
tween Barrow and the mouth of the Mackenzie
River during the winter months; caribou are
exceedingly scarce in this region and seals diffi-
cult to procure except in the spring and
summer. Mr. Stefansson, during his last expe-
dition, spent nearly a year in this portion of
the Aretic, but, despite his reviewer, he does
not claim to have lived off the country at this
time, or even to have attempted to do so. He
will probably himself admit that from Septem-
ber, 1913, when he first landed from his ship,
the Karluk, until March, 1914, when he started
on his ice trip, his rifle did not secure him a
single meal. Similarly, on his exploration trips
in the northern archipelago, where game is
more plentiful than in most places, he pru-
dently carried on his sleds all the supplies he

JULY 7, 1922]

could, as is shown by his statement of what he
intended to carry on his second ice journey in
1915 :1

I shall start about Feb. 15 with 2 sleds and 3
men beside myself .. . Fortunately our dog-feed
is ready where we dried it at Norway Island—it
will be dried caribou meat, caribou fat and blub-
ber. Our own grub will be chiefly rice, fat and
sugar. We also have 50 pounds of malted milk,
50 pounds pea-meal and over 200 pounds pem-
mican.. 2

The reviewer, being absolutely ignorant of
the true conditions of polar travel, has unerit-
ically taken certain general statements made by
Mr. Stefansson about his living off the country
and its advantages as an actual fact that
occurred, not merely at certain times and in
certain places, but invariably throughout the
whole five years of the expedition. Mr. Ste-
fansson, with better knowledge of the condi-
tions that he would be called upon to face,
wisely provided himself with three vessels
loaded with all the necessary supplies of pem-
mican, sugar, rice and other foods.

There is also another side to this question of
living off the country which seems totally un-
known to the reviewer. It involves the destruc-
tion of entire herds of caribou and musk-oxen,
males, females and young. On Melville Island,
one of the largest islands in the north where
musk-oxen are still found, Mr. Stefansson and
his companions killed, on their own estimate,
about one tenth of the total number of musk-
oxen (400 out of an estimated 4,000). One
ean easily imagine how long the supply of
game would last under these conditions. The
musk-oxen have already been almost exter-
minated on the mainland of America and in

1Copy of letter on file at the Department of
Mines, Ottawa.

2 The italies here and elsewhere are mine. The
pemmican was the Underwood man pemmican.
From the amount Mr. Stefansson earried with him
on this occasion he must have rated its food value
somewhat higher than would appear from his book
(See ‘‘The Friendly Aretic,’’ pp. 718f.).

8 Testimony of S. T. Storkerson before the
Royal Commission appointed May 20, 1919, to
Investigate the Possibilities of the Reindeer and
Musk-ox Industries in the Aretic and Sub-Arctie
Regions of Canada.

SCIENCE 9

Greenland; on Victoria and Banks Islands they
were destroyed by the Eskimos prior to 1913,
and the only places where they still remain in
any numbers are Ellesmere Island and a few
smaller islands adjacent to it. The caribou too
have seriously diminished in numbers; their
extinetion around Coronation Gulf is well
within sight even now, although in 1913 they
could be counted there by thousands.

The cautious reader, then, will hardly accept
the reviewer’s extravagant claims for this so-
called “new and strictly scientific method” of
polar exploration. Another of his statements,
equally false, demands more serious attention.
He says:

In point of fact a considerable number of the
members of his [Mr. Stefansson’s] expedition,
logically excogitated the matter and came to the
conclusion that in holding such views [i. e., feasi-
bility of living off the country] Stefansson was
not merely silly but probably also insane, and in
consequence felt justified in (a) disobeying his
orders as commander of the expedition, (b) in
refusing to render him any aid (cf. pp. 114-115
regarding chronometers), and (c) in actively hin-
dering his preparations and subsequent operations.
Now no really scientific man would endorse un-
substantiated charges without considering
whether there might not be another side to the:
question. A few official documents will show
that there is another side. The three principal
charges made by Mr. Stefansson in his book
are:

Charge I.—Attempted mutiny, insubordination
and disobedience at Collinson Point, 1914. Dr.
Anderson, it is alleged, refused to supply the
stores and equipment necessary for Mr. Stefans-
son’s ice trip, and the topographers deliberately
withheld chronometers that he needed (‘‘ The:
Friendly Arctic,’?’ Ch. XII).

The official orders issued to Mr. Stefanssou
by the Department of Naval Service before the
expedition left Esquimalt, B. C., in 1913, read’
as follows :4

The first party, headed by yourself, will explore
the Beaufort Sea, and the unknown waters in that
vicinity. The second party, under the direction of
Dr. Anderson, will busy itself with the scientific
work in the extreme northern land of Canada .. .

4 Copy of orders on file at the Department of”
Mines, Ottawa.

10 SCIENCE

The relative importance for this party is as fol-
lows: (1) geological, (2) geographical, (3) an-
thropological, (4) biological, (5) photographical.
The chief of the Southern Party, as executive
head, must afford every facility as circumstances
permit to enable these sub-parties to carry out the
above important work.

The Summary Report of the Geological Survey
of Canada for 1913 contains the following
statement by the director (p. 9):

Scientific work within the scope of the Geolog-

ieal Survey was placed under the jurisdiction of
the Survey. The expedition was divided into two
parties, the northern exploration party under Mr.
V. Stefansson, the leader of the expedition, and a
southern scientific party under Dr. R. M. Ander-
son of the Geological Survey, whose field of oper-
ation was to be in the neighborhood of Coronation
Gulf, Coppermine River and Victoria Land.
[After naming the officials of the Survey who
were on this southern party the director con-
tinues:] The officers of the Survey are working
under the direction of and reporting to the Geo-
logical Survey.
From these official documents it is clear, (a)
that the Southern Party was working on a def-
inite program outlined by the Geological Sur-
vey, and (b) that its leader, Dr. Anderson, was
responsible for providing it with all the neces-
sary facilities in the way of food supplies,
sleds, dogs, ete.

The old whaling steamer Karluk, which was
to be used by Mr. Stefansson for his northern
explorations, was caught in the ice in August,
1913, carried away towards the coast of Siberia
and crushed in the following January. It had
earried not only the whole of the Northern
Party and its outfit, but much of the outfit of
the Southern Party as well. The former was
competely broken up by its loss, while the
* Southern Party, though nearly intact as far as
personnel was concerned, was left inadequately
equipped for its work in Coronation Gulf. Dr.
Anderson, its leader, holding himself responsi-
ble for the carrying out of that work in ac-
cordance with the government instructions,
refused to cripple his party any further for
the sake of Mr. Stefansson’s ice trip, or the
formation of a new northern party. The topog-
raphers, for their part, were faced with two
alternatives by Mr. Stefansson’s demand for
their chronometers; they could either hand them

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

over, leave the expedition and return at once to
Ottawa (for without their chronometers they
could do nothing) or else refuse to give them
up and proceed to carry out their work as
originally planned. In view of the fact that
their department had attached them to the ex-
pedition solely for the work in Coronation
Gulf and had issued precise and detailed
instructions to them concerning it, the topog-
raphers decided that it was their duty to retain
their chronometers and carry out the orders of
their department to the best of their ability.
The question at issue was not, as both Mr. Ste-
fansson and his reviewer state, whether the
members of the Southern Party accepted Mr.
Stefansson’s views about living off the country
(land or ice), or considered them “silly and
insane,” but whether the work outlined for the
Southern Party was to be seriously curtailed
in order to equip Mr. Stefansson’s new party
with scientific instruments, large quantities of
condensed provisions and other supplies. Had
the Southern Party consented, it could not have
carried out its own program. The government
sustained its action on receiving the full re-
ports; even before their receipt it sent the fol-
lowing despatch, which reached Herschel Island
in July, 1914:5
Department of the Naval Service,
Ottawa, 30th April, 1914.

V. Stefansson, Esq., Commander, Canadian Arctic

Expedition (Northern Division), Herschel
Island, via Athabasca Landing.
Sir:

With reference to the plans for a northern ex-
pedition during the coming summer

I have discussed with Mr. Brock® your sugges-
tions for the movements of the men and ships
this summer and the matter has been submitted to
the minister with result that it has been decided
that, should the Karluk and the men on board not
be available for work this spring, it will mean
that you will find yourself with the southern
party practically intact and with two small vessels
besides the motor launch and smaller boats. Under
these circumstances it is considered that it would
not be wise to break up the Southern Party and
take seme of its members for northern exploration.

5 Copy on file at Department of Mines, Ottawa.
6R. W. Brock, then deputy minister of mines.
See ‘‘The Friendly Arctic,’’ p. 380.

JULY 7, 1922]

Such a division of forees would probably defeat
the object of sending out the Southern Party by
weakening it and the results to be obtained by
the exploration of Banks Land and Prince Patrick
Island would not compensate for the sacrifice.

It has therefore been decided that the Southern
Party should as far as possible be kept intact and
that the program laid out for it should be carried
out as far as circumstances will admit.

Your proposal that you should lead a northern
party along the coasts of Banks Land and Prince
Patrick Island is approved and you are authorized
to engage the men of whom you spoke as being
available for this expedition. Details of the ar-
rangement must necessarily be left to you and
will depend largely on developments in the Arctic
regions. But the main point to be borne in mind
is that the work of the Southern Party should be
carried out as originally proposed and that it
should not be weakened for the purpose of organ-
izing another northern party.

; Yours truly,
(Signed) G. J. DESBARATS,
Deputy Minister

Charge 2.—Dyr. Anderson, the leader of the
Southern Party, is aceused of failing to forward
to the government a copy of a very important
letter of instructions from Mr. Stefansson out-
lining his plans and projected movements during
and after his ice-trip of 1914 and to inform the

press of Mr. Stefansson’s movements (‘‘The
Friendly Arctic,’’ p. 382).
Mr. Stefansson is clearly in error. Dr. Ander-

son forwarded copies of this letter by the first
mail to the Department of the Naval Service
and to the Geological Survey, Department of
Mines. The copy sent to the Department of
Mines is still on file in that department; that
sent to the Naval Service was acknowledged by
the deputy minister of the Naval Service, a
copy of which acknowledgment is also on file
in the Department of Mines.*

Charge 3.—Dr. Anderson is accused of disobe-
dience in the summer of 1914 because he failed to
send the schooner North Star to Banks Island, as
ordered by Mr. Stefansson. The North Star, Mr.
Stefansson states, was bought especially for the
explorations around Banks. Island, the schooner
which was actually sent there, the Mary Sachs,

7See also Dr. Anderson’s despatches to N. Y.
Times; of May 16, 1914, published September 1;
August 21, published September 23; and Septem-
ber 14, published March 5, 1915.

SCIENCE 11

being unsuitable for the work (‘‘The Friendly
Arcetic,’’ pp. 271-2).

Now on March 10, 1914, six days before set-
ting out on his northern explorations and nearly
three months after the purchase of the North
Star (“The Friendly Aretiec,” p. 103), Mr.
Stefansson gave the following instructions to
Dr. Anderson :§

The work of the Mary Sachs as planned at pres-
ent has two main objects—(1) the carrying for-
ward so far as resources permit of the scientific
and exploratory work of the Karluk and (2)
establishing beacons and depots along the west
coasts of Banks and Prince Patrick Islands
against the possible landing there of either ship-
wrecked men or exploration parties from the
Karluk...

A supply depot for the Southern Party shall be
established from a portion of the supplies bought
from M. Anderson [a local trader]. The North
Star shall take these to some place agreed upon
that is uninhabited and therefore safe—probably
Liston Island—and leave them there to be picked
up later by the Alaska. After that the North
Star shall go about work later to be decided upon
—probably either oceanography or establishing a
depot on the west coast of Banks Island for the
Sachs or against the possible arrival there of men
from the Karluk.

Evidently Mr. Stefansson at this date con-
sidered the North Star less suitable than the
Mary Sachs for his northern explorations. This
is hard to reconcile with his statement (“The
Friendly Arctic,” p. 272) that “the Star was
purchased especially for the Banks Island trip
and the Sachs, through her twin propellers, was
particularly badly suited to those more north-
erly and icy waters.”

In his later instructions (“The Friendly
Arctic,” p. 158; the letter is dated April 6)
Mr. Stefansson ordered both the North Star
and the Mary Sachs to proceed to Banks
Island. Dr. Anderson sent the Mary Sachs
alone with a launch, for the following reasons:

(a) One of these schooners was required to
earry the supplies of the Southern Party to Cor-
onation Gulf. Mr. Stefansson had already issued
orders to this effect.

(b) The Mary Sachs was the larger vessel, and
Mr. Stefansson’s original choice.

8 Copy of letter on file in the Department of
Mines, Ottawa.

12 SCIENCE

(c) The Mary Sachs was sanctioned by the
government for the Banks Island work, the North
Star was not. [A copy of the instructions sanc-

tioning the Mary Sachs, dated Ottawa, 5th May,

1914, is on file in the Department of Mines. |

(d) News of the Karluk’s crew having reached
Wrangell Island made provision for them on
Banks Island unnecessary.

(e) Where orders were too contradictory to be
reconciled, it was considered more ethical to fol-
low out the carefully considered plans of the
government.

The reviewer of Mr. Stefansson’s book was
unaware, of course, of all these documents; but
a sense of justice and the exercise of a little
eritical acumen should have saved him from
accepting Mr. Stefansson’s charges at their
face value. The real value to be placed on
them, as well as on other statements made by
Mr. Stefansson, the reader can determine for
himself in the light of the documents quoted

above.
D. JENNESS

VicTori4 MrMoriaAL MusEuUM,
OTTAWA

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
PASTEUR AS DRAMA?

Pasteur is the title of the play with which
M. Lucien Guitry, the eminent French actor,
has this week opened his repertory season in
London. The piece, which was played last year
in London on a few occasions by M. Guitry,
was first produced in Paris in 1919. It no
doubt owes something to the successful produc-
tion in this country of Abraham Lincoln, for
both plays depict a great man in selected
scenes at different periods of his life. The
author of Pasteur is M. Sacha Guitry, son of
the actor, who admittedly found his inspiration
in Vallery-Radot’s biography of Pasteur, and
designed the play especially to suit the talents
of his distinguished father. The first act shows
Pasteur in his study with his pupils at the out-
break of the war of 1870. In the second aet
there is a moving representation of a meeting
of the Academy of Medicine, where Pasteur
vigorously combats an attack upon his theories,
in this scene the audience plays the part of the
members of the Academy, with one or two
actors speaking from the stalls. In the third

1 From the British Medical Journal.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

act the boy Joseph Meister, who has been
bitten by a mad dog, is brought to be inoculated
by Pasteur, who sends for a doctor to perform
the inoculation, for Pasteur himself held no
medical qualification. The dramatist shows his
art at the close of this act, for Pasteur, al-
though he knows he can give no help, stays on
all night in ease something unexpected may
happen. The scene changes in the fourth act
to Pasteur’s home in the country, where he is
ill and on the verge of a breakdown; his friend
the doctor tries to persuade him to take a rest,
but Pasteur is deeply engaged in the study of
epilepsy and cannot tear’ himself away. To
him comes again Joseph Meister, now a youth,
and a delightfully sympathetic scene ensues be-
tween the two. The last act is the crown of
Pasteur’s career, his reception by the president
of the republic in the amphitheater of the Sor-
bonne, crowded by his friends, among whom is
Lister, whose name is announced, although he
does not actually appear on the scene. The
play has no “love interest’? and no female
character, and follows no dramatic rules; it is
practically a series of monologues, in which the
actual words of Pasteur ave often used, and its
only unity is in the portrayal of its chief char-
acter. Jt is a triumph for M. Lucien Guitry,
who appears to live the part of the simple,
unaffected, kindly man of genius.

FOREIGN STUDENTS AND THE FEDERAL
IMMIGRATION LAWS

Exemption of bona fide foreign students
from the operation of the present immigration
law is urged in a resolution adopted recently by
the exeeutive committee of the American Asso-
ciation of University Professors. The resolu-
tion states:

Whereas, The omission to exempt bona fide stu-
dents desirous of entering American institutions
of learning from the operation of the present
immigration law is probably due to inadvertence,
inasmuch as such students are expressly exempted
from the operation of the Chinese exelusion act
and the agreement with Japan;

Whereas, the actual operation of the immigra-
tion law has been attended with such deplorable
annoyance to incoming students as to lower the
prestige of the United States as a center of edu-
cation ;

JULY 7, 1922]

Be it resolved, That Congress be petitioned to
amend the existing three per cent. immigration act
by exempting from its provisions all bona fide
students.

Be it further resolved, That in case such amend-
ment be not made effective before September 1,
1922, the government be petitioned to cause the
adoption by the Bureau of Immigration of such
administrative rulings as will preclude the possi-
bility of incoming students being sent to Ellis
Island or other detention stations.

TEXTILE RESEARCH INSTITUTE?

In the hearings before the Senate committee
investigating dyes, the statement was made that
there remain to be invested in education and
research several hundred thousand dollars rep-~
resenting the profits of the Textile Alliance,
in accordance with the original understanding
with the State Department.

We urge that this fund be devoted to the es-
tablishment of an American Textile Research
Institute. Notwithstanding the work of govern-
ment bureaus, private corporations, and textile
schools, there are concerted efforts abroad which
surpass anything we have to offer. As an in-
dustry, textile manufacturers have not yet been
convineed that they can conduct research as an
association enterprise. We believe that unless
the present opportunity is utilized it may be
many years before adequate work will be sup-
ported here.

A simple effective plan can be devised. Cot-
ton, wool, linen and silk should be represented
in the institute. There are strong trade associa-
tions representing these fibers. There is a
splendid association of finishers, and still other
groups of spinners, dyers, dry cleaners, laundry-
men, and other crafts directly concerned with
textiles. From these groups a strong advisory
committee can be formed and by utilizing the
income from the fund to be available a deal of
important work can be carried on in existing
laboratories throughout the country. The ini-
tial staff of the institute could consist of a di-
rector with proper assistants, and if desirable
an early activity could be the establishment of
informational service and a statistical bureau

1 From the Journal of Industrial and Engineer-
ing Chemistry.

SCIENCE 13

and a proper medium for broadcasting new in-
formation.

To divide the capital sum among those now
interested in textile research seems to us un-
wise, for provision should be made for study of
new problems as they may arise in whatever
laboratory may be best fitted for the investiga~
tion. By keeping the present sum as a fund
other money is sure to be attracted, and there
would be available annually a sum which under
wise administration would eventually bring to
the laboratories far greater support.

Plans should be perfected, and it is our hope
that the committee appointed by the Textile
Alliance to consider and recommend methods
for the employment of the money in hand may
decide upon some such program as we have
here suggested.

THE CHEMICAL FOUNDATION

PRESIDENT HarpinG on July 1 addressed the
following letter to Colonel Thomas W. Miller,
the alien property custodian:

My attention has been called by the Department.
of Justice to the fact that a corporation known
as the Chemical Foundation has brought suit
against the treasurer of the United States and
certain licensees of the Federal Trade Commission
for an accounting alleged to be due the said
Chemical Foundation on royalties due it for the
use of certain patents originally seized under the
authority of the alien property custodian and sold
to the Chemical Foundation by the custodian
during the previous administration. On the face
of such an action it became so apparent to me that
an inquiry should be made that I asked for a
report by the Department of Justice on the sale
of this enemy property to the Chemical Founda-
tion. It appears that the sale was made at so
nearly a nominal sum that there is reason to be-
lieve that this government has not faithfully ob-
served the trust which was implied in the seizure
of this property. The circumstances relating to
the entire transaction are of such a character that
full investigation becomes a public duty. More-
over, I feel that your office is obligated to main-
tain the sacred character of the trust to which
the alien property custodian is committed by the
law.

You are therefore directed to forthwith proceed
as follows:

1. Make written demand upon the Chemical

14 SCIENCE

Foundation, Ine., in form to be approved by the
attorney general, to immediately return, transfer
and assign to the alien property custodian, all
patents, trademarks, copyrights, contracts, applica-
tions or other properties or rights transferred to
it by the alien property custodian as aforesaid,
and to account to you for any and all rents,
profits, license fees, or other proceeds thereof real-
ized by said Chemical Foundation, Inc., from said
properties, or rights or any of them from the
date of transfer thereof to the Chemical Founda-
tion, Inc., to the date of restitution.

2. Take any other action which may be advised
or approved by the attorney general, by suit or
otherwise, to fully and in every respect protect
the rights or interests of the United States and
any other person or corporation interested therein,
in and to the properties and rights aforesaid, and
any proceeds, income or profits therefrom in the
hands of the Chemical Foundation, Ine., or its
officers, agents or employees.

In carrying out these instructions you will act
upon the advice of the attorney general.

THE ROCKEFELLER INSTITUTE FOR
MEDICAL RESEARCH

Tue Board of Scientific Directors of the
Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research an-
nounces the following promotions, appoint-
ments and other changes:

Dr. Wade H. Brown, hitherto an associate mem-
ber in pathology and bacteriology, has been made
a member.

Dr. Homer F. Swift, hitherto an associate mem-
ber in the department of the hospital, has been
made a member.

Dr. Carl A. L. Binger, hitherto an assistant in
the department of the hospital, has been made an
associate.

Dr. Albert H. Ebeling, hitherto an assistant in
experimental surgery, has been made an associate.

Dr. Laura Florence, hitherto an assistant in the
department of animal pathology, has been made
an associate.

Dr. Albert B. Hastings, hitherto an assistant
in the department of the hospital, has been made
an associate.

Dr. Philip D. McMaster, hitherto an assistant in
pathology and bacteriology, has been made an
associate.

Dr. Louis A. Milkeska, hitherto an assistant in
chemistry, has been made an associate.

Dr. Ida P. Rolf, hitherto an assistant in chem-
istry, has been made an associate.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

Mr. Fred A. Taylor, hitherto an assistant in
chemistry, has been made an associate.

Dr. Hugh J. Morgan, in the department of the
hospital, has been appointed resident physician at
the hospital.

Dr. David I. Hitcheock, hitherto a fellow in
general physiology, has been made an assistant.

Mr. James M. Neill, hitherto a fellow in the
department of the hospital, has been made an
assistant.

Mr. Henry 8S. Simms, hitherto a fellow in chem-
istry, has been made an assistant.

The following new appointments have been
made:

Professor Karl Landsteiner, member in pathol-
ogy and bacteriology.

Dr. Christian Lundsgaard, associate in the de-
partment of the hospital.

Dr. Thomas M. Rivers, associate in the depart-
ment of the hospital.

Miss Lillian E. Baker, chemical assistant in the
division of experimental surgery.

Dr. Edmund A. G. Branch, assistant in the de-
partment of the hospital.

Dr. George R. Brow, assistant in medicine and
assistant resident in the hospital.

Dr. Harry W. Dahl, assistant in medicine and
assistant resident in the hospital.

Dr. Douglas R. Drury, assistant in pathology
and bacteriology.

Dr. Geoffrey C. Linder, assistant in medicine
and assistant resident in the hospital.

Dr. Henry A. Murray, Jr., assistant in the de-
partment of the hospital.

Mr. Fredrie M. Nicholson, assistant in pathology
and bacteriology.

Miss Ida W. Pritchett, assistant in pathology
and bacteriology.

Dr. Harold A. Salvesen, assistant in medicine
and assistant resident in the hospital.

Dr. Harold J. Stewart, assistant in medicine
and assistant resident in the hospital.

Dr. Chester M. Van Allen, assistant in pathology
and bacteriology.

Miss Helena A. M. Tibbetts, fellow in the de-
partment of animal pathology.

Changes in position have taken place as fol-
lows:

Dr. Harold L. Amoss, hitherto an associate
member in pathology and bacteriology, has ac-
cepted a position as associate professor of medi-
cine at Johns Hopkins Medical School.

Dr. Lloyd D. Felton, hitherto an associate in

JuLy 7, 1922]

pathology and bacteriology, has aceepted a posi-
tion as assistant professor in preventive medicine
at the Harvard Medical School.

Dr. Raymond G. Hussey, hitherto an associate
in bio-physics, has accepted a position as assistant
professor in pathology in Cornell University Med-
ical College.

Dr. Robert L. Levy, hitherto an associate in the
department of the hospital, has accepted a posi-
tion as associate in medicine at the College of
Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia University,
and assistant visiting physician at the Presby-
terian Hospital.

Dr. Edgar Stillman, hitherto an associate in the
department of the hospital, has accepted a posi-
tion as associate in medicine at the College of
Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia University,
and assistant visiting physician at the Presby-
terian Hospital.

Dr. Goronwy O. Broun, hitherto an assistant in
pathology and bacteriology, has accepted a posi-
tion as assistant in the Thorndyke Laboratory,
Boston, Mass., and assistant resident physician at
the Boston City Hospital.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

ALFRED GoLDsBoroucH Mayor, director of
the department of marine biology of the Car-
negie Institution, died on June 25, at Key
West, Fla., aged fifty-four years.

Prince ALBERT DE Monaco, distinguished for
his oceanographic studies, died in Paris on
June 27, at the age of seventy-four years.

Dr. F. G. Corrrent has been appointed di-
rector of the Fixed Nitrogen Research Labora-
tory. He succeeds Dr. Richard C. Tolman, who
goes, as has been already announced, to the
California Institute of Technology.

Tue Albert Medal of the Royal Society of
Arts for 1922 has been awarded by the council
to Sir Dugald Clerk, in recognition of his im-
portant contributions, both theoretical and
practical, to the development of the internal
combustion engine.

Tue John Fritz medal has been presented by
the board representing the leading engineering
societies to Senator Guglielmo Marconi. The
medal is presented for achievement in applied
science as a memorial to John Fritz, who was
the first recipient. Other recipients of the

SCIENCE 15

medal have been Lord Kelvin, George Westing-
house, Alexander Graham Bell, Thomas Alva
Edison, Charles T. Porter, Alfred Noble, Sir
William Henry White, Robert W. Hunt, John
Edison Sweet, James Douglas, Elihu Thomson,
Henry Marion Howe, J. Waldo Smith, George
W. Goethals and Orville Wright.

JoHN Lyte Harrineron of Kansas City,
Mo., has been nominated as president of the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
succeeding Dean Dexter 8. Kimball, formerly
of the Cornell University College of Hngineer-
ing. The newly nominated vice presidents of
the society are: W. S. Finlay, vice president of
the American Water Works and Electric Com-
pany, New York; William H. Kenerson,
professor of mechanical engineering, Brown
University; Earl F. Scott, Atlanta, Ga.; H. H.
Vaughan, Montreal.

On June 4, at the special invitation of the
governors and the medical school, Professor
Harvey Cushing took over the directorship of
the surgical unit of St. Bartholomew’s Hospital
and replaced the director, Mr. Gask for ten
days. The compliment was, as it were, a return
for a like compliment paid to Mr. Gask last
year, when he acted as temporary chief of the
Peter Brigham Bent Hospital, Boston, to which
Dr. Harvey Cushing as professor of surgery at
Harvard is surgeon.

THe honorary degree of Doctor of Laws was
conferred by Wesleyan University on June 19
on Dr. John Campbell Merriam, president of
the Carnegie Institution of Washington.

AMHERST COLLEGE at the recent commence-~
ment conferred the degree of doctor of science
on Dr. Walter W. Palmer, a graduate in the
class of 1905, professor of medicine in Colum-
bia University.

Mr. George RockweuL PUTNAM, commis-
sioner of lighthouses, U. S. Lighthouse Service,
received the honorary degree of doctor of
science at the fiftieth commencement of Stevens
Institute of Technology.

A LARGE meeting was held at the Sorbonne on
June 14 to do honor to M. Camille Flammar-
ion, the astronomer, who celebrated his eightieth
birthday. M. Paul Painlevé, of the Institute,

16 SCIENCE

lectured on “Man and the signs of the heavens.”
M. C. E. Guillaume followed on “The work of
Flammarion.” Distinguished artists of the
Comédie Frangaise read extracts from Flam-
mazion’s works, and astronomical photographs
were thrown on the screen.

Proressor Herpert F. Moors, professor of
engineering materials at the University of Ill-
nois, received the degree of doctor of science
at the commencement of the New Hampshire
College.

Tue following geographers were elected hon-
orary members of the Hungarian Geographical
Society at its fiftieth anniversary meeting in
Budapest in May, 1922: MM. de Margerie
(Paris), Mackinder (Oxford), Hellmann (Ber-
lin), Beltran y Rozpide (Madrid), Machatschek
(Prague), Marinelli (Florence), Lawrence
Martin (Washington), and the presidents of
the Spanish and Italian geographical societies.

Dr. Witu1am Lipper, professor of physical
geography at Princeton University, and M. 8.
S. Smith, professor of civil engineering, have
retired with the title of professor emeritus.

Dr. JoHN Lorenzo Herrron resigned as
dean of-the Syracuse University School of
Medicine on June 15. This resignation termi-
nates the connection which Dr. Heffron has held
with the teaching staff of the medical school
for forty years, during fifteen of which he has
served as dean. Dr. Heffron was made dean
emeritus.

Mr. Huserr Vickery, Ph.D. (Yale ’22), has
been appointed research assistant in biochem~
istry in the laboratory of Dr. Thomas B. Os~
borne, Connecticutt Agricultural Experiment
Station, New Haven.

Proressor T. H. Goopsperp, of the Univer-
sity of California, is at present working at the
University of Oxford, and will spend the latter
part of the summer at the John Innes Horticul-
tural Institution at Merton, Surrey.

Dr. Water L. Brrrrinc, Des Moines, sailed
for Scotland on June 27, to attend the cere-
mony of his election as an honorary member of
the Royal College of Physicians, Edinburgh.

Proressor ADOLPH EH. WALLER of the Ohio

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

State University, will devote the current season
to the further study of economic botany in Eu-
rope, later returning to America via England
in time to attend the annual meeting of the
Britiesh Association.

Mr. Frank C. Baker, curator of the Mu-
seum of Natural History, University of Illinois,
will spend the summer in Wisconsin, continuing
his study of the mollusecan fauna of that state
for the Geological and Natural History Survey.

Tue twelfth season for the Laguna Marine
Laboratory of Pomona College began on June
21. The summer school will last six weeks.
There are the usual courses in zoology and
marine biology, with eight private rooms for
investigators. As in the past ten years the
work is under the charge of Dr. W. A. Hilton.

THE new plant breeding station and chemical
laboratories established in connection with the
agricultural department of the University Col-
lege of Wales, Aberystwyth, were formally
opened on May 20. The station has been made
possible by the endowment provided by Sir
Laurence Philipps, who, in addition, will for
ten years contribute a substantial sum towards
the annual cost of the farm of ninety-two acres.

As reported in the Journal of the American
Medical Association, the new laboratory build-
ing, erected by the Harvard Cancer Commis-
sion for the study of cancer and biophysics in
Boston, was opened recently with appropriate
exercises, in the amphitheater of the Harvard
Medical School. This building adjoins the
Huntingdon Memorial Hospital and will be
known as the John Collins Warren Laboratory,
in recognition of the services rendered to the
university by Dr. Warren, former chairman of
the cancer commission. In the basement of the —
new building a vault for the storage of the
commission’s radium is provided, together with
the necessary pumps and apparatus for collect-
ing and purifying the gaseous emanation from
the radium solution. The first floor contains
the reception and examination rooms for out-
patients, together with the Roentgen ray labora-
tory for Professor Duane. Free diagnosis
service will be maintained by the State Depart-
ment of Health, under the supervision of Dr.

JuLY 7, 1922]

James H. Wright. Material removed at sur-
gical operations can be sent to the laboratory
by any registered physician in Massachusetts,
and a pathologie examination of the tissue will
be made, with a report as to its nature, and
returned without expense to the physician or
his patient. Dr. Henry P. Wolcott, chairman
of the cancer commission, and Dean David L.
Edsall, of the Harvard Medical School, who
was the presiding officer, gave addresses at the
ceremony.

We learn from Nature that a prize of $5,000
is offered by Mr. Frank J. D. Barnjum of
Montreal for a practical method of combating
and suppressing the spruce bud worm, bark
beetle and borer, which have caused such tre-
mendous damage in the forests of Eastern
Canada and the United States. The Province
of Quebec alone has suffered a loss during the
past ten years of 150,000,000-cords of standing
pulpwood by these pests, which represents a
market value in pulpwood of three billion dol-
lars, or if manufactured into paper, of seven
billion dollars. This represents a loss of wood
sufficient for forty-five years’ requirements for
newsprint for the North American continent.
The competition will close on August 1, and
the $5,000 will be given for the successful sug-
gestion that is accepted by the judges, who will
be Sir William Price of Messrs. Price Bros.,
Quebec; Dr. C. D. Howe, dean of the faculty
of forestry, Toronto University; Mr. Fred A.
Gilbert, Great Northern Paper Company, Ban-
gor, Maine; Mr. G. C. Piche, chief of forest
service, Quebec, and Mr. Ellwood. Wilson,
Laurentide Company, Grand Mere, Quebec.
Competitive suggestions should reach Mr.
Frank D. J. Barnjum, New Birks Building,
Montreal, Canada, before August 1.

Av the time of the celebration of the cen-
tennial of Pasteur’s birth, in Strasbourgh, a
congress of hygiene and bacteriology will be
held for discussion of questions relating to
disease. In order to show the sympathy of
Great Britain with the projects of the French
committee, a British committee composed of
the following members has been formed: Sir
Charles Sherrington, chairman, A. Chaston,
H. EK. Field, Professor Perey R. Frankland, Sir

SCIENCE 17

John M’Fadyean, Professor C. J. Martin, Sir
W. J. Pope, Sir James Walker and Sir Almroth
Wright.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

By the will of Frederic C. Penfield, who last
served the United States in Austria as ambassa-
dor, $80,000 each is left to New York Univer-
sity, the University of Pennsylvania and the
Catholic University, for Penfield scholarships
in diplomacy and international affairs.

By the will of Seymour Coman of Chicago,
the University of Chicago is made trustee of his
residuary estate, estimated to be approximately
$145,000, the net income to be used for scientific
research, with special reference to preventive
medicine and the cause, prevention and cure of
diseases. This bequest to be known as the
Seymour Coman Researeh Fund.

Stevens Institute or TrecHnouoay has se-
cured from the United States government the
two buildings erected by the Navy Department
for the use of the steam engineering school con-
ducted by the Navy at Stevens during the war.
The smaller building has been remodeled to
house the college library and the museum. One
wing of the larger building has been adapted as
a laboratory for the department of electrical
engineering. The United States government
has paid back to the trustees of the Stevens
Institute of Technology a tax of $45,750 paid
by the original trustees on the bequest pro-
viding for the foundation and endowment of
the institute in 1870.

Tue gift of £100,000 by an unnamed bene-
factor was announced by Lord Haldane on
June 14 on the occasion of the laying of the
foundation-stone of the new University College,
Nottingham, which is to form the nucleus of
the Kast Midlands University. The buildings
will be situated in a large park lying between
Nottingham and Beeston. This was given by
Sir Jesse Boot, who had already made dona-
tions, amounting to £110,000.

Five additional professors for the medical
department of the University of Georgia are
announced as follows: Dr. Eliot R. Clark, from

18 SCIENCE

the University of Missouri, professor of anat-
omy; Dr. Richard V. Lamar, professor of
pathology; Dr. Virgil P. Sydenstricker, Au-
gusta, professor of medicine; Dr. Ralph H.
Chaney, Rochester, Minn., professor of sur-
gery, and Dr. Harry B. Neagle, Adrian, Mich.,
professor of preventive medicine and hygiene.

Dr. ArtHur J. Hit, of the department of
chemistry of Yale University, has been pro-
moted to an associate professorship in organic
chemistry, and Herbert W. Rinehart, Ph.D.
(Yale, 1922) has been appointed an instructor.

Dr. Luoyp L. Swain, of the University of
Washington, has been promoted to an assistant
professorship of mathematics.

Dr. Harry V. Arxrnson, of the University
of Illinois Medical School, has been appointed
associate professor of pharmacology in the
department of medicine of the University of
Texas.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
BACTERIAL PLANT DISEASES IN THE
PHILIPPINE ISLANDS

TuHat fungus diseases of plants are numerous
and destructive in the Philippine Islands is a
well established fact. The extent of damage
resulting from this class of organisms is great.
Cane is reduced by Fiji disease up to 30 per
cent.; the mung bean has suffered so severely
that entire crops have been total losses, seed-
lings of tobacco, tomato and some other plants
are severely handicapped by being parasitized
by soil harbored fungi. Rusts take their toll
yearly, not to mention the serious losses due
to forest and timber destroying fungi.

On the other hand, bacterial diseases are
scarce and especially so on hosts which have
not been introduced from a temperate climate.

Tobacco and other solanaceous as well as
some non-solanaceous plants are attacked by
Bacterium solanacearum E. F. S., an organism
which, without a doubt, has been introduced
with certain host plants from temperate re-
gions.

Citrus is attacked by the citrus canker or-
ganism, cabbage by Pseudomonas campestris

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

(Pamm.) E. F. S., beans by Pseudomonas
phaseo K. F. 8., cotton by Ps. malvacearum
HK. F. §., and parsley by an organism not pre-
viously deseribed. So far as present informa-
tion is concerned these bacterial diseases repre-
sent the entire number which are parasitic on
economic hosts in central and southern Luzon.
With the possible exception of citrus canker
and the previously undescribed disease of
parsley none of the diseases, or even more,
none of the hosts are indigenous to the Philip-
pines and there is no doubt that the diseases
were imported for the most part with the hosts,
from temperate regions.

The writer has been searching carefully for
bacterial diseases and has made many isolations
from numerous hosts in an effort to discover
the cause of certain unreported maladies. In
every case, with the exception of the parsley
disease, no bacterial organism capable of
initiating disease was found.

The searceness of bacterial diseases is obvi-
ous and those which are commonly found, with
the exception of citrus canker, have been
brought, in all probability, with their respective
hosts. This statement holds true for central
and southern Luzon, only, for no work has
been possible elsewhere.

CotIn G. WELLES

COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURE,
Los Banos, P. I.

SWORDFISH TAKEN ON TRAWL LINES

Mr. Henry D. Warton, of New York, re-
cently informed me of the capture of several
swordfishes near New York late in December,
on trawl lines set for tilefish, the information
coming to him through Mr. Haroldson, the
sailing master of his yacht. At my request Mr.
Whiton asked the sailing master to look up
details. He reported that four schooners took
13 swordfishes as follows: William A. Morse 2,
Columbia 3, Ruth M. Martin 3, and Benjamin
W. Latham 5. The swordfishes were all entan-
gled in trawl lines set for tilefish at a point
110 miles southeast of Ambrose Channel light-
ship, the trawels being set at depths varying
from 95 to 125 fathoms. All the swordfishes
were taken during the period between Decem-

JULY 7, 1922]
ber 20, 1921, and January 1, 1922. Their
weight varied from 250 to 300 pounds.

With this information I called at the office
of the Atlantic Coast Fisheries Company,
owners, at Fulton Market, where Mr. J. M.
Matthews, in charge of the office, after inter-
viewing Captain Emil Rasmusen of the
schooner Ruth M. Martin, made the following
statement :

While fishing for tilefish 120 miles HE. S. E.
of Ambrose Channel lightship, a swordfish was
found on the trawl line when hauled to the
surface. The fish was entangled in the trawl
apparently in an effort to obtain some of the
tilefish that had been hooked. The tilefish near
where the swordfish was entangled were cut
and bruised, indicating that they had been
attacked. There was no indication that the
swordfish had been hooked or had taken any
bait. The trawl line was looped around the
sword close up to the head and wrapped around
the body several times. On this trip three
swordfish were taken on the trawls in the same
manner. One weighed 265 pounds and had a
sword about five feet in length. The other two
weighed 254 and 185 pounds, respectively. The
tilefish trawl had 320 hooks nine feet apart.
The fishing ground is on the edge of the Gulf
Stream.

I then interviewed Captain Jack Rasmusen
of the schooner Benjamin W. Latham. He
reported having taken five swordfish on tilefish
trawls during the holidays, with a total weight
of 990 pounds, the trawls being set at depths
of 70 to 115 fathoms.

The masters of all four vessels stated that
swordfish had never been caught in this manner
before so far as they knew. There were no
signs of swordfish at the surface when any of
the trawl catches were made.

In going into the details of the matter, I was
interested chiefly in ascertaining whether the
swordfishes had actually gone to the bottom in
search of food, but there does not seem to be
any positive evidence on this point. The mas-
ters of the vessels thought that the unusual
catches on the trawl lines were first felt at
about 25 fathoms below the surface. All the
swordfishes were much tangled up in the lines
and most of them were dead when brought up.
They probably attempted to raid the trawls

SCIENCE 19

while they were being lifted, and it is possible
that some of them did so at depths considerably
greater than that at which they were first
noticed.
Cuas. Haskins TOWNSEND
THE AQUARIUM,
New York,

MEXICAN ARCHEOLOGY

To tHe Eprror or Scipnce: A somewhat
inaccurate account of the communication on
“Recent archeological discoveries in Mexico”
that I made to the Royal Anthropological So-
ciety in London on November 22, 1921, having
been reprinted in Scimnce (April 7, 1922)
from Nature, I would be obliged if you would
permit me to refer those interested in the sub-
ject to the exact report of my text printed
in Man (January, 1922), to rectify the fol-
lowing inaccuracies :

It was in 1909, not “in 1920” that specimens
of the sub-gravel type were first brought to my
notice. It was in the great pyramid of the
Sun at Teotihuacan and not in the recently un-
covered and reconstructed “small pyramid”
that Sefor Gamio pierced a tunnel. It was an
age of two thousand years and not of “twenty
thousand years” that the late distinguished
voleanist, Dr. Temple Anderson, tentatively as-
signed to the lava bed at Coyoacan under which
a second type of clay figurines was discovered.
In his remarks Mr. T. A. Joyce referred to a
figurine acquired by the British Museum “from
Michoaean, Mexico,” and not from “Ecuador.”

Zevia NUTTALL

QUOTATIONS
THE ISOTOPES OF TIN

THE insensitivity of the photographic plate
in recording positive rays when compared with
its sensitivity to light has long been observed,
and has been accounted for by the fact that the
action of positive rays is purely a surface effect.
There has, therefore, always been the hope that
considerable improvement could be made in this
direction by increasing the concentration of the
bromide particules on the surface of the gela-
tine. This hope has now been realized to some
extent by the uge of a method which, I under-
stand, has been devised for the production of

20 SCIENCE

Schumann plates. It consists essentially in
dissolving off more or less of the gelatine by
means of acid. I have not yet succeeded in ob-
taining certain or uniform effects, but in the
most favorable cases the sensitivity of the “half
tone’ plates used in the mass-spectrograph has
been increased ten to twenty times without seri-
ously altering their other valuable properties.

The immediate result has been the definite
proof of the complex nature of the element tin
which had been previously suspected (Phil.
Mag., xiii, p, 141, July, 1921). Tin tetra-
methide was employed, and a group of eight
lines corresponding approximately to atomic
weights 116 (c), 117 (f), 118 (b), 119 (e),
120 (a), 121 (h), 122 (g), 124 (d) was def-
initely proved to be due to tin. This conclu-
sion was satisfactorily confirmed by the pres-
ence of similar groups corresponding to
Sn(CH,), Sn(CH,), and Sn(CH,),. The
intensities of the various components indicated
by the letters in brackets agree quite well with
the accepted chemical atomic weight 118.7, and
incidentally preclude the possibility that any
of the lines, with the possible exception of the
extremely faint one at 121, are due to hydrides.

The spacing of these eight lines, which are
only just resolved, show that their differences
are integral to the highest accuracy, but the
lines themselves compared with known lines on
the plate give atomic weights always tending
to be 2 or 3 parts in 1,000 too light for the
above whole numbers. That this remarkable
divergence can not be explained as experi-
mental error is very strongly indicated by the
following consideration. The discharge tube
had been used previously to investigate some
very pure xenon. The line due to Sn'*°(CH,)
should therefore have appeared exactly halfway
between the two strong xenon lines 134, 136.
It was actually quite unmistakably nearer the
former, so much so that the two were only par-
tially resolved. The same irregular grouping
repeated itself in another portion of the field
in the following spectrum. It seems, therefore,
difficult to resist the conclusion that the isotopes
of tin have atomic weights which are less than
whole numbers by one fifth to one third ofa
unit of atomic weight, but satisfactory settle-
ment of this important point will probably

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

have to be deferred till a more accurate mass-
spectrograph has been made.

Incidentally I may add that the presence of
the two faint components of xenon 128 and 130
previously suspected has now been satisfactorily
confirmed.—F. W. Aston in Nature.

SPECIAL ARTICLES
CRATERLETS IN EAST-CENTRAL ARKAN-
SAS PROBABLY DUE TO THE NEW
MADRID EARTHQUAKE
Tue following brief description of six crater-
lets occurring on and about the border between
the southeast quarter of Sec. 31 and the north-
east quarter of Sec. 32, T. 8 N., R. 7 E., is of
interest because it apparently extends the
sphere of destructive violence of the New
Madrid earthquake from that illustrated in
Bulletin 494, United States Geological Survey,
to within about 20 miles northwest of Memphis.
These are also of interest because few, if any,

larger than these have been described.

Occurrence: Five of the craterlets occur on
the upper surface of one of the low ridges of
the Mississippi flood plain. The sixth is a
double craterlet, occurring on the slope of the
ridge. They apparently bear no relationship:
to each other except as regards origin and age.
With the exception of the double craterlet,
they are saucer-shaped, with diameters ranging
from 10 to 40 feet, and depths ranging from
2 to 6 feet. One part of the double eraterlet is
about 15 feet by 10 feet along the diameters
of its elliptical outline. The smaller craterlet.
is about 10 by 8 feet along similar directions.
They are separated by a ridge about three feet
high. The bottoms of both ecraterlets lie about.
4 to 5 feet below the surrounding surface.
These eraterlets are all located within a radius.
of 800 feet.

Origin: The ridge on which these craterlets.
oceur has long been cultivated, and between
cultivation and sporadic attempts to fill them
up, any evidences of rims that may have sur-
rounded the eraters have disappeared. How-
ever, the material about the craterlets is made:
up of the characteristic fine sand and clay that
appears in all the dredgings in this vicinity,
together with rocks that range in size from
1 inch through to 11x4x5 inches. These rocks.

JULY 7, 1922]

_ very clearly are not indigenous to the flood
plain materials that form the ridge. The sup-
position is that they were forced up from below
by gaseous and water pressure that gave rise
to the craterlets.

Age: No evidences as to age was obtained
by the writer. However, as similar craters are
found farther to the north and are there shown
to have been formed at the time of the New
Madrid earthquake, it is logical to assume that
these were formed during the same disturb-
ances.

H. T. THomas

UNIVERSITY OF ARKANSAS

AZOTOBACTER IN SOILS!

Some time ago the writer? called attention to
the apparent relation existing between the
presence of Azotobacter in soils and the abso-
lute reaction of the soil. At that time less
than one hundred soils, all local, had been
examined and the reaction was determined
colorimetrically upon an extract of the soil.
Since then 418 samples of soil collected from
39 counties in Kansas and 25 states other than
Kansas have been cultured for Azotobacter and
their presence or absence in such cultures com-
pared with the absolute reaction of the soil
determined colorimetrically upon an extract of
the soil, and also with the reaction of the soil
determined electrometrically upon a suspension
of the soil.

These soils have been arbitrarily divided
into two groups: those, the hydrogen-ion con-
centration of which was found to be greater
than 1 X 10—®; and those with a lower hydro-
gen-ion concentration. This particular division
point has been chosen because the large amount
of data that have been accumulated indicate
that the maximum hydrogen-ion concentration
tolerated by Azotobacter is very near this point.
Comparing the presence and absence of Azoto-
bacter in these two soil groups with the reac-
tion we ean, by making use of Yule’s® associa-

1 Contribution No. 47, Department of Bacteri-
ology, Kansas Agricultural Experiment Station.

2P. L. Gainey: Science, N. S., 48, pp. 139-
140; Jour. Ag. Res., 14, pp. 265-271.

3G. Udny Yule, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., Ser. A,
Vol. 194, pp. 257-319.

SCIENCE 21

tion correlation formula, obtain a mathematical
expression for the association or correlation
existing between the reaction and the presence
or absence of Azotobacter.

An application of this formula to our data
gives, when the reaction of the soil was deter-
mined colorimetrically, a coefficient of 0.956.
When the reaction was determined electromet-
rically the coefficient was found to be 0.942.

It has been demonstrated in this laboratory
that when Azotobacter are introduced into a
soil with a hydrogen-ion concentration greater
than 1 X 10~*, and not containing Azotobacter,
they can exist therein for an appreciable length
of time. Considering the relative ease with
which soils may become inoculated under nat-
ural conditions, and also the probability that
other conditions may inhibit the growth of
Azotobacter in soils the reaction of which is
favorable, it is believed that an association, or
correlation coefficient as high as that indicated
above is significant in indicating the influence
of the hydrogen-ion concentration of a soil
upon the ability of that soil to support Azoto-
bacter.

P. L. Gainey
Kansas AGRICULTURAL

EXPERIMENT STATION

GENERAL MEETING OF THE AMER-
ICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY

THE sixty-third general meeting of the Amer-
ican Chemical Society was held at Birmingham,
Alabama, Monday, April 3, to Friday, April 7,
1922, inclusive. The council meeting was held
on the third, the general meeting on the morn-
ing and afternoon of the fourth and divisional
meetings all day Wednesday and Thursday.
Excursions were enjoyed in Birmingham on
Friday, and some fifty of the members took a
special excursion to Muscle Shoals on Satur-
day. Full details of the meeting and program
will be found in the May, 1922, issue of the
Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chem-
istry. The registration was 381, coming from
36 states and one from the island of Mauritius.
Twenty-eight ladies attended the meeting.

General public addresses were given by
Carlile P. Winslow, director, U. 8. Worest
Products Laboratory, on “The development of

22 SCIENCE

the forest products industry in the south,” and
by William H. Stone, associate editor of the
Manufacturers’ Record, on “The remarkable
development of the south and its relations to
the American chemical industry,” and a public
address to the people of Birmingham by Pro-
fessor Marston Taylor Bogert on the evening
of April 5 under the title, “The flower fields
and the organie chemist. Perfumes—natural
and synthetic.”

At the general business meeting held on
Tuesday morning, April 4, resolutions and
tributes were presented to the general society
on our late honorary member, Giacomo Ciami-
cian, and a long time councilor and active mem-
ber, the late Dr. Charles Baskerville, the society
remaining standing for a few moments as a
tribute to the memory of each.

Following these tributes to members of the
society, Dr. W. A. Noyes referred to the work
of Adolph von Baeyer and Emil Fischer.

At the general meeting on Tuesday afternoon
the following general papers were presented :

The manufacture of phosphoric acid in the
electric furnace by the condensation and electrical
precipitation method: THEODORE SWANN.

The pioneer’s field in petroleum research: VAN
H. MANNING.

Information needs in science and technology:
CuarLes L. REESE.

Recent developments of the chemistry of rub-
ber: W. C. GEER.

Some research problems in the canning indus-
try: W. D. BIGELow.

Chemistry in the old south and the new: FRAN-
cis P. VENABLE.

The following divisions and sections met:
Divisions of Agricultural and Food Chemistry,
Biological Chemistry, Dye Chemistry, Indus-
trial and Engineering Chemistry, Organic
Chemistry, Physical and Inorganic Chemistry,
Rubber Chemistry, Sugar Chemistry, and
Water, Sewage and Sanitation Chemistry;
sections of Cellulose Chemistry, Chemical Edu-
cation, History of Chemistry, and Petroleum
Chemistry. Full details of their meetings will
be found in the May issue of the Journal of
Industrial and Engineering Chemistry.

On Tuesday evening a very enjoyable smoker
was tendered by the Alabama Technical Asso-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

ciation to the society at the Southern Club.
The Country Club, the Roebuck Country Club
and the Southern Club were open to the mem-
bers throughout the meeting. On Friday ex-
cursions were made to the industrial plants
around Birmingham and a barbecue was given
at noon, which was a unique experience to many
of the members and was enjoyed by all. The
scientific program was extensive, 237 papers
being presented.

Division oF AGRICULTURAL AND Foop CHEMISTRY
T. J. Bryan, chairman
C. 8. Brinton, secretary

Composition, grade and baking qualities of self-
rising flour: BrngaMIN R. Jacoss. The author
discusses briefly grades of wheat and flour, and
the process of milling ordinary flour. Examina-
tion of forty-seven samples of commercial self-
rising flour and a few samples of this product
made in the laboratory was made. The data give
determinations of moisture, protein, total ash,
added salt, P,O., SO,, co, available and residual,
microscopic count of bran and hair particles and
baking tests. From these data the author shows
that approximately 25 per cent. of the commercial
product is of a grade inferior to what is com-
monly known as ‘‘straight’’ grade of flour. He
also shows that a large number of samples con-
tain excessive amounts of acid-calcium-phosphate
and are deficient in CO,. The baking experiments
which are accompanied by photographs show that
many of these self-rising flours make biscuits of
inferior quality, this inferiority being due to the
grade of flour used as well as to deficiencies in
co,.

Bleached and self-rising flours: JUANITA E.
DarraAH. This paper discusses the nutritive
values of bleached and self-rising flours and gives
the results of a series of experiments in feeding
rats. The author’s conclusions are that bleached
flour is inferior. Self-rising flour is not neces-
sarily inferior, if not bleached and if milled and
compounded correctly and marketed in original
packages. She recommends that stringent meas-
ures should be adopted to standardize such flours,
and for protection of the honest miller there
should be required a statement of the proportion
of all ingredients on the label. It is concluded
that the better growth of rats fed on products
made from self-rising flour over those fed on
bleached flour diet must be due to the presence
of the phosphates in the leavening agents added
in the manufacture of self-rising flour. This has

JULY 7, 1922]

led to a comparison of the phosphate and tartarate
baking powders in addition to the flour problem.
This work is still under way.

Composition and nutritive value of yeast grown
in vitamine-free media: JUANITA E. DarRAH. The
problem here was to determine the nutritive value
of yeast grown from such substances as extracts
of wheat and alfalfa, after a series of treatments
to destroy the vitamine content. The media of
B. MacDonald and McCollum was adopted for
the experiments, but with a higher concentration
of sugar. In addition, oats with vitamine de-
stroyed were added. Rats and guinea pigs were
given various diets, and the results were recorded.
The author’s conclusions are: 1. Yeast may be
readily grown in vitamine-free media through an
exceedingly large number of transfers. 2. Yeast
grown in this way contains protein and nitroge-
nous bases of undoubted nutritive value. 3. Evi-
dence of dietetic value of yeast grown in such
media is not substantiated. There was only very
slight indication of presence of water-soluble B,
and none of fat-soluble A or water-soluble C.

New sources of water-soluble C and fat-soluble
A in the southeast: Juanita E. Darran. New
sources of these vitamines have been found; water-
soluble B and C are abundant in Jerusalem arti-
chokes, and fat soluble A is fairly abundant in
Avocado pears. Five guinea pigs were fed scurvy
diet and succumbed in three weeks in so far as to
show unmistakable symptoms of seurvy. Two of
these died. One had just been through a previous
attack of scurvy and had recovered. Another
died, due to chilling on a cold day, when there
was a delay in securing the artichokes. The other
three recovered entirely on addition of the Jeru-
salem artichokes in five gram quantities per diem,
added to the usual scurvy ration. When protein
and mineral salts are supplied in suitable
amounts, there is sufficient water-soluble B in
Jerusalem artichokes to promote normal growth
in white rats, when fed as the sole source of this
vitamine in quantities of three grams dried arti-
choke to ten of the dry water-soluble B free mixed
diet. There is sufficient fat-soluble A in Avoca-
does to promote considerable growth in white
rats; and to prevent sore eyes for a very long
period, no xerophthalmia was induced. This is
true of a diet adequate in other respects in pro-
tein, vitamine content and energy value. No re-
production tests have been secured.

Foods, facts, fancies and follies: Epwarp
GUDEMAN. This paper discusses the subject of
foods from the viewpoint of, firstly, their produe-

SCIENCE 23

tion, distribution, inclusive of adulteration and
substitution, and secondly, from the viewpoint of
national habits and follies as to consumption and
conservation. It calls attention to the exhausting
and wastage of good agricultural lands, the same
as with other natural resources, and recommends
the reclamation and occupation of the 2,225,000,000
acres of tillable land now lying barren, by em-
ployment of the unemployed, the same suggestion
as made by President Roosevelt and Secretary
Lane for returned soldiers in 1919, such work to
be under direct control and supervision of the
federal government. Such action would provide
labor for thousands of men, would greatly increase
the resources of the nation and would create a
demand for the products of the government’s
nitrogen fixation plants, without coming into com-
petition with existing fertilizer manufacturers.
It is a paper for the layman without the use of
scientific or technical terms.

The determination of hydrogen sulfide by foods
when cooked at various temperatures: EDWARD F.
Kouman. A method has been developed in which
the food is heated in a flask in an autoclave. The
flask is fitted with a stopper carrying two glass
tubes. The inlet tube passes to the bottom of the
flask and opens in the autoclave. The outlet tube
passes through the pine wood stopper of the flask
and up through the top of the autoclave and
carries a glass stopcock. The autoclave is sup-
plied with steam from a boiler. By this device
food may be heated at any temperature for any
length of time, while the water content remains
constant. At the same time the hydrogen sulfide
formed can be collected and determined as barium
sulfate. The method is a quantitatively accurate
one. Its application to other steam distillations
under pressure is considered. It should have wide
application in many organic preparations.

Studies of the availability of organic nitroge-
nous compounds. IT (by title): C. 8. Ropinson.

The interpretation of mechanical analysis of
soils as affected by soil colloids: R. O. E. Davis.
So-called mechanical analysis of soils is one in
which the soil is divided into its mineral constitu-
ents according to the grain sizes of the material.
This mechanical analysis has an important bearing
on indicating the character of the soil and its
physical properties. From the results of such an
analysis may be judged the water-holding ¢a-
pacity of soils and their relations to tillage opera-
tions, and, more important, their probable pro-
ductivity. In carrying out such an analysis it be-
comes absolutely necessary, first, to break up all

24 SCIENCE

aggregates of soil material and then to go through
the operations by which the different sizes are
separated. The various methods employed have
used various means for deflocculation of the soil
material, but the method adopted as most satisfac-
tory by the Bureau of Soils has been that of sha-
king the sample of soil with water for a period of
about seven hours. Experiments recently carried on
have demonstrated that the colloid content of soils
is considerably greater than has been generally
believed. These experiments have shown that the
so-called clay separate obtained in the mechanical
analysis, consisting of material grains smaller
than .005 of a millimeter in diameter, is made up
partly of aggregates of colloidal material. These
aggregates have withstood the shaking operations
without breaking down, but it has been demon-
strated that they can be broken down and ob-
tained in a dispersed state by rubbing lightly with
the finger or rubber pestle. These results indicate
the insufficiency of our present methods of me-
chanical analysis and show that in addition to the
separations as obtained at present this method
may have to be supplemented by a determination
of the amount of colloid contained in the soil and
the main separate groups, such as the clay and
silt.

Studies on flavors, beverages and related prod-
ucts. 1. The determination of methyl anthran-
ilate:1 J. W. Sane and Jonn B. Witson. A col-
orimetrie method for the determination of methyl
anthranilate in genuine and imitation grape prod-
ucts which depends upon the formation of a red
azo dye, is described. The reagent used is
sodium-1-naphthol-2-sulphonate. Experimental data
are given which show that the method is quantita-
tive. Advantages of the method described over
others in current use are: first, the method is
quantitative; second, the test is applied directly
to distillate, thus avoiding possible loss of ester
through extraction and subsequent evaporation of
solvent; third, use of hydrazine sulphate in place
of urea for destroying excess of nitrous acid.
The method is recommended in the examination
of products which are believed to be sophisticated.

Studies on flavors, beverages and related prod-
ucts. 2. Determination of methyl alcohol in ea-
tracts:2 Joun B. Winson and J. W. Sate. The
merits of a number of well-known tests for methyl

1 Contribution from Water and Beverage Lab-
oratory, Bureau of Chemistry.

2 Contribution from Water and Beverage Lab-
oratory, Bureau of Chemistry.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

aleohol are discussed and data are given which
show their relative value and delicacy. The
Denigée and Lyons’ tests are found to be the most
satisfactory for examination of flavoring extracts
suspected of containing methyl alcohol. Flavor-
ing extracts contain a variety of esters and essen-
tial oils which interfere unless the analysis is con-
ducted properly. The sample to be analyzed
should be adjusted so that it will have a volume
of 100 ee and contain not more than ten per cent.
of ethyl alcohol. Interfering substances are elim-
inated by salting the sample, extracting it with
petroleum ether previous to distillation, and dis-
tilling, using a fractionating column. Thirty ce
of distillate are collected in which will be found
practically all the ethyl and methyl alcohols. The
colorimetric tests to be applied are described in
detail.

Relations between the active acidity and the
lime-requirement of soils: EpGar T. WHERRY.
Lime requirement is stated in parts per thousand
of CaO, and, because of the ease with which rela-
tive values can be appreciated, active soil acidity
is stated in the form of specific acidity. The
ratio between these in a given soil may be ex-
pressed by a correlation coefficient C, obtained by
the equation: L.R. = C x (S.A.— 1). The value
of C is believed to be a measure of the adsorptive
power of the soil colloids for hydrogen-ion. The
coefficient C has been found to vary so widely
from one soil to another, from an untreated to a
limed soil, and even from one depth to another in
the same soil, that it is impracticable to calculate
lime-requirement from acidity determinations in
general, as has been proposed. Soils may be
roughly classified on the basis of the value of C,
a convenient ratio between classes being 3/10;
but only if some simple procedure is first devised
for classifying a given soil can there be obtained
from its specific acidity a value for its lime-
requirement.

Characteristic proteins in high and low protein
corn: M. F. SHowaLTER and R. H. Carr. The
protein content of corn is subject to wide varia-
tions by breeding and selection. The highest
protein ear the writers have been able to produce
contained 18.43 and the lowest 7.62 per cent. pro-
tein. A study has been made of the relative
abundance of the different proteins in corn, and
it was found that zein was the important protein
which varied most, averaging 50.28 per cent. in
high protein and only 31.85 per cent. in low pro-
tein corn. The averages for the other proteins
are: glutelin 38.11, glolulin 3.70, albumen 3.92,

JULY 7, 1922]

and amide 2.81 per cent. in the high protein and
52.15, 1.53, 8.21 and 6.25 respectively in the low
protein corn. The zein is higher yet in high pro-
tein popcorn, averaging 57.24 per cent.

_ Errors in the determination of fat wm cream:
E. G. Manin and R. H. Carr. The use of hydro-
carbon oils, non-miscible with butter fat, for elim-
inating the upper meniscus in the necks of Bab-
eock bottles has become quite natural. More
recent experimental results in the Purdue labora-
tory have shown that in the hands of the ordinary
dairy tester this results in readings averaging
about 0.5 per cent. lower than when the bottom
of the meniscus, obtained without added oil, is
used. As the latter has formerly been shown to
be about 0.5 per cent. lower than is given by the
gravimetric method, the use of such oils (such as
‘“glymol’’) ordinarily results in a loss of about
1.0 per cent. of fat for each test. Ten large
ereameries in Indiana averaged 100,000 cream
tests in 1917. Upon the assumption that each
test represented a five-gallon lot, this represented
approximately 500,000 gallons of cream. An ex-
perimental error of 1.0 per cent. in the fat deter-
mination therefore meant a loss to the producer of
more than 40,000 pounds of butter fat, if the
““glvmol’’ method was used in all cases. The
value of this fat was approximately $20,000. The
reading error has been found to vary according to
the method of adding the oil. If the latter is
added slowly and carefully, little or no error
oecurs. If the oil is run in rapidly, as is ordi-
narily the ease, it momentarily sinks into the
liquid butter fat, and as it rises it carries some
of the latter upon its surface, thus decreasing the
length of the residual fat column. It is conelu-
sively shown that the method is not safe in the
hands of the average dairy tester, but the use of
amyl aleohol for this purpose, substituted for
hydrocarbon oils, gives reliable results in all cases.

The commercial purification of phosphoric acid
by crystallization: Witt1am H. Ross, C. B.
Durain and R. M. Jones. Commercial phosphoric
acid contains among other constituents such
poisonous impurities as lead, arsenic and fluorine.
Acid intended for use in the manufacture of
foodstuffs must therefore be treated for the elim-
ination of these materials. This is done, at pres-
ent, by precipitation with the aid of suitable
reagents. The effectiveness of this method is
limited by the solubility of the precipitate in the
acid. It has been found that by concentrating
phosphorie acid, at a temperature below 105°, to a
speeific gravity of 1.85 at 20° and inoculating

SCIENCE 25

with a crystal of phosphoric acid, the greater part
of the acid will crystallize, leaving the impurities
in the mother liquor. The crystallization may be
repeated by centrifuging, melting the crystals at
a temperature above 40° C., cooling to ordinary
temperature, adding water to bring to a specific
gravity of 1.85 and again inoculating. Two or
even one crystallization will usually be sufficient
for acid of commercial quality, but by repeated
erystallizations acid of any desired degree of
purity may be obtained. When phosphorie acid
is prepared by the volatilization process and col-
lected in a Cottrell precipitator, it is usually of
such a concentration that it may be crystallized
with little or no initial concentration. The
crystallization method is therefore especially
adapted to the purification of volatilized phos-
phoric acid and experiments on the commercial
development of the method are now in progress.

Do velvet beans contain vitamin B? KE. R.
Miniter. Fourteen pigeons were fed on an exclu-
sive diet of polished rice until pronounced symp-
toms of polyneuritis appeared. Seven of these
were restored by feeding each five grains of corn.
The other seven were fed five velvet beans each
with the result that all were improved temporarily,
but all died within two to six days. Of another
group of six which were fed polished rice, two
died, apparently from starvation. Of the four
brought down with polyneuritis, three were com-
pletely restored by administering to each 0.5
grams of an alcoholic extract of velvet beans and
one was partially restored. This amount of ex-
tract represented three beans of average size. The
more favorable results obtained with the second
group is probably due to the greater availability
of the vitamin and is believed to show that the
velvet beans contained a fair amount of vitamin B.

The occurrence and composition of some Ala-
bama phosphates: B. B. Ross.

The mineral requirements for the nutrition of
wheat during the seedling phase: H. H. Kine and
M. C. SEWELL. Wheat was grown in sand cul-
tures, the nutrient solution consisting of KH,PO,,
Ca(NO,), and MGSO, and the concentration of
the salts in each pot having a caleulated osmotic
value of 1.00 atmosphere but differing by incre-
ments of % in salt proportions. The pots were
arranged in duplicate triangles of twenty-one pots
each. The experiment was carried through the
seedling phase of five weeks’ length. Solution
R,S, which was chosen as best consisted of
KH,PO,, Ca(NO,), and MgSO, in the following
proportions, 3:2:3, and the respective partial vol-

26 SCIENCE

umes moleeular coneentrations being 0.0072,
0.0048, 0.0072. The basis for the determination
of the best solution was the dry weight of tops.
To five pots vitamines extracted from yeast was
added. This increased the growth of the plants
quite noticeably.

A dietary study of some state institutions:
E. H. S. Barty. This is a study of the dietary
of each of the groups at the different institutions
under the care of the Kansas State Board of
Administration, where shelter, food and clothing
are provided. The calculations are made from a
complete report of all the food used for a series
of months, sometimes during the entire year. The
proteins, fats and carbohydrates and the calories
per day per capita are worked out for each insti-
tution according to a commonly accepted method.
The number of inmates at these institutions being
large, and the conditions varied, an excellent
opportunity is afforded for a comparison and for
eonstructive criticism on the quantity, variety
and cost of the food furnished.

Studies on the electropure process of treating
milk: FLoyp W. Rospison. This paper gives a
résumé of previous work on the treatment of milk
by electricity and gives in detail the results of
the author’s studies on the improved apparatus.
The apparatus is described in detail and its essen-
tial characteristics emphasized. Results of
studies on bacterial reduction; keeping qualities
of the treated milk; effect on cream line, ete., are
given and include a very thoroughly conducted
experiment on the effect of the process on bacteria
of tuberculosis in milk. The great value of the
process is pointed out and certain automatic eon-
trol features dwelt upon. The application of the
electric current and the method of preventing the
electrodes from becoming hot, thus eliminating
any heated taste, are important features in the
light of their effect on the treated milk. The
process produces a milk free from pathogenic
organisms and with a phenomenal bacterial reduc-
tion. The keeping quality of the treated milk is
excellent and its commercial values otherwise
greatly enhanced. The apparatus is illustrated.

The role of manganese in plants: J. S.
McHarcur. The purpose of this investigation
was to determine if manganese has any definite
function to perform in plant economy. The meth-
od of attack has been the preparation of plant
nutrient compounds and quartz sand, free from
manganese, and the growing of plants in different
portions of nutrient solutions or sand cultures
from which manganese was withheld and in an-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1486

other equal number of portions of these media to
which manganese was added. All the plants were
grown until those that received manganese showed
signs of fructification and a few to maturity. The
plants from which manganese was withheld made
a normal growth for about six weeks only. There-
after they became chlorotic and the young leaves
and buds died back and the plants made no
further growth of any consequence, whereas the
plants to which manganese was available grew in
a normal way and fructified where the plants were
grown to that state of maturity. The author con-
cludes that manganese is necessary in the plant
economy and that, therefore, eleven elements are
necessary for the normal growth of autotrophie
plants, whereas it has been taught previously that
only ten are necessary.

The absorption of water by soil colloids: W. O.
Rosinson. A method is given for determining
the amount of water absorbed by the air-dried
colloid under specified conditions. It was found
that the water absorbed by purified colloids from
thirty-five different soils was nearly a constant,
the average being .298 grams of water absorbed
per. gram of colloid. A tentative method is pro-
posed for determining the amount of colloid in a
soil by finding the amount of water absorbed
and dividing this figure by .298. The assump-
tions involved are discussed.

Division or PHYSICAL AND INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
S. E. Sheppard, chairman
R. E. Wilson, secretary

Theory of the structure and polymorphism of
silica: Ropert B. SosMaAn. There exists a wide
variety of experimental data on the forms of
silica, and particularly on quartz, which have
never been assembled and explained on the basis
of a single consistent set of hypotheses as to the
ultimate structure of this substance. This paper
attempts to provide such a set of hypotheses,
based upon the general knowledge already gained
concerning the structure of matter in general and
silica in particular. It is believed that the silica
atom-triplet maintains a certain degree of indi-
viduality in its amorphous and crystalline states
as well as in its compounds, and the freedom of
its oxygen atoms to change their positions with
respect to the silicons is restricted. The triplets

. are assumed to assemble into chains or threads in

the liquid and glassy states, and a thread struc-
ture persists in the crystalline states (cristobalite,
tridymite, chalcedony, quartz). The high-low or
alpha-beta inversions in all the forms are thought
to be due to the same underlying change, namely,

Juuy 7, 1922]

a change in the shape of the silicon atom and in
the relative positions of the two oxygen atoms
attached to it. j

A general conception of acids, bases and salts:
Hamitton P. Capy and Howarp M. ELSEy.
General definitions are suggested for acids, bases
and salts which it is believed will include all sys-
tems whether containing hydrogen as one of the
constituents of the solvent or not. According to
this view, an acid is defined as a substance which
ionizes to yield the same cation as is given by the
direct ionization of the solvent. A base is a sub-
stance which, by its direct ionization, yields the
same anion as the solvent. General definitions
may be easily derived for salts, neutralization,
hydrolysis and other terms. These definitions are
applied to solutions in sulfur dioxide.

Crystallography and atomic structure: EDGAR
T. Wuerry. Instead of treating crystal struc-
ture from the viewpoint of point-systems, it is
desirable for some purposes to consider the atomic
domains, or spaces, with which each atom acts.
The most important domains which are geomet-
rically possible are figured, and summaries given
of the elements known to possess each. It is held
that in any atom in the erystalline state the elec-
tron arrangement possesses the same symmetry
as the domain within which that atom lies. The
structures on the basis of Langmuir’s synthesis
of earlier theories and of Bury’s modification of it
are compared with the simplest possible structures
reconcilable with the geometrical requirements. It
is thought that in some atoms the two electrons of
the helium nucleus are not stationary, but revolve
so as to produce a spherical external field of
force. From lithium up to calcium the arrange-
ments are simply related to those accepted by
both Langmuir and Bury, but in the elements of
higher number the arrangements suggested by
Langmuir are not capable of passing into those
fulfilling the geometrical requirements as readily
as are those of Bury. The conclusions as to the
simplest structures reconcilable with the domain
symmetry in the cases of most of the elements of
which the domains are known are shown in a
final tabulation.

Liquilibrium in the reduction of iron oxides and
in the oxidation of iron by steam: A. S. RicHarp-
son, . C. Viprans and W. P. Betu. Equilibrium
in the systems H,-H,0-Fe-Fe0, H,-H,0-Fe0-
Fe,0,, CO-CO,-Fe-FeO, and CO-CO,-FeO-Fe,0,,
have been commonly supposed to apply to the
reducing and steaming phases of the steam-iron
process of hydrogen manufacture. The literature
on these equilibria is itself conflicting, but in still

SCIENCE 27

worse agreement with the authors’ observations
on the first stages of both reducing and steaming
the iron contact mass used in hydrogen manufac-
ture. Higher conversion of steam to hydrogen
and higher conversion of reducing gases to ox-
idized gases have been obtained than the equilib-
rium data indicate to be possible.

Solubility measurements on sulfur dioxide:
Stewart J. Lroyp. The solubility of sulfur
dioxide was determined in naphthalene, acetone,
ether, ethylene bromide, butyric acid, ethyl ace-
tate, trichloracetic acid, carbon tetrachloride and
chloroform. Distinct irregularities were observed
with trichloracetie acid, chloroform and carbon
tetrachloride, and a further study of them is
under way.

Eisterification equilibria in the gaseous phase:
GraHamM Epcar and Wm. H. Scuuyier. The
equilibrium in the gaseous phase between acetic
acid, alcohol, ethyl acetate and water has been
measured by distilling a small amount of vapor
from the liquid equilibrium mixture, chilling and
analyzing. The composition of the distillate dif-
fers widely from that of the liquid. Calculations
of the equilibrium constant in the gaseous phase
are complicated by the partial association of the
acetic acid, but indicate a much more complete
esterification than in the liquid phase. The re-
sults are in accord with qualitative results of
Berthelot and Pean de Saint Gilles, and have an
important bearing upon the high yields of ester
obtained by Reid when passing alcohol and acetic
vapor over silica gel.

Partition ratios and solubility numbers: N. E.
Gorpon and E. Emmer Rem. Formie acid has
been partitioned between water and a number of
organic solvents in which the solubility of formic
acid has been determined. From the partition
ratios and the solubilities an attempt has been
made to estimate the tendency of formie acid to
dissolve in water.

The amphoteric ionization of hypochlorous
acid: Witu1aM A, Noyes and THomas A. WILSON.
The ionization constant of hypochlorous acid as
an acid was determined by measuring its conduc-
tivity in 0.001 normal solution and also the con-
ductivity of solutions 0.001 normal for sodium
hypochlorite and for calcium hypochlorite, pre-
pared by mixing a solution of pure hypochlorous
acid with solutions of the respective bases. The
solution of hypochlorous acid was prepared by
distilling, under diminished pressure, chlorine
water in contact with yellow mercurie oxide. The
ionization constant found was between 6.60 and
6.79 10—10, a value somewhat smaller than that

98 SCIENCE

of Sands calculated from entirely different data.
No measurable difference could be found between
the conductivities of 0.001 and 0.0001 normal
nitric acid and the conductivities of solutions
which were 0.001 or 0.0001 normal for both nitric
and hypochlorous acids. In other words, the
ionization of hypochlorous acid as a base, to posi-
tive chlorine and hydroxyl ions, can not be shown
by this method. It was shown by determining
the composition of the vapors carried away from
solutions of pure hypochlorous acid by a current
of air that these contain chlorine monoxide, ClO,
and not hypochlorous acid, HClO. The chlorine
monoxide is evidently formed by the union of posi-
tive chlorine ions with hypochlorite ions, showing
very clearly the amphoteric ionization of the acid.
Jakowkin has shown by the freezing point lower-
ing that solutions of hypochlorous acid contain
chiefly the unionized acid.

The ionization of butyl mercuric hydroxide:
W. V. Evans and Louist Oris. It is generally
stated in the literature that substances of the type
RHgOH are strong bases, but no experimental
data exist. Preliminary conductivity measure-
ments show that butyl mercuric hydroxide is a
weak base. Because of its hygroscopic nature
weighing out samples is unsatisfactory. Ordinary
titration of the base offered difficulties which were
overcome by adding sodium chloride, thus precipi-
tating out butyl mercuric chloride and leaving
NaOH to be titrated. Molecular weight deter-
minations by the freezing point method showed
ionization varying from about 10 per cent. in .1N
solution to about 40 per cent. in .02N. This pre-
liminary study has shown several interesting
properties of the base. A trace of the base in
water changes the surface tension of the water in
such a way that the solution does not wet glass.
A solution of butyl bicarbonate on boiling loses
all of its carbon dioxide, leaving a solution of
the pure base.

Ammono nitric acid: Epwarp C. FRANKLIN.
Assuming a structure represented by the formula

H-N-N-N hydrazoie acid may be looked upon as a
nitric acid of the ammonia system. In agreement
with this view it has been found first, that a mix-
ture of hydrazoie acid and hydrochloric acid dis-
solves the noble metals; second, that sodium oxide
(sodium ammono nitrate) nitridizes sodium
cyanide (sodium ammono carbonite) to sodium
cyanamide (sodium ammono carbonate); third,
that potassium nitrate (potassium aquo nitrate)
may be ammonolyzed to potassium oxide (potas-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

sium ammono nitrate); and fourth, that nitrous
oxide (a mixed acid anhydride acid anammonide)
reacts with potassium hydroxide to form potassium
nitrate.

The drainage error in viscosity measurements
of viscous materials by the capillary tube method:
EucEenE C. BincHamM and H. L. Younc. Tests
with bulbs of 8 to 24 ml capacity show that the
amounts of liquid left on the wall of the bulb
for a given time of efflux are nearly independent
of the size of the bulb, but they are directly in
proportion to the viscosity of the liquid. The
authors have constructed a tube which shows the
drainage correction for any particular viscosity
at the different rates of efflux.

Hydrogen ion concentration and the properties
of the emulsoid colloids: Roprrr H. Bocur. It is
shown that the various physical properties of the
emulsoid colloids, as viscosity, jelly strength,
melting point and joining strength (of glues) are
at a minimum at a hydrogen ion concentration
corresponding to the isoelectric condition. As the
acidity or the alkalinity of the solution is
increased from this point, these properties rise in
value to certain maxima. It is shown that salt
precipitations for gelatin content should be made
at the isoelectric condition if maximum precipi-
tation is desired. The necessity for a careful con-
trol of hydrogen ion concentration in investiga-.
tional work on the emulsoid colloids is empha-
sized, and the desirability of a similar control in
the plant during manufacture is pointed out.
The limitation of benefit from such control makes
questionable, however, the practicability of such
methods for the purpose of the improvement of
grade. The estimation of hydrogen ion concen-
tration as one of the tests in evaluation is urged,
but it is not recommended that all tests for vis-
cosity, jelly strength, etc., be made at a specified
Py Value. f

The elasticity of ash-free gelatin jellies: S. E.
SHEPPARD and 8. 8S. Sweer. In an earlier paper
on ‘‘The elastic properties of gelatin jellies’’ the
authors gave results on the measurement of the
modulus of rigidity of gelatin jellies from com-
mercial gelatins, at various concentrations and
Py values. Certain anomalous results were ob-
tained on variation of p,,. It was suspected later
that these anomalies might depend upon the (inor-
ganic) ash constituents, and elastic measurements
have been repeated on carefully de-ashed gelatin
at various concentrations and p,, values. The new
results show that for this purified gelatin a maxi-
mum of rigidity (jelly-strength) is obtained at

JuLY 7, 1922]

about p,, = 8, at all concentrations; the curves
show a ‘‘shoulder’’ near the isoelectric point
(Py = 4:8) but no definite maximum or minimum.
On adding aluminum salts, to give as low as .01
per cent. Al,O, on dry gelatin, the course of the
curve was greatly altered, a secondary maximum
being produced at p,, = 5, and the maximum on
the alkaline side displaced.

The formation of inorganic jellies: general
theory: Harry B. Weisrr. Factors that influence
the formation of jellies in general are: A jelly
may be expected to form if a suitable amount of
a highly hydrous substance is gotten into colloidal
solution and allowed to precipitate at a suitable
rate without stirring. If the concentration of the
hydrous substance is too low, no jelly or only a
very soft jelly can result. If the precipitation
from colloidal solution is too rapid, contraction
is likely to oecur with the formation of a gel-
atinous precipitate instead of a jelly; if too slow,
the particles are likely to grow and settle out in a
granular or sandy mass. The effect of the pres-
ence of salts on jelly formation is determined by
the agglomerating and stabilizing action of ions,
in so far as these affect the rate of precipitation.

The adsorption and orientation of molecules of
dibasic organic acids and their ethereal salts in
liquid-vapor interfaces: H. H. Kine and R. W.
Wamepter. Adsorption values are given for oxalic,
malonic, succinic, fumaric, maleic and d tartaric
acids and the di-ethyl esters of all the above acids
with the exception of oxalic and maleic. The
values were calculated using Gibbs’ equation.
Hydroxyl groups and double bonded carbons
increase the surface tension, as is shown by the
fact that d tartaric acid has the highest surface
tension, and in order maleic malic to succinic,
which has the lowest. The higher surface tension
of the acids as compared with the esters is due to
their polarity. The influence of the polar groups
in the esters is similar. The esters are adsorbed
more than the acids due to the replacement of the
polar groups with the insoluble ethyl group. The
molecules are orientated so that the polar groups
are in the liquid leaving the carbon chains in the
surface. Tartaric acid is negatively adsorbed,
the surface tension of an 8 M solution being
74.125 and a .125 M solution being practically
that of water.

The atomic weight of lanthanum: B. 8. Hop-
KINS and F. H. Driegs. The lanthanum from
182 kg. of cerium group double sulphates was
purified by fractional crystallization of the double
magnesium nitrates until free from neodymium
followed by fractional crystallization of the

SCIENCE 29

double ammonium nitrates. The are and absorp-
tion spectra of the insoluble end of this series
showed it to be free from all other rare earths.
The material was further purified by eight alter-
nate precipitations with ammonia and oxalic acid.
The pure oxide was converted to the chloride in a
quartz flask with pure dry HCl and weighed. A
nearly equivalent amount of pure silver was
weighed out, dissolved in HNO, and added to the
solution of LaCl,. The deficiency of silver or
chloride was added from a standard solution of
AgNO, and NaCl. Equivalence was tested for
with the nephalometer. From the _ ration,
Lacl, : 3Ag, the atomic weight of La was caleu-
lated. The average of five determinations was
138.91.

Thermo-regulator: E. B. Svrarkry and Nem EH.
Gorpon. A thermo-regulator, designed to meet
the needs of the individual student in physical
chemistry. It has an accuracy to .05° C., and
does not require a relay or battery. Furthermore,
the point of contact is enveloped in an atmos-
phere of inert gas, and hence there is no oxidation
at the point of contact.

The concentrations of alkali halide solutions of
the order of 0.0001 N most favorable to adsorp-
tion by barium sulphate: Jack P. MonrcomeEry.
Each halide was used in concentrations progress-
ing from 0.00004 N to 0.001 N in a series of 50
ce cylinders each containing 0.01546 gram barium
sulphate. The upper half of each solution was
withdrawn for titration with 0.004 N
nitrate.

silver
There was a regular progression of the
volume of silver nitrate required until a certain
concentration of the halide was reached, at which
concentration less than the expected volume was
required. Having passed this concentration the
progression became regular as before. Plotting
the halide adsorbed against the concentration, the
curves are regular except for a dip at the point
showing the most favorable concentration. Favor-
able concentrations are LiCl, 0.00088 N; NaCl,
0.00072 N; KCl, 0.00034 N; RbCl, 0.00014 N;
LiBr, 0.00068 N; NaBr, 0.00056 N; KBr, 0.00016
N; Lil, 0.0001 (?).

The transposition of ‘insoluble oaalates by
sodium carbonate solution: L. J. CurtMan and
D. Harr. Working under the most favorable con-
ditions for the transposition of calcium oxalate by
sodium carbonate solution, it was found that 91
per cent. was transposed. With the oxalates of
barium, strontium, ferric and ferrous iron, alum-
inum, nickel, cobalt, manganese, zine, bismuth,
copper and stannous tin, a transposition of 98 to
100 per cent. was obtained. The oxalates of eal-

30 SCIENCE

cium, magnesium, lead and cadmium were trans-
posed from 91 to 97 per cent. Silver oxalate on
the other hand was transposed only to the extent
of 77 per cent. In determining the amount of
transposition it was necessary to analyze the
insoluble oxalates for their oxalate content. In
this work it was necessary to devise special pro-
cedures wherever the oxalate content could not be
directly determined as in the cases of ferrous,
cobalt, lead and stannous oxalates. These special
procedures are given in the original article.

A new method for the volumetric determination
of iron: L. J. CurtMAN and N. H. Hecut.. In,a
previous communication (Chem. News, CXXII,
1921, p. 254) the authors proposed a rapid method
for roughly estimating the iron in systematic
qualitative analysis. In this method the iron, if
not already in the ferrie condition, is first oxidized,
treated with KCNS and the deep-red Fe(CNS),
which form is bleached with a standard solution
of SnCl,. The results obtained by this method
were so surprisingly accurate that we undertook
a special study of the procedure to determine
whether or not it could be used as a substitute for
the standard volumetric methods for iron. Numer-
ous analyses of iron ores were made by our method
as well as by the Zimmerman-Rheinhart and gravi-
metrie methods. The results agreed very well,
showing the new method to be a reliable one.
The various factors which influence the results by
this method were studied and a suitable apparatus
was devised for preventing the oxidation of the
standard SnCl, solution. Once the apparatus is
set up, our method will be found much more rapid
of execution than any of the old volumetric meth-
ods in which the iron is first reduced and then
oxidized.

Two new pieces of apparatus for use in ana-
lytical work: Louis J. CurrMan. Having experi-
mentally demonstrated that 48 per cent. HF was
without appreciable action on transparent bake-
‘lite, the author had prepared for him from this
material a 10 ce graduate and a medicine dropper.
The former has been found very serviceable in
measuring definite quantities of HF. These
graduates are less brittle than glass, they are non-
inflammable, retain their shape and can be readily
cleaned. They are provided with a flared top to
facilitate pouring the HF from the usual wax
containers in which HF is supplied. The medicine
dropper made of transparent bakelite has been
found superior to the improvised lead tubes which
have heretofore been used in carrying out one of
the best qualitative tests for silica and silicates.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1436

Rapid electrolysis without mechanical stirring:
GraHamM Ep@ar and R. B. Purpum. By the use
of an electrolytic cell consisting of a wide glass
tube provided with three glass ‘‘air lifts’’ sealed
into its side and entering tangentially at their
upper ends, a vigorous stirring, both rotational
and vertical, may be effected by blowing or suck-
ing an air current through the air injectors. With
a cylindrical platinum gauze cathode and a spiral
anode in such a cell, rapid and accurate deter-
minations of copper have been made, using a cur-
rent of as much as three amperes and a time as
low as fifteen minutes. Zine does not interfere.
The apparatus is readily constructed, and the
technique for its use is extremely simple.

The relation of yield valué and mobility to the
so-called painting consistency of paints: HuUGENE
C. BrncHaM and Hersert D. Bruce.

Hydroux oxide IV: Hydrous Stannic Owide:
Harry B. Weiser. The so-called alpha or
stannic acid and beta or metastannic acid are not
isomeric compounds but are the two extremes of
a series of hydrous stannic oxides that differ from
each other in solubility, peptizability, adsorba-
bility, the structure of the mass and the amount
of water contained. Peptization and adsorption
experiments on stannic oxides prepared at various
temperatures show that each is a chemical indi-
vidual and not a mixture of a definite alpha with
a definite beta oxide. Contrary to the usual ob-
servation, stannic oxide jellies may be prepared
by precipitation of the hydrous oxide from col-
loidal solution, under suitable condition.

The interfacial tension between toluol and ash-
free gelatin solutions: S. E. SHEPPARD and S. S.
Sweet. Measurements were made by means of a
drop pipette, the interfacial tension being caleu-
lated from the weight of a drop by Harkin’s
formula, the accuracy being checked by measure-
ments on water. It is found that gelatin lowers
the interfacial tension between water and toluol
considerably, a one per cent. at 30° C. lowers it
some 10 dynes/em, and this increases with the
concentration of gelatin. The interfacial tension
or p,, curve was determined for 1.0 per cent. ash-
free gelatin at 30°, 40° and 50°. Between
Py = 1 and p,, = 10 there is but little variation,
except for a well-marked and significant ‘‘kink’’
at p,, = 4.8, the iso-electric point. At 30° and
40° C. there is but little change with time, but at
50° C. the change is considerable, except at the
iso-electric point, indicating hydrolysis.

The nitration of toluene: JAMES M. BELL.

Cuarues L. Parsons,
Secretary

New SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1437 Fripay, Juty 14, 1922 SineLe Copies, 15 Ors.

Some Notable Blakiston Books

DUFF. A Textbook of Physics

5th Revised Edition. 609 Illustrations. Cloth, $4.00. Prepared by collaboration of a num-
ber of Physicists; Edited by A. Witmer Durr, A. M., Sc.D., Professor of Physics, Wor-
cester Polytechnic Institute.

“Taken as a whole, the parts of the book are well welded together, and, having as authors
specialists in the different departments, it ranks among the best college texts of the day.’—
Science.

PLANCK. Theory of Heat Radiation

Illustrated. Cloth, $3.00. By Max Prancx, Professor Mathematics and Physics, Berlin
University ; Translated by Morton Masts, Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute.

“Planck gives a very clear exposition of his hypothesis of the ‘quantum of action,’ which has
exerted a very profound influence on the recent developments of theoretical physics.”—
American Journal of Science.

ROUGIER. Philosophy and the New Physics

Cloth, $1.75. By Pror. Louis Roucier (Paris); Authorized Translation by Morton Mastus,
Ph.D., Worcester Polytechnic Institute.

“Tt is written in such language that the ordinary high school teacher of physics would be
able to understand. It is worthy of a large sale.”—School Science and Mathematics.

CHAMBERLAIN. Textbook of Organic

Cloth, $4.00. By JosepH ScuppER CHAMBERLAIN, Ph.D., fofessor of Organic” Chemistry,
Massachusetts Agricultural College. [fe \

“The book contains a very large amount of information,{ wal Il etpressqd aAndgwenl Ae i th
—Henry Leffmann, in Journal of Franklin Institute. 5

VA

BROWN. History of Chemistry tonal Muse
2nd Revised Edition. 107 Illustrations. Cloth, $6.00. By J. Camprnett Brown, D.Sc., LL.D.,
Late Professor of Chemistry, University of Liverpocl.

From most ancient to modern times, based upon extensive research into original authorities
including many old and rare treatises.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO. Publishers: Philadelphia

il SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

Just Issued
KOFOID and SWEZY

Mitosis and fission in the active and encysted

phases of Giardia enterica (Grassi) of Man.
50 cents.

Mitosis in Endamoeba dysenteriae in the bone
marrow in Arthritis deformans.

Endamoeba dysenteriae in the lymph glands
of Man in Hodgkin’s disease.
In one cover, 25 cents.

Mitosis in the encysted stages of Endamoeba
coli (Losch). (In press), 30 cents.

University of California Press

Berkeley, California

Research Prize of $1,000

The Ellen Richards Research Prize
is offered for award in the year 1923.
Theses by women based on indepen-
dent laboratory research are eligible
for competition and must reach

the Committee before February 25,
1923.

For circulars of information and
application blank, apply to

DR. LILIAN WELSH,

Goucher College, Baltimore, Maryland

For further information apply to
the Secretary, Mrs. Samuel F. Clarke,
Williamstown, Mass.

PUBLICATIONS OF
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON

CoNTRIBUTIONS TO AMERICAN Economic History:
215A. Johnson, E. R., T. W. Van Metre, G. G.
Huebner, and D. S. Hanchett, with an introduc-
tory note by H. W. Farnam. History of Do-
mestic and Foreign Commerce of the United
States. Octavo. Vol. I. xXv-+363 pages, maps I
to 5. Vol. II. 1x+398 pages, maps 6 to Io.
The first edition having become exhausted, a
second edition has ‘been issued, the two volumes
lin cdlermonecOVetmne cece anne eiice $3.00
2158. Clark, Victor S. History of Manufactures
in the United States, 1607 to 1860. Octavo,
x1I-++675 pages, 7 plates, and 7 text figures, $6.00
215c. History of Transportation in the United
States before 1860. Prepared under the direc-
tion of Balthasar Henry Meyer by Caroline E.
MacGill and a staff of Collaborators. Octavo,
X= O78 paveSsmoieplatesin . sstcie elie -/-lemteee $6.00
RECENTLY ISSUED

309. Smith, Henry Monmouth.
change and Physiological
Level and Grade Walking. Octavo, vi1I+310
pages Teplatesma2imisuines Wn emcee $6.00
320. Castle, W. E. Genetic Studies of Rabits and
Rats. Octavo, 55 pages, 2 plates, 7 figures, $1.00

The publications of the Tnzdtation now AUS | over 450 vol-
umes, the subjects including Anatomy, Archeology, Astronomy,
Botany, Chemistry, Climatology, Economics and Sociology, Em-
bryology, Genetics, Engineering, Folk-Lore, Geology, History, In-
ternational Law, Literature, Mathematics, Medicine, Nutrition,
Paleontology, Philology, Physics, Stereochemistry, Terrestrial Mag-
netism, Zoology. Classified and descriptive lists will be sent post-
paid on application. All communications should be addressed to:

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
WASHINGTON. D. C.

Gaseous Ex-
Requirements for

Publications of
The Philippine Bureau of Science

Vegetation of Philippine Mountains. The rela-
tion between the environment and physical
types at different altitudes. By William H.
Brown. 434 pages, 41 plates, and 30 text
figures; postpaid $2.50, U. S. currency.

Index to the Genera of Birds. By Richard u.
McGregor. 185 pages; postpaid $1.00, U. S.
currency.

Species Blancoanae. A critical revision of the
Philippine species of plants described by
Blanco and by Llanos. By BE. D. Merrill. 424
pages; postpaid $2.25, U. S. currency.

Philippine Water Supplies. By G. W. Heise and
A. S. Behrman. 218 pages, 19 plates; post-
paid $1.75, U. S. currency.

An Interpretation of Rumphius’s Herbarium
Amboinense. By E. D. Merrill. 596 pages, 2
maps; postpaid $3.00, U. S. currency.

The Philippine Journal of Science, a monthly
(no longer issued in sections), per year $5.00,
U. S. currency.

A list of the publications of the Philippine
Bureau of Science and a sample copy of the
Philippine Journal of Science will be sent upon
request.

Subscriptions and orders for publications
should be sent to

THE BUSINESS MANAGER

Philippine Journal of Science
Bureau of Science MANILA, P. L

SCIENC

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices an

proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS

1] Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00. Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the

Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI JuLY 14, 1922 No. 1437
CONTENTS
Education and Exploration by the American
Museum of Natural History.....-.--.2..22-:...0------ 31

The Necessity of Balancing Dietaries with
respect to Vitamines: Dr. H. H. Mircurnn 34
Ansel Augustus Tyler: PRoressor Henry B.
NYE NTIS) Fea tah dL apc ae Neb 37
Scientific Events:
Research Work in Coal Mining; The Optical
Society of America; Additions to the Scien-
tifie Staff of the Field Museum of Natural
History; Honorary Degrees at the Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania.......
Scientific Notes and News....-.........2.-10-ceeeseeo--= 39
University and Educational Notes............-.-.---- 42

Discussion and Correspondence:
Some Simplifications of Microscopical Tech-
nique: Dr. F. M. McFaruanp. Professor
Keyser on Russell’s ‘<The Analysis of
Mind’’: Proressor Mary Wuiron Cat-
KInS. Methods of German Publishers:
Proressor R. C. ARCHIBALD. Russian Sci-
entific Literature: Dr. VERNON KELLOGG.... 43

Quotations :
Physiological Effects at High Altitudes........ 45

Scientific Books:
Books on Natural and Unnatural History:
DE EDAVID)E STARR) MORDAN. Wee SA 46
Special Articles:
The Control and Cure of Parathyroid Tet-
any ir Normal and Pregnant Animals: Dr.
Arno B. LuckHarpt, Pune J. Rosen-
BLOOM. Influence of H-ion on Growth of
Azotobacter: P. L. Gainry and H. W.
BatcHepor. Preliminary Notes on Vauazite
and Paravauxite: SAMUEL G. GORDON........... 48
The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
STS EVAR S ONS 2. 2 SHES AMER theatL e 2iNih 50

EDUCATION AND EXPLORATION
BY THE AMERICAN MUSEUM

THE report of President Henry Fairfield
Osborn, of the American Museum of Natural
History, for the year 1921 is a concise recountal
of the accomplishments of the institution and
records the firm establishment of the policy
inaugurated in 1917—the policy of a broader
and more varied service caleulated to prove of
scientific and educational value, not alone to
the citizens of New York, but also to those of
the entire nation.

The most conspicuous event of the year last
past was a favorable attitude adopted by the
city administration toward this institution—
the decision to begin the construction of addi-
tional wings which have been urgently needed
for more than fifteen years, but which because
of the war and the high cost of building imme-
diately following, it was found impracticable to
start before the current year. At a meeting
of the Board of Estimate and Apportionment,
held on December 26, 1921, the sum of
$1,500,000 was unanimously voted to erect the
southeast wing on Central Park West and the
southeast court building adjacent thereto as
planned in 1875. In providing these additional
halls, the city administration is liberally sup-
porting the public educational activities of the
museum’s work. During the past year the
museum, which serves alike the schools of the
five boroughs, reached 1,500,000 school children,
869 natural history collections were in use
among the elementary schools. This is exclu-
sive of the number of lantern slides distributed
which illustrate the work of the museum in all
parts of the globe and provide the latest ac-
cepted methods of visual instruction in geog-
raphy, zoology, forestry and history, totaling
210,000, or a service of 182 schools. The num-
ber of schools reached outside the museum was
477 in all of the boroughs, and the number of
scholars was 1,247,515. By the methods initi-

a

ated in this museum, the observations and
results of its field workers in Australia, Asia,
South America, Africa, Polynesia and Western
Europe are made acceptable to the use of the
teachers of our public schools in less than
twelve months, and this phase of the museum’s
activities has far outgrown the space capacity
of the insttution to care for it properly. On
a single day as many as 2,500 boys and girls
may be found in the museum preparing for
their examinations. For this purpose adequate
space must be provided. Still greater care is
necessary for the large classes coming for a
day from the outlying sections of the city or
from neighboring cities in New York and New
Jersey, which also are finding the museum in
increasing numbers. To care properly for this
enormous number of school children, a special
school service building has been planned in the
southwest court, to be devoted exclusively to
their use.

On April 21, 1922, the Board of Estimate
and Apportionment of the City of New York
unanimously appropriated $570,000 for the
construction and equipment of the School
Service Building of the American Museum of
Natural History. This action of the city
authorities opens a new period in the history
of the museum’s relation to the schools and is
significant appreciation of what the museum
is doing in bringing nature to the boys and
girls of the city. The work of the museum
with the schools during the last eighteen years
has been carried on with inadequate facilities.
The Department of Public Education, which
has immediate charge of these activities, has
been housed, for the most part, in corridors,
basements and anterooms in various parts of
the present edifice. In fact, under the cireum-
stances, it is surprising that the museum has
attained the position of usefulness that it now
holds in the educational system of the city.

The School Service Building is to be located
in the southwest court of the museum. It will
be a four-story and basement structure, con-
nected by covered bridges in the first and
second floors with the north wing on the east
and the southwest wing on the west. The base-
ment and the first floor will be 160 x 88 feet,
and the second, third and fourth floors will be

32 SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

160 x 53 feet. The height from the basement
to the peak will be 91 feet and the cubical space
approximately 1,000,000 feet. It is estimated
that from 3,000 to 5,000 children may be prop-
erly taken care of daily in the School Service
Building, or from ten to twenty times the num-
ber that the present facilities of the museum
will permit.

How highly the educational service of the
museum is estimated may be inferred from a
reading of the following resolution adopted by
the Board of Superintendents of the Board of
Edueation of New York City on March 27 by
way of endorsement of the application of the
American Museum for funds for the School
Service Building:

Whereas, The American Museum of Natural
History since 1881 has been conducting educa-
tional work with teachers, and since 1904 has
been supplying the public schools of the City of
New York with lectures and with nature-study
material of all kinds, with lantern slides and other
visual education aids in teaching geography, his-
tory and natural science; and

Whereas, The American Museum, entirely at the
expense of the trustees, through its explorations
in all parts of the world, is bringing to New York .
rare ‘and valuable educational specimens which
are made freely available for the use of the teach-
ers of the city; and

Whereas, The museum is lacking in adequate
facilities for receiving the school children who
visit the museum and for housing the administra-
tive work connected with its operation with the
public school system of the city, and has there-
fore made application to the Board of Estimate
and Apportionment for the appropriation of
$570,000 for the erection of a four-story School
Service Building in the southwest court of the
American Museum of Natural History.

Resolved, That the Board of Superintendents
of the Board of Education of the City of New
York desires to record its unreserved approval of
the valuable service which the American Museum
is rendering to the schools of the City of New
York, and heartily indorses the plans of the trus-
tees for making it more thorough and effective
and hereby recommends to the Board of Educa-
tion that it request favorable consideration from
the Board of Estimate and Apportionment of the
museum’s application for funds to erect and
equip the School Service Building.

While the practical side of the school work

JuLY 14, 1922]

of the museum is cared for by the city, the
scientific side is entirely cared for from trus-
tees’ funds. It is interesting to record that
during the past sixteen years the total amount
contributed by the trustees, members and
friends of the museum to the endowment and
to the enrichment of the collections was
$11,871,722. Although the present city gov-
ernment has been more liberal than any of its
predecessors, providing for annual maintenance
the generous sum of $352,025.52, the generosity
of citizens of New York so far exceeds this
provision by the taxpayers that it nearly
doubles it. Thus, for every dollar contributed
by the city from tax funds, the citizen receives
$3.00. The growing appreciation of the mu-
seum by the public is shown by the attendance
which has risen from 613,152 in 1910 to
1,174,397 in 1921. Sunday opening, which was
one of the most warmly debated questions in
the early history of the museum, leading to the
resignation of some of our strict Sabbatarians,
during the year 1921 totaled 327,888, showing
that the museum is sought for wholesome and
inspiring education during the Sunday - after-
noon hours by constantly increasing numbers.
The Sunday attendance during January, 1922,
alone has been 51,062.

Like all other educational and municipal
institutions, the operating cost of the museum
has doubled during the last decade. This
inerease, however, is not due to the increased
number of employees or to extravagance, but to
the necessary increase in salaries and material
required for the proper upkeep. For the year
1921 the museum experienced a deficiency of
$88,249.48, to meet which $56,000 was con-
tributed from the accrued interest on the Mar-
garet Olivia Sage Fund and $32,348.42 was
contributed individually by the trustees. For
the year 1922 the trustees have reluctantly cut
down the work of the museum by the amount
of $81,059.56, and have guaranteed to raise
$40,000 through their personal contributions
and the gifts of members and friends. Real-
izing that this deficiency can only forever be
obviated by increasing the general endowment
fund and that for the immediate future the
sum of $2,000,000 should be raised, the trustees
announced at a meeting of the executive com-

SCIENCE 33

mittee of the board, held on May 20, 1922, that
their efforts to raise $2,000,000 during the
present year by public contributions to its per-
manent endowment fund were receiving united
and generous support from publie spirited citi-
zens, who, after a thorough investigation of the
educational activities of the museum, were con-
vinced of the worthiness of the undertaking.
The initial subscription of $250,000 came
from Mr. George F. Baker, who, in addition to
his previous gifts, now contributes that sum to
the capital fund of the museum, the income
from which is to be at the disposal of the trus-
tees. Closely following Mr. Baker’s gift, Mr.
John D. Rockefeller, Jr., wrote to President
Osborn that he long had felt that the American
Museum of Natural History was an important
factor in the educational and scientific life of
New York City, and that it gave him pleasure
to contribute $1,000,000 toward the permanent
endowment, the income of which was to be
available for any of the current needs of the
museum. Mr. Rockefeller stated that he real-
ized the unwisdom of seeking to forecast the
requirement of the distant future, and was
fully conscious of the dangers attendant upon
the establishment of any endowment fund in
perpetuity and, therefore, it would be agree-
able to him, if in the judgment of the trustees
it was wise, to have the whole or any portion
of the principal of this gift devoted to any of
the corporate purposes of the museum. To
the above sums is to be added the amount re-
ceived from the Eno bequest by which, accord-
ing to the settlement of the contested will, the
museum receives $272,000, of which $200,000
is to. be added to the endowment fund.
Through the generosity of friends and from
museum funds, work in the field has been
undertaken with renewed efforts. The third
Asiati¢e expedition, under the leadership of Roy
C. Andrews, has begun preliminary work in
China and has already forwarded valuable
zoological material. This expedition will be in
the field for five years. Rollo H. Beck, work-
ing under the auspices of the Whitney fund, is
securing thousands of specimens of bird, animal
and plant life from the remote islands of the
South Seas. In Australia, Dr. W. K. Gregory
and Harry C. Raven established most cordial

tieniaiadiatea ae

, Rta
Sth Hy
see! LL aS
Ss GEN
wey “Ly

34 SCIENCE

working relations with the government authori-
ties and as a result the small collections of
fauna of that continent which we now possess
will be greatly enriched. Captain Harold E.
Anthony and George K. Cherrie, on an expedi-
tion to Eeuador, secured 4,000 specimens of
birds and mammals. On this expedition the
little-known country of the head hunting Jivaro
Indians was penetrated, and valuable photo-
graphs secured. In Africa, Carl H. Akeley has
been successful in obtaining a family of five
gorillas. With the photographs and accessories
which this well-known taxidermist, sculptor
and hunter has secured, it will be possible to
complete the finest group extant of these man-
like apes. Entomological work has been car-
ried on by Dr. F. E. Lutz in the Pine Barrens
of New Jersey and Northeastern United States.
Ethnological studies were made in Utah, New
Mexico, California and Peru. By far the most
important work in this field of science has been
made possible through the funds provided by
Mr. Archer M. Huntington for the completion
of a restoration of the ruins at Aztec, New
Mexico. Earl H. Morris, who has this work
in charge, has forwarded highly important
specimens found in these ruins and his observa-
tions will go far toward establishing the eul-
tural area of the early inhabitants of our great
southwest. Mr. Barnum Brown has sent im-
portant paleontological specimens from Egypt,
Abyssinia and India, and Albert Thomson has
continued, with success, work in the fossil fields
of Nebraska. Through exchange and by gift,
as a result of the Neolithic tour in Europe. Pro-
fessor Henry Fairfield Osborn secured collec-
tions enriching our European archeology and
established most agreeable working relations
with eminent scientists of England, Norway,
Sweden, Denmark, Belgium and France, to the
end that new discoveries bearing on the an-
tiquity of man in those countries will at once
be forwarded to the American Museum.

At the beginning of the year the trustees
recommended the grouping of the scientific
work of the museum into four divisions in order
to harmonize the work of the different depart-
ments, and in order to produce greater effi-
ciency and economy for the future harmonious
development of the exhibition halls of the

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

museum.
in effect :

I. Division of Mineralogy, Geology, Paleon-
tology and Paleography: Curator William Diller
Matthew, F.R.S., in charge. Under leadership of
Curator Matthew, Curators Whitlock, Hovey,
Reed, Osborn, Granger and Brown will confer
and cooperate in the development of their respec-
tive subjects and exhibition halls.

Ii. Division of Zoology and Zoogeography:
Curator Frank Michler Chapman, N.A.S., in
charge. This division will include mammals, birds,
reptiles, amphibians, fishes, insects and marine
and terrestrial invertebrates. Curators Andrews,
Anthony, Gregory, Chapman, Murphy, Noble,
Dean, Nichols, Gudger, Lutz and Miner will econ-
fer and cooperate in the development of their
respective lines of exhibition and scientific work.

III. Division of Anthropology: Curator Clark
Wissler, Ph.D., in charge. This division will be
coordinate with the present Department of An-
thropology but will include direction of the Galton
Laboratory and progress of the Galton Society,
also William K. Gregory as representative of
comparative anatomy, J. Howard McGregor in
human anatomy, Honorary Curator Osborn in
geologic relations and prehistory of man.

IV. Division of Education, Books, Publication
and Printing: Curator George H. Sherwood, M.A.,
in charge. This division will include the officers
and chief of the Department of Public Education,
of the library, of Natural History, of the printing
and publication departments, and of public infor-
mation.

Outstanding Publications: The publications of
the American Museum of Natural History for the
year have been the Bulletins, the Memoirs, the
Anthropological Papers, the Novitates, Natural
History, and the Museum Journal.

The following scheme of work is now

THE NECESSITY OF BALANCING
DIETARIES WITH RESPECT
TO VITAMINES

THe fairly recent discovery that small
amounts of unknown substances are necessary
constituents of a complete diet has opened up
a large and evidently attractive field of re-
search. The enthusiasm with which this work
is being prosecuted and the novelty of many
of the results obtained, have apparently led
to the conviction in many quarters that vita-
mines are of great importance in practical

JuLy 14, 1922]

dietetics, and that human dietaries should be
deliberately balanced with respect to these fac-
tors. It may be fairly questioned, however,
whether this attitude is not premature. In-
vestigators in this field should remember that
their experiments are being performed upon
animals chosen particularly because they are
known to be readily susceptible to a deficiency
of this or that vitamine. Pigeons are used
for experimental investigation of the anti-
neuritic vitamine, because they so readily
suecumb to a diet devoid of this factor, and
because the symptoms induced are so character-
istic of the dietary deficiency. Similarly with
guinea pigs and monkeys and the anti-scorbutie
vitamine, and with rats and the growth vita-
mines. It is of great significance that when
other animals are used in these studies, the
results obtained are often not clear cut. When
guinea pigs, rabbits or monkeys are used in
the study of vitamine A, or when rats are used
in the study of vitamine C, inconstant or en
tirely negative results are observed.

It is of course permissible to use animals
known to be highly sensitive to vitamine de-
ficiencies in the study of the relative distri-
Rats
may be used, for example, in determining the
relative concentration of vitamine A in cereal
grains, tubers, green leaves, etc. From the re-
sults obtained it may be coneluded that green
leaves are much richer in the factor than are
cereals, or, if the work is conducted on a quan-
titative basis, that certain green leaves are so
many times richer than a certain cereal seed
in the vitamine. This conclusion would evi-
dently bear no relation to the species of ani-
mal used, but would have a general application
to all animals. However, as is so often done,
if it is concluded that oats or white corn or
potatoes are deficient in vitamine A, the con-
clusion has no general applicability whatever.
It should be rigidly restricted to the rat, which
has been chosen because of its relatively great
requirement for this vitamine. The statement
that a food is deficient in a certain vitamine,
defines a relation between the vitamine content
of the food and the vitamine requirement of
the experimental animal, and hence can not

bution of vitamines in food materials.

SCIENCE 39

with any degree of certainty be applied to
other animals.

In many of the original articles reporting
the results of feeding experiments relative to
the distribution of vitamines in food materials,
this loose interpretation may be found. As a
result certain foods are generally classed as~
being deficient in certain vitamines. We are
told that the cereals and many of their milling
products, white potatoes, white bread, meats,
and animal fats are deficient in vitamine A,
that white bread and milk are deficient in vita-
mine B, and that most dried and preserved
foods are deficient in vitamine C, when the
facts only warrant the statement that they are
relatively poor in these vitamines. For all
that is known to the contrary, the vitamine
contents of these foods may be considerable
in relation to human requirements, and hence in
dietetics they can not be considered deficient
in them in any strict sense of the word. To il-
lustrate the point, meat seems to be distinetly
deficient in yvitamine C for the guinea pig,
since very large amounts of meat or meat ex-
tract in the ration of guinea pigs will not ade-
quately protect them against scurvy. On the
other hand, for human beings, even the rela-
tively low concentration of the vitamine in
meats is still so considerable in relation to
human requirements that a moderate consump-
tion of fresh meats will prevent the outset of
scurvy indefinitely. In human _ experience,
therefore, fresh meats can not be considered
deficient in vitamine C.

In the total lack of quantitative data on the
vitamine requirements of humans, and in the
very general absence of malnutrition or disease
among people in this country which can with
any degree of probability be diagnosed as in-
volving vitamine deficiencies, 1t seems pre-
mature to formulate recommendations for the
balancing of diets with respect to vitamines.
The richness of milk and butter in vitamine
A, for instance, has been made the basis for
an extensive campaign in favor of substituting
these products in the diet for foods not so
rich in this factor. That this vitamine is ever
a limiting factor in human dietaries is ques-
tionable, and any statement to that effect is not

36 SCIENCE

based upon evidence, but upon uncertain anal-
ogy with laboratory animals. That human
dietaries are so frequently deficient in the fat-
soluble vitamine as to warrant general recom-
mendations for an increased consumption of
foods rich in this dietary factor, is a presump-
tion still further removed from fact. The lat-
ter statement may also be made relative to any
of the known vitamines.

In regard to vitamine A in particular, the
fact is sometimes overlooked that this seems
to be a peculiarly growth vitamine, its fune-
tions in the animal body probably being con-
fined largely if not entirely to the period
of active growth. Adult rats have been
maintained in good health for over a year on
rations devoid of this vitamine as judged by
current standards. At the Illinois Agricultural
Experiment Station, four sows have been main-
tained for nearly a year on a ration of white
corn (Silver Mine) and tankage, and have sue-
cessfully raised two litters of pigs each, though
the ration, according to tests on rats, 1s near-
ly if not entirely devoid of vitamine A.

In a recent report on vitamines prepared by
the Medical Research Committee of the (Brit-
ish) National Health Insurance Commission,
the relation of vitamines to the public health
is discussed somewhat fully, and the conelu-
sions reached have been widely circulated in
this country. The tenor of their conclusions is
that “a deficiency in food, which when com-
plete or extreme leads to actual disease, may,
when only relative, be responsible for ill health
of a vague but still important kind,” and in
particular that ‘a deficiency of an accessory
factor (vitamine) may be of a much smaller
order than that necessary to produce the typi-
cal syndrome of the disease usually associated
with the deficiency, but may nevertheless be
sufficient to induce a distinct failure of nutri-
tion and health.’ No criticism can be made of
such hypothetical statements as these, but when
the argument is made to converge upon a defi-
nite proposition that “there is a very real
danger that the improperly balanced dietaries
consumed in many cases may lead to a partial
deficiency of one or more of the necessary sub-
stances (vitamines), if not of other components

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

as well,” one may be pardoned for question-
ing the reality of any such danger. The
reasons for transforming a possibility into a
“very real danger” are not at all obvious. And
yet such a transformation is tacitly involved
in any general recommendation that vitamine
foods should be substituted in the bill of fare
for other food materials less rich in vitamines,
or that vitamine preparations having little
other food value should be regularly consumed.

In the issue of Science for October 28,
McClendon argues for the use of tablets con-
taining vitamines A, B, and C. His plea is
based upon premises of doubtful soundness.
He points out the low content in vitamines of
wheat flour, cane sugar, and hydrogenated fats,
but does not consider the possibility that other
staple articles of food, available the year
round, including dairy products, meats, po-
tatoes, and canned and preserved vegetables
and fruits, may entirely supplement the diet
with respect to vitamines. Nor does he con-
sider that the general consumption of fresh
vegetable foods, rich in vitamines, during the
spring and summer months may result in a
considerable storage of vitamines in the body
which may aid in tiding over a period of low
vitamine intake. The statement made that
“there are many families who do not, under
the present system, receive sufficient vitamines
in their food,’ has no claim to credence, since
it does not seem to be based upon any eyi-
dence whatsoever. Nor is there any particular
reason why it should be assigned any high de-
gree of probability.

The attitude taken in this brief discussion of
the practical bearing of the recently acquired
fund of information relating to vitamines, is
admittedly conservative, though only to the ex-
tent of insisting that the connection between
general conclusions and recommendations on
this matter and experimental or other evidence
should be sufficiently tangible to constitute at
least a fair deduction. At a time when popular
periodicals are widely publishing irresponsible
articles on vitamines, ignorantly or deliberately
creating an entirely distorted popular concep-
tion of them, and when commercial concerns
are widely advertising purely hypothetical ad-

JuLy 14, 1922]

vantages of vitamine preparations, it is par-
ticularly important that investigators in nutri-
tion exert great care in the wording of state-
ments as to the practical significance of vita-
mines in every day life. Otherwise they may
become unwilling accomplices in the perpetra-
tion of a gigantic fraud upon the American

publie. H. H. MircHetu

COLLEGE OF AGRICULTURE,
University or ILLINOIS

ANSEL AUGUSTUS TYLER

Tur sudden death of Professor Tyler of
Millikin University (Decatur) on March 31
from pneumonia has taken from the institution
and the college circle of the state'a quiet and
faithful worker whose place will be hard to fill.

Ansel Augustus Tyler was born at Hast
Bridgewater, Pa., on March 7, 1869. He re-
ceived his A.B. at Lafayette College in 1892,
and won the Ph.D. at Columbia University in
1897. Thereafter he taught botany or biology
for a year each at Union College, Syracuse and
Arizona, with such success that in 1900 he was
called to take charge of this work at Bellevue
College in Omaha. At that date the prospects
before Bellevue were alluring and he threw
himself wholeheartedly into the work of build-
ing up not only his own department but also
the college itself. The high appreciation in
which his efforts were held was manifested by
his election as dean of the college in 1911, a
position which he held as long as he remained
there. But the fortunes of Bellevue suffered
serious reverses and, although Tyler devoted
himself unsparingly to its service, he found
the institution steadily losing ground through
influences which he could not control or mod-
ify. So in 1916 he accepted a call to take
charge of the department of biology at Millikin
University. Here again he was formed to carry
a heavy load of teaching during a transition
period, but a year ago was granted some much
needed aid in his department and had just
started to realize his cherished ambition of de-
veloping that work when his career was so
prematurely terminated.

Tyler’s ability as a college student won him
the Latin salutation on graduation and also

SCIENCE 37

election to Phi Beta Kappa. His later work
brought him in 1898 membership in Sigma Xi.
He was a fellow of the American Association
and a working member of the State Academies
in Nebraska and Illinois. In 1908 he was hon-
ored by election as president of the Nebraska
Academy. Although quiet and retiring in per-
sonality, he was always ready to carry his part
in enterprises of public merit. Thus in 1910
there was organized a movement to secure and
preserve for Omaha a splendid and unique
tract of wild forest near that city. Tyler
served as secretary of this organization, the
Fontanelle Forest Association, until he left
Bellevue, and did much to develop public senti-
ment in favor of the project, which has re-
cently realized much of its hopes through a
generous gift from a public spirited citizen of
Omaha.

But Dr. Tyler’s greatest work was after all
in his department. He inspired many college
generations with his own high ideals of service
and love of the truth. From his class room
went out a steady stream of students filled with
love of science and steadied by his calm and
thoughtful leadership to test the offerings of
life, to reject the hollow and false, and to
cherish the true. Such service to the college
and the state can not be measured in formal
terms but will always be held in grateful re-
membrance by his students and his colleagues,
as well as by the many other friends to whom
he devoted himself equally unselfishly.

Henry B. Warp
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
RESEARCH WORK IN COAL MINING

THROUGH the efforts of the coal operators of
western Pennsylvania, another year of exten-
sive research work in coal mining will be con-
ducted by the cooperative department of mining
engineering of Carnegie Institute of Technology
and the Pittsburgh Experimental Station of the
United States Bureau of Mines. The research
will be carried on through teaching and research
fellowships appointed by the Carnegie Institute
of Technology and supervised by senior inves-
tigators in the Experimental Station.

38 SCIENCE

The establishment of four fellowships to do
this work in 1922 and 1923 is an endorsement
of similar investigations conducted this past
year at these institutions. Four fellowships
were established a year ago by the advisory
board of coal operators of the cooperative de-
partment of mining engineering at the institute.
They also chose the problems for the research
work The Pittsburgh district is the first to
take this progressive step in solving the prob-
lems of coal mining. When the results of the
research work are broadcasted, the whole indus-
try should be benefited.

The investigations of the four research fel-
lows conducted the past year are completed and
reports will soon be available to the coal indus-
try. For the coming year, appointments have
already been made by the cooperative depart-
ment of coal mining to begin the work in Sep-
tember. The problems selected by the advisory
board of operators have been assigned to the
fellows in accordance with their specific train-
ing and adaptability. In making the appoint-
ments, applications were considered from all
parts of the United States, reflecting the wide
interest at large in research work of coal mining
problems.

The four problems to be investigated, as
recommended by the advisory board, are:
(1) De-sulphurization of coke. (2) Corrosion
problem with regard to acid mine waters. (3)
Microscopie study of the Pittsburgh coal seam.
(4) By-product study of the roof coal of the
Pittsburgh coal seam.

The appointments and assignments for
1922-3 are:
Teaching Fellows: John H. Thompson, B.S.

metallurgy, 1922, University of Washington, under
Dr. Alfred R. Powell, physical chemist, of the
United States Bureau of Mines, and V. F. Parry,
B.S. mechanical engineering, 1922, University of
Utah, under Joseph D. Davis, fuels chemist, U. S.
Bureau of Mines.

Research Fellows: J. Richard Adams, B. 8.
physical chemistry, 1922, Cornell University, under
R. J. Anderson, metallurgist, U. S. Bureau of
Mines, and James U. Staud, B. S. geology, 1922,
Pennsylvania State College, under Dr. Reinhardt
Thiessen, research microscopist, U. S. Bureau of
Mines.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

THE OPTICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA

THE seventh annual meeting of the Optical
Society of America will be held at the National
Bureau of Standards, Washington, Thursday,
Friday and Saturday, October 26-28, 1922.
The regular sessions for the reading of papers
will be open to all interested persons.

Members and others desiring to communicate
results of optical research are invited to submit
titles of papers for the program to the-secre-
tary any time before September 25. Titles re-
ceived after that date can not be included in the
program. Address Irwin G. Priest, secretary,
Optical Society of America, care of Bureau of
Standards, Washington, D. C. Each title must
be accompanied by an abstract of not more
than 300 words. These abstracts will be printed
in the program and in the minutes of the meet-
ing. The purpose of the abstract is to give:
(1) a more definite description of the nature
and scope of the paper than can be conveyed
in the title, (2) the essential results in so far as
may be possible in the limited space allowed.
It is hoped that the advance publication of
these abstracts will prepare those attending
the meeting to consider the papers more intelli-
gently and with much greater interest. Authors
are urged to cooperate in this effort by pre-
paring their abstracts carefully with this end in
view. They are also asked to submit with each
abstract a careful estimate of the time which
will be necessary and sufficient to present the
paper briefly but adequately. In preparing the
program the secretary will be guided by these
estimates insofar as time will permit.

No title will be printed to be presented “by
title.’ Titles should not be submitted unless
the author has a bona fide intention to actually
present the paper orally or have it presented
by some one else.

One session will be devoted to vision and
physiologic optics.

An exhibit of optical instruments and ap-
paratus will be held at the Bureau of Standards
in connection with this meeting. Communica-
tions relative to this exhibit should be ad-
dressed to Professor C. A. Skinner, chairman,
exhibit committee, Optical Society of America,
Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C.

JuLY 14, 1922]

The program will be mailed to members
about October 1. Others desiring programs in
advance may obtain them by applying to the
secretary.

Irwin G. PRIEST,
Secretary

ADDITIONS TO THE SCIENTIFIC STAFF OF
THE FIELD MUSEUM OF NATURAL
HISTORY

Tue following additions have been made to
the scientific staff of Field Museum of Natural
History:

Mr. Ralph Linton has been attached to the
staff of the Department of Anthropology with
the rank of assistant curator of North Amer-
ican Ethnology. Mr. Linton received his M.A.
degree from the University of Pennsylvania
and continued his anthropological studies at
Columbia and Harvard Universities. He has
carried on extensive investigations, principally
archeological, in the eastern, central and south-
eastern United States, several reports of which
have been published, as well as in Central
America and Polynesia. Only recently he re-
turned from an expedition to the Marquesas
Islands for ethnological and archeological re-
searches, undertaken under the auspices of the
Bishop Museum of Honolulu, Hawaii, the
results of which will be published shortly by
that museum.

A new division of taxonomy has been created
in the Department of Botany and Mr. J. Fran-
cis Macbride, now in Peru at the head of a
botanical expedition for Field Museum, has
been designated as assistant curator of tax-
onomy. Mr. Macbride is a graduate of the
University of Wyoming of the class of 1914.
Since graduation he has been connected with
the Grey Herbarium of Harvard University.

In the Department of Zoology Dr. C. E. Hell-
mayr, known for his extensive work on neo-
tropical birds, has been appointed associate
curator of birds. Dr. Hellmayr was formerly
connected with the Rothschild Museum at Tring,
England, and more recently has been with the
Museum of the University of Munich. He will
arrive in this country early in September. Mr.
Edmund Heller, former associate of Theodore
Roosevelt, and Myr. John T. Zimmer have re-

SCLENCE 39

cently been appointed assistant curator of
mammals and assistant curator of birds, respec-
tively, and are now engaged in field work in
central Peru, where they will remain until 1923.
Mr. Karl P. Schmidt, formerly with the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History, New York,
has been appointed to the zoological staff as
assistant curator of reptiles and batrachians.

HONORARY DEGREES AT THE UNIVERSITY
OF PENNSYLVANIA

AmonG five honorary degrees awarded by the
University of Pennsylvania at its recent com-
mencement two were doctorates of science. In
conferring the degree on Professor William
Duane Dr. Penniman, the acting provost, said:

Graduate of Pennsylvania with the degree of
bachelor of arts in 1892; afterward a student at
Harvard and at Berlin; research worker in the
Radium Institute of the University of Paris; pro-
fessor of physics at Colorado, and since 1913 at
Harvard; member of the National Academy of
Sciences; John Scott medallist for scientific re-
search; author of numerous important scientific
papers, particularly on radium and related topics.

In conferring the degree of Professor George
A. Piersol Dr. Penniman said:

Beloved by your colleagues and by your stu-
dents. You have recently laid aside the active
duties of the professorship of anatomy in our
School of Medicine, from which in 1877 you were
graduated, and in which for many years you have
been one of the outstanding members of a distin-
guished medical faculty. Learned in your own
field of research, lucid and eloquent as a teacher;
the author of many papers and volumes on anat-
omy, histology and kindred subjects containing
contributions to knowledge.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

AT the annual meeting of the Pacific Division
of the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science held in conjunction with the
summer session of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science, from June 22
to 24, the University of Utah conferred the
honorary degree of doctor of laws on Dr.
Barton Warren Evermann, president of the
Pacifie Division, and director of the Museum
of the California Academy of Sciences and the
new Steinhart Aquarium, now being construct-

40 SCIENCE

ed in Golden Gate Park, San Francisco. On
the same occasion the honorary degree of
doctor of laws was conferred on Dr. James
Harvey Robinson, director of the New School
for Social Research of New York. It is under-
stood that this degree had been conferred pre-
viously by the University of Utah on but six
persons in the seventy-three years’ history of
the university.

Tue degree of doctor of laws has been con-
ferred by Lafayette College on Dr. Alfred
Stengel, professor of medicine in the Univer-
sity of Pennsylvania.

At the eighty-fifth annual commencement
exercises of Marietta College, Dr. Charles E.
Humiston, of Chicago, received the honorary
degree of doctor of science in “recognition of
his efforts to raise the standard of the medical
profession in all parts of the country.”

THE Harvard Chapter of Phi Beta Kappa
has eleeted as honorary members Roland Bur-
rage Dixon, professor of anthropology, and
George Howard Parker, professor of zoology.

Dr. Wiutiam B. Owen, president of the
Chicago Normal College, was elected president
of the National Edueation Association at the
meeting held last week in Boston.

Tur Jenner medal of the Royal Society of
Medicine was presented to Dr. J. C. MeVail
at the annual dinner of the society on July 6.

A PRESENTATION was made on June 6 by pro-
fessional and other friends to Sir John Mac-
pherson, M.D., in recognition of his long and
eminent services devoted to the interests of the
insane. He recently retired from the post of
commissioner of the General Board of Control,
and is about to proceed to Sydney as professor
of psychiatry. The ceremony took place in the
hall of the Royal College of Physicians of Edin-
burgh, with Professor Sir Robert Philip, presi-
dent of the college, in the chair. Lord Pol-
warth made the presentation of a piece of plate
and a check to Sir John Macpherson and a
diamond brooch to Lady Macpherson.

Dr. Peyton Rous, member in pathology and
bacteriology of the Rockefeller Institute for
Medical Research, has been appointed co-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

editor of the Journal of Experimental Medi-
cine.

APPOINTMENTS effective July 1, 1922, at the
New York State Agricultural Experiment Sta-
tion, at Geneva, include the following: Dr.
D. C. Carpenter, formerly assistant professor
of physical chemistry at the University of
Towa, associate in research (chemistry) for
investigations of milk proteins; Dr. W. H.
Rankin, formerly officer-in-charge of the Lab-
oratory of Plant Pathology of the Canadian
Dominion Experimental Farms at St. Cath-
arines, Ontario, associate in research (plant
pathology) for investigations of raspberry
diseases:; Dr. H. HE. Clayton, formerly exten-
sion plant pathologist of Ohio State Univer-
sity, and Mr. Hugh C. Huckett, a graduate
student at Cornell University, plant pathologist
and entomologist, respectively, for the newly
established laboratory for the study of inseet
pests and plant diseases affecting vegetable
crops on Long Island; George L. Slate, assist-
ant in research (horticulture); Walter F. Mor-
ton, assistant chemist.

Dr. T. F. Ascuman, of Pittsburgh, Pa.,
chemist to the Pennsylvania Bureau of Foods,
has been elected chairman of the Board of
Chemists of the bureau, to succeed the late Dr.
William Frear.

Mr. 8. M. Krytner has been recently ap-
pointed manager of the research department of
the Westinghouse Electric and Manufacturing
Company to succeed Mr. C. E. Skinner, who is
now assistant director of engineering.

Mr. C. H. Kipwern, formerly with the
Semet-Solvay Company, Syracuse, N. Y., is
now with Dr. Raymond F. Bacon, who has re-
cently opened a consulting chemical engineer-
ing practice in New York City. ;

Dr. Aaron ARKIN, professor of pathology
and bacteriology in the West Virginia Univer-
sity School of Medicine, has been granted a
year’s leave of absence for study and research
abroad. He will spend the year in Vienna,
Berlin, Paris and London doing work in path-
ology and medicine.

A Brain scientific expedition, led by Pro-
fessor Massart, of Brussels University, will

JuLy 14, 1922]

leave next month for Brazil, where biological,
botanical and zoological research work will be
carried out.

Proressor A. E. Warr, of the department
of botany, Ohio State University, is spending
four months in Europe continuing studies on
economic botany.

At the fifteenth annual meeting of the Amer-
ican and Canadian Section of the International
Association of Medical Museums held recently
in the Army Medical Museum, Washington,
under the presidency of Professor James
Ewing, of Cornell University, the following
officers were elected for the ensuing year: Pres-
ident, Dr. Frank B. Mallory, Boston; vice-
presidents, Drs. Howard T. Karsner, Cleve-
land, Harry Marshall, University, Va., and
Robert A. Lambert, New Haven; secretary-
treasurer, Dr. Maude E. Abbot, Montreal.

Tue Harvard Medical Association held its
triennial dinner on June 16. Dean Edsall
spoke on the progress of the Medical School.
Dr. Francis W. Peabody, professor of medi-
cine, discussed his new work in the department
of clinical investigation at the Boston City
Hospital. Dr. Elliott P. Joslin spoke of the
relations between the Medical School and its
alumni.

THe Harvard Engineering Society held a
dinner in Boston on June 14. Clifford M. Hol-
land, ’05, presided. The speakers included
Dean Hughes, of the Engineering School, and
W. W. Torrey, 719, secretary of the under-
graduate section of the society. Howard E.
Coffin spoke on “Our American air policies
and national defence.”

In connection with the annual general meet-
ing of the Eugenics Education Society a con-
ference on “The inheritance of mental quali-
ties, good and bad,” was held at Burlington
House, London, on July 4. Among the speak-
ers were Dr. Tredgold, Dr. C. H. Bond, Dr.
Bernard Hollander and Mr. R. A. Fisher.

Proressor James G. NeepHam, of Cornell
University, will give a special lecture at the
University of Utah Summer School, on “War,
a biological phenomenon.”

Aw address was delivered on June 7 before

SCIENCE 41

the Medico-Chirurgical Society of Edinburgh,
with Professor Sir Robert Philip in the chair,
by Professor A. Calmette, of the Institut Pas-
teur of Paris, on “The protection of mankind
against tuberculosis.”

A coMMITTEE has been formed in France to
erect by international subscription a monument
in memory of Ives Delage, distinguished for
his work in biology. It is proposed to place
the monument at Roscoff, where Delage was in
charge of the Marine Biological Station.

Frep C. WorKENTHIN, assistant professor of
botany at Iowa State College, Ames, Iowa, died
on June 13, at the age of thirty-two.

Epwarp Hatt NicHots, clinical professor of
surgery in the Medical School of Harvard Uni-
versity, has died at the age of fifty-eight years.
Dr. Nichols was also director of the cancer
laboratory of the Croft Research Fund, Boston.

Wiuu1am Munroe Courts died at his home
in Detroit on June 19, aged eighty years. He
was a well known consulting engineer in mining
and had also made contributions to botany.

Proressor F'ReperIc PerrcivaL TUuTHILL,
chemist, for twenty years connected with the
Brooklyn College of Pharmacy, died on July 2,
aged fifty-four years.

By the will of the late Prince Albert de
Monaco, a million franes is bequeathed to the
Paris Academy of Sciences.

A researcH fellowship of $1,000 for the
study of the chemistry of tubercle bacillus has
been given to Yale University by the National
Tuberculosis Association. The funds will be
used to support research in the subject now
being conducted by Professor Treat B. Johnson
and his associate, Dr. E. B. Brown.

THE National Poultry Council of Great Bri-
tain has been informed by the ministry of agri-
culture that the revised scheme of operation for
the educational and research work of a national
poultry institute has now been approved by
the development commissioners, and that the
treasury will sanction the payment of the prom-
ised grant. The amount of the grant for cap-
ital expenditure is not to exceed £19,500, and
is conditional on a further sum of £6,500 being
provided by the industry, to complete the
£26,000 which, it is estimated, will be required

42 SCIENCE

under this head. As the scheme is to be financed
out of the fund provided under the Corn Pro-
duction Acts, it is understood that the main-
tenance grant (estimated at £6,000 per annum)
is limited to a term of five years, at the end of
which time it will be subject to reconsideration
by the treasury. The starting of this work de-
pends now on the promptitude with which the
contribution from the industry is raised.

A COMMITTEE of representatives of British
governmental departments and British scien-
tific men has recently recommended a compre-
hensive scheme of dealing with inventions by
government workers or by individuals aided or
maintained from public funds. The committee
recommends the organization of an interdepart-
mental patents board. Pending a decision in
each case by this board, all rights in inventions
made by government employees shall belong to
the government. If the inventor can satisfy the
board that he derived no assistance from the
nature of his employment in making the inven-
tion, he shall be entitled to all rights therein.
The question of whether the inventor is entitled
to any reward in addition to the enjoyment of
commercial rights shall be decided by the board.
Where the rights in an invention capable of
commercial exploitation belong to the govern-
ment, the invention shall be exploited commer-
cially for the benefit of the government. <A sys-
tem of awards and merits for the inventor is
proposed, which should be passed upon by an
awards committee, to be organized within the
proposed patents board. These are not intend-
ed as substitutes for commercial profits, but as
a recognition of merit and as an incentive to
government workers.

A PSYCHOLOGICAL test in addition to the reg-
ular examination will be required of all men en-
tering Princeton University. A trial period of
two years has been set for the test. During
this time any man entering who fails to pass
the test, but whose written examinations are
satisfactory, will not be disqualified. If the
faculty committee which has charge of the test
reports favorably at the end of the trial period,
the psychological test will be as essential there-
after as a written examination.

ENGLISH literature leads in popularity as a

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

subject for ‘concentration’ among Harvard
freshmen. Of the 634 freshmen who have filed
with the committee on electives their choice of
subjects for concentration during the rest of
their college course, 175 have selected English.
Economies comes second, with 119; history is
third, with 66; Romance languages fourth, with
59, and chemistry fifth, with 46. The other sub-
jects chosen and the number of freshmen who
are to concentrate in each are as follows: Math-
ematics, 32; government, 26; history and litera-
ture, 25; biology, 24; physics, 14; classics, 13;
fine arts, 11; geology, 6; psychology, 6; phil-
osophy, 4; social ethics, 4; all others, 4.

As reported in Nature, an important con-
tribution to the controversy over the Piltdown
Skull has been made by Professors Elliot Smith
and Hunter at a meeting of the Anatomical
Society, when they exhibited a reconstruction
of the skull and its endocranial cast. The re-
construction has been made by a careful and
minute examination and correlation of the ana-
tomical points of the fragments of the skull.
The result confirms generally the reconstruc-
tions made by Dr. Smith Woodward and Mr.
Pyeraft when first the skull was discovered,
and agrees in showing the remarkable breadth
of the skull and its low capacity, which is, in
each ease, placed below 1,300 ec. This later
reconstruction, however, differs in one import-
ant particular. The occipital fragment assumes
a more vertical position, with the effect that the
skull is brought into closer relation with the
skull of the anthropoids. As a result, the cra-
nium falls into complete harmony with the
chimpanzee-like jaw, and the paradox which
has hitherto been a stumbling-block to the ae-
ceptance of the jaw as indubitably belonging
to the fragments of the cranium now disap-
pears.

Tue Association of Engineers whose members
are former students of the Liége University, on
the oceasion of the seventy-fifth anniversary of
its foundation, held in Liége, from June 11 to
16, an international scientific congress. There
were seven sections, dealing, respectively, with
mining, metallurgy, mechanics, electricity,
chemical industries, civil engineering and ge-
ology, in each of which a number of papers
were read and discussed.

JuLY 14, 1922]

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

By the will of Mrs. Ann M. Swift the Uni-
versity of Chicago and Northwestern University
received a total of $200,000, while the Amer-
ican University of Washington receives $25,000.

Tue Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation states that the sum of $2,500,000 has
been appropriated by the Dominican Order
which controls the University of St. Thomas
College of Medicine, Manila, for the erection
of a new concrete building, in which will be
housed all the colleges of the university, the
laboratories, the dispensary, the libraries, the
hall, the chapel and its offices, leaving the old
building which the university now oceupies in
the Walled City. The site for this new build-
ing will be on the outskirts of Manila. Con-
struction work will be started in a few months.
A university hospital for the practice of the
students of the college of medicine will be
erected on the same site. Dy. José Luis de
Castro is dean of the university.

Dr. A. A. HamerRScHLAG, who has been presi-
dent of Carnegie Institute of Technology,
Pittsburgh, since it was established in 1903, has
resigned, effective on July 1. Dr. Thomas
Stockham Baker, secretary for the past three
years, and formerly director of the Jacob
Tome Institute at Port Deposit, Md., has been
appointed acting president. Dr. Hamerschlag
plans to enter business, with offices in Pitts-
burgh and New York, as adviser and con-
sultant to business organizations.

Dr. Grorce W. Corner, associate professor
of anatomy at the Johns Hopkins Medical
School, has been appointed head of the depart-
ment of anatomy in the new school of medicine
and dentistry now being organized at the Uni-
versity of Rochester, N. Y.

THE appointment is announced of Dr. Edwin
Bramwell to the Monerieff-Arnott chair of clin-
ical medicine at the University of Edinburgh,
in succession to the late Professor Francis D.
Boyd. Dr. Edwin Bramwell is a son of Dr.
Byron Bramwell, the distinguished Edinburgh
physician, and has made his reputation chiefly
in the study of diseases of the nervous system.

Atv the University of Cambridge Mr. F. C.
Bartlett, St. John’s College, has been appoint-

SCIENCE 43

ed reader in experimental psychology and
director of the Psychological Laboratory.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
SOME SIMPLIFICATIONS OF MICRO-
SCOPICAL TECHNIQUE

In handling large classes in histology and
allied biological subjects in which it is desir-
able to supplement loan series of slides by sec-
tions, given out for individual mounting, any
means of shortening or economizing the work
of preparation is usually welcome. During the
past three or four years I have hit upon and
practically tested out a number of such short
cuts which have proven exceedingly valuable.
Others have doubtless used the same or simi-
lar methods, but their worth may justify publi-
cation here.

Among these are first, the substitution of
C. P. Acetone for the usual series of graded
percentages of alcohols for the hydration and
dehydration of sections when staining and
mounting. Each student is provided with three
slide bottles, labelled Nos. 1, 2, and 3, and
containing C. P. Acetone in two and Absolute
Acetone in the third. Through this series the
mounted sections are passed to and from the
stain, before clearing and mounting as usual.
Acetone mixes readily with water and with
alcohol, and the absolute acetone with xylene
or other clearing agents. It is especially valu-
able in applying the various blood stains to
sections, since it does not extract them, nor
affect them in any appreciable manner. It
may also be substituted for absolute alcohol
as a solvent for celloidin when imbedding in
the latter medium. Its high volatility and in-
flammable nature are dangers against which
the student should be explicitly warned.

The second method is the staining of ribbons
of sections without removing the paraffine in
which the material was imbedded. The par-
affine ribbons are cut into convenient lengths,
floated upon warm distilled water in a suitable
dish until flattened, cooled, and then trans-
ferred to the surface of the filtered stain in a
flat dish, upon which they are left floating
until stained. The correct time of staining
can be readily determined by experiment.

44 SCIENCE

From the stain they are transferred by means
of a clean lifter or a glass slide to a dish of
distilled water, rinsed, differentiated if neces-
sary, suitably counterstained in the same man-
ner, rinsed, and finally floated into place upon
the surface of an albumenized slide, dried
thoroughly, cleared and mounted.

The majority of our routine histological
stains may be used in this way, but few, such
as iron haematoxylin, presenting any difficul-
ties. By this method a number of sections of
the same tissue or organ may be stained by
different methods to bring out special struc-
tural features, and then mounted side by side
on the same slide for comparative study. For
example, Haematoxylin and Hosin, Mallory’s
or Van Gieson’s connective tissue stains, and
Para-Carmine combined with Orcein or Wei-
gert’s Resorcin-Fuchsin may be used, and a
section of each mounted together under the
same cover glass. Even the most reluctant
student may thus be brought to a comparative
synthetic study of the structure of an organ.

In routine work large numbers of sections
may be stained by an assistant in a short time,
floated upon distilled water in large dishes,
and issued to a class, ready for mounting, with-
out the large expenditure of time, labor, re-
agents and glassware necessitated by the usual
method of handling individually mounted sec-
tions. If preferred the sections may be issued
directly to the students, and each can readily
perform the staining for himself, using Syra-
cuse watch glasses or similar dishes. The main
points are that the removal of the paraffine
from the section, and the consequent use of al-
bumen or other fixative, xylene, absolute alco-
hol, and the customary series of three to five
percentages of graded alcohols are all unneces-
sary, save in the case of serial sections of con-
siderable extent, and in delicate cytological
work. Finally it is not even necessary to re-
move the paraffine as a final step before mount-
ing in balsam, if the section has been thorough-
ly dried, the surrounding paraffine in such a
mount being entirely invisible, save with a
very narrow diaphragm opening.

F. M. McFarvanp
DEPARTMENT OF ANATOMY,
STANFORD UNIVERSITY, CALIFORNIA

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437
PROFESSOR KEYSER ON RUSSELL’S “THE
ANALYSIS OF MIND”

May a belated reader of Professor Keyser’s
notice, in Sctmncz, November 25, of Bertrand
Russell’s Analysis of Mind dissent from the
implication that the book is written by a man
specifically competent to deal with psychology?
My dissent is not based on the obviously ama-
teur quality of Russell’s psychology, for an
amateur may be a good observer and many of
Russell’s psychological passages have genuine
significance. Nor do I care to stress the rather
eclectic range of Russell’s psychological read-
ing. I am concerned rather with his totally
non-psychological point of view. In this book,
as in all his others, Mr. Russell obviously
treats psychology as handmaid of metaphysics
—a procedure quite as disastrous to scientific
psychology when the metaphysics in question
is neo-realism as when it is, say, Wolffian spir-
itualism. Russell himself declares that he is
“interested in psychology not so much for its
own sake as for the light that it may throw
on the problem of knowledge’’;! and the fact
which his reviewer correctly states, that the
motive of the book is “primarily logical...
that of reconciling two tendencies seemingly”
inconsistent, “the tendency of the behaviorist
to materialize mind and the tendency of mod-
ern physicists to spiritualize matter’—this fact
alone rouses the suspicion of every scientifie-
ally-minded reader. For the competent psy-
chologist writes not in the interest of logical
or metaphysical reconciliations but rather with
the primary intent to record and to order ob-
served phenomena. The reviewer provides us
with many other instances of the author’s
metaphysical manipulations. Russell’s doe-
trine of desire, for example, as “a mere ‘fie-
tion’ like force in dynamics,” may be (in
Keyser’s phrase) “a diabolically ingenious
analysis” but certainly is not a psychological
conception. And assuredly Russell’s agree-
ment with the realists in the thesis that (with
respect to sensations) the world is composed
of a “neutral stuff’ would not by anybody be
regarded as a contribution to psychology.

I am not here concerned to criticize the
argument, or the more plentiful assertions, on
which the metaphysical conclusion of The

1 Analysis of Mind, p. 15.

JULY 14, 1922]

Analysis of Mind is grounded. Yet I can not
forbear to call the interested reader’s attention
to the mortal wound which Russell himself
inflicts upon his argument by his treatment, in
Lecture XII, of belief. He has rested the whole
realistic theory of consciousness as “neutral
stuff” on the denial of the “personal” or “func-
tion” conception of consciousness.? Yet here
he insists that “believing,” a present occur-
rence “in the believer” is “an actual experi-
enced feeling,’’® a personal “attitude.”* Pro-
fessor Keyser, to be sure, might regard this as
one of those “notably frequent public recanta-
tions of experience” which testify to Russell’s
“ceaseless re-examination of seeming certitudes
and ... to an unsurpassed intellectual can-
dor.” But I can not force myself to such a
pitch of liberality. I am willing to grant
Russell the privilege of changing opinion with
every volume, of arguing in 1921 for the neu-
tral monism which in 1914-1915 he so bril-
liantly refuted.© But liberality may be carried
too far, and for my part I protest that nobody,
be he Bertrand Russell himself, shall be at
liberty in the course of a given argument to
recant, publicly or privately, one of the
premises of the argument itself.
Mary WHIToN CALKINS
WELLESLEY COLLEGE

METHODS OF GERMAN PUBLISHERS

Ix Germany the chief publishers of mathe-
matical books and periodicals are Springer,
Teubner, and Vereinigung wissenschaftlicher
Verleger (a combination of the firms: Géschen,
Guttentag, Reimer, Triibner and Veit). They
have decided that for their mathematical pub-
lications of 1922 America shall, in general, be
required to pay at least as much as $2.40 per
100 marks of the price for Germany.

Of Jahrbuch tiber die Fortschritte der Math-
ematik, volume 45, part 3 (conclusion) has not
been published; but part 1 (1920, 12 + 368
pages) and part 2 (1921, 6 + 526 pages) are
sold in Germany for 73 and 190 marks respec-
tively. The corresponding prices for America
are $4.65 and $9.00! Such extortion ought

2 Op. cit., pp. 17 ff.

3 Op. cit., pp. 233 ff.

4 Op. cit., p. 2438.

5 Cf. The Monist, XXIV, XXV, passim.

SCIENCE 45

appreciably to hasten the appearance of an
American abstract journal, the establishment
of which has been already approved by the
National Research Council.

But again, Journal fiir die reine und ange-
wandie Mathematik (Crelle), volume 151
(1920-21), is sold in Germany for 96 marks;
the price to America is $6.00!

The publisher of these two periodicals is
Vereinigung wissenschaftlicher Verleger.

The above facts, obtained from the pub-
lishers themselves on May 26 and May 31, 1922,
will probably suggest to mathematicians the
immediate cancellation of all contemplated
orders for the publications of Vereinigung
wissenschaftlicher Verleger—at least.

R. C. ARCHIBALD

NEWCASTLE-UPON-TYNE,

JUNE 12, 1922

RUSSIAN SCIENTIFIC LITERATURE

Tue officers of the Russian Entomo-Phyto-
pathological Congress sent a request some
months ago to American scientific societies and
investigators to send to Russia literature on
entomological and phytopathological matters.

In connection with this request the Russians
promised to send Russian scientifie literature in
exchange. Certain difficulties, however, have
been found to exist, principal among which is
a regulation by the Soviet government made
about two months ago whieh prohibits the
sending out of literature from Russia without
a special permit. This permit seems very diffi-
cult to get. The Russian scientific men, there-
fore, who have received American scientific
literature in response to their request, feel much
embarrassed by their inability to respond by
sending Russian literature here, and I have
promised to make known, in this way, the facts
which have prevented their promised sending
of Russian literature to those Americans who
have kindly sent scientific papers to them.

VERNON KELLOGG

QUOTATIONS

PHYSIOLOGICAL EFFECTS AT HIGH
ALTITUDES
In the Friday evening discourse delivered at
the Royal Institution last week Mr. Joseph

46 SCIENCE

Barcroft, F.R.S., reader in physiology at the
University of Cambridge, provided some de-
tails of the recent expedition to Peru, to study
physiological effects at high altitudes, supple-
menting the account he gave to the Chelsea
Clinical Society as reported in our columns on
April 22 (p. 648). The observations were car-
ried out in the mining town of Cerro de Pasco,
which is situated in the Andes, at a height of
about 14,000 feet. Mr. Bareroft noted in pass-
ing the curious fact that at 12,000 feet there
were cows which gave milk, and at 13,000 feet
cows which gave little or no milk; this was not
a question of fodder, because fodder was
brought to the animals, and still they gave no
milk. At 15,000 feet there were neither cows
nor milk. Another point of interest was that
fleas disappeared at 11,000 feet, though the
louse accompanied man to a higher region.
The Andes were chosen for this expedition for
two reasons. The less important was that, un-
like the heights on Teneriffe, to which the lec-
turer had previously gone as a member of an
expedition, water was obtainable, by means of
a water tower on the railway, right up to the
level at which the work was done, and water,
of course, was the first essential of the labora-
tory. The second reason was that in this ease,
instead of a mountain solitude, there was a
community which had been acclimatized for
generations to life at these levels. The people
in this region were interesting ethnologically:
they might loosely be called Indians, and their
civilization, such as it was, probably dated back
to before the days of the Incas. Many of them
lived in chimneyless and windowless houses;
they had a purely communal system of govern-
ment, and some of their customs would hardly
appeal to more civilized races. When a native
was very ill, for instance, the date of his funeral
was fixed without reference to his convenience,
and an official saw to it that he was ready to
keep the appointment! It was remarkable
what loads the people were able to earry at
these altitudes. A boy of about 13 would carry
from the interior of a mine a burden of 40
pounds, ascending a staircase with it from a
point 250 feet below, while a full-grown man
would carry a hundred pounds of metal! yet the
European was out of breath if he carried his

[Vox. LVI, No. 1437

coat up a slight incline. Even the native, how-
ever, only accomplishes the work with great
panting and with many intervals for rest.
X-ray photographs of the chests of some of
the natives showed that the ribs started almost
horizontally and went round the chest like the
hoops of a barrel. According to tables of chest
measurements in relation to the length of the
spine, the natives in this region should have a
chest measurement of less than 80 em, whereas
their usual chest measurement was 90 em. The
native who was 5 feet 2 inches in height had a
chest which should belong to a man of 5 feet
11 inches. Mr. Bareroft dealt also with blood
changes. The immediate effect of the ascent
was greatly to increase the number of red blood
corpuscles, and although this excess was some-
what reduced later, the blood of members of
the expedition showed throughout a larger pro-
portion of young blood cells than normal. Com-
parative X-ray photographs showed also that
the heart tended distinctly to become smaller.
Mr. Barcroft closed by appealing for the estab-
lishment of some institute and laboratory which
should continue permanently the study of the
physiological effects at high altitudes——British

Medical Journal.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

BOOKS ON NATURAL AND UNNATURAL
HISTORY

How and Why Stories: JoHN C. BRANNER.
Henry Holt & Co., New York.

Interesting Neighbors: OulveR P. JENKINS.
P. Blakiston’s Son & Co., Philadelphia.

The Earth and Its Life: A. WappINGHAM
SreeRS. World Book Company, Yonkers-on-
Hudson, New York.

I find on my desk three little books of nat-
ural and unnatural history, as different as pos-
sible, one from another, but each wholly admir-
able of its kind. Branner’s How and Why
Stories represent the efforts of wise old negroes
on his father’s plantation in East Tennessee to
account for the ways of common animals as
seen against a Biblical background. The vari-
ous tales are as racy and quite as remarkable
as the Georgia adventures of Brer Rabbit as
related by Joel Chandler Harris. In them,

JuLny 14, 1922]

much as in Paradise Lost, Ole Nick takes the .

part of hero though he stands in the foreground
only when mischief is to be accomplished as
when he paints some of the Good Lawd’s sheep
and men black while the Creator was busy in
the dining room after a hard day’s work. So
“dey come out culled all ’cep’n de pams o’ dey
han’s an’ the bottoms o’ dey feet, an’ de bran’
new sun done make dey hair kinky ’cause it
was so hot. But after all, honey, dey’s all
white on de insides, des lak othah folks, an’
dey chilln dey’s all des de same way.”

The reason “why the snake has no feet”
will interest students of evolution. It appears
that Ole Nick was snooping around the wall
outside the. Garden of Eden, finally boring a
hole through, thereby wearing “about an inch
off de end of his ole tail.”” Through this hole
he coaxed the snake, then a lizard, to thrust
his nose, which Ole Nick seized “an’ he pull so
ha’d dat he scraped all fo’ o’ de snake’s laigs
clean off, an’ he pull an’ stretch his body out
so long dat when he was all thu’ de hole he
look jes’ like a piece of rope.”

The moral attached to each tale is unique.
In this case “dey don’t no good come o’ listen-
ing to de debble. He’s allus ready to promise
you mo’n he can do, and to tell you things he
don’t know nothing about.”

As to the origin of this species of folk-lore,
Dr. Branner says that it can not be traced to
Africa. “It is too clearly under the influence
of Biblical history to have had such an origin.”

In a few trenchant words, Dr. Branner dis-
poses of the idea that negroes were happier in
slavery. It is true that on emancipation “they
were inveigled away from their former homes
and friends and finally left to the winds and
waves of fate like so much flotsam and jetsam
of the war.” Returning at one time to his old
home at Dandridge, he ealled on a beloved and
trusted former slave, “Aunt Ellen.” He found
her “in a state of poverty and wretchedness
that went to his heart.” After discussing her
condition, he asked her: “Don’t you think you
were better off as a slave?”

And this is what Aunt Ellen replied:

“De Lawd bless yo’ soul, chile, dat’s a fac’;
hit’s jes lak you ben a sayin’. I knows I had
mo’ to eat an’ mo’ to wear, an’ a better house

SCIENCE 47

to live in, an’ all o’ dem things, an’ you all was
mighty good to me; an’ I didn’ have none 0’
dese here doctah’s bills to pay. But Law’,
honey, atter all, dah’s de feelin’s!”

“Hrom that day to this I have had no more
to say in favor of human slavery.”

The book is admirably illustrated, the serious
pictures by William S. Atkinson, the zoolog-
ical artist of Stanford, and the cartoons—not
less excellent—by Richard K. Culver, both
former students of Dr. Branner.

In Interesting Neighbors Professor Jenkins
has given a model of what “Nature Studies’
for children should be. Taking familiar ani-
mals, mostly insects, and various wild flowers,
he leads the reader along to the observation
and interpretation of phenomena that ought to
be familiar. Anywhere and everywhere he
finds unexpected adaptations and relations of
cause and effect, for every fact in Nature has
somewhere a cause behind it.

The “Magic House” is the oak-gall, which
sacrifices a leaf to make a safe home for the
babies of the gall-fly, thus secure from depre-
dations of the flycatcher, the tree frog and
predatory insects. Many other insects are
treated in similar fashion, their life histories
accurately described and in such fashion that
children of any age will be interested, and
those not case-hardened will be eager to verify.
And to induce them to do this is the purpose
of this charming book, which will not suffer in
comparison with the works of Fabre. Atkin-
son’s illustrations are admirable.

The Earth and Its Life is a compact record
of the story of Evolution from the lowest Pro-
tozoan up to civilized man. It is written in
simple and interesting fashion and so far as
the limits of space permit, the conclusions
are fairly represented. Little effort is made,
however, to define the factors in organic evo-
lution, the processes in operation day by day,
the knowledge of which gave reality to what
before Lyell and Darwin was merely a philo-
sophical conception. The last seven of the
eighteen chapters are devoted to the evolution
of man, a matter of increasing scientific inter-
est as the caves and gravels of the earth are
becoming more and more fully explored.

Davin Starr JORDAN

48 SCIENCE

Philippine Birds for Boys and Girls: RICHARD
C. McGregor and EuizanptH MARSHALL,
Bureau of Printing, Rene.

Just as I finished the last line above, there
came to my desk another charming book of
nature study written for the children of the
Philippines.

Mr. McGregor (by the way, a former student
of Jenkins, Branner and myself) has been for
years the ornithologist of the Bureau of
Science in the islands and is author of a valu-
able “Manual of Philippine Birds.” In this
small book he gives simple, intelligible life
histories, mostly accompanied by colored plates,
of thirty of the most striking birds of the
region. Among the most notable is the edible-
nest swift (Collocealia germani) with its sin-
gular habit of locking the female in its nest of
glue during incubation. When one nest is
taken for “bird’s nest soup,” it cheerfully builds
another, but, when in a hurry, it mixes sticks
and moss with the glue. Most powerful of the
birds of the islands is the monkey-eating eagle
(Pithecophaga jeffery), the chief enemy of
the monkeys of the Philippine forests. ‘“Hand-
some and cruel, it is large and strong and fear-
less. No other country in all the world has a
monkey-eating eagle. It is our eagle. His
picture would make a good symbol for a flag
or a school banner. It would stand for
strength, industry, courage.”

For such a purpose it might serve even
better than our own bald eagle, “the piratical
parasite on the osprey, otherwise known as the
emblem of the republic” (Elliott Coues).

Davip StTarR JORDAN

SPECIAL ARTICLES
THE CONTROL AND CURE OF PARATHY-
ROID TETANY IN NORMAL AND
PREGNANT ANIMALS
Normal Animals—In our first communica-
tion on this subject! we stated that we could
keep completely parathyroidectomized “dogs
alive indefinitely (at least two months) even
when fed daily on a diet consisting chiefly of
meat” by means of the intravenous injection
of Ringer’s solution. We have confirmed and

1Luckhardt and Rosenbloom: Proc. Soc. Exp.
Biol. and Med., Vol. XIX, No. 3, 1921, p. 129.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1487

extended this work as follows:

1. If this treatment is maintained for about
forty days no further injections are necessary,
especially if

2. The animals are given only a moderate
amount of meat and care is taken that

8. The animals do not become constipated.

After about forty days the animals can be
put on their usual diet containing great quan-
tities of meat without inducing tetany. In one
animal we could induce the severest form of
tetany on the one hundred and twenty-first
day (February 22, 1922) after parathyroid-
ectomy by feeding an excessively large amount
of meat mixed with barium sulphate as a con-
stipating agent. In fact, if this animal became
constipated spontaneously on its usual meat
diet more or less severe parathyroid tetany
attacks would occur.

The freedom from all signs of tetany on a
normal meat diet after treating parathyroid-
ectomized animals for about forty days might
be due

a. To the hypertrophy under treatment of
accessory parathyroid tissue;

b. To the compensatory activity of some .
other organ or organs;

c. To the increased tolerance of the poison
or toxins responsible for the tetany.

d. To the return to functional activity of a
deranged gasterointestinal tract as part of a
general paresis of the sympathetic nervous
system. We have some evidence on the latter
possibility.

At any rate, it is clear that the cause of the
tetany is an exogenous poison or poisons de-
rived chiefly if not entirely from the proteins
(more especially the meat) of the food.

Pregnant Animals—Parathyroid tetany is
notoriously severe and fatal in pregnant ani-
mals. Hight of Carlson’s? fifteen dogs died in
“acute tetany within twelve to twenty-four
hours after parathyroidectomy.” The average
duration of life of ten pregnant animals oper-
ated on by Werelius® was 1.98 days.

We used to date three pregnant animals:
One early after conception; two just before

2 Carlson: Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. and Med., 1913,
Vol. X, pp. 183-184.

3 Werelius: Surg., Gynec. and Obstetrics, Feb-
ruary, 1913, pp. 141-144.

Juty 14, 1922]

term. The first of the series died on the four-
teenth day after parathyroidectomy probably
from a hemothorax. Three hundred and sev-
enty-five ce of almost pure blood were found
in the thoracic cavity of this animal at autopsy.

Of the remaining two pregnant animals one
went into labor four days after parathyroid-
ectomy and gave birth to seven young. This
animal showed slight tetany symptoms twenty-
four hours after operation and again violent
tetany at the time of labor. Three days later
the consumption of an unusually large meal of
meat precipitated a tetanic convulsion involving
the diaphragm. Artificial respiration had to
be given. The tetany was soon controlled by
enemata and intravenous injections of Ringer’s
solution. The animal was kept throughout the
puerperium on a moderate meat and bone diet.
Artificial feeding of the young was resorted to
in part. The latter contracted distemper, the
last two dying from the disease on the twenty-
sixth and twenty-eighth days after birth. The
mother is alive at the time of writing (ninety-
eighth day after parathyroidectomy). She has
received no injections since the fifty-first day.

The other pregnant animal went into labor
on the day of the parathyroidectomy and
within twenty-four hours gave birth to nine
young. Her tetany attacks were unusually
severe and difficult to control. Several of her
young died. Others were given away. Un-
aided she raised four of her young to the stage
of weaning. The last intravenous injection was
given on the fifty-second day after parathyroid-
ectomy. She is alive at the time of writing
and in splendid physical condition (eighty-
seven days after operation).

Our chief conclusions are as follows:

1. By means of the intravenous injection of
Ringer’s solution completely parathyroidecto-
mized animals can not only be kept alive for
a prolonged period of time but if this treatment
is maintained for about forty days they are to
all purposes cured of their tetany.

2. On the basis of further work we find that
normal Ringer’s solution is better than Ca free
Ringer’s solution in controlling parathyroid
tetany.

3. The source of the poison responsible for
the tetany is of exogenous origin (particularly

SCIENCE 49

meat of the diet). One can precipitate an
almost fatal attack of tetany thirty-three days
after parathyroidectomy in two hours by feed-
ing an animal one half pound of meat, espe-
cially if the latter is not fresh.

4. In addition to the intravenous injections
of Ringer’s solution it is important to avoid
constipation by feeding bones and giving soap
suds enemata.

5. Even pregnant dogs can be kept alive.
Instead of dying in tetany within seventy-two
hours after parathyroidectomy they can pass
through pregnancy, labor, and raise their
young. The control and cure of pregnant and
lactating bitches is, however, much more diffi-
cult than in normal, non-pregnant animals.

6. None of the adult animals which have
survived as long as seven months have shown
any signs indicative of myxedema although
both lobes of the thyroid gland were removed
at the time of the parathyroidectomy. They
are in excellent physical condition. The ad-
ministration by mouth of dessicated thyroid
gland in three gram doses every other day for
more than one month did not have the slightest
effect on their general condition and behavior.

7. The young animals born of and raised by
parathyroidectomized mothers never showed
any symptoms even suggestive of tetany.

Arno B. LuckHarpt

Puiuie J. RosenBLoom
HULL PHyYsrIoLoGicaL LaBorarory,
THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

INFLUENCE OF H-ION ON GROWTH OF
AZOTOBACTERI

WHILE studying the influence of the reaction
of the soil solution upon the Azotobacter flora
of soils,? it seemed desirable to ascertain the
influence of the reaction of culture media upon
pure cultures of these organisms. Several
strains of Azotobacter were isolated from dif-
ferent soils and grown in dextrose media of
different hydrogen-ion concentrations. The
maximum hydrogen-ion concentration permit-
ting growth was found to be py 5.9-6.0 for all

1 Contribution No. 49, Department of Bacteri-
ology, Kansas Agricultural Experiment Station.

2P. L. Gainey: Science, N. 8. Vol. 48, pp.
139-140.

50 SCIENCE

strains studied. This is appreciably lower than
that reported (py 6.6-6.8) for two strains by
Fred,’ but agrees very closely with the senior
writer’s findings regarding the maximum hydro-
gen-ion concentration tolerated by these organ-
isms in soils (py 5.9-6.0).4

As the hydrogen-ion concentration of the
medium decreased, growth inereased until
Py 6.1 to 6.4 was reached. Here growth ap-
peared to be quite as vigorous as at lower con-
centrations.

No fixation of nitrogen took place in a
hydrogen-ion concentration greater than py 5.9,
while fixation in concentrations of py 6.3 to 6.5
was as great as in lower concentrations. The
optimum reaction for the fixation of nitrogen
appeared to be very closely associated with the
optimum reaction for growth.

The total quantity of acid produced by the
various cultures was insignificant. The culture
medium employed required only about 0.05
ce N/1 acid per 100 ce to produce a change of
0.1 py in reaction. Even with this low buffer
index only slight changes in the hydrogen-ion
concentration of the medium were produced by
the growth of any strain of the organism. This
would indicate the production of inappreciable
quantities of either acid or basic metabolic
by-products by these organisms.

P. L. GAINEY
H. W. BarcHeLor
Kansas AGRICULTURAL
EXPERIMENT STATION

PRELIMINARY NOTES ON VAUXITE AND
PARAVAUXITE

Amone the mineral specimens collected on
the Vaux-Academy Andean expedition of 1921
are two that have proved to be new. As the
erystallographie work on these will take some
time, the following brief notes are therefore
presented :

VAUXITE

Color: Sky-blue to Venetian-blue (Ridg-
way); streak white. Luster vitreous. Trans-
parent. Form: Aggregates of small crystals

3. B. Fred: Jour. Agr. Res., Vol. 14, pp. 317-
336.

4P. L. Gainey: Jour. Agr. Res., Vol. 14, pp.
265-271.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437
tabular parallel to b (010). Hardness 3.5.
Specifie gravity = 2.45.

Composition: 4 FeO. 2 Al,O,. 3 P,O,. 24
H,O + 3 H,0. ;

Crystal system: Triclinic.

Optical properties: Optically +; « = 1.551;
B = 1.555; y = 1.562; all = .003; y —« =
.001; 2V = 32°; Bx,, emerges on sections par-
allel to b (010). Dispersion considerable g>v.
Strongly pleochroic, colorless to blue.

Occurrence: On wavellite from the tin mines
of Llallagua, Bolivia.

Name: In honor of the well-known amateur
mineralogist, Mr. George Vaux, Jr., of Bryn
Mawr, Pennsylvania. ;

PARAVAUXITE
_ Colorless; streak white. Luster vitreous to
pearly. Transparent. Form: Small prismatic
erystals. Hardness 3. Specific gravity: 2:30.

Composition: FeO. Al,O,. P,O;. 6H,0 +
5H,0. é

Crystal form: Triclinie.
parallel to b (010).

Optical properties: Optically+; « = 1.554;
B = 1.558; y = 1.573; all = .003; y —¢« =
.019; 2V (calculated) 35°. Sections parallel
to b (010) show the emergence of an optic —
axis.

Occurrence :
Bolivia.

Cleavage, perfect

On wavellite from Llallagua,

SaMUEL G. GORDON
ACADEMY OF NATURAL
SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA,
APRIL 15, 1922

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY
(Continued)
SECTION OF CHEMICAL EDUCATION
Edgar F. Smith, chairman
Neil E. Gordon, secretary

First year college chemistry: Witu1amM Mc-
PHERSON.

A first course in general chemistry: WILHELM
Srcerstom. A brief comparison is made of four-
teen of the more modern texts in chemistry suit-
able for secondary schools. The results of a re-
cent text-book survey made by the New England
Association of Chemistry Teachers are given.
The usual custom of starting beginners in chem-

Juny 14, 1922]

istry on gases and gas laws is eriticized. The
belief that the ordinary student can get more
tangible results by starting with more tangible
substances is put forth. A scheme of experimen-
tation, which was tried out at Exeter some years
ago, and which starts the student on some common
metals and leads up through a series of ninety
experiments to a little chemical investigation of
an unknown substance without the use of a con-
ception of atoms, molecules and symbols, is de-
scribed. The scheme was satisfactory from the
point of view of teaching chemistry but had its
limitations for those who must primarily prepare
students for the college entrance examinations. A
possible revision of the College Entrance Exam-
ination Board syllabus is suggested.

First year chemistry for women: Minnir B.
FisHer. Women students who take chemistry as
a cultural subject, or as a prerequisite to home
economics courses, should be taught in separate
groups. They lack background for scientific
work, will devote little time to pure science and
need very careful laboratory direction and super-
vision. Conference periods should be arranged to
clear up difficult points. The utmost accuracy in
observation and recording of facts should be
insisted on. Greatest cultural value is to instill
into students greater respect for truth. Greater
proportion of time should be devoted to study of
chemical history, theory and non-metallic ele-
ments.

Metric system: EUGENE C. BINGHAM. Metric
education has been too largely neglected in the
elementary schools, so we need not only to instruct
our students in its use, but also in the desira-
bility of an extension of the use of the metric
system. Particularly we should give an object
lesson to students by buying apparatus and chem-
icals and selling it in metric quantities.

Methods for presenting first year chemistry:
F, P. VENABLE.

The project method of teaching chemistry:
Nei E. Gorpon. <A project method has been
worked out in the first year chemistry where the
laboratory work and the text work have been
very closely correlated. What the student can
find out and has time to find out is not presented
in the text. Blank spaces are left for inserting
this material by the student, and hence the book
is not complete until the student has done his
part. The method has been found very efficient
in training the student’s power to think, ability
to reason and arousing his curiosity.

Studying chemical engineering by the nae

_ engineering education:

SCIENCE 51

operation method: Dr. W. K. Lewis and Pro-
FESSOR R. T. Hastam. A brief description of the
School of Chemical Engineering Practice of the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology and the
methods employed in teaching chemical engineer-
ing by means of experimental work on full-scale
operating equipment is given. The field of chem-
ical engineering is divided into ‘‘unit-operations,’?
the more important of which are flow of fluids,
flow of heat, evaporation, distillation, drying, fil-
tration, combustion, extraction, electrolysis, etc.,
and these unit-operations are studied quantita-
tively, particular attention being paid to the eff-
ciency of the operation, how this efficiency can be
improved or the losses decreased, and how the
equipment can be changed to get increased pro-
duction. The students in this school design,
carry out and work up the results of these investi-
gations by themselves under suitable guidance
from members of the institute faculty resident at
the plant, who devote their time wholly to work
in the practice school. A description of the quan-
titative tests carried out in the study of these
unit-operations is given, showing the wide scope
and the fundamental character of these plant
investigations.

Standardization of courses in quantitative anal-
ysis for students in chemical engineering: JoHN
L. Danie, A study of the courses given to
chemical engineering students in sixty-nine insti-
tutions shows that the time given to quantitative
analysis laboratory varies from 72 hours as a
minimum to 714 as a maximum. The time given
to recitation work in quantitative varies from
none to 270 hours. There is no suggestion of any
agreement among these schools as to the proper
time to give to quantitative. Teachers of this
subject should confer with a view to standard-
izing the course so that sufficient time would be
given to it to accomplish its aim and purposes
and to avoid devoting an excessive amount of time
to it as this crowds desirable courses out of the
curriculum.

Discussion of committee’s report on chemical
R. H. McKee.

Content of chemistry courses: L. J. DrEsHA.
With a fixed limit to the time available for
instruction in chemistry and an ever-widening
science, the problem of what to omit becomes
fundamental. Courses have grown by simple addi-
tion of the newer developments to the traditional
content, without sufficient attention to consolida-
tion. As a result, the student’s knowledge con-
sists chiefly of isolated facts but poorly knit to-

52 SCIENCE

gether by laws and theories. Reorganization
should start with a clear-cut decision as to just
what we are going to try to teach in the four
years available, the careful selection of the sub-
ject matter best suited to this end and the equally
careful omission of extraneous facts.

Importance and time given for courses in eco-
nomics and industrial management in chemical
engineering training: C. S. WILLIAMSON, JR.

Distribution of time between ‘‘pure’’ and ‘‘ap-
plied’’ science: GRAHAM Ep@ar.

Recent progress at Columbia University:
Marston Taytor Bocert. Certain new ad-
vanced courses in chemistry are now available for
those interested. Statistics are given relating to
the present student body in the department of
chemistry.

Some laboratory helpers: J. N. Swan. The
planning of a chemical building is a fine piece of
research work. Many problems present them-
selves for solution. Attention is here called to
just t +> items as representing different funda-
mental ideas to be kept in mind in planning for
two different things in the same laboratory. In
the matter of locks for desks in the freshman
laboratory the fundamental idea is to save time.
Getting into a desk is wholly a matter of routine;
hence a time saver is worth while. Therefore
compare the time involved with different locks and,
as a secondary matter, expense and trouble to
the institution. In the matter of reagent bottles
it has got into the minds of some that time
saving is the fundamental principle. Not so, they
are teachers. The time of students spent in look-
ing at reagent bottles is well spent; therefore
the bottles should be where they can be seen. The
fundamental principle is to have excellent reagent
bottles where they hold the attention of the stu-
dent. A comparison is then made of varieties of
locks and of reagent bottles.

A chart of the synthetic intermediates: CHAS.
W. Cuno. A chart of the various commercial
intermediates prepared from the distillates of coal
tar, their type syntheses, the relation of these
intermediates to one another, and their relation-
ship to the common dyes of commerce. Three
objects are in view: (1) to give the student in
organic chemistry a bird’s-eye view of this im-
mense field; (2) to aid the manufacturer and
commercial chemist in understanding and covering
his field; (3) to show the research chemist possi-
ble gaps in present syntheses.

Training for agricultural chemistry: W. F.
HAnp.

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1437

Unified chemistry courses: Jack P. Monr-
GOMERY.

Standard tests in science, especially chemistry:
H. A. Wess. Standard tests have become adopted
as a definite method in educational practice. A
standard test may be defined as a method of
measuring quantitatively a pupil’s intelligence or
his achievements in a certain branch of study.
Various workers in the field of science as early
as 1917 began to publish proposed standard tests
in different scientific branches. The different
types of tests and methods suggested up to the
present time were illustrated. It is proposed by
some that a type of quick, rapidly taken test be
substituted for the conventional two or three hour
examination which is so frequently used. The
results obtained with such tests were discussed,
and the advantages and disadvantages set forth.
The use of standard tests in science has not been
widely adopted, for none of them are standardized
in the ordinarily accepted sense of the word, the
whole matter being in a very experimental stage.

Science or athletics? HE. G. Mauin. The steady
increase in extra-curricular activities in our col-
leges is believed to be largely responsible for the
much discussed decline in our standards of scien-
tific education. It is believed also that the ab-
normal development of commercialized intercolle-
giate athletics is the greatest obstacle to restric-
tion of such activities to sane and reasonable
limits. In this paper it is argued that our stand-
ards can not be materially improved until the col-
leges divorce themselves from commercialized ath-
letics, and that this necessarily involves elimina-
tion of the high salaried professional coach and
correction of the disproportion now existing in
expenditures for athletics and for educational
purposes. :

SECTION OF HisToRY OF CHEMISTRY
C. A. Browne, chairman
Lyman C. Newell, Secretary

Dr. Thomas Cooper—A pioneer American chem-
ist: Epa¢ar F. SmirH.

The chemical and scientific achievements of
Father Athanasius Kircher, S. J.: Grorce A.
COYLE.

A book and a battery (Section of Sir Humphry
Davy’s battery and a volume of the complete
works of Davy): J. N. Swan.

An early type of chemical slide rule: Joun A.
Gunton. An improved scale of chemical equiva-
lents, dating from 1828, is described. It was de-
signed by Beck and Henry of Albany as an im-

Juuy 14, 1922]

provement on a scale invented by Wollaston in
1814 and differs from the original in having a
greater number of elements listed and also in the
fact that hydrogen is taken as the radix or unit.
Altogether 36 elements and 144 compounds are
listed on which computations may be based. The
calculation is carried out by means of sliding por-
tion, as in the ordinary slide rule, the slider being
subdivided into divisions representing the log-
arithmie ratios of the numbers from 8 to 330. The
‘equivalent weights’’ as given and the nomen-
clature are interesting from the historical stand-
point.

Reminiscences of Italian
McPHERSON.

A few sources of information upon early chem-
istry and chemical industries in America: C. A.
BROWNE.

Some facts relating to early chemists and chem-
ical industries in Alabama: B. B. Ross.

Some early southern chemists and their work:
EvuGene A. SMITH.

Not much time was taken in the discussion of
the papers, as the program was long without dis-
cussion. There were more than one hundred pres-
ent during at least part of the time the section
was in session, which was probably the largest
attendance of any section at the meeting.

Quite a number of autograph letters, pam-
phlets, pictures and books were shown and some
pieces of apparatus.

chemists: WILLIAM

DIVISION OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
H. T. Clarke, chairman
Frank C. Whitmore, secretary
The preparation of methylmercuric acetate and
methylmercuric hydroxide: M. C. SNEED and
J. Louis Maynarp. During the course of an
investigation of the thermal decomposition of
mercurous acetate in an atmosphere of nitrogen,
the formation of a small quantity of an organic
derivative of mercury was noted. This product
was assumed to be methyl mercuric acetate,
despite the fact that its properties did not agree
with those described by Otto. Doubt was cast on
the purity of his salt prepared by the action of
acetic acid on mercury dimethyl at 120°. Jones
and Werner have shown that, at higher tempera-
tures, a more complicated reaction takes place
with no evidence of the formation of the desired
salt. The true methylmereurie acetate has been
prepared by four reactions, each of a different
type, none of which admits the possibility of the
decomposition of the desired organomercuric salt.

SCIENCE 53

These methods were: (1) Action of mercuric
acetate with mercury dimethyl; (2) Action of
methylmereurie iodide and silver acetate; (3)
Neutralization of methylmercuric hydroxide with
acetic acid; (4) Action of methylmereurie hy-
droxide with ethyl acetate. The same organo-
mereurie salt was formed in each of the above
reactions. It was identical with the mercury
derivative produced in the decomposition of mer-
eurous acetate. The hitherto unprepared methyl-
mercuric hydroxide required in methods 3 and 4
was obtained as a white crystalline solid by the
action of moist silver oxide on methylmercuri¢
iodide.

An electrolytic method for the preparation of
mercury dimethyl: Henry C. Howarp, Jr., and
J. Louis Maynarp. Although mercury dimethyl
has been obtained by Kraus by the electrolysis of
aqueous solutions of methylmercurie salts, the low
conductivity of such solutions renders the process
unsuitable as a means of preparation of the
dialykyl. However, it has been found that the
addition of pyridine in approximately equi-
molecular quantities increases the conductivity to
such an extent that electrolysis becomes a satis-
factory method of preparation. In the course of
this investigation the conductivities of solutions of
methylmereuric hydroxide and several of its salts
were determined. It is interesting to note that
these measurements show methyl mercuric hy-
droxide to be an extremely weak base. This is
contrary to the statements in the literature.

The asymmetry of diazodiethylglutamate: W1L-
tiAM A. Noyes and H. M. Cuites. While Noyes
and Marvel did not succeed in obtaining optically
active diazo esters in which the asymmetry was
due to the carbon atom to which the diazo group
is attached, Levene and Mikesha have reported
the preparation of such a compound from 1/-diethyl
aspartate. We have obtained an active diazo
ester, EtO,C-CH,-CH,-CN,-CO Et, from d-diethy]l
glutamate ‘by the Curtius method. The carefully
purified ester is a yellow oil which boils 92-93°
under a pressure of 0.1 mm. Other optically
active substances which might have been present
were carefully removed and the composition was
established by analysis. The specific rotation at
20° for the D line is +1.68°. The specific rota-
tion in a 10 per cent. ether solution is +4.03°.
The diazo ester, in solution in ether, gives the
d-hydroxy ester on shaking with NH,SO,. Sapon-
ification of the hydroxy ester gives the sodium
salt of a hydroxy acid which is also dextro-
rotatory. It is difficult to reconcile the optical

54 SCIENCE

activity of this diazo compound with the Lewis-
Langmuir theory of the combination of atoms in
“‘non-polar’’ compounds.

Further observations on the nitration of halo-
genated phenols: lL. CHas. RatrorpD and LIANG
Yr Ho. Previous work by Raiford and Heyl has
shown that the method of nitration of brominated
phenols first used by Zincke is suitable for the
bromine and iodine compounds, but that the nitro
radical fails to replace chlorine; and that, fur-
ther, both dibrominated and tribrominated deriva-
tives of ortho and meta eresols may be expected
to give isomeric nitro derivatives. The small
yield (10-12 per cent.) of the para siomeride,
3-bromo-5-nitro-o-eresol, obtained when dibromo-
o-eresol was nitrated in this way raised the ques-
tion as to whether the position taken by the nitro
radical depends more upon the relative position
of the halogen atom or upon its character. To
get data on this point, 3-chloro-5-bromo-o-cresol
and its isomer, 3-bromo-5-chloro-o-cresol, were
nitrated. In each case the bromine was displaced,
giving the isomeric compounds, 3-chloro-5-nitro-o-
eresol and 3-nitro-5-chloro-o-eresol.

New organic selenium compounds: Marston
Taytor Bogert and Y. G. CHEN. By the action
of hydrogen selenide upon acyl anthranilic nitriles,
selenoquinazolones have been prepared and
studied. Derivatives of 2-phenyl benzselenazole
also have been investigated and show some inter-
esting properties.

The synthesis of a thiazole analog of cinchophen
(atphan): Marston Taytor Bogert and EE.
ABRAHAMSON. 2-phenyl benzothiazole is nitrated,
giving the 6-nitro derivative, which is reduced to
the amine, and the latter is then changed to the
corresponding carboxyl compound through the
diazo reaction. Various derivatives and collateral
compounds were prepared. The position of the
nitro group was proved by decomposition of the
amine and by its conversion to the- benzobis
thiazole.

Hydrocyanice acid: an ammono carbonous acid
and an emmono formaldehyde: EDWARD C. FRANK-
LIN. From a purely formal point of view HNC
represents hydrocyanie acid as an ammono ear-
bonous acid, while the nitrile formula represents
it simultaneously as an ammono formaldehyde and
as formic ammonid. Sodium ammono carbonite
may be nitridized to an ammono carbonate by a
considerable number of methods, as, for example,
by the action of sodium ammono nitrate and of
cyanogen as _ represented~ by the

equations,
NaNC + NaNa = NCNNa,

+ N; and

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

NaNC + CN, = NaN(CN), + C. As an am-
mono aldehyde, hydrocyanie acid undergoes poly-
merization and condensation, forms addition com-
pounds with bisulfites, ammonia, water and alco-
hol, reacts with hydroxylamine, hydrazine and
phenylhydrazine, and is reducible to an ammono
alcohol.

A study of the optimum condition for the
formation of the Grignard reagent: HENRY GIL-
MAN and CHas. H. Meyers. Two satisfactory
methods for the estimation of the Grignard re-
agent are being used. One involves titration with
standard acid and the other the measurement of
gas evolved when the reagent is decomposed by
water. The study concerns those ordinary factors
affecting the yield: rate of addition of RX, con-
centration of reagents, kind of magnesium, cool-
ing during formation, refluxing after formation,
stirring, kind of air protection (calcium chloride,
soda lime, ete.), catalysts, etc. This preliminary
report is on ethyl magnesium iodide.

The reaction between thionyl aniline and the
Grignard reagent: HENRY GILMAN and Harry L.
Morris. In connection with a series of studies
on the mode of reaction of the Grignard reagent
with compounds having more than one reactive
grouping, thionyl aniline (C,H _N=S=O) has
been treated with several RMgX compounds.
Phenyl magnesium bromide gives a good yield of
the anilide of benezen sulfinie acid. Excess of
the Grignard reagent gives the same compound.
Up to the present no success has attended attempts
to determine the mechanism of the reaction—the
—MgX may have added either to the nitrogen or
to the oxygen.

Arsenated heterocyclic compounds prepared
from 3,4-diaminophenyl arsonic acid (amino
arsanilic acid): W. LEE Lrwis and R. 8. Buy.
The great reactivity of the ortho-diamines with a
great variety of substances yielding quinoxalines,
azimides, piafthioles, imidazoles, etc., suggested
the easily available amino arsanilic acid as a
fruitful starting point for new organic arsenicals.
3,4-diaminophenyl arsonie acid is made by nitra-
ting oxalyl p-arsanilie acid and reducing the nitro
compound with ferrous chloride and ammonia.
Thus far this compound has been condensed with
benzil, oxalie acid, pyruvic acid, maltosone yield-
ing the following: 2,3-diphenyl-quinoxaline-6-
arsonie acid, 2, 3-diketoquinoxaline-6-arsonic acid,
2-methyl-3-hydroxy-quinoxaline-6-arsonic acid, and
3-(glucosido-erythrityl) -quinoxaline-6-arsonic acid.

Derivatives of the beta-chloro-vinyl arsines:
W. Lee Lewis and H. W. Stizcuer. The chloro-

Juny 14, 1922]

vinyl arsines were prepared by the action of
acetylene upon arsenic chloride in the presence of
aluminum chloride and were separated by frac-
tionation under reduced pressure. The following
derivatives were prepared: Beta-chloro-vinyl arse-
nious oxide, beta-chloro-vinyl arsonic acid, beta-
chloro-vinyl di-iodo arsine, beta-chloro-vinyl bi-
bromo arsine, hydrated bis-beta-chloro-vinyl ar-
senie acid, bis-beta-chloro-vinyl arsenious sulfide
and bis-beta-chloro-vinyl arsenious oxide.

Chemical and crystallographic notes on the acid
phthalates: FRANcIs D. Dopez. The use of potas-
sium acid phthalate as ultimate standard in alka-
limetry was suggested by the writer in 1915. This
salt and the corresponding salts of sodium, am-
monium, lithium and magnesium have since been
more carefully examined. Acid salts of the
formula, 2MHC.H,O,.C,H.0O, (M = K, NH),
were also observed. The acid phthalates erystal-
lize remarkably well, and invited further study.
The potassium, sodium, ammonium and lithium
salts have been measured. The potassium and
ammonium salts are isomorphous, and also show
an interesting isomorphism with the corresponding
salts of ortho-sulfo-benzoic acid. The rubidium
and cesium salts were also prepared, and appear
to belong to the same isomorphous group. In
optical properties, the crystals of the potassium
and lithium acid phthalates proved interesting, as
they exhibit crossed axial plane dispersion toward
the violet end of the spectrum. The same variety
of dispersion is also very well shown by the mixed

erystals of potassium and rubidium acid phthal-
ates.

The occurrence of formic acid in essential oils:
Francis D. Dope. <A erystalline sediment which
had been deposited in a zine lined container of
oil of geranium was found to be zine formate,
and its occurrence was explained by the presence
of formic acid in the oil. This acid, in ecombina-
tion with the alcoholic compounds as esters, is
apparently a normal constituent of the oil, the
amount of ester, calculated as geraniol formate,
ranging from 9 to 13 per cent. A method was
devised for the determination of the acid in oils,
and a number of the latter were examined. The
relatively large amount of formie ester found in
oil of geranium seems to be characteristic, and
the determination may be of service in the tech-
nical valuation of the oil.

Catalytic reduction of the C=N complex:
DeWirr Nercupors, 8S. M. Cuarx, J. E. MiIuer,
A. L. Foster and J. R. Batmry. Lochte and
Bailey have recently applied the catalytic method
employing colloidal platinum to the reduction of

SCIENCE 55

dimethylketazine, Me,C—N—N—CMe,. This
reaction has been successfully applied to the re-
duction of acetone semicarbazone to i-propylsemi-
carbazide, of menthone semicarbazone to menthyl-
semicarbazide, of camphor semicarbone to bornyl-
semicarbazide, and of acetaldehydephenylhydra-
zone to phenyl hydrazoethyl. The investigation of
i-propylsemicarbazide has been completed. Among
the salts prepared are the hydrochloride and the
oxalate. Other derivatives made are the nitroso
and benzoyl compounds. The latter with caustic
soda yields the corresponding i-propylphenyl-
hydroxytriazole. With 80 per cent. H,SO,
i-propylsemicarbazide hydrolyzes to i-propylhydra-
zine, previously obtained by Lochte in the redue-
tion of acetone hydrazone. Oxidation of the semi-
carbazide with permanganate in either acid or
alkaline solution gives 2-carbonamidoazopropane,
NH,—CO—N—N—CHMe,, along with acetone
semicarbazone. The azo compound readily under-
goes rearrangement to the hydrazone.

The preparation of mono- and parabromacctal-
dehyde and their application to synthetic work wn
cellulose chemistry: HAroLp Hipperv and HaroLp
S. Hitu. These substances have been prepared
in a state of purity and have been applied to the
synthesis of a variety of substances closely related
to the polysaccharides.

The electrolytic reduction of crotonaldehyde:
Haroip Hispert and RoLaAnp R. Reap.
lead cathode, the principal product is an unsat-
urated eyclic aldehyde, apparently 4-aldehydo-2, 3-
dimethyl-2, 3-dihydro-R-pentene (cyclopentadiene).
The authors discuss the mechanism of this redue-
tion and see in it valuable evidence for Nef’s
vinyl alcohol theory of the aldol condensation.

Preparation and properties of 1-mercaptobenzo-
thiazole and its derivatives: L. B. SEBRELL and
C. E. Boorp. The preparation of this substance
from thiocarbanilide and sulfur, from aniline,
carbon disulfide and sulfur, and from both the
zine and ammonium salts of phenyldithiocarbamic
acid and sulfur were carefully studied and com-
pared as to yield, purity of product, etc. This
work was extended to the methyl derivatives of
1-mereaptobenzothiazole, heretofore unknown, and
their preparation and properties described.

Absorption spectra of phenylazophenol and its
derivatives in the visible region: C. S. ADAMS and
C. E. Boorp. The absorption spectra of azoben-
zene, phenylazophenol, and the substitution prod-
ucts of phenylazophenol were studied in both aleo-
holic and alkaline solutions. The shift in the
absorption band due to position isomerism, varia-
tion in the dye concentration, changes in the

Using a

56 SCIENCE

solvent, changes in the nature and concentration
of the alkalies used were carefully noted and the
results recorded as extinction curves. The work
includes the methyl, chloro, bromo, iodo, nitro
and hydroxy derivatives.

The condensation of primary aromatic arsines
with aldehydes: C. S. PALMER and RoGER ADAMS.
It has been found that primary aromatic arsines
react with aldehydes in three ways, depending
on the condition. These may be illustrated
by the equations: (1) RAsH, + 2H-CH =
RAs(CHOHR),; (2) 2RAsH, + 4R-CHO —

O-CH-R
RAS. A R 2R-CH,OH; (3) 2RAsH

x és sk + 2RCH, 3 (3) 2RAs ais

R-CH-O
2R-CHO = R-As=As-R + 2R-CH,OH. The first
reaction proceeds by treating the arsine with the
aldehyde at. room temperature with a little con-
centrated hydrochloric acid as a catalyst. The
products are high-boiling oils, or in the aromatic
series, solids. They are stable to water, alkalies,
and cold dilute acids; they oxidize readily to
give the aryl arsonie acids and aldehyde; they
react with many other reagents as though they
consisted of a mixture of the aldehyde and the
arsine; they form addition products with chloro-
platinie acid. The second reaction proceeds by
treating the arsines and aldehydes with anhydrous
hydrogen chloride, or by treating the compounds
obtained by reaction (1) with hydrogen chloride,
acetyl chloride, or acetic anhydride. Alcohol is
evolved and 1,4,3,6-dioxdiarsines are produced
having the structure given above in equation (2).
These products do not form when aromatic alde-
hydes are used. The third reaction proceeds by
heating the arsine with the aldehyde at a high
temperature with or without hydrochloric acid or
at a low temperature without hydrochloric acid.

Organomercury compounds formed from salicyl-
aldehyde and its nitro derivatives: EDMUND
Burrus Mippirron with Frank C. WHITMORE.
Calicylaldehyde, since it is not readily oxidized
and contains a phenolic hydroxyl, can be mer-
curated with mercuric acetate. The principal
product is 3, 5-diacetoxymercuri-salicylaldehyde.
Using an excess of the aldehyde in water solution
gives a mono-acetoxymercuri-salicylaldehyde,
although the chief product is still the dimercurated
compound. 3-nitro- and 5-nitro-salicylaldehyde
react with mercuric acetate in alcohol to give
mono-mercurated products. The sodium salts of
these compounds are highly colored and soluble.
Oxidation changes the mercurated aldehydes to

[Vou. LVI, No. 1437

the corresponding acids. The mercurated alde-
hydes have been condensed with the following
amines: aniline, p-toluidine, anthranilie acid and
p-aminobenzoie acid. The mercurated salicyl-
aldehydes are decomposed by aqueous inorganic
iodides giving inorganic mercury compounds,
alkali and the unmercurated aldehydes.

Organomercury compounds formed from ben-
zenesulfonic and benzylsulfonic acids: FRANK C.
WeHiTMorE and Louis EHRENFELD. Benzene-
sulfonic acid in aqueous solution dissolves mer-
curie oxide readily. Evaporation of the resulting
solution does not give the expected mercuric salt.
All the mercury is then attached to carbon, the
product apparently being a-mixture of at least
two organic mercury compounds. Benzylsulfonic
acid dissolves mercuric oxide and changes to an
organic mercury compound even on gentle warm-
ing. The product contains only one substance.
The position of the mercury is to be determined.
The remarkable ease of mercuration of these sul-
fonic acids is without parallel among aromatic
compounds which contain no ‘‘activating group’’
such as —OH or —NH_,.. Preliminary report.

Mass action in the preparation of compounds of
urea with acids and salts: Jack P. MONTGOMERY.

Mononitro derivatives of the benzoic acid esters
of the trihalogen tertiary butyl alcohols. T. B. °
Aupricu and JuLia E. BuaNNER. Through the
interaction of o-, m-, and p-nitrobenzoyl chlorides
and trichloro tertiary butyl alcohol and tribromo
tertiary butyl alcohol, the six possible esters have
been prepared. Nitration of the benzoic ester of
trichloro tertiary butyl alcohol gives a nitro ester
which is identical with the product obtained from
m-nitrobenzoyl chloride. The nitro esters erystal-
lize from alcohol in the form of colorless plates
or needles. They are insoluble in water, but
readily soluble in organic solvents; are not readily
saponified; are practically odorless and tasteless;
and ean be reduced to amino compounds. They
are not as active physiologically as the alcohols
from which they are prepared. Possibly this is
due to their insolubility.

Some reaction products of malonic ester and
cyclohexane derivatives: E. C. KENDALL and A. E.
OsTERBERG. Cyclohexane ethoxyglyeol was pre-
pared from ortho-chloro-cyclohexanol and sodium
ethylate in alcohol. This substance heated with
malonie ester replaces one or both ethyl groups
according to conditions. The disubstituted product
heated with malonice ester gives the monosubsti-
tuted compound. Ortho-amino-cyclohexanol reacts

JULY 7, 1922]

with malonic ester with either. one or both groups.
The amino group is first substituted. The
methylene hydrogen atoms of the malonie residue
in this compound are easily replaced by chlorine.
Sodium ethylate and alcohol react with this to
form ‘‘dichloracetyl of ortho-amino-cyclohex-
anol.’’ The reaction product between amino-
eyclohexanol and malonie ester in which both
groups react with the ester at a high temperature
reacts in such a manner that two molecules
combine with an acetal linkage.

The alkylation of aniline: A. B. Brown and
HE. EMMer Rei. Mixtures of aniline vapor with
methyl, ethyl, propyl and butyl alcohols have been
passed over special silica gel at from 300 to 450°.
This substance is an efficient catalyst for this
reaction, though its activity falls off with time.
In all cases the product is chiefly the monoalkyl
derivative. The optimum temperature is from 365
to 395°. At the start 43 to 51 per cent. of alkyl
anilines are produced with one equivalent of the
alcohol and 68 to 70 per cent. with two equiva-
lents, except in the case of butyl alcohol, where an
excess is of little advantage.

The amination of alcohols: A. B. Brown and
E. Emer Rew. An extensive study has been
made of the conversion of methyl, ethyl, propyl
and butyl alcohols into the corresponding amines
by passing their vapors mixed with ammonia over
various catalysts at different temperatures up to
500°. The optimum temperatures and percentages
of the primary, secondary and tertiary amines
formed haye been determined for the different
catalysts. The best catalyst so far found is a
specially prepared silica gel.

The alkylation of benzene: T. M. Berry and
E. Emuur Rew. Continuing the work of Milligan
and Reid, a more thorough study has been made of
the alkylation of benzene by ethylene and pro-
pylene in the presence of aluminum chloride. The
proportion of the alkylated benzenes in the two
layers has been specifically investigated. It has
been found that the higher alkylated benzenes, ex-
cept the hexa-, are concentrated in the lower layer,
which also contains almost all of the aluminum
chloride. The absorption of propylene is relatively
slow but continues till the tetra- product, at least,
is formed.

Ditolyl ketene: Henry GinMan and CHESTER
E. Apams. Several unsuccessful attempts have
been made by others to synthesize this ketene.
Azitolil, prepared by the oxidation of mono-
hydrazi tolil, loses nitrogen when heated in ben-
zene at 75 to 80° C., rearranging to the desired
ketene. In addition to its general interest as a

SCIENCE 5T

new type it is being used in connection with an-
other study.

The effect of an ‘‘iso’’ grouping on the melting
and boiling points of organic compounds belong-
ing to various classes: F B. Fuck, H. M. Craw-
ForD, R. Hoyte and H. Ginman. In connection
with some work on the structure of tetra-tolyl
ethylene, a substance with an apparently ‘‘ab-
normal?’ melting point, a regularity in the boiling
points of ethylenic hydrocarbons having an ‘‘iso’’
group was observed. The study extended to other
classes of compounds having an ‘‘iso’? grouping
revealed certain regularities, some of which might
have been forecasted.

Physiological action and chemical constitution:
the replacement of the benzoyl by related acyl
groups: Henry GILMAN and RussELL M. Pick-
ENS. A number of organie acids, aromatie and
aliphatie, are related in different ways to benzoic
acid. The physiological behavior (the present
study concerns local anesthetics) of derivatives of
these acids is being compared. The diethylamino-
ethyl and the benzyl esters of pyromucic, furyl
aerylie and alpha-thienoie acids are described.

Arsenated benzanilide and its derivatives:
W. Lre Lewis and C. 8. Haminron. — Dichloro-
p-arsinobenzoyl chloride was prepared according
to the method of Lewis and Cheetham and con-
densed with various amines. With aniline there
resulted p-arsonobenzanilide which, on reduction,
gave p-arseno-benzanilide. Similarly there were
made p-arsono-benzanthranilide and -anisidide and
the arseno derivative of the latter. Further deriy-
atives prepared are the following: p-arsono-
benzoyl-p-phenetidide, its arseno derivative, di-
iodo-p-arsino-benzoyl-p-phenetidide, p-arseno-ben-
zoyl-p-xylidide, p-arseno-benzoyl-alpha-naphthyl-
amide, and p-arsonoso-benzoyl-arganilide.

Arsenated benzophenone and its derivatives:
W. Les Lewis and H. C. CHrrrHam. A previous
paper by the authors dealt with the condensation
of di-chloro-p-arsinobenzoyl chloride with aro-
matie hydrocarbons and pheayl ethers in the pres-
ence of anhydrous aluminum chloride. In the
present paper the work has been extended to
include the preparation of the following: aceto-
phenone-p-arsonie acid, o-carboxyphenyl arsonie
acid, dichloro-o-arsinobenzoyl chloride, 4-methyl-
benzophenone-2’-arsonic acid, 4-ethoxy-benzo-
phenone-2’-arsonie acid, 4, 4’-dibenzoyl-arseno-
benzene, 4-methoxy-benzophenone-2'-arsonic acid,
4-methoxy-benzophenone-2’-arsenous acid, 4-ethoxy-
benzophenone-2/-dibromo-arsine, 4-methoxy-benzo-
phenone-2’-dichloro-arsine, 4-methoxy-benzophen-
one-2’-diiodo-arsine, 4-ethoxy-benzophenone-2'-di-

58 SCIENCE

jodo-arsine, 4-methoxy-benzophenone-4’-dibromo-
arsine, 4-methoxy-benzophenone-4'-diiodo-arsine,
and 4-methoxy-benzophenone-4/-arsinie (acid )-
acetic acid.

Application of the chloroethers for the prepara-
tion of some new derivatives of diethyl malonate
and barbituric acid: ArtHurR J. Hitt and
DrWirr T. Kreacu. The present investigations
are preliminary to an extended study of the hyp-
notie effects produced by the introduction of vari-
ous ether rests in the 5 position in barbituric
acid (the methylene grouping). To this end
chloromethyl ethyl ether and chloromethyl methyl
ether have been combined with the sodium salts
of diethyl malonate and ethyl diethyl malonate,
suspended in anhydrous ether. The following
esters have been thereby obtained: Di (ethoxy-
methyl) diethyl malonate, ethyl-ethoxymethyl
diethyl malonate, and ethyl-methoxymethy1 diethyl
malonate. These derivatives of malonic ester
interact smoothly with urea in the presence of
alcoholic sodium ethylate, giving respectively:
5,5-di (ethoxymethyl) barbiturie acid, 5, 5-ethyl-
ethoxymethyl barbituric acid, and 5, 5-ethyl
methoxymethyl barbituric acid.

DIVISION OF RUBBER CHEMISTRY
C. W. Bedford, chairman
Arnold H. Smith, secretary

The internal mixer as a factory unit: R. P.
Dinsmorr. The study of the internal type of
rubber mixer in factory production has revealed
two defects. The ratio of cooling surface to vol-
ume of stock is so much less in such a mixer
than on a mill and the working is so much more
rapid that the temperature of the batch rises rap-
idly, and in most tire stocks it is impractical to
add sulphur before the batch is taken out of the
mixer. Also, these- mixers require considerable
batching-out equipment in order to sheet out the
finished stock thin enough so that it will cool in
a teasonably short time. The time for batching-
out does not vary greatly, and it is difficult to
balance mixing equipment with batching-out
equipment. The advantages to be gained from
the internal mixer are lower mixing costs, greater
freedom from the dust nuisance and lighter work
for the operatcr.

The thermal properties of various pigments and
of rubber: IRA WILLIAMS. The thermal conduc-
tivity and diffusivity of rubber is determined by
two separate methods. A method for the deter-
mination of the conductivity of pigments is given
and the values have been determined for the most
common pigments used in rubber compounding. A
method is shown by which the thermal conductivity

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1437

and diffusivity of any rubber compound may be
ealeulated from an analysis of the stock.

Physical properties of rubber compounded with
light magnesium carbonate: H. W. Greiper. The
physical properties of rubber compounded with
light magnesium carbonate have been studied,
ineluding tensile strength, elongation, hardness,
resilient energy capacity and permanent set. This
material was shown to behave in rubber as a
reinforcing or toughening pigment, the maximum.
effect being given by nine volumes of the filler to
100 volumes of rubber. The principal disadvan-
tage of magnesium carbonate in rubber was found
to be the high permanent set imparted to the vul-
canized product, attributable to the definite
crystalline character of the particles. The rein-
forcing effect of magnesium carbonate at nine
volumes per hundred of rubber was compared with
equal proportions of other reinforcing pigments,
ineluding zine oxide, gas black, fine china clay
and colloidal barium sulfate. Gas black was
shown to be the only filler showing a reinforcing
effect greater than that given by light magnesium
carbonate.

The relation between chemical and physical
state-of-cure of rubber vulcanized in the presence
of certain organic accelerators: NoRMAN A. SHEP-
ARD and STANLEY Kraut. Hexamethylenetetra-
mine, aldehyde ammonia, p-nitrosodimethylaniline -
and thiocarbanilide, respectively, have been intro-
duced in such quantities into a mixing consisting
of 48 parts of first latex erépe, 48 parts of zine ~
oxide and 3 parts of sulfur, that equivalent
physical states of cure (as gauged by the stress-
strain relations) were obtained in each case when
vulcanized for 60 minutes at 287° F. The coeffi-
cients of vulcanization of these cures show that
there is no uniform relationship between the
physical and chemical states of cure in these
stocks, even though the time and temperature of
curing are constant. The equivalent quantities
used in this work indicate that, in the type of
stock here examined, one part of hexamethylene-
tetramine is equivalent in accelerating power to
one and one half parts of aldehyde ammonia,
three parts of thiocarbanilide and one half part
of p-nitrosodimethylaniline, respectively.

Physical testing graphs: W. B. WIEGAND.

Rubber Division methods for rubber analysis:
Report of committee and discussion.

Organic accelerators. Symposium. Specification
standards and testing, including both chemical and
physical tests in compounds.

CuHartes §. PARSONS,
Secretary.

SCI

New SEgIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1438 Pripay, Juny 21, 1922 Stnete Corrs, 15 Ors.

Bausch & Lomb
Photomicrographic
Equipment

AUSCH & LOMB have always been
among the leaders in the develop-
ment of photomicrographic equipment.
We are today the only American makers
of a complete line of this apparatus, con-
sisting of outfits ranging from simple
cameras for use with ordinary micro-
scopes, to the large GSA-ILo outfit shown
above.

Wherever a microscope is required, a
photomicrographic camera can be used to
advantage for making a permanent, photo-
graphic record of the image. In industrial
laboratories, for testing and inspecting,
and in hospital and university labora-
tories, for educational and research pur-
poses, our equipment is widely used.

The manufacture of this apparatus in-
volves the very finest work in optics,
combined with mechanical construction of great precision. Our many years of experience in
making optical instruments has enabled us to meet these requirements in the fullest measure.

Write for descriptive circulars and let us kuow of your needs.

Bausch & Lomb Optical Company

409 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.
New York Washington Chicago San Francisco London

Leading American Makers of Optical Measuring Instruments, Photomicrographic Apparatus, Photographic
Lenses, Microscopes, Projection Apparatus (Balopticons), Ophthalmic Lenses and_ Instruments,
Range Finders and Gun-Sights for Army and Navy, Searchlight Reflectors, Stereo-Prism
Binoculars, Telescopes, Magnifiers, Automobile Lenses and other High-Grade
Optical Products.

=" better and ee

a

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

Sargeni’s Electric Drying Qven With

Gonstant Temperature Gontrol
Patented

Made to fill the need of the chemists for a dependable piece of apparatus
at a reasonable price. This Oven was the pioneer in this class of apparatus
and still maintains its position as the lowest priced satisfactory constant tem-
perature drying oven. It will produce any desired temperature between room
temperature and 200°C.

A workman-like piece devoid of the cost of ornamentation.

Constancy of temperature 1°C. Size of chamber 10x10x12 inches.

Made for 110-volt or 220 volt currents, operates on alternating or direct
current.

Furnished complete with thermometer, cord and plug for attaching to

lamp socket.
PRICE, $35.00

Descriptive circular on application. |

E. H. SARGENT & Ct

Importers, Makers and Dealers in Chemicals
and Chemical Apparatus of High Grade Only

155-165 East Superior Street CHICAGO, ILL.
ESTABLISHED 1852—SEVENTY YEARS IN BUSINESS

SCIENC

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
ef Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00. Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Juuy 21, 1922 No. 1438

CONTENTS

Vou. LVI

Conservation of the Waters of the Colorado
River from the Standpoint of the Reclama- y
tion Service: Dr. F. E, WEYMOUTH....-....... 59

The Elector Plan for the Administration of
Research Funds: Proressor C. E. S&Ea- :
SHOR By ue Wa uae ae oe Sone he eed 66

Alfred Goldsborough Mayor: Dr. R. 8S.

VVOOD. WARD pisces tauani as ue sweet stnae UME ye Nees 68
Scientific Events:
Magnesite in Southern Nevada; The British
Chemical Industry; Agriculture and Wire-
less Telephony in France; The Mount
Everest Hapedition; Engineers and an
American University in Hurope....-...--.------- 69
Scientific Notes and News....:..-.---.---c.:-tseeceesne 72
University and Educational Notes..........-...... 75
Discussion and Correspondence :
Which is the Highest Water Fall in the
World: Dr. F. HE. Matrurs. A Cabinet
for Colored Papers: Dr. CHRISTIAN A.
Ruckmick. The Human Yolk Sac: Dr. a
AGES TUTTE (iS WPA By vincene seve ste uel ene peed 75
Scientific Books:
Ditmars on the Reptiles of the World:
Prorrssok ALEXANDER G. RUTHVEN.......... 79
Special Articles:
The Measurement of Extremely Small Ca-
pacities and Inductances: Drs. H. G.
TASKER) and Wut) Me Jionms: 26 0 ny 79
The American Chemical Society: Dr.
CHARTES, Ti, PARSONS see in 81

The Kentucky Academy of Science: Dk.
SER RED\ VE HED e TUR Yee newacunl sta niietlin Liye 85

CONSERVATION OF THE WATERS
OF THE COLORADO RIVER FROM
THE STANDPOINT OF THE
RECLAMATION SERVICE}

THE Colorado River Basin includes the
largest river system lying entirely within the
arid region. Its average annual discharge is
nearly 18,000,000 acre-feet and it drains
244,000 square miles of territory, nearly all in
the United’ States, less than one per cent. of
the area and an insignificant part of the water
coming from Mexico. The basin lies in seven
different states of the Union and all of them
can and should veeeive benefit from the use of
its waters. The trunk stream was navigated
for many years from the gulf northward a
distance of over 400 miles and before the ad-
vent of railroads this navigation was import-
ant. It has recently been largely abandoned
but the stream is technically and actually navi-
gable. Most of the course of the main stream
is in the United States, but for a distance of
about 20 miles it forms the boundary between
Mexico and Arizona and for about 80 miles
flows through Mexican territory. It is there-
for an international stream, an _ interstate
stream, and a navigable stream. The waters
of the stream not heretofore appropriated to
private use are the property of the United
States government and the lands necessary for
its proper development and use are mainly
public lands. Its problems and their adminis-
tration are therefore distinctly national.

Like most of the streams of the world the
discharge of the Colorado River varies greatly
in volume. Its low water discharge frequently
falls below 5,000 cubic feet per second, and
its flood sometimes peaks above 200,000 cubic

feet per second. Numerous small valleys are

1 Presented at the joint meeting of the Amer-
ican Association for the Advancement of Science
and the Pacific Division, Salt Lake City, June

23, 1922.

60 SCIENCE

irrigated from the tributaries of the Colorado
River and their aggregate use of its waters is
very important. The largest valley which the
Colorado irrigates is the Imperial Valley in
southern California. Smaller diversions from
the river are in the Palo Verde Valley of Cali-
fornia and the Yuma Valley of Arizona.
These valleys can of course receive only the
waters left after the diversion in the basin
above and in years of low water the entire
available flow of the river is utilized in the
lower valleys. A much larger quantity is
needed to fully develop these valleys and this
can not be secured without the storage of the
flood flow at some point above. Hence arises
the problem of the conservation of the waters
of the Colorado River.

This problem has been under investigation
by the Reclamation Service ever since the year
of its organization, 1902. In this it has had
the cooperation of the Geological Survey in
fhe measurement of streams and of the Agri-
cultural Department in the examination of
soils. The investigation has been carried on
in all parts of its vast basin, many dam sites
have been explored with diamond drill, and
the results have been condensed in various re-
ports, the latest and most comprehensive of
which has been recently published as Senate
Doeument No. 142 entitled “Problems of
Imperial Valley and vicinity.”

The topography of the Colorado River
Basin is admirably adapted to the conservation
of its waters and their use for power. Several
good reservoir sites have been found at ad-
vantageous locations. The main stream below
its Junction with Green River has a total fall
of nearly 4,000 feet to sea level, fully three
fourths of which are physically capable of
being developed for power, and the greater
portion of the waters of the basin can be made
available for use in this stretch. The main
trunk of Green River above the junction falls
over 2,000 feet and the upper fork or Grand
River has a fall of nearly 4,000 feet. The
average potential power in the basin at
present is over 8,000,000 horse power. Some
of this is unavailable for development for
various reasons and some of the water will
ultimately be consumed in irrigation, so that

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

the ultimate available is about 6,000,000 horse
power, of which more than two thirds is on
the main stream, mostly within the state of
Arizona or on its boundaries.

During the past twenty years many engi-
neering examinations of the main stream of
the Colorado River have been made by power
interests, with a view to the estimation of its
power possibilities, and though these were uni-
formly reported as great, the engineers have
until recently agreed in the conclusion that
there was no available market; but the mar-
kets have been growing and the feasibility of
transmitting large blocks of power has also
been improving. It is believed that the time
has at last arrived when the development of
power on the lower Colorado River has be-
come feasible at such points as are most acces-
sible and nearest to adequate markets.

The use of the waters of the Colorado for
irrigation presents problems of considerable
difficulty. Most of the river is in canyons
where no valleys are adjacent and its use in
irrigation is impossible. In the lower reaches
the river has formed some alluvial valleys
which are in part being irrigated by the nat- _
ural flow of the stream, but which for full
development require a much larger flow of
water than is available in the late summer and
fall. The present irrigated area can be more
than trebled if the water supply is conserved
and the complete regulation of the river will
furnish a supply greater than the available
valley areas. Their reclamation, however,
presents great engineering difficulties and im-
poses upon those lands heavy charges for con-
struction which would be difficult if not impos-
sible for settlers to pay if the entire burden
of the conservation and diversion had to be
borne by those settlers. Fortunately, however,
the conservation for power purposes will so
nearly fit with the requirements for irrigation
that the utility of the storage sites for the de-
velopment of power may be utilized as an
asset to defray the expenses of regulating the
river and thus through the power asset render
feasible irrigation enterprises that would not
otherwise be feasible.

One of the greatest, and by far the most
pressing problems on the Colorado, is the con-

JuLY 21, 1922

trol of the mighty floods that are sometimes
furnished by its drainage basin and which
annually threaten to overwhelm and destroy
the valleys in its lower reaches. Problems of
this kind are presented on every large river
flowing through alluvial valleys, but the case
of the Colorado is unique and the flood prob-
lem is far more important and imminent than
usually is the case. This situation is due to
the peculiar topographie conditions of the
valleys which the river serves.

The Gulf of California formerly extended
northwestward to a point a few miles above
the town of Indio, about 144 miles from the
present head of the gulf. The Colorado River,
emptying into the gulf a short distance south
of the present international boundary, carried
its heavy load of silt into the gulf for centu-
ries, gradually building up a great delta cone
entirely across the gulf and eutting off its
northern end, which remains as a great depres-
sion from which most of the water has been
evaporated, leaving in its bottom the Salton
Sea of 300 square miles, with its surface about
250 feet below sea level.

The river flowing over its delta cone stead-
ily deposits silt in its channel and by over
flow on its immediate banks, so that it gradu-
ally builds up its channel and its banks and
forms a ridge growing higher and higher until
the stream becomes so unstable that it breaks
its banks in the highwater period and follows
some other course. In this manner the stream
has in past centuries swung back and forth
over its delta, until this exists as a broad, flat
ridge between the gulf and the Salton Sea,
about 30 feet above sea level, and on the
summit of this the river flows at present, the
water finding its way to the southward into
the gulf.

The direct distance from Andrade on the
Colorado River, where it reaches Mexico, to
the head of the gulf is about 75 miles, and
the distance to the margin of Salton Sea is
but little more. As that latter is about 250
feet lower than the gulf, the strong tendency
to flow in that direction needs no demonstra-
tion. This, coupled with the inevitable neces-
sity for such an alluvial stream to leave its
channel at intervals, constitutes the menace of

SCIENCE 61

the lands lying about Salton Sea, called the
Imperial Valley. As there is no escape of
water from Salton Sea except by evaporation,
the river flowing into this sea would, unless
diverted, gradually fill it to sea level or above
and submerge the cultivated land and the
towns of Imperial Valley, nearly all of which
are below sea level. Any flood waters that
overflow the bank to the north must therefore
without fail be restrained and not allowed to
flow northward into Salton Sea. This is now
prevented by a large levee, north of Volcano
Lake, extending eastward and connecting with
high land near Andrade. This levee is in
Mexico and its maintenance is complicated
thereby.

In 1905 the river scoured out the channel
of the Imperial Canal and turned its entire
volume into the Salton Basin, eroding a deep
gorge and raising the level of Salton Sea. It
submerged the salt works and forced the re-
moval of the main line of the Southern Pacific
Railroad. At great difficulty and expense,
after several unsuccessful attempts, the river
was returned to its old channel in February,
1907. The control of the river would be
greatly facilitated if the floods were redueed
in volume by storage. Investigations have
been made concerning the feasibility of storing
the floods and reducing thei volume to an
amount easily controlled.

The regulation of the Colorado River has
been examined and discussed a great deal.
Some engineers have expressed opinions that
the storage of the waters of the Colorado
should be accomplished entirely in the upper
basin and on the tributaries of the river be-
cause in those regions good storage sites can
be found which will intercept the major por-
tion of the water supply and will receive those
waters very largely free from sediment and
nearly clear, whereas the erosion rapidly in
progress throughout the canyon region gradu-
ally loads the river with sediment so that the
water reaching the reservoir sites below the
canyon is heavily laden with sediment. Where
the river leaves the canyon region it is esti-
mated that if carries on an average about
80,000 acre-feet of sediment annually.

There are, however, many and serious objec-

62 SCIENCE

tions to this plan. Reservoirs above the. can-
yon region, while in the long run intercepting
the major portion of the waters, leave unreg-
ulated the sudden floods to which the lower
and more arid portion is subject. The Gila
Basin alone, while comprising less than one
fourth of the area of the basin, sometimes fur-
nishes floods which at their maximum may
equal or even exceed those of the main stream
above its mouth with nearly four times the
dvainage area and about fifteen times the mean
annual discharge. Complete regulation there-
fore requires the control of the waters of the
Gila as well as those of the Colorado, and the
same is true of any other large portion of the
basin. If we confine storage to the streams
above the Arizona line we can intercept over 80
per cent. of the mean annual flow, but we
leave unregulated about 150,000 square miles
of drainage area or three fifths of the basin.
This avea while arid and unreliable as to water
supply, is, like the Gila Basin, subject to tor-
rential rains and would in the aggregate leave
a. flood menace that would have to be met in
some other way if the lands are to be pro-
tected.

It is obvious that the nearer the reservoir
can be built to the lands in the lower valley
the more complete will be its flood regulation,
and it also happens that the lowest reservoir
site of adequate capacity, which is at Boulder
Canyon, lies at a point within transmission
distance of the Pacific Coast and thus renders
available for its construction the vast power
asset not available to any adequate
reservoir site existing above this point. For-
tunately it is possible here to build a dam as
high as may be required and to furnish there-
by not only complete regulation of the river
flow but a surplus capacity which will store
the sediment for centuries to come without
impairing the head on the power plants to be
served therefrom. In the distant future it
will become necessary to furnish additional
storage by building reservoirs above, but this
requirement will be more than a century away
and in that time certain regulation of the
river is likely to be accomplished by reservoirs
on its tributaries and the problem can be
easily and practically met when it arises.

which is

[Vou. LVI, No. 1488

Investigations have demonstrated the feasi-
bility of building a dam of sufficient height to
form a reservoir in Boulder Canyon of more

‘than 30,000,000 acre-feet capacity, which is

more than actually required to accomplish the
proposed solution of the conservation prob-
lems that are now imminent. The feasibility
and perfection of this accomplishment and the
economy with which it will conserve the waters
of the Colorado River for their best uses, are
in strong contrast to the results that would be
obtained by reservoirs in the upper basin.
Good sites for storage and the development of
power exist on the Green, the Grand and the
Yampa, all of which have been carefully sur-
veyed by the Reclamation Service, and their
possibility established. These reservoirs could
be bmlt one at a time as needed and individu-
ally would cost much less than a large reser-
voir on the lower river, but if their construe-
tion were undertaken to meet the present needs
of the lower valleys, they would necessarily be
operated in accordance with those needs and
this would destroy their usefulness for power
development and irrigation in the upper basin
where they are needed and for which purposes ©
there are no substitutes. To attempt such a
solution would therefore interpose obstacles of
a legal and financial nature to the proper
development of the upper states and virtually
destroy a large part of the potential resources
of those states because most of the projects
would become infeasible if loaded with the
additional burdens of the extinguishing rights
which such a program would establish. The
preservation of the resources of the upper
states and the elimination of serious obstacles
to their development is the strongest argument
in favor of storage on the lower river and
the preservation of the reservoir sites in the
upper basin for local use. It is thus seen that
the conservation and proper use of the waters
of the Colorado Basin ave in some sense one
great problem which must be considered as a
whole, otherwise there is danger of virtual
destruction of natural resources by throwing
obstacles in the way of the development which
at best is in many cases difficult and expensive.
The recognition of this relation has led to
common action on the part of the seven states

Juny 21, 1922)

affected and of the Congress of the United
States, which has provided for a commission
to consider the equitable division of the waters
of the Colorado River. On this commission
the United States is represented by its chair-
man, Honorable Herbert Hoover, secretary
of commerce, whose ability and fidelity to
public duty are recognized in every household
of the land. It is hoped that under his leader-
Sup an agreement can be reached among’ the
states which can be ratified by the United
States and which will provide for the full use
of the waters of the Colorado River without
imposing unbearable burdens on any part of
the basin nor destroy any of its resources.

In order to make a large storage reservoir
in the lower basin financially feasible, it will
be necessary to charge the major portion of
the cost of the storage dam to power. The
development of power and irrigation are
closely related in that the amount of power
which if is practicable to develop depends
largely upon the extent of the development of
the irrigable lands in the entire drainage basin,
The extremely arid and semi-tropie character
of the lands in t+~ lower Colorado Basin makes
it necessary to irrigate throughout the year
and irrigation requirements therefore conform
more nearly to the requirements for power
than do those in northern latitudes. The
capacity of the reservoir provided for power
purposes will depend wholly on the relation of
its cost to the value of additional power ob-
tainable therewith.

As the point of complete utilization of the
streams is approached, the excess water will
occur in such widely separated periods as to
require a disproportionate amount of storage
for its utilization. It has been assumed that
all the water must primarily be conserved for
irrigation use. By utilizing the minimum head
on the turbines as determined by silt storage
in the entire Colorado River Basin, 600,000
firm horsepower of electric energy can be
developed at Boulder Canyon and 700,000
horsepower is feasible with the same reservoir
in connection with the full development of the
irrigable lands in the upper basin and about
1,500,000 acres in the lower basin which it is
practicable to develop in the near future. In

SCIENCE 63

either case there will be a large amount of
secondary power which will be of considerable
value. Installation of a power plant to
develop a large amount of power may be de-
sirable for the reason that although the devel-
opment of the upper basin will doubtless pro-
ceed steadily it will be a long time before the
full development is reached. The immense
amount of power to be generated and the
variable head under which the turbines will
be required to work will make the Boulder
Canyon plant one of the most remarkable
ever built. Under present plans the power
house would be located on the downstream toe
of the dam in the event a gravity dam is built,
or along the canyon wall below the dam if an
arch dam is constructed.

Among the more important reservoir sites
in the upper basin which have been carefully
investigated by the Reclamation Service are
the following: the Flaming Gorge on the
Green River, where a dam 327 feet high would
create a reservoir with storage capacity of
4,000,000 acre feet; the Juniper on the Yampa
River, where a dam 268 feet high would
create a reservoir of 1,500,000 acre feet ca-
pacity; the Dewey located on the Grand River
with a dam 275 feet high, which would create
a reservoir of 2,270,000 acre feet capacity.
The foundations of these sites have been tested
with diamond drill and the foundations are
known to be satisfactory.

The choice of a reservoir site on the lower
Colorado River depends upon numerous fac-
tors of which a few may here be enumerated:

First, for flood control the reservoir should
be as near the area to be protected as possible.

Second, for irrigation with ultimate supply
but little in excess of demands, control. must
be. had as near the ultimate diversion as pos-
sible for the prevention of waste due to in-
ability to coordinate demand and supply.

Third, the generation of power, incidental
to irrigation operations, should be carried on
as near as possible to its market.

Fourth, the site should be as close to estab-
lished railroads as possible to eut down con-
struction costs.

Fifth, with due allowance for costs the
reservoir should be as deep as possible in

64 SCIENCE

order to expose the minimum possible area for
evaporation losses and prevent waste of water
thereby.

Sixth, lowest possible cost giving due weight
to other considerations.

From all data available to date, the Black
or Boulder Canyon sites, only 181% miles apart
by river, seem to fill the above requirements
more nearly than any other site or sites which
have been found.

The proper size of the reservoir is a matter
not yet fully determined, the factors entering
into this feature being irrigation storage, flood
detention storage, silt storage and power de-
velopment.

The maximum capacity so far considered is
31,400,000 aere feet, including 5,000,000 acre
feet of silt storage, 11,400,000 acre feet for
nrigation storage, 10,000,000 acre feet for
power development and 5,000,000 acre feet for
flood control. Other capacities considered have
varied from 8,000,000 acre feet up to the max-
imum. Recent estimates include a reservoir,
with dam located in Black Canyon to store
23,500,000 acre feet, which would leave a 200
foot head available for the development of
power between this reservoir and the so-called
Diamond Springs power project.

Tf built for flood control purposes alone, a
reservoir with capacities of 5,000,000 and
8,000,000 acre feet is estimated to be suffi-
cient to hold discharges at Yuma due to up-
stream floods down to 75,000 and 50,000 second
feet respectively except in rare instances. In
connection with a reservoir for irrigation pur-
poses, the addition of 5,000,000 acre feet stor-
age for flood control alone is expected to pro-
vide the desired reduction in floods.

In order to visualize the size of the reser-
voir to be impounded it may be said that in
case of the largest reservoir considered, the
lake when full will have a surface of 240
square miles and will be about 90 miles long,
with a 40 mile arm extending up the Virgin
River. If all the water in the reservoir were
to be discharged through a conduit 10 feet
in diameter at the rate of 10 feet per second
it would require six years to empty the reser-
voir provided no water entered it during that
time and neglecting evaporation losses.

[Von. LVI, No. 1438

A great many preliminary designs and esti-
mates have been prepared of various types of
dam for both Boulder and Black Canyons in
connection with various plans for the develop-
ment of power. The conelusion reached is
that a dam of the gravity type, built on a
curved plan, is the most conservative in de-
sign and best suited to a dam of such unpre-
cedented height.

The dam in Boulder Canyon proposed for
the largest reservoir considered would be 600
feet high above the present low water surface
in the river and 750 feet from the lowest point
in the foundation to the highest point on the
dam. This would be more than twice the
height of Arrowrock Dam, which is 348%
feet high and which, at present, is the highest
dam in the world. The length on top would
be approximately 1,250 feet and at the bottom
the dam would be nearly as long up and down
stream as it is high. The amount of conerete
required to build the dam and appurtenant
structures with a reasonable allowance for
contingencies is roughly estimated at 4,700,000
cubie yards. This would be four times the
concrete contained in Arrowrock and Elephant.
Butte dams combined, and if used to build a
column 100 feet in diameter, the height of the
column would be three miles and would weigh
91% million tons.

The preliminary estimate of the cost of this
dam is about $58,500,000. About 700,000 firm
horsepower could be generated with a power
plant costing $28,000,000 and the transmission
line will cost about $20,500,000 more, or a
total of about $107,000,000.

In connection with the dam, it is proposed
to provide outlet capacity for the discharge
of 25,000 second feet of water for irrigation
use and a spillway capacity of 200,000 second
feet with water surface in the reservoir 10
feet below the top of the dam. Under condi-
tions of extreme floods the latter will be
inereased to 300,000 second feet at the time
the water surface in the reservoir reaches the
top of the dam. As a part of the spillway it
is proposed to provide an opening at the
bottom of the flood storage with no provision
for closure. By this means water would start
discharging as soon as the reservoir is full to

JuLy 21, 1922]

the top of the irrigation storage and would
continue to discharge as long as there is any
water in the space provided for flood deten-
tion. This permanent opening would prevent
encroachment upon that portion of the reser-
voir provided for flood detention and will be
so designed as not to allow water to pass in
excess of the capacity of the levee system in
the lower basin.

Excellent dam sites exist in both canyons
and after examining them in February, 1921,
Dr. F. L. Ransome of the United States Geo-
logical Survey pronounced them as _ geolog-
ically feasible for the construction of a high
dam.

Probably the most difficult task to be en-
countered in the construction of a dam on the
Colorado River is the turning of the river
during construction of\the foundation and con-
siderable thought has been given to this fea-
ture. A study of the hydrograph of the Col-
orado at Yuma over the period 1902 to 1921
shows that, if the discharge at Boulder Can-
yon is assumed to approximate that at Yuma
with the exception of the flash peaks thrown
into the river from the Gila, a_ diversion
works of 50,000 second feet capacity would
have been overtopped every year of the twenty
and that the average time of submergence
would have been about 11 per cent. of the
total, the maximum being about 84 days in
1920 and the minimum 2 days in 1904.

Diversion works of 75,000 second feet ca-
pacity would not have been overtopped during
nine of the twenty years. The average time
of submergence would have been 5 per cent.
of the total, the maximum being about 50 days
in 1907 and 1909.

Seven of the twenty years of record show
peaks of from 115,000 to 190,000 second feet
at times occurring in two successive years. In
1920 the peak was 190,000 second feet, while
in 1921 it reached 185,700 feet, and the pres-
ent year promises to be one of high discharge.

With so great an amount of work to be done
in excavating and laying concrete below water
surface in so short a season it is essential that
diversion works of ample capacity be pro-
vided to avoid being flooded out, thus losing

much valuable time. It is therefore considered

SCIENCE 65

necessary to provide for diverting the river
during years of ordinary high water and it is
proposed to design the works with a capacity
of 150,000 second feet. The years 1920 and
1921 are the only ones of record when the dis-
charge exceeded 150,000 second feet at Yuma
and it is thought that the expenditure neces-
sary to increase the capacity of the diversion
works above 150,000 second feet is unwarrant-
ed. Diversion would be by means of coffer-
dams and tunnels through the rock abutments
of the main dam.

In order that the diversion problem may be
properly attacked and in order that methods
to be used in construction of the dam may be
properly worked out, diamond drilling opera-
tions to ascertain foundation conditions at the
possible dam sites were commenced in Sep-
tember, 1920, and are still under way. To
date three sites have been investigated in a
preliminary way and considerable detail infor-
mation has been obtained at one of them. A
total of 88 holes have been put down including
approximately 3,500 feet of wash borings and
2,100 feet of diamond drilling. The results
of the investigations at Boulder Canyon indi-
cate that bed rock will be found at depths not
to exceed 140 feet below low water surface.
At Black Canyon, bed rock in the deepest hole
drilled to date was found at a depth of 62
feet below low water surface. However, the
investigations have not been carried far
enough for it to be said that this is the mavxi-
mum depth to bed rock at the Black Canyon
site.

The following recommendations by Director
Davis conclude his report as provided for in
the Kineaid Act:

1. It is recommended that through suitable
legislation the United States undertake the con-
struction with government funds of a highline
canal from Laguna dam to the Imperial Valley,
to be reimbursed by the lands benefited.

2. It is recommended that the public lands
that can be reclaimed by such works be reserved
for settlement by ex-service men under conditions
securing actual settlement and cultivation.

3. It is recommended that through suitable
legislation the United States undertake the con-
struction with government funds of a reservoir
at or near Boulder Canyon on the lower Colorado

66 SCIENCE

River, to be reimbursed by the revenues from
leasing the power privileges incident thereto.

4, It is recommended that any state interested
in this development shall have the right at its
election to contribute an equitable part of the
cost of the construction of the reservoir and re-
ceive for its contribution a proportionate share

of power at cost to be determined by the secre-—

tary of the interior.

5. It is recommended that the secretary of the
interior be empowered after full hearing of all
concerned to allot the various applicants their
due proportion of the power privileges and to
allocate the cost and benefits of a highline canal.

6. It is recommended that every development
hereafter authorized be required in both construc-
tion and operation to give priority of right and
use:

First, to river regulation and flood control.

Second, to use of storage water for irrigation.

Third, to development of power.

These recommendations have been embodied
in a House bill by Representative Swing of
California, introduced April 25, 1922. This
bill provides for an advance of $70,000,000 to
the reclamation fund to be used for the
construction of the Boulder Canyon dam and
the Imperial Valley system to be repaid to the
general treasury in accordance with the
Reclamation Act of 1902.

F. E. WeymMoutH

U. S. RECLAMATION SERVICE

THE ELECTOR PLAN FOR THE AD-
MINISTRATION OF RESEARCH
FUNDS!

One of the most effective uses of wealth for
the good of mankind lies in the wise encourage-
ment of the search for truth through sustained
scientific investigation.

A history of the methods followed through
the last two hundred years reveals an astonish-

1 The present note is a skeletal outline of a pre-
liminary report prepared by the writer as chair-
man of the Committee on the Stabilizing of Sci-
entific Funds. The committee is continued for
further work on this problem and welcomes dis-
cussion and criticism of the plan from those who
are interested in the allocation of funds in trust
from wills, bequests, or grants for the encourage-
ment of scientific investigation and service.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

ing record of unwise provisions in wills and
bequests and shows that only in the last few
years have economic and legal authorities de-
voted systematic efforts to the organization of
permanent trust funds given for benevolent
purposes.

During the last few years, the Community
Trust movement has developed a valuable type
of organization. The result of this plan has
been most gratifying. To cite a single exam-
ple; in the first six years of its existence, the
Cleveland Foundation accumulated a fund of
more than one hundred million dollars.

The specific interests of research in science
have not yet enjoyed any such encouragement
or facilitation through the organization of gen-
eral public interest. With but slight excep-
tions, donors are left to hit or miss methods of
organization and without appropriate encour-
agement or aid.

It would therefore seem timely to present an
outline of a method of organization which shall
be safe and permanent, flexible and adjustable
to changing conditions, simple and economic of
operation, and inviting as a means of disposing
of wealth in the service of science and the
establishment of a monument to commemorate
some cherished object or ideal.

The plan should be devised to meet the
changing conditions of the times, conceding to
each succeeding generation the largest measure
of ability to administer its own affairs, and
should afford the opportunity for the main-
tenance of some broad, scientifie project in
which the donor is interested, while, at the same
time, granting great flexibility in the meeting
of unforeseen future contingencies. It should
avoid specifically those methods of organization
which history has shown to be undesirable, par-
ticularly as to methods of perpetuating the
governing board, the designation of objects to
be served, and the safeguarding of the capital.
It should utilize legal and economic principles
which in recent investigations have been pro-
nounced sound.

The approval and promulgation of some
plan by recognized scientific bodies should give
a new significance and opportunity to the own-
ership of wealth and should furnish an incen-
tive for generosity in the disposal of a fortune,

JULY 21, 1922]

because it perpetuates it under a proper guar-
antee and makes it a permanent instrument in
the service of science for the good of mankind.

To meet these needs, a type of organization to
be known as the Elector Plan is proposed.

I. THe Puan

1. A board of trustees entrusted with the
administration of a fund shall be elected at
stated periods by a committee of electors.

2. There shall be five electors appointed an-
nually, two to be chosen by the board itself and
three by some stable institution or institutions
designated in the charter.

3. The board of trustees shall be composed
of five members or some multiple of five,
such as ten or fifteen. Election shall be
for five years, and a member shall not be eligi-
ble for re-election until after a lapse of one
year. Rotation established, one fifth of the
board shall be elected each year. Irregular
vacancies shall also be filled at the annual elec-
tion. The chairman of the board of trustees
shall be designated annually by the board itself.
Hither the original board or the original elec-
tors may be named in the charter by the donor.

4. The powers and duties of the board of
trustees shall be prescribed in the charter, and
must include the following provisions: (1)
Full power to carry out the provisions of the
charter in regard to the organization and
supervision of projects and the expenditure of
funds; (2) power to adapt the provisions of
the charter as to object of funds, to meet
changing conditions and needs in the spirit of
the original intent of the donor; (3) power to
change custodianship of funds, on good evi-
dence for need of change, to guarantee safety
and profitable investment. The charter shall
also prescribe how any of the institutions
which designate electors may be replaced in
ease of loss of fitness for the service.

5. The funds shall be placed in the custody
of a trust company or companies having a cap-
ital and surplus of not less than ten million
dollars, empowered to make investments and
pay out the income with the consent of the
board of trustees.

6. The charter shall provide for an annual
auditing and public accounting of the expendi-
tures.

SCIENCE 67

II. ADVANTAGES OF THE PLAN

It provides that the board of trustees shall
be elected by persons a majority of whom are
approved representatives of the science or sci-
ences named, fully conversant with the situa-
tion in the age in which they are acting, free
from self-interest in the election, and by virtue
of their position charged with responsibility
for rendering this type of service.

It harmonizes a progressive flexibility and
growth in adaptation to purpose as determined
by a progressively evolving science with sta-
bility and good faith in permanent service-
ableness.

It prevents the unwise restriction of funds by
donors, the diversion or dissipation of funds
by self-perpetuating boards, the loss of value
in funds as a result of changing conditions and
interests in the service of science, and unin-
formed and whimsical procedure in the alloca-
tion of funds for research.

It serves the purpose of encouraging donors
in generous and confident giving of funds for
research, creates an interest in this type of
permanent and far-sighted service as a personal
monument or memorial, and points to the
opportunity and wisdom of consulting repre-
sentative scientific bodies on technical matters
in the allocation of funds for research.

III. Sraprnizinc ORGANIZATION

The National Research Council, a working
organization of the National Academy of Sci-
ences, would seem to commend itself as a suit-
able body for this type of responsibility in that
it is permanent, progressively adaptable, rep-
resentative of the sciences, composed of per-
sons highly qualified for scientific guardianship,
and takes a genuine interest in rendering
service of this kind with forethought. The
National Research Council should therefore
hold itself ready to designate one, two or three
of the electors in accordance with the wish of
the donor as expressed in the charter.

Other agencies, such as other scientifie foun-
dations, national societies, state or federal offi-
cials, universities, museums, community trusts,
or other organizations representing a particular
interest involved, may be found suitable for
acting in a coordinate capacity with the Na-
tional Research Council. Among the qualifica-

68 SCIENCE

tions of an organization adapted for such co-
ordinate responsibility with the National Re-
search Council in designating electors, these are
essential: That it shall represent the interest
involved, shall be permanent, shall be progres-
sively adaptable to the evolution of its fune-
tion, shall be so organized as to perform this
function with a genuine interest and fore-
thought, and shall command a position of rec-
ognized dignity and integrity.
C. E. SEASHORE
DIVISION oF ANTHROPOLOGY
AND PSYCHOLOGY,
NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL

ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYOR

American men of science have lost a highly
esteemed colleague and friend in the untimely
death, at his laboratory at Tortugas, Florida,
on June 24, of Alfred Goldsborough Mayor.
For about three years past he has been making
a heroie struggle against a tubercular infection,
followed during the last winter by a severe
attack of influenza, while he was at Tucson,
Arizona; but the end came sooner than either
he or his intimate associates anticipated.

Mayor was born at Frederick, Maryland,
April 16, 1868. His early life was spent at
Maplewood, New Jersey, where his family lived
while his distinguished father was professor of
physies at Stevens Institute of Technology.
His easy aptitude for learning in general
doubtless led him to pursue a course of study
in that institute, and he was awarded the
degree of mechanical engineer there in 1889.
Later on he turned his attention to zoology and
pursued studies at Harvard University leading
to the degree of doctor of science in 1897. For
some years he was intimately associated with
Professor Alexander Agassiz as a trusted as-
sistant in the development of the museum of
comparative zoology at Harvard and in the
other fertile enterprises of Agassiz. From 1900
to 1904 he was curator of the natural sciences
of the museum of the Brooklyn Institute. Since
1904 he has been director of the department of
marine biology of the Carnegie Institution of
Washington, and the more important results
of his investigations, and of the investigations

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

of his numerous associates made at the Tortu-
gas laboratory and during his expeditions else-
where are to be found in the publications of the
institution of the past two decades.

A just estimate of the scientifie work of
Mayor must be left to more competent hands.
It is more fitting in a brief notice to call atten-
tion to the characteristics he manifested as a
man among men. He possessed and practiced
in high degree four cardinal virtues of which
the world at large is now in great need, namely,
the virtues of integrity, industry, reciprocity
and moral courage. Although of a distinctly
artistic and poetic temperament, he had unusual
capacity to see and to understand realities. Few
among our contemporaries have understood so
well as he the arithmetical limitations, for ex-
ample, of the Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton. Few men approach the problems of life
with the degree of insight and’ foresight he
brought to bear upon them. It is commonly
held that men of science are incompetent in
fiscal affairs; but this is only an obscure way of
stating the fact that men as a rule are inefficient
in business. Mayor was a marked exception
to the rule. Whatever he undertook was well
considered and well executed, and it was never
essential to even suggest the aid of a public
auditor to interpret his accounts. His versa-
tility was equal to almost any emergency. He
was equally at home in the navigation of a
ship, in the construction of a laboratory, in the
delineation of the delicate tissues of a jelly-fish,
and in his associations with the natives of the
South Sea Islands. He accepted the situation,
whatever it was, and without complaint sought
only to improve its conditions. Never aggres-
sive but always persuasive, he was one of the
most unselfish of men. In the conduct of his
laboratory and of his expeditions, his personal
interests were the last to be considered. He
afforded a continuous example of the joy in life
that comes from getting something worth while
well done. He made it easy for, and a source
of the highest pleasure to, his associates who
worked with him. His normal span was cut
short by insidious disease, but he left an im-
pressive and inspiring record in the fields of

altruistic endeavor.
R. S. Woopwarp

JuLy 21, 1922]

“SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
MAGNESITE IN SOUTHERN NEVADA
A MASSIVE deposit of magnesite of unusual

character that has recently been brought to
the attention of the United States Geological
Survey promises to yield a large and readily
available supply of this material. The de-
posit lies in Clark County, Nevada, in the
valley of Muddy River, one of the tributaries
of Virgin River, a few miles above the town of
St. Thomas. The material has been known for
some time as kaolin, and successful experi-
ments for utilizing it as a porcelain clay are
reported to have been made, though they have
not yet resulted in the exploitation of the
deposit. The recognized outcrops have been
located as mining claims, and some prelim-
inary exploration and development work has
been done. A side track on the St. Thomas
branch of the Los Angeles and Salt Lake Rail-
road, about three miles northeast of the north-
ernmost group of claims, offers a readily avail-
able railroad connection, and the station has
been named Kaolin from this deposit.

The so-called kaolin is stated by the Geolog-
ical Survey to be in fact a magnesite and was
deposited in a highly magnesian sedimentary
bed, a part of a regularly stratified series of
sedimentary beds exposed by stream channels
that cut across a low ridge at the upper edge
of Muddy Valley. The deposit forms a
chalky-looking bluff, dazzlingly white in the
bright sunlight. The material is porcelain-
white, fine grained and massive, is remarkably
free from foreign material, and has the struc-
tureless appearance and conchoidal fracture
that are generally characteristic of magnesite.
It is not so hard as the more typical mag-
nesite, and it erumbles more rapidly on ex-
posure to the weather.

The deposit is included between tilted beds
of conglomerate and sandstone below and shale
above. The lower contact is sharply defined,
but the magnesite grades up into the overlying
beds. The purer part of the deposit consists
of beds aggregating at least 200 feet in thick-
ness. Within the section of purer material
there are a few bands of sandy matter, but
these are minor in amount and apparently
almost negligible, as they could undoubtedly

SCIENCE 69

be avoided in mining. The whole section lies
in the form of a “hogback”—that is, the softer
beds lap up against a uniform slope of the
sandstone and conglomerate that has a north-
easterly dip of 30° to 50°.

The region in which the deposit lies is in
large part covered with alluvial wash, which
conceals most of the bedrock formations, so
that the section including the magnesite is ex-
posed at only a few places where streams have
cut down through the overlying deposits. The
regularity of the exposed section and the con-
tinnity of the harder beds, which project
through the surface wash, justify the assump-
tion that the magnesite is practically con-
tinuous between exposures and for considerable
distances beyond. Its length at the surface
seems to be a mile at least.

THE BRITISH CHEMICAL INDUSTRY

Str JosepH Larmor, professor of mathe-
matical physies at Cambridge and member of
parliament, writes to the London Times as
follows :

I have no claim to expert technical knowledge
on chemical matters, but with others I have been
wondering what is involved in the announcement
in the House of Commons that the British Dyes
Association are entering into negotiation with
the German Color Industry Combine.

I well remember the remonstrances of scientific
chemists when this national venture was placed
under the direction of business men and members
of the House of Commons early in the war; but
it was reasonable at that time that the energies
of the government that was conducting the war
should not be distracted on smaller matters.

The welcome letter of Sir William Pope sug-
gests further questions, to which answers must
now be available and possibly instructive. Has
the American dye industry, also started during
the war, been as hopelessly unfortunate as our
own? Have the attempts to develop the fixation
of atmospheric nitrogen in this country, on meth-
ods which supplied the paramount needs of Ger-
many during the war, met with better success?
If the industry of fine chemicals is to be worked
by British companies supported by the govern-
ment, under German direction and instruction,
what is to become of the armies of young men
who, at the universities, have been undergoing
long and expensive training in chemistry, in order

70 SCIENCE

to take advantage of the openings that public
policy seemed to offer?

We were informed on the highest authority
that British effort, in the universities and in
technical works, overtook and far out-distanced
that long start that German military chemists
possessed as regards noxious gases and other
agents of chemical warfare. Has that superiority
now disappeared, and why? One may even ask,
judging from public pronouncements, is the same
the case with our war-time superiority in aircraft
and the relative scientific problems? Or is it that
these things are now back under official control,
with copious production of Blue-books?

A dozen years ago my duties threw me in the
way of observing some of the great German
university chemists who developed into chemical
engineers on the grand scale and founded the
German industry. While struck by their quiet
capacity and apparent friendliness, it did not
appear for a moment that they rated themselves
higher than their British colleagues who had
never had the same opportunities.

AGRICULTURE AND WIRELESS TELEPHONY
IN FRANCE

Aw editorial article in the London Times
says:

WHILE England has been considering France
has acted and has arranged to bring wireless
telephony to the assistance of agriculture. A gen-
erous extension of the telephone system to rural
districts has long been urged on our own General
Post Office. It would help to redress the isolation
of the country and it would confer the special
benefit of prompt knowledge of approaching
meteorological changes. Farmers and gardeners,
who are at the mercy of vagaries of the weather,
could do much to arrange their work or even to
protect their crops were they in possession of
weather bulletins such as are posted at harbors
for the benefit of fishermen and mariners. But
the cost of telephone cables has retarded the
progress of extensions, and would, indeed, pro-
hibit even the ultimate completion of a sufficient
network. According to a message from our
Paris correspondent, printed in our columns last
Wednesday, France has overcome the difficulties
of cost and distance by a prompt application of
wireless telephony. The ministers of air and of
agriculture, acting in concert, have arranged that
the National Meteorological Office shall ‘‘broad-
cast’’? a weather bulletin twice daily. Every
commune will have a receiving station in the
parish school or police station, where the mes-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

sages will be received and posted. It is pro-
posed, further, that the peasants shall be warned
of any sudden storm by ringing the village bell.
Such an organization is well suited to rural
France, where, for the most part, the owners are
the actual cultivators and live in villages from
which they sally forth to their fields. It would
Tequire modification in this country, where the
isolated farm rather than the village is the center
which would have to be reached. But messages
issued by the Meteorological Office, now under
the Air Ministry, could be received at suitably
chosen towns, from which they would be redis-
tributed not only to villages, but to farms in
possession of the cheap wireless receivers already
at the disposal of the general community.

THE MOUNT EVEREST EXPEDITION

Atv a recent meeting of the Royal Geograph-
ical Society Sir Francis Younghusband, the
president, made the following announcement
in regard to the Mount Everest Expedition:

As this is the last meeting of the session and
consequently the last occasion on which I shall
have the honor of addressing you as your presi-
dent, perhaps you will allow me to summarize the
results of the Mount Everest Expedition, so far
as we at present know them. The climbers were
on June 6 to have made a final effort to reach
the summit—or rather the real attempt, for the
previous efforts were more in the nature of
reconnaissances. But we know that the monsoon
broke on June 3 and we fear that this will have
definitely frustrated any further effort.

But the expedition has, in spite of terrific
weather, already accomplished much. As you
know, they have reached 26,800 feet without oxy-
gen and 27,300 feet with its aid. And in accom-
plishing these great feats they have gained much
experience for future use. They have ascertained
that the mountain itself at the highest points
reached is, in Mallory’s words, ‘‘not difficult,’’
and Finch and Bruce were able to proceed along
the north face without ropes. Mallory was con-
vineed, too, that with favorable weather the
porters could have carried a camp to 26,000 feet
and so brought the climbers within reach of the
summit. And Finch’s experience was that by a
moderate use of oxygen in camp both sleep and
hunger were induced. So that, even if the final
climbers did not carry oxygen on them, they
might start from their high camp refreshed by
its use.

The experience gained this year also shows that
skilled mountaineers are able to take those un-

Juny 21, 1922]

skilled in high mountain craft to the highest alti-
tudes. Geoffrey Bruce had never climbed a snow
and ice mountain before. Yet under Finch’s
skilled leadership he was able to attain a height
of 27,300 feet. And the Sherpa porters, though
they were practically untrained to snow and ice
work, were able, under General Bruce’s stimu-
lating influence—and we must gratefully acknowl-
edge that it was he who originated and carried
out the idea of forming a corps of these men—
to carry loads up to 25,500 feet, some of them
making the journey four times and so earning
the unstinted praise of the best mountaineers.

So by careful organization and combination of
effort, by using experience to guide inexperience,
and by the display of indomitable pluck on the
part of the highest climbers, the expedition has at
a bound brought the record up from 24,600 feet
to 27,300 feet, and thus left only 1,700 feet to
be climbed before the crowning summit is
reached.

The standard of human achievement has there-
by been sensibly raised. And many another
climber, many another traveler, and many an-
other struggler upward in every walk of life and
in every country will be braced and heartened in
remembering what Finch and Mallory, Somervell,
Norton and Bruce have this year accomplished
on Mount Everest. And this, to my mind, is
incomparably the most valuable result of the
expedition—and a result which makes their efforts
in the highest degree worth while.

In conclusion may I quote from an article on
mountaineering I have just read? ‘‘ Mountain-
eering proper is not necessarily rashness, but is
entirely a question of prudence and of courage,
of strength and steadiness, and of a feeling for
nature and her most hidden beauties, which are
often awe-inspiring, but for that reason the more
sublime and to a contemplative spirit the more
suggestive.’’ These words were written thirty-
three years ago by an Italian Alpine climber, a
certain Father Ratti. That mountaineer has now
become Pope Pius XI and his words exactly
express the sentiment which has animated all
those connected with the Mount Everest Expedi-
tion, whether in its initiation or in its execu-
tion—and which will continue to animate them
till the final goal is reached.

The Public Ledger, in a cable dispatch, an-
nounces that the expedition to climb Mount
Everest has been abandoned as a result of an
avalanche in which seven porters were killed.
Three members of the expedition, C. L. Mal-
lory, T. H. Somervell and C. A. Crawford, had

SCIENCE 71

narrow escapes. The dispatch said the final
attempt to scale Mount Everest had been made
on June 7.

ENGINEERS AND AN AMERICAN UNIVER-
SITY IN EUROPE

ESstaBLISHMENT in Central Europe of a
great American university and library is urged
by Dr. B. Stepanek, minister to the United
States from Czechoslovakia, who, to advance
international peace, calls upon the engineers
of this and other countries for united partici-
pation in world affairs. Dr. Stepanek makes
an appeal for the formation of a world fed-
eration of engineers, and for an international
engineering conference to deal constructively
with the problems of civilization.

Dr. Stepanek’s views, made public by the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
which, through its official journal, stresses the
need of engineering solidarity among the lead-
ing nations, are regarded by engineers as a
significant diplomatic utterance supporting the
efforts now being made in America, Great
Britain, France and Italy to bring about closer
relations among engineers.

Award of the John Fritz medal to Senator
Guglielmo Marconi has aroused fresh interest
in the idea of a world union of engineers.
Marconi’s expressed hope of promoting peace
through science coincides, it was said, with
action to devise a working plan of international
cooperation between the engineers of America
and Italy.

John W. Lieb, vice-president of the New
York Edison Company, has reported, after a
trip to Italy, that Italian engineers are ready
to form such an alliance. Herbert Hoover,
Professor Comfort A. Adams, of Harvard
University, Eugene Schneider, of Paris, and
Sir Robert A. Hadfield, of London, are others
who favored advancement of world peace
through the united action of men of science.
Actively backing the project also are the presi-
dents of the American Society of Civil Engi-
neers, American Institute of Mining and
Metallurgical Engineers, American Institute of
Electrical Engineers and the Federated Amer-
ican Engineering Societies.

Alfred D. Flinn, secretary of the Engineer-
ing Foundation, and chairman of the Engineer-

72 SCIENCE

ing Division of the National Research Council,
endorses Dr. Stepanek’s suggestions “that at
an early date there should be an international
conference of engineers, rather than of politi-
cians and of statesmen, bound by tradition and
self-seeking nationalism—a conference of con-
structively-minded men who could take fresh
views of the world’s condition, deal scientific-
ally with fundamental causes, and suggest im-
partial, far-sighted plans for continuing
_ progress.” :
In appealing for the establishment of a

American university in Central Europe, Min-
ister Stepanek said that it would constitute a
center from which could be given out the best
products of American culture, a source of cor-
rect information about America and American
ideas. Through a world alliance of engineers,
the minister said, a constructive type of mind
could be brought more effectively into the
service of the nations.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Jacopus Corneuius Kapreyn, professor of
astronomy and theoretical mechanics at the
University of Groningen since 1888, has died
at the age of seventy-one years.

WILLIAM WISLICENUS, director of the chem-
ical laboratory of the University of Tiibingen,
died on May 8, at the age of sixty-one years.

Dr. Epwin E. Stosson, editor of Science
Service, received the honorary degree of LL.D.
at the recent commencement of the University
of Kentucky.

Dr. W. S. THayer, formerly professor of
medicine in the Johns Hopkins Medical School,
has been elected an overseer of Harvard Uni-
versity.

Dr. Orro Kuorz has been elected an hon-
orary overseas member of the Norman Lockyer
Observatory in England.

M. Henri Lespecue has been elected a mem-
ber of the Paris Academy of Sciences in the
section of mathematics to succeed the late
M. C. Jourdan. M. Lesbegues has recently
been elected professor at the Collége de France.

Av the meeting of the Royal Society of
Edinburgh on June 19, the Keith Prize (1919-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

1921) was presented to Professor R. A. Samp-
son for his astronomical researches, and the
Neill Prize (1919-1921) to Sir Edward
Sharpey Schafer, for his contributions to our
knowledge of physiology.

ArT a special meeting of the directing board
of the National University of Mexico, it was
voted to grant an honorary diploma to Dr
8. Ramon y Cajal. The Mexican Academy of
Medicine has appointed him an honorary mem-
ber.

THE second year’s work of the Ameriean
School in France for Prehistoric Studies began
the first week in July at La Quina, Charente,
under the directorship of Dr. Charles Peabody.
The retiring director, Professor George Grant
MacCurdy, will visit Switzerland, Austria,
Czechoslovakia, Germany, Belgium and Eng-
land before returning to Yale University in
September.

Dr. Joun L. Srenquist, who has been as-
sistant to the director of reference and research
in the Department of Education of New York
City, has been appointed director of the new
Bureau of Educational Measurements, Statis-
ties and Research for the city of Baltimore,

where he will assume his duties about Sep-
tember 1.

Dr. Epwarp A. Sprrzka has been appointed
district medical officer, Second District, U. S.
Veterans’ Bureau. The Second District em-
braces the state of New York, New Jersey and
Connecticut.

Hucu M. Henvon, formerly instructor in
metallurgy at Case School of Applied Science,
has opened an office as consulting engineer in
Cleveland.

Proressor Herbert H. WHeETZzEL, who has
been head of the department of plant pathol-
ogy since its organization in the State College
of Agriculture at Cornell University, has been
relieved from the leadership at his own urgent
solicitation in order that he may devote his
time exclusively to teaching and research.

PROFESSOR JOEL STEBBINS, of the University
of Illinois, who, as was reported early in the
spring, has been appointed professor of astron-
omy and director of the Washburn Observatory

JULY 21, 1922]

at the University of Wisconsin, succeeding
Professor G. C. Comstock, retired, took up his
new work July 1. Professor Comstock has
been director of the observatory since 1889 and
has reached the age of retirement. He has been
on the faculty since 1887, and was dean of the
Graduate School from 1906 to 1920.

Proressor Tracy HE. Hazen, of Barnard
College, Columbia University, sailed from New
York on June 21 for Buenaventura, Columbia.
Early in July he expects to join the expedition
of Dr. Francis W. Pennell and Mr. Ellsworth
Killip for botanical exploration of the Cor-
dillera Central of the Andes, returning to New
York in September.

Proressor J. A. Detuersen, of the Univer-
sity of Illinois, will take a year’s leave of ab-
sence during which he will devote himself to
the study of the inheritance of disturbances of
orientation.

Proressor JUNE EK. Downey, head of the
department of psychology of the University
of Wyoming, has been granted leave of ab-
sence for the next academic year and will
spend the year in study and travel, part of
the time abroad. Miss Louisa C. Wagoner will
serve as chairman of the department during
Professor Downey’s absence and will be assist-
ed by Donald A. Laird of the University of
Towa.

DurineG the week of July 24 to 28, Professor
H. 8. Jennings, of the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, will give before the summer session of
the Colorado State Normal School at Gunni-
son, Colorado, a series of five lectures on “Ad-

ventures in research on development and evo- ~

lution.”

Tue following popular lectures in physies
are being given this summer at the University
of Illinois:

June 22, Production of sound by the applica-
tion of heat: Professor C. T. Knipp.

June 29, Relativity: Discussion of phenomena:
Associate Professor J. Kunz.

July 6, Recording of sound on photographic
films and its application to talking motion pic-
tures: Professor J. Tykociner.

July 18, Wireless telegraph: H. A. Brown.

July 20, Fatigue of metals: Professor H. F.
Moore.

SCIENCE 73

July 27, Theories of magnetism: Assistant
Professor E. H. Williams.

August 3, The tones from bells: Professor F. R.
Watson.

Tue second lecture of the series on physics
in industry, arranged by the London Institute
of Physics, was given on July 4 in the hall of
the Institution of Electrical Engineers, by Sir
J. Alfred Ewing, whose subject was “The
physicist in engineering practice, with special
reference to applications of thermodynamics.”

Own June 7 a lecture was given by Professor
A. F. Holleman, of Amsterdam, at the Impe-
rial College of Science and Technology, under
the auspices of the University of London, en-
titled “Recent researches on substitution in the
benzene nucleus.”

Tue fifth international Neo-Malthusian and
Birth Control Conference was held in London
on July 11-14, under the presidency of Dr.
C. V. Drysdale. Many delegates from abroad
were present and the discussions were arranged
to take place in several sections. A visit to
Dorking was arranged to the birthplace of the
Reverend T. R. Malthus.

WE learn from Nature that the formal open-
ing of the newly established Metallografiska
Institutet of Stockholm has recently taken
place. The new institute is under the direc-
tion of Dr. Carl Benedicks, whose work on the
physical chemistry of metals is well known.
An inaugural address was delivered by Pro-
fessor Arrhenius, who referred to the inter-
national character of scientific research, as
shown by the presence of foreign representa-
tives at the ceremony, and by the review of
the history of metallography contained in the
address of Dr. Benedicks.

THe Italian Royal Committee for Scientific
Marine Investigations has assumed charge of
the Zoological Station at Rovigno, Istria,
which was formerly under German administra-
tion, and the station is now in active work,
under Professor Raffaele Issel as director.

Tue Honorary Advisory Council for Scien-
tifie and Industrial Research of Canada has
made a grant to the department of chemistry
of Macdonald College for an investigation of
soil acidity. The various methods proposed
for the measurement of soil acidity will be

74 SCIENCE

compared, surveys in Quebee will be carried
on, and the relation of acidity to crop growth
will be studied with a view to deciding whether
full or partial correction of acidity should be
attempted in soils devoted to specifie crops or
crop rotations.

Tue Public Health Institute of Chicago has
undertaken to finance the cooperative research
between the University of Wisconsin Medical
School and the Chemical Department of
Northwestern University, which in the past has
been supported by appropriations from the
United States Interdepartmental Social Hy-
giene Board. This research which has been
devoted to attempts to improve the treatment
of syphilis of the central nervous system has
been directed by Dr. W. Lee Lewis and Dr.
Frank C. Whitmore, of Northwestern Univer-
sity, and Dr. A. S. Loevenhart and Dr. W. F.
Lorenz, of the University of Wisconsin. The
Public Health Institute has appropriated
$21,600 to both universities for the coming
year.

A party from the department of zoology of
the Louisiana State University at Baton Rouge
spent several days during the latter part of
June in an exploring and collecting trip in the
waters of the gulf east and south of the Missis-
sippi River delta. Through the courtesy of the
Honorable M. L. Alexander, state commis-
sioner of conservation, the party had the use
of the yacht of the commission, the Alexan-
dria, and her crew. The course followed was
from New Orleans through Lakes Pontchar-
train and Borgne and Mississippi Sound to
the Chandeleur Islands; and a number of the
islands en route, including several of the fed-
eral game preserves, were visited and explored.
It is hoped that this may be the first of a series
of annual trips for the purpose of studying at
first hand not only the bird life but the rich
coelenterate, arthropod, molluscan and _ fish
fauna of this fertile region. The members of
the party were Mr. Robert Glenk, curator of
the Louisiana State Museum at New Orleans,
who initiated the trip; Mr. Perey Viosea, Jr.,
the biologist of the Fisheries Division of the
Conservation Commission; Dr. E. H. Behre,
Miss A. M. Fuller, W. H. Browning, J. R.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1488

Fowler and Miss Jessie Chambers, all of the
department of zoology of the State University.

Tue Paris correspondent of the Journal of
Industrial and Engineering Chemistry writes
that the French Senate is now considering a
first draft of a law organizing an “Office
national des recherches scientifiques, idustri-
elles et agricoles.” This organization is mod-
eled on the National Research Council of the
United States. This plan is said to have been
fought from the first by the chamber, which
sees in it a duplication of the laboratories of
the teaching establishments of the state. It has
been decided that the part of the new office
would be one of coordination of the dif-
ferent laboratories, not only of the state but
also of private industry. There have been
established in France some laboratories analo-
gous to the Mellon Institute, and these organ-
izations would cooperate in the work of this
office.

Ow the occasion of the annual inspection by
the General Board of the British National
Physical Laboratory on June 29, as we learn
from the London Times, some eight hundred
guests were invited to Teddington, where they
had the opportunity of seeing some of the
work that is being done. All the various de-
partments were open to view, and the atten-
tion of the visitors was drawn to many exhibits
with features of special interest. In the aero-
dynamics department one of the wind channels
was engaged in measuring the distribution of
pressure over the wings of a model aeroplane,
and in another the discontinuous flow of air
was rendered visible by a smoke cloud. In the
new extension that has been added to the engi-
neering department machines were at work for
testing the efficiency of spur gears and of the
transmission gears and driving chains of
motor-cars. In another new building devoted
to the testing of concrete a steel colmun cased
in conerete, which had failed in the testing
machine under a load of fifty-five tons, was to
be seen side by side with an exactly similar
column not so cased, which had not been able
to sustain more than four tons. Close to this
building is a new underground range in which
a small projectile is made by an arrangement

JULY 21, 1922]

of electrical contacts to photograph itself at
regular intervals during its flight to the target.

THE British commissioners of 1851 announce
the following appointments to senior student-
ships for 1922:

J. Sybrandt Buck, B.Se. (Liverpool), research
student in chemistry, of the University of Liver-
pool.

Geoffrey T. R. Hill, B.Se. (London), research
student in aeronautics, of the University of Lon-
don, University College, late experimental engi-
neer and pilot to Handley Page, Limited.

Albert Edward Ingham, B.A. (Cambridge),
research student in mathematics, of the Univer-
sity of Cambridge.

John Edward Jones, M.Se. (Victoria), lecturer
in mathematics, of the University of Manchester.

Cecil Edgar Tilley, B.Se. (Adelaide and Syd-

ney), research student in geology, of the Univer-
sity of Cambridge.
The senior studentships are intended to give a
few selected students of exceptional promise
and proved capacity for original work the
opportunity of devoting their whole time for a
period of not less than two years to the prose-
cution of scientific research. The studentships
are of the value of £400 per annum (with addi-
tional allowances. The awards are made by
selection from among candidates under thirty
years of age who are recommended to the com-
missioners through the executive authorities of
institutions invited to make recommendations.
The student is required to devote himself to
research in some branch of pure or applied
science.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Dr. Leon L. Sotomon, New Orleans, has
announced that he will give the University of
Louisville the sum of $500 annually, for use
in the medical research laboratory of the uni-
versity. This fund will be known as the Solo-
mon Fund.

THE resignation of J. C. Jones, president of
the University of Missouri, has been accepted
by the curators of the institution, effective
at the close of the college year. Dr. Jones has
been a member of the faculty for thirty-eight
years and desired to be relieved of the respon-
sibility, as he is now sixty-six years old.

SCIENCE. 75

Prorsessor Mito 8S. Ketcuum, professor of
civil engineering at the University of Penn-
sylvania, has been appointed dean of the engi-
neering school of the University of Illinois and
director of its extension work.

Proressor Earn B. Miuyuarp, professor of
materials of engineering, and Professor Har-
rison W. Hayward, associate professor of the-
oretical chemistry, have been appointed assist-
ant directors of the division of industrial co-
operation and research of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology.

Dr. E. S. Conxurn, head of the department
of psychology of the University of Oregon,
has been made acting dean of the Graduate
School for the session of 1922-1923, in the ab-
sence of Dean George Rebec, who will devote
the year to travel and study in Europe.

Proressor Epwarp C. Stonz, of the depart-
ment of chemistry of Trinity College, Hart-
ford, Conn., who has been on leave of absence
during the past year, has resigned, and Dr.
Charles B. Hurd, of Colby College, Waterville,
Me., has been appointed his successor.

Mr. H. J. Warne, dean of the faculty of
medicine of the University of London, has
been elected vice-chancellor of the university
for 1922-1923, in succession to Sir Sydney
Russell- Wells.

Dr. Huco OseRMAIER has been appointed to
the new professorship of prehistoric arche-
ology at the University of Madrid.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

WHICH IS THE HIGHEST WATER FALL IN
THE WORLD?

To THe Epitor or Science: Mr. Hardy’s re-
cent note concerning the reputed height of the
Kaieteur Falls in British Guiana raises the

‘moot question as to which really is the highest

water fall on earth.

My physiographic studies in the Yosemite
region of California, which is par excellence
the land of water falls have led me to collect
data on water falls in different part of the
world for purposes of comparison. My infor-
mation still is far from complete—as necessarily

76 SCIENCE

it must be in view of the scattered nature of
the references to water falls in the literature,
and in view of our still imperfect knowledge
of the mountainous portions of several con-
tinents—nevertheless I venture to offer here a
few facts and figures that may be of interest
in this connection. If more accurate data are
available, it is hoped that this note will be
instrumental in inducing others to bring them
forth.

The Kaieteur Falls, which are reported to
be 804 feet high, are probably the highest of
their particular class—the class of broad,
voluminous cataracts to which the Niagara
Falls, the Victoria Falls and several others
belong. The Wooloomumbi, on a branch of
Macleay River, Australia, is about 900 feet
high, but its volume is so much smaller that it
searcely belongs in this class.

The highest water falls in the world are of
the slender “bridal veil’ type. Among them
the Yosemite Falls appear to stand foremost.
The entire chain of falls and cascades which
the waters of Yosemite Creek make in their
descent from the upland to the floor of the
Yosemite Valley is 2,565 feet high. The indi-
vidual measurements are: upper fall, 1,430
feet; intermediate cascade, 815 feet; lower fall,
320 feet.

However, it may be questioned whether it is
fair, in making comparisons with other water
falls, to consider the two Yosemite Falls and
their connecting cascades as forming together
a single unit. Those who would champion the
claim to first place of some other noble water
fall—and there is no little pride, national,
state and local, involved in this matter—might
perhaps properly object to such procedure.
For the cascades between the upper and lower
Yosemite Falls, however beautiful they may be,
consist only of small drops, chutes and rapids,
and their descent of 815 feet is distributed
over a horizontal distance of about 2,000 feet.
There are elsewhere many other cascades of a
similar kind that are not generally considered
worthy of being classed as water falls.

It is to be noted, however, that, even if the
point be conceded and the cascades be ruled
out, the upper Yosemite Fall, taken by itself,
still remains far in the lead as the highest
single, unbroken leap of water in the world.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

This leap measures 1,360 feet in height.

There is, so far as I can ascertain, only one
water fall that exceeds the upper Yosemite in
height—the Sutherland Fall, in New Zealand.
It measures 1,904 feet in height but it is broken
about midway by projecting ledges and makes
no clear leap of more than 900 feet. The falls
of Gavarnie, in the Pyrenees, are, according to
some authorities, 1,385 feet high, but they con-
sist of braided streamlets that slide down the
seams of an irregularly sculptured cliff and do
not fall clear through any notable height.

It seems to me that it would be a matter of
no little satisfaction to American geographers
—and, indeed, to all American citizens who
take pride in the great natural features of their
country—if the question of the highest water
fall could be definitely settled, and I, therefore,
wish to express the hope that others who may
have reliable data on this subject will consent
to make them known. Personally, I should feel
greatly indebted for any information they may
be willing to supply.

F. E. Marrues
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY,
WASHINGTON, D. C.

A CABINET FOR COLORED PAPERS

Facruities for storing the stock of large
sheets of colored papers in the psychological
laboratory usually fall considerably short of
the technical requirements. This is true of all
papers that have been surfaced on one side for
use in chromatic or achromatic comparisons and
more specifically for working out color equa-
tions. Such papers should be readily accessi-
ble for selection, should therefore be arranged
in relatively short series, and should be prop-
erly classified and indexed. To these ends it is
customary to store the papers in a yertical
cabinet built up of some two dozen shallow
drawers of suitable dimensions.

On account of the unequal treatment of the
two surfaces these papers have a tendency to
curl upward. In almost any arrangement of
drawers this will lead to tearing, rolling up and
final destruction of some of the material in
the cabinet. It is a particularly common occur-
rence in cabinets built to accommodate papers
with the short side toward the front and con-
structed without partitions between the draw-

Juny 21, 1922]

ers. What psychologist has not experienced
some form of emotion when he has envisaged
the pile of trash and supertrash accumulated
behind the drawers at the periodical laboratory
housecleaning festivity! The affective experi-
ence of the conscientious director of the labora-
tory is further embellished by the knowledge
that this trash is expensive to replace and
wasteful of energy and time spent in reorgan-
izing the contents of the cabinet.

In an earlier attempt to prevent mutilation
of papers in this wise a cardboard of medium
weight was placed in each drawer on top of
the papers. Instructions printed in bold char-
acters advised students and others to replace it
before closing the drawer. But since failure
to heed the advice did not entail consequences
similar to the infraction of a natural law, treat-
ment of the situation by suggestion was un-
successful. The next step was to tack a piece
of cardboard over the back of the drawer and
reaching forward about eight or ten inches.
While this device proved to be a great help,
it did not prevent catching and rolling back
at the front of the drawer when it was pulled
out.

The best solution of the difficulty seems to
lie in a very simple arrangement which if em-
bodied in the original construction of a cabinet
ought to be less expensive than a case of draw-
ers, but it can also be installed where drawers
are already in use. In the simpler plan the
drawers are slides that fit into grooves at the
side of the cabinet and are made with strips
14% inches high at the front and a trifle lower
at the back, but affording ample room for the
standard-sized sheets. On each slide a heavy
cardboard cover is hinged at the back with
heavy binder’s cloth over the top of the strip
and is cut large enough to fall just within the
front strip or face of the slide. A leather
“pull” or flap by means of which the cover can
be readily lifted is fastened to it near the
front. The apparent inconvenience of having
to pull the drawer almost entirely out before
the cover can be sufficiently lifted to extract
the papers is more of an advantage than a
hindrance in view of the well-known fact that
most of the untidiness of cabinets is due to the
careless extraction and introduction of papers

SCIENCE 77

with drawers insufficiently opened. Papers
that lie beneath are thereby frequently pulled
or pushed back and crumpled up. If the eab-
inet were constructed so that the grooves at
the sides extended six inches or more, or in
other words if the sides of the cabinet were
built six or more inches wider than the depth
of the slides, the slides could be held in place
while the covers were lifted and the papers
handled, provided that the remaining slides
were always systematically returned to their
full extent.

A neat and carefully arranged “color cab-
inet” is always an asset to the well-appointed
laboratory and there seems to be no reason why
we should not begin at this point to inculcate
the ideals of order and system in the minds of
our young scientists and at the same time to
increase the efficieney of the laboratory accord-
ing to those standards for which the newer
generation is so valiantly fighting!

Curistian A. RuCKMICK

WELLESLEY COLLEGE

THE HUMAN YOLK SAC

Somer time ago there came under my ob-
servation two specimens of early human twins,
both of which showed a direct developmental
relation to single yolk sacs. For record I pub-
lished a brief note? announcing the discovery
of this important condition and emphasizing
the single-ovum origin which it implies; in
addition were appended several deductions or
speculations of secondary importance. In a
recent issue? of this journal Professor F. T.
Lewis has raised certain objections which de-
mand consideration that the intent of my
former condensed account be not misunder-
stood.

The second specimen described in that pub-
lication had a single yolk sae and yolk stalk
connected to one embryo of the twin pair; the
other embryo lacked both stalk and sae. Pro-
fessor Lewis believes this indicates the early
obliteration of one of the originally paired
stalks. My interpretation was that an early un-
equal division of the embryonic mass had left

1 Anatomical Record, Vol. 23, pp. 245-251.
2 Science, Vol. 55, p. 478.

78 aa SCIENCE

one member essentially without a sac, as such.
This conclusion was based on the following
facts:

1. There is no external evidence of a second
yolk sae or stalk although the most careful
search was made for them.

2. The umbilical cord lacks a yolk-stalk com-
ponent, as proved microscopically by serial
sections.

3. The single yolk sae shows no indication
of a second stump, nor are its vessels sugges-
tively arranged as if at any previous time in
relation to a second stalk.

4. Although the yolk stalk normally be-
comes separated from the gut in embryos
slightly younger, its connection with the yolk
sac is retained until later. (On this point
Professor Lewis’s criticism unintentionally car-
ries the erroneous implication that it is even
remarkable that the other stalk had retained
its connection with the sae until this period—
and hence the early disappearance of one is
entirely obvious!).

5. The yolk stalk, with its vessels and invest-
ing tissue, usually is recognizable until a con-
siderably later period than the six weeks’ em-
bryo in question; Minot records that it persists
beyond the fourth month but seems to have
disappeared by the sixth; Lénnberg states that
portions of its vessels may be found rarely at
birth; and in any case they are easily demon-
strable in embryos five or more times the size
of my specimen.

Evaluating these several points I was led to
favor an early primary separation, rather than
a late secondary one with the coincidence of
precocious disjunction of a stalk and its simul-
taneously precocious disappearence. After
thorough reconsideration I still incline to the
same opinion though recognizing fully the
possibility of the alternative interpretation
which I myself had considered but too sum-
marily dismissed without mention. But which-
ever interpretation is correct, the real objective
of the communication is equally supported, for
both refer to a single-ovum origin.

In the further discussion of this specimen
several deductions were drawn as to the physi-
ological import of absence of the yolk sac. No
implication of morphological development, ex-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

cept mention of the ingrowth of bloodvessels,
was meant, and I supposed the context made
this clear; if not, several statements must have
seemed as revolutionary to others as they did
to Professor Lewis. When, therefore, I spoke
of the yolk sac as “not essential to the growth
of an embryo or the proper differentiation of
its parts,’ I was merely referring to the
“srowth” (that is, increase in size) of an em-
bryo and its organs, and the coincident ‘“dif-
ferentiation” (or orderly progress) of its
developing parts. The sole aim was to draw
attention to the physiological insignificance of
the yolk sac as related to growth. This is
attested by the remainder of the same sen-
tence: “indeed, the embryo in question is
slightly larger than its twin... ,” and again
further on: “In the earliest human embryos
known, when it might be of real use, it (the
yolk sac) is a simple entodermal sac containing
masses of coagulum; growth to a conspicuous
size is attained relatively late, long after ade-
quate nutritional relations with the mother
have been thoroughly established.” Little did
I suspect that any one would infer an intended
reference to initial morphological development
in its strict sense. Of course, the gut and
allantois had to form from entoderm some-
where, and the yolk sac, broadly speaking, is
the undoubted source, yet it is entirely con-
ceivable that essentially all the yolk sae, as a
significant sac, might be dispensed with and
still the gut would arise from entoderm which
for the most part normally forms its roof.
With this in mind I wrote that the fission “was
presumably such that one received all, or
essentially all, the cells destined to form a yolk
sac,” ete. Again, that I recognized the possi-
bility of a rudimentary or abortive sac is seen
in a later sentence: “That tiny vascular
anlages of yolk-sac ancestry actually existed
. 1s of course conceivable.”

In short, my aim was remote from the heresy
of denying the gut an entodermal, yolk-sac
origin; on the contrary it was to re-emphasize
from the functional side precisely what Pro-
fessor Lewis has designated as a platitude:
“But it is universally recognized that the yolk
sae does its work in early stages, and . . . usu-
ally persists as a functionless rudiment until

JULY 21, 1922

birth .. .” When, therefore, the foregoing
complete explanation was furnished Professor
Lewis he generously replied: “The chief inter-
est in anatomical publications is in the observa-
tions they record; and as to the interpretation
of the unusual specimens which you described
so clearly, we seem to be in entire agreement.”
Lesuiz B. AREY
NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY
MeEpiIcaL SCHOOL

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Reptiles of the World. By RaymMonp Dirmars.
New York, The Macmillan Company, 1922.
pp. xi plus 373; 90 plates, 1 colored.

This book is a reprint: of the first edition
(1910), the only change being in the arrange-
ment of plates. I believe now, as I did in 1911
(Scrmncz, N. S., XXXIV, pp. 54-55), that it
is an excellent popular account of a group
that has been neglected by writers on natural
history, that it is rather well proportioned, and
that it contains much of interest to professional
zoologists and herpetologists.

I made a few rather unimportant criticisms
in the review of the first edition, viz., a few
typographical errors, absence of plate refer-
ences, too few headings, the amount of space
devoted to the habits of captive specimens, and
an antiquated nomenclature. Unfortunately,
since the text is an exact reprint, these criti-
cisms still apply, and it must now be added
that the book is decidedly out-of-date. Twelve
years see many additions to our knowledge of
even those groups which receive relatively little
attention, of which the Reptilia is one: more
forms are known, more information upon habits
and distribution is available, and the accepted
nomenclature is different than in 1910. Much
of the new information might well find a place
even in a popular book.

It.is not because I am interested in systematic
herpetology that I protest against the retention
in works of this kind of an obsolete nomencla-
ture. Admittedly it is not important in itself
to the amateur naturalist whether the racers
are called Bascanion, Zamenis or Coluber, and
it may be granted that the use of the latest
accepted names would often confuse the ama-

SCLENCE 79

teur naturalist or beginning student who has.
become familiar with the forms under other
names. However, it must also be admitted that
the retention of old names in recent popular
natural histories and text-books makes it
equally difficult for the student to read the
modern literature on particular groups. In
1910 there was some excuse for retaining an
out-of-date nomenclature, since there was not at
that time a recent check-list of the North Amer-
ican reptiles; but the present edition woufd be
much more valuable if the nomenclature were
based upon the excellent check-list of Stejneger
and Barbour, with the names used in the earlier
edition given as synonyms.

In one respect the book is decidedly im-
proved. The total number of pages, including
plates, has been reduced from 463 to 419 by
printing the plates on both sides of the page.
The first edition was too bulky, and the present
one would be improved by the use of a thinner
text paper.

As I pointed out in 1911, there is a distinet
need for a general book upon the natural his-
tory of reptiles. This one goes a long way
towards meeting this need; but it is sincerely
to be hoped that before another printing the
old plates will be discarded and the subject
matter brought up to date.

ALEXANDER G. RUTHVEN

SPECIAL ARTICLES
THE MEASUREMENT OF EXTREMELY
SMALL CAPACITIES AND
INDUCTANCES
Hystop and Carman! have recently described
an undamped wave method of measuring small
changes of capacity such as are obtained by
introducing liquids as the dielectrics in the
capacity of an oscillating circuit. Thomas?
has applied this same beat-note oscillating cir-
cuit method to the measurement of the capacity
of transmission line insulators.
The authors described? a method of using
the hot-cathode Braun tube as the detector of

1 Phys. Rev., XV, p. 243, 1920.
2 Electrical Journal, XVIII, p. 349, 1921.
3 Phys. Rev., XVIII, p. 331.

80 SCIENCE

frequency change, indicating that the method
is sufficiently sensitive to afford a means of
detecting such small changes of capacity as
are caused by introducing a gas as the dielectric
instead of vacuum.

The method is particularly applicable to the
determination of the dielectric constants of
gases as it will be seen from the following that
only the difference between the constant and
unity is measured.

Since the authors started the above investiga-
tion L. M. Hull of the Bureau of Standards
has described? the use of the hot-cathode Braun
tube to determine frequency ratios.

Two oscillating circuits are made to deflect
a cathode beam in two directions at right
angles to each other. The combined deflections
produce one of the well-known Lissajous’ fig-
ures. If the two cireuits are of exactly the
same frequency, say 500,000 cycles, the result-
ing figure will in general be an ellipse. A
change of capacity sufficient to cause a fre-
queney change of 5 cycles per second will cause
the ellipse to revolve 5 times per second. The
change of frequency, if small, may thus be
counted directly. The frequency of the master
cireuit must be kept constant during the time
of observation. This can be done.

Let C, be a portion of the capacity in the
one oscillating circuit and let it be so arranged
that the dielectric may be either vacuum or a
gas of dielectric constant K.

Then

1
he

Qn L(C + C,)
where F is the frequency and C is the capacity
of the remainder of the cireuit, distributed
capacity included. If the introduction of a gas
in the condenser C, causes a change f in the
frequency due to additional capacity AC, we
shall have
F i
Ia/L(C + C, + AC)

Eliminating Z and solving for AC
f2F—f)(C4C,)
(Ge ip)

4 Proc. Inst. Radio Engr., 9, p. 130.

1

[Vou. LVI, No. 14388

Neglecting f as small compared with F

2f(C + C,)
AC NRT aa

Since
KG C, (& — 1)

2f(C + C,)
C.F

K—1=

It is readily seen that the largest error is in
the determination of the initial capacities. The
preceding equation also indicates that only the
excess of the dielectric constant over unity is
measured. Should it be found possible to sur-
round the entire capacity with the gas the above
equation reduces to

pre ay
F
and the method would then be one of quite
remarkable accuracy.

If the capacity be kept constant and the
inductance varied, the first two equations may
be written

; all
7 2ny/LC
Fenty peeteumees De AES
2nv/ (LZ + AL)C
where C is the entire capacity of the cireuit.
Eliminating C we have

2fL

F

If the master cireuit ean be kept constant
for 60 seconds, and such has already been ac-
complished, a change of inductance of the order
of 1 part in 10° can be detected.

The ability to detect so small a change in an
inductance makes it now possible to use the
inductance as the basis of an ether-drift experi-
ment similar to that of Trouton and Noble.®
Even though the experiment be doomed to null
effect it is nevertheless necessary that it be
carried out.

The above method may also be applied to
the determination of the magnetic permeabili-
ties of gases.

Na

H. G. Tasker
L. T. Jones

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS,
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

5 Proc. Roy. Soc., 72 (1903), p. 132.

JULY 21, 1922]

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL

SOCIETY
(Continued)

SECTION OF CELLULOSE CHEMISTRY
Harold Hibbert, chairman
G. J. Esselen, Jr., secretary
Report of the Standard Cellulose Committee.
Report of the Analytical Methods Committee.
Report of the Viscosity Measurement Committee.

The effect of concentrated hydrochloric acid on
different celluloses: E. C. SHERRARD and A. W.
FROEHLKE. <A preliminary report on an investi-
gation to differentiate celluloses from various
species of woods by observing the action of con-
centrated hydrochloric acid by of the
polariscope. Characteristic curves are given
showing changes in specific rotation. Cotton and
spruce cellulose give similar curves, although it
has been shown that mannose is present in spruce
cellulose and absent in cotton. For such a com-
parison a standard cellulose is required.

The effect of salts upon the acid hydrolysis of
wood: EK. C. SHERRARD and W. H. Gaucer. In a
search for a material to act as a catalyst in the
hydrolysis of wood a number of salts and acids
have been tried. The effect of these added mate-
rials upon sugar and alcohol yields, as well as the
effect produced by varying some of the conditions
under which the hydrolysis was carried out, are
given in the report.

Sugar formation in a sulfite digester: E. C.
SHERRARD and C. F. Suum. This paper contains
charts showing the rate of formation of sugar
during the conversion of white spruce into sulfite
pulp by the Mitscherlich and _ Ritter-Kellner
processes. Time and steam pressure appear to
exert the greatest influence on sugar formation.

Ethyl alcohol from western larch: E. C. SiueEr-
RARD. This report describes the preparation of
ethyl alcohol from the difficultly fermentable
galactose obtained from western larch. Yields of
sugar and alcohol are given for the hydrolysis of
the water-soluble portion, the residue remaining
after water extraction and the original larch
wood. It is pointed out that western lareh is the
best source of ethyl aleohol of any wood yet
studied.

Some of the products obtained in the hydrolysis
of white spruce wood with dilute sulphuric acid
under steam pressure: E. C. SHERRARD and G. W.
Bianco. A study of products formed in the
hydrolysis of wood and wood cellulose has fur-
nished valuable information concerning this reac-
tion and the composition of these two substances.

means

SCIENCE 81

Approximately 20 per cent. of the wood cellulose
is hydrolyzed with the formation of mannose,
glucose, galactose, xylose and arabinose. Mannose
and glucose represent nearly two thirds of these
sugars. Spruce cellulose prepared by the Cross
and Bevan method yields mannose, glucose and
pentoses on hydrolysis with dilute hydrochloric
acid. This indicates a marked difference in the
chemical constitution of wood cellulose and of
cotton cellulose. The latter does not yield man-
nose or pentose sugars on hydrolysis.

The distribution of methoxyl in the products of
wood distillation: L. F, Hawury and 8. 8. Aryar.
At the last meeting of the society it was reported
that the methoxyl had been determined in the
charcoal, settled tar, dissolved tar, pyroligneous
acid and gas, from the distillation of maple wood
both treated and untreated with sodium carbonate.
This work has been continued to include oak and
one softwood and also one other catalyzer, phos-
phorie acid. In the case of oak and the softwood
the increase in methyl alcohol due to sodium ear-
bonate is not balanced by the decrease of methoxyl
in the charcoal and the dissolved tar alone (as
was the case with maple) but also by a decrease
in the methane in the gas. The increase in methyl
alcohol due to phosphoric acid was accompanied
by decreases in the methoxyl of all the other
products.

The chemistry of wood. V: G. J. Rrvrer and
L. C. Furck. This article records the analysis of
eight more species of wood in continuation of sim-
ilar previous work. No very striking variations
in composition were noted. In a study of the dis-
tribution of the pentosans it was found that both
alpha and beta cellulose contained pentosans, the
alpha cellulose containing the higher proportion.
The distribution of the methoxyl groups was also
studied, and it was found that in general the
lignin of softwood contained a greater proportion
of the total methoxyl of the wood than the lignin
from hardwoods.

The chemistry of wood. IV. The analysis of
western white pine and eucalyptus: S. A. MAHoop
and D. E. Caste. This paper represents a con-
tinuation of the investigation of the chemistry of
wood carried on by the U. S. Forest Products
Laboratory. In addition to those constants deter-
mined by Schorger methods are given in this
paper for the determination of alpha, beta and
gamma cellulose and of lignin. The values ob-
tained for western white pine are in the main
similar to those obtained for other conifers, while
the values for eucalyptus do not vary greatly from
the values previously obtained on broad-leafed

82 SCIENCE

trees. Since, according to the values obtained in
this series, the woods fall into two groups of
fairly uniform composition, depending upon
whether they are from broad-leafed trees or from
conifers, the suggestions are made that a more
detailed study of the splitting products, particular-
ly the cellulose and lignin, of the woods of these
two groups be made.

Some observations on the determination of cellu-
lose in woods. II: S. A. Manoop. In a previous
communication the author showed that the yields
of cellulose from woods obtained by Schorger’s
modification of the Cross and Bevan method of
cellulose determination are higher than those ob-
tained by Seiber and Walter’s modification. It
was suggested that this difference might be due
(GD) comma, concentration of the
chlorine in contact with the sample or (2) to a
difference in temperature at which the chlorina-
tions are made. The present paper covers an
investigation of these two points. It has been
found that the yield of cellulose obtained by the
Seiber and Walter method of chlorination can be
made to accord with that obtained by the Schorger
method by diluting the chlorine used with an
equal volume of air. There appears to be no
difference in the percentage of cellulose obtained
by the Seiber and Walter method when chlorina-
tion takes place at zero and at room temperature.
The Willard crucible has been found to be more
suitable than the Gooch erucible with the fiber pad,
as proposed by Seiber and Walter, for making
chlorinations of cellulosic materials. The results
show that the lower yield of cellulose obtained
by the Seitber and Walter method of chlorination
is due only to too concentrated a stream of chlo-
rine and not to too high a chlorination tempera-
ture.

difference in

Preparation of a ‘‘standard cellulose’’: W. O.
MivscHERLING.

Synthesis of derivatives relating to polysac-
charides: Haroup Hippert and Haronp S. Hitt.
Bromacetaldehyde has with
mannitol, glycerin, glycerin brom-hydrin and vari-
ous glycols. The bromine atom in the resulting
cylie derivatives may be replaced by hydroxyl by
boiling with dilute alkali. In the case of glycerin
a bieylic derivative is apparently formed at the
same time. The condensation products are being
subjected to a careful examination in view of their
relationship to the anhydro-sugars and polysac-
charides.

been condensed

Synthesis and properties of cylic acetal deriva-
tives: Haronp Hippert and Joun A. Trim. Par-

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1438

tition experiments carried out on the condensation
of a mixture of one mol. each of a 1:2 and a 1:3
glycol with one mol. of an aldehyde show that in
the various cases investigated a much higher yield
is obtained of the six- than of the five-membered
ring compound. Also, the stability of the latter
towards dilute acids is much less than that of the
former. Similar experiments are being carried
out using a mixture of one mol. each of two alde-
hydes with one mol. of a glycol. The nature of
the products resulting from the condensation of
various aldehydes (1 mol.) with glycerol (1 mol.)
is also under investigation as well as the part
played by the catalyst in bringing about such
condensations.

Constitution of sedoheptose anhydride and its
relation to cellulose: Harotp Hippert. The con-
stitution of this anhydro-sugar first prepared by
Hudson and LaForge is probably represented by
dilactonyl-configuration for the follow-
ing reasons: It is stable towards mineral
acids so that the absence of an ethylene linking
may be assumed. The product is a mono-molecu-
lar, stable, crystalline derivative showing no ten-
dency in this respect
differing from the intra-moleeular condensation
product of a yA di-hydroxy aldehydo-derivative,
the outstanding feature of which, as found by the
writer, is its rapid ease of conversion into a poly-
morphic form. The evidence for this view could
be found in the oxidation of sedoheptose anhy-
dride to the acid, elimina-
tion of carbon should
be formed. Experiments with this object in view
are in progress. The properties of yA dihydroxy-
aldehyde derivatives are being examined, the first
under review, viz., 2:keto-5:6 dihydroxyhexane,
being found to yield a highly polymerized product
when submitted to the intra-molecular condensing
action of a small amount of a mineral acid.

Bh BST

towards polymerization,

from which, by

dioxide, levoglucosan

Symposium. The action of alkali and acid on
cellulose, wood and waste cellulosic material with
special reference to the production of cheap cattle

foods.

Joint symposium with division of organic chem-
istry on recent work on the constitution of starch
and cellulose.

SECTION OF PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY
T. G. Delbridge, chairman
W. A. Gruse, secretary
Volume changes in petroleum products: A. P.
BJERREGAARD. This paper will deal with some
peculiarities exhibited by petroleum oils under

JuLY 21, 1922

changes of atmospherie temperature conditions
when the oil is in tank cars. A set of expansion
coefficients that fit the observed phenomena will
be included.

The surface tension of petrolewm: C. K. FRAN-
cis and H. T. Bennert. The surface tension of
petroleum from different sections of the United
States and of the products derived from the vari-
ous crudes was determined in order to ascertain
whether a relation existed between the surface
tension and any other physical properties of the
oils. The surface tension of petroleum varies
almost directly with the specifie gravity, but is
influenced by the asphaltic content. The presence
of high boiling fractions and high viscosity
products tends to raise the surface tension of the
lighter petroleum products, such as gasoline and
naphtha. The small quantity of sulfur com-
pounds, amorphous and crystalline wax, fatty
acids and related substances commonly found in
petroleum products do not appear to appreciably
influence the surface tension. The surface ten-
sion at 85° F. of the substances examined varies
as follows:

Crude ..... . 28.8 ej by4
Gasoline -. 24.4 25.8
Naphtha . 26.3 29.2
Kerosene 30.7 31.2
Gas oil H Soul

Lubricating oil.. 2E36!0 37.5
Wiasxendistillate sees eee 33.6 36.2

The change in viscosity of oils with the temper-
ature: Winstow H. HerscHeEL. It is often neces-
sary to estimate the viscosity of an oil at one
temperature from an observation made at an-
other. While it is not convenient to do this by
equations, because no two petroleum oils are
alike, and the relation between viscosity and tem-
perature is complex, a graphical method has been
developed which it is believed is accurate enough
for commercial purposes. The method depends
upon the observed fact that the graphs of a log-
arithmie viscosity-temperature diagram will,
under certain conditions, meet at a point.

Some notes on the determination of the absolute
viscosity of petroleum oils: W. H. FuLWriLer and
C. W. Jorpan. In connection with the determina-
tion of absolute viscosity, of certain samples of
petroleum products, it was noted that the viscosi-
ties decreased when the sample had been left in
the viscosimeter for 24 hours. In other samples,
the viscosity increased on standing. Some data is
given showing the effect on viscosity of various
samples of petroleum, vegetable and animal oils.
Some suggestions are made as to the cause of this
phenomenon.

SCIENCE 83

Detonation characteristics of blends of aro-
matic and paraffin hydrocarbons: THOMAS
Mivetry, Jr., and T. A. Boyp. The compres-
sions to which aromatic hydrocarbons can be
subjected in internal-combustion engines without
detonation are very high as compared to the
initial compressions that can be employed when
paraffin hydrocarbons are used as fuel. Accurate
measurements have been made through a wide
range of relative composition of the tendency of
blends of these hydrocarbons to detonate in en-
gines. Values are given for the limiting com-
pression ratio at which the various blends will give
combustion that is free from detonation. The
new instrumentation used for the accurate meas-
urement of the degree of detonation occurring
during the combustion of the fuel mixture in the
engine is described.

The catalytic oxidation of insulating oils: C. J.
RopMan. Many oils used in electrical apparatus
for insulating purposes tend to slowly form ‘‘de-
posits’’ known to the trade as oil sludge. Ex-
periments have been carried out in both open and
closed systems to substantiate the view that
numerous substances may act continuously in
small quantities to materially assist in the forma-
tion of the undesirable sludge. Such substances
found somewhere in the transformer or circuit
breaker construction are: copper, brass, lead,
iron, tin, organie resins, oxidized asphaltie ‘‘
? and some loading materials such as mag-
nesia, calcia and a small proportion of certain
driers found in the protective paints. Properly
protected materials of electrical apparatus con-
struction are discussed as well as the desirability
of protecting the oil from oxygen contact.

Corrosion of petroleum refining equipment:
R. R. Marruews and P. A. Crospy. The authors
have shown in earlier papers that in refining Mid-
Continent petroleum in a_ so-ealled pipe still
hydrochloric acid was formed, due to hydrolysis
of the magnesium chloride in the brine associated
with the petroleum. Ammonia has been used in
the fractionating system to reduce the corrosion
caused by the acid. The cost has beeen small and
results gratifying. This paper shows’ that
hydrochloric acid is also produced when Mid-
Continent crude is shall stills ar-
ranged in series for continuous operation. The
aetion was especially noted in stills where the oil
temperatures were 175° ©. to 250° C., and where
bottom steam was used. The acid corrosion was
also noted in a heat exchanger where the outgoing
crude oil was not over 110° C. Evidently the acid
formation was small there, however, as the ex-

var-
nishes’

refined in

84 SCIENCE

changer was in use one and one half years before
a tube was corroded badly enough to give away.

Recent developments in the methods for the
extraction of gasoline from natural gas: FRED E.
Hosmer and F. M. Sermerr. The commercial
importance of the natural gas gasoline industry
is reviewed. The chemistry of natural gas is
briefly discussed. Two new methods of gasoline
extraction are described. The first is known as
the low pressure evaporation method, in which the
crude product is utilized to furnish refrigeration
for cooling the gas after being subjected to
pressure. The second method is known as the
crude oil absorption method. This method con-
sists in subjecting the gas to about fifty pounds
pressure, at ordinary temperatures, and absorbing
the gasoline in crude oil, carrying the saturation
to about 25 per cent.

Petroleum education: Epwin Dr Barr and
Frep W. Papecrerr. A survey of petroleum educa-
tion from the standpoint of pedagogy and prac-
tical application throughout the course of several
years. The paper is outlined as follows: I, Rela-
tion of the various branches of engineering to the
petroleum industry; II, Theoretical discussion of
petroleum education; III, Petroleum education at
the University of Oklahoma; IV, The future of
petroleum education. The writers realize that the
subject of petroleum education, especially from
the standpoint of chemistry, is in a formative
stage and it is hoped that the present paper will
stimulate discussion and that outlines of courses
in other institutions will be presented.

Sulfur compounds and the oxidation of petro-
leum oils: C. E. Waters. In general, mineral
lubricating oils which contain large percentages
of sulfur compounds are more easily oxidized
than those in which there is less sulfur. This is
true whether the oils are heated to 250° C., as in
the oxidation method for determining the ‘‘car-
bonization values’’ of oils, or when the oils are
exposed to sunlight. The precipitates formed on
diluting the oxidized oils with petroleum ether
contain higher percentages of sulfur than the
original oils. The residues left behind on erack-
ing and partially distilling off oils, as in the
Conradson carbon residue test, tend to retain the
sulfur in the oil. The bearing of these facts
upon the formation of sludge in transformer and
turbine oils and of carbon in internal combustion
engines is pointed out.

DIVISION OF WATER, SEWAGE AND SANITATION
A. M. Buswell, chairman
W. W. Skinner, secretary

The effect of temperature on the rate of reac-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

tion in water softening by the lime-soda ash
method: Epwarp Bartow, M. E. FLENTJE and
W. U. GALLAHER.

Observations on the mechanism
moval: A. M. BUSWELL.

Specific gravity of mineral waters by calcula-
tion: J. W. SALE.

Bottled mineral waters of unusual composition:
W. W. SKINNER, C. H. Bapcrer and J. W. SALE.
The composition of the domestic and foreign
bottled mineral waters examined in the water and
beverage laboratory of the Bureau of Chemistry
during the last fifteen years is discussed with
particular reference to the presence of unusual
constituents or of ordinary ‘constituents present
in unusual amounts. The majority of these waters
belong to one or another of the three following
types: First, those in which the dissolved min-
eral constituents consist chiefly of dissolved lime-
stone or of dolomitie limestone; second, of sodium
bicarbonate and sodium chloride; third, of either
or both sodium sulfate and magnesium sulfate.
Usually a determination of the acid radicals,
namely, nitrate, chloride, sulfate, carbonate and
bicarbonate, and of the basic radicals, iron, alum-
inum, calcium and magnesium, together with a
calculation of the sodium by difference, will fur-
nish sufficient knowledge as to the’ composition .
of a water, provided qualitative tests are made
for the more unusual constituents. ( ‘dinarily,
constituents other than those mentioned and silica
are present only in traces. There have been some
exceptions to the above, and instead of traces
only substantial amounts of certain constituents
enumerated below were found. The following
maximum amounts of constituents expressed in
milligrams per liter are reported: nitrate, 5700.;

of tron re-

nitrite, 10.; hydrogen sulfide, 496.; bromide,
1510.; iodide, 30.; fluoride, 0.4; phosphate,
32950.; borate, 2000.; saline ammonia, 69.;

lithium, artificial water, 288.; natural water, 32.;
strontium, 200.; barium, 18.; manganese, 50.; and
arsenic, 15. The composition of the so-called iron
and alum waters is discussed briefly.

Two instances in which acute troubles were ex-
plained by means of the p,, determination: W. F.
Monrort.

Hydrogen ion concentration and coagulation:
W. D. Hatrirtp. For the majority of water
works laboratories Gillespie’s method for deter-
mination of p,, values, without buffer solutions, is
most applicable. The amount of alum required
for coagulation of a water is dependent on the
buffer value of the water or the methyl orange
alkalinity. Turbidity has very little effect.
Coagulation begins at a p,, of 7.6-7.8 and the

Juuy 21, 1922]

flock settles readily until a p,, of 6.6 is reached.
The Highland Park filtration plant operated most
efficiently at a p,, of 7.3 but most economically
at 7.5-7.6.

Formulation of equilibria in
basin: A. M. BUSWELL.

Report of committee on standard methods of
enalysis: A. M. BUSWELL.

Cuartes L. Parsons,
Secretary

THE KENTUCKY ACADEMY OF
SCIENCE

Tue ninth annual meeting of the Kentucky
Academy of Science convened in the physics
lecture room of the University of Kentucky on
May 20, with President G. D. Smith in the
chair.

Twenty-three new members were elected.
Officers elected are: Lucien Beckner, Winches-
ter, president; John A. Gunton, Transylvania
College, Lexington, vice-president; A. M. Peter,
University of Kentucky, Lexington, secretary,
and W. S. Anderson, University of Kentucky,
Lexington, Treasurer. A. M. Peter holds over
as representative in the council of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science.

The following are abstracts of the communi-
cations:

The Boleti of Kentucky: G. D. Smiru, Eastern
Kentucky State Normal School (President’s ad-
dress). Colored lantern slides and stereoscopic
photographs of 37 species of boleti observed in
the vicinity of Richmond were presented and ex-
plained.

Factors affecting the germination of the sclero-
tia of Claviceps (Ergot of rye): Frank T.
McFaruanp, University of Kentucky. Most
mycologists are fairly well acquainted with the
method of germination of sclerotia of Claviceps,
but there still remain several factors which are
poorly understood. During the past two years,
the writer has been engaged in a study of the
sclerotia of ergot from various countries. In the
course of these investigations it has been found
that sclerotia more than one year old failed to ger-
minate. Sclerotia sown out of doors, on the surface
of the soil, without any covering showed good ger-
mination of the sclerotia with many well-formed
stromata but the stalks usually are short. Some
mycologists seem to have the idea that these
sclerotia may have the power to retain their ger-
mination ability for more than one year. It is

the coagulating

SCIENCE 85

quite unlikely that any sclerotia under out-of-door
conditions should remain dormant during the first
spring after their maturity and germinate the
second season. Sclerotia of Claviceps must go
through a period of rest. The shortest period of
rest so far found is about eight weeks. During
this time when the sclerotia are at rest, they must
be kept stratified in moist sand. Removal of the
cuticle of sclerotia with a scalpel does not pre-
vent the germination, but the stromata are nearly
always deformed, and all seem to rise from a
stromatie cushion. Treating the sclerotia with a
5 per cent. and a 30 per cent. NaCl salt solution,
and then completely removing all traces of the
salt and stratifying the selerotia in the usual
manner did not injure their germination power.

The réle of manganese in plants: J. S.
McHarcur, Kentucky Agricultural Experiment
Station. The purpose of this investigation was
to determine if manganese has any definite func-
tion to perform in plant economy. The method of
attack has been the preparation of plant nutrient
compounds and quartz sand, free from manganese,
and the growing of plants in different portions of
nutrient solutions or sand eultures from which
manganese was withheld and in another equal
number of portions of these media to which man-
ganese was added. All the plants were grown
until those that received manganese showed signs
of fructification and a few to maturity. The
plants from which manganese was withheld made
a normal growth for about six weeks only. There-
after they became chlorotic and the young leaves
and buds died back and the plants made no fur-
ther growth of any consequence, whereas the
plants to which manganese was available grew in
a normal way and fruetified where the plants were
grown to that state of maturity.

The author concludes that manganese is neces-
sary in the plant economy and that, therefore,
eleven elements are necessary for the normal
growth of autotrophie plants, whereas it has been
taught previously that only ten are necessary.

The hydroxy-anthraquinone derivatives in
plants: JOHN ABERDEEN GUNTON, Transylvania
College. A résumé was given of the various
plants containing derivatives of this type as well
as a description of the forms in which these oceur.
The cathartic principles of cascara, senna, rhu-
barb, aloes and buckthorn were shown to be
irritant anthracene derivatives that exist in the
plant in the form of glucosides to whieh the physi-
ological action is presumably due. Plants con-
taining these bodies are found widely distributed
throughout the globe and present an interesting

86 SCIENCE

stage in the chemical evolution of plant life. Con-
siderable remains yet to be done on this group
from the analytical and synthetical standpoints.

Some seed-borne diseases of agricultural crops:
W. D. VaLLeau, University of Kentucky. Further
studies on the extent of seed infection of corn
with Fusarium moniliforme confirm previous re-
ports that it is practically universal. The organ-
ism is carried between the various seed-coat layers
and may extend in as far as the aleurone layer.
In very flinty corn the organism remains dormant
a longer period after the seed is planted than in
the poorly filled starchy kernels. A preliminary
study of 8 lots of barley from 3 states, 12 lots of
oats from 4 states, and 38 varieties of wheat from
5 states indicates that small grains are infected
to a higher degree with pathogenic organisms than
has generally been suspected. Morphological
studies of lettuce seeds have demonstrated the
presence of an organism in a high percentage of
seeds which is believed to be the causal organism
of lettuce root rot. The universal presence of
root rot on clovers and the results of preliminary
tests of secd infection suggest that the causal
organism is constantly present in clover seed.
Observations on crops affected by seed-borne root
disease organisms, grown under different seasonal
conditions, suggests that these organisms may
play an important part in geographical and sea-
sonal distribution of certain wild and crop plants.

A preliminary report on a study of various
clovers as found on three soil experiment fields of
Kentucky with special reference to root systems:
E. N. Frreus and W. D. VaLueau, University of
Kentucky. An ecological and pathological study
is being made of various clovers, particularly red
clover, growing on three soil types of Kentucky,
in order to determine the causes of clover failure.
Actual counts showed that red and alsike clover
stands were practically equal throughout the first
year whether on productive or ‘‘
Much diminution of stand occurs on most soils
during the second summer, reaching 100 per cent.
on the least productive soil. Root rot was present
to some extent on all root systems
Those developed in least productive soils were
badly diseased or dead at the end of the first
season. All tap root systems examined were badly
diseased or dead at the end of the second season.
The persistence of a clover plant after death of
the tap root system depends on its ability to pro-
duce new roots from the crown.

Extraction of crude oil by means of shafts and
tunnels: Henry Meter, Centre College. This
method of recovery of oil from beds has been

clover sick’? soils.

examined.

{[Vou. LVI, No. 1438

successfully carried on in Alsace since 1917. Ex-
perience has shown that by means of wells and
pumps not more than 20 per cent. as a maximum
of the oil contained in a bed can be brought to
the surface. The recovery by sinking a shaft and
digging tunnels through oil-bearing sand enables
the recovery by seepage and by treating the sand
with hot water, of two and a half times as much
oil as by means of wells. This method of recovery
increases the value of a concession. It opens to
countries whose oil-bearing regions seem to have
reached the end of production, new and encour-
aging prospects.

Depletion of Kentucky crude oils: W. R. JI1-
son, State Geologist, Director of the Kentucky
Geological Survey. Although petroleum was first
produced on the South Fork of the Cumberland
River in 1819, the industry in Kentucky may be
said to have gained its feet in 1900, when 62,259
barrels were produced. Production increased
steadily until it exceeded 1,200,000 barrels in 1905
and 1906, after which it steadily fell off to 407,081
barrels in 1915. From that time it inereased rap-
idly to 9,226,473 barrels in 1919 and has continued
near 9,000,000 barrels. The author thinks that a
production of 150,000,000 barrels in the next 60
years is a conservative estimate.

Oil shales of Kentucky: C. 8. Crousr, Univer-
sity of Kentucky. The oil consumption in the
United States is outstripping the domestic pro-
duction, creating an alarming situation. New
sources of oil must be found. Oil shale will solve
the problem so soon as the extraction of oil from
this source is made commercially feasible. A re-
search has been in progress at the University of
Kentucky for three years with the development
of a commercial retort as its object. The results
are more than encouraging. Kentucky has
90,000,000,000 tons of shale immediately available
for steam shovel methods of mining. This shale,
conservatively figured, represents 40,000,000,000
barrels of crude oil. Kentucky shales show
marked superiority over shales in other parts of
the United States. Such being true Kentucky is
the logical place for the genesis of the oil shale
industry in this country.

Model showing structure of Gainesville oil pool,
Allen County, Ky.: E. S. Prrry, University of
Kentucky. The author exhibited the model show-
ing the stratification and explained its construe-
tion.

Table moving by so-called spirits: GLANVILLE
TERRELL, University of Kentucky. An example
of table-moving produced in daylight by a girl of
fifteen and a boy of ten with no possibility of

JuLY 21, 1922]

collusion, was described by the author, as having
come under his observation. The author is con-
vinced that the phenomenon was genuine but
asserts his disbelief that it was a spiritual mani-
festation.

A Kentucky chemist of the old school: ALFRED
M. Prrer, University of Kentucky. J(ohn) Law-
rence Smith, M.D. (1818-1883), a citizen of
Louisville, Ky., from 1854 to 1883, is most
esteemed by the chemist engaged in mineral
analysis by reason of the unique and very prac-
tical method for the determination of alkalies in
silicates of his devising. Indeed, the extensive
study of the potassium content of Kentucky soils,
by the experiment station, was made practicable
by the application of this method. Dr. Smith’s
publications number some 150 titles, a large pro-
portion of which appeared in the American Jour-
nal of Science. His work was mainly in mineral
chemistry. His investigations on emery led to the
development of the emery industry in the United
States. He made a life study of meteorites, of
which he had a very fine collection, now owned by
Harvard University. Dr. Smith occupied a high
position in the scientific world and was an active
member of many learned societies both foreign
and American, including the National Academy of
Sciences. The Lawrence Smith medal of the Na-
tional Academy, a gold medal worth $200, to be
awarded for research upon meteorites, was estab-
lished by Dr. Smith’s widow, who used for the
endowment the sum of $8,000 received from the
sale of his collection of meteorites to Harvard
University. The medal has been awarded only
twice: to H. A. Newton, in 1888, and to Dr. Geo.
P. Merrill, in 1922. Dr. Smith man of
means, charitable, public spirited, always ready to
contribute his scientific knowledge for public
good, and was held in high esteem in the eom-
munity.

Home economics as a_ science: MARGARET
WuitrTEMoRE, University of Kentucky. Before
considering home economics in relation to natural
sciences it must be remembered that it has a vital
connection also with social sciences and with the
fine arts. For this reason, and also because it is
distinctly an applied subject, its relation with the
natural sciences should be chiefly that of producer
and consumer.
contribute to scientific knowledge by suggesting
problems which need attention and by providing
the situations for application and experimentation.
The earnest attention now being given to home
economics reveals several weaknesses. One is the
fact that as a course of study it has been organ-

Was a

Home economics, however, should

SCIENCE . 87

ized too much upon a logical in opposition to
psychological basis. This seems still true of much
of the teaching of the natural sciences, as shown
by the requirement of inorganic before organic
chemistry. Another cause of weakness is the
failure to recognize the desirable limits of home
economics and the frequent attempt to teach in
the department the principles as well as the appli-
cation of the arts and sciences involved.

The measurement of the mental changes after
the removal of diseased tonsils and adenoids:
GLADYS Marie Lowe, University of Kentucky. A
group of thirty-five school children operated upon
for diseased tonsils and adenoids was compared
with a group of twenty-five which did not undergo
the operation. This study is unique in the use
of a control group of children with diseased ton-
sils and adenoids but not operated upon. Three
lines of evidence were used, namely, changes re-
vealed by a scale of tests of mental alertness, by
the teacher’s estimate of certain traits, and by
the actual scholarship records. The comparisons
are made between data obtained just preceding the
operation and those obtained one year after the
diagnosis. The Stanford Revision of the Binet-
Simon Scale for measuring mental alertness was
used. The teacher’s rating for each trait was
obtained by estimating in which fifth of the class
the pupils belonged. The traits estimated were:
(1) companionship with fellows, (2) emotional
self control, (3) initiative, (4) self expression
(speech), (5) interest in school work, (6) atten-
tion and (7) scholarship. The results show that:
(1) While the average scholarship of the oper-
ated group continued to be the same as that of all
the classes represented, the average scholarship of
the non-operated group fell one scholarship rank
below the average of all the classes represented.
(2) The operated group showed no more change
in the mental age, or in ‘brightness’? (I.Q.) than
did the non-operated group. The differences com-
pared with the error were so slight as to be negli-
gible. (3) The teacher’s estimates showed no
significant change. (4) Pronounced improvement
was found in three or four eases.

The importance of Scientific investigation in
marketing: O. B. JESNESS, University of Ken-
tucky. Attention was called to the growing com-
plexity of marketing methods and a comparison
of present methods with the comparatively simple
methods that sufficed a century ago was made in
order to suggest some of the reasons why the
marketing system of to-day necessarily is involved.
Mention was made of the prevalence of loose
thinking and talking on

marketing questions.

88 SCIENCE

Emphasis was placed on the importance of scien-
tifie investigations in marketing. Facts are the
only safe basis for action and careful studies are
needed in order to obtain essential facts. Agri-
cultural experiment stations and departments
have studied production problems for years but
have taken up marketing activities only recently.
Much work in this field is now being undertaken
and the future should witness the accumulation of
much helpful material.

Factors involved in the standardization of
tobacco grades: ERLE C. VAUGHN, University of
Kentucky. Standardization of tobacco grades is
designed to avoid confusion, to stabilize prices,
and to protect both producer and buyer. The
factors involved are the conditions which must be
considered in bringing about these results. The
chief ones are: descriptive terms used, natural
grades, manufacturers’ grades, methods of buying
and selling, interest of producer in grading, and
the many variations which occur both in the
product and in opinions and practices concerning
it. These factors, their true value and their rela-
tion to each other must be carefully considered in
establishing practicable standard grades of to-
bacco.

Factors which influence the cost of gain in feed-
ing cattle: WAYLAND Ruoaps, University of Ken-
tucky. The foundation of the beef cattle indus-
try is the production and sale of fat cattle for
beef, so when cattle feeding is profitable, both the
breeders of purebreds and the producer of feeder
steers have a good market for their stock. Pas-
ture is the basis of the cheapest gains while the
winter feedlot is necessary to produce fat cattle
at that time, in order to have an even supply of
beef. The cost of putting gains on cattle varies
with a number or a combination of things. They
are the age of the cattle, the time of year the
eattle are fed, whether on grass or on dry feed,
the length of the feeding period, the feeds fed,
conditions under which the cattle are fed such as
barn room and water supply, the daily gain which
the cattle make, the quality of the cattle, the
way they were fed before going on feed, the con-
dition of the cattle and last the individual feeder
himself. The old saying is true that ‘‘the eye of
the master fatteneth the cattle.’’

Geology of eggs: G. Davis BucKNeER and J. H.
Martin, University of Kentucky. An experiment
was discussed wherein two lots of ten White Leg-
horn hens each, all hatehed the same day and
coming from a common parent stock, were fed
rations consisting of: No. 1, corn, buttermilk and
limestone, and No. 2, corn and buttermilk. During

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1488

the first six months of laying lot No. 1 consumed
11.1 pounds of limestone and produced 651 eggs
while No. 2 laid 343 eggs. Among other things
it was shown that the average dried eggshell was
4.7 grams in lot 1 and 3.5 grams in lot 2. This
means that lot 1 produced 1,789 grams of dried
eggshell more than did lot 2. The relation of
egg production to geology may be inferred.

Testing for moisture in transformer oil: C. C.
Kipuincer, Mt. Union College, Alliance, Ohio.
Freshly cut sodium dropped into the oil to be
tested is a convenient and sensitive means of
detecting traces of moisture. Evolution of gas
bubbles is produced by smaller quantities of mois-
ture than can be detected by the usual test of
rubbing the oil with eosin. |

A simple apparatus for demonstrating heat of
absorption: C. C. Kiplinger, Mt. Union College,
Alliance, Ohio. A Bunsen ice calorimeter with a
long horizontal capillary tube attached serves as
an air thermometer which may be used to demon-
strate thermal changes due to absorption of
liquids by charcoal.

The present status of the cancer problem: (leec-
ture) Dr. H. GipEON WELLS, professor of pathol-
ogy, University of Chicago. Many lantern slides,
most of them from photomicrographs, were exhib-
ited to show the nature of cancer, which may be
described as the continued unnatural growth of -
cells. This growth cuts off the supply of nourish-
ment for other cells and makes conditions more
favorable for the growth of bacteria around the
affected area. It seems to have been established
that the disease is not caused by a specifie para-
site, nor has a specific causative agent been iso-
lated. Improved methods in the use of radium
and X-rays seem to give the best promise for the
control of cancer, and great advances have been
made in the last six years. Drugs are useless. A
very important factor is education of the people
to recognize superficial cancers and have them
treated before they become serious. Cancer is not
properly a contagious disease and is not neces-
sarily inherited by humans, though it has been
shown to follow the Mendelian law of inheritance
in rats, and some animals are more susceptible to
it than others. A study of statistics shows that
cancer is not on the increase, the apparent increase
being accounted for largely by more exact diag-
noses; the actual number of deaths caused by
cancer is decreasing because of improved methods
of treatment.

AurreD M. PETER,

Secretary
May 27, 1922

NrEw SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1439 Fripay, Juny 28, 1922 SINGLE Copies, 15 Crs.

Bingham & Green V ariable Pressure Plastometer

With Freas Water Thermostat as Bath

See book by Dr. E. C. Bingham, entitled
“Fluidity and Plasticity.’

Plastics have the property of maintaining
their shape so long as the shearing force to
which they are subjected remains below a
certain value necessary to start the flow.
The shearing force required to start the flow
is known as the Friction of the material. The
rate of flow after the friction has been ex-
ceeded gives a measure of the Mobility of
the material. The Plasticity of a substance
is therefore determined by these two readily
measurable properties.

The Bingham & Green Plastometer is the
standard instrument for determining plas-
ticity as above indicated. It consists of a
source of air pressure with tank and pres-
sure regulator for preliminary regulation, and
a mercury stabilizer for exact regulation, a
mercury gauge for measuring the pressure,
a bath in which the plastometer proper is
immersed to control the temperature, and the
plastometer proper. The plastometer proper
is a brass container for the material. The
cover has a tube for connecting with the air
pressure. At the bottom of the plastometer
a glass capillary tube of size as desired is
inserted. There is also a side tube extending
upward for the escape of air. The amount
of pressure required to start the flow is
noted, also the amount of material extruded
in a given time at a given pressure.

The Bingham & Gre ermis. ne
ommended for the ory, control lof call /
of plastics inclu Apaints, clays Bail? oT

tically all matgfial$\in the colloid state. “4%
*

It is also fised for resear By te re) my clls $e We
and other vifetias mfatptialsis 19 of)

AMONGST USERS ARE THE FOLLOWING:
Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C. Texas Company,\Bayonne, New Jersey. F v4
New Jersey Zinc Company, Palmerton, Pa. Richards Compan Sys d, Cant aarer Sy 4
Lafayette College, Easton, Pennsylvania. . Hlonal Muse
PRICES OF DISTINCTIVE PARTS
Mercury Stabilizer, including mercury gauge________________ ag ie A $150.00
Riastometersproper withytour |(4)) capillaries ee ee ee 60.00

Write for further details.

NEW YORK CITY PITTSBURGH BRANCH
3rd Ave., 18th—19th St. 4048 Jenkins Arcade
ESTABLISHED 1851
Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemical Reagents

Washington, D. C. Display Room, Suite 601, Evening Star Building, Pennsylvania Avenue and 11th Street.

i SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

MERRIAM anp STOCK

Notes on Peccary Remains from

Rancho La Brea
—and—

Note on an Hipparion Tooth from
the Sierran Deposits of the Berke-
ley Hills, California. Price, 20

cents.

LAWSON

The Mobility of the Coast Ranges of
Californias An Exploitation of
the Elastic Rebound Theory, by
Andrew C. Lawson. Price, 60

cents.

University of California Press
Berkeley, California.

ISIS

International Review devoted to the
History of Science and Civilization

Edited by GEORGE SARTON, D.Sc.
Associate of the Carnegie Institution

Harvard Library 183, Cambridge, Mass:

The chief feature of Isis is a Critical Bib-
liography of the History and Philosophy of
Science and of the History of Civilization.
The three first volumes (1882 pages) con-
tain about 5,620 bibliographic notes, 312 re-
views and 43 longer papers. Isis is the main
center of information on the History and
Philosophy of Science, and the organ of the
New Humanism. 2 or 3 parts complete a
volume within 12 to 18 months.

The 1st part (220 p.) of Vol. IV has ap-
peared. Each volume costs 50 Belgian
francs (about $3) (ed. de luxe, from vol. IT
on, 100 francs).

Publisher: WEISSENBRUCH

49 rue du Poincon Bruxelles, Belgium

BLAKISTON BOOKS

THE THEORY OF HEAT RADIATION
It reconciles the electromagnetic theory of
radiation with experimental facts. With
appendix of literature. By PROF. MAX
PLANCK (University of Berlin), Translated
by PROF. MORTON MASIUS (Worcester),
Illustrated. Cloth, $3.00.

PHILOSOPHY AND THE NEW PHYSICS
Recent developments of science, especially rela-
tivity and quanta of energy. By PROF. L.
ROUGIER (Paris), Translated by PROF. M.
MASIUS (Worcester). Cloth, $1.75.

COLLOID CHEMISTRY OF PROTEINS
Behaviour of proteins in acid and alkaline solu-
tion. By DR. W. PAULI (Vienna), Trans-
lated by P. C. L. THORNE (London). Illus-
trated. Cloth, $2.25.

AMMONIA AND THE NITRIDES
Synthesis of ammonia from its elements. By
PROF. E. B. MAXTED (London). Illustrated.
Cloth, $2.00.

PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY OF COL-
LOIDS
Gives the fundamental facts and methods. 4th
Edition. By EMIL HATSCHEK (London).
Illustrated. Cloth, $2.25.

TEXTBOOK OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
Textbook of College Grade. Creates a new in-
terest in the science. By JOSEPH S. CHAM-
BERLAIN (Massachusetts Agricultural Col-
lege). Cloth, $4.00.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO. Philadelphia

“TURTOX” CATALOGS include

Aquaria Microscope slides,
Bird glasses (special for High
Charts Schools)
Chemicals Microtomes
Dissecting outfits Models
Earthworms (spe- Museum Prepara-
cial) tions
Entomological sup- Preserved Material
plies for Botany, Em-
Glassware bryology and
Lantern Slides Zoology
Life Histories Insect Mounts
Microscopes Skeletons
Microscope slides, Syringes, Injecting
(General) Vascula

and many other items.
Items in black type are our own special products.
We are Manufacturers and Preparators of
Biological Supplies.

Catalogues to Cover any or all of the above items
will be sent on request.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE
1177 EAST 55TH STREET, CHICAGO, ILL.

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

_ THE SCIENCE PRESS
1] Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00. Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI JuLY 28, 1922 No. 1439
CONTENTS
The Humanizing of Knowledge: Dr. JAMES
FEPARVEY, | ROBINSON: 222---...-----2-. LR 89

The Food Research Institute of Stanford
OMAUU CN SUCY ee eee eae ats Ee enacc te nesnanennnemnn 100

Scientific Events:

Canadian Society of Technical Agricul-
turists; Bishop Museum Fellowships; The
Hull Meeting of the British Association...... 102

Scientific Notes and News.........-.--.------.-----0------- 104

University and Educational Notes............-.-.---. 107

Discussion and Correspondence:

Filtered Air: PRoFrESSOR ALEXANDER
McApizr. The Processing of Straw: Dr.
A. J. Pieters. Does the Bible Teach Evo-
lution: Dr. CHARLES V. PIPER..............--..------ 108

Scientific Books:
Jenkins on the History of the Whale
Mishertes)-) DR whe Ac CAS ee rer etree 109

Special Articles:

Bacterial Pustule of Soy Bean: FLORENCE
HELD GES jot oense eet ec sca nee EEE 111

The American Chemical Society: Dr.
CHARLES) 0) MPARSONS strc ceuemen rete oes, 112

THE HUMANIZING OF KNOWL-
EDGE!
I

Awny most familiar objeet will suddenly turn
strange when we look it in the face. As we
repeat some common word or regard keenly the
features of an intimate friend they are no
longer what we took them to be. Were it not
for our almost unlimited capacity for taking
things for granted we should realize that we
are encompassed with countless mysteries which
might oppress our hearts beyond endurance did
not custom and incuriosity veil the depths of
our careless ignorance. That I am “I” to my-
self and “you” to all of you, who are each of
you “I” to yourself is on contemplation a per-
turbing cireumstanee. That the vibrations of
my voeal cords should stir ideas in you is no
easy matter to explain, and no one has yet been
able to tell us why we and the earth so iner-
rantly attract one another. Rut these can
hardly be called mysteries to most of our fellow
men, who are so inured to personality, speech
and weight that they are for them scarcely ob-
served commonplaces.

Those to whom a commonplace appears to be
most extraordinary are very rare, but they are
very precious, since they and they alone have
made our minds. It is they who have through
hundreds of thousands of years gradually en-
riched human thought and widened the gap
that separates man from his animal congeners.
Without them the mind as we know it would
never have come into existence. They are the
creators of human intelligence. The mass of
mankind must perforce wait for some spe-
cially wide-eyed individual to point out to them
what they have hitherto accepted as a matter of

1 Address before the American Association for
the Advancement of Science, meeting in conjune-
tion with the Pacific Division in Salt Lake City,
June 23-24.

'

90 SCIENCE

routine or failed altogether to notice. These
mind-makers are the questioners and seers. We
classify them roughly as poets, religious lead-
ers, moralists, story-tellers, philosophers, the-
ologians, artists, scientists, inventors. They all
are discoverers and pointers-out. What eludes
the attention of others catches theirs. They
form the noble band of wonderers. Commonly
unnoticed things excite a strange and com-
pelling curiosity in them, and each new ques-
tion sets them on a new quest. They see
where others are blind, they hear where others
are deaf. They point out profundities, com-
plexities, involutions, analogies, differences and
dependencies where everything had seemed as
plain as a pike staff.

In short, poets, philosophers, religious
geniuses, artists and scientists are all rare
variants of the human species, who emerge here
and there through the ages. Sometimes they
make a wide appeal to their fellow men; often
they stir their resentment or horror; most fre-
quently they suffer neglect and contempt. A
discovery to which no one listens is obviously
of little or no importance. It is a mere private
gratification which concerns only the discoverer
himself. So the great question arises as to
what determines the swecess of a new idea;
what establishes its currency and gives it a
social significance by securing its victory over
ignorance and indifference or over older rival
and conflicting beliefs?

To be accepted by the multitude of non-
discoverers an idea must obviously be attractive
to them in some way or other. And what are
the kinds of attractiveness which promote the
wide dissemination and the firm and prolonged
acceptance of beliefs? This is a difficult ques-
tion, and I do not flatter myself that I can
answer it very satisfactorily. I take it that the
new idea must seem “good,” and mayhap noble,
beautiful and useful, and that it must fit in
pretty well with existing notions; or at least
must not threaten violently to dislocate the
accepted scheme of things. If it is ugly,
wicked, discouraging, humiliating or seriously
disturbing to the received plan of life it is
likely to be shown the door. Ideas like kisses
go by favor. The truth of the new idea pro-
posed for acceptance plays an altogether sec-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

ondary role. We rank the Good, True and
Beautiful together but it is shocking to ob-
serve how little does the success of a new ob-
servation depend upon its scientific or his-
torical credentials. In almost all we hear,
read, say and come to believe, truth, in the
scientific sense of the term, is a matter of
almost complete indifference. It is irrelevant
and may seem an impudent intruder and mar-
plot. We often naively use the word “feel”
for “believe,” and even the word “believe”
means to cling to something dear and precious,
and good in our sight—to accept what we like
to accept. And the wonder grows that there
ever appeared in this world of ours a group of
men like those here assembled so eccentric as
to regard truth as the paramount issue.

If we make an exception of certain homely
matters of fact which have underlain the de-
velopment and practice of the industrial arts,
mankind has until very recently been nurtured
in the main on beliefs that were not submitted
to any rigorous test of scientific or historical
criticism, and which for the most part would
not have been able to withstand careful seru-
tiny. But it would be a grave mistake to as-
sume that what from a modern scientifie stand-
point are myths, poetic fancies and gross mis-
apprehensions have not played an all-essential
part in the building up of the human mind.
Man’s beliefs had inevitably in the first instance
to be what suited him and what he naturally
and easily grasped and clung to. For it is not
the precise truth of an idea, as we have seen,
that leads to its wide acceptance but its ap-
peal; its congeniality to a being of the nature
and setting of man. There had to be a vast
widening of the primitive imagination and vo-
cabulary, and innumerable guesses about real
and imaginary things before a phenomenon so
strange as modern science could emerge. Log-
ical definition and speculation can operate quite
as well—indeed better on unreal presupposi-
tions than on experimentally verifiable ones.

Among the wonderers and pointers-out the
poet, who “fancy light from Fancy caught,”
whose “thought leapt out to wed with thought,”
has always been surest of a large audience.
For songs, heroic tales and rhapsodies can be
attuned to the heart’s desire—they are magic

JULY 28, 1922]

carpets on which we can voyage whither we
will. Their truth is the deepest truth, that of
vague human longings. When we are told that
Kubla Khan a stately pleasure dome decreed,
“where Alph the sacred river ran, through e¢ay-
erns measureless to man, down to a sunless
sea,” we do not feel obliged to consult a list
of Tartar rulers, or locate the sources of the
river Alph, or consider the geological forma-
tion of limestone caverns. Few will be dis-
turbed by the question of what particular spe-
cies of wood louse secreted the honey dew, or the
probable number of bacteria occurring per
cubic centimeter in fresh milk of Paradise.
When the scientific rumor reaches the poet that
Nature is so careful of the type, so careless of
the single life, he will find many who will share
his impulse to kneel down upon “the great
world’s altar stairs that slope thro’ darkness
up to God.” The truth of human fears, disap-
pointments and aspirations is’ indeed the
supreme truth, being made as we are, and is
likely to remain so. All other truth no matter
how true is in comparison dust and chaff, ex-
eept for the few who owing to their highly
exceptional temperament crave proofs and pre-
cision, at least in some narrow segment of
life’s cirele.

Religion shares with poetry and romance the
appeal to man’s natural and deep longings and
spontaneous inclinations. Indeed, among the
many definitions of religion none is perhaps
better than that of Santayana, to whom it
seems to be poetry sometimes mistaking itself
for science. Religion has concerned itself, at
least during historic times, with those terrors,
awes, obligations and aspirations which rest on
a belief in supernatural beings, good and bad.
Tt has to do with our vivid fears in a world of
sad mischance; with the hopes, restraints and
sacred duties which might in some way offset
life’s incalculable tragedies. The poetic ele-
ments in religion are accompanied by more or
less definitely formulated beliefs about man’s
origin and nature and the workings of the
things about him. These convictions are com-
monly of ancient and untraceable genesis,
although they may finally be very logically and
precisely stated by a Saint Thomas or a Calvin
and form a part of a closely concatenated

SCIENCE 91

philosophical system. One may not, however,
take the same liberties with religious beliefs
as he may with the fancies of the poet. The
adherents of a particular religious creed are
not free to pick and choose, and reject what
comes to seem improbable. The “truth” once
delivered stands, for it depends largely on the
form of its original delivery. It is the word
of the Most High or of some prophet inspired
by him. At least this has seemed inevitable to
a great majority of Christians and their leaders
since the founding of their faith. Religion
therefore makes a double appeal, that of poetry
and of divinely certified truth about all the
great concerns of life. It meets questions about
our origin, duty and possible fates, without
any call for painful critical thinking, suspen-
sion of judgment and dubious, ever-to-be-
revised, theories and hypotheses.

II

These preliminary reflections have been nec-
essary in order to introduce the scientist to
himself. He is quite as prone as others to
take himself for granted and not realize what
an altogether astonishing and even grotesque
mystery he and his doings constitute. He, like
the poets, philosophers, theologians and artists,
belongs to the small and precious group of per-
sistent wonderers. He is a questioner, a dis-
coverer, a pointer-out. He like them gives
meaning to things that would otherwise pass
unnoticed. But there is something inhuman in
his methods and aims. He craves a meticulous
precision of observation, measurement and
statement quite alien to the other teachers of
men. He exhibits an almost shocking insensi-
bility to the cherished motives of belief. He
does not ask whether what he looks for is right
or wrong, beautiful or ugly, useful or futile,
comforting or distressing. He only asks
whether what he finds is an instance of some-
thing really happening. He persistently car-
ries his analysis as far as he can and serupu-
lously sets down just what he has seen and the
inferences he may make or suspect. Moreover
he interests himself in what appears to the
overwhelming mass of mankind as_ stupid
trifles which promise neither pleasure nor profit.
What difference can it possibly make whether

92 SCIENCE

a caterpillar has four muscles or four thou-
sand, as described by the indefatigable Lyonnet;
whether the light from metallic ares may con-
tain wave lengths as short as a six hundred
thousandth of a millimeter; whether the solu-
tions of the violet salt of chromium sulphate
are stable at room temperature; whether there
are sixty or eighty thousand species of beetles.
And in other fields, what does it profit a man to
be able to point out the interpellations in the
Book of Eeclesiastes, or discover the origin of
the Edict of Milan or describe the marriage
eustoms of the small and obscure tribe of the
Todi. And yet there can be no doubt that
these and similar questions and their answers
constitute the great bulk of scientific knowl-
edge that has been accumulated during the past
three centuries. They are stowed away in
monographie contributions, proceedings and
transactions under innumerable rubrics which
no single man of science no matter how broad
his interests and comprehensive his knowledge
could possibly recall. This esoteric treasury of
knowledge, the very existence of which is un-
known, or indifferent, even to the so-called
educated classes, is like a vast safety deposit
vault with its many boxes large and small.
The keys are in many hands, but few there be
that can open more than two or three of the
boxes.

Nevertheless the scientific investigator and
the scholar has his own peculiar rewards. He
finds a few like-minded persons to cooperate
with him. Scientific research is not simply a
solitary indulgence of infrequent and eccentri¢
individuals. Little drops of knowledge coalesce
into bigger drops, and odds and ends of de-
tailed information gradually get shifted into
patterns of great interest and beauty. For the
world proves to be indefinitely investigable.
Then there is much refreshingly human in the
pursuit of knowledge. The investigator is the
hero in a romance; he is keener than the sleuth
of the detective tale and knows it. He has his
territorial disputes, his ententes and his wars
with his fellow scientists.

It is apparent however that the sustained
and arduous scientific research which has grad-
ually built up our fund of knowledge is a
pursuit for the few. It is far from a seductive

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

occupation for even creative minds of the
poetic and religious type. It often requires
years to ascertain facts and record observations
that will in the end fill a small, abstruse and
technical pamphlet. For research is mainly
looking for things that are not there and
attempting processes that will not occur. The
layman has little notion of this. Hxperimental
science is tireless fumbling and groping or, in
its taxonomic aspects, the painful discrimina-
tion and comparison of detail. It is subject to
innumerable disappointments in following
trails that lead out into a boundless desert or
up against barriers that it seems hopeless to
try to scale. For the scientist does not make
his own landscape as does the poet and even
many philosophers, nor can he fly hither and
thither at will, but he subjects himself to the
tyranny of the natural phenomena or processes
that he is observing, and, as Bacon says, he
works “according to his stuff and is limited
thereby.”

The successs of modern scientific emulation
lies very largely in its stubborn refusal to con-
sider natural phenomena in terms of human
impulse and mankind’s native interests. Dur-
ing the Middle Ages the world was thought to
be made for man. It was the vestibule to an
eternal existence that awaited every human
soul beyond the grave. As his transient so-
journing place and scene of trial it had a
moral and edifying quality which underlay a
great part of the speculation about natural
things. Around about the earth were the
heavens, the ever perfect and incorruptible
dwelling place of God and the angels and of
the blessed who were found worthy to see
His face. Those who began the reconstruc-
tion and further amplifying of knowledge,
from the early seventeenth century onward,
were on their guard against these older genial
anthropomorphic and geocentric conceptions of
Nature, and they also found various excuses
for neglecting the sanctified interpretations
prevailing in the universities. The preferences
of the observer were to be ruled out. He was
to be merely a careful and neutral spectator
who must not allow himself to become so
warmly implicated in his discoveries as to sac-
rifice a whit of his eager indifference. Of

JULY 28, 1922]

course this proud isolation was subject to many
compromises, conscious and unconscious. And
from a philosophical standpoint the onlooker,
as has often been pointed out, is always one of
the essential elements in the observing and re-
cording. The ideal was, however, and still is,
to dehumanize scientific investigation so far as
may be. And this method has approved itself
by its exceeding fruitfulness.

Til

The question here arises, how did this scien-
tific ambition ever come to be a matter of
public concern? How did this professedly idle
curiosity, as Veblen ironically calls it, confined
as it is to rare and eccentric intellects and
affecting a superb indifference to human inter-
ests, ever come to influence the beliefs and
daily lives of great masses of mankind? The
indubitable and ever growing social significance
of modern experimental science is the result
chiefly of three historical tendencies.

1. In the first place the minute and scrupu-
lous observations and calculations and careful
inferences of the natural scientist have in a few
eases formed themselves into such impressive
generalizations as to catch the attention of lay-
men. Examples of such large reconstructions
are the reduction of the celestial bodies to phys-
ical and chemical processes; a growing substi-
tution of respect for so-called natural laws, and
a corresponding decline of confidence in mira-
cles and magic, the partial elimination of the
diabolical in the theory and practice of medi-
cine, and latterly the frank inclusion of man
himself in the order of nature. This process
of transforming a naturally unscientifie crea-
ture into a scientific one has of course not gone
very far, and the tendency has met with varied
and insistent opposition with which we are all
familiar.

2. In the second place the inventor and
engineer have in the interest of practical utility
seized upon certain details of scientific dis-
covery and with the connivance of the business
man, influenced by motives of pecuniary profit,
succeeded in revolutionizing industry and inter-
communication, thereby gravely altering the
conditions, possibilities and problems of civili-
zation. Scientific research originally carried on

SCIENCE 93

for its own sake has thus produced indirectly
the most far-reaching effects on our daily life.
Moreover the constant refinement of technology
has led to the invention of scientific apparatus
without which research could never have
reached the point it has. A striking example
of this is the perfecting of electrical apparatus
which has recently rendered possible the dis-
covery, bewildering in its implication, of the
electrical nature of matter.

In the beginning mankind was in no position
fundamentally and permanently to modify his
environment in his own interests. He had to
make such terms as he could with the un-
controlled order of nature. To-day through
scientific knowledge and experiment he is con-
stantly engaged in remaking the world to suit
his convenience. He indeed often yields to the
temptation to exploit his resources with a reck-
less abandon which raises many serious prob-
lems in regard to the future of the race. He
substitutes mechanical devices for the human
hand; he generates and distributes new forms
of power, and has finally learned through syn-
thetic chemistry to create an indefinite number
of new substances. Achievements of this class
are the most spectacular outcome of applied
knowledge and have done more than anything
else to secure the scientist a specious popular
esteem. But the problem is becoming acute
whether that esteem is of such a character that
it will permit the overwhelming process of
readjustment to be guided and controlled by
those best qualified by natural competence and
training to prevent varied catastrophe.

3. A third less theatrical but none the less
significant effect of the progress of natural
science has been the influence which its ideals
and methods, so successfully applied to the
investigation of physical, chemical and biolog-
ical processes, has had on the conception of man
himself, his origin, history, habits and institu-
tions. Anthropology, history in all its branches,
philosophy, psychology, economics, and all
other departments of research bearing on man’s
nature and conduct are undergoing changes of
a momentous nature so revolutionary in their
theoretical and practical implications that some
recent writers go so far as to maintain that a
great part of what has passed for social science

94 SCIENCE

is obsolete or obsolescent; that it will pass
away in the light of new scientific knowledge
even as the scholastic philosophy was sup-
planted by experimental science. Man sud-
denly finds himself a bewildered actor in a new
drama where he must learn his part all over
again on pain of disastrous failure in his ap-
pointed role.

To summarize the preceding reflections:
Modern scientific research, in spite of its pro-
fessed aloofness and disregard of human feel-
ings and motives, has succeeded in unfolding
to our gaze so new a world in its origin, devel-
opment, workings and possibilities of control
in the interests of human welfare that prac-
tically all of the older poetic and religious ideas
have to be fundamentally revised or reinter-
preted. Scientific knowledge ingeniously ap-
pled and utilized by inventors and engineers
has, with the assistance of business men and
financiers, metamorphosed our environment and
our relations with our fellow men. Lastly, our
notions of our own nature are being so altered
that should we discreetly apply our increasing
knowledge of the workings of the mind and
the feelings a far more successful technique
might finally emerge for the regulation of the
emotions than any that has hitherto been sug-
gested. This is at least an exhilarating hope.

Now if all this be true we are forced to ask
whether it is safe when our life has come to be
so profoundly affected by and dependent on
scientific knowledge to permit the great mass
of mankind and their leaders and teachers to
continue to operate on the basis of presupposi-
tions and prejudices which owe their respecta-
bility and currency to their great age and un-
eritical character, but which fail to correspond
with real things and actual operations as they
are coming to be understood. For a great part
of our beliefs about man’s nature, the rightness
and wrongness of his acts date from a time
when far less was known of the universe and
far different were the conditions and problems
of life from those of to-day. Do we not ur-
gently need a new type of wonderer and point-
er-out whose curiosity shall be excited by this
strange and perturbing emergency in which we
find ourselves and who shall set himself to dis-
cover and indicate to his busy and timid fellow

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1439

creatures a possible way out? Otherwise how
is a race so indifferent and even hostile to
scientific and historical knowledge of the pre-
ciser sort—so susceptible to beliefs that make
other and more potent appeals than truth—to
be reconciled to stronger drafts of medicinal
information which their disease demands but
their palates reject?

IV

It is this paramount question that I had in
mind in preparing this address. I have not
the time nor indeed the capacity to make its
multiform and urgent necessity clear as I
should wish. But many of you, I know, have
already been thinking of the matter and will
concede the necessity and urgency without
further argument. Others will have experi-
enced a vague anxiety and foreboding about the
present state and prospects of scientific ad-
vance, and what has been said may help to clear
their minds if they do not agree forthwith that
the present crisis is of the precise nature and
gravity that it seems to me to be.

Much has been written of the conflict of sci-
ence and religion. But this is to narrow down
the real problem, which is nothing less than
the stupendous task of cultivating an appre-
ciation of the nature and significance of precise
thought and exact knowledge in a being by na-
ture and nurture so careless of truth and given
to modes of thinking repugnant to scientific
intelligence. For even the more magnificent
scientific discoveries, especially those of recent
years, have not penetrated into our general
education and are entirely disregarded in most
discussions of social problems. And yet an
imposing accumulation of critical information
of wide bearing is at our disposal which could
become an active factor in the readjustment of
the troubled relations of man were it possible
to overcome the obstacles to its general dissem-
ination and acceptance.

A striking illustration of the present inef-
fective methods of popularizing cardinal scien-
tific discoveries has recently been supplied by
the revival of a strong and threatening opposi-
tion to the knowledge we now have of man’s
affinity and obvious relationships with the rest
of the organic world. The idea of organic

JuLY 28, 1922]

evolution is perhaps the most momentous in its
bearings of all the great generalizations which
have come with increased knowledge of the
globe’s history and the history of its inhab-
itants. Those who will take the trouble to con-
sider even in the most elementary manner the
multifold and concurrent evidence of the suc-
cessive appearance of vegetable and animal
species on the earth and the reasons for in-
cluding man among the primates, can not fail,
unless they be utterly blinded by prejudice,
freely to concede the animalhood of man. The
matter has been set forth by skillful writers
such as Huxley, Wallace, Haeckel, John Fiske,
Drummond and many others in a manner so
plain and convincing that it would seem that no
one would have the slightest inclination to take
issue with them on the general proposition.
But to judge from the conscious and unecon-
scious confusion that seems to prevail in the
minds of many the matter is still very ill-
understood by even intelligent laymen.
Recently a serious misunderstanding has re-
sulted from the report that men of science are
giving up “Darwinism,” that “Darwinism is
dead.” This has puzzled those who supposed
that evolution was a well substantiated assump-
tion, and has filled with a somewhat malicious
joy those who have always denounced the no-
tion as wicked and opposed to Seripture. To
the public, Darwinism means evolution, man’s
monkey origin, as the matter is popularly but
inexactly phrased. But to the paleontologist
and biologist Darwinism does not mean the
theory of man’s animal descent, which was
formulated long before the publication of the
Origin of Species, but is confined to the in-
genious theories which Darwin so patiently
worked out to account for the facts of evolu-
tion. The statement that Darwinism is dead
does not mean that the evidence for the evolu-
tionary hypothesis has in any way been weak-
ened or that any really competent man of sci-
ence doubts our animal derivation. It only
means that Darwin’s explanations of how one
species may have been derived from another
have proved, as a result of increasing knowl-
edge, to be mistaken or wholly inadequate. It
means that we can not any longer assign the
importance he did to sexual and natural selec-

SCIENCE 95

tion and the hereditary transmissibility of ac-
quired characters. But the confessed failure so
far of biologists to clear up the process of evo-
lution, or experimentally create a new species
from an existing one, does not affect the facts
derived from many converging sources which
lead to the unavoidable conclusion that man
has a genealogical relation to the higher ani-
mals.

It is the extraordinarily illuminating dis-
covery of man’s animalhood rather than evolu-
tion in general that troubles the routine mind.
Many are willing to admit that it looks as if
life had developed on the earth slowly, in suc-
cessive stages; this they can regard as a merely
curious fact and of no great moment if only
man can be defended as an honorable exception.
The fact that we have an animal body may
also be conceded, but surely man must have a
soul and a mind altogether distinctive and
unique from the very beginning, bestowed upon
him by the Creator and setting him off an
immeasurable distance from any mere animal.
But whatever may be the religious and poetic
significance of this compromise it is becoming
less and less tenable as a scientific and historic
truth. The facts indicate that man’s mind is
quite as clearly of animal extraction as his
body. Those older observations which are
classed under paleontology, zoology, compara-
tive anatomy, bio-chemistry, physiology and
embryology, which reveal innumerable con-
formities and affinities between man and the
higher mammals in structure, function and de-
velopment from the egg, are now being par-
allelled by observations, classed under com-
parative psychology, functional psychology,
anthropology, prehistoric archeology and intel-
lectual history, which show that man’s mind
like his body is akin in its nature and funda-
mental operations to that of the higher animals.

The historical and comparative methods of
approaching the study of the human body are
largely responsible, as you are all aware, for
our present rapidly growing understanding of
it. The historical and comparative study of
psychological phenomena—of what we call
reasoning, emotions, impulses, the will—prom-
ise to be quite as clarifying and revolutionary
when they ean be freely applied. They will

96 SCIENCE

alter the whole conception of the various old
divisions of philosophy—logic, epistomology,
psychology, ethics—and tend to put these
hitherto rather unreal and half mythical dis-
ciplines on a firmer foundation of observable
facts. To cite a single example of this hopeful
tendency, John Dewey has recently issued a
book called “Human Nature and Conduct” in
which he frankly reverses the usual procedure
of writers on ethics. He first takes up the
nature and workings of the human animal and
then attempts to deduce the general rules that
would seem appropriate to a creature like man.
Now, the moralists in the past have in general
neglected man’s nature, of which with their
mistaken presuppositions they could at best
know but little, and have devoted their atten-
tion to accepted standards of conduct, ancient
and dubious in origin, which they sought to
justify by subtle theories and ingenious appli-
cations. This was, of course, to do little more
than to rationalize the prevailing morals and
mores. Hence the general barrenness of ethics
as commonly understood.

Those who follow the recent developments in
philosophical speculation can not fail to see
how deeply they are influenced by the methods
and discoveries of natural science. Indeed this
old distinction between “natural” science and
our knowledge of man himself is an artificial
and misleading one. Man is an integral part
of the natural order; he and his environment
are constantly interacting. Such well-tried old
terms as the will, consciousness, selfishness, the
instinets, ete., when reinspected in the light of
our ancestral background and embryological
beginnings, all look very different from what
they once did. The soul is no longer the pale
little creature, Hospes comesque corporis, as
described in Emperor Hadrian’s famous lines.
Nor is the human body, made up as it appears
to be, exclusively of electrical charges, so lump-
ish a thing as it seemed. Mind and matter can
no longer be divorced but must be studied as
different phases of a single vital and incredibly
complicated situation. Mind, as a recent writer
has well put it, is no longer to be viewed as
“primary but eventual.” It is in the making,
and a historical consideration of human intelli-
gence, taking into account its animal and pre-

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

historic substrata, its development in historic
times and the profound effect of childhood on
adult thought and feeling, reveals all sorts of
previously neglected elements in the estimate
of mind itself and of its untold future possi-
bilities.
Vv

The chief aim of education for us who really

grasp the value of a scientific attitude and

.appreciate the inherent obstacles which oppose

themselves to its successful cultivation in the
human species should be the inculeation of the
profoundest of truths, namely, that science is
one. It is nothing more or less than the most
accurate and best authenticated information
that we possess, subject to constant rectification
and amplification, of man’s nature and history,
and of the nature and history of the world in
which he finds himself. It is just the most
reliable knowledge we have. It is not history,
philosophy, psychology, ethics, politics, eco-
nomics; it is not astronomy, physics, chemistry,
geology, botany, biology—these are merely his-
torical divisions of labor, which are now being
profitably transgressed as we learn more of the
essential interweaving and mutual dependence
of all things. Those consecrated divisions may
still have a declining significance in research,
but I can not but think that they are one of
the chief barriers to the cultivation of a really
scientific frame of mind in the young and the
public at large. They are aspects of a single
supreme theme, Man and his World. Once it
was well to dehumanize science; now it must
be rehumanized.

The prevailing misapprehension of the evo-
lutionary or historical conception of life and
its unity should not be permitted to afflict the
coming generation. But the precautions neces-
sary to prevent this, demand our most careful
thought and planning. The problem is nothing
less than so revising our education that a new
type of mind will be cultivated appropriate to
our present knowledge and _ circumstances.
Education is, however, controlled to a large
extent by those who still adhere to many an-
cient conceptions which appear to them to be
based on the best wisdom of the past, to be test-
ed by time and substantiated by a consensus
of human experience. These they do not wish

JULY 28, 1922]

to see disturbed. No two persons might agree
as to exactly what these approved findings are,
but so long as a notion is familiar it is assumed
that it will not do any particular harm. Now,
new knowledge, if taken seriously, is very
likely to prove an indictment of those very
ideas which are dearest to the ill-informed. So
in order to avoid inconvenient discussion the
doctrine has become popular that so-called
‘controversial” matters should be carefully ex-
cluded from both the schools and colleges.
This means, when stated in a bald form, that
instruction which might stir religious preju-
dice, no matter how unintelligent, business, po-
litieal or racial prejudice, or violate the proprie-
ties, must be avoided. College presidents, school
superintendents, text-book writers and their
publishers are at present almost helpless in this
situation. Teaching must be made as little dis-
turbing as possible, when its chief function
should be to stimulate thought and furnish new
and reconstructive ideas. The plight of the
directors of education is indeed pitiable. Col-
lege presidents have to sit up late at night
reconciling the noble doctrine of freedom of
teaching with the practical necessity of dodging
controversial questions—for at all costs nothing
must happen to arouse the resentment of timid
parents and donors. Like Milton, the college
head can not endure the humiliating imputa-
tion that his teachers are under the wardship of
an overweening fist; and yet he is constantly
haunted by the nightmare of the fist which
will refuse to write any more checks to the
order of the institution if an instructor is
carelessly charged with Bolshevism or with
teachings tending to immorality, sedition or
irreligion. And what is perhaps still worse
the religious, moral or patriotic critics rarely
take the trouble to find out what an instructor
or text-book writer whom they attack really has
said or believes. This seandalous state of
affairs is too little understood. Those best
informed about it are for various reasons dis-
inclined to tell all they know. Those who plan
out courses of study and write books for the
schools are not free but must often make very
humiliating terms with unintelligence.

Fifty years ago Matthew Arnold deseribed
education as “the getting to know on all matters

SCIENCE 97

which concern us the best which has been
thought and said in the world; and through
this knowledge turning a stream of fresh and
free thought upon our stock notions and
habits.” This ideal would be accepted by most
educators, but how very far are we from realiz-
ing it in practice. Teachers and text-book
writers can not proceed directly toward this
goal as they conceive it. They must hedge and
Suppress, compromise and extenuate, lest the
authentic things now known which it concerns
boys and girls to learn should unluckily start
them thinking. For this might rouse the ap-
prehension of some defender of the social and
moral order, some professional patriot or some
adherent of the Mosaic authorship of the
Pentateuch. The politicians in the Kentucky
legislature think themselves competent to decide
whether the state should grant funds to any
institution in which man’s animal extraction
is taught; the politicians in the New York
legislature have provided that no one shall
teach in the schools of the state who is known
at any time to have expressed any distrust of
our institutions.

Now nothing could be more diametrically
opposed to the cultivation of a scientific frame
of mind. Education should be largely devoted
to the issues upon which the young as. they
grow up should be in a position to form an
opinion. They should understand that scientific
advance has greatly altered, and promises still
further to alter, our environment, and our no-
tions of ourselves and, consequently, the expe-
diency of existing institutions of moral, social
and industrial standards. We should have a
dynamic education to fit a dynamic world. The
world should not be presented to students as
happily standardized but urgently demanding
readjustment. How are they to be more intelli-
gent than their predecessors if they are trained
to an utterly unscientific confidence in ancient
notions, let us say of race, heredity and sex,
now being so fundamentally revised.

VI

Supposing it be conceded that one at least
of the objects of a general education is to help
the young to become acquainted with the best
that is now known or guessed about mankind

98 SCIENCE

and the world; that it concerns them to know
this, and that it should be so presented that it
will, by encouraging them to busy their minds
with our stock notions and habits, best prepare
them to lead more intelligent lives and deal
more wisely than their predecessors with old
and new problems. Would it not be a most
important contribution to reorder and restate
this knowledge and suggest its implications?
Might not this be profitably done with entire
disregard of the timidities of educators and the
apprehensions of those who now support edu-
cation? No doubt things would have to be
said which have hitherto been regarded as dan-
gerous or inappropriate for the young to
know. Issues of a distinctly controversial na-
ture would constantly be arising. So such a
task should not be left to any single individual.
College faculties and teachers’ associations are
in no position to run counter to respectable tra-
dition, and few there be that have any dis-
position to do so. As I have thought over the
matter I see no large and influential associa-
tion so well fitted as yourselves through a
peculiarly competent and broad-minded com-
mittee, to undertake the task of humanizing
science, and setting a new standard of educa-
tion. That it will be easy even with your re-
sources to choose the very best persons for such
a committee, or that its work will have any
immediate effect on general education is prob-
ably too much to expect. There are, however,
minds of the requisite temper, training and
literary tact. They must be hunted out and
brought together in an effective conspiracy to
promote the diffusion of the best knowledge we
have of man and his world. They should have
been researchers at some period of their lives,
and should continue to be researchers in an-
other sense. Their efforts would not longer
be confined to increasing knowledge in detail
but in seeking to discover a new synthesis of
what is already known or in the way to get
known. They should be reassorters, selecters,
combiners and illuminators. They should have
a passion for diffusing, by divesting knowledge
so far as possible of its abstract and profes-
sional character. At present there is a woeful
ignorance even among persons who pass for
intelligent, earnest and well read, in regard to

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1439

highly important matters that are perfectly
susceptible of clear general statement. The
members of the proposed committee should
combine a knowledge of the exigencies of scien-
tifie research with a philosophic outlook, human
sympathy, and a species of missionary ardor.
Each of them should have professional famil-
larity with some special field of knowledge, but
this should have come to seem to him but a
subordinate feature of the magnificent scien-
tifie landseape.

Such a committee should be freed from edu-
cational restraints and from all suspicion of
haying to consider the feelings and preferences
of donors and financial supporters. The more
open-minded teachers and managers of educa-
tion, as well as text-book writers and their pub-
lishers, would welcome a tribunal of high stand-
ing and unimpeachable independence, whose
opinion and decisions might be sought from
time to time to offset the complaints of impor-
tunate critics, who are now a constant nuisance
and occasionally a great danger. There is at
present a growing discontent with our educa-
tion which appears even among the hitherto
docile student bodies. The trouble lies not so.
much in our sometimes inept and now and then
tyrannical form of administration; nor is it to
be met by devising new ways of teaching old
things. We must look to the very core of the
instruction given; to what is being taught and
to what is not. There is a recognized failure
to make connections between the work in school
and college on the one hand and the obligations
and amenities of later life on the other. The
whole substance and content of our general
education needs a thorough overhauling. Some-
thing should be found to replace the effete and
disintegrating old arts course. A good and
sound idea underlies it, but its aims and meth-
ods and assumed results will not stand inspec-
tion in the light of modern knowledge and mod-
ern conditions of life. The elective system was
but a confession that the tree of knowledge had
put forth so many and such thick branches that
the trunk was no longer visible. The stately
proportions of knowledge are now lost in its
ramifications. This difficulty can only be met
by a novel synthesis—groping and tentative
at first, but which will at least recognize and

JULY 28, 1922]

proclaim an essential need and suggest at least
one way of meeting it.

At present there is no proper interplay be-
tween the so-called natural and social sciences;
and each of these grand divisions of human
knowledge, which belong so intimately together,
dealing as they do with man and his world, are
artificially separated by old boundary lines,
defended against invaders and smugglers by
jealous vested interests. This is an inevitable
outcome of transplanting into our educational
system the technical divisions of scientific re-
search. It seems to me that our various scien-
tific courses rarely produce either of the main
results to be expected from them. They
neither engender in the student a discriminating
and exacting tendency of mind—that combina-
tion of open-mindedness and caution which
should be the finest fruit of successful scien-
tifie training; nor do they foster such a lively
understanding of the workings of nature that
the fascination of ever discovering new won-
ders will endure through life and mitigate sor-
row, boredom and disappointment. Of course,
judged by this standard, the failure of educa-
tion is no less conspicuous in the fields of
literature, history, language and philosophy.

We need some new organized effort to bring
together in an imaginative and novel manner
the prevailing and sometimes conflicting knowl-
edge of the material world, its fundamental
nature as it is coming to be understood in the
light of the astonishing new theories of matter
itself; the general story of life, with some
attention to the great classes of living crea-
tures; the discoveries in regard to man’s nature
and functioning and the history of his achieve-
ments and perplexities.

To give a single instance of the way in which
this might be done I will explain that a good
many years ago I became bored with what
passes for history and began to consider those
things in the past that interested me. These
proved to be such evidences as we have of how
the beliefs we now accept about man and his
world grew up and developed. I found my-
self a trespasser roaming about in the pre-
serves of the philosopher, theologian, anthro-
pologist, comparative psychologist, prehistoric
archeologist and of the historians both of liter-

SCIENCE 99

ature and science—to mention only a few of
my divagations. Now this has proved very
amusing and instructive to me, and I have
found many hundreds of young men and
women to follow me in my wanderings. When
we got through we had discovered a new world,
and man’s past and the possibilities of his
future were no longer what we had taken them
to be. What I have done others ean do in
better and more ingenious ways; and the his-
tory of man’s achievements and growing under-
standing of himself and his world could be
made a branch of study beginning early and
running through all the years of school and
college. For, as Francis Bacon said, the his-
tory of the world without the story of man’s
education is like a figure of the mighty giant
Polyphemus with his single great eye left out.

An Association for the Advancement of Sci-
ence representing theoretical knowledge and
some of its multiform practical applications,
should not confine itself merely to forwarding
the progress of research; coordinating, system-
atizing and applying the discoveries made. It
must assume the further responsibility, in the
juncture in which mankind now finds itself, of
cultivating and spreading an appreciation of
our best knowledge of man and his world
among those now indifferent or actively hostile
to it. We have every reason to dread unin-
telligence, but are as yet altogother too con-
siderate of the unintelligent; for we know that
they usually have the whip hand. How shall
we escape from this unworthy bondage?

I am aware that the new organization at
Washington under the auspices of this asso-
ciation, Science Service, is already doing what
it can to spread the knowledge of new dis-
coveries and keep the public aw courant of
scientific advance. I know that the admirably
edited periodicals, Scrence and Tuer Screntrric
Montuty, are performing the same service for
those sufficiently prepared to read them with
interest and understanding. But excellent as
is this beginning we must prepare to go much
farther by making scientific knowledge in the
broadest sense an integral part of education
from beginning to end. We must so identify
it with the experience of the child and the youth
that no longer will a deeper import lurk in

100

the legends told us in our infant years than
in “the truth we live to learn.”

JamMES Harvey Ropinson
NEw ScHOOL FoR SociaAL RESEARCH

THE FOOD RESEARCH INSTITUTE
OF STANFORD UNIVERSITY

Tur Food Research Institute of Stanford
University was founded in February, 1921, by
the Carnegie Corporation of New York in con-
junction with the trustees of Leland Stanford
Junior University, California. It is organized
for the purpose of intensive scientific study of
the problems of the production, distribution,
and consumption of food. The institute grew
out of a suggestion offered by Mr. Herbert
Hoover, and its location at Stanford University
was due partly to the fact that this university
possesses, in the Hoover War Library, a large
and unique collection of documentary material
relating to the food problems and other eco-
nomic aspects of the Great War. The Car-
negie Corporation guarantees stated funds for
the work for a period of ten years. Stanford
University provides quarters and facilities and
has appointed the directors of the institute to
positions on the Stanford faculty.

The control of its policies and the active
direction of the work of the institute are en-
trusted to three joint directors. The plan of
the founders called for the selection of an
expert in agriculture and food manufacture,
an expert in economies and food distribution,
and an expert in the physiology and chemistry
of nutrition. In accordance with this plan,
the following directors were appointed in
April, 1921: Carl L. Alsberg, M.D., Joseph S.
Davis, Ph.D., and Alonzo E. Taylor, M.D. At
the same time an advisory committee was ap-
pointed comprising the presidents of Carnegie
Corporation and Stanford University, ex
officio, and the following additional members:
Hon. Herbert Hoover, secretary of commerce;
Dr. James C. Merriam, president of the Car-
negie Institution of Washington; Mr. Julius
Barnes, formerly president of the U. S. Grain
Corporation; Dr. William M. Jardine, presi-
dent of the Kansas State Agricultural College;
Mr. J. R. Howard, president of the American

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

Farm Bureau Federation; and Mr. George
Roeding, formerly of the California Horticul-
tural Commission.

The founding of the Food Research Institute
is an outgrowth of war experience. During
the late war, possibly for the first time in his-
tory, food production and distribution, nutri-
tion and dietetics had to be considered by
governments as national and even inter-
national problems. In determining policies
required to meet the emergency, food ad-
ministrators sought certain scientific informa-
tion, from agriculturists, economists, physiolo-
gists, and physicians. Many valuable data
were readily furnished. On the other hand,
much of the desired information was not in
existence, not because, given time, it would
have been difficult to obtain, but because no
one before the war had asked these questions
or attempted to reach an adequate answer.
Nutrition and dietetics had been studied mainly
as individual problems, not as mass problems.
The food supply had seldom been examined
with adequate reference to its international
aspects and to the particular commodities en-
tering into it. Marketing problems had re-
ceived mainly local investigation. There had
been little coordination of studies in several
important fields, and serious gaps were numer-
ous. In many instances, therefore, the lack of
essential information led to action more or less
in the dark.

The founders of the Food Research Institute
were convinced that the scientific study of such
problems, from a broad national and interna-
tional viewpoint, was important in peace no
less than in war. While recognizing the essen-
tial services which research work in federal
and state agricultural departments and colleges
had rendered and will continue to render, they
considered that a non-governmental organiza-
tion with university affiliations could have ad-
vantages in attacking certain kinds of problems
without the limitations which apply to these
agencies.

The institute proposes, therefore, to investi-
gate significant food problems from the stand-
point of their bearing upon national economy
and well-being, to deal with them as mass prob-
lems, and to emphasize the commodity and

JuLY 28, 1922]

international aspects. While it will frequently
study data of individual businesses, it will do
this not in order to serve as a business adviser,
but primarily in order to discover principles
of general importance.

The precise program of the institute will be
developed gradually. Its exact form will be
determined partly by the readiness with which
essential data on particular subjects can be
assembled, and by the work which is already
in progress elsewhere. In the course of its
activity the institute will concern itself with
such subjects as the food elements in actual
and normal standards of living, and the physi-
ological and social aspects of sub-nutrition;
the sources, production, marketing, and utiliza-
tion of important staple foodstuffs, such as
wheat; the financing of farm operations and
the manufacture and marketing of food
products; the analysis of important food indus-
tries and the problems which they present;
the technology of food manufacture, and the
desirable scope of public control thereof; and
the elements in a sound national policy with
respect to food production, internal distribu-
tion, and international trade.

Numerous existing organizations are already
conducting research into food problems, from
one angle or another, notably the Department
of Agriculture, state bureaus of markets, agri-
cultural colleges and experiment stations; re-
search organizations of banks, business houses,
trade and marketing associations; and univer-
sity departments, committees, or individuals.
It will be the policy of the institute to avoid,
so far as possible, any serious overlapping of
the work of established research organizations,
public or private. It will endeavor rather to
enlist the aid of existing organizations in the
prosecution of researches in which there is a
common interest, in which essential data are
already collected or in process of collection, or
in which another organization is in a better
position to perform a portion of the research.
Moreover, in numerous instances the institute
will consider its purpose accomplished if meth-
ods which it may develop, or sample studies
which it may make, can be utilized by public
or private agencies in undertaking similar
investigations on a far more extended scale.

SCIENCE

101

The research work will be done, for the most
part, at Stanford University. In general, sub-
jects for investigation will be selected which do
not necessitate extensive field work, or in which
the results of field investigations conducted by
other competent organizations can be utilized.
It is recognized, however, that certain investi-
gations which the institute can undertake will
require more or less field work by the directors,
fellows, or assistants, and for these necessary
provision will be made.

The institute is organized as an integral part
of Stanford University, with the status of a de-
partment for the purpose of directing research
and recommending degrees. For the year
1922-23 it has established four fellowships for
graduate study in the field of food research.
The directors will guide the work of these fel-
lows, and occasionally a few other well-qualified
graduate students, in studies which fall within
the scope outlined above and which will fre-
quently constitute a specific part of a piece of
research which the institute has in process.
Such individual research will ordinarily form
a part of the work toward a higher degree at
Stanford University, and will be supplemented
by such work in other departments of the uni-
versity as may be necessary to fulfill the usual
requirements for degrees.

While the institute does not contemplate
undertaking extensive experimental work on its
own account, the university’s established facili-
ties for experimental research on foods, nutri-
tion, ete., are available to graduate students,
and to a limited extent the directors of the
institute will cooperate in the direction of re-
search in these fields. In addition, the directors
will occasionally offer courses of instruction in
other deparments of the university.

In part the results of researches will be pub-
lished through established technical journals.
Where circumstances render this undesirable,
the results will usually appear in a series of
publications to be issued by the Food Research
Institute. In cases where certain lines of re-
search are of interest to specific groups of
readers, other or additional channels of pub-
lication will be sought in order to reach those
concerned.

The first year of the institute has been

102

largely occupied with the establishment at
Stanford, the determination of general policies,
the organization of a small staff, enlarging the
collection of data which will be required for
research, and making certain preliminary sur-
veys and investigations designed to furnish the
basis for more intensive studies. The work
will be fully under way by the autumn of 1922.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

CANADIAN SOCIETY OF TECHNICAL
AGRICULTURISTS

THE Canadian Society of Technical Agricul-
turists held its second annual convention at
Macdonald College, Ste. Anne de Bellevue,
Que., in the week of June 26 to July 1. In
addition to the business sessions, a number of
advanced lectures were given, the expense of
which was borne by the Dominion Department
of Agriculture. Professors W. T. Jackman, of
the University of Toronto, and A. Leitch, of
the Ontario Agricultural College, discussed
topics appertaining to rural economics. Pro-
fessor L. J. Cole, of the University of Wis-
consin, spoke on “Genetics”; Dr. A. Bruce
Macallum, of the Synthetie Drug Company,
Toronto, on “Vitamins”; and Dr. M. O. Malte,
National Herbarium, Ottawa, and Professor
R. G. Stapledon, director of the Plant Breeding
Station, Aberystwyth, Wales, on “Plant
Breeding.” President L. S. Klinck, of the
University of British Columbia, delivered the
presidential address and was succeeded in the
chair by President J. B. Reynolds, of the On-
tario Agricultural College. An interesting
feature of the convention was an excursion to
the Oka Agricultural Institute, La Trappe,
Que., where the members of the society were
very hospitably entertained by the staff of the
institute under the Reverend Father Leopold.
Speakers at the luncheons and _ banquets
included the Honorable J. E. Caron, minister
of agriculture, Quebec; Dr. J. H. Grisdale,
federal deputy minister of agriculture; Dr.
Jas. W. Robertson, Ottawa; the Reverend
Father Leopold, principal of the Oka Agricul-
tural Institute, and Principal F. C. Harrison,
of Macdonald College. Professor W. H. Brit-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

tain, of the Nova Scotia Agricultural Society,
was appointed representative of the society on
the council of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science. The society main-
tains a Bureau of Records of its members,
which serves as an employment agency, and a
bilingual journal, Scientific Agriculture (La
Revue Agronomique Canadienne), both of
which are conducted by the general secretary-
treasurer, Mr. F. H. Grindley, B.S.A., Gar-
denvale, Que.

BISHOP MUSEUM FELLOWSHIPS

From the list of applicants for the Bishop
Museum fellowships Yale University announces
the selection of the following fellows for the
year 1922-23:

Henry W. Fowler, ichthyologist, Philadel-
phia Academy of Science.

N. E. A. Hinds, instructor in geology, Har-
vard University.

Carl Skottsberg, director of the Botanical
Garden, Gotenberg, Sweden.

Dr. Fowler will devote his attention to a
study of the fish of Hawaiian waters; Dr.
Hinds will continue his investigations of the
geology of the island of Kauai; Dr. Skottsberg
plans to make a study of the flora of Hawaii
with particular reference to comparison with
the plant life of Juan Fernandez and other
islands of the southeast Pacific.

The four Bishop Museum fellowships yield-
ing $1,000 each were established in 1920 by a
cooperative agreement between Yale University
and the Bernice P. Bishop Museum of Hono-
lulu. They are designed primarily for aid in
research on problems in ethnology and natural
history which involve field studies in the Pa-
cifie region.

The Bishop Museum fellows for 1921-22
were Dr. F. L. Stevens, professor of botany
in the University of Illinois; Dr. Stephen 8.
Visher, professor of geography in the Univer-
sity of Indiana, and Ruth H. Greiner, graduate
student in ethnology in the University of Cali-
fornia. The results of Professor Stevens’
work on Hawaiian fungi and of Miss Greiner’s
study of Polynesian art have been submitted to
Bishop Museum for publication.

JuLy 28, 1922]

THE HULL MEETING OF THE BRITISH
ASSOCIATION

THE association meets from September 6 to
13 under the presidency of Sir C. 8. Sherring-
ton, Waynflete professor of physiology at Ox-
ford, who will succeed Sir Edward Thorpe.

The London Times states that the presiden-
tial address will be on “Some aspects of animal
mechanism.” In the course of the meeting
there will also be two evening discourses, the
first by Professor W. Garstang on “Fishing:
old ways and new,” and the second, which will
raise a question that created great interest at
the last meeting in Edinburgh, by Dr. F. W.
Aston, F.R.S., on “The atoms of matter: their
size, number and construction.” An interest-
ing part of the proceedings will be the series
of Citizens’ Lectures, in development of the
movement started by Huxley in the “sixties.”
These lectures will be four in number. Dr.
E. H. Griffiths, F.R.S., will speak on “The
conservation and dissipation of energy,’ Sir
Westeott Abell, of Lloyd’s Register, on the
“Story of the ship”; Dr. Smith Woodward, of
the Natural History Museum, on the “Ances-
tors of man”; and Professor A. P. Coleman,
Toronto, on “Labrador.” There will also be
special lectures for children, at which Pro-
fessor H. H. Turner, F.R.S., will speak on
“The telescope and what it tells us,” Professor
J. Arthur Thomson on “Creatures of the sea,”
and Mr. F. Debenham on “The Antarctic.”

Since the program was first arranged Dr.
W. H. R. Rivers, F.R.S., president-elect of
the Psychology Section, who was to have
spoken on “The herd instinct and human soci-
ety,” has died, and his place will be taken by
Dr. C. S. Myers, F.R.S., who will speak on
the influence of the late Dr. Rivers on the
development of psychology in Great Britain.
The following are the titles of the other ad-
dresses to be given by sectional presidents:

Mathematics and Physies: Professor G. H.
Hardy, F.R.S., ‘‘The theory of numbers.’’

Chemistry: Principal J. C. Irvine, F.R.S., ‘‘Re-
search problems in the sugar group.’’

Geology: Professor P. F. Kendall, ‘‘The phys-
ical geography of the coal swamps.’’

SCIENCE

103

Zoology: Dr. E. J. Allen, F.R.S., ‘‘The pro-
gression of life in the sea.’’

Geography: Dr. Marion Newbigin, ‘‘ Human
geography: first principles and some applica-
tions. *’

Eeonomies: Professor F. Y. Edgeworth, ‘‘ Equal
pay to men and women for equal work.’’

Engineering: Professor T. Hudson Beare,
‘Railway problems in Australia.’’

Anthropology: Mr. H. J. E. Peake, ‘‘The study
of man.’’

Physiology: Professor E. P. Cathcart, F.R.S.,
‘The efficiency of man and the factors which
influence it.’’

Botany: Professor H. H. Dixon, F.R.S., ‘‘The
transport of organic substances in plants.’’

Edueation: Sir R. Gregory, ‘‘Educational and
school science.’’

Agriculture: Lord Bledisloe, ‘‘The proper po-
sition of the landowner in relation to the agricul-
tural industry.’’

The special interest of Hull as a fishing
center will receive prominent attention in a
series of sectional discussions dealing with the
North Sea. On the more technical side, a
discussion of intense interest will be that on
“The origin of magnetism,’ which will be
opened by Professor P. Langevin, Paris, and
in which Professor P. Weiss, Strasbourg, will
also take part. Another subject to be dis-
cussed is that “Economic periodicity,” which
arises out of the theory expressed by Sir Wil-
liam Beveridge that there is a bad time coming
in a few years. Lord Haldane will lecture on
“The ideal of our national education,” and,
among the other topies which will be dealt with
are “Training in citizenship,” “Psycho-analysis
and the school,” “Vitamins,” “The present
position of Darwinism,” “The possibility of
increasing the food supply of Great Britain,”
and “Our bones and teeth” (the latter, a lec-
ture by Professor W. D. Halliburton, F.R.8.).

A special effort is being made this year to
attract the younger generation of students.
Thanks to the beneficent gift of £10,000 of
War Stock recently handed over to the asso-
ciation by Sir Charles A. Parsons, the associa-
tion has offered a certain number of exhibitions
to universities and university colleges in Great
Britain.

104

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Proressor Epwarp SYLVESTER Morsz, of
the Peabody Museum of Salem, Massachusetts,
and the Boston Museum of Fine Arts, an
authority on Japan and the Nipponese people,
their habits, customs and arts, was in 1898
decorated by the Japanese government with
the Order of the Rising Sun. He has now
received through the Imperial University of
Tokio, from the department of foreign affairs,
Japan, the second class of the Order of the
Sacred Treasure, “in recognition of merito-
rious services rendered to the cause of learning
and culture” in Japan.

A COMPLIMENTARY dinner was tendered to
Professor and Mrs. G. F. Hull, of Dartmouth
College, on July 15, by the departments of
physics, astronomy and physiological opties,
in celebration of the twenty-fifth anniversary
of Professor Hull’s doctorate. Professor Hull
received the degree of Ph.D. from the Univer-
sity of Chicago on July 1, 1897. Later the
party was entertained at the home of Professor
and Mrs. A. B. Meservey. Congratulatory
letters were read from Dr. E. F. Nichols, for-
merly of the department of physies of Dart-
mouth, from Sir J. J. Thomson, of Trinity
College, Cambridge, with whom Professor Hull
has studied, and from others with whom he has
been associated.

A COMPLIMENTARY dinner was recently given
to Dr. Henry Head, F.R.S., on his retirement,
in recognition of his services as editor of Brain
for seventeen years. The chair was taken
by Sir Charles Sherrington, F.R.S., professor
of physiology at the University of Oxford and
president of the Royal Society and of the
British Association.

THE James Scott Prize of the Royal Society
of Edinburgh, established in 1918 for a lecture
or essay on the fundamental concepts of nat-
ural philosophy, was presented on June 5 to
Professor A. N. Whitehead for his lecture enti-
tled “The Relatedness of Nature.”

Honorary degrees have been conferred by
the University of Sheffield on Sir Charles Par-
sons for his work on the turbine engine, and
on Mr. T. W. Hall for researches in paleogra-
phy and archeology.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1439

M. Amé Picret, professor of chemistry at
the University of Geneva, has been elected a
corresponding member by the French Academy
of Sciences.

Proressor Grorce H. F. Nurrauu, of the
University of Cambridge, has been elected a
corresponding member of the Société de
Biologie, Paris, and of the Society of American
Bacteriologists.

Tue Swedish Medical Association at a recent
meeting voted to commemorate the sixtieth
birthday of Professor A. Gullstrand, in June,
with a special gold medal and the foundation of
a fund in his honor. He was given the Nobel
prize in medicine in 1911 for his contributions
to the science of ophthalmology.

Proressor T. Perrina, of Prague, professor
emeritus of internal diseases and president of
the German section of the Bohemian Medical
Society, retired from this and other positions
on reaching his eightieth birthday recently.
The German-Bohemian members of ithe society
have founded the Petrina Endowment in his
honor.

Mr. V. H. GorrscHaLk, of the technical
branch of the Western Electric Company, at
Hawthorne, Ill., has joined the research staff
of the Society of Automotive Engineers, New
York City.

Tue following men have accepted temporary
appointments at the Japanese Beetle Labora-
tory, Riverton, N. J., for this summer and
have reported for duty: Professor W. A. Price,
of Purdue University; Dr. Henry Fox, of
Mercer University; H. H. Pratt, a graduate of
Rutgers College, and J. H. Painter, a graduate
of the University of Maryland. There was re-
ceived at the Japanese Beetle Laboratory
earlier in the spring what is believed to have
been one of the largest shipments of imported
parasite material ever brought into this country
from abroad. Something over a hundred thou-
sand cocoons of a tachinid known to be para-
siti¢c on the Japanese beetle in Japan were
sent to the laboratory by C. P. Clausen and
J. L. King, who are stationed in Japan and
working upon Japanese beetle parasites there.
A fairly large proportion of these cocoons

JuLy 28, 1922]

were apparently in good condition upon their
arrival at the laboratory and emergence has
just commenced.

Tue British Commissioners of 1851 announce
the following appointments to science research
scholarships (overseas) :

Canada: J. M. Luck, University of Toronto,
biology; W. H. McCurdy, Dalhousie University,
physics; D. F. Stedman, University of British
Columbia, physical chemistry.

Australia: Miss M. Bentivoglio, University of
Sydney, crystallography; J. S. Rogers, University
of Melbourne, physics. ;

New Zealand: J. C. Smith, University of New
Zealand, chemistry.

South Africa: I. Low, University of Stellen-
bosch, meteorology.

Dr. T. T. Reap, chief of the information
service of the United States Bureau of Mines,
has been appointed by the president of the
American Institute of Mining and Metallur-
gical Engineers as the official representative
of the institute to attend the International
Congress of Engineering to be held in Rio de
Janeiro, Brazil, in September. Dr. Read ex-
pects to leave for Rio de Janeiro about
August 15.

Dr. A. B. Stour, of the New York Botanical
Garden, will be in residence as professor at
Pomona College during the year 1922-23, being
on leave of absence for one year.

A party in charge of Dr. C. H. Edmondson
and Dr. Stanley C. Ball, of the Bishop Museum
staff, sailed on July 10 for Fanning Island.
They plan to make a study of the bird life
and marine fauna and to procure representa-
tive collections.

PROFESSOR ARTHUR JOHN HopxKins, of the
department of chemistry of Amherst College,
has started on a tour of eleven months through
Spain, Italy and Egypt. He will search for
traces. of alchemy.

Dr. W. B. Cannon, professor of physiology
at the Harvard Medical School, gave a Mayo
Foundation lecture at the Mayo Clinic on June
20. His subject was “The effects of the emo-
tions on the body.”

J. D. Sister, of the Pennsylvania Geological
Survey, is spending the summer mapping the

SCIENCE

105

geology of the Myersdale quadrangle in the
southwestern part of the state, and M. KE.
Johnson visited the Tidioute oil pool in the
northwest part of the state a few days ago
and will shortly resume geologic mapping of
the Pittsburgh quadrangle.

THE name of Dr. Keating Hart, who lived
in Paris, is gazetted in the Journal Officiel on
June 16 as having “deserved well of France
and humanity.” The order points out that he
had specialized for twenty-five years in elec-
trical and X-ray therapy, and had rendered
great service in research work. During the
war he showed the utmost contempt of danger
while attending to the wounded under bom-
bardment. Injured by exposure to X-rays he
underwent two operations on his right hand,
but nevertheless he continued his work until
his death on January 25 of this year.

Tue French Senate has unanimously voted
2,000,000 frances to observe the hundredth anni-
versary of the birth of Louis Pasteur, which
will take place this year. The Senate in voting
the appropriation described Pasteur as the
“symbol of French science.”

Moriz WEINRICH, sugar expert, well-known
in the beet, cane and refining industry through-
out the world, died on July 15 in Rosendale,
New York, after a brief illness, at the age of
seventy-six years.

Mr. Ernest Wiuuiam Lyons Hott, chief
inspector of Irish fisheries, died on June 10,
at the age of fifty-seven years.

Dr. Jacques Brertitton, who had charge of
the bureau of statistics at Paris, in which posi-
tion his father and grandfather had preceded
him, has died at the age of seventy-five years.

A RECENT exploration of Palmyra Island,
lying about 1,000 miles south of Hawaii, has
resulted in a map and a large collection of
zoological material, especially mollusca and
crustacea, which go to enrich the collections
of the Bishop Museum.

Ir is announced by Professor E. Perroncito,
president of the Second International Con-
gress of Comparative Pathology, that this con-
gress, which was to have convened at Rome on
September 20, 1922, has been postponed until

106

sometime in 1923. The date will be given in
later announcements.

THE Congress of the German Society of
Geneticists will be held from September 25 to
27, immediately after the Mendel celebration
in Briinn. It is open to members, as well as
to guests interested in research in genetics.
The following addresses are on the program
and will be followed by a general discussion of
the subjects: R. Goldschmidt, Berlin, “The
problem of mutation”; H. Spemann, Freiburg
i. B., “The hereditary material and its activa-
tion”; E. Riidin, Munich, “The inheritance of
mental disturbances.” On September 27 a
special session will be held, which will be
addressed by E. Baur, Berlin, on the “Tasks
and aims of the science of genetics in theory
and practice.” In addition to these addresses,
a large number of other papers are on the pro-
gram. Information on all matters concerning
the congress and its program may be obtained
from Dr. H. Nachtsheim, Berlin, N. W.,
Invalidenstrasse, Nr. 42.

A MEETING was held recently at Harvard
University, at which the subject under discus-
sion was the killing of flies and mosquitoes.
Sanitary experts, business men and the heads
of women’s and children’s welfare organiza-
tions of the metropolitan district were present.
J. Albert C. Nyhen, director of fly and mos-
quito suppression of the Brookline Board of
Health, and Professor G. C. Whipple, of the
engineering department of Harvard University,
called the meeting, at which Professor Whipple
presided. Its purposes were to consider ac-
tion to be taken in a cooperative movement for
the suppression of mosquitoes and flies in the
metropolitan area and to call a later meeting
to start a state-wide mosquito campaign. It
is hoped that all insect nuisances affecting
public health may be abolished and the move-
ment will try to include the flea and the biting
fly.

Tue Forest Service of the United States
Department of Agriculture is using airplanes
for locating and photographing undiscovered
lakes in the national forests of Alaska. It has
long been known that there are many lakes
on the headlands and islands traversed by the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

inside passage between Seattle and Skagway
that do not appear on any map. During the
New York-Nome flight made by army aviators,
lakes were frequently sighted which could not
be found on the latest and most authentic
maps of the territory. Tales of unknown
water bodies are constantly being brought in
by trappers and prospectors. Less than a year
ago a lake four and one half miles long and
one half mile wide was discovered at the head
of Short Bay. This lake has over 1,000 acres
of surface area and is less than one and one
fourth miles from tidewater, yet because of the
surrounding country’s rough topography, it
has remained unknown and unnamed. Recog-
nizing that many other of these “lost lakes”
may be sources of valuable water power, the
Forest Service has laid plans to map this no
man’s land of the north by means of aerial
photographs. A few days’ flight, it is said,
will be sufficient to cover the area with a
degree of accuracy that would require many
years and great expense to accomplish by or-
dinary methods. The work, which has been
approved by the Federal Power Commission,
will be done by seaplane, flying from Ketchikan
as a base.

Tue British Medical Journal states that the
annual report of the Gordon Memorial College
at Khartoum for 1920, which is the nineteenth,
shows steady progress in all directions; it pays
a tribute to the late Sir William Mather, one
of its most generous supporters and an ener-
getic member of the governing body for seven-
teen years. The Wellcome Research Labora-
tories are accommodated in the Gordon Memo-
rial College; they are under the supervision of
Major Archibald, who is maintaining the high
standard set by his predecessors, Drs. Andrew
Balfour and Chalmers; it contains research de-
partments in medicine, chemistry and entomol-
ogy, the activities of which are duly set forth.
Research work in the bacteriological section was
interfered with by depletion of the staff and by
the large amount of routine work that had to
be carried out. But the director has a number
of articles awaiting publication—namely, notes
on urinary amebiasis in the Sudan; on kala-
azar in the Sudan; on tropical splenomegaly
caused by a hitherto undescribed bacillus; on

JULY 28, 1922]

juxta-articular nodes, their etiology and path-
ology; and on baciluria as a cause of pyrexias
of uncertain origin in the tropies. According
to the report, the time when the prophets of
research had to clamor for a hearing is happily
past, and there is no longer any hesitation on
the part of government departments or pri-
vate enterprise in appealing for assistance. Of
the two possible methods of extension to meet
these inereased responsibilites Major Archibald
advocates decentralization, by the establishment
in various parts of the Sudan of local labora-
tories, temporary or permanent, for medical,
chemical, and entomological research. This he
considers preferable to the creation of new and
larger laboratories at Khartoum. His recom-
mendation has been unhesitatingly approved
by the government.

In order to present to the public more
promptly the results of its scientific investiga-
tions, the Bureau of Mines issues a series of
brief mimeographed reports of investigations
as an adjunct to the printed publications. Be-
sides affording a medium of prompt publica-
tion of information, the reports of investiga-
tions provide a vehicle for the publication of
briefer material which would hardly justify
issuance in the form of printed bulletins.
These reports deal with major metals, minor
and rare metals, non-metallic minerals, petro-
leum, gasoline, coal, coke, safety, sanitation,
mine accidents and other subjects. The reports
are mailed free to interested applicants as long
as the editions are available. Descriptive no-
tices of issues in the series are mailed regularly
to all who desire to receive the information.
Serial 2316, just issued, is a subject list of
reports of investigations issued to December 31,
1921, and describes some 300 reports, whose
range covers such subjects as abrasives, auto-
mobile exhaust gases, breathing apparatus,
carbon black, Fuller’s earth, liquid oxygen ex-
plosives, mine telephones, oil pipe lines, slate
dust, valuation of oil properties, airplanes in
mine-rescue work, powdered coal, helium, mine
timbers, lead poisoning, smoke prevention,
clays, building stones, safety in quarrying, ete.
Serial 2316 may be obtained from the Bureau
of Mines, Washington, D. C.

The Journal of the Royal Geographical Soci-
ety reports that a short account is given in

SCIENCE

107

Ymer of the scientific expedition organized by
Prince William of Sweden for zoological re-
search in the region of the Kirunga volcanoes,
north of Lake Kivu. The expedition left Mar-
seilles towards the end of 1920, landed at Mom-
basa, and passed through the Kenya colony
and Uganda to its destination. Various camps
were established among the voleanoes and on
the north shore of the lake, and extensive zool-
ogical collections made, including specimens of
the mountain gorilla. Near the lake the barren
lava-fields due to the sudden eruption of a new
voleano in December, 1912, were found to be
but sparsely covered here and there by new
vegetation. The expedition went north to the
Belgian post of Ruchuru and Lake Edward,
through a district described as a paradise for
sportsmen. Passing rapidly through the Sem-
liki valley, where interesting collections were
made in the outliers of the great equatorial
forest, it spent some time at the Belgian post
of Isumu, and made some study of the Wam-
butti dwarfs. Thence the return was made by
Lake Albert and the Nile. The collections,
which have been deposited at the Natural His-
tory Museum at Stockholm, include about 1,000
mammals, 1,700 birds, and some hundreds of
reptiles and amphibia, besides a large number
of insects.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Srx medical students from Polish universities
have been selected to go to America to finish
their studies preparatory to entering the new
Institute of Hygiene recently established at
Warsaw by the Rockefeller Foundation. Pro-
fessor Selskar Gunn, representing the Rocke-
feller interests, has made the final choice of
the students after a competitive examination
organized by the Polish ministry of health.
An endowment of $250,000 has been given for
the establishment of the institute by the Rocke-
feller Foundation.

Tuer departments of engineering and medi-
cine at the Kyushu Imperial University have
just been opened to women students. Women
are still barred from attendance at the Imperial
University in Tokio and at most of the other
higher schools.

108

At Stanford University, Dr. Lewis M. Ter-
man has been appointed head of the depart-
ment of psychology to succeed Professor Frank
Angell, who retired at the end of the academic
year 1921-1922. Other additions to the depart-
ment include Dr. W. R. Miles, professor of
psychology, and Dr. Calvin P. Stone, assistant
professor.

Proressor J. J. THORNBER, director of the
Arizona Agricultural Experiment Station, has
in addition received appointment as dean of
the College of Agriculture of the University
of Arizona, succeeding Dean D. W. Working.

Mr. Cuartes W. T. Penuanp, A.M., Har-
vard, has been appointed instructor in biology
in Colorado College for the ensuing year. Mr.
H. R. Remmers, A.M., Iowa, has been ap-
pointed instructor in psychology.

Mr. R. A. Brinx, who has for the past two
years been at the Bussey Institution of Har-
vard University, has been appointed assistant
professor of genetics at the University of Wis-
consin. He succeeds in this position Dr. E. W.
Lindstrom, who goes about September 1 to the
Iowa State College at Ames as professor of
genetics, where he will organize a new depart-
ment.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
FILTERED AIR

In Science of June 2, 1922, in mentioning
the work of the Committee for the Investiga-
tion of Atmospheric Pollution, reference was
made to the work of Dr. Owens on the amount
of dust found in expired air. It has been taken
for granted, I think, by many medical men
that in passing through the nasal and buccal
passages efficient filtering of the air took place;
and that all dust particles were deposited on
moist membranes and automatically removed by
secretion flow. Dr. Owens’ experiments seem
to prove that in ordinary breathing the ex-
pired air still contained as much as 70 per cent.
of the suspended impurities which entered
during inspiration. So that only about 30 per
cent. of the impurities in air are removed
in transit through respiratory passages.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

Dr. Chase S. Osborn, formerly governor of
Michigan and one who had much to do with
mines, referring to the above mentioned insuf-
ficient filtering, suggests that there may be
something in the fact that the influx of air has
not the velocity and current strength of the
efflux, and states that the finding of Dr. Owens
that air is not purified in its passage through
the body appears to be proved without doubt
by sillicosis in the Transvaal mines. He says:

It takes very little time comparatively for a
miner’s lungs to fill up. He is then subject to
all sorts of pulmonary diseases. Dr. Gorgas was
summoned to see if he could offer anything to
prevent or cure. Even when the men wear masks
these do not entirely avail, as often the men are
in close places and will not wear the masks.

Good water, sterilized milk and insect screens
have aided materially in reducing disease. May
we hope to add to the list filtered air? There
seems to be no doubt but that the use of a
mouth mask was helpful in combatting the
spread of influenza.

ALEXANDER McADIE

THE “PROCESSING” OF STRAW

In a recent number of Science, Professor
Harold Hibbert calls attention to the work
done in Germany in converting straw into a
feed of greater value by boiling it with soda
and suggests that American farmers may con-
vert a waste product into “a profitable and
palatable cattle food of high nutritive value”
by following the German example. Professor
Hibbert has apparently overlooked the fact that
this feed is extremely low in proteins. This
fact was mentioned by Lorenz Hiltner in his
pamphlet in 1917-18 and is recognized as being
a point against “processed” straw as a feed.
Various methods have been tried by the Ger-
mans to increase the protein content, some of
which are mentioned by Hiltner.

The Office of Forage Crops has been inter-
ested in the development of this German work
but has not been convinced of the value of the
process for the American farmer. While it is
not possible to make accurate estimates of the
expense involved it is quite evident that the
labor item would be considerable. The farmer
would have to set up a plant however simple

JULY 28, 1922]

whether he used the cold process with NaOH or
the boiling process with soda. Such a plant
would necessarily be of considerable size since
straw is light and considerable quantities of
liquid (eight times the weight of the straw)
must be used. Besides the treatment, the pro-
cessed straw must be washed to remove the
alkali. All of this involves labor and increases
the cost of the process. Besides it seems prob-
able that in America it will always be possible
to grow corn or sorghum for feed much more
cheaply than to process straw even if the latter
were wholly a waste material, which is not the
case.

Without doubt the attention of experiment
stations should be and probably has been called
to this process but it seems unwise even to sug-
gest it to the average farmer.

A. J. PIrvers

OFFICE OF ForAGE Crop INVESTIGATIONS,
U. S. DeparTMENT or AGRICULTURE

DOES THE BIBLE TEACH EVOLUTION?

THE creation of man according to the story
in Genesis is placed by chronologists at about
4004 B.C. The acceptance of this date or
indeed of any variation from it that has been
suggested carries the imperative implication
that all existing types of man—white, yellow,
red, brown and black—Englishman, Japanese,
Malay and Negrito—have all descended from
Adam and Eve. It matters not what anthro-
pological characters may be assumed for Adam
and Eve, the diversity of their supposed
progeny illustrates what the biologist means by
evolution. The Biblical story with its logical
impheations stamps every believer in it as an
evolutionist. However, no serious scientific
man will admit for a moment that human evo-
lution has proceeded as rapidly as the story in
Genesis necessarily supports. Viewed from the
evolutionist’s standpoint, the theory involved in
the Biblical story makes Darwin’s ideas seem
exceedingly conservative. Really Mr. Bryan
ought to attack Darwin as a hide-bound reac-
tionary whose notions regarding the slow rate
of modification in species seriously challenges
the truth of evolution as taught by the Bible.

CHARLES V. PIPER

SCIENCE

109

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

A History of the Whale Fisheries, from the
Basque Fisheries of the Tenth Century to
the Hunting of the Finner Whale at the
Present Date. By J. T. Jenkins, D.Se.,
Ph.D. London, H. F. and G. Witherby, 326
High Holborn, W. C., 1921. 336 pages,
with reproductions from photographs and
old engravings.

In the preface to this book, the author tells
us that no attempt has hitherto been made to
give within a brief compass a detailed history
of the whale fisheries: to the best of our knowl-
edge and belief, this statement is in the main
correct and the volume under consideration
may be looked upon as an effort to remedy this
lack of information. Parts of the story have,
it is true, been told, and told very well, par-
ticularly that relating to the United States,
and these Mr. Jenkins has passed over some-
what lightly, devoting much time and care to
bringing together and making available for
the reader who knows only English the story
of the early days of the fishery and especially
the important part played by the Dutch who,
having practically dispossessed the English,
for more than a century successfully prose-
cuted the chase of the whale about Spitz-
bergen or, as it was constantly called, Green-
land. At the height of this fishery, the decade
from 1680-89, nearly 2,000 vessels sailed to
Spitzbergen—1,966, to be exact—and the catch
of whales was 9,487, but from that time, with
certain spurts, the industry gradually de-
clined, coming to an end about 1800.

Mr. Jenkins has been at great pains to give
us the details of this whaling, the size of the
vessels—often much larger than the average
American whaler of the fifties—their crews,
equipment, even provisions and the manner of
capture and trying out. All of this is interest-
ing and important, to most of us it is new, and
for this information we are most grateful. In
one detailed list of equipment is noted ‘150
hogsheads of cidar and four tunnes of wines,
eight kintals of bacon and six hogsheads of
beefe,” proportions that might have met with
the approval of Falstaff.

One point is surprising—the comparatively

110

small number of whales taken per vessel, the
average being about three and seldom as many
as five. To give an idea of the intensive, not
to say destructive, methods of modern whaling,
it may be noted that the day’s catch of a steam
whaler is often as great as the season’s catch
of these early days.

There were, however, some exceptionally
“fat? years when the number ran up to ten
or twenty whales per vessel, which possibly
means better weather and better ice conditions.

The English in their first attempts did little
better and it is small wonder that later on the
Americans attained preeminence in their field,
though they in turn failed sadly to realize the
possibilities of modern steam whaling and the
industry fell into the hands of the Norwegians.
As practically the same weapons and methods
were used by the Americans as by their prede-
cessors and competitors, it would seem as if
this success might justly be ascribed to the
greater energy in the pursuit of whales.

The Americans seem to have had an inborn
contempt for the use of any gun harpoon, for
while it was employed by the English as early
as 1780 in the capture of the Bowhead, it was
never adopted by the Americans and it took a
visit to South Georgia to convince the modern
New Bedford whalers that the Norwegian
whaling methods were really any improvement
over their own. For that matter, even the
English did not adopt their own gun harpoon
until well along in the nineteenth century.

The English and Dutch did not have an en-
tirely happy time owing to troubles with one
another and with the French, and if a whaler
secured a cargo of oil, it was by no means cer-
tain that he would reach home with it. In
those days the line between privateering and
piracy was none too sharply drawn and often
the only rule followed was

That they should take who have the power,

And they should keep who can.

Spanish and French, Dutch and English,
with some participation by Danes and Ger-
mans, Americans and Norwegians, each in turn
led in the whale fishery and each has played,
or is playing, an important part in the slaugh-
ter of the whale, and Mr. Jenkins tells us of
them all.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1439

The book opens with a chapter on Whales
and their Classification, their habits and haunts,
which is followed by one on the Economics of
Whaling, including under this head the meth-
ods employed, utilization of products and the
possibility of conservation. In discussing the
measures that have been proposed or taken to
preserve the whales, Mr. Jenkins seems inclined
to give some credence to the argument of the
whalers that the industry will in a way regu-
late itself, that long before whales can be
exterminated, their capture—on account of
lessened numbers—will cease to be profitable.
This, as shown by experience in other “fish-
eries’” and even by the collapse of Newfound-
land whaling after a few years of prosperity,
is a fallacy, as is the statement made in con-
nection with the Natal whaling, and often
used with all manner of statistics, that there
is a tendency for the whales to abandon the
coast altogether. Altogether is quite correct;
as in the case of seals and walruses, the aban-
donment is due to the fact that the whales
have been killed off and put beyond all hope
of return. To illustrate, it may be said that
Right Whales were formerly common off the
eastern end of Long Island but that during
the past decade only two have been seen and
these fortunately escaped.

While steel and the automobile have tem-
porarily stayed the extermination of the Bow-
head since his “bone” is no longer in demand
for whips and corsets, the species increases
but slowly at the best and some new demand
may blot the species out of existence.

So we subscribe most heartily to a previous
statement, on page 47, that “in no ease has the
cessation of whaling taken place sufficiently
soon to render possible the recovery of the
whales to any appreciable extent.”

About the only real protection that has been
given whales is the prohibition, by the Nor-
wegian government, of whaling in some loeali-
ties and the establishment of close seasons in
others. This has been done in response to
the protests of fishermen whose reasons are
set forth in the Last Phase of Whaling.

There is an occasional little slip here and
there, as where it is said a superior kind of oil
was found in the head of the Sperm Whale,

JuLy 28, 1922]

which might lead a careless reader to think
that this was the sole source of Sperm Oil,
even though in dealing with the Sperm Whale
fishery it is apparent that this is not the case.
Another statement capable of misinterpreta-
tion is that the “entire Arctic fleet was
destroyed by pack ice in 1871,” which happily
was not the case, as, while 34 ships were
crushed in the ice, seven vessels were left
which brought home the crews without the loss
of a single life.

In the very useful bibliography, we miss,
among some others, any reference to Star-
buck’s “History of the American Whale Fish-
ery” with its wealth of information and detailed
lists of vessels and their catch. That the
“Speckshioner” and his duties are not defined
nor his title mentioned in the index is possibly
a personal grievance due to “satiable curiosity”
aroused by Kipling.

But these are trivial matters; destructive
criticism is the easiest thing in the world, and
to point out all the good things in the book
would be to write another. Jenkins’ “History
of the Whale Fishery” is simply indispensable
to any one interested in the subject of whaling,
and in these days, when information in regard
to the early days of the industry is eagerly
sought for, and paintings, models and relics
of the old whale ships bring surprisingly large
prices, this book should be most welcome.

F. A. Lucas
AMERICAN MUSEUM or NATURAL HISTORY

SPECIAL ARTICLES
BACTERIAL PUSTULE OF SOY BEAN

Ever since 1904" there have been scattering
references in phytopathological literature to a
bacterial leaf spot or bacterial blight of soy
bean, due, it was assumed, to Bacterium
phaseoli Erw. Sm., but there has been no pub-
lication of any experimental proof of this
theory. In 1917 Johnson and Coerper? pub-

1 Smith, Erwin F.: ‘‘ Bacterial Leaf-spot Dis-
eases,’’? Science, N. S., XIX, No. 480, pp. 416-
418, 1904.

2 Johnson, A. G., and Coerper, Florence M.:
‘‘A& Bacterial Blight of Soy Bean’’ (abstract),
Phytopathology, VII, 65, 1917.

SCIENCE

111

lished a note on a bacterial blight of soy bean
caused by a white organism which in a later
paper by Miss Coerper? was named Bact.
glycineum. Since then Wolf*® and Shunk®
have described a bacterial leaf spot caused by
an organism which the former has named Bac-
terium soj@, but which is yery similar to if
not identical with Bact. glycinewm Coerpeyr.

Since the publication of these papers there
have been an increasing number of references
in the literature, including the reports of the
plant disease survey of the U. S. Department
of Agriculture, to “bacterial blight” or “bae-
terial leaf spot” of soy bean without any men-
tion of the causal organism, due to the assump-
tion, presumably, that there is but one disease
and that due to Bact. glycinewm Coerper.

In 1917 the writer isolated from soy bean
leaves from Texas a yellow organism very
closely resembling Bact. phaseoli Erw. Sm.
With pure culture inoculation with this organ-
ism infection has been repeatedly produced
both on soy beans and several varieties of
garden beans belonging to the genus Phaseolus.
From these artificial infections the same yellow
organism has been re-isolated and with it in-
fections have been produced on sound plants.
The infections on Phaseolus when made in
favorable circumstances are not to be distin-
guished from those caused by Bact. phaseoli
isolated from Phaseolus, but, except under
very abnormal conditions to be described in a
paper in preparation, no infections have ever
been obtained on soy-bean with the latter or-
ganism, although repeated attempts have been
made. Furthermore, there are certain internal
markings very commonly though not univer-
sally present in the colonies of the soy-bean
strain of the organism which have been ob-
served in only two colonies of the many thou-
sands isolated from Phaseolus. The markings

3 Coerper, Florence M.: ‘‘Bacterial Blight of
Soy Bean,’’ Jour. Agr. Res., XVIII, No. 4, pp.
179-193, 1919.

4Wolf, F. A.: ‘‘Bacterial Blight of Soy
Bean,’’ Phytopathology, X, No. 3, pp. 119-132,
1920.

5 Shunk, I. V., and Wolf, F. A.: ‘‘ Further
Studies on Bacterial Blight of Soy Bean,’’ Phy-
topathology, XI, No. 1, pp. 18-24, 1921.

112

have the appearance of central convolutions.
They are wholly internal, the surface of the
colony being smooth. Illustrations will be
published in a later paper. The markings
might be described in brief as a mottled,
wrinkled (convolute) central area fading to a
homogeneous margin, appearing in five to
seven days and visible for one to two weeks.
In view of these facts the writer, rightly or
wrongly, has decided to name the soy bean or-
ganism Bact. phaseoli var. sojense.

The writer has never seen the Bact. glyci-
neum blight in the field, but, judging from
Miss Coerper’s description and illustrations
and her own greenhouse experiments the two
diseases very closely resemble each other in the
later stages. In the early stages, however,
they are quite different, Bact. glycinewm caus-
ing a water-soaking, a phenomenon never ob-
served in the disease under consideration.
Bacterium phaseoli var. sojense does, however,
produce water-soaking in Phaseolus. Another
difference—only noticeable in young infections
4s a slight raising of the center of the infected
area in the ease of infection with Bact. pha-
seoli var. sojense, hence the name “pustule.”
‘This raised portion may occur on one or both
sides of the leaf and rarely, if ever, exceeds
1 mm. in diameter. It ultimately collapses or
is sloughed off. Microscopie examination of
these pustules shows both hypertrophy and
hyperplasia. In the later stages the disease is
characterized by angular reddish brown spots
on the leaves, varying in size from tiny incon-
spicuous specks to large irregular brown areas
involving a considerable portion of the leaf.
Frequently the leaves have a ragged appear-
ance due to the dropping out of portions of
the large spots. A conspicuous though not
universal accompaniment of this disease is a
pronounced yellowing. The writer believes
that in this stage only the isolation of the
parasite could make possible a correct diag-
nosis of the disease, and it is in the hope of
avoiding further confusion that this prelim-
inary note is published. A paper covering the
results of work since 1917 is in preparation.
This disease occurs from Washington south-
ward.

FLorENCcE HeEpGes

U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL

SOCIETY
(Continued)

DIVISION OF DYE CHEMISTRY
William J. Hale, chairman
R. Norris Shreve, Chemistry

The preparation of phenylglycine-o-carboxylic
acid. I. From anthranilic acid and mono-
chloracetic acid: HrrBpert L. Hauurer. A study
of the preparation of phenylglycine-o-carboxylic
acid from anthranilic acid and monochloracetic
acid has been undertaken. Optimum conditions
have been determined for (1) concentration in
water of the reacting substances, (2) time allowed
for reaction, (3) ratio of reacting materials, (4)
condensing agent, and (5) temperature of reac-
tion mixture.

On the preparation of 7-7’ Di (g-hydroxyisopro-
pyl) indigo: Max Puiuups. Starting with
p-cymene obtained from ‘‘sulphite turpentine’’
and using a modified procedure of the Heumann
phenylglycine-o-carboxylie acid synthesis of indigo,
a new indigoid dye has been prepared. The
method used consists in first nitrating p-cymene, |
then oxidizing the nitro cymene to o-nitro
p-hydroxyisopropyl benzoic acid; reducing this to
o-amino p-hydroxyisopropyl benzoic acid; con-
densing the latter with monochloracetie acid to
hydroxyisopropyl phenylglycine-o-carboxylic acid
and finally fusing with potassium hydroxide. This
new dye has a similar absorption spectrum to that
of indigo and has quite similar dyeing properties.

A new method for the preparation of dicyanine
and related dyes (By title): S. Panky.

The necessity for reclassification and standard-
ization of dyes: C. R. DELoNG and W. R. Watson.

The influence of sulphur on colors of azo dyes:
W. R. Watpron and E. Emmet Rep. Some 30
different bases containing sulfur in a variety of
positions and associated with various alkyl and
aryl radicals have been prepared, diazotized and
coupled with representative dye intermediates to
form dyes so as to show the influence of sulfur
groups in various positions on the color. Bases
having sulfur in the sulfide and sulfone condition
have been compared with the sulfur-free bases,
and it has been found that the sulfide sulfur is
bathochromic while the sulfone group is usually
hypsochromic.

Experiments with dehydrothio-p-toluidine and
related compounds: Marston TayLor BoGErt and
Martin Meyer. When dehydrothio-p-toluidine is
subjected to Skraup reaction, it yields the cor-
responding benzothiazolyl quinoline. The Atophan

JuLY 28, 1922]

reaction was unsuccessful. Attempts to prepare
dehydrothio-p-toluidine by fusion of nitro-toluene
or of p-nitrobenzal-p-toluidine with sulfur gave
very poor yields of the product sought. 2-p-tolyl-
benzothiazole was prepared by the Jacobsen meth-
od from thio-p-tolanilide and some of its deriva-
tives investigated.

Uses of p. toluenesulfonyl chlorine in the manu-
facture of dyes and intermediates: JULES BXBIE.
p. Toluenesulfonyl chloride is a by-product in the
manufacture of saccharin. A great amount of
chemical work has been devoted to the utilization
of this material and one of its derivatives, chlo-
raminte-T, is generally known as an excellent
germicide. Other derivatives have found applica-
tion in the dye industry. The p. toluenesulfonyl
chloride itself can be used in various ways in the
manufacture of dyes and intermediates, particu-
larly as a component or a part of a component
for the production of various classes of azo dyes
and in the combination with azo dyes containing
hydroxyl groups with the purpose of making the
resulting dyes fast for alkali and soap.

The method of determining the class to which
each dye belongs: ANDREW J. LEDpy.

The function of assistants used in
cotton: ANDREW J. LEppy.

The application of the direct dyes in coloring
paper: WALTER C. HOLMES.

The functions of the dye testing laboratory:
R. E. Rose.

The analysis of B. naphthylamine: HENRY R.
Ler and D. O. Jones. Methods are presented for
the analysis of B. naphthylamine in the presence
of its common impurities, namely, B. naphthol,
amnaphthylamine and B B dinaphthylamine. By
sulfonation of B. naphthylamine the nitrate titra-
tion can be applied in the presence of B. naphthol.
A separation of D. naphthylamine from B. naph-
thol and B B dinaphthylamine is made by pre-
cipitation of the former as the hydrochloride from
benzol solution. The hydrochloride is dissolved
in water and titrated with N/2 nitrite at 0-5° C.
The benzol solution is evaporated to dryness and
the B. naphthol determined by titration with
diazo p-nitro-benzene. The Kjeldahl Gunning
method has been modified by sulfonation of the
sample with 25 per cent. oleum in the cold and
the use of a glass wool plug in the neck of the
flask during digestion. B. naphthylamine, a-naph-
thylamine, B. naphthol and B B dinaphthylamine
were prepared in the pure state and some of their
physical constants determined. Melting point
curves are given for B. naphthylamine with each
of these impurities up to 10 per cent.

dyeing

SCIENCE

113

DIVISION OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY
Howard B. Lewis, chairman
J. S. Hughes, secretary

Higher alcohols formed in the fermentation of
sugar: J. C. Swenarron and E, EmMer Rep.
Crude fusel oil, from the large scale fermentation
of molasses with pure culture yeast, contains sub-
stances boiling above isoamyl alcohol even up to
270°. A quantity of the high boiling portion has
been repeatedly fractioned in vacuum and the
aleohol part of each fraction extracted by treat-
ment with phthalic anhydride. The alcohols ob-
tained by saponification of the mono-alkyl
phthalates boil up to 110° at 8 mm. and vary in
density at 25° from 0.8007 to 0.9067. Some are
optically active. They are being studied further
with the hope of identifying the individual alco-
hols. The non-alecohol portions of the fractions
boil up to 155° at 10 mm. and have densities at
25° from 0.80 to 0.90. Some are optically active.

The toxic constituent of greasewood (Sarcobatus
vermiculatus): JAMES F. Couch. Greasewood is
an important forage plant for sheep on the winter
ranges in the west. It is common in the semi-
arid alkali valleys of the far western states, and,
while it is extensively grazed, it has been found
by Marsh, Clawson and Couch to be poisonous.
Chemical examination of the edible portions of the
plant showed that they contain a large proportion
of oxalic acid and unusually large amounts of
sodium and potassium salts. Toxic alkaloids,
glucosides and saponins were absent, and it was
shown by experiments upon sheep that the poison-
ing is due to sodium and potassium oxalates. The
leaves of the plant contain the largest proportion
both of ash and of oxalic acid; in the stems most
of the oxalie acid is combined as calcium oxalate.

Influence of breeding upon oil and protein con-
tent of cotton seed: C. L. HARE.

The iodine absorption of urine: Jack Mont-
GOMERY.

Influence of sodium chloride upon animal excre-
tion: E. R. Miuuer.

Further experiments on the isolation of vitamin:
ATHERTON SEIDELL. The method as now used for
the preparation of highly active vitamin fractions
consists in heating fresh brewer’s yeast mixed
with water to about 90° C.; adsorbing the vitamin
present in the filtered solution by means of Eng-
lish fuller’s earth; extracting this latter with sat-
urated barium hydroxide solution; and concen-
trating the extract, after acidifying with sulfurie
acid and filtering, by rapid vacuum distillation.
More detailed experiments on the precipitation of
the vitamin in these concentrated extracts by

114

means of silver salts have shown that approxi-
mately one third of the solids present unite with
the silver salts to form insoluble silver com-
pounds. About one half of the total vitamin, as
determined by feeding experiments on pigeons, is
present in these insoluble silver precipitates and
the other half remains in the filtrate. This un-
expectedly large unprecipitable fraction of the
vitamin raises the suspicion that the portion ac-
companying the silver precipitates may not be in
chemical combination but simply held by adsorp-
tion. Further studies of the silver precipitates
and filtrates are in progress.

Cow’s milk versus goat’s milk as a source of
the antiscorbutic vitamin: C. H. Hunt and A. R.
WINTER. Four weeks before the experiment start-
ed two cows and three goats were placed on the
same ration, consisting of equal parts of a grain
mixture and alfalfa hay. Forty-four guinea pigs
were divided into eleven lots of four each and
were given a weighed daily amount of a basal
ration consisting of rolled oats 69 parts, auto-
elaved alfalfa flour 25 parts, casein 5 parts and
NaCl 1 part. All of the pigs received, with the
exception of the control lot, in addition to the
basal diet, a measured amount of milk each lay;
one half of the lots receiving cow’s milk ar J the
other half goat’s milk. The amount of mil«x fed
varied from 10-50 ce in increments of 10 ce.
The control lot died of scurvy in 26-30 days. The
pigs receiving 10 ce. of cow’s milk survived from
42-53 days, while the survival period of those re-
ceiving 10 ce goat’s milk was from 60-103 days.
Up to a period of 90 days one death from scurvy
occurred among the lot receiving 20 ec. cow’s milk,
while no deaths from scurvy occurred among the
pigs receiving 20 ce. goat’s milk. There was a
decline in weight of both lots receiving 20 ce.
milk, but the decline was greater with those re-
ceiving cow’s milk than with those receiving goat’s
milk. When the amount of milk fed daily was
increased to 30 ce. or more no difference was
noted between cow’s and goat’s milk as a source
of the antiscorbutic vitamin (C).

Results obtained by feeding breeding gilts a
ration low in vitamin: J. S. Hugues and H. B.
WINCHESTER. Breeding gilts receiving a feed
low in vitamin A and C developed no abnormali-
ties during the first ten months. At this time
they developed the eye trouble common to rats,
rabbits, dogs and other experimental animals, and
in addition to this they developed a nervous dis-
order manifested by a general incoordination ae-
companied by frequent convulsions. Two of the
eight did not breed, two died during the latter

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 14389

part of the gestation period, two aborted a few
days before they died, one farrowed dead pigs
and the last one went fourteen days longer than
the normal gestation period. Gilts receiving 5
per cent. alfalfa as a source of their vitamin A
showed no abnormalities. Five per cent. alfalfa
did not furnish sufficient vitamin for normal
reproduction, as 28 per cent. of the pigs farrowed
by these sows were dead.

Influence of the vitamin content of a feed on
immunity to roup: J. S. Hucues, L. D. BusH-
NELL and L. F. Payne. Chickens receiving a feed
low in vitamin were much more susceptible to
roup than those receiving a similar feed high in
vitamins. Four pens, of twelve chickens each, re-
ceived feeds varying in their vitamin content. One
chicken from the pen receiving a feed high in
vitamins, eight from the pen receiving a feed low
in the fat-soluble vitamin, seven from the pen
receiving a feed low in the water-soluble vitamin
and nine from the pen receiving a feed low in
both fat and water-soluble vitamin, died with
clinical symptoms of roup or a disease similar to
roup. All chickens were exposed to the roup
infection by keeping infected chickens in the pens.

The detection and estimation of inorganic ac-
tivators in commercial rennin and pepsin prepara-
tions: Harper F. Zouuer. An activator-free
pepsin or rennin solution coagulates dialyzed milk —
with great difficulty at the optimum temperature
(41° C.) for rennin action. The presence of cal-
cium or magnesium ions accelerates the enzyme
action and gives the coagulum its normal physical
consistency. The differential between the rate of
coagulation in dialyzed milk and in undialyzed
milk furnishes a factor, which when compared
with a similar factor obtained from activator-free
enzyme solution under the same set of conditions,
furnishes a means of roughly estimating the
quantity of activator or accelerator present.

A laboratory disinfectant solution to displace
mercuric chloride: Harper F. Zouuer. Sodium
hypochloride solution furnishes a means of pro-
viding an efficient, economical and safe sterilizing
agent for use in biological laboratories. In the
preparation of the solution it is essential to main-
tain a sufficiently high hydroxyl ion concentra-
tion for maximum stability—about p,, 10.5.
Solution containing about 0.15 per cent. available
chlorine (0.32 per cent. sodium hypochlorite) will
destroy the most persistent of micro-organisms
within ten minutes.

The decomposition of food by bacillus botu-
linus: I. K. Puenps and J. E. Bascu.

The feeding of non-ketogenic odd-carbon fats

Juny 28, 1922]

to diabetic patients: Max Kaun. It is prohib-
itive to feed diabetic patients who have a very
low carbohydrate tolerance even a moderate
amount of natural fat because of the danger of
inducting a severe ketosis which may prove fatal.
It was found that synthetic non-ketogenic odd-
carbon fats could be fed in large quantities to
such persons without inducing any acidosis, and
that the nutrition of such individuals was im-
proved. A study is now being made of the inter-
mediate metabolism of these fats and their effect
on all types of diabetic and normal individuals.

A new source of santonin: ARNO VIEHOEVER
and RurH G. Capen. As a result of a survey of
American plants it is evident that santonin can
be obtained from Artemisia mexicana and Arte-
misia neo-mexicana, which grow wild in Mexico,
New Mexico and neighboring states. The survey
thus far made comprises 17 species and plant
material obtained from 30 different sources. The
santonin isolated was identified by the form and
refractive indexes of the crystals, the melting
point, furfural reaction and the formation of
santonin periodide. Though no quantitative data
are as yet on hand, the manufacture of santonin,
now quoted at $150 per pound, from domestic
s\urees appears a distinct possibility. (Contri-
hution from the Pharmacognosy Laboratory,
Bureau of Chemistry, Department of Agricul-
ture).

A new method for the colorimetric determina-
tion of Peroxidase: Victor E. Levine. The
leuco base of malachite green is used as the re-
agent. In the presence of peroxidase this com-
pound turns emerald green on the addition of a
small quantity of hydrogen peroxide. Proteins
of the enzyme extract are coagulated by chloro-
form, which also dissolves out the green dye. On
centrifuging the mixture separates into a green
chloroform layer on the bottom and a colorless
layer on top. Between these two layers is a zone
of coagulated protein. The chloroform solution
is separated from the other layer and is made up
to volume. The removal of the proteins renders
the extract clear for colorimetric examination.
The standard is a solution of malachite green in
chloroform. It must be made up fresh as it has
a tendency to deteriorate on standing.

A simple method for differentiating boiled or
pasteurized milk from unboiled or unpasteurized
milk; Selenium compounds as biochemical re-
agents: Victor E. LEVINE.

The catalytic properties of the metals occurring
in respiratory pigments: VictorR E. Lrvine and
ARTHUR C. ANTONY.

SCIENCE

115

DIVISION OF SUGAR CHEMISTRY
S. J. Osborn, chairman
Frederick Bates, secretary

The moisture absorptive power of different
sugars and carbohydrates: C. A. BrRownr. Com-
parisons were made of the water absorptive
power of anhydrous dextrose, levulose, rhamnose,
sucrose, maltose, lactose, raffinose, starch, cellu-
lose, mannite, invert sugar, honey, molasses, malt
syrup, commercial glucose and agar under dif-
ferent conditions of atmospheric humidity. The
substances of greatest absorptive power at end
of one hour exposure (at 20° C., 60 per cent. rel.
humidity) were starch (1.04 per cent), cellulose
(0.89 per cent.), agar (0.88 per cent.), and of
least absorptive power dextrose (0.07 per cent.),
mannite (0.06 per cent.), sucrose (0.04 per cent.).
At the end of nine days’ exposure the substances
of greatest absorptive power were agar (20.34 per
cent.), starch (12.98 per cent.), raffinose (12.90
per cent.), and of least absorptive power dextrose
(0.07 per cent.), mannite (0.05 per cent.),
sucrose (0.03 per cent). At the end of 25 days’
exposure at 20° C. and 100 per cent. humidity the
substances of highest absorptive power were
invert sugar (76.58 per cent.), honey (74.10 per
cent.), levulose (73.39 per cent.), and of lowest
absorptive power cellulose (12.57 per cent.),
lactose (1.38 per cent.), mannite (0.42 per cent.).
The presence of levulose increases water absorp-
tive power, but the latter is not proportional to
the levulose content. The absorptive power of
the substances was lowest in February and high-
est in July and August. The natural fluctuation
noted from some _ substances were: levulose,
11.19-36.31; invert sugar, 11.81-34.73; agar,
21.00-30.74; starch, 12.29-18.41; cellulose, 5.06-
10.89; maltose, 5.46-9.37; manmite, 0.22-0.52. The
general tendency of sugars is to absorb moisture
up to the amount necessary to form a_ stable
hydrate form.

Sugar purity determinations: W. D: Horne.
Great numbers of sugar purity determinations
having to be made daily for chemical control of
sugar factories and refineries, a very rapid and
accurate method has been evolved, by means of
special appliances. A Brix spindle containing a
complete temperature correction scale gives a
correct Brix for any density and temperature.
Defecation with ‘‘dry lead’’ is practically instan-
taneous and more accurate than by the use of
lead solution. From the Brix and the polariza-
tion thus obtained, one finds the purity on a table
of purities printed on a long paper mounted on
movable rolls easily exposing the desired portion.

116

Plastometer tests on alkaline thin boiling corn
starches: C. E. G. Porst and M. Moskowrrz.
Corn starches of various fluidities ranging from
ten to fifty (as determined by the Corn Products
Refining Company’s funnel method) were pre-
pared having alkalinities varying between acid to
phenolphthalein up to .12 per cent. alkali. The
pastes from these starches were then tested on
the plastometer. Results show that the paste
from starches which were just about neutral to
phenolphthalein were firmer than those that re-
acted acid. As the alkalinity of the starch
increased, the pastes became smoother and more
elastic. Methods for preparing the pastes were
standardized and made uniform. Two concen-
trations of starch pastes were used in the tests.
Curves were plotted in the regular manner, and
also on logarithmic paper. The equation for the
flow in cubic centimeters per second in terms of
a function of the pressure was. determined from
the logarithmic curve.

The determination of gums in sugar products:
H. T. Rurr and J. R. Wirurow. The various
analytical methods proposed for gum determina-
tion in sugar products were studied and com-
pared for the purpose of determining the method
best adapted for control work. Some proposed
methods compared with each other on solutions
of pure gums in water or refined sugar solutions,
but were not comparable on customary sugar
products. The method of precipitating the gums
with ethyl alcohol acidified with hydrochloric acid
was found to be the most suitable and was fur-
ther studied to determine concentrations of alco-
hol and acid. While we have no claim to orig-
inality in method adopted, the technique is
original and is definitely expressed to make re-
sults obtained rapid and reliable. It was found
with certain precautions denatured or wood aleo-
hol could substitute for ethyl alcohol. Curves
are plotted to show the influence of concentration
of alcohol and aeid.

The determination of the Dy, value of commer-
cial glucose as a substitute for the candy test:
O. A. SsosTrom.

Some notes on the determination of reducing
sugars: B. B. Ross.

An improved precision refractometer for the
sugar industry: WARREN P. VALENTINE. This
paper contains a short reference to the develop-
ment of the refractometer and its increasing ap-
plication in the sugar industry; errors and ap-
proximations in the present sugar tables and the
consequent demand for highly standardized data;
the construction and test by the Bureau of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

Standards on a special refractometer, and the
final development of an instrument to utilize new
sugar tables now in process by the Bureau of
Standards.

The observance of mutarotation in the polar-
ization of raw cane sugar: M. H. Witry and
C. A. Browne. In the polarization of two dete-
riorated sugars from the Cuban crop of 1921, the
direct polarization immediately after solution de-
creased at the end of three hours in one instance
from 90.85 to 90.15 and in another instance
from 90.15 to 89.50. The sugars had undergone
considerable inversion during storage from the
attack of micro-organisms, and the mutarotation
is probably due to the very perceptible drying
out of the sugar in the bags and the separation
of the high rotating modification of dextrose in
the sirupy films which cover the crystals of
sucrose.

Note on the color range of cane sirups and
molasses: FE. W. ZERBAN. Dr. Zerban reported
an interesting series of color measurements on
cane syrups made according to the Bureau of
Standards method with two simplifications, both
of which are objectionable—the use of Kiesel-
guhr to obtain an optically pure filtrate and the
use of the Hess-Ives instrument with white light.
The color values showed a general correlation
with the purity. i

Manufacture of plantation standard granu-
lated sugar with and without actwated char:
C. E. Coates. An outline is given of the various
methods for making standard granulated sugar
in the sugar house, including: Its manufacture
direct from the cane without the use of char,
using sulfitation or carbonation of the juice; the
non-chemical process using heat and Kieselguhr,
the clear juice being given immediately a char
filtration; making carbonated or sulfited syrup,
which syrup is subjected directly by a char filtra-
tion; the manufacture of 96 test sugar as usual
and immediately remelting and treating the
melted sugars with char. Much improvement has
been made during the last few years, both in
quality of product and in yield.

The decolorizing power of bone char (prelim-
inary report): Paunt M. Horton. It has been
claimed by Patterson that the decolorizing power
of boneblack is due to a nitrogenous base which
can be extracted by concentrated sulfuric acid.
Patterson’s experiments have been repeated, the
results leading to the conclusion that the nitroge-
nous base mentioned has no special decolorizing
power, and that the decolorizing power of bone-
black must be due to other causes. The extract

JuLY 28, 1922]

was made with both warm and cold sulfuric acid
and the acid removed by dialysis, leaving the
acid-free base in a form suitable for testing its
decolorizing power.

Color and ash absorption by boneblack and
decolorizing carbons: W. D. Horne. While a
number of very good decolorizing carbons have
been developed, they generally lack the power to
absorb ash, which is of great importance in sugar
refining. Experiments show that it is the mineral
frame-work in boneblack which absorbs most of
the ash taken up by boneblack. Calculation
shows that a carbon deficient in ash absorbing
power could seareely compete economically with
boneblack in refining. Encouraging results in
ash as well as color absorption were had with an
artificial boneblack formed by the fixation of
carbon on a porous earthy substratum. The
attention of investigators is invited in this direc-
tion.

Control of reaction in sugar house (and re-
finery) liquors: J. F. BBEWSTER and W. G. RAINES,
Jr. No matter what clarifying agent was used,
in the clarification of cane juice, there always
was obtained upon concentration to sirup a pre-
cipitate changing in quantity and composition
according to the cleanness of the cane and the
method of clarification.

The precipitate formed in sugar house sirups:
J. F. Brewster and W. G. RaInEs, JR.

Modifications in the use and application of the
Hess-Ives tint photometer: H. H. Prters and
F. P. Pueups. In addition to the Hess-Ives
color plate, various Wratten light filters were
used in connection with white light. It is point-
ed out that special lamps (for instance, a mer-
cury vapor lamp in place of white light) may ad-
vantageously be employed with special light fil-
ters in place of the Hess-Ives three fundamental
colors (red, green and blue), for instance, mer-
eury yellow, green and violet. . One then obtains
scale readings (per cent. transmittaney), which,
interpreted as negative logarithms, refer to def-
inite wave-lengths instead of to broad spectral
bands. _ The color values of the Hess-Ives plate
and of several Wratten filters are plotted as
transmittancies and luminosities, which were also
given for Stammer standard color plates, Stam-
mer’s ulmine solution and various sugar products.
Their absorption graphs are given also. The
authors use the subject of tint photometric anal-
ysis as introduction to their spectrophotometric
investigations. In three of the papers given so
far, the chemical aspect of color analysis was

SCIENCE

117

discussed, while here the optical aspect is treated
in detail. Hundreds of quantitative spectropho-
tometric analyses of sugar products have proven
conclusively that the absorption and transmit-
taney in the blue end of the spectrum is of para-
mount importance.

Color values of high grade sugars: W. B. New-
KIRK and H. H. Perers. The absorption and
transmittancies of 204 high class sugars were
determined for yellow, green and violet mereury
light, using a Stammer colorimeter whieh had
been modified in such a manner that it was prac-
tically a spectrophotometer. The Stammer color
plate was entirely dispensed with, and a rotating
sector dise used in its place. The average results
of various classes of sugars are plotted in various
ways.

A laboratory vacuum still: E. P. Cuark. A
laboratory vacuum still is described which is of a
simple type of construction and is compact and
easily dismantled. The capacity is quite large
(12 liters), concentration taking place in glass.
An ordinary laboratory water pump furnishes
sufficient vacuum.

Preparation of adonitol: R. 8. Buack. Crystal-
line adonitol is prepared by extracting adonis
vernalis plants with hot water, defecating the
expressed liquid by first adding aluminum sulfate
solution followed by an excess of slacked lime
until precipitation is complete. The yellow pre-
cipitate is removed by fitering upon a suction
filter. Concentrate the filtrate in vacuum to a
thin sirup when basic lead acetate is added, filter,
remove the excess lead, concentrate to a sirup and
add alcohol. At this point a little phosphoric
acid added to the alcoholic solution throws out
more impurities and aids in the subsequent
erystallization. The alcoholic solution is evap-
orated to a thick sirup and taken up in an equal
volume of 95 per cent. alcohol, is seeded and is
allowed to erystallize. Recrystallize from 95 per
cent. alcohol.

DIVISION OF INDUSTRIAL AND ENGINEERING
CHEMISTRY
W. K. Lewis, chairman
E. M. Billings, acting secretary
Symposium on Distillation
W. A. Peters, Jr., chairman
Efficiency and capacity of fractionating col-
umns: W. A. PeTers, Jr. The efficiency of plate
columns and columns filled with spheres and
cylinders of various sizes was measured by com-
paring the performance of each with the caleu-
lated performance of a theoretically perfect col-

118

umn. The capacity of the different types of
columns was determined by measuring the maxi-
mum possible heat input or vapor velocity
through the column when various materials were
being separated. Both efficiency and capacity
were found to vary widely with the type and
size of filling and with the materials being sep-
arated. From the data determined, it is possible
to figure the size and cost of a fractionating
column of any type for almost any work. More-
over, it is possible to set up in the laboratory a
small column which will duplicate the performance
of any plant sized column. Thus, a fraction-
ating problem can be worked out in laboratory
apparatus and from the laboratory data a plant
sized column can be designed.

The plate efficiency of a continuous alcohol
still: CLARK S. Ropinson. Three tests on a con-
tinuous alcohol still under varying conditions
indicated average plate efficiency of from 24 per
cent. to 56 per cent.

The simple distillation of hydrocarbon mia-
tures: W. K. Lewis and Ciark 8S. Rosinson.
It is possible to predict the simple (Engler) dis-
tillation curve (boiling temperature plotted
against percentage distilled over), for mixtures
of two or more components which follow Raoult’s
Law approximately. This is of great importance
in the petroleum industry and in the recovery
of the benzene homologues from the destructive
distillation of coal. The application to binary
mixtures is simple, but when applied to complex
mixtures, the problem must be solved graphically.
The Engler curve is calculated for benzene-
toluene mixtures and is compared with the expe-
rimental curve.

Benzol purification: 8. S. Hewwr. The custom
has been as outlined in making C. P. products
to make separate crude cuts of light oil, such as
90 per cent. benzol, 90 per cent. toluol and crude
light solvents and treating these separately with
sulfurie acid. With this procedure the benzol
fraction is somewhat difficult to wash down to
proper color test, due to nature of acid sludge
produced by action of sulfuric acid. The toluol
fraction gives no trouble, good clean separation
being obtained. One point brought out is that
C. P. benzol will have lower color test than sample
taken from agitator subsequent to acid treatment.
Just the reverse is true in operation using 90
per cent. crude benzol fraction.

Wood turpentine: C. A. Lampert. A_ brief
outline of the factory method for the manufac-
ture of steam distilled wood turpentine, the ap-
proximate composition and the physical chemical

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1439

characteristics of the turpentine and of the
heavier fractions of the turpentine known as
pine oil.

The calculation of the heats of vaporization of
various liquids, first by means of the Hindebrandt
function; second, from vapor pressure curves:
W. K. Lewis and H. ©. Weser... This is
a short article dealing with an original method of
using the molal entropy of vaporization of
liquids for determining their heats of vaporiza-
tion of various vapor compositions, together with
a method for determining heats of vaporization
from vapor pressure curves.

Present practice of dynamite and chemically
pure glycerine distillation: J. W. BopMANn. It is
shown that the most recent glycerine distillation
plants use the principle of double effect evapora-
tion in that the superheated water vapors used
as a distilling agent for the glycerine receive
superheat from the latent heat of condensation
of the glycerine distilled. While the apparatus
illustrated and described for distilling dynamite
glycerine has thus far been used in the compara-
tively restricted field of glycerine distillation, the
same principle is well adapted for use in connec-
tion with any liquids which show a tendency to
partially decompose when distilled directly or
alone at normal pressure.

Turpentine distillation: McGarvEy CLINE.

Carburetor. adjustment by gas analysis: A. C.
FIELDNER and G. W. Jones. Road tests on motor
vehicles has shown that approximately 30 per
cent. of the heat value of the gasoline is lost due
to incomplete combustion products in the exhaust
gas. At least 50 per cent. of this loss can be
saved by proper carburetor adjustment. Curves
are given showing how the CO, per cent. in the
exhaust gas bears a direct relation to the mileage
and completeness of combustion from the gaso-
line used. Tests are given showing proper meth-
od of sampling exhaust gases and procedure for
adjusting a carburetor on the road. A portable
CO, indicator for adjusting carburetor is de-
scribed and examples given showing increase in
mileage obtained with increase in the CO, per-
centage in the exhaust gas. i

Investigations of whitewashes
lime paints: G. J. Fink. Results are given on
the development of whitewashes and aqueous
lime paints which involved exposure tests of 175
formulas. The effects of a large number of
ingredients in various combinations are shown
and conclusions given regarding the relative
merits of the various formulas. Of the siceatives
used those as casein forming insoluble films with

and aqueous

JuLy 28, 1922]

lime proved best, while those which are water
soluble as glues are not so satisfactory for exte-
riors. Several alkaline salts were used for accel-
erating the solution of casein, trisodium phos-
phate proving most satisfactory. Among the
addition agents used with lime in mixtures con-
taining no definite siccative alum and table salt
were effective on improving the workability and
permanence of the whitewashes. Several formu-
las developed and tested are shown to be superior
to most of those in common use.

Can we afford to make potash in America?
R. Norris SHREVE. Broad economics regarding
the manufacture of potassium salts in America
and from American raw materials are considered.
Cost of materials, labor and freight is discussed
and the value of various by-products cheapening
the cost of the primary material is treated. Is it
worth America’s while to pay the cost necessary
to finish the development of the potash industry?
Past, present and probably future costs to farm-
ers and chemical industry for their potash are
described. It will be money in the pockets of
American potash consumers to build their own
industry here, but the potash industry should be
developed regardless of cost for it is necessary
to safeguard food and clothing of the country.

Discontinuous extraction processes: L. F.
Hawtry. This paper is a study of Turrentine’s
extraction process! according to the theory of
discontinuous extraction formerly developed.2 By
using Turrentine’s data in the mathematical
theory of the process it is shown that the incom-
plete extraction is due to the fact that complete
solution of the potassium chloride was not ob-
tained in the first treatment of the raw material.
The other conditions of extraction were so effi-
cient that the final recoyery was only slightly
less than the theoretically perfect recovery with
the solvent ratio and number of treatments em-
ployed in the process.

The classification of coal: S. W. Parr. The
use of ratios between certain constituents as an
index of coal types shows that the value of a
ratio depends upon the freedom of the factors
employed from adventitious material, or material
not essential in producing the type characteristics
to be indicated, and shows that the use of analyt-
ical factors in the construction of a system of
classification based on ratios is limited, for the
ratios do not differentiate with respect to vari-
ables inherent in the actual coal substance as

1 Jour. Ind. and Eng. Chem., 13, 605 (1921).
2 Discontinuous Extraction Processes, 9, 866
(1917).

SCIENCE

119

oxygen. This factor is significant as between
different types, and its effect should be given a
place in any system indicating type distinction.
Such a factor may enter into the scheme of classi-
fication by using heat values referred to the unit
or pure coal substance. Accuracy of the values
derived from the author’s unit coal formula are
shown.

A comparison of the standard gas furnace and
micropyrometer methods for determining the
fusibility of coal ash: A. C. Fre.pner, W. A.
SrLyieg and W. L. Parker. The micropyrometer
method for determining coal ash fusibility is
quicker than the gas furnace method and better
for the operator. Coal ashes fusing under 2,600°
F. by the gas furnace method can usually be
checked within 100° F. by the micropyrometer
method if fused in a reducing atmosphere of com-
bustion gases similar to that employed in the
gas furnace method. Very refractory ashes,
fusing above 2,800° F. as determined by the gas
furnace method, tend to give considerably lower
results by the micropyrometer method. The two
methods can not therefore be considered as
strictly alternate methods for all ashes. The
great majority of coal ashes from American coals,
however, fuse below 2,800° F. in the gas furnace.

The calorific value of American woods: S. W.
Parr and ©. N. Davmson. There are no well
authenticated values published in the literature
for the calorific value of American woods, and
the published values for foreign woods are un-
reliable. The values of the time of Berthier and
Winkler are about 50 per cent. of those reported
by Gottlieb, yet no basis of fair comparison is
possible because of the lack of definite informa-
tion as to the presence of moisture. The paper
reports on a detailed study of the moisture factor
in order to base calorific values upon the mois-
ture-free material. The heat values were deter-
mined by means of a calorimeter, adiabatic in
type, using a bomb with platinum lining.

The shatter and friability tests for metallur-
gical coke: S. P. Kinney and G. Sr. J. Prrrorv.
A discussion of testing methods, reproducibility
of results, and their interpretation. A large
amount of test data obtained at the Southern
Experiment Station of the Bureau of Mines is
used as the basis of the discussion. A compari-
son of results of the machine and bag shatter
test procedure, an improved method of conducting
the bag shatter test, the effect of size of coke on
absolute and relative results obtained by the fria-
bility or ‘‘hardness’’ test, and the effect of other
modifications of the standard procedure are given.

120

Determination of true specific gravity of coke:
Haroutp J. Rosz. Methods published, and in
actual use, for the determination of the true spe-
cifie gravity of coke, include important variations
in practically every detail of the test. The writer
presents data which shows that discrepancies of
many per cent. may be obtained by the use of
various wetting liquids. A distinct increase of
the true specific gravity figure was found as the
fineness of the sample was increased. The paper
shows the need for a uniform method for making
this determination.

Smokeless fuel for Salt Lake City: G. St. J.
Perrott and H. W. CuarK. A consideration of
the practicability of by-product coking of Utah
coals for supplying smokeless fuel to domestic
consumers of Salt Lake City. A summary is
included of smoke abatement work carried out in
Salt Lake City since 1919 and of experiments by
the Bureau of Mines in determining the coking
properties and by-product yields of Utah coals
‘at low temperatures.

The ultimate analysis of coal by utilization of
sodium peroxide fusions: S. W. Parr. All heat
developed in combustion comes from the sulfur,
carbon and hydrogen present. The amount of
the first two constituents being known, their heat
value can be ecaleulated and subtracted from the
total heat determined by the calorimeter. The
remaining heat comes from the available hydro-
gen whose percentage is equal to the remaining
heat divided by 34,450, the accepted value for
hydrogen. The formulas are given in the com-
plete paper which is to be published later. The
total carbon factor is obtained from a fusion
with sodium peroxide and the carbon discharged
as CO,, which is measured. From this the weight
of carbon present is derived.

The value of brands to buyers: W. D. CoLuINs.
Materials often have been purchased by trade
name at higher prices than when purchased on
specifications. A pure merchandise law regu-
lating dealings in all kinds of merchandise in
the way the food business is regulated by the
pure food law has been suggested. The ten-
deney to standardization and adoption of uniform
specifications has been marked during the past
ten years, but drawing up acceptable specifica-
tions and standards of products involves much
work and time. Specifications failing to insure
proper quality or demanding unnecessarily high
standards as to raise the cost out of proportion
to the benefits received may be adopted. For a
long time small buyers will benefit by securing
material by brand than specification.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1439

Acetone, butanol and ethanol in gas from the
butyric fermentation of corn: ArTHuR L. Davis.
Gases produced during fermentation of corn by
anerobic, spore-forming bacteria (B. granula-
bacter pectinovorum) carry with them consider-
able quantities of solvents since the temperature
of operation is from 39° to 40° ©. The enriched
gases are passed through activated carbon to
remove all condensible material. The carbon is
then distilled with cresol and the distillated freed
of cresol by agitation with sodium hydroxide
solution with subsequent distillation. The volume
of total solvents was found by removing water
from a definite volume of the aqueous solution
with potassium carbonate. The acetone content
is determined by the Messinger method. There
is no known manner of conveniently separating
the butanol and ethanol when only small quan-
tities of a mixture containing them is available.

Crystallization in transparent soap: A. F.
TuHau. Three types of spots in transparent soap
are described. Two are crystalline with evi-
dently the same chemical composition but differ-
ing in crystalline structure. The first type con-
sists of a large mass of small needles which are
interspersed with soap. These are obtained in
an impure state by extracting the soap with boil-
ing alcohol. The second type are compact, hard,
glass-like crystals which can be removed me-
chanically. These consist of two mols of sugar
combined with one mol of sodium carbonate
probably in the form of a double compound. The
third type is amorphous soap which has _ sep-
arated from solution on slow cooling.

The control of industrial processes by light
sensitive means: Luoyp Logan. A_ proposed
method of automatically controlling chemical and
other industrial processes is described and its
possible field of application outlined. This meth-
od includes the use of light-sensitive cells to
detect, through changes in the optical character
of the substance undergoing treatment, deviations
from the desired constitution of the product and,
by suitable relays and valves, to correct the char-
acter of the product. Among the properties of
the final and intermediate products, variations in
which may be used to alter the illumination of
the photoelectric cell sufficiently to operate the
eontrol, are color, e. g., on addition of a chemical
indicator, absorptive power for white or mixed
light, index of refraction, power of scattering
light, specific rotatory power, reflective power, or
intensity of light emitted at a given temperature.

Cuar.es L. Parsons,
Secretary.

NrEw SERIES
Vout. LVI, No. 1440

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00

1G@us 99
Fray, Avucusr 4, 1922 SINGLE Copirs, 15 Crs.

Text=

STILES—Human Physiology. By Percy Gold-
thwaite Stiles. Second Edition. $2.50 net.

STILES—Nervous System and _ its
tion. By Percy G. Stiles.
$1.75 net.

STILES—Nutritional Physiology. By
Stiles. Fourth Edition. $2.00 net.

LUSK—Science of Nutrition. By Graham Lusk,
Ph.D. Third Edition. $6.50 net.

BURTON-OPITZ—Elementary Eby sclony: By
Russell Burton-Opitz, M.D. $2.51

BURTON-OPITZ—Text-Book of Ebysiolosy: By
Russell Burton-Opitz, M.D. $8.00

BURTON-OPITZ—Laboratory Physiology. By
Russell Burton-Opitz, M.D. $4.00 net.

HOWELL—Physiology. By Wm. H. Howell,
M.D. Seventh Edition. $6.50 net.

WHETZEL—History of Phytopathology. By
Herbert Rice Whetzel, Ph.D. $2.00 net.

FRED-—Soil Bacteriology. By E. B. Fred, Ph.D.
$1.50 net.

JORDAN—General Bacteriology. By E. O. Jor-
dan, Ph.D. Seventh Edition. $5.00 net.

DREW-—Invertebrate Zoology. By G. A. Drew,
Ph.D. Third Edition. $2.25 net.

DAUGHERTY—Economic Zoology. Field and
Laboratory Guide. By L. S. and M. C. Daugh-
erty. $1.50 net.

McFARLAND-—Biology: Medical and General.
By Joseph McFarland, M.D. Fourth Edition.
$2.50 net.

PRENTISS and AREY—Embryology. By C.
Prentiss, Ph.D., and L. B Arey, Ph.D. thd
Edition. $5.50 es

AREY—Laboratory Histology.
Ph.D. $1.00 net.

HILL—Histology and Organography. By Charles
Hill, M.D. Fourth Edition. $3.50 net.

HERRICK—Introduction to Neurology. By C.
Judson Herrick, Ph.D. Second Edition.
$2.75 net.

HERRICK and CROSBY—Laboratory Neurology.
By C. Judson Herrick, Ph.D., and Eliz. C.
Crosby. Second Edition. $1.75 net.

RADASCH—Anatomy. By H. E. Radasch, M.D.
~ $3.75 net.

RANSON—Anatomy of the Nervous System. By
S. W. Ranson, M.D. $6.50 net.

WILLIAMS—Personal Hygiene
Jesse Feiring Williams, M.D.

Conserva-
Second Edition.

Percy G.

By L. B. Arey,

Applied. By
$2.50 net.

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY

OO

PYLE—Personal Hygiene.
M.D. Seventh Edition.

BRADY—Personal Health.
M.D. $2.00 net.

S

By Walter L. Pyle,
$3.00 net.

By William Brady,

HEAD—Everyday Mouth Hygiene. By Joseph
Head, D.D.S. $1.00 net.

SMITH—Bacterial Diseases of Plants. By E. F.
Smith. $10.00 net.

SMITH and HEDGES—Pasteur: The History of
a Mind. By E. F. Smith and Florence Hedges.
$5.00 net.

WINSLOW —Prevention of Disease.
Winslow, M.D. $2.00 net.

GALBRAITH—Personal Hygiene and Physical
Training for Women. By Anna M. Galbraith,
M.D. Second Edition. $3.00 net.

BOYD—Preventive Medicine. By Mark F. Boyd,
M.D. $4.00 net.

OVERTON and DENNO—The
By Frank Overton, M.D.,
no, M.D. $5.50 net.

BERGEY—Principles of Hygiene. By D.
Bergey, M. D. Seventh Edition. $5.50 net.

STOKES—The Third Great Plague (Syphilis).

By Kenelm

Health Officer.
and Willard J. Den-

By John H. Stokes, M.D. $2.50 net.
WHITING—Bandaging. By A. D. Whiting,
M.D. $2.00 net.
COWAN—Bandaging. _By M. Cordelia Cowan.

$2.00 net.

OW egnmediate Care of the Injured. By
. S. Morrow, M.D. Third Edition. $2.75 net.

OWEN—Treatment of Emergencies. By Hubley
R. Owen, M.D. $2.25 net.

HEINEMAN—Milk. By Paul
Ph.D. $7.00 net.

SISSON—Anatomy of Domestic Animals. By
Septimus Sisson, S.B., V.S. $12.00 net.
KAUPP—Anatomy of the Fowl. By
Kaupp, D.V.M. $3.50 net.

BUCHANAN and MURRAY—Veterinary Bac-
teriology. By R. E. Buchanan, Ph.D., and
Charles Murray, B.Sc. Third Edition. $4.50 net.

HADLEY—Veterinary Science. By F. B. Had-
ley, D.V.M. $3.00 net.

HADLEY—Horse in Health and Disease. By F.
B. Hadley, D.V.M. $1.50 net.

DIETRICH—Live Stock on the Farm.
Dietrich, Ph.D. $1.75 net.

SHARP—Ophthalmology for Veterinarians. By
Walter N. Sharp, M.D. $2.00 net.

G. Heineman,

1535.) 19

By W.

Philadelphia and London

il SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

FREAS CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
ELECTRIC VACUUM DRYING OVEN

GOERZ

Polariscopes

for the sugar industry,
chemical laboratories and
the physician.

Refractometers

for testing butter, margar-
ine and other oils and fats.

These are now being furnished through
us as the exclusive distributors of optical

and scientific instruments manufactured

by C P. Goerz of Berlin. BRAT a ie

h designs. All i t oneiee 9
Seabees oe ae With improved type of cylinder head, mak-
ing removal more easily accomplished.

For sale by all leading dealers.

are of the highes precision.

Correspondence is invited.

C. P. Goerz American Optical Co.

Manufactured by
319 P East 34th Street, New York City

The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.
8 Johnson Street, Newark, N. J.

SPENCER
DIOCULAR

Attachable to any standard compound micro-
scope and possessing many of the advantages
of the Mon-objective Binocular.

The optical system in this instrument is, in
all respects, identical with that employed in
our binocular microscopes except that a nega-
tive lens has been introduced to compensate as
far as possible for the increased tube length that
results from adding the binocular body to the
tube of the ordinary microscope.

The characteristic features include:

SPENCER DIOCULAR NO. 440

50.08
CATALOGUE SENT ON REQUEST
I. Convenient adjustment for pupillary distance.
Il. Dial register for individual settings.
III. Convergent tubes, giving normal vision.
IV. Independent focusing of oculars.

SPENCER LENS COMPANY

MANUFACTURERS

Microscozes, Microtomes, Delineascopes, Optical Glass, Telescope : BUFFALO
Discs and Lenses, Optical Measuring Instruments, Etc. —UsSAS

BUFFALO, N. Y.

SPENCER

CIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS

11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00. Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the

Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI Aveust 4, 1922 No. 1440

CONTENTS

A Graduate School of Geography: PROFESSOR
Wists MISSED) AWS ESAS | EE era eel Sale a at 121

The Researches of Alfred Goldsborough
Mayor: Dr. CHas. B. DAVENPORT..............- 134

A Scientific Expedition to the Islands off the
West Coast of Caltforntd....c.-c.--c.cc.ce.-cenes---: 135

Scientific Events:

The Chemical Foundation; Lectures on
Science at Teachers College; Pittsburgh
Meeting of the American Chemical Asso-
ciation; The Southwestern Division of the
American Association for the Advancement

Of Scrence = 22 Oa ere Nein Tv 137
Scientific Notes and News:....22 22 oe een 140
University and Educational Notes...................- 143

Discussion and Correspondence:
Concerning the Botulinus Toxin: Dr.
Raymonp L. STEHLE. The Periodtcal Cica-
da: JAMES NELSON GOWANLOCK. Some
Sidelights on the Life of Russian Pro-
eSSOTS ae DW RveNin) Te WiOLKORW 2... ee 143

Scientific Books:
Walter’s Genetics: Proressor J. A. DeEt-

DUDES ONG itera sae ete ep Sr ee 145
Special Articles:

The Emergency Function of the Adrenal:

Proressor Frank A. HarrMan. Sealing

Quartz to Glass with Silver Chloride: Dr.

EE 278 © SEL Wi ER Dee Se SSRN I UMC N Te 146

The North Carolina Academy of Science:
Dr. BERT CUNNINGHAM .02..2.202cccccccecccccceenes 147

A GRADUATE SCHOOL OF
GEOGRAPHY!

A CASTLE IN THE AIR

In spite of a wide-spread prejudice against
building castles in the air, I propose this after-
noon to consider a construction of that kind;
for if castles are not to be built in the air,
where in the world are they to be built; surely
not underground o1 in the water! All the
castles I have ever seen were built in the air;
their foundations were in the ground, of course,
but the castles themselves were in the air. My
proposal therefore needs no defense.

In view of the good number of castles already
built, some of them very high in the air, even
on mountain tops, for occupation by the de-
fendants of various sciences, it is gratifying to
learn that plans are advancing for the erection
here in Woreester of a castle of the particular
kind in which my own interest is most excited,
a geographical castle. But it is on the other
hand regrettable to find that the proposal to
erect a castle, a stronghold, dedicated to geog-
raphy alone seems, even in intellectual cireles,
to need explanation if not justification; so
little is the vast and varied content of geog-
raphy understood, so imperfectly is the great
opportunity for original research in geography
appreciated, so halting is the recognition of the
importance that the results of such research
will have in the conservation and consecration
of the wide spaces of the earth to the better
advantage of mankind. Let us try to rise to a
realization of the geographical opportunity be-
fore us.

THE Epocu oF GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION

We must remember that the geographical
epoch, in which the first discovery of the gen-

1 An address at the annual commencement of
Clark University, Worcester, Mass., on June 12,
1922.

122

eral outline of the lands and waters over the
world was made, is now closed. The work that
remains for the coming geographical epoch is
not the discovery but the description of the
earth’s features; and their description can be
properly prepared only by professional geo-
graphers, unlike in disposition and training to
the bold pathfinders who made the first entry
into remote and unknown regions. Moreover,
the labor involved in the future preparation of
such descriptions will be enormously greater
than that already expended in the epoch of
discovery. I fear that few persons have any

idea of how much geographical work remains’

to be done or of the amount of labor demanded
in doing it. Let me tell you that even most of
our own states, for example, Tennessee or Mon-
tana, familiar by name to all of us and well
known locally in an empirical way to many of
their inhabitants, have not yet been described
with professional thoroness. There are abso-
lutely no treatises, not even handbooks in which
the regional geography of most of our states
is set forth in a thoroly competent and com-
prehensive manner. How vastly ignorant then
must we be of South America, Africa and Asia!
The geography of the world is really yet to be
written, and in preparation for that writing the
world must be explored all over again, not by
mere travellers, but by geographical experts.
In order to carry on the re-exploration of the
world and give adequate opportunity for the
preparation of the many scholarly volumes in
which a competent description of the re-ex-
plored world shall be contained, many institu-
tions in all parts of the world must cooperate,
and one of those institutions should be the
geographical stronghold which we hope to see
erected here.
Tue EssentiaL OBsEcTS OF A GEOGRAPHICAL
STRONGHOLD

What is the essential object of such a strong-
hold? In the first place, the object of a geo-
graphical stronghold may be most advantage-
ously reached if it is built up over a well
planned lower story in which introductory col-
legiate instruction shall be offered in geography
and other undergraduate subjects; but in the
stronghold itself the object should be primarily
geographical research and only secondarily

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

geographical teaching. Let me at once make
clear and insist upon this main reason for the
construction of a geographical stronghold. It
should not be planned primarily to provide
either introductory or utilitarian instruction,
altho such instruction should not be altogether
excluded from it. The main reason for the
construction and maintenance of the strong-
hold should be to add geographical contribu-
tions to the sum of human knowledge, without
regard to what is called their practical value.
Immediate usefulness, direct application of the
knowledge gained should not be made a prime
requisite in an institution of research; and
particularly not in a geographical stronghold,
because the higher branches of geography are
as yet so little developed. The essential tasks
of a geographical stronghold will therefore not
be the imparting of geographical knowledge so
that it may be imparted again elsewhere, as in
teaching; or so that it may be applied else-
where, as in geographical engineering—I will
explain later what geographical engineering is.
If the work be mainly of that utilitarian nature,
the stronghold will be, from the point of view
which I wish to insist upon, largely a failure.

The first duty of a geographical stronghold—
or, to use its proper name, of a Graduate
School of Geography—must be geographical
research; and until such research has advanced
well beyond its present limits the acquisition
and not the dissemination of geographical
knowledge must be the main object in view;
the dissemination of the acquired knowledge
will follow as a secondary duty. It may be
well urged for many years to come that, even
in the case of graduate students, the best way
to prepare them for the higher reaches of
geographical science will not be to impart to
them the geographical knowledge already
gained; teaching of that kind is properly the
task of a college. The correspondingly proper
task of a professional graduate school is the
cultivation of proficiency in the pursuit of new
knowledge; and such proficiency is best ac-
quired not by direct instruction in formal
lecture courses, but by placing those who wish
to acquire it in close association with others
who, already proficient, are using their profi-
ciency in research.

Aveust 4, 1922]

RESEARCH THE Brest PREPARATION FOR
HicH-Grape PracticaL, WORK

Geography is not peculiar in that respect.
T have it on good authority that even in chemis-
try, a science of enormous practical importance,
the best training for a chemical engineer is
not alone the study of those chemical processes
which are already known to have practical
value, but the investigation of new processes
without regard to their application; and this
for the good reason that the essential thing for
the really proficient chemical engineer is not
simply to know this or that treatment of a
problem which has already been solved, but to
know how best to attack and solve new prob-
lems. Knowledge of that sort comes best by
attacking and trying to scive new problems,
under the guidance of experts who are them-
selves chiefly engaged in solving new problems.
- So with the development of a really proficient
geographer. It will not be enough to teach
him a certain share of what is already known
about geography; he must learn how to find
out more than is already known; and the very
best way for him to do that is to spend a few
years in an institution primarily devoted to
geographical research.
A Starr or Nine PRoFEssoRS OF GEOGRAPHY

Of what should such an institution consist?
I have thus far described it as a castle, a strong-
hold; but I hardly need say that the most im-
portant elements of such a stronghold are not
walls but men; geographers. They must of
course have rooms to work in; and I hope that
the Graduate School of Geography in Clark
University will eventually occupy a large build-
ing, planned for and devoted to research; but
the essential thing is the men. A strong staff
of full professorial rank will be needed. There
should be at least one professor for each grand
division or continent, hence five in all; it would
be much better to have two for each of the less
known continents, South America, Africa and
Asia, or eight professors in all; and another
should be added for Australia, Polynesia and
the cceans, thus making nine in all. Those
nine geographers, or five if nine cannot be
secured, would constitute the central and per-
manent staff of the institution. There should
be a good number of others temporarily or

SCIENCE 123

peripherally attached, as I will explain later,
and all of these should be in addition to and
independent of the geographical staff for un-
dergraduate instruction in the college.

If you suggest that one or two geographers
for a continent is a lavish provision, I must
insist that it is a small provision. For each
geographer must be responsible for the regional
description of a large area, and that means
that he must know the form of its surface, its
climate, its more important vegetable and ani-
mal occupants, its human inhabitants, its po-
litical subdivisions, its products and industries,
and its transportation and trade. And all
these subjects must be known, not as made up
of isolated items unrelated to each other, but
as correlated items all in their natural and
interdependent juxtaposition, thus constituting
the landscapes and manifesting the activities
of the region. To know so much as that about
a continent is no small responsibility. But in
addition to this continental responsibility in
regional geography, each member of the staff
should be a specialist in the subject of one of
the eight larger systematic divisions of geog-
raphy—land and water forms, climate, plant
geography, animal geography, human geog-
raphy, economic geography, historical geog-
raphy, and history of geography; the differ-
ence between the regional and the systematie
aspects of geography being this: In each di-
vision or special subject of systematic geog-
raphy, such as land and water forms, climate,
and the rest, all the classes of facts treated
under that subject should be studied in what-
ever part of the world their examples are
found; while in each large division of regional
geography, such as North America or Africa,
all kinds of facts to whatever special subject
of systematic geography they belong must be
studied in their natural associations. Surely
when the work to be done in a geographical
stronghold is thus envisaged a permanent staff
of nine men will not seem too large.

REGIONAL GEOGRAPHY THE CULMINATION OF
GEOGRAPHICAL SCIENCE

Let me make it clear why I lay so much

emphasis on regional geography in contrast to

systematic geography. However important the

different divisions of systematic geography are,

124

they yield only a discontinuous sort of knowl-
edge. Under the division of land forms we may
study about volcanoes, and learn as much as
possible about all of them wherever they are;
but the items of knowledge that we thus gain
compel us to leap about all over the world in
order to locate them. Similarly, we learn under
human geography all about fishing villages
wherever situated; but there again we must
leap about to locate the items that we learn.
On the other hand, the study of regional geog-
raphy gives us a continuous or areal sort of
knowledge. If we study the regional geog-
raphy of Japan, for example, we shall learn
not only the distribution of its many volcanoes
and its many fishing villages, but of all its
other geographical features; and it is this con-
tinuous or areal knowledge that is usually and
properly implied when we speak of geography
in a general way. The study of the various
divisions of systematic geography has, indeed,
its chief value as a preparation for the study
of regional geography; hence no one should
consider himself a geographer until he has be-
come expert in the regional geography of at
least one large area, preferably a continent.
Moreover, not until such expertness is gained
is a geographer’s knowledge likely to be of
practical application in such a profession as
geographical engineering. A thoro representa-
tion of regional geography is therefore essential
in a well developed Graduate School of Ge-
ography.
RESEARCH BY EXPLORATION

How will these nine geographers do their
work? First and foremost, each one of them
will be expected to take part from time to time
in the actual exploration of the continent for
which he is responsible, or in the investigation
of his special subject in systematie geography;
and between times he must make himself ac-
quainted with the work of other explorers of
his continent, and of other investigators in his
special systematic subject. His own explora-
tory work, in which he should be accompanied
by one or more advanced students, will require
absence from Worcester for periods of half a
year or a year every three, four or five years;
and the digestion and publication of the re-
sults of his exploration will require, after he

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1440

returns home, at least twice as much time as
he spent in the field. The rest of his time at
home should be given to the study of explora-
tions and investigations by others, so that each
one of the nine professors shall become a rec-
ognized center of absorption and radiation of
regional and special knowledge. On this plan,
two professors would ordinarily be absent every
year; three or four others would be engrossed
in preparing for publication the material they
secured in the field during their absence one
or two years before; and each of the remaining
three or four professors would be very busy
in reviewing and assimilating the work of other
geographers in various parts of the world, as
far as it referred to matters for which he is
responsible. If under these conditions any
professor finds that he has some free time left
over, he might give it to the preparation and
delivery of set courses of lectures.
Curators snp Marertan HQuipMent

You may have noticed that, apart from the
staff of nine professors, nothing has yet been
said about the rest of the School’s establish-
ment. While I still maintain that the essential
feature of the School must be its corps of re-
search professors, there are also other features
of equipment which the professors will say are
essential, even if I do not.

There must be in the first place a compre-
hensive library of geography and allied sub-
jects in charge of a scholarly librarian; not
simply a man who will put books back in their
places on the shelves, but a man well versed in
geographical literature, an active collaborator
with the professors in keeping the library up
to date in all its departments, and perhaps hay-
ing so great an interest in geographical pro-
duction as to serve as editor of the School’s
publications. There must be in the second
place a complete collection of modern, large-
scale topographical and hydrographical maps
of all countries which publish such maps, and
this collection should be in charge of a carto-
grapher; not a mere draftsman, but an experi-
enced craftsman with a real understanding of
the outdoor things that maps represent and a
dextrous hand for the construction of such
new maps as are needed in the School work;
instruction in so much of surveying and map

Auvaust 4, 1922]

making as young geographers need might be
given by this member of the staff. In the third
place there should be a large and growing col-
lection of models, in charge of a trained and
skilful model-maker; not a mere artificer but
a geographer of artistic capacity and outdoor
experience, competent to design and construct
truthfully expressive models himself. There
should be in the fourth place an extensive and
ever-growing collection of geographical photo-
graphs, not in charge of a mere photographer,
but of a geographer competent to make scien-
tifie selection of characteristic views for the
illustration of geographical subjects and re-
gions. And in the fifth place there should be a
comprehensive collection of the products of all
countries in charge of an experienced economic
geographer, unless the School proposes to de-
pend for such material on the great Commer-
cial Museum in Philadelphia. The material
equipment of a graduate school of geography
is therefore a somewhat formidable matter. It
must be vigorously looked after.

A Crntrat Bureau FOR GEOGRAPHICAL
ILLUSTRATIONS

Let me say a few words more about the col-
lections of geographical photographs and
models, in order to explain the manner in
which such collections may be made useful not
only in Clark University, but all over the coun-
try wherever geography has recognition. Hvery
college where geography is taught needs a col-
lection of lantern slides for the illustration of
its lectures. At present each professor of
geography in all those colleges has to build up
his own collection as best he can; as a result
such collections are very uneven and imperfect.
There is no central bureau where well selected
sets of lantern slides for the illustration of
special subjects or of special regions can be
obtained. What a boon it would be for pro-
fessors of geography in every part of the
United States if the Graduate School of Ge-
ography at Clark University would undertake
to form a standard collection of photographs
and lantern slides; not a finished collection, but
a constantly growing collection, from which one
could order, for example, an elementary set of
10 slides or an advanced set of 50 slides for
the illustration of the physical geography of

SCIENCE

125

coasts; or an elementary set of 15 slides or an
advanced set of 100 slides for the illustration
of the regional geography of Colorado. <A
great amount of correspondence and travel, of
reading and study would be required before
such a collection was well developed; but when
it came to be known that the sets made up
from the collection were composed of pictures
critically selected by a competent geographer,
so that they would really accomplish their pur-
pose, all geographical eyes would be often
turned to Clark.
A Serres or GrocrapHicaL Moprts

A similarly beneficient work could be done
by establishing a standard collection of geo-
graphical models, from which duplicates could
be had at the cost of casting and coloring, with-
out charge for the making. Like the lantern
slides, these might illustrate both systematic
and regional subjects. Thus there might be a
set of five models to exhibit the successive
changes of a voleanic mountain from its youth
of eruptive construction to its old age of ero-
sional degradation, and so on for other physical
features. Similarly there might be models rep-
resenting certain striking features of different
countries. These, on account of their expense,
would be less often sold to colleges than to
museums where they would attract much atten-
tion; but the systematic series would surely
become popular as well as serviceable in the
geographical laboratories of colleges; for such
models may serve not only in illustration of
type forms, but as the basis for very disciplin-
ary exercises in landscape description, a phase
of geographical instruction which is too gen-
erally neglected. Such instruction may be ad-
visedly begun in field excursions, where it can
be grounded on the direct observation of na-
ture; but the variety of landscape on which
advantageous exercise may be had will be
greatly extended if field excursions are supple-
mented by models. But I must turn away from
this attractive topic, and consider again the
Graduate School itself.

An EncovuraGInG ANALOGY FROM ASTRONOMY

If we now return to consider the work of the
research professor, perhaps you will ask: Is
it really worth while to study the world in so
much detail as has been thus far implied. Let

126

me answer that question by a celestial analogy.
The astronomical observatory maintained on
Mt. Wilson in Southern California by the Car-
negie Institution of Washington—this being a
shining example of one of those lofty mountain-
top castles already alluded to—has a corps of
high-grade astronomers devoting all their time
and abilities to the study of the sun and the
stars. They have nothing whatever to do with
teaching. They never stop to ask whether their
discoveries will have practical application or
not. But first informing themselves thoroly in
all branches of astronomy as well as in the
allied sciences of mathematics and physies, they
perseveringly catalog and chart the stars, large
and small, as so many facts of occurrence;
they measure their brightness with the photo-
meter and they analyze their composition with
the spectroscope; and, marvellous to say, by
combining spectrum and brightness they de-
termine the distance of stars that are so im-
mensely far away that they have no measurable
parallax! They give the most ingenious and
penetrating study to the distribution and move-
ment of stars in space. They determine with
great accuracy the periods of revolution of
what are known as spectroscopic doubles, the
two components of which cannot be separated
even by the most powerful telescopes. Can
you conceive of anything more utterly useless?
And yet the world applauds their work.

The spirit of devotion to research which
characterizes the staff of an astronomical ob-
servatory is the spirit which should dominate
and guide the staff of a Graduate School of
Geography. For if it be praiseworthy to spend
years, without the least regard to what is vainly
ealled “utility,” on the construction of catalogs
and classifications of stars, most of which are
invisible to the naked eye and inconceivably
distant from our solar system, shall it not be
praiseworthy also to spend years in the study
of every geographical feature in every part of
the world, without the least regard to whether
the study leads to utility or not? The facts of
one science are of the heavens, heavenly; those
of the other are of the earth, earthy. But who
shall say that a ninth magnitude star in such
and such a part of the sky is a more worthy ob-
ject of study than a ridge or a ravine in such

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

and such a part of the earth? The star may be
very large, but it is far away; the ridge or
rayine may be very small, but it is near at hand.
The study of the earth, our own earth, is surely
deserving of all the time and skill we can give
to it. And even if, among various other geo-
graphical strongholds, the one here to be es-
tablished eventually gains its quota of nine
professors of geography, there will be abundant
work for all to do for years and years to come.
Indeed, it is highly probable that, what with the
ever-growing demands of science, the scope of
the work to be done in geography will be ex-
panded about as fast as the advance of the
work goes on.

THE STANDARDIZATION OF GEOGRAPHY

But even as geography is now conceived, do
not imagine that the staff of nine professors
will find their progress to be all clear sailing,
as if their courses were already charted and
their duties specified. That is by no means the
case. One of the most important parts of their
work will be its standardization, both as to con-
tent and as to method, concerning which many
problematic matters, now unsolved or imper-
fectly solved, must be carried to a conclusion.
Let us examine first those touching the content
of geography.

How shall the deseription of land forms be
treated so as to distinguish that special division
of geography from its relative in geology?
How much physical meteorology shall be in-
cluded in climatology? What facts concerning
the plants and animals of a region shall be
treated in a truly geographical essay, so that
it shall not duplicate sections of botanical and
zoological essays? How shall the essential
factors of economic and of historical geography
be treated so that they shall have a quality of
their own, and not be merely selections from
economics and history? All these questions
must be examined and answered before the
geographer can assure himself that all phases
of geography, systematie as well as regional,
are not merely restatements of parts of other
subjects. He must see to it that all his own
statements are essentially geographical state-
ments, and of a kind that other subjects do
not directly duplicate. Not that the establish-
ment of sharp limits between the contents of

Aveust 4, 1922]

neighboring sciences is desirable, nor that
trespassing upon a neighboring science is
in itself undesirable; but that when a geo-
grapher has so serious a responsibility placed
upon him as the regional description of a large
area of the earth’s surface, he is more likely
to meet it if it does not dissipate his time and
energy and thought upon subjects for which he
is not responsible.

While I am speaking of this matter, let me
add that a geographer should resent the im-
plication made by those who argue that the
interest or importance of certain non-geograph-
ical matters is reason enough for their intro-
duction into geographical essays. To accept
that argument is a confession that the truly
geographical elements in geographical essays
are of so little importance and interest that such
essays need the stimulation of irrelevant mat-
ters. That is not true. Geography needs no
padding, no seasoning by items and scraps of
other subjects. It is, like them, sufficient unto
itself. Did you ever hear of an astronomer or
a geometer or a physicist or a botanist who
thought that his science needed to be spiced
up by any other in order to attract attention?
Never! All kinds of subjects must be studied,
and studied for themselves in this studious
world; and geography is one of them. Let
geography therefore be pursued as earnestly,
as devotedly, as wholeheartedly and as single-
mindedly as any other subject; and let it accept
cheerfully and contentedly the place that it
can win on its own merits in the constellation
of the sciences.

THe Limits or GEOGRAPHY

It is however certainly a curious thing that
geography still needs the development and defi-
nition of its content in the manner that I have
just intimated. One might almost eall it a
moron among the sciences, for altho it is very
old in years it has not yet come into the full
possession of its senses. It is a part of the
duty of trained professional geographers to
arouse and awaken their science, both by defin-
ing and by limiting its content, especially in its
regional aspect which is the culmination of
geography. The solution of this task is largely
a question of the point of view; and the essen-
tial point of view for a geographer is one from

SCIENCE

127

which he ean clearly see the actual constitution
of a region as it exists in the “today” of human
history. Let it be remembered that, as already
noted, the geography of a region of the earth
must inelude its land and water forms, its cli-
mate, its more significant plants and animals,
its human inhabitants, its political divisions,
its products and industries, and its trade and
transportation; and that all these elements must
be conceived in their actual special relations,
as they exist together and interact upon one
another. Regional geography is therefore an
immensely complex subject, even if all non-
geographical elements are excluded from it; all
the more wisely therefore should a geographer
hold only to truly geographical elements, as
above intimated.

Indeed, even when properly limited, regional
geography is so complex that some erities assert
it cannot be successfully mastered and treated

by one man. There is no question that
it can not successfully be treated by a
geographically uninformed, untrained, un-

disciplined man; or by a trained man who gives
part of his attention to other sciences; and it
may perhaps be true that it cannot be so well
treated by one informed, trained and disci-
plined geographer working alone as by several
informed, trained and disciplined geographers
each responsible for a part of the total subject
and all working together in a team. No de-
cision need be made on that question now, be-
cause the problem has never been given study
long enough and serious enough to answer it.
My own belief however is that such a staff of
professional geographers as I have indicated
will, after a score of years or more, reach such
a measure of success in their tasks as to show
that one-man regional descriptions are of great
value. But if that judgment be wrong, and if
one-man geography be insufficient, the remedy
is simple enough; geographical exploration
must then be done by pairs of geographers, or
trios, or quartettes or groups working together,
each member supplementing the work of his
associates. Whatever the decision is on this
point matters very little today; the essential
thing is that the work must be done, and done
in the best way possible. So much then for the
content of geography. Now for its method.

128

Tur Art oF GEOGRAPHICAL DESCRIPTION

The staff of a Graduate School of Geography
will have to take their share not only in defin-
ing and cultivating a scientific method of geo-
graphical investigation; they must also develop
an artful method of geographical description.
While a geographer is in the field, the subject
of his investigation and his method of attack-
ing it will oceupy his mind. When he returns
home the statement of his results in form for
their communication to others will occupy his
mind. In both occasions his mind will be fully
occupied, however great its capacity. The
science of investigation is somewhat technical;
I can not discuss it here; but the art of pre-
sentation may be briefly considered. Many
results of exploration may be best presented on
maps; some results may be presented in photo-
graphs, sketches and diagrams; some in models
and some in statistical tables; but the great
body of results is best presented in words.
Now while the geographical facts coexist sim-
ultaneously in their regions, they can not be
presented simultaneously in a report upon a
region; a written report must present them
consecutively, word after word, line after line,
page after page. It may surprise you to learn,
but I believe it to be true, that the future staff
of geographers in the Clark Graduate School of
Geography will have a very serious problem
to solve before they can establish, even in gen-
eral terms a standard method of presenting
or reporting upon the results of their explora-
tions.

By such a standard method I do not mean
anything rigid and inflexible; but a method
that will give the reader of a report true and
vivid concept of the region described. For
just as accuracy is the essential object in the
science of investigation, so intelligibility is the
essential object in the art of presentation, and
one of these high qualities is about as difficult
of acquisition as the other. It is unfortunately
true that certain leading geographers are
stronger in the possession of their science with-
in themselves than in its presentation to others.
It would almost seem, from their preference for
possession and their indifference to the fine
art of presentation, that they hold possession
to be in geography, as it is in the law, nine

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

points of the whole ten; but that is an un-
scholarly attitude. Of what avail is knowledge
if it is not clearly set forth; of what value is
an obscure presentation in which at least a
part of the truth is lost. I trust that no pro-
fessor or student of geography in Clark Uni-
versity will be indifferent in this matter; for
accuracy in investigation and intelligibility in
presentation are correlated essentials, and hence
lack of intelligibility in presentation is too
often an accompaniment of a sort of careless-
ness that is incompatible with accuracy in
investigation.
ERRORS TO BE AVOIDED

How is the art of geographical presentation
to be acquired and communicated? Perhaps
you may imagine that articles and reports of
standard excellence in the presentation of prob-
lems in regional geography already abound,
and that all that is needed is to adopt and
copy their method; but such is by no means
the case. In the first place a large number of
articles and books commonly classed as geo-
graphical are chiefly narratives in which the
narrator, often an untrained traveller, gives a
leading position to his personal experiences,
altho they are very subjective matters. Narra-_
tive presentation is certainly entertaining to
the general reader, and it is not to be dispensed
with; but it falls far short of satisfying the ob-
jective demands of scientific geography, just
as the narrative of a plant collector would fall
short of the demands of scientific botany.

In the second place many geographical arti-
cles and reports, altho they are presented in a
descriptive instead of in a narrative form,
nevertheless treat problems of less extent than
those of full-fledged regional geography; they
are useful contributions to the geographical
science, but they fail to reach a complete re-
gional treatment. In the third place, many
articles that are in part regional are also in
part analytical, in that they attempt to demon-
strate an explanation for some fact or phe-
nomenon that they describe; indeed, such arti-
cles are often largely geological, in that they
turn attention away from the facts of today
and direct it to the past conditions and pro-
cesses by which the present-day facts have been
brought about. Articles of this kind are in-

Avaust 4, 1922]

dispensable to progress, but their analytical
discussions should be completed before regional
description is begun; their results should be
standardized and systematized before they can
be properly used in regional description; and
when the results are employed in their stand-
ardized and systematized form, the analysis
upon which the standardization and systema-
tization are based should not be repeated. Ex-
planatory description in a regional essay should
be used without any analytical demonstration.
THe Dirricutty oF REGIONAL DESCRIPTION

Finally, when regional description is at-
tempted, it is too often inexpert in that it fails
in the prime object of such description; name-
ly, to give a vivid account of all the geograph-
ical elements of a region in their natural and
interdependent combinations. Some such arti-
cles are faulty in a way that shows clearly
enough how undeveloped the art of geograph-
ieal presentation still is; for they leave their
readers to work out, by the aid of such maps
as they may possess, various details of location
which the author himself ought to have made
clear once for all, by map, diagram or other-
wise. Many other such articles are faulty in
attempting to define the location of physical
features or boundaries in terms of the location
of small towns or villages, the names of which
are not only unknown to all readers, but un-
discoverable even in good atlases! Very few
such articles present at the outset a simple ac-
count of the whole region and of its subdivi-
sions in such manner that, whenever any local
feature is later mentioned, it may be at once
and very easily located in terms of the intro-
ductory account; and as a result geographical
descriptions are often so obscure and difficult
to follow that even geographers turn aside from
them, discouraged. It is as if the investigator
felt indifferent to the labor that his readers
must undergo before they can learn what he
has done, without realizing that such indiffer-
ence costs him a loss of influence.

GEOGRAPHERS AND TRAVELLERS

One of the reasons for these various defi-
ciencies in the present status of geography de-
serves explicit mention: it is that the authors
of articles published in the geographical peri-
odicals of the leading geographical societies of

SCIENCE 129

the world are in a regrettable number of in-
stances, not trained and disciplined geograph-
ers, but simply intelligent and observant trav-
elers. It would seem that such persons, on
visiting and returning from a little travelled
region, were thereupon popularly classed as
geographers, whatever they were before their
travels began; and this idea is given support
by the character of the membership of many
geographical societies, because such member-
ship is made up largely of generously-minded
persons who, whether they have travelled or
not, are glad to support the work of the so-
cieties in which they are enrolled. That they
should do so is most gratifying, but that they
should be regarded as geographers because of
so doing is disappointing.

To return to astronomy for an illustration,
do you suppose that the Astronomical Society
of America is made up of intelligent persons
who like to look at the nocturnal sky and recog-
nize the constellations, and of persons who,
whether they like to look at the sky or not,
have pleasure in contributing to the cost of
publishing an astronomical journal? Not at
all; that society is made up of qualified as-
tronomers; no others need apply. But so far
as I know only one of the many geographical
societies in the world limits its members to
geographers; and altho its requirements for
membership are not severe and altho diligent
search has been made to discover as many
qualified members as possible, that society has
not yet succeeded in discovering 200 persons
fit to be members in its country of over 100,-
000,000 population.

Whatever the cause of the characteristic im-
perfections in regional presentation to-day, it
is manifest that improvements can be made
only by persistent conscious effort. A large
share of the attention of research professors
in a Graduate School of Geography must be
directed to making that effort successful.

Means anp Men

It is an easy matter to outline the constitu-
tion of a Graduate School of Geography, as
I have just done. It is a more serious matter
to establish such a school. Obstacles of two
kinds stand in the way. Those of one kind are
merely difficulties; those of the other kind are

130

more serious, they are dangers. The difficulties
are only those of finding means and men. Diffi-
culties of that kind can be overcome in time if
they are attacked energetically and persistently.
Whether the means or the men will be the
easier to secure I cannot say; but as to the
men I believe that relatively few will be found
ready made; they will have to be engaged in an
immature stage and developed to maturity here
and elsewhere. Of course some fully competent
geographers will be brought here, ready at once
to undertake research. But it is more probable
that the staff will be built up gradually by the
engagement and promotion of young men. A
practical method to that end is to select a young
man of promise and give him opportunity for
growth by study and travel, during which he
may specialize in one subject or another; then
on his return he may be given an appointment
for a term of years, and at the end of that
term he may be given permanent appointment
if his work has been such as to justify it.
Gradual growth in some such way will I be-
lieve lead to better results than can be gained
by the wholesale appointment of a full staff,
even if that were possible from the financial
side of the problem. In the mean time, in-
struction by visiting lecturers and by professors
invited for a year from Europe will add to the
attractiveness chiefly in the undergraduate de-
partment, of whatever regular instruction can
be offered there; but neither visiting lecturers
nor temporary professors from abroad can give
the solidity and continuity of work that should
characterize a properly constituted and truly
American Graduate School of Geography.
Hence if the proposed staff of nine research
professors is established in 10 or 20 years, that
will be doing well, remarkably well.

THE PrRopER STANDARD FOR A GRADUATE

ScHooL OF GEOGRAPHY

The dangers to be met are more serious.
They will arise chiefly from the pressure and
urgency of students, of undergraduate rank
geographically, whose needs, indeed, whose de-
ficiencies, will tend to divert the professors of
the Graduate School proper from their primary
duty, research, to a secondary duty, teaching.
I must here point out an essential difference
between teaching and studying. In secondary

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

schools, the teachers must do a great deal of
teaching because the pupils are only just learn-
ing how to study. In eolleges, the teaching by
the professors and the studying by the students
may about balance each. other. In properly
constituted graduate schools the properly pre-
pared students should be expected to do most
of their study by themselves; the duty of the
graduate staff of professors is chiefly to set
example and pace by doing their own research
work, and to give occasional guidance to stu-
dents working with them, but not to do set
teaching.

Now the mere announcement that Clark
University is going to establish a Graduate
School of Geography will attract college grad-
uates to come here. Some such graduates will
be properly qualified by their previous studies
to enter the Graduate School at once, but many
of them will come from colleges where the
undergraduate teaching of geography is so im-
perfectly developed that they will not be suffi-
ciently grounded in the elements to enter upon
truly advanced work. What shall be done with
such students when they arrive here? Mani-
festly they should have more undergraduate
instruction, but they will not like to be en-
rolled with undergraduates again. Yet if they
are immediately admitted to the Graduate
School of Geography, its standard as a school
of research will be injuriously lowered.

I therefore suggest that the present graduate
department of the university be continued with-
out specification of subjects studied; and that
graduates of other colleges on coming here
should be enrolled in that graduate department
until they have completed the requirements for
admission to the Graduate School of Geogra-
phy. But even so, the introductory teaching
that they will need, as well as the introductory
teaching needed by Clark undergraduates who
propose to make geography their life work, will
demand that a considerable body of under-
graduate teaching in geography be offered here;
and for that purpose three professors will be
ealled for at the very least. The danger is that
the research professors in the Graduate School
of Geography will be drawn into this work.
Naturally enough, undergraduate geography
will be developed here before the Graduate

Avaust 4, 1922]

School of Geography is fully established; and
with such a beginning it may be difficult to
establish a Graduate School of the kind I have
outlined. The college professors of geography
will themselves wish to have some time for
original studies; some of them will wish to give
graduate instruction. And thus even if one or
two research professors are added, a_half-
developed Graduate School of Geography may
grow up, in which research is only incidental
and secondary, and teaching of an under-
graduate grade is the larger duty.

The very respectability of such an arrange-
ment is ominous. It will be so good that a
‘better arrangement, a real professional school
of geography may be lost sight of; and yet a
mixed school of that sort will only be “an-
other” school of the mixed kind; and being
attached to a small university instead of to a
large one it will have no particular merits; it
will not stand out with preeminence of its own.
As I am only a commencement speaker and not
a trustee, my duty goes no farther than to
point out this threatening danger: it will be for
others to provide safeguards against it. I may
however note in passing that although a num-
ber of other universities have already reached
the stage of offering geographical instruction
in both their undergraduate and graduate de-
partments, none of them thinks it worth while
to segregate the graduate part of such instruc-
tion under so ambitious a name as a Graduate
School of Geography; and I believe that they
are quite right in not doing so because they do
not propose, for the present at least, to pro-
vide opportunity for advanced work in geogra-
phy so far in excess of that provided in other
subjects as to warrant the announcement of a
School of Geography. It is here that the op-
portunity for geography in Clark University
is hkely to be for a long time unique; because
in this university geography is, if I understand
the plans, of the trustees correctly, to be given
as great pre-eminence over other subjects of
graduate study as possible. It can not reach
great pre-eminence immediately, for as I have
already pointed out it is not possible immedi-
ately to secure a staff of research professors.
The unique feature of geographical oppor-
tunity at Clark is therefore the aim in view;

SCIENCE

131

namely, to establish a real Graduate School of
Geography as soon as possible. The recent ap-
pointment of a geographer to the presidency
of the university is evidence of the seriousness
with which this aim is regarded by the trustees.
They have my heartiest good wishes for their
success, but it is evident that success can not
be reached if the research professors in the
Graduate School are distracted from their
proper work by the necessity of giving under-
graduate instruction.

UNDERGRADUATE PREPARATION FOR GRADUATE

Work

There is a second danger about as serious
as the first. Properly qualified members of a
properly constituted Graduate School of Geog-
raphy ought not only to have already acquired
a good understanding of fundamental under-
graduate courses in geography; they should
also have acquired a good understanding of
some one or two other subjects allied to those
systematic divisions of geography in which they
propose to specialize. The requisite under-
graduate courses in geography itself should rep-
resent several of the chief systematic divisions
of geographical science; for example, land and
water forms, climatology, human geography,
economic geography; and also one or two intro-
ductory courses in regional geography, for ex-
ample, North America and some other con-
tinent. These taken together should constitute
the equivalent of a whole year’s undergraduate
work at least. But in addition thereto, a stu-
dent who proposes to specialize in one or an-
other division of systematic geography should
have made good undergraduate progress in
some other subject closely allied to that divi-
sion.

Thus one who specializes in human geography
should have taken several undergraduate
courses in the allied subject of history on one
hand, or in anthropology and ethnology on the
other. A student who proposes to specialize
in economic geography should be well prepared
in the allied subject of economics; and one
who selects plant geography or animal geog-
raphy for his special subject of preference,
should be well grounded in the allied subject
of botany or zoology; and so on. These allied
subjects should occupy from half a year to a

132

year of undergraduate study. Furthermore, a
real facility in reading French and German,
and, still more important, a trained capacity to
write good Hnglish should be included among
the results of undergraduate study. No stu-
dent, of whatever college he may be a graduate,
should be admitted to the Clark Graduate
School of Geography if he falls seriously short
in any of these undergraduate requirements.
He may be admitted of course to the graduate
department of the university, if he holds a
bachelor’s degree from any reputable collegiate
institution; but so long as he has serious defi-
ciencies in the undergraduate preparation for
the graduate study of geography, he ought not
to be admitted to the Clark Graduate School of
Geography, or to any other such graduate
school. For in just so far as a member of a
professional graduate school uses his time there
on undergraduate studies, he lowers the stand-
ing of the school; and any one who looks on
the high standing of his school with pride
should be jealous of all influences which tend
to lower it.

The seriousness of this danger of unprepar-
edness and the importance of establishing safe-
guards against it ought to be manifest to any
one who is familiar with the demoralizing influ-
ence exerted on a graduate student’s work for a
higher degree by the necessity of making up
undergraduate deficiencies at the same time.
Work for a higher degree should occupy a stu-
dent’s whole attention. If in his graduate years
he is giving part of his time to undergraduate
subjects, which he ought to have studied earlier,
he is not only distracted thereby from his
proper graduate work, but the graduate work
which he does will be weakened by reason of
not being based on a completed foundation. In
a word, the student members of a professional
graduate school ought to be well trained for
the work that they have to do there; as such
they would constitute a select body of which
any institution must be proud.

THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN STUDYING AND

BEING TAUGHT

You may now understand better than be-
fore what was meant by my earlier insistence
that teaching should not be a prime duty of
the research professors in a true Graduate

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

School of Geography; for the fact that they
are not to teach does not imply that they are
to have no students. Of course they are to have
students, properly qualified graduate students;
and the students are to study; but the pro-
fessors are not to teach in the ordinary sense of
the word. The students having reached that
stage of their education when they have learned
how to study and when they really wish to
study, are to study chiefly by themselves on
their special subjects. The professors are to
propose problems for them, to advise and to
guide them in the study of the problems, to
hold conferences with them, but not to teach
them. And with the conception of a body of
professors devoted chiefly to research in the
several departments of a single science and of
a body of students devoted chiefly to study in
different subdivisions of the same science, you
may imagine the atmosphere by which a Gradu-
ate School should be enveloped. It is one of
the most delightful, most inspiring atmos-
pheres in which human beings ean live.
THE PREPARATION OF TEACHERS OF
GEOGRAPHY

A practical question may however rise in ©
your minds. If the requirements of a Graduate
School of Geography are so high, is it likely
that any students will wish to enter it? I ean
give several very confident answers to that
question. In the first place, a eandidate for
the position of teacher in a secondary school
ought not to be encouraged to enter it. He
acquired during his undergraduate college years
as much knowledge of the subjects which he is
to teach as he will need; and moreover, inas-
much as a school teacher should be more inter-
ested in the boys and girls that he teaches than
in the subjects which the boys and girls are to
be taught, it is not necessary for him to carry
preparatory studies to the point of becoming
engrossed in research. In the second place, a
candidate for the position of professor of geog-
raphy in a college should without question be
encouraged to enter such a Graduate School of
Geography as I have outlined, and to stay there
long enough to earn a master’s degree at least
and a doctor’s degree if possible. College pro-
fessors ought to be learned persons; and as a
preparatory step toward becoming learned they

Aucust 4, 1922]

ought to have breathed an atmosphere of learn-
ing for a year or two. To be sure, a candidate
for a professorship in a college where the
teaching of geography is combined with the
teaching of another subject may make the other
subject his first interest, and may not therefore
feel justified in carrying his geographical
preparation very far. But it is encouraging to
see that geography is coming to be recognized
in more and more of our colleges as a subject
large enough and important enough to occupy
the whole of a professor’s time. Young men
who have the ambition to be professors of
geography in colleges of that grade should be
urged to take a doctor’s degree in geography;
and to young men of that sort the Clark Grad-
uate School of Geography should be powerfully
attractive, if it is organized on the lines I have
indicated.
GEOGRAPHICAL ENGINEERS

But there is an altogether different group of
positions for which young men will be increas-
ingly needed as the affairs of the world, now so
disordered, return to a more normal condition,
and as, In consequence of that return, interna-
tional ecommerce comes to flourish again, par-
ticularly those branches of international com-
merce which have to do with the less known con-
tinents of South America, Africa and Asia. At
that time, which we may hope will not be too
long delayed, many of our larger commercial
houses will find, as some of the most enterprising
have already found, that they need much more
information than is ordinarily available regard-
ing the more distant parts of the world; and
they will learn that it is profitable to secure
that information from trained experts. In my
opinion the experts who ean best give that sort
of information will be high grade geographers,
who have specialized in economic geography as
well as in the regional geography of one or an-
other continent.

The Clark Graduate School of Geography
ought to make a specialty of training such men:
their specialty ought to be called geographical
engineering, and those who become proficient in
it ought to receive the degree of geographical
engineer. Needless to add that training of that
kind must be based on a broad and firm foun-
dation of undergraduate studies in a well

SCIENCE

133

equipped college, and must be extended by con-
tinuing those studies in a thoroughgoing pro-
fessional School of Geography; and the train-
ing will need one other element, namely, after
the professional study is well advanced, a year
of studious travel in the continent selected for
special attention. For although the later work
of a geographical engineer must be largely of
so practical a nature as to satisfy the money-
making demands of commerce, the preparation
for that work can not be made by learning
definite answers to set questions. The problems
that the geographical engineer has to answer
will be as a rule so novel, so individual, that
his best training for them will be found first in
the comprehensive acquisition of all the funda-
mental knowledge in his specialty, and second
in the original study of novel and individual
problems in the same specialty, that is,
research in economic geography. Hence even
for this most practical field of geographical
science, experts will be best made ready by
close association with older experts who are
carrying on researches in the same field. Men
who have received high-grade preparation of
that kind will be sought for and prized.

Tue Ciark ScHooL A CENTER OF GEOGRAPH-

1cAL ACTIVITY

Can you not imagine the eagerness and
earnestness with which the students in a
Graduate School of Geography will pursue
their studies? They will be proud of their
association with a staff of research professors;
they will be devoted to their science and de-
lighted with the opportunity that the school
affords of advancing themselves in it; they will
be ambitious to become proficient in the science
and to apply their proficiency to serious tasks
in the actual world. Can you not understand
also that the presence of such a Graduate
School of Geography in Worcester, with its
corps of expert professors, its well developed
material equipment, its body of enthusiastic
students and its exhilarating scholarly atmos-
phere, will attract intending and returning
travelers to visit it, to stay near it for a time,
and to establish more or less formal relations
with it? An intending traveler may well spend
several months under its influence while making
preparations for his journey; a returning tray-

134

eler may advisedly remain an entire year in its
wholesome atmosphere while writing his ac-
count of an accomplished journey. Can you
not see that the school will thus become a nota-
ble center of geographical activity if its devel-
opment follow serious professional lines? It
will inevitably become such a center, and it will
thereby exert a greatly needed and most benefi-
cent influence on the cultivation of scientific
geography all over our country. That the be-
ginning now made should have some such con-
summation is my devout wish. When that wish
is realized, then wherever geography is seriously
spoken of in America, the speaker and _ his
hearers will find themselves thinking spontane-

ously of the Graduate School of Geography at _

Clark University.

Wiiuram Morris Davis
HARVARD UNIVERSITY

THE RESEARCHES OF ALFRED
GOLDSBOROUGH MAYOR

Aurrep G. Mayor brought to research an
unusual personality. He had an _ extraor-
dinary artistic sense both for color and form;
he had a training in physies and engineering
in accordance with a parental desire; he had
the brillianey in conversation that made him
an excellent companion on expeditions or after
work hours; he had a capacity for meeting peo-
ples of all kinds and conditions—whether in
social events in cities or among the natives of
the shore of Torres Straits; and he had an
industry that outran his strength.

After graduating from Stevens Institute he
went to Clark University as assistant to Pro-
fessor Michelson, and then to the University
of Kansas where he taught physics for parts
of two years. While there he made biophysical
studies on leaves, and published the results
after going to Harvard. Mayor’s artistic sense
lured him to study animals. He had as a boy
made the most beautiful paintings of butter-
flies of iridescent types which looked as
though their wings had been pasted on the
page. His first research at Harvard was on
the development of the wing scales and their
pigment in butterflies and moths (1896) and
this was quickly followed by a contribution of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

87 pages and 10 (for the most part colored)
plates “On the color and pattern of moths and
butterflies.” These papers revealed three
major interests of the author: (a) a fine
artistic sense, with a special attraction toward
color; (b) a tendency to make crucial experi-
ments to test mooted points; and (c) a fond-
ness for physical experimentation. Thus he
used in these researches the spectroscope to,
study the pigments and a pendulum to deter-
mine the friction of wing scales on the air.
In the latter experiment on butterflies the
wings were studied with their scales on and
also removed. The later paper stimulated
Alfred R. Wallace to discuss it in Nature.

Five years later Mayor published further
researches on Lepidoptera and analyzed the
elements of their color patterns. He returned
again to the Lepidoptera in 1906, when he pub-
lished a paper with Miss Soule on some reac-
tions of caterpillars and moths. He studied
not only their reactions to light, food and
gravity and their feeding habits but continued
the studies he had begun six years earlier on
mate selection. Wings of males were painted
with scarlet or green ink; and males were
variously maimed. Color made no difference
with matings but the maimed males met more
resistance than normals to copulation unless
the female was blinded.

Mayor had not been Jong at the museum in
Cambridge before his artistic work attracted
the attention of Alexander Agassiz and led to
an invitation to him to accompany Agassiz on
his trip to the Bahamas in Mr. Forbes’ yacht
Wild Duck in 1893. This was the first of a
series of voyages with Agassiz up to 1900;
to the Great Barrier Reef of Australia in
1896; to the Fiji Islands in 1897-8; to the
tropical Pacific on the Albatross in 1899-1900.
On these voyages Mayor made drawings and
observations on radiates—especially the Me-
dus. These fascinated him as they did that
other artist-naturalist, Haeckel. The outcome
of these studies and those of later years ap-
peared eventually in Mayor’s ‘“Meduse of the
World” and “Ctenophores of the Atlantic,”
published by the Carnegie Institution and
illustrated by scores of plates drawn by his
own hand and brush. To this period belonged

Aucust 4, 1922

his discovery of the “Atlantic Palolo” and his
study on the Partulas of Tahiti.

In 1900 Mayor entered on a new phase of
work. He was appointed curator of natural
science at the new Brooklyn Museum and, in
1904, curator-in-chief. Here he devoted him-
self to arranging the rapidly increasing col-
lections; and he also continued his studies on
Lepidoptera and Meduse. But museum work
was too static for this experimental naturalist.
He agitated the establishment of a marine
laboratory at the Tortugas (Screncr, January
30, 1903) and found the American biologists
strongly favored the plan. So it was natural
that when the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington was casting about for the best projects
to support it should adopt this and its prin-
cipal sponsor, Dr. Mayor. In 1905 he pub-
lished a book, “Sea Shore Life,” of which he
unselfishly turned the copyright over to the
New York Zoological Society; just as he turned
over the problem of the Partulas of Tahiti to
Dr. H. E. Crampton; and just as he gen-
erously gave unsparingly of his time and ideas
to others.

And now began a new era in Mayor’s life.
He erected in July, 1904, laboratory buildings
at Loggerhead Key, Florida, and sailed thence
from Maine to the Tortugas in the new 57-foot
auxiliary ketch, the Physalia. Besides pro-
viding for the physical care and scientific needs
of the zoologists that gathered at the labora-
tory, Mayor plunged into scientific work. In
it he combined his special knowledge of jelly
fishes with his fondness for physical and chem-
ical experimentation and showed that rhyth-
mical pulsation may be initiated and maintained
independently of the nervous system. During
the following seasons he made fundamental
studies on the effect of different ions. Thus
Mg is stupefying ahd the NaCl, K and Ca and
sea water resist its stupefying effect; many
ions. have the opposite effect on muscles from
that on cilia.

In 1909 the series of ‘Papers from the Tor-
tugas Laboratory” began to appear, of which
15 large volumes have been published. It took
a lot of pertinacious endeavor and much tact
on the part of the director to secure a prompt
publication of results.

SCIENCE

135

In 1913-14 Mayor made an expedition to
Thursday Islands and Murray Islands in
Torres Straits, where studies were made on
coral reefs, and where he found clear evidence of
solution of limestone on the reefs. A summary
of the first ten years of work of his depart-
ment is given in Mayor’s report in the Year-
book of the Institution for 1914.

Already it had begun to appear that the
Tortugas must be abandoned as the permanent
site of the laboratory, on account of its de-
struetive hurricanes and its isolation; so Mayor
visited numerous other islands to find a better
site; also more studies were undertaken in the
Pacific Ocean on coral reefs, especially at
American Samoa. Later studies were made
here upon the theory of coral reef building.

The war seriously interfered with Mayor’s
scientific work for a year or two—when he
was giving much time to instructing naval re-
cruits in navigation. Returning to Samoa in
1919 he demonstrated that the present living
coral reefs are not superimposed upon ancient
reefs but have simply grown outward from
the shore slopes since post-glacial times. Mayor
made observations and photographs of corals
down to 8.5 fathoms by the use of a diving
hood, and it was probably in connection with
this trying experience that his resistance was
weakened and that illness was started which
resulted in his death.

Mayor’s scientific influence is not confined
to his personal researches; to his activity must
be largely ascribed the results of Vaughan’s
studies on growth of corals, of Bartsch’s on
hybridization in Cerion, of Drew’s on the origin
of limestone deposits through bacterial action,
of Harvey’s on phosphorescent light; and many
other researches. The hope may be expressed
that since the department which Mayor found-
ed has so amply justified itself the man and
means will be found to continue it.

Cuas. B. DavENPORT

A SCIENTIFIC EXPEDITION TO THE
ISLANDS OFF THE WEST COAST
OF LOWER CALIFORNIA

THE most important expedition sent out by
the California Academy of Sciences this year
has sailed from San Diego for a two months’

136

cruise among the islands off the west coast of
Lower California. The expedition has been
made possible through the cooperation of the
Mexican government with a number of Amer-
ican institutions, including the California
Academy of Sciences, the San Diego Museum
of Natural History, the Seripps Institution
for Biological Research, the National Geo-
graphic Society, and the Committee on Con-
servation of Marine Life of the Pacific of the
Pacifie Division of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science, functioning
under authority of the Committee on Pacific
Investigations of the Division of Foreign Re-
lations of the National Research Council.

The Committee on Conservation of Marine
Life of the Pacific, of which Dr. Barton W.
Evermann, director of the Museum of the Cali-
fornia Academy of Sciences, is chairman, has
for several months been planning this expedi-
tion, but not until recently were funds forth-
coming to meet the expense. When the matter
was placed before the Mexican government it
very generously proposed not only to detail
their fishery guard boat Tecate for the pur-
pose, but also to accept as their guests the
naturalists whom the American institutions de-
sired to send on the expedition. The National
Geographic Society, always alert to the possi-
bilities of inereasing geographic knowledge,
became interested in the expedition and has
liberally contributed to the fund for meeting
the cost of the cruise. With such material aid
from these two sources, the proposed expedi-
tion has become a reality.

The Mexican government is represented by
Sr. Carlos Cuesta Terron, professor of herpe-
tology and biology in the Museo Nacional de
Historia Natural de Mexico; Sr. Jose Maria
Gallegos, professor of mammalogy and botany
in the same institution; Captain Victor Angulo
of the Tecate; Sr. Jose Rubio, taxidermist;
Sr. Gonzales, inspector of fisheries; and Sr.
Rodolpho Lazcano, inspector of lighthouses.
Professor Terron will be in general charge of
the expedition.

The California Academy of Sciences is rep-
resented by Dr. G. Dallas Hanna, curator of
paleontology and secretary of the Committee
on Conservation of Marine Life of the Pacific;

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1440

Joseph R. Slevin, assistant curator of herpe-
tology, and Frank Tose, chief taxidermist.

The San Diego Museum of Natural History
sends A. W. Anthony, curator of vertebrates,
and Ernest Hinkley, assistant; and P. 8. Barn-
hart represents the Scripps Institution for
Biological Research.

Messrs. Hanna and Anthony will be in im-
mediate charge of the scientific investigations.

The primary purpose of the expedition is to
make investigations to determine as fully as
may be the present abundance and condition
of the southern fur seal, southern sea otter,
and elephant seal in the. localities visited. It
is known that each of those three important
and valuable marine mammals was at one time
quite common not only about the islands off
Lower California but also about the islands on
the California coast as far north as the Faral-
lons. Records believed trustworthy show that
in the years 1808 to 1811, more than 203,000
fur seals were taken on the Farallon Islands,
besides many thousands on the Channel
Islands, Cedros, and other islands off the coast
of Lower California. Records also show that
the southern sea otter was at one time very
abundant in the great kelp beds about these
same islands, more than 22,000 having been
taken prior to 1806. The elephant seal was
once abundant on Guadalupe Island and on
other islands on this coast.

It is generally believed that each of these
interesting animals is now extinct or nearly
so; but certain recent discoveries show that at
least small remnants of each of the three spe-
cies still exist. It is the purpose of this expe-
dition to find out the facts in so far as is pos-
sible and place them before the State Depart-
ments of the United States and Mexican goy-
ernments in the hope that the necessary steps
may be taken by the two governments through
an international treaty for the adequate pro-
tection of these valuable natural resources.

The scientists of this expedition will avail
themselves of the exceptional opportunities for
making a general survey of the fauna and flora
and geology of the islands visited. They will
be equipped for making collections in various
branches of natural history, particularly in
birds, mammals, reptiles, insects, shells, botany

Aveust 4, 1922]

and fossils. These islands have been but little
explored and it is believed that many new
species will be discovered. Provision is made
for taking photographs, both still and moving,
adequate for illustrative and educational pur-
poses.

Cooperation of Mexican and American scien-
tists in an expedition of this kind is most grati-
fying and will do much toward increasing the
friendly relations between the two countries
and developing a mutual interest in the con-
servation of the natural resources of our coastal
waters.

On Sunday morning, July 9, the expedition
sailed from San Diego, with all the scientific
staff on board, and with the American flag
flying at the masthead and the beautiful
Pabellén Mexicano flying gracefully aft.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
THE CHEMICAL FOUNDATION

(American Chemical Society News Service)

Tur American Chemical Society, represent-
ing some 15,000 men and women working in
educational institutions, research laboratories
and industrial plants, is preparing to fight to
the last ditch to preserve the American chem-
ical industry.

Recent acts on the part of the government
have made the necessity for such a fight ap-
parent to this group. In the hope of placing a
fair presentation of the views of American
chemists before the president, Dr. Edgar F.
Smith, former provost of the University of
Pennsylvania and now president of the Amer-
ican Chemical Society, appointed a committee
to serve with him. Their purpose in seeking
a conference with President Harding was to
lay before him briefly the far-reaching effects
which the contemplated action against the
Chemical Foundation will have upon chemistry
in America. The committee also desired to
have any facts which could properly be given
to them in order to guide the society in its
future actions. The committee with Dr. Smith
as chairman is as follows:

Dr. J. E. Teeple, consulting chemist, New York,
treasurer of the American Chemical Society.

SCIENCE

137

Dr. R. H. MeKee, head of the department of
chemical engineering, Columbia University.

Dr. J. F. Norris, professor of organic chem-
istry, Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
Cambridge, Mass.

Dr. A. D. Little, consulting chemist, Cambridge,
Mass., past president of the American Chemical
Society and of the American Institute of Chem-
ical Engineers.

E. R. Weidlein, director, Mellon Institute of
Industrial Research, Pittsburgh, Pa.

Dr. George D. Rosengarten, director and mem-
ber advisory committee on national policy, Amer-
ican Chemical Society, Philadelphia, Pa.

Dr. Julius Stieglitz, University of Chicago.

William Hoskins, consulting chemist, Chicago,
Til.

H. E. Howe, editor, Journal of Industrial and
Engineering Chemistry, member National Re-
search Council.

None of the members of this committee is a
dye manufacturer or connected with the Chem-
ical Foundation. The committee believes that
the president would not have taken this step if
he had possessed full information or had called
into conference unprejudiced persons well able
to advise him.

American chemists believe in the Chemical
Foundation and no facts have been presented
thus far by the administration to shake their
faith in this institution which has become the
nucleus of the organic chemical industry in
this country.

The request for a conference with the presi-
dent was made on July 12, and was followed
by two reminders. Not until July 21 was offi-
cial word received from the White House. It
was then stated that the president would be
unable to meet such a committee for the present
because of the other urgent and imperative
matters now before him.

The American Chemical Society is about to
hold its annual meeting in Pittsburgh, where
the situation will be presented in detail to
the governing body at the general meeting.
The society is planning a vigorous campaign
to have the country understand the true situa-
tion. The latest evidence of the necessity for
this action is an announcement carried in an
Associated Press despatch from Chicago, dated
July 18, which makes the significant announce-
ment that the Third German-American Na-

138

tional Conference adopted resolutions including
the following:

We greet with satisfaction the first steps of
the administration to correct the iniquities com-
mitted by the custodian of alien enemy property.

It is also significant that George Sylvester
Viereck was chairman of the resolutions com-
mittee. Viereck attracted much attention dur-
ing the war as a persistent German propa-
gandist.

LECTURES ON SCIENCE AT TEACHERS
COLLEGE

TEACHERS COLLEGE, Columbia University, is
offering for the summer session of 1922 a spe-
cial course entitled “Educational Interpreta-
tion of Modern Science,” under the charge of
Dr. Otis W. Caldwell, director of the Lincoln
School of Teachers College. The course is
open to all students who register and pay the
tuition fee. It carries two credit points for
those who attend the lectures, and prepare
synopses and term papers. upon two topics
selected from the subjects discussed.

The lectures, which are being given daily in
the Horace Mann Auditorium at 2:30 p.m.
from July 10 to August 18, are as follows:

““Achievemeents of science,’’ Dr. Otis W. Cald-
well.

““Methods and purposes of medical research,’?
Dr. Simon Flexner, direetor of the Rockefeller
Institute for Medical Research.

“‘Poliomyelitis (infantile paralysis),’’ Dr.
Harold L. Amoss, associate professor of medicine,
Johns Hopkins Medical School.

‘“Hpidemic influenza,’’ Dr. Frederick L. Gates,
Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research.

‘«The control, care and treatment of human
tuberculosis,’? Dr. Matthias Nicoll, Jr., deputy
commissioner, Department of Health, State of
New York.

“‘Chemistry of Foods,’? Dr. H. C. Sherman,
executive officer of the department of chemistry,
Columbia University.

“‘Tnfluence upon man of climatic conditions
and of the physical features of the earth’s sur-
face,’’ Dr. W. W. Atwood, president of Clark
University.

“‘Infiuence of the distribution of natural re-
sources upon human activities,’? Dr. Atwood.

“‘Recent advances in long distance telephony,’’
Dr. F. B. Jewett, president of the American

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

Institute of Electrical Engineers and vice-presi-
dent of the Western Electric Company, and Mr.
John Mills, the Personnel Department.

“Chemistry in relation to present day civiliza-
tion. I. Gasoline. II. Refrigeration. III. Coal
tar products. IV. Photography. V. Sugar,’’ Dr.
E. E. Slosson, editor of Science Service, Wash-
ington, D. C.

“<The human voice and its electrical transmis-
sion,’’ Mr. John Mills.

““Warfare against insects,’’ Dr. L. O. Howard,
chief of the United States Bureau of Entomology.

‘“A modern botanic garden in relation to com-
munity needs,’’ Dr. George T. Moore, director of
the Missouri Botanical Gardens.

‘“Tnternational health work,’’ Dr. George E.
Vincent, president of the Rockefeller Foundation.

“‘The meaning of evolution,’’ Dr. John M.
Coulter, head of the department of botany, Uni-
versity of Chicago.

‘“Evolution and religion,’’ Dr. Coulter.

“<The use of statistics in industry,’’ Mr. R. S.
Kellogg, editor of News Print Service, New York
City.

‘‘What science has done to enlarge our knowl-
edge of the soil,’’ Dr. Milton W. Whitney, chief
of the U. S. Bureau of Soils.

‘«The Endurance of the Soil,’’ Dr. Whitney. _

‘“Porests as economic factors in modern life,’’
Dr. Raphael Zon, forest economist, U. 8. Forest
Service.

‘¢Forests as physical and biological factors,’’
Dr. Zon.

‘“Physiological aspects of the modern potato
problem,’’ Dr. C. O. Appleman, professor of plant
physiology and biochemistry, University of Mary-
land.

‘¢Physiological aspects of food storage,’’ Dr.
C. O. Appleman.

‘¢Vitamins,’’ Dr. Walter H. Eddy, associate
professor of physiological chemistry, Teachers
College.

PITTSBURGH MEETING OF THE AMERICAN
CHEMICAL SOCIETY

Tue fall meeting of the American Chemical
Society will be held with the Pittsburgh Sec-
tion on Monday, September 4, to Saturday,
September 9, inclusive. All divisions and five
sections are planning extensive meetings. The
Pittsburgh local committees have already
nearly completed their arrangements and an
interesting program, together with instructive

Auveust 4, 1922]

excursions, is assured. It is expected that two
thousand members will be present. The Na-
tional Exposition of Chemical Industries
meets in New York, September 11 to 16, and
members can readily go from Pittsburgh to
New York for this meeting.

Following the meeting of the council on
September 4, the general program is:

TUESDAY, SEPTEMBER 5

9:00 a.m.—Registration and reception of mem-
bers and guests at Carnegie Music Hall.
10:30 a.m—General meeting, Carnegie Music

Hall.

Address of welcome.

Response, Edgar F. Smith, president of the
American Chemical Society.

General addresses, including the following:

1. J. H. James: ‘‘Pittsburgh as an industrial
center: historical and industrial.’’

2. W. F. Rittman: ‘‘Pittsburgh as an indus-
trial center: finance and transportation.’’
2:00 p.m.—General meeting, Carnegie Music
Hall. Special addresses will be given, of

which the following are part: .
Thos. Midgley, Jr., and T. A. Boyd: ‘‘The
chemical control of gaseous detonation with
particular reference to the internal combus-
tion engine.’’ (Illustrated by experiments
and slides). (One hour). Discussion later
in Industrial Division.
2. E. J. Crane: ‘‘The journal literature of
chemistry. ’’
8. Wilder D. Bancroft :‘‘
feathers. ’’
2:00 p.m.—tlLadies’ trip to Country Club.
8:15 p.m.—Smoker at Syria Mosque.
features.
8:15 pm.—Drama school play for ladies, Carne-
gie Institute of Technology.

Fe

Structural colors in

Special

WEDNESDAY, SEPTEMBER 6

9:30 a.m.—Divisional and _ sectional meetings,
Carnegie Institute of Technology.

10:00 a.m.—The ladies will go to the Heinz Fac-
tory and lunch there.

2:00 p.m.—Divisional and _ sectional
Carnegie Institute of Technology.

4:00 p.m—There will be a musicale for the
ladies in the afternoon at the Twentieth Cen-
tury Club.

8:15 p.m.—Publie meeting, Carnegie Musie Hall.
Reception by the president and members.

meetings,

THURSDAY, SEPTEMBER 7

9:30 a.m.-2:00 p.m.—Divisional and _ sectional

SCIENCE

139

meetings at the Carnegie Institute of Tech-
nology.

5:00 p.m.—Garden party and supper and social
evening with music and dancing at the Uni-
versity of Pittsburgh Faculty Club (Oak
Manor), Fifth Avenue and Atwood Street.

FRMAY AND SATURDAY, SEPTEMBER 8 AND 9

Exeursions to industrial plants, ete.

All divisions and sections, as enumerated
below, will meet. All divisions and sections
will have two full days at their disposal if
needed.

The Division of Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry will include in its program on Wednes-
day morning a symposium on ‘‘ Automatic
process control.’’? The chairman, L. W. Parsons,
has arranged with various authorities to present
papers, many being illustrated, bearing upon the
fundamental and practical aspects of the subject.

The Water, Sewage and Sanitation Division
will discuss the specifications for lime for water
treatment, as a feature of the meeting.

The Biological and the Agricultural and Food
Chemistry Divisions will hold a joint symposium
on the subject of ‘‘Fatty foods,’’ with Dr.
David Wesson as chairman. Papers dealing with
the preparation, purification, digestibility, adul-
teration, ete., of various fatty goods are solicited
for this symposium. Vitamin papers will be
included.

The Rubber Division is planning for the
largest meeting in its history, as Pittsburgh is
situated near the center of the rubber industry.

The Leather Division has prospects of a very
large meeting at Pittsburgh. A symposium on
gelatin and colagen will be a feature of the
meeting.

The Dye Division is arranging a symposium on
“¢The chemistry of the application of dyes.’’

The Division of Physical and Inorganic Chem-
istry will hold a symposium on ‘‘ Recent advances
in applied colloid chemistry,’’ in cooperation with
the colloid committee of the National Research
Council.

The Petroleum Section hopes to perfect its
divisional organization at this meeting, and will
hold a short symposium on ‘‘Lubrication from
the chemists’ viewpoint. ’’

A Gas and Fuel Section will hold its initial
meeting at Pittsburgh, with A. C. Fieldner as
chairman. Several authorities have already
agreed to present papers. A symposium on
‘“Combustion’’ will be held Wednesday after-

140

noon, with R. T. Haslam, Massachusetts Institute
of Technology, as chairman.

The Section of Chemical Education is desirous
of being an open forum for settling national
questions in chemical education including high
school, college, university and industry problems.
Bring your problem for discussion. A fifty-word
abstract of all papers is required before the
paper is presented at the meeting.

The Cellulose Section plans a number of dis-
cussions on special topics, such as: (a) Coopera-
tive research -problems in cellulose chemistry.
(b) The nature of oxycellulose and its bearing
on the artificial silk, viscose and paper industries.
(c) Dr. Tingle’s proposed ‘‘ Bromine number.’’
(d) Absorption of salts by cellulose.

THE SOUTHWESTERN DIVISION OF THE
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE
ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE

Tue third annual meeting of the South-
western Division, American Association for the
Advancement of Science, will be held in Santa
Fé, New Mexico, on September 6 to 9 inelusive.
It will immediately follow the annual Santa Fé
Fiesta.

Three afternoons will be devoted to field
meetings; one to a large fossil bed containing
remains of extinct animals; another to the
ruins at Pecos; and the other to the cliff dwell-
ings at the Rito de los Frijoles, under the direc-
tion of Dr. E. L. Hewett.

The Santa Fé museums offer a special arche-
ological and Indian program on the evening of
the sixth. The address of the president, Dr.
D. T. MacDougal, will be followed by a recep-
tion. On the evening of the seventh, the
friends and associates of Mr. Springer will
present to the State of New Mexico a bust of
him, in appreciation of his work in the ad-
vancement of science and education.

The scientific papers will be read before five
sections :

Physical science: Chairman, Dr. A. E. Douglass,
University of Arizona and director of the Stewart
Observatory.

Social science: Chairman, K. M. Chapman,
artist of the Acheological Museums, Santa Fé.

Biology: Chairman, Dr. E. C. Prentiss, El Paso.

Agriculture: Chairman, Dr. H. L. Kent, presi-
dent of the New Mexico College of Agriculture
and Mechanic Arts, Mesilla Park.

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1440

Education and psychology: Chairman, Dr. B. F.
Haught, professor of psychology, University of
New Mexico.

We wish to extend a cordial invitation to
attend this meeting to all members of the asso-
ciation who are spending the summer in the
west.

Euutorr C. PRENTISs,
Chairman of the Executive Committee

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS ©

Proressor Manein, director of the Paris
Museum of Natural History, presided over the
meeting of the French Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science held at Montpellier from
July 24 to 29.

Sir JosepH J. THomson, master of Trinity
College, Cambridge, was presented on July 26
with the Franklin Medal by the Franklin Insti-
tute of Philadelphia for his “signal and em-
inent service in science.” The presentation
was made by the Earl of Balfour.

THE Charles P. Daly Medal for 1922 was
presented to Sir Francis Younghusband, presi-
dent of the Royal Geographical Society, at the
Americal Ambassy in Great Britain on July 19
by George Harvey, the American ambassador,
on behalf of the American Geographical Soci-
ety. The medal was inscribed “For explora-
tions in northern India and Thibet, and for
geographical publications on the Asiatic and
African borders of the empire.”

AT its commencement in June, Randolph-
Macon College conferred the honorary degree
of doctor of laws upon Rear Admiral David
Watson Taylor, chief constructor, United
States Navy, in recognition of his international
reputation as a naval architect and his distin-
guished services to his country. The occasion
was the near approach of his retirement from
active service. Admiral Taylor is a native of
Louisa County, Virginia, and was a student of
Randolph-Macon College before entering upon
his special training for the navy.

THE degree of doctor of science has been
conferred by the University of Manchester on
Mr. G. H. Hardy, Savilian professor of geom-
etry and fellow of New College, Oxford, and

Aucust 4, 1922]

on Sir E. J. Russell, formerly lecturer in chem-
istry at Owens College, Manchester.

Tue doctorate of laws has been conferred
by the University of St. Andrews on Sir Peter
Bedford Scott Lang, emeritus professor of
mathematics in the university; Dr. Arthur Lap-
worth, professor of organic chemistry in the
University of Manchester; Dr. Charles Robert-
shaw Marshall, professor of materia medica
in the University of Aberdeen; and Sir Harold
Jalland Stiles, regius professor of clinical sur-
gery in the University of Edinburgh.

M. Atsert Recoura, professor at Grenoble,
has been elected a correspondent of the Paris
Academy of Sciences, to fill the vacancy caused
by the death of M. Ernst Solvay.

Dr. Lecry, professor of anatomy in the
Paris School of Medicine, has been elected a
member of the Paris Academy of Medicine in
the place of the late M. Ranvier.

In accordance with an act of the California
legislature, a commission of agricultural edu-
cation has been appointed by the governor to
formulate the needs of agricultural teaching
and research in California and report to the
next legislature. This commission consists of
A. C. Hardison, who sueceeds the late G.
Harold Powell, G. H. Hecke, H. A. Jastro,
Senator 8. C. Evans, Mark Grimes, R. N. Wil-
son and Elwood Mead.

Dr. Henry B. Warp, of the University of
Illinois, will conduct investigations for the
Bureau of Fisheries of the pelican in relation
to the fishes of the waters of Yellowstone Na-
tional Park, with the view of ascertaining to
what extent these birds prey upon the fish and
whether or not they serve as hosts for the para-
site which infests many of the trout of the
park waters.

B. LinepurG, a graduate student at the
Johns Hopkins University, has been appointed
by the U. S. Department of Agriculture for
the summer to conduct work on the responses
of bees to lights of various wave lengths and
intensities.

Tue Rockefeller Foundation has sent a hook-
work commission to Honduras. One of its
members, Dr. D. B. Wilson, accompanied by

SCIENCE

141

Dr. Brizzio, director of public health, has
already visited several towns.

Dr. CHartes H. Gitpert, accompanied by
Willis H. Rich and W. P. Studdert, sailed
from South Bellingham, Wash., on June 1
for the purpose of making a thorough investi-
gation of the Alaska Peninsula Fisheries
Reservation to determine whether the present
regulations are adequate to keep the fisheries
of that distriet in perpetuity.

Proressor H. H. Wuerzen, who has been
for fifteen years head of the department of
plant pathology of the College of Agriculture
of Cornell University, retired on July 1 from
the administrative headship in order to devote
his time and energies more fully to teaching
and research together with the immediate
preparation of one or more text-books. Dr.
L. M. Massey, who has been acting head for
the past year during Professor Whetzel’s ab-
sence in Bermuda, succeeds to the permanent
position. A correspondent writes: “Cornell
was the first American University to establish
an independent department of plant pathology
and this stands, doubtless, at present as the
largest development in its field. It is note-
worthy when the leader of a flourishing depart-
ment like this voluntarily retires from the ad-
ministrative headship while still in his prime.”

Proressor B. M. Kozor-Pousansxi, of
Dorpat University, Russia, has requested
American hotanists to exchange papers with
him, in order that he may come in touch again
with American work. His present address is
University Botanical Institute, Woronesh,
Russia.

Av a meeting of the Société Mathématique
de France in the Sorbonne on July 12, Pro-
fessor Kdward Kasner, of Columbia University,
spoke on “Problémes de géométrie dans la
théorie de gravitation Hinsteinien.”

Proressor G. Euiior Suira, F.R.S., and
Professor J. T. Hunter described a reconstrue-
tion of the Piltdown skull at a meeting of the
Royal Anthropological Institute on June 13.

Proressor C. Lioyp Morean, Bristol, has
been selected to deliver the Gifford Lectures
in the University of St. Andrews in 1922-23

142

and 1923-24. His subject will be “Hvolution,
emergent and creative.” The first course will
begin about the end of next October.

In memory of the late Dr. Howard M.
Fussell, friends, officers and students of the
Medical School of the university, have pre-
sented his portrait to the university. The
formal presentation was made by Dr. David
Riesman and the portrait was accepted on
behalf of the university by the acting provost,
Dr. Josiah H. Penniman. Dr. James M.
Anders presided.

Tur Mérida branch of the Mexican Medical
Association will hold a medical contest in honor
of Pasteur. The prizes will consist of medals
and diplomas to local physicians who submit
the best papers on local diseases and means of
control. The prizes will be awarded on De-
cember 27, the centenary of Pasteur’s birth.

THe portrait medallion of Sir Norman
Lockyer, by Sir Hamo Thornycroft, at the
Norman Lockyer Observatory, Saleombe Hill,
Sidmouth, was unveiled by Sir Frank Dyson,
astronomer royal, on July 22.

Dr. JoxicHi TAKAMINE, who established the
Takamine Research Laboratory at Clifton,
N. J., known for his work on diastatic ferments
and the active principles of the suprarenel
glands, died on July 22. Dr. Takamine was
born in Tokyo in 1854.

Dr. Simon Neuson Parren, from 1888 to
1917 professor of political economy in the Uni-
versity of Pennsylvania, known for his con-
tributions to economies, including the relations
of the natural sciences to sociology, died on
July 25, aged seventy years.

Tur Honorable Huia Onslow, known for his
work on the relations of biochemistry to
genetics which he carried on in his private lab-
oratory at Cambridge, has died at the age of
thirty-two years.

Tue sum of $40,000 has been donated to St.
Luke’s Hospital, Chicago, by Mrs. John J.
Borland in memory of her husband. This
fund is to endow a fellowship for clinical
investigation and is to be under the immediate
supervision of Dr. Joseph A. Capps.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

Tue late Prince of Monaco has bequeathed
sums of one millions frances each to the Acad-
emy of Sciences, the Academy of Medicine,
the Institut Océanographique, the Institut de
Paléontologie Humaine of Paris, and the
Musée Océanographique of Monaco.

Ten government departments have appoint-
ed representatives on an advisory committee
on governmental broadeasting formed at the
request of Secretary Hoover to make recom-
mendations on the distribution of government
information by radio. A preliminary classifi-
cation of the kind of information that should
be broadcasted from various stations is being
made. The committee will meet at frequent
intervals to consider the questions that arise
through the progress of radio. Dr. S. W.
Stratton, director of the Bureau of Standards,
is chairman.

Aw Associated Press despatch from Moscow
states that after a month’s negotiations, Leo
Kameneff, the acting premier, has definitely
refused the American Relief Administration’s
conditions for feeding the Russian intellectuals
as a class. The Commonwealth Fund offered
to send food packages to the value of approxi-
mately $250,000 to Russia for distribution by
the Relief Administration among professors,
teachers, doctors, scientists and others selected
by the relief authorities. The latter were ready
for the government to cooperate in the dis-
tribution, but insisted that the final decision as
to what persons should receive the packets
should rest with the Relief Administration.
The government, according to M. Kameneff, is
willing to permit the Relief Administration to
veto any of the government’s selections of bene-
ficiaries, but it is not willing that any outside
organization be permitted to assist persons
despite a Soviet veto.

THE first meeting of the newly formed Asso-
ciation of Maine Geologists will be held on
August 11 in Auburn and Lewiston. Professor
Frank D. Tubbs, of Bates College, N. B. Tracy,
of Auburn, L. C. Bateman, of the Lewiston
Journal, and other members of the local com-
mittee have arranged a program that will take
in all the points of geological interest in the
vicinity. These include Mt. Apatite, the source

Aveust 4, 1922

of much of the feldspar, and of many of the
Maine gems and a large variety of minerals;
the Lewiston Falls and a number of other
localities. It is hoped that the geologists from
other parts of New England will take part in
the meeting, and it is expected that Professor
George P. Merrill, curator of the National
Museum at Washington, will deliver an address
in the evening. The headquarters of the asso-
ciation will be at the Auburn Chamber of
Commerce.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Bowpotn CouLEGE receives $500,000 under
the will of the late Edward H. Blake, of
Bangor.

Puitie A. Lenenpaver, professor of plant
pathology at the University of Illinois, has ac-
cepted a position as head of the department
of horticulture at the University of Nevada.

Dr. Freprrick C. Lronarp has been ap-
pointed instructor in astronomy and mathe-
maties, in charge of the work in astronomy, at
the Southern Branch of the University of Cali-
fornia in Los Angeles.

Proressor Bengamin A. Wooten, Ph.D.,
head of the department of physics at the Ala-
bama Polytechnic Institute, has been elected
professor of physics at Washington and Lee
University, in the place of Dr. Walter LeConte
Stevens, who has been retired and made pro-
fessor emeritus.

Lretanp H. Taytor, who received the degree
of doctor of science from Harvard in 1922, has
been elected to an instructorship in zoology in
West Virginia University.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

CONCERNING THE BOTULINUS TOXIN

Recentity Bronfenbrenner and Schlesinger?
have reported the death of laboratory animals
(mice) as a result of the intraperitoneal injec-
tion of 3 X 10~—*! ce of a solution of the toxin
of B. botulinus. In a preliminary communica-

1 Journal American Medical Assn., 78: 1519

(1922).

SCIENCE

143
(

tion? concerning the matter they state that
under suitable “conditions of the experiment
the botulinus toxin which ordinarily kills mice
in amounts not smaller than 3 X 10~“‘ ce can
be inereased in potency to such an extent that
3 X 10-*! ce occasionally and 3 X 10—7® ee
quite regularly kills mice of 18-20 g. in less
than 48 hours after intraperitoneal injection.
While the total solids of such a minute dose of
toxin amounts to only 3 X 10—*° g¢ (this amount
also includes the inorganic portion of the me-
dium), the toxic product thus obtained, never-
theless, possesses all the essential characteris-
ties of bacterial toxins,” ete.

Because of the smallness of the quantity
it seemed worth while to examine some of
the consequences involved. Since a gram
molecule of any compound contains 6.06
x 10°* molecules then one gram of water or
approximately 1 ce would contain 1/18 X

23

6.06 X 10? = 0

23
ae
3 O22
From the quotation given it is apparent that
the solution of toxin ean not be even a one per
cent. solution, but assuming that it is a one
per cent. solution and that the molecular weight
and density of the pure toxin are the same as
those of water then 3 10—*! ce would contain
only one molecule of toxin. However, the
molecular weight is probably higher than that
of water and not even one molecule in a hun-
dred would be a toxin molecule. Consequently
the average 3 X 10—*! ce quantity of solution
would contain no toxin. If one takes the larger
quantity, 3 < 10-18 ce, which quite regularly
kills mice, and assumes that the molecule has
ten times the molecular weight of the water
molecule then one hundred molecules of toxin
would be present.

In the case of the smaller quantity it is un-
likely that at best more than one or two mole-
cules of toxin could have been present and
since the animal was killed one seems forced to
conelude that the life of an organism is de-
pendent upon the integrity of one or two cells
or that the action of the toxin is catalytie and

molecules and 3 X 10—?+

ce would contain = 10? molecules

2 Proceedings Society Exper. Biology and Med-
icine, 19: 1 (1921).

144

accelerates or inhibits some vital process. In
either case a difficulty arises when the proba-
bility of a single or even small number of
molecules reaching the necessary cells is con-
sidered.
Raymonp L. STEHLE
McGiLL UNIVERSITY,
MontREAL

THE PERIODICAL CICADA

To THE Epitor oF Science: It is probably
desirable to record the appearance, in accord
with expectation, of brood XIII of the peri-
odical cicada or seventeen-year locust (Tibicina
septendecim) in the Chicago area this year.
Reference to Marlatt’s excellent paper’ en-
ables one to satisfactorily identify the present
insects as those of the compact brood described
by Fitch as brood 6, by Walsh-Riley as brood
III, by Riley as brood V and by Marlatt as
brood XIII. In Dr. Gideon B. Smith’s manu-
script chronology the present brood was listed
as appearing “in Winnebago, Monard County,
and neighborhood in 1854; again in 1871.”

The writer first noted the larve April 29 of
this year, at which time they were present in
great numbers at Flossmoor, occupying their
characteristic “chimneys.” The adults emerged
May 28 in enormous numbers, distributed from
at least Batavia and Wheeling to Flossmoor
and to Crown Point. Two weeks ago oviposi-
tion seemed to be past its erest and at the
present time in loealities visited the adults
have practically disappeared.

The precision of appearance of this brood
over a period of seventy years is an interesting
instance of the uniformity of developmental
tempo under natural conditions.

JAMES NELSON GOWANLOCK

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO,

JUNE 30, 1922

SOME SIDELIGHTS ON THE LIFE OF
RUSSIAN PROFESSORS

Ir has been noted on various occasions that
the Russian professors and the research men

1 Marlatt, C. L.: 1907, ‘‘The Periodical
Cieada,’’ Bureau of Entomology Bulletin No. 71,
U. 8S. Department of Agriculture.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

are “book-hungry.” Being shut off from the
remainder of the civilized world for nearly
eight years, they have but very little and very
fragmentary knowledge of what has been and
is being done in western Europe and America.
To work under such conditions is at least very
inconvenient. But in reality the situation is
much worse. The Russian men of science lit-
erally have been “bread hungry” for the past
several years. Every one of us who had a
chance to talk to Russian refugees heard of
stories of bread hunting for four or five hours
at a time. Those days, let us hope, have
passed. The conditions in Russia are becom-
ing better. But even the so-called “better con-
ditions” are very far from good, as one can
judge from the following extracts from a letter
which the writer received from a Russian pro-
fessor in Petrograd:

Notwithstanding the fact that the salaries are
regulated by associations of professionals and
continuously raised in parallel with the value of
the ruble, yet the highest paid specialist in vari-
ous departments will receive in May, 1922, nearly
40,000,000 rubles in Soviet paper money, plus
the food ration of 36 pounds of flour, 7 pounds
of fish and a pound each of salt, sugar and fat,
plus (in exceptional cases) special academic por-
tion (a little in excess of one mentioned above).
Meantime, according to quotation of Government
Bank for May, $100 is equal to $193,000,000
Soviet paper rubles.

a

But even this meager portion and the pack
of worthless money do not come on time, add-
ing further to the discomfort of professional
people in Russia.

On account of shortage of funds at the govern-
ment’s disposal, the personnel in all departments
is systematically decreasing, the salaries come
late as well as the food rations. As a matter of
fact, the salaries in our division (of an agricul-
tural experiment station) have not been received
for March, while the food ration is just being
received for April. [The letter was dated May
27, 1922.]

In the same way, the allowances for current
expenses of the experiment station are being
decreased and delayed.

In spite of all these conditions, of which I do
not think it advisable to talk in detail, we are still
alive and continue our research, although, of

AveustT 4, 1922]

course, not so intensively as in America or other
countries.

Sorry to confess, I was unable until now to
send you our literature including that which was
published during the last few years. Perhaps I
will have this possibility in the near future.

Such bits of information fairly well charae-
terize the conditions under which Russian men
of science are obliged to live and to keep the
“light of knowledge burning,” in anticipation
of better days for science in Russia.

M. I. Wouxorr

UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Genetics, An Introduction to the Study of
Heredity. By H. E. Waurer. Revised edi-
tion, pp. XVI + 354, 92 figs. The Macmillan
Co., New York.

This revised edition of a book originally pub-
lished in 1913 brings the elemental facts of
genetics up to date, and meets at once a need
for a popular presentation for the general
reader as well as an introduction to the study of
heredity for the beginning college student. The
enormous progress in this field during the last
ten years has necessitated eliminations, addi-
tions, and modifications in the former text.

About 82 pages have been added in the
present edition, 50 of which form three new
chapters. A new chapter on the “Factor
Hypothesis” contains much material that was
formerly discussed under “Old Types and
New,” but the rearrangement of materials
places the subject matter in a more logical
position and allows a distinet and important
concept to be treated as a separate unit.
Hereditary genes are here classified roughly as
single or plural according to ways in which
they determine the visible hereditary character.
Of the plural genes, the discussion of genetic
modifiers is the most important new subject,
since modifiers play such a large part in
present explanations for the results of selee-
tion. An entirely new chapter on the ‘Archi-
tecture of the Germ Plasm” reflects the most
important advances made since the original
edition was published, and deals with the con-
ceptions and viewpoints based largely on the
famous Drosophila experiments, such as link-
age, crossing over, the chiasmatype theory,

SCIENCE ©

145

interference, and the arrangement of the genes.
The author takes the point of view “that it has
been possible in a single chromosome to deter-
mine not only the relative arrangement of over
thirty genes but also to find out the relative
distance between these genes.” While the order
of the genes may be determined readily, our
conclusions as to distances between genes have
perhaps outstripped the demonstrable evidence.
If two linked genes show 1.5 per cent. recom-
binations, it still remains to be proved that the
low percentage of crossing over is due to or
proportional to a short distance between these
genes on the chromosome, even in the so-called
normal population. Possibly it may be, but
there are other alternative explanations. To be
sure, the possibility of an accurate localization
of hereditary genes in their appropriate
chromosomes is attractive and even astonishing.
While the hypothesis is alluring, the implica-
tions are so grave and important, we must
await conclusive proof. A new chapter on
“Somatogenesis” points out the problem of
biological differentiation which must take place
between the invisible genes in the fertilized
egg and the Mendelian characters as end
products, for during this process many external
and internal factors (ineluding endocrines)
come into play and contribute to the formation
of the somatie characters as we see and study
them in pedigreed cultures. The present chap-
ter on “Determination of Sex” introduces much
new and important material which was un-
available ten years ago, and substitutes for
some of the former discussion which now has
only a historical significance, such topics as
polyembryony, sex-linked inheritance, non-
disjunction of the sex chromosomes, secondary
sex characters in relation to hormones, sex
intergrades and the like. Excellent diagrams
make clear at a glance the distinction between
the eases where the males are heterogamic
(producing two types of spermatazoa) and
those eases in which the females are hetero-
gamie (producing two types of matured ova).

Two radical changes occur in the rearrange-
ment of materials in the new edition. A chap-
ter discussing “Pure Lines and Selection’’ for-
merly preceded Mendelism but now more appro-
priately follows this subject because pure lines
and selection can be interpreted best in terms

146

of Mendelism. The basic facts of cytology
were originally treated in the second chapter
but now follow the fundamental facts of
Mendelism and prepare the way for an inter-
pretation of the “Architecture of the Germ
Plasm”’ according to recent researches.

To reduce mathematical formule to a mini-
mum is a decided advantage to the lay reader
to whom these are confusing; but it is perhaps
disadvantageous for the college student, whom
we seem to be shielding from even moderate
mental effort by continually simplifying sub-
ject matter. Underlying all distributions of
charaeters in assortative matings are certain
elementary principles based on probabilities
and the theory of simple sampling. When the
student looks upon a Mendelian population in
these terms, he has the advantage of a general
fundamental law rather than the knowledge of
an individual case. The general lack of this
element in approaching genetic problems is
perhaps more keenly felt than any other one
thing. For example, the standard deviation is
not used “since for mathematical reasons it is
more accurate” (p. 27); but it is more con-
venient, and preferable to the average devia-
tion because of its relation to probable error.
Again, the sum of a set of observed frequencies
should equal the sum of the calculated fre-
quencies in any given series of observations,
but they fail to do so in the table on p. 157.
In discussing the practical applications the
author states (p. 119) that “when ten differing
characters are combined in the parental gen-
eration there would result over a million kinds
of possible offspring among the hybrids of the
second filial generation, (3 + 1)?° = 1,048,576.”
While such a hybrid would produce 2?° kinds
of gametes which might combine in 279 =
1,048,576 ways, so many duplications of type
appear that it is misleading to consider each
combination as a separate “possible kind”;
and in reality there would be only 2?° = 1,084
different visible classes (phenotypes) and 31° =
59,049 classes differing in germinal constitu-
tion (genotypes). At some points, there seems
to be confusion as to an exact definition of geno-
type. On p. 109, the author states that “There
are then... nine different genotypes in any
dihybrid cross,” 7. e., 38" where » = number of
allelomorphic pairs. This definition agrees

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

with the current usage, but is hardly consistent
with the usage on p. 153 and p. 159. A num-
ber of minor errors which always occur in the
most earefully prepared texts will without
doubt be corrected in subsequent editions.

The revised edition maintains the same
attractive and readable style of the original.
The volume as a whole has a broad usefulness
in the related fields of sociology, psychology,
education and medicine. Many excellent new
diagrams, remarkable for their lucidness and
pedagogic value, help the reader to visualize
complex groups af fact quickly. Even the
experienced teacher of genetics will find the
volume most suggestive and refreshing.

J. A. DETLEFSEN
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

SPECIAL ARTICLES

THE EMERGENCY FUNCTION OF THE
ADRENAL

We have recently obtained evidence of an
emergency function of the adrenal. In some of
this work we have confirmed Cannon’ and his
co-workers, who suggested an emergency func-
tion for the adrenal. Our method is a modifi-
cation of Meltzer’s? denervated eye reaction.
The iris is made sensitive to epinephrin by
removal of the superior cervical ganglion. Sey-
eral days later, in order to eliminate central
nervous influence, the ciliary ganglion is re-
moved. We have made a study of sixteen cats
by this method.

In most animals prepared in this way, stimu-
lation of the moist pinna by rapidly repeated
induction shocks will cause a good dilatation
of the denervated pupil. Asphyxia for forty
seconds will cause almost maximal dilatation.
Exposure to cold (immersion in cold water)
will usually cause a very decided dilatation
after a few minutes, the rectal temperature
decreasing meanwhile. As an illustration, a cat
whose rectal temperature was 39.0° C. at the
start and whose pupil was 0.13 in. in diameter
showed the following changes:

1Cannon, W. B.: ‘‘Bodily Changes in Pain,
Hunger, Fear and Rage.’’ 1915, D. Appleton and
Co., New York.

2 Meltzer, S. J.: Am. J. Physiol, 1904, II, 37.

Aucust 4, 1922]

Minne esse eeeseee lmin. 3min. 8min. 10min.
Temperature ....39.25 38.20 34.30 33.0° C.
Die. pupil 0.13 0.17 0.34 0.425 in.

After removal of the adrenals and before
adrenal insufficiency had time to develop,
induction shocks, asphyxia and cold produced
little or no effect in the same animals which had
previously given good responses with the same
stimulation.

Our evidence points conclusively to an emer-
gency function of the adrenal.

Frank A. Hartman

DEPARTMENT OF PHYSIOLOGY,

UNIVERSITY OF BUFFALO

SEALING QUARTZ TO GLASS WITH SILVER
CHLORIDE

AurHoucH silver chloride has long been used
as a cement, the possibility of employing it
as a cement for vacuum purposes has perhaps
not been thoroughly appreciated. Recent tests
have demonstrated that the substance possesses
certain qualities desirable in a cement, name-
ly, it melts at 455° C, a relatively high tempera-
ture, it adheres to glass and quartz surfaces
and forms a joint that does not leak, it does
not give off gas in any quantity, and does not
decompose readily with time. By means of
the silver chloride quartz windows were sealed
to glass mercury vapor lamps and gas dis-
charge tubes for use as sources of ultra-violet
light.

The silver chloride was prepared by pre-
cipitation from an aqueous solution of silver
nitrate with sodium chloride. The precipi-
tate was thoroughly washed, dried, and ground
to a powder. To fasten a plate of quartz or
other material to a glass tube the following
simple manipulation was found workable. The
end of the glass tube was ground evenly,
warmed above 500°C in a bunsen flame and
dipped quickly into the silver chloride powder.
This adhered to the glass and upon further
heating in the flame melted evenly around the
end of the tube. The tube was then clamped
in an upright position and the plate laid on
the top of it. The bunsen flame was carefully
played over the tube and the plate until the
silver chloride again melted and crawled into
optical contact with the plate. Little difficulty

SCIENCE

147

was experienced in sealing fused quartz plates
to glass tubes, but with plates cut from erys-
tal quartz considerable care was necessary to
heat them to the required temperature without
fracture. Slow even heating by a furnace
would have been better than the bunsen flame.
It was found that if the glass tube was either
too thin or too thick it was liable to crack near
the seal upon cooling. Glass tubing of medium
thickness stood the strain well. Of course in
such a seal strains exist because of the different
heat expansions of quartz and glass, but the
fused silver chloride, being tough and not brit-
tle, no doubt yields somewhat and eases the
strain.
EK. O. Hunsurt
Iowa State UNIVERSITY

THE NORTH CAROLINA ACADEMY
OF SCIENCE

Tue North Carolina Academy of Science met
at the University of North Carolina at Chapel
Hill May 5 and 6. Thirty-five new members
were added, making a total of 163. The North
Carolina Section of the American Chemical
Society and the North Carolina Physies Teach-
ers’ Association met at the same time and place.
The following officers were elected: (Academy)
President, Dr. A. Henderson, University; vice-
president, Dr. H. B. Arbuckle, Davidson Col-
lege; secretary-treasurer, Dr. Bert Cunningham,
Trinity College; executive committee, Dr. H. N.
Gould, Wake Forest College, Professor J. P.
Givler, North Carolina College for Women,
Dr. B. W. Wells, State College. (Chemists)
President, Dr. A. 8. Wheeler, University; sec-
retary, Mr. L. B. Rhodes, Raleigh. (Physics
Association) President, Dr. A. H. Patterson,
University; vice-president, W. T. Wright,
North Carolina College for Women; secretary-
treasurer, Professor A. L. Hook, Elon College;
executive committee, Professors C. W. Ed-
wards, J. B. Derieux and A. F. Roller.

In addition to the address of welcome by
President Chase of the university and the pres-
idential address, “The search for the ultimate
atom,” by Professor J. L. Lake of Wake Forest,
the following papers were presented:

The variation of the photoelectric current with
thickness of metal: Orro STUHLMAN, JR.

148

Studies on fermentation of rare sugars by plant
pathogenic bacteria: F. A. WOLF.

Pod and stem blight of soy beans: S. G. Lrn-
MAN.

The dipterous galls of the hickories: B. W.
WELLS.

The stems of grape hybrids: C. F. WILLIAMS.

Instincts in social life (By title): C. C. TAytor.

Wild ferns and flowers of Chapel Hill: H. R.
TOTTEN.

Coordinate systems in mathematics (By title):
J. W. LASLEY, JR.

The calcium content of mixed feeds in relation
to the feeding requirements of animals: J. O.
HALVERSON and L. M. Nrxon.

Influence of climate on protein content of corn:
H. B. ARBUCKLE.

A note on the pulmonary circulation in verte-
brates: W. C. GEORGE.

The polymorphic genus clavaria: W. C. COKER.

The geology of the Muscle Shoals area: W. F.
PROUTY.

Dormancy in the seeds of Diospyros Virginiana:
H. L. BLoomauist.

A ‘‘nature-experiment’’ on the development of
frogs and one on the physiology of sponges: H. V.
WILSON.

Notes on the reproduction of hydra in the
Chapel Hill region: H. 8S. Evererr. Presented by
H. V. Wilson.

Twenty years of the North Carolina Academy
of Science: C. S. BRIMLEY.

Notes on protozoa: BERT CUNNINGHAM.

A review of the fulgoride of eastern
America: Z. P. METCALF.

Striations in inorganic solutions: C. M.

A parasite of the Mediterranean flour
J. E. ECKERT.

Spore dischargal in some genera of water molds:
J. N. Coucn.

Laboratory work in elementary genetics: C. O.
EXppy.

The Echigo oil fields, Japan: COLLIER Coss.

Age of the Talladega and associated rocks of
Clay County, Alabama: W. F. Prouty.

Acoustics of auditoriums: A. H. ParrErson.

A review of high school science teaching: J. N.
CoucH.

Sand dunes of Niigata: Courier Coss.

The structure and development of the seed coats
of garden peas and sweet clover: L. E. Yocum.

Some intestinal cestode and nematode parasites
of cats of Wake Forest: R. B. Wiuson. =

A new species of isoachlya: F. A. GRANT.

Some investigations into the bacteriology of

North

HEcK.
moth:

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1440

common colds and a brief trial of autogenous
vaccine therapy for siz months at Wake Forest
College: W. L. Taytor and Cas. PHILLIPS.

The relation of chemistry to the state’s public
water supply: C. F. CATLET.

New dyes derived from 5-chloro-2-amino-p-
cymene: A. S. WHEELER and I. V. GILEs.

CHEMISTRY SECTION

Zirconium ferrocyanide: F. P. VENABLE and
R. A. LINEBERRY.

Zirconium citrate:
MorHLMANN.

Modification of the official sodium method: J. O.
Hatverson, L. E. Morean and J. H. ScHutrz.

The determination of potassium in the official
sodium method: J. O. Hatverson and J. A.
SCHULTZ.

A modified thermoregulator: M. L. HaMuin.

A convenient form of condenser: M. L. Hamutn.

Phenolsuphonphthalein and some of its deriva-
tives: W. N. OrNpdorFF and F. W. SHERWOOD.

Binary systems of metanitrotoluene and another
mononitrotoluene: J. M. Beth and J. L. McEwen.

The nitration of certain nitrotoluenes: J. M.
Bru and W. B. SMoor.

The nitration of orthonitrotoluene: J. M. BELL
and H. G. Pickert.

The chlorination of 2-amino-p-cymene: A. 8.
WHEELER and I. V. GiILEs. '

New derivatives of 2-bromo-5-hydroxy—1, 4—
naphthoquinone: A. S. WHEELER and B. NAIMan.

The effects of tops on the wilting of succulent
vegetables: L. B. RHopEs.

The determination of the solubility of nickel
sulphate by floating equilibrium: F. C. VILBRANDT
and J. A. BENDER.

F. P. VENABLE and E. C.

Puysics SECTION

How the Einstein theory of relativity was veri-
fied: A. HENDERSON.

X-ray spectra from crystals: J. B. Dmrimux.

Effect of an electric field wpon colloids in non-
conducting liquids: N. B. Foster.

Analysis of crystal structure from X-ray spec-
tra: A. A. Dixon.

The color of metals by transmission:
STUHLMAN, JR.

Some suggestions for the teaching of physics:
A. H. PArrErson.

The use of an audion tube as negative resist-
ance: D, A. WELLS.

Research in North Carolina: (By title) C. W.
EDWARDS.

Orro

Bert CUNNINGHAM,
Secretary

SCIENCE

a Sis aL SERIES 99 ISAs ee SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1441 PRipay, Avaust 11, 1922 SineGLE Copigs, 15 Ons.

DUFF’S
TEXTBOOK OF PHYSICS

Edited by A. WILMER DuFF, Sc.D.

A College Physics Having as Authors, Specialists
in Different Departments

5th Revised Edition. 609 Illustrations. Cloth, $4.00

Mechanics and Sound.—By A. Wilmer Duff, Sc.D., Pro-
fessor of Physics, Worcester Polytechnic Institute.

Wave Motion and Light——By E. Percival Lewis,- Phe D)., “
Professor of Physics, University of a igs

Heat.—By Charles E. Mendenhall, Ph/, ., Profiesse%of
Physics, University of Wisconsin. — \"

Electricity and Magnetism.—By Albert P. eletions tong By
Professor of Physics, University of Illinois.

Conduction of Electricity through Gases and Radio-Activity.
—By R. K. McClung, Sc.D., Assistant Professor of
~ Physics, University of Manitoba.

More than three-fourths of the schools of engineering in
the United States use Duff’s Textbook of Physics. The
leading schools of Canada, Japan and China also use it.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.
Publishers Philadelphia

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

RECEN® ISSUES
IN GEOLOGY

The Briones Formation of Middle
California, by Parker D. Trask.
Price, 75 cents.

Genesis of the Ores of the Cobalt
District, Ontario, Canada, by Al-
fred R. .Whitman. 80

cents.

Price,

Geology of the Cuyamaca Region of
California with special reference
to the origin of the nickeliferous
pyrrhotite, by F. S. Hudson.
Prices) $ile2%

University of California Press
Berkeley,

California.

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
Publications of Department of Marine Biology

The Institution, from 1906 to 1922, has issued
17 volumes of papers from the Department of
Marine Biology, of which the late Alfred G.
Mayor was the Director. These volumes contain
112 separate papers, aggregating 3,556 pages, 537
plates, and 1,000 text-figures. Besides these, Dr.
Mayor was the author of a monograph, in 3 quarto
volumes, on “The Meduse of the World,” issued
in 1911, with 738 pages, 76 colored plates, and 428
text-figures. Another volume (publication No.
312), containing articles on similar researches, is
now in press, as follows:

Tennent, D. H.—Studies of the Hybridization of Echinoids.
Harvey, E. N.—Production of Light by the Fishes

Photoblepharon and Anomalops.

Mayor, A. G.—Hydrogen-ion Concentration and Electri-
cal Conductivity of the Surface Water of the Atlantic
and Pacific.

Wells, R. C—The Carbon-Dioxide Content of Sea-Water
at Tortugas, Florida.

Phillips, A. H.—Analytical Search for Metals in Tortugas
Marine Organisms.

Fowler, H. W., and C. F. Silvester—A Cdilection a Fishes

from Samoa.
Mayor, A. G.—Tracking Instinct in a Tortugas Ant.
Treadwell, A. L.—Leodicide from Fiji and Samoa.

Treadwell, A. L.—Polychzetous Annzlids Collected at Fri-
day Harbor, Washington.

More complete information concerning the publications of

this Department, lists of titles, prices, etc., may be
obtained by addressing:

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
WASHINGTON, D. C., U. S. A.

THE JOURNAL OF GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY

Edited by

JACQUES LOEB, New York, N. Y.

W. J. V. OSTERHOUT, Cambridge, Mass.

CONTENTS OF VOLUME IV, NO. 6, JULY 20, 1922:

NORTHROP, JOHN H. The stability of bacterial
suspensions. I. A convenient cell for microscopic
cataphoresis experiments.

NORTHROP, JOHN H.. and CULLEN, GLENN E.
An apparatus for macroscopic cataphoresis experi-
ments.

NORTHROP, JOHN H., and DeKRUIF, PAUL H.
The stability of bacterial suspensions. Il. The ag-
glutination of the bacillus of rabbit septicemia and
of Bacillus typhosus by electrolytes.

NORTHROP, JOHN H., and DeKRUIF, PAUL H.
The stability of bacterial suspensions. III. Ag-
glutination in the presence of proteins, normal

serum, and immune serum.
EGGERTH, ARNOLD H., and BELLOWS, MAR-
GARET. The flocculation of bacteria by pro-
_ teins.
SCHMIDT, CARL L. A., and NORMAN, G. F. Fur-

ther studies on eosin ‘hemolysis.
PARKER, G. H. The calibration of the Osterhout

respiratory apparatus for absolute quantities of car-
bon dioxide.

COHN, EDWIN JOSEPH. Studies in the physical
chemistry of the proteins. I. The solubility of cer-
tain proteins at their.isoelectric points.

CROZIER, W. J. Cell penetration by acids.
on the estimation of permeability changes.

HITCHCOCK, DAVID I. The combination of gelatin
with hydrochloric acid.

LOEB, JACQUES. The mechanism by which trival-
ent and tetravalent ions produce an electrical
charge on isoelectric protein.

LOEB, JACQUES. Ionizing influence of salts with
triv valent and tetravalent ions on crystalline egg
albumin at the isoelectric point.

LOEB, JACQUES. On the influence of aggregates
on the membrane potentials and the osmotic pres-
sure of protein solutions.

INDEX TO VOLUME IV.

V. Note

Subscription price per year (one volume), $5.00
Published bimonthly by

The Rockefeller Institute for Medical Research

Avenue A and 66th Street

NEW YORK

SCIENC

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices an
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 15) (Cts:

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Single Copies,

Avueust 11, 1922 No. 1441

Vout. LVI

CONTENTS

The Extension of the Full-time Plan of
Teaching to Clinical Medicine: PRorEssor
INTORENCE di OABIN tes cette, seedctseen neue 149

Preliminary Report on American Bacterio-

logical Stains: H. J. CONN.........---2-..-se000:: 156
George Bruce Halsted: Prorrssor ARTHUR
IMSS ELUMEP TER E'S cece rence ora oe ae ANE 160

Scientific Events:
The Foulerton Professorship and Student-
ship; Appointments and Promotions at the
Johns Hopkins University; Dedication of
the University of Colorado Mountain Lab-
oratory; Program on Conservation of the
Section of Social and Economic Sciences of

EILCRPAMN ET LCHIVAPA SSOCIOLLON cetera eas 161
Scientific Notes and News...-....-.-..:2---1.00..--.----- 164
University and Educational Notes.................... 167

Discussion and Correspondence:
The Spectrum of Helium in the Extreme
Ultra-Violet: PRoressor THEODORE Ly-
MAN. The California Poppy: Dr. Davin
STARR JORDAN. The Temperatures of Me-
teorites: PROFESSOR ARTHUR TABOR JONES.
The Bureau of Standards: PRorEessor
GAYS: GSA VVSEB SITE Rate antes Pees aie Nts Meni a SAMI IO) 167

Special Articles:
Basal Glauconite and SAA Beds: Dr.
Marcus I. GonpMAN... See eal 7p!

The American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science:

Section E—Geology and Geography: Pro-
FEssor E. S. Moore. Section Q—Educa-
tion: PRroressor Birp T. BaLpwiIn.............. 174

THE EXTENSION OF THE FULL-
TIME PLAN OF TEACHING TO
CLINICAL MEDICINE?

You have done me the honor to invite me to
speak to your graduating class at your com-
mencement exercises. Let me tell you how
much I appreciate it, and how glad I am of
the opportunity to affirm my profound faith
in the special fitness of women for the medical
profession. As practising physicians, the
large numbers of successful women, of whom
your city and your school have had many con-
Spicuous examples, make the question of their
value a closed subject. There are perhaps
fewer women working on the scientific side of
medicine, but no one would now advocate elim-
inating the work of a Madame Curie, because
of a prejudice against the sex of the worker.
In relation to education, may I call your atten-
tion to the fact that yesterday the Johns Hop-
kins University honored a woman, Miss M.
Carey Thomas, retiring president of Bryn
Mawr College, because she is one of the out-
standing educators of our day. She has a rela-
tion to medical education because her vision
and her profound faith in the value of the
college training as a preparation for medical
education had raised the standards of medical
education in this country. Thus it seems to
me that the question of giving women a med-
ical training has now been settled, but there is
one place where women who are now studying
may increase rather than decrease the preju-
dice against giving women adequate chances
for a medical education, namely, if the women
who have been adequately trained so lightly
give up all use of that training when they
marry. English women have been able to
carry on the practice of medicine after mar-

1 Address delivered at the seventieth com-
mencement exercises of the Woman’s Medical
College, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

150 SCIENCE

riage and it is quite possible for married
women to do scientific work or public health
work of a high order if they have the ability
and the training, so there is no reason why
the responsibility to the community for using
expert training should not be forcibly pre-
sented to our students. Indeed, one of the
next steps in the feminist movement is for edu-
cated married women to claim and to carry on
a share of professional work.

I desire, however, to speak this morning on
a subject of more general interest in medical
education, a subject which it may be possible
to apply only to medical schools connected
with univerrsities at the present time but one
of such general importance to the medical pro-
fession that I most earnestly bespeak for it
your sympathetic interest. I refer to the ex-
tension of the so-called full-time scheme to the
elinieal branches.

About thirty years ago, the full-time plan
of teaching was introduced into the pre-clinical
departments of our medical schools. At that
time the pre-clinical sciences were unproduc-
tive servants of the clinical branches and were
taught by practicing physicians as a side issue;
they are now represented by professional anato-
mists, physiologists, chemists and pathologists.
No one questions the value of the change. The
idea was but the extension into the medical
training of the fundamental principle that
teaching is a highly specialized profession. It
has not been very long since the presidents of
eur colleges were ministers, now they are pro-
fessional educators. The thought that it was
now time to apply the same principles of edu-
cation to the clinical branches that had
wrought so much progress elsewhere can be
traced, I think, to the late Professor Mall and
Mr. Abraham Flexner. The experiment is now
being tried in several of our medical schools
which are a part of universities, but the plan
is having an even more difficult time to win
support than did the earlier experiment with
the scientific side. It is not yet clearly under-
stood by our students and has therefore not
yet won their enthusiastic sympathy; and it is
still actively opposed by some of the medical
profession. The reasons for these difficulties
are threefold: first, the failure to keep the

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

fundamental principles involved distinct from
personalities; second, the greater complexity
of the actual scientific problems involved, and
third, certain practical difficulties in putting
the plan into effeet.

The fundamental principle, as I see it, is a
recognition of the value of edueation to the
community. It states boldly that a great edu-
cator in clinical medicine is as great an asset
to the community as a great practitioner of
medicine. To set any great value on teaching
Tuns counter to popular belief. If you are
accustomed to look facts in the face you will
admit this to be true. You all know the
phrase, “he who can, does; he who ean not,
teaches.” You all remember that the most fre-
quent criticism of Wilson was that his train-
ing had been only that of a teacher. In Wells’
history there is a statement of the exact truth
about education; that we treat it in a beg-
garly, niggardly way. The funds for edu-
cation are in part an endowment that is given
by a few people; and, in part, they have been
won from unwilling and uncomprehending
legislatures. What a pitiful contrast do the
sums we spend on teaching make with ine
sums we spend on war!

In studying the problem, it is first essential
to analyze the relation of research to teaching.
On the scientific side, it is now established
with sound wisdom that all teachers should be
engaged in research. It is based on the idea
that universities shall be the home of intellec-
tual progress; that they should have a double
function, the advancement of knowledge and
the training of those who shall carry it on.
Research is the teacher’s own professional
work, it is that which he does; it makes plain
to his students and to his colleagues the quality
of his mentality and it is his contribution to
the knowledge of his day. Only to minds of
feeble comprehension does the carrying on of
research mean any lessening of the value of
teaching; research lifts teaching to a higher
plane. It is perhaps better to say that no one
can be a really great educator unless he is him-
self an investigator, either in the subject mat-
ter or in the methods of education, and can
lead students, in part, into research, and, in
part, to carry into all work the spirit and

Aveust 11, 1922]

method of research. It may here be made
clear that no school expects all of its students
to undertake scientific investigation; indeed
only a part and perhaps but a small part of
the student body either want to or are fitted
for it, but our schools must hold in research
those who are to be the next generation of
teachers. Thus the extension of the full-time
scheme throughout the medical training means
putting the entire medical training into the
hands of professional educators.

The full-time scheme in clinical medicine
substitutes research to be associated with teach-
ing, instead of the practice of medicine. The
progress of medicine of the past thirty years
has brought us face to face with something
quite new, namely, with preventive medicine
as a reality instead of a dream. We need no
longer say diseases may disappear, but dis-
eases are disappearing. It is this fact that
calls for something really profound in the
reorganization of medical education. When
I began the study of medicine twenty-six years
ago, we learned clinical medicine mainly in
the typhoid wards. In the fall nearly every-
thing on the medical side gave way to typhoid;
now our students hardly see it. The most
vivid memories of my year of internship are of

typhoid tubs and the elaborate reasons for’

believing in them; our students will now carry
away the impression of the value of sanita-
tion and the efficacy of typhoid vaccine. In
China, last summer, the contrast between pre-
ventive and palliative medicine became clearer
to my mind than ever before. I was hearing
of deaths from malaria and discussions as to
whether it was wiser for the traveler to take
small preventive doses of quinine or not, some
saying that the subsequent treatment in case of
infection was less effective if these preliminary
doses had been taken. I knew that in reality
only certain places at home had really elim-
inated malaria; but I also knew that our own
department of clinical microscopy was having
a difficult time to get enough blood infected
with malarial parasites to teach our students
the characteristics of the organism. With our
present knowledge it is easy to see that the
better way for China to deal with malaria is
to get rid of mosquitoes rather than to import

SCIENCE

151

quinine, but it is just as clear that until there
is money enough and enough of a civie organ-
ization in China to undertake sanitation, the
palliative treatment of each case of malaria is
the only feasible plan. At least it is easy to
see which type of work has the greater ultimate
value, the research which shows that the mos-
quito is the intermediate host of malaria and
shows how to eliminate the disease or the dis-
covery of the effect of quinine and the treat-
ment of each case. Such a contrast by no
means disparages the skill of clinical diagnosis
and treatment; it is quite clear that palliative
medicine must remain as the measure of the
failure and ignoranee of preventive medicine.
In the full-time scheme as applied to clinical
medicine, we recognize that preventive medi-
cine has so far advanced that we can demand
that the few leaders of medical education shall
have as their major intellectual interest the
growth of scientific medicine. The actual deal-
ing with the sick is an ancient and honorable
profession; but the science of preventive medi-
cine is a profession on a still higher plane and
it is now legitimate to ask that those who are
teaching in a profession which is thus changing
shall themselves contribute to that change. The
research which brings new methods is of great-
er ultimate value than the immediate practical
application of our present knowledge.

It must again be emphasized that practical
applications of knowledge are in no way to be
despised. The practise of medicine must be
palliative but I should here like to pay tribute
to the progress of curative medicine. There
has developed on the clinical side of modern
medicine a degree of expert skill in diagnosis
of which I believe many workers on the purely
scientific side are unaware and underestimate.
Our students must acquire this skill; there are
certain parts of the medical training where I
believe our students should be really expert
when they are graduated, namely: in the tech-
nique of clinical microscopy, in the methods of
medical and surgical diagnosis, and in the
aseptic technique of modern surgery. In their
attitude toward curative medicine, those who
are working on the scientific side should keep
clearly in mind that the amount of curative
medicine necessary is the measure of the defi-

152

ciencies of their own branch of the work. To
make up these deficiencies of preventive medi-
cine we must continue to develop the curative
side, but beside the technique of curative med-
icine our students must now have also a train-
ing that shall enable them to continue to de-
velop with the growth of medical knowledge
and this, the greatest asset of an education,
demands educational institutions that are
themselves the sources of such growth.

It is frequently said by those who oppose
the full-time scheme, that workers in labora-
tories do not possess technical clinical skill.
It is true; moreover, those who are to teach on
the clinical side must have clinical skill, their
work must be with patients. But for those
who are to be our clinical teachers the con-
trast is not between the laboratory and the
elinie but between private practice as against
practice with patients in hospitals. From the
standpoint of acquiring skill and experience
for the doctor, it seems to me that there can
be no question but that the advantage les in
having patients in hospitals. To illustrate,
Osler’s well-known text-book of medicine was
written as a record of his experience and that
of his colleagues in dealing with the sick in
the Johns Hopkins Hospital. One might make
it still stronger and say that it is only in hos-
pitals that studies and records of clinical ma-
terial adequate enough to make any large con-
tribution to clinical medicine can be made.
Indeed, to go tack historically, the early
studies on tuberculosis of the great French
physician, Louis, were made from records of
patients in a hospital and started the idea
that the hospital is the laboratory of clinical
material. Indeed, at the present time many of
the exceptionally successful physicians in pri-
vate practice are developing hospitals of their
own of which the Mayo clinic is a conspicuous
example. For surgery, practically all of the
work has already been transferred to hospi-
tals, and for medical practice, the advantages
to the patient are producing the same change.
Thus, even if it be admitted, and it can not
be doubted, that for the study of disease the
hospital has every advantage over the home,
still the opponents of the full-time scheme
have often claimed that on the side of making

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

human contacts, of learning how to deal with
people, the private practitioner has a kind of
experience that a teacher and a physician who
deals only with patients in hospitals never
acquires—I deny it. The school and hospital
are as much a part of the world as the sick
man in his home. The same ability to have
really great influence in dealing with people
makes toward success in a hospital or in a
class room as in a private practice. There are
two facts, however, which we should recog-
nize, if we want to see all sides of the ques-
tion. First, the teacher is somewhat artificially
protected from the consequences of poor work.
The teacher is always dealing with minds that
are immature in his particular subject; and
in the organization of our educational system
the criticisms of students, that is, of those
who are most affected by inefficient teaching,
are allowed but little weight. I understand
that in Hngland students are not so docile as
with us. Moreover, the very low salaries paid
to teachers have led institutions to offer secur-
ity of tenure as a compensation. We should
recognize this, our institutions should set an
adequate value upon the profession of teach-
ing, and should demand high standards of
work. Secondly, hospitals develop a routine
in which the feelings of people are forgotten.
If many of our hospitals had more of the
spirit of exceedingly efficient service that char-
acterizes our best hotels, there would be less
room for legitimate criticism of caring for the
sick in institutions. I do not think that this
criticism applies so much to the smaller hos-
pitals, but in some of the larger ones, where
the actual medical work is done exceedingly
well, the management of the institution could
learn much from efficient business.

Thus we are quite willing to admit the defi-
ciencies of our present educational system; we
believe that it should be subjected to criticism,
for it is better that its faults should be known
than concealed. We recognize all the advan-
tages of curative medicine, and that our pres-
ent skill in dealing with disease represents a
great achievement; nevertheless, we believe that
the whole of medical education should be in
the hands of professional educators who will
recognize that the still more brilliant achieve-

Avcust 11, 1922]

ments of preventive medicine have brought us
to a stage where we need to reorganize clinical
teaching on the basis of research. To my mind
this is the fundamental point and the final
argument. Up to this time, preventive medi-
cine has been left for the most part to chance
and to boards of public health who applied
what knowledge they had but attracted to their
services, for the most part, only men of mod-
erate ability. The reorganization of medical
schools consists in focussing the minds of the
ablest men in the profession on the problems
of advance in medicine in contrast to the ideas
associated with the practical applications of
knowledge. This is the meaning of stressing
research instead of the practical side in edu-
cational institutions.

On this plane, I believe that you will admit
the principle of the full-time scheme. What
are the practical difficulties? The first one is
due to the complexities of clinical problems.
If you analyze the progress of scientifie medi-
cine, it is astonishing how many of the dis-
coveries that have really changed medicine in
any fundamental way have come, not from the
clinies, but from the laboratories; for example,
diphtheria antitoxin, the whole treatment of
infections by means of serums, and the dis-
coveries of the action of the glands of internal
secretion. In fact, in connection with this
latter subject, there is abundant reason to
demand that clinical applications of our knowl-
edge shall measure up to the standards of
sound physiological experiments. It is ob-
vious that the materials of research are more
readily handled in the laboratory than in the
clinic. In the laboratory ideas ean be sub-
jected to experiment and the number of varia-
bles can be limited in these experiments in a
manner not possible in dealing with patients.
In the early days of the application of the
idea of the full-time plan to clinical work, the
first research done in clinical laboratories was
pure anatomy, pure physiology and pure
chemistry and was done no better than it was
being done in the pre-clinie departments. It
was asked and asked legitimately if there is
such a thing as pure clinical research. Already
we see light in this matter. There have now
developed certain combinations between the

SCIENCE

153

workers in the pre-clinical departments and
the clinics of advantage to both. I may
instance the brilliant progress which has come
from the laboratories of nutritional chemistry
and the departments of pediatrics in the study
of rickets. Here three different techniques
have been brought to bear on a problem of pro-
found interest to clinical medicine, namely,
the nutritional experiments of McCollum com-
bined with the clinical and histological methods
by Park and Shipley. In the nutritional ex-
periments on rats, McCollum and Simmonds
have not only been able to produce rickets but
other bone deficiencies as well and are now
analyzing the effects of sunlight as well as of
diets on these deficiencies. Indeed, the bril-
liant results in nutritional chemistry of Hop-
kins in England, of Mendel and McCollum in
this country, demand an extension to the elin-
ical field as a logical conclusion of their work.

Surgery gives another example of a place
where such combinations are of value, for in
surgery we are now passing into a phase
where further progress depends on a utiliza-
tion of various methods of the pre-clinical
sciences. The actual technique of surgical
operations has now reached a high degree of
perfection and any great advance in surgery
now depends on a more searching analysis of
the reactions of tissues to surgical procedures.
Indeed, if I may cite a particular example, we
have in Dr. Halsted a man who has not only
contributed very greatly to surgical technique
during its period of marked development, but
has also used surgical technique and the
insight which his clinical experience has given
him toward solving the problems of scientific
medicine. Such an instance is to be found in
his work on the thyroid, where he demon-
strated that a graft of a thyroid gland does
not take in an animal until an artificial defi-
ciency has been produced.

On the other hand, there are certain prob-
lems with which it seems to me that the hope
of progress lies with the underlying sciences.
There are certain subjects where all the results
which ean be expected from simple methods
have been obtained and where progress must
be made by going deeply into the underlying
causes. Such problems are to my mind illus-

154

trated in connection with blood and with the
subjeet of the etiology of malignant growths.
In connection with anemias, for example, we
have had a complete survey of all the types of
blood-cells that appear in the circulation under
abnormal conditions, so that the hope of sue-
cess now lies in a very careful study of the
fundamental origin and relation of the types
of blood-cells in the hope of finding out how
to stimulate them differentially. If you will
permit me to speak for a moment of my own
work, it is now possible to eut out the blasto-
derm of a chick and watch it develop under
the microscope, in a hanging drop preparation.
In such a preparation, one can see the devel-
opment of the blood-cells in the embryonic
membranes of the living specimen. On the
second day of incubation only red cells arise
and they can be seen to come from the endo-
thelial walls of the blood-vessels. The white
cells on the other hand begin to appear on the
third day. They come in part from new cells
that differentiate directly from mesenchyme
without becoming a part of the lining of a
vessel. Moreover, the type of the white cor-
puscles that come from endothelium, namely,
the monocytes, have the same kind of phago-
eytie activity, with the storage of phagoeytized
material, that characterizes the parent endo-
thelium, These observations seem to me to open
up anew the question of relationship of the
white cells of the blood, from the standpoint
of their classification on the basis of function.
In connection with the great subject of new
growths it is clear that we now await the dis-
covery of their fundamental cause and that
toward this discovery we need certain very fun-
damental biological studies in connection with
the reactions of cells to normal and abnormal
conditions; such as, for example, are involved
in the investigations of Loeb, Murphy and
others.

Problems which can be solved by purely
clinical methods, or problems which need for
their completion the application of clinical
methods are not lacking. Indeed, their roots
cover the whole period of modern medicine.
In the full-time scheme, it is the argument
that these problems can be solved at enor-
mously greater advantage by a group of men

. SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

concentrating their interests on the study of
patients in hospitals rather than in private
practice. The idea involves changing the em-
phasis of the interests of the leaders of the
medical profession from the application of
knowledge to the cure of disease, to the study
of the problems of disease. It is, I believe,
clear that, in the development of medicine,
there is a very wide range of problems that
are immediately feasible, some of them to be
attacked in the laboratories of the pre-clinical
sciences, some in the wards of hospitals, and
some by combinations of workers in laborato-
ries and in the clinies; but that all of them
will gain by being in the hands of those to
whom their solution is a major interest seems
absolutely certain.

In the development of a group of scientific
workers in direct connection with clinies who
are actually engaged in applying the tech-
nique of ithe underlying sciences to clinical
problems, there have grown up two groups of
workers doing the same kind of work, one in
connection with the clinics and the other in
the pre-clinical departments. In this connec-
tion there have come discrepancies in salaries,
the workers on the clinical side receiving the
higher salary and ultimately the greater re-
ward. The student becomes interested in re-
search while still a student and finds that if
he joins a clinical staff and does the same type
of work that he might have done in a pre-
clinical laboratory he will gain more respect
from the university. Already there is begin-
ning to be some surprise that such a system
works against the fundamental sciences. It is
said frankly that a man who keeps in touch
with the clinical branches has a greater earn-
ing capacity in the community than’ the man
who severs his connection with practice and
devotes himself to the fundamental sciences.
This in my judgment is a direct challenge to
the leaders of universities to renew their faith
in the kind of work for which universities exist.
They must remedy this condition before the
laboratories are depleted of their workers;
they must show clearly that in estimating the
use of a university they do not accept the
popular estimate of the value of the practice
of medicine over and above its study; and

Avaust 11, 1922]

finally that they have a clear view of the merits
of preventive as compared with palliative med-
icine. The public would always pay more to
have a given case cured than to have all cases
of a given disease prevented, but leaders of
universities must not fall into this error. Uni-
versities should rather lead than follow public
opinion. In great contrast to public opinion,
it is interesting to note that the most con-
spicuously successful and hard-headed business
man of our time has judged it wise to make
his total contribution toward the study of dis-
ease. The condition of discrimination against
the fundamental sciences is also a menace to
universities unless they wish to lose the abler
men in the pre-clinical branches who have
proved themselves fundamental on two scores,
on making progress, and on training workers
in the methods of research. I do not believe
that increased salaries of those engaged in edu-
cational work will come through any organiza-
tion of teachers. The associations of teachers
have always been based on the principle of
improving their professional standards instead
of seeking for personal gain. The profession
of teaching is concerned in a very fundamental
way with the ideals of giving and helping,
rather than receiving. But there are signs
that the community as a whole is beginning to
think of the value of education. Progress
through the light of reason may not be rapid,
but there lurks in the minds of all of us a
memory of the poison gases of the late war
and a consciousness that no antidotes are to
be found against them except through trained
minds. It is only with regret that one appeals
to the educational force of war, but it can not
be escaped. It is probable that the contact of
the university with the increased earning ¢a-
pacity of modern medicine and with the need
in commercial life for men trained in science
will work out to the advantage of education in
two ways, first, in the bringing of more ade-
quate funds to education, and second, in the
drawing of abler people into universities, thus
raising the standards of teaching.

I have claimed that the idea at the root of
the full-time scheme is better teaching and
more research. In the practical working out
of the plan it has not always been clear that

SCIENCE

155

the balance of high ideals of teaching lies with
the full-time scheme. If this were made clear
the plan would readily win the support of the
entire body of students. By the time a student
has reached the third and fourth years of the
medical course, he has*no longer the idea that
teaching does not matter; he really wants help
and guidance. Marked ability to teach is not
common; exceptional ability is as rare in
teaching as it is in any other profession. A
man who is practicing medicine may easily
have as much ability to teach as a man who is
doing research, and indeed, in many of the
medical schools, there are practicing physicians
who are doing excellent work in teaching. The
universities have asked these men to teach,
giving them either no salaries or salaries that
are merely nominal, and have expected them
to gain compensation in experience as an asset
to the practice of medicine. The full-time
scheme must not be considered as an attack
on these men but merely as the next step in
the progress of medical education which de-
mands that educational institutions shall now
select, and draw into their teaching force, a
group of men who shall devote their entire
energy to teaching and research. If this can
be done, one can hardly question but that the
advances of the past thirty years of profes-
sional teaching of the pre-clinical side will be
duplicated on the clinical side.

It is clear that two factors have given us a
very much larger staff of teachers on the clin-
ical than on the pre-clinical side. The first is
the legitimate factor of the development of the
great number of specialties. The second is
the fact that many clinical teachers have put
only a small part of their time into teaching
and the fact that the custom of the medical
school of paying them practically nothing has
made it easy to increase their numbers. With
the change of emphasis on teaching and re-
search, it is obviously impossible to put all of
this large group on the full-time basis with
adequate salaries. The change can be made
rapidly in the organization of new institutions
but must be made gradually in the older ones,
where only a few of the teachers in the main
branches of medicine and surgery, together
with representatives of some of the specialties,

156

varying according to local conditions, can be
put on the full-time plan in the beginning.
This can be done with the confident expecta-
tion that the principle which is the more sound
toward improving education will win out in
the end. ?

The development of modern scientific medi-
cine with all its expert skill, and especially the
skill of modern surgery, has brought the sam
possibilities of exaggerated financial reward
into medicine that has followed the develop-
ment of machinery into industry. Moreover,
in the practise of medicine, a chair in a great
institution serves as the same enormous finan-
cial asset as advertising in business. These
facts are conspicuous and hence overestimated.
The number of men making conspicuous wealth
in medicine is not large. The skill of the
physician deserves an adequate reward. Un-
fortunately it has been made to appear as if
the fundamental reason for the full-time
scheme was an attack on commercialism in
medicine. It is not true; the fundamental
reason is much more profound, more construc-
tive, 1t concerns the development of higher
ideals of research and teaching. It is true
that the development of the full-time scheme
makes large demands in terms of ability; it
needs men with ability for research, for teach-
ing, and for organization, but men for whom
ideals and the chance for a brilliant achieve-
ment may outweigh the pursuit of excessive
wealth. I say excessive wealth advisedly; the
advantages to the community have already
been so enormous in the development of scien-
tific medicine, and it is so logically the next
step to bring clinical medicine under the prin-
ciple underlying this progress, that it should
be possible to give adequate support to this
new development.

I said at the beginning that there had been
considerable opposition on the part of the med-
ical profession to the full-time scheme. This
opposition I believe to be due to a lack of
understanding of the principles involved and
to the difficulties of transition. One certainly
hears some suggestion, vaguely expressed, per-
haps not wholly consciously formulated, of a
fear of preventive medicine. To this there
can be only one answer. To preventive medi-

cine the medical profession must adjust itself.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

It is obvious that eliminating typhoid, malaria,
typhus, smallpox, cholera and so forth have
so far not emptied our hospitals nor dimin-
ished the need for doctors; indeed, along with
preventive work, many conditions have come
into the range of treatment which were for-
merly untouched, so that up to the present
time the effect of preventive medicine has been
expressed largely in a lengthening of the ex-
pectation of life. This fact, together with the
eliminating of many of the weaker schools of
medicine, makes it sure that the effects of pre-
ventive medicine on the profession belong to
another generation, not to ours. When the
time comes, the medical profession will make
the only possible adjustment of training fewer
physicians.

In conclusion, I may say itthat I do not think
that all the problems associated with the
practical extension of the full-time scheme to
the clinical side have been solved. Adjust-
ments may have to be made, perhaps radical
ones, but I profoundly hope that the plan will
be given an adequate trial and that it can win
the support of those who are teaching in our
medical schools, because I believe it of the
utmost importance to the community to range
the ablest minds in the medical profession on
the side of preventive medicine. Besides an
occasional school of hygiene and public health
we need to have all of the leaders of medical
education engaged in research to advance med-
icine. It is my sincere conviction that the
opposition to extending the modern standards
of professional education to clinical medicine
will yield readily to sound constructive leader-
ship on the part of those who desire this re-
form. Gq
Fiorence R./Sapin
Ture JoHNS Hopkins MepicaL ScHooL

PRELIMINARY REPORT ON AMERI-
CAN BIOLOGICAL STAINS

As previously mentioned in this journal,’ a
committee was organized under the auspices
of the National Research Council last fall for

1‘‘The Standardization of Biological Stains,’’
Science N. 8. LV, 43-44; Conn, H. J.: ‘‘Amer-
ican Biological Stains Compared with Those of
Griibler,’’ Scrzncr, N. 8. LV, 284-285.

Aveust 11, 1922]

the investigation of the biological stains pro-
duced in this country. This committee is work-
ing in cooperation with the Society of Amer-
ican Bacteriologists, the Botanical Society of
America and the American Society of Zoolo-
gists. Through the cooperation of these dif-
ferent organizations stains are being tested in
their bacteriological applications, and in their
histological and cytological uses, both in con-
nection with zoology and botany. The field is
a very large one and in some lines the work is
only just barely started; but enough informa-
tion has been obtained in connection with cer-
tain uses of some of the stains so that a pre-
liminary report is justified at the present time.

The most important conclusion reached in
this work is that in general as good stains can
be obtained in this country now as were avail-
able before the war. In some cases the Amer-
ican products are distinctly better than were
the Griibler stains. The only important stains
we have so far failed to find in satisfactory
quality in this country are methyl green and
safranin. In regard to these it must be men-
tioned that not all Gritbler samples were satis-
factory, some of the samples we have tested
which were of unquestionable Griibler origin
proving as unsatisfactory as the poorest Amer-
ican samples. It must be remembered that
Griibler did not manufacture stains, but bought
from other concerns in large quantities, and
the constancy of his stains was due wholly to
the large bulk he was able to buy at once, on
account of the large market which he supplied.
In general his stains were in no sense pure,
and one of the greatest difficulties in this coun-
try at present is that as soon as a biologist
obtains poor results with a stain he immedi-
ately calls for a purer product, which the man-
ufacturer tries to supply, often obtaining
stains that are too pure to be used by the same
formule originally used with Griibler stains.
It is not purity so much as agreement with the
Griibler products in staining properties that
should be desired.

It is hoped that eventually one line of stains
may come to have official approval in this
country, not necessarily all manufactured by
the same house but the production of each
stain limited to one concern, so that responsi-

SCIENCE

157

bility of its manufacture can be definitely fixed.
Arrangements for this have not yet been made
and can not be until more preliminary inves-
tigation has been carried on, but at the present
time it is possible to recommend certain brands
of the most common stains for certain par-
ticular purposes.

METHYLEN BLUE

There are various grades of methylen blue
on the market, but so far as we have been able
to find out, one grade, namely, the medicinal
grade generally designated as methylen blue
U.S.P., seems to be satisfactory for all pur-
poses. This is the purest grade of methylen
blue on the market and, although there are
other grades of slightly less purity, designated
by such terms as “BX” or “rectified for blood
stains,” which are perfectly satisfactory for
staining purposes, nevertheless the difference
in price between them and the medicinal grade
is insignificant. It is the committee’s recom-
mendation, therefore, that methylen blue
U.S.P. be regularly specified. The following
brands have been very carefully tested for bac-
teriological purposes and prove to be very sat-
isfactory. Indications are that they can be
used equally well in histological work, although
for this purpose they have not been so fully
tested. These brands are: Coleman and Bell
Company, National Aniline and Chemical
Company and Providence Chemical Company.

Of these three brands, the first and last men-
tioned have been tested in vital staining of
shrimps and sea worms. In this work quite
a large number of other methylen blues were
run for comparison. Of those tested, the sam-
ple of medicinal methylen blue from the Provi-
dence Chemical Company was the only Amer-
ican sample of known manufacture to compare
with Griibler’s methylen blue for bacilli when
used for this purpose. Only one report on
the stains used in this way has been received,
but as it is by a specialist in this line of work
the results are regarded as quite conclusive.

FUCHSIN, BASIC

This stain has been tested for two different
purposes: (1) Staining bacteria, primarily the
tubercle organism; and (2) for use in the Endo
medium for differentiating the colon and

158

typhoid organisms. For staining bacteria sev-
eral satisfactory samples have been found,
namely, those obtained from Coleman and Bell,
Dicks, David & Co., the Goldin Biological Lab-
oratories, the H. 8. Laboratories, National Ani-
line and Chemical Company, the Newport
Chemical Works and the Providence Chemical
Company. Used in the Endo medium all of
these samples have given as good results as
Griibler’s basic fuchsin, but one of them,
namely, that of Coleman and Bell, gives even
better results for this purpose than Griibler’s
samples or any of the others tested.
GENTIAN VIOLET

Gentian violet is not a textile dye. It is not
recognized in the regular dye industry and is
not listed in Schultz’s index, the recognized list
of textile dyes. The name was apparently
introduced by Griibler and is certainly found
nowhere except in the literature relating to
biological stains. Griibler’s gentian violet was
a mixture of various pararosanilin dyes, but its
exact composition is a little difficult to deter-
mine because of conflicting statements that
have been made about it. Somewhat simpler
mixtures of these pararosanilin dyes are known
to the textile trade under the name of methyl
violet, the name being followed by a designa-
tion indicating the shade such as B, 2B, 3B, ete.

The methyl violets are regarded as being
various mixtures of the following three com-
pounds: Tetramethyl-pararosanilin, pentame-
thyl-pararosanilin, hexamethyl-pararosanilin,
which differ from each other as the names imply
in containing 4, 5 and 6 methyl groups respec-
tively to the molecule. The more highly
methylated the compound, the bluer its shade,
and as in the trade designation of these dyes
the number of B’s following the name indicates
the depth of the blue in the violet, it may be
assumed that the more highly methylated com-
pounds are distinguished by the greater number
of B’s, although these trade designations do not
refer to definite chemical formule. In the case
of methyl violet 5B, 6B and 7B, there is appar-
ently a still different compound introduced in
which one or more of the methyl groups have
been replaced by benzyl groups.

Only two of these compounds have to our
knowledge been put upon the market in a pure

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

form, namely, the pentamethyl and the hexa-
methyl compounds. The former of these has
been claimed to have been obtained pure for
use in microscopie work but has never been put
on the market widely. The latter is a well-
known textile dye sold under the name of
erystal violet.

It will thus be seen that there are quite a vari-
ety of dyes and biological stains all falling with-
in the group commonly referred to by biologists
as gentian violet. Now that it is certainly dif-
ficult, and perhaps impossible, to obtain the
same mixture sold by Griibler as gentian violet,
it becomes a question just what to use in its
place. Certainly it is not wise to purchase
“gentian violet” at the present time, because
every dealer has his own idea as to what to sell
under this name and the different gentian vio-
lets at present on the market vary from pure
erystal violet to various mixtures of methyl
violets with crystal violet, some of them possi-
bly containing other dyes as well.

The first point, therefore, that the committee
wished to test was as to what dye to substitute
for gentian violet. The work so far done along
this line has been mostly in connection with
the Gram staining technic, the procedure for
which the bacteriologist most frequently em-
ploys this stain. Work is at present in progress
to see whether the conclusions reached in this
work will apply also to this stain when used
for histological purposes. The indications are
that they will.

It has been found that for the Gram stain
the compounds of low methylation such as those
known under the names methyl violet, methyl
violet B and methyl violet 2B are rather unsat-
isfactory, but that methyl violet 5B and erystal
violet can be well substituted for gentian violet.
Now, crystal violet is a definite chemical com-
pound and is generally recognized as a textile
dye; hence, the source of supply is much more
constant than in the case of any of the other
dyes in this group, and it seems to be the most
logical substitute to use. The committee there-
fore recommends that, except for work where
it is known that erystal violet will not work,
this dye be substituted for gentian violet, and
that it be regularly substituted for it in the
Gram stain for bacteria.

Avcusr 11, 1922]

There seem to be but two sources of crystal
violet in this country—namely, the du Pont
Company and the National Aniline Company.
The du Pont product we have tested and found
to be of very good quality. The National Ani-
line produet was not obtained in time to include
in the cooperative tests, but upon examination
by the writer it appears to be entirely satis-
factory for the Gram stain.

Crystal violet can be obtained from nearly all
the dealers in biological stains but we are
informed that nearly all of them buy the du
Pont product and rebottle it without any puri-
fication or standardization. The du Pont Com-
pany does not sell this dye in small bulk, so
when ordered for staining purposes it is well
to buy it through one of the dealers in stains
but to specify the product desired. The Na-
tional Aniline Company sells erystal violet both
in bulk as a dye and in small containers as a
stain.

If gentian violet is ordered it is recommended
that it be purchased from one of the following
concerns, all of which have ‘been tested for the
Gram stain and found to be very satisfactory:
Coleman and Bell, Goldin Laboratories, H. 8.
Laboratories, National Aniline and Chemical
Company and Providence Chemical Company.

In using any of these dyes it must be remem-
bered that owing to the presence of a large
amount of dextrin and possibly other impuri-
ties in the Griibler product the American stains
are two to four times as strong. This must be
allowed for in preparing the formule. Those
formule which call for a definite amount of
saturated alcoholic solution of gentian violet
do not need to be changed, but those calling for
a definite number of grams per 100 ce. must be
modified to suit these more concentrated
products.

HAMATOXYLIN

One source of American hematoxylin proves
to be very satisfactory for general purposes
and is specially recommended for cytological
work. This is the e.p. product prepared by
McAndrews and Forbes. It is handled by all
of the dealers in stains but generally without
indicating the manufacturer on the label.
Although this is probably the only ¢.p. hema-
toxylin on the market and is handled without

SCIENCE

159

modification by every concern that deals in
these products, nevertheless users of this stain
are recommended to specify the McAndrews and
Forbes product in order to discourage dealers
of these stains from omitting the manufac-
turer’s name from the bottles when all they do
themselves is to rebottle the stains. The
McAndrews and Forbes hematoxylin has been
enthusiastically endorsed by practically every
one who has used it, generally with the state-
ment that it is better than some Griibler sam-
ples.
EOSINE

The situation in regard to eosine is not quite
so satisfactory, but even in this case it is not
discouraging. The Griibler samples of eosine
seem to have varied considerably, certain sam-
ples proving poorer than certain American
samples and others distinctly better. For the
present it can merely be said that the most
promising American samples so far tested have
been those from the Geigy Chemical Company
and from the Heller and Merz Company, among
the manufacturers, while among the dealers in
biological stains, apparently satisfactory sam-
ples have been obtained from D. H. Pond of
Cleveland, Ohio, from the Providence Chemical
Company and from Coleman and Bell. The
latter has been tested with good results in
Mallory and Wright’s methylen-blue-eosine for-
mula. These samples have also been used in
counterstaining against hematoxylin in his-
tological work and for staining red blood cells,
and have proved distinctly better than the
Griibler samples submitted for comparison with
them but not as good as some Griibler samples
that the individual investigators have had on
hand in their laboratories. These results must
be regarded as very preliminary findings.
Further work is now in progress and it is
hoped in a later report to have more definite
information in regard to eosine. For the
present no definite recommendations are made.
It is suggested that where unsatisfactory re-
sults are obtained in counterstaining against
hematoxylin, Orange G may be substituted for
eosine to great advantage.

ORANGE G

Samples of Orange G have been tested from

Coleman and Bell, the du Pont, the Geigy

160

Chemical Company, the Grasselli Chemical
Company, and from the National Aniline Com-
pany. All of these have been found to work
satisfactorily as a counterstain with the hema-
toxylin. They all seem to be more concen-
trated, however, than the Griibler product and
have a tendency to overstain, especially if used
in alcoholic solution. In aqueous solution,
although they give a slightly browner color
than Griibler’s Orange G, they have proved
very satisfactory. Any tendency to overstain
can be counteracted by using weaker solutions.
The results are not yet complete but are very
encouraging so far as they go.
PYRONIN

Some difficulty has been experienced in ob-
taining a good American source of pyronin,
which is now considerably used in the Pappen-
heim stain and as a counterstain in the Gram
technic. Only two samples have so far been
tested under the direction of the committee,
one from Providence Chemical Company and
the other from the National Aniline Company.
The former proves satisfactory, the latter less
so. Other concerns list this stain, but their
products have not yet been tested. More work
on this stain is now in progress.

S. I. KoRNHAUSER
F. W. Matuory
F. G. Novy
L. W. SHarp
H. J. Conn
Chairman
Committee on Standardization of Stains,

National Research Council
GeENEvA, N. Y.

GEORGE BRUCE HALSTED

George Bruce Hatstep, son of Oliver
Spencer and Adela (Meeker) Halsted, was
born at Newark, N. J., November 25, 1853.
He received the degrees of A.B. (1875) and
A.M. at Princeton, and Ph.D. (1879) at Johns
Hopkins.

For a few years he was instructor in post-
graduate mathematics at Princeton, then
(1884-1903) professor of mathematics in the
University of Texas. Here he rendered with
marked success his most important services as

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

a teacher of mathematics. After leaving this
institution he was professor of mathematics
at St. John’s College, Md. (1903), and at
Kenyon College, Ohio (1903-6), and finally at
Colorado State Teachers’ College (1906-12),
when he retired from teaching and devoted
himself to practical work in electrical engi-
neering. Six or seven years later his health
began to fail and in 1921 it broke down com-
pletely, so that he could not do any work. He
spent his last few months in hospitals and
sanitariums, and finally passed away, March
16, 1922, at the Roosevelt Hospital, New York.

After retiring from teaching, Dr. Halsted
continued his labors in the field of mathe-
maties so far as his occupation permitted, nor
did he abandon them, even after his failing
health had become serious, until further work
was physically impossible.

At Johns Hopkins he studied under Sylves-
ter, for whom he had the greatest admiration
and from whom he seems to have imbibed the
view that, whatever else mathematics may be,
it is poetry. To this fact may possibly be due
his inclination to employ poetic diction in
discussing mathematical subjects.

Dr. Halsted was preeminently a geometri-
cian, though he wrote some articles on higher
mathematics. He was an ardent devotee of
non-Kuclidean geometry. Some of his utter-
ances justify the opinion that he believed, not
only that space is a genus comprising more
than one species, but that our space is actu-
ally non-Euclidean and (with Riemann) that,
though boundless, space may be finite. He
wrote several works on geometry (including
mensuration) one of which was translated and
republished in France. He wrote many articles
for periodicals, most of them on non-HEuclidean
geometry. He also contributed articles to the
Century Dictionary and the Encyclopedia
Britannica. He translated a good many works,
written in different modern languages and two
written in Latin—Bolyai (the well-known Ap-
pendix) and Saccheri (Huclides Vindicatus).
He seemed to attach more importance to his
having translated these two works and
Lobatschewsky’s non-Euclidean geometry than
to anything else he ever did. When he was
compelled to cease from work of any kind he

Aveust 11, 1922]

was preparing a translation of Saccheri’s
Logica Demonstrativa from a copy which he
believed to be the only one extant.

He married Margaret Swearingen, who, with
three sons, survives him.

ArtHur M. HumpuHreys
UNIVERSITY OF VIRGINIA

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
THE FOULERTON PROFESSORSHIP AND
STUDENTSHIPS OF THE ROYAL
SOCIETY!

Tue Council of the Royal Society gives no-
tice that it has created the Foulerton research
professorship, and that the appointment of a
professor will be made on the advice of a com-
mittee of fellows called “The Foulerton Re-
search Fund Managing Committee.” The
stipend will be £1,400 a year, and the duty of
the holder of the professorship will be to con-
duct, in a place approved by the committee,
such original researches in medicine or the
contributory sciences, on lines approved by
the committee, as shall be calculated to pro-
mote the discovery of the causes of disease and
the relief of human suffering. The appoint-
ment will be in the first place for five years,
but may be renewed for further periods of not
more than five years at a time. The normal
retiring age will be 60, but a professor may be
continued in exceptional cases for a further
specified period. Arrangements are being
made for superannuation under the federated
superannuation system for universities, and
the professor will be required to devote the
whole of his time to research. The holder of a
paid academic or other scientific appointment
may, however, be nominated, provided the
committee is satisfied that the duties of such
other appointment oceupy only a subsidiary
portion of the applicant’s time and that its
retention would not interfere with the dis-
charge of the duties of the professorship as
essentially a whole-time research appointment.
In such case the committee would recommend a
reduction of the stipend, of such amount, how-

ever, as shall not reduce the total annual

1From the British Medical Journal.

SCIENCE

161

income of the professor from his paid appoint-
ment and from the fund below £1,400. The
appointment will only be made if candidates
of sufficient distinction present themselves.
The Royal Society also gives notice that it is
prepared to appoint one or more Foulerton
research students. The duties of a Foulerton
research student will be to conduct researches
in medicine or the contributory sciences under
the supervision and control of the committee,
to whom the student will be required to report
from time to time on the progress of his work.
The studentship will be for three years, but
may be renewed from year to year until it has
been held for a maximum period of six years
from the first award. In recommending a
person for appointment as student, the com-
mittee will have in view the expressed wish of
the donor that awards should be made espe-
cially to young workers. The stipend is £700
a year, and a studentship will normally be re-
garded as a whole-time appointment, but in
exceptional cases the holder may be allowed
to retain a paid teaching post; in that case
the committee may recommend the payment of
such stipend as it may think fit. A candidate
may be called upon to show that he or she is
and that his or her father and paternal grand-
father are, or were at the date of the respective
deaths, of British nationality. Applications
for the professorship or studentship, for both
of which members of either sex will be eligible,
must reach the Royal Society not later than
October 31 next.

APPOINTMENTS AND PROMOTIONS AT THE
JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY

IN THE FACULTY OF PHILOSOPHY

Joseph T. Singewald, Jr., Ph.D., associate pro-
fessor, to be professor of economic geology.

IN THE FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

Frederick W. Lee, Ph.D., associate, to be asso-
ciate professor of electrical engineering.

J. Trueman Thompson, B.S. in Eng., associate, to
be associate professor of civil engineering.

IN THE FACULTY OF HYGIENE AND PUBLIC HEALTH

William W. Ford, M.D., associate professor, to
be professor of bacteriology.

Carroll G. Bull, M.D., associate professor, to be
professor of immunology.

162

Robert W. Hegner, Ph.D., associate professor, to
be professor of protozoology.

Linda B. Lange, M.D., instruetor, to be associate
in bacteriology.

IN THE FACULTY OF MEDICINE

Warfield T. Longcope, M.D., professor of medi-
cine.

Harold L. Amoss, M.D., associate professor of
medicine.

Robert S. Cunningham, M.D., associate, to be
associate professor of anatomy.

William S. McCann, M.D., associate, to be asso-
ciate professor of medicine.

Arthur L. Bloomfield, M.D., associate, to be asso-
ciate professor of medicine.

Benjamin Kramer, M.D., associate, to be asso-
ciate professor of pediatrics.

Esther L. Richards, M.D., associate, to be asso-
ciate professor of psychiatry.

Albert Keidel, M.D., associate, to be associate
professor of clinical medicine.

Wilburt M. Davison, M.D., instructor, to be asso-
ciate in pediatrics.

Leslie B. Hohman, M.D., instructor, to be asso-
ciate in psychiatry.

Phyllis G. Richter, M.D., instructor, to be asso-
ciate in psychiatry.

Emil Novak, M.D., instructor, to be associate in
clinical gynecology.

Mary N. Buell, Ph.D., associate, to be associate in
physiological chemistry.

Ernest H. Gaither, M.D., instructor, to be asso-
ciate in clinical medicine.

J. Earle Moore, M.D., instructor, to be associate
in clinical medicine.

Wilder G. Penfield, M.D., associate in neurology.

Edwin G. White, Ph.D., associate in urology.

Alfred G. Kolls, M.D., associate in physiology.

DEDICATION OF THE UNIVERSITY OF
COLORADO MOUNTAIN LABORATORY

Tus construction of a laboratory building in
the mountains near Boulder at an altitude of
10,000 feet marks a new departure by the
University of Colorado. The erection of this
building is the outgrowth of the field work in
geology that has been conducted for the past
ten years by Dean W. E. MeCourt, of Wash-
ington University, St. Louis, and of the Uni-
versity of Colorado Summer School.

The laboratory building is constructed of
logs which were hewn from the mountain side

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

in the vicinity. It contains a working labora-
tory, a kitchen and an office. Sleeping quar-
ters for students and the staff are provided in
house tents. The building is located near to
the university camp, a summer recreation camp
conducted by the associated students of the
university, some thirty miles from Boulder.
The camp and laboratory are accessible by
automobile over good mountain roads.

The dedication of the laboratory building
was conducted by the Colorado chapter of the
Society of the Sigma Xi on July 22. At these
exercises addresses were delivered by Dean
W. E. McCourt, Dean O. C. Lester, of the Uni-
versity of Colorado, and Professor F. K.
Richtmyer, of Cornell University. Dean
McCourt explained the character of work that
is being conducted in geology in the moun-
tains. The immediate vicinity of the labora-
tory has a wealth of varied geological forma-
tions which supply an abundant material for
class study and research. Dean Lester pledged
the support and cooperation of the Graduate
School of the university in the project and
expressed the hope that this unpretentious be-
ginning may flourish and grow into a formid-
able institution.

The main address of the occasion was deliv-
ered by Professor F. K. Richtmyer, of Cornell
University, who, in conjunction with Dr. F. E.
Lutz, of the American Museum of Natural
History, is spending the summer in the moun-
tains near Boulder investigating the relation
of color of flowers to insect visits. Professor
Richtmyer spoke on “Sigma Xi and Research.”
He reviewed the history of Sigma Xi and ex-
plained the character of the work that the
society is conducting at the present in the
stimulation of original investigation. After the
formal program Professor Richtmyer and Dr.
Lutz explained the character of the problem
they are investigating and exhibited the re-
sults they have obtained so far.

Besides the work in geology, the university
plans to conduct field courses in biology from
this mountain laboratory. The fauna and
flora in the vicinity of the camp are abundant
and varied. It is hoped to enlarge this plant
in a few years and to provide facilities for
geological and biological investigators of the

Avaust 11, 1922]

country who may wish to spend a summer in
the mountains. The usual cool weather and
the abundant recreational facilities make the
mountains an ideal place for summer work.

I. E. W.

PROGRAM ON CONSERVATION OF THE
SECTION OF SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC
SCIENCES OF THE AMERICAN
ASSOCIATION

Section K. will hold several sessions at the
Boston meeting devoted to the various aspects
of our natural resources and their conserva-
tion. Invitation papers by many leading spe-
cialists have already been promised. This pro-
gram will constitute a symposium, or a series
of symposia, that promises to be nationally of
very great importance. It will interest all
scientists and all workers in education, as well
as all who are looking forward toward the
betterment of national and international wel-
fare and living conditions generally. The sec-
tion is particularly fortunate in having, as its
vice-president and chairman for the current
year, Colonel Henry 8S. Graves, dean of the
School of Forestry of Yale University. The
tentative program for these sessions, as far as
it has been arranged, is given below, with the
names of those who have been invited to pre-
sent papers. The majority of those invited to
speak have already accepted.

Introductory address, by the vice-president and
chairman, Colonel Henry 8. Graves, dean of
School of Forestry, Yale University.

I
THE CONSERVATION OF HUMAN AND MATERIAL
RESOURCES

1. The conservation of human energy, by Dr.
Tuomas 8. Baker, secretary, Carnegie Institute
of Technology, Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania.

2. Conservation of labor power, by Dr. L. C. Mar-
SHALL, School of Administration, University of
Chicago.

3. Conservation of health, by Dr. EuagEne R.
KELLEY, state health commissioner of Massa-
chusetts.

4. Conservation of motherhood, by Dr. H. B.
Hemenway, State Health Department, Spring-
field, Illinois.

SCLENCE

163

II
CONSERVATION OF FUEL AND POWER

5. Our national coal problem, by Dr. D. L. Wine,
Washington, D. C.

6. Economic aspects of the oil problem.
yet assigned).

7. Conservation of power, by Mr. Winuiam 8S.
Murray, Grand Central Terminal, New York.

8. Problems of flood control, by GENERAL HARRY
TAYLOR, in charge of government flood control
work, Corps of U. 8. Army Engineers, Wash-
ington, D. C.

9. Conservation and
Joun T. Buackr,
Hartford, Conn.

(Not

industrial waste, by Dr.
state health commissioner,

IIl
CONSERVATION OF CAPITAL AND CREDIT

10. Conservation of capital, by Mr. H. T. New-
coMB, general solicitor, Delaware & Hudson
Company.

11. Conservation of wealth through insurance, by
Mr. CHAMBERLAIN, superintendent of the
Group Insurance Department, Travellers Insur-
ance Company, Hartford, Conn.

12. Conservation of America’s economic inde-
pendence, by Dr. FREDERICK L. HorrMan, dean
of Advanced Department, Babson Institute,
Wellesley Hills, Mass.

IV
CONSERVATION AND RURAL DEVELOPMENT

13. The national problem of land reclamation, by
Mr. F. H. NeweLt, Washington, D. C.

14. Problems of rural economics, by PROFESSOR
HE. G. Nourse, chief of agricultural economies,
Iowa State College.

15. Conservation of the qualities of the rural
population, by Dr. Kenyon L. BUTTERFIELD,
president Massachusetts Agricultural College.

16. Home economics, by Mr. C. F. LANGwortHy,
States Relation Service, Washington, D. C.

a
CONSERVATION OF FOREST RESOURCES

17. The forests of the world, by Mr. RAPHAEL
_Zon, forest economist, U. S. Forest Service,
Washington, D. C.

18. Economic aspects of our timber supply, by
CoLtoneL W. B. GReevey, chief forester, U. 8.
Department of Agriculture.

19. Forest research and the forestry movement,
by Proressor R. T. FisHEr, head of Division
of Forestry, Harvard University, Cambridge,
Mass.

164

20. State policy in forestry, by Mr. W. A. L.
BaZeELEy, state conservation commissioner of
Massachusetts, Boston, Mass.

21. Forestry and rural development, by CoLONEL
Henry S. Graves, dean of the School of For-
estry, Yale University. ‘

VI
CONSERVATION OF NATIONAL PARKS AND SCENIC
RESOURCES

22. Our scenic resources and their practical uses,
by Dr. G. F. Kunz, president, American Scenic
and Historie Preservation Society, New York
City.

23. Our national park policy in its economic
aspects, by Mr. Ropert STERLING YARD, secre-
tary of the National Parks Association, Wash-
ington, D. C. :

24. Conservation of waters of medicinal and heal-
ing value. (Not yet assigned).

VII

CONSERVATION OF GAME RESOURCES AND WILD LIFE

25. Hceonomic aspects of game conservation, by
Mr. F. C. Watcort, fish and game commis-
sioner, Hartford, Conn.

26. Conservation of our whale fisheries, by Dr.
JOHN FRANKLIN CROWELL, economist, New
York City.

27. The migratory fish problem, by Dr. R. E.
Coxer, U. S. Bureau of Fisheries.

Freperick L. Horrman,

Secretary of Section K
WELLESLEY Hinus, Mass.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

ALEXANDER GRAHAM Buu died on August 2
at his summer home in Nova Scotia. Dr. Bell
was born in Edinburgh on March 3, 1847.

Dr. W. J. Houuann, since 1898 director of
the Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, has become
director emeritus. He is succeeded in the
directorship of the museum by Mr. Douglas
Stewart.

PRESIDENT JOHN Bracken, of the Manitoba
Agricultural College, Winnipeg, formerly pro-
fessor of field husbandry at the University of
Saskatchewan, is to be the next premier of
Manitoba.

More than 500 of the pupils and friends of
Professor L. Bolk, of the chair of anatomy at

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1441

the University of Amsterdam, recently pre-
sented him with his portrait painted in oils.

Dr. F. T. AscHMANN, chemist to the Penn-
sylvania Bureau of Foods at Pittsburgh, has
been elected chairman of the board of chem-
ists of the bureau, to succeed the late Pro-
fessor William Frear.

Dr. W. H. Brirrain, provincial entomologist
for Nova Scotia, has been appointed a member
of the council of the American Association for
the Advancement of Science, to represent the
Canadian Society of Technical Agriculturists.

Dr. F. P. Verron, of the Bureau of Chem-
istry has been appointed by the secretary of
agriculture as a member of the special com- —
mittee on government paper specifications.
This committee will prepare and submit to the
congressional joint committee on printing
specifications for paper for public printing
and binding.

Dr. J. A. Ampier has been appointed chem-
ist in charge of the Color Laboratory of the
Bureau of Chemistry. Dr. Ambler has been
acting chief since the resignation of Dr. H. D.
Gibbs.

Dr. W. H. Rangin, Ph.D., plant pathologist
for the Dominion of Canada, has been ap-
pointed an associate in research (plant pathol-
ogy) at the New York State Station, effective
July 1, and will take up a special study of
diseases and insects affecting raspberries, par-
ticularly in the Hudson River Valley. This
work has been made possible by a special
grant by the legislature. D. W. Carpenter,
Ph.D., assistant professor of physical chem-
istry at the University of lowa, has been ap-
pointed associate in research (chemistry), be-
ginning on July 1. W. L. Kulp, assistant in
research (biochemistry), has resigned, effective
on the same date, to accept a teaching fellow-
ship in bacteriology and biochemistry at Yale
University, the vacancy being filled by the
transfer of Millard G. Moore, assistant chemist.

KH. E. Crayton, Ph.D., extension plant
pathologist at the Ohio State University, has
been appointed pathologist at the newly estab-
lished field station on Long Island. H. C.
Huckett, a graduate student at Cornell Univer-

Aveust 11, 1922]

sity, has been appointed associate entomologist,
beginning on July 1.

Mr. R. E. Zimmerman, formerly director of
the research laboratory of the American Sheet
and Tin Plate Company, has been made
assistant to the vice-president. Mr. J. W.
Whetzel, formerly research associate, has been
appointed manager of the research laboratory,
and Mr. E. 8. Taylerson, formerly physicist, is
now assistant director.

Mr. R. L. Howarp, associate professor of
chemistry in the Medical College of Virginia,
has been awarded the research fellowship in
pharmacology at Western Reserve University.

Tue University of Brussels has conferred
the “Docteur spécial en sciences physiologiques”
on I. Newton Kugelmass, M.A. (Columbia),
Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins), for his researches,
“Physico-chemical studies of the mechanism of
blood clotting.”

Dr. Henry Hansen, chief of the Department
of Public Health of Peru, who since 1919 has
been combating yellow fever there, arrived in
New York on August 5 for a visit. Dr. Han-
sen went to Peru from the Rockefeller Insti-
tute at the request of the Peruvian government.

Dr. Aaron ARKIN, professor of pathology
and bacteriology at the West Virginia School
of Medicine, Morgantown, has been granted
a year’s leave of absence for study and re-
search abroad. He will spend the year in
Vienna, Berlin, Paris and London.

Dr. W. P. Witson, director of the Commer-
cial Museum of Philadelphia, has been appoint-
ed by Governor Sproul of Pennsylvania com-
missioner, to represent the state at the centen-
nial of Brazil opening on September 7. He
will represent also the city of Philadelphia.
Dr. Wilson has in addition been appointed
delegate from the Academy of Natural Sci-
ences, of Philadelphia and from the Smith-
sonian in Washington, by Secretary Hughes,
to the Congress of Americanists meeting about
the twentieth of August in Rio de Janieiro.

Proressor THEODORE W. Ricwarps, of Har-
vard University, spoke before the Société
Chimique de France on July 12 on “La sig-
nification actuelle des poids atomique.”

SCIENCE

165

Dr. T. Caspar GincHrist, of Baltimore, de-
livered the annual oration, on the progress of
dermatology, before the London Dermatolog-
ical Society.

Dr. Water B. CANNON gave an address on
“What has been accomplished by animal exper-
imentation” during the recent meetings of the
Pacifie Northwest Medical Association.

A LEGISLATIVE bill that recently passed the
French Chamber of Deputies, as we learn from
the Journal of the American Medical Associa-
tion, provides for the granting of an appro-
priation of 3,620,000 franes to enable the state
to participate in the commemoration at Stras-
bourg of the centenary of Pasteur. The com-
mittee delegated to inquire into the project has
reported that the centenary should be cele-
brated not in Strasbourg alone but also in Paris
and in various cities of Franche-Comté in
which Pasteur lived—particularly Dole, Lons-
le-Saunier, Arbois and Besancon. The com-
mittees on public instruction and public health,
after hearing M. Strauss, minister of public
health, who spoke in the name of the govern-
ment, reached the same conclusion and decided
to request the government to modify the scope
of the centenary by eliminating the two words
“at Strasbourg.” Acting on the suggestion of
M. Deville, in turn, the municipal council of
Paris has unanimously voted an appropriation
of 50,000 franes for the celebration at Paris of
the centenary of Pasteur.

AN appeal has been made for subscriptions
to a proposed memorial to Sir German Sims
Woodhead, late professor of pathology in the
University of Cambridge. It is proposed that
the memorial shall take the form of a portrait
relief in bronze, to be placed in the library of
the Medical School at Cambridge, and that it
shall correspond in design to those of Professor
Woodhead’s predecessors in the chair of pathol-
ogy, the late Professors Roy and Kanthack.

Proressor J. J. Mackrnzin, head of the
pathological departments of the University of
Toronto, died on August 1 at the age of fifty-
seven years as a result of infection contracted
during his experiment with the pus-forming
bacteria.

166

Dr. AmprosE Ropinson WILLIS, who for
many years taught mathematical physics at the
Royal College of Science, died on June 23, at
the age of seventy-two years.

Dr. Harvey Cusine, of Harvard Univer-
sity, has been awarded the Charles Mickle
Fellowship of the faculty of medicine of To-
ronto University. He has accepted the fellow-
ship, which is for $1,000, but has stipulated
that the money shall be used to send one grad-
uate of the University of Toronto to Harvard
to work with him. The Charles Mickle Fellow-
ship, bequeathed by the late Dr. W. J. Mickle,
is the annual income from an endowment of
$25,000 and is awarded annually to the mem-
ber of the medical profession anywhere who is
considered to have done the most during the
preceding ten years to advance sound knowl-
edge of a practical kind in medicine. The first
award was made last year to Professor I.
Pawlow, of the University of Petrograd.

Proressor A. SOMMERFELD, professor of
mathematical physics at the University of
Munich, will be in residence at the University
of Wisconsin for the first semester of the com-
ing academic year 1922-23, holding the Karl
Schurz memorial professorship in the univer-
sity for that period. Professor Sommerfeld is
expected to give a three-hour course on
“Atomic Structure’ and a second three-hour
course either on the “Analysis of Wave Propa-
gation,” or a three-hour course in “The Gen-
eral Theory of Relativity.” The Karl Schurz
memorial professorship in the University of
Wisconsin was founded in 1910 as an exchange
professorship with the German universities.
The appointment of Professor Sommerfeld
marks the resumption of the professorship
after the interruption caused by the war. Be-
fore the days of the Civil War, Karl Schurz
was a resident of Watertown, Wisconsin, and
served on the board of regents of the State
University. The memorial professorship was
founded in recognition of his distinguished
services to the state and nation.

Tue following appointments have been made
in the Food Research Institute of Stanford
University: Special investigators—Wilfred
Eldred, Ph.D. (Harvard), recently professor

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1441

of economics at the University of Virginia,
who for nearly a year has been carrying on
investigations in the baking industry for the
institute, and John L. Simpson, A.B. (Cali-
fornia), who in 1919 was liaison officer of the
food section of the Supreme Economic Coun-
cil and chief of the A. R. A. Commission to
Serbia, and in 1920 special correspondent to
the New York Evening Post for eastern
Europe. Research assistants—Susan §. Burr,
A. B. (Vassar), A.M. (Stanford); Franklin
D. Schurz, A.B., M.B.A. (Harvard); A. G.
Silverman, A. B. (Harvard). Fellows—Hdith
Hawley, A.M. (Columbia), a graduate student
at Columbia for the past two years; James N.
Holsen, A.B. (Indiana), A.M. (Princeton) ;
Olaf S. Rask, A.B., B.S. (Minnesota), a grad-
uate student at the University of Minnesota
and formerly a research chemist in the Bureau
of Chemistry, U. S. Department of Agricul-
ture; William B. Stewart, A.B. (Reed), a
graduate student at the University of Illinois:
and Conrad P. Wright, A.B. (Oxford), a
graduate student at the University of Cali-
fornia.

We learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association that Dr. R. P. Strong, of
the Harvard Medical School, who has just
returned from his fourth trip to Panama, has
announced that it has been decided to estab-
lish first divisions of bacteriology, pathology,
protozoology, helminthology, biochemistry, en-
tomology, plant pathology and animal diseases
in the new Gorgas Memorial Institute of Trop-
ical and Preventive Medicine, at Panama.
These departments will be organized with
laboratories for research work, particularly in
connection with the study of the mode of
spread of the most important infectious dis-
eases of man and animals. There will be close
cooperation between the institute and the
Ancon Hospital and Leprosarium. In addi-
tion to the foregoing subjects, tropical botany
and the biologic effect of sunlight will also
receive attention. Provision will be made for
the instruction of a limited number of students,
the courses of instruction to be designed espe-
cially for those who have had laboratory train-
ing before. A limited number of research
workers will also be received. Dr. Strong

Aveust 11, 1922]

states that, since the president of a small
South American republic, already overtaxed,
had donated a memorial to an American, it
was the duty of all American citizens, not only
American physicians, to provide a suitable en-
dowment fund with which to carry on the work
of the institute.

Tue conference of the British Museums
Association has noted: “That in the opinion of
the Museums Association the time has arrived
when it is desirable in the interests of the
country to appoint a royal commission to
investigate and report upon the work of muse-
ums in relation to industries and general cul-
ture.” af

AT its recent meeting, the Hugenics Research
Association voted that it was its sense that
Germany should be granted membership on
the International Eugenics Commission.

Tue Canadian Horticultural Council, which
was recently organized with headquarters at
Ottawa, has taken steps towards the organiza-
tion of a system for the registration of new
varieties of plants. Through the agency of
Mr. W. B. Lobjoit, controller of horticulture
for Great Britain, the secretary of the Cana-
dian Horticultural Council will be kept in-
formed of ‘the efforts being made not only in
England but on the continent, to provide a
means for the registration of horticultural
plants, shrubs and trees. The secretary of the
council has also got into touch with the horti-
cultural authorities in the United States who
are interested in this matter. It is expected
that a conference on the subject will be ar-
ranged for during the present year.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

By the will of Miss Harriet 8. Hazeltine,
Middlebury College receives $25,000.

Accorping to the Bulletin of the American
Mathematical Society, the title of the chair of
“differential and integral calculus” in the Uni-
versity of Paris has been changed to “the
theory of groups and the calculus of variation.”

Dr. Marcus P. Neat, assistant professor of
pathology and baeteriology at the State Uni-
versity of Iowa College of Medicine, Iowa City,

SCIENCE

167

has accepted a position as professor of pathol-
ogy and bacteriology at the University of Mis-
souri School of Medicine, Columbia.

Dr. Leroy S. Paumemr, associate professor of
agricultural biochemistry in the University of
Minnesota, has been promoted to a full pro-
fessorship.

8. W. Guiser, Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins), has
been appointed assistant professor of zoology
in Washington University, St. Louis.

F. B. Isety, dean and professor of biology at
Culver-Stockton College, Canton, Missouri,
has accepted a similar position with Texas
Woman’s College at Fort Worth, Texas. L. S.
Hopkins, of Kent, Ohio, becomes dean and
professor of biology in Culver-Stockton Col-
lege.

Mr. Exiorr Frost has resigned his position
as director of the Industrial Management
Council of the Rochester Chamber of Com-
merce to accept the headship of the department
of psychology at the University of Rochester,
the directorship of its Department of Exten-
sion, and of its Summer School.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

THE SPECTRUM OF HELIUM IN

EXTREME ULTRA-VIOLET

Mr. Fricke and I showed (Phil. Mag., 41,
May, 1921) that in the extreme ultra-violet
the are spectrum of helium probably contained
but one line with a wave-length near 585 AU.

I have recently attacked the subject again,
using a vacuum spectroscope so arranged that
a good vacuum could be maintained in the body
of the apparatus while the discharge tube con-
tained helium at a pressure of about a milli-
meter. No window was employed, the success
of the device depending on the use of a very
short and narrow slit and upon the suitable
application of a powerful pump.

With a continuous current the line at 584.4
is of very great strength, and is accompanied
by three new lines at 537.1, 522.3 and 515.7
whose intensities decrease with their wave-
length and in a manner strongly suggesting a
series relation. Luckily the first three mem-
bers appear in the second order spectrum, a

THE

168

comparison with the hydrogen line 1215.68 and
with the three following lines of the same
series is therefore possible, with the result that
the wave-lengths are probably correct to one
or two tenths of a unit.

The spacing of these four helium lines on
the frequency scale is of great interest and
importance, for it is found to be identical with
the spacing of the first four lines in the singlet
principal series. It may be stated therefore
with considerable certainty that the line 584
forms the first member of a principal series,
which, according to the notation of Professor
Fowler, is to be represented by oS-mP.

Besides this series there is a single line at
600.5 = .3 of a feeble and diffuse character; its
origin is not entirely above suspicion. In the
extreme ultra-violet the are spectrum of helium
appears to contain no lines in addition to those
just mentioned.

The relation between the accepted values of
the resonance and ionization potentials in
helium and the wave-lengths of these new lines
is rather puzzling. The ionization potential
should certainly correspond to the limit of the
oS-mP series; now this limit can be accurately
calculated, it corresponds to 24.5 volts but the
experimental value is 25.3 volts. This is the
chief difficulty, but it is not the only one, for
the agreement between the wave-lengths of the
individual spectrum lines and the values of the
resonance potentials as determined by Franck
and Knipping is not satisfactory. A correc-
tion of about —0.8 volts if applied to all the
potential measurements will bring the two sets
of data into fair agreement but at the expense
of the first resonance potential which is left
without any corresponding line in the spec-
trum.

The matter should be of some interest to
those who are struggling with the model of
the helium atom.

THEODORE Lyman

JEFFERSON LABORATORY,

HARVARD UNIVERSITY,
Aveust 3, 1922

THE CALIFORNIA POPPY

Iv is perhaps strange that students of gene-
tics have not given more attention to the plant

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

which is the glory of California fields, the
Copa d’Oro or California poppy, Eschscholtzia
californica chamiso. It is a plant easily
raised from the seed, remarkably affected by
external conditions as well as subject to marked
variations, fluctuations or mutations, which
could be readily confirmed or intensified by ©
selective breeding.

So great is the variability of this plant that
Greene has separated the ordinary perennial
form into thirty-two different “species,” while
of the eight or nine other forms, annuals,
closely related to the golden poppy, but tan-
gibly distinct from it and from each other he
defines seventy-three species with some outlying
varieties. To this incredible list, Fedde, a Ger-
man botanist, adds several more. There is in
fact no limit if we regard every peculiar plant
as the type of a new species, without evidence
as to the origin and permanence of its varia-
tion. Such a condition, as observed by Darwin
among cirripeds, is attractive to us “as specu-
latists, however odious to us as systematists.”

The flowers of Eschscholtzia californica are
normally of a deep, rich orange, the four petals
with entire edges an inch and a half long. Near
the seashore the flowers are smaller, of a more
or less clear lemon yellow, orange at base or
not. This is apparently “ontogenetic” varia-
tion, not entitled to a systematic name, because
likely to disappear with a changed environ-
ment, as the plant is not only inherently vari-
able but responds directly to all changes of soil
and season.

Towards the end of a rainless summer, the
upright flower stalks wither and flowers suc-
cessively smaller spring from near the root-
stock. These are of a clear lemon yellow, some-
times more or less orange at base, the orange
fading as the flower grows smaller.

Just now looking from my window as I
write over.a field golden with blossoms, I see
numerous variations, some of them perhaps to
be called mutations, as they are quite striking
and, occurring in patches must be more or less
permanent. In several areas the flowers are
of a light creamy yellow, the petals holding
their place when plucked longer than in the
orange form. Another group has large flowers

Aveust 11, 1922]

of a citron color. On some plants the petals
are more or less laciniate on the margin. Fre-
quently they are five in number, sometimes six,
often eight. The number of pistils is not fixed,
and the bifid cotyledon and broad rim of the
torus, both traits normally characterizing the
true califormca (the smooth perennial), are
often as elusive as the other characters.

The color especially lends itself to modifica-
tion by selection. Burbank once found a plant
with a crimson streak like a red thread at the
base of each petal. Saving the seed, he ob-
tained through selection alone a poppy with
the flowers all crimson. Seedlings from Bur-
bank sometimes have pinkish flowers, almost
white.

Eschscholtzia has certain advantages over the
evening primrose for experimental purposes.
It is a natural species occurring by the million
in its habitat. Though very difficult to trans-
plant, it grows readily from the seed. It is
therefore not a garden variant, nor a suspected
hybrid. C£nothera lamarckiana, thus far the
subject of most mutation experiments, though
cultivated in HKurope, is American in origin.
No one, I believe, has yet ever found it growing
wild anywhere.

In any event, accurate studies of the varia-
tion in Eschscholtzia should be interesting and
repaying.

Davin Starr JORDAN.

THE TEMPERATURES OF METEORITES

In the last number of Scirncz! Dr. George
P. Merrill discusses some matters connected
with meteorites. With regard to their tem-
perature he says, “it seems certain that they
have been wandering for an indefinite period
in space and at a temperature of ‘absolute
zero.’ At the time of entering our atmosphere
it is fair to assume that they are cold through-
out to.a degree of which we can have no con-
ception.’”” It has seemed to me worth while to
examine roughly what temperature a meteorite
might reasonably be expected to have just be-
fore it enters the atmosphere of the earth. The
meteorite has certainly been for some time ex-

1 Science, 55, p. 675, 1922.

SCIENCE

169

posed to radiation from the sun, and it may
well be that its temperature is much higher
than the absolute zero.

To get some idea as to the temperature sup-
pose that the meteorite is a sphere with a black
surface, and that the material of which it is
composed is a perfect conductor of heat. The
temperature of this sphere is determined by
the condition that the rate at which it loses
heat by radiation equals the rate at which it
receives heat from the sun. The condition is
expressed by the equation

ar o0s — mrbe, (1)

where r stands for the radius of the meteorite,
« for the constant in the Stefan-Boltzmann
radiation formula, ® for the absolute tempera-
ture of the meteorite, b for the solar constant,
and e and d for the respective distances of the
earth and the meteorite from the sun. If we
take ¢ as 1.279-10-1? ecal./em2.see.deg.t and b
as 1.93 cal./em?.min. (1) leads to

= 2g2/é (2)

Thus if black spheres which conduct heat per-
fectly were placed at the same distances from
the sun as the several planets, (2) shows that
the temperatures of these spheres would be the
following :

At the distance of

IMIR HCY) Mat matle DD ECAR

Jupiter

Saturn

Urannsy ee A

INI YORE) Lae se a a
We see that in the neighborhood of the earth
such a sphere would have a temperature above
that of melting ice!

But a meteorite is not a perfect conductor
of heat. Suppose we apply the above method
of reasoning to a sphere which is a perfect
non-conduetor of heat, covered, except along a
narrow equatorial line, by a thin layer of a
substance which is a perfect conductor of heat
and is black. The conducting layer forms two
separate caps, and if one cap is turned toward
the sun and the other away from the sun we

QAARARAAARQA

170

find, when the sphere is as far from the sun as
the earth is, that the cap which faces the sun
will have a temperature of about 62° C. The
other cap will be at the absolute zero of tem-
perature, so that the average temperature of
the sphere will be about —105° C. We may,
therefore, conclude that if a meteorite were
spherical and black its temperature when near
the earth would lie between —105° C. and
+9° C.

If the meteorite is not a perfect conductor
of heat the temperature of the inside will not
usually be the same as that of the outside. The
amount by which the temperature of the inside
differs from that of the outside will depend in
part on the thermal conductivity of the mete-
orite and in part on the rapidity of motion
toward the sun or away from it, as well as on
the distance from the sun. Suppose that the
meteorite is a sphere and has a diffusivity of
0.01 em.2/see. This is about the diffusivity
of limestone and is less than that of
granite. Suppose further that this sphere is
at the absolute zero of temperature and is sud-
denly placed where its surface is maintained at
9° C. Then for a sphere 10 em. in diameter I
find? that at the end of fifteen minutes the dif-
ference between the temperature at the center
and that at the surface will be less than 15°,
at the end of twenty minutes the difference will
be less than 5°, and at the end of thirty min-
utes it will be less than 0.2°. If the meteorite
travels 100 kilometers a second it would re-
quire nearly five days to go a distance equal to
that from the orbit of Venus to the orbit of
the earth. So, unless the meteorite travels
much faster than 100 kilometers a second, or is
much more than 10 em. in diameter, it seems
likely that the temperature of the inside can
not be very different from that of the outside.
This, of course, is before the meteorite enters
the atmosphere of the earth.

As another way of attempting to get some
idea as to the temperature of a meteorite sup-
pose we consider the temperature of a cylinder.
Let the cylinder be at the same distance from

2 From eq. (44) on p. 133 of Ingersoll and
Zobel, The Mathematical Theory of Heat Con-
duction.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1441

the sun that the earth is. Let the ends of the
cylinder be black, and let one of them point
directly at the sun. To simplify matters sup-
pose that there is no radiation from the sides
of the cylinder. Then the heat which reaches
the end that is turned toward the sun is partly
radiated from that end and partly conducted
to the other end and there radiated. From this
condition we obtain the equations

o(04 + 63) = b (3),
and

6, = 6, + Tame (4)

where 0, and 0, stand for the absolute tempera-
tures of the two ends of the cylinder, and
1 and k stand for the length and thermal con-
ductivity of the cylinder. Taking k as 0.008
ceal./em.sec.deg., which is about the value for
granite, equations (3) and (4) lead to the fol-
lowing results.

Average
Length of Temperatures temperature
cylinder of ends of cylinder
1 em. 61° C. 63° C. 62° C.
10 em. 52° C. 70° C. 61° C.
100 em. AO (0h) OCs 51° C.

In the actual case there would, of course, be
considerable radiation from the sides of the
cylinder, so that the temperatures would be
lower than those given in the above table.

Although these calculations do not tell us
precisely what the temperature of a meteorite
may be expected to be just before it enters the
atmosphere of the earth, they do seem to be
sufficient to indicate that that temperature is
nearer to 0° C. than to the absolute zero of
temperature.

ARTHUR TABER JONES
SmirH COLLEGE

THE BUREAU OF STANDARDS

To tHE Eprtor oF Science: Considering
the enormous interest taken even by the non-
discriminating newspaper public in the
achievements of the Bureau of Standards,
which scientific men are justly proud of as
one of the greatest physical laboratories of the
world, using physics in its proper sense of
including chemistry and engineering, or ap-

Aveust 11, 1922]

plied physics, your readers may be interested
in the following letter, which I have just un-
earthed, in one of those single-handed combats
in the perennial struggle against dirt, in which
an armistice has just been declared. (Pardon
the lack of unity in the preceding sentence. It
at least does not contain the word “due,” nor
the adverbial phrase “back of,” meaning be-
hind).

I had written an article, the first in English,
describing the Physikalisch-technische Reichs-
anstalt in Charlottenburg, which I had seen
in its initial stages, and urging to the best of
my ability the establishment of such an insti-
tution in this country. This article I had sent
to the Popular Science Monthly, from whence
it was returned with a note from the editor,
Dr. Youmans, saying he did not believe that
such things were the function of the govern-
ment. What to do with it I did not know, but
finally Dr. G. Stanley Hall took pity on the
little wanderer, and published it in his Peda-
gogical Seminary, and the U. S. post-office did
the rest. I sent copies to Sir Oliver Lodge,
who read an article on the same matter at the
meeting of the British Association, but I never
heard whether he got them. It was probably
as a result of his paper that the National
Physical Laboratory was founded. The United
States, as usual, brought up the rear. It was
not until eight years after my article that the
first step was taken leading to the establish-
ment of the Bureau of Standards, which now,
in size and expenditure at least, leads all the
rest. This is due to the extraordinary tact and
skill in management of its able director, Dr.
Stratton, whose name is now a household word.
May the bureau long continue to have success
under his wise direction. The letter follows:

Cambridge, 1892, Jan. 13.
My dear Sir:

Your article on a National Physical Laboratory
came duly, and I thank you for sending it to me.
By this mail it goes back to you.

I have read it with care and much pleasure,
and trust that you may soon publish it, for it
ean not fail to be useful. What may be the best
way to bring it before the public I do not know;
but, from my limited means of judgment, it
seems to me that some one of the great New
York magazines might afford a good opportunity

SCIENCE

171

—say the Century, or Scribner’s. I should select
a periodical of large circulation—and not a
‘‘popular scientific’? one, where the public
reached is one which would in general require no
education on the subject, or else not to be of
the influential class of people.

And when it is printed, I hope you will take
steps to insure that members of Congress and
professors of physics in our leading universities
shall have opportunity to read it. Possibly some
of the engineering journals might have the sort
of circulation which is desirable. :

Wishing you all success, and with cordial sym-
pathy with such a movement, I am,

Very sincerely yours,

B. A. GouLD
Dr. Arthur G. Webster,
Worcester.
A. G. WEBSTER
WORCESTER,

JULY 8, 1922

SPECIAL ARTICLES
BASAL GLAUCONITE AND PHOSPHATE
BEDS

As a result of lithologie studies of carbon-
iferous formations in Texas I showed last year?
that glauconite beds characterized by certain
peculiarities oceur at breaks in a sedimentary
series. Although I pointed out that this ob-
servation was merely an extension of Cayeux’s
observation’ that phosphate beds occur in sim-
ilar positions, I thought at the time that the
relation of typical glauconite beds to these
breaks had not been noted. I was therefore
much interested to learn in conversation re-

1 Published with the permission of the director
of the U. S. Geological Survey.

2Goldman, Marcus I.: ‘‘Lithologic Subsurface
Correlation in the ‘Bend Series’ of North-central
Texas,’’ U. S. Geol. Survey Prof. Paper 129-A,
pp. 1-22 (especially pp. 3-4), 1921. ‘‘ Association
of Glaueonite with Unconformities,’’ Bull. Geol.
Soc. America, 32, p. 25, 1921 (abstract).

3 Cayeux, L.: Contribution a l’étude micro-
graphique des terrains sédimentaires, Mém. de la
Soc. géol. du Nord. 4 pt. 2, pp. 427-432, 1897.
Genése des gisements de phosphates de chaua
sédimentaires, Bull. Soc. géol. de France, 4¢ ser.,
5, pp. 750-753, 1905.

172

cently with Professor W. G. Fearnsides, of
Sheffield, England, that the association was
familiar to him and had been described by him
‘in print. He mentioned a number of other
occurrences and gave in addition several refer-
ences to British publications which discuss the
relation of phosphate beds to stratigraphic
breaks. As all this evidence serves to establish
the principle on a solid basis it seems worth
while to bring it to the attention of American
stratigraphers.

The deposit of basal glauconite described by
Fearnsides* and Anderson® is at the boundary
between the Cambrian and Ordovician of
Sweden and is very extensive. Another deposit
of wide extent, described by Hayes,® is at the
boundary between the black Chattanooga shale
and the overlying carboniferous in Tennessee.
Both of these are associated with phosphate.
The association of glauconite and phosphate is,
in fact, so generally referred to in the literature
relating to either of them, especially in that
relating to nodular phosphate, that it may be
regarded as established. Anderson’ not only
recognized it but interpreted the relative abun-
dance of one or the other. He formulated the
principle that in deposits of the two constitu-
ents phosphate predominates in the littoral
facies and glauconite in the offshore shallow-
water facies (essentially the continental shelf).
If this practical equivalence in mode of ocecur-
rence of glauconite and phosphate is recog-
nized, then the papers referred to in this note,
although most of them deal with phosphate de-
posits, serve to establish beyond reasonable
doubt the association of certain types of glau-
conite as well as of phosphate deposits with

+ Fearnsides, Wm. G.: ‘‘The Lower Ordovician
Rocks of Scandinavia,’’ ete., Geol. Mag., n. s.,
Dec. 5, 4, pp. 257-267, 295-304 (especially pp.
264-267), 1907.

5 Anderson, J. G.: ther Cambrische und Silu-
rische phosphoritfiihrende gesteine aus Schweden,
Bull. Geol. Inst. Univ. Upsala, 2, pp. 133-236
(especially pp. 178-200, 220-229), 1895.

6 Hayes, .C. W.: ‘‘The Tennessee Phosphates,’’
Sixteenth Ann. Rept., U. S. Geol. Survey, pt. 4,
pp. 611-612, 1895; Seventeenth Ann. Rept., U. 8.
Geol. Survey, pt. 2, p. 523, 1896.

7 Anderson, J. G.: loc. cit., p. 221.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1441

breaks in a stratigraphic succession. As early
as 1874 Tawney® stated that the fossils in a
phosphate bed represent a long time range,
indicating a dearth of sedimentation. The de-
velopment of the conception with various mod-
ifications may be followed in the references
given. In a very recent paper Vaughan® points
out the possible bearing of a glauconite bed in
solving the problem of the position and char-
acter of the Mesozoie-Cenozoic boundary in
New Zealand.

Two conclusions seem to have impressed
themselves on most students of these basal de-
posits of phosphate and glauconite: One is that
the surfaces on which they occur had not
emerged, the other that they represent a long-
time interval.

The reasons for supposing that there has
been no emergence are not always very clearly
formulated. The principal ones seem to be:
(1) The usual absence of any recognizable
erosion surfaces underlying the deposits; (2)
The absence of an underlying weathering sur-
face; (3) The absence of fragments of the
underlying bed; (4) Lack of evidence of trans-
portation of constituents of the beds; (5) The
fact that similar modern deposits form under
purely submarine conditions.

There seems to be room for many fallacies in
these assumptions, and at best the demonstra-
tion of the fact they are called upon to prove—
that during the interval between the formation
of the underlying and overlying bed there was
no emergence—does not appear very essential.
A long period during which the sea bottom
was at or near marine base-level seems to be
implied in any ease, and that, so far as I can
see, Implies also an approximation to subaerial
base-level of the adjacent land. Slight oscilla-
tions of base-level may safely be assumed and
are indicated by some of the evidence. Whether
these fluctuations have at times brought part of

8 Tawney, EH. B.: ‘Notes on the Lias in the
Neighborhood of Radstock,’’ Proc. Bristol Nat.
Soc., n. s., 1, p. 174, 1874.

9 Vaughan, T. Wayland: ‘‘Correlation of the
later Mesozoic and Cenozoic Formations of New
Zealand,’’ Proc. First Pan-Pacifie Scientific Con-
ference, Pt. 3, Bernice P. Bishop Special Pub-
lication, pp. 734-737, Honolulu, 1921.

Auecust 11, 1922]

the area, in which phosphate is found, above
water makes little difference. The essential
fact is that the phosphate nodules and most of
the materials associated with them probably
accumulated mainly in place and not as a result
of transportation.

The length of the period during which the
deposits accumulated is deduced from the fol-
lowing facts: (1) The wide range of the fossils
they contain; (2) The great thickness of the
“equivalent” section in other areas. Without
the fossils this has no bearing; (3) In modern
deposits of similar character the decomposition
of associated detrital minerals and evidence of
prolonged submarine exposure of other con-
stituents; (4) The abundance in the deposits
of bore holes made by submarine animals; (5)
The evidence of different stages in the forma-
tion of the nodules; (6) Differences in the
amount of wear on different nodules, indicating
formation at different times; (7) The fact that
the sand included in the concretions is finer
than that in the matrix, indicating a range of
conditions; (8) The abundance in the deposits
of the teeth of fish without their bones, the
bones having been dissolved.

One of the most convincing arguments
involves a consideration of the origin of the
deposits and the reason for their association
with stratigraphic breaks. This is not the
place for attempting a complete discussion of
the problem, but one explanation formulated
or implied by several of the papers cited is so
convincing in its simplicity that I wish to state
it briefly as superseding the one which, follow-
ing Cayeux, I proposed in my previous papers.
This new explanation is based on the peculiar
composition of the glauconite and phosphate
beds at stratigraphic breaks. A definition of
these peculiarities is almost an explanation of
them—they are essentially concentrations. The
materials concentrated as I have described
them and as they are described in part by
Fearnsides and others include the glauconite
and phosphate grains and nodules themselves,
shells or coarse fragments of shells of marine
animals, sulphide concretions, ete. These same
constituents are found in the overlying bed and
in some localities also in the underlying bed.
The reason they are concentrated here is ap-
parently that no detrital material accumulated
to separate them. In Teall’s picturesque

SCIENCE

173

words,!° “The deposition of sediment acts on the
zonal succession [of ammonites] and on the
distribution of phosphatic matter very much
as a prism acts on the rays of light. It sup-
plies a kind of dispersive power.” So far as
my reading goes, Hayes! is the only one who
has made the important deduction from this
interpretation that the scarcity of caleareous
shells must then be accounted for. He attrib-
uted it to solution, which accounts also for the
dominance of phosphatic skeletons, the lime
phosphate being less soluble than the car-
bonate. Otherwise the abundance of living
phosphatie organisms such as the brachiopods,
which usually characterizes these areas of phos-
phate deposition, would be hard to explain,
seeming to imply a puzzling selective action of
the environment on the fauna. Murray and
Renard? noted on the one hand the occurrence
of glauconite and phosphate deposits in areas
of slow sedimentation, and on the other hand
the presence of glauconite, though in much
smaller relative amount, in many types of more
rapidly accumulating deposits, such as_ the
Blue Muds. But apparently they did not asso-
ciate the abundance of the glauconite and phos-
phate with the mere scarcity of the sediment.

It is perhaps surprising that a fact so long
and frequently recognized as this association of
phosphate and glauconite with stratigraphic
breaks should have failed almost completely to
penetrate the text-books. I have found it
touched on only in Grabau’s “Geology of the
Non-metallic Minerals.”!* Nevertheless, though
it still requires a great deal of interpretation
and qualification, it seems to be established
well enough to receive general consideration
from stratigraphers as a eriterion of great pos-
sible value in the analysis of stratigraphic
sections.

Maxcus I. Goupman
U. 8. GroLogicaL SuRVEY

10 Teall, J. J. H.: ‘‘The Natural History of
Phosphatie Deposits,’’ Proc. Geologists’ Assoc.,
London, 16, p. 379, 1900 (bibliography of 45
titles).

11 Hayes, C. W., loc. cit., 1895, pp. 621-622.

12. Murray, John, and Renard, A. F.: ‘‘Deep-
sea Deposits,’’ Report on the Scientific Results
of the Voyage of H.M.S. Challenger, pp. 382
and 411, 1891.

18 Vol. 1, p. 306, MeGraw-Hill, New Yerk, 1920.

174

THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR
THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE!

SECTION E—GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY
AND ASSOCIATED SOCIETIES

The American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science and Canadian Geology: A retro-
spect: W. G. Mrmr, provincial geologist,
Toronto, Ontario. The working together of
Canadians and Americans in the association has
done much to promote pleasant relations between
the two countries and to advance science. When
the association was founded, over seventy years
ago, prominent Canadian geologists were among
its first members and contributed important
papers, some of which, especially that one which
introduced the terms Huronian and Laurentian
have become classic. Certain views held concern-
ing the age relations of pre-Cambrian rocks in
the earlier years of the association are con-
trasted in the paper with those which are at
present current.

Some physiographic forms of western North
Dakota: Harry N. Eaton. Illustrations of the
Bad-land topography of the Little Missouri River
Valley; the Missouri River escarpments and flood
plain, with erosional details of the Fort Union
formation; the Missouri Coteau; the Altamont
moraine; slump topography; clinker buttes, ete.

Mineralography or the microscopy of the ore
minerals: ELLIs THOMSON, University of Toronto.
The history of the study; technique and equip-
ment employed in the preparation of polished
sections; microscopic examination; microphotog-

raphy and the practical application of the
method.

A new genus and species of dinosaur from the
Belly River beds of Alberta: W. A. Parks. A
description of a remarkable new genus of dino-
saur found recently in the Cretaceous beds on
the Red Deer River. It has a peculiar projection
backward over the neck of the bone of the skull
into a prong over four feet in length.

TUESDAY AFTERNOON SESSION, DECEMBER 27

This session was largely given up to the dis-
cussion of glacial geology.

The glacial period: its record in Iowa: GEORGE
F. Kay. For many years Iowa has been recog-
nized as one of the most important areas in the
world for the study of the Glacial Period. Dis-
tinctive deposits mark five glacial epochs and four

1 Toronte, December 27, 1921.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

interglacial epochs. Attention is directed to the
significance of the gombotils, which on account of
their distinctive characters and wide distribution
are considered to be among the best of horizon
markers. They strengthen the view that the
Glacial Period was probably hundreds of thou-
sands and possibly millions of years in length.

Some recent and pleistocene glaciers of Argen-
tina and Bolivia: A. P. CoLEMAN.

The drumlins: CoLoNEL JoHN MIuuis. Since
in the opinion of the writer the conditions favor-
able for drumlin formation are basin-shaped
areas with impeded drainage, the radial move-
ment of ice from these basins produced crevasses
which became filled with water in summer. On
freezing in winter, it produced pressure resulting
in a buckling of the drift beneath the ice.

Stratigraphy and paleontology at Toronto:
W. A. Parks. The Paleozoic rocks in this dis-
trict are overlain by the remarkable series of
glacial and interglacial beds which have been
formerly so fully described by Dr. Coleman and
which contain evidences of interglacial epochs
warmer than the present climate of the region.
The Paleozoic rocks which consist of shales and
limestones are exposed at a few rather widely
separated points and while there are some varia-
tions in the fossil characters indicating different
zones there are no physical unconformities in the
series.

Outline of the physiographic history of north-
eastern Ontario: W. H. Gotuins. A summary of
the data showing what important diastrophie
movements have occurred in this area and the
evidence which fixes the periods in which these
revolutions have occurred.

WEDNESDAY MORNING SESSION, DECEMBER 28

Address of Dr. Eliot Blackwelder, the retiring
vice-president of the section, on ‘‘The Trend of
Earth History.’’

The remainder of the morning session was
mostly taken up with papers bearing on sedi-
mentation.

Sedimentation in Lake Louise, Alberta: W. A.
JoHNSTON. The sediments being formed in the
lake are glacial silts derived from Victoria glacier
near the head of the lake. Conditions of sedi-
mentation are somewhat similar to those which
existed in northwestern America at the close of
the Ice Age. Core samples from the bottom of
the lake taken by means of a bottom sampler
and sounding machine show fairly distinct band-
ing believed to be seasonal.

A natural classification of sedimentary rocks:
RichHarp M. Fienp. Owing to the inereased

Aveusr 11, 1922]

interest in the study of clastic rocks, new terms
are needed to describe new phenomena. For
instance, conglomerates may differ greatly—not
only as to compositions but also as to origin, and
the phenoelasts should not always be called
pebbles. The petrogenesis of the sedimentary
rocks is intimately related to paleogeography and
paleobiology. The paper is a suggestion that
more attention should be paid to the ‘‘life-
history’’ of sedimentary rocks.

The Pre-Cambrian of western Patricia: E. M.
BurwasH. A summary and comparison of the
pre-Cambrian complexes of the Lac Seul region
and of the Manitoba boundary north of the Win-
nipeg River.

WEDNESDAY AFTERNOON SESSION, DECEMBER 28

Some of the physico-chemical properties of
colloidal solutions and their relation to geological
processes: E. F. Burton. The study of colloidal
solutions has to deal with the properties of sus-
pension of small solid or liquid particles in such
a liquid as water. Their geological importance
rests on the conditions under which such suspen-
sions are precipitated from their solutions, as,
for example, in the formation of deltas and, also,
on the curious effect of small traces of certain
jelly-like substances on the properties of soils.
Surface tension, electrical charges and molecular
motions play a réle in bringing about the sta-
bility of such suspensions and in regulating con-
ditions of precipitation.

The present status of the medina problem in
southeastern Pennsylvania: Harry N. Eaton.
The Pennsylvania Geological Survey has investi-
gated recently the extent of the ridge-making
sandstone of the North or Blue Mountain in
southern Pennsylvania, and the stratigraphic and
faunal successions of the superjacent Silurian
and Devonian strata on the north side of the
mountain. Tentative conclusions were reached as
follows: For over one hundred miles in extent
the ridge-making sandstone is overlain conforma-
bly by the Clinton and probably is of Medina
age, apparently correlating with the Shawangunk
grit of the Delaware Water Gap region and west-
ern New Jersey. The upper Silurian and lower
Devonian limestones of the New York State series
were not deposited over the area immediately
north of the mountain, the Cayuga shale lying
directly below the Hamilton sandstone as far east
as the Lehigh Gap; isolated exceptions being a
thin band of Helderberg-Oriskany chert west of
the Susquehanna River valley, and a thin Onon-
daga limestone bed in Schuylkill County, east of
Swatara Gap.

SCIENCE.

175

The session then adjourned for a visit to the
Royal Ontario Museum under the leadership of
Dr. A. P. Coleman and Dr. W. A. Parks.

THURSDAY MorninG SESSION, DECEMBER 29

The Mackenzie River Basin: D. B. Dowutne.

The basin of the Mackenzie River is underlain
by Devonian limestones and shales thinly covered
by Cretaceous and Tertiary sediments. The shales
and dolomites underlying the upper Devonian
limestones are of Middle Devonian age and in
places are petroliferous. The area which may be
considered as forming a possible oil field consists
of a belt showing comparatively little disturbance
between the crushed and metamorphosed zone -of
the Rocky Mountains and the overlap of the
Paleozoic on the Archean to the east. The field
is divided by a line of folds which may be con-
sidered a spur of the mountains which cross
diagonally in a north and south direction. The
eastern part exposed around Great Slave Lake is
comparatively undisturbed. The portion west of
the mountain spur shows signs of partaking in
the earth movements. A triangular area with
upturned edge next the mountains shows minor
crumplings or lines of anticlines in a general east
and west direction near the northern border.
These terminate to the east in a probable fault
line or line of breaks in which the downthrow is
on the east side with the upthrow on the west
side showing only in the ridges which are anti-
clinal in section. The surface east of this line of
breaks is a flat plane, covered by Cretaceous,
Tertiary and later sediments leading to the hills
of the Franklin range to the east. The Devonian
shows erosion previous to the deposition of what
is probably Upper Cretaceous. Denudation of
the Cretaceous is indicated. previous to the depo-
sition of the Tertiary and in this interval nearly
all the mountain building took place since the
Cretaceous is uplifted with the Devonian and the
Tertiary but slightly tilted. The structure of the
basin included within the pressure folds that
bound the part of the oil field west of the Frank-
lin range must be interpreted mainly from the
Cretaceous measures assuming that the uncon-
formity with the Devonian was a planation of
horizontal beds near sea level. The Tertiary
basins represent down warpings of the plane
underlain by Cretaceous which was to base level
of erosion at the inception of the mountain
building. Southward Cretaceous sediments are
present in great masses and form thick deposits
which were elevated by the earth stresses and
now form the plateaus of the plains to the south.
The Cretaceous measures against which the pres-

176

sure from the west was expended extended north-
ward to the latitude of the Liard River at least.
Northward there seems to have been less of a
barrier and the alignment in the Rocky Moun-
tains, preserved from the boundary line north-
ward to that point, is broken and the Mackenzie
Mountains represent the eastward extension of
the lines of weakness developed by the lateral
compression. The eastern margin of this earth
movement affects the area under study.

The influence of rock structure on quarrying
methods: OLIvER BowLes. While brief reference
is made to the effect of joints on drilling and
blasting limestone, chief emphasis is placed on
the importance of rock structures in dimension
stone quarrying, and the influence of such struc-
tures on the quality of the finished products.
Reference is made to the manner in which mar-
ble, slate and granite quarrying methods should
be modified to conform to best advantage with
such rock structures as slaty cleavage, bedding,
grain and rift. The great need of a more:ex-
tended application of geology to quarry prob-
lems is emphasized.

The fluorspar deposits of the Madoc district,
Ontario: M. E. Wiuson. The fluorspar deposits
of the Madoe district are all veins occupying
fault fissures of post-Ordovician age, and are
similar in type to the fluorspar deposits of the
central United States and the north of England.
The principal features that distinguish the de-
posits are that they occur in part in faults on
which the displacement has been horizontal and
in a region where igneous rocks of later age than
the Pre-Cambrian are unknown. The evidence
bearing on the origin of these deposits therefore
lends greater support to the hypothesis that they
have been formed through the agency of meteoric
waters than in the case of other fluorspar de-
posits of the Madoc type.

The geology and surface features of the
Torngat Mountains in northern Labrador: A. P.
CoLeMAN. The rocks displayed in northern
Labrador are chiefly Laurentian granites and
gneisses and Grenville sedimentary deposits. On
the upturned edges of these rocks there are much
later Pre-Cambrian sediments with gentle dip.
The earlier Pre-Cambrian rocks, once forming
great ranges of mountains, have been cut down
to a peneplain of which the northeastern edge
has been elevated, forming a tableland. The
edge of the tableland has been carved by great
valley glaciers into the wildest mountains of
eastern North America, and a few small glaciers

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1441

still survive. This glacial work has excavated
some of the most impressive fiords to be found
in America.

Gaspé Peninsula: the country, its geology and
economic possibilities: F. J. Aucock. This
paper is a brief description-of the physiography
and geology of Gaspé peninsula, with particular
reference to an area in the interior where a
variety of igneous rocks oecur. Associated with
these are important deposits of zine and lead
which present certain features of interest.

The geology of oil in Canada: D. B. Dow.ine.
A discussion of the oil producing areas and pros-
pective oil fields of Canada.

No program was prepared by Section E on the
afternoon of December 29 in order that the mem-
bers might meet with Section M (Engineering)
and hear a number of papers of interest to geolo-
gists and geographers. In the evening a combined
dinner for Sections E and M was held in the Music
Room of Hart House, University of Toronto,
where a very enjoyable time was spent.

HE. S. Moors,
Secretary, Section E

SECTION Q—EDUCATION

Srction Q held session from December 28
to 30. A dinner and smoker was held on Wed-
nesday evening. The dinner was followed by
an address by Dr. R. M. Yerkes, of Washing-
ton, entitled “Remarks Concerning the Research
Information Service of the National Research
Council and Its International Relations.” On
Friday morning a session was held in conjunc-
tion with Section I. At this session HE. K.
Strong, Jr., of the Carnegie Institute of Tech-
nology, delivered his retiring presidential ad-
dress for Section I, and Dr. Charles H. Judd,
of the University of Chicago, delivered his re-
tiring vice-presidential address for Section Q
on “Technique of Scientific Revision of the
Curriculum.” A joint session of Section Q and
K was held on Friday afternoon, at which a
symposium on “An International Auxiliary
Language” was given.

The average attendance at the final sessions
included in the program was good throughout,
including from 125 to 250 educators and
psychologists.

Brrp T. BaLpwin.
Secretary, Section Q

SCIENCE

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
SINGLE Copigs, 15 Crs.

New SERIES Taye me 99
Vou. LVL, No. 1442 Fripay, August 18, 1922

4 vistors MiRoUGE

Bausch & Lomb
Drawing Apparatus

Can be Used in
Both Vertical
and Horizontal
Position

To meet the requirements of those engaged i1 research or reconstruction work. as well as for
regular routine student use, this new Drawing A >paratus has been designed. It can be used in a
horizontal position, as illustrated, or vertically.

The microscope is of special design, with a re novable body tube to permit the use of both low
and high power objectives. The stage, which w ll accommodate large slides,,is so arranged that
the slide can be held on either side.

Either a concentrated filament Mazda or Tungs-are lamp can be used as the light source.

Write for complete description and prices

Bausch & Lomb Optical Company

409 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.
New York Washington Chicago San Francisco London

Leading American Makers of Optical Measuring Instruments, Photomicrographic Apparatus, Photographic
Lenses, Microscopes, Projection Apparatus (Balopticons), Ophthalmic Lenses and _ Instruments,
Range Finders and Gun-Sights for Army and Navy, Searchlight Reflectors, Stereo-Prism
Binoculars, Telescopes, Magnifiers, Automobile Lenses and other High-Grade
Optical Products.

eT
——— better and farther

i SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

No. 610 Model of the Atom

Designed according to the Suggestions of
Professor R. R. Ramsey, Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana

The atom consists essentially of a coil with an iron core mounted vertically, above which
is a tray with electrodes so placed that when current is sent through mercury placed within
the tray, the current fiows radially toward or away from the center. This produces a magnetic
field and a current at right angles and consequently there will be motion in the third direc-
tion and the mercury will rotate.

The tray is connected to a storage battery. A carbon rheostat may be inserted in circuit to
vary the current and it is advisable to have an ammeter to measure the current. The current
should be from 2 to 5 amperes.

The coil is best operated by connecting to a 110 volt lighting circuit with a bank of lamps
for resistance and the ammeter may be inserted for measuring the current. This current should
take from 2 to 5 amperes also.

The amount of current necessary will depend on the adjustments and should be varied
so as to get the best operative conditions.

Two balls placed on the rotating surface alternately rotate in elliptical orbits about each
other.

Three balls rotate in ellipses about each other but the motion is more complicated and
more difficult to follow.

A larger number of balls form a ring which rotates as a fixed, stable form.

Various stable forms such as a ring with one or more balls in the center, or one or more
rings may be formed. Other phenomena such as the breaking apart of a stable form by means
of concentrating the lines of force through a ring outside and the illustration of radioactive

matter, etc., may be shown.

A booklet of instructions describing the apparatus in detail and many atomic phenomena
that may be illustrated, will be sent upon request.

Bulletins of other apparatus recently developed and illustrating some of the more recent
developments of science will be sent upon request.

A SIGN OF QUALITY \WWIBILC]H] A MARK OF SERVICE

/

W. M. WELCH SCIENTIFIC COMPANY

Manufacturers, Importers and Exporters of
Scientific Apparatus and School Supplies

1516 Orleans Street CHICAGO, ILL., U. S. A.

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices -and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS

11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Camiioa, ING YG

New York City: Grand Central Terminal
Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single ‘Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

August 18, 1922

Vou. LVI No. 1442

CONTENTS

Geology of the Colorado River Basin with
reference to Engineering Problems: Pro-

FESSOR) DB ATUB Ws eWOUUTTS eerste eee eee 177
The Expeditions of the American Museum of
ICS OURONS DEMOS ROT acta eres com oes Se 182

The Proposed Federation of the American

Biological Societies: Proressor A. FRANK-

TAIN ORR TEU Ua Ene se ge on gee ane pay ties 184
Huia Onslow: Proressor T. D. A. CocKERELL 185
Scientific Events:

Illuminating Engineering Nomenclature

and Photometric Standards; French Vital

Statistics for 1921; Production of Dyes in

the United States; Fellowships for Medical

Research; The Second National Highway

COmpenenceg omnes Na Nees Medel Nee he ET, 186
Scientific Notes and News........-.--....---c.c0o- 190

University and Educational Notes . 194

Discussion and Correspondence:
Pasteur on Science and the Applications of
Science: Dr. CHARLES ROBERTSON. Culti-
vation and Evaporation: Dr. : JEROME
ALEXANDER. Depositories for Scientific
Publications: Dr. W. E. ALLEN. Alfred °
Goldsborough Mayor: Dr. T. C. Mrenprn-
FEAT es ace aes ee toe eee nL 194

Scientific Books:
Stevenson on Terrestrial and Celestial
Globes: PRorEssor L. C. K-ARPINSKI............ 199
Special Articles:
The Effect of Absorbed Hydrogen on the
Thermo-electric Properties of Palladium.
R. M. Houmes. The Effect of Sperm
boiled in Oxalated Sea-water in initiating
Development: Dr. E. EB. Jusv........ 201
The Western Society of Naturalists 5
CHES TER gi S10 0 (Kaan en dren ATT 204

GEOLOGY OF THE COLORADO
RIVER BASIN WITH REFERENCE
TO ENGINEERING PROBLEMS!

Any account of the geology of the Colorado
River basin falls naturally into two parts: that
which deals with the life of the Colorado River
and that which deseribes the preceding ages
before the river began to flow. Professor Pack
has presented the life history of the river. It
is my task. to sketch the earlier history of this
part of the continent. With reference to the
engineering problems, the geologist is con-
cerned with three questions. relating to the sta-
bility of the dam as affected by, possible earth-
quakes, the nature of the foundation rocks, and
the durability of the rocks used in construction.
Reference will be made to these matters after
the geology has been described.

We have become familiar with moving pic-
tures, which present a succession of views, each
one of which differs so slightly from the pre-
ceding that the eye sees their sequence as a con-
tinuous movement. The intervals are fractions
of a second. The action is timed to our human
scale. Geographic changes are exceeding slow.
If we would present a moving picture of a
succession of landscapes, the intervals between
the views would be a hundred thousand or even
a million years. Even so, the eye would see a
continuous procession of views. Mountains
would grow to majestic heights and waste away
till their sites became plains. Rivers would
develop and competing for territory would be-
come master streams or tributaries according
to the law of the strongest. Seas would invade
the land ‘and retreat from it after ages of occu-
pation. Climates, floras and faunas would
change. Such is the moving picture of geologie

1 Presented in the Symposium on ‘‘The Prob-
lems of the Colorado River’’ at the Salt Lake
City meeting of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science and the Pacifie Division.

178

history.

Even that slow movement of events is be-
yond our power to present in its continuity.
We can at best represent widely separated con-
ditions. And so, in attempting to sketch the
history of the Colorado Plateau region, I can
give you detached pictures only, some of them
so unhke that imagination alone can link them
together. It will be simplest to roll the broken
film backward from the later, better known
events to the earlier scenes, till knowledge be-
comes guess and guess fades into surmise in
the mists of antiquity.

The Colorado River developed during a
period before the present plateaus were ele-
vated. So great a river system, like a great
empire, is the result of many territorial con-
quests. The force by which it conquers is due
to its fall, for by its fall it carves its canyons
and extends its tributaries. Thus the earlier
history of the river corresponded with an
earler ancient uplift of the plateau country.
But that uplifted mass was first gashed by
canyons, then became a land of broad valleys
and mesas, and finally was eroded to a low
plain. A later uplift has raised that plain to
its present position, 7,000 feet above the sea,
where it is the surface of the plateau.

The cycle of erosion just referred to is called
the “Great Denudation.” The time of its dura-
tion corresponded with the so-called early Ter-
tiary. The early mammals drank from the
growing Colorado. North America then, as
now, stretched from the Atlantic to the Pacific,
an undivided continent.

Stepping back a million years or so, we see
North America divided. A broad, though
shallow, strait stretched from the Gulf of
Mexico to the Arctie Ocean along the Great
Plains of to-day, dividing the continent into
an eastern and a western land. The climate
was mild and equable. Vegetation flourished
in the warm humid atmosphere. It was the
Coal period of Colorado and New Mexico.
Great saurians dominated the life of the period,
yet became extinct, apparently rapidly. Dull
brutes, they were incapable of adaptation to

changes of environment such as closed the

period of their dynasty.
During this period, the so-called Cretaceous,
the region of the Colorado plateaus was a

SCIENCE

It is timed to the march of the ages. |

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

watered land with rivers flowing from eastern
coast ranges, on the site of the Rocky Moun-
tains, toward the Pacific. Among them may
have been the stream which eventually grew to
the Colorado, but we can not identify it.

Still retreating down the aisles of time, we
come upon the panorama of a wide North
America, united from east to west, but sub-
merged along the western margin even to
Idaho. This, the Triassic and Permian periods
of geologists, might well be called the period
of the “Great American Desert.” A red wind-
swept delta plain covered the Rocky Mountain
states from Montana to Arizona and extended
southeastward over Oklahoma and _ Texas.
Bleak and arid, it was like the plains of north-
ern Siberia. Similar cold, barren lands existed
widely throughout the continents. It was a
time of stress for all living things and led to
the evolution of higher forms than had pre-
viously existed when conditions bettered, just
as the severe environment of life during the
Glacial Period later led to the evolution of
man from his ape-like ancestors.

The red muds and sands of the desert time
reached far into the Colorado Plateau country
and, in so far as they were not eroded during
the “Great Denudation,” they give the dom-
inant color note to the upper gorges of the
river.

Thus far in our retrospect we have found no
epoch during which the plateau country was
submerged beneath sea waters. Yet there is
written in the strata of the canyon walls a very
long record of marine conditions. Whoever
has been down the Bright Angel Trail has
seen it. The cliffs of sandstone shale and
limestone demonstrate by their long horizontal
lines of bedding, as well as by the fossils they
contain, that they were laid down beneath the
sea. It was never a deep sea, yet there gath-
ered in the basin more than 4,000 feet of strata.
Evidently the bottom sank gradually and the
sediments gathered as the basin deepened. Far
more impressive evidence of subsidence is
found near Salt Lake. There the strata ag-
gregate more than 40,000 feet in thickness and
indicate a corresponding subsidence of the an-
cient foundation rocks.

It is clear from the great difference between
4,000 and 40,000 feet that we should not re-

Aueust 18, 1922]

gard the subsidence as uniform. On the con-
trary, it was an unequal warping of the sur-
face, which indeed rose and remained land in
the region southeast of the canyon, or was but
temporarily submerged.

The invasion of the sea into western North
America began with and extended through the
so-called Paleozoic age, that vast lapse of time
during which life evolved from the grasping
crustacean to the ambitious reptile. It is one
of the proofs of evolution that although the
Paleozoic creatures are long since extinct, their
mentalities still persist in individual men. Ac-
cording to geologists the Paleozoic was an era
which began with the Cambrian period and
closed with the Permian. Various intervening
periods are distinguished, but for our study of
the Colorado River basin, the Paleozoic stands
for one event, the advance of ocean waters over
much of the continent, their prolonged occu-
pation of its area accompanied by numerous
changes of front, and their retreat into the
permanent ocean basins.

Back to the beginning of the Paleozoic era,
including the Cambrian period, we have fairly
complete records of the physical geography of
the earth and we can trace the major lines of
evolution of organic life. We can even attempt
maps of the shifting lands and seas, follow
the course of great climatic oscillations, and
image in our minds the habitats in which our
remoter and nearer ancestors lived. If we draw
a parallel between human history and earth
history we may compare the dawn of Assyria
with the beginning of the Paleozoic. But the
remoteness of Assyria is to be measured only
in hundreds, whereas that of the early Paleo-
zoie is to be estimated in as many millions of
years.

Let us not think, however, that a hundred
million years represents a large proportion of
the earth’s history, as it is recorded in the
rocks of the Grand Canyon. Beneath the
earliest Paleozoic strata lie other water laid
deposits of sediment, the waste of ancient
lands. Only a few fragments of those old
records are known, but they testify unmis-
takably to the passage of unnumbered ages.

We are prone to think the earth must have
been in a different state of cooling or had a
different atmosphere in so distant a past. But

SCIENCE

179

no, the winds blew, rains fell, streams flowed,
there was night and day, heat and cold. And
within the earth there went on periodically
those changes which occasion the rise and sub-
sidence of continents, the growth of mountain
chains. The Algonkian strata (such is the
name geologists use to designate the era) were
deeply buried, tilted up, invaded by masses of
molten rock and eroded. They record activities
identical in kind and intensity with those
which are now active in the most youthful
ranges, the Rocky Mountains and the Sierra
Nevada. Though we look back two hundred
million years we find earth-processes the same.

Hiven so we have not read the earliest chapter
recorded in the rocks of the Grand Canyon.
Beneath the Algonkian we come upon an older
and different group of rocks. It is a group
which never occurs anywhere but at the bottom.
It is the foundation of the superficial crust.
I speak of the so-called Archean, the oldest
rocks known, though by no means necessarily
the oldest rocks ever formed.

The Archean rocks are not surface rocks,
not like the strata of the plateau country.
They have risen from depths in the earth’s
crust where temperatures are high and _pres-
sures are enormous. The typical Archean are
crystalline. Whatever the previous state of
the minerals may have been, they have re-
crystallized. Some, which are called schists,
have reerystallized in a solid state under over-
whelming and unequal pressures. They have
thus changed form, shortening anad lengthen-
ing to fit their Procrustean bed. Others, the
granites, have been melted and have intruded
as tongues of magma into surrounding masses,
causing changes of crystalline form in them.
Melting and recrystallizing, erystallizing and
remelting, these rocks have undergone changes
so complete that no one can tell what they may
once have been nor through what sequence of
kneading, mechanical shearing, folding, and
chemical changes they may have passed.

The Archean rocks thus represent physical
and chemical conditions which exist within the
earth’s outer shell. I say advisedly exist, not
exisied. For while it is true that we see only
very ancient rocks of this character, there is
every reason to assume that they are forming
now beneath our feet. We know that the

180

earth, though solid, is very hot. We know
that very great and unequal pressures exist at
depths of a few miles beneath the surface.
These are the conditions under which the
Archean rocks formed and no doubt are
forming.

In the laboratory of the Master no reaction
oceurs except according to law, and law is
eternal, unchanging. ‘There is, perhaps, no
thought with which we may more appropriately
approach the engineering problems of the
Colorado River.

The engineers who will speak here of the
utilization of the Colorado will describe works
of great magnitude: dams surpassing any yet
built; reservoirs impounding millions of acre
feet of water; values of irrigated lands rising
to hundreds of millions of dollars; powers
which are to turn the wheels of industry from
San Francisco and Los Angeles to Denver.
But even so, they speak only as men, of the
little works of men. In the laboratory of the
Master their greatest accomplishment is infi-
nitely small and transient.

A laboratory is a place where the forces of
nature work changes in material compounds
or erystal forms according to law. The me-
chanic, the physicist, the chemist arranges the
conditions of some desired reaction and under
the same conditions observes the identical
effects recurring endlessly, unfailingly. If he
makes an experiment the personality of the ex-
perimenter makes no difference. Even the
Master works by law and can not work other-
wise. Nor does time make any difference. A
billion years ago the law of gravitation held
the stars to their courses as it does to-day. In
the earliest conceivable eon of the existence of
matter the atoms moved to their places in
molecules in the same order as now.

Yet there is a new development, no doubt
also in obedience to law, but so subtle that we
can not establish the relation. I mean the evo-
lution of mind, which can investigate law,
which can conceive and execute great works
that rightly constructed will stand for ages.
The mind can even trace its own evolution.
Backward from human thought to animal
instinct, from instinct to mere conscious ex-
istence, from consciousness to unconscious
molecular reaction runs the chain. It runs un-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

broken. Life is its characteristic. But if
thought is life, then is consciousness also; if
consciousness is life, then is molecular reaction
also life. In this sense minerals are alive, for
they are chemical compounds which react to
their environment. The earth is alive, for the
reactions of its masses are evidenced in un-
ending change.

The development of thought from uncon-
scious reaction has recently evolved reason.
Reason is so young, however, that it is still
embryoni¢e and in many humans is in a larval
state. Nevertheless, no man becomes a scien-
tist or engineer without having to some degree
developed it and therein lies the hope of a
successful solution of the extraordinary prob-
lems of the utilization of the Colorado.

The major difficulty in damming the Col-

orado is to establish the dam on a firm founda-
tion. Investigations of the river’s bed show
that it is filled to depths exceeding a hundred
feet with large boulders. The dam, if it be a
masonry or concrete structure, must be welded
to the solid rock in place. It will tax the re-
sources of the engineer to the utmost to dig so
deep through boulders and to place his foun-
dation structure during the few months be-
tween floods, which, if unrestrained, will
destroy it.
. The presence of a boulder bed, of such depth
and composed of rocks of such size, was not
foreseen. It is due to the power of the floods.
At low water the river ripples impotently
around the stones. One can hardly conceive
that in flood it moves rocks as large as cabins
and buoys up a mass of them, rolling them
over one another with irresistible foree. But
the evidence is there. It does. The bottom of
the river in flood is a torrent of rolling rocks,
of huge size. They roll, they jam, they tem-
porarily resist. The river piles up its waters
behind them. The rocks yield and are carried
crashing down the channel to come to rest as
the victorious waters roll on.

It is one of the most daring conceptions of
modern engineering that this awful power
may be used to build the dam that shall chain
it. How, may best be stated in speaking of
the types of dams that are under consideration.

The engineer and geologist are both cog-
nizant of the power of floods. But there are

Aveust 18, 1922]

some facts regarding the structure of rocks
which lie more exclusively in the province of
geology. The first of these is what is called
‘Jointing’ in rocks. Jointing is a mechanical
effect. It is produced by pressure in the case
of massive rocks, like granite, or by torsion in
the case of strata, when they are warped. All
the rocks of the plateau region are jointed. In
the magnificent architecture of the Grand Can-
yon, the vertical cliffs are the planes of joints.
In the pointed forms which are characteristic
of the deepest gorges in the granite, we see the
effect of two or more intersecting joint planes.
Now joints permit water to penetrate under
and around a block of rock. The film of water
may be very thin, but to the extent that it sur-
rounds the rock it buoys it up, tends to lift it
from its bed by virtue of hydrostatic pressure,
and may free it from its firm foundations.
Engineers are fully aware of this action. They
seek to excavate to foundation rocks which
show no open joints, or to seal visible joints
by cement. Granite is regarded as one of the
firmest foundations. It is liable, however, to
blind joints, invisible planes on which there
has been no actual parting, but the minerals
have been strained and are ready to react to
forces of decay. Water, not enough to wet, but
just enough to moisten, is the agent that sets
those forces to work. The engineer can not
discover blind joints. Investigation of the
minerals by the microscope, a study which is
among the most specialized of geologic train-
ing, alone can demonstrate whether or not they
are present.

We may think that the invisible is reason-
ably negligible. But the infinitely small is the
infinitely powerful and also the infinitely pa-
tient. A film of water penetrating a plane of
strained crystals may open the way to the ulti-
mate destruction of man’s mightiest work.

Minerals decay. That is not a familiar
thought with many, although soil, a product of
mineral decay, is familiar to every one. I said
that minerals are alive. And it is because they
are alive that they decay, decay being simply
the reaction to a change of environment. Evi-
dence of these facts is found in the rocks which
the engineer must use in building a dam in
ihe Canyon of the Colorado.

A : 7
The granites and

SCIENCE

181

schists of the ancient formations crystallized
deep within the crust in an environment of
very high temperature and great pressure.
Hlevated to their present positions at the sur-
face they are in a cool environment, under
little pressure. The change produced in every
erystal a tendency to change, to disintegrate
into forms and compounds better suited to
their actual environment. Thus the seemingly
solid granite of the Boulder Canyon site is
pervaded with disintegrating forces, which
will in the course of time, though probably
long time, certainly cause it to crumble.

Let us now consider the two methods of
building the proposed dam, which have been
suggested. The first fascinates by its unusual
character and its daring. It consists in blow-
ing great masses of rock from the canyon walls
into the river channel in such quantity that
they will form the body of a dam three quar-
ters of a mile up and down stream on the base
and six hundred feet high. The blasting is not
to be done all at once, but in sections from
upstream downward and only to a part of the
height at any one time. And the river is to be
allowed to flow over the fallen rock masses in
such manner that it will by its own power dig
the deep hollows into which it shall also roll
the great rocks. Thus the river shall work its
will, but shall lay the masses where it can
never move them again. It shall chain itself.

The success of this operation depends upon
providing by blasting rock masses of such
magnitude that the river can not carry them
away. We have a report by Mr. Ransome, a
geologist of the U. 8. Geological Survey and
one of the highest rank, to the effect that the
granite of Boulder Canyon is considerably
jointed. Conservative knowledge would sug-
gest that there are many more joints than ap-
pear as actual fissures and that they would
cause the granite to break into relatively small
masses, in the blasting from the cliffs and sub-
sequent rolling by the river.

Another question is how “solid” is the
granite? That it is so described is natural,
for “granite” and “solid” are almost synony-
mous terms to English speaking peoples. The
significance of words depends upon our asso-
ejation with them and our experience of New

182

England granite says that it is the very symbol
of solidity. But New England granites have
been stripped by glaciers of every trace of de-
cayed rock. They are solid because they are
freshly exposed. That is not the ease with
granites in this western country.

For instance there is granite in the imme-
diate vicinity of Salt Lake City. It seems
solid. It is used in building. It will take a
polish. But I am told it will not hold a polish
more than three or four years, because the
crystals have begun to decay. Professor Pack
tells me that he has examined granite in this
vicinity from the surface to a depth of 800
feet below it and found even at that depth
that decomposition was in progress, as shown
by the clouded appearance of certain crystals,
the feldspars, under the microscope.

The granite of Boulder Canyon is decom-
posed on the surface. No one knows, as yet,
to what depth. But the geologist has reason
to suspect its solidity and must add his objec-
tion to those of conservative engineers against
the suggestion that the dam be built by blow-
ing the cliffs into the canyon.

The other type of dam proposed is to be
built of reinforced concrete. Concrete may be
described as a rock composed of minerals
which are permanent under surface conditions
because they form in that environment. Mois-
ture promotes the consolidation of concrete.
Age inereases its strength. So far as the
superstructure is concerned, a geologist must
reason that a concrete dam will outlive a rock
fill dam. The engineering problem in building
a concrete dam is that of excavating to solid
foundations. It is, in the judgment of con-
servative and experienced engineers, reasonably
practicable to do so. But, if the conditions
of jointing and decay of the rocks are consid-
ered as they should be, it will be the geologist
rather than the engineer who shall determine
whether they are solid or not.

The foundations are now being explored by
drilling.. It is not enough. A drill may bore
out a core within a foot of a weak seam and
not betray its existence. The preliminary
examination will, no doubt, be followed by
more thorough investigation and it may be sug-
gested that a method of shafts and tunnel be
employed. Shafts sunk, one on each side of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

the river, and connected by a tunnel at a depth
of a hundred feet below the bottom of the
channel, would enable a complete examination
of the rock, inch by inch. Weaknesses could
be excavated and filled. If they should prove
too numerous at one hundred feet, the shafts
could go deeper to a deeper tunnel. EHventu-
ally when solid rock was found, the rock above
the tunnel could be cut away to the surface,
stoped, as miners say, and the stope filled with
concrete would form an impervious curtain
wall. Working from the bottom up, the hed
of the river would be approached and the
deeper foundations would. be laid without ex-
posure to the risk of floods. It is not the
province of the geologist to instruct engineers
and I would not presume to, but the suggestion
may stand to illustrate the problem of a deep
and secure foundation, that the geologie con-
ditions demand.

The Garden of Eden was created some five
thousand or more years ago by the building of
huge dams of earth to control the Tigris and
Euphrates, and so well did those ancient engi-
neers execute their task that the beauty of the
garden became a tradition of all Eurasian
races. The garden endured until the state fell.
Subtle forces weakened the quality of its citi-
zens as moisture attacks the minerals of the
granite. Our engineers can build a dam to
endure for thousands of years. What is the
endurance of our state? What concrete foun-
dations of national character are we laying to
cut off the underground activities that would
destroy it?

Baitey WILLIS
STANFORD. UNIVERSITY

EXPEDITIONS OF THE MUSEUM OF
NATURAL HISTORY

In one of the corridors of the American
Museum of Natural History the oiicials of
that institution have hung a map of the world
to which labels are attached showing the dis-
tribution of its exploring parties and field
workers. During the present year a larger
number of expeditions have been sent out than
ever before. Intensive work is being pursued
by each department.

In the department of geology, Dr. Edmund
O. Hovey is at present on a trip through Cali-

Aveust 18, 1922]

fornia, Oregon, Washington and _ British
Columbia, securing data and photographs for
the purpose of the construction of a number
of relief models, showing most interesting geo-
logical formation in these states. Associate
Curator Reeds is working in the vicinity of
New York, collecting data for a museum ex-
Inbit to show the “Climates Past and Present,”
and Mr. Foyles is continuing his studies in
northwestern Vermont on the Fort Cassein
terrain.

For the department of vertebrate paleon-
tology, an expedition in charge of Albert
Thomson is at work in western Nebraska, seek-
ing fossil mammals from the Snake Creek beds
of the Pliocene age. Working in the same
vicinity is Curator Matthew, who will shortly
be joined by Mr. Olsen. Mr. Barnum Brown,
who is well known from his success in securing
most of the Brontosaurian material now on ex-
hibition in the museum, is at work in the
Siwalik Hills of India, obtaining fossil mam-
mals and other invertebrates from a famous
fossil bearing formation. In the late autumn,
it is the intention of President Henry Fairfield
Osborn to join the Third Asiatic Expedition,
which has connected with it, in charge of
paleontology, Mr. Walter Granger. Working
with Mr. Granger at the present time are Pro-
fessors Charles P. Berkey and Frederick K.

Morris. Already extensive shipments have
been made by this expedition. Mr. Childs

Frick, one of the trustees of the institution,
will continue fossil collecting in southern Cali-
fornia, where he has already obtained an ex-
tensive collection from the Pliocene.

Dr. Frank M. Chapman, curator of the de-
partment of birds, accompanied by Mr. George
K. Cherrie and Captain O’Connell, are in
Keuador continuing their studies on the distri-
bution of bird life in the Andes. They will
first investigate southern and southeastern
Ecuador and will then conclude their work by
a boat trip from Guayaquil along the coast to
Paita, Peru. Assisting in the investigations in
bird life in Eeuador, Henry Watkins is now
engaged in the mountains of Peru. His latest
shipment comes from the humid regions north-
east of Lake Junin. Ernest Holt, formerly of
the United States Biological Survey, is engaged

SCIENCE

183

in collecting birds and mammals for the mu-
seum in the mountains of eastern Brazil. A
collection was recently received from him
which was secured around Mt. Itatiaya. Later
Mr. Holt will explore still higher peaks. The
museum’s representation of bird life from this
important region has until now been confined
entirely to specimens in the old Prince Maxi-
milian Collection. José G. Correia is under-
taking the collection of birds at the Cape Verde
Islands, and Rollo H. Beck, who is working
under the auspices of the Whitney South Sea
Expedition, is collecting in the Society Islands.
Mr. Beck is accompanied by Mrs. Beck and
Mr. Quayle. Mr. Griscom is doing work in
New Foundland, while other members of the
department are engaged in the local field.

The department of mammals has G. H. Tate
in Keuador. He will later be joined by an
assistant in order that more intensive investi-
gations of the life of mammals in this region
may be studied. H. C. Raven, who accom-
panied Dr. W. K. Gregory to Australia last
year, has nearly completed a systematic collee-
tion in Queensland and will next go to the
great Nullaboa Plain in South Australia. He
has already obtained for exhibition and study
a series of the marsupial mammals.

In September, Herbert Lang, assistant cura-
tor of African mammals, will leave for British
Guiana for a three months’ trip. At George-
town he will join William La Varre and will
go up the Essequibo River through the diamond
mining district along the Mazaruni. He hopes
to go through the savannah country and Mt.
Koraima. By studies of the conditions in this
section at first hand, Mr. Lang has an oppor-
tunity to compare the ecological conditions in
the great South American forests and savan-
nahs with those of equatorial Africa, a com-
parison which has long been needed in connec-
tion with the preparation of his reports on his
Congo expeditions.

Dr. F. E. Lutz, of the department of ento-
mology, is engaged in work in the vicinity of
Boulder, Colo. F. E. Watson, of this depart-
ment, recently returned from a four months’
trip to Haiti where he secured approximately
eleven thousand specimens of the lower inver-
tebrates, chiefly insects, and about three hun-

184

dred miscellaneous specimens of fishes and rep-
tiles. He is now carrying on local field work,
having in view the collection of material for
several butterfly groups.

R. W. Miner, of the department of inverte-
brate zoology, is continuing field studies in
southern New Jersey in connection with the
construction of a new rotifer group. Assisting
him is Research Associate Frank J. Myers,
whose well equipped laboratory at Ventnor,
New Jersey, is the basis of operations.

Dr. Russell J. Coles is collecting material
for the department of ichthyology off the coast
of North Carolina. Mr. Louis L. Mowbrey
has sent in some important material for this
department from the Florida waters.

Dr. G. K. Noble, of the department of
herpetology, accompanied by Mrs. Noble, has
left for the Dominican Republic. The chief
object of this expedition is to secure data, pho-
tographs and material toward the construction
of the two habitat groups for the new Hall of
Reptiles in the museum. The West Indian
region is rich in reptilian and amphibian life.
Perhaps the two most striking creatures in this
locality are the rhinoceros iguana and the giant
tree frog. Both these forms are confined to
the island of Santo Domingo. The expedition
will travel over a large part of the island in
the course of its investigations. The rhinoceros
iguana is found 'to-day chiefly in the arid south-
western portion of the island in the vicinity of
a dead sea, the surface of which is more than
a hundred feet below sea-level. The giant tree
frog has been taken only in the Central Cor-
dillera and on the Quita Espuala, a range of
mountains in the northeastern part of the
island. It will be necessary for the expedition
to carry on its work during the height of the
rainy season in order to secure information in
regard to the life history of the giant tree frog.
Although this species is the largest and most
spectacular tree frog in the world, its life his-
tory is entirely unknown, and the expedition
hopes to secure valuable scientifie data as well
as exhibition material.

While field work in the department of an-
thropology is necessarily restricted for the
present year, nevertheless, Mr. Nelson, of the
Division of Archeology, is in Europe, engaged

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

in a study of the paleolithie and neolithic eol-
lections in the museums abroad, and will en-
deavor to secure specimens to round out the
exhibition series in this museum. During his
trip Mr. Nelson will visit Norway, Sweden,
Spain and Belgium.

Earl H. Morris, who for a number of years
has been engaged on the Huntington Expedi-
tion work at Aztec, New Mexico, in company
with Charles L. Parnheimer, of this city, is
now busy making a general reconnaissance of
the Navajo mountain region of New Mexico.
Dr. P. E. Goddard, of this department, accom-
panied by Lieutenant G. T. Emmons of
Princeton, left early in June for a trip to the
Northwest Coast. It is the intention of this
party to secure specimens and authentic data
which will make possible an early completion
of the North Pacifie Coast Hall.

PROPOSED FEDERATION OF AMERI-
CAN BIOLOGICAL SOCIETIES

Tue second conference called to consider the
question of cooperation or federation among
biological societies met in Washington in the
rooms of the National Research Council, on-
April 23, 1922. This meeting was held in pur-
suance of a resolution adopted at an informal
conference in Toronto, December 27, 1921, and
approved by the societies there in session. The
conference organized under the chairmanship
of Professor L. R. Jones, who had also pre-
sided over the Toronto gathering.

Plans for the 1922 meeting, in so far as they
could be arranged by agreement among the
officers of the several societies, were entrusted
to a committee consisting of the secretaries of
the American Society of Naturalists, Botanical
Society of America, and American Society of
Zoologists, in cooperation with the permanent
secretary of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science.

The view was generally expressed that the
conference should, if it decided to recommend
any form of federation, present a definite plan
of organization. A committee was accordingly
raised to formulate such a plan. This com-
mittee, of which Professor F. R. Lillie was
chairman, reported to the conference the fol-

Aveust 18, 1922]

lowing recommendations, which were adopted:

1. That the vote of the Toronto conference in
favor of the idea of federation be reaffirmed.

2. That the proposed federation be styled the
Federation of American Biological Societies.

3. That the members of the federation be socie-
ties, not individuals, and that all societies repre-
sented in this conference (a list of which is given
below) be eligible to charter membership.

4. That a council of the federation be estab-
lished, consisting of two representatives from
each society, these to be the president and secre-
tary unless otherwise designated by the society.

5. That the council choose an executive com-
mittee from its own membership.

The committee that made the foregoing re-
port was continued as an executive committee
pro tempore of the conference, and to it was
intrusted the task of drawing up a constitution
and by-laws in accordance with the above gen-
eral plan. The instructions of this committee
eall for completion of its work at a reasonably
early date, and the transmission of its decisions
and recommendations to the officers of the sev-
eral societies by correspondence. It is expected
that it will be possible to distribute the pro-
posed constitution and by-laws to the members
of the societies early next fall.

The executive committee pro tem. has the fol-
lowing personnel: Frank R. Lillie, University
of Chicago; C. W. Greene, University of Mis-
sourl1; I. F. Lewis, University of Virginia;
C. E. McClung, University of Pennsylvania;
A. Franklin Shull, University of Michigan;
R. E. Thatcher, Agricultural Experiment Sta-
tion, Geneva; H. B. Ward, University of Illi-
nois; and B. H. Livingston, representing the
American Association (Herbert Osborn to sub-
stitute for latter at August 4 meeting).

Considerable discussion was devoted to the
problem of improving biological publications,
a question likely to come before the council, if
the plan of federation shall be adopted. This
problem was considered so important that it
was deemed advisable by the conference that
some action be taken without waiting for the
establishment of the federation. A special
committee was, therefore, appointed to work
in cooperation with a committee on the same
subject from the Division of Biology and Agri-
culture of the National Research Council, to
study the whole question of biological publica-

SCIENCE

185

tions and report to the conference or to the
federation if formed. The personnel of this
committee is as follows:

A. P. Hitchens, Army Medical School.

I. F. Lewis, University of Virginia.

C. A. Kofoid, University of California.

D. R. Hooker, Johns Hopkins University.

The corresponding committee of the Division
of Biology and Agriculture of the National
Research Council is composed of the following
members :

E. D. Ball, Department of Agriculture.

C. E. McClung, University of Pennsylvania.

J. R. Schramm, National Researeh Council.

A. F. Woods, University of Maryland.

The biological organizations represented at
the Washington conference were as follows:

American Association for the Advancement of
Science.

Sections F (Zoology), G (Botany), N (Medical
Sciences), and O (Agriculture) of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science.

Federation of American Societies for Experi-
mental Biology.

The Executive Committee of the Division of
Biology and Agriculture of the National Re-
search Council.

American Society of Naturalists.

American Society of Zoologists.

Botanical Society of America.

Geneties Sections of the Botanical Society of
America and the American Society of Zoologists.

American Genetic Association.

Ecological Society of America.

American Phytopathological Society.

Ameriean Society for Horticultural Science.

Society of American Foresters.

Society of American Bacteriologists.

American Society of Agronomy.

Entomological Society of America.

American Association of Economie Entomolo-
gists.

American Society of Animal Production.

American Dairy Science Association.

A. FRANKLIN SHULL,
Secretary of the Conference

HUIA ONSLOW

At Cambridge, England, on June 27, Mr.
Huia Onslow died. He was born in New Zea-
land on November 13, 1890, where his father,
the Earl of Onslow, was then governor-general.
To commemorate the place of his birth, he was

186

given the Maori name Huia, and was regarded
as the honorary chief of a Maori tribe. Queen
Victoria became his godmother. Favored by
circumstance, strong and handsome, he passed
through Eton and Cambridge University, with
every prospect of a brilliant career. But when
taking a holiday in the Tyrol in July, 1911, he
struck his head against a rock in diving, and
was so severely injured that he became para-
lyzed from the waist downward. An appar-
ently helpless invalid, he was condemned to
spend the rest of his life on a couch, able only
to move his head and arms. Many men, so
situated, would have given up all idea of useful
activities, lamenting a life of supposedly un-
avoidable idleness. Not so Mr. Onslow. Hav-
ing been much interested in biological subjects
when in college, he returned to Cambridge,
secured the necessary assistants, and ardently
devoted himself to biological research. Those
interested in genetics will remember his papers
on heredity in moths, based on breeding expe-
riments carried on in his laboratory. His
doubtless most important work, of 74 pages,
was “On a periodic structure in many insect
scales, and the cause of their iridescent
colours” (Philosophical Transactions of the
Royal Society, July, 1921). In this elaborate
and fully illustrated paper the iridescent colors
of many insects of various orders are studied,
using all the modern refinements of micro-
scopic technique and the latest pertinent re-
searches in physics. All the drawings on the
three plates are by Mr. Onslow. <A few years
ago Mr. Onslow was married to Miss Muriel
Wheldale, formerly a fellow of Newnham Col-
lege, well-known for researches on biochemistry
and especially for her book on the anthocyanin
pigments of plants. Marriage did not prevent
her from continuing her work at the university,
and so Onslow lived, as he wished to do, in the
atmosphere of the laboratories, closely in touch
with whatever was going on, himself an actor
in the great scientific drama of the day. When
I saw him in 1920 I was struck by the keenness
of his mind and the breadth of his interests.
His was a remarkable life, fruitful in many
ways, and ever worthy to be remembered.

T. D. A. CockERELL
UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO

SCIENCE

{Vou. LVI, No. 1442

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING NOMENCLA-
TURE AND PHOTOMETRIC STANDARDS

THe American Engineering Standards Com-
mittee announces that the Illuminating Engi-

“neering Nomenclature and Photometric Stand-

ards of the Illuminating Engineering Society,
1918 edition, have been approved by the
American Engineering Standards Committee
as “American Standard,” with the substitution
of six internationally agreed upon definitions
for certain ones of the 1918 rules. The defini-
tions which have been reworded are: luminous
flux, luminous intensity, illumination, candle,
lumen and lux. ’

The special committee of the American En-
gineering Standards Committee which exam-
ined the proposal submitted by the Illuminating
Engineering Society and which recommended
approval of the nomenclature and photometric
standards included representatives of the U. S.
Bureau of Standards, the American Gas Asso-
ciation, the American Physical Society, the
International Acetylene Association, the Op-
tical Society of America, the American Insti-
tute of Electrical Engineers, the Illuminating
Engineering Society and the National Electric
Light Association.

The new tests to be substituted for existing
text in sections 3, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 13 of the
Nomenclature and Standards Rules of the
Illuminating Engineering Society of 1918 are
as follows:

Section 3: Luminous Flux is the rate of flow
of radiant energy evaluated with reference to
visual sensation. Although luminous flux must
strictly be defined as above, it may be regarded
for practical photometric purposes as an entity,
since the rate of flow is for such purposes inva-
riable.

Section 8: The Luminous Intensity of a point
source in any direction is the flux per unit solid
angle emitted by the source in that direction.
(The flux from any source of dimensions which
are negligibly small by comparison with the dis-
tance at which it is observed may be treated as
if it were emitted from a point.)

Section 9: Illumination at any point of a sur-
face is the luminous flux density at that point,
or, when the illumination is uniform, the flux
per unit of intercepting area.

Aueusr 18, 1922]

Section 10: The unit of Luminous Intensity
is the International Candle, such as has resulted
from international agreement between the three
national standardizing laboratories! of France,
Great Britain and the U. S. A. in 1909.

This unit has been conserved since then by
means of incandescent electric lamps in the lab-

oratories which continue (or remain) charged
with its conservation.
Section 12: The unit of Luminous Flux is

the Lumen. It is equal to the flux emitted in a
unit solid angle, by a uniform point source of
one international candle.

Section 13: The practical unit of illumination
is the Lux. It is equal to one Lumen per square
meter, or it is the illumination at the surface of
a sphere of one meter radius due to a uniform
point source of one international candle placed
at its center.

As a consequence of certain recognized usages,
the illumination can also be expressed by means
of the following units:

Using the centimeter as the unit of length the
unit of illumination is one lumen per square
centimeter, and is called the Phot. Using the
foot as the unit of length, the unit of illumina-
tion is one lumen per square foot, and is called
the Foot-Candle.

FRENCH VITAL STATISTICS FOR 19211

Tue secretary (minister) of labor recently
published the official vital statistics for France
for the year 1921. It is an unfavorable report
from every point of view. The number of
births is below that of 1920, while the number
of deaths has increased; the number of mar-
riages has also decreased. The excess of births
over deaths, amounting to 159,790 in 1920, or
forty-one for each 10,000 inhabitants, de-
creased in 1921 to 117,023, or thirty for each
10,000 inhabitants.

A comparison of the number of births and
deaths for the years 1921, 1920 and 1913 is
shown in the following table:

Total Excess
Year Population Births Deaths of Births
19 Die ele 39,209,766 813,396 696,373 117,023

1 These laboratories are the Laboratoire Cen-
tral d’Electricité, Paris, the National Physical
Laboratory, Teddington, and the Bureau of
Standards, Washington.

1From the Journal of the American Medical
Association.

SCIENCE

187
1920. .ccceccnnnn 39,209,766 $34,411 674,621 159,790
T1913 ema 41,476,272 790,355 731,441 58,914

The number of marriages, which reached an
unusually high figure in 1920 (623,869),
dropped in 1921 to 456,221, but it is still ap-
preciably higher than the number recorded in
1913 (312,036).

An examination of the report brings out the
fact that whereas the number of living births
for each 10,000 inhabitants in 1920 was 213,
it fell in 1921 to 207; in 1913, it was 191. The
relative proportion of deaths has risen from
172 for each 10,000 inhabitants in 1920 to 177
in 1921, reaching about the same proportion
that was recorded in 1913—176 for each 10,000
inhabitants.

In 1921, sixty-seven of the French depart-
ments showed an excess of births over deaths,
the total amounting to 127,654, as compared
with seventy-three departments in 1920. On
the other hand, twenty-three departments
showed an excess of deaths over births, the
total amounting to 10,631, as against seventeen
departments in 1920. The seven departments
which, in 1920, showed an excess of births over
deaths but in which the balance in 1921 was
on the side of the deaths are: Aube, Cher,
Cote-d’Or, Maine-et-Loire, Orne, Seine-et-
Marne and Seine-et-Oise. In the department
of Isére, which in 1920 showed an excess of
deaths over births, the excess of births over
deaths in 1921 was 292. During the year just
preceding the war (1913), an excess of births
over deaths amounting to a total of 86,768 for
fifty-two departments was recorded, and an ex-
cess of deaths over births amounting to 27,854
was found in the thirty-eight other depart-
ments.

The departments in which the excess of
births over deaths, in 1921, reached the highest
figures are: Nord, Seine, Pas-de-Calais, Finis-
tere, Moselle, Bas-Rhin, Seine-Inférieure,
Cétes-du-Nord, Morbihan, Haut-Rhin, Aisne,
Meurthe-et-Moselle, Ardennes and Bouches-du-
Rhone. In all these departments, with the ex-
ception of Aisne, Meurthe-et-Moselle and
Ardennes, the excess of births in 1921 was
much less than in 1920.

The departments in which the excess of
deaths over births, in 1921, was highest are:
Yonne, Var, Gers, Lot, Lot-et-Garonne, Maine-

188

et-Loire, Niévre, Hautes-Pyrénées, Seine-et-
Oise, Puy-de-Déme, Vaucluse, Cher and Allier.
In all these departments, with the exception of
Puy-de-Déme and Allier, the excess of deaths
in 1921 was greater than in 1920; three of
these departments, Maine-et-Loire, Seine-et-
Oise and Cher, had shown an excess of births
over deaths in 1920.

In 1920 (the figures for 1921 are not as yet
available), Germany, exclusive of Wurttem-
berg and Mecklenburg, showed an excess of
births over deaths amounting to 623,367; in
1919, the excess of births was 282,230, and in
1918 there was an excess of deaths over births
of 299,885. In England, the excess of births
for 1920 was 491,781, and for 1921, 390,355.
PRODUCTION OF DYES IN THe UNITED

STATES

THe United States Tariff Commission re-
ports that the production of dyes in this coun-
try declined last year far below that of the
previous year, ascribing as the reasons the loss
of much of the country’s export trade, the gen-
eral business depression, and the carrying over
of large stocks from the previous year.

The commission states that the progress made
during the year includes the production in the
United States for the first time of a number
of dyes of greater complexity and more spe-
cialized application. Many of these dyes,
which are of secondary importance from the
point of view of quantity consumed, are essen-
tial in the dyeing and printing of numerous
fabrics. These additions to our list of dyes
represent an added step toward a well-rounded
coal tar chemical industry. The development
of many of these new products is a highly
technical achievement.

There were 201 firms engaged in the manu-
facture of coal tar derivatives in 1921. The
output of dyes by seventy-four firms exceeded
39,000,000 pounds, a decrease of 56 per cent.
from that of 1920. The sales in 1921 exceeded
47,000,000 pounds, valued at more than
$39,000,000, and exceeded production by 22
per cent., indicating that a part of the domestic
consumption for that year was supplied from
the large stocks carried over from the previous
year’s abnormally high production. The sales

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

of dyes for 1921 exceeded the imports of 1914,
when the United States imported nearly
46,000,000 pounds and produced over 6,000,000
pounds of dyes from German imported inter-
mediates.

The average price of all dyes in 1921 was
83 cents per pound, compared with a value of
$1.08 per pound in 1920 and a value of $1.26
for 1917. The total quantity of dyes imported
in 1921 was 38,914,036 pounds, valued at
$5,155,779, or $1.32 per pound, compared with
3,402,582 pounds, valued at $5,763,437 in the
previous year. The imports of 1921 represent
10 per cent. of the production and about 8 per
cent. of the total dye sales during the year.
Germany supplied about 48 per cent. of the
total dyes imported during 1921; Switzerland,
41 per cent.; England, 7 per cent., and all other
countries, 4 per cent.

Exports of domestic dyes for 1921 show a
decrease of nearly 79 per cent., compared with
those for the previous year. The value of our
exports for 1921 was $6,270,139, compared
with $29,823,591 in 1920. The total exports
of dyes for 1921 were less than for the year
1917, when the first considerable expansion of
the domestic dye industry from pre-war con-
ditions occurred.

The total production of synthetic organic
chemicals other than those derived from coal
tar, which are used as medicinals, perfumes,
flavoring ingredients, solvents and in numerous
industrial processes, was 21,545,186 pounds;
the sales amounted to 16,761,096 pounds,
valued at $13,746,235. The development of
this industry in the United States has been
similar to that of the dye industry, as our sup-
ply of synthetic organic chemicals was con-
trolled primarily by Germany prior to the war.

FELLOWSHIPS FOR MEDICAL RESEARCH

Tr is stated in Nature that Junior Beit Me-
morial Fellowships of the annual value of £350,
and tenable for three years, have been awarded
by the trustees to the following, the subject
and place of research being given after each:
Mr. E. B. Verney: The physiology and pathol-
ogy of urinary secretion, at the Institute of
Physiology, University College, London; Pro-
fessor F. Cook: A study of the neuro-muscular

Avueust 18, 1922]

apparatus of the uterus, at Guy’s Hospital;
Dr. J. L. Rosedale: The chemistry of normal
and pathological tissue with special reference
to the protein and nuclein constituents, at St.
Thomas’s Hospital Medical School, London;
Mr. R. Hilton: The study of the blood gases
in various stages of pulmonary collapse pro-
duced by artificial pneumonthorax; the condi-
tion of the circulation in the collapsed lung,
at the Lennee Hospital, Paris, and at St.
Bartholomew’s Hospital; Mr. A. St. G. J. M’C.
Huggett: The investigation of the function of
the placenta in relation to the passage of gases
and other substances from the mother to the
foetus and the cause of foetal apnea, at the
Sherrington School of Physiology, St. Thomas’s
Hospital, and at the Brown Animal Institution
at Vauxhall; and Mr. V. D. Allison: The inves-
tigation of the nature and properties of a
hitherto undeseribed substance which has a
strong bactericidal, bacteriolytic and bacterio-
inhibitory action—named lysozyme, at the
Institute of Pathology and Research, St. Mary’s
Hospital. Fourth year fellowships of the an-
nual value of £400 have been awarded to Dr.
D. Keilin: The life-histories of protozoa patho-
genie to insects; the life-history, anatomy and
physiology of insects, at the Monteno Institute
for Research in Parasitology, Cambridge; and
My. I. de B. Daly: Auriculo-ventricular block,
at the Institute of Physiology, University Col-
lege, London. The trustees of the Beit Scien-
tific Research Fellowships have re-elected Mr.
H. L. Riley and Mr. W. A. P. Challenor to
fellowships for the year commencing Septem-
ber, 1922, and elected Mr. H. W. Buston to a
fellowship for the same period. All the fellows
are required to carry out their research at the
Imperial College of Science and Technology.
Mr. Riley will continue his research on “The
Atomic Weight of Silver, and the Dielectric
Constants of Dry Gases” in the chemistry de-
partment, and Mr. Challenor will continue his
work on “Ring Formation in the Aromatic
and Aliphatic Series of Organic Chemistry”
in the chemistry department, both under the
direction of Professor H. B. Baker. Mr. Bus-
ton will carry out investigations on “Nitrog-
enous Metabolism in Plants” in the biochem-

SCIENCE |

189

istry department under the supervision of Pro-
fessor J. B. Farmer.

THE SECOND NATIONAL HIGHWAY
CONFERENCE

Puans for a second national conference for
the study of highway engineering and highway
transport education are being prepared by the
Highway Edueation Board, of which Dr. John
J. Tigert, U. S. commissioner of education, is
chairman. Teachers of highway engineering
and highway transport, officials in charge of
highway construction programs, members of
the automotive industry and kindred fields, to-
gether with representatives from other coun-
tries, are being invited to attend. The confer-
ence will be held in Washington from October
26 to 28 inclusive, and, according to the tenta-
tive program, this period will be devoted to the
intensive study of highway and engineering
problems.

According to a statement of the program
committee, the object of the conference is “To
review the field of highway engineering and
highway transport education in the light of ex-
panding state and federal highway programs
and the rapidly increasing social and commer-
cial use of the highways; to diseuss general and
special courses in undergraduate and graduate
curricula; and to exchange views on educa-
tional trends arising from these developments
in the national transportation system.”

Members of the program committee charged
with the duty of arranging an adequate pro-
gram are: Professor T. R. Agg, professor of
highway engineering, Iowa State College; Pro-
fessor Arthur H. Blanchard, professor of civil
engineering, University of Michigan; Professor
C. J. Tilden, professor of engineering mechan-
ies, Yale University; Professor Lewis W. Me-
Intyre, professor of civil engineering, Univer-
sity of Pittsburgh; H. G. Shirley, chairman of
the Virginia State Highway Commission, Rich-
mond, and Dr. Walton C. John, U. S.-Bureau
of Education, Washington, D. C., chairman.

Seven principal committees will function as
the chief activities of the conference, but a
program of unusual and exceptional merit, it is
said, is being arranged. Tentatively the com-

190

mittees will be assigned to the study of the fol-
lowing problems: (1) Undergraduate and
elective courses in highway engineering; (2)
Undergraduate and elective courses in highway
transport; (3) Graduate work in highway en-
gineering and highway transport; (4) Short
courses in highway engineering and highway
transport; (5) Introductory general course in
highway engineering and highway transport;
(6) Vocational training for non-professional
highway personnel, and, (7) Highway traffic
regulation and safety.

Information with regard to the conference
may be obtained from the Highway Education
Board, Willard Building, Washington, D. C.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Ar the meeting of the British Association,
which begins at Hull on September 6, for the
first time, special lectures are being arranged
for children in the secondary schools. These
will be given by Professor H. H. Turner, on
“The telescope and what it tells us’; Professor
J. Arthur Thomson, on “Creatures of the
sea”; and Mr. F. Debenham, on “The Ant-
arctic.”

Tue ninetieth annual meeting of the British
Medical Association was held in Glasgow, Scot-
land, from July 25 to 28, under the presidency
of Dr. David Drummond, of Neweastle-on-
Tyne. Sir William Macewen, Glasgow, was
elected president for the year 1922-1923. Mr.
Charles P. Childe, Southsea, is president-elect
for the annual meeting to be held in Ports-
mouth in 1923.

Str Wititam Pops has been elected presi-
dent of the International Union of Pure and
Applied Chemistry for the ensuing three years.
The next meeting of the union will be held at
Cambridge in June, 1923.

THe physicists, Professor H. K. Onnes, of
Leyden, Professor P. Zeeman, of Amsterdam,
and Dr. N. Bohr, of Copenhagen, have been
elected corresponding members of the Berlin
Academy of Sciences.

H. Le Cuateuier, professor of chemistry at
the Sorbonne, Paris, has been presented with
a gold medal on the completion of his fifty
years of teaching and of service to France.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

CotoneL ArtHuR 8. Dwicut, president of
the American Institute of Mining and Metal-
lurgical Engineers, and Charles F. Rand, chair-
man of the Engineering Foundation, have been
made Chevaliers of the Legion of Honor.

Tue honorary degrees conferred by the
University of Edinburgh on July 21 included
the doctorate of laws on M. Roger, dean of the
faculty of medicine in the University of Paris;
Sir Charles Scott Sherrington, professor of
physiology in the University of Oxford; Mr.
John Bretland Farmer, professor of botany at
the Imperial College of Science and Technol-
ogy, London, and William Somerville, pro-
fessor of rural economy at Oxford.

Dr. Virain Snyper, professor of mathe-
matics at Cornell University, received, at the
seven hundredth anniversary celebration of the
University of Padua, the honorary degree of
doctor of the University of Padua.

Tue Rio de Janeiro Academy of Medicine
has conferred the Sampaio prize this year on
the pharmacist, P. Seabra, for his work on an
electric process for producing nitric acid.

Dr. Grratp L. WENDT resigned on July 1 as
associate professor of chemistry at the Uni-
versity of Chicago to join the staff of the
Standard Oil Company of Indiana in the
direction of research.

Tue Cross of the Legion of Honor has been
awarded to Dr. A. E. Kennelly, professor of
electrical engineering at Harvard University
and the Massachusetts Institute of Technology,
for distinguished services as exchange pro-
fessor in engineering to the French Republic.
Dr. Kennelly will be succeeded as American
exchange professor by Dean John Frazer of
the University of Pennsylvania, now in France.
The French representative to the American
institutions, Professor J. Cavalier, director of
the University of Toulouse, has returned to
France and will be succeeded by Dr. M. E.
de Margerie, director of the Geological Service
of France.

Dr. FrepertcK Rosert Zeit, for more than
twenty years professor of pathology at North-
western University Medical School, at his re-
quest has been relieved of active duty in the
medical school. He plans to spend next year

Aveust 18, 1922]

abroad. The pathological museum of the uni-
versity will hereafter be known as the Fred-
erick Robert Zeit Museum of Pathology.

James B. Poutock, associate professor of
botany in the University of Michigan, goes to
the University of Hawaii at Honolulu for the
college year 1922-1923, in exchange with Pro-
fessor H. F. Bergman.

Proressor Hersert H. Gregory and Dr.
Levi F. Noble are devoting the months of
August and September to geological investiga-
tions in southern Utah. At the beginning of
the academic year Professor Gregory will re-
sume his work at Yale University.

Tue sixth session of a series of graduate
medical lectures given at the University of
Washington, Seattle, opened on July 17. Five
lectures each were given by Dr. Hobart Amory
Hare, professor of therapeutics, Jefferson Med-
ical College, Philadelphia; Dr. John B. Deaver,
professor of surgery, University of Pennsyl-
vania, and Dr. Williams MeKim Marriott, pro-
fessor of pediatrics, Washington University,
St. Louis. Single lectures were given by Dr.
William Englebach, professor of medicine, St.
Louis University School of Medicine; Dr.
Joseph Colt Bloodgood, professor of surgery,
Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, and Dr.
Walter B. Cannon, professor of physiology,
Harvard University, Boston.

Dr. George Minpry Gounp, known for his
work in medical ophthalmology and especially
in eyestrain, formerly editor of American Med-
icine, Biographic Clinics and the Gould Med-
ical Dictionary, died on August 8, aged sev-
enty-four years.

Tue death is announced of Professor W.
Hallwachs, of the Dresden Technical School,
known for his researches on electricity, par-
ticularly on the photo-electric effect, and of
Professor Otto Lehmann, of the Karlsruhe
Technical school, best known for his work on
liquid crystals.

Tue death is announced from Paris, at the
age of forty-one, of Professor Pierre Boutroux,
of the Collége de France, formerly professor
of mathematics at Princeton University. The
son of the philosopher Emile Boutroux and
the nephew of Henri Poincaré, himself a math-
ematician of no little merit, his main work

SCIENCE

191

was along the lines of multiform functions
and of singularities of differential equations.

Nature says: “Mr. H. G. Wells has accepted
the invitation of the labor party of the Uni-
versity of London ‘to offer himself as the can-
didate of the party at the election for a rep-
resentative of the university in the House of
Commons to be held after the retirement of
Sir Philip Magnus at the end of the present
session of Parliament. Mr. Wells occupies
such a distinguished position in the world of
literature and among leaders of thought to-day
that his early work in science and edueation is
often overlooked. He was a student at the
Royal College of Science, South Kensington,
in 1884-87, and was the first president of the
Old Students’ Association of the College. He
took his B.Se. degree with honors in zoology
in 1890, and his first book was a “Text-book
of Zoology,” written particularly for London
University students while he was a teacher of
the subject.. He is a fellow of the College of
Preceptors, and for a short time edited the
Educational Times. Throughout his career he
has been a steadfast supporter of scientific
methods in schools and government, and in his
books has pleaded the cause of scientific edu-
cation and research with eloquence and convic-
tion. It is not too much to say that no grad-
uate of the University of London possesses
such a rare combination of brilliant literary
power and scientific thought or has used these
gifts with greater effect than has Mr. Wells
in his many and various works.”

Tue Congress of Learned Societies will
meet at the Sorbonne, Paris, from April 3 to
7, 1923.

Tue exhibition which opens in Rio Janeiro
on September 7 will include displays repre-
senting the New England offshore fisheries, the
salmon industry, the sardine industry of Maine
and California, the oyster industry, the fresh-
water mussel fishery, the fish-canning industry,
the by-products of the and the
bureau’s relations with the industries. Because
of limited allotments of space and funds the
exhibit will of nécessity be small. A report
on the fisheries of the United States, the or-
ganization and functions of the bureau, edu-
cational opportunities afforded students of

fisheries,

192

fisheries in the United States, ete. has been
prepared for publication in English, Spanish,
and Portuguese.

Unper the presidency of Lord Ancaster,
British deputy minister of fisheries, the Deep
Sea Fishing Exhibition was held at the
Royal Agricultural Hall, Islington, from July
24 to August 5. Among the exhibits were
fish from the Dogger Bank shown alive in
tanks of salt water, free fish snacks eooked on
the premises, the dressing and curing of fish,
wireless broadcasting, Scottish fisher girls at
work, a diver operating under water, samples
of fish not known on the markets, fish luncheons
and dinners, a museum with models of various
types of vessels, working exhibits, a picture
gallery, and films dealing with deep-sea fishing,
life under the surface, whaling and _ pearl
fishing.

Tue London Natural History Museum Staff
Association held their summer scientific re-
union in the board room of the -museum on
July 5. According to the report in Nature,
among the exhibits were the following: speci-
men of the supposed gigantic gastropod (Dino-
cochlea ingens) from the freshwater sand-
stones in the Wadhurst Clay, Hastings; the
natural cast of a footprint of an iguanodon
from the Wealden Beds. between Bexhill and
St. Leonards; opalised mollusea of Cretaceous

age from New South Wales and South
Australia; skin with seutes of astego-
saurian dinosaur from the Upper Creta-
ceous, Alberta, Canada; specimens from
the collection of Swiss minerals be-

queathed to the museum by the late Reverend
J. M. Gordon; one of the four meteoric stones
which fell in the Strathmore district of Perth-
shire and Forfarshire on December 3, 1917;
living specimens of a branchiopod crustacean
(Leptesheria dahalacensis) hatched from eggs
contained in dried mud from Bagdad; ammo-
nites with the operculum preserved and asso-
ciated fossils from the same bed in the Lias
at Charmouth, Dorset; horse chestnut seed-
lings, illustrating three different methods of
replacing the bud of the primary shoot; a very
rare British orchid (Orchis hircina) recently
found near Lewes; examples of the remarkably
different, smooth and partly rough, skinned

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1442

fruits borne on the same tree of the Khatta
orange, North India; model. of Commerson’s
dolphin (Cephalorhynchus Commersom) from
Port Stanley, Falkland Islands; and the model,
enlarged 740 diameters, of the itch mite
(Sarcoptes Scabiet) recently made for the
museum by Miss Grace Edwards. Messrs.
R. and J. Beck exhibited their most recent
forms of microscope, and Duroglass Ltd.
showed examples of their glass-ware for pre-
serving specimens in spirit and for use in
chemical analysis.

Tue third International Congress of the
History of Medicine was opened on July 17,
at the Royal Society of Medicine, London.
Dr. Charles Singer, lecturer on the history of
medicine, London University, presided. The
following countries were represented: Belgium,
Czecho-Slovakia, Denmark, Egypt, France,
Greece, Holland, Italy, Portugal, Rumania,
Spain, Switzerland and the United States.
Lord Onslow, parliamentary secretary to the
Ministry of Health, welcomed the delegates on
behalf of the government, after which Dr.
Singer addressed the congress. Dr. Laignel-
Lavastine acknowledged the welcome on be-
half of the foreign delegates. Sir D’Arcy
Power, in the absence of Sir Norman Moore,
president of honor, said it was a matter of
especial gratification that England had
been chosen for the third congress. Dr. Tricot-
Royer, first president, thought that greater suc-
cess would result from that conference than
from its predecessors. He announced that the
next conference would be held at Brussels. At
the afternoon meeting of the congress, held at
the Royal College of Physicians, Pall Mall, the
president of the institution, Sir Humphrey
Rolleston, gave an address of welcome, and Dr.
Arnold Chaplin, Harveian librarian, described

the treasures of the library. The president of

the congress and Mrs. Singer gave a reception
and conyersazione in the evening at the Royal
Society of Medicine, when a demonstration on
human paleolithic skulls was given by Pro-
fessor Elliot Smith.

WE learn from Nature that a summer course
in the Austrian Tyrol has been organized by
the directors of Leplay House, London. The
course is of the nature of a civic and rustic

Aveust 18, 1922]

survey, and for this purpose the party is
divided into groups each of which takes one
particular aspect of the work. Mr. H. J. E.
Peake, president-elect of the Anthropological
Section of the British Association, has under-
taken to direct the group studying the anthro-
pological aspects; Dr. M. Hardy will organize
a survey of plant life and agriculture, while
other sections will deal with the geology, phys-
lography, history and sociology of the district.
Group meetings and gatherings of the whole
party will frequently be held for the purpose
of discussing and comparing results. The tour
commenced on August 4 and will last four
weeks, although it is possible to arrange for a
shorter course of two weeks.

Tue Haperiment Station Record states that
the Palestine Zionist executive is opening an
institute of agricultural research in Jerusalem.
This institute will be in charge of O. Warburg
as head and botanist, with I. Wilkansky as
director of experimental stations and farm
management, F. Bodenheimer in charge of
entomology, A. Treidal and M. Winik of chem-
istry, M. Wilkansky of agronomy, L. Pinner
of plant breeding, N. Reichert of plant pathol-
ogy, Wi. Pickholz of animal nutrition, and 8.
Zemach in charge of agricultural publications.
Departments of horticulture, animal husban-
dry, irrigation, and agricultural education will
be opened next year. The institute will for
the present be under the direction of the Col-
onization Department of the Palestine Zionist
Executive, but is expected to be transferred
eventually to the Research Institute of the
Jerusalem University. Experimental stations
in Ben-Shemen for the Shephela, Merhavia for
the Jezreel Valley, and Degania for the Jordan
Valley were established during the past year.
It is anticipated that a similar station will
shortly be opened in Beer-Sheba for the Nogob.

Accorpina to the Journal of the American
Medical Association the International Health
Board of the Rockefeller Foundation has en-
tered into a cooperative arrangement with the
Health Organization of the League of Nations
whereby the board will provide a sum not to
exceed $32,840 a year, for a period of five
years, for the purpose of maintaining an
international epidemiologic intelligence service.

SCIENCE

193

The board will also provide a sum not to exceed
$60,080 a year for three years to put into
effect a scheme for the international exchange
of public health personnel, to be conducted
under the auspices of the health organization
of the league. Since the establishment, in 1921,
of the intelligence service of the health organ-
ization of the League of Nations, it has con-
dueted an international epidemiologic informa-
tion service, keeping all governments informed
as to the status of epidemics of typhus, inter-
mittent fever and cholera, which have been
sweeping westward from the famine regions of
Russia. It has also undertaken to promote the
international standardization of vaccines and
serums. It advises the league in matters af-
fecting health and cooperates with the Inter-
national Labor Organization in promoting
industrial hygiene and sanitary conventions for
the control of epidemics. It is expected that,
by the end of the five-year period, for which
funds have been provided by the International
Health Board, the epidemiologic intelligence
service will have become so efficient and valu-
able that the various national governments will
regard it as indispensable and provide funds
for its further maintenance. Interchange of
health officials will be arranged, not only for
observation but for definite periods of service,
which will result in actual exchange of experi-
ence. This system of exchanges will be put
into effect first in Europe and may be extended
to other countries throughout the world.

Tue Weather Bureau is conducting a study
of the constants of anemometers in general use
in this country. With the cooperation of the
Bureau of Standards about thirty instruments
of various dimensions, proportions and
weights have been tested in the wind-tunnels
of the latter bureau at velocities ranging from
five to sixty meters per second. Since the be-
havior of these anemometers may be different
in the variable natural wind, certain instru-
ments tested in the wind-tunnels have been
taken to Mount Washington, New Hampshire,
for comparison in the very high winds pre-
vailing there. These free-air comparisons will
be completed during August, 1922. Following
an analysis of the data an improved standard
anemometer, recording true velocities, will be

194

developed and corrections determined for
records of velocity already accumulated. Ex-
perimental values of the factors or constants
of anemometers, throughout the range of ve-
locities occurring in nature, are now available
for the first time, and much information useful
in the design and construction of these instru-
ments has been obtained. In advance of pub-
lication of final results it may be stated that
the velocities recorded by the standard Robin-
son anemometer now in use are about 22 per
cent. too high and that the rate of the instru-
ment is more nearly constant than that deter-
mined by means of tests on whirling-machines.
The three-cup pattern suggested by Dr. Pat-
terson, of the Canadian Meteorological Office,
appears to be more satisfactory than the four-
cup pattern in general use. This investiga-
tion is being conducted by Messrs. 8. P. Fer-
gusson and R. N. Covert, of the Instrument
Division.

Ir is stated in Nature that a biological expe-
dition has left Antwerp for Brazil. It is under
the direction of Professor C. Massart, of the
department of botany in the University of
Brussels, and there are four other members of
the expedition, two of whom are students. For
several years before the war the universities of
Belgium and Holland organized expeditions to
enable students to go into the field under the
guidance of their professors, and it is one of
these expeditions, to Brazil, which has now
been promoted by the University of Brussels.
The party will not aim at exploring Brazil; the
object is rather to put the young naturalists
directly in touch with tropical nature; they
will have the opportunity of collecting botan-
ical and zoological material for study and
demonstration and of making ethnological ob-
servations. Brazil has been chosen on account
of its salubrity and also because, some twenty
days’ journey from the starting-place, the
party will be in the virgin forest. The expe-
dition will remain in Brazil from August until
January or February next, and visits will be
paid to the state of Rio de Janeiro and Bahia,
to the Campos de Minas Geraés, a region in
the state of Bahia which is almost deserted,
and to some of the peaks of the Sierra de
Mantiqueira.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

Tue Hugenical News states that, under date
of June 4, 1922, Dr. A. Govaerts, secretary of
the Société Belge d’Eugénique, who spent eight
months, from September, 1921, to May, 1922,
studying the organization of eugenics in the
United States, writes that efforts to establish
a governmental eugenics office in Belgium have
been successful. The new office will be located
in the Institute Solvay in Brussels and will be
supported by the government. It has been de-
cided to provide regular courses of lectures in
eugenics in the State School of Social Service.
This school is an organization which prepares
its students to undertake actual social service
in connection with societies and institutions
devoted to charity, the protection of children,
and other welfare activities. Professionally,
the students of this school will, in the future,
be trained, not only as visiting nurses and
social workers, but also as eugenical field work-
ers. Dr. Govaerts will organize and give the
courses of lectures in eugenics. In general, the
courses will be modeled after the instruction
provided for the annual training corps of the
Eugenics Record Office. Closest contact will
be maintained between the Belgian and the
American organizations. In Dr. Govaerts’ first
course of weekly lectures, the following sub-
jects will be treated: Meaning of eugenics;
laws of heredity in plants, animals and man;
selective matings; the relation between natality
and mortality and the national welfare; the
technique of eugenics; the field workers’ inter-
views and questionnaires; charting family
pedigrees; tracing the descent and recombina-
tion of human traits in actual pedigrees; men-
tal and physical measurements in man. —

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Princeton Universrry has established a
library of industrial relations, the expense of
which, $12,000 a year, will be defrayed for the
first five years by a gift from Mr. John D.
Rockefeller, Jr.

Mission and educational bodies of East
China have set in motion a project to build in
Shanghai a union medical school at a cost of
$500,000. St. John’s University of Shanghai,

Aucus? 18, 1922]

which now has a medical department, is one
of the institutions supporting the project.

WE learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association that two chairs in the Uni-
versity of Cincinnati College of Medicine, hon-
oring John D. Rockefeller and Andrew Car-
negie, donors of munificent sums to the medical
school, were founded at a meeting of the board
of directors on July 19. The professorship in
obstetrics will be known as the John D. Rocke-
feller Chair of Obstetrics and the professor-
ship in biochemistry as the Andrew Carnegie
Chair of Biochemistry. Dr. William Gillespie
holds the chair of obstetrics, and Albert Pres-
cott Mathews, Ph.D., is professor of biochem-
istry.

Dr. StepHEN RusHMORE, associate professor
of gynecology, has been appointed dean of the
Tufts Medical School. The deanship has been
vacant since the resignation of Dr. Charles F.
Painter, one year ago. Dr. Rushmore is a
graduate and former instructor of the Johns
Hopkins Medical School.

Dr. Wiut1AM Mouton Marston has been
appointed professor of experimental psychol-
ogy in the American University at Washing-
ton, D. C.

Dr. R. W. Suuretpt, of Washington, has
accepted the position of lecturer on art anat-
omy and zoology on the faculty of the Research
University of that city. He will also give a
course of lectures at the Catholic University
of America on “The Essentials of Natural
Science.”

Dr. H. F. Pierce, who has been for three
and a half years in the department of pathol-
ogy at the University of Oxford, engaged in
research for the British Medical Research
Council, has been appointed associate in phys-
lology at the College of Physicians and Sur-
geons, Columbia University.

M. Pruvost has been appointed to the chair
of geology and mineralogy newly established
at the University of Lille.

M. Hesse has been appointed professor of
zoology at the University of Dijon.

In the University of London, Dr. J. C.
Drummond has been appointed to the univer-

SCIENCE

195

sity chair of biochemistry tenable at Univer-
sity College, and Professor Adrian Stokes to
the Sir William Dunn chair of pathology ten-
able at Guy’s Hospital Medical School.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

PASTEUR ON SCIENCE AND THE APPLICA-
TIONS OF SCIENCE

In his address as president of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science,
Sciencg, 54: 650, 1921, Dr. L. O. Howard
makes the following quotation from the ad-
dress of Edwin Linton at the Baird Memorial
meeting in Washington in 1916:

As I look over the titles of theses for doe-
torate degrees in biology, however, knowing that
they must, in some fashion, reflect the activities
of our biological leaders, I am led to wonder if
the failure of science to influence legislation in
the interests of the people is not to be charged to
the propensity on the part of these leaders to
shun the practical. Is there a hierarchy in sci-
ence that frowns upon independence of thought
and action in her sanctuary? That can hardly
be. Let the heads of departments of biological
research in our universities then take heart, and

not be afraid to follow the lead of Pasteur, who

surely committed no violence upon science by
undertaking the solution of practical problems.

This reminds me that, about fifty-one years
ago, Pasteur had some pretty definite things to
say about this matter. In the preface to the
fourth edition of “Fragments of Science,”
December, 1871, Tyndall says:

My friend M. Pasteur, of the Institute of
France, sent me some time ago, among other
important books and papers, a short essay
entitled “Quelques Réflexions sur la Science en
France.” It consists of three articles, the first
published in January, 1868; the second unpub-
lished, though laid before the Emperor Napo-
leon at the Tuileries in March, 1868; and the
third communicated to a public journal last
March. All three articles are conceived in
the same spirit, and directed to the same end.
The last of them, entitled “Pourquoi le France
n’a pas trouvé d’hommes supérieurs au moment
du peril,” contains many remarks which may
wisely be laid to heart in England. In our
eager pursuit of “practical” results, the high

196

preparatory studies contended for by M. Pas-
teur as essential are only too likely to be under-
rated or overlooked.

The bearing of his views on the question of
technical education, now so much spoken of in
England, will be apparent to every reader of
the following translation of a portion of the
article referred to. Its introduction in this
place would be incongruous were it not that
the main object of the various essays published
in this book was to create a public interest in
science as a source of knowledge, and as a
means of culture, without present regard to its
material results. But the issues of studies
animated by this spirit are incalculable; for,
though undertaken with no practical intent,
they are really the prime movers of all prac-
tice. If the purely scientific discoverer die out,
practical applications cannot long survive him.

The following three quotations are selected

from Pasteur’s article:
* Few persons comprehend the real origin of
the marvels of industry and the wealth of na-
tions. I need no other proof of this than the
employment more and more frequent in lec-
tures and speeches, in official language, and in
writings of all sorts, of the erroneous expres
sion applied science. The abandonment of sci-
entific careers by men capable of pursuing
them with distinction was recently complained
of in presence of a minister of the greatest
talent. This statesman endeavored to show
that we ought not to be surprised at this result,
because in our day the reign of theoretic science
yielded place to that of applied science. Noth-
ing could be more erroneous than this opinion;
nothing, I venture to say, more dangerous even
to practical life, than the consequences which
might flow from these words. They have rest-
ed in my memory as a proof of the imperious
necessity of reform in our superior education.
No, a thousand times no! There exists no eate-
gory of sciences to which the name of applied
science could be given. We have science and
the applications of science, which are united
to each other as the fruit and the tree on which
it grew.

At one time the majority of the foremost
disciples of the Ecole Polytechnique followed
the career of mathematical and physical sei-

SCIENCE

{[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

ence, and of the higher studies generally. In
our day this fact is only a rare exception. It
is not that the pupils of this great school are
less numerous than formerly, or less capable
than their predecessors, the Maluses, the
Poissons, the Fresnels, to render their country
illustrious by fruitful discoveries, but the
course of events invites them to carry the fruit
of their studies into the operations of industry,
such as the working of mines, the construction
of railways, ete.

The German nation has understood that there
exists no applied science, but only the applica-
tions of science, and that these latter are only
rendered valuable by the discoveries which
nourish them; while the constant preoccupation
of our statesmen regarding public instruction
during fifty years has had principally for
object primary and secondary education. They
have forsaken the higher studies, particularly
that of science, to the impulse they had received
from the renovation of science in the eighteenth.
century.

Finally Tyndall says:

The opinions of so eminent a man regarding
the relation of science to its applications, and to
the general culture of the nation, merits our
gravest attention. ‘

CHARLES ROBERTSON
CARLINVILLE, ILLINOIS

CULTIVATION AND EVAPORATION

To THE Eprtor oF Science: Dr. L. 8. Frier-
son (in Screncr, March 24, 1922, p. 317)
shows by his remarks the danger of confound-
ing facts with their explanation. What “all
practical farmers from the days of King
Hamurabi to date” agree upon is the fact that
cultivation helps plants in dry weather. But
Dr. Frierson and I have differed as to the
explanation of this fact—he believes that culti-
vation “stops evaporation, and thus conserves
the store of soil water,” whereas my view was
that “a greater total surface is exposed to
evaporation, and evaporation is therefore facili-
tated.”

The remarks of Dr. H. A. Noyes (in SCIENCE,
June 9, 1922, p. 610) throw further hght on
the subject. He believes that “cultivation lets
air down in the soil, thereby increasing bac-

Aveust 18, 1922]

terial activities which in turn cause the plants
to get more food and grow larger on less mois-
ture.” In the Journal of Industrial and Engi-
neering Chemistry for March, 1922, Dr. Noyes
reported experiments where “fertilization has
decreased the water requirements of plants over
one half, when expressed as the amount of
water necessary to produce one unit weight of
plant.” “It appears that if the soil solution
is weak, the plant transpires more water in its
attempt to make a normal growth.”

The observations of Dr. Noyes seem to con-
firm my application of Bechhold’s “capillary
phenomenon” in agriculture (Sctencr, July 22,
1921), because increased evaporation at the
surface of the ground in the immediate neigh-
borhood of the plant would mean a richer soil
solution within reach of the plant roots; so
that even if some water is lost, the plant can
get its food requirements with less water. The
uncultivated soil near the plant may even be
robbed of its food and moisture by sidewise
diffusion streams. As W. Kraus showed, the
movement of salts in the Bechhold “phenom-
enon” is dependent upon evaporation at the
exposed surfaces (Kolloid Zeitschrift, 28, 161,
1921).

Another important factor is the rate at which
the soil water reaches the plant roots. This
must at least equal the speed at which moisture
is evaporated by the leaf system, otherwise the
wilting coefficient is reached and the plant
droops. In this connection Sir E. J. Russell,
director of the Rothamsted Experimental Sta-
tion, pointed out that the availability of
nutrients should properly ‘be measured by the
rate at which they reach the roots which ab-
sorb them: (J. Agri. Sci., 1, 327).

According to the Bechhold phenomenon,
cultivation of the soil immediately above
the roots (which is where cultivation takes
place) increases evaporation there and the
accelerated upward and sidewise diffusion
streams carry the essential water and food with
sufficient rapidity to favor plant growth.
Russell says (Trans. Faraday Soc., February,
1922) that a crop of wheat weighing with its
straw about four tons per acre, transpires
during its lifetime about 1,000 tons of water
per acre, the actual strength of the soil solu-

SCIENCE

197

tion varying from 0.0001 to 0.006 per cent.
according to treatment.

Dry weather usually comes when the plant’s
leaves are well developed; and in any event it
means a period of rapid evaporation from the
leaves. Hspecially then has cultivation been
found a life saver, and often an actual aid to
growth.

The remarks of Dr. Cyril Hopkins (quoted
by Dr. Frierson to support his view) that the
soil is “stirred after each rain to prevent evap-
oration, and thus store up sufficient moisture
in the soil to give the crop a good start,” do not -
militate against my view; for Dr. Noyes’ ex-
periments show that cultivation, by allowing
the plant to grow with less moisture early in
the season, enables it to enter the drought period
“with an accumulative reserve of soil moisture.”
This is a most important conclusion. It seems
to me, however, that the Bechhold phenomenon
of salt concentration or movement also ex-
plains why a plant may thrive on less water;
for this lesser amount of water, enriched by
diffusion, has the essential plant foods.

JEROME ALEXANDER
RIDGEFIELD, CoNN.

REPOSITORIES FOR SCIENTIFIC
PUBLICATIONS

To tHE Epitor or Science: Recent discus-
sion in ScrENCE as well as in other places is
indicative of the increasing interest in efforts
to extend limited funds so as to cover rapidly
expanding scientific writings or to curtail such
writings so as to bring them within the limits
of the funds.

This interest is considerably augmented by
the realization of workers in certain lines that
there is also a problem of storage space for
multitudinous papers and a kindred problem
of finding time and energy for reading such
as come to hand.

In the course of recent discussions with rep-
resentatives of the University of California
Press and the University of California com-
mittee on research I have been impressed with
the need for adoption of a general policy with
regard to certain features (at least) of scien-
tifie publications.

It is my understanding that the University

198

of California officials are about ready to adopt
for their publication material of all depart-
ments the settled policy of curtailing or ex-
cluding generally explanatory discussion which
is plainly redundant or needlessly explicit, and
of curtailing or excluding tabular, statistical
or other exhibitive matter which is likely to
receive little or no attention from most readers.
But, in order that such exhibitive material shall
not be lost to permanent record (where its
value may be far superior to mere textual dis-
cussion) it is expected that limited numbers
of copies of such matter will be mimeographed
or otherwise duplicated and placed in certain
repositories designated because of their accessi-
bility to those persons most likely to need such
records.

Such a plan seems to offer the best possibili-
ties for meeting the adverse conditions men-
tioned, but since it is probable that in many or
most cases the individuals or organizations con-
cerned will be expected to arrange matter for
deposit there is danger of much confusion in
the process of accumulation at points of
deposit.

Possibly the National Research Council can
give early assistance in the matter by obtaining
the consent of available institutions to act as
repositories and also by classifying them ac-
cording to local interests if that should seem
desirable. For example, an institution in
Indiana would not be very favorable as a place
of deposit for most marine material.

Provision should also be made for putting
deposited documents in fairly uniform pack-
ages. In the case of statistical tables such as
my own the ordinary typewriter sheets (8 x 11
inches) would probably be most satisfactory.
It would then be an easy matter for the insti-
tution of deposit to tie them up or put them
in clip binders for convenient and economical
storage.

If definite plans can be made for some such
dispersal they will surely greatly expedite the
issuance of papers using large volumes of
quantitative and statistical records. Such
papers may then get into print and into use
while still comparatively fresh. Furthermore
the worker in such lines will not have so much
reason to be discouraged by long delay in pub-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

lication, following the monotony (and some-
times dreary drudgery) of making, accumu-
lating and interpreting the records.
W. EH. ALLEN
Scripes INSTITUTION FoR
BIoLoGicaAL RESEARCH,
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

ALFRED GOLDSBOROUGH MAYOR

To THE Eprror or Science: When I saw the
name “Alfred Goldsborough Mayor” at the
head of Dr. Woodward’s most interesting and
appreciative notice of his late associate I sus-
pected a typographical error, but when I saw
the same name “Mayor” throughout the article
and found it the same in “Who’s Who” and
in the list of members of the National Acad-
emy of Sciences, I realized that a change,
which had escaped my notice, in the spelling
of this well-known name had been made by
the son of my old friend, Professor Alfred
M. Mayer, the charming and accomplished
professor of physics who for so many years
was the head of that department at the Stevens
Institute of Technology.

One would like to know the reason for this,
which may have been due: to the not infrequent
pronunciation of the original spelling as if it
were “Myer,” but this seems an insufficient
excuse for abandoning a form so long and so
well known in the world of science and art.

Besides the distinguished father of the late
biologist, his uncle, Frank Blackwell Mayer,
was an eminent artist who studied in Paris,
exhibited in the French salon, won a prize for
his paintings at the Centennial exhibition in
Philadelphia and made special studies of
Indian types in the west.

His father’s uncle, Brantz Mayer, was a dis-
tinguished historian and archeologist, the
author of numerous volumes and the founder
of the Maryland Historical Society.

Alfred M. Mayer also studied in Paris and
always exhibited a fondness for and even a
prejudice in favor of .French men, methods
and ‘books, and I had always assumed that the
family was of French origin, a hypothesis
which received some confirmation in the fact
that one “Constant Mayer,” a French artist,
came to this country about the middle of the

August 18, 1922]

last century and rose to distinction in his pro-
fession, though I have no evidence of his being
closely related to the Maryland Mayers.

By all of the latter, except the subject of
Dr. Woodward’s sketch, the name was invaria-
bly spelled with an “e” in the last syllable.
The future student of heredity is very likely
to be misled by this change, which seems un-
fortunate unless there existed some sufficient
reason, not apparent at this moment.

T. C. MenpENHALL
RAVENNA, OHIO

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Terrestrial and Celestial Globes, their history
and construction including a consideration
of their value as aids in the study of geog-
raphy and astronomy. By Epwarp LUTHER
STEVENSON, New Haven, Yale University
Press, published for the Hispanic Society of
America, 1921, Volume I, xxvi + 218 pp.,
95 plates; Volume II, xii + 292 pp., 72
plates.

These magnificent volumes present in a most
interesting way the development of globes
from earliest times up to the nineteenth cen-
tury. The first volume treats terrestrial globes
in antiquity, celestial in antiquity, globes of
the Arabs, globes of the Christian middle ages,
those constructed in the period of the great
discoveries, and in four further chapters globes
of each quarter of the sixteenth century. The
second volume discusses globes of the seven-
teenth and eighteenth centuries in two chapters
each, with a final chapter on the technic of
globe construction, including materials and
methods particularly of making the gores.

A bibliographical list, which makes no pre-
tense of being exhaustive, gives approximately
600 titles; an “Index of Globes and Globe
Makers” occupies 25 pages; and finally a “Gen-
eral Index” follows, occupying 16 pages. For
use as an ordinary index the inclusion of items
of the bibliographical list and names given in
the index of globes and globe makers would
have been highly desirable. As it is all three
indices must be consulted to determine whether
given items are mentioned in the work.

The section devoted to Arabic globes and
the section relating to globes in antiquity are

SCIENCE

199

based upon material of thirty years ago and
longer. There is more recent material, and
the use of modern works would have improved
these chapters. In particular no mention is
made of Suter’s great work on the mathemati-
cians and astronomers of the Arabs! which
includes the references of the Fihrist. Suter
mentions as writers on the use of the armillary
sphere, or on the planisphere or astrolabe,
Al-Sufi and Al-Fazari (p. 3) of the eighth
century, Al-Nairizi of the tenth (p. 45) and
also Al-Biruni, Al-Zarkali of the eleventh, and
Tbi- al-Bannah, whose activity extended into
the fourteenth century. Al-Zarkali’s instru-
ments were famous and one of his works dis-
cussing instruments was published in Latin
translation by Johann Schoner at Niirnberg in
1534.

With reference to the Greek conception of
a globular earth the works of both T. L.
Heath? and of the late Pierre Duhem® contain
the latest and best information by the highest
authorities on these matters. It may be of
interest to note that Theon of Smyrna C. 150
A.D. (ed. J. Dupuis, Paris, 1892, p. 287)
states that the Babylonians “explained celestial
phenomena” and were able “to predict celestial
phenomena to come, the Chaldeans by the aid
of arithmetical methods, the Egyptians by
graphical methods.”

The bibliography could easily have been ex-
tended to give more adequate conception of the
wide interest in globes, and the large amount
of literature bearing directly upon globes in
works of the sixteenth to nineteenth centuries.

Probably the most notable omission is that
of any reference to one of the earliest works in
the English language containing an extensive
discussion of both celestial and_ terrestrial
globes. Robert Recorde, an English physician,

1Suter: ‘‘Die Mathematiker und Astronomen
der Araber,’’ Abhandl. zur Geschichte der Math.
Wissenschaften, Vol. 10, 1900.

*7T. L. Heath: ‘‘Aristarchus of Samos, ...
A History of Greek Astronomy to Aristarchus,
ete.,’’? Oxford, 1913; ‘‘A History of Greek Math-
ematies,’’ Oxford, 1921, 2 vols. In Vol. II, pp.
17-18, Heath states that Archimedes wrote a
work on Sphere-making which is lost.

&“Le Syst8me du Monde,’’ 5 vols., Paris,
1913-1917.

200

wrote in English treatises on Arithmetic, Alge-
bra, Geometry and Astronomy which were the
most widely used of sixteenth century English
text-books on mathematics. The titles were
intended to be attractive: The Grounde of
Artes, the Whetstone of Witte, The Pathwaie
to Knowledge, and The Castle of Knowledge.
The last mentioned is the astronomical work,
published in London in 1556, and contains a
section on pages 35-60, “The Seconde treatise
of the Castle of Knowledge wherein is taughte
the makinge of the materiall sphere, as well in
sounde or massy forme, as also in ryng forme
with hoopes.” Recorde discusses the mounting
of such spheres as well as the use of them.

An earlier Englishman who deserves passing
mention is William Batecombe or Badecumbe
who is reputed to have written about 1420 two
works evidently on spheres: De Sphera
Solida and De Sphera Concava fabrica et usu.
The former of these works is reported by Bale
to have been in the library of Robert Recorde.

Another sixteenth century writer who de-
serves mention is Fr. Baroccius whose Cosmo-
grafia published at Venice in 1585 contains
material on globes and a passage (p. 227-228)
“vsi sumus globo terrestri, quem Gaspar
Vopelius Mathematicus anno 1553 ab ortu
Christi construxit.” No globe of this date by
Vopel is known; while Stevenson, following
Fiorini, ascribes an armillary sphere to one
Giovanni Maria Baroecius, it might equally
well be due to this astronomer.

The bibliographical list is unsatisfactory in
several points. The items are not included in
the final index; many items relate to works
not cited in the text, and the title as given fre-
quently does not indicate why the work should
be included; many treatises and discussions of
globes widely used and easily accessible in
New York are not included.

As an illustration of a title which does not
indicate the reason for its inclusion, take the
Cosmografia of Peter Smit. The 1720 edition
which is available to me here includes in the
title the phrase “Als mede het maken van de
Hemelsche en Aardsche Globe,’ but this is left
out in the bibliography.

A work on the globe which went through
three editions by 1661 is Pierre Bourdin’s

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

Traité de l’usage du globe terrestre, included
in his Le Cours de Mathématique (Bibl. Chem.
Math., 2 vols. 1921). Such a work should be
included.

Of English discussions of globes Sotheran’s
recent catalogue mentions two that are anony-
mous: The antiquity and excellency of globes,
26 pp., 1652, and Treatise of the Descriptive
Use of both Globes, 1718. I have an anony-
mous treatise in German, Hinleitung zur
Erkent. und Gebrauch der Erd und Himmels-
Kugeln, Niirnberg, 1767, which mentions Lowiz
and also a Professor Hasen in Wittenberg as
designers of the Homann globes.

In view of the distinguished author’s con-
nection with the Hispanic Society the refer-
ences to Spanish works treating globes are sur-
prisingly limited in number. Among Spanish
treatises on the subject which apparently en-
joyed wide popularity in the eighteenth cen-
tury may be mentioned Thomas Vicente Tosca’s
discussion. This appeared in the eighth vol-
ume (out of nine volumes) in the third edition
of Tosca’s Compendio Mathematico published
at Valencia in 1757; it is in the geography,
Libro IV, pp. 157-184, under the title, “De la
fabrica y uso del Globo Geographico, y de todo
genero de Mapas.” The writer treats the
making both of gores and of moulds.

A similar and contemporary German work
which went through numerous editions was
Johann Christian Wolff’s Elem. Math. Uni-
verse. The edition published in five folio vol-
umes in Verona, 1746-1751, contains De Globi
terrestri artificialis constructione et usu, in
Vol. IV and De Globo coelesti artifice, in Vol.
III, with discussion of gores.

No uncertainty need be entertained as to the
date when Lalande made his celestial globe
(II, p. 182), as in his Astronomie, Paris, 1792,
Vol. I, p. 247, Lalande says: “J’ai publié un
nouveau globe celeste en 1775.” On pages
616-617 of Vol. III Lalande discusses the man-
ufacture of globes. But more interesting is
the price list of globes in 1791 which he gives
in Vol. I, pp. Ix-Ixiii. The celestial and terres-
trial mounted, ete., of Robert of Vaugandy,
the two for 300 livres in size 1744 poneces; the
one foot size, corrected by Messier, the two
for 80 livres; 10 inch at 15 livres each. The

Avueust 18, 1922

then more recent globes of Bonne and Lelande
were sold in the one foot size at 100 livres
the pair; 10 inch at 18 livres; 8 inch at 10
livres; 6 inch at 7 livres. The prices are more
than double those quoted by Stevenson (II,
136) from Moxon, a century earlier.

Lalande cites among the enormous globes
one at Cambridge and one at Lyon by Piepus
de la Guillotiere. Lalande further states that
the finest of the large terrestrial globes is that
made in 1787 by D. Bergerin. The Cambridge
celestial globe was made, according to the
Encyclopedia Britannica (IX edition, Vol. X,
Globes, p. 683) about 1764 by Dr. Roger Long,
professor of astronomy and master of Pem-
broke College. This globe was 18 feet in diam-
eter, lined with tin. No one of these three
men is mentioned by Stevenson.

Nowhere does the author touch upon early
appearances of globes in America, North or
South. One would expect to find the earliest
references in Mexico or Peru; certainly in
North America globes must have been import-
ed in the eighteenth century and possibly even
constructed here. In the geography by John
Payne, revised by James Hardie, that appeared
in New York in 1798, there is a figure of an
artificial sphere and pages xxxi-xxxviii are de-
voted to the use of the globe; other references
could doubtless be found.

These additions have been made to indicate
the wide appeal which globes have made in
the past as instruments of instruction. Steven-
son’s work may well stimulate a revival of
interest in globes for instruction purposes.

The two volumes constitute an enduring
monument of American scholarship. The
press work. and the plates are up to the highest
standards of the finest presses of Europe. It
is to be hoped that students of astronomy and
geography in American colleges will make the
appearance of a second edition of more than
1,000 copies necessary. The author is to be
congratulated upon having added new laurels
to his crown in a field closely related to
cartography wherein the name of Edward
Luther Stevenson has so long stood first in
America and almost alone.

L. C. KarprnsKki

UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN

SCIENCE

201

SPECIAL ARTICLES
THE EFFECT OF ABSORBED HYDROGEN ON
THE THERMOELECTRIC PROPERTIES
OF PALLADIUM

Iv is well known that palladium will absorb
relatively large quantities of hydrogen under
the proper conditions. Palladium black ab-
sorbs the gas more readily and in larger quan-
tities than the solid metal but the latter will
contain several hundred times its own volume.'
The purpose of the work here described was to
determine the effect of the absorbed gas on the
thermoelectric properties of the metal.

The palladium used was in the form of a
strip 0.01 X 0.125 < 10 em. It was first an-
nealed in a vacuum at a temperature of 1,000°
C., and then used in a thermo couple with a
strip of platinum as the other metal. The cold
junction was kept at 0° C. and the hot junction
could be heated to various temperatures up to
300° C. This strip of platinum was used as a
reference metal throughout all of the deter-
minations.

After the thermoelectric power was obtained,
the palladium strip was heated to a tempera-
ture of about 700° C., in vacuo, and then
allowed to cool slowly in an atmosphere of
hydrogen. It is well known that palladium
will absorb hydrogen under these circumstances.
The thermoelectric power obtained with the gas
filled metal against platinum was less than with
gas free metal, amounting in one case, at 0° C.,
for instance, to 73 per cent. of the gas free
value. The palladium was then heated in vacuo
to a temperature of about 700° C., to remove
the hydrogen, and another determination
showed the thermoelectric power to have re-
turned to its gas free value. This process was
repeated several times, the gas filled palladium
having its thermoelectric power against plati-
num lowered each time hydrogen was absorbed,
and restored again to its original value after
the hydrogen had been removed.

A much greater decrease in the thermoelectric
power of palladium against platinum as a
reference metal was obtained when the palla-
dium was filled with hydrogen by the electro-
lytic method. The palladium strip was used as
the cathode in the electrolysis of water from a
very dilute solution of sulphuric acid. The

nascent hydrogen obtained in this way is very
active in penetrating the palladium. At 0° C.,
the thermoelectric power of the palladium, after
being exposed to nascent hydrogen, was in one
case only 28 per cent. of the value for the gas
free metal. The process of filling with hydro-
gen by the electrolytic method and then re-
moving the gas by heating in vacuo to about
700° C. was repeated several times and each
time the thermoelectric power was lowered by
about the same amount as a result of the ab-
sorption of the gas and restored to the original
gas free value upon removal of the hydrogen.

To obtain the largest effects it was necessary
to use the palladium soon after it had been ex-
posed to the hydrogen as the gas slowly dif-
fused away from the metal over a period of
several days. Also if the region containing the
temperature gradient of the gas filled strip
were heated during a determination of thermo
em f, the result was a removal of the hydrogen
and a restoration to the original gas free value
of thermoelectric power. During a determina-
tion of thermo e m f the conduction of heat
from the hot junction along the palladium
strip caused the evolution of some of the gas
and for the higher temperatures of the hot
junction the thermoelectric power approached
that for the gas free metal.

These results show that a monometallic eir-
euit consisting of gas free and gas filled palla-
dium will give rise to a thermo e m f when
the junctions are at different temperatures.
Since palladium is negative at the cold june-
tion of a palladium-platinum couple, and since
the absorption of hydrogen causes a reduction
in thermoelectric power, it follows that gas
filled palladium is positive to the gas free metal
at the cold junction. Data obtained for one
case in which the palladium was electrolytically
filled give the value of the thermo e m f in
such a monometallic cireuit as: EH = 0.126 —
0.0002362, where 4 is the temperature of the hot
junction, the cold junction being to 0°C. The
constants will depend upon how completely the
palladium is filled with hydrogen.

According to the electron theory of thermo-
electricity the thermoelectric power (e)
of a couple is given by the expression:
e=—K log—, where K is a constant, n, and n,

b

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1442

are the effective electron densities in the two
materials forming the cireuit. When n, is
larger than , the current flows from material
a to material 6 at the cold junction. The effect
of absorbed hydrogen, then, is to increase the
effective electron density in palladium.
R. M. Hommes
DEPARTMENT OF PHYSICS,
CoRNELL UNIVERSITY,
JUNE 10, 1922

THE EFFECT OF SPERM BOILED IN OXA-
LATED SEA-WATER IN INITIATING
DEVELOPMENT
In connection with certain experiments (the
results of which have not yet been published)
that were made in an attempt to analyze the
réle of calcium in the fertilization of the egg
of Nereis, the following results were obtained:
(1) Nereis sperm that have been treated with
oxalated sea-water are capable of fertilizing
normal Nereis eggs; (2) Nereis eggs treated
with oxalated sea-water are capable of fertiliza-
tion with normal Nereis sperm; (3) Eggs of
Nereis are capable of fertilization in oxalated
sea-water. Such eggs form jelly, maturate,
cleave and give rise to swimming larve in the
oxalated sea-water. These larvee show a vary-
ing per cent. of abnormalities; (4) Uninsem-
inated Nereis eggs treated with oxalated sea-
water (0.5 per cent. and above of sodium or
potassium oxalate in sea-water) form swim-
ming larve which show differentiation without
cleavage; (5) Sperm of Nereis boiled in 0.1
per cent. to 0.25 per cent. sodium or potassium
oxalate in sea-water are capable of initiating
development in the egg of Nereis. This last

result may be briefly considered.
Uninseminated eggs of Nereis obtained by
cutting a dry female are exposed to each of
three boiled sperm suspensions. These boiled
sperm suspensions are made up as follows:
one drop of dry sperm in 5 ce of sea-water,;
one drop of dry sperm in 5 ce of 0.53 M NaCl;
and one drop of dry sperm in 5 ce of 0.1 to
0.25 per cent. sodium or potassium oxalate in
sea-water. In each case the drop of sperm is
carefully placed in the bottom of a test tube
and the solution added. The test tube is then
quickly brought to the boiling point over a
flame and the suspension is kept at the boiling

Aucus? 18, 1922]

point for three minutes. To avoid any possi-
bility of living sperm being present, the wall
of the tubes are thoroughly flamed. The tubes,
together with one containing normal sea-water
kept at the boiling point for three minutes, are
then set aside to be used after from two to
twenty-four hours. For an experiment ten
drops of each suspension and ten drops of the
boiled sea-water are placed in dishes each con-
taining one drop of dry eggs. Two minutes
later to each dish are added ten ce of sea-
water. A control, uninseminated eggs in nor-
mal sea-water, was always kept. If the control
showed jelly. formation the experiment was
discarded. &

Uninseminated eggs of Nereis exposed to
these boiled sperm suspensions and to boiled
sea-water in this way give the following results:
boiled sea-water, no development; sperm boiled
in sea-water, no effect beyond small per cent.
of jelly formation, maturation and differentia-
tion without cleavage; sperm boiled in oxalated
sea-water, higher per cent. of differentiation
without cleavage. The hhighest per cent. of
swimming larve (differentiation without cleay-
age) ever obtained with the NaCl boiled sperm
was about 10 per cent.; the highest with oxa-
lated sperm was 32 per cent. And this propor-
tion usually holds.

The first experiment of this kind was made
early in June, 1914. At Dr. F. R. Lilhe’s sug-
gestion these experiments were repeated directly
under his supervision in his laboratory at the
Marine Biological Laboratory, Woods Hole,
Mass., during each Nereis “run” of 1915. It
gives me great pleasure to acknowledge my
indebtedness to him for many helpful sugges-
tions in this work.

Every possible precaution was taken against
contamination; every variation in procedure to
be thought of was tried; and throughout one
season, whenever Nereis eggs were to be had,
the experiments were studiously repeated.
Despite the precautions and the laborious repe-
titions, both during 1915 and subsequent sea-
sons, it is impossible to reduce the results to
any seeming order. Even after the elimination
of certain sources of error the results are
inconstant. The sources of error may be men-
tioned:

SCIENCE 203

1. Failure to use perfectly fresh eggs of
high cortical sensitivity. In 1915 I had great
difficulty in keeping the worms from shedding
their eggs when kept in the laboratory over
night. I therefore adopted the plan of keeping
the animals in the refrigerator. But this only
made matters worse, for the females shed very
quickly on removal from the low temperature.
Such eggs were of little value. Moreover, if
transfer from the cold sea-water to that at room
temperature be suddenly made not only are the
eggs shed but they are induced to form jelly
and maturate. Moreover, eggs from animals
that have been kept at low temperature are not
best for study of cortical changes. Such eggs
are apt to be polyspermie and in other ways
give evidence of change in the cortical reaction.
I have found that keeping Cumingia (dry) in
the refrigerator markedly changes the normal
cortical reactions. The eggs of both forms kept
in this way give good cleavage and swimmers,
but they do not give the best cortical reactions.
For the work with sperm boiled in oxalated
sea-water, then, one myst have fresh eggs taken
from dry females.

2. The oxalated sea-water should not be more
than twenty-four hours old when used. It is
best not to use stock solutions. Various experi-
ments were made with different molecular solu-
tions of the oxalates in distilled water plus the
addition of double sea-water to correct the
hypotony. But the distilled water solutions
seem to deteriorate. It was found best to add
from 0.1 to 0.25 grams of the oxalate to 100
ce of sea-water which was filtered before use.
But even with fresh eggs and the optimum
oxalated sea-water the results are far from
uniform.

Since hypertonie sea-water alone initiates
development in the egg of Nereis, we might
think that boiling the sea-water is alone respon-
sible for the results. But boiled sea-water
alone has no effect. Since oxalate in sea-water
initiates development, we might argue that it
is the oxalate in the sea-water rather than the
dead sperm that initiates development. How-
ever, oxalate alone to call forth development
must be present in greater amount than in the
suspension of sperm boiled in oxalated sea-
water.

204

My first thought in making these experiments
was that calcium is necessary for fertilization
on the assumption that in some way it holds
intact a substance loosely bound to the sperm
head which makes possible the reaction of the
sperm with the egg. Calcium free sea-water,
then, would bring about the loss of this sub-
stance and thus render fertilization impossible.
If, however, fertilization takes place in oxa-
lated sea-water, this assumption is untenable.

On the basis of Robertson’s work, which
indicates that “fertilizing” substance can not
be extracted in presence of calcium, we might
conclude that the Nereis experiments here cited
show that the effect of boiling sperm in oxa-
lated sea-water is to extract a fertilizing sub-
stanee from the sperm. This I do not believe
and for several considerations.

Though hypertonicity is not responsible for
the results here reported, nevertheless, boiling
must certainly increase the salt content of the
oxalated sea-water. Again, any amount of
oxalate present above that necessary to remove
calcium must increase on boiling. Moreover,
in the sea-water itself chemical changes ensue
through boiling. And finally, on boiling, the
sperm perhaps lose specificity—they act as any
foreign colloid which may induce development.

The results here reported might thus be due
to the total of these several factors each of
which alone is incapable of calling forth de-
velopment. I conclude, therefore, that the re-
sults here reported do not indicate that they
are due to a fertilizing substance extracted
from the sperm.

E. E. Just

Marinr BrouocicaAL LABORATORY,

Woops Hour, Mass.

THE WESTERN SOCIETY OF
NATURALISTS

THe annual meeting of the Western Society
of Naturalists was held in: Salt Lake City,
Utah, June 22-23, 1922, during the convoca-
tion of the Pacifie Division, American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science. Pre-
siding officers were Dr. F. B. Sumner, presi-
dent, and Dr. J. F. McClendon, secretary pro
tem.

The following officers were chosen at the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1442

annual election: H. S. Reed, president; Ches-
ter Stock, vice-president, and C. O. Hsterly,
secretary.

The program presented was as follows:

JUNE 22
PHYSIOLOGICAL PAPERS

The occurrence of essential oils
plants: MAXWELL ADAMS.

The influence of temperature wpon the germina-
tion of orange seed: H. S. FAWCETT.

Influence of gravity on the development of
new growth on horizontal shoots: F. F. Haba.

Mitosis in rhizopods and flagellates: C. A.
Koro. ;

Longevity of Artemia in natural and artificial
brines: E. G. Martin. '

Some quantitative aspects of growth: H. Ss.
REED.

Dendograph record of the redwood (with lan-
tern slides): D. T. MacDouea..

The occurrence of goitre in relation to the dis-
tribution of iodine: J. F. McCuENnpon.

in desert

HEREDITY AND EVOLUTION

The two chromosomes of Clarkia: L. L. Bur-
LINGAME.

Inheritance of flower color in Clarkia: L. L.
BURLINGAME.

The law of geminate species: D. S. JORDAN. ©

Theories as to the mode of evolution: J. P.
Lortsy.

The origin and inheritance of specific charac-
ters: F. B. SUMNER.

Darwinism—an analysis by. observation and
experiment: W. Li. TOWER.

JUNE 23
PAPERS READ IN JOINT SESSION WITH THE
ECOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA

The original grasslands of California: F. E.
CLEMENTS.

Why not conserve the marine mammals of the
Pacific? B. W. EVERMANN.

Factors limiting the distribution of Teredo
navalis in San Francisco Bay: C. A. Korom.

Climate of the Inland Empire in relation te
silviculture and forest fires: J. A. LARSEN.

Food and game fishes of the Snake River, Great
Basin: 8. B. Locke.

Wild bird life of the rookeries on the islands
of Great Salt Lake (with motion pictures): C. G.
PLUMMER.

A bog forest near Victoria: G. B. Riee.

CHESTER STOCK,
Secretary

NEw SrEr1xEs) c AN Ss ; $6.00
. Be ee FI AY 1q 9 99 ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.
VoL. LVI, No. 1443 Pripay, August 5, 1922 [RBI 3 bo SiInGHERCOPIEs ploy Crs Copiss, 15 Crs.

The MacLeod Vacuum Gauge |

Columbia University Modification

_ Besides retaining the features of. the original Mac-
Leod gauge, namely : Ease of reading and accuracy
to one ten millionth of an atmosphere, the Columbia
University modification, (see cut), is easier to manip-
ulate, simpler, smaller, more compact, and without
ground joints. :

Price of the improved form with sliding mm. scale,
rack, and pinion support and adjustment for
levelling bulb, without mercury..........: $37.50

American Rotary Vacuum Pumps have the follow-
‘ng advantages: Compact; operate with small ex-
penditure of power; require no attention when in
operation; not affected by chemically active gases;
not endangered if vacuum is broken.

No. 1—Capacity 5 cu. ft. per mm. Pressure limit
1/50” of mereury. Reeommended for general labo-
ratory work.

No. 144—Used with a supporting pump for exhaust-
\ing the bulbs of tungsten lamps and similar work.

No. 2—Used with supporting pump for high
vacua as required in X-ray work.

Write for new bulletin No. 288 which gives details
of above apparatus

NEW YORK CITY PITTSBURGH BRANCH

3rd Ave., 18th—19th St. 4048 Jenkins Arcade
ESTABLISHED 1851

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemical Reagents
Washington, D. C. Display Room, Suite 601, Evening Star Building, Pennsylvania Avenue and 11th Street.

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

RECENT ISSUES
IN GEOLOGY

The Briones Formation of Middle
California, by Parker D. Trask.
Price, 75 cents.

Genesis of the Ores of the Cobalt
District, Ontario, Canada, by Al-
fred R. Whitman. Price, 80

cents.

Geology of the Cuyamaca Region of
California with special reference
ito the origin of the nickeliferous
pyrrhotite, by F. S. Hudson.
Price, $1.25.

University of California Press
Berkeley, California.

BLAKISTON BOOKS

RICHTERS’S Organic Chemistry
Vol. I. 2nd Edition. Chemistry of the
Aliphatic Series. Cloth, $7.00.
Vol. Il. The Carbocyclic Series. $8.00.
Vol. Ill. Nearly ready.
PAULI’S Colloid Chemistry of the
Proteins
Tilustrated. Cloth, $2.25.
HATSCHEK’S Physics and Chemistry of
Colloids
4th Edition. Illustrated. Cloth, $2.25.
JENKINS’ Interesting Neighbors
A science Reader for youth.
Illustrated. $1.50.
ATWOOD’S Civic and Economic Biology
Illus. High School Text. Cloth, $1.68.
LEE’S Microtomists Vade Mecum
8th Edition. Cloth, $6.50.
MORRIS’ Human Anatomy
6th Edition. Illustrated. Cloth, $10.00.

P. Blakiston’s Son & Co.

PHILADELPHIA

ISIS

International Review devoted to the
History of Science and Civilization

Edited by GEORGE SARTON, D.Sc.
Associate of the Carnegie Institution

Harvard Library 183, Cambridge, Mass.

The chief feature of Isis is a Critical Bib-
liography of the History and Philosophy of
Science and of the History of Civilization.
The three first volumes (1882 pages) con-
tain about 5,620 bibliographic notes, 312 re-
views and 43 longer papers. Isis is the main
center of information on the History and
Philosophy of Science, and the organ of the
New Humanism. 2 or 3 parts complete a
volume within 12 to 18 months.

Parts t and 2 (454 pp.) of Vol. IV. have
appeared. Each volume costs 50 Belgian
francs (about $3) (ed. de luxe, from vol. II
on, 100 francs).

Publisher: WEISSENBRUCH

49 rue du Poincon Bruxelles, Belgium

“TURTOX” CATALOGS include

Aquaria Microscope slides,
Bird glasses (special for High
Charts Schools)
Chemicals Microtomes
Dissecting outfits Models

Earthworms (spe- Museum Prepara-
cial) tions
Entomological sup- Preserved Material

plies for Botany, Em-
Glassware bryology and
Lantern Slides Zoology
Life Histories Insect Mounts
Microscopes Skeletons
Microscope slides, Syringes, Injecting
(General) Vascula

and many other items.
Items in black type are our own special products.
We are Manufacturers and Preparators of
Biological Supplies.

. oe
Catalogues to Cover any or all of the above items
will be sent on request.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE
1177 EAST 88TH STREET, CHICAGO, ILL.

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS

I] Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI Avaqust 25, 1922 No. 14438
CONTENTS
The Record of Science: PrRorrssor WM.
IVVAYR NIE Rs STS EL O Be seece tee tee eat ea ene eee () 5)
The Depletion of Soils by Chemical Denuda-
tion: Dr. MILTON WHITNEY.............-.-..--.----- 216

Scientific Events:
The Pittsburgh Meeting of the American
Chemical Society; Exhibit of Optical In-
struments; Ventilating Code of the Amer-
ican Society of Heating and Ventilating
Engineers; The Aquarium of the Zoolog-

UCOUNS OCUEUY) NOs ONC ON -sscne eens eee 219
Scientific Notes! and) News:.....---2..---.--c----2noe =~ 221
University and Educational Notes................... 225

Discussion and Correspondence:
The Food Habits of Swordfish: PROFESSOR
J. S. Kinestey. Experimental Transfor-
mation of the Smooth-bladder of the Dog:
Dr. EBEN J. Carey. An Albino Mutation
of the Dematiaceous Fungus Brachy-
sporium Trefoli: Dr. Lee Bonar. A
Damp Chamber. for Microscopes: Pro-

FESSoR CLirrorp H. Farr. The Cost of

German Publications: PRoressor JAS.

WES ep EVO Wales ee erene eae heer obe enon este AD)
Quotations :

Science and; the’ Dropicss 2-2 228
Scientific Books:

Keyser’s Mathematical Philosophy: Pro-

NSS SOR): Grr eA tee MI Tea TOR see ree ae ne eee 229
Special Articles:

The ‘‘Winter Cycle’’ in the Fowl: Dr. J.

ARTHUR Harris and H. R. Lewis. The

Effect of X-Rays on Chemical Reactions:

The Fifteenth Annual Conference on Weights
anduileasures: ite Ri eee ee Sa. 232

THE RECORD OF SCIENCE?

One learns by adversity—at least such is the
popular belief, although the press dispatches
from Europe during the past few months would
seem to give the lie to this old adage. It used
to be my fate to encounter at frequent intervals
a genial friend of great distinction in the field
of physics and astronomy, long engaged in
high administrative functions, an alumnus of
this university—altogether a man of great
weight and substance, who endeavored each
time we met to overwhelm my cherished ambi-
tions by bringing forth with great gusto this
aphorism, “Bibliography is the platitude of
research!”’? So much did this phrase please
him that he paraded it on many occasions, and
I confess I used to dodge around the corner
to avoid its rotund and sonorous condemna-
tion of my own ways and works. I hope to
show you that bibhography is the foundation
of research, and that however level and flat
that foundation may be, however dull may be
the task of laying it deep and strong, no last-
ing and lofty superstructure may safely be
reared, save on the secure footing of a knowl-
edge of previous work done by others, a knowl-
edge resting necessarily even in the field of
science on the much despised labor of the
bibliographer.

There is
campus, I suppose, an impression—not among
students alone—that the various branches of
human knowledge are for practical purposes
divided into two groups, the laboratory sciences
and the book sciences. This is an extremely
convenient and easy grouping—and it has cer-
tain elements of truth in its facile cleavage of
the field of inquiry. But it is essentially inmae-
curate in that it ignores a fundamental factor
common alike to research with the microscope

prevalent on every university

1 Address at the annual meeting of the Michi-

gan Chapter ot Sigma Xi.

206

or the blow-pipe and research with the written
word or philosophic logie as its instrument.
That factor is the record of what has been
known and spread abroad by previous in-
quirers. The processes of human inquiry de-
pend fundamentally on memory—and in the
case of the pursuit of knowledge in our own
day on the record in print of what the race
has done or thought or attempted. It makes
little difference whether the inquiry be into
the morphology of the early Italie dialects of
the Latin tongue, or into the function of the
ductless glands of guinea pigs—the essential
processes are alike these: observation.and the
gathering of data by experiment or by com-
pilation; a study of the previous work done

in the same field with a critical examination .

both of processes and results; a synthesis from
one’s own observations and from the recorded
observation of others; and finally such refleec-
tion (or theorizing) on the results as may lead
to correlation of this piece of investigation
with the sum of human knowledge, perhaps
(occasionally) in a way to affect human activ-
ity. The so-ealled “book sciences” employ
methods in no way essentially different from
those long approved in the so-called “natural
sciences.” All of them alike depend on care-
ful study of previous work as an initial step
and on the publication of results as a final
process. No facile popular division can sep-
arate “book-knowledge” from “experimental
research.” Experiment without “book- knowl-
edge” is generally not research in the true
sense, even though it occasionally leads an
Edison into discoveries of untold value to the
world.

There is, notwithstanding, a justification for
this distinction popular among college students.
The manner of teaching the natural sciences
has been completely revolutionized in the last

_forty years. Every one knows that subjects
formerly taught from text-books are now
taught chiefly in laboratories. Emphasis is
now laid on accurate observation, correct
inference from observation, ability to report
the sum of observation succinctly and truth-
fully. An equipment elaborate in itself, im-
pressive in amount and cost, is properly
thought needful to the task of teaching the
natural sciences. Each student is considered

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1443

(I suppose) an embryo Pasteur or Rowland,
and is laboriously inducted into scientific meth-
ods by requiring him to develop manual dex-
terity in the use of instruments, and training
him to produce neat and correct note-hooks.
Naturally the mass of students is found in the
elementary courses. It is only the smaller
number resulting from a process of natural
(or at least academic) selection which ever
gets to the “journal club” stage, and becomes
personally aware of the existence of the enor-
mous and multifarious record of scientific
knowledge. That the method of teaching
should of itself influence the student’s concep-
tion of the subject-matter of instruction is
both natural and inevitable. That undue
weight should be given by their elders to man-
ner and form of presentation is quite another
matter. It is, however, impossible to escape
the conclusion that many a scientist thinks
that he is freed by the very nature of his work
from a supposed taint of bookishness. He
gives thanks that he is not as other men, as
these historians and philologians—or even this
librarian.

There is a real danger lurking in this atti-
tude; and we are not without evidence that
(whether from this source or more subtle
workings of the laws of auto-suggestion) this
tendency to pride himself on being strictly a
scientific and not a book bred a
habitual attitude of neglect of the record side
of scientifie inquiry which has already ‘been
disastrous in too many instances. The con-
viction that apparatus and laboratories are
essential—a perfectly sound and indeed a fun-
damental thesis—has somehow led to the no-
tion that they and they alone constitute the
requirements not only of instruetion, but of re-
search as well. This tendeney—and I do not
exaggerate 1t in the least—has made too many
folk unmindful of the long history of science,
has bred an attitude which can best be de-
seribed as almost wholly lacking in the historic
sense. And without a sense of the historic
setting of his work, a man is almost as hope-
less as is the man who lacks a sense of humor!
You can not argue with one or the other! In
fact I dare go farther and affirm that only by
the combinations of the historical and the ex-
perimental methods can any work of first-rate

man has

Auveust 25, 1922]

importance be produced in any field of knowl-
edge.

By this time, I fear you may be saying to
yourselves that whatever the vlatitude of re-
search may mean as applied to bibliography
the bibliographer is in truth indulging in
platitudes! No one need set up a man of
straw for the pleasure of knocking him over.
There is no point to my contention, if it be
true that students of the natural sciences in
America have rigorously employed both the his-
torical and the experimental method. The
great leaders have unquestionably done just
that. But how many great leaders have we
produced in America? May not one reason
for our surpassing excellence in the practical
arts and our rather secant array of great names
im pure science lie exactly in the absence of
the historical record of science from American
institutions in the past century? It is difficult,
perhaps one may say it is impossible, to get a
correct historical perspective without a really
good and strong library to furnish the means
of study. No amount of second-hand informa-
tion will ever take the place, for the real stu-
dent, of the original documents. This is just
as true in the pure and applied sciences as it
is in history, economies or letters. Imagine an
astronomer trying to carry on intelligent re-
search in the observational field alone, without
the great publications of the nineteenth cen-
tury at his hand for previous study and ocea-
sional consultation. Yet that is precisely what
scores of astronomers have done in this land,
and are doing to-day. The example might be
multipled ten-fold. Really good libraries of
scientific books are scarce enough in America
to-day. Before 1870 they did not exist, save
perhaps at Cambridge in Massachusetts. No
one of them is yet fully equipped to meet all
the reasonable demands of scientists for a
record of the progress of knowledge. I say
this from my own experience. For eight years
I labored—too often in vain—to serve the
scientists in the various bureaus in Washing-
ton with books they needed. My work was in
the third largest library in the world. This
fact is significant. May I enlarge upon it?

America is not a nation alone—it is a con-
tinent. Distances are enormous. Because Mr.
Henry E. Huntington has in San Gabriel in

SCIENCE 207

California a very rare early English book on
American fishes or plants, it does not follow
that it is of much use to a Harvard student
who requires the exact language of the original
description of a particular species. The ex-
traordinary collection of early botanical works
in the library of Notre Dame University is not
easily helpful to the botanists of the Bureau
of Plant Industry. These are but two con-
crete examples of the physical size of this land.
You know what it means to journey to Wash-
ington in the hot weather of summer—yet you
must make the trip in vacation to consult some
volume found in America only in the Library
of Congress and too rare or too fragile to per-
mit its loan. The situation is quite different
in Kurope. No university in the British Isles
is as far from the British Museum as Ann
Arbor is from New York or Washington.
Even from Aberystwyth or remoter Aberdeen
the trip is less in time consumed than from
here to Albany. No-French university pro-
fessor is so far in time from the Bibliothéque
Nationale as we from our national library, and
we (be it remembered) are much nearer than
our colleagues to the west and south. In Ger-
many the Prussian State Library and in Aus-
tria the great libraries at Vienna are relatively
near the universities. If one goes to London,
it is but eight hours to Paris. Between the two
largest libraries in the world a scholar can
usually find all he needs in the way of books.
I need not point out the contrast in this coun-
try and in Canada. These distances from great
library centers have not been without influence
on American scholarship.

In fact we may safely say that up to about
1900 there were very few strong scientific libra-
ries in America, libraries in which the record
of science could be traced with precision. There
has been an almost startling change since the
opening of this century. We have much yet
to do. We can overcome the obstacles of dis-
tance and youth only by further heroic efforts.
But we have most surely made progress. We
have now a round dozen libraries really strong
from an absolute standard.
growing stronger every day.

And they are
We have many
special libraries in various fields of science
which have been highly developed in their own
line—of these the most conspicuous is prob-

208

ably the great medical library of the Surgeon
General’s Office in Washington. We have
developed library technique and library service
far beyond those of Europe. But we have not
developed to the point where the histori¢e sense
is necessarily fostered and the historie instinet
adequately satisfied. That will come with time.
Meantime we may perhaps expect that instrue-
tion will take cognizance of this changed situa-
tion and will by its pressure aid to improve
further the resources in the way of books.

For, of course, instruction in historic method
and in the use of books as tools is utterly im-
possible without really good libraries. It is
folly to expect students—even advanced stu-
dents of high promise—to acquire a proper
attitude toward their predecessors and their
contemporaries without the publications of
both at hand in full numbers. It is useless—
or nearly so—to teach exact methods of ascer-
taining the present state of knowledge about
any particular problem, when you know it is
being worked on in New Zealand and South
Africa—and your library lacks the New Zea-
land and South African transactions and jour-
nals. I need not dwell on this painful fact.
You know more about it than I do. I suggest,
therefore, that the production of truly strong
men in your various lines of study depends to
a very considerable degree on a sufficient pro-
vision of books in our libraries here on this
campus. That provision depends on many
factors—of which money is by no means the
only one, as I hope to show you in the course
of these remarks.

For the publication of the results of ob-
servation in the field of science has taken many
(and frequently strange) forms. We ordinar-
ily think of books as just books—perhaps un-
consciously influenced by the manufacture or
the perusal of text-books. Ordinary mono-
graphs of the text-book type do, it is true,
make the staple contents of book-sellers’ stocks
and ordinary library shelves. But they are
perhaps the least important element in the com-
plicated record of science. They are too gen-
erally compilations—not the results of original
research. And their tendency to accumulate on
those very shelves has perhaps had no
small part in that neglect of the historic aspect
of seientifie inquiry to which allusion has just

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

been made. The large and imposing mono-
graph is the exception. True, it generally re-
mains valuable and “well-spoken-of” long

after the smaller books have passed to the
limbo of things with a “merely historical”
interest. Moreover, the hugh monographs
which have appeared in some scientific fields—
such things as Audubon’s Birds of North
America, for example, or the monumental pub-
lications of von Humboldt—have been so costly
that save ito a favored few they have been
merely names and names alone. I am inclined
to consider this costliness in relation to our
American libraries (until a recent date) a very
real factor in the neglect of the older literature.
It has simply cost too much to be known by
the average student.

Perhaps the most extremely particularized
form of monograph is the doctoral thesis.
Most folk whom I have met have lost interest
in theses within a few years after their own
have been prompitly” forgotten by their col-
leagues. It is hard to get any money for a lot
of dissertations—particularly for the thin
German products. The more extended French
dissertations usually masquerade as real books.
But historically theses for the doctorate have a
great value—particularly those printed before
1800. Few people recall the pleasing habit of
the earlier centuries which practically com-
pelled the candidate respondens to pay for the
publication of the work of his preses under the
guise of a doctoral dissertation. A few years
since a committee on botanical nomenclature—
or rather, members of it resident in Washing-
ton—began to torment me for the dissertations
of the pupils of Linneus, which, they averred,
contained some of the great master’s best work.
It was an interesting quest which became ex-
citing when I discovered a bundle of these
much desired little Upsala dissertations care-
fully tied up and labeled among a group of
several thousand Smithsonian exchanges from
Sweden. By the liberal use of the photostat,
reproducing copies from the Harvard Library
and the Torrey Botanical Club the series was
made, I believe, complete, and the committee
supplied with those original descriptions so es-
sential in determining nomenclature.

One of the extremely important groups
which has been too often denied our budding

Avueust 25, 1922]

scientists is that formed by the publication
of museums the world over. The catalogs and
series, the monographs and bulletins pub-
lished by important museums are in a very
real sense the foundation stones in many
branches of science. And it is not only the
great museums such as the British Museum,
the Berlin group, the National Museum at
Washington, the Peabody Museum at Cam-
bridge, which have issued vitally important
publications. The local and the special mu-
seums have issued publications both serial and
monographie which become of vital impor-
tance the minute a piece of work done here
demands them. You ean never foretell when
one of these will seem to some professor ex-
actly the one book in the world whose ab-
sence from our shelves is fairly blocking his
studies. He could not tell you himself a week
before his need suddenly arises that he would
ever care for such a report or catalog. But
he can make his wants known without any
difficulty when the demand comes, I assure you.
What has seemed a fairly good library up to
this morning instantly changes to a _ very
mediocre establishment in the afternoon after
a consultation of the catalog! It is a great
pleasure to be able to report to you that for
five years past the income of the Octavia Bates
Bequest has been chiefly devoted to the pur-
chase of museum publications, beginning with
those of the British Museum. We could use
a permanent fund twice as large to very good
purpose in supplementing this work, which
up to this time has only begun.

Museum publications are generally issued
in limited numbers and at high prices. It is
a serious task to secure them. But it is easy
compared to the job of getting the publica-
tions of expeditions. There is a peculiar fate
which attaches to the printing and editing of
the scientific results of expeditions of all sorts,
Usually some member publishes a popular nar-
rative which frequently sells rather well, par-
ticularly if any notoriety or celebrity attaches
to the expedition. This very quickly gets into
the libraries, as witness the host of popular
accounts of polar expeditions which you doubt-
less all know by name. Far different is the
fate of the publication of the scientific re-
sults. They are inevitably the work of dif-

SCIENCE 209

ferent men. The labor of preparation requires
vastly more time for some subjects than for
others. Parts of volumes appear from time
to time—members of the expedition go off on
other expeditions with their first work half-
done or half-published. Editors change, or die.
A fire in a store-room or a residence destroys
another’s notes—or even the specimens them-
selves. Years pass and the expedition’s pub-
lications are still unfinished—perhaps they are
never finished. Volumes remain unbound be-
cause of a missing part never issued, but still
hoped for. Publishers fail and the stock is
sold for paper. Governments grow weary and
withdraw subventions—then vote them again.
Heaven blesses a few scientific expeditions with
capable members, vigilant editors, a govern-
ment’s purse and completion of publication
within a few years. But they are few. I
could tell you tale after tale of heart-breaking
delays, inconsistencies, changes of forms, fail-
ures, deaths—and all involving untold trouble
for the librarian who must first get these
things and then take care of them. Altogether
a difficult and perhaps a useless job, you might
say.

But then—remember the momentous results
of some expeditions and voyages;—yes even
of some which have never been completely
published! One need only recall a few
names, La Perouse, The Challanger, the Beagle,
—need we go on? Take but one example—The
Wilkes Exploring Expedition. You reeall its
history, the famous controversy over the Ant-
arctic Continent, the numerous narratives, the
slow appearance of the stately folios contain-
ing the scientific results. This was the first
scientific publication on a large scale of the
government of these United States, and an
entire evening could be spent in a most inter-
esting way in detailing its vicissitudes. I need
mention only one volume to show its impor-
tancee—Dana’s great work on the Zoophytes, a
book so important that seventy years after its
appearance it is still regarded as fundamental.
But how few libraries own a copy of the orig-
inal text and plates! Printed in only 200
copies, never sold, distributed solely by reso-
lution of Congress, what chance has there been
for the newer libraries to secure a copy for
their clientéle? To be sure, not all expeditions

210

encounter such a series of accidents in publica-
tion as this of Wilkes—but as a class they
present a most difficult problem. They are
alike hard to get when issued, slow to appear,
slower to be finished, costly and even (occa-
sionally) not sold at all, but only given to a
select few. Later, years later, the task is much
harder. If I were given a round sum and told
to get in three years all the important scien-
tifie expedition publications of the past hun-
dred years—I should decline to promise sue-
cess in that time—perhaps even in five years.
But I can think of but few efforts so well
worth attempting.

If expeditions present difficulties alike to
_ the librarian and the scientist, what shall we
say of international congresses? That they
mark the progress of research in many lines
is a truism. They are absolutely needed—but
they too are very hard to get. In the first
place, there is no good list of them—even the
brief list issued about a year ago is most in-
complete. Then, the congresses seldom have
permanent offices and officers. They are held
at irregular intervals, generally in a different
place each time they meet. If one attend, he
generally gets the proceedings. But very sel-
dom does any library get a notice of the meet-
ing in advance. Usually the papers and pro-
ceedings are published in the place where the
congress meets—at Madrid one year, three
years later at Washington or Moscow or
Stockholm, or where you please. The pub-
lisher of course varies with each move of the
congress. An attempt to place an order for
subsequent issues usually fails of execution.
Three or five years is a long time for any sec-
retary to carry an order. So if some profes-
sor from Michigan goes to the geological con-
gress at Brussels this summer, we may get on
the mailing list—but otherwise we probably
shan’t—despite our efforts. The difficulty is
vastly increased by the habit of EKuropean gov-
ernments of giving subvention to private pub-
lishers to aid in printing reports of congresses
instead of issuing them through the govern-
mental printing office. So they may appear in
the publisher’s list as his own publications—
or they may never be listed anywhere. - It can
not be denied that the hunting down of inter-
national congresses adds zest to the librarian’s

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

life—but when you are held accountable by
science for the results of your hunting it
ceases to be sport. Then, too, local societies
and savants have a pleasing habit of offering
volumes to the congress as a sort of testimony
alike of their interest and of their own ac-
tivities. These are almost never to be con-
fused with the Report of the Congress itself—
except in the minds of booksellers who man-
age to introduce no end of confusion into
orders as a consequence. You may imagine,
therefore, that international congresses are a
bug-bear to library folk—a sore topic. You
may also imagine my own delight in securing
over one hundred and fifty reports of various
international congresses on my book-buying
trip last fall. Few acquisitions have given me
more solid satisfaction. And yet, I suppose
I have simply created more trouble for my-
self—every department will now demand that
these reports be made absolutely complete! In
the language of the street, “I can see my fin-
ish!” Partial success always brings its own
penalty.

Who originated the idea of the “Academy”?
Whoever he was, whether Plato in the groves
of Academe, or some Renaissance imitator, or
even the gentleman who conceived the Royal
Society, he let loose on mankind an institution
making for publication—if we appraise it in
no higher terms. And particularly in the
nineteenth century did the academy flourish
in print. Here again Europe has an advan-
tage over America, and advantage more of age
than of enterprise, of geographical smallness
as contrasted with continental sweep and range.
Most scientists in Europe have easy access to
files of academic publications, files which have
been slowly accumulated with the passing
years. Here we have had to work hard in the
past two decades to establish half a dozen
centers in which fairly complete series may be
found, a process still going on and proving
increasingly costly each year. But we must
continue and complete it. The interests of
American scholarship simply require at of us.
The greater academies are now well repre-
sented at Michigan, with here and there a gap,
it is true, but still with full ranks for the most
part. What to do about the minor academies
and societies from the whole world? That is a

Avaust 25, 1922]
vexing question to which I may refer again in
a few moments. I pause merely to remark
that a minor academy is minor only so long
as you do not want its transactions in your
own work.

And last in this array of forms of scientific
publication comes the largest. group of all,
newest and most insistently demanded, the
journals. To me the rise of the special peri-
odieal devoted to the interest of a special group
is one of the most significant social phenomena
of the past fifty years. Let no one here think
that this tendeney to periodical publication is
confined to science or to the more learned
groups. By no means—the brick-layer, the
barber, the banker, the baker, the builder, the
book-binder (to keep to one letter only) all
have their journals fully as much as the biolo-
gist, the botanist, the biochemist, or even the
bibliographer. And they ail have to be ordered,
entered, paid for, cataloged, bound, and stored.
Periodical publication is the one modern form
for telling the world what everybody has done
and what other people think about it. We
take in over twenty-two hundred journals in
the University Library. A goodly number—do
you say? Well, it is just about half what
other libraries of our size subseribe for, and
about a quarter of what the Library of Con-
gress receives each year. Perhaps the medical
faculty is satisfied with its four hundred and
sixty-six journals received. But I fear no
other group really has enough. Certainly that
great department loosely known as the social
sciences does not have at hand here anything
like an adequate supply. I see no end to this
modern form of publication. Every quarter I
read with sadly disappointed hope the record
of “Births and Deaths in the Periodical
World” appearing in the Bulletin of Bibliog-
raphy. The births always outnumber the
deaths and the marriages of journals. My one
consolation is my firm conviction that wood-
pulp paper has a very definite limit of sta-
bility. But then I reflect that some chemist is
sure to discover some process of preserving
this wood-pulp mass for an indefinite period.
There is no way out.
tions, reviews and proceedings we have ever
with us in ever increasing numbers. These the

SCIENCE

Journals and transac-.

211

investigator simply must have. Can he have
them all at hand currently and in bound form?
Obviously not, unless we multiply our library
budgets about ten-fold, and our storage quar-
ters five-fold.

This leads us very naturally to consider this
problem of supplying the full record of science
to our men of science. It is not a local prob-
lem merely. It is also a national problem.
The difficulties in the way are partly those of
finance, partly those of time, partly competi-
tion, not alone among American libraries, but
with those of Japan and China, of South
America and South Africa, of New Zealand
and Australia. Very much of the material
required by this group before me was pub-
lished in but a small edition, running from a
couple of hundred in the case of certain very
costly books, to a thousand or more for certain
journals. In their beginnings journals and
transactions are frequently issued in only suf-
ficient numbers to meet the actual number of
subscribers. You all know how the waste-
basket yawns for odd numbers, and what
chances of destruction stray copies must run,
between careless or absent-minded owners,
house-maids, janitors, the frugal house-wife
and the rag-man. Wars and disasters inter-
vene to reduce the numbers of copies in exis-
tence. I have no hesitation in saying that the
possibility of securing sets of certain very
much valued books and journals is diminishing
even to the vanishing point with each year that
goes by. The world war was destructive of
reserves, caused restriction in the number of
copies printed, and increased enormously the
cost of printed matter of all sorts. In some
eases known to me no copies were printed be-
yond the actual home demand, totally ignoring
foreign or enemy subscribers. I know of one
American journal which actually printed last
December one hundred and fifty copies less
than its regular subscription list, because paper
took a sudden jump in price and only the stock
on hand was used. This sort of thing makes
the task of securing sets anything but easy.
The chief source of supply is the libraries of
deceased professors as they come on the mar-
ket—and professors who own and bind long
files of journals and transactions are becoming

212

rarer with the high cost of living and the de-
creasing amount of shelf space in modern
houses and apartments. The necessity of
quick action ean not be stressed unduly in view
of the present circumstances. It is not a ques-
tion any longer of waiting for a favorable op-
portunity. Rather are we faced with the ne-
cessity of getting what we need whenever the
chance comes up. The competition from the
newer countries and the newer libraries is
keener every year. Thirty years ago there was
no large scientific library west of us—not one.
Now we may mention the Universities of Chi-
cago, Illinois, Wisconsin, Minnesota, Iowa,
Nebraska, California, Leland Stanford, Wash-
ington, and the John Crerar Library, without
even exhausting the list of institutions of the
first rank—for special libraries in a small field
are equally dangerous competitors for the val-
uable books and sets in their own line. In
those same thirty years South America, South
Africa, Japan, Australia, and Canada have
come into the field eager to provide their scien-
tists with the record of science. McGill Uni-
versity bought just before me last fall very
many sets of journals long on our list of
desiderata. I found Japanese buyers had been
everywhere with the government purse to draw
on. The fact is that we must both hasten our
own purchases and combine with our neighbors
if American learning is to be kept on an
equality with that of Europe.

The need of cooperation and of a policy
looking to the elimination of certain forms of
competition is brought home to me more
keenly each year. We should be able, it would
seem, to agree on certain fields which we can
cultivate intensively, securing everything of
moment in them, as far as we can raise the
funds. Certain general works, general society
transactions, journals of a wide appeal we
must all have. But must we—to take a con-
crete case—all try to buy the publications of
the smaller and less important societies? May
not half a dozen sets spread over the country
suffice with the development of the inter-
library loan and of photo-duplicating ma-
chines? Can we not agree with Chicago,
Urbana, Cleveland, Columbus, Pittsburgh, and
Ithaca on a limit in purchasing such local
society publications? Thus we might all save

SCIENCE

[ Vor. LVI, No. 1443

money, keep down prices, gain in the total
number of sets available, and lend freely be-
tween ourselves. This matter seems to me
highly important—even vital to our success.
It has been much discussed among librarians.
There would be small difficulty in arriving at
a policy, if it were a matter to be decided by
librarians alone. But it concerns far more
deeply the faculties of the various universities
and their governing boards. We librarians
can not, for example, get together and agree on
a limitation of our several fields of specializa-
tion. We must first gain adherents to a policy
of limitation, then form an agreement through
some joint committee of professors, and finally
secure the consent of boards of regents and
trustees. The facts are most clear and patent.
We simply can not all have everything. There
isn’t enough to go ’round, nor money enough
to buy everything. What we must do, then,
in common sense is to stop trying to get every-
thing in each library, and go for the things
we can reasonably expect to secure in co-
operation with our neighbors. If any one
doubts the success of this plan, I refer him to
the results of the agreement between the Chi-
cago libraries made in 1895 and carried out
since to the lasting benefit of scholarship.
There is every reason why we should enter into
a similar pact with neighboring libraries.

For what is our position now? We have no
near neighbors among universities. We stand
half-way between Cornell and Buffalo on the
east and Chicago and Northwestern on the
west. Western Reserve, Ohio State and Ober-
lin to the south are in a manner comparable
with our collections—but as yet hardly formid-
able rivals. There is practically nothing north
of us—(Remember that I am speaking now of
libraries whose chief interest is the furthering
of scholarship). We have two large public
libraries fairly near—Detroit and Cleveland,
both owning certain valuable special collec-
tions, and both likely to specialize in tech-
nology and in the applied sciences. There are
a few specialized libraries of distinction, such
as that of the Western Reserve Historical
Society at Cleveland, which owns what is prob-

‘ably the best collection on our Civil War in

existence. We may safely say, then, that we
have fewer neighbors on whose aid we may
rely than have the eastern universities or those

AveusT 25, 1922]

in the northern Mississippi Valley. But there
is no reason that I can see why we should
attempt to duplicate and surpass, for exam-
ple, the White Collection of Folk-lore in the
Cleveland Public Library, or the Burton Col-
lection of local history and genealogy in the
Detroit Public Library. Nor should we fail to
agree with the Chicago libraries and those of
Ohio (and even perhaps of western New York
and Ontario) as to certain fields of learning
which they will leave to us, and others in
which we shall not aim at more than general
works. I should like to see the Association of
University Professors, or some other body rep-
resenting various universities, take up this
problem ina practical fashion. The inter-
library Joan and the photostat put the re-
sources of each library at the disposal of its
neighbors. Why neglect so obvious a step as
conference and agreement on subjects of spe-
cialization? But, of course, when it comes to
self-denying ordinances, only the men con-
cerned may pass them. It is not for me to
say what any group of professors shall forego.
It is “up to” them in the interest of science as
a whole and of its progress in our land. I can
merely point out one very obvious step to be
taken—and perhaps push a little towards that
step.

Our present situation here at Michigan is
better than it was, but it is far from satisfac-
tory. We have a goodly list, for example, of
journals and society transactions—but we have
far too many gaps in the sets, gaps that are
very hard to fill. We have a fair lot of expedi-
tion publications—likewise badly defective. We
have a few of the great monumental publica-
tions, and very incomplete sets of congresses
and museum publications. I have already indi-
cated that our collections of monographs are
reasonably large. But we are distinctly worse
off in the pure sciences and the applied sci-
ences than we are in literature or American
history. We are far worse off as regards eco-
nomics or philosophy than in scientific fields.
We have a faculty and a student body prob-
ably third in size in America. But the library
ranks about eighth among universities in num-
ber of volumes. We have, therefore, very much
to add before our book collections correspond
to our size in students and faculties. Harvard,
for instance, has more than four times as many

SCIENCE

213

books as we have, Yale three times as many,
and Columbia and Chicago about twice our
holdings. This is a situation not to be reme-
died in a day—even were adequate funds in
hand, as I have tried to show. All the more
reason, therefore, why we should think clearly
and plan wisely, and should cooperate with
our neighbors.

The country as a whole is in about the same
relative state as regards the record of scientific
work the world over as is the University of
Michigan. That is to say, by diligent effort we
ean find the obscure and the rare, and without
too much trouble can secure the obvious and
ordinary run of books. But taken as a whole,
the country is decidedly worse off than most
European lands. Our scientists are at a dis-
tinet disadvantage when it comes to books as
compared with those of Great Britain, France
or Germany, or even Italy. We can only over-
come this handicap—which is very real—by
the most careful bibliographic work and by
lending freely.

This brings me to that aspect of our topic
which was probably most in my friend’s mind
when he spoke so disparagingly of bibliog-
raphy. Most people ignore the practical and
administrative side of the bibliographer’s
labors. They think of him merely as one who
records what other men have done and said.
That he is also the gatherer of material, and
to a large extent its interpreter they forget.
But the major function of the scientifie bib-
liographer is that of indexing the record of
science, after he has got it together. This is a
highly technical job and has been very well
done in certain fields, and very poorly done in
others. Perhaps medicine has the best indexes.
The great catalog of the library of the Sur-
geon-General’s Office in Washington forms one
of the most remarkable pieces of index work
ever attempted. The Index Medicus is a won-
derful clue to the currently appearing work
of the world of medicine. Both have proven
frightfully expensive. Both are due to the
energy of one man, John Shaw Billings, and
the extraordinary skill and devoted patience of
his associate and biographer, Fielding H. Gar-
vison. Neither has ever paid expenses and
both have had a hard struggle to survive,

214

despite government aid and the purse of great
foundations. Even now we are threatened
with a curtailment, if not the ending, of the

catalog. Such books are very costly, but with-
out them, science must perforce halt its
progress.

The pure sciences have had no such Amer-
ican record as these two in medicine. The
Royal Society’s Catalogue of Scientific Papers,
appearing years after their publication, is the
most conspicuous British effort. And then,
after years of incubation, came the great inter-
national undertaking known as the Interna-
tional Catalog of Scientific Literature, bearing
the Royal Society’s imprint and prepared by
regional bureaus under an international coun-
cil. This was to begin with the twentieth cen-
tury and to be the final word in all branches
of pure science. Now unhappily the world
war has brought it to a standstill, probably to
an end. But it was already breaking down of
its own weight before the war. The plain
speaking of the few librarians who were given
any chance to be heard between 1895 and 1900
was utterly disregarded. They insisted, if I
remember correctly, that without some pro-
vision for cumulation of entries at intervals of
about five years the scheme would defeat its
own ends. And their prophecy was amply
justified before the war brought a halt to the
already huge series of annual volumes. The
set remains a monument to the difficulties of
the task of an adequate index to the published
work of scientists.

A few attempts at overcoming this difficulty
by ecard bibliographies have been made. Of
these the most conspicuous is the work of the
Concilium Bibliographicum in the field of
zoology, paleontology and anatomy—an under-
taking which is likewise due to an American,
the late H. H. Field. This is, as you doubt-
less know, a classified bibliography printed on
cards, arranged in very minute sub-divisions of
the decimal classification. When you once
learn how to use it, it is most valuable. It
usually takes us about a year to train a girl to
file the cards, and how long it may take a
zoologist or an anatomist to learn how to use
them to full advantage, I can not say. This
bibliography was also stopped by the war, but

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

will soon be resumed with money supplied by
the Rockefeller Foundation. I know of no
other current card subject bibliography on a
sunilar scale.

The tendency has been, on the whole, to de-
velop special annual reviews in rather minute
sub-divisions of the general field. Of these by
far the most conspicuous have been the
Jahresberichte appearing in Germany. There
was formerly no end to these special bibliog-
raphies—often accompanied by critical notes
on the scope or value of the works listed. They,
too, were mostly stopped or curtailed by the
war, and various efforts have been made to
revive them or produce new ones. You each
know your own favorite bibliographical re-
view—but do you know the difficulties under
which they have labored and which are well-
nigh fatal at the present day? The chaotic
condition of the world from an economic or
political viewpoint is well matched as regards
the record of science. Publication of results
is still slow and defective—indexing of pub-
lications is more so. The obligation rests on
America to provide both the means of publi-
cation and the proper clue to recorded work.
I can hardly stress this too strongly, as I neces-
sarily am forced to take a broad and general
view of the whole situation. If the needed
indexing of scientific (and indeed all learned)
literature is to be done at all—it must be
financed in this country. I can think of noth-
ing more important for the attention of the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science than this very problem of adequate
successors to those special and general indexes
which have been so useful and which are now
either suspended or definitely dead.

May I, as a layman, venture a suggestion to
you who are experts? I feel that most of you
tend to ignore in the organization of your
work of instruction any presentation of two
things which help to mark a scientist of real
distinction. The first of these is a knowledge
of how to use to the full the various biblio-
graphic tools provided. It seems to me that
such instruction in their use is a real necessity
—perhaps not for elementary classes, but cer-
tainly for any study of an advanced character.

Aveust 25, 1922]

The loss which comes from an ignorance of
what has been done on any given problem is
pathetic—loss of time, unnecessary labor, dis-
couragement. It is a loss which can be avoid-
ed by very simple means. The gain which
comes with full knowledge of previously pub-
lished results is uncounted. It marks the suc-
cessful from the halting start on any task.
The complexity of the bibliographic indexing
in most fields is so great that there is real
need for formal instruction in handling biblio-
graphic tools. No one of you ignores instruc-
tion in laboratory method. Should he overlook
the need of instruction in bibliographic meth-
od? The second of my two marks of distine-
tion is a broad, general view of the history,
methods and scope of his subject, what in my
youth the Germans used to eall “Eneyclope-
die.” Few men are willing to take the time
from their own particular researches to lecture
on a general introduction to their subjects.
But I venture to point out that precisely such
a broad, sweeping view of the whole topic is
what the younger men need most. It can be
given only by one whose reading has been
wide, whose grasp of the whole subject is firm,
whose judgment is matured, and whose experi-
ence entitles him to speak with authority.
What in a master makes disciples? What
qualities in some men enable them to found a
real school? Is it not precisely that grasp of
method, that sense of relations of parts to the
whole, that historic view and that prophetic
insight which comes from a deliberate attempt
to survey the whole of one’s subject, to weigh
its importance, to contemplate not alone its
past but its present and future? My sugges-
tion is that students should not be left to pick
up either bibliographic method or a general
view of their subject from incidental allusion
or chance comment. The need of both is too
great and too serious to warrant the indiffer-
ence or neglect which they now seem to en-
counter.

To sum up, then, this attempt at some reflec-
tion on the record of scientific inquiry, par-
ticularly as it concerns us at the present hour
and in this university: We have made a fair
beginning at providing our men and women
with the printed record of the more immediate
past. We have at least the rudiments of a

SCIENCE

215

good collection of the important work of the
remoter periods. We know rather precisely
the direction which our efforts in buying
should take, and more than a little as to the
difficulties in our path. We are ready to do
our part (I take it) in any cooperative scheme
for furnishing to this Great Lakes region a
fuller measure of books and journals. We
know the imperfections of our bibliographic
tools. (We have most of them in constant
use!) And we stand ready to contribute in
this field also our own share of cooperative
labor. In other words—we know our defects
and we are trying to overcome them, and all
we need is time and money—and perhaps
wisdom!

What of the future? What may we hope
for in twenty years, supposing no great dis-
aster checks our labors?

We may, I believe, expect to find here
(available to a large region) the major aca-
demie and society publications in absolute
completeness. We may further expect at least
double the present amount of journals, both
current numbers and bound files. We shall be
part of a regional group of libraries, owning
our share of the minor society publications and
journals, with a fairly complete whole ready
for rapid use, distributed by air-mail in re-
sponse to wireless telephone requests, every
few hours. It ought not to take a man here in
1930 any longer to get a book from Columbus
or Chicago than it now takes him in many
European libraries—that is, six to twenty-four
hours. We shall have a completed printed
list, kept up to date, of all the periodicals and
transactions (and perhaps all the books)
available both in the libraries of our region
and the whole United States. (This is almost
in sight now! With two hundred thousand
dollars it could be done in two years’ time!)
We should have also a bibliographic equip-
ment which will furnish with the minimum of
effort a practically complete list of all articles
and books on any topic, arranged in inverse
chronological order, the latest to appear com-
ing first. This is solely a matter of organiza-
tion and money. It represents merely the
marshalling of a sufficient number of trained
people to supplement work already begun on

methods already worked out. It means ap-

216

plying the method of storing linotype bars and
using them as needed, for example, in the
cumulation decade by decade of the Royal
Society’s International Catalog. This work
could be organized for the future in three -years
and printing of the first two decades of the
twentieth century finished in five or less. I am
less sure that it will come than I am confident
of the future provision in the way of books.
But if and when the key to the record does
exist, then no budding scientist may fail of
confidence in his start, of the help in his
labors as they go on year by year which comes
from knowing what has been done and what
is being done by his fellows. We shall have
them ready at hand—not alone the record in
print of human efforts to comprehend the uni-
verse, but also such an effective and useful key
to that record that we may reverse the old
saying, and affirm he who reads may run.

Wma. WARNER BIsHOP
May 26, 1922

THE DEPLETION OF SOILS BY
CHEMICAL DENUDATION

Tue rate of chemical denudation of soil and
rock material has been of vital interest to geol-
ogists and soil scientists. The geologist has
been interested in an attempt to establish a
unit of time for estimating the age of the
ocean, the time periods of geologic processes
and incidently the time periods of the life of
man, animals and other forms of life on the
globe. He has been ably assisted by hydro-
graphers and oceanographers. The soil scien-
tist has been interested in relation to time
measurements of soil productivity and of meth-
ods to be taken to prolong the life and the en-
durance of the soil for the agricultural needs
of the people.

Unfortunately the vast amount of informa-
tion that has been collected has been based
mainly upon the translocation of material in
true solution, disregarding all material in col-
loidal solution. The results of the methods
used have shown surprisingly little siliea,
alumina and iron lost from the soil in com-
parison, for instance, with the amount of
potash lost. In fact, the soil scientists have
assumed that the three first named elements,

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

which form by far the larger proportion of the
soil, remain in the soil because of their slight
solubility. There has been a lack of evidence
of any considerable loss of these through solu-
tion.

The hydrographers have determined, from
the average composition of the soluble salts
carried to the sea, that SiO, constitutes 8.60
per cent., Al,O, and Fe,O, together constitute
0.64 per cent. and K,O 2.13 per cent. This
gives a ratio of one part of potash to 4.4 parts
of silica, alumina and iron. As the ratio of
potash to silica, alumina and iron in igneous
and in shale rocks is about 1 : 25, there is an
apparent selective loss of potash; that is, the
loss of potash is relatively much greater than
the loss of the main soil constituents. From
this fact, together with the fact that plants
appear to have the same selective power of ab-
sorption of potash in much greater proportion
than of the original proportion of the main
soil constituents, soil scientists have taken a
very pessimistic view of the length of time the
soil will remain fit for agricultural use.

Opinions have been advanced by some that
our most productive soils will only last for one
hundred and fifty years or so without replace-
ment, because of this selective loss of plant
food material due to their greater solubility
and assuming further that the silica, alumina
and iron are removed in very small proportions
from the soil because of their relative insolu-
bility. Such is briefly an outline of the situa-
tion up to a short time ago.

If silica, alumina and iron are removed from
the soil in proportion to the loss of the so-
called more soluble salts the losses could not
be determined by chemical analysis any more
than the removal of a cartload of soil would
affect the chemical composition of the material
that remains. Recent investigations of the soil
colloids by this bureau suggest that this may
be actually what takes place. It would appear
that, in the breaking down of the silicates to a
point where the potash goes into solution, silica,
alumina and iron also go into solution in the
same proportion as they bear to the potash
content in the original material. There is,
however, this very important difference which
has not heretofore been recognized or properly
appreciated and that is that the solution of

Aveust 25, 1922]

silica, alumina and iron is a colloidal solution
as distinguished from the true solution of the
so-called soluble elements.

The methods devised for separating colloids
from soils for analysis and study, and the
methods for the determination of the amount
of colloids in soils have apparently opened up
a new and vast field of research, the results of
which will undoubtedly throw a broader light
upon the subject of chemical denudation.

In my paper on “The Origin of Soil Colloids
and Reason for the Existence of This State of
Matter,” published in Screncz, December 30,
1921, I called attention to the fact that in the
mechanical analysis of soils under microscop-
ical control practically the smallest particle of
matter is .0001 mm. I advanced the opinion
that complex silicates of such small diameters
contain relatively so few molecules that when
brought into contact with water the bombard-
ment of the water molecules shatters the min-
eral particles, the electrolytes going into true
solution and the silica, alumina and iron going
into colloidal solution, the colloids thus formed
reabsorbing much or all of the electrolytes,
which puts these electrolytes themselves in
large part into a colloidal state.

It is difficult to conceive how the electrolytes
can be dissolved out of silicates at ordinary
temperatures and pressures without coneeiving
that the whole thing breaks down into a dis-
solved mass. In fact, direct evidence of this
is to be found in the dry grinding of silicates
in the ball mill. If this fine ground material
is brought into contact with water, soluble salts
go into solution as determined by conductivity
or chemical test, and at the same time there is
released a relatively large amount of colloidal
material. What the exact ratio is between the
potash, for example, which has been released
from the silicate rock, and the silica, alumina
and iron in the resulting colloids formed has
not been determined.

Soil colloids in suspension of a gram to the
liter give the appearance under the ultra micro-
scope of minute droplets immiscible with the
surrounding water capable of indefinite sus-
pension. In larger concentrations the droplets
appear to coalesce, forming a jelly-like mass
which settles to the bottom of the vessel. These

SCIENCE

217

soil colloids have a distribution equilibrium,
however, between the colloid and the surround-
ing water, involving silica, potash and other
electrolytes to a notable extent, but affecting
the iron and alumina only to an inconsiderable
extent.

We have a general idea of this distribution
equivalent in the case of analyses which have
been made of the truly soluble material that
passes through ‘the Pasteur-Chamberlain filter
in comparison with the colloidal material which
remains on the outside of the filter tubes. The
colloidal material of the Miami silty clay loam
soil collected on the outside of the tubes on a
strictly water-free basis carries 54.15 per cent.
$i0,, 28.03 per cent. Al,O, and 13.39 per cent.
Fe,0,. These together add up 95.57 per cent.
of colloidal material. The content of K,O is
2.89 per cent., giving a ratio of potash to silica,
alumina and iron of 1 : 33. In the dissolved
salts which have passed through the filter tube
there is 10.4 per cent. SiO,, 2.9 per cent. Al,O,
and Fe,O,, making 13.3 per cent., while the
K,0 content is 8.1 per cent., giving a ratio of
1: 1.6. The salts of the river waters of the
United States contain on the average 8.60 per
cent. of Si0,, .64 per cent. of Al,O, and Fe,O.,
making a total of 9.24 per cent., while the K,O
content is 2.13 per cent., giving a ratio of
1: 44.

The average analysis of igneous rocks as
given by Washington on a strictly water-free
basis shows 60.14 per cent. of Si0,, 16.32 per
cent. of Al,O, and 7.84 per cent. of Fe,O, and
FeO calculated to Fe,O,. This makes 84.30
per cent., while the K,O content is 3.27 per
cent. This gives a ratio of potash to silica,
alumina and iron of 1 : 25.8, as compared
with the ratio of 1 : 33 in the case of the
Miami soil colloid as above. The composition
and ratio of potash to silica, alumina and iron
in shale rocks is nearly identical with the
igneous rocks.

The average composition of deep marine
sediments (“red clay’) on a water-free basis,
excluding sea salts and shells, shows according
to Steiger 54.48 per cent. SiO,, 17.15 per cent.
Al,O, and 10.36 per cent. of Fe,0, and FeO
calculated to Fe,O,. This makes a total of
81.99 per cent., while the K,0 content is 3.07

218

per cent. This gives a ratio of potash to silica,
alumina and iron of 1 : 26.7 or very neatly
the ratio in the igneous rocks. The “terrigenous
clay” of the deep marine sediments has a rather
larger content of Si0, and a somewhat smaller
content of K,O, giving a ratio of 1 : 36.4.

The average composition of the soil colloids
shows somewhat less Si0, than is contained in
igneous rocks but considerably more Al,O, and
Fe,0,, indicating probably that much of the
quartz from the disintegrating rock remains as
such in the soil. On the other hand, it is seen
that the marine sediments have gained in SiO,
over the soil colloid for which we ean offer at
present no explanation.

An examination of the Miami silty clay loam
soil shows the following very interesting figures.
If we assume a weight of 3,500,000 pounds per
acre foot, the composition on a water-free basis
with 81.11 per cent. of SiO, shows 2,838,850
pounds of SiO, per acre; Al,O, at 10.46 per
cent. gives 366,100 pounds per acre; Fe,O, at
2.80 per cent. gives 98,000 pounds per acre,
while K,O at 2.27 per cent. gives 79,450 pounds
per acre. The amount of soil colloid at 19.3 per
cent. gives 675,500 pounds of colloid per acre
foot. The SiO, content of this colloid amounts
to 365,780 pounds, the Al,O, 189,340 pounds,
and the Fe,O, 90,449 pounds, while the K,O
content of the colloid is 19,522 pounds per acre.

The total soluble salts of the Miami silty
clay loam soil collected after passing through
the Pasteur-Chamberlain filter, after treatment
of one part of soil to five parts of water,
amounts to 60 parts per million of the soil.
The SiO, in soluble form in this soil collected
under these conditions is therefore 22.43 pounds
per acre and the Al,O, and Fe,O, 6.16 pounds,
while the K,O is 27.16 pounds per acre.

This bureau has determined from observation
of river waters the presence of colloidal mate-
rial but has made no analysis to determine the
amount or composition of this colloid. Unfor-
tunately, in all of the river analyses that have
been made the amount of silica, alumina and
iron in colloidal solution owing to the lack of
methods has not j#een determined and has not
been included iz the evidence presented of
chemical denudation. It seems likely that the
colloids carried by the rivers approximate in
composition the soil colloid and arguing from

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1443

the figures above given pertaining to the Miami
silty clay loam soil the 2.13 per cent. of K,O
and the 9.24 per cent. of silica, alumina and
iron as reported for the average river water
gives only one part of the story. If the ratio
of 1 : 1.6 of potash to silica, alumina and iron
of the soluble salts is changed to the ratio of
1 : 33 as in the colloidal solution, then in addi-
tion to the soluble potash, silica, alumina and
iron as reported in the river water analyses, we
will have a colloidal solution carrying, in its
dry parts, 2.89 per cent. of potash, 54.15 per
cent. Si0,, 28.03 per cent. Al,O, and 13.39
per cent. Fe,O,.

The total additional amount of potash in the
colloidal matter carried by the rivers, as com-
pared with the total amount of potash in true
solution, and the total amounts of Si0,, Al,O,
and Fe,O, carried in this colloidal matter, as
compared with the amounts carried in true
solution, can not be determined without further
investigations and further determinations of
the material carried by the river water. If we
knew the amount of soluble material in the
river water, the amount of colloidally dissolved
material and the amount of unaltered rock
fragments there would still be one item which
would make comparison difficult and would be
seemingly difficult to evaluate, and that is the
amount of CO, that enters from the air and
from decomposing organic matter, which would
combine with some of the constituents notice-
ably with lime, either in the soil or in the river
water. It seems likely, however, from the con-
sideration of the facts given that this would be
a small factor.

Until we evaluate all these factors and par-
ticularly until we determine the actual loss
through chemical denudation of silica, alumina,
iron, potash and other electrolytes in the col-
loidal state carried by the rivers, we are in no
position to even speculate as to whether chem-
ical erosion is a selective process which might
change the chemical composition of the soil or
whether materials leave the soil in about their
original ratios which would not change mate-
rially the chemical composition of the soil
upon which water has acted.

Mitton WHITNEY
BUREAU OF SOILS,
U. 8. Derr. or AGRICULTURE,
WASHINGTON, D. C.

Aveust 25, 1922]

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

THE PITTSBURGH MEETING OF THE AMERI-
CAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY

(American Chemical Society News Service)

From an industrial standpoint the meeting
of the American Chemical Society in Pitts-
burgh from September 4 to 8 will be one of
the most important scientific gatherings ever
held in this country. It will be of particular
interest and value to the automobile industry.
Among the important inventions which will be
publicly described for the first time is a
new zine oxide, much smaller in particle size
than any zine oxide heretofore made, the work
of Frank G. Breyer, chief of research for a
New Jersey zine concern. This pigment used
in the tread of automobile tires gives almost
twice the wear of tires containing ordinary
zine oxide.

Dr. Thomas Midgley, Jr., and T. A. Boyd,
of Dayton, Ohio, will give a demonstration in
Carnegie Hall of how various fuels detonate
and explain how “knocking” may be reduced
by the use of various compounds. Their work
is of great importance, inasmuch as it prob-
ably will be the basis, in the future, of building
automobiles of much greater power and
inereased efficiency in the use of fuel.

Nearly all the sixty-four local sections of
the society, located in nearly all the states, will
be represented at the meeting. From 1,500 to
2,000 chemists are expected to attend.

Dr. Charles L. Parsons, secretary of the
society, who has just returned from Europe,
where he attended the International Confer-
ence of Pure and Applied Chemistry, held at
Lyons, France, the last week in June, says that
European scientists are watching American re-
search work with great interest, but that very
few, if any, will attend the Pittsburgh meet-
ing, as economie conditions, particularly on the
continent, make it almost impossible for Euro-
pean chemists to travel. They, however, are
keeping in close touch with Americal chemical
progress through the literature of the society.

As an instance of the respect of European
chemists for American procedure and methods,
Dr.. Parsons pointed out that the Commission
on Nomenclature of Mineral Chemicals decided
that the “Formula Index” printed in Chemical

SCIENCE

219

Abstracts, one of the publications of the Amer-
ican Chemical Society, be the standard for
scientific purposes the world over. Likewise,
the abbreviations used in Chemical Abstracts
were adopted as the standard by the Commis-
sion on Chemical Periodicals.

The chief address of the Pittsburgh meeting
will be by Dr. Edwin E. Slosson, author of
“Creative Chemistry,” on “The constructive
chemist.” Dr. Slosson, who was for many
years literary editor of The Independent, is
now editor of Science Service, Washington.

Information received by the American Chem-
ical Society indicates a tremendous increase,
since the war, of interest in chemistry as a
result of the work being done to explain in
“every-day” language some of the achieve-
ments of this science. These results seem to
be directly due to efforts of Dr. Edgar F.
Smith, president of the society, to get Amer-
ican chemists to speak before clubs of men and
women, social and business, throughout the
country, and through the writings of such men
as Dr. Slosson, Ellwood Hendrick, of New
York, and others.

At the Pittsburgh meeting further steps to
advance improved methods of teaching chem-
istry, from the high schools up, will be taken
by the Section of Chemical Education, of
which Dr. Smith is chairman.

EXHIBIT OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

ARRANGEMENTS are now being completed for
the exhibit of optical instruments. and appara-
tus to be held at the National Bureau of Stand-
ards, Washington, in connection with the an-
nual meeting of the Optical Society of America,
October 26 to 28, 1922.

The leading manufacturers of optical equip-
ment have already signified their intention of
participating. However, the exhibit will not
be limited to standard commercial types. Indi-
viduals and research laboratories are also
invited to exhibit special research apparatus.
Brief descriptions of instruments and_ their
purposes supplied ‘by the exhibitors will be
printed in the program and published later in
the minutes of the meeting in the Journal of
the Optical Society. The exhibit of new ap-
paratus will thus constitute just as definite a

220

contribution to science as a paper communi-
cated to the meeting. The authors of papers
communicated at this meeting are urged to
supplement their papers by an exhibit of ap-
paratus in case such an exhibit is suitable and
practicable.

Exhibitors are urged to prepare their ex-
hibits and deseriptions so as to give them the
maximum educational value.

Exhibits must be listed with the committee
at the Bureau of Standards not later than Sep-
tember 20. Blank entry forms for this pur-
pose may ‘be obtained from Professor C. A.
Skinner, chairman, Exhibit Committee, O. S. A.,
Bureau of Standards, Washington, D. C. Ex-
hibits may ‘be installed from October 24 to 25
and installation should be completed not later
than noon, October 26.

Irwin G. PRIEST,
Secretary

VENTILATING CODE OF THE AMERICAN
SOCIETY OF HEATING AND VEN-
TILATING ENGINEERS

Tuer code for the ventilation of public and
semi-public buildings adopted by the American
Society of Heating and Ventilating Engineers
in 1915 has been submitted to the American
Engineering Standards Committee for ap-
proval as the American standard.

This code was prepared by a committee of
the American Society of Heating and Ven-
tilating Engineers in response to requests from
state commissions, legislative ‘bodies, public
health agencies and other organizations for
suggestions to be used in the preparation of
legislation and regulations regarding the heat-
ing and ventilation of buildings. The com-
mittee endeavored in this code to cover the
general features most essential to the public
health, in such a manner as to protect the pub-
lic with the least possible expenditure for
equipment and without unnecessarily limiting
the methods of obtaining the desired results.

Section 1 of the code relates to general
matters pertaining to all classes of buildings;
the remaining three sections relate to schools
and colleges, factories, and theaters, respec-
tively.

Among the states that have utilized parts of
the code in their regulations are: Illinois,

SCIENCE

-[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

Indiana, Kansas, Massachusetts, Minnesota,
New Jersey, New York, Ohio, Pennsylvania,
Utah, Virginia and Wisconsin. A thoroughly
representative special committee, including all
the important organizations interested in the
subject, has been appointed by the American
Engineering Standards Committee to investi-
gate the status of the code in the industry and
the desirability of approving it. Sidney J.
Williams, chief engineer of the National Safety
Council, is chairman of this special committee.

The American Engineering Standards Com-
mittee would be glad to learn from those inter-
ested of the extent to which they make use of
this code, and to receive any other information
regarding the code in meeting the needs of the
industry.

THE AQUARIUM OF THE ZOOLOGICAL
SOCIETY OF LONDON

We learn from Nature that the Council of
the Zoological Society of London has approved
a scheme for the establishment of an aquarium
at the Zoological Gardens in Regent’s Park.
The aquarium is to be built under the Mappin
Terraces, but so installed as to be invisible from
the front, and will not interfere with the pan-
orama of the terraces. It will consist of a
erescentic gallery, 400 feet long, lined with
tanks on both sides. ‘Those on the outer curve
will have both daylight and electric illumina-
tion, while those on the inner curve will be
lighted by electricity only, a method used at
the Berlin Aquarium with complete success.
The gallery will be divided into three parts—
fresh water, marine, and tropical aquaria—
with special ponds for seals, diving birds, and
trout. The tanks are to be constructed with
the bottoms, sides and backs of slate, and the
fronts of polished plate glass set in a frame-
work of white marble. They will be provided
with rock-work arranged to suit the needs of
their inhabitants. The water will be kept con-
stantly circulating, flowing into the tanks from
high-level reservoirs and thence through a
series of underground filter-beds, on the plan of
those in use at the New York Aquarium, to low-
level reservoirs, from which it will be pumped
by electric pumps to the high-level reservoirs
again. Special arrangements are to be installed
for heating the tanks and for regulating the

Aueust 25, 1922]

temperature of the water in the different
aquaria. The plans for the gallery have been

prepared by Messrs. Belcher and Joass, and’

the circulation, electric plant, and the heating,
lighting and ventilating systems have been de-
signed by Sir Alexander Gibb. The scheme
will cost about £50,000, and should provide
London with the best-equipped and most care-
fully arranged aquarium in Europe.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Av the forty-first annual meeting of the
Society of Chemical Industry, held in Glasgow
in July, Professor R. F. Ruttan, of MeGill
University, presided, and made an address on
“Some aspects of industrial and scientific re-
search.” Professor H. E. Armstrong, of
London, gave the first of the Messel Memorial
lectures.

Mr. Carvin W. Rice, secretary of the
American Society of Mechanical Engineers,
sailed from New York on August 23, to rep-
resent the engineers of the United States at
the Engineering Congress to be held in connec-
tion with the International Exposition at Rio
de Janeiro. A dinner in his honor was given at
the Engineers Club on _ the
August 21.

evening of

Dr. Henry S. Drinker, formerly president
of Lehigh University, has been appointed the
successor of the late Joseph T. Rothrock as a
commissioner of forestry in Pennsylvania.

Mr. C. A. SussMILCH, principal of the New-
castle Technical College (N. S. W.), and for-
merly lecturer in charge of the department of
geology and mining, Sydney Technical Col-
lege, has been elected president of the Royal
Society of New South Wales.

Tue Royal Dutch Institute of Engineers has
appointed as honorary members Sir Charles
Parsons, inventor of the Parsons steam tur-
bine, Mr. J. H. Tudsbery, secretary of the
Institution of Civil Engineers, London, and
Mr. Charles le Maistre, secretary of the Inter-
national Hlectro-Technical Commission in
London.

Tue seventieth birthday of Dr. S. Goldflam,
the Polish neurologist and alienist, has been

SCIENCE

221

celebrated, a special volume of “Neurologie
polonaise” being dedicated to him.

Dr. Rem Hunt, of the Harvard Medical
School, Boston, has been elected on the edi-
torial board of Physiological Reviews for 1922.

At the recent meeting of the International
Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry, as has
already been noted, Sir William J. Pope was
elected president of the union, and it was de-
cided that the next meeting should be held in
Cambridge, England, on June 17, 1923. Dr.
Wilder D. Baneroft, professor of physical
chemistry at Cornell University, was elected
vice-president for America, succeeding Dr.
Charles L. Parsons, secretary of the American
Chemical Society, whose three-year term of
office has just closed.

On May 24, a Hawaiian Section of the
American Chemical Society was organized
with the following officers: C. C. James, chair-
man; S. 8. Peek, vice chairman; R. Q. Smith,
secretary; Guy R. Stewart, treasurer; Frank
T. Dillingham, councilor.

At the convention of the Western Psycho-
logical Association held at Stanford Univer-
sity on August 4 and 5, the following officers
were elected: President, Edward C. Tolman, of
the University of California; vice-president,
J. Edgar Coover, of Stanford University; sec-
retary, Edmund 8, Conklin, of the University
of Oregon.

Dr. Euwoop Mzap, professor of rural insti-
tutions, University of California, has been
made an honorary member of the American
Society of Agricultural Engineers. Dr. Mead
recently returned from the Hawaiian Islands,
where he went on the invitation of the
Hawaiian Home Commission to investigate
conditions on the islands.

Dr. W. W. Cospuentz, physicist of the Na-
tional Bureau of Standards, spent part of the
month of June at the Lowell Observatory ex-
tending his radiometric investigations of last
year at Flagstaff, on the stars and the planets.
The observing conditions were favorable and
progress was made both in the accumulation of
new observational data and in tests of new
apparatus. The observations were carried out
with the 40-inch reflector.

222

Dr. Wm. F. Proury, of the department of
geology of the University of North Carolina,
has accepted a part time engagement as pale-
ontologist for the West Virginia Geological
Survey, in the study and description of the
fossil faunas of the Devonian, Silurian, Ordo-
vician and older beds of that state. Dr.
Prouty is spending the summer yacations in
the field making collections and stratigraphic
studies. For the present year his work will be
in Mercer, Monroe and Summers counties in
connection with Mr. Dayid B. Reger, assistant
geologist, in the latter’s studies of the geology
of this area. Dr. John L. Tilton’s paleonto-
logie work for the West Virginia Geological
Survey will be eonfined principally to the
study of the fossil fauna and flora of the
Monongahela and Dunkard beds of the state.

M. T. Jenxrys, of the U. 8S. Department of
Agriculture, has been detailed to the Agricul-
tural Experiment Station of Iowa State Col-
lege for cereal breeding experiments on the
relative value of the pure line theory of select-
ing new varieties of corn.

Unoper the direction of Professor Clifford H.
Farr, of the botany department of the Uni-
versity of Iowa, the city officials and residents
have cooperated in a campaign to rid the city
of ragweed for the eradication of hay-fever.

Dr. Donatp D. Van Styxe, of the Rocke-
feller Institute, is on his way to China, where
he will participate in teaching, for six months,
at the Medical School at Pekin.

Dr. Louis A. Baurer gave a lecture on the
“Harth’s magnetism and electricity” before the
Royal Society of Western Australia, at Perth
on June 21, as also before the Philosophical
Society at Wellington, New Zealand, on July
5. During an inspection trip to the Carnegie
Institution Magnetic Observatory at Watheroo,
Western Australia, he completed arrangements
for continuous earth-current observations.
This observatory will be the only one com-
pletely equipped in the southern hemisphere
for investigations relating to the earth’s mag-
netism, atmospheric electricity, and the earth’s
electrie currents. While in Australia he fur-
thermore made arrangements for special mag-
netic and electric observations at various sta-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

tions during the solar eclipse of September 21,
1922. At Wellington Dr. Bauer attended a
specially-called meeting on July 4 and 5 of
the Samoa Observatory Honorary Board of
Advice. Arrangements were perfected for
further cooperation in the maintenance of the
Samoa Observatory at Apia by New Zealand,
the British Admiralty and the Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington. Dr. Bauer returned to
Washington the middle of August.

As has been noted here, Professor Santiago
Ramén y Cajal, having reached the age limit,
has retired as incumbent of the chair of normal
histology and pathology of the Madrid Med-
ieal Sehool. The Journal of the American
Medical Association says: “The whole country
has rendered tribute to the great scientist,
bestowing on him every distinction and honor,
the greatest, perhaps, being the award of the
Echegaray medal. This was presented to him
in the Royal Academy of Sciences by the king,
who delivered a speech overflowing with
respect and love for the illustrious Spaniard,
who has brought so much prestige to his coun-
try. A number of cities have designated
Ramén y Cajal as their adopted son; many
others have named streets after him, and prizes
have been established in his name. The goy-
ernment performed an act of greater impor-
tance in introducing a bill for the construction
of a building for the Cajal Institute, which
was organized February 20, 1920. The bill
carries an appropriation of a million pesetas
($155,400), divided into four sums which will
be spent annually from 1922 to 1925 on the
building designated as Cajal’s Biologic Insti-
tute. An appropriation of 50,000 pesetas
($7,770) a year is made for maintenance,
including the 10,000 pesetas ($1,540) now pro-
vided for Cajal’s laboratory. The work of the
institute will be directed by a board of trustees
presided over by Cajal.”

Proressor H. J. Hampurcer, the distin-
guished physiologist of the University of Gro-
ningen, Holland, will give the first series of
Charles E. Dohme Memorial lectures at the
Johns Hopkins Medical School on October 10,
11 and 12. This lectureship has recently been
established by Mrs. Charles E. Dohme as a
memorial to her husband, the late Charles H.

Aveust 25, 1922]

Dohme, a well-known manufacturer of pharma-
ceutical products. It is the purpose of the
donor to have presented in these lectures dis-
coveries which intimately concern the fields of
chemistry, pharmacy and medicine. Professor
Hamburger has chosen for the title of his lec-
tures, ‘The inereasing significance of perme-
ability problems in physiology and pathology.”

Proressor ALBERT PEerry BrigHam, of Col-
gate University, gave a course of lectures on
“The American Domain and the American
People” before the Oxford University School
of Geography from August 10 to 16.

Rouurn D. Sauispury, since 1892 professor
of geographical geology and since 1897 dean
of the Ogden School of Science at the Univer-
sity of Chicago, died on August 15, aged sixty-
four years.

Epwarp M. HipHerrr, formerly expert in the
department of agriculture, bureau of chem-
istry, Austria, member of the Academy of
Science of Vienna, died on July 24, aged sixty
years.

StepHENSoN Percy Situ, known for his
work on Polynesian ethnology, has died at
New Plymouth, New Zealand, at the age of
seventy-two years.

Accorpine to the regulations of the “Van’t
Hoff Fund” founded in 1913, the foundation
in Amsterdam under the supervision of the
Royal Academy of Sciences appropriates an-
nually allotments to investigators in the field
of pure and applied chemistry. The amount
available for 1923 is about twelve hundred
Duteh florins. The committee in charge con-
sists of A. F. Holleman, president; S. Hooge-
werff, A. Smits and J. P. Wibaut, secretary.

THE seventh summer meeting of the Mathe-
matical Association of America will be held at
the University of Rochester, Rochester, New
York, on Wednesday and Thursday morning,
September 6 and 7. The American Mathe-
matical Society will meet in Rochester on
Thursday afternoon and Friday, September 7
and 8. A joint dinner will be held on Thurs-
day evening at the Oak Hill Country Club,
the future site of the university. Professor
R. C. Arehibald, the president of the associa-

SCIENCE

223

tion, has been invited to give a report at this
time on European conditions, based on his six
months’ traveling in Europe. The sessions of
the association on Wednesday will be held in
the Hastman Building, at 10 A.M. and 2 P.M.
The session on Thursday morning will be held
at 9:30 A.M. at the Research Laboratory of
the Hastman Kodak Company. <A short cham-
ber concert will be given for the members of
the association and the society in Kilbourn
Hall, of the New Eastman School of Musie,
at 4:30 P.M. on Wednesday. An automobile
ride on Thursday afternoon will precede the
joint dinner.

Tuer autumn meeting of the British Iron and
Steel Institute will be held at York on Sep-
tember 5 to 8, when it is expected that ten
papers will be submitted for discussion. In
addition to an excursion to Rievaulx Abbey
and Castle Howard, visits have been arranged,
with special trains, to the works of the Staveley
Coal and Iron Company, near Chesterfield, and
of the Parkgate Iron and Steel Company at
Rotherham.

In connection with the National Colonial
Exhibition to be held in September at Mar-
seilles, a “Semaine Internationale” has been
organized for the purpose of bringing together
geographers, explorers, ethnologists and nat-
uralists, whether French or of other nations,
who are in sympathy with French colonial
achievements. The program will include visits
under suitable guidance to the exhibition gal-
leries, public lectures and technical meetings,
social functions and geographical excursions,
and the congress, which is presided over by
Prince Bonaparte, will last from the twenty-
second to the twenty-eighth of September. The
charge for tickets of membership is 25 frances,
and those attending will be able to travel for
half-fares on the system of the Paris-Lyon-
Mediterranean Railway.

Tue Imperial Department of Agriculture
for the West Indies has been amalgamated with
the West Indian Agricultural College, and the
head office of the department has been trans-
ferred from Barbados to Trinidad.

THE London Chemical Society has agreed to
supply copies of the Annual Reports on the

224

Progress of Chemistry, Vol. XIX, to members
of the American Chemical Society at a reduced
rate. Any member can obtain a copy of the
1922 Annual Reports by sending his order,
accompanied by a remittance of seven shillings,
to S. E. Carr, assistant secretary, Chemical
Society, Burlington House, Piccadilly, London,
W. 1, England. All orders must be in by
January 1, 1923, as it is necessary for the
society to know the number of copies desired
in advance of publication. Each applicant
should make known the fact that he is a mem-
ber of the American Chemical Society.

We learn from the Eaperiment Station
Record that a scientific commission has been
appointed by the French government to study
the agricultural possibilities of French Nigeria,
especially that portion lying between Bamoko
and Timbuctoo. The construction of a huge
dam in this vicinity is contemplated for the
irrigation of the Upper Niger Valley. A gen-
eral agricultural reconnaissance will be made
by the commission, with special emphasis on
cotton, covering a period of from twelve to
eighteen months. Dr. R. H. Forbes, formerly
of the Arizona University and Station and who
has just concluded his engagement with the
Société Sultanienne d’Agriculture of Egypt,
has accepted an appointment as agronomist on
this commission.

Aw additional appropriation of $15,000,
with legislation to guarantee its effective ex-
penditure, will be asked of the next legislature
by the Minnesota State Board of Health, for
the supervision of the state tourist camps. The
importance of extreme care in sanitation mat-
ters among tourists is shown in a report cover-
ing the period from 1913 to 1921, showing that
365 cases of typhoid fever in Minnesota were
contracted outside the state while the victims
were on vacation trips.

THE valuable collection of books on forestry,
photographs, slides and papers gathered by
the late Dr. Joseph T. Rothrock, the “Father
of Pennsylvania Forestry,” has ‘been given to
the State Department of Forestry, in accord-
ance with a wish expressed by the former com-
missioner. The collection was turned over to
Dr. Joseph 8. Dick, chief of the research divi-
sion, who worked under Dr. Rothrock, and he

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

is arranging them to be placed in the depart-
mental library. Among the books is a copy of
Gray’s Botany, which Dr. Rothrock carried
with him during his service in the Civil War.
Some of the photographs in the collection were
among the first taken by Dr. Rothrock when
he was arousing public interest in conserva-
tion and bringing about the organization of
the Department of Forestry.

THE state legislature of South Carolina has
appropriated $50,000 for experimental work,
about half to be expended at the college and
the remainder at the substations and for co-
operative experimental work on different soil
types in the state.

THE University of California announces that
its students have won two of the four prizes
offered by the Glass Containers’ Association
in a national competition for the most valuable
paper on canning or any feature relating to
canning or preserving. The first prize was
won by Lal Singh, a Hindu student who gradu-
ated from the College of Agriculture with the
class of 1921. His paper on “Factors con-
cerned in manufacturing fruit products’ is
said to be a distinet contribution to the knowl-
edge of jams and jellies. The paper is to be
published as a series of articles in the trade
magazine, Canning Age. J. R. Herman, a
graduate student in the College of Agriculture,
won the third prize in the national competition
with a paper on “The utilization of grape
products.” The second and fourth prizes went
to students in eastern universities.

We learn from Nature that the Ramsay
Memorial Fellowship trustees have made the
following awards: Ramsay Fellowship of the
value of £300 tenable for one year, but renew-
able for a second year, to Dr. R. W. Lunt, of
the University of Liverpool, and of University
College, London, for the continuation of his
work at University College, London, on chem-
ical effects of electromagnetic waves over the
frequency range, 10°-108 cycles; Glasgow
Ramsay Fellowship of £300 to Mr. J. A. Mair,
of the University of Glasgow, who will con-
tinue his research on the chemistry of the ter-
penes; a special fellowship of £300 for one
year to Mr. W. Davies, who has already held
a Ramsay Fellowship for two sessions and

Aveust 25, 1922]

whose work, especially that on the preparation
of synthetic reagents from the toluie acids,
shows special promise; Danish Ramsay Fel-
lowship to Mr. Kristian Hoéejendahl, of the
University of Copenhagen, who will pursue his
research in the University of Liverpool; two
Swedish Ramsay Fellowships, to Dr. J. O. G.
Lublin and Mr. A. W. Bernton; and two Nor-
wegian Ramsay Fellowships to Mr. Dag Nick-
elson, who will work at the Imperial College
of Science and Technology, and Miss Milda
Prytz, who will work at University College,
London. <A special Ramsay Fellowship of the
value of £350, which was placed at the disposal
of the National Research Council of the
United States of America, has been awarded
to Dr. C. 8. Piggot, of Baltimore, who will
begin work at University College, London, in
October.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Av the University of Missouri plans have
been practically completed for the new agri-
cultural building for which $200,000 was ap-
propriated ‘by the last legislature. The build-
ing will constitute the center of the agricul-
tural group, including the present agricul-
tural and horticultural buildings, and will serve
as the administration headquarters of the col-
lege of agriculture. ;

Proressor M. Juues Tissor, of the Paris
Museum of Natural History, and Mme. Tissot
have given 844,483 francs to the museum to
endow the chair of physiology.

Dr. Cartes C. Bass has been elected dean
of the school of medicine of Tulane University.

Dr. H. H. Lane, for fourteen years pro-
fessor of zoology at Oklahoma University, has
been appointed head of the department of
zoology at the University of Kansas. He suc-
ceeded Dr. B. M. Allen, who has gone to the
Southern Branch of the University of Cali-
fornia.

Dr. Watpo SHUMWAY, assistant professor
of biology at Dartmouth College, has been ap-
pointed associate professor of zoology at the
University of Illinois.

SCIENCE | 225

Dr. M. Kuarascu, who has held a National
Research fellowship at the University of Chi-
cago for the past three years, has been ap-
pointed associate professor of organic chem-
istry at the University of Maryland.

W. T. CHAMBERS, graduate student in the
department of geography of the University of
Chicago, has been appointed to a newly estab-
lished instructorship in geography at the Uni-
versity of Tennessee.

Miss Marton Bett has been appointed. bio-
chemist in pediatrics and child welfare re-
search at the University of Iowa.

Proressor D. THopay, of the University of
Cape Town, has been appointed to the chair of
botany, in succession to Professor R. W. Phil-

lips, who retires after thirty-eight years’

_ service.

J. A. S. Warson has been promoted to the
chair of agriculture and rural economy at
Edinborough, in succession to Professor Rob-
ert Wallace, retired. Professor Watson was
demonstrator in botany under Sir Isaac Bay-
ley Balfour, afterwards continuing his studies
in Germany, America, and Canada.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
THE FOOD HABITS OF SWORDFISH

THe recent note of Mr. C. H. Townsend
(“Swordfish Taken on Trawl Lines,” Scrmnce,
Vol. 56, p. 18) brings up the question of
whether these fishes descend to considerable
depths for food. On this point I have some
evidence which may be worthy of record.

The late Captain John Toothaker of South
Harpswell, Maine, was always very helpful to
the Harpswell Laboratory, and would bring in
from his trips any of the peculiar animals he
found while sword fishing. Some years ago he
turned over to me a couple of deep sea fishes
which he had taken in a swordfish stomach. I
have forgotten the genus and species, but both
belonged to the Scopelide, and as I reeall look-
ing the matter up, the species had never been
taken in less than 800 fathoms. The specimens
were quite fresh and the digestive juices had
hardly affected the integument, and the phos-

226

phorescent organs along the sides were in good

condition. One of the specimens was given to
the Boston Society of Natural History as a
member of the New England fauna; the other
was presented to the Museum of Comparative
Zoology at Harvard. The swordfish was taken
on the eastern border of the Georges Banks, a
little inside the 500 fathom line. From this it
would appear that the swordfish do descend to
considerable depths for their meals, and, from
the good condition of the specimens, it would
appear that they make a rapid transition from
the feeding grounds to the surface for the
after-dinner siesta.
J. S. KinGsiey
2500 CEDAR STREET,
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

EXPERIMENTAL TRANSFORMATION OF THE
SMOOTH-BLADDER OF THE DOG

THE essential difference between the pale
smooth muscle of the bladder and the red in-
voluntary striated muscle of the heart is de-
pendent upon the differential intensity of the
hydro-dynamic pressure to which the vesicular
and cardiac mesenchymal cells have been sub-
jected, respectively. By experimentally varying
the velocity of application and the intensity
of the intra-vesicular pressure, which causes
tension of the smooth bladder muscle, during
a period of eight weeks, to a point comparable
with that found in the heart the non-striated
bladder muscle is transformed histologically
into cross-striated muscle, and physiologically
into an organ manifesting rhythmicity as long
as the hydro-dynamiec pressure stimulus is ap-
plied.

From the dynamic or functional, embryo-
logical viewpoint the various muscles, smooth,
cardiac and skeletal represent differences in the
amount of work that has been done upon them
by the differential growing parts of the embryo
during the active periods of growth.t The es-
sential difference then physiologically between
the various muscles is their capacity for work
which in turn is dependent upon the amount
of work that has been expended in their pro-
duction. The reason for the different degrees
of energy possessed by the types of muscle is

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

purely an embryological bio-mechanical prob-
lem and corresponds to the differential amount
of optimum tension which these muscles have
experienced during their formative period be-
cause of a dominant energetic zone extrinsic
to the region of myogenesis. The evidence
presented by these experiments warrants the
conclusion that as regards cross-striated muscle,
function determines structure and not the re-
verse. ?

The writer wishes to thank Dr. Charles R.
Bardeen, University of Wisconsin, for re-
checking the evidence leading to the above con-
clusions.

Epen J. CAREY

Marquette UNIversiry MEDICAL SCHOOL,

MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN

AN ALBINO MUTATION OF THE DEMA-
TIACEOUS FUNGUS BRACHYSPORIUM
TRIFOLII

Tus fungus has been under study in culture
since October, 1919, when it was first isolated
from clover plants. A description was pub-
lished in Phytopathology, October, 1920, and an
intensive culture study of the fungus has been
continued since that time. The cultures were
started from a single spore and have been kept
going as a pure strain eyer since.

The normal fungus is of the dematiaceous
type, with dark brown hyphe, forming in eul-
ture a very dense black mat on and in the
medium.

On one of a series of cultures made early in
November 1921 there appeared, starting from
the point of inoculation, a sector of growth
which completely lacked the black-brown color
of the normal mat. A microscopic examination
showed that the mycelium and conidia of this
light-colored area were morphologically iden-
tical with those of the normal growth of the
fungus, except for the lack of the dark brown
color.

Isolation cultures were made of this albino
material by the isolation of sclerotia-like

1 Carey, E. J., 1919-20, Journ. of Gen. Physiol.,
(a) ii, 357; (b) iii, 61; (c) Anat. Record, 1920,
xix, 199.

Avucust 25, 1922]

bodies which are formed abundantly on certain
media. From these pure cultures were made
and subcultures have been carried on through
sixteen consecutive non-sexual generations, both
by the single spore method and by ordinary
transfers from one tube to another, without any
variation in the appearance or nature of this
strain. The mycelium in mass is a true albino
or may at times take on a light flesh color.

Throughout an intensive study in culture
covering thirty months’ time, and employing
every variation in condition that could be
thought of as an influencing factor, there has
been no ascus or sexual stage developed either
in the normal or albino strain. With these
facts in mind, it would seem that the phenom-
enon here reported can only be referred to some
sudden change which occurred in the mycelium
or conidia of the normal strain, and in any case
has no connection with any sexual process.

The abruptness of this change, and the con-
tinual difference shown by contrasting cultures
of the albino and the normal strain, is very
striking. This change does not seem to fall
into that elass of somatic mutations so far re-
ported in fungi which are usually described as
a dwarfing or reduction of the development of
the normal form, but it is a complete loss of
the dark-color character which is typical for
the normal original strain.

Lee Bonar.
CRYPTOGAMIC LABORATORY,
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN

A DAMP CHAMBER FOR MICROSCOPES

In the study of cultures of mycelia of fungi
it is desirable that they be observed under the
4 mm. objective of the microscope without
disturbing the hyphe by transferring them to
a microscopic slide and making a fresh mount
in the usual fashion. The type of damp
chamber described below has been found
especially adaptable to this purpose. It af-
fords a chamber of considerable volume, with
a humidity which is constantly near the satura-
tion point, and of such a proportion that the
greater part of the enclosed space may be ob-
served through the 4 mm. objective.

This damp chamber is a modification of the
one used by Blaauw in his recent work on the

SCIENCE

227
growth and phototropism of roots. It is made
by using a large-sized microscopic _ slide,

2 x 3 inches, and a large-sized No. 2 cover-
glass, 45 x 72 mm., such as are used for mak-
ing mounts of brain sections. These two pieces
of glass are separated by several layers of
filter paper, the central portions of which have
been cut out, so that the filter paper is in the
form of a frame about 5 mm. in width. Slits
in this frame may be made for the purpose of
ventilating the chamber, if such is desired.

The mount is made by placing the filter
paper frame on the slide, then dropping a bit
of nutrient agar just on the inner edge of the
frame and inoculating it with the fungus to be
studied. The large-sized coverglass is then
placed over the filter paper and the mount is
bound together with white linen thread and
placed erect in a tumbler containing a little
water. It is desirable that the mount be kept
in a place which is slightly cooler than the
room in which it is to be examined in order
that the condensation of water on the inner
surface of the coverglass may not interfere
with observations.

This damp chamber has been found by the
writer to be an excellent means of preparing
mycelia of fungi for use in general courses in
botany. Mounts so constructed can be used
repeatedly in successive sections of the same
or different classes. For this purpose only the
low-power, 16 mm., objective is necessary and
therefore the coverglass referred to above may
be replaced by another large-sized slide, mak-
ing the damp chambers much less expensive.
The details of the structure of the hyphe are
well shown, the normal position in which they
develop, and the streaming of the protoplasm
in the hyphe of Rhizopus, for example, are
very distinct. Also the general form and ar-
rangement of the fruiting bodies may be
studied here.

By making a slit in the filter paper frame
at one end, this damp chamber may be ad-
vantageously used for the study of roots and
root-hairs. A seedling with a radicle a centi-
meter or more in length may be inserted in
the slit and development allowed to proceed.
This method of the study of root-hairs even
under low power is found to be far superior

228

to the fresh mounts commonly used. The
writer has found this damp chamber especially
well adapted to the study of the relationship
of fungous hyphe to roots, both in the study
of tropisms and in the actual observation of
root-hair infections.
Currrorp H. Farr

Tue Srate UNIVERSITY oF Iowa

THE COST OF GERMAN PUBLICATIONS

To tHe Eprror or Science: Apropos of
the cost of German publications to Americans,
it may be interesting to note the cost of mem-
bership in the Deutsche Chemische Gesellschaft
(including subscription to the Berichte and
Zentralblatt) to Germans and to others. The
figures are computed on to-day’s exchange rate:

TWmitediStatesmereet ete oreo ere mnie eet 2310.0)
TOWN AG, | eee cocoa 115 shillings........ 25.56
France ze frances ........ 25.28
Belgium pe ereieee eto Oise NCS yee 24.74
TIT tee cede ste recedes 536 lira 24.55
Norway ..-...-- 176 Kroner *-222-:. (28°09
Sweden 104 kroner ........ 27.14
Denmark .. ..124 kroner ........ 26.60
TSM naGl Se 69 gulden ........ 26.71
Switzerland .......-.--.----.----- 91 franes .......- 17.47
Germany ee ai3 ema ks ypenn ests 81

It will be noted that Americans fare better
than any other nationals except the Swiss. It
might be added that in 1921 the subscription
for Americans was $16.00.

But do the Germans expect us to believe
that the disparity between the cost to them-
selves and to others is, as was stated by the
president of the Gesellschaft, due to the low
value of exchange? :
Jas. Lewis Howe
LEXINGTON, VIRGINIA

QUOTATIONS
SCIENCE AND THE TROPICS

From the late Mr. Chamberlain onwards,
successive colonial secretaries have shown a
far-sighted appreciation of what science may
do for the tropics. The London School of
Tropical Medicine, inaugurated and fostered
by the Colonial Office, is now a world-center
of research and education in the diseases prey-
alent in warm climates and the measures for

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

resisting them. In another column Sir Arthur
Shipley, now happily restored to economic
zoology from his arduous and successful tenure
of the vice-chancellorship of Cambridge, de-
seribes the work of the Imperial Bureau of
Entomology, a product of a research committee
appointed by the Marquess of Crewe when
colonial secretary, and firmly established by the
late Viscount Harcourt and Viscount Milner.
Its local habitation is rightly placed at the
Natural History Museum, which contains the
finest collection of insects in the world. It is
in close touch with every part of the empire,
recelves, examines, and identifies specimens
sent to it, and acts as a general headquarters in
the war against insects, whose successful prose-
cution is almost a condition of human existence.
A third very practical application of science
to the needs of the empire, due to the initiation
of Viscount Milner when colonial secretary,
applies specially to the tropics. A College for
the Study of Tropical Agriculture is to open
its first session at St. Augustine, Trinidad, this
autumn. Last year we were able to welcome
the constitution of a governing body to carry
out the details of the scheme. Sir Arthur
Shipley, chairman of the governors, and his
distinguished colleagues have selected a com-
petent staff and devised practical courses ex-
tending over three years for a diploma, and
shorter periods for training in special subjects
or for postgraduate research. The island of
Trinidad has provided the site and a handsome
grant towards the erection of the buildings,
which are now complete. Private persons and
commercial companies interested in tropical
produce have made benefactions, and other
West Indian islands are to contribute towards
maintenance. But the benefits of the college in
Trinidad will radiate far beyond the Antilles.
The conditions of soil and climate which favor
the luxuriant growth of tropical fruits, vege-
table oils, rubber, and woods also favor the
growth of animal and vegetable pests. Insects
and moulds which no more than maintained
existence in the jungle proliferate under the
conditions of cultivation. Much ean be done
towards identifying and studying these in the
museums and laboratories at home, and some-
thing also towards the devising of treatment.

Avuausr 25, 1922]

But the detection of the early stages, discrim-
ination between methods of treatment, and de-
termination of the most suitable times and
modes of applying these can be adequately pur-
sued only in the field. The work of the pro-
fessors of entomology and of mycology will be
eagerly watched in many parts of the empire,
and the men they train will have no difficulty
in finding useful spheres when the demands of
the West Indian islands have been satisfied.
The London Times.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Mathematical Philosophy. A study of fate
and freedom. Lectures for educated laymen.
By Cassius J. Kyser. Pp. xiv + 466.
New York: E. P. Dutton and Company.

The common saying, “What man would be
a philosopher who might be a mathematician”
does not seem to apply to the author of this
book, who tells us in the preface that for more
than two score years he has “meditated upon
the nature of mathematics, upon its significance
in thought, and upon its bearing on human
life.” The book is in the form of twenty-one
lectures designed primarily for students whose
major interest is in philosophy but it aims to
appeal to a much wider circle of readers, in-
cluding professional mathematicians and the
“orowing class of those natural-science stu-
dents who are interested in the logical struc-
ture and the distinctive method of mathematics
regarded not only as a powerful instrument
for natural science but also and especially as
the prototype which every branch of science
approximates in proportion as its basal as-
sumptions and concepts become clearly de-
fined.”

The last lecture of the book is on science and
engineering. In this lecture the author con-
siders various definitions of engineering and
then proposes the following: The science and
art of directing the time-binding energies of
mankind—the civilizing energies of the world,
—to the advancement of the welfare of man.
The language of this definition portrays the
type of language used throughout the volume.
The reader may at times feel that the language
is too flowery to convey much real information,

SCIENCE 229

but he will generally find that the words are
far from empty. Even in the more mathe-
matical parts of the book, where the author
speaks of the infinite abelian group of angel
flights and discusses the question whether mind
is a group, will frequently disclose much eare-
ful thought in what might at first appear to be
superficial statements.

Professor Keyser has for a long time been
preeminent among American mathematicians
as regards a certain type of popularization and
the present volume is perhaps, up to the
present time, his most successful effort along
this line. The scientist who wishes to acquire
a knowledge of the nature and bearing of
some of the fundamental mathematical con-
cepts without going deeply into the subject
will find here a unique opportunity. It is true
that this knowledge is here presented in a
sugar-coated form and that there is a danger
that some of the readers may not get within
this coating, but it is to be hoped that many
others will become really interested in the sub-
ject matter and will give it sufficient thought
to derive a lasting benefit therefrom. Teach-
ers of mathematics will probably find here
attractive features of their own subject which
had escaped their attention. In fact, the
present writer found the lecture devoted to
the group concept worthy of a second reading
although he had given much thought to this
particular concept before reading this lecture.

The hook under review occupies a unique
and useful place in the mathematical litera-
ture of to-day. It deals with a considerable
number of fundamental mathematical con-
cepts, including those of transformation, inva-
riance, infinity, hyperspace, group, variable
and limit. Considerable attention is given to
systems of postulates and the properties which
are essential to a genuine system. In par-
ticular, it is noted that the Hilbert system of
postulates for geometry is not intrinsically
superior to others. On page 43 our author
refers to the system of postulates “devised by
the late Professor Hilbert and found in his
famous ‘Foundations of Geometry,’ ” which
would naturally be construed to mean that Hil-
bert died before the publication of this book.
This is fortunately not the case.

230

In the preface to his “Hasy Mathematics,”
1906, Sir Oliver Lodge stated that “the mathe-
matical ignorance of the average educated per-
son has always been complete and shameless.”
One cause of this ignorance has been the lack
of popular and reliable books dealing with
serious mathematical subjects. By the pub-
lication of the present volume Professor
Keyser has rendered a very notable service
towards the supply of such popular books. He
has introduced into the book at various places
somewhat serious doses of mathematics but
these places are probably sufficiently separated
by non-mathematical material to hold the
reader who would not be interested in a book
restricted to real mathematics.

G. A. Miniter
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

SPECIAL ARTICLES
THE “WINTER CYCLE” IN THE FOWL

‘THE idea of the superimposition of a Men-
delian factor or factors determining the egg
production of the “winter cycle’ upon the
factors determining the egg production of the

1Harris, J. Arthur: ‘‘The Value of Inter-
annual Correlations,’’ Amer. Nat., Vol. 49, 707-
712, 1915.

2 An exhaustive series of correlations for the
egg records of the individual months of the first
and second year was determined some months ago
and is now in press in Genetics. The correlations
for the total productions of the ‘‘eycles’’ have
been only recently determined, because of the diffi-
culty of dealing with the moments of such large
numbers without grouping.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1443

normal or “reproductive cycle’ has become
widely familiar as an explanation of the phe-
nomenon of the inheritance of fecundity in the
domestic fowl.

In recent years there has been much skep-
ticism among geneticists concerning the validity
of this hypothesis. Crucial evidence for or
against it is difficult to obtain.

Some light may be thrown upon the problem
by the determination of the correlations be-
tween the egg records of the various “cycles” in
the first and second laying year. If the birds
of a flock differ fundamentally among them-
selves by reason of the presence in or absence
from the zygotes from which they developed of
Mendelian genes or factors determining their
winter egg production, it would be logical to
expect that the highest inter-annual correla-
tiont would be that of the winter period. This
must be considered true under the theory stated
unless the further assumption be made that
genes of factors which determine egg produc-
tion during the “winter cycle” of the first lay-
ing year have no influence in determining pro-
duction during the “winter cycle” of the second
laying year.

We have, therefore, determined all possible
correlations between the total egg records of
the “cycles” of the first and of the second year
for a series of 443 White Leghorn birds, for
which complete records for the first two laying
years are available.? \

The correlations appear in the accompanying
table. These show that for all four periods
considered there is a higher correlation between
the records of homologous periods than be-

Birp’s First YEAR

ra ‘Winter’ \ Spring® Summer? | Autumns Annual

& Winter ....---.--- .3225 + .0301 | + .0680 + .0335 | + 1269 + .0331|4 .3142 + .0303 | + .2955 + .0307
10.714 2.02 3.83 10.36 9.62

BuiSpring eee + .1177 + .0332 | + .3293 + .0300} + .2060 + .0322 | .1874 + .0325 | 4 .2782 + .0310

Ss 3.54 10.97 6.39 5.76 8.97

& | Summer .....---. ++ .0976 + .0333| + .3047 + .0305 | + .4272 + .0275|+ .2904 + .0308 | + .4026 + .0282

ie 2.93 9.99 15.53 9.42 14.27

? | Autumn ......... + .2535 + .0315 | + .0369 + .0336 | + .2679 + .0312|4 .5545 & .0233 | + .4115 + .0279

2 8.04 1.09 8.58 23.79 14.74

| Annual ........... + .3255 + .0301| + .2352 + .0318]-+ .3641 + 0292) 4+ 5127 + .0248| + .5134 + .0248
10.81 7.39 12.46 20.67 20.70

3 The conventional limits of these ‘‘cycles’’ are as follows: Winter, November to February;
spring, March to May; summer, June to August; autumn, September to October.
4Ratio of correlation coefficient to its probable error.

Avuaust 25, 1922]

tween those which are not homologous. They
show, furthermore, that the correlation between
the winter periods of the first and second year
is the lowest of any of the four correlations
between the productions of homologous periods.
The difference between the winter-winter corre-
lation and the spring-spring correlation is not
large, but the differences between the winter-
winter correlation and the summer-summer and
the autumn-autumn coefficients are more sub-
stantial, the two latter being 2.57 and 6.10
times as large as their probable error.

In so far as this type of evidence is pertinent
to the problem, it indicates that in the White
Leghorn at least there is no evidence of special
factors which distinguish the “winter cycle”
from any other period of the year.

J. ArrHur Harris

H. R. Lewis
STATION FOR EXPERIMENTAL EvyoLuTion,
Cotp Spring Harspor, N. Y.

THE EFFECT OF X RAYS ON CHEMICAL
REACTIONS

WHILE investigating with Dr. E. Dershem
absorption coefficients for X rays, a brass cell
with aluminum windows containing cyclo-
hexanol was subjected to the X rays and after-

wards opened. The contents showed very
striking and unexpected consequences due to
this exposure. The colorless hexanol had

turned to greenish-blue, and later analysis
showed that about 0.1 of a gram of copper had
gone into solution.

The intensity of the X rays was so small,
coming as a nearly monochromatic beam from
a erystal grating, that the amount of chemical
action produced was most surprising. The
geometry of our apparatus and the power used
by the X ray bulb enabled us to calculate the
maximum energy which could be involved.
Assuming the target and the erystal grating to
be 100 per cent. efficient, and taking one hour
as the maximum time exposure, the energy
received by the cell could not be greater than
3 X 10° ergs, or less than 0.1 of a calorie.

Using the quantum theory, we may caleulate
from the wave length, approximately 0.2 A,
the number of quanta entering the cell. The

SCIENCE 231

energy per quantum is 1X 10-7 ergs. There-
fore the number of quanta received could not
be greater than 3 & 101°. Since about 0.1
gram of copper went into solution each quan-
tum must have caused at least 3.3 10° atoms
of copper to react.

The small amount of energy involved,
the small number of quanta relative to the
number of atoms reacting, indicate that the
reaction is an exothermal one. The quantum
voltage producing the X rays was approxi-
mately 10° volts. Since each quantum caused
3.3 10° atoms to react, not more than
3 X< 10° volts could be expended on each atom
if the reaction were endothermal. This value
is only one five-hundredth of the smallest

and

known resonance potential, that for cesium as
determined by Foote, Rognley and Mohler,’
being 1.48 volts.

We therefore must conclude that the X rays
produced some sort of trigger action of the
type studied by Bodenstein and Taylor* and by
Jorissen and Ringer* in their work on the
formation of hydrochlorie acid from hydrogen
and chlorine by means of alpha particles. An
excellent discussion of this work will be found
in a monograph by Lind.®

Mesitylene showed a behavior similar to that
of cyclohexanol, but in this case the color was
a yellowish green. This difference in color may
be due to concentration effects.

On account of the large effect produced by
relatively small amounts of energy, it seems
that the use of X rays may acquire great im-
portanee in the production of organic com-
pounds, especially if substances are produced
in this manner which can not be obtained by
other means.

A. R. Otson
National Research Fellow in Chemistry
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA,

2 Foote, Rognley and Mohler, Phys. Rev., 61
(1919).

3 (M. Bodenstein) and H. 8S. Taylor, J. Am.
Chem. Soc., 37: 24 (1915).

4 Jorissen and Ringer, Ber., 39: 2095 (1906).

58. C. Lind, The Chemical Effects of Alpha
Particles and Flectrons, Chemical Catalog Co.,
New York (1921).

232

THE FIFTEENTH ANNUAL CON-
FERENCE ON WEIGHTS AND
MEASURES

Tur Fifteenth Annual Conference on
Weights and Measures was held at the Bureau
of Standards on May 23 to 26 inclusive. In
many respects, it was the most successful con-
ference which has so far taken place.

At the opening session, the absence of Major
Louis A. Fischer, formerly chief of the
Weights and Measures Division, who died some-
what less than a year ago, was felt by prac-
tieally all those in attendance, and it, there-
fore, seemed especially appropriate to devote
this session to memorial addresses given by
men who had been closely associated with him.
The first of these was delivered by Dr.
Stratton, director of the bureau, the second by
Dr. C. W. Waggoner, of the State Department
of Weights and Measures of West Virginia,
and the last by Mr. D. J. Moynihan, who
spoke on behalf of the manufacturers of weigh-
ing and measuring devices.
mittee presented
Major Fischer. ;

Following these addresses and resolutions,
the regular program of the conference was
taken up, and reports were made by the dele-
gates from the various state departments, ap-
proximately two hundred delegates from thirty
states being present.

On the second day, an interesting paper was
delivered by William F. Cluett, chief deputy
inspector of weights and measures of Chicago,
on the “Enforcement of sales by weight legis-
lation and the elimination of the dry measure.”

The feature of the afternoon session was an
address by the Honorable Herbert Hoover,
secretary of commerce, in which he emphasized
the need for unity of action through organized
conferences and established methods, and the
importance, not only of the “prevention of
crookedness and the catching of crooks’. but
also the protection of the honest producer and
distributor. 1

The program included addresses by Mr.
John N. Mackall, chairman of the Maryland
State Roads Commission; Mr. Charles H.
Ferris, of the National Bottle Manufacturers’
Association; George Warner, chief inspector

A special com-

resolutions memorializing

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1443

of weights and measures of the State of Wis-
consin; F. S. Holbrook, of the Bureau of
Standards; W. T. White, director of the
Bureau of Weights and Measures of the State
of New York; A. H. Vestal, chairman of the
committee on coinage, weights and measures
of the House of Representatives; Mr. W. B.
McGrady, chief of the Bureau of Standards of
the State of Pennsylvania; Mr. P. C. Brooks,
president of the Scale and Balance Manufac-
turers’ Association; Mr. J. J. Holwell, com-
missioner of the Mayor’s Bureau of the City
of New York; Mr. John M. Mote, Ohio state
inspector of weights and measures; Ralph W.
Smith, of the Bureau of Standards; and W. L.
Egy and L. W. Higbee, of W. and L. E.
Gurley.

Resolutions and thanks were tendered to the
Honorable Herbert Hoover, Dr. S. W. Strat-
ton and the Honorable A. H. Vestal, for their
courtesy in addressing the conference.

A motion to the effect that the entire ques-
tion of standardization and simplification, as
applied to all phases of weights and measures
activities, containers, standards, laws, methods
of procedure, etc., be given special considera-
tion at the next conference, was passed with-
out a dissenting vote. The executive com-
mittee was directed by this motion to give spe-
cial thought to this subject and arrange for a
thorough presentation of the various factors
involved so that the matter might be presented
to the next conference in its entirety.

It was also voted that the second day of
next year’s conference should be devoted to the
papers by and the activities of the city and
county sealers of weights and measures.

The following officers were elected:

President: Dr. S. W. Stratton, director of the
Bureau of Standards.

First vice-president: Mr. A. H. Webster, com-
missioner of weights and measures of the State
of New Hampshire.

Second vice-president: Mr. W. B. McGrady,
chief of the Bureau of Standards, State of Penn-
sylvania.

Secretary: Mr. F. S.
Standards.

Holbrook, Bureau of

Treasurer: Mr. J. Harry Foley, superintendent
of weights and measures, State of New Jersey.

NEw SERIES
Vou. LVI, No. 1444

side. The language is not technical.

. New York City.

Pyle’s Personal Hygiene

Personal Hygiene. Edited by Watrter L. Pyte,
12mo of 555 pages, Illustrated. Seventh Edition.
$3.00 net.

M.D.
Cloth,

Galbraith’s Hygiene for Women

Exercise and Physical Training for Women. By ‘ANNA
M. Gatsrairp, M.D, 393 pages, illustrated. Second
Edition. $3.00 net.

Galbraith’s Four Epochs

Four Epochs of Woman’s Life. By Anna M. GavprairH,
M.D. Third Edition. Cloth, $2.00 net.

Brady’s Personal Hygiene
Personal Health. By Witt1am Brapy,
407 pages. Cloth, $2.00 net.

M.D. 12mo of

a ee ee SIGN AND MAIL THIS ORDER FORM TO-DAY

Fripay, SEPTEMBER 1, 1922

PERSONAL HYGIENE

Williams’ Personal Hygiene

This book is far more than a recital of information on health.
a new interpretation of health in terms of life.
The first five chapters consider the various aspects of the problem.
remaining chapters consider in a systematic way hygiene from the scientific
The work is planned for college students
in general educational courses, for nurses, social workers and teachers.
are chapters on the muscular system, nutrition, the respiratory system, circu-
latory, excretory and nervous systems, sexual aspects of life, prevention in
specific diseases, hygiene of the mouth, eye and ear.

12mo. volume of 425 pages. with 398 illustrations.

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
SINGLE Copigs, 15 Crs.

JUST

READY
It establishes
It is personal hygiene applied.
The

There

By Jesse Feminc Wittiams, M.D., Associate Professor of Physical Education, Teachers College, Columbia University,

Cloth, $2.50 net

OTHER BOOKS ON HEALTH

Bandler’s The Expectant Mother

The Expectant Mother. By S. Wrtus Banpier, M.D.
12mo or 213 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.0u net.

Winslow's Prevention of Disease

Prevention of Disease. By KENELM Winstow, M.D.

12mo
ot $48 pages, illustrated. Cloth, ¥z.00 net.

Stokes’s The Third Great Plague

The Third Great Plague (Syphilis). By Joun H. Sroxes,
M.D. 12mo of 204 pages, 4 portraits. Cloth, $2.50 net.

Griffith's Care of the Baby

Care of the Baby. By J. P. Crozer Grirrita, M.D.

12mo
of 463 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.50 net.

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.

Please send me the books checked (\/) and charge to my account:

Williams’ Personal Hygiene Applied

Pyle’s Personal Hygiene_-___-.-_--- -$3.00 net

Galbraith’s Hygiene for Women-_-_ -$3.00 net
Galbraith’s Four Epochs______--________ $2.00 net
Brady’s Personal Hygiene___--_-----~__- $2.00 net

PI ey og eS $2.50 net
Bandler’s Expectant Mother_____________ $2.00 net
Winslow’s Prevention of Disease__ -$2.00 net
Stokes’s Third Great Plague______________ $2.50 net

Griffith’s Care of the Body_______________ $2.50 net

i SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

FREAS CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
LABORATORY APPARATUS

Small Freas Sensitive Water Thermostat

An asset to any laboratory, particularly where
physical-chemical experiments are being car-
ried out.

For sale by all reliable dealers.

Manufactured by

The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.
8 Johnson Street, Newark, N. J.

GOERZ

Polariscopes
the

chemical
the physician.

Refractometers

for testing butter, margar-
ine and other oils and fats.

for sugar industry,

laboratories and

These are now being furnished through
us as the exclusive distributors of optical
and scientific instruments manufactured
by C P. Goerz of Berlin.

We have new designs. All instruments
are of the highes precision.

Correspondence is invited.

C. P. Goerz American Optical Co.

319 P East 34th Street, New York City

CARL ZEISS
JENA

TERRESTRIAL and ASTRONOMICAL
TELESCOPES

With Apochromatic and Achromatic
Objectives

SS :
Telescopes with 60 to 130 ™/, aper.

Altazimuth and Equatorial Mountings
for immediate delivery.

Larger sizes on special order.

Catalogues supplied on request.
HAROLD M. BENNETTS
U. S. Agent

153 West 23rd St., New York City,

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal
15 Cts.

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies,

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

No. 1444

Vou. LVI SrprempBer 1, 1922

CONTENTS

The Geological Survey of China: H. T. CHANG 233

Agglutination and Tissue Formation: Dr.
Lro Lorn... 237
The Shenandoah Caves... . 240
The Salt Lake City Means W. yin
GEANT . 241
Scientific Events:
The International Research Council; Asso-
ciation of Iron and Steel Flectrical Engi-
neers; The American Electrochemical So-
ciety; The Biology Club of the Ohio State
University; The Gorgas Memorial . 243
Scientific Notes and News......... 246
University and Educational Note - 249
Discussion and Correspondence:
Meteorite Hunting: Prorressor ARTHUR M.
Minter. The Occurrence in the Atlantic
Ocean of the Whale Shark: Dr. E. W.
GupcErR. Discharge of Static Hlectricity:
H. E. Jaques. Paraffine Paper Screen for
showing the Position of the Retinal Image:
WOR, CERO) DY, [Seg eres 249
Quotations: z
Sour « IA OUOCTROPDNS rece teeny cree tae een 25oe

Scientific Books:
Manson on the Evolution of Climates: Dr.
TRY DSL « TEN ON ARNE cee oe eer eS 254
Special Articles:
Recent Discoveries of the Antiquity of
Man: Dr. HENRY FAIRFIELD OSBORN and
Dr. CHESTER A. REEDS. Acute Parathyroid
Tetany: Dr. ARNo B. LuckHARDT and
J. BuuMENSTOCK. The Algebraic Method
of Balancing a Chemical Bquation: Dr.
STP Vege At © URE Sete sseeeee neeu cesses Mere seein G
The Iowa Academy of Science: Dr. James
EIR EES Arete, Red Oe eee Rie ee ets | 260

THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF
CHINA

Ty the process of reconstruction, and adapta-
tion to modern conditions, which China is at
present undergoing, the introduction of scienti-
fie research and, concurrently, the establish-
ment of scientific government organs is abso-
lutely essential to the success of the movement.
To a narrow circle of interested mining men
and scientists, it has long been known that the
Geological Survey of China, established in
1916, has been making steady progress, both in
the way of supporting the mining industry
with expert advice, and in accumulating scien-
tifie data and material to such an extent that
it has been recognized abroad as a factor in
inaugural ceremonies by and in the presence
ploration of the earth.

But the work of the Geological Survey has
been carried on in quite an unostentatious way,
and little has transpired about its activities
outside of professional circles, until July
seventeenth, when the institution was officially
thrown open to the public, with appropriate
inaugural ceremonies by and in the presence
of H. R. President Li Yuan Hung.

Before giving an account of these exercises,
it may be well briefly to review the develop-
ment of the survey and its achievement up to
the present time.

Geological Government Surveys have
established during the last half century in all
civilized states. The principal aims of those
institutions are threefold: namely, (1) to pro-
mote the knowledge of the mineral resources
of the country, (2) to carry on a general geo-
logic survey of the whole country upon a uni-
form ‘seale, and (3) to undertake scientific
geological research.

In the first of these fields the Geological
Survey of China ean already point to a eredit-
able series of achievements, the dis-
covery and survey of a large number of iron-

been

such as

234

ore deposits, which will soon be described in a
monographie report, and the examination of
numerous coal-fields, as well as metalliferous
deposits. Among the latter are the antimony
and mercury deposits, which have already been
described in the bulletins issued by the sur-
vey.

The general geological survey of the country
has so far been restricted to the province of
Chihli, Shantung, Shansi, Bonan, and Kiangsu,
the larger part of those provinces being al-
ready mapped. It is the intention of the sur-
vey to publish sheet maps of the whole of
China upon the seale of one to one million, and
four such sheets are now in preparation.

The scientific work of the survey has been
confined principally to the study and descrip-
tion of the fossil remains occurring in the
various geological systems, and to the deter-
mination of stratigraphie horizons. The sur-
vey has had the advantage of the cooperation
of a famous paleontologist, Dr. A. W. Grabau,
formerly professor of paleontology at Colum-
bia University, who has made great progress
in describing the invertebrate fossils.

A number of Swedish scientists, acting as
associate paleontologists to the survey, have,
with the Swedish fund, made extensive collec-
tions of fossil plants, fossil mammals and the
remains of prehistoric man, and these are now
being studied by them. ‘The results of these
studies, together with Dr. Grabauw’s investiga-
tions on the invertebrate fossils, will be pub-
lished in “the Paleontologiec Sinica,” a series
of monographs, which is intended to com-
prise, as far as possible, descriptions and il-
lustrations of all the fossils of China.

Early in the history of the survey, the col-
lections brought together by the field geolo-
gists, were arranged to form a small museum.
This has grown constantly, until now it com-
prises 3,250 specimens of ores, minerals, rocks
and fossils, properly labeled and exhibited
under glass, in the compound of the Survey
west city, Fong Shong Hutung, No. 3.

In order to bring together an up-to-date
geological library, the director of the survey,
Dr. V. K. Ting, approached private individuals
as well as mining companies, requesting them
to contribute to a library fund. Through their
generous response, forty thousand dollars were

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

collected, and with this fund Dr. Ting has
been able to erect a modern library building
and bring together a collection of geological
literature comprising at present 8,873 volumes.
President Li Yuan Hung has taken a leading
role among the individual donators, while
among the mining companies the Kailan Min-
ing Administration stands foremost through
the generosity of its donation.

It has been considered by the minister of
agriculture and commerce, and by the director
of the Geological Survey, that this institution
has now reached such a stage of development
that it is appropriate to throw the museum
and the library open to the public. The open-
ing ceremony took place on the seventeenth
instant at four o’clock in the afternoon, in the
lecture hall of the survey, and in the presence
of a distinguished gathering of Chinese of-
ficials, headed by President Li Yuan Hung,
who, himself a leading donor to the library
fund, gave, by his presence, renewed evidence
of his scientific interest and democratic spirit.
Among other notable guests, we may specially
mention the minister and vice-minister of agri-
culture and commerce, Their Excellencies
Chang Kuo Kan and Chiang Tion To; the
chiefs of the different departments of the mini-
stry of agriculture and commerce; and dele-
gates from other government museums in Pe-
king, as well as many of the donators and
other representatives of the mining industry.

The guests were welcomed ‘by the director
of the survey, Dr. Ting, in the following words:

““H. E. the President, Their Excellencies, the
Minister and the Vice-Minister, our honored
guests and my colleagues: It is my great privi-
lege and pleasure to weleome you most heartily
on behalf of the Geological Survey. First of all,
I must thank the president, not only because he
condescends to come to this ceremony, but also
because he is one of the contributors to our build-
ing fund. In foreign countries it is not uncom-
mon for the official head of the state to be present
at the opening of a similar scientific institution,
but, as far as I know, this is the first time in
China that the President of the Republic honors
such an occasion by his presence. This indicates
the scientific interest as well as the democratic
spirit of our president, for which we are sincere-
ly grateful.

““Secondly, I must thank the donors to our

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

building fund. Without their generous help we
would be still without a library. Furthermore
they have come here to-day in spite of this very
hot weather, so that we may have an opportunity
to thank them publicly, and to show them what
we have done with their money. It proves the
teal interest they take in our institution. I may
add that this is also the first time that private
generosity has helped a scientific institution be-
longing to the government.

‘¢Thirdly, I must thank my official superiors
in the ministry of agriculture and commerce. In
spite of the political changes that have taken
place, they have always given us their support.
They have not only provided us with sufficient
funds in the time of great financial stringency,
but they have also left to their responsible sub-
ordinate a great deal of freedom in administra-
tion, and in the appointment of the staff. Thus,
with the exception of three men in charge of the
business part of the institution, practically all
the members are technical men. Again there is
not a single extra man appointed beside the regu-
lar members, whose number is determined by the
rules of the organization. Whatever result we
have been able to achieve is entirely due to the
confidence and guidance of our superiors.

‘‘Pourthly, I take this occasion to thank the
members of my staff for their loyal cooperation.
Because of the smallness of the staff, we are not
able to put men solely in charge of the library
and the museum. Practically every member has
done his part, in order to render this opening
possible. During this summer all have worked,
through all the day, instead of only half a day,
as in most of the government bureaus, and re-
cently they have even worked on the national
holidays and on Sundays. I therefore tender to
both my foreign and Chinese colleagues my per-
sonal gratitude, and desire to tell our guests
frankly that the results of the survey, such as
they are, have been the work, not of one or two
men, but of all the members of the organization.

‘<For a summary of the history and the fune-
tions of the Geological Survey I refer you to the
printed pamphlets. I wish only to tender to you
once more our sincere thanks, before I respect-
fully request the President to deliver his ad-
dress. ’’

Following Dr. Ting’s welcoming remarks,
H. E. the President of China declared the
Geological Survey Library and Museum opened
to the publie in the following words:

Geology is by no means a new science in

SCIENCE

235

China; indeed, it originated here in very ancient
times. In the book of Yu, the nature and color
of soils were carefully discriminated. In the
Chow Dynasty, a mining and geographical staff
formed an important branch of the government
organization. The book of Kwoitzu touches even
on the principles of ore deposition and the man-
ner of locating ore deposits. Since the Dynasty
of Han and Wei, trained specialists on copper
and silver were constantly employed by the
government. Though their knowledge was frag-
mentary, and their results frequently inconsist-
ent with modern ideas, we can not help think-
ing that the achievements of those pioneer work-
ers entitles them to be considered as forerunners
of the great army of investigators in the modern
science of geology. It is only because of the lack
of system in the methods of study of the ancient
Chinese, that we are at present far behind other
countries in this branch of science. As a result
of this neglect in the development of this im-
portant branch of knowledge, our people remain
poor and miserable, because we are not equipped
with the necessary knowledge to develop our vast
resources, which are at present almost untouched.

As is well known, geology is most intimately
telated to mining, while mining is the founda-
tion of a nation’s prosperity. Important and
fundamental though they are, our government
has paid no attention to such investigations until
very recently.

The Geological Survey of China was organized
in 1913, two years after the revolution. Having
spared no efforts to overcome the many and
serious obstacles in its path, this survey has now
reached its present enviable position. This is
due entirely to the efficient administration of its
officers, and the ambitious labors of all its mem-
bers. Under almost all kinds of difficult con-
ditions, the members of the survey have willingly
and earnestly enlisted to perform their duty—the
work of collecting facts and materials, the map-
ping of many districts, and the study of the vari-
ous problems connected with the mining industry.
Recently the survey has purchased a large number
of books in Europe, America and Japan, to serve
the needs of its ever growing activities. In 1920
the new museum and library were established,
this being made possible by contributions from
outside sources. With these facilities, the survey
is now able to arrange, in systematic manner, all
the minerals, ores, rocks, fossils and books eol-
lected from time to time.

To-day is the opening day for the public ex-
hibition of the newly established museum and

236

library, and I have the great honor to be present
on this occasion. JI found in the library books
on diverse phases of the science of geology and
its kindred subjects, well classified and arranged,
and in the museum, specimens of almost all the
varieties of minerals, rocks and fossils of this
country, accompanied by descriptive matter and
illustrative maps and sections. It is really a
wonderful and marvelous exhibit. I am very
sure that both the industrial and the scientific
world will be greatly benefitted by the existence
of such an organization as this. May I con-
gratulate you, my dear members of the survey,
on the success of your work, and the opportunity
you have for the future development, in this coun-
try, of science and industry—for those are the
foundations of our nation’s prosperity.

The next speaker was H. E., Chang Kou
Kan, the minister of agriculture and commerce,
who spoke as follows:

Geological investigation of the country is a
technical and scientific subject, as well a neces-
sary branch in the government organization. In
order to lay the foundation for industries de-
pending on natural resources, and to point the
way for their development, such investigation is
absolutely essential. When I myself served as
the head of the ministry in former times, I tried
hard to promote this kind of investigation. Ow-
ing to the lack of funds, however, this organiza-
tion was not able to expand as it should have.
Now the President has taken the lead, followed by
many of our mining people, in contributing
towards the building of the library, and the ex-
pansion of the museum. All signs indicate that
the nation as a whole places great hopes in the
Geological Survey. It is to be expected that the
survey will expand its work, and to complete the
geological atlas, and the geological maps of the
important mining regions, so that both the in-
dustrial and the scientific world will be profited.
Thus we shall be able to realize what the presi-
dent has so earnestly hoped for. Great credit is
also to be given to those who have made contribu-
tions towards the realization of this aim. Such
cooperation between private individuals or com-
panies and the government is perhaps the first of
its kind ever practiced in this country.

The next address was delivered by the vice-
minister of agriculture and commerce, H. E.,
Chiang Tien To, who expressed himself as fol-

lows:
The main duty of our ministry is to develop

our natural resources, thereby making our country

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1444

a prosperous one. There are many ways that lead
to this desired end, but the survey of the geology
of the country is one of the most important. In
the study of geology we must pay attention not
only to field work, but we must also carry on
scientific research work. It is for this reason that
the geological surveys of other countries are all
equipped with modern libraries and museums.
The museum of this survey has been established
for many years and I have personally visited it
several times. I found in it specimens of ores
and rocks from all parts of China, furnishing a
very good foundation for research. Owing to lack
of funds, the survey has not been able previously
to build a library. Now the president has taken
the lead, together with many gentlemen prominent
in the industrial and mining circles of this coun-
try, in contributing to this survey the funds which
have made possible the erection and equipment of
this building. From now on the members of the
survey, besides doing field work, will also be able
to carry on accurate research work under adequate
conditions. I am sure that the results thus ob-
tainable will be profitable to both the industrial
and the scientific world. It is hoped, therefore,
that the members of the survey will work with
renewed enthusiasm, and give of their best, so
that the high hopes of the president and the mini-
ster may be realized to their fullest extent.

Mr. C. Y. Yen, the industrial commissioner
of Chihli, spoke next and expressed his admira-
tion of the work already accomplished by the
Geological ‘Survey, not only in building up
a very efficient organization but also in con-
tributing actively to the industrial development
of Chihli province.

Mr. E. J. Nathan, the representative of the
Kailan Mining Administration, the largest do-
nator among the mining companies, expressed
his deep satisfaction with the well arranged
museum and considerable library which the sur-
vey had already been able to bring together.
He was convinced that the Geological Survey
of China, which had already done so much for
the discovery and survey of mineral deposits,
will in the future prove a powerful factor in
the development of China’s mineral industry.

General Yen Chang, formerly minister of
war, explained in an eloquent address the im-
portance of the systematic examination and
development of the rich treasures which are
hidden in the rocky ground of China. The
effective organization of the Geological Survey

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

gives good hope that the public will have ex-
cellent scientific help in the promotion of the
national mineral industry.

After the opening ceremony the president,
followed by the other guests, made a tour of
inspection of the library and of the museum.

H. T. Cuane,

PEKING, Acting Director

JuLY 17, 1922

AGGLUTINATION AND _ TISSUE
FORMATION

For a considerable number of years the prin-
ciple underlying our analysis of tissue forma-
tion—undertaken with the view of contributing
to a physiology of tissues in contradistinction
to a physiology of organs'—was the sugges-
tion that primarily agglutination is the factor
which makes isolated cells join into a tissue,
and that this agglutination depends on a cer-
tain consistency of the outer layer of the cell
protoplasm*. In an analysis of tissue forma-
tion it was thus necessary to determine the
factors on which this consisteney depends and
- we showed that it is a quantitatively variable

factor, that this variability is a prerequisite
in ameeboid movement and that the same ag-
glutinability which determines tissue formation
is the cause of what we have called stereo-
tropism of tissue cells, their tendency to move
in contact with solid surfaces.? Tissue forma-
tion, stereotropism and ameboid movement are
therefore related phenomena, all depending on
a certain variability and regulation in the
consistency of the outer layer of the proto-
plasm. As a step in this investigation we pre-
‘pared an experimental ameebocyte tissue which
consists of motile bloodcells of invertebrates
and which readily admits of an experimental
analysis of all these associated factors.* The
basic laws of tissue formation must apply

1Biological Bulletin, 1903, IV, 1301, Virchow’s
Archiv. 1903, CLXXIII; 135 Anatomical Re-
cord 1912 VI, 109.

2Washington University studies 1920, VIII, 3.
American Journ. Physiol. 1921, LVI, 140.
ScrencE 1921, LIII, 261.

3Washington University Studies, 1920. VIII.
3 ScrpencE 1919 L. 502. American Journal
Physiol. 1922, LX, 277.

SCIENCE

_ as stereotropism of tissue cells

237

equally to the various kinds of growth, em-
bryonic, regenerative, correlative and tumor
growth.*

Tissues are primarily aggregates of agglu-
tinated cells. Secondarily certain differentia-
tions may occur which concern the individual
cells as well as the connections between these
cells. Elementary tissues and even structures
resembling particular tissues in certain re-
spects, can be produced from isolated amcbo-
cytes under conditions which we have described
in detail elsewhere. Under the influence of en-
vironmental changes the consistency of the
outer protoplasmic layer of these cells is
altered in such a way that it becomes sticky.
In this experimental tissue various processes
which oecur in natural tissues can be imitated.
A state of the outer parts of the protoplasm
intermediate between liquid and solid is essen-
tial for tissue formation, because it insures
that degree of adhesiveness necessary for this
process. Agglutination is likewise the basic
factor, which insures the possibility of the
formation of paraplastic structures in which
the products of adjoining cells are united into
a homogeneous whole.

We showed that the movements of tissue
cells take place in contact with surfaces which
are solid or approach the solid state, such as
fibres. We designated this mode of reaction
(1898), and
attributed to it a significant part, not only in
wound healing, but also in processes taking
place normally in the organism whenever
movements of tissue cells oceur.® This stereo-
tropism is apparent not only in normally mo-
tile cells, but even in cells which are normally
in a fixed condition but which are made to
move under conditions which imply a change in
environment; it is self-evident that this in-
cludes also those environmental changes which
take place during embryonal development.
We found that this stereotropic reaction can

4Virchow’s Archiv. 1903, CUXXIII, 135.
Journ. Med. Research, 1917, XXXII, 75, 1920,
XLI, 247. Journ. Cancer Research, 1920, V, 261.
ScIENcE, 1922, LV, No. 1410.

5Archiv. f. Entwickelungsmech. 1898, VI, 297.
1902, XIII, 487. Anatomical Record, 1912, VI,
109. M. S. Fleischer and Leo Loeb. Proe. Soe.
Exp. Biol. and Med., 1911, VIII, 133.

238

be induced and modified experimentally in the
amobocytes and that it depends upon changes
in the consistency of the protoplasm, which
tend to make it sticky. Stereotropism is there-
fore an expression of the same factor which
leads to the agglutination of isolated cells with
each other, which latter results in tissue forma-
tion.

The stereotropism of tissue cells depends
upon their ability to carry out amoeboid move-
ments. On the basis of our observations and
experiments we concluded that in ameboid
movements, cyclic changes in the consistency
of those parts of the protoplasm take place
which are concerned in this activity.© With
these changes there must be associated cor-
responding changes in the agglutinative power
of the tissue cells. The factors underlying
amceboid movements are therefore closely re-
lated to those determining agglutination and
tissue formation; but while in the latter usual-
ly the whole surface of the cell is in a viscous
state, the eyclie changes in consistency and
viscosity of the protoplasm are localized and
thus lead to the formation of pseudopods. In
modifying this ameboid movement experiment-
ally we have shown that its character varies
with the consistency of the protoplasm; only
if the latter approaches the liquid state can
surface tension play a part in the ameboid
movement; but during certain phases of the
process the consistency of the protoplasm is
so great that the laws of surface tension, as
they have been defined for the liquid state of
matter, cannot play an essential part in
amcboid movement.*

Related to ameboid movement but not
identical with it, is the spreading out of tissue
cells, which occurs under certain conditions,
when tthe cells are in contact with solid sur-
faces. This process can likewise very con-
veniently be studied in amecebocytes. Both
amcboid movement and spreading out depend
upon changes in the consistency of the proto-
plasm. The spreading out in particular de-
pends upon a softening and relaxation of the
outer layer of the protoplasm. Usually this
spreading out goes hand in hand with ameboid

6Journal Med. Research, 1902, VII, 145.
7Washington University Studies, 1920, VIII, 3.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

movement; yet both processes can to a certain
extent be separated from each other experi-
mentally. As we have shown, it is possible to
increase the consistency of the protoplasm in
such a way, that the spreading out is prevent-
ed or very much delayed, while ameboid move-
ments are still quite active. Addition of defi-
nite amounts of acids to the medium in which
tthe amceboecytes are held, may have this effect.
However, in influencing the consistency of the
outer layer of the protoplasm as a whole, for
instance through the addition of acid, we may
also influence the character of the pseudopods
in a corresponding manner. Addition of slight
amounts of alkali favors very much the ex-
tension of the cells by softening the consistency
generally... Again the consistency of the outer
layer of the spreading out cell is such that
adhesiveness results; thus an agglutination of
the spreading out cells to the base on which
they rest is assured. This spreading out is an
important factor in tissue formation and dur-
ing embryonic development ithe formation of
the mesenchyme depends upon such a trans-
formation of the more or less rounded off
blastomeres into cells, which not only assume
ameboid movement, but at the same time
spread out. We have previously called atten-
tion to the importance of changes in aggluti-
native properties of cells during embryonic
development, in which a change takes place
from agglutinated round cells, which stick to
each other with certain parts of their cireum-
ference, to cells spreading out in contact with
a solid or viscous substratum.?®

It can be shown that the stickiness and
therefore the agglutinability of cells is a vari-
able factor; but the degree of this variability
differs very much in different kinds of cells
and under different conditions. We have
found that this variability is very great in the
ease of amebocytes. In the circulating blood
they are not sticky; but as soon as the environ-
ment is altered they become sticky, show
amcboid movements and agglutinate to each
other and to other structures. We have every
reason to believe that, while these variations
in stickiness are less marked in the majority

8American Journal Physiol. 1922, LX, 277.
9ScIENCE, 1922, LV, No. 1410.

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

of cells, great variations occur generally. Thus
in the resting stage, the endothelial cells lining
blood and lymph vessels present a perfectly
smooth surface and other cells pass them free-
ly without adhering to them. But when cer-
tain changes in the environment occur, these
cells may become ameboid and migrate ad-
hering to surfaces; or they assume phagocytic
properties, which likewise presuppose certain
changes in the surface consistency. It is very
probable that similar changes oceur in all
epithelial or connective tissue cells, when they
change from the resting state to the active
state of ameboid migration, adhering to sur-
faces with which they come in contact.
Ameboid movement as such implies, as we
have shown, a cyclic, localized change in the
consistency of the cell and it can be shown
that the stickiness of the pseudopod may be
greater than that of the rest of the cell. In
the majority of the cells the variation in con-
sistency and stickiness is less marked than in
the case of the amebocytes, because they are
already naturally in the state of tissue com-
ponents, adhering with certain parts of their
surface to neighboring cells. This applies al-
ready to the blastomeres of the dividing egg,
in which some parts of the outer layer have
such a degree of viscosity that the segmenting
cells remain united. The union of cells in
resting tissues may be accomplished by means
of secondary differentiations, which lead to the
production of special structures. There is
reason for believing that when, under the in-
fiuence of certain stimuli these cells enter into
the state of ameboid movement, these differen-
tiations are at least partially lost and this im-
plies a change in the condition of the outer
layer of the cell, which exhibits amceboid
movement and on which the agglutinability,
and therefore stereotropism, depends.

Such changes in environment which lead to
ameboid movement, alterations in consistency
of protoplasm, stereotropic response, play a
great part in pathological conditions, in in-
flammation, wound healing, and tumor growth,
in all of which cellular stereotropic move-
ments are a significant factor. Under natural
conditions these movements occur not only
during embryonic development in various types

SCIENCE

239

of cells, but also in the adult organism, for
instance in the ovary during atresia of the
follicles, in the endothelial cells of the corpus
luteum during the formation of blood vessels
and in the lymphocytes migrating through
epithelial surfaces.

It is possible further to analyse some of the
factors and especially the significance of ag-
glutination in the formation of certain tissue
structures. In general, cell division not ac-
companied by ameboid movements tends to the
production of epithelial surfaces. Tissues
which show active ameboid and spreading out
movements, may produce structures which dif-
fer according to the relative degree of agglu-
tinability and energy of amm@boid movement
present. If the ameboid motility is very
marked in proportion to the degree of ad-
hesiveness, we tend to have tissues of a more
or less loose character. Thus the fibroblasts
are connected with each other through rela-
tively small areas of contact, while they are
sending out long pseudopodia and moving free-
ly along solid bodies. In epithelial tissues, or
in tissues of similar morphological character,
the preponderance of ameboid motility over
the adhesiveness of the cells is much less pro-
nounced and these cells are therefore joined
together in wider surfaces of contact and may
form more or less connected layers. The same
differences we find between the growth of sar-
coma cells, which behave similarly to fibroblasts,
and carcinoma cells which are epithelial in
character. Great stickiness may lead to the
formation of cell clumps, and if it is associated
with a tendency to amcboid movement and
spreading out of the adhesive cells, it may lead
to the formation of tissue layers, in which
strands of spread out cells form a net. This
net formation is due to the fact that the cells
move away from the cell clumps, which serve
as centers, and form thus secondarily strands
of spread out cells, which connect with each
other.

In the process of tissue formation, such as
we observe in tissue growing in culture media
in vitro, two phenomena are noticeable in out-
growing cells, (1) the stereotropism, which
leads the cells to grow in contact with solid
surfaces, (2) the tendency of the cells to grow

240

out in a centrifugal direction away from the
piece of tissue implanted; thus a more or less
radial and often tree-like branching arrange-
ment of the outgrowing cell strands is pro-
duced. We have discussed above the stereo-
tropie response. The centrifugal arrangement
ean be conveniently studied in amcebocyte tis-
sue. Several years ago we tested experiment-
ally the possible significance of the galvanic
eurrent and differences in electric potential in
the centrifugal direction of cell migration.
Our results were negative, neither did the di-
rection of light rays influence the movements.
It is very probable that the centrifugal growth
depends upon the following two factors, (1)
the tendency of the cells adhering to each other
to separate, to send out pseudopodia and to
move in such a direction that two or more cells
forming a clump become isolated, (2) the ten-
deney of a healthy cell to continue for a cer-
tain time to form pseudopods at the same part
of the cell at which this process has been in-
duced. These two factors, the existence of
which observation of the moving cells verifies,
would be sufficient to produce the centrifugal
movement, which would thus partly represent
a statistical chance phenomenon. Inasmuch as
the isolated cells and the cell clumps become
less frequent with increasing distance from the
central piece, this would insure a centrifugal,
more or less net-like growth, or in other cases
a tree-like growth, such as we found under
various conditions. We may assume that the
same factors play a role during the growth
within the organism.

Tissue formation depends upon a combina-
tion of cell movements and cell divisions. We
have seen that contact with a solid base is a
prerequisite for the outgrowth of tissues; but
in addition we found more recently that in
various tissues growing in vitro, a very active
mitotic cell division may be induced in favor-
able liquid culture media supplied with a suf-
ficient amount of oxygen, even under condi-
tions which do not permit an active outgrowth
because of the lack of a solid surface along
which the cells would be able to migrate.1°

While it is thus possible to separate experi-

10Leo Loeb and Moyer S. Fleisher, Journ. Med.
Research, 1919, XL, 509.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

mentally mitotie cell proliferation and migra-
tion of cells in tissue cultures, the same stimu-
lus usually tends to produce both of these re-
actions together. A suitable change in en-
vironmental conditions usually brings about
alterations in the cells, which lead to both mi-
totie cell division and migration in tissues,
provided they are capable of both of these
activities. The difference in actual response
on the part of different tissues depends upon
the structure of the tissue, which enables cer-
tain kinds of cells to migrate very readily and
to divide only with difficulty or not at all, and
other tissues to divide much more readily than
to make amceboid movements.

The stereotropie reaction of tissue cells to
an environmental change consists of two com-
ponent parts, (a) of amcboid movement and
(b) of alterations in the consistency of the out-
er layer of the tissue cells; the latter change
may vary very much in different cases. In some
cases a previously non-sticky surface may be-
come sticky as the result of the environmental
change (as in amoebocytes, the free surface of
endothelial cells, perhaps in lymphocytes and
certain other cells), while in other cases a cer-
tain degree of usually circumscribed adhesive-
ness pre-existed, but ‘became more general or
stronger as the result of the environmental
change.

These changes in motility and adhesiveness
are responses of a living organism to a stimu-
lus. This is quite apparent in the case of the
amcebocytes and in the reactions of the ex-
‘perimental ameebocyte tissue, where a mechani-
cal stimulus leads to that far going alteration
in cell consistency, which makes possible both
stereotropic reactivity and tissue formation;
but in principle, conditions are similar also in
the case of other tissues.

Lro Lors

WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY

THE SHENANDOAH CAVERNS

Tue exhibition of caverns to the traveling
public is noted by the United States Geological
Survey as a growing industry in the Shenan-
doah Valley of Virginia. The famous Valley
Pike, now a link in the New York to Atlanta
highway, is traversed yearly by thousands of
automobile tourists, and no one has adequately

SepreMBER 1, 1922]

seen America who has not visited one or more
of the caverns in the Shenandoah Valley.
Until recently the only caverns that were ac-
cessible to the publie were the celebrated Luray
Caverns, in Page County, and Weyer’s Caves,
in northern Augusta County, near Grottoes.
However, within twelve months, the Endless
Caverns, near New Market, in Shenandoah
County, have been opened, and on May 31 an-
other cavern near Mount Jackson, also in
Shenandoah County, made its first bid for
public favor.

The latest-opened caves have been named
Shenandoah Caverns. They are about three
miles south of Mount Jackson and two miles
west of the Valley Pike, with which they are
connected by a macadamized road. The visitor
descends into these caverns by a conerete stair-
way and soon sees the first stalactites, which
appear as stout daggers of crystallized lime
carbonate, hanging like icicles from points
where surface water drips from the limestone
roof. At the foot of the stairs is the spacious
anteroom to a long chain of high-vaulted cham-
bers connected by narrow passageways, form-
ing in general plan a gigantic letter §, all
illuminated by cleverly concealed lights. At-
tractive natural decorations are found in every
room. Here the side walls are covered by
fluted veneer done in erystal stucco, there in
graceful drapery hang creamy lambrequins in
ruddy-tinted stripes. From place to place,
singly or in groups, are pendent stalactites
and uprising stalagmites—the first inverted
narrow cones fed by trickling films of lime-
bearing water; the second pillars or columns
fed by spattering drops of the water. In one
room midway down the chain the show piece
is a narrow 30-foot cascade of white glittering
erystal flanked by twin falls of pale trans-
lucent ocher. At the base and to the rear of
this diamond easeade, visible by peering be-
tween slender columns of oriental alabaster, is
the “Fairy’s Secret,” a tiny pool illuminated
in due season by animated torches, presum-
ably carried by a brood of phosphorescent
larvee of some insect, perhaps a small fly that
is commonly present in such caverns. At the
end of the developed portion of the cavern a
ehamber of high vaulted roof suddenly gives

SCIENCE

241

place to a low-ceiled room containing a lakelet
in which are mirrored a multitude of delicate
stalactites—a pool of a thousand crystal
pendants.

According to A. C. Spencer, of the United
States Geological Survey, the caverns of the
Shenandoah Valley are far more numerous
than the casual visitor would be likely to
imagine. The rocks in which the broad trench-
like valley has been excavated by water are
mainly limestone, and wherever these rocks
oceur the existence of caverns is indicated by
two unfailing signs—the presence of innum-
erable water sinks and the absence of brooks
tributary to the rather regularly spaced creeks.
The brookless tracts receive a due share of
rainfall and must obviously contribute water
to maintain the flow of the creeks and rivers,
but their contributions are not delivered by
way of the surface drains, but through under-
ground channels that supply copious springs
in the deep valleys. The sinks are rude fun-
nels, by means of which surface waters are
diverted to the subterranean waterways.

The development of extensive underground
waterways in limestone formations like those
of the Shenandoah Valley hinges upon the two
geologic facts that large masses of rock are
always cut by joints and that limestone is dis-
solved by rainwater, which always contains
more or less carbon dioxide. Surface water
entering fissures, joint cracks and bedding
planes attacks the limestone walls and thus by
a process of etching converts close fractures
and joints into relatively open crevices. As
this progess of solution goes on lateral connec-
tions will be made from crevice to crevice,
and the downward etching of the linked open-
ings will be halted only when the subsurface
water channels have become closely adjusted to
the water table controlled by surface streams.
Thus it is that the caverns of the Shenandoah
Valley are formed.

THE SALT LAKE CITY MEETING

Tue sixth annual meeting of the Pacific
Division, American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, held at Salt Lake City,
June 22 to 24, 1922, in conjunction with a
summer session of the national association, was

242

perhaps the most successful meeting since the
organization of the division and, in the opinion
of those who attended at least, thoroughly
justified the policy of the Executive Commit-
tee, maintained in the face of some opposition,
to hold the annual meetings in rotation in
widely separated centers of population
throughout the Pacifie Coast region.

While Salt Lake City is somewhat isolated
geographically with respect to the major por-
tion of the membership of the division, and its
inaccessibility prevented the attendance of
many who would have attended a meeting in
@ coastal city, nevertheless the number in
attendance exceeded the expectations of the
committee and comprehended a very good rep-
resentation of the active scientists of the
Pacific Coast. Besides, owing to the coopera-
tion of the National Association which called
a summer session at the same time and place,
many distinguished men attended from the
middle west and eastern points.

The general sessions and the meetings of the
affiliated societies were accommodated at the
University of Utah, which is beautifully
located in the eastern part of Salt Lake City
on a plateau commanding a view of the great
valley which is geologically famous as Ancient
Lake Bonneville.

Hleven affiliated societies united with the
Pacific Division in holding meetings upon this
occasion as follows:

The American Physical Society.

American Meteorological Society.

American Phythopathological Society, Pacific
Division.

Ecological Society of America.

Pacific Coast Entomological Society.

Pacific Slope Branch, American Association of
Economic Entomologists.

Pacifie Division, Physiological Section, Botan-
ical Society of America.

Seismological Society of America.

The Society of American Foresters.

Utah Academy of Sciences.

Western Society of Naturalists.

Sessions of extraordinary interest were re-
ported in each case and many significant
papers were presented which it is hoped will
find publication in the various technical jour-
nals if not in the organs of the association.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

In addition to the regular meetings of the
affiliated societies there was a meeting of the
agronomists and soil experts which resolved
itself into an “Alkali Congress” in which the
experience in reclaiming alkali soils in various
sections of the west was presented with great
mutual benefit. It was determined to organize
a permanent association which would affiliate
with the Pacific Division and hold regular
meetings in future.

The general sessions of the Pacifie Division
were well attended and of more than usual
interest. Dr. John A. Widtsoe addressed the
Research Conference, speaking on “The re-
search problems of the Great Basin.”

The address of the retiring president, Dr.
Barton Warren Evermann, on “The conserva-
tion and proper utilization of our natural
resources,” provoked a warm eulogium from
President George Thomas, of the University of
Utah, and from Dr. L. O. Howard. A pleasant
feature of this session, which came as a sur-
prise to the recipients no less than to the audi-
ence, was the conferring of the degree of
doctor of laws upon Dr. Barton Warren Ever-
mann, president of the Pacifie Division and
director of the Museum of the California
Academy of Sciences, and Dr. James Harvey
Robinson, associate of the New School for
Social Research of New York City. With im-
pressive ceremony the degrees were conferred
by President George Thomas, of the Univer-
sity of Utah, who stated that the honor had
been conferred but six times previously in the
history of the university.

Of peculiar interest and significance at this
time was the session devoted to the symposium
on “The Problems of the Colorado River.”
The great reclamation project, which contem-
plates the utilization of the waters of the
Colorado River for power and _ irrigation,
involves the more or less conflicting rights of
seven states. The thorough discussion of the
scientific phases of this subject was of absorb-
ing interest, and will prove to be a direct con-
tribution to the furthering of the project. The
papers presented in this symposium will doubt-
less be published in ScrENnczE.

A notable feature of the convention was the
address by Dr. James Harvey Robinson, which
appeared in a recent number of ScIENCE.

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

Announcement was made of the election of
Dr. E. C. Franklin, professor of chemistry,
Stanford University, as president of the Pacific
Division for the ensuing year.

A resolution was unanimously adopted ex-
pressing appreciation and gratitude to the
University of Utah, the Brigham Young Uni-
versity, the Utah Academy of Sciences and the
Utah Agricultural College, who acted as hosts
to the convention. The great success of the
meeting was largely due to their very efficient
handling of the arrangements.

Dr. Robert G. Aitken, astronomer of Lick
Observatory, was elected a member of the
Executive Committee in place of Dr. W. W.
Campbell, whose term expired.

The thoughtful hospitality which marked the
reception and entertainment of visiting mem-
bers reached its climax on the last day of the
convention, when automobiles and lunches were
provided and the visitors who had previously
designated their choice of several all-day ex-
cursions were conveyed under the guidance of
scientific experts to points of interest in this
famous region of geological records and sceni¢
wonders.

An organ recital in the Mormon Tabernacle
and a dip in Great Salt Lake in the cool of the
evening brought the final day of the conven-
tion to a close.

There was a total registration of about 400,
of which 110 were members of the association.

The publicity afforded through the’ local
press of Salt Lake City was very gratifying.
Each year there is apparent a wider general
interest in the proceedings of ‘the annual meet-
ing which promises well for its future useful-
ness.

W. W. SarGEANT

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

THE INTERNATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL

In an article in Nature it is stated that a
meeting of the International Research Council
was held at Brussels on July 25 and the four
succeeding days, under the presidency of M.
E. Picard, secretary of the Académie des
Sciences, Paris. Twenty countries have now
joined the International Research Council, the

SCIENCE

243

following seventeen being represented at the
meeting: Belgium, Canada, Denmark, France,
Great Britain, Greece, Holland, Italy, Japan,
Norway, Poland, Portugal, Spain, Sweden,
Switzerland, United States of America, and
Czecho-Slovakia.

The greater part of the business of the meet-
ing was concerned with the organization of
international scientific unions additional to the
five for Astronomy, Geodesy and Geophysics,
Chemistry, Mathematics, and Scientific Radio-
Telegraphy, which are already in activity. As
a result of the meeting the formation of unions
for Pure and Applied Physics and for Geog-
raphy is said to be assured. The proposed
union in Geology awaits the consideration of
the Geological Congress, and some advance has
been made in connection with the biological
sciences.

At a previous meeting of the International
Research Council it had been provisionally
agreed to unite medical and biological sciences;
this decision did not find favor, and the inten-
tion now is to separate medicine from physi-
ology, zoology and botany. Proposals will be
submitted to the countries belonging to the
Research Council, and the ultimate formation
of this union will depend on the number of
countries willing to join.

Among other matters dealt with, a proposal
submitted by the National Research Council of
the United States and accepted by the meeting
may prove to be an important addition to the
responsibilities of the Research Council, which
hitherto contented itself with the formation of
unions which became practically autonomous
as soon as their statutes were approved. As
problems in which several unions were con-
cerned ran a danger of being neglected, the
proposal was now made by the United States
that the Research Council itself should take
such problems under its own special protection.
Three inquiries were mentioned as likely to
fall within this category. One of them had
already been considered by the International
Astronomical Union, which requested the Re-
search Council to make arrangements for a col-
laboration of several of the unions in the study
of the correlations between solar and _ terres-
trial phenomena. The second referred to the

244

energy supply of the world (fuel, solar energy,
ete.), while a third suggestion dealt with the
difficult and complicated question of interna-
tional patents. The risk of overlapping efforts
and the possible fear of interference with the
special work of the unions is avoided by the
provision—now coming into foree—that the
executive committee of the Research Council,
which hitherto consisted of five members, should
be enlarged, each union nominating an addi-
tional member.

At the concluding meeting the five members
of the executive committee appointed by the
general assembly were elected as follows: M. HK.
Picard (president), Mr. G. Lecointe and Pro-
fessor Vito Volterra (vice-presidents), Dr.
G. E. Hale, and Sir Arthur Schuster (general
secretary ).

THE ASSOCIATION OF IRON AND STEEL
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS

Tur sixteenth annual convention will meet
September 11 to 15 at Cleveland, Ohio, at
which time there will be presented and dis-
cussed subjects dealing particularly with steel
mill problems.

The papers have been written with a view
of giving to the engineers as much practical
data as is possible, feeling that this class of
information is far more beneficial than the
theoretical side when dealing with steel mill
problems.

Some of those who will present and discuss
the subjects are Dr. C. P. Steinmetz, Messrs.
B. G. Lamme, Wilfred Sykes, A. G. Witting,
F. C. Watson, D. M. Petty, L. W. Heller,
R. B. Gerhardt, D. B. Rushmore, J. B. Crane,
E. R. Fish, H. M. Rush, R. M. Butler, F.
Hodson, Professor Edgar Kidwell, F. W.
Cramer, A. R. Leavitt, E. T. Moore, R. H.
Bauer, F. A. Wiley, L. F. Galbraith and R. 8.
Shoemaker.

A tentative list of the subjects to be pre-
sented are:

Improvement in Efficiency of Electrie Power
Supply.

A Review of Steel Mill Electrification.

Boiler Practices of 1922.

Edueation and Safety.

The Gas Engine as a Prime Mover for Power
Generation.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

Steam Turbines.

Judging Combustion from Gas Analysis.

Electrification of the International Nickel Com-
pany ’s Works for Monel Metal.

Some Considerations in the Electrification of
the Steel Plant Railroad Yard.

Power in the Iron and Steel Industry.

Control—Motor—Lighting and Crane Standard-
ization.

Electric Furnaces.

Electrical Developments in 1922.

Investigation of Insulators for
Service.

In addition to the technical sessions, there
will be an exhibition of apparatus of particu-
lar interest to the steel mill engineers. This
exhibit will cover approximately 30,000 square
feet of floor space and will be held in the same
hall as is the technical sessions.

Representatives from practically every steel
mill in the United States are expected at this
convention for it is planned to interest prac-
tically every class of engineer, such as general
managers, general superintendents, department
superintendents, chief engineers, steam engi-
neers, electrical engineers, electrical superin-
tendents, mechanical engineers, master me-
chanics, superintendents of power, engineers:
of tests, safety engineers and department fore-
men.

Steel Mill

THE AMERICAN ELECTROCHEMICAL
SOCIETY

Tue meeting will be opened by President
Schluelerberg at Montreal on Thursday, Sep-
tember 21, and the technical program will pro-
ceed with the presentation and discussion of
papers on electrolysis and electroplating. The
recently organized Division on Electrodeposi-
tion (G. B. Hogaboom, chairman; Wm. Blum,
secretary) will be well represented and take
active part in the discussion of these papers.

One of the papers of the Thursday morning
session will deal with the physical properties
of electrolytic iron—a product which is being
turned out commercially, contrary to all pre-
dictions of ten years ago. There will also be
papers on zine, brass and other electrodeposited
metals.

On Thursday afternoon and Friday morn-
ing a symposium on “Industrial Heating” will
be in progress. The Electrothermie Division

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

(Bradley Stoughton, chairman; Colin G. Fink,
secretary), which held a most successful sym-
posium on “Hlectrie Cast Iron” at the Balti-
more meeting, in April last, will again be in
charge. Twelve papers especially prepared for
this session and dwelling on industrial heating
in electric furnaces, other than fusion and
melting furnaces, will be placed open to dis-
cussion.

There will be papers on:

a. History of industrial heating.

b. Principles of design of furnaces.

c. Comparison of fuel costs in different types
of electric furnaces, and with combustion fur-
naces. (In this connection, electric energy would
be estimated as a ‘‘fuel cost.’’)

d. Resistor materials.

e. Specific heats.

f. Electric conductivity of insulating materials
at industrial furnace temperatures.

g. Heat emissivity.

h. Heat transfer.

There will be an excursion to Shawinigan
Falls, affording members an opportunity to
inspect the various industrial plants of one of
the most progressive centers on the continent.
It is planned to have a special train for this
all day trip from Montreal.

A popular lecture on “Progress in physical
science’ is scheduled for Thursday evening.
Section Q will be in change of an old-fashioned
smoker on Friday evening.

The headquarters for this meeting will be
the Hotel Windsor. Members and guests are
urged to make their hotel reservations imme-
diately.

THE BIOLOGY CLUB OF THE OHIO STATE
UNIVERSITY

DurincG the academic year of 1921-1922, the
Biology Club of the Ohio State University held
monthly meetings from October to May inelu-
sive. Considerable interest was manifested in
the programs, to which contributed various
members of the biological and related depart-
ments, and some graduate students doing
original research in these departments. The
following papers were presented:

October 8: ‘‘Experiences in England, with ob-
servations on the status of botanical research and
interest there,’’ Professor A. E. Waller.

SCIENCE

245

a

November 7: ‘‘The ductless glands,’’ Professor
R. G. Hoskins; ‘‘The work of the Ohio State
Fish Survey,’’ Professor R. C. Osburn.

December 5: ‘‘Glaciation of the San Juan
Mountains, with notes of paleontological and nat-
ural history interest,’’? Dr. R. F. Webb.

January 9: Reports of the zoological and ento-
mologieal meetings and other sessions and general
meetings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, at Toronto, Professor
R. C. Osburn, Professor F. H. Krecker, Professor
D. M. DeLong, Professor C. H. Kennedy.

February 13: ‘‘The problems of biology from
the standpoint of a philosopher,’’ Professor A. E.
Avey.

March 6: ‘‘The distribution of the dragon flies
of the Put-in-Bay region,’’ Professor C. H. Ken-
nedy; ‘‘The reactions of house flies to radiant
heat,’’? Professor W. M. Barrows.

April 3: ‘The physiology of the guard cells
of Rumea patientia,’? Mr. J. D. Sayre; ‘‘The
nature of twig abscission in cottonwood, Populus
deltoides,’’? Miss Lois Lampe.

May 8: ‘‘Mushrooms and toadstools,’’ Pro-
fessor W. G. Stover; ‘‘Habits of aphid para-
sites,’’?’ Mr. H. Spencer.

The president of the club for the year was
Dr. E. P. Durrant, of the department of physi-
ology; the vice-president, Dr. R. C. Baker, of
the department of anatomy, and the secretary-
treasurer, Mr. W. C. Kraatz, of the department
of zoology and entomology.

THE GORGAS MEMORIAL

Iw response to a request received from the
directors of the Gorgas Memorial Institute of
Tropical and Preventive Medicine for the co-
operation of the American Medical Association,
a committee representing the association was
appointed consisting of Dr. Charles W. Rich-
ardson, Washington, D. C.; Dr. Fred B. Lund,
Boston, and Dr. George E. de Schweinitz, Phil-
adelphia. This committee has presented the
following report:

As a result of the stimulating suggestion of
President Porras, of Panama, it has been resolved
that a fitting memorial shall mark the human-
itarian service of the late Major General William
C. Gorgas, and the beneficent influence of his life
and work on mankind throughout the world.
Following the thought of President Porras, it
has further been decided that this memorial shall
take the form of a scientific institute for the study

246

of tropical diseases and of preventive medicine.

No better place could have been selected than
Panama City, the gateway between the Atlantic
and the Pacific, where General Gorgas’ well-
planned and executed work made possible the
building of the Panama Canal.

It is hardly necessary to call the attention of
the medical profession to the far-reaching effects
of General Gorgas’ work on the welfare of the
people of the whole world, especially in tropical
and semitropiecal climates, and in all places sub-
ject to the inroads of infectious disease.

We of the medical profession remember him as
our surgeon general during the early part of the
World War. We remember his prompt recogni-
tion of the necessity of bringing into active serv-
ice large numbers of physicians and surgeons
from civilian life. We remember his genial and
kindly nature, his high character, and his stead-
fast effort directed toward the organization and
equipment of the medical corps of the Army. We
remember the patriotic response. We remember
him as a great sanitary officer, to whom we wish
to pay a lasting tribute.

A central committee has been formed, with Ad-
miral Braisted, retired, ex-president of the Amer-
ican Medical Association, as its president.
American Medical Association has appointed a
committee of three to work in accord with the
central committee, and through its members this
appeal is made to the American medical profes-
sion.

The plan is to build at Panama an institute
for the study of tropical and infections diseases,
with a hospital, laboratories, departments for re-
search and all other facilities required in an insti-
tute of this character, erected and administered
according to the most progressive, modern ideals.
The Panamanian government, owing to the far-
sighted, philanthropic vision of President Porras,
has donated the great Santo Tomas Hospital, and
also the ground on which it is proposed immedi-
ately to construct the buildings as they have been
described. Dr. Strong has been appointed the
scientific director.

In conjunction with this work in Panama, there
will be established in Tuscaloosa, Ala., the Gorgas
School of Sanitation for the purpose of training
country health workers, sanitary engineers and
public health nurses, especially educated to deal
with the problems peeuliar to the southern states.

An endowment of six and one half million
dollars will be required to enable the institute to
carry on the work aceording to the plans which
have been formed.

SCIENCE

The.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

The Republic of Panama has demonstrated its
sympathetie and practical interest in this enter-
prise with splendid liberality. The physicians of
our country, and especially the members of the
American Medical Association, surely will not
disregard the memory of a former president, and
will seize the opportunity to make in this respect
a contribution of which they will be proud.

The campaign for funds is to be international.
A large response is expected from North, Central
and South America, since the nations of these
countries have been the chief beneficiaries of the
labors of General Gorgas. It is fitting that his
co-workers of the American medical profession
should be requested to respond generously to this
appeal. It is hoped that every member of the
American Medical Association will make as liberal
a subseription as possible. Any sum will be
gratefully received. Checks should be drawn to
the order of the ‘‘Gorgas Fund’’ and should be
mailed to the American Medical Association, 535
North Dearborn Street, Chicago.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Dr. E. T. Wuirraxer, professor of mathe-
matics in the University of Edinburgh, has
been elected a foreign member of the Acea-
demia dei Lincei, Rome.

Proressor W. Roux, of Halle, has been
elected honorary member of the Academy of
Medicine at Turin. Professor Roux has pre-
sented to the Roux Foundation for research on
the mechanics of development the 30,000 marks
recently sent him by the St. Louis HEmergeney
Relief Committee for German and Austrian
Universities.

Proressor A. N. Wuirrneap, of Cambridge,
has been elected president of the Aristotelian
Society for the coming session. He will de-
liver his inaugural address on November 6.

Dr. N. Bishop Harman, of London, has been
elected a corresponding member of the Cher-
bourg Scientific Society, in recognition of his
researches into the origin of the facial muscu-
lature.

Wiuiiam Scuaus, of the Bureau of Ento-
mology, has been elected an honorary member
of the Entomological Society of Brazil in
recognition of his extensive work on the butter-
flies and moths of Brazil.

PosTMASTER GENERAL Hupert Work, for-

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

merly president of the American Medical Asso-
ciation, was the guest of honor at a dinner on
July 26, in Washington, given by the chargé
daffaires of the Panama legation, Sefor
Lefevre, in honor of the committee of the
American Medical Association appointed to co;
operate with the board of directors of the
Gorgas Memorial.

Mr. W. H. Dryss has retired from the diree-
torship of the Aerological Observatory of the
British Meteorological Office at Benson.

Dr. F. von LuscHan, professor of anthro-
pology at the University of Berlin, retires this
year, having reached the age limit.

G. R. Mansrietp has been appointed chief
of the section of non-metalliferous deposits in
the Geologie Branch of the U. S. Geological
Survey.

Dr. J. §. Furr, director of the British
Geological Survey, will act as one of the dele-
gates of the Geological Society of London at
the International Geological Congress at Brus-
sels on August 21 to September 3. The other
delegates nominated by this society are Pro-
fessor E. J. Garwood, vice-president, and Dr.
J. W. Evans, F.R.S.

Tue Rontgen Society, London, has elected
as president Sir Humphry Rolleston, and as
vice-presidents Sir W. H. Bragg, Sir Ernest
Rutherford and Dr. A. E. Barclay.

Proressor THomas F. Honcatsr, of North-
western University, has returned home after a
year’s leave of absence in China, during which
time, though nominally on a vacation, he as-
sisted in the mathematical and administrative
work of the University of Nanking.

ATHERTON SEIDELL, of the Hygienic Labora-
tory, U. 8. Public Health Service, is in Europe
to study methods and progress of work on
vitamines.

Dr. F. W. PENNELL, curator of botany in
the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadel-
phia, accompanied by Mrs. Pennell and by Mr.
K. P. Killip, of the National Museum, have
gone to Colombia, where about six months will
be spent in botanical exploration in the central
and western Cordillera.

SCIENCE

247

Ir is announced in Nature that Dr. Michael
Grabham has gone to Porto Santo, the north-
ern island of the Madeira group, to study the
conditions under which the local race of Portu-
guese inhabitants are said to enjoy complete
immunity from dental caries. These people
possess huge, ugly, yellow, but sound teeth, and
Dr. Grabham proposes to bring specimens to
London.

A. E. Fars has taken furlough from the
Geological Survey to do private geological
work abroad.

WE learn from the Journal of the Washing-
ton Academy of Sciences that at the call of
Secretary Walcott, a meeting of the scientific
staff of the Smithsonian Institution and its

branches was held on May 23 to discuss the

promotion of research. Several research prob-
lems which could be advantageously taken up
were suggested, together with means for carry-
ing them out. A committee on research was
then appointed by the secretary, consisting of
Dr. Merrill, chairman, Dr. Coville, Dr. Fewkes,
Mr. Fowle, Dr. Hough, Mr. Nelson and Dr.
Stejneger. The committee will hear reports
by individuals on proposed research projects
and consider means for taking them up, and
it is hoped that by fall a definite plan of action
will be formulated.

Park Bengamin, the well-known patent
lawyer, formerly editor of The Scientific Amer-
ican and of Appleton’s “Cyclopedia of Ap-
plied Mechanies,” died on August 21, in his
seyenty-fourth year.

Dr. ArtHurR Ransome, F.R.S., known for
his contributions to the study of tuberculosis
and public health, died on July 25 at the age
of ninety-two years.

A commirtE has been organized, as has
already been reported in Science, to collect
subseriptions for the monument to the memory
of Professor Yves Delage which it is proposed
to erect near the marine laboratory at Roscoff,
Finisterre. Several Americans have worked at
this laboratory and all biologists are indebted
to Delage not only for his discoveries in marine
biology but also for his organization of
zoological science, his book on protoplasm and
heredity and “L’Année Biologique.” Sub-

248

scriptions to the memorial may be sent direct
to Mlle. L. Dehorne, treasurer of the com-
mittee, at the Laboratory of Zoology, Sorbonne,
1, rue Victor-Cousin, Paris, 5%, or through any
one of the American members of the committee,
F. R. Lilhe, T. H. Morgan and C. B. Daven-
port. x

We learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association that Professor E. Marchia-
fava, having reached the age of seventy-five,
retired, June 5, from the chair of pathological
anatomy at the University of Rome after forty-
eight years of continuous incumbency. A fund
has been endowed in his name by contributions
from royalty, the city of Rome, the Italian
Red Cross, the public health service, the hos-
pitals and banks, and others, to found scholar-
ships at the University of Rome. A number of
addresses were made by delegates from various
scientific societies and Marchiafava’s numerous
contributions to science were enumerated, his
initial research on malaria and his leadership
in the campaign against malaria in Italy, his
discovery of the estivo-autumnal parasite, of
the cause of melanemia, and his studies in
syphilis, tuberculosis, aleoholism, ete. The city
of Rome has always regarded him as the one
responsible for having freed it from malaria.
One of his latest works was the foundation of
the Asilo Antimalarico Communale as a home
in Rome for the children of fiamilies living in
the malaria infested marshy districts in the
region. A tablet was placed on this building
by the community when it was inaugurated last
year, paying tribute to Marchiafava as the
originator of the project.

Tue tariff bill as passed by the Senate pro-
vides for the continuation of the policy that
scientific instruments and apparatus which are
imported by educational institutions and used
solely for educational purposes shall be ad-
mitted free of tariff duty. The provision was
adopted by a vote of 30 to 26.

Tue Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation notes that in the final passage of the
tariff bill, the Senate reversed its position on
the importation of dyes and synthetic medi-
cines, and placed extremely high duties on all
such articles. There was read to the Senate a

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

letter from Secretary of War John W. Weeks
urging that the American dye industry and
synthetic medicine industry be protected in the
interest of national defense and public health.
While the Senate did not vote that there should
be an embargo on these products, the tariff
duties are of such nature that they will in
effect be a conservative check on the importa-
tion of dyes and synthetic medicines derived
therefrom. The new duties fix the duty on
coal-tar dye intermediates at 10.5 cents a pound
and an additional 75 per cent. ad valorem, and
on finished dyes and coal-tar products, 90 per
cent. ad valorem. In urging the adoption by
the Senate of these rates, Senator Wadsworth,
of New York, showed that England, France and
Italy have placed an embargo against the im-
portation of dyestuffs. He said that as a
people we have paid little attention and given
small encouragement to scientific research. He
asserted that chemical laboratories can not be
maintained unless there is a chemical industry,
and that research in the laboratory and chem-
ieal industry go hand in hand. As a result of
the action taken by the Senate on this legisla-
tion, it is said that approximately 200 labora-
tories and plants manufacturing medicinals and
coal-tar products which have been built up in
this country since the war will be enabled to
continue operations.

Tue American Dietetic Association will hold
its fifth annual meeting in Washington, D. C.,
October 16 to 18, with headquarters at the New
Willard Hotel. Speakers of national reputa-
tion will diseuss recent developments in
dietetics, as well as administrative and other
practical problems of the dietitian. Trips to
Walter Reed Hospital and the scientific labora-
tories of the government will give opportuni-
ties to observe the research work now carried
on in Washington. An exhibit of equipment,
food materials, charts and other illustrative
matter will be a feature of the convention.

Unprer the auspices of the New England
Section of the American Society of Agronomy,
and in cooperation with the Maine Agricul-
tural Experiment Station and Aroostook
County Farm Bureau, some thirty agronomists,
pathologists and others interested in problems

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

of potato production spent three days from
August 8 to 10 in Aroostook County, Maine,
inspecting potato fields and discussing prob-
lems of certification and production. A formal
program was rendered.

Steps were taken recently by the Boston
Chamber of Commerce to organize a New
England Research Council to study the food
supply and marketing problems of the region.
President K. L. Butterfield, of the Massachu-
setts College, was elected chairman of the
groups of agricultural colleges and the federal
and state departments of agriculture and other
agencies interested in the formation of the
council.

We learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association that members of the Brit-
ish Medical Association have been asked to
contribute five shillings each in answer to the
appeal for help from Russian medical men and
their families. Up to July 3 $3,500 had been
received.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tue will of the late William Sloane makes
bequests to public institutions amounting to
about $600,000, including Yale University,
$100,000; the Presbyterian Hospital, $100,000;
New York Public Library, $50,000; Metropol-
itan Museum of Art, $50,000; American Mu-
seum of Natural History, $50,000; Robert Col-
lege of Constantinople, $10,000, and Yale For-
eign Missionary Society for the institution
known as “Yale in China’ at Changshau,
$10,000.

By the will of the late Rollin D. Salisbury,
of the University of Chicago, his estate,
amounting to $125,000, is left in trust to his
two sisters, on whose death one third goes to
the University of Chicago for the endowment
of scientific fellowships and $2,500 to Beloit
College. Two former associates of Dr. Salis-
bury in geological research, Dr. Wallace W.
Atwood, now president of Clark University,
and Dr. Harlan H. Barrows, head of the Uni-
versity of Chicago department of geography,
will share in the division of Dr. Salisbury’s
library.

SCIENCE

249

Dr. J. Scunerper, of Milwaukee, has been
elected “honorary senator” by the University
of Wiirzburg in recognition of his donation of
3,000,000 marks to the university on the recent
anniversary of its foundation, 340 years ago.

Dr. R. Firz, professor of medicine in the
Mayo Foundation and chief of a medical sec-
tion, has become associate professor of medi-
cine at Harvard University and visiting physi-
cian at the Peter Bent Brigham Hospital,
Boston.

Dr. Wint1am C. Ross, professor of biological
chemistry at the medical school of the Univer-
sity of Temas, has been appointed associate
professor of physiological chemistry at the
University of Illinois.

Dr. Witpur C. Surru, since 1916 professor
of anatomy in Tulane University, has been ap-
pointed director of athletics.

Dr. Cuarues B. McGuumpuy has been ap-
pointed assistant professor of pathology at
Northwestern University Medical School. He
has been working in Vienna for the past two
years.

Mr. R. M. Witson, at present principal of
the Hast Anglian Institute of Agriculture,
Chelmsford, has been appointed principal of
the South-Hastern Agricultural College, Wye.

Dr. J. 8. Dunn has been appointed to the
Procter chair of pathology and pathological
anatomy at Manchester in succession to Pro-
fessor H. R. Dean.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

METEORITE HUNTING

To THE Eprtor oF Science: The experience
of the writer in “meteor chasing” fully cor-
roborates those of Dr. Merrill as related in
Science’ for June 23. The general inability
of the observers to furnish reliable data of the
event can scarcely be exaggerated. Despite
this, however, the writer has in two instances
succeeded in “running to earth” the meteorite
and securing a large portion if not all of it.

He also has to announce the recent obtaining
of two pieces of meteoric iron (siderites)
which were plowed up by a farmer in making

250

a tobacco bed three miles southwest of Glas-
gow, Barren County, Kentucky. They exhibit
on fresh surfaces, even without etching, very
coarse Widmanstadt structure. One of them
weighs about twenty-five and the other about
twenty pounds. They are both very. much
oxidized on the surface, and had evidently been
in the earth a very long time. The smaller
piece goes to the National Museum, where
doubtless it will be described in full by Dr.
Merrill in the near future. We propose for
this fall the name “Glasgow siderite.” It is
the fifteenth meteorite known from Kentucky.

In hunting down the first meteorite the
writer secured after he came to Kentucky—
the Bath Furnace, which fell November 15,
1902, at 6:45 p.m. central time—he had good
success in obtaining from a large number of
observations five which were so accurately ex-
pressed as to angular measurements that they
indicated southern Bath County, Kentucky, as
the place of the fall. It was here that the first
two pieces of the meteorite (an aerolite) were
almost immediately recovered, and this was
followed five months later by the discovery by
a squirrel hunter of the main portion.

It is in the attempt to locate a meteorite
which passed over Indiana, Kentucky and
West Virginia, early in the evening of May 30
last, 7:30 central time, 8:30 eastern time, that
the writer has thus far been bafiled by the sin-
gular ineptitude of the average man, and even
of the man supposed to be above the average
in intelligence, to grasp the space relations
involved in the problem of a body coming to
the earth from without. To his request
through the newspapers for observations on
this meteor the writer has received prompt re-
plies from a large number of persons. They
came from four states—Ohio, Indiana, Ken-
tucky and West Virginia—manifest the great-
est eagerness to serve the cause of science, and
represent, for the most part, the more intelli-
gent of the various communities from which
they come; yet even by a follow-up corre-
spondence it has thus far been almost impos-
sible to obtain from any of them reliable data
concerning the main thing desired—namely,
the compass direction of the point of disap-
pearance of the meteorite, either by “bursting”

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1444

or sinking below the horizon, as seen from the
place of observation. Another thing desired
was information concerning any sounds, as of
cannonading, that might have been heard in
connection with the “bursting,” and if such
were heard, what was the interval between the
two phenomena.

It is evident from the replies received, that
while people about us formally subscribe to
the doctrine of a spherical earth, surrounded
by infinite space, practically their conception
of the universe when it comes to orienting
themselves in it with reference to things ter-
restrial and things celestial is as primitive as
that delineated on the monuments of Egypt,
set forth in the writings of the ancient Chal-
deans and Hebrews, or promulgated from the
pulpit of Voliva of Zion City.

Knowing that few people possess compasses,
and that still fewer know how to use them in
measuring degrees of azimuth, the writer sent
out maps, with the direction to each observer
that he return it after he had oriented it with
reference to the points of the compass and
drawn a line on it from the place of observa-
tion toward the point of bursting or disap-
pearance of the meteor. It has been surpris-
ing (though we should have been prepared for
it by previous experience) to find how few
people can locate points correctly on a map,
or indeed use a map for any of the purposes
for which it has been made. One of the par-
ties, and he a college professor, evidently held
the map above his head in an effort to make it
represent the sky and tried to show by a curved
line on this flat surface, and hence in a dif-
ferent plane, what appeared to him to be the
descending path of the meteor. As other evi-
dences of the survival of naive primitive con-
ceptions as to the relation existing between
the “heavens and the earth,” all the Indiana
observers were sure the meteorite fell in their
state, with commendable state pride making
the “circle of the heavens” meet that of the
earth on their side of the Ohio River. The
pot of gold is to be found at the end of the
rainbow just over the neighboring hill. Hence
also the Ohio observer, who saw it from a
moving automobile, was sure that he could
conduct the writer to the exact spot where the

SepremMBer 1, 1922]

meteorite fell, which he described as in a
ravine four and one half miles southeast of
Oxford, Ohio. Hence, also, the size of it was
variously estimated as “six inches in diame-
ter,” “as large as a dinner plate,” ‘“as large as
a lard can,” “as large as a barrel’; and the
path of it on the face of the firmament was
deseribed as “descending toward the earth”
(really it was passing toward the horizon)
“with a moderately descending course,” “at an
angle of 45 degrees,” “at an angle of 65 de-
grees’—all blissfully unconscious that these
estimates mean nothing to any one but the one
making it. A doctor described the bright trail
left by the meteor as “20 feet long.” Two of
the observers at different points, neither of
them closer to it than 50 miles, despite the
fact that sound waves travel with a very low
velocity as compared to those of light, were
certain that they heard a “swishing” or “hiss-
ing” noise accompanying the meteor as it sped
across the sky. A number attempted to give
the direction of the path of the meteor with
reference to the points of the compass, not
realizing that this was impossible in all eases
where it did not pass through the zenith of
the observer, because only one of the com-
ponents of its course—that athwart the line
of his vision—could be determined by him.

Let us hope that when our present boy
scouts come to maturity, having been trained
in a proper knowledge of their relation to their
physical environment, which has been so sadly
neglected in our schools—is it because the
teaching of the boy has been so exclusively
delegated to women?—those who then follow
“meteor chasing” as a scientific recreation may
find their efforts to elicit information concern-
ing things celestial, when they come into rela-
tion to things terrestrial, crowned with better
success than were those of their predecessors.

Meanwhile the meteorite of May 30, 1922,
les hidden somewhere in the most mountainous
portion of West Virginia, probably, according
to the advices received from Dr. I. C. White,
state geologist of that state, within the area
covered by the counties of Fayette, Greenbrier,
Raleigh and Summers. What an exasperating
way meteorites seem to have of so frequently

SCIENCE

251

selecting the wildest and most rugged portions
of our earth in which to bury themselves !2

ArtHuUR M. MILLER
THE UNIVERSITY oF KENTUCKY

THE FOURTH RECORD OF THE OCCUR-
RENCE IN THE ATLANTIC OCEAN
OF THE WHALE SHARK,
RHINEODON TYPUS

On the early morning of May 19, 1922,
while the Munson liner, American Legion,
Charles H. Zearfoss master, was crossing over
the banks which lie northeast of the Abrolhos
Light, off the coast of Brazil, in Lat. 17° 57’ S.
and Long. 38° 41’ W., a large shark was struck
by the stem of the vessel and held doubled
around the bow for some hours. It was photo-
graphed and an attempt was made to get it
aboard, but the weight was too great.

It was struck just behind the gills and, with
about eight feet of the head end on one side
of the bow and some twenty-two feet of the
body and tail on the other, it was so perfectly
balanced that the vessel had to be stopped and
backed before it could be got rid of.

Photographs sent me by Mr. C. F. Krauss,
a passenger on the steamer, and by Captain
Zearfoss, show only a part of the body, but
they show plainly the spots arranged in ver-
tical rows and separated by vertical bars, the
distinctive markings of the whale shark. These
photographs leave not the faintest shadow of
doubt that the shark was Rhineodon.

This then definitely constitutes a fourth
record for the Atlantic Ocean of the oceur-
rence of the largest of all the sharks, and of
the rarest of all the large sharks. The other

1 Since writing the above, letters from two per-
sons in West Virginia—W. T. Hill, Eskdale,
Kanawha County, and M. W. Venable, who saw
the meteor from near the mouth of Glade Creek,
Raleigh County—indicate that the meteorite is
probably to be looked for in Greenbrier County,
that state. The former heard a ‘‘rumbling
sound’’ in a due east direction about one minute
after the meteor disappeared, and the latter a
‘*tremendous roar similar to a salvo of artillery’?
simultaneous with the bursting of the meteorite
with a ‘‘brilliance almost blinding’’ in a diree-
tion a little east of north.

252

records are as follows: In January, 1902, an
18-foot specimen came ashore at Ormond, Fla.
It was deseribed by Mr. B. A. Bean in Sctence,
February 28, 1902. Its skin is now in the
U. S. National Museum. A second specimen
was taken at Knight’s Key, Fla., in May, 1912.
It was put on record by me in Science of
August 22, 1913, and the fish and its capture
were fully described by me in “Zoologica,”
Scientific Contributions N. Y. Zool. NSoc.,
March, 1915. Its mounted skin is in the pos-
session of Captain Charles Thompson of
Miami, Fla. The third, and, except the
Abrolhos Light specimen, the only other def-
inite record, is of a fish taken near Cape
Sable, Fla., in June, 1919. This I have also
put on record in Science for August 27, 1920.
The indefinite record in the Atlantic, to which
reference has been made, is found in George
Bennett’s “Wanderings in New South Wales,
Batavia, Pedir Coast, Singapore and China,”
London, 1834. In Vol. II, p. 267, is a notice
of a giant shark seen near the Azores in 1831.
It was of great size, but too far off for spots
and stripes to be seen, and while it was prob-
ably a Rhineodon it cannot be so stated def-
initely. Hence the specimen, referred to in
the body of this article, constitutes our fourth
definite record for the Atlantie Ocean.

E. W. GupGER
AMERICAN MusruM or Natural HISTORY

DISCHARGE OF STATIC ELECTRICITY

A SPLENDID example of the discharge of static
electricity between two persons was witnessed
at one of the games in the gymnasium of Iowa
Wesleyan College at Mount Pleasant during
the recent southeastern Iowa high school basket-
ball tournament, and is reported by Ben H.
Wilson, a member of the lowa Academy of
Science.

While the game was in progress between the
Wayland and Ft. Madison teams, Saturday
evening, March 11, 1922, two players in pur-
suit of the ball came together in the southeast
corner of the court, after a fast run of almost
half way down the length of the floor. A deep
yellow spark was discharged between their
bodies, the flash of which was plainly visible
to spectators in the top row of the baleony in

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

the northwest corner of the gymnasium, over
one hundred feet distant. This could be no
illusion as it was witnessed by over a dozen
persons who made exclamation of the fact
almost simultaneously. The spark appeared to
be emitted at about knee height. Both players
had on rubber-soled athletic shoes which would
be non-conductors, and wore woolen shirts and
cotton flappers. That this was visible in a
well lighted room makes ithe phenomenon all the
more remarkable.

Shocking the cat by rubbing the fur on its
back; lighting the gas from a spark emitted |
from one’s knuckle; witnessing sparks while’
combing one’s hair in the dark; and children’s
shocking each other while playing on woolen
carpets, are all quite common experiences, but
this is the first time that the writer has heard
of a similar occurrence being reported during
an athletic contest.

H. E. Jaques
IowA WESLEYAN COLLEGE

PARAFFINE PAPER SCREEN FOR SHOWING
THE POSITION OF RETINAL IMAGE

Unper the title, “The Inversion of the
Retinal Image,” Hartridge! refers to a state-

- ment by Senet? that the retinal image is not

inverted. The former author then states that
the evidence for that inversion is absolutely
reliable and proceeds, in five paragraphs, to
summarize the evidence on which the inversion
of the retinal image is based. I quote his first
two paragraphs:

“¢(1) If the eye ball of an albino animal be re-
moved intact, and be mounted in a tube, so that
while the rays from external objects enter the
pupil, the posterior surface of the eye ball can
be examined by an observer, then owing to the
absence of pigment in the choroid the image
formed on the retina is clearly visible. This
image is seen to be inverted, top being at bottom
and right being at left.

(2) In the case of an ordinary animal the
choroid and sclera can with care be removed from
the eye ball, leaving the retina in situ; observa-

1 Hartridge, H.: Proe. of the Physiol. Soc.,
May 15, 1920, published in the J. of Physiol.,
Vol. LIV, August 1920, p. 6.

2Senet: Revista de la Universidad de Buenos
Aires, 41, p. 398, 1919.

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

tion of the retinal image shows that it is inverted
and transposed.’’

The experiments suggested here by Hartridge
are well enough known, but his summary calls
definitely to mind the fact that it is by the
use of one or the other of these experiments
that demonstration of the actual position and
of the inversion of the image in the eye of a
mammal must usually be presented to classes
of students in physiology, whenever direct evi-
dence is given at all. Difficulties often arise
in carrying out either experiment. The eye
of an albino as large as a rabbit is very often
not easily obtainable. Since the eye of such
an “ordinary animal” as the pig may almost
always be had from the butcher or the meat
market so soon after the animal has been killed
that the dioptrical parts are still transparent,
the ordinary eye would seem to be the obvious
one to use for such demonstrations. As a
matter of fact, however, the preparation of the
demonstration with a pigment-bearing eye is
rendered always somewhat uncertain, on ac-
count of the difficulty of removing the choroid
and the retinal pigment without puncturing
the retina and thus destroying its value as a
sereen on which to see the image. I have found
it easy to complete the demonstration of the
inverted image in such cases by carefully
cutting out a little’ window of about 5 mm.
diameter in the retina and then pressing over
this window until it sticks fast against the
vitreous humor a small piece of thin paraffine
paper. Standing in the place of the retina,
this paper forms a very good screen upon
which to receive the image.

An incandescent electric light forms an ex-
cellent object for use in the demonstration,
which is always an interesting one to students
and certainly quite conclusive, as Hartridge
says.

Gro. D. SHAFER

LELAND STANFORD, JR., UNIVERSITY.

QUOTATIONS
SPIRIT PHOTOGRAPHS
THERE is a society or club known as the
Magic Cirele which consists of professional
conjurers, but admits a few approved ama-
teurs, to the kindness of one of whom, a dis-

SCIENCE

253

tinguished member of the medical profession,
we are indebted for a copy of a report, dated
May 31, issued by the Oceult Committee of the
Cirele. This committee, which consists of ex-
pert conjurers, has been appointed to investi-
gate what are called “spiritualistie phenom-
ena,” and at the suggestion of Sir Arthur
Conan Doyle appears to have turned its atten-
tion first to spirit photographs. The report
deals with the inquiries made by the committee
into the claims of two people—a man and a
woman—who it was alleged were producing
spirit photographs of a remarkable nature in
unopened packets of photographic plates.
Neither of the mediums came out of the ordeal
unscathed. When a fraud-proof packet was
sent to the male operator he obtained no re-
sults. He stated that the packet had twice
been “held,’’ but that the “usual sensation”
had not been felt. As soon, however, as a
packet that could be tampered with was sub-
mitted, a “psychic extra,” as it appears to be
called, was obtained on one of the plates. Un-
fortunately for the performer the conjurers
had tampered with the packet first. In addi-
tion to other tests, a straight line of red var-
nish (invisible in the red light of the dark
room) had been painted across the top left
side of the edge of the stack of six plates. On
the return of the packet by the medium three
of the red marks were found at the bottom,
showing that these plates had been reversed.
When the operator was asked for an assurance
that the packet had really been returned un-
opened, he replied in the affirmative. He said
that it was quite usual to get adverse remarks
from persons who did not understand, and that
such remarks were not worthy of notice. Shall
we admire the power of spirits, or deplore the
frailty of human nature? The lady medium
was vouched for by Mr. and Mrs. Hewat
McKenzie, who conduct an institution known
as the British College of Psychie Science.
Three sittings were held with this medium.
First, two members of the committee secured a
private sitting. It was required that the
plates, enclosed in a sealed packet, should be
sent for “magnetization” some days in ad-
vance, and at the sitting these plates were ex-
posed, and on development “extras” were on

254

most of them. On one a face was visible in the
midst of a cotton-wool effect; the others had
erude markings, ascribed by the medium to un-
formed “ectoplasm” or to “spirit lights.” As
will be observed, she had acquired some of the
latest spiritualistic terminology. At the second
sitting, arranged by Mrs. McKenzie, a sealed
box of six plates, forwarded in accordance with
instructions, was produced by the medium.
The box was opened and the plates transferred
to metal dark slides; a service was then held,
hymns being sung, and the Lord’s Prayer re-
cited. The plates were then exposed and an
“extra” appeared on one of them—on No. 1
plate—which the investigators satisfied them-
selves had been substituted for the first plate
of the original package. The medium had by
this time become suspicious and nervous, and
in fact she was not equal to holding her own
with professional conjurers. She, however,
consented to a third sitting, and for this an un-
opened box of unprepared plates was sent. It
therefore became necessary that the plates
should be secretly marked before being placed
in the dark slides. One of the investigators,
having placed the open stack of plates before
the medium under the ruby light, secretly
attached a small pad of pink material, chem-
ically prepared, to the ball of his right thumb,
and in handing the plates one by one to the
medium an invisible mark was impressed on
each. The medium gathered up the slides, and
going into the studio took them to a small table
on which her handbag was standing. The
ostensible object was to obtain the hymn-books
for the service, but the move being anticipated,
the members of the deputation placed them-
selves in convenient positions to observe her
actions. The hand holding the slides was seen
to be placed inside the bag; one slide was
dropped into a side pocket and a duplicate
slide picked up with the hymn-books. Four
plates were developed, and on one which did
not show the mark a “spirit extra’? appeared.
All this may be amusing to the cynic, but the
conclusions the committee of the Magic Circle
draw are that although spirit photographers,
like conjurers, meet changing conditions by the
adoption of new methods, there are at present
at least two methods in general use by some,

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

at least, of the mediums who devote themselves
to obtaining photographic “extras.” In the one
case, when the plates are accessible before the
sitting, the spirit form is impressed, in ad-
vance, by contact with a selected transparency.
In the other, when the packet is not available
beforehand, the exchange for a prepared plate
is made by a subtle move after the original
plates have been loaded into the dark slides.
The committee assert that they have never im-
posed a test which would not have served to
demonstrate the straightforwardness and hon-
esty of the medium, and conclude with a prom-
ise to extend to any honest medium fair, im-
partial and courteous treatment, and to give
him a free hand to carry out the experiment in
his own way.—British Medical Journal.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

The Evolution of Climates. By Marspen Man-
son. 1922. Published by the author.

Dr. Manson has been long and widely
known as a student of geologic climates.
When his attention was first directed to the
subject the currently accepted theory—which
indeed still persists—postulated the solar con-
trol of terrestrial temperatures similar to that
which now dominates such temperatures, but
it early became apparent that not all of the
problems presented could be satisfactorily
solved under this assumption. Jor instance,
the non-zonal distribution of climates such as
certainly obtained during at least the major
part of pre-Pleistocene time, the frequent re-
currence of mild temperatures in polar areas,
glaciation at or near sea level in and adjacent
to the tropics, ete., have not been satisfactorily
explained on the basis of exclusive solar con-
trol. This leads to the postulate of a dual heat
supply—that is a part derived from the earth
itself and a part from the sun. The manner
in which this postulate works out and the
solution it seems to afford to the various prob-
lems involved is set forth in the present paper.

In 1903 Dr. Manson published a preliminary
paper under the same title as the present one,
in which he reviewed the various theories that
have been proposed to account for the origin
and distribution of climatic differences, and

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

after practically twenty years of investigation,
reading, and correspondence the present work
ean be considered as a summation of results.
It is divided into three parts, the first of which
sets forth the scope of the problem, while the
second part deals with the application of the
principles set forth to the facts of paleontology
and geology, and the third to a recapitulation
of conclusions and their general application.

Dr. Manson of course recognizes that on ac-
count of the low conductivity of the earth’s
crust it has been held by physicists and mathe-
maticians that this source was inadequate as a
factor of importance, but after reviewing the
data on which this assumption is based he
“feels obliged to reject ithe conclusions as ‘in-
competent, irrelevant, and immaterial’.’” He
holds that “both earth heat and solar radia-
tion prevailed as active factors in temperature
control during all of the eras of geologic his-
tory and until the modern era of solar con-
trol; that the former was available as ocean
stored heat, but the supply was held in the
forming crust by reason of its low conductivity
and was slowly made available by denudation
and the exposures of radio-active materials,
ete., or by periodic changes in the topographic
form of the earth’s surface which made in-
crements of the interior sources of energy
available.”

This earth heat warmed the early oceans,
the first effect being to increase evaporation
and cloud formation. This ocean stored heat
was conserved by the moist air and clouds and
in part restored by the effects of solar radia-
tion. This continued until the exhaustion of
earth heat was registered by the cold oceans
of Pleistocene time.

The causes for the initiation of glaciation
as well as the alternation of glaciation and de-
glaciation or inter-glacial periods have given
rise to almost endless speculation. Many stu-
dents have stated frankly that they can see
no possible or reasonable explanation of, for
instance, the Permo-Carboniferous glaciation
that occurred in or adjacent to the tropies,
under direct solar control, and under this as-
sumption this is about the only conclusion
that can be reached. But Dr. Manson offers
an explanation that is not only logical but

SCIENCE 255

seemingly possible not to say probable. He
says: “The two conditions essential for glacia-
tion are: (1) Cold Continental Areas—cold .
from more rapid chilling when remote from
ocean influences, from elevation, from exposure
to cold anti-cyclonic winds, and, upon the final
loss of efficient earth heat; (2) Warm
Oceans, to supply water vapor in sufficient
amounts to deeply glaciate and to maintain
continuous cloudiness to intercept solar
energy.”

“and areas chilled prior to the oceans and
were therefore exposed to glaciation. Fur-
thermore in cooling oceans each of these im-
pairments occurred at a critical temperature;
first that degree which could just maintain
cloud density in zones of minimum cloudiness;
and lastly, that degree which could just main-
tain cloudiness in zones of maximum cloud
density. Moreover, if, during the existence of
either glaciation, the oceans should fluctuate
in temperature to points somewhat above or
somewhat below these critical temperatures,
corresponding variations in the generation of
water vapor would necessarily follow, imposing
variations in the integrity of the cloud sphere
in each latitude. Each fall below this critical
temperature would impair the cloud sphere,
and each rise above this temperature would
restore it, thus alternately exposing the sur-
face to solar energy and shutting off the same
until the oceans again chilled below the eriti-
cal temperature.”

This in brief outline is Manson’s explana-
tion of the phenomena of glaciation and de-
glaciation. The theme is of course fully elabo-
rated in the paper, and whatever its fate may
be it is something that will have to be reckoned
with by all future students. All will admit
that any explanation that is put forward to
account for glaciation or deglaciation must
apply equally to these phenomena wherever
they occur, and while many theories have been
proposed that may seem to cover particular
cases they fall short of accounting for all. Dr.
Manson’s explanation applies as well to the
Huronian and Permo-Carboniferous as to the
Pleistocene glaciation. It is a notable contribu-
tion.

F. H. Knowiton

256

SPECIAL ARTICLES

RECENT DISCOVERIES OF THE ANTIQUITY
OF MAN

THIS paper is an abstract of two lines of
research recently undertaken by the authors
which will be published under the titles: “Old
and New Standards of Pleistocene Division in
Relation to the Prehistory of Man in
Europe,”! “Pliocene (Tertiary) and Early
Pleistocene (Quaternary) Mammalia of East
Anglia, Great Britain, in Relation to the Ap-
pearance of Man.”?

At the April, 1921, meeting of the National
Academy, Dr. Osborn ventured the prediction
that a large-brained type of man would be
found in the Pliocene. He was not aware that
such a discovery had actually been made in
the Upper Pliocene Red Crag deposits near
Ipswich, in the summer of 1921, because Mr.
Moir’s discovery of Red Crag and of sub-
Red Crag man had not been accepted in Eng-
land. It was not until an unmistakable human
industrial level was found at Foxhall, near
Ipswich, in the summer of 1921, that this
locality was visited by the French archeologist,
Breuil, who announced this important dis-
covery at the Archeological Congress at
Liége, in August, 1921. Dr. Osborn immedi-
ately planned to visit this locality and to make
a careful survey and review of the animal life
which surrounded Foxhall man. This review,
fully set forth in both papers above
named, shows that Foxhall man—capable of
making ten or twelve different kinds of flint
implements, of providing himself with cloth-
ing and of building a fire—sets an unmistaka-
ble Upper Pliocene date for the antiquity of
man, in which he was surrounded by relatively
primitive mastodons, rhinoceroses, saber-tooth
tigers and two species of elephants, a fauna
closely similar to the Upper Pliocene fauna of

the valley of the Arno River, near Florence,

Italy.
More recent than the Foxhall industry is

1 This paper, presented in abstract by Dr.
Reeds before the Geological Society of America,
is now in press in the Proceedings of the society.

2This paper by Dr. Osborn will appear in full
in the Geological Magazine, London, 1922.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1444

that of Cromer on the coast of Norfolk, dis-
covered during the summer of 1921. Cromer
is also treated as of Upper Pliocene age by
British archeologists, but it is unmistakably
Lower Pleistocene; it belongs to First Inter-
glacial time.

To establish this second point, Dr. Os-
born enlisted the cooperation of Dr. Chester A.
Reeds, beginning in the month of September,
1921, and undertook an exhaustive examina-
tion of the old and new standards of Pleisto-
cene division in Europe, namely, of Geikie,
Penck, Briickner and Leverett, ending with the
recent work of Depéret and of De Geer. While
these authorities do not agree as to causes or
as to the duration of the Ice Age, a most
important result of concurrent observation in
England, France, Germany, Switzerland and
North America is that there were certainly
within the Ice Age four, and possibly five, dis-
tinct periods of glaciation, with at least four
interglacial periods, all embraced within the
Quaternary. British geologists and at least
one French geologist, Marcellin Boule, include
the First Glaciation within Tertiary time, but
all the other authorities named above regard
the First Glaciation as the opening of Quater-
nary time. The latter view is the one adopted
by Osborn and Reeds and is clearly set forth
in the synthetic diagram which summarizes our
present knowledge of the geologic succession,
of the industrial phases, and of the geologic
appearance of human types. This table will
be submitted to the coming International Con-
gress of Geology at Brussels.

As a result of the researches summarized by
the authors, we are now able to fix with con-
siderable certainty the geologic level of the en-
tire succession of human industries, namely,
the Foxhallian, Cromerian, Chellean, Acheu-
lean, Mousterian, Aurignacian, Solutrean,
Magdalenian and Campignian. We are also
able to fix with considerable exactitude the
geologic age of the successive races of men,
i. e., Trinil, Piltdown, Heidelberg, Neanderthal
and Cro-Magnon, which appear between Fox-
hallian and Magdalenian industrial times.

Henry FarrFiztD OSBORN

CuHersterR A. REEDS
AMERICAN MusruM or Natural HIStToRY

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

THE RECURRENCE OF ACUTE PARATHY-
ROID TETANY IN COMPLETELY PARA-
THRYOIDECTOMIZED ANIMALS DUR-

ING THE OESTRUS CYCLE!

In a previous communication Luckhardt and
Rosenbloom? have shown that completely para-
thyroidectomized animals can be cured of all
symptoms of tetany by the intravenous injec-
tion of Ringer’s solution administered daily as
indicated for a period of about forty days.
After that period of time* the animals can be
put on a meat diet limited in quantity only by
their own choice and enjoy excellent health
with no signs or symptoms of tetany except
as noted.

Clinically it has been known for some time
that some women who had been subjected to
goiter operations suffered from tetany at each
menstrual period. It was not clear, however,
that the tetany was due to hypofunction of the
parathyroid glands.

As is perhaps generally known, bitches go
into “heat” about twice a year. At this time
even normal dogs may show signs and symp-
toms which are indistinguishable from attacks
of mild tetany occurring in parathyroidec-
tomized animals. Anorexia, hyperpnoea,
retching, vomiting, and mild fibrillations of
the skeletal muscles are seen off and on par-
ticularly during the last week of estrus.

It was therefore interesting to note what
would happen during the estrus period of
bitches that had suffered a complete removal
of all four parathyroids months previously.

We can present a report on two of such
animals.

The one animal was completely thyropara-
thyroidectomized on October 23, 1921. All
injections were stopped in January, 1922.
From that time on the animal remained in
splendid condition on a stock diet of meat,
bread and bones. Tetany in very severe form
was induced for the last time in February,

1 From the Hull Physiological Laboratory, the
University of Chicago.

2Luckhardt and Rosenbloom: Proc. Soc. Exp.
Biol. and Med., XIX, No. 3, 1921, p. 129.

3Luckhardt and Rosenbloom: Proc., Soc. Exp.
Biol. and Med., this number.

SCIENCE

257

1922, by feeding the animal a large amount of
meat mixed with barium sulphate. Mild tetany
consisting of fibrillations of front and hind
legs appeared spontaneously on ordinary diet
on March 10, 11 and April 4, 1922. The
dog was not depressed. The symptoms would
be present one moment and absent the next
hour only to recur several hours later together
with a mild hyperpnoea. At these times the
animals had a marked polydipsia. On April 9
an enlarged vulva and a distinet bloody vaginal
discharge was first noticed. The tetany symp-
toms became more severe from day to day until
on April 15 the animal had a severe tetanic
seizure with depression, anorexia, hyperpnea,
generalized fibrillations, clonic contraction of
the temporal muscles (chattering), and a
spasticity so marked that walking was difficult.
Intravenous injections of Ringer’s solution
were freely given; and the animal was better
on the following day. The tetany continued in
more or less severe form until May 4. But
even now (May 30, 1922) fibrillations of the
neck and leg musculature can be seen now and
then (perhaps because of early pregnancy).
The other animal was parathyroidectomized
on January 29, 1922. Four days later the
animal had depression, salivation, groaning,
spasticity, tremors, clonic and tetanic convul-
sions. Indeed, artificial respiration had to be
given because of a tetanic spasm of the dia-
phragm. As a result of the usual treatment
the animal recovered. For a week or two it

seemed doubtful whether the animal would
survive. After that the general condition im-
proved. Intravenous injections were discon-

tinued on the forty-sixth day. The animal was
exceptionally alert and playful. Its food
(meat) consumption was not limited. On May
7, almost two months later, the vulva was no-
ticeably enlarged. On the following day
anorexia appeared. A fit of sneezing was fol-
lowed by a spasm of the facial muscles. The
ears were kept back; and the animal was
greatly depressed. The condition became worse
on the succeeding days. On May 12 retching
and vomiting began. On the following day
the animal was spastic. Fibrillations and
clonic contractions were generalized but were
especially noticeable in the temporal muscles.

258

Periodic spasms of the larynx and incessant
vomiting continued for the next eight days.
The generalized fibrillations gradually dimin-
ished in intensity but the clonie jerkings of
the temporal muscles persisted together with
anorexia and a marked depression. The gastric
juice which was vomited up contained appre-
ciable free and total acidity. Throughout this
period intravenous injection of Ringer’s and
enemata were freely given. On May 20 the
animal seemed decidedly better. Thereafter the
condition gradually improved. At the time of
writing (May 30) the animal is again free
from all symptoms of tetany. All treatment
was discontinued 14 days after the reappear-
ance of the tetany.

In many respects the tetany appearing dur-
ing the wstrus eyele of this animal was more
severe than the tetany seen the first month
following the parathyroidectomy.

We are in no position to explain the re-
occurrence of the tetany with all its severity
during the mstrus cycle months after the ab-
sense of any sign suggestive of tetany. The
facts however seem to show that the tetany ap-
pearing in partially strumectomized women
during menstruation is due primarily to hypo-
function or absence of the parathyroids. As
in previous work we observed during the tetany
seizures signs pointing to a paresis of the sym-
pathetic nervous system (enophthalmos),
pseudoptosis, paretic nictitating membrane,
bradyeardia, conjunctival injection, general
vasodilation, and a sluggish atonic gastero-
intestinal tract. The latter condition (paralytic
ileus) would favor the production of toxic
products by bacterial action; the splanchnic
dilatation (paresis of vasoconstrictor control)
would permit of so rapid an absorption of
these poisonous products that the liver would
be functionally inadequate to neutralize them
because of the speed of their delivery (ali-
mentary toxemia). As in Keck fistula animals
parathyroidectomized animals suffer from an
intestinal toxemia. On this hypothesis the
reported Ca deficiency in parathyroidectomized
animals might well be an effect of the tetany
condition rather than its cause.

Arno B. LucKHARDT

J. BLUMENSTOCK
UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

THE ALGEBRAIC METHOD OF BALANCING
A CHEMICAL EQUATION

A CHEMICAL equation is said to be “balanced”
when, for each element involved, the number of
gram atoms in the left member of the equation
is equal to the number of gram atoms in the
right member. Given, then, the initial and
final substances concerned in a chemical reac-
tion, say

aAg,AsO, + gZn + )H,SO, =

dAsH, + eAg +¢ZnSO, + 7H,0
“balancing” the equation consists in finding a
set of values for a, B, i, ete., such that the
above named condition is fulfilled.

There are several methods of balancing a
chemical equation. With simple equations the
necessary coefficients are at once evident, or
become so on brief application of the expedient
of trial and error. In more complicated equa-
tions, however, the method of trial and error
becomes tedious and other methods are con-
venient. In an oxidation-reduction reaction,
consideration of the valence changes will usu-
ally give enough data to enable one to arrive
at a solution of the problem, but this method
is limited, even in application to such equa-
tions.

The algebraic method of balancing an equa-
tion is of general application and will be found
time saving in dealing with complex equations.
This method is outlined in a few of the text-
books, but is not in general use.

THE ALGEBRAIC METHOD

The ordinary method of balancing a chemical
equation algebraically is a very simple pro-
cedure. In the following equation, let a, b, c,
ete., represent the coefficients of the balanced
equation:

aAg, AsO, + bZn + cH,SO, =

dAsH, + eAg + f2nSO, + gH,0
It is obvious that one may write algebraic
equations expressing the number of gram atoms
of each element involved in the reaction. Thus:

For silver: 2a = e

For arsenic: a = d

For oxygen: 4a + 4c = 4f + 9

For zine: b = f

For hydrogen: 2c = 3d +4 2g

For sulphur: ¢ = f

Since this results in six equations amongst

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

seven unknowns, the value of each of the un-
knowns may readily be found in terms of any
one of the unknowns, a numerical value being
then assigned to the latter such that fractional
coefficients will disappear. For example, from
the six equations given above it follows that:

=a C= 2a
lla lla

b= — f=—
2 ; 2
lla g = 4a

Ces

d=—a

and calling a = 2, the chemical soa, is:

2Ag,AsO, + 11%n -- 11H,S0,
QAsH, + 4g 4 11ZnS0, + SH, 10:

NUMBER OF EQUATIONS AND NUMBER OF
UNKNOWNS

In applying the algebraic method there may
be written as many equations as there are ele-
ments concerned, and obviously there will be
as many coefficients as there are compounds.
Since the relation between number of equations
and number of unknowns determines the appli-
cability of the algebraic method, one is led to
inquire into this matter with respect to the
chemical equations ordinarily encountered. A
random selection of fifty equations from an
inorganic chemistry text-book reveals the fol-
lowing:

If « = number of elements concerned

y = number of compounds concerned
Then:

For 4 of the equations:

For 17 of the equations:

For 28 of the equations:

For 1 of the equations:

a—y-+1 (Case I)

c=y (Case IT)
%—=y— 1 (Case TIT)
«= y— 2 (Case IV)

Since x independent equations fix every pos-
sible ratio between x +1 unknowns, it is evi-
dent that in Cases I, II and III above the
number of independent equations written will
be one less than the number of unknowns,
although the procedure of the algebraic method
yields actually two additional (dependent)
equations in Case I and one additional equa-
tion in Case IT.

Case IV offers a curious condition, for here
it is evident that the ratios between all the
unknowns can not be fixed, and there may be
found an infinite number of sets of coefficients

SCIENCE 259

which will balance the equation. The following
equation is an example:

aKMnO, + bH,SO, + cH,O, =
dK,SO, “4 eMn8o, aL F800) Te 0).

The fact that this equation may be balanced
in an infinite number of ways has no signifi-
cance chemically, since the valence changes of
manganese and oxygen settle the matter and
there is only one set of coefficients which per-
mit the equation to represent the chemical facts
involved. In this case the valence changes
involved require that 5¢ = 2c and this adds an
additional equation to those required by stoichi-
ometric considerations, and the problem of
finding the coefficients falls then under Case IIT
above. There are chemical equations, however,
which can be balanced in an infinite number of
ways having due regard for valence require-
ments. In the equation:

aK,Cr,0, + 6H,S0, + f cFeSO, + dH,S =

eK, ‘SO, 4 fer, (SO, ). 4} oFe, (SO, ) s+ fH, O+%s

there are nine unknown coefficient and seven
equations. Valence changes of chromium, iron
and sulphur require that 6a = c + 2d, but this
equation is included in those required by
stoichiometric ratios and the problem remains
indeterminate. There will be 3a — 1 true solu-
tions for every value given a.

NUMBER OF ELEMENTS AND NUMBER OF COM-
POUNDS IN A CHEMICAL REACTION

From a chemical standpoint, the fact that,
with but few exceptions, x elements enter into
reactions involving either « or « + 1 com-
pounds may strike one as curious. Closer ex-
amination of this point, however, does not
appear to reveal anything in the way of a law
of nature, but indicates that the rule arises
from certain limited values in the equations
ordinarily used in inorganic chemistry, as is
shown below:

Let « — Number of elements

y = Number of compounds

¢ = Total number of elementary symbols
appearing

r = Unnecessary repetition of symbols
(i. @., in excess of 22).

k = Average number of elements per com-

pound (iz. @., =)
y

260
Then for any chemical equation:
e= 2 4+r
22 P

c
jE

ky — 2a = r, which is an expression in which
the difference between w and y is fixed by k
and r.

The preponderance of binary and ternary
compounds in inorganic chemistry, with occa-
sional appearance of single elements would
readily lead one to give k an average value in
the neighborhood of 2.25. The actual average
for k in the fifty equations referred to above is
2.285, the extreme values being 1.5 and 3.1.

The repetition of acid radicals in many of
the reagents of inorganic ‘chemistry, coupled
with the fact that it is seldom possible to deter-
mine the products of a reaction amongst more
than three substances, results in an average
value of ry, not far from that for k. Actual
average for fifty equations is 2.44.

These average values for k and 7 require
that the average value for x and y should not
differ widely.

Harry A. Curtis

SoutH CLINCHFIELD,

‘VIRGINIA

THE IOWA ACADEMY OF SCIENCE

THe academy held its thirty-sixth annual
session with Drake University, Des Moines, on
Friday and Saturday, April 28 and 29. After
a short business meeting President Morehouse
gave his presidential address on “The cosmol-
ogy of the The academy then
divided into sections for the reading of papers,
and at six o’clock the sections met for dinners.
In the evening President Edgar O. Lovett, of
Rice Institute, Houston, Texas, gave the public
address on “Some aspects of science.” This
address and the reception which followed were
given at the splendid new municipal observa-
tory, built by the city of Des Moines in one
of its public parks and dedicated to Dr. More-
house, the astronomer of Drake University.
Opportunity was given the members for in-
specting the equipment of the observatory and
seeing the stars through the nine-inch tele-
scope.

On Saturday morning the sections resumed

universe.”

SCIENCE

PVou. LVI, No. 1444 -

their meetings, and at ten o’clock the academy
convened to hear some papers of general
interest. The following were elected as officers
for the ensuing year:

President, R. B. Wylie, State University, Towa
City; vice-president, O. H. Smith, Cornell College,
Mount Vernon; secretary, James H. Lees, Geolog-
ical Survey, Des Moines; treasurer, A. O. Thomas,
State University; chairmen of sections: Botany,
H. S. Conard, Grinnell College, Grinnell; chem-
istry, Edward Bartow, State University; F. E.
Brown, State College; geology, S. L. Galpin,
State College, Ames; mathematics, C. W. Em-
mons, Simpson College, Indianola; physics, L. D.
Weld, Coe College, Cedar Rapids; zoology, H. W.
Norris, Grinnell College.

Resolutions were adopted favoring refor-
estation and conservation, and opposing the
transfer of public forests to the Department of
the Interior.

The following papers were presented:

ARCHEOLOGY

The new Albin inscribed tablet: ELLISON Orr.

Decorative markings on some fragments of
Indian pottery. from Mills County, Iowa: PavuL
R. Rowe.

GEOLOGY

Recent studies of the Pleistocene in western
Towa: G. F. Kay.

Till-like deposits south of Kansas River in
Douglas County, Kansas: WaAuTER H. ScHOEWE.

Status of sedimentation in Iowa: A. C. TRow-
BRIDGE.

Origin of limestone
Louise FILLMAN.

Classification of lenses: Miss LovIsE FILLMAN.

Notes on some mammalian remains reported in
Towa during the past year: A. O. THoMAS.

Records of Paleozoic glass-sponges in Iowa:
A. O. THOMAS.

An Iowa Cambrian eurypterid: O. T. WALTER.

The Laramie hiatus in the southern Rockies:
CHARLES KEYES.

Horizontal oblique faulting in inclined strata:
CHARLES K®YES.

Taxonomic rank of Pennsylvanian grouping:
CHARLES KEYES.

A deposit of pyrites in coal: Joun M. Linpty.

The deep well at Winfield: Joon M. Linpiy.

The structure of the Fort Dodge beds: JAMES
H. Less.

The area near Stuart, Iowa: JoHN L. Tinton.

conglomerates: Miss

SEPTEMBER 1, 1922]

Some Black River brachiopods from the Missis-
sippi Valley: CarroLt LANE FENTON and MIL-
DRED ADAMS FENTON.

Oil prospects in Iowa: JOHN E. SMiru.

The Rockford geodes: Swnry L. GAuLpIN.

MATHEMATICS |
MATHEMATICAL ASSOCIATION OF
AMERICA

The method of averages: G. W. SNEDECOR.

Mathematical bulletins: T. M. BuAKESLEE.

Topics in general analysis: E. W. CHITTENDEN.

The place of the equation in a scheme of edu-
cation: C. W. WESTER.

Pre-symmetric determinants
are finite sums: E. R. SmivH.

On the meaning of the classification of statis-
tical series by means of the Lexis ratio: H. L.
Rievz.

Definitions of imaginary and complex numbers:
E. S. ALLEN.

An extension of the figurate numbers: J. F.
REILLY.

'

IOWA SECTION,

whose elements

PHYSICS

A redetermination of the principal reflecting
powers of isolated selenium crystals: L. P. Sree.

Solubility .and polarity: WiLu1aAM KUNERTH.

A comparison of intensities required under
direct and under indirect lighting systems: Wuit-
LIAM KUNERTH.

Coefficients of diffusion of salt vapors in the
Bunsen flame: George E. Davis.

The path of a rigid electron which moves in a
magnetic field of constant strength rotating with
constant angular velocity: E. O. HuLpurt.

Phenomena in gases excited by radio frequency
currents: E, O. HuLBurRtT.

The broadening of the Balmer lines of hydro-
gen with pressure: BE. O. Hupurt.

Nodal distances in acoustics: G. W. STrwarr.

A variable single band acoustic filter: G. W.
STEWART.

A new form of telephone receiver and trans-
mitter: C. W. HEWLETT.

The scattering of X-rays by light elements:
C. W. HEWLETT.

The attenuation factor in acoustic wave filters:
H. B. PEAcock.

The Hall effect and specific resistance of evap-
orated films of silver, copper and iron: J. C.
STEINBERG.

Effect of automobile headlight lenses by box
photometer method: D. M. SmrrH.

ZOOLOGY
Iowa microlepidoptera: A. W. Linpsry.

SCIENCE

261

Brood ‘‘A’’ of the white grub extends its
range in Iowa: H. E. JAQUES.

A study of the eggs of the white-marked tus-
sock moth: Miss SusaNNAH PouLtTER and H. E.
J AQUES. .

A scribofacilograph for labelling kymographic
tracings: T. L. Parrerson.

Effects of stretch on smooth muscle responses:
B. M. Harrison.

Observations on the habits of a tarantula in
captivity: ALBERT HARTZELL.

Some recently published errors respecting the
cranial nerves of the dogfish: H. W. Norris.

Cranial nerve components in Amia, Lepidosteus,
Polyodon and Scaphirhynchus: H. W. Norris.

Morphological studies on the injury to apple
caused by Ceresa bubalis: J. C. Goopwin and
F. A. FENTON.

Some hereditary pathogens: W. E. SANDERS.

Some notes on Empoasca flaviscens: R. L.
WEBSTER,

Simultaneous fast and slow drum records of
fatigue: EF. M. Baupwin.

Nest-digging and egg-laying habits of Bell’s
turtle: FRANK A. STROMSTEN.

Notes on some of the raver birds of the Ames
region: H. EB. Ewine.

Bird records of the past two winters, 1920-
1922, in the upper Missouri valley: T. C. SrE-
PHENS.

Sociology as a science: HorNELL Harr.

Chance in development as a cause of variation:
P. W. WHITING.

Criteria of superior
SYLVESTER.

The mental and physical status of
entering the public schools: J. E. Evans.

Behavior of trapped and banded birds: Dayton
STONER.

intelligence: Rrurn H.

children

BOTANY

A comparative study of the common and red-
seeded dandelions: Miss JUNE BERRY.

Some influences of the submarginal
leaves: RopertT B. WYLIE.

The sperms of Vallisneria spiralis: Roperr B.
WYLIE.

Types of wound healing
leaves: Robert B. WYLIE.

Morphology of the vein-islet in certain dicoty-
ledons: Sara I. LEwIs.

Bud characters of native
County, Iowa: EF. P. Sipe.

The American Lotus: L. H. PAMMEL.

Some observations on the plants of the Sierras:
L. H. PAMMEL.

vein im
foliage

wm certain

trees

of Jasper

262

Further studies on the germination of trees
and shrubs: L. H. PAMMEL and Miss CHARLOTTE
M. Kine.

The effect of weeds upon crop production:
A. L. BAKKE and L. H. PamMet.

Notes on species of Rhamnus of southwestern
United States and California and the occurrence
of Puccinia coronata: L. H. PAMMEL.

Structure and function of the stigma in rela-
tion to the germinative requirements of the
pollen wm the Easter lily: J. N. Martin, Frep C.
WERKENTHIN and Miss ELizaBETH HUDSON.

The structure and development of the seed coat
and cause of delayed germination in Mellilotus
alba: J. N. Martin.

The genus Cucurbita—Its origin, description
and key to the species: FrepD C. WERKENTHIN.

The relation of the mosaic diseases of wild cat-
nip and cultivated cucumbers: J. H. MunctIs.

Studies of insect transmission and cross-inocu-

lation of mosaic on the Solanacee, Cucurbitacee

and Leguminacee: O. H. ELMER.

Nodal infection of corn by diplodia: L. W.
DURRELL.

Effect of hardness of water on the fungicidal
value of mercuric chloride solutions: J. C. GiL-
MAN.

A manual of ferns and ‘‘fern allies’’ of Grin-
nell and vicinity: HENRY S. CoNnarRD.

A manual of gymnosperms (evergreens) of
Iowa: HEnry S. Conarp.

Parry’s Catalog of Iowa Plants of 1848: Miss
WINNIFRED ELLSWORTH.

CHEMISTRY
AMES SECTIONS, AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

IOWA AND

A study of dolomites from the Austrian Tyrol:
NIcHOLAS KNIGHT.

The role of organic chemistry in plant and
animal therapy: HENRY GILMAN. .

A new method for the introduction of an ethyl
group: RACHEL Hoyer, Joun B. ScHUMAKER and
HENRY GILMAN.

A rapid and inexpensive electrolytic determina-
tion of copper without the use of platinum
cathode: STEPHEN Poporr and T. C. Tucker.

Inexpensive apparatus for use in large classes
of quantitative analysis: STEPHEN PoPorr.

The electrometric titration of tin. Critical
study of the standardization of solutions for use
in titration of tin: STEPHEN Poporr and F. L.
CHAMBERS.

The color of soils as an indication of plant
food content and fertility: P. E. Brown.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1444

A chemical classification of the activities of
soil micro-organisms: PAUL EMERSON.

Water purification in Iowa: Jack J. HIn-
MAN, JR.

The electrometric determination of sulfurous
acid with permanganate: W. S. HENDRIXSON and
L. M. VERBECK.

The electrometric standardization of titanium
solutions: W. 8S. HenpDRIxSON and L. M. VERBECK.

The electrometric titration of organic acids:
J. H. BucHanan and C. J. MEISTER.

The effect of the introduction of steam into
stop end retorts in the manufacture of coal gas:
GEORGE W. BURKE.

A note on lantern slide making: E. W. Rocx-
WOOD. ;

The relation of high school chemistry to college
chemistry: EDwarp Bartow.

Studies on Yeast IV. On the presence of the
antineuritic and the growth promoting vitamines
in yeast grown in a synthetic medium: V. E.
Netson, E. I. FunMEr and V. G. HELLER.

Studies on Yeast:V. Is bios a single substance?
E. I. FutMrr and V. EH. Newson.

A solubility survey—(1) An apparatus for the
determination of solubility up to the periodic sys-
tem: P. A. Bonp. (2) A cross section of the
periodic system—solubilities in sulfur diomide:
M, C. WADDELL with P. A. Bonn. :

Diacyl derivatives of ortho aminonaphthols:
L. CHARLES RatrorD and K. C. ARMSTRONG.

The cost of softening water with various soaps:
O. R. Swrenry and Rosert McKInnNeEY.

The possibilities of the commercial utilization
of corn cobs: O. R. SWEENEY and H. V. WRIGHT.

Alkyl sulfates—(1) Studies on the equilibrium
between alcohols and sulfuric acid, and the sul-
fates and water: Harry F. Lewis. (2) The rela-
tive hydrolysis of the sulfates by water and acids:
H. F. Lewis and O’NEaL Mason. (3) The in-
fluence of molecular weights on the hydrolysis:
H. F. Lewis and ArtHur DAMEROW.

Further data on the vitamin ‘‘A’’ content of
white and yellow corn: A. R. Lams.

The colorimetric determination of hardness in
water: H. F. Lewis and ArtHurR DAMEROW.

Recent attempts to disintegrate the atom:
GERALD L. WreNp? and CLARENCE E. Iron.

The decomposition of potassium chlorate. TI.
Spontaneous decomposition temperatures. II. The
effect of pressure on decomposition: F. E. Brown,
J. Austin Burrows and H. M. McLaveHtin.

James H. Luss,
Secretary

sCIENCE

- ———————————

New SERIES Tes ere 29 ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1445 Fripay, SepTeMser, 8, 1922 SincLE Cortes, 15 Ors.

Philosophy and the New Physics

The Relativity Theory and the Theory of Quanta. By Pror. Louis

RoucieER (Paris). Translated by Pror. Morton Masius (Worcester).
Cloth, $1.75.

“Tt is remarkably free from those long mathematical proofs which are
such effective stumbling blocks to most readers.’—Drug and Chemical
Markets.

“M. Rougier writes as only a master can. The translation is so well done
that it would be difficult to distinguish from an original English work.”
—The Scientific Australian.

Introduction to General Chemistry

The Principles of Chemistry as Recognized To-day by the Leaders of
the Science. 30 Illustrations. Cloth, $2.00. By Pror. H. Copaux
(Paris). Trauslated by HENry LerrmMann, M.D. (Philadelphia).

Besides presenting the older fundamentals laws and theories of chem-
istry, the book discusses the modern topics, such as radioactivity, struc-
ture of the atom, the phase rule, etc. A short appendix dealing with
hydrogen-ion concentration has been contributed by the translator.

The Theory of Heat Roanen

The Quantum of Action. By Pror. Max PLancK (Berlin).~ Trans-
lated by Pror. Morton Masius (Worcester). Illustrations. Cloth, $3.00.

“Planck gives a very clear exposition of his hypothesis of the ‘quantum
of action’ which has exerted a very profound influence on the recent
developments of theoretical physics. The translator has increased its
usefulness by adding foot-notes, an appendix, and a commentated list
of general papers which treat of the application of the theory of quanta
to different hranrhes of physics.”—American Journal of Science.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.

PUBLISHERS 1012 Walnut Street PHILADELPHIA

il SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

RECENT ISSUES
IN GEOLOGY

The Briones Formation of Middle
California, by Parker D. Trask.
Price, 75 cents.

Genesis of the Ores of the Cobalt
District, Ontario, Canada, by Al-
Price,

fred R. Whitman. 80°

cents.

Geology of the Cuyamaca Region of
California with special reference
tto the origin of the nickeliferous
pyrrhotite, by F. S. Hudson.

Price, $1.25.

University of California Press

Berkeley, California.

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
DEPARTMENT OF EMBRYOLOGY

This Department, organized in 1914, has issued
I4 volumes, comprising 65 contributions to em-
bryology. The volumes are quarto in form and
well illustrated, many of the plates being colored.
The total pagination is 2,447, with 239 plates, 236
text figures, and 21 charts. An especially notable
volume is publication 272, which was brought out
as a memorial volume to Franklin P. Mall, who
organized the Department and directed it during
its early years. As indicating the general charac-
ter of theevolumes, the titles of publication No.
277 are listed below. This volume is now in
press and is not included in the statistical state-
ment above:

Sabin, F. R.—Direct Growth of Veins by Sprouting.
Buell, C. E—Origin of Pulmonic Vessels in the Chick.
Doan, C. A.—The Capillaries of the Bone Marrow of
the Adult Pigeon. A
Congdon, E. G.—Transformation of the Aortic Arches
and Related Vessels in the Human Embryo.
Streeter, G. L.—Development of the Auricle in the
Human Embryo. $e,
Wollard, H. H—The Development of ‘the Principal
Arterial Stems in the Forelimb of the Pig. J
Finley, E. B.—Angiogenesis in the Subcutaneous Tis-
sues of the Head of the Human Embryo.

Anyone wishing further information can, on
application to the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington, obtain a list stating the titles in full,
authors, and the extent of all the contributions
referred to above.

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON

WASHINGTON, D. C., U. S. A.

MEKER. F

enameling, assaying, fusion point determination, ash, cupelling, heat treating;

Mcdel D Muffle
work up to 1650°

153 West 23rd Street

or

Furnace for high temperature
C. Made in seven sizes.

PALS comPANY
APPARATUS FOR INDUSTRIAL AND LABORATORY USE

URNACES

also for the metallurgical analysis of
brass, nickel, iron, copper, silver,
gold, palladium, alloys, etc.
Meker furnaces are serving hun-
dreds of laboratories and plants for
various purposes and we unhesita-

tingly recommend them.

Write for Meker Bulletin

New York, N. Y.

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal
Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

No. 1445

Vou. LVI SEPTEMBER 8, 1922

CONTENTS

Common Aims of Culture and Research in the
University: Dr. JoHN C. MERRIAM... dee
°

The World’s Supply of Iodine in Relation to
the Prevention of Goitre: Proressor J. F.
McCLENDON cs

International Meeting of Chemists at Utrecht 270

Scientific Events:

The Royal Sanitary Institute; The French
Dye Industry; Good Reads Scholarship ;
The Association of Iron and Steel Elec-

CPUGOS JORG WOGTS cockeecnrcaces eer Soa eee 272
Scientific Notes and New6...........:-cceceeceee 2T4
University and Educational Notes..........-..--.--- 278
Discussion and Correspondence:

Relief for Russian Astronomers: Dr. Ep-

win B. Frost. Botulinus Toxin: Dr. J.

BRONFENBRENNER. Soil Shifting in the

Connecticut Valley: A. B. BrEAUMONT.......... 279
Scientific Books:

Development and Activities of the Roots of

Crop Plants: PRroressor Burton E: Liv-

TONKS ORS Sree es a eS 283

Special Articles:
Algal Statistics gleaned ree the Gizzard
Shad: Dr. L. H. Tirrany. The Sex
Chromosomes of the Monkey: Dr. THEOPHI-
Lus S. Painter. A Simple Gas Generator
for Laboratory Use: ArTHUR P. Harrison 285

The Ohio Academy of Science: PRorrssor
EE DWAR D aero FUG Team eae os ees ean Ul 288

COMMON AIMS OF CULTURE AND
RESEARCH IN THE UNIVERSITY!

By definition universities aim to compass the
whole range of knowledge. In practical opera-
tion they are characterized rather more by
diversity than by unity of effort. It is in the
nature of things that bodies so constituted
should attempt to express the various phases
of thought represented through many kinds of
organization, and we expect to see philological,
chemical, biological and other types‘of elubs or
societies forming a normal part of the ma-
chinery of every great educational institution.
According to the particular interests of the
moment these agencies within the walls group
themselves in different ways to accomplish spe-
cific kinds of service.

The most interesting of all organizations
peculiar to the university are the two widely
inclusive societies representing scholarship or
culture in Phi Beta Kappa and research and
science in Sigma Xi. These two bodies ex-
press in their aims nearly the whole range of
higher purposes of academic effort. It has
seemed to me that a study of their interrela-
tions, extending to a redefinition of their com-
mon objects, might help to set forth that con-
tinuously needful statement and restatement of
the reason for existence of institutions of
higher learning. Inclimation to consider the
purposes of these societies has been particu-
larly strong as the course of my life has car-
ried me into contact with research and educa-
tion in such a manner as to bring into close
relation, and yet into striking contrast, the
types of academic mind which we call scien-
tific and humanistic. Having seen these inter-
ests so frequently defined with special refer-
ence to their separateness the desire has grown

1 Presented as the annual address before Phi
Beta Kappa and Sigma Xi, University of Penn-
sylvania, June 13, 1921.

264

to secure a better understanding of their true
relations.

Although recognizing fully the specific aims
of scientific and of humanistie investigation
one can not avoid being impressed with the
importance of considering the similarity of
their methods and purposes. It is particu-
larly desirable to consider this interrelation as
a great group of thinking people still holds
humanistic and scientific problems so different
that common criteria may not be used gen-
erally in their solution.

Scholarship and culture as they are in-
volved in the aims of Phi Beta Kappa have
been considered often to represent a goal
quite different from that toward which the
scientific investigator strives in Sigma Xi.
Scholarship should mean understanding and
wisdom, not merely information. Culture has
been taken to represent refinement of educa-
tional attainment and appreciation of knowl-
edge, coupled with the development of per-
sonal characteristics giving that -balanced
judgment sometimes known as mental poise.

Culture should furnish perspective and inter- -

pretation. Its perspective should make it
possible to fit into their proper relations all
available facts and to determine the position
which new knowledge should take. In its
truest expression it should be active and not
passive, constructive and not absorptive. The
imitative spirit is its greatest danger. True
culture is a comprehensive vision and an at-
titude of the active interpreting mind.

Sigma Xi was organized to promote com-
radeship in research. Its activity has been
limited not infrequently to the so-called nat-
ural history subjects. I am unable to con-
ceive of this organization as functioning
logically if it does not cover the whole range
of investigative or constructive thought in
which the scientific method is used. I think
of it as standing for development of the atti-
tude of mind which produces the builder,
rather, than for conduct of specific researches
within a limited field.

Research thas been defined as a reaching
‘out to bring together, organize and inter-
pret whatever may be added to our store of
knowledge. It may express itself in the most
intensive studies in very narrowly defined re-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1445

gions, but is most truly exemplified when it
involves the wider relationship of specific facts
to the whole structure of knowledge.

In the processes of research it is difficult to
distinguish between those operations which are
merely the gathering and those which are in-
terpretation and definition. Simple collecting
of materials without giving them their proper
places and without interpreting them is work
of a relatively low order and is doubtfully
classed as original investigation.

By definition the present discussion is lim-
ited to relationships between culture and re-
search as expressed in the university. A clear
understanding of my purpose, therefore, in-
volves recognition of the real aim in univer-
sity activities. Without intending to offer a
complete classification of the objects and plans
of educational work it may be well to set
forth the following as representing some
of the aims of university life. These are, first,
to hold before young men and women the mir-
ror of knowledge and experience in which they
may be able to see reflected the qualifications
which fit them individually for this or that
profession; second, to give classified informa-
tion; third, to develop wisdom or judgment;
fourth, to stimulate the growth of constructive
or creative ability; and, fifth, to ineuleate the
element of character, which defines our relation
to the world of human life. The highest aims
of education are far from being generally
understood. Many still think of this agency
as informational rather than constructive,
teaching imitation rather than initiative, and
as focussed upon the past rather than the
future.

One of the most fully valid criticisms of
university study lies in the fact that too often
it looks backward without adequate expression
of relation between past and future. The
young men and women who form the student
body are at that early stage in which they
have practically no past and naturally live
in the present and future. Their eyes are
turned forward with keen expectation of what
the coming years may bring. Life and move-
ment of life are to them the supreme enjoy-
ment. Until their individual pasts begin to
evidence marked effect upon the trend of their
futures, uninterpreted history and experience

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

represent to them only shadowy forms or ob-
jects of ill-defined curiosity. Quite in con-
trast to the ideas of youth the machinery of
the university may lend itself to too strong
emphasis upon what is behind us. Thus edu-
cator and educated seem to look in opposite
directions, and like Lot’s wife, who “looked
back from behind him,” the educator may be-
come as lifeless as a stone or fossil without
sensing the change, while the company of
youth moves on.

With a well-ordered program of university
work, development of constructive ideals in
the ‘student inevitably carries with it in the
scientific studies an unlimited series of ques-
tions regarding the relation of each element
of nature to other items or forces, and requires
recognition of continuity or law through all
space and through past, present and future.
Similarly in humanistie study the ideals of
conduet and character come to rest upon real-
ization of a continuity of interests and respon-
sibilities in the world of human life. These
ideas of interrelation, which may in one sense
be called law, are necessary to the clear ex-
pression of both research and culture. Scien-
tific understanding of nature depends upon
our realization of the continuity of its prin-
ciples of being and action. The meaning of
what is covered by culture and scholarship we
shall not know adequately until we understand
the interrelations of events in the history
of human institutions.

Large use of the principle of unity is essen-
tial if we would succeed in attaining the ideals
of education either in science or in culture. The
university programs which have greatest value
are not prepared for the immediate future of
the student but concern rather his activities
at the time of maximum effectiveness. If the
student’s life be of normal span he graduates
near 21 and his period of greatest value to the
world lies between 35 and 65, or from ten to
forty years after graduation. If the many
years of education are to count in the stage
of most fruitful service, the work must be
carefully planned for attaining this end. It
should be clear that the most valuable infor-
mation which the student carries away is not
comprised in the immediately practical things

SCIENCE

265

for use to-morrow or the next day, but in the
basie principles and methods which in later
years will help to answer the new and critical
questions certain to arise, and in the answer-
ing of which there will be the largest oppor-
tunity for personal development. The details
of specific studies in university experience are
largely lost, but the attitude of mind result-
ing from honest thought, and the elemental
laws which furnish the foundation for all
constructive work will be of increasing im-
portance.

From the point of view of culture and also
of science the subject of history is one of the
greatest of all agents for making possible our
understanding of the principle of con-
tinuity. History has not too often been con-
sidered a science, although in its effect upon
the human mind its operation is almost iden-
tical with the idea of continuity or unity in
physical laws. It has had too small a part
among the great opportunities of humanistic
education. Oddly enough the tritest phrase
growing out of this study is that “history re-
peats itself,’ and therefore we seem only
to be studying a past which in effect may be
repeated in the present or future. But what
is it that history repeats? In addition to the
idea of continuity, the most evident things
coming out of historical research are that
history expresses two almost unvarying prin-
ciples, one, instability, the other, progress; one
the view that everything is subject to change;
the other that this instability includes in its
operation a general movement toward what is
more complex and in the realm of intelli-
gence toward fuller comprehension and under-
standing. I am willing that this statement be
challenged, and shall not attempt within these
narrow limits to give it full defense. It may
only be remarked that if this view be aec-
cepted there is no greater lesson to teach a
student than that, contrary to commonly ac-
cepted conservative views, the future in which
he will live his life will not be like either the
present or the past. The direction of move-
ment in the future may, however, be indi-
cated by the evidence drawn from a careful
serutiny of history.

In preparation for later

life, the well-

266

trained student of history will look forward
with a definite expectation of shifting lines, and
should be prepared for those situations in
which judgment may be exercised either to
accelerate or to retard the natural movement
of progress. The laws of history show us a
normal instability which should be recognized
and capitalized. We should expect to inter-
pret the trend of events. The gift of intelli-
gence puts before us the opportunity to help
naturally with normal progress. The possi-
bility which increased knowledge gives for
greater evil does not mean that evil must
therefore be done. It is only an evidence of
wider range of capacity. It is scarcely con-
ceivable that with all the consequences clearly
understood real intelligence could permit the
following of a path that would lead to its own
destruction.

It is difficult to discuss the influence of ecul-
ture in the broader sense upon science and
research, or the relation of these two elements
with the current reversed; but in the hope
that the effort will be understood as an at-
tempt to view the problem constructively, I
venture to suggest what seem to be some of
the normal interactions.

Let us assume for immediate purposes of
this discussion that the essence of research is
the attempt to understand, organize, utilize
and increase our store of knowledge. The
only persons who are not believers in the
value of research are those who studiously
keep away from the borders of knowledge. To
one who has investigated in any subject our
painful limitations are only too evident. The
successes of research in every field within the
past decade show that the possibilities open
more widely with every discovery. One of
the most dangerous types of people we may
have engaged in handling affairs of moment
is that which assumes all useful knowledge to
be comprised within the facts already assem-
bled and fails to recognize the possibility of
progress in nearly every direction in which we
choose to investigate.

Progress in discovery and in constructive
thought has increased our social inheritance
so rapidly that the luxuries of one age often
become necessities of the next. If life is de-
fined as a form of motion, true living in the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

human sense is a state of motion in which
the conditions seem not fully satisfied without
a kind of advance which we call progress. I
doubt whether happiness is possible with-
out a sense of accomplishment, either in-
dividually or socially. Research by bringing
a stream of new materials into application
serves as one of the most important agents
for making human progress and happiness
possible.

In order that we may know the materials
with which we are to work in the future, edu-
cation must present organized and simplified
knowledge to each incoming generation. In
addition to pointing out what is already
known it is the duty of the university to indi-
cate the direction in which progress may be
expected or desired. It is important that spe-
cial stress be laid upon the kind of thought
and the methods necessary for progress in
order that the future investigator may do his
part. Among the greatest teachers within or
without the university we rank those who have
set forth not only what is known but also what
should be known and should be done. In gen-
eral they have shown the way by example as
well as by precept and have been among
those advancing exploration, discovery and
philosophic interpretation.

I believe that the lessons of history suggest
continued advance or progress of the human
type, both in social organization and in physi-
eal being. Social evolution represents an un-
broken train of experience and therefore gives
the greatest possibilies for accumulation of
power and of opportunity to use it. In this
type of evolution research is the most effec-

tive instrument employed. Physical evo-
lution is related to replacement of indi-
viduals in the succession of generations.

Without physical advance the limits set for
mental capacity in individuals will mean the
ultimate attainment of a level of social evo-
lution beyond which we may scarcely reach;
but what I see of history expands my optimism
to accept the view that nothing within our
horizon of information gives evidence that the
final stage of physical betterment is yet in
sight. I do not believe that with increasing
knowledge we shall lose such opportunity for
advance as may still be open to us.

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

Research in science has suffered severely,
both within and without the university, by rea-
son of failure to recognize the magnitude of
the field in which it operates and the inter-
relation of the elements comprised in it. The
researcher must, by definition, be a specialist,
in that he should understand more fully than
any other person the height or depth or
breadth of a particular element or law of na-
ture. Narrow specialization is often consid-
ered to represent research, and contraction of
the limits of investigation is not infrequently
desirable. But the greatest specialist does not
merely go up high or down deep. He sees
from these advantageous positions the real
significance of his explorations. If he pro-
ceeds far in any direction without interpreting
what is learned in terms intelligible to others,
the journey has been merely a personal ex-
cursion and not a contributing voyage of dis-
covery.

I come therefore to speak particularly of
the need for contact between research and
culture, in order that the broader human re-
lation of culture and scholarship may bring
to research a better power of expression and
a deeper interest in its ultimate significance,
thus making more useful the fruits of dis-
covery. Research may profit greatly by con-
tact with every human interest involved within
the wide comprehension of culture. Much of
the material uncovered by constructive work
in science has not reached utility or become
real contribution to humanity by reason of
the view that investigation is complete with-
out interpretation, or that it is an end in it-
self without regard to human use or mean-
ing.

Science and research have missed great op-
portunities because of aloofness from the
more strictly humanistic aspects of investi-
gation extending into the realm of culture.
Problems of research have so multiplied with-
in the field of natural science that there has
perhaps been good reason for our failure to
discover that the most complicated, and there-
fore in many ways the most attractive prob-
lems possible to the investigator are above
and beyond those which have mainly engaged
our attention. Important as are the nature
of matter, chemical affinity and organic evo-

SCIENCE 267

a

lution, some of the greatest fields for dis-
covery still relate to the fundamental under-
standing of human behavior and cultural in-
terests, both in the individual and in the group
sense. With adequate cooperation between the
scientifie investigator and the humanist re-
search should advance rapidly in the study
of man and his cultural expression. Investi-
gation of the physical basis of mental action
may never produce such results as have recent-
ly revolutionized natural science. On the
other hand, it may be that human research will
go farther beyond our present knowledge than
radioactivity has carried us forward in
physics. Are we to believe that man, prob-
ably the most complicated of all objects or
instruments in the universe, may be neglected
as the object of research by reason of his high
level of development? Is it not clear that
added knowledge, such as should be secured
by united effort of the scientific investigator
and the humanist, would give further control
of our powers and greater satisfaction in their
use?

It is with the hesitation of one known as a
representative of the scientific school that I
touch upon the other phase of the problem,
namely, the possible contribution of research
to culture and scholarship. If I were to indi-
cate what might from my point of view seem a
dangerous element in scholarly and cultural
studies as contrasted with the situation in sci-
ence and research, it would be to suggest that
there is not in any branch of knowledge a fin-
ished chapter or a closed book, and that there
is no field in which the principle of growth and
progress may not be expressed profitably
through constructive work. Culture must in
some measure stand for conservatism and pre-
cedents. Theology tends by definition to be
one of the most rigid of all phases of human
thought, but scholarship stands next in rigor-
ous adherence to standard.. This condition is
natural. Hven the normal instability of evo-
lution shows generally a stately and unhurried
movement which illustrates the idea of stand-
ards in rate of change. The researcher states,
“There is more unknown than known’’; the
scholar says, “We have before us only the
known and must therefore base our practical
lives upon it.”

268

Scholarship in a passive or conservative
position diminishes its value. Culture not
merely sets standards of form but may also
indicate the rate of progress. It may not only
require that we know the best from the past,
but should demand the best that can be secured
in the present and future. The study of human
actions and interests is not to be limited
by assumption that creation, even in the human
sense, is ever complete, or that existing states
of law or culture are final. Science and re-
search should be tied to the humanistic group
of agencies for a combined investigation of
problems of every kind relative to man. Cul-
ture should be a constructive force with the
authority of history, and an active source of
ideas and ideals.

Research and cultural activities not merely
overlap and have common aims, but their high-
est expression develops through influence of
similar types of constructive ideals. The
idealism which gives life and hope to culture
and science may be academic, unprofessional,
or even unfashionable, but it has contributed
much toward securing the present privileges of
humanity. The practical man insists that he is
limited by what is and not by what might be.
The idealist dwells upon what should be, with
the hope that what is, by reason of its insta-
bility and by virtue of the laws of change, may
ultimately come to be the thing desired. The
practical man with his hands tied by what he
must do sets precedents and limits which some-
times bind the wheels of progress. The ideal-
ist, with the widest view of unity and movement
reaching through the universe of being and of
thought, visualizes the larger possibilities and
helps to sweep away obstacles in the path of
advance along lines of natural development.

And so, without further expansion of this
view, it is clear that I do not hope to see less
diversification in university activity but only
more unity. We should represent here every
type of thought. We must assemble, organize,
interpret and construct in every region over
which knowledge may extend. We must have
differing types of mind and multifarious
points of view. With meticulous refinement
of technique some will seek out the minutest
details of obtainable information and set them
in order with relation to the ocean of available

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

facts. Some will work upon the nature of
matter and others on the theory of the state.
But with all this differentiation, the prin-
ciples of unity, or law, and the interrelation
and interdependence of all knowledge should
everywhere be recognized and made the basis
of advance in thought. The delight in con-
struction and the joy in expectation of progress
should be lessons of experience which no one
could fail to understand. Culture and scholar-
ship should help science and research to better
orientation. The explorer and builder should
be imbued with that culture which gives the
clearest vision of the road for human progress.

We must not forget that for each individual
the end and aim of university effort is the
securing of that knowledge which fits him
into the niche in which he may perform the
largest service; and that the university is not
an apprentice shop, but is a source of ideals
and a type of environment peculiarly fitted
for growth of constructive minds. Let us be
clear that whatever the university gives repre-
sents wasted time, effort and material, unless it
is received in a spirit of reverence and with the
idea that the greatest satisfaction les in
service as a builder who does not work for per-.
sonal ends. It is said that geniuses are born,
not made; but those who come into the world
to live non-contributive, purely individual
lives, leaving the world no better than they
find it, we may truthfully say are only made,
not born. Contribution to meet real human
needs gives perhaps the only way by which we
obtain full right of recognition as individuals
in the strictly human sense. We may not
know why living things must grow if they
would live, or why history has given a choice
between progress and oblivion, but the think-
ing world has always recognized the validity
of this view. :

We remember that the Great Teacher ex-
plained to Nicodemus the Pharisee: “Marvel
not that I said unto thee, Ye must be born
again.” With all the spiritual meaning that
this saying carries may it not suggest to us
also that constructive service gives, with a sense
of reality, a new and true life, a verifiable per-

sonality in the kingdom of creative beings.

What greater work can a university perform
than through its vision, its constructive power

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

and its eulture to open the way to that kind of
service which brings the joy of progress and
the continuing rewards of real accomplishment.
Joun C. MERRIAM
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON

THE WORLD'S SUPPLY OF IODINE
IN RELATION TO THE PRE-
VENTION OF GOITRE*

Ow1nG to the varying reports as to the con-
centration of iodine in sea water, I have made
a number of determinations on water dipped
from the Santa Monica, Cal., pier. Even after
filtration, this water contained so much ecol-
loidal material as to interfere with the deter-
minations. It was finally observed that thor-
ough shaking with carbon tetrachloride and
filtration removed this sufficiently to make
analysis possible. The carbon tetrachloride
was purified by the addition of a drop of
bromine, action of sunlight and shaking with
an excess of sodium thiosulfate solution. In
determining this excess, some very dilute
sodium carbonate solution was poured into
the carbon tetrachloride and tenth normal
sodium thiosulfate run in, about half a ee. at
a time, followed by shaking, until the color
disappeared. This solution was separated off
and more carbonate and about two ce. of thio-
sulfate added with thorough shaking, followed
by separation of the water phase. The carbon
tetrachloride was then dried and distilled, the
first distillate being rejected.

It was found that evaporation of the sea
water until sodium chloride began to erystallize
out made it acid, due to precipitation of eal-
cium carbonate and the hydrolysis of MgCl,,
magnesium being a weak base, but there was
no loss of iodine. Furthermore, a dry salt
could be made of the sea water, without ap-
preciable loss of iodine. This was accom-
plished by evaporation until the calcium car-
bonate precipitated; precipitation of the re-
maining calcium and magnesium by the addi-
tion of 100 ce. of seven per cent. Na,CO, solu-
tion-for each liter of original volume; filtra-
tion; washing the precipitate on the filter and
evaporation of the filtrates to dryness.

1From the Southern Branch, University of
California, and the University of Minnesota.

SCIENCE

269

In the analysis of the iodine content of salt,
it was dissolved in water and the same pyro-
cedure followed as with brine. In analyzing
water or brine, standard solutions of the same
NaCl content but varying concentrations of
iodate were made up and treated in the same
way as the unknown. The quantity of re-
agents added varied with the samples, and no
portions were thrown away until the yield of
iodine was found to be complete. Each sample
if not near neutrality, was neutralized, using
test paper, and about 10 ec. of concentrated
HCl per liter added. In ease buffers were
present, at least enough acid was added to
react acid to brom-phenol-blue (or methyl-
orange). An excess of arsenious acid was
added to reduce the iodate to iodide, the equiv-
alent of 1 to 10 ce. of tenth normal per liter,
and allowed to stand 20 minutes or more. At
this stage colloids, if present, were removed.
One per cent. sodium nitrite solution was
added to the extent of ten times the quantity
of arsenious acid. The sample was then ex-
tracted with several portions of carbon tetra-
chloride, which were then collected in a sep-
aratory funnel. In eases of 0.04 milligram
per 100 ec. of the sample, a pale pink color
could be detected in the carbon tetrachloride.
The smallest workable quantity, often 1 ee.
of very dilute (less than 0.1 per cent.) sul-
furous acid was shaken with the extract until
complete extraction of the iodine was effected.
The carbon tetrachloride was removed from
the sulfurous acid solution and a drop of con-
centrated sulfuric acid added, followed by
sufficient sodium nitrite solution to oxidize
the sulfurous acid and completely oxidize the
iodide to iodine. The iodine was extracted
with a sufficient quantity of carbon tetra-
chloride to fill the colorimetric apparatus
(which varied in nature with the size of the
yield) and compared with the standards.
There must be nearly the same quantity of
iodine in the final standard taken for compari-
son as in the unknown, and the treatment must
be identical, quantitatively, especially in re-
gard to volume relations and thoroughness of
shaking.

The quantity of iodine found in the sea
water was 0.05 milligrams per liter, which is a
confirmation of the findings of Winkler for

270

Adriatic sea water. Winkler probably had
less decaying organic matter in his samples
than were present in mine, as he makes no
mention of difficulty on account of the pres-
ence of colloid material.

A sample of water which I dipped up from
the Saltair pier, in the Great Salt Lake, Utah,
contained only 40 per cent. more iodine than
in sea water although the chlorine concentra-
tion was about 500 per cent. greater than in
sea water. Since the Great Salt Lake is the
residue left from the evaporation of Lake
Bonneville, which was 1,000 feet deeper than
the Great Salt Lake, and received practically
all of the drainage of the Great Basin, cover-
ing Utah and parts of neighboring states, we
have here a demonstration of the small quanti-
ties of iodine that are given up in the weather-
ing of both igneous and sedimentary rocks.

Practically all of the iodine of the earth’s
surface is in the sea, which contains about
sixty billion metric tons of iodine in the form
of inorganic salts. This iodine probably en-
tered the sea at the time chlorine accumulated
in it. Jodides were probably the most soluble
salts on the earth’s surface, chlorides being
next in solubility. If the earth was once hot
on the surface, it is probable that hydriodic
acid existed in the atmosphere and was washed
into the sea with the first rain. Insoluble
iodides of heavy metals are considered by
Emmons to be secondary formations, due to
the seepage of sea water through ores. —

Judging by the prevalence of goitre, there
is often a deficiency of iodine in our food and
drink. At present, so little is known about
the exact quantities of iodine taken into our
stomachs that we can judge only by the num-
ber of cases of goitre. Omitting the details of
local distribution of goitre, there is a wide
goitre belt extending north along the Appa-
lachian mountains to Vermont, thence west
through the Great Lakes region to Montana
and Washington and turning south it finally
includes all of the Rocky Mountain and Pacific
states. In fact, the goiterous belt includes
the mountainous and glaciated regions. Since
the run-off from mountainous and glaciated
regions has carried away so much ot the
soluble material, it seems likely for this reason

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

in addition to other evidence that the goitre
belt is a low iodide belt.

Since the goiter belt includes large cities
and millions of population, it seems unlikely
at present that all of its inhabitants will re-
ceive iodide medication in pure form. Since
the sea contains the bulk of the supply, the
transfer of iodine from the sea to our food or
drink should be increased. Perhaps the most
attractive method is the inclusion of sea-foods
in our diet, but this is limited. Dr. Turrentine
of the Kelp-Potash Plant at Summerland, Cal.,
informs me that powdered kelp, when added
in small amount to food can not be tasted and
when added in larger’ amount imparts a
pleasing taste to it. Sinee it is richer in iodine
than ordinary sea-food and is relatively
abundant, it should be an important source of
iodine in our diet. Since sea water and salt-
deposits contain iodine, salt might be made an
important source of iodine in our dietary
scheme. Blood and shell fish are about the
only foods that do not require the addition of
salt to make them palatable and fill our physi-
ological needs, and hence the presence of
iodine in salt would insure its universal con-
sumption. Mr. O. S. Rask and myself failed
to find iodine in any one of a number of sam-
ples of salt examined. Salt could easily be
prepared from sea water as described above
with the retention of the iodine compounds
and at a cost not exceeding that of present-
day table salt. Some of the magnesium ear-
bonate precipitated from it could be added
later if it be desired to make a shaker-salt,
but from a nutritive standpoint, the addition
of calcium phosphate for this purpose is
highly desirable.

J. F. McCienpon

UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA

INTERNATIONAL MEETING OF
CHEMISTS AT UTRECHT

Av Utrecht on June 21 to 23, there was held
the first gathering at which chemists from Ger-
many and Austria have met with chemists from
England, America and other countries for the
presentation and discussion of scientific papers.
The following persons were present: America:
L. M. Dennis, D. A. MacInnes, W. A. Noyes.

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

Austria: E. Abel, J. Billiter, F. Emich, A.
Kailan, A. Klemene, F. Pregl, A. Skrabal, R.
Weescheider. Czecho-Slovakia: J. V. Dubsky,
A. Simek. Denmark: N. Bjerrum, J. N. Bron-
sted, J. Petersen, Chr. Winther. England:
BE. C. C. Baly, F. G. Donnan, W. C. McC.
Lewis. Germany: M. Bodenstein, G. Bredig,
O. Hahn, P. Pfeiffer, R. Schenck, W. Schlenk,
A. Stock, P. Walden, H. Wieland. Holland:
J. Backer, J. J. Blanksma, Ernst Cohen, A. F.
Holleman, F. M. Jaeger, H. R. Kruyt, W.
Reindeers, P. van Romburg. Latvia: M.
Centnerschwer. Russia: N. Schilow. Switzer-
land: J. Piccard.

The original suggestion of the meeting was
made by Professor Donnan of London and pre-
liminary plans were made at a meeting in the
home of Professor Cohen of Utrecht in June,
1921. The details were carried out by Pro-
fessor Cohen.

The following scientific papers were read and
discussed :

E. C. ©€. Baly (Hiverpool):
Catalysis.

P. Walden (Rostock): Ueber freie Radicale.

W. A. Noyes (Urbana): Positive and Negative
Valences.

W. Schlenk (Berlin): Beitrige zur Chemie der
freien Radikale und tiber den wechselnden Afiini-
taitswerth der Kohlnstoffverbindung.

M. Bodenstein (Hanover): Die photochemische
Bildung von Phosgen.

L. M. Dennis (Ithaca): The Preparation and
Properties of Metallic Germanium.

Photochemical

H. Wieland (Freiburg i. B.): Ueber freie
Radicale.

N. Schilow (Moscow): Vertheilungs-gleich-
gewichte.

J. Pieeard (Lausanne): Absorptionsfarben

zweiter Ordnung.

E. Abel (Vienna): Ueber direkte und indirekte
Esterbildung in absolutem und wasserhaltigem
Glyzerin (Nach Versuchen von Karl Heidrich).

A. Klemene (Vienna): Dampfdrucke isomerer
Benzolabkémmlinge.

M. Centnerschwer (Riga): Vorschlag zur Hin-
fiihrung einer kleinen Masseneinheit (Radion).

At a reception in Hotel Pays-Bas, Wednes-
day afternoon, there were addresses of welcome
by. G. L. Voernman, president of the Chemical
Society of Holland, by Professor Went,
president of the Royal Academy of Science of

SCIENCE

271

Amsterdam, and a response by W. A. Noyes,
of Urbana.

The delegates were royally entertained at
luncheon and at dinner each day, and on Fri-
day there were tea and a reception given by
Count van Sanderburg in his palace.

The gathering was not only for the purpose
of promoting the development of chemistry
through the discussion of topies of common
interest by men from widely separated coun-
tries, but it was also a frank attempt to renew
old friendships and form new ones between
men of nations recently at war. Expression
of a desire to promote permanent peace met
with a hearty response.

RESPONSE BY W. A. NOYES,
JUNE 22, 1922

UTRECHT,

It is a great pleasure to be present at this
international meeting in Holland. Last year
you sent to us in America a fine representative
in the person of Professor Cohen. - When he
was at our university in Urbana, we not only
listened with great interest to the account he
gave of the fine scientifie work which he is
doing in the van’t Hoff Laboratory but we
were also glad to hear of the scientific and
intellectual life of your universities. We were
particularly impressed by a statement he made
to us about the Nobel prizes. You have here
some five million people—some one says six
million—I do not know very acecurately—but
he told us that you have received in Holland
five Nobel prizes for scientific work. We in
America have somewhat more than a hundred
million people and we have received two prizes
for such work. J am sure no other country
can show such a record as Holland of nearly
one prize for each million of her inhabitants.
Professor Cohen also told us a part of the
secret of your unparalleled work in science.
He said that it is written in the fundamental
laws of your state that the universities are
founded to train men for the service of the
state and also to train them in the methods of
research. You have reason to be very proud
of the way in which the spirit of your law has
been carried out.

We are here for serious scientific discussions
but there is another thought very much in the
minds of every one. For the first time there

272

is gathered here an international group of
chemists from nations that were on opposite
sides during the great war.

On my last day on the other side of the
Atlantic I spent a few hours in Quebec. There,
many years ago, two great generals fought
each other on the Plains of Abraham. Those
generals both died in the battle and there on
the front of the Parliament House I saw the
statues of Wolfe and of Montcalm standing
side by side. In that Parliament House meet
the representatives of a nation part of whose
people still speak French and part of whom
speak English. Those two statues are, to me,
prophetic of that which must come if Europe
will not destroy herself. We are learning
during these days the help which comes from
talking over our scientific problems together.
There is almost no limit to the advances which
the world may make if nations can be willing
to live together at peace. I have a great hope
that states will learn those same lessons of the
value of international cooperation and helpful-
ness that scientific men learned long ago. Let
us hope that our meeting may contribute a
little toward that end as well as do something
for the advance of chemistry.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
THE ROYAL SANITARY INSTITUTE

THE British Medical Journal reports that
the thirty-third congress of the Royal Sani-
tary Institute, which was held at Bournemouth
from July 24 to 29, was attended by some 500
persons, including delegates from the British
dominions and colonies and from many foreign
countries, as well as by representatives of gov-
ernment departments, county and town coun-
cils, and other public bodies. The president
of the congress was Major General J. E. B.
Seely, M.P., who in his presidential address
protested against economies at the expense of
the public health, and said that the three very
important principles which lay at the basis of
the congress were, first, the vital necessity of
the health of the people to the maintenance of
the British Empire; second, that national
health required the organization of all the
various agencies; and third, that the health
policy of the nation should not be merely the

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1445

prevention of disease and premature death, but
the increase in human capacity and happiness.
Great advances had been made in the provision
of cleaner towns, better sanitation, good water
supplies, food control, drainage and sewerage,
but not enough had been done for the educa-
tion of the people in a healthy way of life.
The housing problem could be solved only by
steady and persistent work in every district
over a number of years. Curtailment in the
school medical service had been spoken of in
the interests of economy, but he considered
that that service was not only saving the lives
of hundreds of children, but was laying the
foundation for a healthy nation in years to
come. Meetings for the reading and discussion
of papers were held in five sections: Sanitary
Science, Engineering and Architecture, Mater-
nity and Child Welfare, including School Hy-
giene, Personal and Domestie Hygiene, and
Industrial Hygiene. In the Section of Sani-
tary Science a discussion was held on methods
of securing continuous treatment of persons
infected with venereal diseases, in which papers
were read by Dr. J. Johnstone Jervis, Dr.
W. E. Facey, Mr. Kenneth Walker, and Dr.
Joseph Cates. In the Section of Maternity and
Child Welfare including School Hygiene, pa-
pers were read by Dr. John Robertson on the
regulation of the distribution of milk and food
at maternity and child welfare centers, and by
Dr. D. C. Kirkhope on certain preventive and
curative aspects of the school medical service.
Papers were also read on different aspects of
maternity welfare by Mr. Aleck W. Bourne,
Dr. R. Veitch Clark, and Dr. R. J. Maule
Horne. In addition to the meetings of the sec-
tions, a number of conferences were held of
sectional representatives, such as sanitary
authorities, medical officers of health, engineers
and surveyors, veterinary inspectors, sanitary
inspectors and health visitors. The popular
lecture, on “The value of clean fresh air,” was
delivered by Professor Leonard Hill, F.R.S.,
who said that physiologists could help greatly
to point the way to a happy and healthy life,
but ignorance and custom enveloped the people,
and it was problematical whether our civiliza-
tion might not stifle itself like older civiliza-
tions.and die out. The discipline and the laws

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

of health, which included moral restraints, alone
could save it.

THE FRENCH DYE INDUSTRY?

Tue issue of La Nature, April 15, contains
an interesting summary of the French dyestuff
industry, particular attention being paid to
progress made since 1914. In 1913, 2,000 tons
of dyes, of the value of seven million frances,
were imported. Eighty-five per cent. came
from Germany and ten per cent. from Switzer-
land. The balance of the consumption of
9,000 tons represented French manufacture.
It is pointed out, however, that the dyestuff
factories of France, of which there were four,
were almost completely dependent on Germany
for intermediates, the home production of
which represented scarcely ten per cent. of the
requirements. There were in addition German
works which received intermediates or even
finished dyes from Germany. The article re-
fers to the ready adaptation of the dye works
in Germany to the manufacture of munitions
during the war, and does not omit to point out
that, without the means of obtaining synthetic
nitrie acid, which the enemy had also perfected,
his dye works would not have been of the
slightest use to him.

The French efforts during the war are de-
seribed at length. In April, 1916, the Syndicat
National des Matiéres Colorantes was estab-
lished, which had relations with the state and
further arranged to take over after the war
the national factories used in the manufacture
of explosives. The Compagnie Nationale des
Matiéres Colorantes et de Produits Chimiques
was constituted in January, 1917, and at once
set to work. Two factories rapidly grew up,
the first at Nogent-les-Vierges on a semi-tech-
nical scale, and a large factory at Villers-St-
Paul, with a contemplated capacity of 4,000
tons of synthetic indigo a year. This was
abandoned during the German advance in 1918
and the material removed to Lyons, but it has
again been set in operation, and, as a result of
intensive work, the total production of the
French factories had grown from 175 ,tons in
1919 to 765 tons in 1920. Since that time the
production has decreased on account of the
economic crisis, although the capacity of pro-

1From Nature.

SCIENCE

273

duction is now stated to exceed 13,000 tons.
With a few exceptions, dyes of all the main
types are manufactured and progress is being
made.

The company has two large centers of pro-
duction. The Oissel Works, installed at the
old national factory, with an area of 39,000
sq. m. of buildings, is connected with ithe main
line from Paris to Rouen. The power is gen-
erated by turbo-alternators of the most modern
type, each of 1,000 kilowatts. The factory is
at present making intermediates, of which
more than sixty are being produced, together
with sulphur dyes and azo-dyes. These are
produced directly from the intermediates with-
out isolation of the latter from solution.

The second works is that at Villers-St.-Paul,
with an area of 35,000 sq. m. of buildings, on
the main line from Paris to Compiégne. A
very modern boiler plant is installed, which
when complete will consume 300 tons of coal
daily. In this works are made the dyes which
require special apparatus, such as indigo and
alizarine, phthalic acid and basie dyes derived
from it, triphenyl and diphenylmethane dyes,
pyrazolone dyes, etc. Vat dyes are also made,
and there are large research laboratories.

At Saint-Denis the old works has been en-
larged, while a new works at Isére grew up
during the war. It is stated that prices are
now high owing to high costs of raw materials,
and the yields could also be improved by the
further efforts of the chemists, and particu-
larly of the engineers.

GOOD ROADS SCHOLARSHIP

Names of judges appointed to award the
four years’ university scholarship offered in
connection with the national good roads essay
contest are announced by the Highway Edu-
cation Board.

The judges are: Henry C. Wallace, secretary
of agriculture; George Horace Lorimer, editor
of the Saturday Evening Post, and Dr. John
Grier Hibben, president of Princeton Univer-
sity. The judges accepted responsibility for
the award of the scholarship at the invitation
of Dr. John J. Tigert, United States commis-
sioner of education, who also is chairman of
the board.

They have been supplied with copies of

274

fifty-four essays, representing each state, as
well as the District of Columbia, the Canal
Zone, the Philippines, Porto Rico, Hawaii and
Alaska. Selection of the best essays, out of
the thousands written in the states and terri-
tories, was made by leading educational insti-
tutions, such as a state university, or the state
department of education.

It is estimated by officials of the board that
at least 250,000 pupils of high school grade
participated in the contest, and these fifty-four
manuscripts, therefore, represent the cream of
all papers presented. Essays were written
on the subject, “How good roads are developing
my community.” In many states local prizes
were given, as well as state prizes by the insti-
tutions conducting the contest.

The scholarship is given by H. 8. Firestone,
Akron, Ohio, a member of the Highway Edu-
cation Board. It is intended to defray tuition
and expenses of the student in college and is
valued at not less than $4,000. The successful
student, to be selected by the judges, may
attend any college or university in the United
States. It is expected that the judges will
reach a decision in time to permit the success-
ful boy or girl to enter college this autumn.
The scholarship is given annually for the best
essay on a subject pertaining to good roads.

THE ASSOCIATION OF IRON AND STEEL
ENGINEERS

THE sixteenth annual convention will be held
September 11 to 15, at Cleveland, Ohio. Fol-
lowing is the tentative program:

Monpay, SEPTEMBER 11
9:30 A.M.
Business session—Hlection of officers.

2:00 P.M.

Report of Standardization Committees. IF. W.
Cramer, chairman.

Report of Sub-Committee on Motors.
Petty, chairman.

Report of Sub-Committee on Lighting. R. G.
Bauer, chairman,

Report of Sub-Committee on Control.
Cramer, chairman.

Report of Sub-Committee on Cranes: ‘‘ Résumé
of AI&SEE Crane Code.’’ R. S. Shoemaker,
chairman,

Report of Sub-Committee on Transmission: ‘‘In-

F. W.

SCIENCE

[Vou LVI, No. 1445

vestigation of Insulators for Steel Mill Serv-

ice.’? A. R. Leavitt, chairman.

Report of Electrie Development Committee. R. B.
Gerhardt, chairman.

Report of Electric Furnace Committee. EH. T.

Moore, chairman.

Report of Safety Committee. ‘‘Safety Organ-
ization—General Safety Rules.’’? F. A. Wiley,
chairman.

TUESDAY, SEPTEMBER 12
9:30 A.M.

“Generating Station Development’’: D. B.

Rushmore and E. Pragst.
2:00 P.M.

“¢Hlectrification of the International Nickel Com-
pany’s Works for Monel Metal’’: F. C. Wat-
son.

WEDNESDAY, SEPTEMBER 13
9:30 A.M.

“Steam Turbine Operation’’: L. W. Heller.

““Tnternal Combustion Engines for Power Gen-
eration in Steel Mills’’: D. M. Petty.

2:00 P.M.

‘Judging the Combustion of Gaseous Fuels from
Gas Analysis’’: A. G. Witting.

Topical Discussion—‘‘ Boiler Practices of 19227’:
J. B. Crane, E. R. Fish, Alfred Cotton, R. E.
Butler, R. M. Rush and P. H. Falter.

THURSDAY, SEPTEMBER 14
9:30 A.M.

“*A Review of Steel Mill Electrification’’: B. G.

‘Lamme and W. Sykes.
2:00 P.M.

““Tmprovement in Efficiency of Electric Power

Supply’’: Dr. C. P. Steinmetz.
7:00 P.M.

Sixteenth annual banquet.

Fray, SEPTEMBER 15
9:30 A.M.

“Some Considerations in the Electrification of
the Steel Plant Railroad Yard’’: R. B. Ger-
hardt.

2:00 P.M.

Inspection trips—Cleveland industrials.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

THE centenary of the death of two ‘distin-
guished astronomers occurred last month. Wil-
liam Herschel died on August 25, 1822, and
Jean Baptiste Joseph Delambre on August 19.

Av the meeting of the French Association
for the Advancement of Science, held at Mont-
pellier from July 24 to 29, M. Mangin, director

\

SrprremMBer 8, 1922]

of the Paris Museum of Natural History, gave
the presidential address on the “War against
the enemies of plants.” M. Desgrez presided,
and M. Viala was chosen to succeed him in the
presidency. The meeting next year will be at
Bordeaux.

M. Bercason presided at the two sessions of
the Committee on Intellectual Cooperation of
the League of Nations that met at Geneva on
August 1. Reports were presented by M. de
Reynold, of Switzerland, and Mme. Curie, of
France, respectively, on the situation in Aus-
tria and in Poland. The question of interna-
tional cooperation in bibliography was dis-
cussed and a committee was appointed consist-
ing of M. J. Destrée, of Belgium, M. de
Reynold, Miss Bonnevie, of Norway, and Mme.
Curie.

Tue astronomers who are visiting Australia
for the eclipse were given a civic weleome on
August 8 by the Lord Mayor of Melbourne and
afterwards entertained at luncheon by the fed-
eral ministers at the Federal Parliament. The
prime minister expressed ‘the willingness of the
government to afford the utmost facilities to
ensure the success of the expedition. Dr.
W. W. Campbell, director of the Lick Observa-
tory, replying, said that Australia had shown
greater interest and rendered more assistance
than the government of any other country for
previous expeditions with which he had been
associated.

Henry Epwarp Preuiew, of Washington, has
become Lord Pellew, the sixth viscount of
Exmouth, at the age of ninety-four years. The
title will devolve on Dr. Charles H. Pellew, of
New York, formerly associate professor of
chemistry in Columbia University.

Dr. Rozert AITKEN, astronomer, Lick Ob-
servatory, has returned from the meeting of
the International Astronomical Union which
was held from May 2 to May 10 at Rome. Dr.
Aitken acted as chairman of the commission on
double stars at the international meeting and
was re-appointed chairman of the commission
for the period 1922-25. He was also made a
member of the commission on positions and
orbits of minor planets, satellites and comets.
Dr. Aitken took part in the meetings in cele-

SCIENCE

278

bration of the centenary of the Royal Astro-
nomical Society of London which were held
from May 28 to May 31 in London. While
there Dr. Aitken had the honor of presenting
the Bruce Gold Medal of the Astronomical
Society of the Pacific to the astronomer royal,
Sir Frank Watson Dyson.

Dr. J. S. Kiyesuey, who has been on leave
of absence for the past year, has retired from
the faculty of the University of Illinois with
the title of professor emeritus of zoology. His
address for the future is 2,500 Cedar Street,
Berkeley, California.

Proressor G. A. Minusr, of the University
of Illinois, has recently been elected an hon-
orary member of the Indian Mathematical
Society. This society was organized in 1907
and its membership list, dated 1922, includes,
about 200 names. It then had only one hon-
orary member.

Proressor L. Barrstow has been elected
chairman of the Royal Aeronautical Society in
suecession to Lieutenant Colonel M. O’Gorman.

A. W. Amprose, chief petroleum technolo-
gist of the United States Bureau of Mines, has
been appointed assistant director of the bureau,
to fill the vacancy created by the resignation of
E. A. Holbrook, who has aceepted the deanship —
of the mining school at Pennsylvania State
College. The duties of F. J. Bailey, assistant
to the director, have been increased by assign-
ing to him virtually all the business matters of
the bureau formerly handled by the assistant
director.

Coronet Drtcampre has been appointed
director of the French Meteorological Office.

Harotp E. Bascocx, of Cornell University,
has resigned his position in the department of
farm management and agricultural economics
of the College of Agriculture to become man-
ager of the Cooperative Grange League Fed-
eration Exchange.

Dr. D. I. AnpRoNEScU, of Emerson, New
Jersey, has accepted a position with the De-
partment of Agriculture of Romania as chief
of the department of plant breeding. His ad-
dress will be Statiunea Agronomica, Baneasa-
Bucuresti, Romania,

276

Amone the British civil list pensions grant-
ed “in consideration of their circumstances”
during the year ended March 31, 1922, and an-
nounced in Nature are: Lady Fletcher, in ree-
ognition of the services rendered by her late
husband (Sir Lazarus Fletcher) to science,
£60; Dr. Francis Warner, in recognition of
the services rendered by him in his investiga-
tions into the mental and physical condition
of defective children, £100; Sir George Green-
hill, F.R.S., in recognition of his services to
science and his ballistic work, £125; Mrs. J. M.
Miller, in recognition of the services rendered
by her late husband (Dr. N. H. J. Miller) to
agricultural science, £50; Mrs. Alice Mabel
Ussher, in recognition of the services rendered
by her late husband (Mr. W. A. E. Ussher) to
geological science, £50; Mrs. Agnes E. Walker,
in recognition of the services rendered by her
late husband (Mr. George W. Walker, F.R.S.)
to science, £75; the Misses Ellen C., Gertrude
M., Alice B., Katherine E. and Mary L. Wood-
ward, in recognition of the services rendered
by their late father (Dr. Henry Woodward,
F.R.S.) to geological science, £125.

AccorDING to the Journal of the Washing-
ton Academy of Sciences, at a meeting of the
executive committee of the Institute for Re-
search in Tropical America it was decided to
concentrate the efforts of the institute on the
establishment of a research station in Panama
near the Gorgas Memorial Institute which is to
be erected in the outskirts of the city of
Panama. The members are Thomas Barbour,
Harvard University; H. E. Crampton, Barnard
College (representing the New York Academy
of Sciences); A. S. Hitchcock, Smithsonian
Institution; A. G. Ruthven, University of Mich-
igan, and Dr. Witmer Stone, Philadelphia
Academy of Sciences.

M. Daniet BertHELot, professor of physies
in the University of Paris, gave the lecture at
the joint meeting of the five French academies
held on July 17.

Dr. SrepHen Smiru, distinguished for his
contributions to public health, died on August
26, in his ninety-ninth year.

Gispert Kapp, born in Austria in 1852, pro-
fessor of electrical engineering at the Univer-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1445

sity of Birmingham, died on August 10.

Mrs. J. A. Owen Viscer, author of books
on natural history, died in London on July 30,
at the age of eighty years.

Hans BarrerMan, at one time director of
the astronomical observatory at the University
of Konigsburg, has died at the age of sixty-two
years.

M. Lovis Favs, known for his work on
oceanography, died on July 31 at the age of
sixty-nine years.

Tue third annual meeting of the South-
western Geological Society will be held at
Dallas, Texas, on September 15 and 16. Visit-
ing geologists, who are in that part of the
southwest are invited to be present at this
meeting.

Tue Gutiérrez prize of 400 pesos will be
awarded by the Havana Academy of Sciences
for the best work on the medical geography of
some part of Cuba. The Cafiongo prize of 200
pesos is offered for the best work on any scien-
tifie subject, and the Gordon gold medal for the
best work on the “Physiological conception of
sleep.” The competing articles must be sent
in anonymously, and be in the hands of the
secretary before March 30, 1923.

AN institute of theoretical and applied optics
has been established at Paris with a course
lasting two years and a laboratory for research.
A monthly journal has been established with
the name Revue d’optique théoretique et instru-
mentale, which has the cooperation of the
French syndicate of makers of optical appara-
tus and instruments of precision.

Nature states that a new biological station
for the study of limnological problems and for
research on the development of fresh-water
fishes has been established at the Lake of Trasi-
meno, in Umbria. The University of Perugia
has assumed responsibility, and the director of
the station is the professor of physiology, Dr.
Osvaldo Polimanti.

AccorpiInc to The Experiment Station
Record, the entomological laboratory and offices
of the Station Agronomique de la Guadeloupe
were recently destroyed by fire. Among the
material lost was the mailing list, and the sta-

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

tion asks to be informed of individuals and
institutions desiring to continue to receive its
publications. Correspondence should be ad-
dressed to the director, Station Agronomique,
Pointe-a-Pitre, Guadeloupe, West Indies.

Atv the meeting of the American Psycho-
logical Association at Princeton in 1921, there
was constituted a Section of Consulting Psy-
chologists to represent persons able to carry on
the applications of psychology at a recognized
scientific level. Up to the present, the mem-
bership in this section has ‘been restricted to
members of the Section of Clinical Psychology.
Applications for membership to the Section
of Consulting Psychologists can now be re-
ceived from all members of the American
Psychological Association who are engaged in
the applications of psychology. The com-
mittee in charge will act upon these applica-
tions at the next annual meeting of the asso-
ciation. For further information address the
representative of the committee, Dr. F. L.
Wells, 74 Fenwood Road, Boston, Mass.

Tue Wintersteiner Collection of 13,000 micro-

scopical preparations of eye pathology has’

been acquired by the St. Louis University
through the generosity of Mr. Charles Reb-
stock, of St. Louis. This collection, which is
said to be the most complete in Hurope, will be
utilized for graduate instruction in ophthal-
mology.

Ir is proposed to build an observatory on
the top of the Jungfrau. The Swiss Mete-
orological Bureau has carefully studied the
proposal, and decided that should the observa-
tory be erected it ought to be placed on the
Sphinx rock. The rock stands above the
Jungfraujock at the height of 11,721 feet, 388
feet higher than the Jungfraujock railway sta-
tion. The observatory, which would be intend-
ed for meteorological observation, should,
owing to its altitude, prove important and use-
ful. Its construction, however, would involve
a great expense, but it is hoped that the state
and the scientific bodies of Switzerland will
contribute towards its erection.

Iv is stated in Nature that the British Re-
search Association for the Woolen and Worsted

SCIENCE 277

Industries announce the following awards of
research fellowships and advanced scholarships
for the year 1922-23: Mr. G. W. Chester,
Liverpool, £200 to conduct researeh on wool
fats at the University of Manchester; Mr. John
L. Raynes, Nottingham, £100 to conduet re-
search on the bleaching of wool at the Uni-
versity College of Nottingham; Mr. George
Barker, Baildon, £100, to conduct research on
the action of water on wool as regards strength,
elasticity, lustre, dyeing properties, ete., at the
University of Leeds. Scholarships have been
granted to Mr. Arthur Banks, Sutton Mull,
Keighley, tenable at Bradford Technical Col-
lege; and Mr. Wiliam B. Elliot, Wellington
Road, Hawick, tenable at the South of Scotland
Central Technical College, Galashiels.

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation states that a deputation received on
July 13 by the British minister of health laid
before him the present status of graduate med-
ical education in London. The committee ap-
pointed by Dr. Addison, former minister of
health, recommended that an institute or col-
lege of hygiene be established in London. This
has been made possible by the munificent gift
of the Rockefeller Foundation, and furthered
by a promise from the minister of health of
an annual grant of £25,000 for upkeep. A site
has been selected and other arrangements are
in progress. It was further recommended that
a graduate medical school be established to
serve as a center of a great teaching organiza-
tion, in which the special hospitals of London,
the Poor Law infirmaries and the medical
schools, with their clinical units and research
departments, would all find their place. It
advised that, as an integral part of the organ-
ization, there should be a bureau or central
office controlled by a committee of management
and providing a library, a hostel and full facili-
ties for social intercourse. Nothing has been
done to advance this second recommendation,
and it is on this point that the deputation made
representations to the minister. The president
of the Royal College of Physicians of London,
the president of the Royal College of Surgeons
of England and the chairman of the committee
on graduate education of the British Medical

278

Association, were among the members of the
deputation.

THE program for the Highth National Ex-
position of Chemical Industries, to be held in
Grand Central Palace, New York, N. Y., Sep-
tember 11 to 16, 1922, numbers among its
speakers not only many eminent chemists but
several well-known public men. There are
already about 400 exhibitors. Every branch of
the chemical and chemical equipment indus-
tries, as well as numerous allied houses, will be
represented at the exposition. The chemical
products displayed will include all types man-
ufactured in the United States: Coal, medi-
cinals, and dyestuffs, technical chemicals for the
rubber, leather, paper, textile, paint, and other
consuming trades,—“everything in chemicals
from the crudest of erude materials to the most
delicate aromatic ready for the perfumer’s
use.” A number of new devices in apparatus
and machinery developed since the termination
of war-time activity and completed since the
1921 Exposition will be displayed for the first
time, as well as improvements on machinery
long standard for industrial operations. Many
of the machines will be seen in actual opera-
tion. Some new features which will be on dis-
play are: New special high-capacity evapora-
tor; Lead pumps for handling phosphoric
acid under pressure; new adaptation of the
all hard-rubber pump for use in muriatie acid
loading; recent development on a_ balanced
automatic control valve and in direct reading
resistance thermometer; new ideas in pyro-
meters; developments of the past year in butyl
aleohol and furfural and their derivatives for
solvent purposes; the use of liquid chlorine in
the paper industry in place of bleaching pow-
der; new dust controlling and humidifying
equipment; new ideas for loading machinery
on trucks; all types of containers, steel fiber,
wood and glass.

Tur Journal of the Royal Society of Arts
states that because it represents an entirely
new industry to Malaya, the formal opening of
the pottery works at Gopeng, was made the
occasion of somewhat elaborate ceremonies.
The plant, which is situated about 16 miles
from Ipoh, is equipped to handle all the
processes from refining the crude clay to the
decoration of the completed piece. According

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

to a report by the United States consul at
Penang, easting and jolleying are the processes
used, permitting a comparatively large output
with labor that is not yet thoroughly trained.
Teapots, jugs, ewers and basins are already
being turned out, notwithstam@ling that a few
weeks ago the Malay girls employed in the
casting room had never seen a pottery. As the
available labor becomes more skilled the pro-
duction of porcelain ware in bulk is contem-
plated. All the materials required for pottery
making are found within three miles of the
works. Besides supplying its own clay re-
quirements, the company ships china clay to
cotton mills in Bombay and paper mills in
Calcutta. The barrels for packing the product
are made at the works.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tue will of Arthur B. Emmons, of Newport,
R. I., leaves $50,000 to the Museum of Fine
Arts of Boston and $25,000 to the Children’s
Hospital of the same city, and the Newport
Hospital. Berea College, Kentucky, Hampton
Institute, Virginia, and Tuskegee Institute,
Alabama, receive $10,000 each.

Dr. ANDREW M. Souter has resigned the
presidency of the Georgia State College of
Agriculture, to accept the presidency of the
University of Wyoming, to take the place of
Dr. Aven Nelson, who returns to his former
position as head of the department of botany.

Dr. J. L. Berson, for twenty-five years pro-
fessor of chemistry at the Georgia State Col-
lege for Women, Milledgeville, Ga., has been
elected acting president of the college.

Wiuuiam F. G. Swany, Se.D., professor of
physics in the University of Minnesota, has
been appointed professor of physics at the
University of Chicago. Professor Swann was
connected with ithe Royal College of Science,
London, and the University of Sheffield before
coming to the United States in 1913. For six
years he was chief of tthe physical division, De-
partment of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Car-
negie Institution at Washington.

Dr. Henry H. Gopparp, for the past four
years director of the State Bureau of Juvenile

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

Research at Columbus, Ohio, has resigned to
accept the professorship of abnormal psychol-
ogy in Ohio State University. He will continue
his clinical work and his researches in the ab-
normal field.

Dr. J. BRONFENBRENNER, formerly assistant
professor of preventive medicine and hygiene
at the Harvard Medical School, has accepted a
similar appointment in the department of bac-
teriology.

Mr. Joun L. Buys, Ph.D. (Cornell, ’22), has
been made assistant professor of zoology in the
Municipal University of Akron, Ohio., in the
place of Dr. W. R. Allen, who goes to the
University of Kentucky.

L. E. Miuxs, plant pathologist for the State
Plant Board of Mississippi, has become asso-
ciate plant pathologist and associate professor
of plant pathology at the Alabama Polytechnic
Institute.

Dr. Stuon Kuosxy, of the research depart-
ment, Edgewood Arsenal, Chemical Warfare
Service, has been appointed instructor at the
Martin Maloney Chemical Laboratory of the
Catholic University of America.

Dr. Wautzr Rivcuis, assistant lecturer in
biology in the University College, Aberystwyth,
has been appointed assistant lecturer in biology
at the Technical College, Bradford, in succes-
sion to Mr. L. P. W. Renouf, who has been
elected to the professorship of zoology in the
University of Cork.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

RELIEF FOR RUSSIAN ASTRONOMERS

To tHE Epiror oF Science: Complying with
your request, I will make a brief statement as
to the efforts which have been made by the
American astronomers in recent months toward
the relief of the physical needs of our col-
leagues in Russia.

Letters began to filter in from Russia about
a year ago. We thus learned, for instance, that
the grounds of the great Pulkowo Observatory
had again been chosen as a field for artillery
practice between rival factions. Fortunately,
there had been a little intimation of what might

SCIENCE

279

happen, and no damage was done to telescopes
or other apparatus, the most valuable lenses
having been stored below the possibility of
damage. The letters foreshadowed impending
distress for the necessities of life, and the
natural anxiety about the winter of 1921-2.
Later letters showed that the anticipations were
being realized with distressing completeness.

At the meeting of the American Astrono-
mical Society held at Swarthmore, in convoca-
tion week, or about January 1, 1922, a Com-
mittee on Russian Relief was appointed, con-
sisting of Professors J. A. Miller of Swarth-
more, Benjamin Boss of Albany, and H. C.
Wilson of Northfield. A generous subscription
of about $150 was made at the meeting, prin-
cipally for relief of astronomers at Pulkowo
and for M. and Mme. Ceraski, formerly of the
Moscow Observatory. The committee decided
not to make further appeal for funds.

During the latter part of the winter the calls
for help from the Russian observatories were
numerous and beyond the means of the staff
of any one observatory; consequently, after
learning that the committee of the Astrono-
mical Society had decided not to take further
action, a small, informal committee assumed
the responsibility and issued an appeal to the
members of the staffs of the American obser-
vatories and departments of astronomy—hav-
ing in mind that a monthly contribution might
be given for five months, from the persons
connected with our larger institutions.

Meanwhile, the American Relief <Ad-
ministration was extending its operations, and
direct information was coming to us of the
receipt of the food packets. An actual demon-
stration of the workings of the A. R. A. was
hardly necessary, in view of the splendid ef-
ficiency of all relief work in which Mr. Hoover
has had a hand.

In order to avoid any waste of time in cor-
respondence between the members of a com-
mittee having proper geographical distribution,
the three members were chosen from the same
staff, and decisions could thus be reached im-
mediately and appeals answered on the same
day that they were received. One member of
the committee is Russian, and thus our foreign
friends were enabled to write their letters in

280

Russian, without the inconvenience of trans-
lating them into a language different from
their own. The valuable personal acquaintance
of this member in Russia was of great assist-
ance in drawing up a list of institutions which
ought to be reached.

The response to the appeal in America was
immediate, and very generous. Up to August
15th, a sum of $1,657.47 had been received,
and food packets amounting to $1,490 had
been sent for distribution among the scientific
staffs of twenty-five institutions, observatories
or universities, and to some isolated astrono-
mers or their dependent families. These pack-
ets were sent at intervals, considerably oftener
than a month, as the funds. came in for the
purpose. We have received interesting testi-
mony as to the care and judgment of the A. R.
A. in the selection of contents of the food
packets, having learned from the direct ex-
perience of our friends that a $10 packet has
actually supported two persons for a month.
It should also be recalled that one fourth of
all packets was used for the general relief of
Russian children.

The recipients of the first shipments were
requested to give us the names of other astrono-
mers or their families that might need assist-
ance, and thus the list has been considerably
increased. Many replies have been received,
but not yet has there been time for all to ack-
nowledge the receipt of the food packages.
The distress has been very great in the Crimea
—perhaps where it had been least expected—
and it was not possible for the A. R. A. to
establish warehouses in this district until rather
recently. From six to eight weeks seems to
have been necessary for the actual receipt of
the food at points which could be reached most
expeditiously.

The last general distribution of food packets
was made at the end of July, and we have
assumed that by the time it reaches the per-
sons for whom it is intended the new harvest
will have removed the immediate urgency of
relief. The balance which the committee has in
the bank will be used in responding to calls
from individuals not yet reached, or those in
remote districts where the distress may still be
acute.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

No expenses of the committee have been
charged to the fund, so that the distribution
has been net. This, of course, applies also
to the splendid work of the A. R. A.

The followers of the stars are a scattered,
other-worldly folk, but their work on far-away
things has brought them close together. Per-
sonal acquaintances are probably closer among
astronomers and their families than is the case
in most other branches of science. It has, ac-
cordingly, been a simpler matter for the Ameri-
can astronomers to give this little help to
their Russian colleagues than it would have
been for those in other departments of en-
deavor having a greater constituency. Men
and women of America in several other branch-
es could readily have contributed a hundred
times what the astronomers could do—and
perhaps they have—but the presumptive lack
of personal contact would have made this a
vather difficult proposition. The letters from
Russian astronomers leave no doubt as to the
sincerity of the appreciation of even this small
measure of relief from America.

The members of the committee have been:
George Van Biesbroeck, Otto Struve and the
writer.

Epwin B. Frost,
Chairman
YERKES OBSERVATORY,
WILLIAMS Bay, WISCONSIN
AvecustT 18, 1922

BOTULINUS TOXIN

Sometime ago Dr. Schlesinger and myself
(Proc. Soc. Exp. Biol. and Med., 19, 1, 1921;
Jour. A. M. A., 78, 1519, 1922) stated that the
toxicity of erude filtrate from cultures of
Bacillus botulinus may be greatly increased
by the proper degree of acidification (ap-
proximately py, 4). When we tried to
find the limits of potency of such an acidi-
fied solution of toxin, we were extremely sur-
prised to discover that even such minute quan-
tities of solution which contained only
3 X 10-18 ce. of the original culture filtrate
exhibited all the specific properties of the
original toxin and killed mice in less than 48
hours when injected intraperitoneally. When
this acidified solution of toxin was diluted

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

further, the results became less regular, in fact
the dilution containing 3 X 10-7! ce. of the
original toxin killed only 5 per cent. of the
animals tested.

In the current issue of ScrmnceE (August 4,
1922, page 143), Dr. Stehle questions this ob-
servation. He states that one cubic centimeter
of toxin does not contain enough molecules to
supply a molecule of toxin for each cubic
centimeter of the final dilution. Indeed, he
rightly concludes that “the average 3 X 10-*1
ce. quantity of solution would contain no
toxin.” We agree with Dr. Stehle’s conclu-
sion, but we think it offers an explanation of,
rather than a contradiction to our findings.

Our findings do seem unbelievable. Moreover,
mm view of the fact that mice are not very
reliable as test animals for toxicity, together
with the possibility of some error in dilution
due to inaccuracy of pipettes, we do not insist
on the accuracy of the figures and offer them
merely as the best proof of the apparent ex-
treme increase of the potency of toxin—a con-
dition unknown with other bacterial toxins.
As a matter of fact, we doubted the figures
obtained originally and repeated the experi-
ment many times. Finally, we checked our
finding by a calculation similar to that used
by Dr. Stehle (in our ealeulation we followed
the reasoning found in Walker’s “Introduction
to Physical Chemistry,” Macmillan, 1907,
pages 214-219). This caleulation, in fact,
gave us the audacity to offer our figures which
before seemed to us ridiculous. According to
our interpretation, this calculation showed that
each cubie centimeter of the dilution of the
toxin to the eighteenth power might still contain
enough of the specifie substance to kill mice
regularly. (over 80 per cent. of animals thus
treated died within 48 hours and about 10 per
cent. more died within the next 24 or 48 hours),
whereas in the dilution to the twenty-first
power, many of the one cubic centimeter por-
tions of the solution might not have contained
even a single molecule of toxin, which appar-
ently explains why only 5 per cent. of the ani-
mals injected died. When identical results were
obtained on at least three different batches of
toxin, obtained on different lots of culture

SCIENCE

281

medium, and on repeated tests on each of these
batches, we decided to publish these unusual
findings. I wish to take this opportunity to
add that we still expect to find some source of
constant error in our procedure or in our eal-
culation. We know of no good proof indi-
cating that the toxin may act as a catalyst,
nor are we willing without further good reason
to believe in the existence in the body of some
vital center consisting of a small group of
cells (not more than 100 and possibly less),
the injury to which would lead to death in 80
per cent. of animals tested. Furthermore, con-
tinuing the above calculation, we were forced
to conelude that the molecular weight of such
an active toxin as we have seemingly obtained
when computed on the basis of total solids
could be about 380 and when ecaleulated as
protein (on the basis of total nitrogen) could
be no greater than 260, which makes it ex-
tremely difficult to see how such a simple sub-
stance can possess the degree of specificity in
respect to antitoxin neutralization which our
solutions demonstrated.

In order to clarify the question, I would like
to sum up the arguments which seem to favor
the validity of our observations. ;

(1) When 3 X 10-1 ce. of the acidified eul-
ture filtrate of Bacillus botulinus is injected
intraperitoneally into mice of 17-21 grams, the
animals die with all the symptoms of botulinus
poisoning in mice.

(2) When receiving this small amount of
toxin the animals die within 24-48 hours,
which is a typical incubation period for botu-
linus toxin.

(3) Animals receiving protective injection of
a homologous (type A) antitoxin invariably
survive the injection of the amount many mil-
lions of times greater than 3 < 10-18 ce. of this
active solution.

(4) The animals receiving large amounts of
botulinus antitoxin type B (heterologous) are
not protected even against a single dose of
3 X 10-18 ce. of acidified type A toxin.

(5) The potency of acidified toxin is de-
stroyed by a very short exposure to heating at
80 degrees C.

282

(6) When the reaction of acidified toxin is
brought back to neutral (before dilution), the
resulting solution has the titer of the original
toxin. The re-acidification and re-neutraliza-
tion can be accomplished several times in suc-
cession with the result that acidification inva-
riably increases the potency and neutralization
returns it to the original titer.

(7) When one eubie centimeter of the
original toxin has been distributed through a
sufficiently large amount of a diluent so that
not every cubic centimeter of the diluent would
be theoretically expected to contain one
molecule of original toxin, the results of the
injection of such highly diluted toxin become
irregular and apparently depend on the pres-
ence or absence of a molecule or a small num-
ber of molecules of toxin in each portion
injected.

(3) While not every filtrate yielded an
equally potent product on acidification, the
same filtrate consistently titrated as indicated,
even though repeated tests were performed
several days and weeks apart.

On the other hand, it is evident that there
are a number of considerations militating
against the validity of our observations.

(1) Using the same strain of the organism
and similar culture medium, it was not always
possible to obtain the same degree of increase
in potency of the acidified filtrates, although
in all cases some increase was observed. Ap-
parently, the uncontrollable differences in com-
position of the culture medium during the
early growth of the organism has something to
do with the degree of change in potency which
the toxin will undergo upon its subsequent
acidification.

(2) It is diffieult to conceive how such a
small number of molecules which can theoret-
ically be expected to be present in the small
amount of toxin injected can produce the
effect.

(3) The extreme simplicity and low molecu-
lar weight which the active substance seems to
possess according to calculation is difficult to
reconcile with its strict biologic specificity
which would postulate a more complex struc-
ture.

(4) We find that while this active toxin is
neutralized by a specific antitoxin, the neu-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1445

tralization does not go according to the law
of multiple proportions, but is in fact more
efficient.

(5) It is difficult to explain why such a
simple molecule as that which the active toxin
seems to possess can not pass bacterial filters
which are comparatively permeable to the
original toxin.

These, as well as other considerations, indi-
cate that a further study of the subject is
necessary. We feel more inclined to believe,
and some of our most recent observations
strengthen this belief, that while the toxin does
unquestionably undergo an increase of potency
under certain conditions of the experiment, the
degree of this increase probably is not as great
as some of our findings seem to indicate. We
suspect that there may oceur an ultramiscropic
precipitation of the toxin-carrying portion of
the medium. If the minute particles of such ©
a precipitate should possess particularly high
adsorptive power, they could be carried from
dilution to dilution and thus vitiate the accu-
racy of the calculation. Since circumstances
force us to interrupt this study for the time
being, we thought it worth while to call the
attention of other workers to this interesting
phenomenon. With this in view, we are pre-
paring detailed protocols of the experiments
to date which we hope to publish in the near
future.

J. BRONFENBRENNER

HarvarD MEDICAL SCHOOL,

Boston

SOIL SHIFTING IN THE CONNECTICUT
VALLEY

REecENTLY two articles have appeared in the
current volume of Scrence (Nos. 1413 and
1426), reporting soil shifting by wind. In the
Connecticut Valley in the vicinity of Amherst
sand storms are a common occurrence. The
prevailing winds, coming from the northwest,
have a rather uninterrupted sweep down the
valley, and at times pick up and transport
large quantities of soil consisting of sands,
sandy loams, silt loams, clay loams and clays.
It is the coarser members of the above soils
that are most eroded because the heavier soils
are usually covered with vegetation.

This shifting of the soil by wind action has

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

no doubt had an important part in shaping the
topography of the region, which may be de-
seribed as the level to rolling bottom of an
ancient lake or arm of the sea dotted with
sandy knolls or modified sand dunes. The
shifting also presents to the farmers of the sec-
tion some problems of soil management.
Probably the most striking instance in recent
years of wind erosion of soils in this vicinity
occurred on the days of April 27 to 30, 1922.
Observations by the writer showed a drift as
deep as three inches, the deepest observed being
on the south sides of tobacco barns. Onion
seeds were blown out of the soil necessitating in
some cases reseeding, and no doubt many tons
of fertilizer were carried from recently fer-
tilized onion fields on which a first application
of one ton of high grade fertilizer is the com-
mon practice. It was observed that any sort of
a ground covering, even loose tobacco stalks,
was rather effective in checking erosion, but a
growing cover crop as commonly used in
tobacco, but not onion, fields was most effective.
The winds most disastrous from the stand-
point of soil erosion are those of two or more
days’ duration, the first day usually being re-
quired to dry the soil. Although sandstorms
may occur frequently during the year, the most
damage is done in the spring when the land is
being or has been recently prepared for crops.
A. B. Beaumont
AMHERST, Mass.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Development and Activities of the Roots of
Crop Plants: A Study in Crop Ecology.
By Joun E. Weaver, Frank C. Jean and
Joun W. Crist. 17 x 25 cm. VI + 117
pages, 42 figures, 14 plates. Carnegie Inst.
Washington, Publ. no. 316. May 11, 1922.

Stupents of plants, especially in physi-
ology, ecology and agriculture, will be inter-
ested in Weaver, Jean and Crist’s book on the
roots of crop plants, in which is brought forth
a mass of detailed information in a field that
has been largely neglected until recently. The
studies now reported are a continuation of
those presented in Weaver’s “Root Develop-

SCIENCE

283

ment in the Grassland Formation” (1920).
Much of the present work follows the meth-
ods of his earlier investigations on the form
and distribution of the root systems of un-
cultivated plants. The descriptive data are
obtained by what must seem to most botanists
very tedious and laborious excavations; each
root is traced to its end and the size, form,
ete., of the whole root system of each plant is
shown diagrammatically on a chart. The pub-
lished charts frequently show the size of the
top, as well as the depth and spread of the
root system and the number of roots. Root
systems of plants growing under field con-
ditions are described, in several stages of their
development, for Lincoln ‘and Peru, Nebraska,
for Phillipsburg, Kansas, and for Burlington,
Colorado, these stations having mean annual
precipitations of about 33, 28, 23 and 17
inches, respectively. The plants dealt with
are: oats, wheat, barley, maize, potato, alfalfa
and sweet clover, for the seasons of 1919, 1920
and 1921. Some excellent experimental studies
bearing on the soil-depths. from which water
and nitrate were removed during several de-
velopmental stages of the plants are con-
sidered in the final chapter of the book.

It is pointed out that the root systems of
crop plants show modes of growth similar to
those of native plants growing in the same
region, both being apparently influenced by
the environmental moisture conditions. With
higher evaporation intensities and drier sur-
face soils the root systems tend to be developed
less extensively in the superficial soil layers
and they extend farther into the deeper layers.
There are some differences between the different
forms of plants, but all the forms studied usu-
ally have, at the approach of maturity, a set
of roots that ramify laterally in the upper
30 or 40 cm. of soil, and a set that reach down-
ward, with more or less profuse branching, to
depths of from 1 to nearly 3 m. The two por-
tions of the root system may be relatively dis-
tinet or they may be nearly continuous. The
deepest soil layers reached are of course not
generally well occupied by branches.

The authors emphasize the fact that the
roots of crop plants usually penetrate and

284

ramify far beyond the depth of tillage (12 to
20 cm.) and their studies lead to the convic-
tion that much of the soil water and solutes
entering the plant during its later growth
stages must come from the greater depths.
This appears to be at variance with statements
in the prevailing text-books, as the authors re-
mark, but of course the discussion of root
activities is still necessarily very superficial
in such treatises. It seems probable that, with
increasing age of the plant, the region of great-
est absorption is gradually transferred to the
deeper soil layers. In almost every case of
actual excavation, the total root development
below the region of tillage was found to be as
great as, and usually much greater than, that
within the tilled region. To gain some quanti-
tative information regarding absorption from
the different soil layers, some ingenious ex-
periments were carried out. The methods de-
vised for this experimental study of absorp-
tion, together with the results secured, con-
stitute the most valuable part of this book,
and they should furnish an added impetus
toward a physiological phase of root ecology,
which is much needed and which seems about
to be developed from several points of view.

Vertical sheet metal cylinders were em-
ployed as soil containers, large enough to allow
complete development of the plants. The moist
soil was placed in these, consecutive horizon-
tal layers 15 or 30 em. thick, separated by hori-
zontal wax partitions that prevented move-
ment of soil solution between adjacent layers
but did not hinder root penetration. Sodium
nitrate was added to some of the layers.
Several kinds of controls were also employed.
Rain was practically excluded. Oats, barley,
potato, maize and two native grasses were
studied, at various stages of their develop-
ment, determinations being made of the loss
of water and of nitrate from the several soil
layers.

The amounts of water removed from the
different soil layers were closely related to the
frequency of roots, and absorption occurred
from all layers occupied by the root systems.
Maize absorbed large quantities from the third
and fourth 30-em. soil layer (counting from
the top of the cylinder), and smaller quanti-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

ties from the fifth. Potato absorbed to a depth
of 75 cm., approximately the lower limit of
the root system. Similarly, nitrate was
markedly absorbed from the deeper occupied
layers; maize removed 203, 140 and 118 parts
per million from the third, fourth and fifth
30-cm. layer, respectively.

While the quantitative data are not ex-
pressed in terms such as would render them
most valuable from all points of view (the
authors use parts per million for nitrate
measurements and percentage data for water
measurements, both apparently based on the
dry weight of the soil), yet they furnish con-
vincing evidence that roots absorb water and
nitrate at whatever depths the roots occur in
the soil. This is quite in accord with what
should be expected from our knowledge of the
molecular physics of root absorption.

When a root system advanced into a soil
layer to which nitrate had been added it de-
veloped more profusely than would have been
the case without the extra nitrate, and this
stimulation of ‘branch development in the fer-
tilized soil was accompanied by a correspond-
ing retardation in the farther advance into
the next layer below. From this observation
it is suggested that, in field practice, the pres-
ence of added fertilizer salts in the super-
ficial soil layers may hinder the development
of roots into the deeper-lying soil, with possible
resulting crop failure in case of a subsequent
serious lack of water in the surface layers.

As a minor detail, it is regrettable that the
metric system of measurements of distance
seems not yet to have been appreciated ‘by the
authors, though weights are expressed in grams
instead of ounces.

From my own point of view, the authors’

- presentation might have been improved con-
‘siderably by a more thorough digestion of the

results, with less space devoted to unessential
details and more given to the fundamental
considerations. There is evident a noticeable
tendency toward “publishing the note-book.”
The general headings of the tables, and the
column headings, might have been made much
clearer. A well-made summary of the
descriptive portion of the book would have
rendered it much more valuable and far-reach-

SrrtreMBeErR 8, 1922]

ing. And the experimental results apparently
contained considerable evidence that was not
deduced from them, concerning some of the
most fundamental questions of physiology.
For example, it is not very useful to know
rates of water or nitrate absorption from a
soil as the authors express these, but it would
be very enlightening to have these data ex-
pressed on the basis of the soil volume, or
simply as absolute weights. What I have in
mind, in this instance, is the question whether
the solvent water of the soil solution carries
the solute nitrate into the roots at its own rate
of capillary or imbibitional flow, or whether the
nitrate enters more or less rapidly than its
solvent. A little more logical analysis and
more attention to the deeper and somewhat hid-
den meanings implied in the experimental re-
sults might have strengthened the presenta-
tion very much. These suggestions are not
made here,. however, as serious adverse eriti-
cisms of the book I am reviewing. They are
introduced, rather, with the idea that they
may be a bit helpful in preparing the way for
studies that will carry our knowledge of root
ecology far beyond the present conceptions of
any of us. The experimental methods em-
ployed by the authors involve essentials that
are very promising indeed, and the results
here published form an excellent beginning
toward the illumination of one of the darkest
corners of physiological ecology.
Burton E. Livineston

SPECIAL ARTICLES
SOME ALGAL STATISTICS GLEANED FROM
THE GIZZARD SHAD

In a recent paper! the writer called attention
to the desirability of using the gizzard shad,
Dorosoma cepedianum Le Sueur, as collectors
of the plankton alge. These “living tow nets”
do not get caught on snags and roots, the
string does not break, and the algal collection
is very representative of the body of water
from which the fish were taken. It is necessary
only to catch the young fish and examine their
stomachie and intestinal content to secure a

1 fhe Ohio Journal of Science, 21, No. 4, p.
113, 1921.

SCIENCE

285

proportionate concentrated sample of the
plankton. In aquatic areas where the gizzard
shad are common these fish are well worth con-
sidering as aids in the collection of the plank-
ton alge.

Through the courtesy of its director, Dr.
Stephen A. Forbes, the laboratory of the Illi-
nois State Natural History Survey sent me
some months ago several specimens of gizzard
shad, collected in certain streams and ponds
of Illinois during the late spring and summer
of 1899 and 1900. Rather extensive collections
of gizzard shad from Ohio, made during the
summers of 1920 and 1921, gave some inter-
esting statistics regarding the distribution and
abundance of the non-filamentous alge in
various localities of the state. A comparison
of the results of an examination of the stom-
achie and intestinal content of the fishes from
Ohio and Illinois reveals similarities and dif-
ferences in the algal flora of ponds and streams
of the two states and in addition warrants some
conclusions concerning the algal food of the
gizzard shad in general.

1. The total number of species and varieties
in an identifiable condition in the gizzard shad
from the two states is a hundred and fifty.
Very nearly identical forms indicate the phyto-
plankton similarity of the habitats from whieh
the fish were taken.

2. The amount of mud present in the diges-
tive tract is in some cases considerably more
abundant in the Illinois fishes. It is not, how-
ever, in either case a matter of selection on the
part of the fish but rather a direct function of
the number of suspended mud particles present
in the water, 7. e., it depends upon what enters
with the water as the fish swims along with its
mouth open.

3. Diatoms are relatively much more abun-
dant in the Illinois fishes than in those taken
in Ohio. When a microscopic mount is made
of the intestinal content of some of the Illinois
specimens, little else except diatoms can be
seen. In this connection one might almost im-
prove upon the epitome of Dr. Mann:? “No
diatoms, no hake,” for in that case it was
necessary to have herring and copepods as

2 Ecology, 2, No. 2, p. 79, 1921.

286

intermediaries. Here, however, is a chain of
two links, obviating the necessity of the “mid-
dle man,” and five words tell a complete story:
“No diatoms, no gizzard shad.” In some fishes
from Ohio another story is told by changing
diatoms to Pediastrum; still another, if one
puts in Scenedesmus; for most of the young
fishes examined the complete story reads: “No
phytoplankton, no gizzard shad.”

4, Flagellate forms, species of Euglena and
Phacus in particular, are less common in the
Ohio fishes.

5. The relative abundance of the different
forms of the phytoplankton of the bodies of
water is revealed by the algal content of the
gizzard shad found there.

6. In general, algal species belonging to the
order Protococcales form more commonly a
larger portion of the food of the gizzard shad
than do either flagellates or diatoms. Some-
times, however, the condition is reversed; but
this is apparently purely a matter of the plank-
ton content of the water.

7. The fewness of the zooplankton forms is
somewhat less marked in the specimens from
Illinois than in those from Ohio. This may
again be due to the predominance of the phyto-
plankton over the zooplankton in the localities
where the fish were obtained.

8. The paucity of stream phytoplankton in
comparison with that of ponds and lakes is
shown by the relative algal content of the diges-
tive tract of the gizzard shad taken from run-
ning and quiet waters. The excessive diatom
content of stream water at certain periods—
producing the so-called “pulses” of Kofoid’—
when there is a marked rise in temperature is
only temporary and may be explained, as Pro-
fessor Transeau suggests, by the rapid dis-
solving of the mucus and a consequent break-
ing up of the chains and colonies of diatoms.
This usually takes place in the small tributaries
where the individual diatoms are thus freed
from their places of attachment; and the main
stream is merely the recipient of the contribu-
tion, not the source of the sudden “pulse.”

9. There is a continuation of the above story
in which the gizzard shad plays an important

3 Bulletin of the Illinois State Laboratory of
Natural History, 6, pp. 226, 569, 571, 1903.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

réle: it feeds the game fishes, and the came
fishes feed man. Thus, the gizzard shad is
making useful for man the energy stored in
plant forms which occupy no land areas, which
do not interfere with the ordinary disposition
or utilization of bodies of water (except the
occasional contamination of water for drinking
purposes by some alge), which involve no
labor of cultivation on the part of man, and
which are of no value for direct human con-
sumption.

10. The world’s population in the last hun-
dred years has increased about 150 per cent.
Along with this inerease has had to come a
corresponding inerease in the world’s food sup-
ply. One of the ways in which this necessity
has been met is the securing of new acres of
soil in which to grow crops. It is easily seen,
however, that there is a limit to new acreage.
In the future, therefore, we may have to turn
more of our attention to the cultivation of the
waters for food supplies. We may have to
develop an industry of aquiculture as we have
developed an industry of agriculture. The time
is rapidly approaching when fish will be more
highly prized as food and more extensively
used than now. As that time comes, the cul-
tivation of alge will be a first step toward
greater fish production. A second step may
be the introduction of fish like the gizzard
shad into fish ponds and lakes to make more
readily available the phytoplankton for fish
food.

L. H. Tirrany
THE OHIO STATE UNIVERSITY

THE SEX CHROMOSOMES OF THE MONKEY?

Previous studies on the spermatogenesis of
the opossum (’22) and on man (in press) have

1 Contribution No. 159, Department of Zoology,
University of Texas. The present work has been
aided by a grant from the National Research
Council—Committee for Research on Sex Prob-
lems. In view of the crowded condition of our
journals which greatly delays publication, the
author is presenting in this brief way the essential
facts of general interest to biologists. The com-
pleted study will give the detailed evidence.
Painter, T. S.: 1922, ‘‘The Spermatogenesis of
the Opossum,’’ Journ. Exp. Zool., Vol. 35.

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

shown that both of these mammals possess the
X-Y type of sex chromosome. The sperma-
togenesis of the “ring-tail’” monkey (exact
species not yet determined) shows essentially
the same conditions as were found in the opos-
sum and in man.

In dividing spermatogonia (fig. 1) one
counts 54 chromosomes. It is to be noted that
the smallest element has no mate of like size
and shape. It is the “male determining,’ or
“Y” chromosome.

During the first maturation division one finds
among the tetrads an element the two com-
ponents of which are very unequal in size
(fig. 2). This is the X-Y sex chromosome
complex. The X and the Y components go
undivided to opposite poles of the cell, so that
the secondary spermatocytes have either an
X or a Y chromosome. In the second matura-
tion division the sex chromosome (either X or
Y) divides equationally. 27 chromosomes have
been counted in the late telophase of the sec-
ond maturation division. (In figs. 2 and 3
only part of the tetrads are shown).

In figure 4 the sex chromosomes—as seen
in the first maturation division—are given for
A opossum, B monkey, C man. It is inter-
esting to note that recent work on the genetics
of man (Schoenfield—See Castle, Scrmncs,
Vol. 55, p. 703) confirms the results of my
cytological studies.

THEOPHILUS S. PAINTER

UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS

SCIENCE

287

A SIMPLE GAS GENERATOR FOR
LABORATORY USE

Ir is frequently necessary to prepare small
quantities of carbon dioxide, hydrogen, hydro-
gen sulfide, chlorine, hydrochloric acid gas,
oxygen, ete., in the general laboratory work and
in many laboratories it is not practicable nor
desirable to maintain a lot of elaborate equip-
ment for the generation of these various gases,
especially for the small quantities intermit-
tently needed.

To prepare a special flask each time occasion
arises to generate a gas is at least bothersome
and time consuming and involves a waste of
reagents. On the other hand, a simple piece
of apparatus, taking no more room on the shelf
than a reagent bottle, adaptable to the prepara-
tion of any of several gases at a moment’s
notice without waste of reagent, commends
itself.

The apparatus here presented developed from
such a need and can be easily prepared out of
ordinary laboratory equipment; a large wide-
mouthed bottle, two test tubes, two cocks,
rubber stoppers and glass tubing are all that
is required.

An examination of the diagram will show
the simplicity and convenience of construction
and operation.

CONSTRUCTION

Into the wide mouthed bottle A is fitted a
large rubber stopper D-D containing one small
hole for the tube H terminating in stopcock N,
and a large hole for the large test tube B. At

288

the bottom of the large test tube is a hole MZ and
over it is snugly fitted a layer of glass wool L.
Into B the stopper H-E is placed, through
which passes a smaller test tube C. This tube
also has a small hole at the bottom i, and is
fitted at the top with a stopper I’-F through
which passes a delivery tube fitted with stop-
cock O.

The large test tube B in stopper D-D should
fit especially tight as it is not to be removed
from the stopper. H-E should fit more loosely
as 1t may be removed at will.

The bottle A is the reservoir for the acid 1.

The tube B is a chamber for holding tube C.

C contains the zine, iron sulfide, marble,
peroxide, bleaching lime or fused ammonium
chloride, ete. (which should, of course, be in
lumps) with which the acid acts. A rack of
tubes filled with different reagents and fitted
with stoppers the same size as H#-# afford a
ready souree for each gas, or tube C may be
dumped and filled with a different reagent as
desired.

Pinch cocks may be used instead of glass, or
nearly any preferable type might be substi-
tuted.

OPERATION

Tube C, containing marble, zine or whatever
substance is required, J, and fitted with stoppers
E-E and F-F and tube G, cock O of which is
closed, is introduced into the chamber B. The
air or gas in C prevents the acid from entering.

To operate, open NV and O. Close N after
acid has run into C through M and K so that
the acid will not be forced out of C. Pass the
delivery tube into the test tube P or collect in
any other fashion.

To stop the generation, see that N is open.
Close O. The gas will force the acid out of C,
and out of B. The apparatus may then be set
away for another time, or if preferred C may
be removed in a comparatively dry condition
both inside and outside after closing NV so that
the chamber B will remain empty while C is
being removed.

The acid need not be changed except when
any impurities it contains might interfere with
the test to be run, or when it has eventually
become exhausted. To supply new acid simply
remove the stopper D-D which takes with it all

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

the fixtures, empty the jar A and refill.
place the stopper, and all is ready for use.

Re-

ArtTHuR P. Harrison
Bureau or PLANT INDUSTRY,
U. S. DrparTMENT oF AGRICULTURE

THE OHIO ACADEMY OF SCIENCE

Tue thirty-second annual meeting of the
Ohio Academy of Science was held at Ohio
State University, Columbus, April 14 and 15,
1922, under the presidenev of Professor Ray-
mond C. Osburn, of Ohio State University.
Highty-seven members were registered as in
attendance; forty-six new members were elect-
ed. :

The usual geological excursion was post-
poned until June 3 and 4, and took the form
of a joint field meeting, on invitation of the
geologists of the Michigan Academy of Science,
for the study of the glacial geology and
Silurian rocks of southeastern Michigan and
adjoining portions of Ontario. The party was
under the leadership of Mr. Frank Leverett, of
the University of Michigan, and Professor
W. H. Sherzer, of the Michigan State Normal
College. Professor J. HE. Carman, of the Ohio
State University, collaborated in directing the
investigations at certain localities.

The Committee on State Parks and Con-
servation reported progress in the listing of
areas suitable for preservation. Director Ta-
ber, of the State Department of Agriculture,
addressed the academy on the game preserves
owned or leased by the state. The academy
expressed its formal approval of the estab-
lishment of a state commission, including scien-
tifie representation, to advise in the acquisition
of state parks and preserves and in their
regulation to secure the maximum recreation-
al, scenic and scientific returns.

The trustees reported the twenty-fifth an-
nual gift of two hundred and fifty dollars from
Mr. Emerson MeMillin, of New York City,
in furtherance of the research work of the
academy. A resolution of thanks and the
birthday greetings of the academy were sent
to Mr. MeMillin by night letter, to, reach him
on April 16, his seventy-eighth birthday. (The
death of Mr. McMillin on May 31 has already
been reported in Scipnck. He was a member

SEPTEMBER 8, 1922]

of the academy since 1892, although his resi-
dence in New York had made attendance at
the meetings impossible for many years).

Professor George D. Hubbard presented an
appreciative memoir of G. Frederick Wright,
who died on April 20, 1921. Professor Wright
had been a member of the academy since 1892,
and was one of the first group of fellows elect-
ed m 1920. He served as president in 1899.
The memoir will appear in the Annual Re-
port.

The following members were elected to fel-
lowship in the academy: Annette F. Braun,
Edward KE. Clayton, William C. Devereaux,
Henry Herbert Goddard, Clarence H. Ken-
nedy, Kirtley F. Mather, Susan Percival
Nichols, Bradley M. Patten, Jasper D. Sayre,
Alpheus Wilson Smith, Frank R. Van Horn.

Officers were elected as follows: President,
A. P. Weiss, Ohio State University; Vice-
presidents: Zoology, Charles G. Rogers, Ober-
lin College; Botany, E. Luey Braun, Univer-
sity of Cincinnati; Geology, Kirtley F. Mather,
Denison University; Physics, R. C. Gowdy,
University of Cincinnati; Medical Sciences,
C. F. Spohr, Ohio State University; Psychol-
ogy, H. H. Goddard, Ohio Bureau of Juvenile
Research; Secretary, Edward L. Rice, Ohio
Wesleyan University; Treasurer, A. E. Waller,
Ohio State University.

The scientific _program was as follows:

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS

Some common misconceptions of evolution:
Professor Raymond C. Osburn, Ohio State Uni-
versity.

PUBLIC LECTURES

Disease and disease resistance in plants: Pro-
fessor L. R. Jones, University of Wisconsin. (In
joint session with the Ohio State University chap-
ter of Sigma Xi).

Ether-drift experiments at Mount Wilson,
Qalifornia: Professor Dayton C. Miller,
School of Applied Science.

Case

PAPERS

Some proposed state parks for Ohio; J. Er-
NEST CARMAN.

Segregation and man; Maynard M. Mrrcatr.

American biological stains for microscopical
preparations; S. I. KorNHAUSER.

Further studies in the cytology of Anisolabis -
S. I. KornHavser.

SCIENCE

289

Notes on tropical photography; WiLuiAM Ray
ALLEN.

Some unsolved problems in tidal zone ecology
(By title): Z. P. Mercarr.

Preliminary survey of certain aquatic habitats
on the Bass Islands: F. H. Kreckerr.

Some results from a pure-line isolation culture
of Euglena gracilis Klebs: W. J. Kosrvir.

A source of material for study of parasites:
Maynarp M. Mrrcatr.

Specific names for
METCALF.

Studies of the biology of freshwater mnwssels :
WILLIAM Ray ALLEN.

The relationship of the Syngnathide: JamEs
E. KINDRED.

A quarter century of bird migration at Ober-
lin: Lynps JoNEs.

A case of unhindered growth of the incisor
teeth of the woodchuck: SrepHEn R. WILLIAMS.

A cicindelid from Lake Bennett, British Co-
lumbia: LYNDS JONES.

Factors influencing reproduction in the cucwm-
ber beetle (Diabrotica vittata Fabr): W. V. Bat-
DUF.

Distribution and control of
grape insects: D. M. DELone.

A study of the distribution of the leafhoppers
of Presque Isle, Pa.: D. M. DrLona.

Emergence of a subimago Mayfly:
IXRECKER.

Some factors which have limited and directed
insect evolution: CLARENCE H. KENNEDY.

parasites: Maynarp M.

two wportant

195 Jaf

Insect parasites and
nests: Mary AUTEN.

The inter-relation of the Hessian fly (Phyto-
phaga destructor) and one of its parasites:
T. H.. Parks.

Biological significance of the endocrines: A. B.
PLOWMAN.

The effect of formaldehyde on the vitamins of
milk: A. M: Buritr and R. J. Srymour.

Variation in the dandelion and
causes: P. B. SEARS.

A forest map of the Erie basin: P. B. Sars.

predators in spider’s

some of its

The distribution of flowering plants on the
smaller islands of Lake Erie: Maucoumm E.
STICKNEY.

The sexual nature of vegetative or dichotomous
twins of Arisema: JOHN H. SCHAFFNER.

Influence of length of daylight on sex reversal
in hemp: JoHN H. ScHAFFNER.

Some root and rots of clover in
Synivestrr S. HuMPHREY.

Ohio:

stem

290

Mosaic disease of tomato: RaymMonp A. Dos-
BINS.

Energy relations of plants: E. N. TRANSEAU.

Ecological distribution of grasses of North
America: E. Li. STOVER.

The algal food of fishes: L. H. Trrrany.

Seedling blights of corn: WILMER G. STOVER.

The course of a plant disease: WiLMER G.
STOVER.

Extension work in plant pathology with special
reference to the control of corn and potato dis-
eases: E. E. CLAYTON.

Barberry eradication in Ohio: J. W. BARINGER.

A study of 1k Gh
BEARDSLEE.

Geologic control of river navigation in north-
eastern Bolivia: KirttEy F, Mater.

The gorges of the Yangtze Kiang: GrorGEe D.
HUBBARD.

An inter-glacial gorge at Youngstown, Ohio:
G. F. Lams.

New points in the geology of Kelleys Island:
MiInpRED FISHER.

Some new data concerning the Bellefontaine
outlier: CLARENCE F. MosEs.

The Pottsville
MORNINGSTAR.

The Bainbridge caves: Ropert EF. WEBB.

The formation of box-canyons in sandstone:
J. HE. Hype.

Mineralization

variation in Russula:

formation of Ohio: HELEN

along the dikes of southern

Vermont: Harrirr G. Bray and ALDEN H.
EMERY.

The Wheeler National Monument: Roprert F.
WEBB.

Colloids in geologic problems: GEORGE D. Hus-
BARD.
Dynamics of the lithosphere: O. C. JonES and
GrorGE D. HuBBARD.
Drainage changes
Rosrrt F. WEBB.
The Arctic as one of the centers of distribution
of early Paleozoic faunas: AUGUST FOERSTE.
Meanders of Rio Securé and Rio Mamoré,
Bolivia: Kirtitry F. Maruer.
Iron molding sands of Ohio: J. A. BowNnocKeEr.
Report on the Edward Orton Memorial Library:
J. A. BoWNOCKER.
New fish remains
J. ERNEST CARMAN.
Some fossils from
J. ERNEST CARMAN.
Type specimens of fossils in the geological mu-

nonth of Lake Superior:

from northwestern Ohio:

the Sylvania sandstone:

‘SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1445

seum at Ohio State University: HELEN MOoRNING-
STAR.

Stylolites: their nature and origin: Paris B.
STOCKDALE.

A mounted topographic map of Ohio: G. W.
CONREY.

Notes on the Cincinnatian: W. H. SHIDDELER.

Forecasting the weather in the Ohio Valley:
WiuiiAM C. DEVEREAUX.

The electron theory of metals: ALPHEUS W.
SMITH.

The effect of a unidirectional field upon alter-
nating current permeability and energy loss in
tron: ALVA W. SMITH.

Infra-red absorption bands as a means of de-
termining molecular properties: ERwin F,. Lowry.

Certain aspects of the problem of the static
versus the dynamic atom: F. C. BLAKE.

The study of ‘‘illumination’’ in
courses: EF. C. CALDWELL.

Some interesting pictures in infra-red: YALE
Roors.

Duriren—a product of Ohio industry: JAMES
WITHROW.

A case of dual personality: Henry H. Gopparp.

The field of psychology: B. H. Bopr.

The theory of differential education as applied
to the handicapped pupils in the elementary
grades: J. E. W. WALLIN. ;

Qualitative clinical tests
theory: H. B. ENGLISH.

Psychic complexes: A. W. TRETTIEN.

A comparison of initial and subsequent exam-
inations of the same individual by the same psy-
chological methods: MABEL R. FERNALD.

physics

and psychological

DEMONSTRATIONS

Common mole (Scalopus aquaticus machrinus
Refinesque) ‘‘embalmed,’’ and internal parasites
of same: F. A. HANAWALT.

Tracheation of Lestes nymph:
IKENNEDY.

A plerocercoid (larval) tapeworm from the
liver of the squirrel—ezternally segmented: STE-
PHEN R. WILLIAMS.

Head of woodchuck, showing unhindered growth
of incisors: STEPHEN R. WILLIAMS.

Types of tomato mosaic: RayMonD A. DOBBINS.

Seedling blights of corn: WiLMER G. STOVER.

Stalactites in glacial sand and recent conglom-
erates from Canton, Ohio: G. F. Lams.

Illumination charts: F. C. CALDWELL.
Epwarp L. Rics,

Secretary

CLARENCE H.

DELAWARE, OHIO

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00

Savy SSiaiaiats Fripay, SepremBer 15, 1922 Sa Urea EEONe
SineLe Corrss,

Vou. LVI, No. 1446

Bausch & Lomb

Observation Telescopes

Oy

AMERICAN-MADE instruments of the highest
grade, more moderately priced than other makes of
corresponding quality—equipped for both: terrestrial
and astronomical observations and providing a range
of powers from 24x to 120x.

As an item of school or college equipment, one of
these telescopes adds point and zest to many other-
wise prosaic courses. They can be used satisfactorily
in astronomy, giving sufficient magnifications for ac-
curate observations.

Three models are offered—with objectives of 60
mm (23% in.), 80 mm (3% in.) and 102 mm (4 in.)

free aperture.

IVrite for our fully illustrated, descriptive booklet.

102 mm (4 in.) Model

Bausch & Lomb Optical Company

409 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.
New York Washington Chicago San Francisco London

Leading American Makers of Optical Measuring Instruments, Photomicrographic Apparatus, Photographic
j Ophthalmic Lenses and _ Instruments,

Lenses, Microscopes, Projection Apparatus (Balopticons);
Navy, Searchlight Reflectors, Stereo- Prism

High-Grade

Range Finders and Gun-Sights for Army and
Binoculars, Telescopes, Magnifiers, Automobile Lenses and _ other
Optical Products.

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

=")

National

Methyl Alcohol

BSOLUTELY neutral; free from the smallest

trace of acetone; intended especially for the
preparation of Blood Staining Solutions.

Blood staining work, calling for the nicest precision
and the use of a number of dyes of complicated chemi-
cal structure, is frequently unsuccess-
ful because of slight acidity of the
solvent. In fact, experience has
shown that the greatest trouble has
been due, not to any impurities or
variations in the dyes, but to the
non-neutrality of the alcohol used.

National Methyl Alcohol has
been developed to eliminate com-
pletely this possibility of error. We
believe it to be the purest alcohol
ever offered for laboratory work,
and recommend its use in all Blood
Staining Solutions.

Pharmaceutical Division

National Anilme & Chemical Co., Inc
New York

wa
~

ss BG MED
ys GX ih, NON

A ee Tp
Lm IN ALIN AN EY Ney RES

Pharmaceutical Division |

National Aniline & Chemical Company, Inc.

40 Rector Street, New York. |
Please send me the National Medicinal Products Catalog,

me ee i i ee ee lr

SCIE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal
Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI SEPTEMBER 15,1922 No. 1446

CONTENTS

Discovery of Cretaceous and Older Tertiary
Strata in Mongolia: Dr. HENRY FAIRFIELD
OSBORN ieee ee cae anes eed eee el ween 291

The Feeding Power of Plants: Dr. E. Truoe 294

The Teaching of Evolution: Proressor F. L.
PET CREE DD eo eS ES EMRE ERC TERN ee EET 298

Scientific Events:
Vital Statistics of German Cities; The Red-
wood Trees of California; Ceramic Day;
The Geological Society of America; The
Journal of Physical Chemistry; Chemical
Prize established by the Allied Chemical
and Dye Corporation; Members of the
American Medical Association and the
American Association for the Advancement
Of SCLENCC eae Pyare Waren onaenine et BO

Scientific Notes and News..s..- 2c. 2 este nanee 305
University and Educational Notes.........-..---..--- 307

Discussion and Correspondence:
The Zodiacal Light: THE HONORABLE
CuHAsE S. Osporn. The Mealy-bug called
Pseudococcus Bromelie and other Coccids:
Proressor T. D. A. CocKERELL. The De-
termination of Fat in Cream: PROFESSOR
H. W. Gregory. Dr. Lipman’s Laboratory
of Applied Psychology: Proressor J. B.
Miner. Shipment of American Literature
to Russia: RAPHAEL) ZON....-2--...-2--.----2c-20cte- 308
Quotation:
Ghildren) (and Museums eee 311
Scientific Books:
Green on the Coccide of Ceylon: PRorEs-
SOR Gauche EMER RTS tes eS Se eS UN ee Ne es 312
Special Articles:

Photoperiodism of Wheat: Dr. H. M.

Wanser. Improved Methods in New Infra-
Dr. JOSEPH W.

red Absorption Study:

DISCOVERY OF CRETACEOUS AND
OLDER TERTIARY STRATA
IN MONGOLIA!

THE American Museum of Natural History
announces,t under date of May 3, 1922, that
strata of Cretaceous age, overlain by two dis-
tinct Tertiary formations, have been discovered
in the Gobi region of southeastern Mongolia.

They were found on the outbound trip from
Kalgan to Urga at-a point about 260 miles
northwest of Kalgan. Strata of Cretaceous
age are wholly unknown in Eastern Asia, as
far as the writers of the present communica-
tion are aware, and because of the apparent
importance of the find, it was decided to leave
the geologists in camp at this place while the
rest of the party moved on. Accordingly
Messrs. Berkey, Granger and Morris spent a
week in additional inspection of the ground
and furnish the notes for this memorandum.

Obretcheff, the Russian geologist, who gives
an account of a reconnaissance trip over this
same route from Ude to Kalgan, describes
sedimentary beds at many places, always re-
ferring to them as representatives of the Gobi
formation. His only age determination, how-
ever, was made on the basis of a few frag-
ments of Rhinoceros, found at the escarpment
five miles south of Iren. These remains were
judged by Eduard Suess, to whom they were
referred, to indicate an age not earlier than
the Miocene. The Tertiary age of the rest of
the occurrences mentioned by him seems to
have been taken for granted and apparently
that is in general correct, but it is evident that
the Gobi formation can not properly include
strata of both Tertiary and Cretaceous ages.

1 Abstract: ‘‘Discovery of Cretaceous and
Older Tertiary Strata in Mongolia,’’? Walter
Granger and Charles P. Berkey. American

Museum Novitates, No. 42, 7 pp. 1 fig., August
7, 1922.

292

Tt is clear also that the term Gobi formation
or Gobi series is properly applied to the Ter-
tiary beds instead of to those of Cretaceous age.

The best exposures of this underlying Cre-
taceous formation are in the vicinity of the
small salt marsh Iren Dabasu, where a total
thickness of about 150 feet of nearly hori-
zontal strata is judged to be of this age. Ter-
tiary beds not older than the Miocene he on
top of the Cretaceous strata and are best ex-
posed about five miles south of Iren. Twenty
miles farther south early Tertiary beds were
found in essentially the same relation.

The finding of this upper Cretaceous forma-
tion makes a new designation necessary. For
this purpose nothing seems to be as appro-
priate as the name of this locality. We there-
fore propose the term “Iren Dabasu forma-
tion” for these ‘beds.

Remains in all three beds are fragmentary,
decidedly so in the Houldjin gravels, but they
are of unusual interest apparently and we
have taken everything which has any char-
acter.

Dinosaurs are represented in the Iren
Dabasu beds by one complete tibia, ends of
femora and humeri, presacral and caudal
centra, many good foot bones, including claws
of fore and hind feet, portions of a small car-
nivorous dinosaur skull with two or three
teeth, and two teeth of a predentate, as well
as two portions of jaw with the alveoli of
some teeth, also predentate. Remains of the
small Ornithomimus-like creature are particu-
larly abundant and the last day at Iren Dabasu
we picked up probably fifty good foot bones
and centra from two or three knolls. We could
find no teeth of the little fellow though—
if he was edentate like Struthio-
mimus? The Cretaceous exposures are very
limited so far as we could see but may, of
course, outcrop in other basins to the east or
west of the road. We did not have time to ex-
tend our work in either direction. The out-
crops we did see will stand a more careful

wonder

going over.

The Houldjin gravels are exposed as a
rather thin capping to a low bench of Cre-
taceous which we followed for several miles.
Things are badly broken up here—even such
massive bones as the heads of femora and

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

humeri were usually cracked into several pieces
before deposition. There is one fine bone—a
ealeaneum of the big beast which would be a
match for the astragalus of Baluchithe-
rium? (?). I ean think of nothing else to
which it might belong. It is as long as the
great Megatherium caleaneum from Long
Branch, N. J., but is not edentate. A head of
a femur is the size of one’s head and other
limb bone ends correspond. Some enormous
rhinoceros teeth (broken) may belong with this
animal. Smaller teeth are surely Rhinoceros.
We did not explore the full length of the ex-
posure and there are possibilities in excava-
tion at one or two points of the bluff where
we did explore.

The Irdin Manha beds offer the greatest op-
portunity for future work. Mammalian re-
mains are abundant though fragmentary and
we examined less than two miles of a line of ex-
posures extending many miles both east and
west of the trail. A small lophiodont (Helaletes-
like) is most abundant and we got numerous
teeth besides two maxille (one with premaxilla
and orbital region) and a few lower jaws, also
numerous foot bones, limb bones and verte-
bre. Next in abundance is a_perissodactyl,
looking much like our late Eocene titanotheres.
We have several premolars, many incomplete
molars and one lower jaw with p,—m, in fair
condition. Other forms are curiously rare, a
creodont lower jaw and an artiodactyl astraga-
lus or two ‘being the only things noted. Trion-
ychids are common and we saw a complete
though badly broken carapace which we were
hurrying to get to our car before a storm over-
took us the last day we were there. We made
three trips down from Iren Dabasu camp but
could not do more as our food was getting
short and we had to join the rest of the party
here.

In the vicinity of the small salt lake Iren
Dabasu, the Cretaceous beds lie immediately
on the slate floor of the basin and between this
base and the first determinable beds of later
age, in this case late Tertiary, about 150 feet
of strata are exposed. The bottom members
are dominantly sands and sandstones, prevail-
ingly thin-bedded, some of which are strongly

2A gigantic perissodactyl described by C.
Forster Cooper from Baluchistan.

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922

cross-bedded and well cemented. The middle
members become finer grained, more mixed
with clay and more variable in color. The
upper beds are dominantly clays and sandy
clays and very fine sands, varying in color
from white to dark red and drab and yellow-
ish green. No less than twenty distinct beds
or layers can thus be distinguished, all of
‘which are regarded as belonging to a single
geologic formation.

Only the lower members of this “Iren
Dabasu” formation have been found to be fos-
siiferous. The list includes:

1. Predentate dinosaurs, probably
bipedal type.

2. Carnivorous dinosaurs of at least two gen-
era, the smaller one being of the Ornithomimus
type.

3. Crocodiles.

4. Turtles of the Trionyx type.

5. A few pelecypod shells.

‘The geologic column for the [ren Dabasu
basin therefore is essentially as in the follow-
ing table:

of the

SCIENCE 293

3. An artiodactyl of the size of a Virginia deer.

4. An enormous mammal, probably a perisso-
dactyl and possibly related to or identical with
Baluchitherium, discovered by Forster Cooper in
Baluchistan.

5. A tortoise of large size.

There is a sharp physical change immedi-
ately below this formation and only the coarse
sandy conglomeratic member at the very base
has been found to be fossiliferous. The fossil
remains are unusually fragmentary.

TrpIn Manua Formation (Harty TErtrary)

For the early Tertiary beds found twenty-
five miles farther south, also assumed properly
to belong to Obretcheff’s Gobi Series, we pro-
pose to use the term “Irdin Manha forma-
tion.” It appears to lie immediately on Cre-
taceous beds, the Iren Dabasu formation, and
again there is a sharp change in type of rock.
The beds are cross-bedded sandstones, limy
sands and pebbly sandstones. Only the lower
member has been found to be fossil-bearing.
It is characterized by the following forms:

Recent Uplift and Erosion
Peneplanation
Miocene or Upper barren sands 257 The Houldjin
Later Rhinoceros gravels 5! Formation
enna Oligocene or Upper barren sandstones 25/4 The Irdin ane Gobi
Eocene The Lophiodont bed Manha oe
a Formation
Physical and Faunal Break
Upper barren members, chiefly clays, marls
and fine sands 90’ The Iren
Cretaceous Dabasu
Lower or Dinosaur beds, chiefly sands and 60’ Formation
sandstones
Great unconformity
Pre- The old-rock floor, chiefly slates, limestones Probably
Cretaceous and igneous rocks The Nank’-
on Series

Tur Hovtpsin Beps (Mippie Terriary)

For the late Tertiary beds found five miles
farther south and belonging to the Gobi Series
of Obretcheff we propose the term “Houldjin
Beds,” taken from the local name of the up-
land formed by these beds. They are charac-
terized by the following fossil content:

1. A rhinocerid.

2. A large carnivore.

(1) Small Lophiodonta of at least two species
in great abundance; (2) A perissodactyl about
the size of the Upper Eocene titanotheres and
possibly related to this family; (3) A small
artiodactyl; (4) A small ereodont; (5) An
abundance of turtles of both the hard-shelled
and soft-shelled groups; (6) Teleost fishes.

Henry FAIRFIELD OSBORN
AMERICAN Museum or NaturaL Hisrory

294

THE FEEDING POWER OF PLANTS!

DIFFERENT species of plants vary greatly in
their feeding power or ability to secure the
required elements from the natural mineral
matter of the soil or from difficultly soluble
phosphate and potash minerals which may be
applied as fertilizers. The character of the
native vegetation is in many cases determined
partly by differences in the feeding power of
plants. Of the cultivated plants it is well
known that buckwheat will feed much more
strongly on rock phosphate than corn. The
subject is thus not only of scientific interest
but also of great practical importance.

It was formerly believed that the mineral
matter of soils was made soluble and available
to plants through the action of various acids
excreted by the plant roots. Later experiments,
especially those by Czapex, indicated that,
other than carbonic acid, plants normally ex-
erete at the most only minute quantities of
acids. As is now well known practically all
plants excrete through their roots large quan-
tities of carbonic acid. Attempts to explain
differences in feeding power on the basis of
ditferences in amount of carbonic acid excreted
have not been successful.

It might, however, still be argued that it is
not necessary for plants to actually give off or
excrete the acids in measurable amounts in
order that they exercise an influence on the
solution of mineral matter; it might be argued
that all that is necessary is for the acids to
saturate completely the walls of the root hairs
which come in intimate contact with the min-
eral particles. That this is not the correct ex-
planation is evident from what follows.

During recent years, by aid of the hydrogen
electrode much valuable information has been
secured regarding the acidity of plant juices.*

1 Published with the permission of the director
of the Wisconsin Agricultural Experiment Sta-
tion.

2Truog, E., and Meacham, M. R., Soil Science,
7, (1919), pp. 469-474; Clevenger, C. B., Soil
Science, 8, (1919), 217-242; Bryan, O. C., Soil
Science, 18, (1922), 271-302; Bauer, F. C., and
Haas, A. R. C., Soil Science, 13, (1922), pp. 461-
477.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

This information is aiding greatly to clarify
our conception regarding the feeding power of
plants and the relation of plant growth to soil
acidity and alkalinity. It indicates that the
excretion of other acids than carbonic or mere
presence of them in the walls of the root hairs
is not an important factor in the feeding power
of plants, for it is now known that a plant with
a nearly neutral sap may feed more strongly
on relatively insoluble minerals than one with
a decidedly acid sap; e. g., sweet clover and
alfalfa with relatively slightly acid root saps
of py 6 to 7 feed more strongly on feldspar
than buckwheat with a relatively strongly acid
root sap of py 4 to 5._ If plants made the
mineral matter of soils available through the
excretion or presence of acids other than ¢ar-
bonie, then the reverse should be true, that is,
the buckwheat should feed more strongly on
feldspar than alfalfa and sweet clover because
it would excrete or have present much the
strongest acid. Similarly corn with a more
acid sap than either alfalfa or sweet clover
should feed more strongly than the other two
on rock phosphate and feldspar if it were a
matter of excretion or presence of acids, but
again the opposite holds true. Undoubtedly,
if data for more species of plants were avail-
able many more cases of this kind could be
cited.

It is therefore necessary to find some other
explanation for certain differences in feeding
power than those thus far given, for evidently
there are other factors than the excretion of
acids which exercise a controlling influence on
the feeding power of plants. A number of
years ago the writer presented a new theory®
regarding the feeding power of plants in which
the feeding power for rock phosphate was ex-
plained on the basis of the law of mass action
and chemical equilibrium. The reaction making
the phosphorus of rock phosphate available to
plants is one between carbonie acid and the
tricalcium phosphate in rock phosphate which
may be represented as follows:

Ca,(PO), + 2H,cO, =
Ca,H,(PO,), + CaH,(CO,),-

3 Screncr, N. S., 41, (1915), pp. 616-618; Ke-
search Bulletin 41, 1918, Wis. Agr. Expt. Sta.

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

In order that this reaction continue indef-
initely, it is necessary that both products of
the reaction be removed in somewhat the pro-
portion that they are produced. This is the
condition that actually exists with plants like
buckwheat and sweet clover which use a large
amount of calcium. They are thus enabled to
feed strongly on rock phosphate, as is found
by experiment. In case the calcium content of
a plant is low, and the calcium bicarbonate is
not removed in as high a proportion as the
soluble phosphate, the rate of solution of the
phosphate becomes slower and slower with
time and thus the plant is unable to feed ad-
vantageously on the rock phosphate. This is
the case with plants like oats and corn which
have a low calcium content.

This theory may be tested in other ways;
e. g., the immediate availability of rock phos-
phate to plants like corn is much greater on
acid soils than on the non-acid ones. This is
due to the removal and precipitation of the
calcium bicarbonate from solution by the soil
acids. The effect on the availability of the
phosphate is the same as though the calcium
bicarbonate were removed by the plant. Work-
ing with quartz cultures, Bauer* has shown
_ that the availability of rock phosphate to corn
may be increased by leaching the cultures oc-
casionally. This leaching removes the excess
of soluble calcium bicarbonate and the effect is
again the same as though it were removed by
the plant. The addition of ammonium salts
has also been found to inerease the availa-
bility of rock phosphate. This is at least
partly due to the effect of ammonium. salts in
increasing the solubility of calcium bicar-
bonate, which has the same effect up to a cer-
tain point as is produced by removing the cal-
cium bicarbonate.

There is no question but what the applica-
tion of the law of mass action to a study of
the conditions of solution of mineral matter
around the plant roots makes possible a correct
explanation of many differences in the feeding
power of plants. The conditions necessary for
the continued solution of mineral matter in
which two soluble products are formed at the

4 Soil Science, 9, (1920), pp. 235-247.

SCLENCE

295

feeding points of roots are explained by this
means. When only one soluble product is
formed as is the case in the solution of phos-
phorus from iron and aluminum phosphate by
hydrolysis and the solution of potassium from
orthoelase feldspar by either hydrolysis or car-
bonation, and in fact the solution of most
bases from the silicates of the soil, differences
in the feeding power of plants for these are
not explained directly by the foregoing prin-
ciple. The reaction of these minerals with the
solvent at the feeding points of roots may be
represented as follows:

FePO, + 3H,0 <> Fe(OH), + H,PO..

2KAISi.O, + H,0O, + H,O =
H,A1S$i,0, + 48i0, + K,CO,,

In both of the reactions only the last produet
is soluble and hence is the only product that
can be removed either by the plant or in any
other way. The conditions of solution are
thus the same for all plants since water and
carbonie acid are present in all cases. Differ-
ences in the feeding power of plants for the
essential elements of these compounds must,
therefore, be due to differences in conditions
in the interior of the plants where the elements
are actually used by being precipitated out of
solution to form an essential part of plant
compounds, making it possible for some plants
to utilize more completely the elements from
dilute solutions than others. In other words
some plants can get along with more dilute
solutions of certain elements than others.

The diseussion in this connection will be
limited to the base-forming elements. These
elements are used by plants largely for at least
three rather distinet purposes: (1) They are
precipitated or held in physical and chemical
combination with important colloidal plant
compounds or complexes of which they may
form an essential part. (2) .In the form of
the carbonate or bicarbonate they are used for
the regulation of the reaction of plant pro-
teins and other compounds, the plant sap, and
precipitation of acids like oxalic out of solu-
tion. (3) They may act as carriers of acid
forming elements. Potassium is used largely
for the first purpose. Calcium is used for
both the first and second purpose. Some

296

plants, for example, the cultivated legumes,
many of the crucifer, and buckwheat, require
large amounts of calcium, much of which is
probably used for the second purpose. Mag-
nesium is probably used to a considerable ex-
tent for the third purpose as a carrier of
phosphorus. Calcium and potassium may, of
course, also be used for the third purpose, but
it is only with the first two purposes that the
present discussion is concerned.

In connection with the first purpose it is
important to consider the following: There
are always at least two important factors
which determine how completely an element
may be precipitated out of solution; viz., the
reaction of the solution and the solubility of
the precipitate formed. A proper regulation
of the reaction is the most important factor in
many precipitation processes. As a rule base-
forming elements are more completely precipi-
tated from a slightly acid or neutral solution
than from a more acid one.

On this basis plants with a slightly acid or
neutral sap especially of the leaves where the
most active processes take place should be
able to utilize potassium advantageously from
a more dilute solution and feed more strongly
on a slightly soluble potash mineral like feld-
spar than those plants with a more strongly
acid sap, providing the reaction of the nutrient
solution is favorable for the plants. Although
the data available along this line are very
meager, an examination of what there are
indicates that this is actually the case. The
sap of sweet clover leaves® ranges from slightly
acid to slightly alkaline. Of the data known
to the writer this is the only case in which the
sap is sometimes alkaline. Theoretically the
plant should feed strongly on the potash in
feldspar and in actual test with quartz cultures
Bauer® found it able to make a normal growth
when forced to obtain all of its potash from
feldspar. Of the common agricultural plants
for which there are data available buckwheat
has the most strongly acid sap of any in the
leaves and it feeds very poorly on feldspar as
should theoretically be the case. In tests with

®*> Haas, A. B. C.: Soil Science, 9, (1920), pp.
341-368.

8 Soil Science, 12, (1921), pp. 21-41.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

quartz cultures the writer found that alfalfa
and sweet clover can obtain the necessary
potassium for normal growth from more dilute
solutions than corn and buckwheat which have
a more acid sap. Much more data are needed
before conclusions can be made definitely for
all cases. The available data indicate striking-
ly the importance of the internal acidity on
the feeding power of plants for potassium.

What has just been said in regard to potas-
sium applies only when the nutrient or soil
solution has a reaction which is favorable for
the plant. If the nutrient solution is distinctly
more acid than the plant sap, it will tend to
make the plant sap more acid and the situation
in regard to feeding for potassium may be
greatly disturbed. In this connection it should
be noted that alfalfa and sweet clover require
relatively large amounts of potassium and
quickly suffer from a lack of it, if the even
dilute required concentration in the soil solu-
tion is not maintained due to a lack of the rela-
tively insoluble potash minerals.

Undoubtedly the solubility of the potassium
compounds formed in different plants is also
a factor in the feeding power, but it seems
reasonable to believe that to some extent the.
potassium compounds in different plants are
similar and hence have somewhat similar solu-
bilities. The solubility factor, therefore, be-
cause of its greater probable uniformity would
not cause as great differences in the feeding
power as the internal acidity factor which
varies a great deal.

The relation of the feeding power of a plant
for calcium which is to be used for the first
purpose stated, to the acidity of the plant sap
is probably the same as in the case of potas-
sium. The amount of calcium required for
the first purpose is, however, usually relatively
small and the amount present in the soil solu-
tion relatively large so that the use of calcium
for the first purpose is not a critical factor in
the feeding power of a plant for calcium.

When plants use high amounts of calcium,
the major portion is probably often used for
the second purpose previously stated. The
feeding power of a plant for calcium for this
purpose seems to be related to the acidity of
the plant sap, but the relation, as theoretically
should be the case, is opposite to what it is

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

with potassium, as is evident from the follow-
ing: The reaction of the sap of different
common agricultural plants has a range of
Pu 4 to 8. This range is practically the same
as that of the soil solution’ in the humid region.
It thus appears that plants through adapta-
tion have come to have somewhat the same re-
action as the medium on which they grow. It
is well known that plants growing in solution
cultures of unfavorable reaction tend to change
the reaction of the culture to a more favorable
one which is usually near that of the reaction
of the plant itself. The plant does this* by
utilizing a larger proportion of the acidie or
basie constituents of the nutrient medium as
the case may be. This again follows from the
law of mass action, and the composition of the
plant is thereby somewhat altered. Because
of the highly buffered condition of the soil,
plants can not materialy change its reaction in
the way a solution culture is changed.

The unfavorable situation of a plant like
alfalfa with a sap reaction of py 6 growing
on a soil with a soil solution reaction of py 5
is thus apparent. This plant requires large
amounts of basie material for the second pur-
pose. How ean it obtain this basie material
for this purpose from a solution or medium
which is ten times as acid as its own sap and
system? It can not do it advantageously and
hence the growth is slow and the content of
basie material in the plant becomes lower than
normal and even the reaction of the sap may
become more acid than is normally the case.
In extreme eases the plant not only grows
slowly but also becomes sickly in appearance
and easily succumbs to unfavorable weather
conditions or parasitic diseases.

The buckwheat plant also requires a large
amount of basic material. In fact, at the
blooming stage it has a higher content of eal-
cium than alfalfa, and yet it grows well on
acid soils. The explanation of this is found
in the high acidity of its sap, namely py 4 to 5.
It can thus utilize advantageously a soil solu-
tion of py 5 as a source of basic material for

7Truog, E., Soil Science, 5, (1918), pp. 169-
195.

‘8 Hoagland, D. R., Science, N. 8., 48, (1918),
422-425,

SCIENCE

297

the partial neutralization and regulation of its
own sap and system.

The feeding power of a plant for calcium
which is to be used for the second purpose is
dependent largely on the normal acidity of the
plant sap. The more acid the plant sap the
more advantageously can the plant compete
with another system—the soil and its solution,
for neutralizing material which is largely lime
in the case of plants and soils. Plants like
oats and corn have a low content of calcium
and probably use most of it for the first pur-
pose. They apparently do not produce much
acid which needs to be neutralized. Their sap
is normally quite acid. They are thus well
able to get all the caleium they need from even
quite acid soils. The opposite relation of the
acidity of the plant sap to the feeding power
of many plants for calcium and potassium is
now apparent. A high acidity means a low
feeding power for potassium in dilute solution
and a high feeding power for calcium needed
for the neutralization and precipitation of
acids.

‘The nature of the injurious or toxie action
of acid and alkali soils on plants is also ap-
parent. Theoretically the nutrient solution
most favorably adapted to a plant as regards
reaction would be one with a reaction the same
as that of the plant sap. In case the plant
needed a large amount of calcium and other
basic elements, a nutrient solution slightly more
alkaline than the plant sap would probably be
best. When the nutrient solution is more acid
than the plant sap, the plant by mass action
is forced to utilize acid forming elements in
greater proportion than is normally the case
and as a result the composition of the plant is
changed giving one with less than the normal
amount of basic material. If the nutrient
solution is much more acid than the plant sap
the solid material of the plant due to lack of
bases becomes so much more acid than is nor-
mally the case, that the plant sap also becomes
more acid. The change in reaction of the
whole plant system greatly interferes with the
normal plant processes and as a result the
plant grows slowly, becomes sickly and may
even die. If a plant growing in a nutrient
solution of favorable reaction were transferred
to one with a much more acid reaction there

298

would undoubtedly follow an abstraction of
basic elements from the plant compounds by
the nutrient solution, and if the change were
great enough, the plant would be killed.

In this connection it should be noted that
the soil solution of acid soils often contains
more calcium than the soil solution of less acid
or neutral soils, and yet plants like alfalfa may
suffer for lack of calcium in the former case
and not in the latter, due to the fact that the
acidity makes the calcium less available for
certain purposes even though it is in solution.
Availability is thus not only a question of
solubility. It also depends on the form in
which an element exists in solution.

SUMMARY

1. Differences in the feeding power of com-
mon agricultural plants for the essential ele-
ments of comparatively insoluble minerals are
not due primarily to differences in amounts or
kinds of acids exereted. The differences are
due to several factors, some of which are con-
cerned with external equilibrium conditions
around the feeding roots, and others with
internal equilibrium conditions inside the plant
where the elements are actually used.

2. In case two soluble products are formed
in the feeding region of the roots due to the
action of carbonic acid on a mineral as is the
ease with rock phosphate, the feeding power
follows the law of mass action and chemical
equilibrium, being dependent on the removal
of both of the soluble products either by the
plant or partly by the plant and partly in
other ways; thus plants with a high content of
calcium feed strongly on rock phosphate be-
cause they remove both the soluble phosphate
and soluble calcium bicarbonate in proper
proportion.

3. If only one soluble product is formed as
is the case with feldspar, the feeding power of
the plant for the potassium depends on its
ability to utilize potassium from a dilute solu-
tion which in turn depends largely on the
acidity of the plant sap; the less acid the sap
the greater the ability of the plant to utilize
potassium from this source due to the faet
that potassium is more easily and completely
precipitated in the form of plant compounds
in the less acid sap.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

4. The feeding power of a plant for calcium
which is used for the regulation of the reac-
tion of the plant sap and colloidal system, and
precipitation of acids, or for other elements
used for these purposes, is also dependent upon
the reaction of the plant sap but the relation
is opposite to that of potassium; the more acid
the plant sap the more easily can the plant
compete with another acid system—the soil
solution of an acid soil, for needed basic ma-
terial.

5. In the case of base forming elements used
for other purposes than regulation of the re-
action and precipitation of acids, the relation
of the feeding power for these to the plant sap
is perhaps the same as for potassium.

6. There are undoubtedly many other fae-
tors which affect the feeding power of a plant
but it seems that the ones given often exercise
a controlling influence.

HK. Truoe
DEPARTMENT OF SOILS,

AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION,
UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN

THE TEACHING OF EVOLUTION

Every student, teacher and research worker
in various fields of science must find cause for :
sincere regret in any attitude or movement that
would limit the search for knowledge, or the
presentation of scientific fact in the class room.
There certainly is such a menace in the sug-
gested limitation or elimination of the teach-
ing of “evolution.” It seems rather strange
that such a conflict should be staged in a cen-
tury made notable by outstanding advance in
both pure and applied science. At no pre-
vious time have all men profited as much by
the efforts of scientific workers. Then why
such a hubbub about the teaching of what
many think a fundamental concept of bio-
logical science?

The trouble seemingly was started by a
group of conscientious folk who saw a sharp
variance between their beliefs, religious or
otherwise, and the theories presented and
vigorously promulgated by many teachers.
Some prominent men, as Mr. W. J. Bryan,
made the matter one for publie discussion, and
the controlling trustees of certain schools re-
quested or demanded that the doctrine of evo-

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

lution should not be taught in the institutions
under their control. The question has been
taken to the legislatures of two or three states
with a near approach to tragedy to scientific
' work. In a brief and somewhat generalized
form this is the history of the case through the
past few months.

As is usual in such eases, as has been true
throughout the conflict between scientific and
religious men, this difficulty has arisen through
gross ignorance, useless misunderstanding and
thoughtless intolerance. We have not found
any prominent scientists among the opposers
of the teaching of evolution. From the vague
and inconsistent references to the meaning of
evolution and the subject matter of courses
in which it is involved it hardly seems possible
that the opponents of this teaching have had
the most elementary training in the ways of
science or have had any sort of open-eyed
contact with the world about them. It is al-
ways dangerous to take any difficult or ab-
struse question to any average legislative body
—and it becomes especially dangerous when the
real issue is hidden in a mist of ignorance and
misconception as in the case in review. Legis-
lators must hear the majority of the people
—not judge the truth of scientific theory nor
establish the rectitude of religious belief.
Such misunderstandings with more or less
serious disturbance are wholly unnecessary,
and would never arise but for unwarranted
provocative aggression by one or both parties
in the case.

We know one man well, who through twenty
years of teaching in high school and college
has never had reason to think of his biological
training and religious beliefs as conflicting.
He has been able to maintain perfectly har-
monious relations with different leading Pro-
testant churches, and no question as to his
religious uprightness or sincerity has ever been
raised. He has had a fair training in bio-
logical science and has touched the general
field of science enough to understand the
lines of harmony and possible variance as
touching common or popular beliefs. Doubt-
less, many other men have had a similar ex-
perience of freedom from conflict between their
religious, social and scientific work. It is

SCIENCE

299

easy to see how all things scientific may seem
strange and often unbelievable to the man who
has no scientific training or but very meager
training and that of doubtful accuracy, and
how theories or even facts carelessly or inae-
curately stated so as to seemingly conflict with
as deep-seated a thing as a religious belief
would be cast out as unbelievable or heretical
by such sincere folks. It must be remembered
as a scientific fact that a great many people,
probably a majority of Americans as well as
of other folks, actually live and die by their
religion, shaping social, financial, political,
and moral decisions of each day and year by
their religious beliefs. Scientists who will ac-
cept at once the newest and most far-fetched
theory sometimes fail to take into consideration
the fact just mentioned, even though the ac-
ceptance of the most important scientific teach-
ing depends upon the attitude of the teacher
toward that fact. That the untrained cannot
understand the scientist’s point of view is taken
for granted. Is it asking too much of the
scientist to expect him to take such a sym-
pathetic attitude toward churchmen as he ex-
pects them to take toward himself? As much
of the present difficulty has arisen through a
failure of some who call themselves scientists
to make themselves fully acquainted with the
ideas of the people they would teach as through
the “misguided reformers” who do not at all
understand the theories they think they must
oppose.

There has appeared an alarming amount of
bigotry on the part of some who proclaim
themselves the champions of science. The
really desirable thing, after all, is the free-
dom for scientists to pursue their lines of re-
search and constructive work, and on the part
of others a feeling of trust that our scientific
men are really doing something worth while
instead of merely spinning useless or even
dangerous theories. The attitude of the op-
ponents of evolution does not seem to lead
toward this desirable end; and some of the
scientific men of the country have not been
conciliatory in their remarks when discussing
the question.

The chief cause for disagreement was stated
clearly by Mr. Bryan (Quoted in Science,

300

March 3, 1922, pp. 242, 243.) in these words:
“Christians do not dispute the right of any
teacher to be agnostic or atheistic, but Christ-
jians do deny the right of agnostics and
atheists to use the public school as a forum for
the teaching of their doctrines.” Some scien-
tists through, half a century with rapidly in-
creasing boldness have made themselves critics
of religious beliefs, holding in complete dis-
dain the opinions of churchmen, without
themselves entering experimentally into the
merits of the case. There really seems but
little reason for a scientist thinking himself
fully fitted to discuss at any length the beliefs
of a non-scientifically trained man unless the
latter is at the same time given full right to
diseuss the opinions of the former. To put
the matter ‘bluntly—both are dealing with sub-
jects entirely out of their field and about which
they are, in most cases, essentially ignorant.

The grievance, from the viewpoint of the
churchman, has been increased and in some
cases made unbearable by the type of biological
teaching found in many high schools. The
responsibility for the recent difficulties may be
largely traced to this cause in all probability.
Among the first things impressed upon the col-
lege freshmen in natural science courses is the
infallibility of a theory of evolution. This is
usually made impressive by indefinite, incom-
plete or inaccurate illustrations with reference
to the origin of man. The thorough student
of biology soon finds himself facing other
theories of evolution, and later forms a proper
valuation of these theories with respect to ‘the
evidences in fact upon which they are founded.
We have met with senior and graduate stu-
dents, however, in college and university de-
partments of biology, in whose minds the
theoretical phases of evolution completely over-
shadow the basie facts, whose whole conception
of Darwinism is included in the descent of man
from monkey. Churchmen are not to be
blamed for objecting to the promulgation of
such ideas. Any right minded man _ should
strenuously oppose such a program, and scien-
tists ought to blush for shame at such a crude
presentation of the story of organic develop-
ment.

The teaching of science, particularly of bio-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

logy or related subjects, in the high school is
the chief area of stress, the place where mis-
understandings may most readily occur. Here
the teacher is usually to blame, albeit unin-
tentionally so in many instances. Most of the
high-school teachers of botany, zoology and
biology are drawn from among those students
who have spent a year or less in such classes
in college and who try to pass on to their
students the ideas presented in those elemen-
tary courses. It is small reason for wonder
that the ideas of evolution caught on the wing
in brief lecture periods, unsupported by wide
reading and undigested by extensive labora-
tory work and field observation, should be in-
accurate, calculated to rouse protest in any
community. It certainly seems that in the
interest of public support of true scientific
work, such teachers should be kept from ser-
vice. Under present conditions of school or-
ganization this is impossible, but changes in
the organization and emphasis in elementary
biology courses in colleges would materially
lessen the harm from this source.

The elementary courses in college and uni-
versity courses taken as electives to fulfill
general requirements in science are also
dangerous, turning out as they do thousands
of young folks with but a momentary view
of limited phases of biology. But behind all
this is a warped view of the relative import-
ance of facts and theories on the part of col-
lege and university instructors. After all is
said a theory of evolution is but a theory.
Which particular line of procedure has pro-
duced new forms of life in the past is a basis
for discussion and disagreement among the
most learned. However much we may respect
the theory, however well it may be supported
by accumulations of facts, it is subject to ad-
justment or even serious modification with the
presentation of every new fact, and is lable
to more or less rough handling by some new
Darwin, Lamarck, or DeVries, as some older
theories have been shaken by an LHinstein.
Certainly a theory of evolution suffers violence
at the hands of any one who presents it as
anything other than a theory. The idea of
orderly development, which is all the term evo-
lution may rightly include, will very, very rare-

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

ly arouse antagonism or even doubt. Danger
comes with the presentation and insistence
upon the claims of some particular type of
evolution.

It should be said plainly that there are
abundant unquestioned facts upon which our
theories are based, and while we may differ in
our opinions as to the significance of those
facts, they are generally accepted. Variation
of individuals of species or race, reproduction
of like forms, the struggle for existence, the
adaptation of organism and environment
through the cutting off of the unfit, the produc-
tion of new forms by hybridization, all these
are facts of everyday experience, facts that
may be taught without raising questions as to
the teacher’s religious views, facts which if
more clearly and consistently taught would
tend to develop a better trained group of
scientific workers, teachers and general citi-
zenry.

From the standpoint of right and wrong the
teacher in college or elsewhere can not more
justly force his theories upon an unwilling or
unsuspecting public than can a religious en-
thusiast require all men to subseribe to his be-
liefs. The quack doctor, the religious fanatic,
and the poorly balanced teacher of science are
similar in that they are alike dangerous, and
the general public should consider all with sus-
picion. Lampooning earnest religious folks
because they refuse to accept all that comes
to them in the name of science will not. help
tto develop the very desirable discrimination
between the true and the false, but will rather
arouse more vigorous antagonism. There is
no fundamental basis for conflict between. en-
lightened and sincere churchmen and true
scientists. The development of American in-
stitutions and ideals and the advancement of
the material welfare of the American people
have come from the efforts alike of church-
men, statesmen and scientists; and for con-
tinued prosperity, it is essential that ithere be
harmony of purpose between these factors. It
is the business of the leaders of scientific work
and teachers of science to make such a discrimi-
nation between fact and theory that all must
respect their findings, and to use such care in
the presentation of subject matter that no one

SCIENCE

301

idea will be given the undue prominence that
is provocative of misunderstanding and dis-
trust. Why not make it quite clear that “Dar-
winism,” whatever that may mean to the in-
dividual professor, is not all of evolution?
Why not spend more time making clear to col-
lege students the facts of observation and ex-
periment upon which the “Origin of Species’
was founded? We are confident that more
teaching of fundamental facts will lead to a
better understanding between scientists and the
rest of the world, and to a more hearty sup-
port of scientific endeavor.

F. L. Pickett
State COLLEGE OF WASHINGTON

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
VITAL STATISTICS OF GERMAN CITIES!

Accorp1nG to official publications, the popu-
lation of the 343 larger cities from which re-
ports are accessible had increased one million,
being 25,700,000 in 1921, as compared with
24,700,000 in 1920. It is evident, therefore,
that 41 per cent. of the total population of ‘the
empire resides in these 343 cities. This re-
markable growth of the cities is doubtless due,
to a considerable extent, to the influx from the
smaller towns and to the immigration from
foreign countries. The number of living
infants born in these cities was 560,000, or 21.8
per thousand of population, which denoted a
falling off when contrasted with the record for
the previous year, which was 23.8 per thou-
sand. Since it has been found that economic
factors exert a great influence on the birth
rate, Dr. Roesle, taking the value of the mark
in relation to the American dollar as a basis,
has been making a critical investigation of the
possible effect of economic conditions. In
order to discover the influence on the varying
birth rate throughout the twelve months of the
year, it is quite evidently necessary to date
back nine months the birth rate for each month,
since in this manner the month in which the
children were conceived is ascertained. In
1921, the birth rate of the urban population
continued to drop until August, or, taking the

1From the Journal of the American Medical
Association.

302

month of conception, back to November, 1920,
in which month not only the value of the Amer-
ican dollar in marks but also the wholesale
prices of German goods thereby affected
reached the maximum of the observation
period. Roesle therefore assumes that the
failure of the rational increase in the birth
rate for July, 1921 (conception month, Octo-
ber, 1920), to materialize is traceable to the
further increase in the cost of living which
followed the advance of the dollar and of the
wholesale prices of German goods. In the
months of February and March, 1921, the cost
of living came down, and it is to be noted that
there was a corresponding increase in the birth
rate for the months of November and Decem-
ber, 1921 (just nine months later). It could
not. be shown that economic conditions exerted
a perceptible influence on the death rate. The
year 1921 shows the lowest recorded death rate
in German cities with more than 15,000 inhab-
itants; namely, 13.5 per thousand of popula-
tion, and exeluding deaths among strangers

and transients, the death rate was only 11.9.

A comparison of the monthly death rates for
former years brings out the fact that during
the winter months of January, February and
March, 1921, especially favorable weather con-
ditions must have prevailed. The abnormally
mild winter was followed by an abnormally
hot summer, but the summer peak of infant
mortality did not reach the terrible percentage
of the summer of 1911. Also during the
autumn of 1921 the weather conditions were
favorable. These favorable weather conditions
prevailed elsewhere as well, so that favorable
death rates for the year 1921 are to be expect-
ed also from other countries. Only for the
month of December, 1921, was there a higher
death rate than for the corresponding month
of the previous year, which is explainable by
the severe influenza epidemic. The rapid and
continued decrease in the death rate, since the
war, is due, for the most part, to the improve-
ment in the food situation.

THE REDWOOD TREES OF CALIFORNIA

Dr. J. B. Grant, chairman of the board of
directors of the “Save the Redwoods League,”
has issued a report, giving the history of the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

league which was organized four years ago.
The report, according to the New York Times,
states that the original redwood belt is a rem-
nant of the massive forests of this and related
species that in prehistoric times covered a con-
siderable part of the northern hemisphere. It
averages twenty miles in width and extends
some 450 miles from Monterey County, Cali-
fornia, to just above the Oregon line. In the
southern part of this belt, in Santa Cruz
County, as long ago as 1905, the State of Cali-
fornia established a state park, preserving what
is known as Big Basin, containing many mag-
nificent trees. Muir Woods, on the slopes of
Mount Tamalpais, has already been made a
national monument. And now, as a part of
the Save the Redwoods movement, the nucleus
of another state park has been preserved in
the northern portion of the redwood belt, in
Humboldt County, in the basin of the south
fork of the Eel River and adjoining the Cali-
fornia State Highway.

The Humboldt ‘State Redwood Park, which
is the beginning of a larger area to be pre-
served, consists of about 2,000 acres, extending
fourteen miles along the California state high-
way, where it skirts the eastern bank of the
south fork of the Eel River, between Phillips-
ville and Dyerville. It contains perhaps
200,000,000 feet of some of the finest redwoods.
It is 230 miles from San Francisco on the
main state highway leading to Eureka, Cali-
fornia, and is administered for the state by the
California State Forestry Board. It is accessi-
ble through the year by train.

One tract of redwoods saved by private do-
nation was Bolling Memorial Grove, which is
within Humboldt State Park. It was estab-
lished by Dr. John C. Phillips, of Massachu-
setts, in memory of Colonel Raynal C. Bolling,
one of the first American officers of high rank
to give his life in the World War.

The establishment of Humboldt State Red-
wood Park is a part of the general movement
to save representative groves through the red--
wood belt, particularly those along the “High-
way of the Giants,” the state highway, leading
from the southernmost redwoods in Monterey
to the northernmost at the Oregon line. It is
in the northern region that a larger national

SrpremBer 15, 1922]

park, preserving adequately for all time a rep-
resentative redwood forest in its primitive state,
will probably be established. The task of the
Save the Redwoods League is to cooperate with
the state in assuring the preservation of the
Highway of the Giants and to aid the federal
government toward establishing the national
park.

The league is interested also in promoting the
preservation and reforestation of cutover red-
wood lands. The redwood is a tree that repro-
duces by sprouting from the stump, and in time
produces beautiful second growth trees. While
these are in no way comparable in size or
grandeur with the ancient redwoods that have
‘taken 1,000 to 1,500 years to mature, never-
theless if it is possible to save the finest of the
virgin stands of redwoods, the remaining red-
wood area will ultimately be covered with
attractive second growth.

Sinee the league can not hope to raise more
than a fraction of the needed sum through
state appropriation or private contributions, it
advocates federal action toward the establish-
ment of such a park.

CERAMIC DAY

The American Ceramic Society has issued
the following letter to members of the society:

Our society has provided the program for one
of the days during the exposition week (11-16
inclusive) known as Ceramic Day. This will be
on Friday, September 15.

President Frank H. Riddle will appear on the
opening program of the exposition with the pres-
idents of other technical societies.

Messrs. E. P. Poste and Ross C. Purdy will ap-
pear on the special program on ‘‘Specifications.’’
Mr. Poste will discuss specifications for enameled
chemical ware and Mr. Purdy will describe the
problems in writing specifications for refractories.

The partial program for Ceramic Day, Sep-
tember 15 is:

High temperature cements, by W. H. GAyYLorD,
JR., Quigley Furnace Specialties Company.

Application of magnetic separator in ceramic
industries, by E. 8S. Hirscupere, Dings Magnetic
Separator Company.

Preparation of clays and minerals for ceramic
purposes, by J. D. Dickey, chemist, Industrial
Filteration Corporation.

SCIENCE

303

Apparatus for quickly determining fineness of
grind, by Eric Turner, Trenton Flint and Spar
Company.

Feldspar Colloquium: W. H. LANDERS, GEORGE
M. Darsy, O. O. Bowman, 2d, V. A. Sraupr,
C. R. Moorr, C. M. FranNzHEIM and others.

Manufacture of gray enameled ware, by H. C.
ARNOLD.

Whiting for ceramic uses, by A. E. WILLIAMS.

Gas producers for glass works, by C. B. CHap-
MAN, Chapman Engineering Company.

Witchery of glazes, by Pauu E. Cox.

Architectural faience and its artistic possibilt-
ties, by CONRAD DRESSLER.

Organization of a decorative ceramic research
department; financial and manufacturing consid-
erations, by FREDERICK H. RHEap.

R. D. Lanprum
Chairman of Committee on Program.

THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA

At the last annual meeting of the Geological
Society of America held at Amherst, the fel-
lows listened to an instructive symposium on
Isostasy, in which it was clearly brought out
that this is not the primary cause in the making
of folded mountains. There is a greater ante-
cedent cause, and it is the later adjustments
in the mountains that are due to isostasy.

It is therefore proposed that at the meeting
of the society to be held at the University of
Michigan next December, there be held a sym-
posium on “The Structure and History of
Mountains and the Causes for their Develop-
ment,” dealing with the following questions:
What are the chief internal structures of
mountains? To what extent is lateral com-
pression responsible for folding and uplift?
What causes the lithosphere locally to upheave
and to fold into mountains? These discus-
sions will be led by

Charles Schuchert—The sites and nature of the
American geosynclines.

Chester R. Longwell—Professor Kober’s theory ,
of mountain structure and mountain making.

William H. Hobbs—The Asiatic ares.

Arthur Keith—The Appalachians.

Jay B. Woodworth—The mountains of New
England and the Maritime Provinces of Canada.

Willis T. Lee—The Front Ranges of Colorado
and New Mexico.

304

G. R. Mansfield—The Rocky Mountains of
Idaho and Montana.
Bailey Willis—The Pacifie mountains.

Epmunp Otis Hovey
Secretary.

THE JOURNAL OF PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

As a result of action by the council the
Journal of Physical Chemistry is to be pub-
lished under the auspices of three great English-
speaking chemical societies—the American
‘Chemical Society, the Chemical Society at Lon-
don and Faraday Society of Great Britain.
Action by the Council of the American Chem-
ical Society at the Pittsburgh meeting com-
pleted plans for this step, which is hailed by
leading chemists as a fine recognition by the
two conservative British groups of the high
quality of the work of American chemists, and
an important advance in the science of chem-
istry.

The action is the result of the recent visit
of Dr. Charles L. Parsons, secretary of the
American Chemical Society, to England, where
he had a conference with officials of the Chem-
ieal Society of London an regard to the inter-
nationalization of this journel, of which pro-
fessor Wilder D. Bancroft of Cornell Univer-
sity is editor.

The following conditions were agreed to:

1. In future the Journal of Physical Chemistry
shall be under the joint auspices of the American
Chemical Society and the Chemical Society,1
neither society, however, being financially liable
in any way.

2. The control of the Journal shall be exercised
by a board, consisting of eight members, four
being nominated by the American Chemical Soci-
ety and four by the Chemical Society. These
members to be appointed for a term of two years,
except that one half shall go off each year, those
who retire the first year to be determined by lot.
No member of the board shall serve continuously
more than four years.

3. The eight members of the board will elect
an editor-in-chief, who shall have an equal voice
on the board, except on the question of election

1 Later the Faraday Society became one of the
parties of the agreement and will appoint one
member of the board of editors.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

of the editor-in-chief, on which matter he shall
not vote.

4. The lines on which the Journal will be run
shall be left entirely in the hands of the said
board.

5. It is suggested that the board shall appoint
also a managing editor, who shall be responsible
to the board for the business management of the
Journal.

6. The board shall report annually to each of
the societies under the auspices of which the
Journal is published.

7. The Journal shall be offered to members of
the American Chemical Society and to fellows of
the Chemical Society at reduced subscription rates.

Dr. Parsons also reported to the council
that Francis P. Garvan, president of the Chem-
ical Foundation, had guaranteed $10,000 an-
nually for five years for publication work.
“This guarantee I make on behalf of the Chem-
ical Foundation,’ Mr. Garvan wrote, “but if
the funds of the Chemical Foundation prove
inadequate, I will make good the guarantee
personally.”

CHEMICAL PRIZE ESTABLISHED BY THE
ALLIED CHEMICAL AND DYE
CORPORATION
A prize of $25,000 to be awarded annually
to a chemist in the United States for con-
tributions to chemistry was announced by
the Allied Chemical and Dye ‘Corporation of
New York, in a letter read by Dr. Edgar F.
Smith, president of the American Chemical
Society, at a council meeting which opened
the sixty-fourth annual meeting of the society
at Pittsburgh on September 6. The letter from
Dr. Wm. H. Nichols, chairman of the corpora-

tion, is as follows:

Confirming our interview yesterday, it gives me
great pleasure to state that the Allied Chemical
and Dye Corporation desires to institute an an-
nual prize of $25,000 to reward the chemist re-
siding in the United States, who in the opinion
of a properly constituted jury has contributed
most to the benefit of the science and of the
world. Realizing, as we do, the enormous influ-
ence which chemists working in all the fields of
that science will have on the welfare of the world,
we desire by this prize to so encourage the work-
ers that even larger benefits should accrue than

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

those which have already placed the world under ©

such a debt of gratitude to the profession.

We desire that you should make this announce-
ment at such time and place as you shall deem
best, and to take such steps as may be necessary
to carry the matter into effect beginning with the
year 1923. We assume that a committee, of
which you will be chairman, will be appointed
by you to consider and suggest the rules govern-
ing the selection each year of the chemist who
is deemed most worthy.

We also assume that this committee would pro-
vide for the appointment of a jury to decide an-
nually. who should be the recipient. ‘We would be
glad if the committee would arrange the selec-
tion of this jury so that this company would
have the appointment of two members, it being
understood that neither of those members should
be connected with the company.

We do not desire to limit the gift to any par-
ticular field of chemistry, recognizing as we do
the importance of them all.

As the American Chemical Society is by far
the largest organization of chemists, and repre-
sents every field of the science in its membership,
we have thought it better to work through that
society, although not limiting the gift to its
members. Our sole desire is to encourage chem-
ists. everywhere in our country to do even more
than they have been doing for the general good.

We have not. gone into details, as we value
greatly the opinions of those who would nat-
urally be asked to serve on the committee, and
do not desire to trammel them in their delibera-
tions.

MEMBERS OF THE AMERICAN MEDICAL
ASSOCIATION AND THE AMERICAN
ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCE-

MENT OF SCIENCE

Members of the American Medical Associa-
tion who are not now members of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science
have been invited to become members without
the payment of the usual five-dollar entrance
fee. This special invitation has been voted by
the executive committee of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science be-
cause of the fact that it is practically impos-
sible for the permanent secretary’s office to
send an individual invitation offering this
privilege to each new member of the American
Medical Association each year, as is done in the
case of the other scientific societies affiliated

SCIENCE

305

with the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science.

Members of the American Medical Associa-
tion who are interested in this invitation are
requested to write to the permanent secretary’s
office, Smithsonian Institution Building, Wash-
ington, D. C. They will thus secure a special,
invitation and a booklet of information regard-
ing the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science.

Burton E. Livineston
Permanent Secretary.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Tue Association of, German Scientific Men
and. Physicians holds its hundredth meeting at
Leipzig from September 18 to 24. One of the
publie addresses is by Professor Albert Hin-
stein.

THe Swiss Scientific Society held its one
hundred and third annual meeting at Berne
from August 24 to 27. According to the pro-

gram as quoted in Nature, the general ad-

dresses included the following: “The trend of
modern physies,” Dr. C. E. Buye (Geneva) ;
“The nature of the so-called general neuroses,”
Professor Sahli (Berne); “The Aar Massif—
an example of Alpine granitic instrusion,” Dr.
E. Hugi (Berne); “The natural form of sub-
stanees as a physical problem,” Dr. V. Kohl-
sehtitter (Berne); “Experimental genetics in
regard to the law of variation” (illustrated by
lantern slides), Dr. A. Pictet (Geneva); and
“Investigations into the physiology of Alpine
plants,” Dr. G. Senn (Bale).

At the Pittsburgh meeting of the American
Chemical Society Dr. C. L. Parsons was unani-
mously reelected secretary of the society. The
editors of the society’s journals were unani-
mousely reelected, namely: Chemical Ab-
stracts: EK. J. ‘Crane. Journal of the American
Chemical Society: A. B. Lamb. Industrial and
Engineering Chemistry: H. E. Howe. Dr. W.
A. Noyes was elected editor of Scientific Mono-
graphs. The advisory committee named H. HE.
Howe as successor to Dr. Johnson, who. re-
signed as editor of Technologic Monographs.

Sir CHartes Scorr SHERRINGTON, president
of the Royal Society and of the British Asso-

306

ciation for the Advancement of Science, Wayn-
flete professor of physiology at Oxford Uni-
versity, has accepted an invitation to attend the
formal opening of the new biological building
of McGill University in October.

Proressor F. G. Coker has been presented
with the Howard N. Potts gold medal of the

Franklin Institute of Philadelphia, awarded to ~

him in recognition of his recent work on photo
polarimetry. The presentation was made at a
dinner at the Savoy Hotel by Dr. R. B. Owens,
secretary of the institute.

J. W. Greae, head of the division of land-
seape gardening in the College of Agriculture,
University of California, has been elected as
fellow of the Royal Horticultural Society of
England.

F. B. Toueu, United States supervisor of oil
and gas operations on leased public lands, has
been appointed chief petroleum technologist of
the Bureau of Mines, to sueceed A. W. Am-
brose, who has been appointed assistant direc-
tor of the bureau.

Mr. Ernest A. Sire has resigned his posi-
tion as secretary of the British Non-Ferrous
Metals Research Association and accepted an
appointment as research metallurgist to the
Sheffield Smelting Company.

G. E. Sanpers is returning to Canada this
month, to take charge of the manufacture of
insecticides and fungicides for the Deoro
Chemical Company. For the past year he has
been with the Dosch Chemical Company at
Louisville, Ky.

Dr. A. P. SaunpeErs, professor of chemistry
since 1901 and dean of Hamilton College since
1909, has been given a year’s leave of absence
and will travel in Europe with his family
during the coming winter. His address is care
of Morgan, Harjes & Co., Place Vendéme,
Paris.

We learn from Nature that Professor J. W.
Gregory, of Glasgow University, reports his
safe arrival at Talifu, Yunnan, after a success-
ful journey in Tibet. Professor Gregory and
his son, Mr. C. J. Gregory, left England for
Rangoon at the end of March last with the
object of investigating some features in the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

mountain structure of northwestern Yunnan
and western Szechuan.

Rosert T. ArrKEN has returned from about
two years spent in Tahiti and various islands
of the Society and Austral groups. His work
is to supplement the investigations of the
Bayard Dominick Expedition, which is making
an intensive study of Polynesian origin and
migration. Mr. Aitken collected material ob-
jects illustrative of the life of the present-day
people, and a few that date back to the early
inhabitants of these islands. He also brought
back a few folk tales in fragmentary form,
physical measurements of the inhabitants and
photographs of the majority of the people of
the island of Tubuai in the Austral group.

THe American Society of Mechanical Engi-
neers has appointed a committee to report on
a standard smoke ordinance to apply to all
cities of the country. It consists of O. P.
Hood, chief mechanical engineer of the United
States Bureau of Mines as chairman, Henry
Kreisinger, P. J. Dougherty, Lloyd R. Stowe,
Everett L. Aillard and Osborn Monnett.

Dr. Wituiam §. Hausrep, since 1889 pro-
fessor of surgery in the Johns Hopkins Med-
ieal School, died in Baltimore on September 7,
aged seventy years.

Dr. Harotp C. Ernst, professor of bacteri-
ology in the Harvard Medical School from
1891 to 1921, and editor of the Journal of
Medical Research, died on September 7, aged
sixty-six years.

Dr. Epwarp AntTHoNY SpirzKa, specialist
in the anatomy of the brain, died at Mount
Vernon, N. Y., on September 4, at the age of
forty-six years.

ALEXANDER RIGHTER CraiG, secretary of the

American Medical Association since 1911, died
on September 2, aged fifty-four years.

W. H. Hunson, the distinguished English
ornithologist and writer on natural history,
died in London on August 18 in his eighty-
first year.

Tur Brigham Young University, of Provo,
Utah, has just closed its first annual Alpine
summer school. The school was housed in tents

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

at a point about 7,500 feet above sea level at
the base of Mt. Timpanogos with an elevation
of 12,000 feet. Courses were offered in botany
and geology.

Tue Rockefeller Foundation, through Dr.
Platt W. Covington, state director of the Inter-
national Health Board of the Foundation, has
agreed to donate the sum of $5,000 yearly for
three years toward establishing a laboratory in
San Bernardino County, California, for re-
search work. A condition is made that the
county provide a like sum for the three-year
period and furnish the laboratory and an ex-
perienced physician and chemist to be placed
in charge of the work. San Bernardino is one
of three counties in the state to receive the
offer. The object of the proposal is to better
health conditions and provide means for lower-
ing the heavy death rate.

Aw effort is being made in England to raise
$100,000 for the construction of an airship to
fly to the North Pole. ‘Captain Charles Fro-
bisher, formerly a war pilot, is the leader. His
idea is to start with an airship from London
and fly by way of Christiana and North Cape
and Bear Island to Spitzbergen, where the air-
ship would be overhauled for the final 700-
mile dash. His estimate is that it would not
be necessary for the ship to attain a speed of
more than fifty miles an hour in order to reach
the goal, and that a erew of ten and supplies
could be easily carried. Another advantage of
the airship over the airplane is the proposed
installation of a powerful wireless in orcer to
maintain communication with the outside world.

Durinc October the following public lec-
tures will be given at the Brooklyn Botanic
Garden:

October 7—‘‘A Garden Pilgrimage in Eng-
land’’: Mr. Montague Free, horticulturist, Brook-
lyn Botanic Garden.

October 14—‘‘The Origin of Cultivated
Plants’’: Dr. Orlando E. White, curator of plant
breeding, Brooklyn Botanic Garden.

October 21—‘‘Four Seasons in the Garden’’:
Mr. Leonard Barron, editor of The Garden Mag-
azine, Garden City, L. I.

October 28—‘‘ Health and Disease in Plants’’:
Dr. Arthur Harmount Graves, curator of public
instruction, Brooklyn Botanie Garden.

SCIENCE

307

Accorpine to a dispatch to the London
Times, the opinion was expressed at the meet-
ing of the Association of Tropical Medicine,
which is holding its conference at Hamburg,
attended by scientists from Holland, Java,
Turkey, South America and Germany, that
Germany has made a discovery of considerable
importance. “Beyer 205,” the discovery of the
Bayerische Farbwerke, is said to be a cure for
sleeping sickness, both for human beings and
animals. This drug kills the microbe causing
sleeping sickness in man and animals without
injuring the patient. The Bayerische Farb-
werke has supplied the Belgian colonial minis-
ter, on his request, with a quantity of “205”
for research purposes to be used in the labora-
tories at Leopoldsville in the Congo, and the
Belgian technical schools for tropical diseases.
German scientists expect, owing to the latest
development, that this discovery will point the
way to a cure for malaria and also coast fever
in animals.

A REPORT was presented to the French Acad-
emy of Sciences on August 21 which gave the
results of an examination by Professor Louis
Boutan, of Bordeaux, of a “cultivated” pearl
made by Mr. Mikimoto’s method. Professor
Boutan’s conclusion is that the Mikimoto
pearls are apparently identical with natural
ones. M. Boutan says that the apparatus, by
means of which MM. Galibourg and Rysiger
disclose the artificial nucleus which is to be
found in the ordinary cultivated pearls, is of
no use in distinguishing those of the Mikimoto
variety, as these have no nucleus. M. Louis
Joubin, who presented the report to the acad-
emy, made the interesting point that as the
“culture” process is applied to oysters which
produce pearls spontaneously, Mr. Mikimoto
himself can never be sure that his “cultivated”
pearl is not an ordinary natural one. One
effect of the report would appear to be that
the authenticity of “real” pearls now depends
entirely on the word of the man who sells them.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

THe will of the late Frederick Bertuch be-
queathes, to take effect on the death of Mrs.

308

Bertuch, $750,000 to public purposes. Among
these bequests are $100,000 to Columbia Uni-
versity for poor students and $50,000 to
Cooper Union.

THe Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation reports that the Medical School of the
University of Rochester is making progress.
A research laboratory will be completed in
about three months. An affiliation is being
brought about between the city authorities and
the university for the building of a municipal
hospital on or near the university campus, and,
in accordance with the arrangements, the uni-
versity medical school will furnish the profes-
sional training and nursing staffs, and the
medical teaching will be carried on in the hos-
pital. Walter R. Bloor, Ph.D., of the Univer-
sity of California Medical School, has accepted
the chair of biochemistry, and will begin his
work this fall. Dr. George W. Corner, now at
Johns Hopkins University, is to be the pro-
fessor of anatomy. He will assume his duties
at Rochester early in 1924. Dr. Nathaniel W.
Faxon, now of the Massachusetts General Hos-
pital, will assume the position of director of
the University Hospital on October 15. The
school will be ready to receive students in the
fall of 1924 or 1925.

Dr. RicHarp M. Smiru, instructor in pedia-
tries, Medical School of Harvard University,
has been appointed assistant professor of child
hygiene in the new school of public health.

Dr. CHartes P. ALEXANDER, of the Illinois
Natural History Survey, has been elected
assistant professor of entomology at the Massa-
chusetts Agricultural College, to fill the
vacancy caused by the resignation of Dr. W. 8.
Regan last autumn.

Dr. Auex. McTaccart, formerly agricul-
turist of the Department of Agriculture Mu-
seum at Wellington, New Zealand, has been
appointed assistant professor of agronomy at
Macdonald College, Canada. He will be in
charge of plant breeding work, with special
reference to grasses and clovers.

Dr. J. W. McLeop, lecturer in bacteriology
at the University of Leeds, has been appointed
the first oceupant of the Sir Edward Brother-
ton chair of bacteriology in that university.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

THE ZODIACAL LIGHT

THE most brilliant display of the zodiacal
light that I have observed occurred on the
night of April 8, 1922. My point of observa-
tion was Poulan, Worth County, Georgia (lati-
tude 31-30 north; longitude 83-45 west). The
light covered more of the heavens than shown
as a zone of zodiacal light in any of the sev-
eral hundred charts made of it by an observer
with Commodore Perry’s expedition to Japan
in 1853-1856, and printed in a huge tomed
report by the United States government as a
part of the reports of that historie oceurrence.
One great volume of the Perry reports is given
over entirely to the zodiacal light, forming the
most massive single piece of literature upon
the subject. I have observed the zodiacal
light from the Straits.of Magellan to 46 north
latitude without having seen such a display as
the one here alluded to. It dulled the near full
moon. There was not a cloud in the sky. In
the brilliant moonlight the zodiacal light made
the spots in the heavens unilluminated by it
looks like coal sacks, so great was the contrast.
I have seen the aurora borealis above the Arctic
circle and the aurora australis below the Ant-
arctic line, and seldom were these exhibitions
more brilliant and effective than the display
that was neither on the night of April 8 last.
It must be true that observers in southern
latitudes are often confused by the zodiacal
light and take it for an auroral burst. The
zodiacal light is usually most noticeable in
the western sky. This one covered more than
half the heavens irregularly. It continued
from 9 P.M. until 3 A.M. with varying bril-
lianey. Judge Roberts P. Hudson, of Sault
Ste. Marie, Michigan, was my companion ob-
server on the night of April 8.

Cuase 8. OsBoRN
Sautr Ste. Mariz, Micuigan

THE MEALY-BUG CALLED PSEUDOCOCCUS
BROMELIE, AND OTHER COCCIDS

In my recent review of Wheeler on Tachi-

galia insects, I gave a footnote questioning the

validity of the name Pseudococcus bromelie

(Bouché), as applied to the species of mealy-

bug found on Tachigalia. This has brought

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

me a letter from Hawaii, where an insect pre-
sumed to be the same is of economic impor-
tance, asking for additional information. Since
the matter is one of importance to economic
entomologists, it may be worth while to state
explicitly why Bouché’s name can not be used.
I have not seen Bouché’s original work (1834),
but his whole description is quoted by Signoret.
In 1875 Signoret received a mealy-bug on
pine-apple, which he deseribed, saying that it
was probably Bouché’s Coccus bromelia. Since
there was already an entirely different Coccus
bromelie, published in 1778 (now called
Diaspis bromelie), it appears that Bouché’s
mame was in any case unavailable. Signoret,
uninfluenced by the homonym, was still in con-
siderable doubt as to the identity of his insect,
and accordingly gave Bouché’s description, so
that the reader might form his own opinion.
That description is somewhat confusing, but
we are told that the fertilized female takes the
form of a convex, short, elliptical shield, a
little narrower in front. The last abdominal
segment is cleft. The females, after an early
stage, remain in one ‘place all their lives, un-
less one tears them off. The insect is common
in greenhouses, on various plants. There can,
I think, be little doubt that Bouché had before
him the Lecaniid Satssetia hemispherica (Tar-
gioni, 1867); surely it was not a mealy-bug.
In the Fernald Catalogue of Coccide there is
confused with this Lecanium bromelie Bouché,
grey marbled with brown, which Signoret did
not undertake to identify. It was probably
Lecanium hesperidum (L.).

Another coccid which seems to need discus-
sion is the large Lecaniid of the tulip-tree. Dr.
W. E. Britton (Bull. 234, Conn. Agric. Exp.
Station) gives a good account of this insect,
but calls it Towmeyella liriodendri (Gmelin),
stating that it was so identified by Sanders,
“after a careful study.” Gmelin’s Coccus
liriodendri was based on an account by Dr.
John Hill, of London, appearing in the Ham-
burgisches Magazine for 1753. Many years
ago I borrowed this work from the Library of
Congress, and together with Mr. Pergande
went over the description. The account is very
vague, and contains some apparently inaccu-
rate statements, but it evidently applies to a

SCIENCE

309

Lecaniid on the tulip-tree. We concluded at
the time that it was not possible to reach a
definite decision, and were not in favor of dis-
placing Cook’s name tulipifere (1878). There
is no indication that any one has really recon-
sidered this evidence, and I think the scale
should stand as Toumeyella. tulipifere (Cook).

Sanders (Journ. Economic Entomology,
1909, p. 432), adopting Pseudococcus adoni-
dum (L.) as the name of the common long-
tailed mealy-bug (P. longispinus Targ.), refers
to the “good description of the insect in
Systema Nature, Kd. XII.” The “good de-
scription” refers to “linea dorsalis longitu-
dinalis elevata . .. area inter lineam dosalem
marginemque totidem punctis in seriem longi-
tudinalem dispositis ...cauda bifida,” ete.
Conceivably this may be Orthezia urtice (L.),
but this is guessing. There is not anything to
clearly indicate the mealy-bug, and part of the
description contradicts such a reference. I am
in favor of using the oldest names when there
is real evidence,.or even a satisfactory pre-
sumption, in their favor, but when the deserip-
tions are inapplicable it is another matter.

The application of the generic name Coccus
L. to the soft scales may have to be reconsid-
ered. The original Coecus (the word meaning
a berry) was the hard round scale of the oak,
commonly called Kermes. Under the rules, a
good argument can be made for considering
Coccus ilicis L. (Kermes ilicis) the type of
Coccus, on grounds of tautonomy, but there is
room for diversity of opinion. Lecanium pul-
chrum King, well redeseribed by Marchal
(1908), should apparently stand as L. rufulum
(Eulecanium alni var. rufulum Ckll.).

T. D. A. CocKERELL
UNIVERSITY OF COLORADO

THE DETERMINATION OF FAT IN CREAM

To tHe Eprror or Science: I noticed in
Science for July 7, page 25, an abstract of a
paper read before the American Chemical
Society by E. G. Mahin and R. H. Carr, en-
titled “Errors in the determination of fat in
cream.”

In 1910, the dairy department of Purdue
University, under the direction of Professor
O. F. Hunziker, head of the department, made

310

extensive investigations to determine if it is
desirable to use any material for eliminating
the upper meniscus on the neck of the Babeock
testing bottles and after a very extensive ex-
periment, came to the conclusion that for uni-
form and accurate results of the cream test,
the meniscus must be eliminated. The reason
for this conclusion was that the color of the
test, clearness of fat, amount and direction of
light, kind of background of the test bottle,
angle from which the test is read, ete., gives a
varying meniscus.

A number of experiments were tried out at
this station as well as at other experiment sta-
tions about this time with different liquids for
eliminating the meniseus. Amylaleohol was
one of the materials experimented with at this
time, but it was found that its fat dissolving
properties and the harmful effect of the vapor
on the operator made it impracticable for com-
mercial use.

Glymol, which is a white mineral oil, was
found not to have the objection of the amyl-
alcohol and at the same time eliminated the
meniscus which made an accurate test so diffi-
cult. The use of glymol is now being used
in practically every state of the Union and its
value has been thoroughly proved. The
authors of the above mentioned article, while
they condemn the use of glymol, make the fol-
lowing statement, “If the latter is added slowly
and carefully, little or no error occurs.” This
kind of criticism may be made of any test, but
from our inspection of over 1,800 cream buy-
ing stations in Indiana, this last year, in our
Creamery License Division, we have found at
least 98 per cent. of the testers adding the
glymol as it should be added and where the
testers fail to comply with the creamery and
testers’ license law or perform tests that are
inaccurate, their license is revoked. In cases
where licenses were revoked this last year, our
investigations show very conclusively that the
incorrect testing was due to intent in prac-
tically every case, rather than by faulty meth-
ods of testing. In the last sentence of this
article, the authors say: “It is conclusively
shown that the methods (referring to the use
of glymol) is not safe in the hands of the aver-
age dairy testers, but the use of amylalcohol

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

for this purpose, substituted for hydrocarbon
oils, gives reliable results in all cases.” A few
tests are sufficient to show that this statement
is erroneous. Six samples of cream were used
and the test read by adding amylaleohol. The
tests were read as soon as the amylalcohol was
placed on the test and the six tests averaged
22.2 per cent. After standing ten minutes,
the six tests averaged 21.5 per cent, showing
very conclusively that the amylalcohol dissolves
a portion of the fat and does not give reliable
results.

As chairman of the Creamery License Divi-
sion Board of Indiana, a board which has for
its purpose the enforcement of the Indiana
testers’ license law and the protection of the
producer against fraudulent or incorrect tests
of milk and cream, I am very anxious to re-
ceive all constructive criticisms of our present
methods of testing, but under our present
methods of checking the cream buying stations
in Indiana, it is a most erroneous statement to
intimate that ten large creameries in Indiana
are beating the producers out of $20,000 worth
of cream per year, and any one who is con-
nected with the business and knows conditions
in the state would not make such a statement,
for it would be impossible under the Indiana
creamery and testers’ license law. The state-
ments which the investigators have made in the
article referred to are not only incorrect truths,
but the damage which may result from the
distribution of such an article is unlimited.

H. W. GREGORY
PuRDUE UNIVERSITY

DR. LIPMANN’S LABORATORY OF APPLIED
PSYCHOLOGY

Lerrers from Dr. Otto Lipmann, of Berlin,
state that he is confronted with the necessity
of giving up his scientitie work unless he finds
funds which will allow him to keep on with his
laboratory of applied psychology. From the
Emergency Society for German and Austrian
Science and Art, I have received word that
$200 will bé voted by it provided that Amer-
ican psychologists will pledge an equal amount.
A similar arrangement has been carried out by
groups in two other fields.

At the suggestion of President Knight Dun-

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

lap, of the American Psychological <Associa-
tion, I am offering to receive and be responsi-
ble for contributions. The fund will be used
for continuing Dr. Lipmann in his chosen work.
Quick response promises to prevent the loss of
an international leader from the field of scien-
tifie research.

Dr. Lipmann’s assistance in founding and
editing the Zeitschrift fiir angewandte Psy-
chologie and its Beihefte; his important con-
tributions to, educational and vocational psy-
chology, 34 titles in one recent bibliography in
applied psychology; and the prospect of his
many years of continued work, should rouse
us out of our routine contributions. There is
hope of state support for his work if he can
be helped past the present depression. <A
recent letter makes clear that the need is press-
ing if he is to keep to his ealling.

J. B. Miner

UNIVERSITY OF KENTUCKY

SHIPMENT OF AMERICAN SCIENTIFIC
LITERATURE TO RUSSIA

THe American Committee to Aid Russian
Scientists with Scientifie Literature was in-
formed by the Headquarters of the American
Relief Administration in New York that the
first shipment of eleven cases, each weighing
about 350 Ibs., is being forwarded on the 8. S.
Norlina, scheduled to sail about August 15th.

The response of American scientific institu-
tions and departments to the appeal of the
Committee was remarkably generous. In
handling these first shipments the American
Relief Administration had considerable diffi-
culty in following the original plan, chiefly
due to the fact that many of the donors failed
to prepay the charges to New York and to
send advices and lists of their publications,
making it necessary for the American Relief
Administration in New York to make up lists
from the books and pamphlets as the pack-
ages were opened. The Committee would
greatly appreciate it if the donors of scientific
literature for Russia -would in the future en-
close at least six copies of the list of publica-
tions contributed by them. This number of
copies is absolutely essential in order to fur-
nish the offices of the American Relief Adminis-
tration abroad with copies of the packing

SCIENCE

dll

lists, one to be enclosed in each case, one sent
to the American Committee in Washington,
still another retained in the files in New York.
One copy with a special column provided on it
is to be sent to Moscow and later returned to
the American Committee with the record of the
disposition made of each package of literature
sent. All future shipments should be con-
signed care Gertzen ¢ Co. 70 West Street,
New York, N. Y.

The literature contributed by donors for de-
livery to specifie institutions or individuals
was packed without being opened and the Com-
mittee in Moscow was requested to make de-
livery to the person or persons designated on
the package. The copy of the inventory, when
it is returned from Moscow, should therefore
indicate the extent to which it was practicable
and consistent with our agreements to comply
with the wishes of the donors.

RAPHAEL Zon,
Secretary

QUOTATIONS
CHILDREN AND MUSEUMS

THE direct educational work accomplished
by museums in the United States is a per-
petual source of shame to us in this country.
We are well aware that much is being done in
some of our own museums, often at the self-
sacrifice of their officials; but have we any-
thing to compare with what is described in a
recent number of Natural History (March-
April, 1922)—the journal of the American
Museum of Natural History? Consider lan-
tern-slides, for example. Our own Natural
History Museum has recently started one or
two loan collections, comprising in all some few
dozen slides. Those of the American Museum
number many thousands. They are stored in a
room accessible to teachers, who can thus select
precisely what they want for their class-room
lectures. Last year more than two hundred
thousand slides were cireulated. It is not long
since a fair collection of slides made by an
assistant in our own museum was handed over
to another institution because there were no
facilities for keeping it in the museum itself.
Needless to say, the American Museum has a
lecture theater. It has 869 nature-study collec-

312

tions to be lent to any public school in greater
New York. There are two motor cars and a
motor cycle to deliver slides and collections.
Bach messenger visits from twenty to forty
schools a day. The American Museum is about
to erect a special School Service building of five
stories where from three to five thousand chil-
dren daily may be taken care of properly. The
blind are also provided for.

Of course, all this can not be done by the
ordinary officers of the museum, and that is a
fact which must be recognized in this country.
The American Museum has its own department
of education, with Mr. George H. Sherwood
at the head. In the same way the Brooklyn
Botanical Garden has its curator of elementary
education, who contributes to the same issue of
Natural History an interesting article on “Gar-
dening and the City Child.” But the work
which starts in the museums and public gar-
dens of New York and Brooklyn is taken up by
other outside bodies, as the School Nature
League of New York City, the president of
which, Mrs. John I. Northrop, here tells us
how in one of the elementary schools in the
middle of the slums a wonderful nature-
room has been installed. It is visited by from
eight hundred to one thousand children every
week. Here is a place for all those miscella-
neous curiosities so frequently rejected by the
staid museums. They can be placed in the
hands of the children and many a fascinating
lesson drawn from them. The love of nature
thus begun is earried out into the open by
means of summer camps, and so becomes linked
up with the Boy Scout camps with their trav-
eling museums.

Well, why is it that the Americans have got
so far ahead of us on these lines? They have
no doubt a new field to cultivate, and they do
not have to contend against the terrible weight
of inertia inevitable to some of our royal and
ancient establishments. But to a large extent
it is because Americans are not ashamed of
having an ideal and of talking about it. They
do not mind saying what they are going to do,
and they make the utmost of everything that
they have done. This is not the Englishman’s
way, but it is a way that interests the public

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

both rich and poor. It brings money from
the former and enthusiasm from the latter. If
we want te achieve the same results we must
not be above following somewhat similar meth-
ods. Here, during the summer holidays, are
the children crowding our museums at South
Kensington day after day. Can not something
more be done for them, even if we shed a little
dignity in the process?—Nature.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS
The Coccide of Ceylon. By E. Ernest GREEN.

London: Dulau and Co., 1896-1922. Pp. xli

plus 472; 209 plates.

Part I of “The Coccide of Ceylon” ap-
peared in 1896, Part II in 1899, Part III in
1904, Part IV in 1909, and with the appear-
ance of Part V there is completed a work that
is worthy of a place among the classies of

entomology.
The Coecide or seale insects are a group of
almost unsurpassed economic importance.

There is probably no horticulturist who is not
familiar with at least a few of the species and
whose pocketbook is not the lighter as a result
of their activities. The cost of repressing them
is a constant tax upon the horticultural indus- -
tries everywhere, a part, in effect, of the over-
head expense of producing horticultural
products. And the ease with which they are
transmitted from one part of the world to an-
other has resulted in the practically cosmopoli-
tan distribution of many of the most harmful
species together with the frequent introduction
into new regions of others.

So it is that the scale insects stand in need
of the most careful systematic study. But the
minute size of many of the species, the diffi-
culty of obtaining adequate microscopic prep-
arations, and the obseureness of the structures
available for classification have always stood
in the way of such study. Unfortunately these
difficulties have been only too completely re-
flected in the quality of the systematic work
that has been done upon the family. The sys-
tematic work upon this group is in general of
by no means very satisfactory character and is
in large part sadly deficient. Yet to this gen-
eralization “The Coccide of Ceylon” is a most

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

gratifying exception. It stands, indeed, at the
very apex of all the work that has been done
upon the Coccide.

It is not that “The Coccide of Ceylon” is
entirely free from defects. The fact that its
preparation has extended over more than a
quarter of a century precludes this, for since
it was begun there have been radical changes
in our methods and in our standards as well.
Yet throughout it has always stood fully
abreast and even in advance of the best con-
temporaneous work. Above all, the student,
turning to its pages, can identify with relative
certainty the species with which he may be
dealing. With this much rendered possible,
eriticisms of any other features are but sec-
ondary. It is a splendid work, beautifully
illustrated, well arranged and well printed. To
its author all entomologists, whether economic
or not, who are interested in the seale insects
are under an obligation that can but illy be
repaid. For the work has been a labor of love,
its author’s recompense the pleasure in its ac-
complishment.

With technical criticisms, of which there are
some, I am not here concerned. Nor is it nec-
essary to deal with the scope of the work, for
practically all entomologists are familiar with
this from the earlier parts. It is my desire
simply to call attention to the appearance of
the final part and to congratulate the author
upon the completion of a huge task well done.
Its completion clinches his hold upon a posi-
tion that has really long been his, that of the
foremost student of the Coccide.

G. FE. Ferris

STaANFoRD UNIVERSITY, CALIF.

SPECIAL ARTICLES

PHOTOPERIODISM OF WHEAT; A DETER-
MINING FACTOR IN ACCLIMATIZATION
GaRNER and Allard (4), working with several

species of plants, found that normally a plant

could attain the flowering and fruiting stage
only when the length of day was favorable, and
suggest the terms photoperiod and photoperiod-
ism to designate the favorable length of day
and the response of a plant to the relative
length of day and night. They conclude that,

SCIENCE

313

varying with species and variety, there is a
critical photoperiod essential for the initiation
of the fruiting stage of each plant, and that
when this critical photoperiod does not occur
the plant tends to remain vegetative.

In a preliminary experiment, the writer has
found that a proper adjustment of the daily
exposure to light, independently of tempera-
ture, will control the type of growth in the
winter wheat plant and that by regulation of
this factor it is possible to induce the jointing
and the heading stages irrespective of season.
In addition, this experiment has shown that
there is a minimum stimulating photoperiod
for the control of each of these stages of growth
in the winter wheat plant, that for the sueceed-
ing stage not being the same as that for the
preceding, and each photoperiod being, there-
fore, within certain limits eritical for the stage
concerned.

Although factors governing habits of growth,
the distribution and the production of wheat
have been the subject of many studies, the liter-
ature available has not revealed that any have
ever considered, beyond the generalizations of
Garner and Allard, the factors of photoperiod-
ism as having a deciding influence. Circum-
stantial evidence, however, is available, which
on analysis clearly indicates that these factors
are important both with winter and with spring
wheats. Grantham (5), Jardine (6) and
Seivers and Holtz (11) have shown the ten-
dency of winter wheat to a vegetative type of
fall growth and have emphasized that the
amount of this growth is dependent on time
of seeding and available fertility. Gaines (10)
and Neilson-Ehle (7) have found, in certain
localities of the north temperate zone, the win-
ter character to be inheritable as a simple Men-
delian major. The northern limits of the
winter wheat belt in the United States bear a
significant relation to the northern limits of
an active growing season of 150 days (1, 2).
Smith, Root and Blair (3, 8, 12, 13, 14), in
statistical studies of data from Ohio, found
the dominant weather factor for winter wheat
difficult to determine, but all agreed that the
month of March was the critical period during
which the effects of snowfall and temperature
were later most reflected in condition and finally

314

in yields of winter wheat. Apparently, from
their studies, the influences controlling the be-
ginning of the development which determined
final yielding ability of winter wheat occurred
in March, regardless of how favorable growing
conditions were for the rest of the season or
how severe conditions during the preceding
dormant period had been. Schafer and his asso-
ciates report (9) that Hybrid 128 will not head
out when planted later than March 11, and (10)
that Turkey Red will joint in October when
planted in April, while Hybrid 128 will not.
McCall and Wanser (15) have found that
Jones Fife and similar wheats joint early in
the spring, while wheats of the Turkey Red
type do not joint until a later date.

These observations indicate that the winter
habit of wheat is caused by the absence of the
critical stimulus which is essential for the
initiation of the jointing stage. Though the
response to the stimulus may be affected and
altered by temperature and nutritional factors
and, under field conditions, apparently, has
been usually associated with these factors, the
stimulus itself is, nevertheless, independent of
them and for any given locality is controlled
more by date than by current growing condi-
tions. The observations of Schafer and his
associates and of McCall and Wanser indicate
that the date of the occurrence of the stimulus
varies for different varieties, but for any given
variety is fairly constant in a given locality.

In the light of the work of Garner and Allard
and of the results secured by the writer, all of
this evidence indicates, in the case of winter
wheat, the stimulus for jointing to be a critical
photoperiod having a maximum limit. The
passing of this maximum lhmit results in a
spring-sown winter variety failing to joint
until the occurrence of shorter days during the
following fall or succeeding spring. The sea-
son at which jointing then takes place depends
on the oceurrence of the length of day corre-
sponding to the necessary photoperiod and an
accompaniment of temperatures favorable for
growth. In any case, heading, which must be
preceded by jointing, is delayed until the fol-
lowing summer because of the longer day
necessary to start this stage of development.

Although a preliminary experiment is always
restricted in scope, the close agreement between

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

the results of this experiment and the analysis
of the supporting evidence makes possible a
few safe tentative conclusions. The develop-
ment of winter wheat requires a critical photo-
period for jointing and also a separate and
distinct critical photoperiod for heading.
Garner and Allard, working with dicotyledon-
ous plants, mention but one critical photo-
period. Although varying with species and
variety in the intensity of distinction, there
probably are for most monocotyledonous and
some dicotyledonous plants at least two eritical
photoperiods, one for starting culm or stalk
development from the tillering or rosette stage
and another for starting the heading or bud-
ding and blossoming stage.1 The photoperiods
for both responses probably have an optimum
with a maximum and a minimum limit, but
for winter wheat they are independent of each
other, do not overlap and vary with variety.
The northern limits of the distribution of
winter wheat are probably very largely con-
trolled by the relation of the date of the be-
ginning of the active growing season to the
date at which the longest day within the limits
of the critical photoperiod for jointing occurs
in that locality.

While the photoperiods for jointing and
heading do not overlap and are entirely dis-
tinet in the ease of winter wheat, they are not
so distinct in the case of spring wheats. In
the latter group the photoperiod for jointing
is of greater magnitude than in the former,
possibly without a maximum limit, and joint-
ing and heading are possible under more nearly
an identical photoperiodic stimulus. As a
result such varieties when sown in the spring
joint and head the same season. Photoperiod-
ism, therefore, is the key to the distinction be-
tween winter and spring wheats.

Although no published evidence showing the
effects of photoperiodism in the development
of spring wheat is here referred to, there is,
nevertheless, an abundance of available mate-
rial, some of which will be mentioned in a later
detailed report of experimental work now in

1In an article published in Science (June 2,
1922) since the preparation of this paper Garner
and Allard recognize the two photoperiods for
dicotyledonous plants but do not mention or con-
sider monocotyledonous plants.

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922]

progress. This work, an enlargement of the
preliminary experiment, is intended to cover
certain phases of photoperiodism as it affects
varietal adaptation and dronth resistance of
both winter and spring wheats.

Whatever may be the final outcome from the
standpoint of direct application in practical
crop production, there can be no doubt that the
present studies throw an entirely new light on
crop and especially varietal response in a given
locality, and that a knowledge of these factors
will make possible a better and more logical
interpretation of investigations in both crops
and soils and will as well give a more sound
basis for future work in crop adaptation and
_ breeding.

H. M. WanseErR
AGRICULTURAL’ EXPERIMENT STATION,
STATE COLLEGE OF WASHINGTON

BIBLIOGRAPHY

1. Arnold, J. H., and Spafford, R. R.: §°Farm
practices in growing winter wheat,’’? U. S. Dept.
Agr. Year Book, 1919: 126.

2. Baker, O. E., and Strong, H. M.: ‘‘ Arable
land in the United States,’’ U. S. Dept. Agr. Year
Book, 1918: 436.

3. Blair, T. A.: ‘‘A statistical study of weather
factors affecting the yield of winter wheat in
Ohio,’’ Abstract in Hap. Sta. Record, 42: 617,
1919.

4. Garner, W. W., and Allard, H. A.: ‘‘ Effect
of relative length of day and night and other
factors on growth and reproduction in plants,’’
Jour. Agri. Res., 18: 1920.

5. Grantham, A. E.: ‘‘The tillering of winter
wheat,’’ Bul. Del. Agr. Exp. Sta., 117, 1917.

6. Jardine, W. M.: ‘‘Effect of rate and date
of sowing on yield of winter wheat,’’ Jour. Am.
Soe. Agr., 8: 163, 1916.

7. Nielson-Ehle: Abstract in Int. Rev. of Sci-
ence and Practice of Agr., 1917: 233.

8. Root, C. J.: ‘‘Relation of snowfall to yield
of winter wheat,’’ Abstract in Hap. Sta. Record,
42; 321, 1919.

9. Schafer, HE. G., Gaines, HE. F., Barbee, O. E.:
‘Wheat production as influenced by variety, time
of seeding and source of seed,’’ Wn. Agr. Exp.
Sta. Bul. 159: 33, 1921.

10. Schafer, E. G., et al.: Twenty-ninth annual

SCIENCE

315

report (for 1919), Wn. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 155:
28, 1920.
11. Seivers, F. J., and Holtz, Henry: ‘‘The silt
loam soils of eastern Washington and their man-
agement,’’ Wn. Agr. Exp. Sta. Bul. 166: 25, 1922.
12. Smith, J. W.: ‘‘ Agricultural meteorology,’’
Abstract in Hap. Sta. Record, 35: 114, 115, 1916.
13. Smith, J. W.: ‘‘Effect of snow on winter
wheat in Ohio,’’ Abstract in Exp. Sta. Record, 42:
32117 1919.
14. Smith, J. W.: ‘‘Speaking of the weather,’’
U. S. Dept. Agri. Year Book, 1920: 200, 201.
15. McCall, M, A., and Wanser, H. M.: Un-
published report of Adams Branch Station of
Wn. Agri. Exp. Station, 1921.

IMPROVED METHODS IN NEAR INFRA-RED
ABSORPTION STUDY

Some twenty or more years ago Julius,
Donath, Puecianti, Iklé, Coblentz and others
were interested in the study of infra-red ab-
sorption in organic compounds. The appara-
tus they had to work with-at that time made
the study very tedious, and as Coblentz! has
said, “usually after investigating half a dozen
compounds the results have been given to the
public” by the investigator. Using the electric
are, Nernst lamps and Zircon burners as sources
of radiation, rock salt or quartz prisms for
dispersion, and ‘bolometers and radiometers for
the detection of the radiation, these men suc-
ceeded in studying the absorption spectra of a
great many organic compounds even far out
into the infra-red. In fact, the biggest part of
the work was done in the field beyond the so-
called near infra-red, that is, beyond 30,000 A.

But with such comparatively weak and un-
steady sources. of radiation, small dispersion,
and unsatistactory methods for the detection of
this radiation, no high degree of accuracy in
the measurements of absorption bands has been
claimed. During the last twenty years very
little work has been done in this field. Coblentz?
has recently published a bulletin in which he
gives certain data and curves for the absorp-
tion spectra of certain organie oils, both animal.

1W. W. Coblentz: Astrophysical Journal, 20,
1904.

2W. W. Coblentz: Scientific
Bureau of Standards, No. 418.

Paper of the

316

and vegetable oils, in the region of the near
infra-red. In this paper he shows that because
of the great similarity in the spectral curves
of these oils, a study by means of infra-red
absorption does not lead to a detection of adul-
teration of one oil with another.

But the region of the spectrum between the
visible and 30,000 A is filled with character-
istic absorption bands in the ease of organic
compounds, and consequently makes a very
interesting part of the spectrum to study. The
writer is at present studying the absorption of
many carbon compounds in this region by
means of a spectro-thermograph designed by
Professor E. P. Lewis of the University of
California, under whose supervision this work
is being done. There are certain advantageous
features in the construction and use of this
instrument.

The source of radiation is a 108 watt lamp
made with a helix of tungsten wire for a fila-
ment. It has been found that the intensity can
be increased by as much as forty per cent. by
placing a concave mirror of about a ten centi-
meter diameter behind the lamp and focussing
the rays on the slit through the lamp itself.

For dispersion two 30° flint glass prisms
were used. Now flint glass gives a greater dis-
persion in this region than does quartz which
is usually used in near infra-red work. Fur-
thermore, it is almost as transparent as quartz,
the limit of transmission for each being around
30,000 A. The back of the second prism was
silvered and the radiations caused to pass twice
through each prism, thus doubling the disper-
sion. This gives a dispersion of between two
and three times that obtainable with a single
60° quartz prism and between four and five
times that obtained from a similar rock salt
prism. The silyered prism was capable of rota-
tion about the first prism so that the angle
between these was equal to twice the angle of
incidence necessary for minimum deviation of
radiation falling upon the thermopile, which
was used in series with a sensitive Leeds-
Northrup galvanometer to detect the radiation.
This rotation was accomplished by means of a
small thumb-screw which projected through the
black box which enclosed the system of mirrors
and prisms. Thus it was possible to foeus the
eye upon the galvanometer scale and, turning

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1446

the prism, make an approximate analysis of a
given substance in a few minutes.

This rapidity of locating either absorption
bands or emission lines proved to be very help-
ful in the process of calibration of the instru-
ment. Since no indices of refraction were ob-
tainable for the glass prisms, the instrument
was calibrated by observing certain metallic
emission lines and solar absorption bands deter-
mined largely by Paschen with a grating.
Coblentz states that emission lines may be
used in calibrating up to 10,000 A, but it
was found that the following lines could
also be detected when the proper salts were
introduced into the carbon are: Tl, 13,010
A; Na, 18,460 A; Ca, 19,800 A. In lo-.
cating the positions of the solar absorption
bands, sunlight was reflected in from the win-
dow and focussed upon the sht. As the prism
was rotated the galvanometer deflection would
decrease to a minimum in the neighborhood of
an absorption band. By approaching from
both the long and the short wave-length sides a
set of quite consistent values for the corre-
sponding dispersion could be obtained. The
highest calibration point was for the solar ab-
sorption band at 25,000 A.

It has been mentioned in the earlier litera-
ture of the subject that all compounds that have
a carbon atom united directly to a hydrogen
atom have characteristic absorption bands in
the neighborhood of 17,000 A. In this present
work this same band is found, and two others,
at about 11,500 A and 13,800A, appear in every
compound in which there is a C-H group.
Twelve compounds have already been carefully
analyzed, and an approximate determination of
the positions of the absorption maxima has
been made for some fifteen more. There are
very prominent displacements of these absorp-
tion maxima in certain compounds. In ‘some
eases these shifts are toward the shorter wave-
lengths and in other cases toward the longer
wave-lengths. :

The mapping of the spectral curves of cer-
tain groups of compounds is being continued,
and an attempt will be made to ascertain
whether the shifting of absorption maxima fol-
lows any definite laws.

JosppH W. ELuis
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

NEw SERIES 5 ¥ 99 ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1447 Fripay, SEPTEMBER 22, 1922 SINGLE Corres, 15 Ors.

Glass Blown Apparatus

For the past 50 years our shops have been recognized
as National Headquarters for glass blown laboratory
apparatus of all kinds. We are prepared to supply all
regular forms promptly from stock. Special apparatus
according to blue print can usually be supplied in from
four to ten days. Particular attention is directed to the
following items; numbers refer to our ““AA”’ catalog:

PeEpEbeyEEyEee

550—Bunsen Syphon Barometer, graduated in mm. (See Cut)

Megane ch with thermometer and stoppered capillary
tube.
1271/2—Fleming Mercury Sealed Absorption Bulb.
1273/2—Fisher Absorption Bottle.
, 1318—Burettes with Geissler stopcocks according to the speci-
fications of the Bureau of Standards. (See Cut).
1350—Morse Calibrating Burette, set of 3.
Pee ar coee Condenser, triple walls, gives large cooling sur-
ace.
2731/10—Mercury Purifying Funnel. (See Cut).
2796—Soxhlet Extraction Apparatus. On special order, made
of Pyrex glass. This makes the apparatus much more

durable.

3500—Regular Orsat Gas Apparatus, also special beams, col-
lection tubes, etc.

Burrette, acc.
to B. of

Me 3958—Brix hydrometer with thermometer for sugar testing.
BUneeniGy bon We make also hydrometers for testing gasoline and
Barometer other oils, as well as for many other special purposes.

4754—DuPont Nitrometer Outfit.

5202—Freas Conductivity Cell.

5985—Pyrex Retorts, glass stoppered. Made now in sizes up
to 12000 cc. Useful for many purposes.

6531—Apparatus for determining sulfur in oils, A. S. T. M.
method.

7249/3—Van Slyke COy Apparatus. (See Cut).

We make many other forms of apparatus. Full details of any
form of apparatus gladly sent on request.

NEW YORK CITY PITTSBURGH BRANCH
3rd Ave., 18th—19th St. . 4048 Jenkins Arcade
ESTABLISHED 1851

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemicals

Washington, D: C., Display Room, Suite 601, Evening Star Building,

Mercury Pennsylvania Avenue and 11th Street. Van Slyke CO,
Funnel a

Apparatus

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

RECENT ISSUES
IN GEOLOGY

The Briones Formation of Middle
California, by Parker D. Trask.
‘Price, 75 cents. i

Genesis of -the Ores of the Cobalt
District, Ontario, Canada, by Al-
Price, 80

fred R. Whitman.

cents.

Geology of the Cuyamaca Region of
California with special reference
to the origin of the nickeliferous
pyrrhotite, by F. S. Hudson.

Price, $1.25.

—

University of California Press
Berkeley, California.

ISIS

International Review devoted to the
History of Science and Civilization

Edited by GEORGE SARTON, D.Sc.
Associate of the Carnegie Institution

Harvard Library 183, Cambridge, Mass.

The chief feature of Isis is a Critical Bib-
liography of the History and Philosophy of
Science and of the History of Civilization.
The three first volumes (1882 pages) con-
tain about 5,620 bibliographic notes, 312 re-
views and 43 longer papers. Isis is the main
center of information on the History and
Philosophy of Science, and the organ of the
New Humanism. 2 or 3 parts complete a
volume within 12 to 18 months.

Parts 1 and 2 (454 pp.) of Vol. IV. have
appeared. Each volume costs 50 Belgian
francs (about $3) (ed. de luxe, from vol. II
on, 100 francs).

Publisher: WEISSENBRUCH

49 rue du Poincon Bruxelles, Belgium

BOOKS for EXECUTIVES

PAULI—Colloid Chemistry Of The Pro-
teins. The Behaviour of Proteins in
Acid and Alkaline Solution. Illustrated.
Cloth, $2.25.

RICHTER—Organic Chemistry (Vol. Il,
The Carbocyclic Series). Translated
from the 11th German Edition. Cloth,
$8.00, ;

HATSCHEK—The Physics and Chemistry
of Colloids. 4th Edition. Revised.
Cloth, $2.25. The essential facis and

principles.
-CHAMBERLAIN—Textbook Of Organic
Chemistry. Direct connection of the
newest theory auc Industrial Applica-
tion. Cloth, $4.00. —
HACKH—Chemical Reactions and Their
Equations. It Simplifies the Balancing
of all Chemical Equations. Cloth, $1.75.
ROUGIER—Philosophy and the New
Physics. Recent developments of sci-
ence. Cloth, $1275:
MAXTED--Ammonia and the Nitrides.
With special reference to Their Syn-
thesis. Illustrated. Cloth, $2.00.

P. Blakiston’s Son & Co.

Philadelphia, Pa.

BIOMETRIKA VOL. XIV.

Parts I and II have now been issued.

Price 30/ -++ 2./ postage.

The subscription to Vol. XIV is 44 shillings
including postage.

This journal will now be issued from the Bio-
metric Laboratory University College, London,
England, and checks should be made payable to -
Professor Karl Pearson.

Purchasers not paying advanced subscriptions
can only be sold copies at past prices.

Sets of issued volumes are now scarce and the
price of a complete series, Vols. I to XIII, is for
the present £30; in wrappers, or together with -
postage, £32. 12. 0. Bound series including
cartage £40. i Z =
Sr

MUSHROOM BOOK

and large colored chart
postpaid for $2.00

Specially prepared for beginners who wish to
learn the edible and poisonous kinds.
Dr. W. A. Murrill, N. Y. Botanical Garden,
NEW YORK CITY
jos Ee
SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNICAL PAPERS AND
THESES typed with exceptional care and neat-

| ness. Editorial supervision by one thoroughly

experienced in such work. Especial attention to
uniformity of style, exactness in copying sci-
entific terms, nomenclature, synonyms, biblio-
graphies, etc. Estimates furnished on application
to Scientific Typing Service, 123 Montague St.,
Brooklyn, N. Y.

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

; THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annyal Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922 No. 1447

Vou. LVI

CONTENTS
The Department of Medicine at the Peking
Union Medical College: Dr. Francis W.
PEABODY
A First Course in General Chemistry: Dr.
WILHELM SEGERBLOM.......02-::-..cc-ccc-ceeceecoeeone-- 320

The Physico-chemical Mechanism of Mutation
and Evolution: DR. JEROME ALEXANDER.... 323

317

Scientific Events:
Animal Experiments in Great Britain; Re-
port of the Engineering Council on Work-
Periods; Science Section of the Association
of College and Preparatory Schools of the
Middle States and Maryland; The Herschel
Centenary Pilgrimage; The International

PUG CologicaUiCongr.ess. ss s.2-.-sceccceeeseeeeceeeo oe conan 326
CVENTITICMINIOUES 1am, NG WSi a neces eke ecennnne 330
University and Educational Notes ............-.-.-- 334

Discussion and Correspondence:
Tingitide or Tingide@: Dr. W. J. HoLuANnp.
The Glaciation of the Cordilleran Region:
THoMAS Large. A Suggestion to Zoo-
geographers: EMMETT REID DuNnN. Clin-
kertill—A new Metamorphic Rock: L. P.

Dove. The Homing of a Dog: W. D.

TETAVR Ri Vanaen etree eters occas Ss tbc eee ate wircees cee oee oe 334
Quotations:

Controlling Research Endowments...............- 339

Scientific Books:
Noyes and Sherrill’s Advanced Course of
Instruction in Chemical Principles: Pro-
FESSOR J. Livineston R. Mor@an................ 340
Special Articles:
Sand Drown, a Chlorosis of Tobacco: Dr.
W. W. Garner, J. E. McMourtrey, E. G.
Moss. Transference of the Bean Mosaic
Virus by Macrosiphum solanifolii: Ray
Neuson. The Eatension of the X-ray
into the Ultraviolet Spectrum: Dr. Orto
STUBUMAN,W IR. -onece seen Onenmaman eee UT, 341

THE DEPARTMENT OF MEDICINE
AT THE PEKING UNION MEDI-
CAL COLLEGE

THE introduction of western medicine into
China has been due, thus far, largely to the
therapeutic success of surgery and the various
surgical specialties. Internal medicine has
lagged a long distance behind surgery both in
the attention which it has received in the mis-
sion hospitals and in the extent to which it
has influenced the Chinese people. One fre-
quently hears it said that the Chinese “like
western surgery, but they do not care for
western medicine,” and a corollary is that for
‘Gnternal disease” they prefer to rely on the
native system of practice. The fact is, how-
ever, that our western internal medicine has
not yet been given a fair chance to demonstrate
its worth. Practitioners of western medicine
in China—for the most part, of course, mis-
sionaries—have found themselves confronted
by an enormous number of surgical problems,
many of them presenting direct emergencies,
and it is natural that these cases should have
received the first attention. Traumatic inju-
ries, infections and large superficial tumors can
often be easily and quickly alleviated, and
their cure produces a profound impression on

_ the patient and on his friends, but the diag-

nosis and treatment of strictly medical dis-
eases 1s much more time consuming and the
results are usually far less obvious and striking.
With the days so full of pressing surgical
problems and with the frequent lack of the
facilities for modern medical diagnosis, it is
not surprising that, with few exceptions, the
medical patients have received somewhat scant
attention. Even among the lower classes the
Chinese often manifest great power of dis-
crimination and an appreciation of careful,
thorough attention, and if western internal
medicine is to make its way with them it must
be presented in the best possible manner.

318

Under these circumstances, it is of interest to
watch the development at the Peking Union
Medical College of a medical clinie which in

its personnel and equipment would take high

rank on any continent..

The Peking Union Medical College moved
into its new quarters in the summer of 1921,
and the department of medicine, with its wards,
laboratories, offices and out-patient depart-
ment, is centralized in the hospital and directly
connected with the buildings of the medical
school proper. It thus has the great advan-
tage of being organically connected with the
laboratories of the preclinical sciences, so that
close association between clinical and_preclin-
ical workers is facilitated. In addition, the
department of medicine is only a few steps
from the library, which contains a considerable
and well selected assortment of books as well
as files of all the more important scientific
journals. The medical wards occupy three
floors in a large pavilion and contain 75 beds,
only about half of which are now in use, in
large and small rooms. In addition, there is
an emergency isolation ward of six beds, and
there are also medical patients, both Chinese
and foreign, in the private pavilion. The gen-
eral arrangements of the wards are exactly
similar to what one finds in the best modern
hospitals in America.

The nursing is at present carried on by a
staff of Chinese and foreign graduate nurses,
with Chinese male nurses under a woman
graduate in the male wards, but a nurses’ train-
ing school, based on the highest American
ideals and standards, has been established,

which admits only women as pupils, and it is ©

hoped that before long most of the ward work
can be carried on by the pupil nurses. Con-
nected with each medical ward is a laboratory
for routine clinical examinations. Adjoining
the medical wards, on the ground floor, is the
medical out-patient department with its wait-
ing room, laboratory, and about a dozen rooms
for the examination and treatment of patients,
while on the two floors above are the offices,
laboratories and class rooms of the department
of medicine. Ample quarters and complete
equipment are here provided for special study
and investigation by the members of the de-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

partment. Adjoining the office of the pro-
fessor of medicine, on the third floor, are
laboratories devoted to chemistry; and next to
the associate professor’s office are the labora-
tories for bacteriology. Across the hall is the
laboratory of neuropathology, and an ample
suite of rooms for the electrocardiograph,
which is, in addition, wired to all the wards in
the hospital. On the second floor is the lab-
oratory of clinical pathology, with a large room
for class instruction and smaller rooms in
which the bacteriology and serology for the
hospital is carried out, other laboratories for
special workers, and a spacious room for
clinical demonstrations. Ail the members of the
staff of the department of medicine devote
their time exclusively to hospital work and
teaching, and the staff is large enough to allow
each one to have fairly adequate time for
study and investigation. The professor of
medicine and chief of ‘the medical service of
the hospital is Dr. F. C. McLean (M.D. Rush
Medical School) and the associate professor is
Dr. O. H. Robertson (M.D. Harvard Medical
School), both of whom were formerly connect-
ed with the Rockefeller Institute. Dr. Andrew
H. Woods (M.D. University of Pennsylvania),
who was formerly on the staff of the Canton
Christian College, is associate professor of
neurology. The other members of the depart-
ment are Dr. C. W. Young, Dr. J. H. Korns,
Dr. H. J. Smyly and Dr. R. H. P. Sia. The
house staff is organized with a resident physi-
cian, three assistant resident physicians (at
present all Chinese graduates of American
medical schools) and a group of interns who
are for the most part graduates of medical
schools in China. When the new Peking Union
Medical College has been longer in existence
the majority of the interns will be graduates
of this school because a fifth, or intern year, is
required for the degree. Since the standards
of instruction of the school are analogous to
those of the best institutions in America, the
graduates will make highly satisfactory interns.
In the year 1921-22 there were only three
classes under instruction. Instruction of a
fourth year class will begin this fall.

Peking has a temperate climate, hotter than
New York in summer, considerably colder than

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

New York in winter, and usually very dry.
One does not find here, therefore, the strictly
tropical diseases, except as they may be im-
ported from central and south China. In gen-
eral, the diseases usually met with in the med-
ical wards are less different than one might
expect from what is seen in the United States.
Tuberculosis, and especially pulmonary tuber-
culosis, is very common. There are many acute
infections of the respiratory tract, but lobar
pneumonia is probably somewhat less common
than in northern United States. Typhoid
fever, in spite of much that is said about the
Chinese having an inherited or acquired im-
munity to it, is common and the mortality is
about what we expect in America. Syphilis
abounds in all its manifestations. It has been
repeatedly stated that syphilis of the central
nervous system is rare among the Chinese, but
more careful studies have disproved this point,
and the extraordinarily interesting neurological
clinic in Peking contains its full quota of
syphilitic cases. Dysentery, both bacillary and
ameebic, occurs with great frequency in the
summer and autumn, and malaria, usually the
tertian form, is not uncommon. Scarlet fever
and small pox are seen often; relapsing fever
and typhus fever are not at all unusual; and
leprosy is sometimes seen. The infection which
appears most often, however, and which is at
the same time new to those of us educated in
America, is kala-azar. Every patient with a
large spleen is suspected of having kala-azar,
and four to six patients undergoing treatment
in the wards is not unusual. There are many
eases of acute and chronic nephritis, similar to
what we seen in the west, but one gets the
impression that instances of essential hyper-
tension are far less common in China than in
America. Simple goitre is endemic in parts
of the country around Peking and one sees
enormous tumors, but exophthalmiec goitre,
while it occurs, is rather strikingly unusual.
Diabetes, which was also formerly held to be
very rare in China, is found quite frequently
if routine examinations for sugar are made, but
it usually occurs in patients past middle age
and runs typically a mild course, the glycosuria
disappearing with only slight alteration of diet.
Heart disease is common, and the types met

SCIENCE

319

with are usually the chronic myocardial cases
in older people, or cases on a syphilitic basis
with an aortitis and perhaps a lesion of the
aortic valve. Acute rheumatic fever is dis-
tinetly uncommon in Peking and as a result
rheumatic heart disease is comparatively rarely
seen, Cases of beri-beri come to the clinic
oceasionally, but they almost always occur in
patients who have come from the south, for the
disease does not seem to be indigenous in
North China. Neoplasms, benign and malig-
nant, of all varieties are common and one sees
many of them in stages that are more advanced
than we are accustomed to nowadays in the
west. A cirrhosis of the liver with ascites, said
to occur characteristically in farmers, is another
interesting and new type of disease entity.
Finally, in addition to many eases of organic
neurological disease, there are numerous pa-
tients with all sorts of neuroses and psychoses.
In general, therefore, the medical clinic in
Peking is marked particularly by the great
variety of disease. One finds most of the dis-
eases that we are accustomed to see in America,
and in addition a good many new types.
What makes the clinic especially stimulating
and interesting, however, is the possibility of
studying the cases carefully. The number of
hospital beds available for medical patients is
not nearly sufficient to allow all those who
apply to the out-patient department and who
are in need of institutional care, to be ad-
mitted, and a careful selection has to be made.
Those who are particularly in need of hospital
treatment are, of course, immediately referred
to the wards, no matter what they are suffering
from, but under other circumstances the prin-
ciple which determines whether or not a pa-
tient shall be admitted depends on the fact that
the hospital is essentially a teaching institution.
The cases taken into the wards are, therefore,
chosen in large part because they are particu-
larly suitable for teaching purposes or because
they offer problems for special investigation.
The result of this method of selection, which is
determined by the size and character of the
hospital, is a medical clinie of unusually inter-
esting cases. All of the patients are studied
in great detail by the house staff and in many
instances special observations are made by

320

members of the senior staff who may be con-
cerned with the problems presented by indi-
vidual patients. The various aspects of the
eases are then discussed at the daily visits
when all the members of the medical depart-
ment join the house staff in the wards. In
addition to these exercises, of a strictly clinical
nature, other opportunities are provided to
enable the men to keep in touch with the work
which is being done by their colleagues in
Peking and elsewhere in the medical world.
On Saturday mornings the whole staff meets
for an hour in the laboratories while one of the
members talks to them about his researches, or
about some of the broader fields with which
he is in close touch; once a fortnight the Med-
ical Society meets for the more formal pre-
sentation of papers; and at a similar interval
the “Review Club” discusses special topics from
the medical literature. The fact that the fac-
ulty of the medical school is so large (about
forty members, besides assistants in clinics and
laboratories), that so much progressive scien-
tific work is being carried on in all depart-
ments, and the relations between the depart-
ments are so intimate and harmonious, makes
it almost impossible for one to be a member of
the staff and fall by the professional wayside.
To many people in America, China may seem
to be remote and Peking an outpost of western
civilization, but to those who know the situa-
tion the Peking Union Medical College is pro-
gressing hand in hand with the foremost med-
ical schools of the world on the frontier of
scientific medicine.
Francis W. PEasopy
Boston Ciry HosprraL

A FIRST COURSE IN GENERAL
CHEMISTRY!

Tue opportunity to take part in a discus-
sion on the above topic is ‘highly appreciated,
particularly because during the past twenty
years I have had an exceptional opportunity to
try out certain ideas relating to the teaching of
general chemistry to first year students at the
Phillips Exeter Academy. Since Dr. Gordon
stated that I could confine the discussion either

1 Paper read before the American Chemical
Society at its meeting in April.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

to content or method or both I shall probably
avail myself to the limit of this proviso.
Since my main criticism of the majority of
papers thus presented thas been that the state-
ments have been too general, and that there
has been too little of what was definite and
capable of being carried away by the listener
and put into immediate practice, perhaps I
may be allowed to speak rather personally in
parts, and to mention existing texts by name.

There stand before me on the desk fourteen
of the more modern texts from which the sec-
ondary school teacher must usually choose the
one to use with his classes. From these, three
must reluctantly be dropped out of our con-
sideration. The excellent “Text-book of Chem-
istry,” by W. A. Noyes, is designed for use
with college students, although it is so written
as to be suitable for college students who have
had no chemistry. As I interpret the subject
before us to refer to the first year student in
chemistry during his period of preparation for
college, we must consider the large difference
in the mental attitude of the student towards
his subject manifested in the last years of sec-
ondary school and in the early years of college.
Vivian’s “Every-day Chemistry” and “Chem-
istry and Its Relation to Daily Life,” by
Kahlenberg and Hart, must be laid aside be-
cause, although they are designed for use in
secondary schools, they are adapted particu-
larly to students of agriculture and home eco-
nomics. Students, should, however, have ac-
cess to these two texts which show successfully
how live and every-day a subject chemistry is.

In this connection it may be interesting to
note that at a recent meeting of the New Eng-
land Association of Chemistry Teachers a text-
book survey was made. Of those present about
one third used McPherson and Henderson’s
“Hlementary Study of Chemistry,’’ about one
third used “Elementary Principles of Chem-
istry,’ by Brownlee and Others, while the re-
maining one third were divided among McFar-
land’s ‘Practical Elementary Chemistry,”
Black and Conant’s “Practical Chemistry” and
Newell’s “Chemistry” in about the ratio of
2:2:1, respectively. I shall have occasion to
refer again to these five books, as well as inci-
dentally to the other six before me.

I have never been able to understand why

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

practically all texts written for the beginner
in chemistry start in with oxygen, hydrogen,
the gas laws, and water, to be followed soon
with atoms, molecules, symbols, formulas and
equation writing. It has always seemed to me
more logical to start, not with gases, but with
some solids, such as metals, with which the
student may have had some slight acquaintance
before entering the class. It is my belief that
the ordinary student can at first get more
tangible results from the more tangible sub-
stances, and that introducing him from the
start to gases which he can hardly see, smell,
taste, or handle is likely to discourage him
from the start, particularly if these introduc-
tory substances are tangled up with that bug-
bear to so many students—the gas laws. <A
splendid opportunity is lost to tie the subject
from the beginning in the student’s mind to
things that he has handled, or can handle,
easily in every-day life.

My convictions were so strong that some
years ago I worked out a scheme of experi-
mentation in which the student started with
such common metals as copper, zine and iron,
and followed these with magnesium, phos-
phorus and mercury. After a rather full
study of the properties of the elements them-
selves, heating them in air introduced him to
the subjects of oxidation and combustion.
Without going into details, I might say that
the first ninety experiments led him through
sulfur, carbon and chlorine and the acids
formed from these, the analysis and synthesis
of water, and then sodium, potassium and eal-
cium and their common compounds in such a
way that each experiment grew naturally out
of those preceding it and led up to an investi-
gation of a (to him) unknown substance,
namely, saltpeter, which he investigated by
means of sulfurie acid and by appropriate ex-
periments on the distillate, with the result that
by this procedure he determined for himself
the composition of both saltpeter and nitric
acid. All of this work was completed without
the mention of atom or molecule and without
a symbol or a formula. It is my belief that
the performing of these ninety experiments
revealed to the student the methods of thought
used by the chemical investigator in attacking

SCIENCE

b21

his problem—the same method that he (the
student) should use on a small scale in solving
his own difficulties. I tried in this way to
teach the student how to think his own way
out of his difficulties.

You will probably be asking if no equations
were used in these experiments. Yes, there
were—the kind of equation that McPherson
and Henderson hint at in their chapters on
oxygen and hydrogen in both of their texts.
Newell, Brownlee, Black and Conant and some
others use the same device to a limited extent,
but I developed that form of equation writing
so that instead of using the names of the com-
pounds with pluses and arrows, the student
early got into the habit of representing each
chemical reaction by an equation in which each
compound was represented by the names of
the elements which they had discovered that
compound to contain, each compound being
enclosed in a set of brackets. By this method
the students acquired a very personal and first-
hand acquaintance with the behavior of many
chemicals with each other, and they got a very
good conception, based upon actual laboratory
work, that certain compounds contained such
and such things, not because the formula was,
for instance, Na,SO,, not because the book said
so, but because they had proved it themselves.
It must be admitted that such an attitude in the
student’s mind is not to be scoffed at. The
main question that arises is: “Have we time
nowadays for such a method, or is the subject
so big that we must present the material in a
pretabulated and almost in a_ predigested
form?” °

Of course this set of ninety experiments was
simply introductory to text matter on the
theory in chemistry with experiments to illus-
trate the laws and principles. Then came sym-
bols and formulas and their use in equation
writing, and finally considerable descriptive
chemistry studied in the light of present the-
oretical conceptions, but with the spirit of the
inductive method still an unconscious guide.

It is only fair to say that in those years each
student performed probably 150 or more ex-
periments, and that although it was my opinion
that he was being taught chemistry rather than
a text-book, the school year was not long

322

enough in which to prepare him by this method
for the examination set by the college entrance
examination board, although these same stu-
dents had little or no trouble in passing the
Harvard chemistry paper as set at that time.
As the business of our school is to fit students
for the college examinations it will be evident
that by working out this little piece of educa-
tional research I was sacrificing much and I
reluctantly had to decide to replace my own
text with one of the other texts already men-
tioned. But I satisfied myself that the chem-
ical instruction as ordinarily practiced was
susceptible of considerable improvement and
that in my own mind I was on the right track.

As I look back at the experience now I sus-
pect I overdid the laboratory side of the
scheme, and it seems plausible that an abbre-
viated and modified presentation following my
general outline might perhaps lead to a more
generally accepted method of presenting our
subject. I have gone into some detail on this
method, not because I think it might offer the
eventual solution, but incidentally to show
what has been done and primarily as a protest
against the stereotyped method of plunging
the beginner into the intangibility of gases.

Bradbury’s “Inductive Chemistry” is the
only text I have seen that approximates the
method I have outlined. This book starts the
student on sulfur, leads on through compounds
of sulfur with some familiar metals to some
metals themselves, and then takes up carbon
as an example of a non-metallic solid; he loses
out, however, by making all this textual
instead of the basis for laboratory work. Lest
I give a wrong impression of this book let me
add that succeeding pages deal with oxides,
atomic theory, hydrogen compounds, the
sodium group, the chlorine group, and oxy-
acids and their salts.

The student should certainly have a clear
conception of the terms and phrases he uses
in talking about chemistry, but I doubt very
much if the extreme niceties of definition and
fine drawings of line that characterize Alexan-
der Smith’s books are likely to appeal to the
beginner, however much the teacher may ad-
mire these qualities.

Blanchard and Wade’s “Foundations of
Chemistry” is a valuable addition to elemen-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

tary chemistry literature, and agreeably attrac-
tive, too, but I always lay it down feeling
sorry that so many things are not there. I
have never been able to get really enthusiastic
over Hessler and Smith’s “Hssentials of Chem-
istry”; the directions for the laboratory work
look more satisfactory than the text itself.
Perhaps the too frequent use of fine print
leaves the impression that much of the material
presented is not of prime importance. Dull’s
“Hssentials of Modern Chemistry” strikes
closer home. It makes me wish I were a stu-
dent again and just beginning chemistry,
although he too starts in with oxygen, hydro-
gen and water, and that conflicts with my
pedagogical ideas.

For several years now we have been using
at Exeter Brownlee’s text, but we tie up with
it McPherson and Henderson’s “Laboratory
Manual,” as we consider this manual better
worded for and better suited to the elementary
student.

The chemistry syllabus of the college en-
trance examination board has been a valuable
aid in indicating to secondary school teachers
what topics should be covered in the first year’s
course. It has been noted by some teachers,
however, that those who set the paper some-
times seem to feel that the paper they set
should touch in some way on almost every
topic in the syllabus. This fact, together with
the large number of topics in the syllabus,
make it necessary for the teachers to spend the
whole year covering the topics in the syllabus.
If a majority of the colleges could agree to be
satisfied with a smaller number of topics but
have these covered more thoroughly, perhaps
the board would revise the chemistry syllabus
accordingly. This would be a boon to many
teachers in that they would have time to cover
the essential parts more thoroughly and would
have a little time left to dwell upon such spe-
cial topics as they find appealing to their
classes or appropriate to the localities where
they teach. I feel sure that secondary teachers
may be depended upon not to take advantage
of such diminution in requirements. Those
who might be thus guilty could with advantage
to the profession be eliminated.

Elementary chemistry teachers are much
indebted to the college men who have written

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

chemistry texts for them and for the vast
amount of time and thought they have spent
in the preparation thereof. I often wonder,
however, if the college teacher who lives and
works among college students and does some
research on the side can be expected to guage
the needs of the secondary student and to put
himself in the place of the secondary school
teacher. If such a college man could have an
opportunity to fill the position of a secondary
school teacher of chemistry for a period of say
five years, and have to make his living thereby,
T’d welcome a text he might produce. Or
must we wait till the profession of chemistry
teaching in secondary schools has become suffi-
ciently established to attract men of the requi-
site scholarship, knowledge of chemistry,
acquaintance with what the colleges should re-
quire for entrance, and above all a close knowl-
edge of the mental equipment of students of
secondary school age before we can expect a
solution of the problem: “What should be
taught in first year chemistry and how should
it be presented?”
WILHELM SEGERBLOM
PHILuirs ExereR ACADEMY

THE PHYSICO-CHEMICAL MECHAN-
ISM OF MUTATION AND
EVOLUTION

It is the general rule in biology that
descendants resemble parents, and that a
parent organism can not pass on to offspring
a factor which the parent did not receive from
the germ-plasm of its immediate progenitors.
Many apparent exceptions to this general rule
have been traced to the existence in the parent
gametes of recessive factors, which, while sup-
pressed in the parent, may be liberated again
in the offspring. Whether we accept the view
of Darwin that large differences can represent
the summation of small differences, or the more
probable view of Bateson and others, that mu-
tation or variation is a definite physiological
event, no satisfactory explanation has been
given as to the origin or source of these excep-
tions to the general rule of resemblance,
although they constitute the steps by which
evolution haltingly proceeds.

The crying need that we must find a chem-

SCIENCE

323

ical, physical or physico-chemical basis for
mutation or variation has been voiced by many.
Thus in his address before the British Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science (Aus-
tralia, 1914, reprinted in Smithsonian Report,
1915, pp. 359-394), Sir William Bateson says:
“Hvery theory of evolution must be such as
to accord with the facts of physies and chem-
istry, a primary necessity to which our prede-
cessors paid small heed. ... Of the physies
and chemistry of life we know next to nothing.
Somehow the characters of living things are
bound up in properties of colloids, and are
largely determined by the chemical powers of
enzymes, but the study of these classes of
matter has only just begun. Living things are
found by simple experiment to have powers
undreamt of, and who knows what may be
behind?”

Recently R. §. Lilliet (Scrpncn, 51, 525,
1920) has stressed the importance of physieco-
chemical investigation of protoplasm, and
Alexander Forbes (‘Sctence, 52, 331, 1920) has
called for closer cooperation between physicists
and biologists in attacking biological problems.

An attempt will be made here to outline cer-
tain basic physico-chemical principles which
affect the formation, development, growth and
reproduction of living things, and to point out
how it is possible for variation in some of the
factors therein involved to account for im-
portant and transmissible variations or muta-
tions in individual organisms.

At the outset let it be stated that no mys-
terious or special “vital force” will be evoked,
but that the well-known forces that control
inanimate matter seem quite sufficient for the
purpose.

In nature, both animate and inanimate, the
following basic factors tend to produce sym-
metrical orientation or aggregation: (1)
Crystallization; (2) Diffusion, as in the forma-
tion of Liesegang’s rings, agate, ete.; (3) Elec-
trie or magnetic fields of force; (4) Harmoni-
ous vibration as of air, water, ete. We here
disregard mere chance and the conscious ar-
rangement by man.

1See also Lillie’s interesting papers in Biolog-
tical Bulletin, 1917-1919, and Scientific Monthly,
February, 1922.

324

The main factors modifying the erystalliza-
tion of pure substances are: (1) Concentra-
tion; (2) Temperature; (3) Pressure; (4)
Agitation; (5) The presence of other sub-
stances, especially of colloids, which may pro-
foundly modify erystal forms by protective
action; (6) Iso-colloidism. Some substances
haye the power of interfering with their own
erystallization, because a portion, which first
reaches the colloidal state, then protects the
balance.

Deviations from normal crystalline forms
produced by the presence of colloids are usu-
ally symmetrical, but may not appear crystal-
line. Changes in the nature or degree of dis-
persion of the colloid, or in its percentage,
mixtures of colloids, variations in salt or H-ion
concentration of the solution, must all have an
efiect on the resultant quasi-crystals. Enzymes
may, of course, entirely change the nature of
the colloid. The species-specificity of proteins
seems to be maintained by degenerating food
protein to simpler forms (polypeptids and
amino-acids) and then building up the specific
proteins from these.

Among the factors influencing diffusion,
especially in gels, are the chemical nature and
particle size of the gel, and the concentration
and nature of the diffusing solution. Liese-
gang has pointed out that “enzoon,’ which has
been considered to be the fossilized remains of
primitive organisms, is due to the phenomenon
that bears his name—the rhythmic banding re-
sulting from diffusion in gels. In his chapter
on “Growth, Metamorphoses and Development”
Bechhold~ (“Colloids in Biology and Medi-
cine,” trans. by J. G. M. Bullowa, p. 252 et
seg.. D. Van Nostrand Co., 1920) refers to
some of the remarkable diffusion figures and
osmotic forms produced by F. EH. Runge and
by Stéphane Leduc, some of which resemble
alge, fungi, seaweed, etc., and even show a
cellular microstructure. While pointing. out
the great differences between these formations
and the organized structures they simulate,
Bechhold says: “The physical forces which
produced these inorganic formations are the
same as those which produce the growth and
configuration of organized material mem-
branes, osmotic pressure, diffusion.”

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

Differences in diffusion speed mean varia-
tions in concentration that may affect the ac-
tion of the enzymes, for, as T. B. Robertson
showed, these may work analytically or syn-
thetically, depending on the concentration.

A preliminary note of this character can not
consider all of the points above referred to, and
will therefore be limited mainly to a brief dis-
cussion of one of the most important factors
controlling the form of organisms, namely, the
influence of colloids on crystallization, and the
changes in form that may be expected when
the colloids are changed or the erystalizing sub-
stances varied.

Perhaps the most familiar instance of modi-
fied crystallization is to be found in the delicate
frost tracery on window panes, the forms being
probably influenced by the glass (itself a col-
loid) or by substances adsorbed at its surface.
The writer has pointed out the powerful influ-
ence exerted by colloids such as gelatin, gum
arabie and albumin on crystallization (Kolloid
Zeit., 4, 86, 1909), and R. E. Liesegang, look-
ing at the question from the opposite stand-
point, has described the power of ecrystalloids
to give a form to colloidal jellies (Kolloid
Zeit., 7, 96, 1910). It may be said that with -
different salts or combinations of salts, various
colloids or combinations of colloids, and yaria-
tions in concentrations, temperature and speed
of evaporation, will produce characteristic and
generally reproducible forms on a microscope
slide. A characteristic form of sodium chloride
is a four pointed star with fern-lke arms
which cross at a slight angle.

A few slides made with solutions of common
salts such as NaCl, MgSO,, Na,SO,, ete., con-
taining from 0.5 to 50 per cent. of gum arabic
or gelatin (figured on the basis of the dry salt)
will illustrate what is meant. When a drop of
the mixed solution is allowed to dry on the
slide without cover glass, changes of concen-
tration and temperature occur, giving a field
that changes progressively from rim to center
of the drop. A solution of one part sodium
chloride, one part sodium carbonate (dry) and
one tenth part gum arabic or gelatin in ten
parts of water, when dried, shows in some part
of the field a “flowering plant,” with graceful
stems and characteristic four-petaled flowers.

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

To see that a marked change may be pyro-
duced by modifying the colloidal state of the
protective substance, a slide was made with a
solution containing egg albumen as the colloid.
The solution was then heated until the albumen
began to show a milkiness, another slide was
made, and after drying was compared with the
first unheated specimen. The difference in
crystallization is considerable.

Unusual crystalline forms such as sphero-
erystals and sheaf-like groups which are so
often seen in the erystals of substances derived
from organisms, are very often consequent
upon the protective action of some colloid from
which they are not entirely purified. Another
curious occurrence must be mentioned here,
which may be termed auto-protection because
it is due to iso-colloidism. Before reaching
the ordinary visibly crystalline state, particles
of every substance must pass through the col-
loidal zone, and the particles first reaching that
state may interfere with the normal erystalliza-
tion of the rest. Thus ammonium salts, even
without the addition of protective colloids, are
prone to assume feathery or fern-like forms.
The phenomenon is marked in the oleates and
is probably the underlying cause of the forma-
tion of myelins, although their formation is
fostered by such lipoid protectors as cholestrin.
According to J. G. Adami (Harvey Society
Lecture, 1906), if certain simple soaps be dis-
solved by warming on a slide with water and
then allowed to cool, they may show upon
examination in the polarizing microscope a
perfect rain of doubly refracting spherules,
which,. depending on the nature of the soap,
may last for hours or days or else immediately
give place to a brilliant white layer of formed
crystalline plates. The fluid erystals of O.
Lehmann are probably examples of auto-pro-
tection, and W. B. Hardy, E. Hatschek and
others have described substances which form
unstable gels that soon become erystalline.

An indication that the colloidal state is
anomalous is given by the fact that, while the
sun attracts microscopic particles, and even
erystalloidally dispersed particles, it selectively
repels colloidally dispersed particles, as in the
tails of comets (See J. Alexander, “Colloid
Chemistry”’).

SCIENCE

825

The bio-colloids are so readily affected by
salts, H-ion concentration (effective reaction),
temperature, actinic (sun’s rays) and traumatic
(shaking, mechanical injury) effects, that it is
more surprising that plants and animals
should breed true, than that they should show
variations. Therefore, although individuals
may be mueh affected by such changes during
their lives, it is evidently a rare occurrence
that these changes are registered in the germ
plasm by which alone they may be transmitted
to offspring. The specificity of the germ plasm
is evidently guarded by many factors, among
which seem to be selective adsorption and dif-
ferential diffusion of dissolved substances
through its protecting walls or membranes.
Nevertheless unusual influences must occasion-
ally change it materially without destroying it,
and along this line experiment may be directed.
It may be that the germ plasm can be affected
through the somatoplasm, as well as by direct
means. And of all the variations, in nature
only the beneficial changes survive.

With highly developed organisms the com-
plications are enormous. We are just begin-
ning to realize the importance of enzymes,
hormones, internal secretions (endocrines),
essential “impurities” like the vitamines,
iodine and manganese, and the necessity of a
sufficient variety of food to include enough of
each of the essential amino-acids, outside of
mere fat-carbohydrate-protein-calorie figures.
Therefore, even if experiments with higher
forms of life may yield more numerous results,
it may be better to begin with the simpler
forms where the results may be more readily
traced to their causes. Nor must it be imagined
that this will prove an easy matter; for filter-
able bacteria, invisible in the ordinary micro-
seope and not resolvable by the ultra-micro-
scope if visible in it, whose size is of the order
of some of the protein molecules, are still capa-
ble of ‘breeding true.

Consideration should be especially given to
conditions that are apt to be met with in nature
or which may have existed in geologic times.
The effect of small quantities of substances
such as manganese in plants and iodine in
mammals should not be overlooked. Even
strong acidity or alkalinity may be produced

326

by voleaniec action or by differential diffusion
in the earth or in unorganized matter. The
slime of some snails carries as much as three
per cent. of free sulphuric acid. Temperature,
light, water and CO, are potent factors.

While the actual experimental work is
largely the province of biologists, they will
gain much both in direction and interpretation
by close consultation with the chemists and
physicists.

JEROME ALEXANDER
RIDGEFIELD, CONN.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
ANIMAL EXPERIMENTS IN GREAT BRITAINI

THE annual return showing the number and
nature of experiments on living animals during
the year 1921 gives a list of all “registered
places” where such experiments may be per-
formed, the names of all persons who hold
licenses during 1921, together with the regis-
tered place for which the license was in force
and the number and nature of experiments per-
formed. In the year 1921 twenty new places
were registered for the performance of experi-
ments and thirteen places were removed from
the register. The total number of licensees was
812, of whom 219 performed no experiments.
The experiments may be divided into two main
groups, according to whether or not an anes-
thetic was used. It should be noted that the
granting of a license only permits the licensee
to perform experiments under an anesthetic,
for the law declares “the animal must, during
the whole of the experiment, be under the
influence of some anesthetic of sufficient power
to prevent the animal feeling pain; and the
animal must, if the pain is likely to continue
after the effect of the anesthetic has ceased, or
if any serious injury has been inflicted on the
animal, be killed before it recovers from the
influence of the anesthetic which has been ad-
ministered.” To perform other experiments or
even to observe the subsequent course of experi-
ments undertaken with an anesthetic the
licensee must be possessed of special certafi-
cates. Special certificates are also necessary
for experiments on dogs, cats, horses, asses,
mules and other large animals. The total num-
ber of experiments with anesthetics was 8,165,

1 The British Medical Journal.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

and of these 2,053 were simple inoculations into
the skin of guinea-pigs, which were anesthe-
tized in order to keep the animals motionless
during the introduction of a minute quantity
of the fluid to be tested for the purpose of
standardization. Of the remaining 6,112 ex-
periments, comprising all the cases in which
any serious operation was involved, 2,751 were
performed under the license alone, and were
subject therefore to the restrictions above men-
tioned. In all operations, with the exception of
a few special cases dealing with the efficiency
of antiseptics, the law demands that the opera-
tion shall be performed antiseptically so that
the healing of wounds shall, as far as possible,
take place without pain. If the antiseptie pre-
cautions fail, and suppuration occurs, the ani-
mal must be killed. The following “pain con-
dition” is attached to the license under special
certificates: “If an animal, after and by reason
of the said experiments, is found to be suffer-
ing pain which ds either severe or is likely to
endure, and if the main result of the experi-
ment has been attained, the animal shall forth-
with be painlessly killed. If an animal, after
and by reason of the said experiments, is found
to be suffering severe pain which is likely to
endure, such animal shall forthwith be pain-
lessly killed, whether the main result of the
experiment has been attained or not. If any
animal appears to an inspector to be suffering
considerable pain, and if the inspector directs
such animal to be destroyed, it shall forthwith
be painlessly killed.” The ‘total number of ex-
periments without anesthetics was 67,097.
These were mostly simple inoculations and
hypodermic injections, but included also some
feeding experiments and administration of
various substances by the mouth or by inhala-
tion or by external application, and the ab-
straction of blood by puncture or simple vene-
section. In no instance was a certificate dis-
pensing with the use of anesthetics allowed for
an experiment involving a serious operation.
The total number of experiments was 75,262,
being 4,895 more than in 1920. The objects for
which these experiments were performed were
very diverse. A large number, almost wholly
simple inoculations, were performed either on
behalf of official bodies, with a view to the
preservation of the public health or directly for

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

the diagnosis and treatment of disease. Experi-
ments conducted at a sewage farm to test the
character of the effluent by its effect on the
health of fish is an example of work carried out
for the preservation of public health. Nearly
20,000 experiments were performed for the
preparation and testing of antitoxin serums
and vaccines and for the testing and standard-
izing of drugs. The several registered places
were visited frequently by the inspectors, usu-
ally without previous notice, and they report
that the animals were suitably lodged and well
eared for, and the licensees generally attentive
to the requirements of the act and the condi-
tions attached to their licenses.

THE REPORT OF THE ENGINEERING
COUNCIL ON WORK PERIODS

“THE tendency throughout the world is
toward the abolition of the twelve-hour shift,”
it is held by the report of the Committee on
Work-Periods of the American Engineering
Council of the Federated American Engineer-
ing Societies, which has been adopted after a
long discussion by the executive board of the
couneil in Boston. The report, in effect, finds
that the two-shift day of twelve hours each is
not an economic necessity in American industry.

“In almost every continuous industry,” ac-
cording to the report, “there are plants which
are operating on an eight-hour shift basis in
competition with twelve-hour shift plants.” It
is also shown that in practically all major
continuous industry plants which have changed
from twelve hours to eight hours have increased
the quantity of production per man up to as
much as twenty-five per cent. In a few cases,
the report states, the increase has been much
higher. In the steel and iron industry, which
is made the subject of a special report, it was
found that “the change from tthe twelve to the
eight-hour day has secured results sufficient to
compensate in whole or in part for the extra
cost.”

Other advantages of the eight-hour day in
the steel and iron industry are described as
increased efficiency, better morale, elimination
of the “floating gang,” which is maintained to
give twelve-hour men a day off a week, and
greater prestige of the industry with the public.

SCIENCE

327

Professor Samuel McCune Lindsay, of
Columbia University, representing the Cabot
Fund of Boston, officialy styled the report as
embodying the results of “the most important
investigation of any industrial situation ever
undertaken in this country.” The Cabot Fund
cooperated in the engineering investigation,
which occupied nearly two years and covered
practically every continuous industry in the
United States. Professor Lindsay, who is pres-
ident of the Academy of Political Science,
authorized the statement that Professor Henry
R. Seager, of Columbia, president of the Amer-
ican Heonomie Association, shared his general
view.

The results of the industrial investigation,
which will exereise a great influence on the
general labor situation, were obtained through
two lines of inquiry. One enquiry, embracing
the steel and iron industry of the country, was
directed by Bradley Stoughton, of New York,
former secretary of the American Institute of
Mining and Metallurgical Engineers and
former adjunct professor of metallurgy in
Columbia University.

The second enquiry was directed by Horace
B. Drury, industrial investigator and former
member of the faculty of Ohio State Univer-
sity. Hach enquiry was made the subject: of
a separate report, the whole investigation being
in charge of the council’s Committee on Work-
Periods, of which Dr. H. E. Howe, of Wash-
ington, is chairman. Dr. Howe presented the
report to the board. His associates on the
committee are J. Parke Channing, L. P. Alford,
Fred J. Miller and Dwight T. Farnham, of New
York; Morris L. Cooke, of Philadelphia, and
L. W. Wallace, of Washington.

Presentation of the report by Dr. Howe
caused a spirited discussion of two hours,
during which President Cooley, urging adop-
tion, asserted that the report was a remarkable
contribution of the engineering profession
toward the advancement of mankind. Others
participating in the debate were Philip N.
Moore, of St. Louis; Professor Joseph W. Roe,
of New York University; Irving E. Moulthrop,
of Boston; W. W. Varney, of Cleveland; Cal-
vert Townley, of New York; E. S. Carman, of
Cleveland; John A. Stevens, of Lowell; Wil-

328

liam Rolfe, of St. Louis, and Messrs. Channing,
Alford and Wallace, representing the Com-
mittee on Work-Periods. The report was
finally adopted by an. overwhelming vote.

The Drury report was described as a general
survey of all industries operating continuously
twenty-four hours a day. The leading con-
tinuous industries investigated are divided into
four groups as follows:

Group I: Iron and steel, non-ferrous metals,
glass, Portland cement, lime, brick and pottery.
Group II: Heavy chemicals, fertilizers, explo-
sives, dyes, industrial aleohol, wood distillation,
refined corn products, soap, glue, drugs, etce.,
electro-chemical industries, sugar, table salt,
petroleum, cottonseed oil and other oils.

Group III: Paper, flour, rubber,
foods, automobiles, textiles and mines.

‘Group IV: Power, gas, water supply, ice, ship-
ping, railroads, street railways, telegraph and
telephone, mails and express, policemen, firemen
and watchmen.

breakfast

SCIENCE SECTION OF THE ASSOCIATION
OF COLLEGES AND PREPARATORY
SCHOOLS OF THE MIDDLE STATES

AND MARYLAND

Atv the annual meeting of the Association of
Colleges and Preparatory Schools of the Mid-
dle States and Maryland held at Swarthmore
College on November 26, 1921, Science Section
was organized. Dr. Bertha M. Clark, William
Penn High School, Philadelphia, presided at
the organization meeting. A constitution pre-
pared by a committee consisting of Dr. H. J.
Creighton, Swarthmore; Dr. James Barnes,
Bryn Mawr; Dr. Ida A. Keller, Philadelphia
High School for Girls; Dr. W. B. Meldrum,
Haverford; and Dr. R. H. True, University of
Pennsylvania, was presented and adopted by
unanimous vote.

Aeeording to its constitution the Science
Section has been organized to bring about
active cooperation between the colleges and pre-
paratory schools in improving the teaching of
The following officers were elected to
serve one year:

President: Dr. Thomas D. Cope, Randal Mor-
gan Laboratory of Physics, University of Penn-
sylvania.

science.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

Vice-president: Mr. Charles E. Dull, South Side
High School, Newark, N. J.

Secretary: Miss Margaretta Atkinson, Philadel-
phia High School for Girls.

Treasurer: Dr. Walter Steckbeck, Macfarlane
Hall of Botany, University of Pennsylvania.

The following councillors were elected to
serve two years:

Dr. Gellert Alleman, Swarthmore College.

Dr. Bertha M. Clark, William Penn
School, Philadelphia.

Dr. Raymond Brownlee,
School, New York City.

The council has decided to hold the next
meeting of the section at the time of the next
annual meeting of the Association of Colleges
and Preparatory Schools. This meeting will
be held at the Tower Hill School, Wilmington,
Delaware, during the Thanksgiving recess in
1922. An attractive program is being prepared
and plans are being made to increase materially
the membership of ‘the section. Due announce-
ment of the program will ‘be made public.

High

Stuyvesant High

HERSCHEL CENTENARY PILGRIMAGE1

Tue centenary of the death of Sir William
Herschel, the first president of the Royal As-
tronomical Society, was commemorated ou
August 25 at Slough, where he lived and ear-
ried out so much memorable work. The Royal
Astronomical Society, with Sir F. Dyson, the
astronomer royal, made a pilgrimage to the
chief places associated with Herschel’s history,
and were welcomed by the chairman (Mr. E. T.
Bowyer) and other members of the District
Council of Slough, and representatives of the
Herschel family, in whose occupation the
astronomer’s house—Observatory House—still
remains.

The first place to be visited was Old Upton
Church, a competitor with Stoke Poges for the
honor of having inspired Gray’s Elegy. Her-
schel’s body lies beneath the flags of the ancient
chancel, on which there rested a star-shaped
wreath of flowers. The church register records
the date of his marriage with “Mary Pitt,
widow, of this parish,’ May 8, 1788, and the
baptism of his only son, John Frederick Wil-

1 The London Times.

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

liam, who was afterwards also to contribute to
the astronomical fame of the family. An old
thatched barn, which Herschel used as a work-
shop, was visited next, and the party after-
wards went through Upton Court, where his
wife’s first husband, John Pitt, lived. It be-
longs to Lord Harewood, and has been for some
time untenanted. In the afternoon the visitors
were welcomed to Observatory House by Miss
Herschel. There they saw many interesting
personal relics—some in the house itself, some
in an adjoining cottage which has been made
into a little museum, and some in the garden.
Against the back wall of the garden, embow-
ered in foliage, rests a section of Herschel’s
great telescope, 10 feet or 12 feet in length.
A circular ridge on the lawn marks tthe place
where the telescope formerly stood. In the
hall of the house is one of two mirrors which
were cast for the big telescope. The mirror and
tube of the smaller telescope which Sir John
Herschel took to ‘the Cape to survey the heavens
of the southern hemisphere were also shown.
At luncheon, which was served at the Old
Crown Hotel, at one time part of the property
of Sir William Herschel, the Reverend Sir
John Herschel said that the great work of Sir
William Herschel at Slough was his investiga-
tion of the structure of the heavens. He put
. forward the view that the whole visible universe
was like a couple of soup-plates put face to

face. That theory, he believed, still held the
field. Another great discovery was that of
nebulew. Herschel at first thought they could

be resolved into separate stars, but afterwards
came to the conclusion that in certain cases
these dull, fuzzy things were a shining fluid.
That some of the nebule were resolvable into
stars was proved later by Lord Rosse, and the
hypothesis of the shining fluid was confirmed
many years later by Huggins. Sir William
Herschel was much before his age in his specu-
lations. Though they fell into discredit for a
time, he had since come into his own again and
had been found to have made very few mis-
takes.

Sir Frank Dyson said he thought what Sir J.
Herschel had said about Sir William Herschel
was true. He was undoubtedly a very great
man. In addition to the wish to fathom the
heavens, he had the great mechanical and en-

SCIENCE

329

gineering skill which enabled him to make his
telescopes. He had also the prodigious enthu-
siasm and energy needed to carry out his big
surveys.

Dr. Dreyer added further instances of Sir
William Herschel’s clear insight. About the
year 1785 he announced that the sun was trav-
eling through space towards the constellation
Hereules. Though the evidence was perhaps
slender at the time, and nobody, he believed,
took serious notice of the matter, the discovery
was undoubted. He also first suggested the
“ovindstone theory” of ‘the Milky Way—that
there was a great layer of stars between two
parallel planes.

THE INTERNATIONAL GEOLOGICAL
CONGRESS

Tue twelfth International Geological Con-
gress was held in Belgium during the month
of August with a large and influential delega-
tion of some 500 geologists from all parts of
the word, except former enemy countries. A
number of geological excursions were organ.
ized covering the most interesting: sections of
Belgium, to which a large number subsertbed.
France was well represented by men like
de Margerie, Lacroix, Gentil, Wilian, Bigot
Lory, Haug, Cayeux, Fallot, Yung and others;
while Switzerland had sent Lugeon and Argand,
both masters of tectonics. Especially interest-
ing was Argand’s lecture on “The Tectonics of
Asia,” illustrated with a tectonic map of the
Eurasian continent which no doubt marks an
epoch in structural geology. This synthetic
and clever graph of the Eurasian continent
contained more than 3,500 geological sections,
transferred in tectonic form and colors on the
map which served to illustrate the opening
public lecture of the congress.

Spain was well represented, and Director
Cesar Rubio, of the Instituto Geologica de
Espafia, with a goodly contingent of geologists
from the Iberian Peninsula, took part in the
congress. The invitation given by Spain was
accepted, so that the fourteenth International
Congress of Geology is to be called for 1925 in
Spain.

A large number of United States geologists
attended the congress. Dr. David White, chief
geologist of the U. 5. Geological Survey, was

330

there, representing the United States govern-
ment and survey. Dr. R. A. F. Penrose, Jr.,
of Philadelphia, was also an official represen-
tative of the United States government, whilst
Professor N. H. Winchell, ex-president of the
American Institute of Mining and Metalur-
gical Engineers, was also an official delegate.
Professors §. B. Matthews and W. H. Em-
mons, Dr. Quirke, Professor G. F. Cleland,
E. O. Ulrich and many others took part in the
meetings.

Dr. Frank Darwin Adams, of McGill Uni-
versity, president of the twelfth congress held
in 1913 in Canada; Dr. Charles Causell, of
Ottawa, deputy minister of mines; Dr. Reg-
inald W. Brock, of Vancouver; Professors
Coleman, T. L. Walker and W. A. Parker, of
the University of Toronto; Professor EH. M.
Baker, of Queen’s University, and the writer
represented the Royal Society of Canada.

Great Britain, Italy, Poland, Czecho-Slova-
kia, Roumania, Denmark, Mexico, Argentina,
Brazil, New Zealand, Australia, West Africa,
Egypt and India were represented.

The tectonies of Africa formed one of the
principal topics and what was formerly styled
the dark continent is now supplying some of
the brightest pages in our knowledge of the
crust of the earth.

The consolidation or drafting of a constitu-
tion for the International Geological Congress
oceupied the attention of a number of Euro-
pean and American geologists, and, finally, at
the last general meeting the statutes as dis-
cussed in council and approved ‘by it were
adopted with one dissenting vote.

EG MEAY

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Dr. ALEXANDER SMITH, formerly professor
of chemistry at the University of Chicago and
Columbia University, has died at Edinburgh
at the age of fifty-six years.

PRESIDENT LivinasTon Farranp, of Cornell
University, has accepted an invitation to de-
liver an address at a joint meeting of the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science and the Society of the Sigma Xi to be
held at the Boston convocation week meeting.

SCLENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

Dr. Hiram BryeHam, professor of Latin-
American history at Yale University, has been
nominated by the Republican state convention
of Connecticut for the office of lieutenant
governor.

A CABLE message to the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers announces the election
by the engineers of Holland to honorary mem-
bership in the Koninkljik Instituut van Inge-
nieurs of Mr. Calvin W. Rice, secretary of the
society. Mr. Rice is now in Rio de Janeiro as
the representative of American engineering
societies at the International Engineering Con-
gress.

Mr. Jessr Merrick Situ, of New York,
has been elected by the American Society of
Mechanical Engineers delegate to the seventy-
fifth anniversary of the Dutch Engineering
Institute, with Mr. Hosea Webster, of New
York, as alternate.

On the oceasion of the annual dinner of the
Royal Society of Medicine, presided over by
Sir John Bland-Sutton, the Jenner Memorial
Medal was presented to Dr. John C. MeVail.

PROFESSOR RaPraeLE IsseL has been appoint-
ed director of the biological work of the Italian
government on the Adriatic. This work will
now be concentrated at Rovigno.

Dr. Ernest B. Forses has been appointed
director of the Institute of Animal Nutrition at
Pennsylvania State College to succeed the late
Dr. Henry Prentiss Armsby. Dr. Forbes is
specialist in nutrition in the Institution of
American Meat Packers of Chicago, and was
for thirteen years chief of the department of
nutrition of the Ohio State Agricultural Ex-
periment Station.

Linntian Secau Koretorr has been appoint-
ed in charge of the newly established research
department of biological chemistry at the
Psychiatrie Institute of the New York State
Hospitals, Ward’s Island, New York City.

Mr. H. K. Cummines has resigned an
instructorship in mathematics at Brown Uni-
versity to accept a position in the Bureau of
Standards at Washington.

Proressor L. WiNFIELD Webs, professor of
psychology, has been named by President

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

Walter Dill Scott as director of the mental
alertness tests which will be made by North-
western University on the 1,000 freshmen that
are expected to register during the week be-
ginning on September 18.

THE auxiliary schooner Bowdoin, bringing
back to their starting point Donald B. Mac-
Millan and the members of his Arctie expedi-
tion, was anchored on September 11 at Mohe-
gan Island. Mr. MacMillan has announced
that the expedition, which spent fourteen
months exploring Baffin Land, proved that all
maps of Baffin Land, were largely guesswork.
G. Dawson Howell, of Boston, has remained
behind to cruise around Hudson Bay to con-
tinue his observations in terrestrial magnetism
for the Carnigie Institution. He expects to
reach St. John’s, N. F., about October 1.

Proressor F. L. WasHpurn, of the Univer-
sity of Minnesota, accompanied by Mr. Cad-
wallader Washburn, sailed on the SS. Tahiti
on September 8 for Tahiti and other South Sea
islands. Professor Washburn is on sabbatical
leave and will make a collection of insects for
‘the university. Mr. Cadwallader Washburn,
of New York and Mexico, expects, in addition
to adding to his collection of canvases, to se-
cure a representative collection of the eggs of
birds found in the Marquesas Islands for the
Museum of Comparative Oology of Santa
Barbara, California.

A SPECIAL PRESS telegram to the London
Times from Professor J. W. Gregory, of Glas-
gow University, reports his safe arrival at
Talisu [? Talifu, Yunnan] after a successful
journey in Tibet. Professor Gregory left at
the end of March last on an expedition which
had for its object the exploration of the moun-
tain ranges of southwest China, and to make
geological, zoological and botanical collections,
specimens of which Professor Gregory intended
to distribute between London and Glasgow mu-
seums. Professor Gregory and his son, Mr.
Christopher Gregory (who was to act as sur-
veyor), were to be the only Europeans in the
party, the intention being to rely upon the
services of a Chinese escort,

Miss Autice H. Armstrrona, assistant chief
of the radium section of the Bureau of Stand-

SCIENCE

331

ards, will be absent from the bureau during
the current academie year, pursuing special
studies at Harvard University.

Jowa Stare Conuece has granted Associate
Professor J. T. Colpitts of the department of
mathematics leave of absence for the coming
year to study at Cornell University, and As-
sistant Professor E. C. Kiefer leave of absence
to study at the University of Michigan.

Dr. Hermance Mutremeister, of the Uni-
versity of Washington, has been granted a
year’s leave of absence to study mathematies in
Holland.

Tue French delegation sent to Rio de Janeiro
for the celebration of the centenary of Bra-
zilian independence comprises, among others,
Dr. Pierre Janet, professor of the Collége de
France, and Dr. Georges Dumas, professor of
experimental psychology at the Sorbonne.

Dr. Cuartes K. CuarKer, medical director
of the Canadian National Committee for Men-
tal Hygiene, and professor of psychiatry at
the University of Toronto, has been asked to
deliver the Maudsley lecture on psychiatry at
the congress of the British Medico-Psycholog-
ical Association in London in 1923.

Dr. Anton Davin Uppen, instructor in
physics in the University of Pennsylvania,
during the last year McFadden fellow of the
American-Seandinavian Foundation, studying
with Professor Bohr in. the University of
Copenhagen, died in San Antonio, Texas, on
September 5, at the age of thirty-five years.

Dr. Juan Santos FrrnAnpez, the ophthal-
mologist and hygienist of Cuba, has died at
the age of seventy-five years. His seventieth
birthday was celebrated at Havana in 1917 with
great ceremony, and a gold medal was present-
ed to him with many tributes.

Tue death is announced of Dr. Juan Gugliel-
metti, a leader in experimental medicine and
instructor in physiology at the University of
Buenos Aires, and professor at La Plata, aged
thirty-three years.

Tur American Petroleum Institute has called
a general conference of the transportation and
mechanical sections of the oil industry, to be
held at the Statler Hotel, St. Louis, September

332

27. One of the subjects which will be under
discussion is the rail transportation of petro-
leum and its products.

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation states that the convention of the Ger-
man Botanical Society and of the German
Society for the Study of Heredity will be held
in Vienna this month. The two societies have
agreed to unite for the present sessions. A
large number of papers will be presented, and
representatives from Sweden, Switzerland, the
United States, Norway, Italy and Czecho-Slo-
vakia have already announced their intention
to be present. Special attention centers in the
proceedings of the German Society for the
Study of Heredity, as reports on the latest
achievements in this line will be made by Gold-
schmidt (Berlin), on the problem of mutation;
Spemann (Freiburg), on the activation of the
heredity-mass, and Riidin (Munich), on the
hereditary transmission of mental disturbances.
Professor Wettstein will preside over the joint
meeting.

We learn from the Journal of Industrial
and Engineering Chemistry that the Publie
Health Institute of Chicago has undertaken to
finance the cooperative research between the
University of Wisconsin Medical School and
the chemical department of Northwestern Uni-
versity, which in the past has been supported
by appropriations from the United States
Interdepartmental Social Hygiene Board. This
research which has been devoted to attempts to
improve the treatment of syphilis of the central
nervous system has been directed by Dr. W. Lee
Lewis and Dr. F. C. Whitmore, of North-
western University, and Dr. A. S. Lovenhart
and Dr. W. F. Lorenz, of the University of
Wisconsin. The Public Health Institute has
appropriated $21,600 for the use of both uni-
versities during the coming year.

Foutowine the receipt of a message from
M. Mowatt, of London, secretary of the British
Institution of Mechanical Engineers, Charles
F. Rand, chairman of the Engineering Founda-
tion, has announced that the leading engineer-
ing societies of England have formed the En-
gineering Joint Council, to work with engineers
of the United States and of Canada and other
British possessions toward concerted action for

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

world peace and. the advancement of engineer-
ing ideals “for the good of mankind.” Mr.
Rand described the organization of British en-
gineering bodies into a single unit as a step
in the movement to form a world union of en-
gineers, which already has gained headway in
France, Italy and Czecho-Slovakia, direct con-
tacts having been established by the engineer-
ing bodies of these countries with those of
America. The organizations represented on
the British council include the British Institu-
tion of Civil Engineers, Institution of Mechan-
ical Hngineers, Institution of Naval Architects
and the Institution of Electrical Engineers.
Coincident with Mr. Rand’s announcement,
Dean Mortimer E. Cooley, of the University
of Michigan, announced that the Federated
American Engineering Societies, of which he
is president, has appointed a committee on
affiliation with engineering societies outside of
the United States. The chairman is Gardner
S. Williams, of Ann Arbor, a former member
of the Michigan faculty.

A Reurtsr’s dispatch states that members of
the Mount Everest Expedition have sent the-
Pope a fragment of rock taken from the high-
est point reached by them on the mountain.
The fragment has been mounted on an ebony
stand decorated with silver and having a carved
dedication to the pontiff, who is himself an
alpine climber of no mean prowess. The pope
has sent General Bruce, the leader of the expe-
dition, the golden medal of his pontificate, to-
gether with an autograph letter of thanks. In
this he recalled that when he was elected pope
the Everest Expedition, which had already
begun the ascent, sent him a telegram of con-
gratulation and good wishes addressed to “the
Alpinist Pope.”

THE Province of Quebec has purchased from
the U. 8. Radium Corporation one gram of
radium, valued at $100,000, for the use of its
citizens in the treatment of cancer and other
malignant diseases. The radium will be sent
to the University of Montreal, where, under the
supervision of Dr. J. A. Gendreau, it will be
at the service of the people of Quebec Province.

A pispatcH from The Pas, in Northern
Manitoba, as reported in the London Times,
says that Mr. Alfred Tremblay, Arctie ex-

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

plorer, with his party, is leaving shortly for
Hudson Bay, whence he will journey to the
Arctic Seas and continue his investigations in
Baffin Land and at the Magnetic Pole. Mr.
Tremblay was a member of Captain Bernier’s
Aretie expeditions of 1910-11, 1912-13. He
was only nineteen years of age when he made
his first trip into the north. On his last ex-
pedition he succeeded where several well-
equipped expeditions had failed in reaching
Tgloolik and Fury and Hecla Strait for the
first time since the visit in 1822-23 of Sir
EK. W. Parry. Mr. Tremblay covered over four
thousand miles on foot in the depth of winter
and afterwards, with the assistance of Mr.
A. B. Reader, a native of New Zealand, mapped
and re-mapped some three thousand miles of
coast-line. He was the first white man to cross
land from the head of Admiralty Sound to
Fury and Hecla Strait and to make the long
and dangerous crossing from Murray Maxwell
Bay, across Cockburn Land to Milne Inlet.
Mr. Tremblay is accompanied on this expedi-
tion by Messrs. Arthur Barbeau and C. Talbot.
all being natives of Quebec. Hudsen Bay will
be followed to Fox Channel, whence the party
will proceed along the northwest side of Baffin
Land. After carrying out surveys and general
exploration of the areas of Baffin Land which
he did not examine on his last trip, he will pro-
ceed to the Magnetic Pole to take observations.
Mr. Trembiay’s party will be the first to at-
tempt the journey which it is undertaking by
canoe and on foot. His trip will occupy ap-
proximately two years.

Tue Paris correspondent of the London
Times writes that in its annual report, re-
cently published, the Compagnie Nationale des
Matiéres Colorantes, which was founded five
years ago with government encouragement to
guarantee the supply of dyestuffs to French
industries, confesses its dependence upon the
experience and assistance of its foreign com-
petitors. The report says: “The work of even
the best technicians must be sterile unless they
are in possession of all the knowledge. accu-
mulated in the past—knowledge which is essen-
tial to suecess. All who understand the com-
plexity of the manufacture of organic coloring
matters will realize why we have been com-

SCIENCE

333

pelled to acquire the patents, the processes and
the technical aid of our principal foreign com-
petitors for exclusive use in France. Thus we
have had at our disposal the results of fifty
years of investigation, and processes minutely
studied and methodically put into practice, and
so we are immediately placed in a position
equal to that of the most modern and most
specialized firms in our industry.” Certain
sections of the French press affect to perceive
in this statement confirmation of a rumor long
in cireulation that the Compagnie Nationale
has entered into an alliance with its German
rivals. It is recalled that not long ago the
Chemiker Zeitung announced that an agree-
ment had been entered into between the Ger-
man and French dye industries, in which seven
great German firms and the Compagnie Na-
tionale des Matiéres Colorantes were associated,
by which the German firms were to give the.
French company detailed technical assistance
and full information concerning the processes
of manufacture and to supply German chemists
to supervise the application of the processes in
French dye works. In return, it was stated,
the Compagnie Nationale undertook to limit
supplies of certain synthetic dye-stuffs to
France and her colonies, and to allow the Ger-
man firms a share of the profits.

Nature announces that proposals for closer
cooperation amongst the leading British engi-
neering institutions, which have recently been
under consideration, have now received the ap-
proval of the institutions, the representatives
of which met in conference, namely, The Insti-
tution of Civil Engineers, The Institution of
Mechanical Engineers, the Institution of Naval
Architects, and The Institution of Electrical
Engineers, and that an engineering joint coun-
cil composed of representatives of these bodies
has been formed. Among the objects of the
joint council will be, to improve the status of
engineers, to secure the better utilization of
their services in the country’s interests and the
appointment of properly qualified individuals
to responsible engineering positions, and to
prevent the unnecessary duplication of activi-
ties. It is anticipated that, at a later stage,
the number of bodies represented on the joint
council may be increased, but this at present

384

remains a matter for future consideration for
the joint council and the institutions concerned.

Tux medical correspondent of the London
Times writes as follows: “It is worth noting
that whereas the death rate in 1851-1860 was
3,841 per million (all forms of tuberculosis),
it was only 1,352 per million in 1913. During
the war there was an increase, but in 1919 a
sharp fall oceurred to a figure lower than any
previously recorded. This fall continued in
1920; in 1921, taking into consideration the
inerease of population, the position was again
satisfactory, though a slight increase over 1920
was recorded. This slight increase was almost
negligible in males (from 998 to 1,002 per
million), but in females it was more appre-
ciable (756 to 777 per million). Both the
number of deaths and the death rates for non-
pulmonary tuberculosis were lower in 1921
than in 1920. Sir George Newman asks
whether this slight check to the fall in the mor-
tality of pulmonary tuberculosis bears any
relation to the large amount of unemployment
in 1920. It may well do so, for tuberculosis
flourishes in conditions of malnutrition and
poverty. In Germany, for example, the tuber-
culosis death rate increased from 1914 on-
wards until, in 1916, it was double the pre-war
rate. In 1917 it was still higher. In 1918
there were 40,000 more deaths in Germany
from tuberculosis than in 1913. A similar state
of matters has been reported from Poland,
where in 1917, in Warsaw, four out of every
hundred persons were said to have died from
this cause. The mortality decreased from the
date of the departure of the German army and
the cancelling of the rigorous food restrictions.
These facts are of great importance. They
tend to confirm the view that our gradual de-
liverance from this scourge is due to better
feeding.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tux will of the late Mrs. Harriet L. Cramer,

widow of the late owner of the Evening Wis-

consin, leaves $100,000 to the arts and science

department of Marquette University and ap-

proximately $1,000,000 to Marquette Univer-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1447

sity Medical School. This is the second million
that the medical department of Marquette
University has received in the past four years.

THe Kyushu Imperial University, Fukuoka,
Japan, has recently opened the departments of
medicine and engineering to women students.
Women are barred from attending the Univer-
sity of Tokyo.

Dr. ArtHuR Griswotp CRANE has _ been
elected president of the University of Wyoming
to sueeeed Dr. Aven Nelson, president since
1917 and previously professor of botany. Dr.
Crane was major in the Sanitary Corps during
the war. i ;

Tue Reverenp Apert C. Fox, §.J., former
president of Campion College, at Prairie du
Chien, Wisconsin, has been appointed presi-
dent of Marquette University, sueceeding the
Reverend Herbert C. Noonan, S.J. Father
Noonan assumes other administrative work in
the Missouri province of the Jesuit Order.

Dr. WiuutAM C. Ross, professor of biological
chemistry at the medical school of the Univer-
sity of Texas, has been appointed professor of
physiological chemistry at the University of —
Illinois.

Dr. Howarp BisHop Lewis, instructor of
physiological chemistry at the University of
Michigan Medieal School, has been appointed
to a chair of physiology at the university.

Assistant Proressor R. B. Rossins will
return to the University of Michigan after two
years’ absence in actuarial work in the depart-
ments of insurance of Missouri and New York.

Av the University of Colorado, Assistant
Professor G. H. Light has been promoted to a
full professorship of mathematies and Dr.
Claribel Kendall to an assistant professorship.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

TINGITID/L OR TINGID/E
TuE proper form to be used as the family-
name for the Lace-bugs (Hemiptera) has been
the subject of considerable correspondence be-
tween Professor Carl J. Drake and the writer
of these lines.
The generic name Tingis was first employed

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

in the Hemiptera by Fabricius (“Systema
Rhyngotorum,” 1803, p. 124). Fabricius
_ named a number of genera in the Hemiptera
employing ancient Greek names of cities, from
which the insects which he was describing had,
no doubt, come. Tingis is the Greek name of
Tangiers in Morocco. It is also spelled by
classic authors Tingi and sometimes Tinge.
Strabo in his Geography, Part 1, 3, 1, § 140,
speaks of Ttyyos and uses the genitive form
Tiyytoc. This shows that the root or stem of
the word is Ttyy: = Tingi. The adjectival
form derived from the noun Tingis in Latin is
Tingitanus. (Cf. Valpy’s edition of the
Delphin Classics, Vol. No. LXX XTX, p. 882,
where comment is made upon the passage in
Pliny’s Historia Naturalis, Lib. V, 1, 1:
“Tingitana pertinet a freto Gaditano ad fines
usque Marocani regni.”? This adjectival form
plainly indicates that the Latin root of the
noun is Tingit.

In forming family names the fixed rule is
to suffix “ide” to the stem, and it is the rule
that the Latinized form of Greek words should
be employed. The Latin stem, as shown above,
of the ancient name of Tangiers is “Tingit.”
Adding “ide” to this we have the word
Tingitide. The Greek stem, if the Latin is
overlooked, is Ttyy: = Ting?. Suffixing “ide”
to this we should have form Tingiide, which
has never been used.

The first time that a family name was given
to the Lace-bugs was in 1833 when Laporte
employed the term Tingidites (Gallicism).
Westwood in 1840 used the word “Tingide.”
Amyot and Serville in 1843 employed the
Gallicized form Tingides; Stal in 1873 em-
ployed the form Tingitide and was followed
by Uhler, Champion, Horvath, Oshanin, Os-
born, Drake and a numiber of others. Then
Duzee in 1917 in his “Catalogue of the Hemip-
tera of America North of Mexico” employed
“Tingidide” as the family name, citing
Laporte as his authority.

The writer of these lines having regard to
etymology and the rules governing the con-
struction of family-names is decidedly of the
opinion that “Tingitide” is the correct form
of the word, formed as it is by suffixing “ide”
to the Latin stem Tingit. Westwood’s

SCIENCE

335

“Tingide’ is in error, first because had he
studied the classic Greek he would have dis-
covered that the root is not Ting but Ting;
and secondly, because he did not follow the
rule which calls for the employment of the
Latinized form of the word. Tingidide as
used by Van Duzee is wholly in error, based,
as it is, upon the mistake of Laporte who
imagined that the genitive of Tingis was
Tiyyid0c, instead of Tiyytos as given by Strabo.

The conclusion of the matter in the mind of
the writer is that the word Tingitide is not
merely formed according to the requirements
of scientific nomenclature, but according to
classic use. It furthermore has in its favor
the weight of authority, having been used by a
number of eminent gentlemen, distinguished
not merely for their entomological but for their
philological attainments. They have already
been mentioned. The question of priority can
not be invoked as against the correct structure
of language.

W. J. Houuanp
CARNEGIE MUSEUM,
Aveust 2, 1922

THE GLACIATION OF THE CORDILLERAN
REGION

To tue Eprror or Scrmnce: Because of
general interest in the subject of glaciation in
the Cordilleran region and of recent discussion
in Science of the origin of the Palouse soils
the investigation of the writer in the twelve-
months past in the region about Spokane,
Washington, may merit the attention of your
readers.

The investigation began with discovery of
evidence of glaciation on the basalt plateau
about Spokane some four or five hundred feet
above the train of the valley glacier in Spo-
kane Valley (described and mapped by Camp-
bell, N. P. R. R. Guide-book of the U. S. Geol-
Survey, 1916). Examination proved that all
of these “prairies” (Pleasant Prairie, Five Mile
Prairie, Sunset Prairie, Moran Prairie and
Paradise Prairie) occupying this plateau bore
evidence in the form of erratic boulders, gravel,
sand and clay, of depths varying from nothing
to fifteen feet or more, of ground ice on the
level tops of the plateaux. In the valley of

336

Hangman Creek (Latah Cr.) in the southwest
part of the city deposits are five or six hun-
dred feet deep, the valley having been filled
(as, presumably, was also the valley of Spo-
kane River). As no evidence was found of the
glacier having crossed the Spokane River to
the east of the city limits and as what appeared
to be a marginal moraine was found on the
south side of the valley at the southeast corner
of the corporation boundary (Pantops) it
seemed that the valley of the Spokane must
have been completely dammed, impounding the
waters of the entire Columbia drainage basin.
It was believed that such a volume of water
even in a brief time must have eut an outlet
which would be readily found. Such was found
to be the case. In the gap between Mica Peak
and Moran Peak, at the village of Mica, on
the O. W. R. & N. Railway, twelve miles south-
east of Spokane, at an elevation of about 2,460
feet, two outlets may be easily seen in the
field or by examination of the topographic
sheet of Spokane Quadrangle of the U. S.
Geological map. These two streams join Cali-
fornia Creek a short distance south of Mica
and follow it to Hangman Creek (Latah Cr.).
Apparently Hangman Creek was obstructed
here also for the stream followed up Hangman
Creek (Oakesdale Quadrangle) until it reached
what is now the low land between Hangman
Creek and the head of North Pine Creek, where
it cut a channel some 200 feet in depth in the
Palouse soil of that region, reaching and
scouring the basalt beneath, thus opening an
outlet to the southwest.

This glaciation was followed by a period
when stream erosion cleared the valleys of
Spokane River and Hangman Creek and per-
haps eroded Spokane Valley almost 200 feet
below the present floor (left at the time of
the Wisconsin period of glaciation) as shown
by the depth of Lake Cour d’Alene and other
lakes which occupy side branches of Spokane
Valley. There is also some evidence collected
of a glacier having almost reached Spokane
from the north by way of the valley of the
Little Spokane River. As this is about 400
feet lower than the glaciation on the “prairies”
and extends some twenty miles south of what
seems to be the terminal moraine of the Wis-
consin period (the Wisconsin glaciation reach-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

ing Spokane came from the east), it will be
seen that we have evidence of three periods of
glaciation here. The earliest of these is re-
sponsible for “Lake Spokane’! and its Mica
outlet by way of California, Hangman and
North Pine Creeks.

It will be seen from this that a long period
has elapsed since the eutting of this great
trench through this soil and as yet the exolion
deposits have not covered the bare rocks of its
floor, though for eight miles between North
Pine Creek and Hangman Creek there is no
stream sufficient to account for removal of
deposits.

(Mr. J. T. Pardee of ithe U. S. Geological
Survey spent six weeks of May and June of
this year making a careful study of glaciation
and related subjects in northeast Washington
and has secured data for what promises to be
the most interesting of all recent reports on
this subject. The appearance of his report
is awaited with great interest. The writer is
collecting further material on the shore line
of L. Spokane and on the glaciation in Little
Spokane Valley.)

THomas LarGE

THE LEWIS AND CLARK HiGH SCHOOL,

SPOKANE, WASHINGTON

A SUGGESTION TO ZOOGEOGRAPHERS

Ranges of animals are most easily defined in
terms of political divisions, cities near the limit
of range, and such readily determinable points.
This eminently practical method will doubtless
always be used.

But ordinarily zoogeographers have not been
content to use only this method, which, from
its nature, explains nothing, and questions
nothing.

There has been a constant search for some
sort of scheme whereby ranges of animals
might be reduced to a common denominator.
Various schemes of this kind are in use at
present and hereinafter shall be commented
upon.

1 The name ‘‘Lake Spokane’’ was given by the
writer in a paper on ‘‘Glaciation and Vulcanism
in the Spokane Region’? read on November 3,
1921, before the Columbia Section of the Amer-
ican Institute of Mining and Metallurgical En-
gineers.

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

By far the most generally used of these
philosophical methods is that of Realms, Re-
gions and Zones. These are all based on the
idea that large numbers of species have the
same range, and that by picking out some of
the conspicuous forms and mapping their
ranges one has ipso facto a set of regions, to
which other ranges may be referred, and with
which other ranges should agree.

This is, in some degree, true, but in nearly
every case in which the ranges of any two
species agree, the agreement is due to the
geographic factors and not to the zoologic
factors.

It is obvious that the zoogeographical realms
are nothing save and except the great land
masses with lines drawn to correspond to the
physiographic barriers. There is a great philo-
sophical difference between such terms as
Holaretie Fauna and Holaretic Region. In
the first case we speak of zoological matters in
terms of zoology, in the second of geograph-
ical matters in terms of mythology.

The Palearctic fauna is an aggregate of spe-
cies and may invade (in fact has invaded)
Australia without forfeiting its name.

It occupies, in the main, territory distinct
from that of any other fauna, and this by
virtue of the Sahara and the Himalaya, but in
eastern China there is a broad area where

Palearctic and Oriental faunas intermingle and -

where no line can be drawn which would de-
limit the range of more than a few species.
In Malaysia, Oriental and Australian faunas
overlap in the same way. Van Kampen (“The
Zoogeography of the Hast Indian Archipel-
ago,” Amer. Nat., XLV, 1911, p. 537-560) has

shown that Wallace’s famous line is as myth-

ical as the Jack of Diamonds.

All lines of this sort apply primarily to the
animal on whose range they are based (and
theoretically should be shifted when the range
is extended); secondarily to its parasites, com-
mensals, prey, ete.; and thirdly to animals of
very similar constitution, origin, or habits.

Where zonal lines coincide with physio-
graphic barriers there is a noticeable change in
fauna within a few miles, where there is no
barrier there is a broad region wherein each
species is a law unto itself.

SCIENCE

337

In no ease can the boundary of a faunal
zone, as such, be seen.

As, in cases where the zonal lines really
mean a sudden change in fauna, there is also
present a sharp change in topography, and as
this topographical change can be seen with
the greatest ease (and as, in cases where the
zonal lines are based on ranges of a few spe-
cies, and do not indicate a sudden change in
fauna, there is no sharp change in topog-
raphy), it seems high time to cease disputing
about zones and to use terms which have some
meaning.

The zones are frequently described as being
based on temperature and the lines as corre-
sponding to isothermal lines. Apart from the
objection that no one can see an isothermal
line, the temperature measurements for the
zones are not the bases on which these areas
are delimited, but are merely the temperatures
for areas previously delimited by other means.

Once established the zones have persisted in
spite of the extensions of the ranges of many
animals on which the zones were originally
based, and it is a question whether the range
of any one species corresponds with the lines
drawn on faunal zone maps.

A second method is the use of “major en-
vironments” and “minor environments,’ which
was put forward with considerable diffidence
in Shull, Larne and Ruthven, “Principles of
Animal Biology,’ 1920.

These are essentially plant formations or
forest areas. In some ways they are more
serviceable than zones as plant formations can
be seen. Also plants are somewhat more inter-
dependent than animals and hence the ranges
of more plants might reasonably be expected
to coincide. Furthermore, plant formations
play a large part in providing animal en-
vironment, as forest, prairie, etc., a part recog-
nized in the term “major environment.”

But, after all, the same objection holds in
this ease as in the case of the zones. Where
there is a sharp change in plant formation
there is usually a sharp change in topography
or in soil conditions. Without such change
there is no marked change in plant communi-
ties.

There is certainly an inherent absurdity in

338

defining the range of animals whose range one
knows, in terms of the ranges of plants and
animals whose range one does not know.

Lutz’ method of “Geographic Average”
(1921, Amer. Mus. Novitates, 5) involves con-
siderable calculation, which brings to light
with great effort the astounding information
that the “mid-range” of a northern species is
north of the “mid-range” of a southern species.

He voices considerable discontent with the
zones as being indefinite and indistinct. Where-
upon he proceeds to define anew the undefin-
able and to redistinguish the indistinguishable.

Inasmuch as all sharp changes in fauna are
dependent on similarly marked changes in
topography, it would seem reasonable to adopt
physiographic regions, instead of zones,
“major environments,” and “geographic aver-
ages.”

For the United States this has been made
remarkably easy by the publication of “Physi-
ographie Divisions of the United States,” by
Nevin S. Fenneman, Ann. Ass. Amer. Geog.,
VI, 1917, which is the result of long continued
work on the part of a committee of the asso-
ciation.

The lines of these divisions in many cases
agree with the zones and with the plant forma-
tions. This is to be expected for the ranges of
many animals should logically stop at a physi-
ographie break, or at a line of sudden change
in temperature or moisture, and the former
usually carries with it the two latter.

Furthermore the use of these physiographic
regions clears the way for intelligent associa-
tion of animal and plant ranges with the
geology and soil conditions, and brings to light
routes of dispersal.

For instance, this system makes clear the
presence of the Connecticut valley and the
Hudson-Champlain trough, in which many
southern forms extend north, but to draw these
on the map as Upper Austral, indicating
faunal identity with Piedmont Virginia (also
Upper Austral) is sheer falsehood.

The beauty of this method, however, is its
ease of application. These regions can be
seen, their boundaries can be seen, and there is
seldom any doubt as to which region one is in
or from which specimens came.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

Of course, all animals do not respect physi-
ographic boundaries, any more than all animals
respect the lines drawn on maps to represent
faunal zones.

None of our methods of indicating general
distribution is perfect. None ever can be.
Zoogeographers might well give some consid-
eration to the results of the “new geography,”
and afford themselves some justification for
their title.

Emmett Reip DuNN
SmirH COLLEGE

CLINKERTILL, A NEW METAMORPHIC
ROCK

In view of the interest attached to the study
and identification of tillite a note about a rather
unusual form of till may be of interest. This
occurrence has never been described so far as
the writer is aware.

Capping the northern bluffs bordering the
Missouri river in portions of sections 16, 17
and 18, Township 154 west, Range 95 north,
Williams County, North Dakota, is a typical
bowlder-clay. This till lies on the truncated
edges of the gently easterly dipping, lignite
bearing, Fort Union Beds. In the sections
mentioned above a heavy bed of lignite, here
known as the Williston bed! immediately under-
lies the drift. Here as elsewhere the Williston
bed has burned back from the outcrop baking
the overlying till in places to a thickness of
30 feet or 40 feet. The clinkertill so formed
varies in color from salmon-pink to dark brown,
brick-red being the common eolor. In selected
spots the material is fused to a porous, scoria-
like, mass but in most part is only slightly in-
durated by the heat. This baked till so formed
resists weathering and removal and forms the
capping of steep bluffs and buttes or mesas.

The most common pebbles found in this
clinkertill are granite and limestone. The
granite pebbles appear to be unaltered by the
heat and the limestone pebbles but slightly as
they effervesce freely in hydrochloric acid.

L. P. Dove
NortH DaKkora GEOLOGICAL SURVEY

1 Collier, A. J., ‘The Nesson Anticline,’’ Bul-
letin 691 G., U. S. G. S., p. 218.

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

THE HOMING OF A DOG

In this month’s issue of The Review of Re-
views is a copy of some notes taken by Pro-
fessor Herrick of Cleveland, Ohio, and pub-
lished in The Scientific Monthly. This refers
to the “homing” of certain eats. I have had
much experience in this line myself in my
earlier years and can confirm what he says.
My greatest story of this instinct, however, is
not with cats but with a collie dog still living
and in my possession. Canon City is distant
from Denver something like 160 miles by rail.
The D. & R. G. road passes southeast forty
miles, then turns north to Denver. This course
1s necessary on account of the range of moun-
tains divided by the Arkansas River. This
range consists of many lofty peaks in which
Pike’s Peak is inclided, almost directly in line
between Canon City and Denver.

One of our neighbors directly across the
street moved by rail to Denver, taking this dog
less than a year old with him on the train.
In less than a week he was back at the old
premises and barking joyously as ever. We
adopted him and now for six years past he has
been one of the family. He has given so many
evidences of intellectual power that whole pages
could be written of him. Possibly the remem-
brance of this episode in his life is the reason
he will never voluntarily ride in any kind of
vehicle. With his three feet yet remaining (one
lost in coyote trap) he will travel miles to keep
us company in an auto and when we take him
in forcibly will leap out regardless of any
speed we may be making.

W. D. Harry

QUOTATIONS
CONTROLLING RESEARCH ENDOWMENTS

Men of wealth do not always show wisdom
in their endowments of science. Sometimes
their ideas are fantastic. The late Mr. Car-
negie, for example, early in the nineties, learned
with surprise that there was still dubiety about
the descent of man. He suggested buying Dar-
win’s house at Down, putting up a sum of
money and “settling the matter one way or
another” in the decisive fashion of business.
Later on his wealth and his knowledge, or his

SCIENCE

339

capacity for taking competent advice, grew,
and he founded the splendid Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington, a large part of the funds
of which have since been continuously engaged
on the more general problems of evolution, to
the great benefit of knowledge, but without yet
“settling Darwinism one way or another”!

Endowments on a princely scale are able to
run on their own lines and to adapt themselves
to the changing needs of science. But smaller
funds are less flexible, and are often attached
to a purpose so precise that their real utility
may cease. Hven if the original testators had
ideas that were vague and liberal, the lawyers
whom they employed to devise the terms of
the trust, and the subsequent lawyers who have
had to interpret them, have generally con-
trived to secure the maximum of rigidity. For
such is the way of lawyers, preferring the form
to the substance.

ROYAL SOCIETY TRUSTS

Our own Royal Society, to take an example
of the disabilities arising from the rigidity of
bequests, has over thirty separate trust funds
to administer. The total income is not large,
but it is relatively large as compared with the
income that can be applied to the general pur-
poses of the society. Every year the council
begs possible donors not to tie up their gifts or
their bequests. They state that in their experi-
ence “the usefulness of the Society for the
Advancement of Natural Knowledge has been
greatly hampered by the lack of funds which
they could freely use according to their own
judgment.” All over the country, attached to
scientific societies and institutions or to uni-
versities, there are many similar rigid endow-
ments, given doubtless for a purpose that was
urgent at the time, but now wasting zeal in
their administration, and failing to make con-
tinuous additions to the progress of science
from their inappropriateness to present needs.

There are many immediate objects which
may appeal to the taste or to the imagination
of the wealthy, and which could be gained
within a reasonable time. It might be useful
were the leading societies from time to time to
draw up lists of these, with estimates of the
possible period within which they might be
completed and of the sums of money which

340

seemed necessary. A simple legal formula
could be devised for the administration of such
a specific bequest, with some provision against
canitalization and the assignment of unexpend-
ed balances to some other object after a definite
period. The donor’s benevolence could be re-
corded in perpetuity, were the memoirs de-
seribing the results associated with his name.

THE AMERICAN PLAN

But there are also donors who wish to pro-
vide capital funds, large or small, for the per-
petual benefit of science or of some branch of
natural knowledge. One of the members of the
National Research ‘Council of America has pro-
posed a scheme in which he hopes to have com-
bined permanence with flexibility. In that
western home of liberty a very large inter-
ference with what in Europe we still think the
inalienable rights of the individual is not only
advocated, but is accepted with docility, and I
gather that the intention is to compel bene-
factors to wisdom.

It is proposed, in brief, that the board of
trustees to whom is to be committed the admin-
istration of any permanent gift for the ad-
vancement of science should be elected at stated
periods by a committee of electors. Of the
latter, five are to be appointed annually, two
chosen by the board itself, and three by some
stable institution such as, for example, the
National Research Council, which is a working
organization of the National Academy of Sci-
ences. The duration of office should be for five
years, and a member would not be eligible for
re-election for one year. The object is that
every board of trustees should be chosen by
persons a
majority of whom are approved representatives
of the science or sciences named, fully conversant
with the situation in the age in which they are
acting, free from self-interest in the election, and,
by virtue of their position, charged with responsi-
bility for rendering this type of service.

The trustees so elected and so kept in con-
tinuous touch with the ‘best interests of science
should have full power in regard to the super-
vision of projects and expenditure of funds.
But what is the vital element in the scheme is
that they would have power to adapt the pro-
visions of their original charter to what they

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

conceive to be the object of the funds, so as to
meet “changing conditions and needs in the
spirit of the original intent of the donor.” It
is a very interesting proposal, which if carried
out on a large scale would probably do much
for the progress of science, and certainly
imerease to a very marked extent the power of
the National Research Council. But Quis cus-
todiet ipsos custodes? Is it quite certain that
even a National Research Council will prove a
perpetual fount of wisdom and impartiality ?—
London Times.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

An Advanced Course of Instruction in
Chemical Principles. By ArrHur A. Noyrs
and Minus S. SHerrItL. Complete Revision.
pp. XVIII + 310. The Maemillan Com-
pany, New York.

PERHAPS in no other subject is the method
which is employed for instruction more vital
than it is in Physical Chemistry; for it is in
that subject that the distinction between Power
and Knowledge is probably most marked.

In striking contrast to the many books on
this subject which are written from the purely
descriptive point of view, books which are
attractive because easy to read, but which leave
the reader only with a vague knowledge of
what has been done, and with no acquired
power to apply the principles studied to the
new questions of to-day and to-morrow, this
book is intended primarily to make the prin-
ciples and at the same time their general and
specific application so clear, that the knowl-
edge and the power to apply and use it practi-
cally are developed simultaneously. In other
words, the problem-method of instruction, first
introduced in Physical Chemistry by Speyers
in his “Text-book,” and amplified by the Re-
viewer in the second edition of his “Elements”
(1902), is the method recognized in this work
as the only one which will “give that intensive
training which is essential for pursuing more
specialized courses of scientific study, or for
applying chemical principles to industrial
problems.”

It is to be regretted that the authors have
not seen fit to include any journal-references
in the text, either to the things directly con-

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

sidered, or to those which are expansions and
continuations of them, for the student is thus
confirmed in his bad habit of being satisfied
with a statement from a text-book, rather than
encouraged to seek the real source, the journal
article. Another disadvantage arising from
this lack of references is the very real danger
that the reader will feel that at any point the
last word had been said on the subject, whereas
a glance at the original papers would show
him in truth that it was only the first.

Since an international committee has already
established a notation for use in Physical
Chemistry, 1t would seem a pity that the
authors in this text have adhered to a local one,
for it will needlessly confuse the reader.

The fact that this is the final revision of the
preliminary editions of 1917 and 1920 is assur-
ance that few if any misprints or errors are
likely to be found in the text.

A list of the chapter headings given below
will show the general scope of the book:
Part I The atomic, molecular and
theories and properties of substances
directly relating to these theories.
The composition of substances and
atomic theory. The molal properties
of gases and the molecular and kinetic
theories. The molal properties of
solutions and the molecular theory.
The atomic properties of solid sub-
stances. The electrolytic behavior of
solutions and the ionic theory.

The rate and equilibrium of chemical
changes from mass-action and the
phase view points. The rate of chemi-
cal changes.

The equilibrium of chemical changes
at constant temperature. Equilibrium
of chemical systems in relation to the
phases present.

The energy effects attending chemical
changes, and the equilibrium of chemi-
cal changes in relation to these effects.
The production of heat by chemical
changes. The production of work by
isothermal chemical changes in rela-
tion to their equilibrium conditions.
The production of work from _ iso-
thermal changes by electrochemical
processes. The effect of temperature
on work producible by isothermal
chemical changes and on their equi-

ionic

Part II

Part III

SCIENCE

341

librium conditions.
free-energy values.

Systematization of

J. Livineston R. Morgan

SPECIAL ARTICLES

SAND DROWN, A CHLOROSIS OF TOBACCO

AND OTHER PLANTS RESULTING FROM

MAGNESIUM DEFICIENCY

In connection with recent field investigations
in the improvement of tobacco production con-
ducted by the Bureau of Plant Industry in ¢o-
operation with the North Carolina Department
of Agriculture attention was directed to a
characteristie chlorosis of the leaves of tobaceo
plants on certain test plots. Investigation dis-'
closed the fact that this disease often causes
serious damage to the tobacco crop on certain
types of soil, particularly in comparatively
wet seasons. The popular name of this chloro-
sis is “Sand Drown,” a term referring to the
fact that the disease is likely to occur in ag-
gravated form on the more sandy portions of
the field after heavy rainfall. As a result of
considerable field and laboratory study extend-
ing through several ‘seasons this malady has
been found to be due to an insufficient supply
of magnesium in the soil or fertilizer. It has
been found, further, that the ratio between the
quantities of sulfur (sulfate) and magnesium
contained in the fertilizer is a factor of im-
portance, the symptoms of magnesium defi-
ciency being intensified by increase in the quan-
tity of sulfur applied to the soil. The details
of the investigations will eventually appear in
the Journal of Agricultural Research but be-
cause of considerable delay in publication re-

‘sulting from temporary suspension of this

journal it seems desirable to present at this
time a brief outline of the principal facts es-
tablished. The chlorosis in question usually
begins at the tip and along the outer margins
of the older leaves, advancing toward the leaf
base and extending progressively to the upper
leaves of the plant. In some cases, however,
the chlorosis involves large portions of the leaf
surface when first clearly recognizable. The
veins and midrib of the leaf tend to retain their
normal color. There is more or less complete
blanching of the leaf lamina, both yellow. and

green chlorophyil pigments being affected

342

(thus differing from the chlorosis caused by
potassium deficiency in which the affected area
acquires a dull yellow color with a bronze or
copper overcast). The blanched tissues usually
do not die as quickly as in potassium deficiency
so that local specking or spotting of the leaf
is commonly wanting except in advanced stages
of the malady. In some instances, however,
local dying of the tissues between the veins
has been the first symptom. In plot tests con-
ducted in several tobacco-growing districts, in
which chemically pure sources of nitrogen,
phosphorus, potassium, calcium and sulfur
were used instead of the ordinary commercial
fertilizer materials, the symptoms of mag-
nesium deficiency have usually appeared where
sandy and sandy loam soils were used and
there was abundant rainfall. In all such eases
addition of sulfate or chloride of magnesium
to the fertilizer salts has prevented the chloro-
sis. In comparative tests, applications of the
so-called high grade or relatively pure com-
mercial forms of the sulfate and chloride of
potassium have resulted in severe chlorosis
while low grade sulfates and chlorides of po-
tassium containing considerable quantities of
magnesium, such as “double manure salt” and
“kainit,” have prevented the disease. In some
cases use of the purer forms of sulfate of po-
tassium has resulted in severer chlorosis than
that caused by the chloride and, moreover, the
severity of the chlorosis has been proportional
to the quantity of sulfate of potassium used.
Symptoms of the disease also have been pre-
vented by applying dolomitie limestone to the
soil while comparatively pure calcite has been
ineffective. Certain organic fertilizer materials
of vegetable origin which are commonly used
as sources of nitrogen, notably cotton seed
meal, tobacco stalks and stems and barn ma-
nure, tend to prevent the disease. These ma-
terials contain appreciable quantities of mag-
nesium. Use of other common sources of fer-
tilizer nitrogen which contain little or no mag-
nesium, including nitrate of soda, dried blood
and especially ammonium sulfate, has favored
development of the disease. In pot cultures
this chlorosis is readily induced by applying a
nutrient solution containing all the usual plant
food elements except magnesium, using an ex-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

cess of the solution so as to produce a leaching
action on the soil. Moreover, the disease if
not too far advanced is readily cured by adding-
magnesium to the nutrient solution. In view
of the relation of the sulfur supply to the
symptoms of magnesium deficiency it is worthy
of note that an inadequate supply of sulfur
per se results in a mild, diffuse type of chloro-
sis of tobacco, affecting all green parts of the
plant and thus differing from the symptoms
of magnesium deficiency. Since more or less
sulfur is constantly added to the soil through
rainfall, while there is loss of magnesium
through the leaching action of the rain water,
it is to be expected that symptoms of mag-
nesium deficiency will be especially pronounced
in wet seasons. In dry seasons the likelihood
of relative deficiency of sulfur is increased.
Experiments with corn, a crop plant differing
widely from tobacco in many respects, show
that it also is subject to the “sand drown”
disease, the symptoms and characteristics of
the disease in corn corresponding rather close-
ly with those found in tobacco. It seems like-
ly, therefore, that other crop plants are sub-
ject to injury from an inadequate supply of
magnesium in the lighter, more sandy type of
soils. Apparently the quantity of magnesium
required in the fertilizer to prevent the symp-
toms of magnesium deficiency is small, prob-
ably less than 50 pounds per acre. These in-
vestigations suggest that the element mag-
nesium needs to be taken into account both in
the general problem of liming and in the
proper choice of commercial fertilizer ma-
terials for making up so-called complete fer-
tilizers.

W. W. GARNER

J. E. McMurtrey

EK. G. Moss

BurEAU or Puant InpustRyY,
U. S. DeparTMENT or AGRICULTURE

TRANSFERENCE OF THE BEAN MOSAIC
VIRUS BY MACROSIPHUM SOLANIFOLII
Ir has been assumed by pathologists that the

virus of bean mosaic is transferred from dis-
eased to healthy plants by insects. No experi-
mental proof has been submitted to substan-
tiate this claim. The only satisfactory ex-

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922]

planation of the widespread occurrence of the
disease in certain seasons seems to be that
occasional plants which show mosaic early in
the season serve as the sources of infectious
material which is carried throughout the field
by virus-carrying insects. The probability of
this being the correct explanation is strength-
ened by the known facts concerning the spread
by insects of mosaic diseases of other plants.

Indirect proof of the relation of insects to
the dissemination of bean mosaic was obtained
during the summer of 1921. Plantings in late
May of seed collected from plants showing
mosaic the previous season were made in rows
four feet apart. Another plot was planted
at the same time seventy-five feet away with
seed from plants grown for two previous sea-
sons under insect-proof cages. These plants
had shown no symptoms of mosaic. By the
middle of July, practically all of the plants in
the mosaic seed plot were showing symptoms
of the disease. None of the plants in the clean
seed plot had developed any signs of mosaic
up to the time of the appearance of the second
pair of leaves. Weekly inspection was made
and the first case of mosaic was found in one
plant of the Long White variety on June 12.
A count was made each week of the new plants
which had developed mosaic and on September
17, when the results were summarized, 19.5
per cent. of the total number of plants in the
plot, which included twenty varieties, were
affected with the disease. On July 15, clean
seed from the same source as the above was
planted in hills between the rows of diseased
plants in the mosaic plot, half of the seed
under insect-proof cages. By September 1,
every plant outside of the cages was affected
with mosaic, while not a single diseased plant
appeared in the cages up to the time the plants
were killed by frost. The diseased and healthy
plants at all times during their growth were
sufficiently far apart so that they did not come
in contact with one another. This experiment
indicated that insects are directly responsible
for the dissemination of the disease.

In May, 1922, a planting of beans in the
greenhouse was found to be infested with
aphids. Several of the plants had early
shown symptoms of mosaic. Growing some

SCIENCE |

343

distance from the aphid-infested plants were a
group of bean plants in water cultures. Prac-
tieally every plant in these cultures developed
a severe case of mosaic, and examination
showed that the aphids were also abundant on
them. Golden Wax and Green Pod Stringless
beans were planted in pots in the greenhouse
and the pots placed in cages. Brittle Wax
beans were planted in the field and three cages
placed over a portion of the row. In addition,
a twenty-foot row of the same variety was
planted and left uncaged for observation as to
freedom of the seed from mosaic. As soon as
the greenhouse and field plants had developed
the first pair of leaves, aphids from the mosaic
plants were transferred by means of a camel
hair brush to watch glasses, and then placed
on the leaves of three plants in one of the field
cages, and on five plants of Golden Wax and
three of Green Pod Stringless in cages in the
greenhouse. Two cages of plants in the field
as well as the additional twenty foot row were
held for field checks. A large number of
plants in pots were held in separate cages in
the greenhouse as checks. The plants were
inspected daily. After five days, three plants
of Golden Wax and one of Green Pod String-
less showed apparent symptoms of mosaic as
water-soaked areas along the veins which
gradually involved the entire leaf. In addition
there was a distinct down-curling of the leaves,
usually characteristic of mosaic. This was con-
trary to usual observations which have been
that when mosaic is transferred to healthy
plants by aphids, symptoms of the disease do
not appear on the inoculated plant until the
new leaves have developed. However, with
both of the varieties used the mottling was
very distinct on the original leaves. Contrary
observations on other plants have probably
been due to the fact that it is difficult to detect
mosaic symptoms on old leaves. After twelve
days new leaves had appeared and these showed
marked mosaic symptoms. These plants were
held for eighteen days and the succeeding
leaves continued to present characteristic mo-
saic markings. None of the plants in the check
cages had developed any signs of mosaic one
month after the beginning of the experiment,
when they were discarded.

344

After seven days one plant of Brittle Wax
in the field cage reacted similarly to the
plants in the greenhouse. When the see-
ond pair of leaves appeared, mosaic markings
were not apparent and it was thought that
weather conditions had checked the progress
of the disease in the plant. However, upon
examining the plants one week later, two plants
of the three upon which the insects had been
placed had developed typical mosaic symp-
toms. All of the plants in the check cages, as
well as in the twenty-foot row outside of the
cages, have remained healthy up to this time,
one month from the time of the appearance of
the first pair of leaves.

The species of aphid used in these experi-
ments has been identified by Miss Eugenia
McDaniel of the entomology department as
Macrosiphum solanifolii. This species has been
collected on beans at other times, especially
early in the season. Phaseolus vulgaris 1s one
of the known hosts of this very polyphagous
species.

SUMMARY

The spread of bean mosaic was observed
during 1921 under conditions which strongly
suggested transfer by insects. The sudden ap-
pearance of the disease in the water cultures of
beans growing in the greenhouse, and infested
with aphids, indicated even more definitely the
mode of dissemination. Definite proof of the
transfer of the virus by Macrosiphum solam-
folii was obtained under controlled: conditions,
both in the greenhouse and in the field.

Ray NELSson

DEPARTMENT OF Borany,

MIcHIGAN AGRICULTURAL COLLEGE

THE EXTENSION OF THE X-RAY INTO THE
ULTRAVIOLET SPECTRUM

Ir was found that when thermions liberated
from a tungsten filament were accelerated and
allowed to impinge on a metal grid maintained
at a variable positive potential, secondary
electrons were emitted from the grid. The
number of such secondary electrons emitted
were measured by means of a galvanometer
in series with the grid and a plate maintained
at a constant positive saturation potential.

On plotting the secondary current as a fune-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1447

tion of the accelerating voltage, acting on the
primary electrons, a sudden change in the
slope of the curve occurring at critical poten-
tials was interpreted in the usual way. The
energy-quantum relation V(volts) L (A) =
12320 was used to compute the equivalent wave-
lengths.

The following table gives the preliminary
results thus far discovered. The quantities
bracketed are still doubtful. Those preceded
by an (a) are not found by the usual breaks in
the curves but are positions on the continuous
curves where the ratio of the number of sec-
ondary (s) electrons per primary (p) were
such as indicated in the s/p column. At pres-
ent it appears as if the convergence wave-
length (s/p = 3) for tungsten ended at 91.2 A
and is followed by an absorption band extend-
ing probably down to 14 A. This is then fol-
lowed by the Me line, here extrapolated as
7.04 A from the above measurements. i

TUNGSTEN
Wave-
Volts |length (A)| S/P | Remarks
4.4 2800 Hull found 2700 shortest
. spark spectrum. ;

(17 (725) Suspected

35.0 352

(60) (205)

135 91.2 3 Doubtful
144 a85.6 25
181 a68.0 2.0
295 a41.7 1.5
435 a28.3 1.0
€ ) Co 0.0
1750 7.04 Extrapolated
X-ray data gives
Mg = 7.007)
IRON
Wave-
Volts length Remarks
3.3 3763
8.5 1450 Millikan’s iron spectrum
shows 1430 and 1409.

10.4 1184.6 |Also 1184.

24.3 507.0 | Also 506 and 552.1. In-
tensity 7. Mg com-
puted from Sanford’s
formula gave 484 A.

45.8 269 Iron shows spectrum
271.6 °R.

(Co) OE) Doubtful.

200 a61.6

Orro STUHLMAN, JR.
Tue University or NortH CAROLINA,

New SrEr1IES Pee 9 99 ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1448 Fripay, SEPTEMBER 29, 1922 SINGLE Corres, 15 Cts.

Saunders’ Books

Wells’ Chemical Pathology EDITION

This work considers pathology from the standpoint of the chemical processes involved. It
deals with the chemical changes that take place in pathologic conditions. It treats of the
causes of disease and so provides the first step in their treatment.

Octavo of 695 pages. By H. GIDEON WELLS, M.D., Ph.D., Professor of Pathology, Unwersity ernie oes

9 fe SEVENTH
Jordan’s General Bacteriology EDITION
In this work there are extensive chapters on methods of studying bacteria, including stain-
ing, biochemical tests, cultures, etc; on development and composition of bacteria; on enzymes
and fermentation products; on the bacterial production of pigment, acid, and alkali; and on
ptomains and toxins.

Octavo of 744 pages, illustrated. By EDWIN O. JORDAN, Ph.D., Professor of Bacteriology in the Uni-
versity of Chicago. Cloth, $5.00 net.

Smith’s Bacterial Diseases of Plants

This book is the result of thirty-five years of reading and diligent laboratory and field in-
vestigation. It is largely the product of a single laboratory, eight of the organisms here
selected for special study having been named by the author.

By ERWIN F. SMITH, in charge of Laboratory of Plant Pathology, Bureau of Plant Industry, Washing-
ton, D. C. Octavo of 688 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $10.00 net.

Whetzel’s History of Phytopathology

Professor Whetzel divides his subject into Five Eras, and these in turn into Periods. He
gives a general survey of each Era and each Period, crystallizes the evolutionary movement
of each, gives interesting biographic sketches of the predominant figures, frequently includ-
ing portraits.

12mo of 130 pages. By HERBERT RICE WHETZEL, Professor of Plant Pathology at Cornell University,
Ithaca, New York. Cloth, $2.00 net.

Heineman on Milk

This work discusses milk from the viewpoint of the sanitarian, producer, and physician.
There are chapters on the physiology of lactation, chemical, physical, and bacteriologic ex-
aminations, contamination, fermented milks, pasteurization, certified milk, economic aspect
of production and distribution, etc. :

By PAUL G. HEINEMAN, M. D., Wisconsin. Octavo of 684 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $7.00 net.

be ee med SIGN AND MAIL THIS ORDER FORM TODAY.

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.

Please send me the books checked (V) and charge to my account :—~

Wells’ Chemical Pathology_-.-_----------- $7.00 net. Smith’s Bacterial Diseases of Plants_--_-$10. 00 net.

Jordan’s General Bacteriology $5.00 net. Whetzel’s, pet Otay sot Phytopathology

TNC SUV ADDRESS

i SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

A Complete Revision of a Famous Textbook of Psychology

THE FUNDAMENTALS OF PSYCHOLOGY
By W. B. PILLSBURY

Director of the Psychological Laboratory, University of Michigan

A carefully revised edition of Professor Pillsbury’s
widely known book, with three entirely new chapters.
In its enlarged form the volume is ample for a year’s
course in elementary psychology. The new chapters
deal respectively with Intelligence Testing and Habit
Formation, Imagination and Dreams (with a discus-
sion of Freud), and Fatigue and Sleep. The other
chapters follow the general plan of the earlier edition,
but each has been brought thoroughly up to date, and
the order has been changed somewhat, in the interest of
greater ease in teaching. ‘Throughout the book large
sections are wholly new, and every sentence has been
re-examined in order to improve and simplify expression.
As revised, this book will rank among the most valuable

psychology textbooks.
Published September 5
Cloth, crown octavo, 589 pages, $2.75

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
64-66 FIFTH AVENUE

NEW YORK

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI SEPTEMBER 29, 1922 No. 1448
CONTENTS
The British Association for the Advancement
of Science:
Some Aspects of Animal Mechanism: Sir
CHARLES 8. SHERRINGTON............-- wa 345
Can Waste of Mental Effort be avoided? Pro-
FESSOR FLORIAN CAJORI---..-2..--2----------2------0-cee== 855
An Institute for Acoustic Research: Pro-
FESSOR CHRISTIAN A. RUCKMICK.............--.---- 357

Proposed Federation of American Biological
Societies: PRrorrssor A. FRANKLIN SHULL 359

Scientific Events: ;
Bust of Chester S. Lyman; Effects of For-
est Fires on Food and Game Fishes; Con-
ference on World Metric Standardization ;
Activities of the Rockefeller Foundation.... 361

Scientific Notes and News............--.--- Shi EE nee 364

University and Educational Notes..............-.---- 366

Discussion and Correspondence:
Growth of Plants in Artificial Light from
Seed to Seed: R. B. Harvey. The
Preparation of Clear Beef Agar: FRANK-
LIn W. Marsu. The Effect of Feeding
Velvet Beans to Pigeons: W. D. SaALMon.
A Chemical Spelling Match: Dr. C. A.
ENC OBS ON sess tna sae ce carrera eter eae aee ns ease 366

Scientific Books:
Loeb on Proteins and the Theory of Col-
loidal Behavior: PRorEssoR JAMES KEN-
DALL

Special Articles:
Mosaic Cross-inoculation and Insect Trans-
mission Studies: O. H. EtmMrr. Sper-
matogenesis of the Garter Snake: Lioyp
1B js ANS UNMON ODN ca Seer aeons ee 370

SOME ASPECTS OF ANIMAL
MECHANISM!

Ir is sometimes said that science lives too
much in itself, but once a year it tries to re-
move that reproach. The British Association
meeting is that annual occasion, with its op-
portunity of talking in wider gatherings about
scientific questions and findings. Often the
answers are tentative. Commonly questions
most difficult are those that can be quite brief-
ly put. Thus, “Is the living organism a
machine?” “Is life the running of a mechan-
ism?” The answer cannot certainly be as short
as the question. But let us, in the hour be-
fore us, examine some of the points it raises.

Of course for us the problem is not the
“why” of the living organism but the “how”
of its working. If we put before ourselves
some aspects of this working we may judge
some at least of the contents of the question.
It might be thought that the problem is pre-
sented at its simplest in the simplest forms ot
life. Yet it is in certain aspects more seizable
in complex animals than it is in simpler forms.

Our own body is full of exquisite mechanism.
Many exemplifications could be chosen. There
is the mechanism by which the general complex
internal medium, the blood, is kept relatively
constant in its chemical reaction, despite the
variety of the food replenishing it and the
fluctuating draft from and input into it from
various organs and tissues. In this mechan-
ism the kidney cells and the lung cells form
two of the main sub-mechanisms. One part
of the latter is the delicate mechanism link-
ing the condition of the air at the bottom of
the lungs with that particular part of the
nervous system which manages the ventilation
of the lungs. On that ventilation depends the

1 Presidential address delivered at the Hull
meeting of the British Association on Septem-
ber 6.

546

proper respiratory condition of the blood. The
nervous center which manages the rhythmic
breathing of the chest is so responsive to the
respiratory state of the blood supplied to. it-
self that, as shown by Drs. Haldane and
Priestley some years ago, the very slightest
increase in the partial pressure of carbon di-
oxide at the bottom of the lungs at once suit-
ably increases the ventilation of the chest.
Dovetailed in with this mechanism is yet an-
other working for adjustment in the same di-
rection. As the lung is stretched by each in-
breath the respiratory condition of the nervous
center, already attuned to the respiratory
quality of the air in the lungs, sets the degree
to which inspiration shall fill them ere there
ensue the opposite movement of outbreath.
All this regulation, although the nervous sys-
tem takes part in it, is a mechanism outside
our consciousness. Part of it is operated
chemically; part of it is reflex reaction to a
stimulus of mechanical kind, though as such
unperceived. The example taken has been
nervous mechanism. If, in the short time at
our disposal, we confine our examples to the
nervous system, we shall have the advantage
that in one respect that system presents our
problem possibly at its fullest.

To turn therefore to another example, main-
ly nervous. Muscles execute our movements;
they also maintain our postures. This postural
action of muscles is produced by nerve-centers
which form a system more or less their own.
One posture of great importance thus main-
tained is that of standing, the erect posture.
This involves due cooperation of many sepa-
rate muscles in many parts. Even in the ab-
sence of those portions of the brain to which
consciousness is adjunct, the lower nerve-
centers successfully bring about and maintain
the cooperation of muscles which results in the
erect posture; for example, the animal in this
condition, if set on its feet, stands. It stands
reflexly; more than that, it adjusts its stand-
in posture to required conditions. If the pose
of one of the limbs be shifted a compensatory
shift in the other limbs is induced, so that
stability is retained. A turn of the creature’s
neck sidewise and the body and limbs, of them-
selves, take up a fresh attitude appropriate

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

to the side-turned head. Hach particular pose
of the neck telegraphs off to the limbs and
body a particular posture required from them,
and that posture is then maintained so long
as the neck posture is maintained. Stoop the
creature’s neck and the forelimbs bend down as
if to seek something on the floor. Tilt the
muzzle upward and the forelimbs straighten
and the hind limbs crouch as if to look at
something on a shelf. Purely reflex mechanism
provides all kinds of ordinary postures.
Mere reflex action provides these harmonies
of posture. The nerve-centers evoke for this
purpose in the required muscles a mild, steady
contraction, with tension largely independent
of the muscle length and little susceptible to
fatigue. Nerve-fibers run from muscle to
nerve-center, and by these each change in
tension or length of the muscle is reported to
the activating nerve-center. They say “ten-
sion rising, you must slacken,” or conversely.
There are also organs the stimulation of which
changes with any change of their relation to
the line of gravity. Thus, a pair of tiny
water-filled bags is set one in each side of the
skull and in each is a patch of cells endowed
with a special nerve. Attached to hairlets of.
these cells is a tiny crystalline stone the pres-
sure of which acts as a stimulus through them
to the nerve. The nerve of each gravity-bag
connects, through chains of nerve-centers, with
the muscles of all the limbs and of one side
of the neck. In the ordinary erect posture of
the head, the stimulation by the two bags right
and left is equal, because the two gravity-
stones then lie symmetrically. The result, then,
is a symmetrical muscular effect on the two
sides of the body, namely, the normal erect
posture. But the right and left bags are
mirror pictures of each other. If the head in-
cline to one side, the resulting slip, micro-
scopic though it be, of the two stones on their
nerve-patches makes the stimulation unequal.
From that slip there results exactly the right
unsymmetrical action of the muscles to give
the unsymmetrical pose of limbs and neck re-
quired for stability. That is the mechanism
dealing with limbs and trunk and neck. An
additional one postures the head itself on the
neck. A second pair of tiny gravity-bags, in

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

which the stones hang rather than press, are
utilized. These, when any cause inclining the
head has passed, bring the head back at once
to the normal symmetry of the erect posture.
These same bags also manage the posturing of
the eyes. The eye contributes to our orienta-
tion in space; for example, to perception of
the vertical. For this the eyeball, that is the
retina, has to be postured normally, and the
pair of little gravity-bags in the skull, which
serve to restore the head posture, act also on
the eyeball muscles. Whichever way the head
turns, slopes, or is tilted, they adjust the eye-
ball’s posture compensatingly, so that the
retina still looks out upon its world from an
approximately normal posture, retaining its
old verticals and horizontals. As the head
twists to the right the eyeball’s visual axis
untwists from the right. These reactions of
head, eyes and body unconsciously take place
when a bird wheels or slants in flight or a
pilot stalls or banks his areoplane; and all
this works itself involuntarily as a pure
mechanism.

True, in such a glimpse of mechanism what
we see mainly is how the machinery starts and
what finally comes out of it; of the intermedi-
ate elements of the process we know less. Hach
insight into mechanism reveals more mechanism
still to know. Thus, scarcely was the animal’s
energy balance in its bearing upon food in-
take shown comfortably to conform with
thermodynamics than eame evidence of the
so-called “vitamins”—evidence showing an un-
suspected influence on nutrition by elements
of diet taken in quantities so small as to make
their mere calorie value quite negligible; thus,
for the growing rat, to quote Professor Hard-
en, a quantity of vitamin A of the order of
one five-hundredths milligram a day has po-
tent effect. Again, as regards sex determina-
tion, the valued discovery of a visible distinc-
tion between the nuclear threads of male and
female brings the further complexity that, in
such cases, sex extends throughout the whole
body to every dividing cell. Again, the assso-
ciation of hereditary unit-factors, such as body
color or shape of wing, to visible details in
the segmenting nucleus seemed to simplify by
epitomizing. But further insight tends to trace

SCIENCE

347

the inherited unit character not to the chromo-
some itself, but to balance of action between
the chromosome group. As with the atom in
this heroie age of physicists, the elementary
unit once assumed simple proves, under fur-
ther analysis, to be itself complex. Analysis
opens a vista of further analysis required.
Knowledge of muscle contraction has, from the
work of Fletcher and Hopkins on to Hill, Har-
tree, Meyerhof and others, advanced recently
more than in many decades heretofore. The
engineer would find.it difficult to make a mo-
tive machine out of white of egg, some dis-
solved salts, and thin membrane. Yet this is
practically what nature has done in muscle, and
obtained a machine of high mechanical effici-
ency. Perhaps human ingenuity can learn
from it. One feature in the device is alternate
development and removal of acidity. The cycle
of contraction and relaxation is traced to the
production of lactic acid from glycogen and its
neutralization chiefly by alkaline proteins; and
physically to an admirably direct transition
from chemical to mechanical effect. What new
steps of mechanism all this now opens!

But knowledge, while making for complexity,
makes also for simplification. There seems
promise of simplification of the mechanism of
reflex action. Reflex action with surprising
nicety calls into play just the appropriate
muscles, and adjusts them in time and in the
suitable grading of their strength of pull. The
moderating as well as the driving of muscles
is involved. Also the muscles have to pass
from the behest of one stimulus to that of an-
other, even though the former stimulus still
persist. For these gradings, coadjustments,
restraints, and shifts, various separate kinds
of mechanism were assumed to exist in the
nerve-centers, although of the nature of such
mechanisms little could be said. Their pro-
e@esses were regarded as peculiar to the nerve-
centers and different from anything that the
simple fibers of nerve-trunks outside the centers
can produce. We owe to Lucas and Adrian
the demonstration that, without any nerve-
center whatever, an excised nerve-trunk with
its muscle attached can be brought to yield,
besides conduction of nerve impulses, the grad-
ing of them.* That is remarkable, because the

348

impulse is not gradable by grading the strength
of the stimulus. The energy of the impulse
comes not from the stimulus, but from the
fiber itself. But Lucas and Adrian have shown,
however, that it is gradable in another way.
Though the nerve impulse is a very brief af-
fair—it lasts about one thousandths second at
any one point of the nerve—it leaves behind
it in the nerve-fiber a short phase during which
the fiber cannot develop a second impulse.
Then follows rapid but. gradual recovery of the
strength of impulse obtainable from the fiber.
That recovery may swing past normal to super-
normal before returning finally to the old rest-
ing state. Hence, by appropriately timing the
arrival of a second impulse after a first, that
second impulse may be extinguished, reduced,
increased or transmitted without alteration.
This property of grading impulses promises a
complete key to reflex action if taken along
with one other. The nervous system, including
its centers, consists of nothing but chains of
cells and fibers. In these chains the junctions
of the links appear to be points across which
a large impulse can pass, though a weak one
will fail. At these points the grading of im-
pulses by 'the interference process just outlined
can lead, therefore, to narrowing or widening
their further distribution, much as in a rail-
way system the traffie can be blocked or for-
warded, condensed or scattered. Thus the dis-
tribution and quantity of the muscular effect
can be regulated and shifted not only from one
muscle to another, but in one and the same
muscle it ean be graded by adding to or sub-
tracting from the number of fibers activated
within that muscle. As pointed out by Pro-
fessor Alexander Forbes, it may be, therefore,
that the nerve impulse is the one and only re-
action throughout the whole nervous system,
‘central and peripheral,—trains of impulses
colliding and over-running as they travel along
the conductive network. In this may he the
secret of the coordination of reflexes. The
nerve-center seems nothing more than a meet-
ing-place of nerve-fibers, its properties but
those of impulses in combination. Fuller
knowledge of the mechanism of the nervous
impulse, many of the physical properties of
which are now known, a reaction which can

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1448

be studied in the simplest units of the nervous
system, thus leads to a view of nervous fune-
tion throughout the system much simpler than
formerly obtained.

Yet for some aspects of nervous mechanism
the nerve impulse offers little or no clue. The
fibers of nerve-trunks are, perhaps, of all ©
nerve-structures those that are best known.
They constitute, for example, the motor nerves
of muscle and the sensory nerves of the skin.
They establish their ties with musele and skin
during embryonic life and maintain them prac-
tically unaltered throughout the individual’s
existence, growing no further. If severed, say,
by a wound, they die for their whole length be-
tween the point of severance and the muscle or
skin they go to. Then at once the cut ends of
the nerve-fibers start regrowing from the point
of severance, although for years they have
given no sign of growth. ‘The fiber, so to say,
tries to grow out to reach to its old far-distant
muscle. There are difficulties in its way. A
multitude of non-nervous repair cells growing
in the wound spin scar tissue across the new
fiber’s path. Between these alien cells the new
nerve-fiber threads a tortuous way, avoiding
and never joining any of them. This obstrue-
tion it may take many days to traverse. Then
it reaches a region where the sheath-cells of the
old dead nervye-fibers lie altered beyond ordi-
nary recognition. But the growing fiber recog-
nizes them. It joints them and, tunneling
through endless chains of them, arrives finally,
after weeks or months, at the wasted muscle-
fibers which seem to have been its goal, for it
connects with them at once. It pierces their
covering membranes and reforms with their
substance junctions of characteristic pattern re-
sembling the original that had died weeks or
months before. Then its growth ceases,
abruptly, as it began, and the wasted muscle
recovers and the lost function is restored.

Can we trace the causes of this beneficent
yet so unaccountable reaction? How is it that
severance can start the nerve re-growing. How
does the nerye-fiber find its lost musele micro-
scopically miles away? What is that mechan-
ism that drives and guides it? Is it a chemo-
taxis like that of the antherozooid in the botan-
ical experiment drawn towards the focus of the

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

dissolved malie acid? If so, there must be a
marvelously arranged play of intricate se-
quences of chemically attractive and repellent
substances dissolved suitably peint to point
along the tissue. It has recently been stated
that the nerve-fiber growing from a nerve-cell
in a nutrient field of graded electrical potential
grows strictly by the axis of the gradient. Some
argue for the existence of such potential gra-
dients in the growing organism. Certainly
nerve regeneration seems a return to the orig-
inal phase of growth, and pieces of adult tissue
removed from the body to artificial nutrient
media in the laboratory take on vigorous
growth. Professor Champy describes how epi-
thelium that in the body is not growing, when
thus removed starts growing. If freed from
all fibrous tissue, its cells not only germi-
nate, but, as they do so, lose their adult
specialization. In nerve regeneration the
nerve-sheath cells, and to some extent the
muscle-cells which have lost their nerve-fiber,
lose likewise their specialized form, and regain
it only after touch with the nerve-cell has been
re-established. So similarly epithelium and its
connective tissue cultivated outside the body to-
gether both grow and both retain their spe-
cialization. The evidence seems to show that
the mutual touch between the several cells of
the body is decisive of much in their individual
shaping and destiny. The severance of a
nerve-fiber is an instance of the dislocation of
such a touch. It recalls well-known experi-
ments on the segmenting egg. Destruction of
one of the two halves produced by the first
segmentation of the egg results in a whole em-
bryo from the remaining half-egg; but if the
two blastomeres, though ligated, be left side by
side, eack then produces a half-embryo. Each
half-ege can yield a whole embryo, but is re-
strained by the presence of the twin cell to
yielding but a half embryo. The nerve sever-
ance seems to break a mutual connection which
restrained cell growth and maintained cell dif-
ferentiation.

It may be said that the nerve-sheath cells
degrade because the absence of transmission of
nerve impulses leaves their fiber functionless.
But they do not degrade in the central nerve-
piece, although impulses no longer pass along

SCIENCE

349

the afferent fibers. This mechanism of recon-
struction seems strangely detached from any
direct performance of function. The sprout-
ing nerve-fibers of a motor nerve with impulses
for muscular contraction can by misadventure
take their way to denervated skin instead of
muscle. They find the skin-cells the nerve-
fibers of which have been lost, and on these
they bud out twigs, as true sensory fibers would
do. Then, seemingly satisfied by so doing,
they desist from further growth. The sense-
cells, too, after this misunion, regain their nor-
mal features. But this joining of motor nerye-
fiber with sense-cell is functionless, and must
be so because the directions of functional con-
duction of the two are incompatible. Similarly
a regenerating skin-nerve led down to muscle
makes its union with muscle instead of skin,
though the union is a functional misfit and
can not subserve function. Marvelous though
nerve regeneration be its mechanism seems
blind. Its vehemence is just as great after
amputation, when the parts lost can of course
never be re-reached. Its blindness is sadly
evident in the suffering caused by the useless
nerve-sprouts entangled in the sear of a heal-
ing or healed limb-stump.

There is a great difference, however, between
the growth of such regeneration and the
growth impulse in pieces of tissue isolated from
the body and grown in media outside. With
pure cultures, in the latter case, Professor
Champy savs the growth recalls in several
features that of malignant tumors, for exam-
ple, multiplication of cells unaccompanied by
formation of a specialized adult tissue. A piece
of kidney cultivated outside the body de-
differentiates, to use his term, into a growing
mass unorganized for renal function. But
with connective-tissue cells added even breast-
cancer epitheium will in cultivation grow in
glandular form. New ground is being broken
in the experimental control of tissue growth.
The report of the Imperial Cancer Research
Fund mentions that in cultivation outside the
body malignant cells present a diffculty that
normal cells do not. To the malignant cells the
nutrient soil has to be renewed more frequently,
because they seem rapidly to make the soil in
which they grow poisonous to themselves,

350

though not to normal eells. The following of
all clues of difference between the mechanism
of malignant growth and of normal is fraught
with importance which may be practical as
well as theoretical.

The regenerating nerve rebuilds to a plan
that spells for future function, but throughout
all its steps prior to the time when it actually
reaches the muscle or skin, no actual perform-
ance of nerve-function can take place. What
is constructed is functionally useless until the
whole is complete. So similarly with much of
the construction of the embryo in the womb for
purposes of a different life after emergence
from the womb; of the lung for air-breathing
after birth; of the reflex contraction in the
fetal child of the eyelids to protect the eye
long before the two eyelids have been sep-
arated, let alone ere hurt or even light can
reach it; of the butterfly’s wing within the
chrysalis for future flight. The nervous system
in its repair, as in its original growth, shows
us a mechanism working through phases of
non-functioning preparation in order to fore-
stall and meet a future function. It is a mech-
anism against the seeming prescience of which
is to be set its fallibility and its limitations.
The “how” of its working is at present chiefly
traceable to us in the steps of its results rather
than in comprehension of its intimate reac-
tions; as to its mechanism, perhaps the point
of chief import for us here is that those who
are closest students of it still regard it as a
mechanism. If “to know” ‘be “to know the
causes” we must confess to want of knowledge
of how its mechanism is contrived.

If we knew the whole “how” of the produc-
tion of the body from egg to adult, and if we
admit that every item of its organic machinery
runs on physical and chemical rules as com-
pletely as do inorganic systems, will the living
animal present no other problematical aspect?

The dog, our household friend—do we exhaust -

its aspects if in assessing its sum-total we omit
its mind? A merely reflex pet would give little
pleasure even to the fondest of us. True, our
acquaintance with other mind than our own
can only be by inference. We may even hold
that mind as an object of study does not come
under the rubric of natural science at all. But
this association has its section of psychology.

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1448

and my theme of to-night was chosen partly
at the suggestion of a late member of it, Dr.
Rivers, the loss of whom we all deplore. As a
biologist he véewed mind as a biological factor.
Keeping mind and body apart for certain
analytic purposes must not allow us to forget
their being set together when we assess as a
whole even a single animal life.

Taking as manifestations of mind those ordi-
narily received as such, mind does not seem ta
attach to life, however complex, where there is
no nervous system, nor even where that system,
though present, is little developed. Mind be-
comes more recognizable the more the nerve-
system is developed; hence the difficulty of the
twilit emergence of mind from no mind, which
is repeated even in the individual life history.
In the nervous system there is what is termed
localization of function—relegation of different
works to the system’s different parts. This
localization shows mentality, in the usuxl ac-
ception of that term, not distributed broad-
cast throughout the nervous system, but re-
stricted to certain portions of it; for example,
among vertebrates to what is called the fore-
brain, and in higher vertebrates to the rela-
tively newer parts of that forebrain. Its chief,
perhaps its sole, seat is a comparatively mod-
ern nervous structure superposed on the non-
mental and more ancient other nervous parts.
The so-to-say mental portion of the system is
placed so that its commerce with the body and
the external world occurs only through the
archaic non-mental remainder of the system.
Simple nerve impulses, their summations and
interferences, seem the one uniform office of
the nerve-system in its non-mental aspect. To
pass from a nerve impulse to a psychical event,
a sense-impression, percept, or emotion is, as
it were, to step from one world to another and
incommensurable one. We might expect, then,
that at the places of transition from its non-
mental to its mental regions the brain would
exhibit some striking change of structure. But
it is not so; in the mental parts of the brain
there is nothing but the same old structural
elements, set end to end, suggesting the one
function of the transmission and collision of
nerve impulses. ‘The structural inter-connec-
tions are richer, but that is merely a quantita-
tive change.

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

I do not want, and do not need, to stress our
inability at present to deal with mental actions
in terms of nervous actions, or vice versa.
Facing the relation borne in upon us as ex-
istent between them, however, may we not gain
some further appreciation of it by reminding
ourselves even briefly of certain points of con-
tact between the two? Familiar as such points
are, I will mention rather than dwell upon
them.

One is the so-called expression of the emo-
tions. The mental reaction of an emotion is
accompanied by a nervous discharge which is
more or less characteristic for each several type
of emotion, so that the emotion can be read
from its bodily expression. This nervous dis-
charge is involuntary, and can affect organs,
such as the heart, which the will can not reach.
Then there is the circumstance that the peculiar
ways and tricks of the nervous machinery as
revealed to us in the study of mere reflex reac-
tions repeat themselves obviously in the work-
ing of the machinery to which mental actions
are adjunct. The phenomenon of fatigue is
common to both, and .imposses similar disa-
bilities on both. Nervous exhaustion and
mental exhaustion mingle. Then, as offset
against this disability, there exists in both the
amenability to habit formation, mere repetition
within limits rendering a reaction easier and
readier. Then, and akin to this, is the oft-
remarked trend in both for a reaction to leave
behind itself a trace, an engram, a memory, the
reflex engram, and the mental memory.

How should inertia and momentum affect
non-material reactions? Quick though nervous
reactions are, there is always easily observed
delay between delivery of stimulus and appear-
ance of the nervous end effect; and there is
always the character that a reaction once set in
motion does not cease very promptly. Just
the same order of lag and overrun, of want of
dead-beat character, is met in sense-reactions.
The sensation outlives the light which evoked
it, and the stronger the reaction the longer the
sensation persists. Similarly the reflex after-
discharge persists after the stimulus is with-
drawn and subsides more slowly the stronger
the reaction. The times in both are of the
same order. Again, a reflex act which con-
tracts one muscle commonly relaxes another.

SCIENCE

351

Even so, with rise of sensation in one part of
the visual field commonly occurs lapse of sensa-
tion in another. The stoppage is in both by
inhibition, that is to say, active. Then again,
two lights of opposite color falling simultane-
ously and correspondingly on the two retina
will, according to their balance, fuse to an in-
termediate tint or see-saw back and forth be-
tween the one tint and the other. Similarly a
muscle impelled by two reflexes, one tending to
contract it, the other to relax it, will, accord-
ing to the balance of the reflexes, respond
steadily with an intensity which is a com-
promise between the two, or see-saw rhyth-
mically from extreme to extreme of the two
opposite influences.

Reflex acts commonly predispose to their op-
posites; thus the visual impression of one color
predisposes to that of its opposite. Again,
the position of the stimulated sensual point acts
on the mind—henee the light seen or the pain
felt is referred to some locus in the mind’s
space-system. Similarly the reflex machinery
directs, for example, the limb it moves towards
the particular spot stimulated. Such spots in
the two processes, mental and non-mental, cor-
respond.

Characteristic of the nervous machinery is its
arrangement in what Hughlings Jackson ealled
“Jevels,” the higher levels standing to the lower
not only as drivers but also as restrainers.
Hence in disease underaction of one sort is ac-
companied by overaction of another. Thus in
the arm affected by a cerebral stroke, besides
loss of willed—that is higher level—power in
the finger muscles, there is in other muscles
involuntary overaction owing to escape of
lower centers from control by the bigher which
have been destroyed. Similarly with the sen-
sory effects; of skin sensations some are pain-
ful and some not, for example, touch. The seat
of the latter is of higher level, cortical; of the
former lower, sub-cortical. When cerebral
disease breaks the path between the higher and
the underlying level a result is impairment of
touch sensation but heightening of pain sensa-
tion in the affected part. The sensation of
touch, as Dr. Head says, restrains that of pain.

Thus features of nervous working resemble
over and over again mental activities. Is it
mere metaphor, then, when we speak of mental

302

attitudes as well as bodily? Is it mere analogy
to liken the warped attitude of the mind in a
psychoneurotie sufferer to the warped attitude
of the body constrained by an internal poten-
tial pain? Again, some mental events seem
spontaneous; in the nervous system some im-
pulses seem generated automatically from
within.

It may be said of all these similarities of
time-relation and the rest between the ways of
the nervous system and such simpler ways of
mind as I here venture on, that they exist be-
cause the operations of the mental part of the
nervous system communicate with the exterior
only through the non-mental part as gateway,
and that there the features of the nerve-
machinery are impressed on the mind’s work-
ing. But that suggestion does not take into
account the fact that the higher and more com-
plex the mental process, the longer the time-
lag, the more incident the fatigue, the more
striking the memory character, and so on.

All this similarity does but render more suc-
cinet the old enigma as to the nexus jbetween
nerve impulse and mental event. In the proof
that the working of the animal mechanism con-
forms with the first law of thermodynamies is
it possible to say that psychical events are
evaluated in the balance sheet drawn up? On
the other hand, Mr. Barcroft and his fellow-
observers in their recent physiological explora-
tion of life on the Andes at 14,200 feet noted
that their arithmetic as well as their muscles
were at a disadvantage; the low oxygen pres-
sure militated against both. Indeed, we all
know that a few minutes without oxygen, or
few more with chloroform, and the psychical
and the nervous events will lapse together. The
nexus between the two sets of events is strict,
but for comprehension of its nature we still
require, it seems, comprehension of the un-
solved mystery of the “how” of life itself. A
shadowy bridge between them may le perhaps
in the reflection that for the observer himself
the physical phenomena he observes are in the
last resort psychical.

The practical man has to accept nervous
function as a condition for mental function
withovt concerning himself about ignorance of

their connection. We know that with strue-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1448

tural derangement or destruction of certain
parts of the brain goes mental derangement or
defect, while derangement or destruction of
other parts of the nervous system is not so ac-
companied. Decade by decade the connection
between certain mental performances and cer-
tain cerebral regions becomes more definite.
Certain impairments of ideation as shown by
forms of incomprehension of language or of
familiar objects can help to diagnose for the
surgeon that part of the brain which is being
compressed by a tumor, and the tumor gone the
mental disabilities pass. Similarly those who,
like Professor Elliot Smith and Sir Arthur
Keith, recast the shape of the cerebrum from
the cranial remains of prehistorie man, can out-
line for us something of this mentality from
examination of the relative development of the
several brain regions, using a true and scien-
tific phrenology.

Could we look quite naively at the question
of a seat for the mind within the body we might
perhaps suppose it diffused there, not localized
in any one particular part at all. That it is
localized and that its localization is in the ner-
vous system—can we attach meaning to that
fact? The nervous system is that bodily sys-—
tem the special office of which, from its earliest
appearance onward throughout evolutionary
history, has been more and more to weld to-
gether the body’s component parts into one con-
solidated mechanism reacting as a unity to the
changeful world about it. More than any
other system it has constructed out of a collec-
tion of organs an individual of unified act and
experience. It represents the acme of accom-
plishment of the integration of the animal or-
ganism. That it is in this system that mind,
as we know it, has had its beginning, and with
the progressive development of the system has
developed step for step, is surely significant.
So it is that the portion in this system to which
mind transcendently attaches is exactly that
where are carried to their highest pitch the
nerve-actions which manage the individual as
a whole, especially in his reactions to the ex-
ternal world. There, in the brain, the inte-
grating nervous centers are themselves further
compounded, inter-connected, and re-combined
for unitary functions. The cortex of the fore-

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

brain is the main seat of mind. That cortex
with its twin halves corresponding to the two
side-halves of the body is really a single organ
knitting those halves together by a still further
knitting together of the nervous system itself.
The animal’s great integrating system is there
still further integrated and ithis supreme inte-
grator is the seat of all that is most clearly
inferable as the animal’s mind. As such it has
spelt biological success to its possessors. From
small beginnings it has become steadily a larger
and larger feature of the nervous system, until
in adult man the whole remaining portion of
the system is relatively dwarfed bby it. It is not
without significance, perhaps, that in man this
organ, the brain cortex, bifid as it is, shows
unmistakable asymmetry. Man is a tool-using
animal, and tools demand asymmetrical, though
attentive and therefore unified, acts. A ner-
vous focus unifying such motor function will,
in regard to a laterally bipartite organ, tend
more to one half or the other and in man’s
cerebrum the preponderance of one half,
namely, the left, over the other may be a‘sign
of unifying function.

It is to the psychologist that we must turn
jto learn in full the contribution made to the
integration of the animal individual by mind.
But each of us can recognize, without being a
professed psychologist, one achievement in
that direction which mental endowment has
produced. Made up of myriads of microscopic
cell-lives, individually born, feeding and breath-
ing individually within the body, each one of
us nevertheless appears to himself a single
entity, a unity experiencing and acting as one
individual. In a way the more far-reaching
and many-sided the reactions of which a mind
is capable the more need, as well as the more
scope, for their consolidation to one. True,
each one of us is in some sense not one self,
but a multiple system of selves. Yet how
closely those selves are united and integrated
to one personality. Even in those extremes of
so-called double personality one of their mysti-
fying features is that the individual seems to
himself at any one time wholly either this
personality or that, never the two commingled.
The view that regards hysteria as a mental
dissociation illustrates the integrative trend of

SCIENCE

308

the total healthy mind. Circumstances can
stress in the individual some, perhaps lower,
instinctive tendency that conflicts with what
may be termed his normal personality. This
latter, to master the conflicting trend, can judge
it in relation to his main self’s general ethical
ideals and duties to self and the community.
Thus intellectualizing it, he can destroy it or
consciously subordinate it to some aim in har-
mony with the rest of his personality. By so
doing there is gain in power of will and in
personal coherence of the individual. But if
the morbid situation be too strong or the
mental self too weak, instead of thus assimilat-
ing the contentious element the mind may
shun and, so to say, endeavor to ignore 4t.
That way lies danger. The discordant factor
escaped from the sway of the conscious mind
produces stress and strain of the conscious
self; hence, to use customary terminology, dis-
sociation of the self sets in, bringing in its
train those disabilities, mental or nervous or
both, which characterize the sufferer from
hysteria. The normal action of the mind 1s
to make up from its components one unified
personality. When we remember the manifold
complexity of composition of the human in-
dividual, can we observe a greater example of
solidarity of working of an organism than that
presented by the human individual, intent and
concentrated, as the phrase goes, upon some
higher act of strenuous will? Physiologically
the supreme development of the brain, psycho-
logically the mental powers attaching thereto,
seem to represent from ithe tbiological stand-
point the very culmination of the integration
of the animal organism.

The mental attributes of the nervous system
would be, then, the coping-stone of the con-
struction of the individual. Surveyed in ther
broad biological aspect, we see them carrying
integration even further still. They do not
stop at the individual; they proceed beyond the
individual; they integrate, from individuals,
communities. When we review, so far as we
can judge it, the distribution of mind within
the range of animal forms, we meet two peaks
of its development—one in insect life, ‘the other
in the vertebrate, with its acme finally in man.
True, in the insect the type of mind is not

304

rational but instinctive, whereas at the height
of its vertebrate development reason is there
as well as instinct. Yet in both one outcome
seems to be the welding of individuals into
societies on a scale of organization otherwise
unattained. The greatest social animal is man
and the powers that make him so are mental;
language, tradition, instinct for the preserya-
tion of the community, as well as for the pre-
servation of the individual, reason actuated by
emotion and sentiment, and controlling and
welding egoistic and altruistic instincts into
one broadly harmonious, instinetive-rational be-
havior. Just as the organization of the cell-
colony into an animal individual receives its
highest contribution from the nervous system,
so the further combining of animal individuals
into a multi-individual organism, a social com-
munity, merging the interests of the individual
in the interests of the group, is due to the
nervous system’s crowning attributes, the
mental. That this integration is still in pro-
cess, still developing, is obvious from the whole
course of human pre-history and history. The
biological study of it is essentially psycho-
logical; it is the seope and ambit of social
psychology. Not the least interesting and im-
portant form of social psychology is that rela-
tively new one, dealing with the stresses and
demands that organized industry makes upon
the individual as a unit in the community of
our day and with the readjustments it asks
from that community.

To resume, then, we may, I think, conclude
that in some of its aspects animal life presents
to us mechanism the “how” of which, despite
many gaps in our knowledge, is fairly ex-
plicable. Of not a few of the processes of the
living body, such as muscular contraction, the
circulation of the bleod, the respiratory intake
and output by the lungs, the nervous impulse
and its journeyings, we may fairly feel, from
what we know of them already, that further
application of physics and chemistry will fur-
nish a competent key. We may suppose that
in the same sense as we can claim to-day that
the principles of a gas-engine or an electru-
motor are comprehensible, so will the bodiy
working in such mechanisms be understood by

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No, 1448

us, and indeed are largely so already. Tt may
well be possible to understand the principle
of a mechanism which we have not the means
or skill ourselves to construct; for example, we
eannot construct the atoms of a gas-engine.

Turning to other aspects of animal mechan-
ism, such as the shaping of the animal body,
the conspiring of its structural units to com-
pass later functional ends, the predetermina-
tion of specific growth from egg to adult, the
predetermined natural term of existence, these
and their intimate mechanism, we are, it seems
to me, despite many brilliant inquiries and in-
quirers, still at a loss to understand. The steps
of the results are known, but the springs of
action still lie hidden. Then again, the “how”
of the mind’s connexion with its bodily place
seems still utterly enigma. Similarity or iden-
tity in time-relations and in certain other ways
between mental and nervous processes does not
enlighten us as to the actual nature of the
connexion existing between the two. Advance
in biological science does but serve to stress
further the strictness of the nexus between
them.

Great differences of difficulty therefore con-
front our understanding of various aspects of
animal life. Yet the living creature is funda-
mentally a unity. In trying to make the “how”
of an animal existence intelligible to our im-
perfect knowledge we have, for purposes of
study, to separate its whole into part-aspects
and part-mechanisms, but that separation is
artificial. It is as a whole, a single entity, that
the animal, or for that matter the plant, has
finally and essentially to be envisaged. We
cannot really understand one part without the
other. Can we suppose a unified entity which
is part mechanism and part not? One privilege
open to the human intellect is to attempt to
comprehend, not leaving out of account any
of its properties, the “how” of the living
creature as a whole. The problem is ambi-
tious, but its importance and its reward are
all the greater if we seize and attempt the full
width of its scope. In the biological synthesis
of the individual it is concerned with mind. It
includes examination of man himself as acting
under a biological trend and process which is

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

combining individuals into a multi-individual
organization, a social organism surely new in
the history of the world. This biological trend
and process is constructing a social organism
the cohesion of which depends mainly on a
property developed so specifically in man as to
be, broadly speaking, his alone, namely, a mind
actuated by instincts but instrumented with
reason. Man, often Nature’s rebel, as Sir Ray
Lankester has luminously said, can, viewing
this great supra-individual process, shape his
courses conformably with it even as an in-
dividual, feeling that in this ease to rebel would
be to ‘sink lower rather than to continue has
own evolution upward.

C. S. SHERRINGTON

CAN WASTE OF MENTAL EFFORT

BE AVOIDED

One of the most startling phenomena in the
history of science and invention is the lack of
economy of mental effort. As a rule the great
discoveries in science have not been made once,
but have been repeated several times. It is as
though engineers had built several Panama
canals when only one was needed, thereby pro-
ducing financial waste. At the recent death of
Alexander Graham Bell the daily press reminds
us that he invented the telephone. But he was
not the only one who accomplished this. On
the very day that Bell patented his telephone,
Elisha Gray applied for a patent for an instru-
ment of similar kind. At an earlier date
Phillip Reis sent a speaking machine to the
emperor of Russia. The same is true in the
invention of the telegraph. No historian of
science can give Samuel Morse exclusive credit.
Before him, Joseph Henry at Albany, by the
attraction of an electromagnet, produced audi-
ble signals at a distance. Gauss and Weber
sent messages by an electromagnetic device over
wires connecting the Observatory and Physical
Cabinet at Gottingen. The mental effort of
inventing the telegraph and telephone was
made, not once, but several times.

These are only two of the numerous illus-
trations which might be given of duplication
in applied science. In pure science the situa-
tion is even worse. Waste of effort through

SCIENCE 355

repetition occurred in the discovery of the laws
of gases, Ohm’s law in electricity, the principle
of the conservation of energy, logarithms, de-
terminants, J. W. Gibb’s equilibrium of chem-
ical systems and Mendel’s law. The full ae-
counts of reproduction of scientific discovery
and invention would fill a large book. The
waste of gray matter has resembled the prodi-
gality of the pine-tree which produces millions
of pollen particles for every new plant that is
actually started.

It may be argued that the waste occurs only
in the records of centuries which are passed,
that the number of scientific journals has now
increased so greatly that scientific results can
be published promptly. As a matter of fact,
the greater number of journals has not brought
effective relief. The danger of unnecessary
repetition is still with us. Not only is the
army of scientific workers tremendously aug-
mented, so that even now the editorial desks
are overloaded with able manuscripts and pub-
lication is not so prompt as some suppose, but
the long list of scientific journals has greatly
augmented the labor on the part of any one
worker to ascertain what new results have been
reached in his particular field of activity.
Paradoxical as it may seem, the publications
themselves, by their great mass, clog the work-
er’s efforts to find what he desires.

Tt is still true that investigators are fre-
quently unacquainted with results already
reached by others. And so it frequently hap-
pens that the best brains are exercised to the
utmost in discovering things already discovered
by others. Creative genius is rare. There are
in a generation few cubic decimeters of brains
in a mation, capable of materially advancing
science, and yet history shows that in the past
a large part of these precious cubic decimeters
of gray matter has been expended upon need-
less repetition.

Is it not possible to improve on the present
wasteful methods of condueting research?
There is indeed need of persistence in the en-
deayvor that

No subtle, bright and novel thought

In this wide world shall come to naught;
No germ of purest ray serene

Shall seintillate by us unseen.

356

Can the pathfinders of the intellect conduct
their inquiries as if organized in a team for a
relay race, each individual carrying the torch
of light from the point reached by his prede-
cessor? Such a procedure would prevent repe-
tition. But unfortunately the problem before
us is too complex to admit of such simple solu-
tion. The impractieability of the relay plan is
evident from the consideration that when A
has announced some startling novelty, not only
B, but also C, D and E may take up the further
pursuit of the subject. And it is indeed well
that it should be so, for not every B, C, D and
E may be fortunate to travel in the right diree-
tion and reach desired results. The probability
of further penetration into the unknown is

jnereased when several able minds are at work

simultaneously, rather than one alone. More-
over, several workers may expect to obtain a
greater volume of new knowledge. Under
these cireumstances some duplication is quite
certain and can not be avoided. But when a
goal has been reached by one or more men,
there should be an effective system of distribu-
tion of this knowledge that will stop all unnec-
essary intellectual endeavor.

In the prevention of waste the capitalist can
play a leading réle. A serious difficulty en-
countered in the United States at the present
time is the lack of funds for prompt publica-
tion. In mathematics, for example, no new
books in advanced fields have been issued in
this country in recent years. Several manu-
seripts are awaiting publication. Moreover,
the American periodicals devoted to research
articles are financially unable to print articles
except after long delay. Terminal stations for
the distribution of scientific products are
greatly congested. Moreover, there is a crying
need for efficient and prompt bibliography and
abstracts of scientific output. It is here that
the sympathetic capitalist ean contribute to the
advancement of science almost as much as he
could, were he himself one of the foremost
research workers. He can contribute to a very
essential phase of scientific progress, namely,
the prompt distribution of new knowledge and
the prevention of ayoidable waste of effort.
Essential agencies in the dissemination of
knowledge are abstracts and bibliographies.

SCIENCE

,

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

Except in chemistry and medicine, the United
States has been derelict in the discharge of its
share of obligation in this regard. The Great
War has disarranged what was being accom-
plished in Europe and the present interna-
tional situation is much worse than that of
eight years ago.

The need of the hour is not only adequate
funds for printing, but also new, more instan-
taneous and effective methods of distribution.
Some advance is desired which will accomplish
for the twentieth century what the invention of
printing achieved for the fifteenth century and
photography for the nineteenth century.
Scientific discovery should take up as one of
its problems its own more efficient progress.
Science should bend its efforts to devise new
plans to accelerate its own rate of advance-
ment. Is it not possible for progress to be
made on the compound interest or the snow-
ball mode of accretion? The printing press
will not be superseded, but it should be sup-
plemented by new agencies. The possibilities
of the radiophone seem almost unlimited. It
cam be made to do what it is not yet doing.
When John Smith has a new result, it lies
theoretically within his power to transmit it
instantaneously to his co-workers all over the
world. And if such were done, the largest
part of the waste of mental effort could be
avoided. At present this method lends itself
more readily to some fields of science than to
others. As yet, it is difficult to see how the
“radio” could be effectively used in diffusing
advanced mathematics that is expressed, per-
haps, in the notation of differential equations
or in the Peano symbolism. “Radio” appeals,
not to the eye, but to the ear. Moreover, it
transmits a message that is not permanent, but
vanishes as quick as wink. But, probably even
in abstruse mathematics, modes of quick and
permanent communication by wireless telegra-
phy will be found to lie within the range of
practicability.

The instantaneous distribution of intelli-
gence in the form of a permanent record will
remove all avoidable waste of scientific effort.

FLoRIAN ‘CAJORI
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 7

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

AN INSTITUTE FOR ACOUSTIC
RESEARCH

THERE is much to be said against too elab-
orate an organization of scientific research.
We carry our highly prized individualized
democracy into our experimental endeavors and
shun therein all actual or even apparent con-
trol “from above.” And this attitude if not
carried to an extreme is as it should be. We
train our young graduate students, for exam-
ple, to observe the dependence of their prob-
lems on past performances of others while at
the same time we encourage them ‘to obtain an
orientation in the general history of science.
It would not do much harm to go further in
the latter direction than we do. But above all
we unmistakably teach them also the power of
self-reliance and attempt to inculcate in them
the sense of aggressive initiative in connection
with their problems of investigation. The
young possessor of the doctorate is distinctly
respectful of historical accomplishment and in
that light he envisages the present. But from
that point on he dares independently to face
what lies before.

That assertiveness, displayed in the mature
adventurer after truth as well as in the youth-
ful pioneer, does not gainsay ‘the need of
cooperation. The problem in science is the
same as that in political government: the indi-
vidual needs the state, the state needs the union
of states, and the union of states needs the world
confederacy. So the individual investigator
needs the stimulus of his colleagues. This ex-
tensive sort of organization we have already
abundantly recognized in science in the com-
bination of our specific scientifie associations
into state academies, sectional conferences, na-
tional bodies, and international councils.’

The present scope of scientific inquiry is de-
veloping to such an extent, however, that this
type of extensive cooperation and organization
is not the only desirable one, for we have

1Dr. W. R. Whitney, director of the Research
Laboratory of the General Electrie Company, has
ably brought out the international character of
research in a brief article entitled, ‘‘Science—A
World Partnership,’’ published in the Scientific
American, 127, 1922, 100 (August).

SCIENCE

307

already begun to establish what I should like
to call an intensive form of scientific organiza-
tion. To draw a comparison this time with
industries in ‘the commercial world, it appears
that not only are there associations of insurance
companies, of automobile manufacturers, of
dry goods merchants, and the like, but between
these establishments ‘there are associations that
group together only certain interests, e. g., the
employment managers, the credit men, the buy-
ers, the salemen, etc. So as our scientific
knowledge increases and our scientists of vari-
ous persuasions are beginning to explore con-
tiguous territory, we are finding it necessary to
obtain ‘an outlet for our common interests.
Physicists, chemists, astronomers and mathe-
maticians may to-day be at work on a kindred
group of subjects, ‘but from widely different
angles of approach. An intensive cooperation
among such workers affords often mutual
respect, appreciative understanding of the sev-
eral points of view, real fellowship, and above
all more authentic results. It is noteworthy in
this connection that many hospitals are inviting
groups of scientists to cooperate in a similar
way on specific problems presented in such
institutions.

There is one field which to ‘the writer’s knowl-
edge has already made pronounced progress in
intensive cooperation. ‘This is the field of
opties and visual phenomena. The photo-
graphie and illuminating industries and pro-
fessions have for some time enlisted the aid of
men from several’ allied sciences. In one of
the largest plants for the manufacture of elec-
tric incandescent lamps a physicist, a physiolo-
gist, and a psychologist have cooperatively
undertaken and completed significant prob-
Jems. While these problems are rarely con-
jointly solved, there is ample opportunity for
mutual consultation. Illuminating engineers
are consulting some of the best trained men
psychology has to offer; some are entered as
regular members of the staff. One of the
largest manufacturing concerns of photo-
graphie appliances and supplies employs a
group of men representing several selences
including psychology.”

2 Qther instances of cooperative research that

358

Public attention is just now attracted, more-
over, ‘to the field of another sense-department,
one which, indeed, has usually followed vision
both in historical diseussions and genetically in
the race, viz., hearing. We have lately wit-
nessed an immense development in the photo-
graphic and cinematographic industries; now
comes the prospect of an even wider applica-
tion of wireless telephony. With its problems
added ‘to the problems that are already facing
us in acoustics, it would be wise, it appears to
the writer, to provide a sort of clearing-house
for work done in acoustics by the various sci-
ences. There are constantly occurring phases
of problems and partial problems that need to
be referred to the authority of those whose
training and equipment guarantees satisfac-
tory envisagement and promises sound econelu-
sion. Not only would the various sciences have
something to contribute to an acoustic sympo-
sium, but with closer cooperation, a pace could
be set, an impetus given, toward more intensive
investigation. With this we do not want the
type of overhead organization that will throttle
endeavor and spontaneous effort, but we need
the kind that will inspire research and provide
intelligent aid.

Already there are a considerable number of
institutions where work of a highly valuable
nature is being done in the auditory field.
Some of this is cooperative. The acoustical
laboratory at the Case School of Applied
Science has become an outstanding post of re-
search under the direction of Professor D. C.
Miller. At the State University of Iowa Dean

occur to the writer are: (1) the Mellon Institute
of the University of Pittsburgh; (2) the Research
Bureau for Retail Training and the Bureau of
Personnel Research, both at the Carnegie Insti-
tute of Technology at Pittsburgh; (3) the Amer-
ican Institute of Baking of Chicago, and (4) the
newly organized Department of Engineering Re-
search at the University of Michigan. Some of
these undertakings are entirely, some only in part,
financed by commercial corporations which are
interested in the problems investigated. In addi-
tion mention should be made of a considerable
number of industrial fellowships of various de-
scriptions that are maintained by industrial con-
cerns at our larger universities.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

C. EK. Seashore has for many years done note-
worthy work in supervising research in several
branches of the auditory field and has recently
enjoyed the cooperation of Professor G. W.
Stewart in some of these undertakings. At
Harvard the late Professor W. ©. Sabine con-
tributed largely to an understanding of the
auditory properties of architectural interiors,
a problem which Professor F. R. Watson, of
the University of Illinois, has also largely and
ably devoted his attention. The psychological
laboratories of Clark, Cornell, Illinois, Mis-
souri, Ohio State have added considerably to
our store of knowledge on the subject, while
Professor G. E. Shambaugh, of the University
of Chicago, stands among those who have done
original work in connection with the physio-
logical theory of audition. The private labora-
tory of Colonel Fabyan at Geneva, Ill., has
busied itself to a large extent with auditory
phenomena, and a number of industrial enter-
prises, like the phonographie laboratories,
have carried on investigations allied ‘te their
work. This brief résumé is doubtless inade-
quate but serves to show many of the separately
organized establishments in acoustic research.

Some of the problems that would lend them-
selves advantageously to cooperative investiga-
tion are summarized below:

(1) Sound localization. Further investigation
of intensive and qualitative factors in the binaural
ratio as applied to the detection of the direction
of the source of tones and noises throughout the
ranges of intensity and quality; experimental
study of sound localization through all three types
of media, gaseous, liquid and solid; phantom
sounds; polarized sound.

(2) Qualitative and quantitative thresholds of
sound. Careful serutiny of the liminal values for
both tones and noise; standardization of inten-
sive units of sound; re-investigation of the upper
and lower pitch limits of tone with carefully
calibrated instruments.

(3) The attributes of tone and noise. Sys-
tematie review of the tonal manifold with an em-
pirical attempt at classification of the variable
characteristics; distinction between noise and
tone; question of vowel tones.

(4) Consonance and dissonance. Working out
the higher difference and summation tones; fur-
ther analysis of harmony; question of beat-notes.

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

(5) Membranous sound production and trans-
mission. Improvement in the fidelity of sound
produetion through telephonic and phonographiec
reproducers; reduction of inherent membraneous
tones and noises; problem of sibilants and as-
pirates.

(6) The acoustic qualities of confined areas.
Question of preventing leakage of sound through
ventilating systems and wall-supports; reflecting
and absorbing qualities of various building mate-
rials to be used from time ‘to time; acoustic prop-
erties ‘of halls, rooms, ete.; ‘‘sound-proof’’
rooms.

(7) Auditory theory. Further investigation of
the human auditory mechanism and its pathology;
intracranial conduction of sound; tonal gaps and
‘Cislands.’?

Specifically, then, it is the opinion of the
writer that there exists in this field a threefold
need:

I. There should be a closer
workers in acousties.

affiliation of
An association of those
interested might be assembled under some such
title as the American Acoustical Society.

II. A journal with this society as sponsor
would become an outlet for the publication of
papers on the general topics of acoustics.

III. If in the course of events progress is
recorded, an endowment fund should be raised
with perhaps industrial assistance for the pur-
pose of erecting a central laboratory or insti-
tute where apparatus would become available
for precise and intensive work. It would save
the expense of multiplying elaborate research
pieces in our various laboratories where they
frequently lie idle for long periods of time. It
might serve further for the exchange and loan
of apparatus under a system of adequate guar-
antee against mishandling and breakage.

A number of our leading men working to-
gether at such an institute would not only lend
zest to their own endeavors, but would offer a
place for the training of younger men in the
field. The institute would, moreover, provide
for the industries that are concerned in ‘the
manufacture of acoustical apparatus a fund of
information for their guidance and an atten-
tive and trained “ear” for problems that arise
in their practical work.

Curistian A. RuCKMICK

WELLESLEY COLLEGE

SCIENCE |

359

PROPOSED FEDERATION OF AMERI-
CAN BIOLOGICAL SOCIETIES

A CONFERENCE was held in Washington
in April, 1922, at which a number of
biological organizations were represented,

to discuss plans for a federation of Ameri-
ean biological societies. This meeting was
held in pursuance of instructions given by the
several societies at their annual meetings at
Toronto and elsewhere in 1921. The Washing-
ton conference, after some debate, affirmed its
belief in the desirability and feasibility of a
federation of biological societies, and adopted
a general plan in accordance with which such
a federation might be established. An outline
of this plan has already been published in this
journal!, A committee was raised to work out
the details of the plan and to prepare a con-
stitution embodying these details.

This committee, which consisted of F. R.
Lillie, C. W. Greene, I. F. Lewis, C. E. Me-
Clung, A. Franklin Shull, R. W. Thatcher,
H. B. Ward, and B. EH. Livingston represent-
ing the American Association, met in Woods
Hole, Massachusetts, August 4 and 5, 1922.
Professor Herbert Osborn substituted for Pro-
fessor Livingston at this meeting.

For its own guidance, after some delibera-
tion, the committee adopted certain funda-
mental principles upon which, in its opinion,
any federation should be based. These prin-
ciples are stated in the following resolution
which was adopted by the committee.

Resolved, That it is the judgment of the so-
ciety representatives considering the formation
of a federation of biological societies that cer-
tain principles should be observed in setting
up relations with existing organizations. These
principles are:

1. The federation should, for its benefit,
utilize other organizations in accordance with
their nature and purposes.

2. The federation should, on the other hand,
so direct its policies and methods as to strength-
en the efforts of organizations with which it
is affihated.

3. The federation should avoid unnecessary
duplication of effort and expenditure.

1$crence, Vol. LVI, p. 184.

360

The concrete application of these principles
in the development of a constitution was one
of the principal tasks of the committee. How
to use such organizations as the National Re-
search Council and the American Association
most effectively and in turn how to be of the
greatest service to those organizations in the
furtherance of the interests of biological sci-
ence were problems that elicited much discus-
sion. The committee believes that a satisfac-
tory solution of these problems is contained in
the constitution given below. This instrument
will be submitted to the various societies for
ratification or rejection at their annual meet-
ings late in 1922, and it is important that all
members of the ibiological societies which have
been concerned in formulating plans of federa-
tion should become familiar with its provisions.
The proposed constitution of the federation is
as follows:

Proposed Constitution
for a
Federation of American Biological Societies
Article I. Preamble

In view of the existence of many biological
societies in America, each preoccupied with its
own special affairs and problems, in view of the
assured interest of all these societies in the
broader and more general aspects of the promo-
tion of biological science, and especially in view
of the need for improved means of contact and
mutual aid between the pure and the applied
branches of biological science, this Federation is
established to facilitate constructive and mutu-
ally advantageous cooperation among the several
special biological societies and to promote the
major interests of biology.

Anticle II. Name

The name of this organization shall be the

Federation of American Biological Societies.
Article IIT. Objects

The objects of the Federation shall be to
stimulate investigation in the field of biology,
to organize and promote the interests of biblio-
graphy and publication, to.deal with questions
of general interest in the field of biology, and in
general to promote the solution of those broad
problems which the specialized societies are not
in a position to support effectively, and to do
anything else which may serve these ends.

Article IV. Membership

Section 1. The membership of the Federa-

tion shall be by societies and not by individuals.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

Section 2. The original members of the Federa-
tion shall be all those organizations that were
concerned in the Preliminary Conference on
Federation held in Washington, D. C., April 23,
1922, provided that each member society shall
officially accept membership in the Federation.

Section 3. Any other organization working in
the field of biology may become a member of
the ederation upon invitation by the Council of
the Federation and acceptance of membership.

Section 4. Any Society may terminate its
membership in the Federation by official notifica-
tion to the Council and completion of its obliga-
tions to the Federation.

Article V. Delimitation of Authority

The constituent societies of this Federation re-

tain their complete autonomy.
Article VI. Council

Section 1. The management of the Federation
shall be vested in a body to be known as the
Council of the Federation of American Biological
Societies. Each original member society shall be
entitled to be represented in the Council by two
representatives that the society may officially
designate.

Section 2. The Council shall establish its own
organization and enact its own rules and by-laws.

Section 8. The Council shall establish regula-
tions governing the admission of additional or-
ganizations to membership in the Federation and
shall determine their representation in the Coun-
cil.

Section 4. The Council shall receive and decide
questions referred to it by member societies; it
may also independently promote the objects of
the Federation.

Section 5. The Council shall act in close co-
operation with existing agencies, such as the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science and the National Research Council.

Section 6. The Council shall appoint an Exeeu-
tive Committee, which shall have such duties and
powers as the Council may prescribe.

Section 7. The Council shall appoint a Com-
mittee on Bibliography and Publication, with
such duties and powers as the Council may pre-
scribe. This committee shall act in cooperation
with similar committees that may be appointed
by the National Research Council and the Ameri-
ean Association for the Advancement of Science.

Section 8. The Council shall arrange places
and times for its own meetings. The Council
shall assist the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science in making arrangements
for meetings of any member society or group of

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

member societies, when officially requested by the
member societies to do so.
Article VII. Finances

The financial affairs of the Federation shall be
controlled by the Council, which may receive and
administer funds for the promotion of the pur-
poses of the Federation, The current expenses
of the Council shall be met by contributions, and
by assessments on member societies. The Council
may recommend but not impose such assessments.

Article VIII. Reports

The Council may make an annual report to
each of the member societies, setting forth the
nature and extent of what has been accomplished
by the Federation during the past year, and also
pointing out, as far as possible, the general lines
along which the activities of the Federation are
to be directed during the coming year. The an-
nual report of the Council shall include a financial
statement.

Article IX. Amendments

Section 1. Amendments to the Constitution
shall require the approval of a majority of the
Council and of two-thirds of the member societies.

Section 2. Amendments may originate in mem-
ber societies or in the Council.

Section 3. Notice of proposed amendments
must be presented to the Secretary of the Council
and mailed to all members at least one month be-
fore the meeting at whieh they are to be con-
sidered by the Council. Notice of approval of
any amendment by the Council shall be submitted
to the Secretaries of the Societies for action. On
receipt of notice of the approval of any amend-
ment by two-thirds of the member societies, the
Secretary of the Council shall give notice of its
adoption in writing to all member societies.

A. FRANKLIN SHULL,
Secretary of the Executive
Committee pro. tem.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
BUST OF CHESTER S. LYMAN1

Mr. Cuester W. Lyman, of the class of
1882, Yale College, has presented to the trus-
tees of the Scientifie School a portrait bust in
marble of his father, the late Professor Chester
S. Lyman. This piece of sculpture, made by
Mr. James T. Porter, of New York, is a beau-
tiful work of art and the artist has not. only
sueceeded in depicting in the marble a likeness

1 From the Yale Alumni Weekly.

SCIENCE

361
which is striking but has caught the essence of
the subject’s personality. The bust will stand
in the faculty room, where it will perpetuate
within the walls of the school not only the
features but the spirit as well of one whose
life was largely devoted to its welfare during
the early years of its struggle for existence.

Chester S. Lyman was one of the early pro-
fessors in the Sheffield Scientifie School, having
been appointed as professor of industrial me-
chanics and physics in 1859. In 1884 his chair
was limited to astronomy, physics being made
a distinet chair, and Dr. Charles 8. Hastings
was appointed at that date to fill this position.
Professor Iyman was retired as professor
emeritus in 1889 and died in 1890.

Dr. Hastings, now professor of physics
emeritus, has kindly written the following ap-
preciation of the late Professor Lyman’s work:

The admirable portrait bust of the late Pro-
fessor Chester S. Lyman, presented to the Shef-
field Scientific School, gives the weleome oppor-
tunity to an old and grateful pupil to record some
memories of his enviable place as a teacher.

A most interesting sketch of his remarkably
intellectual, and even adventurous, life was print-
ed in The Popular Science Monthly of September,
1887, by his son, Chester W. Lyman. The present
note may, therefore, best confine itself to some-
what personal reminiscences.

In 1867 an acquaintance began which was of
inestimable value to the present writer and which
continued until the end of Professor Lyman’s life.
The kindness with which the freshman was re-
ceived, the generous manner in which his letters
of introduction were accepted, served to establish
a friendship which is rarely equaled between
teacher and scholar. The teaching was by no
means confined to the classroom, but extended
even to an unrestricted use of his private observa-
tory and convenient little machine shop.

At that time the equipment of the department
of physics was very meager. Notwithstanding
this fact, such was the ingenuity of Professor
Lyman in making necessary apparatus, his clear-
ness of exposition, his profoundly philosophical
feeling for the essentials of science, that there was
certainly no better school for the earnest student
of physics in the country. It was during this
period, or a little earlier, that he invented and
constructed his water-wave apparatus, which still
seems to me the most perfect and remarkable

362

apparatus ever designed for the explanation of a
highly complex phenomenon.

In 1869 Professor Lyman, accompanied by his
colleague, the eminent astronomer, Professor
Newton, went to Europe to purchase physical and
mechanical apparatus from a fund given for that
purpose by Peter Collier, of the class of 1861,
Yale College. Aside from the requisite and
familiar instruments of the physical cabinet not
already at command, a remarkably full collection
of acoustic apparatus was included. The recent
discoveries of Helmholtz in the field of sound
sensations had enormously enhanced the interest
of physicists in that of acoustics, and Professor
Lyman utilized this portion of the equipment not
only in the classroom but also in a number of
public lectures. It was in these lectures that he
first made public his ingenious apparatus for com-
pounding pendulum motions at right angles to
each other. The enthusiasm with which his audi-
ences received his clear expositions and admirably
chosen illastrative experiments left an enduring
impression on the memory of his assistant.

A mind so richly stored with the experiences of
a singularly varied life could not be otherwise
than stimulating in the highest degree to his more
thoughtful students, but more than any other
teacher known to the writer he awakened a per-
sonal affection among all of them which was as
freely expressed as it was unusual.

EFFECTS OF FOREST FIRES ON FOOD AND
GAME FISHES

Tue Fisheries Service Bulletin calls attention
to the fact that everyone is more or less familiar
with the loss of valuable timber sustained each
year from forest fires, but there are other seri-
ous losses of valuable natural resources from
this cause that have received ‘but comparatively
little attention. We refer to the wild life of
the woods and streams, and particularly to the
game and food fishes. Based on a monetary
valuation the loss of wild life from forest fires
may appear insignificant compared with the
loss of timber, but when we consider that the
U. §S. Forest Service estimates that some
6,000,000 people annually visit our natural for-
ests, many or most of them interested in the
fish and game, we become aware to some extent
of the importance of the wild life of our for-
ests. Any game and fish commission or con-
servation commission will be able to vouch for
the real value of good fishing to a community.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

In line with- the growing tendency to place a
large portion of the responsibility of consery-
ing our natural resources on those who reap
the greatest benefits therefrom, it seems
proper to invite the attention of those persons
who find pleasure and healthful recreation in
fishing in the waters of our forests to the
destructive effects of forest fires on the fish.
There is a deplorable lack of reliable informa-
tion and very few recorded observations on the
subject. A few of the most immediate effects
detrimental to fish life that may be expected to
follow forest fires are a sudden rise in the tem-
perature of the water, a lowering of its oxygen
content, a change in its chemical properties,
and destruction of shade. ‘The slightly acid
condition natural to most forest streams, and
recognized as suitable for trout, is changed to
alkaline from the ash deposited therein. <A
large amount of ash in the water may be ex-
pected to have a deleterious mechanical effect
on the fish aside from the chemical changes.

These are but a few of the more obvious and
immediate results of fires, and they take no
cognizance of the most far-reaching though not
immediately apparent effects that probably
oeccur—the destruction of food, increased tur-
bidity, decreased protection against floods and
drought, ete. Reliable information on the sub-
ject is meager, though an appreciation of the
loss of fish from this cause and a record of
intelligent observations thereon are of im-
portance. It will be appreciated if persons
having knowledge of such occurrences will com-
municate it to the Bureau of Fisheries.

CONFERENCE ON WORLD METRIC
STANDARDIZATION

No less than twenty-seven national scientific
societies were represented in the Conference on
World Metrie Standardization which. was held
at the Carnegie Institute of Technology on
September 6, simultaneously with the Pitts-
burgh meeting of the American Chemical
Society. Dr. HE. C. Bingham, of Lafayette
College, presided, and opened the discussion.

The conference was called because it was
deemed advisable to take cognizance of the
organized opposition to the spread of the
metric system which has developed in certain

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922)

quarters.*
very little time to consideration of the relative
merits of the metric system and the English
system, since the superiority of metrie measure-
ments seemed to ibe conceded by every one
present. Discussion turned rather on questions
of the best methods of furthering general adop-
tion of the metric system. Representatives
spoke on behalf of such diverse fields as archi-
tecture, astronomy, chemistry, civil engineer-
ing, education, electricity, medicine, optometry,
pharmacy, physiology, public health, and other
branches of pure and applied science.

Physicists, chemists and pharmacists, on the
one hand, reported that the metric system is
already in general use and the battle won as
far as their portions of the field are concerned.
Representatives of the medical societies, on the
other hand, reported a surprising inertia on
the part of physicians to make use of gram and
milligram units instead of apothecaries’ weight
in writing prescriptions, although only metric
units are used in recent editions of the pharma-
copeia. Better instruction and drill in the
actual use of metric units was demanded of all
schools, and in particular of the medical
schools.

The civil engineers and the architects stand
apparently in a passive attitude, content to
continue in the use of the English system until
a demand on the part of the public indicates a
greatly reduced inertia with reference to the
abandonment of inches, feet and miles.

As far as the writer knows, this is the. first
conference at which the relative merits of
gradual adoption of the metrie system vs. com-
pulsory universal adoption have been debated
by a group of scientific men who have then
gone definitely on record as favoring the policy
of gradnal adoption. The opposition has pro-
ceeded upon the assumption that the change to
the metri¢e system must be completed suddenly,
or else it can not be made at all. As a result
they conclude that the change must be made at
an appalling eost to industry. The conference
went on record unanimously as of the opinion
that the gradual introduction of the metric

1See this journal, June 23, 1922, ‘Are Scien-
tists Encouraging Popular Ignorance?’’

SCIENCE

The delegates, however, devoted

363

system is practicable. The question of how
legislation may be used to assist in bringing
about the gradual change was not taken up at
this conference.

Dr. W. A. Noyes read a paper by Dr. T. C.
Mendenhall representing the National Academy
of Sciences. In it Dr. Mendenhall combated
with historical facts many of the fallacious
arguments which have recently been advanced
against the spread of the metric system. The
paper will appear in full in Scrence.

Formal action was taken by the conference
on four points, as follows:

1. Voted, that it is the sense of this meeting
that we favor the gradual adoption of the metric
system wherever practicable.

2. Voted, that this body take up with the
United States Bureau of Education and other
agencies, a plan for the better teaching of the
metric system in the schools.

3. Voted, that the United States secretary of
commerce be asked to secure information as to
the extent to which the metric system is actually
used at present in those countries which have
made its use compulsory by law; and also in those
countries where its use is not obligatory.

4. Voted, that the system of double-marking all
goods be encouraged. (This vote was adopted
by only a small majority.)

W. V. BincHam,
Secretary of the Conference
CARNEGIE INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

ACTIVITIES OF THE ROCKEFELLER
FOUNDATION

Tue Journal of the American Medical As-
sociation reports that the minister of educa-
tion has accepted on behalf of the Japanese
Government an invitation from George E. Vin-
cent, president of the Rockefeller Foundation,
New York, to name and send a commission of
Japanese medical scientists to visit the medical
institutions of the United States and Canada,
as guests of the Rockefeller Foundation. This
idea originated from the success that attended
the visits to America of similar commissions
from Great Britain, Brazil and Belgium. The
commission will consist of four or five men,
well known as representatives of the important
branches of medical science and of the prin-
cipal medical universities and institutes of the

364

country. The spring of 1923 has been selected
as the most suitable time for this visit, which
will last about three months.

According to the agreement between the
Rockefeller Foundation and the government of
Honduras, a hookworm disease section and a
public health department were organized in that
country. The Foundation will bear 66 per
cent. of the expenses during the first year and
34 per cent. during the second, and the Hon-
duras government will assume all expense from
the third year on.

In a report from Geneva, August 17, it was
stated that the hygiene committee of the League
of Nations had decided ito accept the offer of
the Rockefeller Foundation, amounting to the
sum of $60,000 a year for three years, to allow
an interchange of staff in the public health
services of various countries, and a sum of
$30,000 yearly for five years for the develop-
ment of an international office for distributing
information as to epidemics. After the neces-
sary documents are signed, the plan will be
put into action at once, and the interchange
of staff will begin in October. For a period
of two weeks, functionaries of various natiou-
alities—a Bulgarian, two Belgians, two Czechs,
five ltalians, five Poles, five Russians and two
Serbians—will pursue an intensive short course
at Brussels, following which they will spend
two months 1m the public health services of
different countries.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Sir Ernest RutTHeRFORD, Cavendish profes-
sor of physics at the University of Cambridge,
has been elected president of the British As-
sociation for the Advancement of Science in
succession to Sir Charles S. Sherrington. The
meeting next year will be at Liverpool, and it
is expected that the meeting the following year
will be in Canada.

Proressor W. L. Brace, of Manchester Uni-
versity, who, together with his father, Sir Wil-
liam Bragg, was awarded the Nobel Prize for
physics in 1915, delivered on September 6 the
lecture in Stockholm as prescribed by the

statutes of the Nobel Institution.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

ENGINEER VicE-ApDMIRAL Sir GEORGE GooD-
win, K. C. B., late engineer-in-chief of the
fleet, and Dr. James Colquhoun Ityine,.
C. B. E., F. RB. §., vice-chancellor and prin-
cipal of St. Andrews University, have been
appointed to be members of the advisory coun-
cil to the committee of the privy council for
scientific and industrial research.

Dr. Wittarp Rouse JILuson, director and
state geologist of the Kentucky Geological Sur-
vey, was elected an honorary member of the
Natural Gas Association of America at its re-
cent meeting in Kansas City.

Dr. Henry FAirFIELD Osporn, president of
the American Museum of Natural History, has
sailed from Seattle on the President Grant of
the Admiral Line for Yokohoma. From Yoko-
homa Dr. Osborn will go to Korea and thence
by rail to Peking to the headquarters of the
museum, where he will meet the members of the
Third Asiatic Expedition. During his stay in
Peking, Dr. Osborn plans to make a trip to
the edge of the Gobi Desert, where the expedi-
tion has found beds of Cretaceous and Tertiary
deposits. From Peking, he will go to the
Philippine Islands and from there to India to .
visit the fossil-bearing formations in the
Siwilk Hills, where Mr. Barnum Brown is col-
leeting for the museum.

Atv the Pittsburgh meeting of the American
Chemical Society, the Division of Industrial
and Engineering Chemistry elected D. R. Sper-
ry, chairman, W. A. Peters, Jr., vice-chairman,
EK. M. Billings, secretary, and the following
were elected members of the executive commit-
tee: W. F. Hillebrand, Edward Mallinckrodt,
Jr., F. M. deBeers, A. Silverman, H. C. Moody,
and C. E. Coates.

Norman Snyper, a member of the scientific
staff of the Radio Laboratory of the Bureau of
Standards, left the bureau June 1 for a leave
of absence of several months to work in the
research laboratory of the General Electric
Company at Schenectady on electron tube
problems.

F. W. Stavery, Ph.D. (Chieago, 722), has
aceepted a position with the Firestone Tire
and Rubber Company at Akron, Ohio.

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

Dr. C. 8. Leonarp, who has for the past
year been working with Dr. A. S. Loevenhkart
at the University of Wisconsin upon synthetic
arsenicals, has aecepted a position as a pharma-
cologist in the Hygienic Laboratory, U. S.
Public Health Service, Washington, D. C.

Tue following have joined the staff of the
research laboratory of the Eastman [Kodaix
Company: Dr. Helge Schibsted, formerly with
the Atmospheric Nitrogen Company; Clyde
Brockett, Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, 1922; Alasco Burgess, Bates College,
1922; D. Henry Harris, Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology, 1922; Roger P. Loveland,
Grinnell College, 1919.

Dr. Lewis M. Huu, who for several years
has been engaged in studies of electron tubes
in the radio laboratory of the Bureau of Stand-
ards, has resigned to accept a position as
director of research of the Radio Frequency
Laboratories, Inc., of Boonton, N. J.

Miss GupRUN CARLSON, assistant in the de-
partment of foods and cookery at Teachers
College, has been appointed home economics
expert in the publicity department of the Insti-
tute of American Meat Packers.

Mr. Eric R. Jerre, who recently completed
his work for the Ph.D. in chemistry at Colum-
bia University, has sailed for a year of study
in Stockholm. He has an American-Scan-
dinavian fellowship for the year 1922-23.

Dr. Ronanp E. Kremers has resigned as
assistant professor of chemistry in Vanderbilt
University, and has returned to the University
of Wisconsin, where he will be in residence
this year under a National Research Council
fellowship. He will work on the peppermunt
oils and on azulene.

Dr. F. L. Stevens, professor of plant path-
ology in the University of Illinois, has returned
from a summer spent in collecting fungi in
British Guiana. Collections were made on the
coast and in Demerrara, Hssequibo and Potaro
Rivers.

Proressor C. A. Nosur, of the department
of mathematics, University of California, has
been granted a term’s leave of absence, which
he will spend in Europe.

SCIENCE

365

Dr. Kyup Srepuensen, of the Zoological
Museum at Copenhagen, known for his studies
on the Crustacea, is visiting the scientifie insti-
tutions of the United States.

Dr. Witrrep T. GRENFELL, known for his
work in Labrador, has sailed for Hurope and
will lecture twice in London. Lord Milner will
preside at one of these lectures.

At the Pittsburgh meeting of the chairmen
and secretaries group of the American Chem-
ieal Society, a plan was launched by which
Professor EH. C. Franklin, of Leland Stanford
University, will give a series of lectures before
several of the local sections of the society.
These will be given near the time of the spring
meeting, that is, the latter part of March and
the early part of April. The following sec-
tions have asked Dr. Franklin to speak before
them on this trip: Chicago, Detroit, Kast Lan-
sing, University of Michigan, Purdue, Cleve-
land, New Orleans, West Virginia, Pittsburgh,
Buffalo, Rochester, Syracuse and Philadelphia.
If there are other sections of the American
Chemical Society or other scientific bodies who
would like to have Dr. Franklin speak before
them, information can be obtained by writing
to E. M. Billings, Kodak Park, Rochester, N. Y.

Mr. A. Cuaston CHapMan, F.R.S., hon-
ovary treasurer in England of the Pasteur
Commemoration Fund, writes to the British
Medical Journal that a sum of £848 14s. 6d. has
been subseribed to this fund, in addition to
sums which had previously been sent to France
in response to earlier and direct appeals. In
accordance with a resolution passed at a recent
meeting of the Pasteur Commemoration Com-
mittee, presided over by Sir Charles Sherring-
ton, P.R.S., a draft for the above amount is
being forwarded to Monsieur Héring, the gen-
eral treasurer, at Strasbourg, with an intima-
tion that should the amount prove more than
the French committee desires to expend upon
the monument the excess should be devoted to
some other form of permanent memorial of
Pasteur in the University of Strasbourg.

Tue Prince of Wales has consented to unveil
on November 3 the memorial tablet of the late
Professor Sir William Ramsay which is being

366

placed in Westminster Abbey. The tablet has
been executed by Mr. Charles L. Hartwell,
A.R.A., and was exhibited at the Royal Acad-
emy this summer.

Dr. Horatio R. Storer died at his home in
Newport on September 18, at the age of ninety-
two years. Dr. Storer was a distinguished
gynecologist, who, after an infection from an
operation, retired from active practise in 1872.
He continued to be active in many scientific
movements, having been the founder and life-
president of the Newport Natural History
Society.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

By the will of Dr. William S. Halsted,
lately professor of surgery in the Johns Hop-
kins University, the residue of his estate, valued
at approximately $100,000, is left to the uni-
versity, subject to the payment annually to his
widow of five per cent. of the value of the
legacy. The bequest is to be devoted to re-
search in medicine, preferably in surgery.

Ow September 6, the old chemical laboratory
of the Massachusetts Agricultural College was
destroyed by fire. The building was one of
the oldest on the campus, having been built in
1867, and occupied more or less completely by
the department of chemistry since that time.
About four thousand dollars’ worth of appara-
tus, ineluding all the platinum, was recovered.
A new laboratcry was provided for during the
last legislature by an appropriation of
$300,000. This building is now being erected
and will be ready for occupancy in August,
1923.

By action of the board of trustees of the
Ohio: State University on June 19, supple-
mented by further action on July 11, the Col-
lege of Homecpathie Medicine, which had been
a part of the university since 1914, was abol-
ished.

Dean D. W. Morenousr, for twenty-two
years professor of physies and astronomy ait
Drake University, Des Moines, Iowa, has been
elected dean of the liberal arts colege and
acting president. President Arthur Holmes is

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

on ave of absence, his resignation taking
effect on June 1, 1923. Dr. Morehouse was
awarded the Donahue Comet Medal in 1908 for
discovery of the Morehouse comet.

Dr. W. N. Sei, of the University of Wis-
consin, has been appointed professor of botany
in Marquette University, the former depart-
ment of biology having been divided into the
separate departments of botany and zoology.
Dr. Edward J. Menge, former director of the
department, automatically becomes director of
the department of zoology.

Dr. Martin C. E. Hanks has been appoint-
ed instructor in physiological chemistry at the
University of Chicago.

W. J. Kostir, who during the past year has
been instructor in zoology at Columbia Uni-
versity, returns this fall to Ohio State Univer-
sity as assistant professor of zoology and en-
tomology.

Dr. L. E. Mitzs, of the Mississippi Plant
Board, has become associate professor of plant
pathology and associate plant pathologist in
the Alabama Polytechnic Institute and Experi-
ment Station.

Proressor H. R. Duan, of the University of
Manchester, has been appointed professor of
pathology at the University of Cambridge in
succession to the late Sir German Sims Wood-
head.

CaprTain Grorce Pacer THomson, lecturer
in mathematics at Corpus Christi College, Cam-
bridge, has been appointed to the chair of nat-
ural philosophy in the University of Aberdeen,
im succession to Professor C. Niven, recently
retired. Mr. Thomson, who was unanimously
elected by the court out of seventeen applicants,
is the only son of Professor Sir J. J. Thomson,
master of Trinity, Cambridge. He has had a
distinguished academical career, and is only
thirty years of age.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

GROWTH OF PLANTS IN ARTIFICIAL LIGHT
FROM SEED TO SEED

Durine the past winter the author has suc-

ceeded in producing good seed from plants

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

grown in artificial light entirely. Since no
reference to the growth of plants from seed to
seed without sunlight has been found in the
literature this preliminary report of the first
successful attempt may be of use to plant
breeders and agronomists in northern regions.
A great variety of plants including several
varieties of wheat, oats, barley, rye and pota-
toes, buckwheat, lettuce, beans, peas, clovers,
radishes, flax and a number of common weeds
were grown from seed to seed entirely in arti-
ficial light. The seed produced was of good
quality, full of starch, and germinated well.
Light for the experiment was obtained from
tungsten filament nitrogen filled lamps which
were burned for twenty-four hours each day.
The lamps are rated to burn 1,000 hours but
they averaged 3,000-4,000 hours under continu-
ous use. One set of lamps was found to be
more than sufficient to produce an ordinary
crop such as the cereals, since the time to head
is much decreased by continuous illumination.
Spring wheats produced ripe seed in about 90
days. At this rate it ought to be possible now
to grow three generations from a cross within
one year. The growth of valuable plants in
artificial light should be of considerable advan-
tage in northern regions where the light in
winter is of short duration and low intensity.
All of the plants tested, except cabbage, have
bloomed and each variety does not seem to re-
quire any particular period of illumination to
cause blooming as found jby Garner and
Allard.t
Four ranges of light intensity were used
and a number of plants bloomed in all of them,
although the Ulumination was continuous. The
tests were performed in three unheated base-
ment rooms. It was unnecessary to supply any
heat other than that produced by the lamps
even in the coldest winter weather. For cereals
the temperature was controlled automatically
at 14° C. by blowing in cold outside air. The
energy used in heating the ordinary green-
house in Minnesota during the winter would
be ample for both light and heat in such experi-
ments as these since nearly all the energy of

1Garner, W. W., and Allard, H. A.: Jr. Agr.
Res., 18: 553-606: 1920.

SCIENCE

367

the light finally goes to heat and thus is made
to serve a double purpose.

R. B. Harvey
UNIVERSITY or MInNESOTA

THE PREPARATION OF CLEAR BEEF AGAR

A ciEaR beef agar with a py reading from
6.6 to 7.0 being desired and the usual method
for the preparation of such media proving un-
satisfactory, inasmuch as a cloudiness often
developed in the cleared agar on sterilization,
the following procedure has been adopted and
has proved uniformly reliable.

The formula is as follows:

Beef extract (Liebig’s)
Peptone (‘‘Bacto’’)
Sodium chloride
BA ELT BAND aT ee eae

grams
grams
grams
grams

These ingredients are dissolved in one liter
of distilled water by flowing steam. As sug-
gested by the directions for the preparation of
beef bouillon, given by James McIntosh, M.D.,
and William A. M. Smart, B.Se.Land.,? the
resultant nutrient agar is adjusted to a py of
about 8.2 with an approximately normal solu-
tion of sodium hydroxide. After cooling to
45°-50° C., the beaten whites of two fresh eggs
are added. Soluble egg albumin powder may
be substituted for the fresh eges, 5 grams
beaten up in 50 ee. of distilled water proving
satisfactory. If more than one liter is being
made, the beaten white of one egg or a. pro-
portional quantity of egg albumin powder
should be used for each additional liter. After
mixing thoroughly by pouring from one con-
tainer into another, the agar and egg are auto-
claved for 15 minutes at 15 pounds pressure,
filtered through paper or, preferably, through
absorbent cotton by suction, and the filtrate
adjusted to the desired py with an’ approxi-
mately normal solution of hydrochloric acid.
It is then autoclaved for 5 minutes at 15
pounds pressure to insure the complete pre-
cipitation of any fine particles remaining in
suspension and filtered through paper. After
tubing, it is finally sterilized for 20 minutes at
15 pounds pressure. This beef agar remains

1 James McIntosh and William A. M. Smart:
“‘The Adjustment of the Reaction of Bacteri-
ological Media,’’ Lancet, Vol. CXCVII, No. 5017.

368

clear after sterilization and has given excellent
results as a bacteriological medium.

FRANKLIN W. MarsH
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE

THE EFFECT OF FEEDING VELVET BEANS
TO PIGEONS -

THREE groups of three mature pigeons each
were fed as follows:

Pen I: Ground velvet beans.

Pen II: Ground velvet beans plus aqueous ex-
tract of rice bran.

Pen III: Ground velvet beans plus aqueous ex-
tract of rice bran plus 10 per cent. putterfat.

The beans were fed dry and at the start were
eaten readily. Pens II and III were given an
aqueous extract of rice bran as the sole source
of drinking water. ;

On the second day after feeding the beans,
all birds showed ruffled feathers and a drawn-
up, sleepy appearance. On the fourth day,
one bird in Pen I and one in Pen II died. The
remaining birds were in very poor condition.
The loss in weight averaged about 80 grams.

Check birds receiving polished rice made
slight gains during the same period, and were
apparently in thrifty condition. On the fourth
day the feed was changed to polished rice in
all pens.. One bird in Pen III was too weak
to eat and was hand-fed on polished rice. Re-
covery was rapid in all cases.

Two pigeons were then fed ground velvet
beans from another source. They rapidly de-
veloped the appearance of the birds in the
former test. Both died on the eighth day.

Ground velvet beans were forced into the
crops of two pigeons that had developed symp-
toms of severe polyneuritis. A decided im-
provement in condition was noticed. The
birds died, however, on the following night in
one case and on the second day in the other.

An aqueous extract of velvat beans furnished
as the sole source of drinking water to pigeons
receiving polished rice, apparently delayed the
onset of polyneuritis, but did not entirely pre-
vent it. The difference in appearance of the
birds receiving the extract and of check birds
receiving polished rice alone was striking. The
feathers of the former remained smooth and
glossy, while those of the latter soon became
dry and rough looking. These results seem to

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

indicate at least a small amount of water solu-
ble B in the beans.
An effort will be made to ascertain the cause
of the ill effect.
W. D. Satmon

SouTH CAROLINA EXPERIMENT STATION,
CLEMSON COLLEGE, S. C.

A CHEMICAL SPELLING MATCH

A UNIQUE modification of the old-time
spelling bee was staged at the West Virginia
University last May with rather remarkable
success.

At the suggestion of the writer the chemical
faculty of the university arranged to hold a
contest among the 376 students taking the
course in general inorganic chemistry, and this
contest was to be a public match for the spell-
ing of chemical formule of such compounds
as are ordinarily included in a first year’s col-
lege course in chemistry.

These students are normally divided into
sixteen quiz sections, and it was evident that
so many could not be brought on the floor at
the same time for spelling. Therefore, eight
preliminary matches were held at seven o’clock
in the evening of the final match, where two -
sections, in charge of two instructors, spelled
against each other, and then a number chosen
from each of these groups, representing one
out of every eight students, who became eligible
to the final match.

The preliminaries lasted about one hour,
after which all the students assembled in the
armory and the winners lined up for the final
contest. Professor Samuel Morris pronounced
the words, and three well-known chemists, not
connected with the department, acted as judges.
For example, ortho phosphoric acid was given,
and the student whose turn it was replied by
saying “H,PO,.”

Upwards of 700 formule were prepared for
the instructors’ use at the preliminaries, and
then 50 to 60 additional formule in ease of
emergency for the final match. As a prize,
Mr. J. F. Cadden, the winner, was presented
with a copy of Mellor’s “Modern Inorganic
Chemistry.” The last five students to spell
down were presented with attractive certificates
bearing the university seal.

A: great deal of enthusiasm and rivalry be-

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922]

tween quiz sections was manifested, and the
different sections came as units to boost their
representatives. The students had had three
or four weeks in which to prepare for the con-
test, and nearly all of them had been working
hard for it. Our instructors are all agreed
that the students participating derived great
benefit from this match.

In addition to these ibenefits, the con-
test brought out the fact that our chem-
ical nomenclature is not yet above re-

proach. <A few instances of ambiguity might
be cited: Sodium thiosulphate, Na,S,0O,, is
sometimes named sodium hyposulphite and so
labelled by a few manufacturers of chemicals.
The latter name, however, is represented by
the formula Na,8,O,. Potassium fluosilicate
and potassium silicofluoride are: both used to
represent the same substance. Potassium
sulphocyanide and potassium thiocyanate are
two names in use for KCNS. Then, again, we
say hydronitric acid, or triazoie acid, or azo-
amide, when we mean a substance with the
composition N,H.

If these spelling bees were to be adopted by
a considerable number of educational institu-
tions it would doubtless tend to unify chemical
nomenclature so that finally we should have
one name only to represent a chemical com-
pound having a definite composition. Spell-
ing matches of this sort could also be profit-
ably arranged between classes in organic
chemistry, mineralogy and perhaps other de-
partments of science. The contests appeal to
students because they combine the elements of
sport and competition. The benefits derived
therefrom are incalculable, and we are now
planning to make the chemical spelling match
an annual event at the West Virginia Uni-
versity.

C. A. Jaconson
MorcGantowN, WEST VIRGINIA

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Proteins and the Theory of Colloidal Behavior.
By Dr. Jacqurs Lors, member of the Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research. New
York: McGraw-Hill Book Co., 285 pp. 1922.
In this volume the author has collected the

results of his extensive investigations upon the

SCIENCE

369

properties of protein solutions and has at-
tempted to found upon them a general theory
of colloids. The book falls naturally into two
sections. The main argument in the first half
is that proteins are amphoteric electrolytes and
that consequently, when hydrogen ion con-
centrations are duly measured and considered,
proteins are found to combine with acids and
alkalies according to the stoichiometrical laws
of classical chemistry. This argument is il-
lustrated and supported by numerous tables
and diagrams. In the second part of the book
the conclusion is established that all of the
experimental results recorded can be logically
explained upon the basis of Donnan’s theory
of membrane equilibria.

The far-reaching significance of the author’s
contentions may be summarized in the state-
ment that, if justified, they dispose of colloid
chemistry as a special branch of the science,
with laws different from those of general
chemistry. This does not, as is pointed out
in the preface, detract from the importance of
colloidal behavior for physiological and ‘tech-
nical problems, but it completely changes the
theoretical treatment of the subject.

A revolution in our current conceptions of
colloidal solutions is hereby ‘threatened, equal
in importance to that brought about by van’t
Hoff and Arrhenius a generation. ago in the

. field of crystalloidal solutions, and it seems:

probable, from certain reviews that have al-
ready appeared, that the battle between the
new and the old points of view will be waged
with equal bitterness. It is interesting to note
in this connection that the veteran fighter Arm-
strong, now president of the Society of Chemi-
cal Industry in England, went out of his way
in his recent Messel Memorial Lecture at Glas-
gow to refer to Loeb’s “praiseworthy efforts to
raise the character of the proteins from mere
indeterminate lumps of jelly to a status of
definite materials behaving in a simple and
definite, orderly manner, if only put under
comparable conditions.” Since, however, he
indulged in the course of the same address in
his customary diatribes against the Seandina-
vian Ikon Arrhenius and his High Priest Ost-
wald, remarking that “hydrogen ion concentra-
tion is pure gibberish,” his conversion to Loeb’s

370

theory is obviously incomplete. As he so ap-
positely puts the case himself: “We all have
partially permeable intellects.”

At ‘this stage, indeed, it is altogether pre-
mature to express an opinion as to the outcome
of the struggle. What is certain is that Loeb
has made, in this volume, a brilliant thrust
which his adversaries will find it difficult to
counter. There are many points of detail
in his experimental work which will curdle
the blood of any analytical chemist, yet it ap-
pears on close examination that the errors in-
troduced are, after all, insufficient to affect
the main issue. The opponents of Loeb’s views,
in any case, cannot restrict themselves to at-
tacking the weak points of his presentation;
he has already succeeded so far as to put them
definitely on the defensive. To quote from
his own preface: “Any rival theory (of col-
loidal behavior) which is intended to replace
the Donnan theory must be able to accomplish
at least as much as the Donnan theory, 2. e.,
it must give a quantitative, mathematical and
rationalistic explanation of the curves express-
ing the influence of hydrogen ion concentra-
tion, valency of ions, and: concentration of
electrolytes on colloidal behavior; and it must
explain these curves not for one property
alone but for all the properties, electrical
charges, osmotic pressure, swelling, viscosity,
and stability of solution, since all these
properties are affected by electrolytes in a
similar way.”

This quotation may be supplemented by an-
other, from. the final page of the book, in-
dieating the importance of Loeb’s work out-
side of chemistry. “If Donnan’s theory of
membrane equilibria furnishes the mathematic-
al and quantitative basis for a theory of col-
loidal behavior of the proteins, as the writer
believes it does, it may be predicted that this
theory will become one of the foundations
upon which modern physiology will have to
rest.”

Every so-called colloidal chemist will evi-
dently be forced to read Loeb’s book in self-
defense. Those also who are only indirectly
interested in colloidal phenomena cannot fail
to find it stimulating.

JAMES KENDALL

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1448

SPECIAL ARTICLES

MOSAIC CROSS-INOCULATION AND INSECT
TRANSMISSION STUDIES

WHETHER or not the plant disease known as
mosaic is transmissible to plants of different
orders, and the réle of insects as agents in
such transmission, are questions of funda-
mental importance. It is generally held that
mosaic of the Cucurbitacee, Solanacee and
Leguminacez are all quite specifie and with few
exceptions transmissible only to species within
the same family. Certain mosaic diseases have
been described indicating that even among spe-
cies within the same family there may be two
or more types of the disease. Allard+ in 1916
described a specific mosaic disease on Nicotiana
viscosum distinet from the mosaie disease of
Nicotiana tabacum. Jagger?° in 1917 and
1918 reports three specific mosaic diseases of
the cucurbits. The tendency has thus been to
divide mosaic into types which are distinet in
their host range.

As opposed to the evidence indicating that
there are a number of types of mosaic which
are specific to a narrow host range, we have
evidence showing that mosaic will eross to.
species belonging to other families and orders.
Jagger* in 1918 published results of cross-
inoculation studies where he succeeded in trans-
ferring mosaic from the Cucurbitaceew to spe-

_cies of two other families of the Order Campa-

nulales. Doolittle’ has shown that mosaic of
cucumber is transmissible to Martynia lowisi-
ana, a species belonging to the Order Polemo-
niales.

Cross-inoculation experiments by the writer
have shown that the mosaic diseases of the
Cucurbitacee, Solanacee and Leguminacee are
inter-transmissible. Four petunia plants inocu-
lated with mosaic from crookneck squash be-
came infected while an equal number of checks
remained healthy. The inoculations were made
by inserting mosaie tissue into the stem with a
sterile scalpel. An experiment in which juice
from mosaic plants was inoculated hypo-

1 Journ. Agr. Research, 7: 481-486, 1916.
2 Phytopathology, 7: 61, 1917.

3 Phytopathology, 8: 74-75, 1918.

4 Phytopathology, 8: 32-33, 1918.

5U. S. D. A. Bull. 879, 1-69, 1920.

SEPTEMBER 29, 1922

dermically resulted in 100 per cent. infection.
Using this method, four crookneck squash
plants were inoculated with mosaic from
tomato, and four with mosaie from tobacco.
All of these plants became infected. Simi-
larly, a tobacco and two tomato plants were
inoculated with juice from mosaic crookneck
squash leaves and became infected. The num-
ber of plants kept as checks greatly exceeded
the number of inoculated plants. All checks
remained healthy. In an attempt to cross-
inoculate tomato with mosaic from crookneck
squash: by the hypodermic needle method, two
out of five plants became infected while the
ten checks all remained healthy. In another
experiment where mosaic crookneeck squash leaf
tissue was inserted into the midribs of five
tobacco plants, the result was 100 per cent.
infection. At the same time five tobacco plants
were similarly inoculated with mosaic cucumber
tissue and one of the five became infected.
These inoculations were made using a sterile
flamed scalpel. In order to further check
whether or not the inoculations were being
made under ‘sterile conditions, healthy leaf
tissue was inserted into the midribs of ten to-
bacco plants. In addition, 30 plants were kept
as checks. No mosaic developed either on the
inoculated or on the uninoculated checks. An
attempt to inoculate tomatoes with mosaic
from catnip, Nepeta cataria, resulted in three
of the five plants inoculated becoming infected
while an equal number of checks remained
healthy.

The investigations made by the writer with
mosaic of the legumes have been mainly with
cow pea, Vigna Catjang. Although the cow
pea has not been reported susceptible to
mosaic, this species has been found susceptible
under greenhouse conditions. Symptoms in-
clude mottling and distortion of the leaves, and
stunting of the whole plant. Inoculation by
means of transferring aphis (species undeter-
mined) from the mosaic plants to healthy
plants was shown clearly that this mosaic is a
transmissible disease. Two pots containing 38
cow pea seedlings were infested with aphis
from the mosaic cow pea plants and were
placed in insect proof cages. One hundred per
cent. infection occurred in both pots while all
checks remained healthy.

SCIENCE

371

In addition to aphis being carriers of mo-
saic, numerous experiments have shown that the
mealy bug (Dactylopus sp.) also transmits this
disease. This has been found especially true
where mealy bugs caused mosaic infection of
cow peas and soy beans. Cross-inoculation ex-
periments using mealy bugs which had been
transferred from mosaic infected solanum and
cucurbit ‘plants to healthy cow pea seedlings,
have resulted in infection in both cases.. Hx-
periments have shown that soy bean plants are
susceptible to mosaic from cow peas where
mealy bugs served as carriers. Mealy bugs
with a portion of the mosaie plant on which
they were feeding were transferred to the pot
containing the seedlings. The result of an ex-
periment in which mealy bugs from a mosaic
erookneck squash plant were transferred to two
pots containing a total of 33 cow pea plants
gave 100 per cent. infection. All checks re-
mained healthy. A pot of cow pea plants was
inoculated by means of mealy bugs from
mosaic infected egg plant and of 38 plants 100
per cent. became infected. At the same time
aphis from mosaic potato were transferred to
another pot containing 36 cow pea seedlings,
28 of which developed the disease. Out of 60
plants held as checks no case of mosaic has
appeared. Mealy bugs were transferred from
mosaic infected cow pea to soy bean seedlings
with the results that a large per cent. of the
soy bean plants developed mosaic.

Data and observations in the greenhouse
indicate that mealy bugs may transmit mosaic
to solanums. Two tobacco plants and one
tomato plant have thus been infected with
mosaic from crookneck squash through the
agency of mealy bugs.

The results obtained indicate that the mosaic
with which we are working is inter-transmissi-
ble between species of Cucurbitacer, Solanacee
and Leguminacew. To what degree this will
hold true under field conditions has not been
determined. Judging from observations, the
writer believes that infection with mosaic is to
a large degree determined by the growth con-
dition of the plant. Experiments testing this
point have shown that the optimum condition
for mosaic infection is an unchecked, vigorous
growth of the plant. Inoculations of mosaic
within the Solanacee or within the Cucurbita-

372

cee have, as a rule, been more easily accom-
plished than the cross-inoculations between
members of the Solanaceze and members of the
Cucurbitacere. Successful cross-infections be-
tween members of different families are more
easily obtained with plants growing under very
- favorable conditions than with plants growing
under unfavorable conditions.
O. H. Eimer
Towa AGRICULTURAL EXPERIMENT STATION

SPERMATOGENESIS OF THE GARTER
SNAKE

Up to the present no work has been pub-
lished on the spermatogenesis of the snakes.
The only Reptilia which have been studied in
any detail have been the lizards, and the recent
work of Daleq and Painter thas definitely
pointed out that an accessory element exists in
this group. The work on the spermatogenesis
of this species of snake (Thamnophis butleri)
has progressed far enough to make it advisable
to publish a few of the details, although the
work has not yet been completed.

The species on which this study is being
made was collected in the vicinity of Ann
Arbor, Michigan, and was identified by Drs.
A. G. Ruthven and F. N. Blanchard. It has
one of the narrowest ranges of any of the
garter snakes but is abundant in that locality.

The material has been fixed in Flemming’s
strong and Flemming’s strong plus .5 per cent.
urea at both room temperature and cold, and
in Allen’s modification of Bouin. The best
results have been obtained with cold Flemming
plus urea, fixed for twenty-four hours, seec-
tioned at six micra and stained with Heiden-
hain’s Iron Hemx. by the short method of Lee.

The material shows thirty-seven chromo-
somes in the spermatogonial equatorial plates
in the best counts and this is what would be
expected from a study of the spermatocyte
divisions. There is a border of large bent rod
shaped chromosomes and an inner group of
short rods and round chromosomes.

In the late prophase and side views of the
equatorial plate of the first spermatocytes the
accessory elements form a tripartite body.
Polar views of the first spermatocyte show
seventeen autosomes and either one or two ac-
cessory chromosomes depending on the way the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1448

plate is turned. At the first division, the tri-
partite body divides, two parts going to one
pole and one to the other, the double part re-
maining more or less fused. A polar view of
the first spermatocyte shows five quite large
bivalents, two of which are slightly smaller
than the other three, eleven medium sized and
two microsomes, making eighteen as the hap-
loid number. If the double accessory happens
to be turned toward the observer, one of the
three large ones gives the double appearance.
There is little indication of an earlier division
of the accessory elements though at times the
double one may be seen lying closer to the
centrosome, indicating that it has divided
earlier. The first division is the differential
division, the two daughter cells receiving the
following: one, seventeen autosomes and the
double accessory, and the other, seventeen auto-
somes and the single accessory.

The second spermatocyte division then be-
comes an equational one so far as the accessory
chromosomes are concerned and give rise to two
classes of spermatozoa.

Oogonial counts have not yet been made to
determine whether the single or the double is
the X chromosome, but it might be expected,
in light of what has been found in the lizards
by Painter, that the double one is the X and
the single the Y and that oogonial counts
should yield thirty-eight chromosomes. It
would seem in this species of snake, at least,
that the accessory chromosomes are found as
three separate ones in the spermatogonia,
which bears out what Painter has already de-
seribed for the lizards.

Examination of some slides of snake testis
of an unknown species has revealed a condition
of the chromosomes more like the lizards as
described by Painter. This material shows
in the first spermatocyte division equatorial
plates with approximately nine very large and
eleven very small chromosomes as the haploid
number. Before the complete results are pub-
lished, a comparative study of other genera
and families will be made in order to deter-
mine whether the: behavior of the accessory
chromosomes in snakes falls in line with what
Painter has already described for lizards.

Luoyp E. THATCHER
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN

New SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00

Vou. LVI, No. 1449 Fripay, Octoser 6, 1922 Sinaue Cops, 15 Ors.
Williams’ Personal Hygiene pote

This book is far more than a recital of information on health. It establishes
a new interpretation of health in terms of life. It is personal hygiene applied.
The first five chapters consider the various aspects of the problem. The
remaining chapters consider in a systematic way hygiene from the scientific
side. The language is not technical. The work is planned for college students
in general educational courses, for nurses, social workers and teachers. There
are chapters on the muscular system, nutrition, the respiratory system, circu-
latory, excretory and nervous systems, sexual aspects of life, prevention in
specific diseases, hygiene of the mouth, eye and ear.

By Jesse Ferinc Wiutiams, M.D., Associate Professor of Physical Education, Teachers College, Columbia University,
New York City. 12mo volume of 425 pages, with 398 illustrations. Cloth, $2.50 net

OTHER TEXT-BOOKS ON HEALTH

’ .
Pyle’s Personal Hygiene Bandler’s The Expectant Mother
Personal Hygiene. Edited by Watren L. Pyiz, M.D. The Expectant Mother. By S. Writs Banpiter, M.D.
12mo of 559 pages, Illustrated. Seventh kdition, Cloth, 12mo of 213 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.00 net.

$3.00 net.

Winslow's Prevention of Disease

Prevention of Disease. By Kenetm Winstow, M.D. 12mo
of 348 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.00 net.

Galbraith’s Hygiene for Women

Exercise and Physical Training for Women. By ANNA
M. Ga.srairp, M.D. 393 pages, illustrated. Second
Edition. Cloth, $3.00 net.

Stokes’ The Third Great Plague

Galbraith Ss Four Epochs The Third Great Plague (Syphilis). By Joun H. Sroxgs,
Four Epochs of Woman's Life. By ANNA M. GateraitH, M.D. 12mo of 204 pages, 4 portraits. Cloth, $2.50 net.
M.D. Third Edition. Cloth, $2.00 net.

, : 5 °
Brady's Personal Hygiene Griffith’s Care of the Baby
Personal Health. By Wit1am Brapy, M.D. 12mo of Care of the Baby. By J. P. Crozer Grirrita, M.D. 12mo
407 pages. Cloth, $2.00 net. of 463 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.50 net.

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.
Please send me the books checked (\/) and charge to my account:

Williams’ Personal Hygiene Applied_.-..---------------------------- $2.50 net
Pyle’s Personal Hygiene_---------------- $3.00 net Bandler’s Expectant Mother-_------------
Galbraith’s Hygiene for Women. ---$3.00 net Winslow’s Prevention of Disease
Galbraith’s Four Epochs____-- ---$2.00 net Stokes’ Third Great Plague___--

Brady’s Personal Hygiene-------------- $2.00 net Griffith’s Care of the Body-_--------------

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

NEW BOOKS IN THE

Engineering Science Series

Edited by D. C. Jackson and E. R. Hepricx

Engines and Boilers

By Tuomas T. Eyre, Dean of the College of Engineering in the State

University of New Mexico.

This textbook on Engines and Boilers is intended for use in engineering
schools which offer elementary courses in Heat Engines. It embodies the re-
sults of many years of teaching experience. Chapters are devoted to Units,
Fuel, Steam, Boilers, Boiler Accessories, the Steam Engine, Engine Valves,
Governors, Steam Turbines, and Gas Engines. The book is completely illus-
trated and well provided with problems.

Published August 29,
Cloth, octavo, 234 pages, $3.50

The Hydraulic Principles Governing River
and Harbor Construction

By CoLtoneL Curtis McD. Townsenp, United States Army, retired.

A college text on the construction of rivers and harbors for students of civil
engineering, based on the course designed for the Engineer School of the Army.
The book describes the formation of rivers, discusses the laws governing the flow
of water and of sediment, and applies these laws to the various problems which
arise in river and harbor improvement. The book contains numerous trans-
lated extracts from French, German, and Italian authors heretofore unavailable
in Enelish.

Published September 12
Cloth, octavo, 189 pages, $2.60

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

64-66 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK

CIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

OctToBER 6, 1922 No. 1449

VoL. LVI

ae

CONTENTS

The British Association for the Advancement
of Science:
The Organization of Research: PROFESSOR
ed foph On MR VENUE 20 c, totes tote sal te eaceecaeec otek eaten 373

The United States Fundamental Standards
of Length and Mass: Dr. T. C. MENDEN-

HALL 377

Scientific Events:
The Herschel Centenary; American Ornith-
ologists’ Union; Public Lectures at the
California Academy of Sciences; The Silli-
man Lectures of Yale University; Appoint-
ments at the Massachusetts Institute of

CCH NOLO Gig i snsen care toncat wate na sade vases vcndene be eee eee 381
Scientific Notes and News...2...--.-..--:---00---eseeceeenoee 383
387

University and Educational Notes.......-..--.-.-----

Discussion and Correspondence:
The Death Rate from Tuberculosis: Dr.
A. C. Assort. Old Glaciation in the Cor-
dilleran Region: Dr. FRANK LEVERETT.
Some Similarities between the Geology of
California and Parts of the Dutch East
Indies: PRorEssor H. A. Brouwer. Relief
for Russian Scientific Men: IsaporE Levirr 387

Quotations:
The British

Scientific Books:
Haldane on Respiration: Proressor YAN-
DELL (LENDERS ONS secs ea eens eee ees eens 390

PASS O.CULL LON sserercee ones ee eee 390

Special Articles:
Duplicate Genes in Crepis; Inheritance of
Glandular Pubescence in Crepis: Pro-
ressor E. B. Bapcock and J. L. Coutrs.. 392

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
To ARSON Sie sisi te lau aah a ERS EY)

THE ORGANIZATION OF RESEARCH!

Tue principles of science are to-day widely
spread; systematic scientific training has found
an honorable place in the schools and in the
colleges; above all, there is the realization that
much of human progress is based on scientific
inquiry, and at last this is fostered and, in
part, financed as a definite unit of national
educational policy. Public funds are devoted
to provide facilities for those who are com-
petent to pursue scientific investigations, and
in this way the state, acting through the De-
partment of Scientific and Industrial Research,
has assumed the double responsibility of pro-
viding for the advancement of knowledge and
for the application of scientific methods to
industry. Scientifie workers have ‘been given
the opportunities they desired, and it remains
for us to justify all that has been done. We
have to-day glanced briefly at the painful toil
and long years of preparation; now it falls to
us to sow the first crop and reap the first
harvest.

Thanks to the wisdom and foresight of
others, it has been possible to frame the gov-
ernment policy in the light of the experience
gained with pre-existing research organiza-
tions. The pioneer scheme of the kind is that
administered by the commissioners of the 1851
Exhibition, who since 1890 have awarded re-
search scholarships to selected graduates.
When in 1901 Mr. Carnegie’s benefaction was
applied to the Scottish universities the trustees
wisely determined to devote part of the reve-
nues to the provision of research awards which
take the form of scholarships, fellowships and
research lectureships. These have proved an
immense boon to Scottish graduates, and the
success of the venture is sufficiently testified by

1 From the address of the president of Section
B—Chemistry, British Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, Hull, September 7, 1922.

3874

the fact that the government research scheme
was largely modeled on that of the Carnegie
Trust.

In each of these organizations chemistry
bulks largely, and the future of our subject is
intimately connected with their success or
failure. The issue lies largely in our hands.
We must not forget that we are only at the
beginning of a great movement, and that fresh
duties now devolve upon us. It was my privl-
lege for some years to direct the work of a
chemistry institute, where research was organ-
ized on lines which the operation of the govern-
ment scheme will make general. If, from the
very nature of things, my experience can not
be lengthy it is at least intimate, and I may
perhaps be allowed to lay before you my im-
pressions of the problems we have to face.

Two main objectives lie before us: the ex-

pansion of useful learning and the diffusion -

of research experience among a selected class.
This class in itself will form a new unit in the
scientific community, and from it will emerge
the “exceptional man” to whom, quoting Sir
James Dewar, “we owe our reputation and no
small part of our prosperity.” When these
words were uttered in 1902 it was a true saying
that “for such men we have to wait upon the
_ will of Heaven.” It is still true, but there is
no longer the same risk that the exceptional
man will fall by the way through lack of
means. Many types of the exceptional man
will be forthcoming, and you must not imagine
that I am regarding him merely as one who
will occupy a university chair. He will be
found more frequently in industry, where his
function will be to hand on the ideas inspired
by his genius to the ordinary investigator.

I have no intention of wearying you by
elaborating my views on the training required
to produce these different types. My task is
greatly simplified if you will agree that the
first step must be systematic experience in pure
and disinterested research, without any refer-
ence to the more complicated problems of ap-
plied science. This is necessary, for if our
technical research is to progress on sound lines
the foundations must be truly laid. I have no
doubt as to the prosperity of scientific indus-
tries in this country so long as we avoid hasty

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1449

and premature specialization in those who con-
trol them. We may take it that in the future
the great majority of expert chemists will pass
through a stage in which they make their first
acquaintance with the methods of research
under supervision and guidance. The move-
ment is already in progress. The government
grants are awarded generously and widely.
The conditions attached are moderate and rea-
sonable, and there is a rush to chemical re-
search in our colleges. Here, then, I issue my
first note of warning, and it is to the pro-
fessors. It is an easy matter to nominate a
research student; a research laboratory com-
fortably filled with workers is an inspiring
sight, but there are few more harassing duties
than those which involve the direction of young
research chemists. No matter how great their
enthusiasm and abilities, these pupils have to
be trained, guided, inspired, and this help can
come only from the man of mature years and
experience. I am well aware that scorn has
been poured on the idea that research requires
training. No doubt the word is an expression
of intellectual freedom, but I have seen too
many good investigators spoiled and discour-
aged through lack of ‘this help to hold any
other opinion than that training is necessary.
I remember, too, years when I wandered more
or less aimlessly down the by-paths of point-
less inquiries, and I then learned ito realize the
necessity of economizing the time and effort of
others.

The duties of such a supervisor can not be
light. He must possess versatility; for
although a “research school” will doubtless
preserve one particular type of problem as its
main feature, there must be a sufficient variety
of topics if narrow specialization is to be
avoided. Remember, also, that there can be no
formal course of instruction suitable for
groups of students, no common course appli-
cable to all pupils and all inquiries. Individual
attention is the first necessity, and the educa-
tive value of early researches is largely derived
from the daily consultations at the laboratory
bench or in the library. The responsibility of
becoming a research supervisor is great, and,
even with the best of good will, many find it
difficult to enter sympathetically into the

Ocrosrr 6, 1922}

mental position of the beginner. An unex-
pected result is obtained, an analysis fails to
agree, and the supervisor, out of his long ex-
perience, can explain the anomaly at once, and
generally does so. If the pupil is to derive
any real benefit from his difficulties, his ad-
viser must for the moment place himself in
the position of one equally puzzled, and must
lead his collaborator to sum up the evidence
and arrive at the correct conclusion for him-
self. The policy thus outlined is, I believe,
sound, but it makes severe demands on patience,
sympathy, and, above all, time.

Research supervision, if conscientiously
given, involves the complete absorption of the
director’s energy and leisure. There is a rich
reward in seeing pupils develop as independent
thinkers and workers, but the supervisor has to
pay the price of seeing his own research output
fade away. He will have more conjoint papers,
but fewer individual publications, and limita-
tions will be placed on the nature of his work
by the restricted technique of his pupils.

I have defined a high standard, almost an
ideal, but there is, of course; the easy alterna-
tive to use the technical skill of the graduate
to carry out the more laborious and mechanical
parts of one’s own researches, to regard these
young workers as so many extra pairs of
hands. I need not elaborate the outcome of
such a policy.

There is another temptation, and that, in an
institution of university rank, is for the pro-
fessor to leave research training in the hands
of his lecturers, selecting as his collaborators
only those workers who ‘have passed the ap-
prenticeship stage. This, I am convinced, is a
mistake. Nothing consolidates a research
school more firmly than the feeling that all
who labor in its interests are recognized by
having assigned to them collaborators of real
ability.

Tam not yet done with the professor and his
staff, for they will have other matters to attend
to if research schools are to justify their ex-
istence and to do more than add to the bulk of
our journals. In many eases it will be found
that the most gifted of the young workers
under their care lack what, for want of a better

expression, is known as “general culture.”

SCIENCE

(ss)
=
or

Remember, these graduates have just emerged
from a period of intensive study in which
chemistry and the allied sciences have absorbed
most of their attention. For their own sake
and in the interests of our subject, they must
be protected from the criticism that a scientific
education is limited in outlook and leads to a
narrow specialism. The research years are
plastie years, and many opportunities may be
found in the course of the daily consultations
“to impress upon the student that there is
literature other than the records of scientific
papers, and music beyond the range of student
songs.” I mention only two of the many
things which may be added to elevate and refine
the research student’s life. Others will at once
occur to you, but I turn to an entirely different
feature of research training, for which I make
a special plea: I refer to the ineuleation of
business-like methods. You will not accuse me,
I hope, of departing from the spirit of scholar-
ship or of descending into petty detail, but my
experience has been that research students re-
quire firm handling. Emancipated as they are
from the restrictions of undergraduate study,
the idea seems to prevail that these workers
ought to be excused the rules which usually
govern a teaching laboratory, and may there-
fore work in any manner they choose. It re-
quires, in fact, the force of a personal example
to demonstrate to them that research work can
be carried out with all the neatness and care
demanded by quantitative analysis. Again, in
the exercise of them new freedom young col-
laborators are inclined to negleet recording
their results in a manner which secures a per-
manent record and is of use to the semor col-
laborator. As a rule, the compilation of results
for publication is not done by the experimenter, °
and a somewhat elaborate system of records
has to be devised. It should be possible,
twenty years after the work has been done, to
quote the reasons which led to the initiation of
each experiment, and to trace the source and
history of each specimen analyzed, or upon
which standard physical constants have been
determined. I need not enter into detail in
this connection beyond stating that, although a
system which secures these objects has for
many years been adopted in St. Andrews, con-

376

stant effort is required to maintain the stand-
ard.

One of the greatest anxieties of the research
supervisor is, howeyer, the avoidance of ex-
travaganee and waste. The student is some-
times inclined to assume a lordly attitude and
to regard such matters as the systematic recov-
ery of solvents as beneath his notice. My view
is that, as a matter of discipline as much as in
the interests of economy, extravagant working
should not be tolerated. There is naturally an
economic limit where the time spent in such
economies exceeds in value the materials saved,
and a correct balance must ibe adjusted. Tit is
often instructive to lay ‘before a mesearch
worker an estimate of the cost of an investiga-
tion in which ‘these factors of itime and material
ave taken into account. As a general rule it
will be found that the saving of material is of
greater moment than the loss of time. The
point may not be vitally important in the
academic laboratory, but in the factory, to
which most of these workers eventually
migrate, they will soon have the lesson thrust
upon them that their time and salary bear a
small proportion to costs of production.

You will see I have changed ‘my warning
from the professor to the student. A student
generation is short. In a few years, when
almost as a matiter of course the best of young
chemists will qualify for the doctor of phil-
osophy degree, it will be forgotten that these
facilities have come to us, not as a right, but as
a privilege. Those who reap the advantages
of these privileges must prove that the efforts
made on their behalf have been worth while.

Looking at the position broadly, if one may
criticize the research schemes of to-day, it is
in the sense that the main bulk of support is
afforded to the research apprentice, and the
situation has become infinitely harder for the
supervisor in that new and onerous itasks are
imposed upon him. To expect him to under-
take his normal duties and, as a voluntary act,
the additional burden of research training is to
force him into the devastation of late hours
and overwork. The question is at once raised
—Are we using our mature research material
to the best advantage, and is our policy suffi-
ciently focussed on the requirements of the

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1449

experienced investigator? I think it will gen-
erally be agreed that members of the professor
or lecturer class who join in the movement
must be relieved in great measure of teaching
and administrative work. I am decidedly of
the opinion that ‘the research supervisor must
be a teacher, and must mingle freely with
undergraduates, so as to recognize at the
earliest possible stage the potential investi-
gators of the future and guide their studies.
To meet this necessity universities and colleges
must realize that their curriculum has been ex-
tended and that staffs must be enlarged accord-
ingly. There could then be definite periods of
freedom from official duties for those who
undertake research training as an added task.
Opportunities must also be given to these “ex-
ceptional men” to travel occasionally to other
centers and refresh themselves in the company
of kindred workers. It is evident that our uni-
versities are called upon to share the financial
burden involved in a national research scheme
to a much greater extent than possibly they
know.

I may perhaps summarize some of the con-
clusions reached in thinking over these ques-
tions. The first and most important is that in
each institution there should be a board or
standing committee entrusted with the super-
vision 6f research. The functions of such a
body would be widely varied and would
include:

1. The allocation of money voted specifically
from university or college funds for research
expenses.

2. The power to recommend additions to the
teaching staff in departments actively engaged
in research.

3. The recommendation of promotions on
the basis of research achievement.

4. The supervision of regulations governing
higher degrees.

Among the more specific problems which con-
front this board are the following:

1. The creation of research libraries where
reference works can be consulted immediately.

2. The provision of publication grants, so
that where no periodical literature is available
the work will not remain buried or obseure.

3. The allocation of traveling grants to en-

OcrozEr 6, 1922]

able workers to visit libraries, to inspect manu-
facturing processes, and to attend the meetings
of scientific societies.

' There is one thing which a research board
should avoid. It is, I am convinced, a mistake
for a governing body to call for an annual list
of publications from research laboratories.
Nothing could be more injurious to the true
atmosphere of research than the feeling of
pressure that papers must be published or the
department will be diseredited.

What I have said so far may seem largely
a recital of’ new difficulties, but they are not
‘insurmountable, and to overcome them adds a
zest to life. It would have taken too long to
go more fully into details, and I have tried to
avoid making my address a research syllabus,
merely giving in general terms tthe impressions
gained during the twenty years in which the St.
Andrews Research Laboratories have been in
existence.

I have confined myself to the first stage in
the research development of ithe chemist. His
future path may lead him either to the factory
or to the lecture-room, and in the end the ex-
ceptional man will be found in tthe director’s
laboratory or in the professor’s chair. How-
ever difficult these roads may prove, I feel that
with the financial aid now available, supported

by the self-sacrificing labors of those who de- .

vote themselves to furthering this work, he has
the opportunity to reach the goal. It is the
beginning of a new scientific age, and we may
look forward confidently to the time when there
will be no lack of trained scientific intellects
to lead our policy and direct our efforts in all
that concerns the welfare of the country.
J. C. IRVINE

THE UNITED STATES FUNDAMEN-
TAL STANDARDS OF LENGTH
AND MASS

Tue recently published volume containing
the testimony submitted to the Senate Com-
mittee on Manufactures, in favor of and
against the passage of Senate Bill 2267 “To fix
the Metrie System of Weights and Measures as
the Single Standard of Weights and Measures
for Certain Uses,” contains a mass of informa-
tion and misinformation of great interest to
students of metrology.

SCIENCE B17

The opponents of the metric system were
very active in marshalling their full strength
at the numerous “hearings” before the sub-
committee, about half of the volume being de-
voted to the evidence which they furnished,
either in writing or in the form of personal
testimony.

These are the pages which the well informed
reader will centainly find most interesting, be-
cause of the remarkably illogical arguments
introduced, the total disregard of historic facts
and the apparently complete ignorance of the
fundamental principles of the
metrology.

This is especially true of the testimony of
Mr. C. C. Stutz who, born in Italy of Swiss
parents, seems to have been thought partien-
larly fit to be chosen as the representative of
the opposition, being ithe seeretary of the
American Institute of Weights and Measures,
an organization created, as the secretary de-
clares, “for the purpose of defending the exist-
ing American system of weights and measures
against pro-metrie propaganda,”—and also for
the improvement of the same, though evidence
ot the latter objective seems yet to be forth-
coming.

seience of.

Mr. Stutz is especially agitated because, as
he says, “the impression has ‘been spread
throughout the United States and abroad that
the meter and not the yard is the legal standard
here’—diseussing that question at great length
on pages 173-4-5-6 and again pages 318-19-2(
of the Report of the Hearings.
an imaginary

He creates
American “inch,” contending
that it is exactly the same as the English inch
and hence the English yard and the American
yard are identical.

In reference to this particular part of Mh.
Stutz’s voluminous testimony the statement of
a few facts that are well known to most me-
trologists may be useful.

The constitution of the United States de-
claves that Congress shall have power “‘io fix
the standard of weights and measures,” but
Congress has never exercised that power, ex-
cept in a few isolated instances, the most im-
portant being the adoption of the decimal
system for the coinage and currency of the
United States in 1785—with the subsequent
adoption in 1828 of a material standard “troy

378 SCIENCE

pound” for the regulation of the coinage, and
the “act to define and establish the units of
electrical measure,” which became a law on
July 12, 1894.

The failure of Congress to act when the
importance of action was especially urged by
Washington in a message to the first Congress,
as it was later by Jefferson, Madison and
Adams, was due to the general recognition of
the unscientific character of the clumsy and
burdensome system or systems then in use in
the colonies (mostly derived from the then
very imperfect English system) and a strong
desire on the part of the “early fathers” (who
seem at this distance to have been as wise as
they were early) to put into our weights and
measures the same simplicity of decimal ratio
that has made our system of currency the best
in the world.

In the absence of congressional action many
of the states acted separately, establishing their
own standards, thus creating much confu-
sion. Some states took no action at all, the
business of exchange of commodities by weight
and measure being based upon units that had
no authority except tradition and continued
use.

In the mean time important work was to be
done by the government itself, in which stand-
ards of authority and precision were required.
By far the greater part of ithis, the collection
of revenue and the survey of the coasts and the
country as a whole, was under the jurisdiction
of the Treasury Department, and to a bureau
of this department, the Coast and Geodetic
Survey, was assigned the duty of obtaining and
caring for such standards of precision as could
be obtained in Europe.

Among them was a brass bar, eighty-two
inches in length, made by Troughton, of Lon-
don, which was graduated in inches and tenths
with a degree of accuracy probably as high as
was at that time attainable. A careful exam-
ination of the divisions, however, revealed a
considerable degree of irregularity, but it was
finally decided (1830) that when the tempera-
ture of this bar was sixty-two degrees Fahren-
heit the distance between the twenty-seventh
and the sixty-third inch lines should be re-

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1449

garded as the standard yard by all of the vari-
ous government bureaus in which measures of
length were used.

It is important to note that there was no
congressional action, no law passed, the fixing
of this standard being done by the secretary of
the treasury, on the recommendation of the
superintendent of the coast survey, acting in
the capacity of superintendent of weights and
measures.

Its authoritative use, therefore, was restrict-
ed to operations in which the United States
government was concerned. At the same time,
as ‘the result of the discovery of great discrep-
ancies among ithe weights and measures actu-
ally in use at the principal custom houses,
standards of mass and volume were estab-
lished, the validity of which was restricted in
the same way. j

In order to reduce the confusion of standards
in and among the several states, in 1836 the
secretary of the treasury caused a complete set
of all weights and measures adopted for use
in the collection of revenue to be delivered to
the governor of each state, hoping that through
their adoption by state legislatures a good de-.
gree of uniformity might ‘be secured. In many
cases ‘this followed and in some instances the
treasury standards were accepted without legis-
lation.

To reeur now to the standard yard as repre- .
sented on the Troughton scale, and its relation
to ‘the English standard: It was doubtless a
copy, though not an exact copy, of what had
been adopted by the Hnglish parliament in
1826 as the imperial yard of Great Britain.
This was a bar on which the yard was en-
graved, made in 1760 by a mechanician named
Bird and kept in the custody of the clerk of
the House of Commons.

In 1834 the burning of the Parliament
House destroyed this and other imperial stand-
ards stored therein, and thus the immediate an-
cestor of the Troughton scale disappeared.

It was found impossible to reproduce it with
any degree of aecuracy lby finding the period
of vibration of a pendulum as had _ been
originally provided and recourse was had to
several copies of it which had been made and

OcrosER 6, 1922]

deposited elsewhere. In this way was created
the imperial yard which is at present the stand-
ard of length in Great Britain.

Here, therefore, are two outstanding facts:
First, assuming for the moment that the
Troughton scale has some legal standing as a
standard yard of the United States, it is not a
copy of the standard yard of Great Britain and
it is well known that it is not in agreement
with that standard. Hence our inch ean not
be the same as the English inch.

Second, the Troughton scale has not and
never had legal standing as a standard of
length, authoritative over the whole country,
and funthermore, it may be well to repeat that
Congress has never passed an act to establish
a standard yard or a standard inch, except
indirectly, as will be explained later.

Thus the claim made by Mr. Stutz and his
followers that the inch of the United States
is identical with that of Great Britain has no
foundation whatever in fact.

The use of the metric system of weights and
measures throughout the ““sited States was
legalized by act of Congress .n 1866 and it is
an interesting fact that it is thus far the only
general system of weights and measures that
has full legal (though not compulsory) stand-
ing throughout the whole country.

The history of the so-called ‘Mendenhal:
Order” which seems to be so disturbing to the
peace of mind of Mr. Stutz and others opposed
to metrological reform is briefly as follows:
a copy of what is known as ithe “Metre of the
Archives” and also a copy of the kilogramme,
both of platinum, came into the possession of
the Coast Survey in 1821, through the interest
of Albert Gallatin, and as years passed other
standard measures were added to the collec-
tion, including copies of the imperial yard.
The inferior character of the earlier standards
as compared with those of later date led to the
practical abandonment of their use wherever
work of the highest degree of precision was
attempted. Every metrologist knows that a
material standard may have the backing of
legal authority and at the same time be 50
crude and imperfect as to be useless for re-
fined work.

Without going into the history of the In-
ternational Bureau of Weights and Measures

SCIENCE 379

and the production of beautiful copies of the
international standards, it is sufficient to say
that on the receipt of the two copies allotted
to the United States it was resolved to form-
ally abandon the Troughton scale as a stand-
ard of length and adopt the international
metre as the final standard of reference, for
only in this way could work of high precision
then being done in the United States (this
included not only the operations of the Coast
and Geodetic Survey and other bureaus of the
government but practically all research work
done at colleges and universities or by inde-
pendent scientific workers) be “tied up” with
that done in Europe, for even in England the
metric system was and still is in universal use
among’ scientific men.

In reeognition of the really great import-
ance of the event, it was arranged to have the
seals (which had been put upon the containers
of these standards before they left Paris)
broken by the President of the United States.

This was done in the cabinet room of the
executive mansion on the second of January,
1890, in the presence, also, of the Secretary
of State and the Secretary of the Treasury,
together with a number of invited guests,
representatives of engineering and scientific
societies and others especially interested in the
science of metrology.

Thus Metre No. 27 and Kilogramme No. 20
were formally adopted as the national protc-
type metre and kilogramme.

In connection with the World’s Fair in Chi-
cago in 1893 there was held an International
Blectrie Congress, associated with which was a
“Chamber of Delegates” officially organized
for the purpose of coming to an international
agreement upon the definitions of units for
electrical measure.

In view of the probable success of this move-
ment and of the certainty that such defini-
tions would be built upon a metric foundation,
it was deemed wise to have definite recognition
of these national prototypes as the fundament-
al standards of reference in all metrological
operations in which the United States Govern-
ment was concerned.

This was accomplished by the preparation
and publication of Bulletin No. 26 of the Coast
and Geodetic Survey, which became authori-

380

tative on the approval of the Secretary of the
Treasury which it received on April 3, 1893.

The ‘“‘bull’s eye” of that announcement is
found in ‘the following sentence: “In view of
these facts and the absence of any material
normal standards of customary weights and
measures, the office of weights and measures,
with the approval of the Secretary of the
Treasury, will in the future, regard the inter-
national prototype metre and kilogramme as
fundamental standards, and the customary
units, the yard and the pound, will be derived
therefrom in accordance with the Act of July
28, 1866.”

Mr. Stutz in his testimony before the com-

mittee quotes this sentence several times, re-
ferring to the last phrase, “in accordance with
the Act of July 28, 1866,” as evidence that the
metre and kilogramme are not thus made fun-
damental units but are to be considered as de-
pendent upon the inch and ‘the pound, aeccord-
ing to his personal interpretation of the Act
f 1866. But by some unhappy chance, by
aceident or otherwise, he has invariably omit-
ted the words italicised above, “the customary
units, the yard and pound, will be derived
therefrom,” which nullify and completely re-
verse his argument.

His quotations are apparently made from a
cireular, No. 47 of the Bureau of Standards
in which, according to his own words, it was
not intended to reproduce the order as a whole.
It is possible, therefore, that these very im-
portant words were omitted in that eireular
and Mr. Stutz shall have the benefit of the
doubt, but if he had consulted the original
order he would have found them.

There can be no doubt of their meaning and
it is a fortunate thing that the legal relations
established by the Act of 1866 are so very
nearly correct that for all ordinary purposes
of comparison (and there can be no other) they
are sufficiently accurate.

Recalling the fact that when this Act was
passed Congress had never defined the yard or
the pound (except the Troy pound for use in
the mint); that these words had, throughout the
country as a whole, no definite meaning; and
the further fact that at that time the metric sys-
tem of weights and measures was in almost

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1449

universal use, except in Great Britain and the
United States, and that it was represented by
precise material standards, it seems more
probable than otherwise that the Act of 1866
itself put the country upon a metric basis,
supplemented and completed as it was by the
receipt and adoption in 1890 of the national
prototypes.

In any event there ean be no possible doubt
as to the effect of the issue of Bulletin No. 26
in making them the fundamental standards
for all metrological operations in which the
national government is in any way concerned.

The opponents of the metrie system are
strangely silent regarding another Act of
Congress, much more far-reaching and vastly
more effective in putting the country upon a
metric basis than anything which preceded it.

It is the Act of July 12, 1894 which defines
the units of measure by means of which trans-
actions amounting to many hundreds of mil-
lions of dollars annually are adjusted, furnish-
ing the sole method of measuring output and
consumption of one of the very largest and
most important industries of the present day.
No one has had the courage to suggest a re-
vision or repeal of that Act, so as to put into
it the sacrosanct inch and one of the numerous
pounds, in place of ‘the centimetre and the
gramme. Watt, kilowatt, volt and ampere are
now familiar terms. The great war produced
an almost universal interest in metric units
and caused many manufacturers to regret that
their use had not been made compulsory long
ago.

And now space above and around us is al-
most constantly disturbed by waves, the lengt!
of which, measured only in meires, is of vital
interest to tens of thousands of people, old
and young, rich and poor, who are finding
out what a metre is and what goes with it, so
that, take it all in all, it seems certain that the
opponents of metrological reform are engaged
in a hopeless task.

In their own words, “they have beaten it
once,” and perhaps they may beat it again,
but not many more times.

T. C. MenpENuALL
RAVENNA, OHIO
SEPTEMBER 2, 1922

OcvroBER 6, 1922]

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
THE HERSCHEL CENTENARY

Winuim Herscusn died 1822 August 25. A
hundred years later a party of Herschels of
the third, fourth and fifth generations, astron-
omers and members of the Slough Urban
Council made a pious pilgrimage to Upton
Church, Slough, where he lies ‘buried; and,
after lunching together at the Crown Hotel,
which once formed part of William Herschel’s
property, proceeded to Observatory House—
in which two of his granddaughters still live,—
where they saw many manuscripts and the
other relies of the great astronomer. They saw,
for instance, the copy of Locke “On the Human
Understanding,” the first Enghsh book he pur-
chased in order to study our language; and
they saw also Caroline Herschel’s “Bills and
Receipts of My Comets,” which
manner of labeling papers relating to her com-

was her

etary discoveries; they saw’a piece of the old
40-foot tube, and one of the 4-foot mirrors
made for it, and diseussed with Miss Herschel
‘the possible whereabouts of the other mirror,
which may be buried in the garden, and still
to be excavated. It is wonderful to think how
Herschel’s work, old though it is, touches our
modern work almost at every point. If we take
the half-dozen great advances mentioned by
Professor Eddington in his centenary address
to the Royal, we are reminded by the measure-
ments of stellar parallax how Herschel’s at-
tempts in this direction led to the recognition
of binary stars; the discovery of Neptune de-
pended essentially on Herschel’s previous dis-
_covery of Uranus; one of the early uses made
of the spectroscope was to confirm Herschel’s
view of the gaseous nature of nebule; in pho-
tography the first glass negative was taken by
his own son, and the subject was the scaffolding
of his great 40-foot, and even in our modern
advances the two-stream hypothesis is only a
development of Herschel’s investigation of the
sun’s movement among the and the
measurement of the dise of Betelgeuse reminds
us not only of his eareful serutiny of objects
for any signs of a dise, but of his investiga-
tions in opties and his splendid engineering
work in the making of great telescopes. How
he would have enjoyed himself in the great
factory at Mt. Wilson, or discussing problems

stars;

SCIENCE 581

of cosmogony with the mathematicians of to-
day! Undoubtedly he was a great man, and it
was fitting that his memory should be thus
honored, so soon after the centenary of the
society which had the honor of having him for
its first president.—From an Oxford Note-
Book in The Observatory.

AMERICAN ORNITHOLOGISTS’ UNION

Tue fortieth stated meeting of the American
Ornithologisis’ Union will convene in Chicago,
from October 24 to 26. The public meetings
will tbe held in the lecture halls of the Wield
Museum of Natural History, from 10 A.M
until 4:30 P.M. each day.

The reading of papers will form a prom-
inent feature of the meetings.’ All classes of
members are earnestly requested to contribute,
and to notify the secretary before October 15,
as to the titles of their communications, and
the length of time required for their presenta-
tion, so that a program for each day may be
prepared in advance.

Business sessions will be held at the Univer-
sity ‘Club of Chicago. Publie sessions will be
held in the Field Museum of Natural History,
Roosevelt Road and Lake Michigan. Hotel
headquarters will be at the Auditorium Hotel.
According to custom, a dinner will be held on
Wednesday evening, October 25, for fellows,
members, associates and guests. Luncheon will
be served daily at 1 P.M. in the museum, Octo-
ber 25, 26, 27. On Friday, October 28, an
excursion will ‘be conducted to the Indiana
Sand Dunes, fifty miles southeast of Chicago.
Particulars in regard to these features will be
found at the registration desk on the opening
day.

An exhibition of bird paintings and photo-
graphs will be held in connection with the
meeting, to which every one is invited to con-
tribute. Original paintings, drawings and
sketches in color or black and white are de-
sired, not only from the artists, themselves, but
from owners who may ‘be willing to loan them.

PUBLIC LECTURES AT THE CALIFORNIA
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

THe California Academy of Sciences an-

nounces a course of six free public lectures on

the general subject of “Science and Health,” to

382

be given at three o’clock on Sunday afternoons,
im the auditorium of the Academy’s Museum
in Golden Gate Park, San Francisco, as fol-
lows:

Ccetober 1. The Experimental Method in Ani-
mal Psychology: Dr. Samuel J. Holmes, pro-
fessor of zoology, University of California.

October 8. Hquilibration of Animals and
Aviators: Dr. Samuel S. Maxwell, professer of
physiology, University of California.

October 15. The Use of Animals in the Diag-
nosis and Prevention of Disease: Dr. Carl, A. L.
Schmidt, associate professor of biochemistry,
University of California.

October 22. Animal Experimentation: Dr.
T. D. Beckwith, professor of bacteriology, Uni-
versity of California.

October 29. Animal Foes of the Human Body
and How to Control Them: Dr. Charles A. Kofoid,
professor of zoology, University of California.

November 5. What Animal Experimentation
Has Done for Childhood: Dr. E. C. Fleischner,
clinical professor of pediatrics, University of
California.

These lectures are all masters in their re-
spective subjects. What they have to say will
not only be authoritative and up to date, but
will be presented in a popular and convincing
manner. These lectures, which will be illus-
trated, are offered by the California Academy
of Sciences, free to the public, as one of the
several educational activities in which it is en-
gaged.

THE SILLIMAN LECTURES OF YALE
UNIVERSITY

THis year’s Silliman Memorial Lectures at
Yale University will be delivered by Dr.
August Krogh, professor of zoophysiology in
Copenhagen University. Professor Krogh has
taken for his general topie “The Anatomy and
Physiology of Capillaries,” and will speak on
the following subjects on the dates given:

October 5: ‘‘The Distribution and Number of
Capillaries in Selected Tissues. The Evidence of
Their Independent Contractility.

October 6: ‘‘The Histological Structure and
Innervation of the Capillary Wall.’’

October 9: ‘‘The Reactions of Capillaries to
Stimuli. The Hormonel Control of Capillary Cir-
culation. ’’

October 10: ‘‘The Mechanism of Some Capil-

SCIENCE

[Veu. LVI, No. 1249

lary Reactions, especially in the Human Skin.’’
October 11: ‘‘The Hxchange of Substances

through the Capillary Wall.’’
October 12: ‘‘Some Problems

Physiology and Pathology.’’

of Capillary

Professor Krogh has a large amount of en-
tirely new material to present which should
prove of importance to all those branches of
science which concern the circulation of the
blood. At the time of the award of the Nobel
Prize to Dr. Krogh in 1920 his work on capil-
laries was regarded as only beginning, and
since that time his researches in this field have
been pushed ahead with rapidity and success.
The results of these researches will be made
public for the first time in the Silliman lectures.

In a recent article in The Scientific Monthly,
Dr. W. R. Miles, of the Nutrition Laboratory
of the Carnegie Institution of Washington,
gave the following résumé of Dr. Krogh’s
career to date:

Dr. Krogh is scarcely forty-five years old. He
received his educational and scientifie training in
Denmark and is a son of whom that country can
well be proud. For a number of years after re-
ceiving his degree and serving as laboratory
assistant to Professor Christian Bohr no suitable
teaching or research position opened to him in
Denmark. However, he refused to accept such a
position in any other country. He made two ex-
peditions to Greenland, the first to study the
tension of carbon-dioxide in ocean water and the
second to investigate the respiratory metabolism
of the Eskimos. Thus, without any laboratory
facilities, he literally plunged into research. A
study on the expiration of free nitrogen from
the body was recognized as so important as to
receive the Seegen Prize of the Imperial Academy
of Sciences in Vienna. He was appointed a lee-
turer in physiology under the science faculty of
the Copenhagen University in 1908 and was pro-
vided with a small laboratory in the fall of 1910.
It is in this laboratory that most of his scientific
work has been done. A visitor will gain the im-
pression that his laboratory facilities are rather
meager as regards both room and equipment and
that he does not have adequate assistance. Cer-
tainly it would be a most. worth while investment
to provide such a man with all the assistance he
can comfortably direct. His researches have cov-
ered a wide range and have been singularly con-

cise and complete. He is a master technician, a

OctToBER 6, 1922]

scientific explorer by nature, a skilled interpreter
and critic of scientifie facts, and he has much
facility in writing. Most of his recent work is
published in English. About his personality there
is a quiet humility which strongly attracts ad-
vanced students and begets confidence in Dr.
Krogh’s scientifie results. His mental attitude
can well be illustrated by a sentence from a re-
cent letter to an American colleague: ‘‘The
Nobel award came as a perfect surprise to me and
when it was first told me by a journalist, I de-
clined to believe it because, in my opinion, my
work on the eapillaries was so far only a prom-
ising beginning.’’

APPOINTMENTS AT THE MASSACHUSETTS
INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Tue Massachusetts Institute of Technology
announces a number of additions to its faculty
and instructing staff. Chief among these are
the appointments of W. Spencer Hutchinson
to the professorship of mining, Dr. G. B.
Waterhouse to the professorship of metallurgy
and Dr. Frederick G. Keyes to be acting head
of the department of chemistry.

Professor Hutchinson graduated from the
institute in 1892, after having studied in the
civil engineering and mining departments.
During his career he has examined and man-
aged a number of mining properties in the
United States. He is known as an authority
on mine valuation and taxation, and has done
much professional work in Mexico, South
America and Australia. For several years he
has been consulting engineer for the Vanadium
Corporation of America, which has extensive
mines in Peru. He has been a consultant
mining engineer in Boston.

Professor Waterhouse was born in England
forty years ago, and edueated at Sheffield,
where he received the degree of bachelor of
metallurgy. He came to the United States in
1990, and later studied at Columbia University,
where he obtained the degree of doctor of
philosophy in 1906. He is the author of
numerous original scientific papers and the
translator of a great number of French and
German works on metallurgy. His specialty is
the metallurgy of iron and steel. From 1908
until the present time he has been technical
director of the Lackawanna Steel Company in
Buffalo.

SCIENCE

383

Professor Keyes, the acting head of the de-
partment of chemistry, is a graduate of Rhode
Island State College and of Brown University.
During the war he was stationed at Puteaux as
director of the Research and Control Labora-
tory, with the rank of major in the A. EB. F.
In 1920 he was made director of the Research
Laboratory of Physical Chemistry at the
institute, following the resignation of Professor
A. A. Noyes. A short time ago Professor H. P.
Talbot resigned as head of the department of
chemistry to become dean of students on the
retirement of Professor Burton, and Professor
Keyes was appointed as acting head of the de-
partment until Professor Talbot’s permanent
successor is chosen.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Av the Hull meeting of the British Associa
tion, Mr. F. H. Smith, director of scientific re-
search at the Admiralty, and secretary of the
Physical Society, was elected one of the gen-
eral secretaries, to succeed Professor H. H.
Turner, of the University of Oxford. Pro-
fessor J. C. Shields and Professor J. C. Me-
Lennan presented the invitation to meet in
Toronto in 1924, which was accepted. It was
announced that a grant of about $50,000 would
be available for the meeting and for defraying
the expenses of visiting members.

Prorssson J. H. Juans, secretary of the
Royal Society, who was professor of applied
mathematics at Princeton University from 1905
to 1909, received the doctorate of science from
Oxford University on the occasion of his de-
livery of the Halley lecture.

Proressor KH. T. Wurrraxer, formerly royal
astronomer for Ireland and secretary of the
Royal Astronomical Society, has been elected a
foreign member of the Reale Accademia dei
Lincei.

THE honorary degree of doctor of science has
been awarded by the University of Leeds to
Professor A. F. Holleman, of the University
of Amsterdam.

In recognition of the notable services ren-
dered by Dr. Bernhard E. Fernow to forestry
in America, the trustees of Cornell University
have given the name Fernow Hall to the uni-

384

versity building devoted to instruction in for-
estry. The formal unveiling of the tablet
bearing Dr. Fernow’s name took place October 5,
when addresses commemorative of his achieve-
ments were delivered by Dr. Livingston Far-
rand, president of the university, Dean Albert
R. Mann, of the New York State College of
Agriculture, and Professor Ralph S. Hosmer,
head of the department of forestry. Dr.
Fernow organized at Cornell University in
1898 the first school of forestry in America.

At a recent meeting of the corporation of
Yale University a letter was presented from
Dr. Lawrason Brown, president of the Na-
tional Tubereulosis Association, in which ap-
preciation was expressed of the work of Pro-
fessor Treat B. Johnson and Mr. Elmer B.
Brown, who had been associated with Dr.
Esmond R. Long, of the University of Chi-
cago, in research in the fundamental nutrition
of the tubercle bacillus. The corporation
passed a vote of thanks to the National Tuber-
eulosis Association for its further appropria-
tion for the work in which Professor Johnson
and Mr. Brown will continue to be associated.

Tue Treasury Department has announced
that Dr. J. W. Scherechewsky, assistant sur-
geon general, U. S. Public Health Service, has
been commissioned to conduct an investigation
into the cause of cancer; the headquarters of
this investigation will be established in Boston.

Proressor H. B. Merritu, of Carroll Col-
lege, has resigned to take up chemical work in
the research laboratory of the A. F. Gallun &
Sons Company, Milwaukee.

Dr. A. R. Fortscu, of the Iowa State Uni-
versity, will become research chemist in the
laboratory of the Standard Oil Company at
Whiting, Indiana.

Aw Associated Press despatch from Hono-
lulu, dated September 20, states that, as the
result of burns received while experimenting
with radium, Dr. Hideljich Kinoshita, pro-
fessor of science at the Imperial University of
Tokyo, may lose his eyesight.

THE governors of the Harper Adams Agri-
cultural College, Newport, England, have ac-
cepted with regret the resignation of Mr. P.
Hedworth Foulkes, who has held the post of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1449

principal since the opening of this college
twenty-two years ago.

Grorce A. SEAGLE, who had been for thirty-
eight years superintendent of the Wytheville
(Va.) station of the Bureau of Fisheries, has
retired from active service.

Mr. W. H. Fry, petrographer in the Bureau
of Soils, U. S. Department of Agriculture, for
a number of years past, has resigned and will
remove to Fayetteville, N. C.

Dr. O. A. Reryxine has resigned from the
University of the Philippines to take a posi-
tion as plant pathologist, in Honduras, for the
United Fruit Company. Dr. Reinking recently
received his doctorate at the University of Wis-
consin, where he has continued researches,
begun in the Philippines on coconut bud-rot.
He obtained leave from the University of
the Philippines about a year ago and
returned to this country by way of British
North Borneo, Java, Italy, Germany, France
and England, visiting mycological and patho-
logical institutions.

Dr. Barton WARREN EVERMANN, director of
the Museum of the California Academy of Sci-
ences and of the Steinhart Aquarium, has been
appointed by the National Research Council
as its representative at the Commercial Con-
ference to be held at Honolulu from October
25 to November 8, under the auspices of the
Pan-Pacific Union, where he will present a
paper on “The Conservation of the Marine
Life of the Pacific.” Dr. Evermann will sail
for Honolulu on the Maui on October 18.

Proressor §. R. WinutaMs, head of the de-
partment of physies of Oberlin College, has
been granted a year’s leave of absence and
will spend the year in research work at the
California Institute of Technology as research
associate.

Proressor GrorGE Grant MacCurpy has
returned to Yale University after a year’s stay
abroad as first director of the American School
in France for Prehistoric Studies.

Dr. Atonzo E. Taytor, of Stanford Uni-
versity, sailed for Europe on September 23.

AccorpInG to English journals, an expedi-
tion headed by Captain F. Hurley has left

October 6, 1922]

Sydney for Port Moresby with the object of
exploring New Guinea from the air. The
party includes an ethnologist and a naturalist.
Two seaplanes are being taken and will be
used in a four months’ air survey of the western
portions of British New Guinea. Meanwhile
the scientific seetion of the expedition will nav-
igate the Fly River in a ketch. The cost of
the seaplanes is being borne by Mr. L. Hodson,
of Sydney.

THE courses offered by the New School for
Social Research, New York City, include “The
Significance of Modern Philosophy,” by Pro-
fessor John Dewey, Columbia University; ‘“Be-
havior Psychology,” by Dr. John B. Watson,
of the J. Walter Thompson Company; ‘“Psysi-
ology and Conduct,” by Professor Arthur R.
Moore, of Rutgers College, and “Biology and
its Social Implications,’ by Professor Otto
Glaser, of Amherst College.

Tue Harveian Oration will be delivered be-
fore the Royal College of Physicians of Lon-
don by Dr. Arnold Chaplin, on October 18.
The Bradshaw Lecture will be delivered by Sir
Maurice Craig, on “Mental symptoms in
physical disease,’ on November 2. The Fitz-
Patrick Lectures will be delivered by Dr. R. O.
Moon, on “Philosophy and the post-Hippo-
cratic school of medicine,” on November 7.

A CELEBRATION of the one hundredth anni-
versary of the birth of Louis Pasteur will take
place in Philadelphia on December 27. Tenta-
tive plans call for a meeting in the afternoon
at the Academy of Music, and a banquet in
the evening at the Bellevue Stratford Hotel, at
both of which there will be distinguished
speakers. A general committee, comprising
Drs. Edgar Fahs Smith, Ernest Laplace,
Francis X. Dereum, Charles A. EH. Codman
Wilmer Krusen, McCluney Radcliffe, secretary,
Judson Daland, treasurer, and William Duf-
field Robinson, chairman, and an honorary ad-
visory committee from all parts of the country
have been appointed.

Dr. Auice Rosertson, for several years pro-
fessor of zoology in Wellesley College, known
for her work on the Bryozoa, especially of the
Pacific Coast of North America, died at Berke-

SCIENCE

385

ley, California, on September 14. Although
Dr. Robertson had not been in good health for
several years, she had kept at her scientific
work, and death followed a sudden illness,
which a surgical operation failed to relieve.

Miss Mary A. Booru, formerly editor of
Practical Microscopy, has died at her home in
Springfield, aged seventy-nine years. She was
a member of the American Microscopical Soci-
ety, the New York Microscopical Society, and
the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and Sciences
and a fellow of the American Association for
the Advancement of Science and of the Royal
Microscopical Society of London, England.

Davip Suarp, F.R.S., formerly curator of
the Museum of Zoology at the University of
Cambridge and editor of the Zoological Record,
died on August 27, at the age of eighty-one
years.

TADEUSZ GODLEWSKI, professor of physies in
the School of Technology at Lwéw, has died
at the age of forty-four years. He is known
for his work on radioactive and electrochemical
problems.

Dr. T. IcurKawa, president of Momoyama
Hospital, Tokio, died on September 19 from
typhoid fever contracted while experimenting
with typhoid serum.

THE organization founded to promote the
welfare of the University of Bonn has endowed
the university with an institute for research
with the roentgen rays. Professor Grebe is in
charge and it is expected that the institute will
be inaugurated this fall.

A scIENTIFIC conference on problems rela-
ting primarily to the Pacific region will be held
in Australia during August or September of
next year. Plans are now being made for this
event by the Australian National Research
Council, supported by a commonwealth grant
of £5,000 under the leadership of Professor Sir
T. Edgeworth David. This will be the second
conference on Pacific problems. The first was
organized by the Committee on Pacifie Inves-
tigation of the American National Research
Council and met in Honolulu in August, 1920.
The scientific men and scientific agencies inter-
ested in studies of the Pacific have not yet

386 ‘

formed any definite organization except a com-
mittee which has acted informally to facilitate
continuity of effort. Although some form of
organization may be adopted at the meeting
in Australia, it is expected that each confer-
ence will be autonomous and independent and
that the organization and program for each
conference will be in the hands of the country
that issues. the invitation.

We learn from Natwre that the centenary of
the Yorkshire Philosophical Society, which was
founded in 1822, was celebrated on September
20. The members of the society and its guests
were received in the gardens of the Yorkshire
Museum by the president, Mr. W. H. St.
Quintin, and a number of congratulatory ad-
dresses from national as well as local. learned
bodies were read by the representatives. Later,
the gathering went in procession to the Minster,
where a short service was held and an address
delivered by the Bishop of Beverley.

Tue third international conference of
“Psychotechnique appliqué a Vorientation pro-
fessionnelle” will meet this year at Milan on
October 2 to 5. According to the announce-
ment there were to be discussions on the fol-
lowing subjects: (@) What is meant by voea-
tional aptitudes? (Lahy); (b) Natural apti-

tudes and acquired aptitudes (Déecroly,
Patrizi); (c) The psychological analysis of
work (Gemelli, Lipmann); (d) Vocational

guidance and Taylorism (Bauer); and (e) An
international unification of tests and individual
vatings (Claparéde, Mira, Myers).

A HEALTH survey of the printing trades has
been authorized by the International Joint
Conference Council, representing both employ-
ers and employees. The survey is intended to
cover two years and will be nation-wide. The
work wiil inelude a thorough study of printing
processes in their relation to health and of
printing house conditions, possibly more or
less detrimental to health and life. The inves-
tigation will be carried on in cooperation with
a large number of governmental, scientific and
corporate organizations, including the United
States Bureau of Labor Statistics, which will
have charge of the major portion of the social

and economie inquiries. A large measure of

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1449

cooperation is expected from the insurance
companies, but especially from Harvard Med-
ieal School, Yale Medical School, the Public
Health School of Johns Hopkins University
and a number of state health and labor de-
partments. Particular emphasis will be placed
upon methods of ventilation, air-pollution,
lighting, eye-strain, posture and physique. The
investigation will be under the immediate direc-
tion of Dr. Frederick L. Hoffman, dean of the
advanced department of the Babson Institute,
Wellesley Hills, Massachusetts, and consulting
statistician to the Prudential Insurance Com-
pany of America. :

We learn from the London Times that the
Rowett Institute of Research in Animal Nutri-
tion, which is conducted by a joint committee
of representatives of the University of Aber-
deen and the North of Scotland College of
Agriculture, was opened by Queen Mary on
September 12. The buildings forming the
institute are situated about a mile from Bank-
head, Aberdeen. The capital outlay on the
scheme was about £50,000. Of this sum the
Treasury, on the recommendation of the Devel-
‘opment Commission, promised £20,000 pro-
vided an equal sum was obtained from other
sources. At this stage Mr. John Quiller
Rowett, LL.D., who has shown great interest in
scientifie research, offered £10,000 to allow the
work of building the institute to proceed. Im-
pressed with the necessity of leaving the insti-
tute room for expansion, Dr. Rowett made a
further offer to provide, in addition to his first
generous gift, sufiicient funds to purchase the
farm of Bridgefood and the croft of Redpool.
The institution has been organized to include
departments dealing with physiology, biochem-
istry, bacteriology and pathology, and to have
an animal husbandry department, which is
carrying out feeding and other experiments on
a practical scale. All these departments afford
mutual assistance to each other, and all the
work, both purely scientific and practical, is
organized from the newly built center. The
director of the institute is Dr. J. B. Orr.

THERD is given in Nature some further in-
formation concerning the meeting of the Com-
mission on Intellectual Cooperation of the

OctroBerR 6, 1922]

League of Nations which held its first session
at Geneva from August 1 to 5. The commis-
sion had been given a free hand to define its
own program with due regard to existing na-
tional activities and existing organs of inter-
national intellectual life. The following were
among the topics selected for consideration:
the desperate economic condition of the intelli-
genzia in some European countries—notably
Austria and Poland; the protection of pro-
prietary rights in scientifie discoveries and
ideas; the establishment of an international
entenie for the examination and publication of
archeological monuments; inter-university rela-
tions; and an international organization of
bibliography. All these questions have been
referred to individual members of the commis-
sion or to sub-commissions for the preparation
of reports with the view of taking further ac-
tion. As for cooperation in scientific research,
the commission, anxious not to interfere in the
organization or work of the scientifie societies,
decided that this should be left to the initiative
of the societies themselves. Another question
on which the commission found itself unable to
take any useful action was the publication by
common consent of workers in all parts of the
world of discoveries relative to toxic gases and
the development of chemical warfare. It de-
cided to reply to the reduction-of-armaments
commission, which had referred the question,
that it was unable to suggest methods whereby
this result might be brought about.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Mr. James B. DuKs has given $1,125,000 to
Trinity College. The gifts include $1,000,000
to the college endowment fund, $25,000 to the
new gymnasium, $50,000 towards a $100,000
law building and $50,000 toward a $100,000
building for the new school of religious train-
ing.

Dr. Worth Hats, assistant dean of the
Harvard Medical School, has been appointed
acting dean to serve during Dr. David L. Ed-
sall’s absence in Europe during the first half
year; Dr. Roger I. Lee will serve as acting
dean of the School of Public Health.

SCIENCE

387

Dr. Joun M. T. Fryney has been appointed
temporary surgeon-in-chief of the Johns Hop-
kins Hospital and professor of surgery in the
medical school, in place of the late Dr. William
8. Halsted. The faculty will appoint a com-
mittee to make a permanent selection.

Dr. L. A. Pecustern, director of the depart-
ment of psychology and education of the Uni-
versity of Rochester, has been appointed dean
of the College for Teachers of the University
of Cincinnati, to sueceed Dr. W. P. Burris.

THE psychology department of the Ohio
State University announces the following addi-
tions to its staff: Herbert H. Goddard, full
professor; Robert D. Williams, assistant pro-
fessor; Marjorie Bates, instructor. The fol-
lowing promotions have also been made:
Harold E. Burtt to full professor; A. Sophie
Rogers to assistant professor.

Ricuarp C. Lorp, Ph.D. (Washington and
Lee), for some time engaged in industrial
chemistry, has been appointed assistant pro-
fessor of chemistry and physies in Kenyon
College.

Dr. F. I. Werrueimer, recently connected
with Professor Kraepelin’s clinic at Munich,
has become a member of the staff of the Henry
Phipps Psychiatrie Clinic at the Johns Hop-
kins Hospital.

Tue Council of University College of North
Wales has appointed Professor David Thoday,
of the South African University, Cape Town,
to the chair of botany, in succession to Dr.
Phillips, who retires after thirty-eight years’
service.

Dr. Grorce HasweLtt WIxson, lecturer in
bacteriology at the University of Glasgow, has
been appointed to the chair of pathology in
the University of Birmingham, rendered vacant
by the election of Professor J. Shaw Dunn to
the corresponding post in the University of
Manchester.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
THE DEATH RATE FROM TUBERCULOSIS

To tHE Eprror oF ScieNcE: About a year
ago, I had occasion to request of the chief

388

executive of one of our important health de-
partments, information upon the incidence of
tuberculosis in his state for the past decade.
In his reply he stated, among other things, that
recently there had been a very marked and
quite inexplainable decline in the tuberculosis
death rate. The statement struck me as sin-
gular, for it is difficult to conceive of a sudden,
conspicuous decline in the death rate of a dis-
ease of the nature of tuberculosis, without a
reasonable explanation for it. A very brief
search for an explanation soon revealed the
fact that the experience of the particular
health officer to whom I had written was not
peculiar to his state, but was demonstrable for
practically all our registration states, as well
as for the most of our larger centers of urban
population.

If one will chart by years the mortality rates
for tuberculosis for a period covering the past
fifteen or twenty years, for almost any of our
states or cities that keep correct records and
that have ‘been active in the suppression of
tuberculosis, it will be seen that in the main
there was a steady decline until 1917 and 1918.
During 1918 and 1919 there was a sharp up-
ward trend to the curve, followed in a year, or
at most two years, by a marked downward
direction of the curve—much steeper in its
descent than that preceding 1917-1918. With
a number of such charts before one, the reason
for the recent decrease in the death rates from
tuberculosis ‘becomes obvious. The pandemic
of influenza of 1918-19 carried off, in a brief
period, a large number of tuberculosis subjects
that would otherwise have lived on and their
deaths been so distributed through later years
as not materially to have disturbed the uniform
downward direction of the tuberculosis curve
that preceded the period of the great pandemic.

From the standpoint of results, advan-
tageous to the race alone, and disregarding all
humane considerations, this may be viewed as
the beneficent influence of a great plague. The
least resistant of the population succumbed,
those more resistant and physically better
fitted to survive, did so. The human material
thus left is probably the most promising that
has existed for generations, in so far as the
permanent lessening of tuberculosis among it

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1449

is concerned; and we can expect that the curve
for tuberculosis death rates in the future will
be for a time much more sharply downward
than ever before, and that its average level for
a number of coming years will be much lower
than that preceding the epidemic of influenza,
providing, of course, there is no abatement of
those widespread activities that have been so
instrumental in lessening the incidence of the
disease in the past.

For the anti-tuberculosis worker, the present
appears to offer a golden opportunity.

A. C. Axszorr
ScHooL or HyGirnge AND PuBLIC HEALTH,
UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA

OLD GLACIATION IN THE CORDILLERAN
REGION

To THE Eprror of Scrence: The communi-
cation by Thomas Large on the above subject
in the September 22 issue of ScimsncE prompts
me to write that in 1916 I found till with stri-
ated boulders and pebbles in the brickyard near
the normal school at Cheney, Washington, be-
yond the limits here reported by Large. I
brought this matter to the notice of the Geo-
logical Society of America at the Albany meet-
ing in December, 1916, and the following brief
statement concerning it appears in the pro-
ecedings of that meeting (Bull. Geol. Soc.
America, Vol. 28, p. 143):

In northern Washington the occurrence of a
very old drift, probably Kansas, was established
by the discovery of till and striated stones on a
high divide southwest of Spokane, in the vicinity
of Cheney. Boulders had been observed in this
region, and the possibility of glaciation had been
suggested by M. R. Campbell in the Northern
Pacifie Guide Book.

Frank LEVERETT

Awn ArBoR, MICHIGAN,

SEPTEMBER 25, 1922

SOME SIMILARITIES BETWEEN THE GEOL-
OGY OF CALIFORNIA AND PARTS OF
THE DUTCH EAST INDIES

Ir we compare the Sierra Nevada with the
Malay Peninsula, the Coast Range with the
Barissan Mountains of West Sumatra and the
great valley of California with the plains of
East-Sumatra, it is obvious that the topograph-

Octrozser 6, 1922]

ical similarities are attended with geological
ones. In the Malay Peninsula as well as in
the Sierra Nevada granitic rocks of about tthe
same Mesozoic age have a great extension. The
original cover of these rocks has disappeared
during the succeeding periods by long erosion
and the erosion products fill up the geosynclinal
basins of East-Sumatra and the valley of Cali-
fornia, which both are characterized by im-
portant oil deposits of Tertiary age. And to
the west young mountain ranges, in which
strong earth movements still continue, have
separated the geosynclinal ‘basins from the
ocean.

In the Dutch East Indies important trans-
versal and diagonal fractures oecur near the
bending points of the horizontal projection of
the geanticlinal axes. In the western moun-
tains of North America striking examples of
the same kind are found. Several depressions
of the geanticlinal axes along which trans-
continental railroads cross the mountain ranges,
can be compared with straits near the bending
points of the East Indian rows of islands. For
instance, the itraveler, who approaches the
Sierra Nevada from the desert region on the
Santa Fé route, can reach the Pacifie coast
along transversal and diagonal fractures,
which exist near the bending points between
the Sierra Nevada and the San Bernardino
range.

H. A. Brouwer

DeLrr, HOLLAND,

SEPTEMBER, 1922

RELIEF FOR RUSSIAN SCIENTIFIC MEN

Tue “Friends of Russian Scientists,” an or-

ganization sponsored by a hundred professors
and social workers in and around Boston, for
the purpose of raising contributions to be
known as the Gorki Fund for the Relief of
Russian Scientists, has just received the fol-
lowing letter from Maxim Gorki:

In reply to your letter let me make the follow-
ing statement: ‘‘The House of Scientists’? in
Petrograd is a charitable organization for mutual
benefit, founded by Petrograd professors. I have
the honor to be its chairman. The full name of
the organization is ‘‘Committee for the Better-
ment of the Condition of Scientists?’ (Kommis-
sia Ulutschenia Bita Utschenich — abbreviated:
KUBU). Address: C. Oldenburg, Member of the

SCIENCE

389

Academy, House of Scientists, 27 Millionaia,
Petrograd.

The ‘‘House of Scientists’? brings together all
the scientific workers of Petrograd—there are
about 3,000 of them, and together with their
families they comprise about 12,000 souls. They
are undergoing great privation, and are in par-
ticular need of sugar, flour and fats.

Most of the scientists are men of middle or
advanced age, enfeebled by years of undernour-
ishment and the numerous worries of present day
life in Russia.

A ten dollar ‘‘A. R. A.’? parcel is a great help.
The work of the American Relief Administration
with Hoover at the head is one of the most byril-
liant pages in the history of the United States.

It seems to me that there is no need to describe
in great detail the extent of misery among the
scientists.

Do make every possible effort to sustain at least
ten of these precious lives—precious in the broad
sense of serving all mankind, the work of science
being truly international and universal.

I wish you success in your good work!

M. Gorx1
Steringsford, Sept. 1, 1922.

A large section of the American publie,
which has perhaps grown eallous to the con-
tinued appeals for relief funds, has cherished
the notion that the emergency in Russia is over.
Gorki’s letter shows that this is not true. More-
over, in a recent communication to the treas-
urer of the Gorki Fund, Mr. Herbert Hoover
says:

There is no question of the need of the Russian
intellectuals—they as a class have suffered more
than any other class in the Russian debacle. Any
funds raised for the relief of these people will
contribute to a most worthy undertaking.

If the scientists and educators ... will con-
tribute to the support of their colleagues in
Russia, we know of no more worthy cause to
which they can lend their support.

Contributions are being received by Pro-
fessor H. W. L. Dana, treasurer of the Gorki
Fund, 105 Brattle Street, Cambridge, Mass.
They are being transmitted to the Petrograd
“House of Scientists,’ the non-partisan body
of which H. G. Wells and others have written
with enthusiasm, and are in turn distributed to
the Russian scientific workers most in need. It
may be added that the sums received here for
this purpose are forwarded in full to Russia,

390

since the incidental expenses of printing and
postage are being met independently.
IstporE Levitt,
CAMBRIDGE, MAss. Secretary

QUOTATIONS
THE BRITISH ASSOCIATION

THE meeting of the British Association at
Hull ended yesterday. It will be remembered
chiefly by Sir Charles Sherrington’s presiden-
tial address, on which discussion did not cease
during the week, nor is it more likely to die
down when science and philosophy have had
time to study the full text. So far as it was a
positive statement it was definitely on the ma-
terialistic as opposed to the vitalistic interpre-
tation of Nature. It explained the increasing
number of mechanisms in the body of men and
animals which are now understood, and def-
initely referred these to the order of chemistry
and physics instead of to vague non-material
principles. So far, its assault was limited to
fashionable doctrines within the sphere of
science, and should disturb only those who trace
purpose and consciousness back to animalcule,
or attribute a psyche to the cells of the liver.
With regard to the mind itself no positive
statement of a materialistic interpretation was
made; on the contrary, ‘Sir Charles Sherring-
ton, with a deliberateness perhaps in itself sug-
gestive, reiterated our complete failure to inter-
pret mind in terms of matter. But the presi-
dent traced the relations between the evolution
of the nervous system and the rise of mind in
the animal kingdom with meticulous care, and
insisted so coldly but so minutely on the cor-
respondences between what he stated to be
mechanism and what all regard as mind that it
is at least open to read intention into his argu-
ment. No one can doubt but that the British
Association, through its president, has fulfilled
one of its highest functions this year. It has
set men thinking and talking on one of the
more fundamental problems that excite the
human intelligence.

Otherwise the meeting at Hull was useful
rather than distinguished. There were many
solid papers, some valuable discussions, and no
more than the customary number of attempts
to reach the publie ear by the methods of exag-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1449

geration, or of insistence on the dramatic side
of a communication. The debate on nitrogen
was a sound and instructive contribution to
one of the branches of applied science most
vital to the safety and the prosperity of na-
tions. The coming together of zoologists, gov-
ernment officials, fishery experts and members
of the fishing industry did much to enlighten
both science and industry. We admit with
pleasure that since we and others called atten-
tion to the diffuse and overloaded nature of the
program of meetings of the association, the
organization has been notably improved, espe-
cially with regard to the arrangement of joint
discussions, in which two or more sections take
part. Our special correspondents, however,
inform us that there were still at the Hull
meeting many eases of several papers or dis-
cussions of wide interest set down for the same
day and hour. Unfortunately, moreover, not
a few of the speakers and readers of papers
had rudimentary ideas on public speaking, and
attempted to cover far too much ground in the
time allotted to them, or overloaded their con-
tributions with unnecessary introductory mat-
ter. Science should not disdain the art of pre-
sentation—The London Times.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Respiration. By J. S. Haupanz, M. D.,
LL. D., F. R. S., Fellow of New College,
Oxford; Hon. Professor, Birmingham Uni-
versity. Yale University Press, 1922. 427
pp., 104 figures, and an appendix of ana-
lytical methods.

Tuts volume contains the Silliman Memorial
lectures at Yale University for 1915, revised
so as to bring the presentation of the material
up to the date of publication. It is a mono-
graph covering the field of respiration: a field
which, largely as the result of the work of
Haldane and his collaborators, has assumed
outstanding importance in recent years, and
promises further important developments in
the near future in theoretical knowledge and
in practical applications to clinical medicine
and industrial hygiene.

In brief, this book is the carefully revised
and coordinated presentation, while the author
is at the acme of his productive powers, of

Octosrr 6, 1922]

the hfe work of one of the master investigators
of our time. It is a fit companion to the
volumes from the pens of previous Silliman
lecturers, including such names as J. J. Thom-
son, Sherrington, Rutherford, Nernst, Bateson,
and Arrhenius.

It begins with a brief but illuminating ac-
count of the historical development of the
knowledge of respiration; its relation to
chemistry and physics on the one hand, and to
the theory of physiological regulation on the
other. The chapters following deal with ecar-
bon dioxide and the chemical regulation of
breathing; the nervous mechanism and control
and some of the nervous disturbances of res-
piration, as in “gsoldier’s heart,” neurasthenia
and fatigue; the blood as a carrier of oxygen
with a diseussion of the properties of hzemo-
globin and the variations of its dissociation
eurve; the blood as a carrier of carbon di-
oxide and the relations of earbon dioxide to
neutrality regulation in the blood and other
fluid media of the body; the causes and effects
of anoxhemia, and the importance and fre-
quency of oxygen deficiency as a factor in
functional disturbances; the mutually regula-
tive relations of blood reaction and breathing;
the much disputed question of gas secretion
in the lungs; the influence of vitiation of the
atmosphere upon health in relation to indus-
trial hygiene; high atmospheric pressures and
caisson disease; low atmospheric pressures,
mountain sickness, and the physiological con-
ditions to which aviators are exposed; and an
appendix giving the specialized methods which
the author has developed for investigation in
this field.

Two general aspects of Haldane’s work de-
serve particular notice: Other master physiolo-
gists—formerly Voit, and in modern times,
particularly Pawlow—have emphasized the
importance of dealing with the normal and
complete organism—for example, the con-
seious, healthy, happy, unanesthetized, unre-
stramed dog. It is the failure of the general
run of investigators to appreciate and apply
this doctrine, and their attempt to infer truth
directly from the essentially false conditions
of most experimentation—for example, much
of the current blood pressure experimenta-

SCIENCE

391

tion, and the reduced circulation—which leaves
so little value in most of the articles filling our
journals. They deal merely (as Haldane in-
cisively expresses it in his preface) “with frag-
ments of frogs and other animals.” Haldane,
on the contrary, more than any other physiolo-
gist has found ways to use as his “versuchs-
tier” not only the normal mammalian or-
ganism, with functions unpreverted by experi-
mental conditions, but living, conscious, active
man. The investigator himself and his col-
laborators have been the chief subjecis of his
experiments. Indeed Haldane’s demonstration
of the possibility and the efficiency of experi-
mentation upon man will probably in the fu-
ture be accounted his greatest contribution.
By no other method apparently could the
character and uniformity of the alveolar CO,
regulation,—the central fact of the Haldanian
conception of respiration—have been estab-
lished.

The second aspect of MHaldane’s thought
which gives 1t permanent philosophical value
is his treatment of respiration and the blood
as aspects and illustrations of physiological
regulation: that extraordinary power of every
living organism to maintain itself, so different
from, or rather so much in addition to the
equilibrium of an inorganic system. It is the
capacity to “preserve constant the conditions
of life in the internal environment,” as Claude
Bernard expresses it.

This conception of “organicism” as the cen-
tral doctrine of biology differentiates Bernard,
Haldane, and others who hold it, from the
vitalists on the one hand, and from the mech-
It prompts the most
esent day

anists on the other.
thorough analysis of which our pr
and incomplete ehemistry and physics are ¢a-
pable into the physico-chemical conditions and
properties of the humors and cells; but it looks
on this analysis as merely a preliminary and
sees as the essential topie of the physiologist
those “living” reactions and processes by which

the organism “preserves constant,” or rather
adjusts, controls, and regulates, within narrow
limits of variation such “conditions of life” as
osmotie pressure, hydrogen ion concentration,
temperature, content of sugar, calcium, and po-
tassium and a thousand other elements already

392

known, suspeeted, or yet to be) msrouered we
the internal environment.”

Seti Waser YANDELL HenpERson

SPECIAL ARTICLES
A CASE OF DUPLICATE GENES IN CREPIS
CAPILLARIS (L.) WALLR.

Tue rosette leaves of Crepis capillaris (1.)
Wallr. normally have a more or less pronounced
pubescence on the lower surface of the
midrib. Often the upper surface is also sim-
larly pubescent, but not by any means in all
cases, and the significance of this latter differ-
ence, if any exists, has not been learned.’

In°1918 in a culture which had its origin
from wild plants growing in Berkeley there
was found a plant (17.192P,) which did not
show the pubescence on the lower surface
of the midribs of the rosette leaves. When
selfed this plant reproduced the type and a
strain of “smooth” leayed plants was estab-
lished. Although there is some variation in
the amount of pubescence on the ribs of dif-
ferent plants of the hairy strain, there is no
difficulty in distinguishing the two groups.

Crosses between these races at first gave dis-
cordant results. More recently with larger
cultures and perfected technique data have
been collected which indicate that hairiness of
the midribs is due to duplicate dominant genes,
which are not in the same chromosome group.

Two EF, cultures in 1921 gave 556 hairy- to
40 smooth-leaved plants, a rato of 14.926 to
1.073 = 0.106, which is a very good fit indeed.
Among the F, plants there should be an equal
number populations and
populations containing only one type of plant.
Among those segregating in F, half should give
15:1 ratios and half 3:1 ratios.

Data from F, populations are not yet com-
plete but cultures giving both 3:1 and 15:1
ratios have been obtained from another eross.
These results show that the hairy plant used
as pollen parent in this ease was AABb which
gave all hairy in F, and equal numbers of 3 : 1
and 15:1 populations in #',. This supplies
also the necessary data to satisfy theoretical
requirements for the duplicate gene interpre-
tation.

giving segregating

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1449

Complete data from crosses involving hairy
and smooth characters are reserved for a future
publication.

KE. B. Bascocx

J. L. Connins
CALIFORNIA

BERKELEY,
INHERITANCE OF GLANDULAR PUBES-
CENCE IN CREPIS CAPILLARIS
(L.) WALLR.

Tue usual wild type of this species has
glandular pubescence on the involueral bracts
and extending downward on the pedicel for
some distance from the flower head.

In 1918 a single plant appeared which did
not have these glandular hairs. Such plants
have been designated as “bald.” The culture
in which this “bald” plant appeared grew from
seed sent us from Copenhagen, Denmark. Since
this first appearance, “bald” plants have been
found in cultures derived from five other geo-
graphical locations as follows: England, Swe-
den, Chile, France and the Azores Islands.

The identity of the gene in all the cultures
except that from France has been established
by crossing, which in all cases produced only
“bald” plants.

The bald character is produced by a single
recessive gene. The F, plants obtained from
crossing bald with glandular were completely
glandular. In a culture of 77 back crossed
plants 39 were glandular and 38 bald. A total
of 210 F, plants gave a segregation of 174
glandular to 36 bald, the ratio being
3.314 : 0.685. The deviation in this case is
3.89 times the probable error. The major part
of this deviation is due to one culture which
produced 72 glandular to 2 bald plants. When
this culture is excluded from the totals, there
then remains 102 glandular to 34 bald, which
is an exact 3:1 ratio. The F, bald plants
which were tested bred true in F,. Only two
glandular F', plants have been tested, both seg-
regating in F,.

Detailed data for all bald cultures will -be
given in a future publication.

EK. B. Bascock
J. L. Couiins
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

OctosER 6, 1922

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCEM

Tre sixty-fourth gentral meeting of the
American Chemical Society was held at the
Carnegie Institute of Technology, Pittsburgh,
Pa., on Tuesday morning, September 5, 1922.
Short addresses were given by J. O. Handy,
chairman of the Pittsburgh Section, John G.
Bowman, chancellor of the University of Pitts-
burgh, and Thomas 8. Baker, acting president
of the Carnegie Institute of Technology. Dr.
Edgar F. Smith responded on behalf of the
society. The address of Edward E. Slosson on
“The constructive chemist” was the feature of
the morning and was heartily enjoyed by all
those who had the privilege of hearing it. No
business was transacted at the general meeting.

The following addresses were given at the
afternoon session in the Carnegie Musie Hall:
“The chemical control of gaseous detonation
with particular reference to the internal com-
bustion engine,” by Thos. Midgley, Jr., and
T. A. Boyd; “The journal literature of chem-
istry,’ by HE. J. Crane; “Structural colors in
feathers,” by Wilder D. Bancroft; “How re-
Search made a potash industry,” by John KE.
Teeple.

On Tuesday evening a complimentary
smoker was given the members as guests of the
Pittsburgh Section at the Syria Mosque. There
were 1,325 people present. A very interesting
program, with songs, local vaudeville entertain-
ment, moving pictures, etc., was enjoyed by
all. On Wednesday at 2 P.M. a conference on
“World Metric Standardization,’ with Eugene
C. Bingham, chairman, was held in the theater
of the Fine Arts Building with the following
delegates present:

American Chemical Society: Eugene C. Bing-
ham.

National Academy of Sciences: T. C. Menden-
hall.

American Society of Zoologists: Dr. H. H.
Collins.

American Psychological Association: Professor
W. V. Bingham.

American Institute of Electrical Engineers:
N. W. Storer.

American Metrie Association: W. W.
son.

Optical Society of America: Harry S. Hower.

Steven-

SCIENCE

393

United States
Holbrook.

New York Mineralogical Club: Dr. George F.
Ikunz (Absent).

American Statistical
Roswell H. Johnson.

Geological Society of America: Professor Ros-
well H. Johnson.

Association of Seed Analysts: Dr. E. M. Gress.

American Electrochemical Society: R. E. Zim-
merman,

Bureau of Standards: F. §.

Association: Professor

American Pharmaceutienl Association: Dean

J. A. Koch.
National Society for the Study of Edueation:
J. Freeman Guy (Absent).

American Astronomical Society: Professor
Herman S. Davis.

Maryland Academy of Seienee: Dr. Claude. H.
Hall.

American Association of University Professors:
Professor Alexander Silverman.

Eeological Society of America: A. E. Ortman

(Absent).

American Institute of Architects: T. E. Bill-
quist.

American Society of Biological Chemists:

Howard B. Lewis (Absent).
American Society of Civil Engineers: R. A.

Cummings.

American Mathematical Society: Professor
I. L. Bishop.

American Medical Association: Dr. Paul N.
Leech,

American Physiological Association: Dr. GC. C.
Guthrie.

American Public Health Association: Dr. Wads-
worth.

Illuminating Engineering Society: E. J. Ed-
wards.

Mathematical Association of
fessor F. L. Bishop.

Sullivant Moss Society: Dr. O. E. Jennings.

The same evening a reception was held and
President Edgar F. Smith gaye the annual
presidential address under the title “Our
Science.” On Thursday evening a garden
party, followed by supper and an out-of-door
dramatic entertainment, “The Wonder Hat,”
was the chief entertainment of the meeting.
The party was held at “Oak Manor,” which is
the University of Pittsburgh faculty and
Mellon Institute elub house. The weather was
ideal. Some 1,500 persons were present and a
thoroughly delightful social evening, including

America: Pro-

394

also musie and dancing, was enjoyed by all.
On Friday, excursions were made to the Car-
negie Steel Company’s Clairton by-product
coke plant, the steel works and to the American
Window Glass Company’s plant at Mononga-
hela City. The ladies were entertained through-
out the week with receptions, dinners and ex-
cursions. Further details will be found in the
October. issue of the Journal of Industrial and
Engineering Chemistry.

The following divisions and sections met:
Divisions of Agricultural and Food Chemistry,
Biological Chemistry, Dye Chemistry, Fertilizer
Chemistry, Industrial and Engineering Chem-
istry, Leather Chemistry, Chemistry of Medi-
cinal Products, Organic Chemistry, Physical
and Inorganic Chemistry, Rubber Chemistry,
Sugar Chemistry, Water, Sewage and Sanita-
tion Chemistry, and Sections of Cellulose
Chemistry, Chemical Edueation, Gas and Fuel,
History of Chemistry and Petroleum Chemis-
try. Full details of their meetings will be
found in the October issue of the Journal of
Industrial and Engineering Chemis*y.

The divisions elected officers as foliows:

Division of Agricultural and Food Chemistry:
Chairman, H. A. Noyes; vice-chairman, R. H.
Carr; Secretary, C. S. Brinton; executive com-
mittee, T. J. Bryan, Harper F. Zoller.

Division of Biological Chemistry: Chairman,
J. S. Hughes; secretary, W. V. Bovie; executive
committee, H. B. Lewis, chairman, A. W. Dox.
D. B. Jones, A. R. Lamb, J. F. Lyman.

Division of Cellulose Chemistry: Chairman,
G. J. Esselen, Jr.; vice-chairman, Louis E. Wise;
secretary-treasurer, L. F. Hawley; executive com-
mittee, Harold Hibbert, J. F. Waite.

Division of Dye Chemistry: Chairman, W. J.

Hale; vice-chairman, R. E. Rose; _ secretary,
R. Norris Shreve; ezecutive committee, L. A.
Olney, L. F. Johnson.

Division of Fertilizer Chemistry: Chairman,

FE. B. Carpenter; vice-chairman, R. N. Brackett;
secretary, H. C. Moore; executive committee,
H. J. Wheeler, C. H. Jones, E. W. Magruder,
IN Vo

Division of Industrial and Engineering Chem-
Chairman, D. R. Sperry; vice-chairman,
W. A. Peters; secretary, E. M. Billings; executive
committee, W. F. Hillebrand, Edward Mallinek-
rodt, Jr., F. M. DeBeers, A. Silverman, H. C.
Moody, C. E. Coates.

Patten.

istry:

_ SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1449

Division of Leather Chemistry: Chairman,
J. Arthur Wilson; vice-chairman, Charles S. Hol-
lander; secretary, Arthur W. Thomas; executive
committee, F. P. Veitch, C. R. MeKee.

Division of Chemistry of Medicinal Products:
Chairman, Edgar B. Carter; secretary, B. H. Vol-

wiler; executive committee, Charles Caspari,
Oliver Kamm.
Division of Organie Chemistry: Chairman,

Frank C. Whitmore; vice-chairman and secretary,
R. R. Renshaw.

Division of Petroleum Chemistry: Chairman,
C. E. Delbridge; vice-chairman, R. R. Matthews;
secretary, W. A. Gruse; executive committee,
EK. W. Dean, W. F. Faragher.

Division of Physical and Inorganic Chemistry:
Chairman, Robert E. Wilson; secretary, Graham
Edgar; executive committee, Farrington Daniels,
J. H. Ellis, James Kendall, E. B. Millard, R. G.
Van Name.

Division of Rubber Chemistry: Chairman,
W. B. Wiegand; vice-chairman, E. B. Spear; sec-
retary, Arnold H. Smith; ezecutive committee,
C. W. Bedford, D. F. Cranor, G. 8S. Whitby, H. L.
Fisher, N. A. Shepard.

Division of Sugar Chemistry: Chairman, W. D.
Horne; vice-chairman, F. W. Zerban; secretary,
Frederick J. Bates; executive committee, W. B.
Newkirk, C. E. Coates, C. A Browne, 8S. J. Os-
born, H. 8. Paine, H. E. Zitkowski.

Division of Water, Sewage and Sanitation
Chemistry: Chairman, A. M. Buswell; vice-
chairman, F. R. Georgia; secretary, W. W.
Skinner; executive committee, W. R. Copeland,
W. D. Collins.

DIVISION OF BIOLOGICAL CHEMISTRY
Howard B. Lewis, chairman
J. S. Hughes, secretary

The action of sodium soaps on trypsin. J. B.
Brown. The sodium soaps of the higher fatty
acids have been found to destroy trypsin very
rapidly. The amount of destruction of enzyme
depends on the concentration of the soap and the
time of exposure of enzyme to soap. The pres-
ence of protein substrate protects the enzyme
and lessens the destruction. The satured and
unsatured soaps are about equally destructive.
Sodium soaps destroy the autolytic enzymes of
dog liver and the ptyalin of human saliva. The
action of soaps on these enzymes is much greater
than can be accounted for as a p,, effect.

Metabolic disturbances in cats on a milk diet.
GrEorRGE W. PucHER and Karu F. Corr. A very
interesting influence of milk on the alkalimeta-
bolism of cats has been observed and studied

OctoBER 6, 1922

quantitatively. The striking features are sum-
marized as follows: (1) Cats fed on meat and
water excrete a urine normal for carnivorous ani-
mals. The total carbon dioxide content of the
urine is very small and constant in value. (2)
Cats when fed on milk excrete within 24-48 hours
a urine which shows the following qualities:
(a) Alkaline to brilliant yellow and even to
phenolphthalein. (b) Substances which easily
reduce Benedict’s solution (5 minutes). (c)
Huge amounts of biearbonates (calculated from
total COs evolved). (d) Increase of the ammonia
and the ammonia total nitrogen ratio. (3) With-
in 48 hours after the withdrawal of the milk the
animals returned to normal. (4) Milk sugar is
not responsible for these changes.

The effect of various methods of pasteurization
on the vitamin © content of milk. J. S. HucGues,
N. E. Ouson and J. C. JENKINS.

The relationship between the inhibition point
of fungicides and their concentration and their
molecular weight. ERNEST BATEMAN. There is a
definite relationship between the concentration of
fungicides and the relative retardation in the
growth of the fungus. This relationship can be
expressed mathematically by the equation
R
Cmd
b an exponent depending upon the structure of
the compound, & the percentage retardation and
kK a constant. There is a definite relationship
between the molecular weight of poisons in
homologous series and their inhibition point. This
relationship ean be expressed by the equation
CM¢d — K where C is the concentration at the
killing point, M@ the molecular weight of the com-
pound, d an exponent whieh is possibly governed
by the organism and # a constant.

The proteins of wheat bran. D. Breese JONES
and C. EB, F. GERSDORFF.

The nutritive value of the proteins of the palm
kernel. A. J. Pinks and D. Breese JONES.

Proteins from the cantaloupe seed (Cucumis
melo); isolation of a crystalline globulin. .D.
Breesr JONES and C, HE. F. Grersporrr.

The physico-chemical properties of strong and
weak flours. IV. The influence of the ash of
flours upon the viscosity of flour-water suspen-
sions. Rose AIKEN GorTNER and Pau fF.
SHarp. The viscosity of acidified flour-water
suspensions is markedly influenced by the ash
contained in the flour. The greater part of such
ash may be removed by lixiviating the flour with
water and using the leached residue for viscosity

= K where Cm is the concentration in mols,

SCIENCE

395
determinations. Such studies have led to the
formula:

Log viscosity = a + Db (log concentration)

where a and D are constants, and the viscosity is
the maximum viscosity obtainable with lactic acid.
The numerical value of b is a measure of the
colloidal properties of the gluten as influencing
flour strength.

The physico-chemical properties of strong and
weak flours. V. The identity of the gluten pro-
tein responsible for changes in hydration capacity
as measured by viscosity. Paun IF. Suarp with
Ross A. Gorrnrr. The maximum viscosity of
acidulated (lactic acid) flour-water suspensions
from which the ash has been leached is but little
altered by repeated lixivation continued until all,
or practically all, of the gliadin has been re-
moved. Glutenin is the only protein present in
such a preparation in any considerable quantity,
and it is the physical state of the glutenin which
is responsible for changes in hydration capacity
of wheat flour gluten.

The physico-chemical properties of strong and
weak flours. VI. The physical state of the gluten
as affecting loaf volume. Paut F. SHarp with
Ross AIKEN GorTNER. Experiments by other
workers have shown that an inferior loaf results
when gliadin is removed from a flour by extrac-
tion with aleohol and the gliadin-free flour is
dried, remilled and baked. This has been inter-
preted as indicating that the absenee of gliadin
is the determining factor of the poor baking re-
sults. We have found that essentially the same
results may be obtained when flour is doughed
up with 85 per cent. aleohol and the whole mass
dried, remilled and baked. Here nothing was
added to or taken from the flour. Nevertheless
the flour ‘‘strength’’ is destroyed. The aleohol
treatment has destroyed the colloidal properties
of the glutenin and any agent which influences
the colloidal properties of the glutenin will affect
loaf volume.

The quantitative production of furfural from
pentose material. N. C. Prrvier with Ross
AIKEN GoRTNER. JF urfural in theoretical yield
may be distilled from pentose material by boiling
with 12 per cent. HCl and at the same time pass-
ing a rapid current of steam through the solution.

The quantitative estimation of furfural by
electrometric titration. N. C. PERvier with Ross
AIKEN GoRTNER. Furfural can be quantitatively
titrated bromine. We have employed a
standard solution of potassium bromate, titrating
in the presence of KI and 5 per cent. HCl, using

with

396

a galvanometer as an indicator. Two atoms of
bromine are required for each molecule of fur-
fural. Laevulnie acid and hexoses do not inter-
fere in the estimation of pentose material by its
conversion first into furfural and the subsequent
titration.

Methods for the estimation of total solids and
hydrophilic colloid content of expressed plant
tissue fluids with certain phytochemical applica-
tions. Ross AIKEN GorTNER, RopEerT NEWTON
and Water F. HorrmMan. The refractive index
of a plant sap as measured by an Abbe refracto-
meter may be used to measure quantitatively the
total solids present in the sap. A measurement
of ‘‘bound water’’ is used to estimate the
hydrophilic colloid content. The depression of
the freezing point of the original sap is obtained.
Then a quantity of sucrose just sufficient to make
a molar solution in the total water present is
added and the depression of the freezing point
is again obtained. The excess depression (over
the theoretical 2,085 due to molar sucrose) is due
to a part of the water being held by the hydro-
philie colloids in such a manner as to be unavail-
able for the solution of sucrose.

The origin of the humin formed by the acid
VII. Hydrolysis in the
presence of ketones. Ross AIKEN GORTNER and
Fart R. Norris. Ketones do not appreciably
alter the nitrogen distribution of a protein as
measured by Van Slyke’s method. No evidence
was obtained that ketones could be involved in
humin We believe, therefore, that
humin formation is caused by the interaction of

hydrolysis of proteins.

formation.

tryphophane and an aldehyde.

The content of diaminized
H. B. Lewis and Raupo C. Corey.

The influence of food on the excretion of en-

tyrosine caseti.

dogenous uric acid in man. (By title.) H. B.
Lewis and Rate C. CorLey.

The synthesis and rate of elimination of hip-
purie acid in the organism of the rabbit. H. B.
Lewis and WENDELL H. GRIFFITH.

The analysis of the urine as a part of the

physical examination of the college student. G. O.
HicLey. This work was begun in 1915 because of
the death of a college student from diabetes.
Tests are made for sugar and for albumin, and
in special cases for other pathological substances.
Each year a considerable number of cases of
nephritis are discovered, of which about two
thirds show a previous history of an acute attack
of that disease. When any pathological sub-
stance is detected a second and often a third
sample of urine is tested, and the student is ad-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1449

vised to consult a competent physician and to
report his findings to the college physical ex-
aminer.

Further observations on the influence of vitamin
B on the development of organs in Single Comb
White Leghorn cockerels. Artuur J. Sousa and
R. ApamMs DutcHer. Six hundred and nine
chicks were hatched from eggs of pure line stock
and placed on a normal chick ration. At the
age of 76 days 150 normal cockerels were selected
and divided in three groups, designated A, B
and C. Group A received a normal ration with
greens, Group B received an adequate synthetic
diet and Group C received a synthetic diet, ade-
quate in all particulars except vitamin B. After
four wecks 25 birds in each group were killed
and weights and measurements recorded on testes,
heart, kidneys, spleen, pancreas, liver, thyroid
and The remaining birds were
allowed to continue until polyneuritis developed
in Group C, at which time one bird from Groups
A and B, ineluding the polyneuritic bird, were
killed. All data were treated biometrically. The
absence of vitamin B produced significant losses
in the weight of testes, heart, liver and kidneys.
Differences in length of heart and spleen were
also apparent.

Is nitrogen in gaseous form lost from germina-
ting seed and young seedlings as an inherent func-
tion of their metabolic processes? JEHIEL DAviD-
SON.

Influence of
starch

suprarenals.

lysine upon the hydrolysis of
by purified pancreatic amylase. H. C.
SHERMAN and Mary L. Canpwenn. This is an
extension of the work with arginine, histidine
and tryptophane which was reported by the same
authors last year. Juysine resembles histidine and
tryptophane in not increasing the amyloclastic
activity of pancreatic amylase while both lysine,
and tryptophane do inerease its saccharogenic
These results are best interpreted in
terms of the theory that the favorable influence
of amino acids is attributable to their effect in
checking the hydrolytic destruction of the enzyme
in the aqueous dispersions in which it acts. The
theoretical part of the paper does not lend itself
to further condensation.

Influence of some organic compounds upon the
hydrolysis of starch by salivary and pancreatic
amylases. HH. OC. SHERMAN and NELLIE M.
Naynor. In order to test the question whether
the organic substances, which have been reported
as favoring the activity of amylases, have a
directly activating effect upon the enzyme by
reason of their organic groupings, experiments

activity.

OcroseEr 6, 1922

have been made with aniline, methyl and ethyl
‘amines, benzoie benzamide, anthranilic acid and
hippurie acid. These substances collectively con-
tain the amino and carboxyl groups both singly
and in different combinations but none of them
showed any favorable influence upon the activity
of salivary or pancreatic amylase when tested
under what are now regarded as standard condi-
tions for the activity of these enzymes.
sults fail to furnish any support for the view
that certain organic groupings as such activate
amylolytic action. They make it more
probable that the favorable influence of y-amino
acids upon amylases is to be attributed primarily
if not entirely to their effect in preserving the
enzyme from hydrolytic destruction.

Effect of amino acids in retarding the hy-
drolytic decomposition of an enzyme (pancreatic
amylase). BH. C. SHERMAN and FLORENCE
Waker. The extent of the deterioration of this
enzyme when allowed to stand in solution for
different lengths of time and at different tempera-
tures with and without the addition of amino acid
has been determined. The higher the temperature,
up to the point at which coagulation begins, or
the longer the time of heating, the more marked
was the favorable effect of the added amino acid,
thus confirming the view that the enzyme in its
chemical composition either is a protein or con-
tains protein as an essential constituent, and that
the added amino acid exerts its favorable influ-
ence by checking the hydrolytie destruction of

The re-

much.

the enzyme.

Catalytic action of phosphates on the separate
and simultaneous oxidation of glucose and butyric
acid with peroxide. EpGar J. WITzEMANN.

Energy expenditures by women during horizon-
tal walking at different speeds. H. MonmoutTH
SmMira and DortHa B. Baty. Jsing the
Douglas-Haldane method of measuring the gase-
ous exchange the energy expenditure of nine
women was determined when standing and walk-
ing at speeds of 30, 60 and 90 meters a minute.
The average standing expenditure was 0.606
calorie per minute per square meter of body sur-
face computed by Du Bois height-weight chart.
The total imerease for the walking over the
standing values showed an average expenditure
for the nine subjects of 0.527, 0.489 and 0.552
gram-calorie per horizontal kilogrammeter for
the speeds of 30, 60 and 90 meters per minute
respectively. Seven out of the nine subjects
showed a greater energy expenditure per hori-
zontal kilogrammeter at 30 meters per minute
than at 60. The menstrual period was appar-

SCIENCE

397

ently without effect on either the standing or
walking metabolism.

Lhe substitutions of glass electrodes for the
hydrogen electrodes in electromcetric
Water S. Huerss.

Oxidation-reduction potentials and the stability
of vitamin C. Victor K. LaMrr. The differ-
ence in acidity is insufficient to account alone for
the much greater stability of vitamin C to heat
in the case of tomato and citrus fruit juices com-
pared to that of cabbage juice where almost eom-
plete destruction oceurs on boiling for one hour
in the absence of air. The oxidation-reduction
potentials of these juices, freshly expressed, were
determined electrometrically in the absence of
atmospheric oxygen. The potentials, when cor-
rected for Py Mdicate that the stability of the
vitamin depends upon the natural oxidizing or
reducing condition of the juice as well as upon
the opportunities that are afforded fcr atmos-
pheric oxidation.

Flour strength as influenced by the addition of
Miastatic ferments. F. A. Conuatz. The opti-
mum activity for the diastase in malt flour with
raw wheat starch as a substrate was found at
Der 4.26 and at a temperature of 65 degrees C.
This activity was apparently constant over the
period of digestion. The reducing sugars
increased proportionately to the amount of dias-
tase added. The viscosity of the digestion mix-
ture (plus lactic acid) decreased with increasing
amounts of added diastase and also with the time
of digestion. This decrease is apparently not
due to the salt effect. The gas producing ca-
pacity of strong flours is not increased by dias-
tase, but with weak flours the reverse is the ease.

Changes in hydrogen-ion concentration of fer-
menting dough. (By title). F. A. Cotnarz.

The synthesis of vitamins by molds. V. FE.
Nezson, Exuis I. Furmer, V. G. Herter and
W. W. Durcxrer. Yeast grown on medium F is
about 60 per cent. as potent in vitamin B as
Fleischmann’s yeast; the above synthetic yeast will
cure polyneuritis in pigeons. Air drying destroys
about 30 per cent. of the vitamin B potency of
yeast. Aspergillus niger ‘and Penicillium expan-
sum synthesize vitamin B when grown on Raulin’s
medium but do not synthesize vitamin A. The
potency in vitamin B is about the same as that
of our synthetic yeast. Sclerotinea cinerea shows
vegetative growth on medium F but does not

titration.

sporulate. The mycelia, according to incomplete
data, shows no vitamin B. The work is being
continued.

The use of kelp in the preparation of a diet

398

amendment for use in the treatment and pre-
vention of deficiency diseases, particularly goiter.
(By title). J. W. TURRENTINE.

SECTION O¥ CHEMICAL EDUCATION
Edgar F. Smith, chairman
Neil E. Gordon, secretary

Pandemic chemistry. Wiper D. BANCROFT.
There is a great need for a course in chemistry
which shall be intended for the man who wishes
to learn something about the subject as a part
of a general education; but who has no intention
Such a course
should cover the whole field of chemistry in an
interesting way without wasting time on tech-
nical details. Cornell University is considering
seriously starting such a course when the new
chemical laboratory is finished. A general out-
line of the proposed course is given.

What chemistry shall be taught in high school
and how shall it be correlated with college chem-
istry? Louis W. Marrern. Stress is placed on
the adaptability of chemistry in high schools to
the development of certain habits and mental
traits not only essential to the successful study
of chemistry and other scientifie subjects in col-
leges, but, as well, to the average citizen, at a
time when such habits and mental
better obtained than in college. A discussion is
made of the problems in the articulation between
high school chemistry and college chemistry. A
brief statement of content to cover less ground
and to emphasize unity in high school chemistry
is made with a view of the high school taking to
college a greater thoroughness in fundamental
principles, their relationships and the ability to
apply them.

What chemistry shall be taught in the first year
of college and how shall this be correlated with
high school chemistry. Harry N. Houmes. High
school chemistry is valuable as a training in
scientific thinking but it should not be ferced to
prepare the student for second year college chem-
istry. First year college chemistry must consoli-
date what was learned before in an interpretive
spirit and must introduce much new material. It
should give much more attention to physical
chemistry, organic chemistry, qualitative analysis
—and be more quantitative in general. The re-
search attitude of mind may be stimulated even
in the first year. In dividing a large class into
groups—the more elementary and the more ad-
vanced—the judgment of the teacher should be
influenced by the records of the high schools from
which students came and by a more or less formal
quiz on lrigh school chemistry.

of going on with the subject.

traits are

SCLENCH

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1449

What chemistry shatl be taught in our profes-
sional schools? I. B. BroueHron. The chemical
requirements for pre-medical students are cited
as specified by the American Medical Association.
The question is raised as to how the colleges of
liberal arts and science should deal with this type
of chemical training, with suggestions that some
adaptations could be made.

Chemical education in dental schools.
FB. Rupp.
this paper:

WORTLEY
The following points were covered in

(1) Needs of freshmen students in
chemistry in those dental schools requiring only
high school graduation for matriculation. (2)
Needs in those schools requiring one year of col-
lege work for matriculation. (3) The proper cor-
relation of dental metallurgy and dental chem-
istry.

Chemical education in pharmacy schools. JOHN
C. Kranrz, Jr. The purpose of the paper was
to point out the objections to the teaching of
strictly applied pharmaceutical chemistry in
pharmacy schools, and also to show that the sub-
stitution of general college chemistry does not
supply the needs of pharmacy students. The
paper also describes an efficient and comprehen-
sive method of correlating general and pharma-
ceutical chemistry in order to meet the demands
of the pharmacy student.

What chemistry should be taught an agricul-
tural student. C. W. Sroppart. General inor-
ganie and agricultural chemistry should be given
to all agricultural students. Qualitative analysis

should be a part of general chemistry. Organic
chemistry and possibly quantitative analysis
should be a part of agricultural chemistry,

although the latter is not necessarily a part of the
laboratory work of agricultural chemistry. For
specialists in agricultural chemistry a separate
course in organic chemistry is essential, and it
ought to be ‘‘well rubbed in.’’ They need also
a course in quantitative analysis but combining
theory with agricultural practice, not too distinet
courses. Agricultural chemists must be well
grounded in chemistry. But after all the teacher
is the principal item in what chemistry should be
taught to an agricultural student.

Qualitative analysis for engineering students.
CHARLES W. Cuno. A short synopsis of the
paper follows: (1) A discussion of the present
methods of teaching qualitative analysis as a pre-
liminary to other courses in chemistry. (2) A
questioning of the wisdom of such a course for
civil, mechanical and electrical engineers. (3)
Suggestions: (a) For the modification of the
course. (b) For a new course.

OcToBER 6, 1922]

An experience with the general intelligence test
in teaching freshmen chemistry. EDpWarD Bartow
and Jacos Cornoc. A comparison of intelligence
ratings as determined by a general intelligence
test given at the beginning of the year with the
final grades received by 948 students in freshmen
chemistry gives a coefficient of correlation of .44
where complete causation would be represented
by unity and no causation by zero. This indi-
cates that intelligence as determined by this test
is a partial but not predominant factor in deter-
mining final grades. The general intelligence test
may be used in evaluating teaching performance
of large numbers of teachers giving instruction
in the same subject; for effecting economy in ad-
ministration by early elimination of students of
hopelessly low capacity; and for comparison of
the mental potentialities of different groups of
students. The general intelligence test does not
afford a dependable basis for accurately fore-
easting a student’s final grade in individual
cases, except for students of extremely low intel-
ligence. ;

The teaching of chemistry in negro private
schools. B. T. Harvey, Jr. This paper pre-
sented some facts and conclusions derived from
an investigation of the teaching of chemistry in
negro private schools by means of personal ob-

servation, answers to a questionnaire and study _

of the catalogs of these institutions. After a
preliminary survey of the scope of negro educa-
tion and its effects, a statement of the aims of
the courses in chemistry was made. Practice and
Tesults in these schools were checked by aims,
finally suggestions were made for help in meeting
difficulties involved in the teaching of chemistry
in negro private schools.

Quantitative experiments in general chemistry.
H. W. MosrELey. In this paper the question was
raised as to whether quantitative experiments
usually assigned to students in general chemistry
laboratory served their purpose; and as a result
of this study a plan was suggested for the assign-
ment of quantitative work to such students in a
way to get results. Data were included.

The student’s laboratory bench and his sup-
plies. W. L. Estaprookr. The purpose of this
paper was to trace the development of the stu-
dent’s laboratory bench during the past twenty-
five years and the corresponding improvement in
the method of handling his supplies. Two new
student’s desks were shown, one of which was a
radical departure from that usually seen in chem-
ical laboratories. The handling of student’s
ehemicals was described by the writer in ScirncE

SCIENCE

399

of May 30, 1919, under the heading ‘‘The Freas
System’? in honor of Thomas B. Freas of Colum-
bia University, who has done more than most
men in America to meet this problem. The ex-
hibit consists of: (1) The chemicals used in one
year of inorganic chemistry at the College of the
City of New York. (2) The chemicals used in
one year of qualitative analysis at the College
of the City of New York. (3) The Fales’ stu-
dent’s bench in inorganie chemistry, borrowed
from Professors Freas and Fales of Columbia
University, with a full equipment of apparatus
and chemicals.

A system of individual reagents for courses in
qualitative analysis. Louis J. CurtmMan. The
author has designed two small wooden kits pro-
vided with shelves and capable of holding all the
reagents, solids and solutions needed in qualita-
tive analysis. These kits are of such dimensions
that they can easily be locked up in the student’s
locker or cupboard. The shelves are specially
constructed to permit the labels on the bottles
to be plainly seen and to allow the bottles to be
easily removed and replaced. Bottles of six dif-
ferent sizes are used depending upon the quantity
of material needed. <A set of solid salts and
compounds, contained in a pasteboard box, is also
provided. From this small supply of chemicals
the student weighs out the quantities needed for
making his solutions. In the Freas system, which
is in use at Columbia University, the student is
provided with all the solutions he needs. In the
author’s method, the student is required to pre-
pare all his solutions. The advantages of this
system are: (1) The student becomes acquainted
with the physical properties of the solid sub-
stances he used. (2) He is required to calculate,
in each case, the quantity of salt needed to pre-
pare a specified volume of a solution of definite
normality. (3) By actually making up the solu-
tions, he becomes familiar with the characteristic
properties of such substances which require spe-
cial treatment. This information he can obtain
by no other method. The system outlined above
has been successfully used at the College of the
City of New York for the past five years. A
paper describing this system in detail will shortly
be published.

The teaching value of the electrochemical series
of metals. R. A. Baxerr. It is recommended
that at the beginning of the course in general
chemistry, each student be required to learn the
names and symbols of the common metals, ar-
ranged in the order of the electrochemical series,
together with the physical properties of the

400

metals as a group. For the remainder of the
course the conventional order is preserved. As
each non-metal is studied, its chemistry is pro-
jected on to this series of metals, with the result
that no special consideration of the metals is re-
quired at the close. This arrangement causes any
student who had studied chemistry before to adopt
such a different point of view that he is fully
occupied in applying the knowledge he already
possesses. The exact order of the electrochemical
series is an aid to the student in interpreting,
correlating and directing his own experimenta-
tion. Use may be made of it in connection with
the heats of formation of the metal oxides, hy-
droxides, nitrates, etc.; the replacements of
metals by each other; the strength of bases, ete.

The schoolmaster and the teacher. E. G. Manin.
The problems of the teacher of chemistry are
briefly discussed and stress is laid upon correct
personality of the teacher as an absolute pre-
requisite to successful teaching of science. Lack
of interest on the part of the student frequently
springs from lack of respect for the sincerity of
the teacher. Science is the truth of nature and
as such it must be respected. Before it sham and
imposture must eventually give way. This con-
viction must be made a part of the student’s
training or he will never possess correct ideals of
his life work.

The possibility of improvement in the contribu-
tions colleges make to industries. EDWARD ELLERY.

Proper methods of conducting undergraduate
research. WiLuiAM A. Noyres. Two purposes
should be constantly in the mind of the teacher
who directs research work of undergraduates.
First, the student should be trained in the use
of chemical literature. He should learn how to
find for himself the results of previous work on
the problem he is studying. Second, he should
be taught to develop personal initiative in attack-
ing a problem. He should never be considered
merely an agent to carry out an experiment which
the teacher wishes to be performed.

The best college course for the chemist. ROBERT
E. Rost. What the industries most desire is a
well balanced education in those who enter their
research laboratories. Chemistry, as it is taught
at present, is sub-divided much too rigidly, and
the several parts are not treated in the proper
perspective. A course is outlined which would
give a general survey of the whole field of chem-
istry during the first year. This would be valu-
able to those specializing in chemistry as well as to
students desiring the course for its cultural value.
The essentials in science and in the correlated
subjects for the four year course are discussed,

SCIENCE

°

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1449

and the content of the courses outlined. The
suggestions call for a totally different treatment
of all our science classes.

The education of the chemist. J. B. GARNER.
The subject is one regarding which there is a
diversity of opinion varying from that of the
dreamy academician to that of the true practical-
ist. Both the unreasonable expectation of the
classical pedant to justify his idea of culture and
the behest of the industrialist to meet immediate
technical demands sacrifice the ultimate welfare
of the chemist in training. Experience has
shown that personality, mentality and profes-
sional training are the essential elements in the
make-up of a chemist. Personality is one of the
most valuable assets of the chemist. Personal
qualities protrude more in concerted research than
in any other human endeavor. Personality is
made up of the qualities of resourcefulness, cre-
ativeness, initiative, pertinacity, cheerfulness,
loyalty, honesty and courtesy. Mentality is the
mental power, or the right kind of brains for
successful issue in matters chemical. Mentality
comprehends consciousness, thought, opinion,
memory, reason, decision, purpose, common sense
and tact. The real character of the chemist is
in his purpose and the strength of his character
is in the decision and firmness of this purpose.
Personality and mentality energize and give direc-
tion to professional training. The test of the
adequacy of professional training is the use of
this training. It must be sufficient when com-
bined with personality and mentality to supply
that which is needed as one’s life program.
Men must be trained by colleges, technical
schools and universities to adapt themselves with
certainty to the new economic conditions. There-
fore, courses of study must be rearranged as to
their content, and curricula must be formulated.
The subject matter of all courses must be such
that contact with real life, actual conditions, and
needs, is made. Edueation is for life and for
service. The general scope of training must be
as extensive, and the time required for its com-
pletion as great, as that for the profession of
medicine. Chemists must be industry builders
and developers of national natural resources. A
proposed outline of courses for the professional
training of the chemist will be offered. As far
as professional training is concerned, the short-
comings of the chemist are largely English,
chemical literature, German, French, quantitative
analyses and general engineering.

CHARLES L. PARSONS,
Secretary

CIENCE

_ - TFOOHOHOHOHEHEHEHEHEe

NrEw SERIES

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00

Vou. LVI, No. 1450 Fray, Ocroser 13, 1922 Since Copies, 15 Ors.

BLAKISTON BOOKS

FOR EARLY PUBLICATION

Palladin-Livingston—PLANT PHYSIOLOGY

A second printing with numerous corrections, additions and improvements.
One new feature is a summary for each chapter in which a succinct but
complete statement of the main features dealt with in each is given. The
text is concise, readable and exceptionally thorough in treatment and with
well chosen citations from the literature of plant physiology. The chemical
aspects have been given greatest emphasis.

2nd printing. 173 illustrations. By Vuaprmir I. Pannapin (University of
Petrograd). Authorized English Edition, Edited by Burron E. Liv-
ineston, Ph.D., Professor of Plant Physiology and Director of Labora-
tory of Plant Physiology, Johns Hopkins University.

Folsom—ENTOMOLOGY 3rd Revised Edition

With Special Reference to Its Ecological Aspects
This edition has been brought up to date by the inclusion of a great deal
of new material and some new illustrations; a new chapter on insect ecology
has also been added.

3rd Edition. Illustrated by plates and text illustrations. By Justus
Watson Fousom, Se.D., (Harvard) Assistant Professor of Entomology,
University of Ihnois.

Galloway—_ZOOLOGY 4th Edition Revised

A Textbook for Universities, Colleges, and Normal Schools

This new edition contains such progress in the science as bears most directly
upon the instruction of beginners. Greater accuracy of details has also
been accomplished.

4th Edition. With 255 Illustrations. By THomas Watton GaLLoway,
Ph.D., Litt. D. Formerly Professor of Zoology, Beloit College, (Wisc.).
With assistance of Paun 8S. Wetcu, Ph.D., Associate Professor of Biology,
University of Michigan.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.
Publishers Philadelphia

(cet AIP,

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

RECENT ISSUES ~
IN GEOLOGY

The Briones Formation of Middle
California, by Parker D. Trask.
Price, 75 cents.

Genesis of the Ores of the Cobalt
District, Ontario, Canada, by Al-
fred R. Whitman. Price, 80

cents.

Geology of the Cuyamaca Region of
California with special reference
to the origin of the nickeliferous

pyrrhotite, by F. S. Hudson.

Price, $1.25.

University of California Press
Berkeley,

California.

BOTANICAL ABSTRACTS FOR $5 THE YEAR
[This Offer Will Not Appear Again]

The price of Botanical Abstracts (12 months
with annual index) to individuals will be re-
duced to $5.00 net, providing 1,000 new, indi-
vidual subscribers are secured. Former sub-
scribers who dropped out before volume 9 are
considered “‘new.”’ This rate applies only to
individuals who are located at a subscribing in-
stitution or who present evidence that theirs is a
bona fide personal subscription.

The price of Botanical Abstracts volume 12
(January to December 1923) to institutions, de-
partments, cffices, libraries, agents, etc., is
$10.00 net.

If you have not been personally solicited,
please enter your order on a 3 x 5 card, ready
for filing, using the following form:

[On 3.x 5 Card]
Name (as used in business)
Address (where to send the journal)

I agree to subscribe for Botanical Abstracts at
$5.00 net, the year, providing 999 others subscribe
and thus make this offer possible.

Receipt of invoice for volume 12 at $5.00 net,
payable on or before January 15, 1923, will be ac-
cepted as notice that the quota has been reached.

My, institution 1s) ee on

Jvamvanmemberio eee Society.

i Please print.

Postage to Canada 40 cents; to other countries 80 cents.

All orders must be in the hands of the Busi-
ness Manager of Botanical Abstracts, College of
Agriculture, Ithaca, New York, U.S.A., on or
before November 1, 1922.

A HISTORY OF INDIAN PHILOSOPHY

By Surendranath Dasgupta, M. A., Ph. D.

Volume I. }

“Hardly can there be anything more valu-
able for the purpose of comparison with
Western treatments of the same matter.’”—
London Times Lit. Suppt. $12.50

Volume II. Forthcoming.

AGE AND AREA
A Study in Geographical Distribution
and Origin of Species.
By J. C. Willis, F.R.S.
With Chapters by Hugo De Vries, H. B.
Guppy, F.R.S., Mrs. E. M. Reid, James Smail.
“All scientists will be indebted in a variety
of directions for this wonderful presentation
of records from almost every part of the
world.” —Aberdeen Free Press. Tll., $5.00
A MANUAL OF SEISMOLOGY
By C. Davison
“Tt provides geological students and work-
ers with a very clear account of the results of
present-day earthquake study.”’—Manchester
Guardian. Illustrated, $7.00

64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York
Prairie Avenue and 25th Street, Chicago
Huntington Chambers, Copley Sq., Boston

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS, ENGLAND
Announces the Following NEW SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

For Sale by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, American Agents

A TREATISE ON THE ANALYSIS OF
SPECTRA
By W. M. Hicks, F.R.S.

“Professor Hick’s object is to present in
a more or less connected whole the knowl-
edge already gained in this difficult depart-
ment.”’—London Times Lit. Suppt. Ul., $11.00

OCORCANIC EVOLUTION
Outstanding Difficulties and Possible
Explanations.
By Major Leonard Darwin

“Tt treats, with an independent judgment
and careful, suggestive thought, points, such
as, for instance, the existence of a system of
mutations due to imperfect segregation.”—
Scotsman. $1.60
MODERN ELECTRICAL THEORY

Supplementary Chapters
Chapter XV—Series Spectra.
By Norman Robert Campbell, Sc.D.

“Tt deals with Solar Spectra, and is based
on Bohr’s theory, doubtless the most import-
ant advance in pure physics since 1913.’—
English Mechanic. Illustrated, $3.50

609 Mission Street, San Francisco
330 South Harwood Street, Dallas
17 Houston Street, Atlanta

SCIE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

OctosER 13, 1922

Vou. LVI No. 1450

CONTENTS
The British Association for the Advancement
of Science:
The Theory of Numbers: Prorrssor G. H.

PEVARD Yq eset eee er ta 401
Whither? Dr. Marvin FISCHER.........0......------ 405
Alexander Smith: Prorrssor ALAN W. OC.

AN BON AIn GH SS a Ie tN a ee AS Re 409
Scientific Hvents:

The Cost of Research Work; Peking Union

Medical College; Legal Restrictions on

Types of Babcock Glassware; The Confer-

ence on Highways; The American Psycho-

WOGLCAU PASSO CUCLLOT ies. steele steer Leno 409
Scientific Notes and News.......-.--.- . 413
University and Education Notes 416
Discussion and Correspondence:

The Paleopathology of the Parasuchians:

Dr. Roy L. Moopm. Measurement of

Human Crania: PRoFessor RoLanp B.

Dixon. Bibliography and Research: K. C.

Waker. An Unusual Solitaire Game:

Prorressor L. E. Dickson. Science in Fic-

tion: DR. EDWIN HE. SLOSSON.....--.....22...----- 417
Quotations:

Lhe Work of General Gorgas..........-......-.---- 419
Scientific Books:

Osgood and Graustein’s Plane and Solid

Analytic Geometry: Prormssor G. A. MiL-

LAIGR Wyecscasneasatecestne sues there wa tan rer Reet eto 420
Special Articles:

Water Culture Experimentation: PRoressor

W. I. Gericke. The Sperms of Vallisneria:

PROFESSOR RoBERT B. WYDIOD............0.0.0----- 421
The American Mathematical Society: Pro-

rrssor R. G. D. RICHARDSON.........0200.0..2..... 423

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
TSVPAR SON Stet heer ty Simon nine Gea 424

THE THEORY OF NUMBERS!

THERE is probably less difference between the
methods of a physicist and a mathematician
than is generally supposed. The most striking
among them seems to me to be this, that the
mathematician is in much more direct contact
with reality. This may perhaps seem to you a
paradox, since it is the physicist who deals with
the subject-matter to which the epithet “real’’
is commonly applied. But a very little reflec-
tion will show that the “reality” of the phys-
icist, whatever it may be (and it is extraor-
dinarily diffieult to say), has few or none of the
attributes which common-sense instinctively
marks as real. A chair may be a collection of
whirling atoms, or an idea in the mind of God.
It is not my business to suggest that one ac-
count of it is obviously more plausible than
the other. Whatever the merits of either of
them may be, neither draws its inspiration from
the suggestions of common-sense.

Neither the philosophers, nor the physicists
themselves, have ever put forward any very
convincing account of what physical reality is,
or of how the physicist passes, from the con-
fused mass of fact or sensation with which he
starts, to the construction of the objects which
he classifies as real. We can not be said, there-
fore, to know what the subject-matter of
physics is; but this need not prevent us from
understanding the task which a physicist is
trying to perform. That, clearly, is to corre-
late the incoherent body of facts confronting
him with some definite and orderly scheme of
abstract relations, the kind of scheme, in short,
which he can borrow only from mathematics.

A mathematician, on the other hand, for-
tunately for him, is not concerned with this

1 From the address of the president of the Sec-
tion of Mathematics and Physies, given at the
Hull meeting of the British Association for the
Advancement of Science.

402

physical reality-at all. It is impossible to
prove, by mathematical reasoning, any propo-
sition whatsoever concerning the physical
world, and only a mathematical crank would
be likely now to imagine it his function to do
so. There is plainly one way only of ascer-
taining the facts of experience, and that is by
observation. It is not the business of a mathe-
matician to suggest one view of the universe
or another, but merely to supply the physicists
with a collection of abstract schemes, which it
is for them to select from, and to adopt or dis-
card at their pleasure.

The most obvious example is to be found in
the science of geometry. Mathematicians have
constructed a very large number of different
systems of geometry, Euclhdean or non-
Euclidean, of one, two, three, or any number of
dimensions. All these systems are of complete
and equal validity. They embody the results
of mathematicians’ observations of their reality,
a reality far more intense and far more rigid
than the dubious and elusive reality of physics.
The old-fashioned geometry of Euclid, the en-
tertaining seven-point geometry of Veblen, the
space-times of Minkowski and Einstein, are all
absolutely and equally real. When a mathe-
matician has constructed, or, to be more accu-
rate, when he has observed them, his profes-
sional interest in the matter ends. It may be
the seven-point geometry that fits the facts the
best, for anything that mathematicians have to
say. There may be three dimensions in this
room and five next door. As a professional
mathematician, I have no idea; I can only ask
some competent physicist to instruct me in
the facts. ‘

The function of a mathematician, then, is
simply to observe the facts about his own intri-
cate system of reality, that astonishingly beau-
tiful complex of logical relations which forms
the subject-matter of his science, as if he were
an explorer looking at a distant range of
mountains, and to record the results of his ob-
servations in a series of maps, each of which is
a branch of pure mathematics. Many of these
maps have been completed, while in others, and
these, naturally, are the most interesting, there
are vast uncharted regions. Some, it seems,
have some relevance to the structure of the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

physical world, while others have no such tan-
gible application. Among them there is per-
haps none quite so fascinating, with quite the
same astonishing contrasts of sharp outline and
mysterious shade, as that which constitutes the
theory of numbers.

The number system of arithmetic is, as we
know too well, not without its applications to
the sensible world. The currency systems of
Europe, for example, conform to it approxi-
mately; west of the Vistula, two and two make
something approaching four. The practical
applications of arithmetic, however, are tedious
beyond words. One must probe a little deeper
into the subject if one wishes to interest the
ordinary man, whose taste in such matters is
astonishingly correct, and who turns with joy
from the routine of common life to anything
strange and odd, like the fourth dimension, or
imaginary time, or the theory of the represen-
tation of integers by sums of squares or cubes.

It is impossible for me to give you, in the
time at my command, any general account of
the problems of the theory of numbers, or of
the progress that has been made towards their
solution even during the last twenty years. I
must adopt a much simpler method. I will
merely state to you, with a few words of com-
ment, three or four isolated questions, selected
in a haphazard way. They are seemingly
simple questions, and it is not necessary to be
anything of a mathematician to understand
them; and I have chosen them for no better
reason than that I happen to be interested in
them myself. There is no one of them to which
I know the answer, nor, so far as‘I know, does
any mathematician in the world; and there is
no one of them, with one exception which I
have included deliberately, the answer to which
any one of us would not make almost any
sacrifice to know.

1. When is a number the sum of two cubes,
and what is the number of its representations?
This is my first question, and first of all I will
elucidate it by some examples. The numbers
2=1°-+ 1° and 9 = 23 + 1° are sums of two
cubes, while 3 and 4 are not: it is exceptional
for a number to be of this particular form.
The number of cubes up to 1,000,000 is 100,
and the number of numbers, up to this limit

OcToBER 18, 1922]

and of the form required, can not exceed
10,000, one hundredth of the whole. The den-
sity of the distribution of such numbers tends
to zero as the numbers tend to infinity. Is
there, I am asking, any simple criterion by
which such numbers ean be distinguished?

Again, 2 and 9 are sums of two cubes, and
can be expressed in this form in one way only.
There are numbers so expressible in a variety
of different ways. The least such number is
1729, which is 12° + 1° and also 10° + 93%. It
is more difficult to find a number with three
representations; the least such number is
1/75;959\000) = 5603) -— 703) = 95523) 4- 198%) =
525% + 315%. One number at any rate is
known with fowr representations, namely,
19 X 3635103 (a number of 18 digits), but I
am not prepared to assert that it is the least.
No number has been calculated, so far as I
know, with more than four, but theory, run-
ning ahead of computation, shows that numbers
exist with five representations, or six, or any
number.

A distinguished physicist has argued that the
possible number of isotopes of an element is
probably limited because, among the ninety or
so elements at present under observation, there
is none which has more isotopes than six. I
dare not criticise a physicist in his own field;
but the figures I have quoted may suggest to
you that an arithmetical generalization, based
on a corresponding volume of evidence, would
be more than a little rash.

There are similar questions, of course, for
squares, but the answers to these were found
long ago by Euler and by Gauss, and belong
to the classical mathematics. Suppose, for
simplicity of statement, that the number in
question is prime. Then, if it is of the form
4m + 1, it is a sum of squares, and in one
way only, while if it is of the form 4m + 3 it is
not so expressible; and this simple rule may
readily be generalized so as to apply to num-
bers of any form. But there is no similar solu-
tion for our actual problem, nor, I need scarce-
ly say, for the analogous problems for fourth,
fifth or higher powers. The smallest number
known to be expressible in two ways by two
biquadrates is 635318657 = 158* + 59* =
134* + 1334; and I do not believe that any

SCIENCE

403

number is known expressible in three. Nor, to
my knowledge, has the bare existence of such
a number yet been proved. When we come to
fifth powers, nothing is known at all. The
field for future research is unlimited and prac-
tically untrodden.

2. I pass to another question, again about
cubes, but of a somewhat different kind. Is
every large number (every number, that is to
say, from a definite point onwards) the sum of
five cubes? This is another exceptionally dif-
ficult problem. It is known that every number,
without exception, is the sum of nine cubes ;
two numbers, 23 (which is 2.23 + 7.1%) and
239, actually require so many. It seems that
there are just fifteen numbers, the largest being
454, which need eight, and 121 numbers, the
largest being 8042, which need seven; and the
evidence suggests forcibly that the six-eube
numbers also ultimately disappear. In a lee-
ture which I delivered on this subject at Ox-
ford I stated, on the authority of Dr. Ruckle,
that there were two numbers, in the immediate
neighborhood of 1,000,000, which could not be
resolved into fewer eubes than six; but Dr.
A. E. Western has refuted this assertion by
resolving each of them into five, and is of
opinion, I believe, that the six-cube numbers
have disappeared entirely considerably before
this point. It is conceivable that the five-eube
numbers also disappear, but this, if it be so, is
probably in depths where computation is help-
less. The four-cube numbers must certainly
persist for ever, for it is impossible that a
number 9n +- 4 or 9n + 5 should be the sum
of three.

I need scarcely add that there is a similar
problem for every higher power. For fourth
powers the critical number is 16. There is no
case, except the simple case of squares, in
which the solution is in any sense complete.
About the squares there is no mystery; every
number is the sum of four squares, and there
are infinitely many numbers which can not be
expressed by fewer.

3. I will next raise the question whether the
I said that I would
include one ‘question which does not interest
me particularly; and I should like to explain
to you the kind of reasons which damp down

number 2*8* — 1 is prime.

404

my interest in this one. I do not know the
answer, and I do not care greatly what it is.

The problem belongs to the theory of the so-
called “perfect”? numbers, which has exercised
mathematicians since the times of the Greeks.
A number is perfect if, like 6 or 28, it is the
sum of all its divisors, unity ineluded. Huelid
proved that the number 2”(27+1 — 1) is per-
fect if the second factor is prime; and Huler,
2,000 years later, that all even perfect numbers
are of Euclid’s form. It is still unknown
whether a perfect number can be odd.

It would obviously be most interesting to
know generally in what circumstances a num-
ber 2” — 1 is prime. It is plaim that this can
be so only if » itself is prime, as otherwise the
number has obvious factors; and the 137 of my
question happens to be the least value of » for
which the answer is still in doubt. You may
perhaps be surprised that a question appar-
ently so fascinating should fail to arouse me
more.

It was asserted by Mersenne in 1644 that the
only values of , up to 257, for which 2” — 1
is prime are 2, 3, 5, 7, 13, 17,19, 31, 67, 127,
257; and an enormous amount of labor has
been expended on attempts to verify this asser-
tion. There are no simple general tests by
which the primality of a number chosen at ran-
dom can be determined, and the amount of
computation required in any particular case
may be appalling. It has, however, been
imagined that Mersenne perhaps knew some-
thing which later mathematicians have failed
to rediscover.
but there is no doubt that, so long as the pos-
sibility remained, arithmeticians were justified
in their determination to ascertain the facts at
all costs. “The riddle as to how Mersenne’s
numbers were discovered remains unsolved,”
wrote Mr. Rouse Ball in 1891. Mersenne, he
observes, was a good mathematician, but not
an Euler or a Gauss, and he inclines to at-
tribute the discovery to the exceptional genius
of Fermat, the only mathematician of the age
whom any one could suspect of being hundreds
of years ahead of his time.”

These speculations appear extremely fanciful
now, for the bubble has at last been pricked.
It seems now that Mersenne’s assertion, so far

SCIENCE

The idea is a little fantastic,

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

from hiding unplumbed depths of mathemat-
ical profundity, was a conjecture based on
inadequate empirical evidence, and a some-
what unhappy one at that. It is. now
known that there are at least four num-
bers about which Mersenne is definitely
wrong; he should have included at any rate 61,
89 and 107, and he should have left out 67.
The mistake as regards 61 and 67 was discoy-
ered so long ago as 1886, but could be ex-
plained with some plausibility, so long as it
stood alone, as a merely clemecal error. But
when Mr. R. E. Powers, in 1911 and 1914,
proved that Mersenne was also wrong about
89 and 107, this line of defence collapsed, and
it ceased to be possible to take Mersenne’s
assertion seriously.

The fact may be summed up as follows.
Mersenne makes fifty-five assertions, for the
fifty-five primes from 2 to 257. Of these as-
sertions forty are true, four false, and eleven
still doubtful. Not a bad result, you may
think; but there is more to be said. Of the
forty correct assertions many, half at least, are
trivial, either because the numbers in question
are comparatively small, or because they pos-
sess quite small and easily detected divisors.
The test cases are those in which the numbers
are prime, or Mersenne asserts that they are
so; there are only four of these cases which are
difficult and in which the truth is known; and
in these Mersenne is wrong in every case but
one.

It seems to me, then, that we must regard
Mersenne’s assertion as exploded; and for my
part it interests me no longer. If he is wrong
about 89 and 107, I do not care greatly whether
he is wrong about 137 as well, and I should
regard the computations necessary to decide as
very largely wasted. There are so many much
more profitable caleulations which a computer
could undertake.

I hope that you will not infer that I regard
the problem of perfect numbers as uninterest-
ing in itself; that would be very far from the
truth. There are at least two intensely inter-
esting problems. The first is the old problem,
which so many mathematicians have failed to
solve, whether a perfect number can be odd.
The second is whether the number of perfect

OctoBER 13, 1922]

numbers is infinite or not. If we assume that
all perfect numbers are even, we can state this
problem in a still more arresting form. Are
there infinitely many primes of the form
2” — 1? TI find it difficult to imagine a prob-
lem more fascinatiing or more intricate than
that. It is plain, though, that this is a ques-
tion which computation can never decide, and
it is very unlikely that it can ever give us any
data of serious value.....

There is a great deal of mathematics the
purport of which is quite impossible for any
amateur to grasp, and which, however beautiful
and important it may be, must always remain
the possession of a marrow circle of experts.
It is the peculiarity of the theory of numbers
that much of it could be published broadeast,
and would win new readers for the Daily Mail.
The positive integers do not lie, like the logical
foundations of mathematics, in the scarcely
visible distance, nor in the uncomfortably tan-
gled foreground, like the immediate data of the
physical world, but at a decent middle dis-
tance, where the outlines are clear and yet some
element of mystery remains. There is no one
so blind that he does not see them, and no one
so shanp-sighted that his vision does not fail;
they stand there a continual and inevitable
challenge to the curiosity of every healthy
mind. I have merely directed your attention
for a moment to a few of the less immediately
conspicuous features of the landscape, in the
hope that I may sharpen your curiosity a little,
and that some may feel tempted to walk a
little nearer and take a closer view.

G. H. Harpy

WHITHER?!
it

WHETHER one enters a group of socially
minded thinkers or a group of doctors in pri-
vate conference or in public assembly, one soon
becomes conscious of a restlessness regarding
the profession of medicine. What does one
think of membership in the American “Royal”
College of Surgeons or Physicians, of medicine
practiced under the egis of a “group,” of
higher education for nurses, of chiropractors,

1Remarks made at the banquet of the Ohio
State Medical Association meeting, May 3, 1922.

SCIENCE

405

of Christian Sciencers, of medical societies
going to the public with their wares? Is the
patient still the doctor’s, or does he belong to
a hospital? Should “industrial” medicine be
developed? Should hospitals be standardized?
Should the medical educational requirements of
six years be lengthened to seven or eight or
nine? Where ought one to stand on “state”
medicine; should medicine have a portfolio in
the cabinet; should clinical teachers be forbid-
den private practice? Should hospitals be
open only to staffs or to all licentiates in
medicine?

Are the answers to these problems really
hard to find?

The medical profession has been caught in
the swirl of the times. In the press of the mo-
ment it has forgotten its origins. Lost sight of
are the circumstances, the principles and the
ideas which in all times have made medicine
what it is. Cause and effect are being mixed
up. The present day shows too much of the
form and too litile of the spirit of that which
has given the doctor his place and power.

II

It is no new discovery that the tyranny of a
crowd is no better than the tyranny of an
individual and that both lead to death. In
spite of our ery that we are democratic we are
almost exactly the reverse. We certainly dress
alike; it has been said that we look alike; the
corollary is that we think alike. Tersely put,
we work in erowds and think in gangs and
when applied to medicine we forget why any-
thing smacking of such forms has prospered.

A case in point is offered by ‘the diagnostie
and operating “groups” in medicine which to-
day infest us. Blinded by the success of one
or two prototypes, medical men have concluded
that their form accounts for their popularity.
The fact is that none such has prospered—
save as any business which is not bankrupt
may be said to be prospering—except as the
old substance of medical practice has been kept
alive in the group by one or two dominating
personalities. Without such vital souls there
is left only a paper organization—all, it is safe
to predict, that will survive when the present
day medical or surgical leaders of these groups
are gone.

406

A second case is offered by the specialists.
Men formerly were driven into specialisms
through professional or popular demand. A
doctor peculiarly skillful of hand or mind had
his day filled for him by those insistent that he
do continuously the thing in which he excelled.
The present day specialist is a self-anointed
soul. He knows that to have a large view in
medicine means hard work and broken hours;
he sees an “opening” for a specialist, spends
six weeks learning the necessary tricks and
succumbs to the easiest way. It will -be an-
swered that specialists are needed to do the
complicated things of blood analysis, bacteri-
ological study and X-ray investigation. The
truth is that these newer things have not be-
come additions, as they should be, to the older
and established methods of diagnosis and treat-
ment but lazy-man substitutes for them—and
poor ones. In the main, these “scientific”
methods have not decreased error in diagnosis
or broadened treatment. Chemical methods of
blood analysis have not enlarged our knowl-
edge of kidney disease; failures to obtain posi-
tive bacteriological findings have permitted
patients to go without a diagnosis where an
older generation of doctors would have judged
correctly the nature of the disease from its
signs and symptoms; while the ease of looking
through a patient with X-rays has dulled the
touch, the sight, the hearing and the judgment
which made great our predecessors.

It is the common thing for our patients to
be sent to a laboratory man, an X-ray special-
ist, a nose and throat surgeon, a skin doctor
and a half dozen different types of special
surgeons. It has even been proposed that we
need a specialist to determine what medicine
shall be given. But those engaged in these
types of practice are beginning to realize its
dangers. The dangers are to be met with
another specialist—one who is to gather to-
gether the findings of all the doctors and tell
the patient what he came a-seeking. He is to
be known as an integrator. I sent an article
proposing ‘this scheme to a friend of mine with
the marginal note that our colleagues were be-
ginning to look for doctors once more.

I know a place where one can serve himself
to a diagnosis as one serves himself to a meal

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

in a eafeteria. One starts with a numbered
card and buys himself at different counters
and from different men a general examination,
an investigation of the throat, an X-ray plate
of the gall bladder, a dental overhauling, a
surgical operation and a plaster cast for the
foot. Hach item carries its price which is
punched on the ticket. What the scheme takes
no account of is that the patient does not care
whether he has Hirschsprung’s disease, ery-
thema nodosum or pseudo-hypertrophie mus-
cular atrophy. What he is after is a plain
statement of what is the matter with him, and
whether he can be “eured’”’ or not; also there
is wanted a little appreciation of his state of
mind and some understanding of the economic
hardships of his family in the interim of being

ill. The food counters do not carry these
dishes. ;
It is a sin against the Holy Ghost to say

that the profession is overorganized, but such
it is. Organization springs from the desire of
minorities to live in spite of majorities. As
such, organizations give life, shelter and fel-
lowship to the threatened and despised of the
world. Their purposes accomplished, they tend
toward reaction so that rarely have ‘they merit
after birth, when their powers of leadership
because of rightness of cause, are supplanted
by the powers of organization to impress their
will. What looks like strength is merely a
cramp—medicaily expressed, the cramp of
death. Once “suecessful,’ Chapman’s charge
is correct: ‘All association, business or social,
literary or artistic, religious or scientific, is
opposed to any disrupting idea.” How much
in medicine the individual cowers to-day in the
shadows of this mass mediocrity is innocently
portrayed in a recent volume on civilization in
the United States. Of thirty men who write
freely of our polities, art and religion the one
who speaks for medicine must “for obvious
reasons” remain anonymous.

This is just a reversed way of saying that
the present day doctor has saerified his indi-
viduality—the thing through which alone he
has gained his publie standing historically or
in the present. Never before has he affected a
community through mass action, and it is safe
to predict that through such he never—last-

Octosrr 13, 1922]

ingly—will. He enters the publie’s life
through an individual’s need of him; and in
the crises of life—birth, fear, despair and
death. Disease may be objective but its effects
are all subjective. Through his understanding
of the individual in these circumstances has
come the reward of individual trust; and it is
this confidence multiplied which constitutes the
public esteem in which tke doctor lives. To
think that such can be built up through massed
professional activity is idle.

When will we get a secretary of medicine in
the cabinet? Never through a lobby but when
someone politically powerful transposes the
personal faith he feels in his body physician
into political action. We may get him any
day that an occupant of the White House
trusts adequately the mind and heart of his
doctor. This is the manner of men. Not so
long ago another follower of the “regular”
school asked me why one of our intelligent citi-
zens threw his whole energies into the cause of
homeopatny. I ventured the easy answer that
his family doctor was homeopathist, and more
—that as a man this doctor was no mean per-
sonality.

Tit

If the medical profession has problems it is
because it has either voluntarily relinquished
what it should have held or done badly what
others have done better. Hach of these head-
ings has subheadings of a legitimate and an
illegitimate type. The picture of my old doc-
tor friend jogging along in his buggy in the
hours after midnight, responsive to a charity
call registered through a telephone which he
had himself installed in the home of his patient
is all too rare. I inquired why he had not sent
his younger colleague. He answered that he
could not ask an assistant to rise in the night
and work without material recompense. ‘The
young doctors do not nowadays follow the sick
poor of our hospitals to their homes. The
social service workers do this and the human
aspects of the problems of disease are to-day
more commonly touched by the educated nurse
than by medicine’s new generation. But if
these things be so, is it any wonder that the
sum total of patients which constitutes our
public is becoming increasingly deaf to sugges-

SCIENCE

407

tions which spring from the medical profes-
sion and increasingly responsive to those
emanating from social uplifters or economic
and political reformers?

I venture to add that we do not know
enough. For more than a decade now the non-
medical psychologists have been able to tell us
more of the rank of our mental defectives than
we ourselves knew; the graduates of domestic
science schools have known more of food values
than ninety-nine of a hundred doctors; and
laboratory technicians in X-ray work and the
simplest biochemical tests have become the
interpreters to the profession of the things
which it should know itself. If the medical
man still feels that he is set apart to teach
these things, he must be securer in his knowl-
edge of the fundamentals.

From an illegitimate side, the doctor’s calling
has been placed in parallel with the caricatures
and fragments of medical thought represented
in Christian Science, osteopathy and chiro-
practice. There has been much scramble to
keep these things in their proper places through
the political seesawing of legislative groups
inclined to listen at one time to the doctors and
at another to the toredoes. The answer should
be simple. Why does the doctor ever acknowl-
edge these as competitors? Have they a better
knowledge of the principles of medicine and
surgery? Or need there be envy that chicane
so often pays better than honesty? It will be
argued that the public does not know enough
and that it must be protected. This has been
the ery of autocrats since the stork ruled the
frogs. What is at stake is the question of our
fundamental faith in democracy. In brutal
terms, our average fourteen-year-old intelli-
gence is asked to decide whether it will learn
or die. For myself, I have little faith in the
moral or mental merits of a people which in
law buttress the one with the virtue of jails
and the other by a superimposed intelligence.
The superiority of a people is to be measured
iby its ability to withstand temptation and not
by the number of its prohibitory laws which
makes a going-wrong impossible; nor is its
superiority proclaimed by an absence of quack
solutions but by its clearness of intellect which
permits it to distinguish these from better ones.

408

Why the forcing of more health laws upon an
unwilling humanity? Those who do not believe
in vaccination, antitoxins and the purification
of water and food supplies might, for a change,
be permitted to die. If our Christianity needs
to be invoked let us consider St. Luke. As
physician and teacher he preached that “Now
is salvation come nigh unto you.” But with
the truth uttered he left his audiences to make
the final choice.

The medical profession will increase or lose
its public power only as the collective expres-
sion of the people’s faith in the individual
doctors who touch them. To breed such faith
the doctor must get again his old courage and
cease to be the pussyfooter of our present day.
What is wanted is not a strutting vanity, com-
mon enough, but a consciousness in the doctor
of where he came from and where he is going.
To do this he needs to learn again that he is a
judge and obligated as such to get at evidence
first hand. The profession of medicine is an
openhanded one whose discoveries, practice and
points of view are free and obtainable for the
asking. Let the medical man then choose well
whom he will visit and learn from. Let him
discover what men actually do and not what
others ‘tell him they do. This holds true also
fox the evidence which he gathers from the
printed page. In the hustle of our modern
life the medical man has here fallen into the
group of the common. He does not read orig-
inals any more and hardly reviews. The thing
bas become so attenuated that in his journals
and text-books he is literally consuming
reviews of reviews of reviews. As well may a
man think to understand the psychology of
sheep because he feeds on lamb stew.

The fundamental situation will not be
changed in the space of a night. New view-
points and idealism grow lbest in young soil.
Whence our’ interest in the education of the
new doctor. But medical education like all
so-called university education has fallen into
bad ways. There have been carried into it the
false ideals of the kindergarten and grammar
school. Education is conceived of, too much,
as something that may be bought for and added
to a son. And the present day university
course does cost only four years and four

SCIENCE

to the fathers.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

thousand dollars of anybody’s money. This
idea must change. If there is a fundamental
law under which we live it is that of Lamarck.
Not through environment but through the de-
gree of reaction on our part to that environ-
ment do we develop or atrophy.

But what is there in modern university edu-
cation which develops the senses to observa-
tion, the mind to logic and the soul to under-
standing? The medical student is to-day lec-
tured into coma—but the skill we are seeking
can be acquired only by doing. Whence will
come the man and the institution to teach again
by the apprentice system? When will we see
again, working students emulating masters?

What is so badly started in the universities
and medical schools continues in the subsequent
professional life. There is an eternal clamor
for positions on hospital staffs, on boards of
control, on faculties of medicine. As in polit-
ical parties, groups of doctors are insiders or
outsiders. What does it all matter and when
will it be learned again that only the man
counts and not the circumstance? Staff jobs,
faculty places and positions of power are the
husks of corn. Men collect jobs lke political
badges, recognizing in all too few instances
that they are nothing but opportunities for
work—and who uses them?

A doctor friend told me recently that he felt
cramped in a hospital which housed only eight
hundred beds. But Boerhaave changed all
European medicine with but twelve; Corrigan
rewrote the chapter on heart disease with but
six and Kiilz whose work fills one third of all
the tomes on diabetes had just two patients.
Could ‘any practitioner have less?

IY,

Our modern medicine is tending in two direc-
tions, the one leading toward the ideals of the
five-and-ten-cent store and administrative mad-
ness. This group talks of “selling” its ideas
to the pubhe. The other is recognizing that
the collective skill and power and position of
the medical group is only a composite of the
piled-together abilities of the individual doctor
and the reaction evoked from the individual
patient. Our time represents a call to return
The world is seeking, as of old,

OcToBER 13, 1922]

doctors with a kindliness, a tolerance and large
understanding, the skill of hand, the skill of
mind and the resourcefulness of a past genera-
tion. Where are the successors of van Swieten,
John Hunter and Benjamin Rush or, in more
modern terms, of Neusser, Osler and Billings?
The Greek world sank as it grew in democratic
principle—not in the abstract principle of
democracy but in the concrete expression of it
which substituted for its earlier rulers, pro-
ficient in ithe arts and sciences, the ever
increasing number of non-productive Athenian
traders. Is the efficiency of modern medical
practice riding to a similar fall? Let us be
honest with ourselves. If medicine fails it can
not be ascribed to our stars, for our ‘time, as all
ages before it, in the hour of sickness and death
cries as did Jeremiah: “Is there no balm in
Gilead; is there no physician there?”
Martin FIscHer
CoLLEGE OF MEDICINE,
UNIVERSITY OF CINCINNATI

ALEXANDER SMITH

From Edinburgh, Scotland, his birthplace,
comes the news of the death of Professor Alex-
ander Smith, lately head of the chemistry
department at Columbia University. While
this termination of the long and insidious
illmess which clouded his latter days was not
unexpected, his loss is a heavy one for chem-
istry.

His circle of influence was perhaps widest
as a text-book writer. Someone has remarked
that a pre-eminent elementary text-book in any
science appears but once in a generation. In
his generation, Alexander Smith’s elementary
text-books have been the pre-eminent ones in
this country, and, in their various foreign
translations, have become well known abroad.
When Smith was president of the American
Chemical Society in 1911, an after-dinner
speaker referred in his remarks to Smith’s clear
and sparkling eye, which, as those who knew
him will recollect, was a very conspicuous and
characteristic feature of his. Now, the same
two epithets, clear and sparkling, might very
properly be applied to his text-books in part
explanation of their unrivaled position in the
text-book field.

SCIENCE

409

Smith’s teaching work in this country was
begun at Wabash College, whence, in 1894, he
went to Chicago, at which place his teaching
methods were chiefly developed. He was
intensely active here also in administrative
work both within, and, as dean of ‘the junior
college of science, beyond his own department;
but had still abundant energy in reserve to
continue investigative work. The researches
on sulfur and on vapor pressures, for which,
in 1912, he was awarded the Keith Prize by
the Royal Society of Edinburgh, will recur to
the minds of most chemists. In 1911 he mi-
grated ito Columbia University as head of the
department of chemistry, which he proceeded
to reorganize very fundamentally, energizing
progress with his overflowing vitality until
forced by illness to desist.

Truly, his spark was a brilliant one, but all
too short-lived.

Aan W. C. Menzizs

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
THE COST OF RESEARCH WORK

THe report of the British Scientifie and
Industrial Research Department for the year
which ended on July 31 last has been published.
According to an abstract in the London Times,
it is divided into two sections, the first, which
is signed by Lord Balfour, being the report of
the committee of the Privy Council for Scien-
tific and Industrial Research, and the second,
signed by the administrative chairman, Sir
William §. McCormick, that of the Advisory
Council.

The first section is largely concerned with
financial detail. The total expenditure of the
department during the financial year was
£525,584, made up of £273,193 from the Ex-
chequer, £65,358 interest on the capital fund of
one million for the formation of research asso-
ciations, £86,355 from the same fund, and
£100,677 from fees for tests and special inves-
tigations earried out for outside bodies, from
the contributions of the shipbuilding industry
for research in the Froude tank, and from re-
payments by the fighting services for research
undertaken directly for them. Dedueting the
last item and also the grants from the million
capital fund, the actual net expenditure of the

410

department from public funds amounted to
£338,552, against £427,432 in the previous year.

For the current year this expenditure is esti-
mated at £342,641—nearly £85,000 less than in
1920-21, though about £40,000 of the reduction
is accounted for by the government decision
that research work undertaken directly for the
fighting services at the National Physical Lab-
oratory shall be a charge on the votes of those
departments and not on the research depart-
ment’s vote.

While the council deplore the necessity for
this reduction of expenditure, with the conse-
quent slowing down of the research program,
they realize that the check is less injurious now
than if it had come at a later stage, because a
steady policy in the matter of research is more
conducive to success than the provision of
larger sums of money without the assurance of
their continuance. They refer with special sat-
isfaction to the report of the Geddes committee,
which stated: “We are of opinion that the
activities of this department have been minute-
ly examined with a view to obtaining a reduc-
tion of expenditure, and we are unable to rec-
ommend any further reduction beyond what
has been effected.”

The second section of the report also deals
with the question of expenditure, and its intro-
duction contains short notes by the Advisory
Council on each of the activities of the depart-
ment, intended to show the necessity for their
continuance. It goes on to discuss the present
position and future prospects of the research
associations connected with the department. Of
these, twenty-four have now received licenses
from the Board of Trade, and twenty-two are
in active operation. In addition, three other
industries have the possibility of forming such
organizations under immediate consideration,
and preliminary negotiations are taking place
with several others. Several examples are given
of the economies and improvements in practice
that have resulted from the work of these asso-
ciations.

The report proceeds to describe the work
that has been done for national purposes, in-
cluding the work of the coordinating research
boards, the research undertaken in the various
research institutions belonging to the depart-
ment, and certain investigations undertaken for

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

the department elsewhere. There is also a
brief account of the development of research
for other parts of the empire, reference being
made to the Empire Cotton Growing Corpora-
tion, the Colonial Research Committee, and the
West Indian Agricultural College, for the last
of which temporary buildings and laboratories
are being prepared in Trinidad.

Steady progress is reported in the direction
of closer cooperation between the scientific
work of the various government departments,
represented on the coordination boards, and an
increasing tendency is noted on the part of the
service departments to enlist the cooperation of
outside bodies and to arrange for the open pub-
lication of the results of their work, when these
are of general scientific and industrial impor-
tance.

A general survey follows of the work of vari-
ous institutions under the direct control of the
department, including the National Physical
Laboratory, the Geological Survey, the Fuel
Researeh Board, the Deep and Hot Mines Re-
search Committee, the Building Research Com-
mittee, the Food Investigation Board, and the
Forest Products Research Board.

The last part of the report deals with certain
independent institutions and specific researches
which have been aided by the department, and
with the grants made to individual research
workers and students. As regards the latter,
544 applications for grants were considered,
against 333 in the preceding year, and 280
awards were made, against 245. The bulk of
the applications for the academic year 1922-23
have been received, and already it is clear that
they will at least equal in number those received
last year. The expenditure proposed under
this head for 1922-23 is £50,000, against an
estimate of £47,000 for the year ending on the
thirtieth of September.

PEKING UNION MEDICAL COLLEGE

THE year 1921, the seventh of the work of
the China Medical Board of the Rockefeller
Foundation, was marked by the completion of
the main buildings of the Peking Union Med-
ical College, the only institution for which the
China Medical Board has thus far assumed
complete financial responsibility.

It is hoped, according to the report of Dr.

OctToBER 13, 1922]

Roger S. Greene, the director, that it may serve
as a model for other medical schools, not in the
sense that it necessarily represents the ideal in
all matters of organization and construction,
nor that it is as yet complete in every respect
as a few of the largest institutions in other
countries may be said to be complete, but that
it presents, in China, a demonstration more
nearly adequate than any that has preceded it,
of the essential elements of a modern medical
school.

The college seeks to point the way by which
the future system of Chinese medical educa-
tion may be adapted as well as possible to the
actual conditions in the country. If the hopes
of its founders are realized, it will graduate a
select group of leaders in medical education, in
research, and in public health administration,
and a larger number of useful practitioners of
medicine and surgery.

The attempt to harmonize the exterior of the
college buildings with the great architectural
monuments of Peking may be regarded as
typifying the hope that the Peking Union Med-
ical College itself may in time become a true
Chinese institution, and that through it Chinese
scientists may succeed in adapting western med-
ical science to the needs of their own country
more effectively than foreigners can ever hope
to do.

It is obvious that foreigners can play only
a very limited part so far as giving actual med-
ical service is concerned; while foreign-trained
Chinese doctors and nurses, though they can
be very useful in the initial stages, will always
be few in number and at some disadvantage be-
cause the schools they have attended have not
sought to equip them for meeting the special
conditions, whether of climate or of social and
economic¢ organization, which prevail in China.
Therefore the establishment of an institution to
provide the requisite training on local soil was
logically the first step in the program of the
China Medical Board. The efforts of its officers
during these first years have accordingly been
largely devoted to the reorganization and
equipment, on a satisfactory basis, of one such
medical school, the Peking Union Medical Col-
lege.

Since 1915 the college has been supported by

SCIENCE

411

annual contributions from the China Medical
Board. The budget for the academic year
1921-1922 provides for a gross expenditure, on
the school and hospital, of $1,418,989 Chinese
silver currency. The local income from fees
and hospital earnings is estimated at $219,383
Chinese currency. To cover the difference an
appropriation of $600,000 United States eur-
rency has been provided.

Of a teaching staff of ninety at the end of
1921, forty-seven were Americans or Europeans
and forty-three Chinese, the latter being for
the most part men who had been students in
the United States or Great Britain. In order
to lessen the isolation of the staff from scien-
tifie progress in the west, provision has been
made for visiting professorships under which,
every year, one or two leading medical scien-
tists of the United States or Europe are invited
to spend from four months to a year in Peking.

In 1921 visiting professors included Dr.
A. B, Macallum, of McGill University, in physi-
ology, and Dr. Francis W. Peabody, of Har-
vard University, in medicine. In 1922 the vis-
iting professors from the United States are:
Dr. E. C. Dudley, professor of gynecology in
Northwestern University, Chicago; Dr. Harry
R. Slack, Jr., of Johns Hopkins Medical
School, in charge of the department of oto-
laryngology; Dr. Donald D. Van Slyke, a
member of the Rockefeller Institute for Medi-
cal Research, who is giving graduate instruc-
tion in the department of physiological chem-
istry, and Dr. Elliott G. Brackett, professor of
orthopedic surgery, Harvard Medical School,
and during the war director of military ortho-
pedic surgery for the United States Army, who
has conducted graduate courses and clinies.

LEGAL RESTRICTIONS ON TYPES OF
BABCOCK GLASSWARE

A STATEMENT has been issued by the experi-
ment station at Geneva setting forth the pro-
visions of the amendment to the agricultural
law enacted at the last session of the legislature
relative to the kind of Babcock glassware that
can be legally used for making butter fat 'tests
of milk and cream where the test forms the
basis of payment. Accurate glassware is essen-
tial for just payments, and milk dealers and

412

farmers in New York have been protected by
law in the past against inaccurate glassware
which would influence the butter fat test. New
York was one of the first states in the Union
to compel all glassware jobbers and manufac-
turers to submit their glassware to be tested for
accuracy previous to its sale. Since 1900, the
experiment station has tested all the Babcock
glassware used in New York before it was
offered for sale. All glassware meeting the re-
quirements is marked §. B., or state branded,
to show that it has ben tested and found cor-
rect.

The purpose of the amendment of the old
law is to reduce errors in testing milk and
cream for butter fat by the Babeock method by
reducing the number of kinds of glassware that
can be legally used in making the test. During
1921 the experiment station tested more than
39,000 test bottles and pipettes representing
more than 24 distinet types. Many of these
types, although accurately made, were so con-
structed as to lead to errors. Such glassware
is now illegal. Only five types of glassware
are now permitted by law. These are the usual
8 per cent. milk bottle, the 9-gram short and
long eream bottles, the 18-gram long cream
bottle, and the plain 17.6 ce. pipette. The New
York law, which is now in force, is in accord-
ance. with the provisions of the United States
Bureau of Standards.

Babcock glassware takes its name from Dr.
S. M. Babeock, of the University of Wisconsin,
who perfected the method of testing milk and
cream for butter fat. The method is now used
universally as a basis for payment to the
farmer for his milk and cream.

THE CONFERENCE ON HIGHWAYS

INCREASING interest in the forthcoming con-
ference on highway transport and highway en-
gineering education, to be held by the Highway
Education Board in Washington, from October
26 to 28, is reflected in replies to invitations
from educators and men high in the councils of
the automotive industry. It is estimated that
at least three hundred regularly invited dele-
gates will be present, with approximately half
as many more in attendance who are concerned
in the problems to be studied. The headquar-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

ters of the conference will be the New Willard
Hotel.

Ten committees are now preparing reports
for submission to the conference as a whole.
They will function with an educational chair-
man directing the research of their respective
committees. H. W. Leavitt, assistant pro-
fessor of civil engineering, University of
Maine, is educational chairman of the com-
mittee on “Required Elective Undergraduate
Subjects in Highway Engineering.” L. W.
MelIntyre, assistant professor of civil engineer-
ing, University of Pittsburgh, is educational
chairman of the committee on “Required and
Elective Undergraduate Subjects for Highway
Transport Business and Engineering Posi-
tions.” On the committee, “Subject Matter of
Basic Required Undergraduate Course in
Highway Engineering,’ L. E. Conrad, pro-
fessor of civil engineering, Kansas State Agri-
cultural College, will serve as educational
chairman.

Other educational chairmen and their com-
mittees are: C. B. Breed, professor of civil
engineering, Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, “Subject Matter of Basie Under-
graduate Course in Highway Transport’;
C. C. Wiley, assistant professor of highway
engineering, University of Illinois, “Subject
Matter of Undergraduate Course in Highway
Engineering Theory and Design”; C. A.
Baughman, professor of civil engineering, Ala-
bama Polytechnic Institute, “Subject Matter
of Undergraduate Course in Highway Engi-
neering Laboratory”; Charles 8. Howe, presi-
dent of the Case School of Applied Science,
“Nature and Content of Supporting Non-
Technical Courses in Economics and English”;
H. C. Smith, assistant professor of highway en-
gineering and highway transport, University
of Michigan, “Graduate Work in Highway En-
gineering and Highway Transport”; C. C.
Albright, professor of civil engineering, Pur-
due University, “Conferences or Short Courses
on Highway Engineering and Highway Trans-
port”; H. J. Hughes, dean Harvard Engineer-
ing School, “Teaching Highway Traffic Regu-
lation and Safety.”

Among the automotive officials who plan to
attend are Alvan Macauley, president Packard

OcToBER 13, 1922

Motor Car Company; Robert H. Salmons, vice-
president Selden Truck Corporation; E. M.
Sternberg, Sterling Motor Truck Company;
Roy D. Chapin, president Hudson Motor Car
Company; A. J. Brosseau, president Mack
Motor Car Company; H. S. Firestone, presi-
dent Firestone Tire and Rubber Company;
H. W. Alden, vice-president Timken-Detroit
Axle Company; Clark A. Ward, president
Ward Motor Vehicle Company.

THE AMERICAN PSYCHOLOGICAL
ASSOCIATION

Tue Cambridge meeting of the American
Psychological Association will be held on De-
cember 27, 28 and 29. The sessions will be in
Emerson Hall, Harvard University, and the
official headquarters at the Hotel Bellevue in
Boston.

Because of the increased pressure for places
on the program, the program committee is ex-
tending the sessions to include the afternoon of
the third day of the meetings. So far as pos-
sible papers of general and theoretical import
will be placed in the sessions on Wednesday,
December 27. The business meeting will be on
Wednesday evening. The sessions of Thursday,
December 28, will include a symposium ar-
ranged by Section I of the American Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science and the
address of Professor Bott, retiring vice-presi-
dent of Section I. The annual dinner of the
association followed by the presidential ad-
dress and smoker will be Thursday evening.
Friday, December 29, will be devoted to ses-
sions of the Section of Clinical Psychology.
In the afternoon the session will be at the
Boston Psychopathic Hospital at the invitation
of Dr. Campbell and Dr. Wells.

Apparatus may be exhibited in the Psycho-
logical Laboratory in Emerson Hall. Members
are asked to supervise the setting up of their
apparatus and the repacking of it. Consign-
ments should be shipped to Dr. C. C. Pratt,
Emerson Hall, Cambridge, Mass. The treas-
urer is authorized to pay transportation
charges on apparatus, charts, demonstrational
devices and text materials which the members
display.

A cordial invitation has been extended to

SCIENCE

413

members by Professor M. W. Calkins to visit
Wellesley College; by Dr. W. E. Fernald to
visit the Massachusetts State School for Feeble-
minded at Waverley; by Dr. Wm. Healy to
visit the Judge Baker Foundation at 40 Court
Street, Boston; and by Dr. O. H. Lundholm to
visit McLean Hospital at Waverley. Arrange-
ments for these visits will be made during the
meeting. Dr. Campbell and Dr. Wells invite
the members to examine the work at the Boston
Psychopathic Hospital after the meeting at the
hospital on December 29.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

‘Dr. Ropert A. MiniiKan, chairman of the
board of the California Institute of Tech-
nology and director of the Norman Bridge Lab-
oratory, has been appointed a member of the
committee on intellectual cooperation of the
League of Nations to sueceed Dr. George HK.
Hale, who has resigned from the committee.

Dr. Lupwik SILBERSTEIN, mathematical
physicist at the Eastman Kodak Company
Research Laboratory, has been appointed a
member of the Commission on Relativity of the
International Astronomical Union.

Dr. Cuarues B. Davenport, director of the
Station for Experimental Evolution and the
Eugenics Record Office of the Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington, left New York on the
Paris for Europe on September 13. He planned
to proceed to Brinn, Czechoslovakia, for
the purpose of participating in the Interna-
tional Gregor Mendel Centenary on September
22, 1922, and from Briinn to go to Vienna
to attend the meeting of the German Society of
Geneticists from September 25 to 28. His next
visit will be to Upsala, where he will confer
with Dr. Herman B. Lundborg of the Univer-
sity of Sweden. From Sweden he will proceed
to Norway for the purpose of paying a visit to
Dr. Jon Alfred Mjoen, of the Winderen Lab-
oratorium, Christiania, thence to Holland to
visit Dr. Joh. Von Der Speck, Doldersche Weg.
60, Den Dolder. He will go to Belgium for
the purpose of attending, as delegate of the
Carnegie Institution of Washington and the
Eugenics Research Association, the meetings of
the International Commission of Eugenics.

414

These will be held from October 9 to 14. The
next visit will be to Paris in the interests of the
Third International Congress of Hugenics. In
London, on October 24, he will lecture before
the Eugenics Education Society on ‘Recent
Work of the Eugenics Record Office.” He will
sail from England about October 25.

Dr. HucH 8. CumMtne, surgeon general of
the U. S. Public Health Service, sailed on Octo-
ber 5 for Europe to spend two weeks inspect-
ing the government’s sanitary stations abroad.
While in France, General Cumming will also
attend the convention at Paris which is to re-
vise the international sanitary treaty of Rome,
where he will present several amendments con-
cerning international measures against typhus,
the plague and cholera. He will attend, in
addition, the meeting in Paris of the hygiene
unit of the League of Nations.

Dr. Davin Starr Jorpan has sailed for
Japan. He expects to return to Stanford Uni-
versity in December.

Dr. H. Citento, of the Australian Health
Department, recently arrived in America to
study the methods used by the late General

Gorgas in effecting sanitation in the Canal
Zone.

Drs. Leon Bueum, P. Bouin, Georges Weiss
and L. M. Pautrier, of the University of Stras-
bourg, arrived in New York on October 2.
They plan to make a study of American hos-
pitals.

Nem M. Jupp, curator of American arche-
ology of the U. S. National Museum and direc-
tor of the National Geographie Society’s
Pueblo Bonito Expedition, returned to Wash-
ington at the end of September after having
completed the second season’s exploration of
the great ruin of Chaco Canyon, New Mexico.

Epwarp 8. Hanpy, ethnologist of the Bishop
Museum of Hawaii, will leave Honolulu in
December or January to take charge of an ex-
pedition to Tahiti and Moore, for which the
museum has completed arrangements. The
work is planned to supplement the investiga-
tions by members of the Bayard Dominick Ex-
pedition, who have been at work in the Mar-
quesas and the Austral Islands during the past
two years.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1450

Proressor Abert W. Smitru, formerly
dean of Sibley College, Cornell University, and
acting president of the university, has returned
to Ithaca, where he is engaged in writing the
biography of John Edson Sweet, first head of
the mechanical engineering instruction at Cor-
nell, and later president of the Straight Line
Engine Company of ‘Syracuse. Professor
Smith retains his connection with the Kent
Construction Company of Rutherford, New
Jersey, as consulting engineer.

Dr. Warren D. Smite, who has been for
the past two years on leave of absence from
the University of Oregon, in charge of the
Division of Mines, Bureau of Science, Manila,
P. I., has returned to the university to resume
his work in geology and geography.

Tur Norman Lockyer Observatory, Sid-
mouth, England, has elected Dr. Otto Klotz,
chief astronomer and director of the Dominion
Astronomical Observatory, Ottawa, an hon-
orary overseas member.

Henry E. Summers has retired from active
work as state entomologist of Iowa and pro-
fessor of zoology in Iowa State College, posi-
tions to which he was appointed in 1898. He
will live in Los Angeles, California.

Mayo Dyer Herszy, associate professor of
the properties of matter in the department of
physics of the Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, has resigned to take a position as
physicist in charge of the Physical Laboratory
of the United States Bureau of Mines, Pitts-
burgh, Pa.

Mr. Barry J. Anson has recently resigned
his assistantship in the U. S. Bureau of Fish-
eries Biological Station, at Fairport, Iowa, to
accept a Rockefeller Foundation medical fel-
lowship paying $2,000. He is working at Har-
vard University.

Mr. E. Leonarp Giuu, of the Hancock Mu-
seum at Newcastle-on-Tyne, has been appoint-
ed assistant in the natural history department
of the Royal Scottish Museum, Edinburgh.

WHEN the Maud was at Deering, Kotzebue
Sound, Alaska, in order to land Captain
Amundsen for his proposed airplane flight
across the polar area, Dr. H. U. Sverdrup, in

OctorER 13, 1922

charge of the scientific work of the Amundsen
expedition, mailed magnetie records to the De-
partment of Terrestrial Magnetism of the Car-
negie Institution of Washington. The expedi-
tion was able to reoccupy magnetic stations of
1920 and 1921 at Kain-ge-sken, Siberia.

Tue Italian government has decided to
restore to the German psychiatrist, Professor
H. Kraepelin, his villa in Italy, which was con-
fisecated during the war as enemy property.

Dr. EH. D. Batt, director of scientifie work
in the U. S. Department of Agriculture, and
national president of Gamma Sigma Delta, the
agricultural honor society, installed a chapter
at the Pennsylvania State College on October
10. A local association has also been formed
by members of the Society of Sigma Xi who
reside in State College or vicinity, with Dr.
F. D. Kern as president and Professor C.
Emory Myers secretary-treasurer.

Dr. Henry H. Dats, director of the National
Institute for Medical Research, London, gave
a Hanna lecture at the Medical Library Audi-
torium in Cleveland on October 6.

Dr. Harrow SHapiey, director of the Har-
vard College Observatory, lectured at Mount
Holyoke College on October 6 on “Measuring
the Milky Way.” The lecture is the first of a
series of science lectures provided for by the
Polly Hollingsworth fund for lectures on art,
science and music.

Proressor L. Bairstow delivered a lecture
to the Royal Aeronautical Society on October
5, on “The Work of S. P. Langley.”

THE twenty-fifth annual Traill-Taylor Me-
morial Lecture of the Royal Photographie So-
ciety was delivered by Dr. R. S. Clay on Octo-
ber 10, on “The development of the photo-
graphic lens from the historical point of view.”

FOLLOWING services which were held at his
home, the body of Dr. William §. Halsted,
late professor of surgery in the Johns Hopkins
University, who died on September 7 at Johns
Hopkins Hospital, was cremated on September
9, in pursuance of his wish. Drs. William H.
Welch, Howard A. Kelly, William H. Howell,
John J. Abel, Wiliam G. MacCallum, Harvey
Cushing, Iva Remsen, Winford H. Smith, John

SCIENCE

415

Whitridge Williams and Judge Harlan were
the honorary pallbearers, and Drs. John M. T.
Finney, Joseph C. Bloodgood, Hugh H. Young,
George J. Heuer, Samuel J. Crowe, Walter E.
Dandy and Mont R. Reid were the active pall-
bearers.

Dr. JosepH HE. Winters, professor emeritus
of the diseases of children at Cornell Univer-
sity Medical College in New York, died in
Boston on October 4.

Dr. InteuxEs, professor of astronomy at the
University of Madrid and formerly director of
the Madrid Observatory, has died.

Dr. Winitam Hause Rivers Rivers, of St.
John’s College, Cambridge, author of works on
ethnology, psychology and anthropology, who
died on June 4, aged fifty-eight, bequeathed to
St. John’s College the portrait of himself by
Shields, to the library of the college such of
his books as the council of that college may
choose; the balance of his books and pamphlets
to the University of Cambridge, for the de-
partments of psychology and ethnology as the
librarians may select; and to his friend, Pro-
fessor Grafton Elliot Smith, professor of
anatomy in the University of London, all his
MSS. and unpublished works as his own prop-
erty, but requesting him to publish such por-
tion as he might consider ought to be published,
and he left to him £500 for defraying the costs
of preparing and publishing these documents.

Tue John Elliott Memorial Pathological and
Bacteriological Laboratory at the Chester
Royal Infirmary was opened on September 16
by Sir Humphrey Rolleston, K.C.B., M.D.,
president of the Royal College of Physicians
of London. The laboratory has been fitted and
equipped by public subscription in memory of
the late Dr. John Elliott, honorary physician
to the infirmary from 1895 to 1921.

PRESIDENT-EMERITUS PaTTERSON, of the Uni-
versity of Kentucky, died at his residence on
the campus on August 15, 1922, in his eighty-
ninth year. After making a number of per-
sonal bequests he left his residuary estate to be
reinvested by the Security Trust Company, of
Lexington, and the interest compounded until
it shall become large enough to yield an income
of $35,000 or $40,000 a year, when the income

416

is to be used to maintain the William Andrew
Patterson College of the University of Ken-
tucky, the purpose of which shall be to train
young men for diplomatic and consular service.
President Patterson’s library is to be given to
the university on condition that it be kept
intact and that the books be not allowed to go
out of the room in which the library is kept.
‘The will names as literary executors Dr. Wil-
liam B. Smith, of New Orleans, and Miss
Mabel Pollitt, who are to examine correspond-
ence and other writings and prepare and pub-
‘lish a biography.

A JOINT meeting of the Eastern and Western
Divisions of the American Philosophical Asso-
ciation will be held in New York City on De-
cember 27, 28 and 29, at Union Theological
Seminary. At this meeting Professor John
Dewey will deliver the Paul Carus Lectures on
the attempt to apply a theory of experience to
certain metaphysical problems. The afternoon
sessions will be largely devoted to the lectures
by Professor Dewey, and the morning sessions
to the reading and discussion of papers offered
by members. Abstracts of papers should be in
the hands of Professor G. A. Tawney, Univer-
sity of Cincinnati, Ohio, not later than No-
vember 10. On Wednesday and Thursday
evenings, respectively, the smoker and annual
dinner will be held, and at these times also ad-
dresses by the presidents will be delivered.

THe writer of “From an Oxford Note-
Book” in The Observatory, who is always very
much alive, writes in the last number as fol-
lows: “Those interested in handy reference
works will be grateful to the compilers of
Who’s Who for producing a supplementary
volume Who was Who, covering the period
1897-1916. The volume was intended to ap-
pear in 1916, but owing to the war its publica-
tion was delayed. It has now been produced,
and can be put upon the reference-shelves.
Since it consists chiefly of extracts from the
volumes of the main publication, with dates of
death added, its information can generally be
trusted; but I notice that it contains a state-
ment of the death in 1909 of Professor Turner,
of Oxford. Now I much doubt the accuracy
of this information. I have certainly not seen
the actual face of the learned gentleman for

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

many years; but I have heard him lecture, and
(unless wireless has entered upon a new phase)
I do not think he was very far away. Further
investigation is, however, proceeding.’

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tue China Medical Board of the Rockefeller
Foundation has given $125,000 each to South-
eastern University at Nanking and Nankai
College at Tientsin for science buildings and
equipment. Southeastern University is a gov-
ernment institution, located at Nanking, the old
southern capital of China. Nankai College, in
the north, is a private institution receiving pro-
vineial aid.

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation reports that the new Darling Building
in the Medical School of Adelaide University,
South Australia, was opened recently by Sir
George Murray. It is to be devoted to the de-
partments of the fundamental sciences in the
faculty of medicine, as there has been inade-
quate accommodation for the teaching of
anatomy, physiology and pathology. The fam-
ily of the late Mr. John Darling contributed
£15,000 towards the erection of the building.

Dr. Cuartes Russ RicHarps, formerly dean
and director of the College of Engineering of
the University of Illinois, will be inaugurated
as president of Lehigh University on Octo-
ber 14.

Dr. Howarp B. Lewis, formerly associate
professor of physiological chemistry at the
University of Illinois, has accepted an appoint-
ment as professor and head of the department
of physiological. chemistry in the Medical
School of the University of Michigan.

Dr. Leon A. Hausman, of Cornell Univer-
sity, has joined the staff of Rutgers College as
instructor in zoology and research zoologist.

Joun L. Buys, instructor in entomology at
Cornell University, has been appointed assist-
ant professor of entomology at the University
of Akron.

Dr. A. D. Howarp, until recently assistant
in the Bureau of Fisheries with assignment to
certain fresh-water mussel studies at the bio-

OcrosEr 13, 1922]

logical laboratory at Fairport, Iowa, has re-
signed to become assistant professor of zoology
at the University of Southern California.

Proressor T. J. TALBERT, superintendent of
farmer’s institutes and extension schools and
leader of subject matter specialists, Division
of Extension, Kansas State Agricultural Col-
lege, has been appointed professor of horticul-
ture and chairman of the department of horti-
culture at the University of Missouri.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

THE PALEOPATHOLOGY OF THE
PARASUCHIANS

Stupents of vertebrate paleontology have
long been aware of the presence of curious
knob-like eminences on the snouts of the Tri-
assic crocodile-like, elongate reptiles which
Huxley regarded as the Parasuchia, but are
now known as ‘the Phytosauria with an organi-
zation quite remote from that of the Croco-
dilia. No adequate explanation of these emi-
nences has ever been given although the writer
referred to one of them as a callus following
a fracture; an interpretation from which he
was dissuaded by Huene. Recently Dr. Case
has written me about a very curious example
of these eminences and Professor O. Abel of
Vienna has discussed! in a very interesting
manner the nature of all the eminences, regard-
ing them as lesions following injuries received
in combat, and as occurring more frequently
in the male. The ensuing complexities of a
taxonomic nature are startling, and if correct
pathological disturbances will reduce a lot of
scientific names to the limbo of useless terms.

But I am not at all sure that Abel is cor-
rect. His argument is from analogy only. He
has given not one positive anatomical or patho-

logical evidence to prove that the eminences '

are “Bissverletzungen,” or lesions.of a trau-
matic nature with often huge necrotic sinuses,
if they are at all pathological. The weakness
of Abel’s argument consists in the fact that

10. Abel: Die Schnauzenverletzungen der
Parasuchier und ihre biologische Bedeutung (mit
10 Textfiguren). Paleontologische Zeitschrift,
Bd. V, Heft 1, Juni 1922, pp. 26-57.

SCIENCE

417

the eminences are always in the median line
and are always fairly symmetrical, at least in
all the examples known to me. So _ before
Abel’s conclusions are accepted and the taxon-
omy of the Phytosauria revised we must have
definite proof that these eminences really are
pathological in nature and not something else.
They may be pathological lesions, but we do
not know they are, and there are methods of
determining this point within reasonable
limits of certainty, and that is by a histo-
logical comparison of the bone from one of
the eminences, with normal bone elsewhere on
the snout.

We have sufficient knowledge of the histology
of fossil bone through the studies of Kolliker,
Seitz and Schaffer, whose work is reviewed in
my forthcoming volume on ‘“Paleopathology,”
and to which I have made a number of ad-
ditions. From the standpoint of histology the
bone tissue of ancient forms, and of modern
fishes, consists largely of an osteoid tissue
which in normal fossil bone has few, widely-
scattered lacune, scant lamelle and little or
no evidences of an Haversian arrangement.
In fossil pathologie bone, however, ‘the lacunze
become more numerous, the lamelle more
prominent, and numerous concentric arrange-
ments, recalling Haversian systems, are ap-
parent. I have found this to be true in eal-
losites of the Permian reptiles, in the Co-
manchi¢ dinosaurs, in the Pleistocene cats, in
pre-Columbian man and in the modern bison,
so we may say the phenomena are universal.
Foote has recorded a similar fact for the
modern bull-frog, in a case of a fracture of
the femur.

Until positive evidence of this kind is forth-
coming Abel’s conclusions must await accept-
ance. The matter is far too important for
hasty judgment. The numerous fossil patho-
logical lesions I have studied are so different
from the symmetrical, median eminences seen
in the Phytosauria that I hesitate to accept
them as callosities. We usually find a lack
of symmetry in pathological lesions, especially
in those of a traumatic character.

Roy L. Moopiz

COLLEGE oF MEDICINE,

UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

418

MEASUREMENTS OF HUMAN CRANIA

Zo THE HEprToR OF ScipNcE: For many years
students of physical anthropology have been
handicapped by the lack of reliable cranial
measurements from the American area. The
National Museum in Washington and several
other museums contain rich collections of
crania, but no satisfactory measurements of
these have been published.

After some discussion of ‘the situation with
Dr. Ales Hrdlicka, curator of physical anthro-
pology at the National Museum, and corre-
spondence with the secretary of the Smith-
sonian Institution, a plan has finally been
adopted by which the large collections in
Washington will soon be made available.
Measurements of the entire series of human
crania will be made under Dr. Hrdliéka’s diree-
tion and published in the form of a catalog
which will be issued in parts in the Proceedings
of the U. 8. National Museum. It is expected
that several parts will be printed each year, the
first being already in press.

It is to be hoped that other museums will
now follow the lead, and that in this way the
large mass of materials which they contain for
the study of the physical anthropology of ‘the
American Indian will, in similar fashion, be
made available for students.

Rouanp B. Dixon

HARVARD UNIVERSITY,

SEPTEMBER 15, 1922

BIBLIOGRAPHY AND RESEARCH

To tHe Eprror or Science: A clearer por-
trait of the “book sciences” than that in Mr.
W. W. Bishop’s “The Record of Science,” I
have never seen in the ten years that I have
been engaged in library work.

Many of the thoughts expressed in Mr.
Bishop’s address have been uppermost in the
minds of many of ‘the directors of the labora-
tories of book science, if I may be permitted
to borrow Mr. Bishop’s phrase. Many of us
have seen this college and that college, this
large concern and that large industry, endowed
with munificent funds for research. In 1920-
1921 there appeared in our leading index to
technical periodicals over 109 ‘titles relating to

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1450

research work. The National Research Council
has published a second edition of “Research
Laboratories in Industrial Establishments in
the United States,” listing some 526 industrial
houses operating laboratories devoted to re-
search in one form or another. The same insti-
tution later published a list of the sums invest-
ed in research fellowships and endowments.
The total endowments and fellowships amount-
ed ‘to 565, representing, in round numbers, over
$22,000,000.

Now Mr. Bishop has pointed out that bibliog-
raphy is the foundation of research. Yet I
fail to find any specified sum set aside for a
well equipped laboratory of book sciences.
I doubt if 50 per cent. of these 526 industrial
concerns supporting laboratories own and
operate respectable laboratories for research in
facts, or as I choose to call these libraries,
laboratories for “research fact-oring.” In fact,
I know of one organization that spent over
$400,000 for a research laboratory and yet in
its laboratory for research fact-oring, it did
not invest one tenth of that amount.

Now, then, why not promote sentiment for
the establishment of endowments for research
laboratories in “fact-oring” and fellowships in
book sciences?

K. C. WALKER

AN UNUSUAL SOLITAIRE GAME

Dera at random 25 ecards from a pack of 52
playing cards and arrange them in five com-
plete poker hands any one of which may be a
flush (such as any five hearts), a straight
(such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, or Ace, K, Q, J, 10, not
necessarily of one suit), or a full-house (three
of one kind and two of another).

Various persons have tried this solitaire sev-
eral hundred times and worked it without find-
ing a single case of failure, occasionally afiter
many attempts. It was believed that it would
always succeed. After some reflection, the
writer invented the following impossible deal:

Diamonds: 2, 7, Q.
Hearts: 3, 4, 9, Q, K.
Clubs: 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, J.

2

1
Spades: 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, 10, J, K.

9
with exactly two of each kind, excepting the

OcropER 13, 1922]

single 5. Since there are not three of a kind,
there can not be formed a full-house. But
how are we to be certain that we can not make
five flushes and straights with these 25 cards?
We can not examine the more than 5,194 bil-
lions of ways of arranging the 25 cards into
five sets of five each, not distinguishing the
order of the cards in a set or the order of the
sets. We shall resort to the following con-
clusive analysis:

Since there are only three diamonds, no one
of them occurs in a flush, and they are too far
apart for two of them to occur in a straight.
Hence 2d, 7d, Qd occur in three separate
straights.

First, let both 3h and 4h occur in a straight
with 2d, and hence with 5c, the only 5. Since
there is no 5 left to go in a straight with 3e or
with 2s, there is a flush of clubs and a flush
of spades. These with the three straights men-
tioned must exhaust the 25 cards. But Qh is
too far from 2d or 7d to be in a straight with
one of them, nor can it be in a straight with
another queen, Qd, nor in a flush of clubs or
spades.

Second, let either 3h or 4h be not in a
straight with 2d, and hence not in another
straight (since a new 5 is lacking). Thus
either 3h or 4h lies in a flush, containing all
our five hearts. Since 2s can not occur in a
straight (5 lacking), there is a flush of spades.
Hence we have these two flushes and the three
straights containing 2d, 7d, Qd. But 7e can
not occur in one of these five poker hands.

This completes the proof that the above 25
cards can not be arranged in five complete
poker hands.

L. E. Dickson

SCIENCE IN FICTION

To THe Eprror or Scipnce: I am getting
up a little eatalog of fiction on scientific
themes and should like the help of ScrENCE
readers. Such books belong mostly to four
classes :

(1) Fantastic and futuristic fiction, such as
Jules Verne’s “Twenty Thousand Leagues
Under the Sea” (submarine) or “A Voyage to
the Moon” (astronomy) and Wells’s “The
Food of the Gods” (hormones) or “The Story

SCIENCE

419

of Davidson’s Eyes” (fourth dimension). This
seems to be the largest and most popular
group.

(2) Novels based upon some scientific dis-
covery or showing the influence of applied sci-
ence upon society, such as Hergesheimer’s
“Three Black Pennys” (development of ithe
iron industry).

(3) Stories in which some scientific fact or
theory forms the theme, such as Arthur Reeve’s
detective stories and Rebecea West’s “The Re-
turn of the Soldier” (Freudianism).

(4) Historical fiction where a distinguished
man of science plays an important part, such
as Merejkowski’s “Romance of Leonardo da
Vinci” and Guitry’s play of Pasteur. This
which would seem to be a fertile field for fie-
tion has apparently been rather neglected.

I should be very much obliged if those who
happen to know of good novels or worth while
short stories of this sort would give me the
titles and authors’ names, also if convenient
the publisher and the scientific motif.

Epwin E. SLosson

ScIENCE SERVICE,

WASHINGTON

QUOTATIONS
THE WORK OF GENERAL GORGAS

One of the last acts of Congress before ad-
journment was to send to the President a bill
to pay a monthly pension of $150 to the widow
of General William C. Gorgas, who died in
London on July 4, 1920. In 1918 General
Gorgas was placed on the retired list, having
reached the age of 64. In the two years of life
remaining to him his services were in great
demand as an expert in sanitation. The Rocke-
feller Foundation made him director of the
yellow fever work of its International Health
Board. He visited Guayaquil to see what could
be done to clean up that pest-hole. The gov-
ernment of Peru engaged him to carry out a
sanitary program in that country. General
Gorgas did not live long enough to earn the
reward to which he was entitled as a renowned
specialist in sanitation. His army pay had
increased slowly as he rose from grade to grade.
It was not until 1916, two years before he left

420

the army, that he became a major general.
Upon his retired pay, which, of course, ceased
with death, he could live comfortably with his
family, but only by practicing economy. To
gain a modest fortune it was necessary for him
to live the strenuous life of scientific investiga-
tion in tropical countries, and the time at his
disposal was too short. He carried on until he
died worn out.

It was an irony of fate that the soldier who
had saved an incalculable number of lives by
his campaigns against yellow fever and malaria
in Havana and in Panama should be struck
down at sixty-five while risking his own health
to provide for his family after his death. The
republic is not ungrateful to its Deweys and
Pershings, who are rewarded with special rank
and high pay for life for fighting its battles,
but may not the charge of failing to recognize
the merits of a great soldier-sanitarian like
Wiliam C. Gorgas be preferred against it?
There might be extenuation if the world had
not acclaimed him the most efficient plague-
fighter of his day. Great Britain sent for him
when its own medical men were baffled by the
virulence of influenza in the Rand gold mines
in 1913, the War Department lending Colonel
Gorgas to find means of checking the epidemic,
in which he was successful. If he had been an
Englishman, Great Britain would have known
how to reward as well as to honor him for his
invaluable services. Great Britain could only
give to him a decoration coveted by its own
scientists. France made him a commander of
the Legion of Honor. It can not be pleaded
for Congress that it has not the power in such
a case to reward conspicuous merit and service.
If a precedent had been made when General
Gorgas retired from the army, there would not
now be the spectacle of a belated effort to do
. something in a small way for the relief of his
widow.—New York Times.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS
Plane and Solid Analytic Geometry. By
Wiuuiam FF. Oscoop, Ph.D., LL.D., and
Wiuuiam C. Graustern, Ph.D. New York,
The Macmillan Company, 1921. Pp. xvii +
614.
This book is somewhat larger than the usual

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

American text-book designed for an elementary
college course in analytic geometry. The mate-
rial is so arranged that it is easy to select there-
from suitable subjects for comparatively short
courses, and hence the book will be welcomed
by those teachers who believe that it is desira-
ble to place in the students’ hands books which
will enable the most gifted to go beyond what
is discussed in class. Emphasis is laid on pre-
senting the subject in the simplest and most
concrete form, and on pointing out its relation
to physics whenever possible. It may be re-
called that Descartes, who is commonly re-
garded as the founder of analytic geometry,
once said in a letter to Mersenne that all his
physics was nothing else than geometry.

In view of the fact that the various mathe-
matical theories are so interdependent good
text-books for courses in elementary mathe-
matics must cover the same fundamental ideas.
There is, however, considerable latitude as re-
gards the mode of presentation, especially as
regards illustrative examples and the choice of
the problems which the students are expected
to solve for the purpose of developing their
ability to use the subject. Students can usu-
ally prove a large number of theorems which
they do not understand until they have applied
them in the solutions of different types of
problems. The present volume contains a large
number of problems selected by men who are
well qualified to determine what is most essen-
tial for the later progress of the students in
pure and applied mathematics.

About 200 pages of the book are devoted to
solid analytic geometry. Most of our courses
for engineering students are too weak along
this line. Many of the standard texts on ap-
pled mathematics presuppose a_ thorough
knowledge of the rudiments of solid analytic
geometry, and even the ordinary courses in
integral caleulus and mechanics frequently
make greater demands on space conceptions
than the student has acquired in the brief
course which he followed. The developments
found in these last 200 pages are especially to
be recommended to students who seek a clear
presentation of very useful facts lying just
beyond the ordinary elementary course in
analytic geometry.

OctosER 13, 1922]

The text-book under review will doubtless
remain a standard for many years. It may be
too extensive to meet the wants of most insti-
tutions for a first course but it will probably
be consulted by many teachers who prefer to
place briefer treatments in the hands of their
students. The high mathematical attainments
of its authors are naturally reflected in many
details of treatment, and inspire deserved con-
fidence in the accuracy of the statements re-
lating to matters of fundamental importance.
The modern tendency towards the insertion of
numerous historical notes in elementary text-
books on mathematics is not followed here.

It may be added that the authors state in a
foot-note on page 177 that a tangent can not
be defined as a line meeting the conic in a
single point. The opposite view was recently
expressed by Professor Cajori in an article
published in School Science and Mathematics,
volume 22, page 463, where the author tries to
support an inaccurate statement found on page
163 of the second edition of his “History of
Mathematics,” 1919. It is here stated that
Roberval “broke off from the ancient definition
of a tangent as a straight line having only one
point in common with a curve.” It may also
be noted here that some readers might question
whether it should be said that a mathematical
argument can be convincing without being con-
clusive, as is implied by the authors in a foot-
note appearing on page 180. In view of the
extensive literature on Greek algebra the sec-
ond paragraph of the Introduction is mis-

leading.
- G. A. Miuuer
UNIvERSITY OF ILLINOIS

SPECIAL ARTICLES

WATER CULTURE EXPERIMENTATION

As a one-salt solution is the simplest possi-
ble salt solution, so the simplest growth media
that can be devised for plants, provided they
need but two elements at a time, should be the
proper combination of one-salt solutions. Be-
cause green plants require at least seven salt
elements, available to and absorbed through the
roots, complete nutrient solutions having these
elements present together are employed as the
media in which the plants are grown. The use

SCIENCE

421

of at least three simple salts plus a trace of
iron (added as a salt) is required to supply the
growth media with the necessary elements.

The writer has recently grown wheat for a
period of three months, which included the
heading out stage of the plants, in a combina-
tion of single salt solutions of KNO,, CaSO,
and MgHPO, (each of .01 mol. concentration).
The plants grown in these solutions were equal
or comparable in their various features of
growth, including that of total dry weight, to
those of plants grown contemporaneously in
complete well-balanced nutrient solutions pre-
pared either with the above named salts or
with other salts supplying the same elements.

The salts named appear to be the only three
salts that can be used as a combination of three
single salt solutions that permit of normal and
undiminished growth of wheat. This is the
conclusion arrived at from an investigation of
culture tests using those salts singly as com-
binations of one-salt solutions that were out-
lined as combinations of three-salt solutions
(complete nutrient solutions) in the Plan of
Cooperative Research on the Salt Requirements
of some Agricultural Plants.?

Because the mono-basie phosphates given in
the plan were found to be too acid for these
tests with single salt solution, the diabasic
phosphates of calcium and magnesium were
substituted for those of the respective mono-
basic phosphates. It appears, therefore, that
by using the proper salts, wheat plants grow
as well with only two nutriment elements
present in the media at one time (exclusive of
a trace of iron supplied at weekly intervals to
all cultures) as they do in complete nutrient
solutions.

The set of plants that made best growth, of
those sets tested, as combinations of one-salt
solutions named, were apportioned among the
solutions as follows: four days continuously in
KNO,, one day in CaSO, and one day in

1See Plan of Cooperative Research on the Salt
Requirements of Representative Agricultural
Plants, prepared for a Special Committee of the
Division of Biology and Agriculture of the Na-
tional Research Council. B. E. Livingston, editor.
Baltimore, 1919.

422

MgHPO,. On the seventh day the plants were
transferred back to KNO, and the above se-
quence continued. The plants were rinsed in
distilled water with every change of culture
from one solution to another. Whether this
apportionment of exposure of culture to the
several solutions would continue to be the best
for the growth of wheat can not be stated until
the plants have matured. It appears the best
apportionment of exposure of the plants to
the different solutions may vary, being not
inconsiderably influenced by the aerial growth
environment and by tbe nutrient requirements
of the plant at different stages of growth.

Because of its simplicity, the method appears
well adapted for investigation of these points
as well as for instruction in the principles of
plant nutrition. It should aid materially in
throwing more light on the causative inter-
relations of the growth of plants and the com-
position of the growth media.

W. F. GERICKE

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

A NOTE ON THE SPERMS OF VALLISNERIA

Arter trying for many years to secure favor-
able fixation of ovules of Vallisneria spiralis
the writer recently succeeded in getting more
fortunate material. Perhaps a few words, by
way of preliminary publication, on the method
and results may be of interest to workers in
this field.

The ovules are borne numerously in the
epigynous ovary surrounded by a mucilaginous
substance which greatly retards the action of
reagents and is but slowly dissolved by water.
Cutting the ovary across permits one to squeeze
out the contents which in their mass movement
break off the ovules and carry them out. Sev-
‘eral hours of washing in water are then neces-
sary to free these ovules from their gelatinous
matrix. In repeated earlier attempts it was
found that all ovules having received pollen
tubes completed their fertilization and double
fertilization before killing agents penetrated to
them. If pistils were killed in toto the pollen
tubes running down their inner walls in the
edge of the gelatin would be well fixed, but the
interior ovules were invariably found in poor
shape due to the influence of this slime.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

Last year the writer modified the method by
lowering the temperature of the water used in
dissolving the mucilage from the expressed
ovary content. The water was cooled by adding
small pieces of ice, and the container was set
in a larger vessel of iced water. It was hoped
in this way to slow down or stop both growth
and eyelosis and to hold all parts in status quo
until killing was possible.

The results were very satisfactory. Sperms
were found not only in the tip of pollen tube
within the synergid but in all subsequent situ-
ations through to the completion of fertiliza-
tion. Many points regarding the male cells of
Vallisneria, previously left obseure through
poor fixation, were cleared up by use of this
material. A brief statement of findings is
given below.

The sperms of Vallisneria spiralis maintain
their integrity as male cells until the egg is
reached. During the journey through the
pollen tube they remain joined end to end and
pass out of the tip of the tube together. The
sperm that later fuses with the egg emerges
from the tube as a cell and immediately flattens
against the egg membrane. Many prepara-
tions showed the male nucleus with its definite
mass of cytoplasm and bordering membrane
pressed, as a complete cell, against the egg
eyst. One would hardly expect to find, in fixed
material, stages showing events at the moment
the two cells break together, for the union
would probably be completed quickly. But
the two masses of cytoplasm must intermingle
in some degree in fertilization and probably
the male cytoplasm partly or wholly enters
that of the egg. The male nucleus soon moves
to the center and unites with the egg nucleus.
There can be no doubt of the morphology of
the sperm up to the time of its union with the
egg,—they come together as complete cells.

The second sperm loses its cytoplasm soon
after it emerges from the pollen tube. Its
nucleus is often observed as a spherical body
within a strand of protoplasm extending from
the egg-apparatus to the polars. Its successive
positions suggest that it is carried to the
polars by movement of cytoplasm within the
embryo-sac. The male nuclei of Vallisneria
are never vermiform in the slightest degree nor

OcToBER 13, 1922]

is there any suggestion of motility on their

P Pe Rosert B. WYLIE

UNIVERSITY or Iowa

THE AMERICAN MATHEMATICAL
SOCIETY

THE twenty-ninth summer meeting of the
American Mathematical Society was held at the
University of Rochester, Thursday and Friday,
September 7-8, 1922, in conjunction with the
meeting of the Mathematical Association of
America. Special features of the session
included visits to the research laboratories of
the Kastman Kodak Company and to the build-
ings of the Bausch and Lomb Optical Com-
pany, a chamber concert at the Eastman
School of Music, and an automobile drive
through the environs of Rochester, arranged by
the alumni of the university. A resolution was
passed expressing the thanks of the society for
the generous hospitality extended.

The attendance included seventy members of
the society. The secretary announced the elec-
tion of ten persons to membership in the
society; twenty-one applications for member-
ship were received.

At the meeting of the council, committees
were appointed as follows: Professors C. N.
Haskins, T. 8. Fiske and H. 8S. White on award
of the Bécher Memorial Prize; Professors
D. R. Curtiss, Dunham Jackson and H. H.
Mitchell on nomination of officers for 1923.

The medal presented to the society by the
Royal Academy of Belgium on the océasion of
its one hundred and fiftieth anniversary was
exhibited.

A reciprocity agreement was ratified with
the London Mathematical Society which grants
to members of one society membership in the
other at half-rates.

The session of Friday morning was espe-
cially marked by a paper read by Professor
C. A. Fischer, at the request of the program
committee, on “Functions of lines.”

The following papers were read at this
meeting: e

Condition that a tensor be the curl of a vector:
L. P. EISENHART.

A new class of topological invariants for two-
sided manifolds: S. LEFSCHETZ.

The (1, 2) quaternary correspondence asso-

SCIENCE

423

ciated with certain space
SHARPE and V. SnyprER.

On the summability of the double Fourier
series: C. N. Moore.

The theory of sets and the foundation of arith-
metic: N. J. LENNES.

Kirkman parades: F. N. Couz.

On the definition of a simple closed surface:
R. L. Moore and J. R. Kure.

The theory of functions of one Boolean varia-
ble: K. Scumupt.

Representation of rectilinear motion by the
geodesics of a surface: A. MY LuEr.

Note on steady fluid motion: 8. D. Zruprn.

Real representatives of analytic complex
curves: W. C, GRAUSTEIN.

Hatension of Bernstein’s theorem to Sturm-
Liouville sums: EuizaprtH CaRLson.

A Bohr-Langmuir contact transformation:
G. C. Evans. x

An elementary theory of competition: G. C.
Evans.

Groups in which the number of operators in a
set of conjugates is equal to the order of the
commutator subgroup: G. A. MILLER.

Expansions in terms of solutions of partial dif-
ferential equations. First paper: Multiple
Fourier expansions: C. OC. Camp.

On the minimum of the sum of a definite inte-
gral and a function of a point: E. H. CuarKe.

A simple proof of a fundamental lemma con-
cerning the limit of a sum: H. J. Errnincer.

Application of Duhamel’s theorem to the con-
vergence proof for approximate solutions of dif-
ferential equations: A. H. Cowuine.

Two theorems on multiple integrals: P. FRANK-
LIN.

An extension of the theorem of Bayes, by the
use of a certain limit: E. L. Dopp.

Fundamental systems of protomorphic formal
modular senvinvariants of binary forms: W. L. G.
WILLIAMS.

An example in potential theory: O. D. KmELLoae.

On certain systems of differential equations
containing a parameter: F. H. Murray.

Periodic solutions in the problem of three
bodies: F. H. Murray.

Functions of lines: C. A. FISCHER.

The expansion of a certain function: I. J.
ScHWAr?.

The summation of a family of deranged series:
I. J. Scuwarr.

The sum of the harmonic series: I. J. Scowarr.

R. G. D. RicHarpson,
Secretary

involutions: F. R.

424

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY
(Continued)

DIVISION OF INDUSTRIAL AND ENGINEERING
CHEMISTRY

W. K. Lewis, chairman
E. M. Billings, secretary

The control of industrial heating processes:
J. A. Doyiz. The paper will be based upon con-
sideration of factors affecting the quality and
cost of products subjected to the action of heat
in the process of manufacture. Reference will be
made to the influence of time as well as tempera-
ture in the conduct of such operations and the
variable factors that affect the time and rate of
heating and cooling. Further reference will be
made to factors affecting the selection and use of
various forms of fuel or electricity with suitable
equipment, and of the necessity of considering
the mechanical features incident to heating, cool-
ing and handling, as well as the strictly thermal
features incident to the thermodynamics of the
problem. ;

Automatic volumetric analysis—carbon mon-
oxide recorder: Guy B. TayLor and HueH 8%.
Taytor. An instrument for automatically mak-
ing chemical analysis and recording the results
is described. The instrument can be adapted to
any case where two or more fluids can be mixed
in regulated volumes, and the result of the ob-
tained reaction of the fluids recorded by electrical
conductivity, temperature rise, ete. Specifically
the application of the apparatus to the analysis
of flue gas for carbon monoxide is described.

Control devices employed in the high pressure
testing of NHg3 catalysts: A. T. Larson. Flow-
sheet of one hundred atmospheres experimental
synthesis NHg plant shown (slide). Need for
close regulation of pressure and rate of flow dis-
cussed. Various forms of an electromagnetically
operated valve are shown. Consists essentially of
a valve seat cut in metal block; a valve stem
moving in a guide; an adjusting spring for hold-
ing stem against seat; and an electromagnet for
lifting valve stem off seat. Use of accessories
such as gauges, manometers, relays, shown by
slides. Flowmeter for gases under high pressure
shown. Also compensating device for density
balance employed in controlling composition of
gas.

The absorption process for the recovery of gas-
oline from natural gas: J. B. Garner. The

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

paper consists of (a) General description of the
absorption process; (b) application of process to
recovery of gasoline from dry natural gas; (c)
conditions of operation of a large gasoline plant;
(d) economies effected in plant operation; and
(e) physical properties of natural gas gasoline.

The plastometer as an instrument for process
control: EuGENE C. BincHam, H. D. Bruce and
H. D. Wousacu. Recent work proves that the
viscosity of colloidal solutions is not a physical
constant as ordinarily measured, but varies with
the shearing stress used, so that a certain paint
showed a change in viscosity of 10 per cent. when
the shearing stress was trebled. It appears that
this difficulty is not limited to any one class of
colloids, nor are high concentrations of the dis-
perse phase necessary. The difficulty can be
overcome by the use of the plastometer. We
have, then, two apparently well-defined .properties,
viz., yield value and mobility. Colloidal solutions
at different concentrations fall into two types—
plastic and pseudo-plastic—between which there
seems to be a sharp distinction, dependent upon
the character of the structure of the material.
Moreover, some colloidal solutions, such as glue
and nitro-cellulose, show a definite temperature
from plastic solid to true liquid, which is the
analogue of the melting point of crystalline sub-
stances. Finally the concentration of disperse
phase at which the property of plasticity finally
disappears appears to be well-defined and meas-
urable and definitely related to the pore space
and the volume of the dispersion medium.

A glass pressure gauge: S. Karrer. It is
often desirable to measure the pressure of a gas
or vapor which will react chemically with the
materials out of which ordinary pressure gauges
are constructed. An all glass gauge has been
developed for this purpose and has been used
successfully for several years. The gauge con-
sists essentially of a thin glass diaphragm whose
motion due to changes in pressures on it is de-
tected by means of a suitable electrical contact.
The unknown gas pressure on one side of the
diaphragm is balanced by a known or measurable
air pressure on the other side. Equality of these
two gas pressures is indicated by the making or
breaking of the electrical contact. Gauges hav-
ing a range of several atmospheres’ pressure and
a sensitivity of %4 mm. of mercury have been
used.

The construction and selection of temperature
and pressure instruments for automatic process
control: S. S. ANDINSKy. There are three classi-

Octozer 13, 1922]

fications of instruments used in automatic process
control: first, indication; second, recording, and
third, controlling. Indicating types of instru-
ments are used in determining experimentally and
in actual production the exact temperature and
pressure specifications to follow to obtain higher
quality and maximum production at a minimum
cost. Recording types of instruments are used to
maintain continuous and permanent records of
these readings, which records may then be filed
for future reference. Controlling instruments are
used to control these temperatures and pressures
automatically. In this way there is the assurance
of duplicating results. In many cases only by
automatic control can certain temperature or
pressure specifications be followed exactly.

Some phases of automatic process control:
Herbert A. Cuark. Process control during the
initial stages of the development of the process
is usually a matter of close observation on the
part of the operator and careful hand adjustment
to meet conditions as they arise. When the steps
become known, the process is standardized and
the control is made automatic as far as prac-
ticable. If the desired control is merely to keep
the temperature constant, some type of thermo-
stat is employed. Where the temperature must be
varied in a predetermined way over a certain
length of time, an instrument has been devised
which automatically varies the temperature of the
container at any desired rate, either constant or
variable; holds the temperature at any point be-
tween certain limits for any desired time; re-
moves the condensation in case of steam-heated
apparatus; cools the container at any desired
tate at the end of the process; stops the process
at any desired point, and signals this fact to the
operator.

Hydrogen ion methods as applied to process
control: Earn A. KeLurr. The increasing use of
hydrogen ion measurements in the laboratory has
opened a field for such methods in automatic
process control. A brief description of an instal-
lation is given. Other automatic control methods
utilizing electrical measuring apparatus have
already been applied successfully, such as the
temperature controller in oil-refining processes
and in the making of illuminating gas. Hlectro-
lytic conductivity equipment has also proven very
useful. The value of process control by signal
indicating apparatus with manual operation is
compared to control that is entirely automatic.
A brief description is given of the conductivity
equipment used for salinity measurements on
battleships. A new method for measuring and

SCIENCE

425

controlling turbidity is described, based on the
characteristics of a photo-electrie cell.

Cost accounting as a factor in the control of
chemical processes: CHARLES WADSWORTH, 38D.
Once accurate costs are obtained, they must be
deftly used. here are many pitfalls for the
executive who places blind allegiance in cost
figures. Close contact with manufacturing plants
is essential, and an understanding of manufac-
turing problems and manufiacturing psychology is
sine qua non. An intelligent limit can be placed
on purchasing, prices and wages. The efficiency
of each step in complicated manufacturing
processes can be isolated, controlled and made
more efficient. The knowledge of whether a
product is making money or not enables the
executive to control production and sales, espe-
cially as to quantities, and to direct emphasis to
the most profitable enterprise. As the most accu-
rate indicator of business health, technical men
must become acquainted with cost procedure,
unless they are willing to remain in positions
subordinate to men with business training who
understand cost procedure.

The removal of small amounts of CO from gases
ty passage through heated granular soda lime:
Rosert E. Winson, C. A: HassLacHEeR and E.
Masterson. The problem of the complete re-
moval of CO from gas streams is of importance
in a number of industrial applications, particu-
larly in the purification of hydrogen and nitrogen
for the synthesis of ammonia. Several references
and patents have mentioned the use of soda lime
at high temperatures for the purpose, but prac-
tically no quantitative data is offered with regard
to the removal of small amounts or the effect of
the composition of the soda lime. This paper
describes a series of experiments on gas contain-
ing 2 per cent. CO in No at temperatures varying
from 250° to 550° and using soda limes of vary-
ing composition. The results show that soda
lime with high caustic soda contents are better
than those too low, or than lime alone. The
former give substantially complete removal of
CO at around 400° ©. Small amounts of moisture
are helpful in increasing the efficiency but do not
appear to be essential. Experiments in the pres-
ence of hydrogen are inconclusive because the
hydrogen reacted slightly with the Ip0; used to
determine CO. The fundamental reaction involved
is apparently CO + 2NaOH = NagCO3 + He.

The calculation and comparison of specific rates
of corrosion in natural waters: Ropert E. WI1L-
SON.
rosion in practically all natural waters at tem-

he writer makes use of the fact that cor-

426

peratures below 200° F. is substantially inde-
pendent of the hydrogen ion concentration and is
directly proportional to the oxygen concentration.
Specific rates of corrosion are then calculated in
terms of the weight of iron corroded per unit
area, per unit time, per unit concentration of
oxygen. Units are suggested for the. specific
rates of corrosion, and formule given for caleu-
lating these rates from data on (a) loss in weight
of test pieces and (b) drop in oxygen content of
water. By thus correcting for the effect of oxy-
gen concentration, ete., it is possible to compare
rates of corrosion under different conditions and
determine the precise effect of velocity, tempera-
ture, ete. It appears that the specific rates of
corrosion depend more on velocity than on any
other single factor and that the composition of
the metal and the hydrogen ion concentration are
generally unimportant in under-water corrosion.

A new method of measuring corrosion under
water. Investigation of effect of velocity: F. N.
SPELLER and V. V. KENDALL. Subaqueous cor-
rosion is nearly proportionate to the concentration
of oxygen dissolved in water, which fact is used
for measuring the amount of corrosion in the ex-
periments described. Water is passed through a
certain length of 44-inch, 14-inch and %4-inch
commercial steel pipe, uncoated, and the corrosion
is measured by the difference in concentratior of
dissolved oxygen. Time of contact was held con-
stant by varying the length of pipe. Velocities
from 49 foot per second to 8 feet per second
were obtained. Corrosion-velocity curves are given
for each size pipe, for temperatures ranging from
60° to 170° F. Corrosion is found to increase
with velocity in all cases, but at a decreasing
rate. Rate of corrosion accelerates rapidly with
rise in temperature over 90°, velocity and all
other conditions being constant. This method of
measuring corrosion is applicable to the imvesti-
gation of the influence of other factors on sub-
aqueous corrosion, such as composition of the
metal, character of the water, ete.

The action of sodiwm silicate when used in
soaps: A. 8. RicHarpson. The possible advan-
tages of sodium silicate in soap have been studied
under the following headings: Water softening
action; detergent action without admixture of
soap; and effect on emulsification power of soap.
The soap-sparing effect of sodium silicate varies
with the conditions of its use, being most pro-
nounced at high temperature and in hard water
high in magnesium salts, under which conditions
the amount of soap conserved may be more than

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

the chemical equivalent of the sodium silicate
used. Sodium silicate has probably no detergent
action when used without soap, except in so far as
free fatty acid is present in the wash. However,
sodium silicate increases the emulsifying power
of soap solutions, as shown by a decrease of the
surface tension of the soap solution toward a
mineral oil.

Counter-current digestion of wood by the soda
process: R. T. HastamM and W. P. Ryan. From
a consideration of the law of mass action, the
digestion of wood by the soda process seems to
offer a field for the application of the counter-
current principle. Ungerer, an Austrian chemist,
patented the equivalent of such a process in
1872, but no record is found of its commercial
application. Recent work has shown that by
passing the soda solution in counter-current direc-
tion to the wood chips the time required for
digestion can be decreased by one third to one
half that of the usual batch process, that the
yields on small scale equipments are from 2 to 10
per cent. lower, that a better bleaching pulp is
obtained and that the alpha (resistant) cellulose
content of the pulp is materially increased.

Factors influencing the efficiency of alkal-
chlorine cells: W. P. Ryan, C. T. Harpine and
R. P. Russet. A study of the effect of effluent
flow vs. current efficiency at four current densities
shows that the efficiency increases rapidly with
increased flow, approaching 100 per cent. asym-
photically. A plot of current density vs. effluent
flow at the guaranteed (92 per cent.) efficiency is
of especial interest to plants forced to run at
varying current densities because of the influence
of seasonal changes on power supply. The per-
formance of an Allen Moore cell was studied, and
the results show that increasing the effluent flow
increased the cathode current efficiency, the volt-
age and the energy efficiency, although the last
decreases as high flows are reached. Increasing
eurrent density decreases the efficiency and
increases the voltage at the rate of 0.01 volts per
amp. per square root. For 92 per cent. current
efficiency the salt conversion is very close to 50
per cent. For a given energy efficiency the flow
is directly proportional to the current density.
For a given current efficiency the flow is pro-
portional to the current density above 75 amp.
but falls off rapidly below that.

Physical properties of dental cements: PauL
POETSCHEE.

Filtration formulas: W. K. Lewis. The for-
mulas hitherto proposed for filtration in chamber

Ocrosrr 13, 1922]

and leaf presses completely fail to apply in the
case of sludges which are highly compressible and
those to which filter-aids have been added. Care-
ful experimental study of the problem has been
made and empirical formule developed which are
believed to be satisfactory for the problems of
engineering design.

Behavior of compressible sludges during filtra-
tion: M. P. Woopwarp and W. J. Epmonps.
Careful study has been made of the resistance to
flow of liquid through sludges of different types
as a function or pressure, pressure gradient and
time of filtration. On the basis of the experi-
mental results fundamental differential equations
have been derived. One method of solution of
these equations has been suggested.

The solvent properties of acetone: R. F. REeM-
LER. The paper takes up the following industrial
consideration regarding acetone as a solvent; uni-
formity of the present grade of acetone from
calcium acetate, boiling point and volatility,
freezing point, inflammability, dehydrating prop-
erties, miscibility with other solvents, use as a
coupling or bending agent between immiscible
solvents, relative eost per gallon, physiological
effects and recovery of vapors. The solubility of
acetylene, cellulose acetate and cellulose nitrate,
rosin and mineral oils, gums, resins, shellacs,
animal and vegetable oils, fats and greases, waxes,
asphalts and bitumens are discussed. Mention is
also. made of acetone in the dry cleaning and
leather industry as a constituent of paint, var-
nish and carbon removers.

Rosin determination in pine products: A. H.
VILBRANDT and Jamzs R. WirHrow. The deter-
mination of rosin in various mixtures, such as
pine oils, wood creosotes and kerosene mixtures
for materials used as fly chasers or in emulsions
for disinfectant purposes is a matter of well-
known importance. Results frequently reported
by manufacturers and consumers are discordant.
The writers have found, however, that the stand-
ard methods, with but slight modification for the
prevention of emulsions, give results which are
accurate easily within %4 of 1 per cent. and
sometimes much more accurate than this.

Some industrial uses of ozone: Erwin W.
FELKEL. The use of ozone in the industries has
not been widespread due to two reasons, viz.,
(1) A satisfactory source has not been obtain-
able, and (2) on account of the high cost of pro-
duction. For the past several years ozonizers
furnishing a large amount of ozone at a low con-
centration have been developed, and these ma-
chines have demonstrated their durability. The

SCIENCE 427

advent of the commercial ozonizer has opened two
fields for the industrial application of this gas:
(1) in places where a small amount of ozone will
accomplish the desired result and (2) in the pro-
duction of products that sell for a sufficiently
high price to justify its use. In the first class we
have the bleaching and oxidizing of vegetable
drying oils and the drying of paints and var-
nishes. In the second class is the production of
certain aromatic aldehydes and the production of
potassium permanganate. Small amounts of
ozone at low temperatures bleach an alkali re-
fined: linseed oil almost colorless, while if the tem-
perature be raised the major effect is one of
oxidation. The drying of varnishes is also an
effect of oxidation. This oxidation is antocata-
lytic and can be greatly hastened by the presence
of exceedingly small quantities of ozone in the
atmosphere of the drying room. The production
of vanillin is a straight chemical reaction in
which the ozonide of isoeugenol is made and sub-
sequently reduced. The production of potassium
permanganate is accomplished by oxidizing potas-
sium manganate in alkaline solution.

Methanol from methane: RatpH H. MckKrr and
StrpHrn P. Burxr. By passing methyl chloride
mixed with steam over slaked lime at 375° C.
there is obtained a 90 per cent. conversion into
methanol (65 per cent.) and methyl ether (25
per cent.). By passing steam and methyl ether
over aluminium oxide at 350° C., methyl ether is
half converted to methyl aleohol. By reworking
the residual methyl ether this conversion can, be
made complete. The presence of an inert gas,
é. g., methane, is not a hindrance to the process.
All operations are carried through without pres-
sure and can be arranged to work in a continuous
operation. Accordingly we have now available
‘to supplement our failing methanol supplies a
process which incompletely chlorinates a high
methane natural gas, hydrolyzes the methyl chlo-
ride content of same to methanol and methyl
ether and reworks the methyl ether to give a final
yield of methanol of 90 per cent. of the methyl
chloride first made.

The examination of writing inks: F. F. Rupert.
There is need of a system of examination of
writing inks which shall proceed on scientitc
principles and at the same time be related to the
needs of the average user of ink, and this paper
attempts to provide such a basis. The four quali-
ties of writing inks most desired are color, per-
manency, stability and non-corrosiveness, and
these should be given consideration in approxi-
mately equal degree. The relation of composition

428

’

of the ink to each of these properties has been
studied experimentally, and briefly summarized
results are given. The tests now in use by the
Bureau of Standards and others are recommended,
with modifications, with emphasis on the more
practical tests. A system of rating giving equal
weight to the four fundamental properties is sug-
gested. Only iron tannate ink is considered in
full, but the properties of other inks are dis-
cussed briefly.

Non-metallic inclusions: their influence upon
ferrite segregation in steel: E. G. Manin and
H. W. Borrs. In this paper is presented addi-
tional evidence to support the view that non-
metallic inclusions in steel are centers of zones of
segregation of soluble impurities, and that the
segregation of these impurities is the primary
cause of ferrite segregation. Giolitti’s recent
papers are discussed and his theory that only
“foxidized’’ inclusions have any effect upon
ferrite segregation is held to be untenable. Oxi-
dation rings and sulfide halos have been studied
and discussed in this connection, and photomicro-
graphs are reproduced to illustrate the points at
issue. H. M. Howe’s conception regarding the
mechanism of ferrite genesis is regarded as being
correct for all steels except those cooling fairly
rapidly from the liquid state.

The determination of various mono-hydric
phenols by the phenol reagent of Folin and Denis:
CARLETON HENNINGSEN. The phosphotungstic-
phosphomolybdie acid reagent of Folin and
Denis offers a means for the quantitative deter-
mination of a number of mono-hydrie phenols in
dilute aqueous solutions. The nature of the color
produced with these phenols fulfills most of the
requirements of a colorimetric method. The in-
tensity of the color produced is dependent upon
the concentration of the particular phenol in pure
aqueous solutions free from reducing agents.
B-naphthol and isoamyl phenol can be used as
satisfactory standards for color comparison and
offer an advantage over the much used ecarbolic
acid in that they are solids at ordinary tempera-
tures and can be weighed direct with ease.

The acid value of varnishes: Marks NEIDLE.
The correct determination of the acid value of
varnishes may be based upon two conditions:
(1) Tke varnish must be of low viscosity so that
on shaking with alcohol the distribution of the
acid ingredient between the alcohol and the var-
nish solvent may quickly reach equilibrium; (2)
If standard aqueous alkali is used for titrating,
after having added alcohol, the final concentra-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

tion of water in the alcohol layer should not be
greater than 30 per cent. or low results will be
obtained due to hydrolysis.

Propionic acid and ketones from whey: E. O.
Wuirtirr and J. M. Surrman. The factors
affecting the propionic fermentation of lactose
have been investigated and conditions determined
whereby approximately 2.4 pounds of propionic
acid and one pound of acetic acid may be obtained
from five pounds of lactose in twelve days’ ineu-
bation. A mixed culture of Bact. Acidi Pro-
pionici (d) and Lactobacillus Casei incubated at.
30° C. for three days is used for the inoculation
of the previously sterilized and buffered whey.
The mixture of propionate and acetate obtained
may be either converted into the free acids and
refined or distilled to yield a mixture of acetone,
methylethyl ketone and diethyl ketone.

Pittsburgh as an industrial center (historical) :
J. H. James. The greatest of Pittsburgh’s re-
sources is bituminous coal, upon which is built
the whole metallurgical development of the dis-
trict. The glass industry began developing some-
what before the iron, and has had an uninter-
tupted growth, until to-day its tonnage makes
this one of the greatest glass districts of the
world. In iron development the stages were pig
iron principally for foundry iron at first, puddled
iron, crucible steel, Bessemer steel, basic open
hearth steel. The fuel first used was charcoal,
then beehive coke, then natural gas for basie
open hearth steel, and to-day the trend is towards
by-product coke, utilization of the coke oven gas
in steel manufacture supplemented by producer
gas from bituminous coal, offsetting the decline
in natural gas. Secondary to the above group
are the iron and steel fabrication industries and
chemical industries. Most of the chemical indus-
tries are merely tributary to the iron and steel.

Governing factors on which paint consistency
depends—pigments flocculation one of the most
important: H&iNRY GREEN. The governing factors
on which yield value and mobility depend are the
viscosity of the vehicle, the pigment-vehicle ratio,
the force of flocculation in the pigment-vehicle
system and particle size of the pigment. As the
force of flocculation in the pigment is the most
important of the four factors, it is studied in
detail. The paper contains much valuable infor-
mation pertaining to paint manufacture.

Constants of rosin change after powdering:
F. P. Verrcn and W. F. Srrrpuinc. Samples of
various grades of rosin were powdered and kept
in stoppered bottles. Analyses at the start and

OctoBer 13, 1922]

after standing one week show a decided decrease
in the acid and iodine numbers and a decided
increase in the saponification number and melting
point. The percentages of unsaponifiable matter
remain constant. The results show that rosin
should be kept in lump form and powdered imme-
diately before the analysis is to be made in order
to prevent changes in its constants.

The effects of treating materials and outdoor
exposure upon the water resistance and tensile
strength of cotton duck: T. D. JaNnrLu and
H. P. Houman. Numerous samples of treat-
ed canvas were exposed to the weather for
six months under conditions unfavorable to mil-
dew and bacterial decay. Unexposed portions of
the same samples after the same length of time
showed little or no deterioration. With many of
the treatments developed by the Bureau of Chem-
istry the treated canvas showed very high water-
resistance after weathering. By adding certain
bituminous materials or mineral pigments to
treatments which, when used alone, gave the can-
vas low water-resistance after exposure, the
water-resistance was considerably increased. With
all of the treatments free from pigments the
treated canvas gave after exposure tensile
strengths lower than that of the untreated canvas
after exposure. The addition of mineral pig-
ments to certain waterproofing preparations which
caused decided weakening of the canvas when ex-
posed to the weather materially reduced such
effect in every instance and in some cases the
treated fabrie after exposure was stronger than
the untreated fabric after exposure. The results
indicate that the addition of mineral pigments to
waterproofing preparations is beneficial since they
reduce the weakening effect of solar light and
heat without reducing water-resistance.

A new form of precision hydrometer: C. W.
Foutx. This hydrometer consists of a glass float
moving freely in a glass tube carrying a suitable
scale. Between the float and the lower end of the
tube a light chain hangs in a catenary curve. The
float is ballasted so as to be in approximately
submerged floating equilibrium in the liquid to be
tested. The final adjustment to exact equilibrium
is automatically made by the action of the chain,
and this position of the float is then read on the
seale. With a properly calibrated instrument
density determinations accurate to one unit in
the fourth decimal place can Le made in a couple
of minutes.

Chemical corrosion of iron silicon alloys: A. K.
Smauiey. The desirability of using iron silicon

SCIENCE 429

alloys as universal resistant materials for chem-
ical construction and wherever there is a possi-
bility of chemical corrosion has been firmly estab-
lished. Their manufacture demands the use of
the best grades of material, the best foundry
practice and careful metallurgical control. Silicon
contents should be about 14.5 per cent. If it is
lower the acid resistant qualities of the metal
will be affected, and if it is higher the strength
is lessened and many manufacturing difficulties
are encountered. Other specifications are given
in the paper.

Furfural resins: Cart 8. Minrr, Joun P.
Trickry and Haroup J. BROWNLED.

Distillation of dilute ammonia solutions: G.
GaLINGarRT. In very dilute solutions ammonia
does not follow Henry’s law, the volatility being
progressively less as dilution increases. In con-
sequence the complete removal of ammonia from
ammonia water mixtures is rendered difficult.
Careful experimental determinations of the con-
stant of Henry’s Law demonstrate that the devia-
tion is due to dissociation and indieate that in
extreme dilutions there exists a constant boiling
mixture.

Causticization of soda ash: J. Harnor. Bxpe-
rimental determination is reported of the influence
of time, temperature and the amount and char-
acter of lime used in causticizing dilute soda ash
solutions upon the degree of conversion and the
rate of settling of the resultant sludge. The sig-
nificance of the results in design and operation of
causticizing plants is indicated.

Decomposition of nitrates: W. K. Lewis and
G. J. GREENFIELD. The thermal decomposition of
sodium nitrate into nitrate was studied in order
to secure data on the temperature coefficient of
the reaction rate constant of a completely homo-
geneous reaction at elevated temperatures. This
data was obtained, and it was furthermore
demonstrated that the conversion of nitrate to
nitrite is reversible, the reaction equilibrium
shifting to the nitrate side as temperature
increases. In consequence the reaction rate, after
the reaction has progressed to an appreciable
extent, is decidedly retarded by the reverse re-
action. The decomposition itself is monomolecu-
lar, but the character of the reverse reaction has
not yet been determined.

Potash from kelp. VIII—Theoretical consid-
erations pertaining to the preparation of potas-
sium chloride from kelp brines: J. W. Turren-
TINE and H. G. Tanner. Kelp brine contains,
after rectification, potassium and sodium chlo-

430

rides in the ratio of 20:7. These being the
principal constituents, the problem of manufac-
turing potassium chloride therefrom is that of the
separation of potassium and sodium chlorides.
This is accomplished by alternately evaporating
and cooling, the former precipitating the sodium
salt, and the latter the potassium salt, advantage
being taken of the wide difference in the tempera-
ture coefficients of solubility of the two. The
cooling is accomplished by boiling im vacuum.
The equilibria obtaining and their manipulation
for the most convenient operation of the system
and the manufacture of potassium chloride of
desired purity have been studied from the phase
rule point of view. Compositions at the various
points of concentration have been determined,
and methods of calculating these have been devel-
oped and applied to the practical operation of
the evaporating and crystallizing processes.

The chemical control of the Mexican cotton boll
weevil: Lruman Jounson. The U. 8. D. A.
method of dusting cotton plants with calcium
arsenate is an effective means of control, but
difficult, beyond the intelligence and skill of the
average cotton farmer. None the less, in the ab-
sence of any easier or more successful method up
to this time it deserves the endorsement of the
American Chemical Society as an excellent piece
of research work and the society’s encouragement
to simplify, standardize and make more general
the application of the method, probably needing
a special organization and a large body of trained
inspectors and coaches in the method. Compari-
son is drawn with Mississippi River flood preven-
tion.

DIVISION OF CELLULOSE CHEMISTRY

Harold Hibbert, Chairman
G. J. Esselen, Jr., secretary
Chemistry of Wood—VI: Results of analysis of
heartwood and sapwood of some American spe-
cies: G. J. Rirvrr and L. C. Fueck. The com-
parative chemical composition of heartwood and
sapwood of ten American species is given in the
paper. The results show that in general the cellu-
Jose and the lignin are higher in the sapwood of
the conifers, but that these same constants are
higher in the heartwood of the deciduous species.
The higher yields of cellulose and lignin in the
sapwood or in the heartwood of a given species
are accompanied by lower yields in extractives.
The acetolysis reaction applied to cellulose iso-

lated from a number of commercial woods:
Louis E. Wisr and Waurer C. RUSSELL. Cellu-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

lose was isolated from beech, birch, maple, aspen,
oak, pine, balsam, cedar and hemlock by alternate
chlorination and sodium sulfite treatments until
free from lignin. The cellulose was then con-
verted to ‘‘normal cellulose,’’ which was subse-
quently subjected to acetolysis. In each case
appreciable amounts of cellobiose octaacetate
were isolated and identified.

Factors influencing the properties of wood
cellulose as isolated by the chlorination method:
Mark W. Bray and T. M. Anprews. Certain
series of pulps made by keeping all cooking con-
ditions as constant as possible except time gave
values for alpha, beta and gamma cellulose that
did not lie in proper relation to each other. Un-
less the chlorination conditions are uniform in
the preparation of cellulose from these pulps the
character of the cellulose is affected. Therefore,
a study was undertaken of the conditions which
affect the character of the cellulose as expressed
in the per cent. alpha, beta and gamma cellulose.
It was found that increasing the temperature and
time of chlorination (over-chlorination) increases
the percentage of non-resistant cellulose in cello-
lose derived by the Cross and Bevan method.
There is very little beta cellulose in pulps or
wood before it is chlorinated for the preparation
of cellulose, except in decayed material. The
action of the organisms of decay in some cases is
similar to that of chlorination on the character
of cellulose. The copper number of cellulose is
a measure of the resistance of cellulose toward
17.5 per cent. sodium hydroxide solution, and also
of the amount of over-chlorination. The data
indicate that beta and gamma cellulose have the
same copper number.

The ratio, copper number of the cellulose
= constant.
per. cent. beta plus gamma cellulose

From the relation of the copper reduction capacity
of beta and gamma cellulose, the data indicate
that within every three CgH,)0; complexes there
is one aldehyde group.

An improved method for the determination of
alpha, beta and gamma cellulose: Mark W. Bray
and T. M. Anprews. A volumetric method for
the determination of alpha, beta and gamma
cellulose based upon the titration of the organic
material in Cross and Bevan cellulose has been
worked out. The separation of the resistant from
the non-resistant cellulose is carried out by treat-
ment with 17.5 per cent. NaOH, filtered by suc-
tion or centrifuged and washed. The alpha cellu-
lose is dissolved in 72 per cent. H)»SO, made up

OctoBER 13, 1922]

to 100 ec. in a granulated flask, an aliquot of
which is oxidized with standard KyCro07 solu-
tion; the excess KyCr207 is titrated with ferrous-
ammonium sulphate solution. The alkaline fil-
trate is divided into two equal portions. One
portion is acidified with dilute HjSO4, causing
the beta cellulose to precipitate. An aliquot of
the clear solution is oxidized as in the alpha cellu-
lose determination for the estimation of gamma
cellulose. The other portion of the alkaline
filtrate is used for determining beta plus gamma
cellulose. The value for beta cellulose is arrived
at by subtracting the result of the gamma cellu-
lose determination from that of the beta and
gamma determination. The volumetric method
gives a direct means for the estimation of these
three constants in determining the character of
the cellulose. Filtration and washing difficulties
of the gravimetric determination are practically
overcome. This method is more accurate and
can be carried out much more rapidly than the
gravimetric method of Cross and Bevan. Check
determinations can be made without repeating
the Cross and Bevan determination for preparing
cellulose, which procedure is necessary in the
gravimetric method.

The gelatinization of lignocelluloses: A. W.
Scuorcrr. It has been found that lignocelluloses
when ground in dilute alkaline solutions attain a
high degree of dispersion. The resulting gela-
tinous product when allowed to dry forms, with-
out pressure, a dense, horny mass having a spe-
cific gravity of 1.4-1.5, which is three to five
times greater than the apparent specific gravity
of the original wood. The peptonizing action of
alkali is particularly marked in the case of the
hardwoods in comparison with the conifers, the
difference being apparently due to the greater
hemicellulose content of the former. The cereal
straws gelatinize even more readily than woods
by the above treatment.

A study of the methoxyl distribution in the
products of the soda cook of jack pine (Pinus
divaricata): 8S. S. Aryan. This paper is a con-
tinuation of the work on the distribution of
methoxyl in the products of wood distillation pre-
viously reported. As the period of cook is length-
ened the methoxyl in the pulp gradually falls to
a minimum after two hours’ cook at maximum
pressure. Thereafter the loss of methoxyl is not
very appreciable. The liquor in its turn gains
the methoxyl corresponding to the loss in the
pulp so that all the methoxyl in the wood used
is found in the products at the end. The volatile
methoxyl derivatives in the liquor reach a maxi-

SCIENCE

431

mum in half an hour after attaining maximum
pressure, and then their quantity falls. There
seems to be a reversal of the equilibrium as the
strength of caustic falls and more woody matter
is dissolved in the lye. The figures for the lignin
and methoxyl contents of the pulp calculated to
percentage on the lignin and methoxyl content of
wood run parallel. This seems to be another con-
firmation for the theory that all the methoxyl is
associated with the lignin.

Mannose from white spruce cellulose: E. C.
SHERRARD. When white spruce wood is hydrolyzed
with dilute acid at atmospheric pressure the
quantity of cellulose removed corresponds to the
quantity of sugar produced. Since no mannan
can be isolated from the wood by the usual meth-
ods the mannose is probably present as a manno-
cellulose and not in the adsorbed state. Other-
Wise, it is difficult to advance an explanation of
the removal of a quantity of cellulose correspond-
ing to the sugars produced. The paper directs
attention to the presence of mannose as a product
of the hydrolysis of white spruce cellulose and
also to the fact that this sugar is distributed
through the alpha, beta and gamma. celluloses.
While the mannose is quite easily removed by
means of dilute acids a part of it withstands the
action of alkali and is even found in cellulose re-
precipitated from zine chloride-hydrochloric or
cuprammonium solutions. Mannose has been
found in the solutions resulting from the hydroly-
sis of white spruce cellulose prepared by the Cross
and Bevan method, and from soda, sulfate and
sulfite processes.

Experimental work on the development of a
theory of the protection of wood by preservatives:
E. BaremMan and ©. Henninesen. Practical
methods of preserving wood against the attack of
low forms of life require the injection of some
material which either inhibits or kills the attack-
ing organism. A working hypothesis on the pro-
tection of wood by preservatives is proposed. It
states that wood preservative must possess suffi-
cient solubility in water to produce a solution of
lethal concentration. When injected into wood as
an oil solution, the active ingredients are dis-
tributed in the ratio of their solubilities in water
and oil. ‘The paper, which includes new data on
the solubilities, solubility coefficient and toxicity
of mono-hydrie phenols, offers experimental proof
of the theory.

Notes on the rosin-sizing of paper. I. The
reactions between aluminium sulfate and sodium
resinate (rosin size) solutions: ALFRED TINGLE.
The experimental results obtained may be sum-

432

marized as follows: When solutions of these
compounds are mixed in stoichiometrical propor-
tions, precipitation of alumina and rosin is com-
plete. When a considerable excess of aluminium
sulfate is used the precipitate contains no resinate
but consists of free rosin acids with less than
their equivalent of free alumina. At certain con-
centrations all the alumina remains in solution,
rosin acids only being precipitated. Rosin acids
precipitated in this way (‘‘Rosin B’’) are not
in the same physical condition as when precipi-
tated by mineral acids. Addition of mineral acids
to this modification of rosin changes it to the
more common form (‘‘Rosin A’’). ‘‘Rosin B’’
is probably spongy rosin very thoroughly inter-
nenetrated with water.

Notes on the rosin-sizing of paper. II. The
process in the beating engine and at the wet end
of the paper machine: AL¥YRED TINGLE. As com-
monly carried out the reaction in the beater re-
sults in the deposition of rosin in the form of
‘CRosin B’? (see preceding paper) on the fibre
with less than its equivalent of alumina. Most
or all of the remaining free alumina is precipi-
tated as the result of subsequent dilution. That
alumina plays no essential part in the sizing is
shown by the fact that paper can be successfully
sized under such conditions that no alumina can
be deposited. Rosin acids can be precipitated
even by sulfuric acid in a condition closely resem-
bling ‘‘Rosin B’’ if at the same time another
precipitate is formed which will serve to keep
the rosin finely divided. In such circumstances
the rosin has sizing power. Investigation of the
changes in size as paper dries are required.

New methods for measuring the effects of tem-
perature and humidity on the dimensions of
paper: Haroup §. Davis. Where paper is used
for printing purposes its expansion or contraction
between imprints may cause blurring. It is,
therefore, of great importance to have a knowl-
edge of the magnitude of the changes in dimen-
sion and of the rates at which they take place.
A new apparatus is described in which the
humidity and temperature are susceptible to easy
control and in which the changes in dimensions of
different samples of paper may be accurately
measured.

Copper numbers of cotton linters: W. FP. HEN-
pERSoN. A brief description of the source and
properties of the material used is given. Samples
were treated with various kinds of acids of
increasing concentrations, and after washing and
drying the copper numbers of the linters were
determined. In the eases of strong acids a rapid

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1450

increase was noted in the copper values, but in
the cases of weak acids very little change oc-
eurred. Alkalies were used in the same manner,
and while the absorptive power of the linters
increased, the reducing power remained prac-
tically constant. Curves are shown for each series
of determination.

Change of viscosity in viscose: W. F. HENDER-
son. Linters were treated with increasing con-
centrations of nitric acid under uniform condi-
tions and afterwards the samples were washed
and dried. These products were converted into
viscose under exactly similar conditions, and the
viscosities of the solutions were measured. A very
sudden drop in viscosity was noted as is indi-
cated by a curve which is to be shown.

The determination of the viscosity of cwpro-
ammonium solutions: W. O. MitscHERLING.

The manufacture of standard cellulose: W. O.
MITSCHERLING.

Report of committee on the preparation of
standard cellulose.

Report of committee on analytical methods.
I. Methods of analysis of cotton cellulose.

Report of viscosity committee.

Symposium on the nature of wood cellulose:
Louis Wisk, B. Jounson, J. D. Run, EH. C. SuEr-
RARD and others.

Adsorption of salts by cellulose: WiupEr D.
Bancrorr. Though they merge one into another,
we can consider four cases—miscellaneous salts,
bases and acids, mordants and substantive dyes.
(1) We get a water-ring in filter paper with salts
of copper, lead, mereury, ete. We get peptization
of cotton by ammoniacal copper oxide, zine chlo-
ride, barium iodide, ete. (2) Barium, strontium,
calcium and lead hydroxides may be adsorbed so
strongly by filter paper from dilute solutions as
to introduce analytic errors. In mercerization
caustic soda is adsorbed and changes the strue-
ture of the cotton; but no compound is formed.
Mineral acids show no appreciable adsorption at
moderate concentrations by titration method. (3)
Cotton takes up alumina and chromic oxide only
from colloidal solutions. In presence of tannin
alum is decomposed. Tannin is adsorbed; but
must be fixed by antimony, because it is peptized
so readily by basie dyes. (4) Sodium and barium
salts of substantive dyes are adsorbed as such.
Being colloidal solutions the adsorption is
increased by electrolytes which decrease the sta-
bility; and is decreased when these electrolytes
coagulate the dye.

CHarLEes L. Parsons,
Secretary

New SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1451 Fripay, Octoser 20, 1922 SrnGLe Copres, 15 Crs.

Bausch & Lomb
Photomicrographic
Camera, Type F

A new photomicrographie camera, for use either horizontally
or vertically, with supports thoroughly braced to make it extremely
rigid in both positions. The very moderate price at which it is
offered places it well within the reach of any school or college
laboratory.

Designed for use with any standard make of compound micro-
scope, and can be used in making unusually large photographs, as
it accommodates 8 x 10-in. plates.

Rear camera frame is fitted with reversible
back with spring door; front frame equipped
with automatic shutter. Supplied with either
Mazda or Tungsare lamps.

Price, with Mazda lamp and transformer, for
110-volt current, without microscope, $235.00

Our new, complete catalogue of Photomicrographic Equipment has just come from the

press. If you are interested in this apparatus, we will be glad to send you a , COPY.

)

Bausch & Lomb Optical Company /*
409 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.

New York Washington Chicago San Francisco

Leading American Makers of Optical Measuring Instruments, Photomicrographic Apparatus,
Lenses, Microscopes, Projection Apparatus (Balopticons), Ophthalmic Lenses and Instru

iT
Range Finders and Gun-Sights for Army and Navy, Searchlight Reflectors, Stereo-Prism Sta ast

Binoculars, Telescopes, Magnifiers, Automobile Lenses and other High-Grade
Optical Products.

90 shat Instje>

yas)

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS —

ACCELERATION APPARATUS
NO. MM852—FALLING BODIES

New and Improved Form

This instrument is used to verify the law of falling bodies. It is designed par-
ticularly for use with college and university texts in which a very high degree of
accuracy is possible and errors due to mechanical imperfections have been practi-
cally eliminated. The apparatus in itself is similar in make to our No. 852A, but its
accuracy is much greater, due to the additional care as to methods of eliminating
friction. i

The carriage which carries the tuning fork is held between two upright highly
polished nickel plated rods. These rods are about 170 centimeters in height, and
are mounted on a heavy tripod base with leveling screws.

The tuning fork which is carried on this mounting is provided with a coil and
contact maker and binding posts, and is electrically driven, so that the same ampli-
tude of vibration is assured during all the time of. fall. The exact crest of wave
may, therefore, be more accurately located, even at the bottom of the plate.

The method of mounting the carriage within the space between the glass rods
eliminates friction almost entirely. The glass plate is made of heavy plate glass
and is mounted by a method holding it securely in position and yet enabling it to be
very easily removed. It may also be moved sidewise and thus allow several curves
to be traced on the same glass plate.

Two dash pots are provided on the base of the instrument to catch the descending
carriage and absorb the jar, and make it more lasting.

An additional feature of this design is the possibility of fitting a ball-bearing pul-
ley at the top. This enables determining the law of falling bodies with a diminished
rate in acceleration. This causes the rate of travel of the carriage to be very much
less. This enables the partial counterbalancing of the carriage on the opposite side
of the pulley. A weight which counterbalances the fork and carriage may be pro-
vided and an adjustable platform is arranged so as to add sufficient weight to pro-
duce uniform motion at any part of the path of descent of the carriage.

The apparatus is used in many universities and college laboratories and proves the
best of its kind for dealing with measurement of “g.”’ The percentage of errors
will not amount to more than 2%. In many cases it is less than 1% with careful
determinations. The high accuracy is due to the almost complete elimination of
friction. All parts are adjustable and furnish all possible latitude for making all
tests that may be needed.

The apparatus is complete with electrically driven tuning fork, contact maker, and
glass plate. It is made of the very best material and contains the best workmanship
and is very durable. Handsomely finished in black enamel and nickel plated rods
and trimming. With instruction sheets.

Ti

This apparatus is part of that specified in Millikan & Mill’s “Electricity,
Sound and Light,’ and Millikan’s “Mechanics, Molecular Physics and
Heat.” We can supply you with all of the equipment for these texts and
have prepared lists specially for the required equipment for these texts.
NOMNANCe Copies of these lists sent upon request.

MMs852A—ATWOOD’S ATTACHMENT for No. MM852 Acceleration Apparatus. Consists of a light aluminum wheel,
a counterbalance weight, extra weight for use as rider and an adjustable platform. The aluminum wheel
is mounted on ball bearings. The assembly of these parts is shown on the illustration No. MM&852B.

MMs852B—ACCELERATION APPARATUS AND ATWOOD’S MACHINE, combined. Consists of No. MM852 and
No. MM852A. Complete as shown.

MMs852C—EXTRA GLASS PLATE about 15 x 140cm. for No. MM852 or No. MM852B.

QUALITY rrr a ES a
A Sign of Quality ELCH| A Mark of Service
SERVICE

W. M. WELCH SCIENTIFIC COMPANY

Manufacturers, Importers and Exporters of
Scientific Apparatus and School Supplies

1516 Orleans Street : Chicago, Ill., U. S. A.

SCIENCE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal
Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

OctToBER 20, 1922

Vou. LVI No. 1451

CONTENTS

The British Association for the Advancement
of Science:

The Teaching -of Science: Sir RicHARD

GREGORY * 433
Frog and Toad Tadpoles as Sources of Intes-

tinal Protozoa for Teaching Purposes: ~

Proressor R. W. HEGNER.......20220202-1 439

Scientific Events:
Alexander Smith; The Total Solar Eclipse
of September 21; The Fiji-New Zealand
Expedition of the State University of
Iowa; The New England Intercollegiate
Geological Eacursion; Lectures of the
Lowell Institute; Installation of the Chan-
cellor of the University of Buffalo; The
Presidency of the Massachusetts Institute
if, IBCORTOUOG OY coset eerie ec 441
Scientific Notes and News..............--- 5
University and Educational Notes...
Discussion and Correspondence:
The Production of Species: Dr.
Starr JORDAN.

Davip
The Teaching of Evolu-

tion: J. Howarp Brown. Tingitide or

Tingide: Dr. H. M. Parsuuey. The

Vacuum Tube Amplifier in Academic

Work: Prorrssor RoswrLt H. JOHNSON.

Chemical Spelling: Dr. L. O. Howarp........ 448
Quotations:

IBiOlOGUCG SUGums asa e an nse eee = ca Were Mer 450

Scientific Books:
Newman’s Readings on Evolution, Genetics
and Eugenics: Proressor M. F. GuyYeEn...... 451
Special Articles:
Static Deflections of the Vacuum Gravita-

tion Needle: PROFESSOR CARL BARUS.......... 452
The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
TSE APATS ON Soccer sae cr oe en oe aN 453

The American Astronomical Society: Pro-
MESSOR MOLL) STEBBINS te seers eee 459

THE TEACHING OF SCIENCE!

THE prime claim of science to a place in the
school curriculum is based upon the intellee-
tual value of the subject matter and its appli-
cation to life. This conception of education
through science as the best preparation for
complete living was Herbert Spencer’s con-
tribution to educational theory; and to its influ-
ence the introduction of science into the school
is largely due. Spencer’s doctrine was in ac-
cord with the principles of Pestalozzi as to the
sequence in which facts and ideas should be
presented and be related to stages of develop-
ment, in order to be effective in creating or
fostering natural interests in the mind of the
child. Scientific instruetion implies, therefore,
not alone knowledge that is best for use in life,
but knowledge adapted to the normal course of
mental development. Both substance and
method should be judged by the criterion of
what is of greatest immediate worth or nearest
to the pupil’s interest at the moment. When
this standard of psychological suitability is
apphed to the school science courses now usu-
ally followed, it must be confessed that they
rarely reach it, many topics and much material
being remote from the pupil’s' natural interests
and needs.

The truth is that in the design of science
courses for schools “trial-and-error”? methods
have been followed. In the absence of accu-
rate knowledge these are the only possible
methods of construction, but sufficient is now
known of child psychology to produce a
scheme of scientific instruction which repre-
sents not merely the views of advocates of par-
ticular subjects, but is biologically sound be-
cause it is in accord with the principles of
mental growth, and, therefore, with those of

1 From the address of the president of the see-
tion of Educational Science, British Association
for the Advancement of Science, Hull, September,
1922.

434

educational science. When instruction in sci-
ence was first introduced into schools its char-
acter was determined by insight and conviction
rather than by mental needs or interests; -so
later, when practical work came to be regarded
as an essential part of such instruction, its
nature and scope represented what certain
authorities believed pupils should do, instead
of what they were capable of doing with intel-
ligence and purpose. Practical chemistry be-
came drill in the test-tubing operations of
qualitative analysis, and the result was so un-
satisfactory from the points of view of both
science and education that when Professor
Armstrong put forward a scheme of instruction
devised by him, in which intelligent experi-
mentation took the place of routine exercises,
acknowledgment of its superior educational
value could not be withheld, and for thirty
years its principles have influenced the greater
part of the science teaching in our schools.

In its aims the “heuristic” methods of study-
ing science energetically advocated by Pro-
fessor Armstrong were much the same as those
associated with the names of other educational
reformers. Education in every age tends to a
condition of scholasticism, and practical science
teaching is no exception to this general rule, its
trend being towards ritual, after which a revolt
follows in the natural order of events.
Comenius, with his insistence upon sense per-
ception as the foundation of early training—
“Leave nothing,” he said, “until it has been
impressed by means of the ear, ‘the eye, the
tongue, the hand.” John Dury among the
Commonwealth writers who urged that pupils
should be guided to observe all things and
reflect upon them; Locke, with his use of sci-
ences not to bring about “a variety and stock
of knowledge, but a variety and freedom of
thinking”; and Rousseau who would “measure,
reason, weigh, compare,” not in order to teach
particular sciences, but to develop methods of
learning them—all these were in different de-
grees apostles of the same gospel of education
according to Nature, and the development of a
scientific habit of mind as the intention of
instruction. What Rousseau persistently urged
in this direction was clearly formulated by
Spencer in the words, “Children should be led

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1451

to make their own investigations, and to draw
their own inferences. They should be told as
little as possible, and induced to discover as
much as possible’—principles which cover all
that is implied in what has since been termed
“heuristic” teaching.
- Professor Armstrong’s particular contribu-
tion to educational science consisted in the pro-
duction of detailed schemes of work in which
these principles were put into practice. Ideas
are relatively cheap, and it needs a master
mind to make a coherent story or useful strue-
ture from them. This was done in the courses
in chemistry outlined in reports presented to
the British Association in 1889 and 1890, and
the effect was a complete change in the methods
of teaching that subject. “The great mistake,”
said Professor Armstrong, “that has been made
hitherto is that of attempting to teach the ele-
ments of this or that special branch of science;
what we should seek to do is to impart the ele-
ments of scientific method and inculeate wis-
dom, so choosing the material studied as to
develop an intelligent appreciation of what is
going on in the world.” One feature of heuris-
tic instruction emphasized by its modern advo-
cate, but often neglected, is that which it pre-
sents to the teaching of English. Accounts of.
experiments had to be written out in literary
form describing the purpose of the inquiry and
the bearing of the results upon the questions
raised, and wide reading of original works was
encouraged. A few years ago English eompo-
sition was regarded as a thing apart from
written work in science, but this should not be
so, and most teachers would now agree with
the view expressed by Sir J. J. Thomson’s com-
mittee on the position of natural science in the
educational system of Great Britain that “All
through the science course the greatest care
should be taken to insist on the accurate use of
the English language, and the longer the time
given to science the greater ‘becomes the
responsibility of the teacher in this matter. . . .
The conventional jargon of laboratories, which
is far too common in much that is written on
pure and applied science, is quite out of place
in schools.”

When heuristic methods are followed in the
spirit in which they were conceived, namely,

Ocroper 20, 1922

that of arousing interest in common occur-
rences, and leading pupils to follow clues as to
their cause, as a detective unravels a mystery,
there is no doubt as to their success. No one
supposes that pupils must find out everything
for themselves by practical inquiry, but they
ean be trained to bring intelligent thought
upon simple facts and phenomena, and to de-
vise experiments to test ‘their own explanations
of what they themselves have observed. It is
impossible, however, to be true to heuristic
methods in the teaching of science and at the
same time pay addresses to a syllabus. <A
single question raised by a pupil may take a
term or a year to arrive at a reasonable an-
swer, and the time may be well spent in form-
ing habits of independent thinking about evi-
dence obtained at first-hand, but the work can-
not also embrace a prescribed range of scien-
tifie topies. Yet under existing conditions, in
which examinations are used to test attain-
ments, this double duty has to be attempted by
even the most enlightened and progressive
teachers of school science. . There can, indeed,
be no profitable training in research methods in
school laboratories under the shadow of exam-
ination syllabuses. Where there is freedom
from such restraint, and individual pupils can
be permitted to proceed at their own speeds in
inquiries initiated on their own motives, suc-
cess is assured, but in few schools are such con-
ditions practicable; so that, in the main, strict
adherence to the heuristic method is a policy
of perfection which may be aimed at but is
rarely reached.

A necessary condition of the research meth-
od of teaching science is that the pupils them-
selves must consider the problems presented to
them as worth solving, and not merely labora-
tory exercises. Moreover, the inquiries under-
taken must be such as can lead to clear conclu-
sions when the experimental work is accurately
performed. It may be doubted whether the
rusting of iron or the study of germination of
beans and the growth of seedlings fulfils the
first of these conditions, and the common adop-
tion of these subjects of inquiry is due to
custom and convenience rather than to recog-
nition of what most pupils consider to be worth
their efforts. It needed a Priestley and a
Lavoisier to proceed from the rusting of iron

SCIENCE

435

to the composition of air and water, and even
such an acute investigator as Galileo, though
well aware that air has weight, did not under-
stand how this fact explained the working of
the common suction pump. If research meth-
ods are to be followed faithfully, and what
pupils want to discover about natural facts and
phenomena is to determine what they do, then
teachers must be prepared to guide them in
scores of inquiries both in and out of the
laboratory. Under the exigencies of school
work it is impracticable to contemplate such
procedure, and all that can be usefully attempt-
ed is to lead pupils to read the book of Nature
and to understand how difficult it is to obtain a
precise answer to what may seem the simplest
question.

The mission of school science should not,
indeed, be only to provide training in scientific
method—valuable as ‘this is to every one.
Such training does cultivate painstaking and
observant habits, and encourages independent
and intelligent reasoning, but it can not be held
in these days that any one subject may be used
for the general nourishment of faculties which
are thereby rendered more capable of assimi-
lating other subjects. Modern psychology, as
well as everyday experience, has disposed of
this belief. If the doctrine of transfer of
power were psychologically sound, then as good
a case could be made out for the classical lan-
guages as for science, because they also may be
taught so as to develop the power of solving
problems and of acquiring knowledge at the
same time. When, therefore, advocates of par-
ticular courses of instruction state that they do
not pretend to teach science, but are concerned
solely with method, they show unwise indiffer-
ence to what is known about educational values.
Locke’s disciplinary theory—that the process
of learning trains faculties for use in any fields,
and that the nature of the subject is of little
consequence—can no longer be entertained. It
has now to be acknowledged that information
obtained in the years of school life is as im-
portant as the process of obtaining it; that, in
other words, subject matter as well as the doc-
trine of formal discipline must be taken into
consideration in designing courses of scientific
instruction which will conform to the best edu-
cational principles.

436

So long ago as 1867 the distinction between
subject and method was clearly stated by a
Committee of the British Association, which
included among its members Professor Huxley,
Professor Tyndall and Canon Wilson. It was
pointed out that general literary acquaintance
with scientific things in actual life and knowl-
edge relating to common facts and phenomena
of nature were as desirable as the habits of
mind aimed at in scientific training through
“experimental physics, elementary chemistry
and botany.” The subjects which the commit-
tee recommended for scientific information, as
distinguished from training, comprehended “a
general description of the solar system; of the
form and physical geography of the earth, and
such natural phenomena as tides, currents,
winds and the causes that influence climate;
of the broad facts of geology; of elementary
natural history with especial reference to the
useful plants and animals; and of the rudi-
ments of physiology.” If we add to this out-
line a few suitable topics illustrating applica-
tions of science to everyday life, we have a
course of instruction much more suitable for
all pupils as a part of their general education
than what is now commonly followed in second-
ary schools. It will be a course which will
excite wonder and stimulate the imagination,
will promote active interest in the beauty and
order of nature, and the extension of the king-
dom of man, and provide guidance in the laws
of healthy life.

The purpose of this kind of instruction is, of
course, altogether different from that of prae-
tical experiment in ‘the laboratory. One of
the functions is to provide pupils with a knowl-
edge of the nature of everyday phenomena and
applications of science, and of the meaning of
scientific words in common use. Instead of
aiming at creating appreciation of scientific
method by an intensive study of a narrow field,
a wide range of subjects should be presented
in order to give extensive views which can not
possibly be obtained through experimental
work alone. The object is indeed almost as
much literary as scientific, and the early lessons
necessary for its atitainment ought to be within
the capacity of every qualified teacher ot
English. Without acquaintance with the com-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1451

mon vocabulary of natural science a large and
increasing body of current literature is un-
intelligible, and ithere are classical scientific
works which are just as worthy of study in
both style and substance as many of the
English texts prescribed for use in schools.
We all now accept the view that science stu-
dents should be taught to express themselves
in good Nnglish, but little is heard of the equal
necessity for students of the English language
to possess even an elementary knowledge of the
ideas and terminology of everyday science,
which are vital elements in the modern world,
and which it is the business of literature to
present and interpret.

So much has been, and can be, said in favor
of broad courses of general informative science
in addition to laboratory instruction and les-
sons which follow closely upon it, that the
rarity of such courses in our secondary schools
is a little surprising at first sight. Their ab-
sence seems to be due to several reasons. In
the first place, the teachers themselves are
specialists in physics, chemistry, biology or
some other department of science, and they oc-
eupy their own territory in school as definitely
as Mr. Eliot Howard has shown to be the be-
havior-routine of birds in woods and _ fields.
You may, therefore, have a teacher of physics
who has taken an honors degree and yet knows
less of plant or animal life than a child in an
elementary school where nature study is wisely
taught; and, on ithe other hand, there are
teachers of natural history altogether unac-
quainted with the influence of physical and
chemical conditions upon the observations they
deseribe or the conclusions they reach. Naitural
science as a single subject no longer exists
either in school or university, and with its
division and sub-division has come a corres-
ponding limitation of interest. No man ean
now be considered as having received a liberal
education if he knows nothing of Ithe scientifie
thought around him, but it is equally true that
no man of science is scientifically educated un-
less his range of intellectual vision embraces
the outstanding facts and principles of all the
main branches of natural knowledge. It can-
not reasonably be suggested that this general
knowledge of science should be acquired by all

Ocroprr 20, 1922]

if teachers of science themselves do not possess
it. During the past thirty years or so there
has been far too much boundary-marking of
science teaching in school on account of the
specialized qualifications of the teachers. What
is wanted is less attention ito the conventional
division of science into separate compartments
designed by examining bodies, and more to the
whole field of nature and tthe scientific activities
by which man has itransformed the world; and
no teacher of school science should be unwilling
or unqualified to impart such instruction to his
pupils.

Where such teachers do exist, however, they
are compelled by the exigencies of examina-
tions to conform to syllabuses of which the
boundary lines are no more natural than those
which mark political divisions of countries on
a map of the world. All that can be said in
favor of the delimination of territory is that it
is convenient; the examiner knows what the
seope of his questions may be, and teachers
the limits of the field they are expected to sur-
vey with their pupils. While, therefore, it may
be believed that a general course of science is
best suited to the needs of pupils up to the
age of about sixteen years, examining authori-
ties recognize no course of this character, and
very few schools include it in the curriculum.
Expressed in other words, the proximate or
ultimate end of the instruction is not education
but examination, not the revealing of wide
prospects because of the stimulus and interest
to be derived from them, but the study of an
arbitrary group of topics prescribed because
knowledge of them can be readily tested. It
may be urged that this is the only practicable
plan to adopt if a science course is to have a
defined shape, and not, like much that passes
for nature study, merely odds and ends about
nature, without articulation or purpose. Ac-
ceptance of this view, however, carries with it
the acknowledgment that expediency rather
than principle has to determine the scope and
character of school science, which is equivalent
to saying that science has no secure place in
educational theory. I prefer to believe that a
school course of general science can be con-
structed which is largely informative and ai
the same time truly educational, but it must
provide what is best adapted to enlarge the

SCIENCE

437

outlook and develop the capacity of the minds
which receive it, and not be determined by the
facilities it offers for examinational tests.

A third reason for the relative absence of
general scientific education in schools is the
demands which the teaching might make upon
apparatus and equipment. Simple quantita-
tive work in physics, chemistry or botany can
be done in the laboratory with little apparatus,
and a single experiment may occupy a pupil
for several teaching periods. To attempt to
provide the means by which all pupils can ob-
serve for themselves a wide range of unrelated
facts and phenomena belonging to the biolog-
ical as well as to the physical sciences is obvi-
ously impracticable, and would be educationally
ineffective. Experiments carried out in the
laboratory should chiefly serve to train and
test capacity of attacking problems and arriv-
ing at precise results just as definitely as do
exercises In mathematical teaching. But knowl-
edge by itself, whether of quantitative or quali-
tative character, is not sufficient, and it be-
comes power only when it is expressed or used.
Every observation or experiment carries with
it, therefore, the duty of recording it clearly
and fully in words or computations, or both,
and if this is faithfully done laboratory work
of any kind may be made an aid to English
composition as well as an incentive to inde-
pendent inquiry and intelligent thought.

It is very difficult, however, to devise a lab-
oratory course of general science which shall
be both coherent and educative; shall be, in
other words, both extensive in scope and inten-
sive in method. I doubt, indeed, whether any
practical course can perform this double func-
tion successfully. Probably the best working
plan is to keep the descriptive lessons and the
experimental problems separate, using demon-
strations in the class-room as illustrations, and
leaving the laboratory work to itself as a means
of training in scientific method or of giving a
practical acquaintance with a selected series
of facts and principles. The main thing to
avoid is the limitation of the science teaching
to what can be done practically; for no general
survey is possible under such conditions. Even
if two thirds of the time available for scien-
tific instruction be devoted to laboratory expe-
riment and questions provoked by it, the

438

remaining third should be used to reveal the
wonder and the power and the poetry of scien-
tific work and thought; to be an introduction
to the rainbow-tinted world of nature as well
as provide notes and a vocabulary which will
make classical and contemporary scientific lit-
erature intelligible. If there must be a test of
attention and understanding in connection with
such descriptive lessons, because of the spirit
of indifference inherent in many minds—young
as well as old—let it be such as will show com-
prehension of the main facts and ideas pre-
sented and knowledge of the meaning of the
words and terms used. In this way descriptive
lessons may be used to provide material for
work and active thought, and light dalliance
with scientific subjects avoided.

It may be urged that no knowledge of this
kind has any scientifie reality unless it is de-
rived from first-hand experience, and this is
no doubt right in one sense; yet it is well to
remember that science, like art, is long while
school life is short, and that though practical
familiarity with scientific things must be lim-
ited, much pleasure and profit can be derived
from becoming acquainted with what others
have seen or thought. It is true that we learn
from personal experience, but a wise man
learns also from the experience of others, and
one purpose of a descriptive science course
should be to cultivate this capacity of under-
standing what others have described. As in
art, or in music, or in literature, the intention
of school teaching should be mainly to promote
appreciation of what is best in them rather
than to train artists, musicians or men of
letters, so in science the most appropriate
instruction for a class as an entity must be
that which expands the vision and creates a
spirit of reverence for nature and the power of
man, and not that which aims solely at training
seientific investigators. It should conform with
Kant’s view that the ultimate ideal of educa-
tion is nothing less than the perfection of
human nature, and not merely a goal to be ob-
tained by the select few.

The sum and substance of this address is a
plea for the expansion of scientific instruction
in this humanizing spirit, for widening the
gateway into the land of promise where the

_ SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

destinies of the human race are shaped. It is
the privilege of a president to be to some
extent pontifical—to express opinions which
in other circumstances would demand qualifica-
tion—and to leave others to determine how far
the doctrines pronounced can be put into prac-
tice in daily life. I do not, therefore, attempt
to suggest the outlines of courses of science
teaching for pupils of different ages, or for
schools of different types; this has been done
already in a number of books and reports,
among the latter being the report of Sir J. J.
Thomson’s committee on the position of natural
science, the report of the British Association
committee on science teaching in secondary
schools, Mr. O. H. Latter’s report to the Board
of Education on science teaching in public
schools, the “science for ‘all” report and sylla-
bus issued by the Science Masters’ Association,
a Board of Education report on “Some Expe-
riments in the Teaching of Science and Hand-
work in Certain Elementary Schools in Lon-
don,” and one prepared for the board by Mr.
J. Dover Wilson on “Humanism in the Con-
tinuation School.” What has been said in this
address as to the need for extending the out-
look of customary scientific instruction beyond
the narrow range of manual exercises, manipu-
dative dexterity, experimental ritual or incipi-
ent research, can be both ‘amplified and justi-
fied from these reports. I want science not
only to be a means of stimulating real and
eareful thinking through doing things, but also
a means of creating interest and enlarging the
working vocabulary of the pupils and thus
truly increasing their range of intelligence. So
may scientific instruction be made a power and
an inspiration by giving, in the words of the
Book of Wisdom (vii: 16-20):

an unerring knowledge of the things that are,
To know the constitution of the world and the
operation of the elements;
The beginning and end and middle of times,
The alternations of the solstices and the changes
of seasons,
The circuits of years and the positions of stars;
The nature of living creatures and the raging of
wild beasts,
The violences of wind and the thoughts of men,
The diversities of plants and the virtues of roots.

OctoBER 20, 1922

When school science has this outlook it will
lie closer to the human heart than it does at
present, and a common bond of sympathy will
be formed between ‘all who are guiding the
growth of young minds for both beauty and
strength. So will the community of educa-
tional aims be established and the place of
science in modern life be understood by a gen-
eration which will be entrusted with the task of
making a new heaven and a new earth. If
these trustees for the future learn to know
seience in spirit as well as in truth we may
look forward with happy confidence to the
social structure they will build, in which knowl-
edge will be the bedrock of springs of action
and wisdom will make man the worthy monarch
of the world.

RIcHARD GREGORY

FROG AND TOAD TADPOLES AS
SOURCES OF INTESTINAL PRO-
TOZOA FOR TEACHING
PURPOSES

Many teachers of protozoology and inverte-
brate zoology use frogs for the purpose of ob-
taining intestinal protozoa for class use, but it
does not seem to be generally known that the
tadpoles of frogs and toads are even more val-
uable than the adults as sources of material.
Unfortunately tadpoles are most abundant late
in the spring and in early summer when classes
are usually not in session, but two species of
frogs that are more or less common throughout
the United States pass two or more seasons in
the tadpole stage and hence are available in
the autumn and, in the southern part of the
country, at any time of the year; these are the
green frog, Rana clamitans, and the bullfrog,
R. catesbiana. The former is common through-
out eastern North Amerea, inhabiting swamps
and large and small ponds; the latter has a
similar distribution but is limited to swamps
and the larger and deeper ponds. Tadpoles
should be looked for in these habitats. The
identification of these, so far as their use as
material for intestinal protozoa is concerned,
is of little importance, but it may be stated here
that the tadpoles of the two species are very
similar and difficult to distinguish from each
other. Full descriptions of them are given by

SCIENCE

439

Wright (1914). A breeding place once found
will serve as a source of supply year after
year. Sample tadpoles should be collected
some time before the class meets so as to deter-
mine the incidence of infection and numbers
present of the various species of protozoa, since
this varies from year to year. The specimens
for class use may be collected several days
before they are needed ‘but should not be kept
in the laboratory for more than a week or two
since they tend to lose their infections under
laboratory conditions. The writer has found
dishes about ten inches in diameter and three
inches deep containing a quart of tap water
to be suitable for about twenty tadpoles each.
The dishes should not be covered with glass
plates, but the water should be changed every
day or two. Tadpoles may be killed very
quickly, as adult frogs usually are, by destroy-
ing the brain and spinal cord with a heavy
needle. The ventral body wall can then be
opened from the anterior to the posterior end.
The intestine is coiled within the body cavity,
being several hundred millimeters in length.
The rectum, or posterior portion of the ali-
mentary tract, is tightly coiled and is separated
from the intestine by a constriction. The dif-
ferent species of intestinal protozoa are rather
definitely distributed within the intestine and
rectum. The anterior portion of the intestine
is inhabited by a flagellate, Giardia agilis; in
various parts of the intestine and rectum Hnda-
meba ranarum may be found; the rectum is
the principal habitat of two genera of ciliates,
Opalina and Nyctotherus, of two genera of
flagellates, Trichomonas and Heaamitus, and
of several green flagellates resembling members
of the genera Euglena and Phacus. To study
any of these species in the living condition,
the part of the digestive tract containing them
should be teased out in a drop of 0.7 per cent.
salt solution and covered with a cover glass.
Any of the species mentioned can be found
with low magnification, such as obtained with
a 16 mm. objective and a number 5 ocular. To
study the details of most of these protozoa,
however, the Schaudinn iron-hemotoxylin
method is necessary. This in brief is as fol-
lows: Spread the intestinal or rectal contents
in a thin layer over about one half the area of

440

a 3x1 glass slide. Before this has a chance to
dry drop it face downward into a dish con-
taining Schaudinn’s fixing solution. This is
made up of a saturated solution of mercuric
chloride in distilled water, 200 e.ce.; 95 per
cent. alcohol, 100 ¢.c.; and glacial acetic acid,
15 ¢.c. Leave in this solution for about ten
minutes. The slide should then be treated by
the well-known iron-hemotoxylin method (70
per cent. alcohol plus iodin, 30 minutes to 24
hours; water, a few minutes; four per cent.
aqueous solution of iron alum, 1 to 4 hours;
rinse in water; 0.5 per cent. aqueous solution
of hemotoxylin, 4 to 24 hours; rinse in water;
differentiate in itwo per cent. iron alum; wash
thoroughly; dehydrate; mount).

Giardia agilis inhabits the anterior portion
of the intestine. First observed by Kunstler
in 1882, it has recently been studied in detail
(Hegner, 1922). When alive it looks like a
minute, slender tadpole and undergoes ex-
tremely rapid wriggling movements which no
doubt suggested its specific name. When fixed
and stained as suggested above it exhibits
bilateral symmetry, with two nuclei, four pairs
of flagella with intracytoplasmic portions, a
pair of axostyles, and one or several parabasal
bodies. Another species of this genus, Giardia
lamblia, occurs in about 12 per cent. of human
beings (Hegner and Payne, 1921). This spe-
cies, which ‘has been carefully studied and
described by Simon (1921, 1922), is considered
by some to be responsible for serious intestinal
disturbances, but may be present in apparently
healthy persons.

Trichomonas augusta is confined principally
‘to the rectum, although it occurs occasionally
in the intestine of the tadpole. This flagellate
may be recognized by its jerky movement.
When the living animal is examined with high
magnification its active undulating membrane,
along the outer edge of which is fastened a
flagellum,: can be seen; waves of motion start
at the anterior end and pass posteriorly to the
end of the body. Such an undulating mem-
brane is characteristic of certain parasitic pro-
tozoa. The pointed extension of the rod-like
axostyle may also be seen protruding from the
posterior end. When fixed and stained a single
nucleus, three anterior flagella, the undulating

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1451

membrane, axostyle and mouth are clearly re-
vealed. A species of Trichomonas, T. hominis,
that occurs in man is similar in appearance to
that in the tadpole but does not stain well and
hence its structure is difficult to determine.
Trichomonads that have been recorded from
man are 7. hominis, in the intestine; 7. vagina-
lis, in the vagina; and ZT’. buecalis, in the mouth.
The intestinal form has been found in about
three per cent. of the human beings examined.

Hexamiius intestinalis is a very minute spe-
cies with two nuclei, and four anterior and two
posterior flagella. It is an active swimmer and
moves rapidly across the microscopic field. It
differs from Trichomonas in the absence of a
mouth and probably takes in its food through
the surface of the body. No species of this
genus are known from man.

Nyctotherus cordiformis is a very large
ciliate that is often found in the rectum of
tadpoles. It appears to ‘be a scavenger and
resembles Paramecium in structure and in its
primary life processes. A species of this
genus, NV. faba, has been recorded from man.

Opalina ranarum is also a large cihate that
is a frequent inhabitant of the rectum of tad-
poles. This and other species of Opalina that
also may be encountered in this habitat are
especially interesting because of their poly-
nuclear condition and absence of an oral aper-
ture, food being absorbed through the body
wall. The variations in nuclear number and
structure in various members of the Opalinide
are of particular interest (Metcalf, 1914). The
value of these protozoa with respect to prob-
lems of geographical distribution has been em-
phasized by Metcalf (in press).

Balantidium entozoon is an inhabitant of the
rectum of certain frogs. It has not been found
by the writer in tadpoles, but probably occurs
in ‘them in certain localities. Its mouth is situ-
ated near the anterior end instead of forming
a large conspicuous crescent near the center of
the body as in Nyctotherus. A human species
of Balantidium, B. coli, although not very
common, is sometimes very pathogenic, causing
intestinal ulcers and frequently bringing about
the death of the host. \

Endameba ranarum is a species that is often
abundant in tadpoles. It is of particular in-

Ocrober 20, 1922]

terest because of its close resemblance to E.
histolytica, which causes dysentery in man, and
has been found in about nine per cent. of all
human beings examined.

Recently the writer has discovered Euglena-
like flagellates in the rectum and intestine of
tadpoles. One species has many of the char-
acteristics of free living Huglene including
green chromatophores, a reservoir and a red
stigma. This species possesses three flagella.
Another species resembles Huglena spirogyra
and a third species is similar to Phacus pleuro-
nectes.

The following references contain detailed
information coneerning some of the organisms
mentioned above:

Tadpoles. Wright, A. H., 1914.
Carnegie Inst. of Wash., pp. 1-98.

Intestinal protozoa of frogs and toads. Dobell,
C., 1909. Quar. Journ. Mic. Sci., 53: 201-266.

Intestinal protozoa of man. JDobell, C., and
O’Connor, F. W., 1921. Pp. 1-211.

Intestinal protozoa of man. Hegner, R. W.,
and Payne, G. C., 1921. Scientific Monthly, pp.
47-52.

Intestinal protozoa of man. MHegner, R. W.,
and Cort, W. W., 1921. Pp. 1-72.

Giardia agilis. Hegner, R. W. Amer. Journ.
Hygiene, 2: 435-441.
Giardia lamblia.
Hygiene, 2: 406-434.

Trichomonas augusta.
Swezy, O., 1915. Proc. Amer.
Sct., 51: 289-378.

Nyctotherus cordiformis. Bezzenberger, O.
1904. Arch. f. Protist., 3: 138-174.

Opalina ranarwm. Metcalf, M. M., 1909. Arch.
f. Protist., 13: 195-375.

Opalina ranarum. Metcalf, M. M., 1914. Zool.
Auz., 44: 533-541.

Balantidiwm entozoon. Bezzenberger, O., 1904.
Arch. f. Protist., 3: 138-174.

R. W. Hicner

JOHNS HopkKINS UNIVERSITY

Pub. 197,

an

Simon, C. EH. Amer. Journ.

Kofoid, C. A., and
Acad. Arts and

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
ALEXANDER SMITH
THe New York Section of the American
Chemical Society having appointed a com-
mittee, consisting of Professors Thomas B.
Freas, Ralph H. McKee and James Kendall,
chairman, to draw up resolutions in memory

SCIENCE

441

of the late Professor Smith, the following reso-
lutions were prepared and approved by the
section on October 6:

Whereas, By the death of Alexander Smith at
Edinburgh on September 8, 1922, the American
Chemical Society has been deprived of a past
president and the New York Section has lost one
of its most highly esteemed members:

And whereas, Although the work of Alexander
Smith as a teacher, as an administrator, and as
an investigator in chemistry survives as an en-
during monument to his name, yet it is none the
less our privilege to put on record in the minutes
of the section our sincere appreciation of his out-
standing scientific genius and of his rare per-
sonal integrity and charm;

Be it therefore resolved, That the New York
Section of the American Chemical Society express
its profound regret at the passing of this distin-
guished leader in chemistry, who by his labors
has added luster to science both in the land of his
birth and in the land of his adoption;

And be it further resolved, That copies of this
memorandum be forwarded to his widow and to
his sister, with the respectful sympathy of the
section.

TOTAL SOLAR ECLIPSE OF
SEPTEMBER 21

Dr. A. C. D. CRoMMELIN, writing in Nature,
says that the failure of the Christmas Island
eclipse expedition is a great astronomical dis-
appointment. Messrs. Jones and Melotte have
devoted ten months or more to it, and hoped to
secure useful photometric results for connectng
the northern and southern stellar magnitude
scales in addition to the eclipse work. The
climate, however, proved unexpectedly unfavor-
able, and practically nothing could be done.

On the other hand, the conditions appear to
have been ideal right across Australia, and en-
thusiastic reports have come from Wollal (West
Coast), Cordillo Downs (center) and Goondi-
windi and Stanthorpe (Queensland). The
Hinstein problem was studied at Wollal by the
Lick Observatory party under Professor Camp-
bell, and that from Toronto under Professor
Chant. Mr. Evershed also finally selected this
station in preference to the Maldives, and is
believed to have undertaken the same investiga-
tion, in addition, doubtless, to spectroscopic
Professor Dodwell, the government as-

THE

work.

442

tronomer at Adelaide, had the use at Cordillo
Downs of a tower telescope lent by the Lick
Observatory for the Hinstein problem; the
New South Wales astronomers were in
Queensland and did some spectroscopic work;
they intended also to make Hinstein investiga-
tions, but the telegrams do not allude to these.

It is well to point out that the test of the
Einstein theory does not depend wholly on the
results of this eclipse. The plates secured in
the 1919 eclipse at Principe and Sobral settled
definitely that at least the half-shift was pres-
ent, while the two cameras with the best defini-
tion gave values very close to the Hinstein
value. Further, the star-field in that eclipse
was the best along the whole extent of the
ecliptic, the stars in the present eclipse being
much fainter. There are, however, two circum-
stances that should add weight to this eclipse:
(1) that some of the observers were pointing
directly on the stars, avoiding the use of a
celostat or other mirror; (2) that the plan was
being tried of photographing another star-field
during totality, thus obtaining an independent
seale-value for the plates, which gives a much
larger coefficient to the Hinstein displacement
in the equations of condition.

Probably weeks or months must elapse before
the Einstein results are to hand. The corona is
said to have had four long streamers, one ex-
tending to three solar diameters, which is more
than the average, though by no means a record.
Professor Chant reports that the shadow bands
were photographed. Professor Kerr Grant, of
Adelaide University, made measures at Cordillo
by the photo-electric cell of the relative bright-
ness of the sun and the corona. The results,
with this very sensitive instrument, should be
more trustworthy than previous determinations.

The next two total eclipses (1923, September,
and 1925, January) are visible in the United
States; 1926, January, in Sumatra, ete. and
1921 in England and Norway.

THE FIJI-NEW ZEALAND EXPEDITION OF
THE STATE UNIVERSITY OF IOWA
Tus Fiji-New Zealand party from the Uni-
versity of Iowa arrived in San Francisco on
September 4 by the Pacific steamer Tahiti. This
expedition was organized by Professor C. C.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

Nutting, head of the department of zoology of
the University of Iowa, and included the fol-
lowing additional members from the faculty of
that institution: Professor Robert B. Wylie,
botanist; Professor A. O. Thomas, geologist;
Dr. Dayton Stoner, entomologist, and Mr.
Waldo Glock, assistant in geology. Mrs. Day-
ton Stoner, wife of Professor Stoner, accom-
panied her husband and assisted in the work
with insects. The party left Vancouver on the
Niagara on May 19, and after spending five
weeks in Fiji went on to New Zealand for a
like period, working mainly in North Island.

The expedition was greatly aided by the offi-
cials of these islands, with whom Professor
Nutting as director had made preliminary ar-
rangements by correspondence. Considerable
collections were secured by each member of the
party in his own field, including both illustra-
tive and research material. Several hundred
negatives were secured which will be used as a
basis of illustration in lectures and publica-
tions. The Dominion Museums, both at Auck-
land and Wellington, New Zealand, were espe-
cially helpful; they extended to the party use
of their buildings as temporary laboratories,
offered helpful cooperation at all times, and
contributed, many valuable specimens to the
University of Iowa Museum. Their gifts
included four living and two preserved Spheno-
dons.

THE NEW ENGLAND INTERCOLLEGIATE
GEOLOGICAL EXCURSION

THE eighteenth annual New England Inter-
collegiate Geological Excursion was held in the
vicinity of Springfield and Northampton,
Massachusetts, on the sixth and seventh of
October. Professor J. W. Goldthwait, of Dart-
mouth College, and Dr. Ernst Antevs, of the
University of Stockholm, were the leaders. Dr.
Antevs, who has continued the work of Baron
de Geer since the latter’s return to Sweden,
demonstrated the field methods which have led
him to important conclusions concerning the
glacial history of New England. His chief
conclusions are (1) that the Wisconsin ice-
sheet retreated from Hartford, Connecticut, to
the northern border of Vermont in a period of
approximately 4,000 years; (2) that this time

Octosrr 20, 1922]
interval can not be correlated definitely with
the period of 13,500 years which, according to
de Geer, is the approximate number of years
ago at which the last ice-sheet started to retreat
across southern Sweden; (3) that an isostatic
bulge made a freshwater lake of Long Island
Sound during the last glacial period; and (4)
that the axis of post-glacial tilting lies in the
vicinity of Hartford, the dam holding back the
lake in Long Island Sound between Fisher’s
Island and Long Island having been sub-
merged approximately 200 feet in post-glacial
time, or tilted southward from New Haven
approximately eight feet to the mile.

Sixteen New England colleges and institu-
tions, as well as the United States Geological
Survey, were represented on the excursion.
The list of institutions is Amherst (1), Brown
(2), Clark (2), Colby (1), Dartmouth (1),
Hartford High (2), Harvard (2), Massachu-
setts Agricultural (1), Mount Holyoke (3),
Smith (6), Springfield Schools (1), Trinity
(1), University of Stockholm (1), University
of Vermont (1), United States Geological Sur-
vey (1), Wesleyan (2), Williams (5), Yale
(7), unattached (1). The total attendance
was, therefore, 41.

LECTURES OF THE LOWELL INSTITUTE

Aone seven courses of Lowell lectures to
be given during the present season are the
following:

A course of eight lectures by Harlow Shap-
ley, Ph.D., Paine professor of astronomy at
Harvard Unversity and director of the Harvard
College Observatory, on “The Content and
Structure of the-Sidereal Universe.” 1. The
Problems of Modern Astronomy. 2. Space,
Time and Starlight. 3. Stars and Atoms. 4.
Stellar Variation and Evolution. 5. Measuring
the Milky Way. 6. Nebule and Island Uni-
7. Origin of the Earth. 8. Life and
Tuesdays and Fridays

verses.
the Physical Universe.
at 8 o’clock in the evening, beginnng Tuesday,
October 24.

A course of eight lectures by Edwin Grant
Coriklin, Ph.D., Se.D., professor of biology in
Princeton University, on “The Revolt against
Darwinism.” 1. Evolution, Historical and Ex-

SCIENCE

443
perimental. 2. The Materials of Evolution.
3. The Réle of Selection in Species Formation.
4, The Cellular Basis of Heredity. 5. The Cel-
lular Basis of Development and Evolution.
6. Directions and’ Rates of Evolution. 7. The
Mechanism of Adaptation. 8. Mechanism and
Teleology. Wednesdays and Mondays at 8
o’clock in the evening, beginning on Wednes-
day, November 22, and omitting Wednesday,
November 29.

A course of six lectures by A. Hamilton
Rice, A.M., M.D., on “Journeys and Explora-
tions in Tropical South America.” 1. Physical
Outlines of South America. Desiderata in Ex-
ploration. Some Notes on South American
Hydrography. 2. Historical. Quito to the
Amazons by the River Napo, the Route of
Pizarro and Orellana. Caracas to Bogota by
the Route of Bolivar and the Foreign Legion
across the Venezuelan Lianos and the Colom-
bian Andes. 38. Bogota and Exploration of
the River Calaro-Uaupes, the Great West Afflu-
ent of the Rio Negro. 4. Further Explorations
of the N. W. Amazons Valley, including the
Seurces of the Caqueta and the Rivers Inirida
and Icana. 5. The Great Rio Negro (Ama-
zons). 6. The Casiquiare Canal and the Upper
Orinoco. Fridays and Tuesdays at five o’clock
in the afternoon, beginning on Friday, Deéem-
ber 1.

A course of six lectures by W. J. V. Oster-
hout, Ph.D., professor of botany, Harvard
University, on “The Nature of Life and
Death.” 1. Growth. 2. Reproduction and Mo-
3. Irritability. 4. Constructive Metabol-
ism. 5. Destructive Metabolism. 6. Perme-
ability. Thursdays and Mondays at 8 o’clock
in the evening, beginning on Thursday, Janu-
ary 4.

tion.

INSTALLATION OF THE CHANCELLOR OF
THE UNIVERSITY OF BUFFALO

Dr. SamunL Paun Capen, director of. the
American Council on Education since its or-
ganization in 1919, resigns this month to become
chancellor of the University of Buffalo. . This
institution more than a year ago conducted an
endowment fund campaign in which. 26,000
citizens contributed more than $5,000,000. Dr.

444

Capen, as the new head of the institution, will
have charge of developing the greater univer-
sity. Its enrollment this fall totals 1,670 in
the colleges of medicine, law, pharmacy, chem-
istry, arts and dentistry.
bers 262.

Dr. Capen will be installed as chancellor on
Saturday, October 28. Between fifty and sev-
enty-five of the best known leaders in education
in the United States and Canada will attend as
delegates from the colleges and universities
with which they are connected. Speakers at
the inaugural will include President Albott
Lawrence Lowell, of Harvard; President Liv-
ingston Farrand of Cornell; President John A.
Cousens, of Tufts; Sir Richard Faleoner, of
the University of Toronto; Dr. Frank P.
Graves, New York state commissioner of edu-
cation, and Governor Nathan L. Miller, of New
York.

Following the installation of Dr. Capen and
luncheons for men and women delegates at the
University and Twentieth Century Clubs, re-
spectively, there will be a flag-raising at Rotary
Athletic Field just before the Buffalo-Clarkson
foot-ball game. Rotary Field was made pos-
sible by contributions of Rotary Club members
over and above what-they otherwise contributed
to the endowment fund. This field will be part
of the campus. The inaugural dinner will be
held in the evening.

On Friday afternoon, October 27, exercises
will be held for dedication of Foster Hall, the
new chemical laboratory of the University of
Buffalo. Following an academic procession,
the dedication will take place. Funds for eree-
tion of the building, which cost upwards of
half a million dollars, were contributed during
the endowment fund campaign by O. E. Foster,
a Buffalo philanthropist.

The laboratory is the first of the buildings
to be erected on the new 150-acre site to which,
ultimately, all the university departments and
activities will be transferred. It is located at
the northern end of the city, amid beautiful
surroundings, and is an ideal location for devel-
opment of the greater University of Buffalo.

The expansion program of the University of
Buffalo comes as an incident in its long record
of usefulness, which started when Millard Fill-

The faculty num-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451
s

more, thirteenth president of the United States,
was its first chancellor seventy-five years ago.

Dr. Capen, the son of a former president of
Tufts College, commenced his career as instruc-
tor, assistant professor and then full professor
in modern languages in Clark College, Worces-
ter. Next he was professor of German and
lecturer on educational administration in Clark
University. He was a member of the Worces-
ter school board from 1908 to 1914 and special-
ist in higher education in the U. 8. Bureau of
Edueation from 1914 to 1919, when he accept-
ed directorship of the American Council on
Edueation.

THE PRESIDENCY OF THE MASSACHUSETTS
INSTITUTE OF TECHNOLOGY

Dr. Samuet Westey Stratton, for twenty-
one years director of the Bureau of Standards
at Washington, was elected president of the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology on Octo-
ber 11. He will assume the position on Janu-
ary 1.

The institute has been without an executive
head since the death of Dr. Richard C. Mae-
Laurin in January, 1920. Dr. Ernest Fox
Nichols was elected president in 1921, but was
foreed by ill health to resign a few months later
without having served in office. A committee
of faculty and corporation members has carried
on the administrative work.

Dr. Stratton was born in Litchfield, Ill., in
1861, and was graduated in 1884 from the Uni-
versity of Illinois, where he later became pro-
fessor of physies and electrical engineering.
From 1892 to 1901 he was professor of physics
in the Unversity of Chicago.

As head of the Bureau of Standards he has
built up from a small office of weights and
measures employing three or four persons a
bureau which occupies a dozen buildings and
has a staff of more than 900 employees. The
bureau is closely aligned with the industries of
the country, aiding them in research work and
development of methods of precision.

Dr. Stratton has received the honorary de-
gree of doctor of engineering from the Univer-
sity of Illinois and that of doctor of science
from the Western University of Pennsylvania,
the University of Cambridge and from Yale

OctoBER 20, 1922]

University. He was made a Chevalier of the
Legion of Honor in 1909.

The New York Times reports that Secretary
Hoover, commenting on the resignation of Dr.
Stratton, said:

The loss of Dr. Stratton as head of the Bureau
of Standards is a real national loss. He has built
up that service from a bureau devoted to scientific
determination of weights and measurements to a
great physical laboratory cooperating with Amer-
ican industry and commerce in the solution of
many problems of enormous value in industry
which the commercial laboratories of the country,
from lack of equipment and personnel, have been
unable to undertake.

While the Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology is to be congratulated on securing Dr.
Stratton, one can not overlook the fact that the
desperately poor pay which our government gives
to great experts makes it impossible for us to
retain men capable of performing the great
responsibilities which are placed upon them.

The Massachusetts Institute of Technology, an
educational institution, finds no difficulty in pay-
ing a man of Dr. Stratton’s ealibre three times
the salary the government is able to pay him.

Dr. Stratton has repeatedly refused large offers
before, but the inability of the scientific men in
the government to properly support themselves
and their families under the living conditions in
Washington, and to make any provision fer old
age, makes it impossible for any responsible de-
partment head to secure such men for public
service at government salaries.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

On October 5 the new biological building of
McGill University, erected at a cost of over
$500,000, was formally opened. The exercises
were presided over by the principal, Sir Arthur
Currie. Sir Charles Sherrington, P.R.S.,
Waynfleet professor of physiology at Oxford
University, gave the opening address. He was
followed by Dr. Harvey Cushing, of Harvard
University. Lectures were also given by Dr.
H. J. Hamburger, professor of physiology,
University of Groningen, Netherlands, who
spoke on “A new form of correlation between
organs,” and by Dr. John M. Coulter, pro-
fessor of botany of the University of Chicago,
whose subject was “The botanical perspective.”

SCIENCE

445

Tue Faraday Medal of the British Institu-
tion of Electrical Engineers, the first award of
which was made by the council in the early
part of the year to Mr. Oliver Heaviside, was
personally presented to him by Mr. J. 8. High-
field, president of the institution, at Torquay,
on September 9.

Tue University of Leeds has conferred the
honorary degree of doctor of science on Sir
Charles Scott Sherrington, the Due de Broglie,
Paris; Dr. C. G. Joh. Petersen, director of the
Danish Biological Station, Copenhagen, and
Professor P. Weiss, director of the Physical
Laboratory, University of Strasbourg.

Mr. Gano Dunn, president of the J. G.
White Engineering Corporation of New York
City, and second vice-chairman of the National
Research Council, has been appointed a dele-
gate from the Research Council to the Pan-
Pacifie Commercial Conference meeting in
Honolulu from October 25 to November 7.

Dr. Martin H. Fiscuer, professor of physi-
ology in the University of Cincinnati, has been
elected a foreign member of the Leopold-
inisch Carolinische Akademie of Halle, in the
Division of Scientific Medicine.

Dr. Outver Bowtes, of the United States
Bureau of Mines, has been admitted as an hon-
orary member of the Institution of Quarry
Managers of Great Britain.

Ar a recent meeting of the Committee on
Science and the Arts of the Franklin Institute,
an award of the Howard N. Potts Medal was
granted to Dr. Charles Raymond Downs and
Mr. John Morris Weiss of New York “in con-
sideration of their notable achievement in the
scientific and commercial development of the
catalytic vapor-phase oxidation of benzene to
maleic acid and their pioneer work in develop-
ing a commercial process for changing aromatic
to aliphatic compounds.”

Proressor Hippr, who was for many years
director of the Hygienic Institute in Prague,
celebrated, on Aug. 24, his seventieth birthday.

A Mryricke ScHoLarsHip at Jesus College,
Oxford, open to graduates of the University of
Wales and of St. Davids College, Lampeter,
has been awarded to Leon Rubinstein, of Uni-

446

versity College, Aberystwyth, with a view to
research in chemistry.

Dr. J. A. Detiersen, who has leave of ab-
sence from the Unversity of Illinois, will spend
the coming year at the Wistar Institute of
Anatomy and Biology, Philadelphia.

Dr. JosepH Swain, former president of
Swarthmore College and of Indiana Univer-
sity, previously professor of mathematics and a
contributor to biological science, and Mrs.
Swain, are spending a year in Japan and
China.

Dr. Epmunp Ot1s Hovey spent six weeks
during the past summer in making a western
tour partly in behalf of the American Museum
of Natural History. His special object was to
secure photographie and other data in the
Pike’s Peak region, the region of San Francisco
Bay, and at Crater Lake, for use in the con-
struction of relief models: at the museum.

Dr. R. C. Farmer has accepted the position
of deputy director of explosives research at the
British War Office Research Department.

WE learn from Nature that a committee has
been appointed by the British secretary for
mines to undertake research, under the general
direction of the safety in mines research board,
into the causes of, and the means of preventing,
the ignition of firedamp and coal dust by the
firing of explosives. The committee has been
constituted as follows: Sir F. L. Nathan, Mr.
W. Rintoul, Dr. G. Rotter, Mr. H. Walker, and
Professor R. V. Wheeler. A grant has been
made by the miners’ welfare committee out of
the miners’ welfare fund to meet the cost of
initiating the research.

Tue Harvard College Observatory is being
opened from 7:30 P.M. to 9 P.M. on the fol-
lowing dates: October 13, October 28, Novem-
ber 13, November 28, December 12. A short
illustrated taik will be preceded, when the
weather permits, by telescopic observations of
celestial objects. Exhibits showing the work
of the observatory will be explained by mem-
bers of the staff. A limited number of tickets
of admission for any one of the open nights is
supphed on application but must be obtained
in advance. There is no charge for admission.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

The titles include: “Astronomical tests of the
relativity theory,” “The Harvard Observatory
Station in Peru,” “The large observatories of
the west,’ “Scientifie work for the amateur
astronomer.”

Dr. Wauter B. Cannon, professor of physi-
ology in the Harvard Medical School, gave an
address before the Richmond Academy of Med-
icine and Surgery, September 26.

Dr. Rupotex Maras, head of the department
of surgery at Tulane University, New Orleans,
recently sailed for France where he attended
the annual congress of French surgeons on
October 2 and addressed the congress on ‘The
surgery of blood vessels.”

Tue New York Academy of Medicine has
organized a celebration of the one hundredth
anniversary of the birth of Louis Pasteur,
which is to consist of a public exhibition, in
the building of the academy, commencing on
December 27, the anniversary date, and eul-
minating at the end of a fortnight in an even-
ing of public addresses by distinguished mem-
bers of the medical profession. The exhibition
will consist of a collection of Pasteur memora-
bilia, such as books, manuscripts, photographs,
engravings, medals, ete., illustrating the life
work of Pasteur.

F. T. Trouton, F.R.S., emeritus professor
of physics in the University of London, died on
September 21, at the age of fifty-eight years.

THe death is announced of Mr. Louis Heath-
cote Walter, who had been editor of Science
Abstracts since 1903.

Dr. J. K. A. Wurrserm SALomMoNnsoN, pro-
fessor of neurology and radiology at Amster-
dam University, died on September 16 at the
age of fifty-eight years.

THE spring meeting of the American Chem-
ical Society will be held at New Haven, Conn.,

from April 3 to 7, 1923, inclusive.

Tue General Hospital Society of Connecti-
cut is vesiduary legatee of the estate, believed
to be considerably in excess of $1,000,000, of
Mrs. Sarah L. Winchester, after certain be-
quests and life estates are taken from it. Mr.
Winchester established a tuberculosis annex to
a hospital at New Haven, where the Winchester

OcToBER 20, 1922]

Arms Company’s plant is located, and it was to
continue that work that funds were bequeathed
to the General Hospital Society.

THE annual meeting of the American Society
of Ichthyologists and Herpetologists will be
held in the Field Museum, Chicago, on Friday,
October 27, immediately following the meeting
of the American Ornithologists’ Union. All
_ persons interested in any line of investigation
relating to fishes, amphibians or reptiles are
cordially invited to be present and take pari
in the meeting. Those desiring to present
papers should communicate with the committee
on arrangements, Karl P. Schmidt or Alfred C.
Weed, Field Museum of Natural History,
Chicago.

AccorpIne to the September issue of the
Decimal Educator, the official organ of the
Decimal Association, as abstracted in Nature,
the metric system has been or is soon to be
adopted in Greece, Poland, Haiti and Japan,
while the Russian government is rapidly intro-
ducing it into its administrative departments.
The British Chamber of Commerce in the
Argentine and the consul for Bolivia again
warn British exporters of the futility of
quoting in pounds, shillings and pence for
amounts specified in imperial weights and
measures. Mr. W. A. Appleton, secretary of
the General Federation of Trade Unions, states
that “these weights and measures of ours cheat
the home buyer and arouse the suspicion of the
foreigner,” and asks how many buyers know
the difference in weight of a peck of potatoes
and a peck of peas. The Lancashire cotton
market has ceased to quote cotton in sixty-
fourths of a penny and now gives the price in
hundredths, but we still appear likely to fulfil
the prediction of. Augustus de Morgan and
“adopt ithe metric system when every other
country has done so.” Sir Richard Gregory,
president of the association, recommends in an
introductory article that the metrie system
should be made the sole legal system in all de-
partments of state, and the nation thus pre-
pared for its general introduction, which is
bound to come in its time, as it is foolish to
expect the world to adopt the imperial as an
international system.

SCIENCE

447

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

A TRUST agreement made by Mrs. Lydia C.
Chamberlain, formerly of Des Moines, Iowa,
who lived for many years in New York City,
giving $419,000 to Columbia University for
fellowships, has been upheld in the Supreme
Court, but an attempt by Mrs. Chamberlain in
her will to distribute the rest of her estate to
Columbia also under the trust agreement, has
been set aside. Mrs. Chamberlain directs that
the income from the gift be used to establish
“eraduate” and “traveling” fellowships, to be
restricted to men or women who were born in
Iowa, graduated from Iowa institutions, and
who return to live in Iowa. The amount pay-
able yearly is limited to $850.’

A CAMPAIGN is being conducted to raise
$10,000,000 for the University of Southern
California, Los Angeles. Plans provide for a
medical school and teaching hospital which will
cost, on completion, approximately $3,500,000.

Tue Prudential Insurance Company of
America has made a presentation of its entire
sections on geological and geographical science
to the library of Wellesley College. The col-
lection includes over 3,000 volumes, publica-
tions and maps.

Dr. Exmer PrKe has been appointed medical
director of the University of Vermont, to suc-
ceed Dr. David Marvin.

Dr. ArtHur Houmes, recently president of
Drake University, has been elected professor of
psychology in the University of Pennsylvania,
where he will have charge of the welfare of
men students.

Mr. Aubert J. Watcort, a graduate of the
University of Michigan, and for the last three
years carrying on research work in optical
glass with the Bausch & Lomb Optical Com-
pany, has been appointed lecturer in mineral-
ogy at Northwestern University.

Raymonp M. Demtna, formerly instructor in
mathematics at the Case School of Applied
Science, has been appointed professor and
head of the mathematics department at Upper
Iowa University, Fayette.

448

Proressor Ropert Morris Oapen, of Cor-
nell University, has been appointed lecturer on
education at Harvard University for the second
half of the academic year 1922-23.

Dr. UHLENHUTH, director of the Behring
Institute for Experimental Therapy in Mar-
burg, has received a call to the chair of hygiene
in Bonn, as the successor of Professor Neu-
mann, who has accepted the position left vacant
in Hamburg by the death of Professor Dunbar.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
THE PRODUCTION OF SPECIES

To tHE Eprror or Scimnce: It is often re-
marked by biologists who have never studied
organisms in the field, that it is easy “to de-
velop forms at will indistinguishable from
actual species.”

To my mind, this is one of the most decep-
tive of the anti-Darwinian heresies. A species
is not merely a form or group of individuals
distinguished from other groups by definable
features. A complete definition involves
longevity. A species is a kind of animal or
plant which has run the gauntlet of the ages
and persisted. Spreading across or around
barriers, a species may break up into parallel
or geminate species, each having run a special
gauntlet of its own, its primitive qualities
altering through selection, usually slowly, in
the progress of the centuries. A new form
inaugurated through change of surroundings,
through persistent selection and segregation, or
through hybridization, is not a “species” until
it can hold its own with the rest. None of the
created “new species” of plant or animal I
know of would last five years in the open, nor
is there the slightest evidence that any new
species of field or forest or ocean ever orig-
inated from mutation, discontinuous variation
or hybridization.

Garden or greenhouse products are im-
mensely interesting and instructive, but they
throw little light on the origin of species. To
call them species is like calling dress-parade
cadets “soldiers.” I have heard this definition
of a soldier—‘‘one that has stood.” It is easy
to trick out a group of boys to look like sol-
diers, but you can not define them as such until

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

they have “stood.” A greenhouse variant is
easily secured; with some plants excessive vari-
ability is itself a specific character. But tem-
porary variations have no taxonomic value. A
form is not a species until it has “stood.”

The production of species from ancestral
forms is a process which has striking analogies
to the formation of words from older roots.
It is easy to make a new word, as a variant or
mutation from an older root, or even to create
one without a root. But ‘these creations are
not words. They do not get into the dictiona-
ries until they have “stood.” They must have
held their own in the gauntlet of speech which
every word has to run. The new words may
look as good as old ones. Riley’s “gems that
laugh hysterie lights, the glittering quespar,
guenk and pleocynth,” sound technical enough,
but these are freaks of the poet, not real words.
Being artificial and unreal they are not actual
words, never having “stood” in the linguistic
struggle for existence.

Davin Srarr JORDAN

THE TEACHING OF EVOLUTION

Reavers of Professor Pickett’s article on
“The Teaching of Evolution”! will agree that
“the teaching of science, particularly of biology
or related subjects, in the high school is the
chief area of stress.” The teaching of intro-
ductory biology demands great tact, and, of
course, not all teachers have tact. However,
the responsibility for the conflict between reli-
gious teaching and scientific teaching can not be
placed on those teachers.

Opposition to the doctrine of evolution by
Mr. Bryan and those of similar views is not
opposition to what Professor Pickett calls the-
ories of evolution. It is opposition to the doc-
trine of evolution in any form whatever. The
dispute between Neo-Darwinian and Neo-
Lamarkian does not interest them except as
cause for encouragement. To them Darwinism
means evolution, nothing more. With an un-
bending mind they recognize disagreement be-
tween the plain literal biblical account of erea-
tion and the doctrine of evolution. They em-
brace the former and are unable to accept any
of the compromises that have been offered.

1 Science, September 15, 1922, LVI, 298.

(

OcrosER 20, 1922]

The biologist is ready to receive new evi-
dence but it is difficult to see how he can trim
known facts to suit the opposition. However,
science holds the key to the situation. The key
is evolution itself, the evolutionary interpreta-
tion of history, especially the religious and
literary history of the Hebrew people. This
rather than biology would quickly become the
storm center if it were taught in our high
schools. It can not be done at present, but
when historical science percolates more thor-
oughly into the Sunday schools the opposition
to the teaching of evolution will dissolve. In
the mean time the biologist bears the brunt of

opposition because his pupils (or their parents)
‘are not prepared for his message. He has to
offer a new interpretation of life, a new basis
of ethics, which is in opposition to tradition.
He is usually better fitted to discuss and to
appreciate the beliefs of the non-scientifically
trained man than is the latter to discuss the
scientifie view, because the biologist has not
always been a scientist. The scientist is a
trained seeker for truth. His past beliefs, ex-
periences and mental conflicts form a valuable
intellectual background. The non-scientifically
trained person can not claim a similar appre-
ciation of the scientific view. The biologist
must have something of the spirit of a mis-
sionary and if necessary that of a martyr.

J. Howarp Brown

PRINCETON

TINGITIDAE OR TINGIDAE

In his discussion of this family name in a
recent number of Science, Dr. W. J. Holland
has provided us with an excellent review of
the philological and nomenclatural facts in the
matter, but he fails to mention certain items
which have a bearing on the question.

Some years ago in a review of Van Duzee’s
“Cheek List of the Hemiptera” (Psyche,
XXIII: 129, 1916), I stated very briefly my
reason for adopting the form Tingide and it
seems necessary to bring forward this argu-
ment again to the end that nothing pertinent be
overlooked in reaching our decision. In connec-
tion with his original proposal of the generic
name Tingis, Fabricius (“Systema Rhyngoto-

SCIENCE

449

rum,” 1803, p. 124) himself uses the genitive
Tingis in a foot-note, and accordingly we must
adopt the family form Tingide, unless we can
prove that the author was in error regarding
the genitive form of his own generic name.
When I first considered the question I took into
account the facts which Dr. Holland adduees,
and I came to the conclusion that we can not
be sure that Fabricius did in fact adopt the
Greek word Tiyytc, the name of a city; on the
contrary, his use of the genitive Tingis shows
us that he considered the word his own and
indicates what its Latin declension should be.

Until this argument is disposed of I shall
consider it necessary to use the form Tingida,
as proposed by Westwood in 1840.

H. M. ParsHury
SMITH COLLEGE

THE VACUUM TUBE AMPLIFIER IN
SCIENTIFIC WORK

Tue amplification of sound by means of the
triode vacuum tube has now passed on from its
application to wired and wireless telephony to
a means of aiding those of deficient hearing.
Its effectiveness is so great that it promises to
be to the partially deaf as great a boon as
glasses to those optically defective. The use of
the amplifier is sure to expand rapidly in this
field, although it will be somewhat impeded by
its expense.

The purpose of this note, however, is to call
attention to the application or applicability of
a sound magnifier in various fields of scientific
work and industry:

1. For detecting distant underground opera-
tions as in mine rescue or military work.

2. Detecting the approach of a boat, train or
automobile before it comes in sight.

3. Detecting the approach of a storm.

4. As a parallel instrument to the binocular
prism glasses of the ornithologist, to detect bird
songs too far to be heard distinctly or at all. It
is particularly useful in detecting the higher notes
that do not carry far and in observing nocturnal
migration.

5. To aid the hunter in detecting sounds of
distant game.

6. In conversation from vessel to vessel or sta-
tion to station at shouting distance and a little
further.

450

7. In directing men aboard or on shore.

8. To extend the possibilities of the dictograph
in detecting evidence of crime.

9. To make possible addressing larger audi-
ences and distant audiences.

10. To make it possible for some women with
weak voices to nevertheless speak to large audi-
ences.

11. In acoustical research for the study of sub-
liminal sounds.

12. The detecting of subliminal sounds from
animals not now known to make sounds.

13. To make more audible the whispers or weak
sounds of the sick or injured.

14. To make communication by weak or injured
less fatiguing.

That commercial equipment of good efii-
ciency is now readily available may not be
known to some of those who might make good
use of the apparatus.

Rosweitt H. Jounson

PITTSBURGH, Pa.,

SEPTEMBER 22, 1922

CHEMICAL SPELLING

Hurraw for Professor Jacobson
“chemical spelling match” at the West Virginia
University, as described in Scrence for Sep-
tember 29! Twenty odd years’ experience,
when permanent secretary of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science, in
reading the proofs of the program of the
chemical section, gave me some definite opin-
ions of chemical terms. I was delighted, in
reading the preface to a book recently pub-
lished by the veteran naturalist, Auguste Forel,
to note the expression la vraie science est
Vennemie des grands mots. Is it a plain infer-
ence from Forel’s dictum that chemistry is not
a true science?

and his

L. O. Howarp

QUOTATIONS
BICLOGICAL STAINS

Tue stains employed by a worker in?a series
of investigations, and other workers repeating
his methods, should involve identical materials.
It is not necessary that the chemicals should
be “pure’’; indeed, the results from a particular
method have sometimes been due to an un-
known impurity, so recalling the famous salt
in Stevenson’s “Dr. Jekyll and Mr. Hyde.”

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

But they must be the same, if identifications
are to be made by their use.

It was for these reasons and not from any
superiority in German manufacture that
authorities in microscopical technic so long ago
advised the use of German stains and particu-
larly those of Griibler of Leipzig. The advice
was generally adopted, so that a practical
monopoly of this small but important and
profitable commerce in articles essential -to
medical practice and scientific research fell into
German hands, to universal satisfaction. But
the reason for the monopoly and the history of
its institution were forgotten. When the war
deprived allied countries and the United States
of German imports of these chemicals, of which
only very small stocks were held, manufac-
turers in other countries went into the trade.
But their products were irregular in their
action, did not always produce the familiar
results and varied from maker to maker.

The supposed German scientific supremacy
obtained another advertisement. It was de-
manded that importation of scientifie stains
should be allowed, or, alternatively, that by
some great transformation, British, French and
American skill should be brought up to the
German level. Last autumn the National Re-
search Couneil of America organized a prac-
tical inquiry into stains produced in America,
obtaining the cooperation of workers in various
branches of biological science. Their prelim-
inary report has now been issued. Briefly, it
dispels the idea of German superiority. Amer-
ican stains are often purer than the Griibler
products; there is no difficulty in producing
what is required. Buit the trouble is stand-
ardization; the stains of different manufac-
turers produce different effects.

It is suggested in the interests of science that
the Research Council, after further inquiry,
should determine a standard type for each
stain, possibly recommending different manu-
facturers for different stains. But it is of im-
portance that the standardization should ex-
tend beyond one country, so that the results of
scientific investigation and the methods of bac-
teriological identification should be available
for different countres. The whole business is
small from the financial point of View, and it
is to be hoped that standards will be adopted

OcrusER 20, 1922]

by international cooperation—The London

Times.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Readings in Evolution, Genetics and Eugenics.
By Horatio Hackerr Newman. Chicago,
1921: The University of Chicago Press.
Pp. XVIII plus 523.

Doubtless every college teacher who gives a
general course in organic evolution has at times
wished for the presentation in a single text-
book of the materials he has found it necessary
to have his students glean from numerous vol-
umes. This need has been met by Professor
Newman in the present book. The work is
drawn up on much the lines of the “source
books” in history which have become popular
in recent years, and it will doubtless fulfill a
similarly useful function for courses in evolu-
tion, genetics and eugenics. The wide range of
matter necessary for such courses has been se-
lected from the books and papers of many
authors and reprinted in their own words, but
the whole has been deftly knit together by
means of occasional brief comments and pas-
sages written by the compiler himself.

One’s preconception of such a presentation
is that it must imevitably be a patchwork, but,
as a matter of fact, Professor Newman, by
judicious selection, has achieved a surprising
unity. Another inherent difficulty in such a
collection of articles and excerpts is the impos-
sibility of touching out in otherwise excellent
older accounts what, in the light of our more
recent knowledge, are minor mistatements or
contradictions; but here again, through careful
choice, the defect has been reduced to a mini-
mun.

The typographical errors observed by the re-
viewer are few. In line 6, page 294, this is
should read that is; the numeral in line 16,
page 365, should be 18 instead of 19 figures
87 and 88 on pages 434 and 435 have been ex-
changed.

The thirty-seven chapters (512 pages) are
divided into five main parts: (1) Introductory
and Historical (pp. 3 to 53); (2) Evidences
of Organic Evolution (pp. 57 to 182); (3)
The Causal Factors of Organic Evolution (pp.
185 to 283); (4) Genetics (pp. 287 to 456);

SCIENCE

451

and (5) Eugenies (pp. 459 to 512). Since the
historical survey in Chapter II plunges one
into the midst of genes, x-chromosomes, selec-
tion, orthogenesis, heterogenesis, Mendelism,
biometry, ete., the general reader could find
his way through this maze far more readily if
a full glossary of scientific terms were ap-
pended. Such a glossary would also be very
helpful in relation to other parts of the work.

In many colleges and universities the work
in genetics and in organic evolution is given as
separate courses. The reviewer, in fact, has
used the volume under discussion in a practical
way only as a text for a course in evolution.
For such a purpose it would be advantageous
to have the sections dealing with variation
introduced before or along with the discussion
of the causal factors of organic evolution. It

‘is probable also that many teachers would, as

does the reviewer, prefer to have the evidences
from morphology presented before those from
paleontology, but there is, of course, no reason
why the user of the book may not take the
various sections in this order if he so chooses.
While to the initiated the chapters on Neo-
Mendelian Heredity, Sex-linked and Other
Kinds of Linked Inheritance, and Linkage and
Crossing-Over ave clear, succinct accounts, it is
questionable if the beginner would get far with
them without considerable additional elucida-
tion on the part of the teacher.

In the opinion of the reviewer, Professor
Newman has, in this series of readings, pre-
pared for the general student the most com-
plete and acceptable one-volume account of or-
ganic evolution and allied subjects in print.

M. F. Guyer

UNIVERSITY OF WISCONSIN

SPECIAL ARTICLES

STATIC DEFLECTIONS OF THE VACUUM
GRAVITATION NEEDLE, IN 1921 AND 1922

To obtain a comparison, it will be necessary
to measure the distance apart, Ay (y being the
telescopic scale reading, with the needle at rest),
of the equilibrium curves corresponding to the
two opposed positions of the attracting

1 Advance note, from a Report to the Carnegie
Institution of Washington, D. C.

SCIENCE

1922, 3~

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

j t

Vac 4/26

| |
68 8 M4 107 120 133 146 139 Ae 785 198\ 06

=A0G_ SC
duly (a. _

weights, M, at the same hour, on successive
days. As the graphs are often quite divergent,
the interpolations will lose in accuracy; but the
general relations of the results will neverthe-
less appear much more clearly. These static
deflections, Ay, are given in the lapse of time
in the figure. For 1922 the graphs are drawn
for 1", 35, 8h P.M. of the successive days,? and
are distinguished by circles or crosses. For
1921 the night observations (at about 8 P.M.
on the average) only are given, as the other
lines would lie too close and confuse the dia-
gram. In fact the variations in 1921 are of a
smaller order and must be given on a scale ten
times larger to be adequately shown.

The diagram brings out ithe striking differ-
ence of the results very well. For 1921 the
observations lie practically on a straight line,
Ay = 13.42, for which the normal period of the
needle in vacuo would be 752 sec. In the re-
sults for 1922 the ‘time of the successive exhaus-
tions (Hx) is indicated approximately. It will
be seen that the cooling or other influence of
such an exhaustion (though carried from
1 mm. to .001 mm. only) is still effective in
exaggerating the radiant forces, for at least
six hours or more (cf. July 24, 30) after the
exhaustion has been completed. Consequently

2 denotes sunshine, C cloudy,
R rain. Vac.
cury.

C’ partly cloudy,

shows the vacuum in mm. of mer-

Rk se cwee?d al
° i 1 Uf . a

the graphs for 15 and 3 should probably be
joined by the dotted lines as indicated.

In all eases the extraneous radiant disturb-
ance which is strong in July, 1922, gradually
recedes more and more, as ithe observations
enter the days in August. On July 24 at
8 P.M. the combined gravitation and radiant
effect of the attracting mass M was repulsive
(Ay negative), the radiant repulsion being
about twice the gravitational pull. Positive
values are not reached until after July 26.
From July 28 on, the 8 P.M. increase is deter-
mined, though it has not quite reached the
values of Ay even at the end of the diagram
(August 14). In the afternoon observations
(1922) the rain effect (or the absence of sun
effect) is brought out very clearly by ‘the
mercer depressions on August 2, 8, 11,12. At
night this effeet may be reversed. When the
day’s radiation is scantily received, the needle
fails to radiate at night.

In case of the observations of 1921, the
small fluctuations of the Ay curves throughout
a month showed instances of resemblance to
the run of atmospheric temperature. But in
the large variations recorded in 1922 (as a
consequence perhaps) I was unable to detect
such resemblances in the night observations,
which are here alone of interest. The same is
true of the change of temperature per day,
ete. Nevertheless it is possible that relatively

OcrToBER 20, 1922]

short atmospheric temperature changes from
without, such as would not be otherwise re-
corded, may make an impression on the 8 P.M.
graph. This, however, would not bear upon
the 1922 graph as a whole, from July 24 to
August 14. Supposing, moreover, that the
closed region within is in some way modified
thermally by the high exhaustions (carried to
within .001 mm.), it seems hardly probable
that the apparatus would take so long to return
to the normal condition of 1921.

What has gone down during this series of
measuremeents is the vacuum and one would
therefore conclude that «states of high exhaus-
tion (a few hundredths or tenths of a mm.)
are (like the plenum) more susceptible to the
presence of radiant activity than the lower ex-
haustions of a few mm. Thus, night observa-
tions presupposed, the radiant forces pass
through a minimum in a partial vacuum of
several millimeters or more, and the best con-
ditions for observation are then at hand. To
test this further, I exhausted the apparatus on
August 14. The morning observations August
15, twelve hours later (see figure) are again
abnormally high.

It not infrequently happens that night
values are low when day values are high and,
in general, there is a tendency of the graphs
to converge toward rainy or densely cloudy
weather. All this conforms with the view that
the needle is screened from radiation by the
large attracting mass M and that the radiant
forces act with gravitation, if the temperature-
time coefficient dé/dt is positive, and act
against gravitation when d0/di is negative, as
elsewhere explained. I have been tempted to
envisage a coefficient d0/dt, which is not all
temperature; for there may be some other radi-
ation or agency behind the recent rains (for
instance), as well as behind the difference in
the character of the results of 1922 and 1921
as exhibited by the figure. It is difficult, in
other words, to surmise what the nature of the
radiant discrepancy may be, which clings to
the apparatus so persistently in July and early
August. If it were merely thermal, or de-
pendent on a kinetic mechanism associated
with d6/dt, its behavior would seem to be
incompatible with the daily eyecle, which is

SCIENCE

453

practically immediate. However, if the slopes
of the curves giving the static elongations, y,
of ‘the needle in the lapse of time, are en-
hanced by the higher degrees of exhaustion,
these curves would also ultimately intersect,
so that even negative values of Ay, referable
to causes within the apparatus would not be
unexpected.

On my return to the laboratory in Septem-
ber, I resumed the work (upper curve). The
vacuum had in the mean time decreased to
about 3mm. Under these conditions the night
observations (8h) are again normal and com-
pare favorably with the corresponding graph
of 1921, as was anticipated.

Cart Barus
Brown UNIVERSITY,
ProvipENcr, R. I.

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL

SOCIETY,
(Continued )
Division or DYE CHEMISTRY
William J. Hale, chairman
R. Norris Shreve, secretary

SYMPOSIUM ON METHODS FOR STANDARDIZING AND
TESTING DYES
R. E. Rose, chairman

~ Introductory remarks: Rozsrrt E. Rose.

Chemical control of dyestujffs: Wautzr M.
Scorr. This paper presents a general discussion
of various methods for estimating the strength
of dyestuffs as follows: (1) Colorimetric com-
parison of standard dyestuff solutions. (2) Titra-
tion of a solution of known strength of dyestufft
with a standard solution of titanous chloride in
an atmosphere of carbon dioxide. (3 Determina-
tion of the percentage of nitrogen by the Kjeldahl
method. (4) Estimation of the inorganic salts
which have been used in the standardization of
the dyestuff. In connection with the materials
used in dyeing there is such a great variety that
it is only possible to discuss a few of the more
common types. This paper gives an outline of
the general methods of analysis used and also
suggested specifications for the following: acetic
acid, sulfuric acid, ammonia, black iron liquor,
commercial ‘‘nitrate’’? of iron, di-sodium phos-
phate, Glauber’s salt, common salt and soap made
from olive or red oil.

The estimation of erythrosine: W. C. HoLMss.
A method is outlined for the direct evaluation of

454

dye in sample of erythrosine, based upon the
gravimetric determination of the color acid, which
is shown to have relatively excellent accuracy.
The results obtained confirm the conclusion of
Gomberg and Tabern that the dried dye contains
a molecule of water of concentration. In the
absence of interfering substances the consump-
tion of acid involved in the precipitation of the
color acid is determined by the dye and soda ash
present and. may be utilized as a convenient
means of estimating the latter. A further inves-
tigation is being undertaken to determine the
applicability of the methods to other dyes of the
Eosine group and to afford evidence regarding
their constitution. ’

The dangers of the titaniwm chloride method
for determining the strength of dyes: Epwarp H.
GAMBLE and Ropert E. Rosr. The quantitative
method, as described by Knecht for the estima-
tion of the quantity of dyestuff in a sample by
means of titanous chloride, is one which is very
valuable; however, it must be used with great
diseretion and a full understanding of the mate-
rial being tested. The method is sensitive to
changes in chemical composition which are not
accompanied by corresponding changes in tinc-
torial value and, therefore, may be extremely
misleading.

Laundering of textiles: A. F. Suupp. (1)
Gross volume of business transacted; persons em-
ployed by; annual payroll. (2) Development of
standard formulas for laundering cotton, linen,
wool, silk and artificial silk fibers. (3) Effect of
repeated laundering on cotton goods. (4) Dis-
cussion of the proper method for the use of low
titer and high titer soaps. (5) Samples of tex-
tiles that have been improperly laundered. (6)
Samples of textiles that have been poorly con-
structed. (7) American Institute of Laundering.

Dyeing as an art: J. Merritt Marruews. Dye-
stuffs and methods of dyeing have long been em-
ployed by many nations as a means of art expres-
sion, principally for the production of decorative
effects on wearing apparel. The early eastern
nations, such as the Indian, Chinese and Javanese,
were especially prominent in this line of art work,
although we also find a somewhat similar devel-
opment of this form of art among the early Incas
of Peru. The early nations, in contradistinetion
to our own of the present day, nearly always in-
corporated their art work in the actual utilities
of their everyday life, and as their clothes were
the nearest thing to them, they employed their
art in the decoration of the fabrics used for their

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

wearing apparel. We are more inclined to make
our art work distinct in itself and with little or
no connection with the things we use and wear.
To us an art object is generally something that
is set aside or put in a museum or cabinet, or
hung on the wall, and must not be desecrated by
using it or wearing it.

The tinting of white papers: W. C. HouMEs.
For the tinting of newsprint stock and of white
papers of the lower grades the basic dyes are ex-
ceptionally well adapted. The acid dyes are well
qualified to serve the requirements of medium
grade paper. In the tinting of white papers of
the best quality it is necessary to resort to colors
of the pigment type. The ultramarines, indan-
threne dyes and the recently developed phospho-
tungstic lake products are employed, of which
classes of colors each affords relative advantages
in various essential respects. In the latter field
none of the tinting materials available at present
can be considered entirely satisfactory and it
would appear probable that products of superior
general excellence could be developed in other
pigment types, of which the dyes derived from
the anilids of beta-hydroxy-naphthoic acid are
suggested as one of the more promising fields for
investigation.

The relative stability of paper colors to bleach:
W. ©. Houmrs. Eighty representative paper
colors are classified in respect to. their relative
susceptibility to calcium hypochlorite as deter-
mined by laboratory dyeing tests in which the
essential conditions of beater operation were
duplicated. In general the superior stability of
pigment colors to photochemical attack finds an
analogy in a corresponding stability to bleach,
but little or no agreement is found between the
relative susceptibility of the soluble dyes to the
action of light and of bleach. From the point of
view of coloring considerations it is preferable to
eliminate residual bleach from the stock by wash-
ing rather than by the employment of anti-chlors.

Use of bichromates in wool dyeing (as mor-
dants): WintHRop C. Durrer. Bichromates early
used as mordants on wool when dyewoods bene-
fited by oxidation were principal dyestuff. Oxida-
tion is not usually beneficial to synthetic mordant
dyes: is generally injurious. Synthetic mordant
dyes as organic acids require suitable basic mor-
dants. Bichromates furnish chromic acid pecu-
liarly suited for absorption into wool fiber and
conversion into basic chromes. Basie chrome
should be combined in fiber with weak organic

OctosER 20, 1922]

acid. Tartrates suitable for source of organic
acid. Best results in mordanting require careful
consideration of combining weights of reduced
chrome. Amount of chrome used as mordant
should have as near as practical a weight adjusted
to combining weight of quantity of dye to be used.

Influence of tin weighting on the dyeing of
silk: L. J. Matos.

Quercetin, constitution and uses: Gro. L. TER-
RASSE. A brief synopsis of the constitution of
flavone, flavonol and quercetin is given and atten-
tion is called to the brilliant synthetic work on
these bodies performed by chemists of repute,
these researches leaving no doubt about the cor-
rectness of the aecepted formulas of the sub-
stances just mentioned and other bodies similarly
constituted. In spite of the technical importance
of quercetin and allied dyes the commercial syn-
thetic non-production of them is emphasized. The
color of quercetin in relation to its constitution is
discussed and the reasons for the adjective dyeing
qualities of this dye are considered. The influence
of tautomerism, of the alpha hydroxyl and of the
hydroxyls in other positions in the molecule are
touched upon, as well as the influence of the
quinoid formulation on its color. The application
of quercetin to the various fibers with several
different mordants is recorded and the character-
istics of these dyeings are mentioned. The use of
this dye on leather is also given and the analogy
of the usual commercial forms of the dye to the
tannins is indicated. The production of the vari-
ous lakes of this color is likewise touched upon.
It is pointed out that until the necessary original
intermediates be produced much cheaper, or that
entirely new and cheap syntheses be developed,
quercetin must continue to be produced from nat-
ural sources.

An outline of the history and chemistry of the
important natural dyestuffs: David WALLACE and
Emit Lessrr, Ph.D. This paper covers the his-
tory of natural colors as used in ancient times
and the impetus given to the industry by the
discovery of America with its source of valuable
natural dyestuffs, particularly logwood, fustic,
hypernie and quercitron bark. Mention is made
of the history of the development of the use of
these colors. The chemistry of natural dyestuffs
presents an interesting and complex study. It re-
ceived years of study by such men as Chevroul,
Erdmann, Graebe, Kostanacki, Herzig and Perkin.
Most of their work was done on hemotoxylin and
brezilin, the coloring principles of logwood and
hypernic. In this country, the work of Perkin
has been thoroughly reviewed and extended in the

SCIENCE

455

search of a method for producing additional dye-
stuffs from natural sources. The sources, chem-
istry and application of the above mentioned dye-
stuffs are discussed. A brief mention is made of
the present status of the industry.

Color and constitution: M. L. Crossuny and
P. V. RosENvett. A study was made of the
effect of isomerism on the color of certain azo
dyes. It is shown that there appears to be a
definite relation between the reactivity of the
naphthol sulfonic acids of beta-naphthol and the
color of the dyes. produced from them. The
effect of the sulfonic acid group on the beta-
naphthol ring appears to be greatest when it is
in position 3. In this position it acts as a bathy-
chromic group, while in position 7 it acts as a
hypsochromie group. The influence of the nitro
group on the benzene ring in an ortho position to
the diazo group shifts the absorption of the dyes
toward red. This effect is manifested to a maxi-
mum degree by the nitro group in the ortho posi-
tion. When the nitro group is in the meta posi-
tion it acts as a hypsochromic group, shifting the
color of the nitrobenzene-azo-beta-naphthol-sul-
fonic acids in the entire series toward the yellow
and beyond that of the corresponding benzene-
azo-B-naphthol-sulfonie acid series. The methyl
group substituted on the benzene ring has less
influence on color than the nitro group. Chlorine
appears to have very little influence on the color
of the chlorobenzene-azo-B-naphthol-sulfonie
acids. Bromine in the ortho position to the diazo
group acts as a bathychromic group in dyes re-
sulting from F acid and BR salt but has no influ-
ence on the color of the dyes resulting from G
salt and B-naphthol-3.6.8-trisulfonie acid. The
sulfonic acid group introduced on the benzene
ring shifts the color of the benzene-azo-B-naph-
thol-sulfonie acids towards yellow, the maximum
effect being manifested by the meta position.

Constitution and chemical reactivity: M. L.
CrossLry and P. V. Rosenvetr. It is shown that
there is some apparent relation between chemical
constitution and reactivity in the B-naphthol-
disulfonic acid products. The 2-naphthol-3.6-
disulfonic acid, R salt, couples readily with azo
compounds to give corresponding dyes, while the
2-naphthol-6.8-disulfonie acid and the 2-naphthol-
3.6.8-trisulfonic acid, both of which contain a
sulfonic acid group in the 8 position, do not react
under ordinary conditions for coupling, with cer-
tain diazo compounds, particularly those contain-
ing a methyl group in an ortho position to the
diazo group. Since the hydrogen atom in the ad-
jacent position to the hydroxyl group is the only

456 eo

He2 en pees

one of the several on the naphthol ring replaced
by a diazo group, since the naphthol-sulfonic
acids having a sulfonic acid group in position 8
do not form nitroso compounds, and since the sub-
stitution of an aryl radical for hydrogen of the
hydroxyl group diminishes the reactivity of the
adjacent hydrogen atom, as is evidenced by the
fact that coupling no longer takes place on the
naphthol ring, it is suggested that there is a
dynamic relationship between the hydroxyl rad-
ical and the adjacent hydrogen atom, that this
‘relationship is enhanced by a sulfonie acid group
in position 3 and inhibited by a sulfonie acid
group in position 8. It is further suggested that
this condition of a ‘‘loose’’ hydrogen atom when
position 8 is not occupied constitutes a condition
of an ‘‘open field of reactivity,’’ while the con-
dition of the hydrogen atom when position 8 is
oceupied constitutes a condition of a ‘‘closed
field of reactivity.’? An open field of reactivity
is considered necessary for the formation of pre-
liminary addition products, before any can result
in the formation of stable reaction products.

Rhythmic bands of dyes on filter paper by
evaporation. The refractivity, surface tension,
conductivity, viscosity and Brownian movement
of dye solutions: EARL C. H. Davirs. (Lantern.
Tilustrated). Striking bands of dyes have been
obtained, by a method of evaporation, in filter
paper and with unglazed porcelain. There are no
marked relations between the formation of these
bands and the physical properties of the dye solu-
tions, but it is probable that the viscosity of the
very concentrated solutions is important. Oriented
adsorption takes place in rhythmie band forma-
tion. A study was made of 62 dyes with 3 varie-
ties of filter paper.

Adsorption phenomena im the application of
dyes to plain and mordanted fabrics: L. W.
Parsons and E. D. Lorp. This paper deals with
adsorption phenomena which occur in the dyeing
of wool and mordanted eotton. The results are
treated by the Freudlich adsorption equation,
oh = ee where a is the grams of dye adsorbed
m n m
per gram of adsorbent, ¢ is the concentration of
dye in the bath in equilibrium with the dyed

1 :
fibres, and k and — are constants for each indi-
n

vidual dye. Characteristic samples of pure dyes
containing various chromophore groupings were
studied, the data applied to the adsorption equa-

al
tion and the factors affecting the exponent, —, are
n

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

: al
discussed. (1) In azo dyes the value of — is in
n

general high, and only slightly affected by the
addition or removal of OH or SogNa groups.
(2) Thiazene dyes have particularly a low value.
(3) Xanthene dyes containing the grouping
COON or COOCH3 have a low value for the ex-
ponent, the value being raised, however, if this
group is absent. (4) The nitro group raised the

1
value of i provided that there is not a counter-

acting factor. (5) Triphenylmethane dyes have,
in general, a low value. (6) In the case of mor-

1, ;
danted cotton Paes particularly low, indicating

that adsorption is a major factor. (7) This
work is still in its infancy, but it is believed that
a systematic study of such data and an applica-
tion of it to the dyeing processes will lead to
generalities of interest both to the practical dyer
and to the physical chemist.

Dyes of the dinitro-malachite green series:
T. B. Downry with ALEXANDER Lowy. 2, 4-dini-
trobenzaldehyde was condensed with dimethyl-
aniline, benzyl-ethyl-aniline and diethyl-aniline (in
the proportion of 1 mol. to 2 mols.), yielding
2,4-dinitro-malachite-green dyestuffs which have
the characteristic blue-green color typical of the
malachite green series. The properties of the
leucobases and dyes derived therefrom were
studied. Samples of the dyes and dyeings will
be shown.

Catalytic oxidation of anthracene to anthra-
quinone: OC. E. SrnspEMAN and O. A. NELSON.
The importance of anthraquinone as an interme-
diate in the manufacture of dyes is shown. Men-
tion is made of the old methods of manufacture,
chief among which is the chromic acid method.
The catalytic method, patented by Gibbs and
Conover, and worked out by the authors, is de-
scribed in detail. The apparatus consists essen-
tially of: (1) a carburetor, (2) reaction chamber
and (3) sublimer for collecting the reaction
products. All these parts are made of glass and
heated by well-insulated electric heaters. The
carburetor is built with two air inlets, one ar-
ranged so as to sweep over the molten anthracene
and thus carry a definite amount of the hydro-
carbon into the reaction chamber, the other ar-
ranged so as not to interfere with the work of
the first but to vary the air-anthracene concentra-
tion as desired. Four methods of supporting the
catalyst, vanadium pentoxide, are described.
They are: (1) by boats, (2) by dises, (3) by

OcrosrR 20, 1922]

pumice, (4) by fusing to a glass tube. The sub-
limer, as used during most of the runs, consists
of a Kjeldahl flask with neck removed, and joined
to the reaction chamber by a ground-glass joint.
Tables were compiled showing the influence of
different variables in the production of anthra-
quinone. The maximum yield obtained was 85.3
per cent. of the theoretical.

Equations for vapor pressures and latent heat
of vaporization of naphthalene, anthracene,
phanenthrene and anthraquinone: O. A. Nruson
and C. E. SrnsEMAN. This work deals only with
the calculated vapor pressures and latent heats of
vaporization of naphthalene, anthracene, phenan-
threne and anthraquinone, and is an outgrowth
of the work published by the authors on the ob-
served vapor pressures of these compounds in
J. Ind. Eng. Chem., 14 (1922), 58. The caleula-
tions were made by applying the Clapeyron equa-
tion of state. A discussion of the derivation of
the equation is given. The entropy of vaporiza-
tion of the same compounds was also calculated
and the conclusion arrived at that all form
normal liquids. Tables for observed and ealeu-
lated vapor pressures were given for each com-
pound. In each case the calculated agrees favor-
ably with the observed.

Carbazole, its purification and vapor pressure
determination: OC. E. SENSEMAN and O. A. NEL-
son. Carbazole of 82 per cent. purity was washed
three times with benzene at a temperature of 50°
C. Successive crystallizations from benzene and
toluene followed, giving a product melting at
244.8° C. Analysis showed the presence of 8.22

per cent. of nitrogen, while the theoretical per ,

cent. present ‘is 8.38. Using this material vapor
pressure determinations were made by the method
and apparatus described previously by the
authors in J. Ind. Eng. Chem., 14 (1922), 58.
Two tables were given. Table I records the pres-
sures and corresponding temperatures. Table IT
gives the pressures at 5° temperature intervals
read from.a curve made from the observed read-
ings. The boiling point was found to be 354.76°
C. This constant was previously reported in the
literature to be 351.5° C. From the Clapeyron
equation of state a formula was derived for cal-
culating the vapor pressures at the various tem-
peratures. These calculated pressures closely ap-
proximate the observed ones.

The influence of change in concentration on the
absorption spectra of dyes: W. C. Hommes. A
brief review of the literature on the subject is
given. An outline of the preliminary results ob-
tained. by varying the concentration of a large

SCIENCE

457

number of dyes over a wide range is presented,
together with representative absorption curves
illustrating various types of behavior. The inter-
pretation of results and their bearing upon the
condition of dyes in solution is discussed.

The synthesis of dicyanine A: 8. Pauxin. In
the synthesis of dicyanine by the action of sodium
ethylate on an alpha, gamma quinoline interme-
diate it was found that the relative proportion of
dicyanine and eyanine produced varied consider-
ably with the same sample of intermediate, in dif-
ferent experiments. The possible presence of
other intermediates was not thought to be wholly
responsible for the formation of contaminating
dyes. A study of the influencing factors resulted
in the development of an improved process for
this dye, which depends upon the action of sodium
sulfide and chloroform on an alpha, gamma quino-
line intermediate in aleoholie solution. At least
two other types of dyes are formed simultaneously
by this method, one showing an absorption spec-
trum maximum at 6200 A (kryptocyanine). Op-
timum conditions have been worked out for the
preparation of dicyanine A IV (absorption maxi-
mum about 6720 A). The resulting product was
found to have sensitizing power equal to Hoechst.
Dicyanine. The yield of dye by this method is
over twelve times that obtainable by any previous
method.

The preparation and separation of the ortho-
and nara-chioro-anilines: H. ©. BasHioum and
P. O. Powrrs. The work was done to find a meth-
od capable of technical development for the
preparation of the intermediates. Chloro-benzene
was nitrated, and the mixture of o- and p-nitro-
chloro-benzene was cooled, separating a part of
the para isomer. The remaining mixture of nitro
compounds was heated to distill off any remaining
chloro-benzene and then reduced by boiling with
iron and dilute hydrochloric acid. Steam distilla-
tion was used to remove the ortho-chloro-aniline
which was obtained very nearly pure. Para
chlor-o-aniline can be obtained by neutralizing and
continuing the distillation with steam. Several
other methods of separation were investigated.

The preparation of phenyl-thioglycol-o-car-
boaylic acid, thioindoxyl-carboxylic acid, thio-
indoxyl and thioindigo: M. X. Sunurvan. The
brick-red precipitate obtained by running HsS
into diazotized anthranilio acid at 0°-5° C. was
treated with chloro-acetic acid in slightly alkaline
medium and warmed to 75° C. The filtrate there-
from cooled and acidified with HCl gives phenyl-
thio-glycol-o-carboxylie acid. This heated with
3 parts NaOH and a little water gradually to

458

160° with stirring and kept at 160° for 1 hour
gives on dissolving in water and acidifying the
cooled solution (in ice) thioindoxyl-carboxylic
acid. Warming the acidified solution or heating
the solid with acetic anhydride gives thioindoxyl
distillable with steam. In alkaline solution
thioindoxyl-carboxylic acid and thioindoxyl are
converted by potassium ferricyanide to thioindigo,
the former on heating the latter directly. The
motive for the work is, in the present case, bio-
thenical.
Division oF CHEMISTRY orf MEDICINAL PRopUCcTS

Edgar B. Carter, chairman

E. H. Volwiler, secretary

SYMPOSIUM—DEVELOPMENT OF AMERICAN SYN-
THETIC MEDICINALS

The American-made ‘‘chloramine’’ antiseptics:
P. N. LErcu.

Progress in the manufacture of arsphenamine:
G. W. Raiziss.

Present status of the field of local anesthetics:
EK. H. Vouwiter

Recent developments in the chemistry of organic
mercurials: FRANK C. WHITMORE.

New medicinal mercurials: OLIvER KAMM.

Chemical and pharmacological studies of benzyl
compounds: Davi I. Macur.

A synthesis of thymol from p. cymene. IT:
Max Puiuuies. A process for making synthetic
thymol from p. cymene is described. The method
consists in first preparing nitrocymene, reducing
this to cymidine, sulfonating the cymidine to
cymidine-sulfonic acid, diazotizing the cymidine-
sulfonic acid to diazo-cymene-sulfonic acid, re-
ducing the latter to cymylhydrazine p. sulfonic
acid, removing the hydrazine group cymene-3-
sulfonic acid, fusion of the sodium salt of this
acid with potassium hydroxide and obtaining
thymol. An over-all yield of about 15 per cent.
of the theoretical one is obtained.

A method for assaying unguentum stramonii:
A. R. Buss, Jr. The U. S. P. IX gives no
method for standardizing unguentum stramonii.
Bliss and Brown present a method adapted from
the U. S. P. assays of extractum stramonii, ex-
tractum belladonne foliorum, and fluidextractum
belladonnz radicis, which gives very accurate re-
sults as shown by experiment data reported. The
method consists of the usual treatment with ether-
chloroform mixture and ammonia water; followed
by thorough shaking and subsequent standing or
by centrifuging; extraction with weak sulfuric
acid; subsequent addition of ammonia water with
final extraction with chloroform, and titration of
the chloroformic residue in the usual fashion.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

Some hypnotics of the barbituric acid series:
H. A. SHONLE and A. Moment. Of the various
di-alkyl and alkyl-aryl barbiturie acids prepared
and tested, isoamyl-ethyl barbiturie acid was
found to have the greatest hypnotie activity com-
bined with a low toxicity. Isobutylethyl and
n-butyl-ethyl barbiturie acids were next in activ-
ity. Benzyl-ethyl and benzyl-propyl barbiturie
acids, while possessing hypnotic activity, caused
tetanic convulsions. Increasing the length of the
chain of both alkyl groups tends to cause mus-
cular incoordination. It appears possible that the
optimum activity lies in those members of the
series which are more oil soluble and also chem-
ically less stable. The usual method of synthesis
was used in the preparation of this group of
compounds.

Germicidal assays with special reference to col-

loidal silver compounds: Herrserr ©. Ham-
ILTON. Tests of germicides other than the
coal tar compounds should be carried out

under conditions similar to those under which the
substance would be used, particularly time of
reaction and organism. The values so obtained
have more practical significance than the official
hygienic laboratory coefficients. Colloids appear
to vary in value more greatly than some other
disinfectants, making it difficult to obtain a true
valuation. Tests were made with some common
disinfectants on a variety of organisms including
those isolated from a typical case of ‘‘pink eye,’’
also B. pyocyaneous, diphtheria, pneumonia and
others. The substances tested. include colloidal
silver iodide, colloidal metallic silver, silver
nitrate and other well-known disinfectants. Con-
siderable data are included.

Lhe chemistry of digitalis: Hmrpert C. Ham-
ILTON. This is a continuation report on the active
agents of digitalis with some additional data on
their purification and activity.

Hypnotics of the nirvanol series—phenyl butyl
hydantoin: E. H. Vouwmerr and E. B. Vurmr.
Nirvanol, or phenyl-ethyl hydantoin, was at first
acclaimed as the hypnotic par excellence, but in
recent years it has been found to occasionally
produce severe rash and fever. A number of
other substituted hydantoins have already been
prepared and investigated, but none of them ap-
peared promising. The various analogous mem-
bers of the hydantoin series and of the barbituric
acid series seem to have no particular relationship
from the hypnotic side, for example, the dialkyl
hydantoins have practically no hypnotic action.
Phenyl n-butyl hydantoin was prepared and found
to have no hypnotic action whatsoever.

OcTosER 20, 1922]

Chemotherapeutic studies of various aromatic or-
ganic arsenicals: GrorGe W. Raiziss and JosrPH
L. Gavron. The authors have found that in ex-
perimental trypanosomiasis due to infection with
T. equiperdum complete cures may be effected by
employing very pure samples of the two pentava-
lent organie arsenicals—p-arsanilie acid and
3-amino-4-hydroxyphenylarsonic acid. The chemo-

maximum tolerated dose

therapeutic indices » Which

minimum curative dose
are 6.7 and 10, respectively, are of particular in-
terest in view of the favorable results obtained
by various French investigators in the treatment
of human syphilis with the above arsenicals.
Furthermore, by utilizing these compounds as
coupling agents the authors have prepared various
arsenical dyes and found them to possess but
feeble trypanocidal properties. Methods for the
preparation of pure p-hydroxyphenylarsine and
3-animo-4-hydroxyphenylarsine have also been de-
veloped. 9
Experimental work in the prediction of physio-
logical action: Ottver Kamm. Considerations
from the standpoint of molecular magnitude are
of value in predicting certain toxicity data of
mono-hydroxy alcohols. From the physiological
results obtained with aliphatic members it was
possible to predict corresponding effects of alco-
hols of the benzyl type, thus showing that benzyl
compounds are devoid of certain specific effects
sometimes credited to them.

Cuarues L. Parsons,
Secretary

THE AMERICAN ASTRONOMICAL.
SOCIETY

THE twenty-eighth meeting of the society was
held at the Yerkes Observatory, Williams Bay,
Wisconsin, on September 5 to 8, 1922. This

‘was the twenty-fifth anniversary of the open-
ing of the observatory and also of the found-
ing of the society, which grew out of the con-
ference of astronomers held in connection with
the dedication of the observatory in 1897. The
members and visitors, who numbered about one
hundred, were quartered at the Y. M. C. A.
Camp on the shore of Lake Geneva.

Sessions for papers extended over three
days, and the social events included a recep-
tion at the home of Director and Mrs. Frost,
a boat ride on Lake Geneva, and the annual

SCIENCE

459

dinner. On one evening Professor HE. E. Bar-
nard gave an illustrated lecture on “Some
Peculiarities of the Comets,” and the anniver-
sary celebration included reminiscences of the
twenty-five years of the observatory and of the
society. A series of astronomical moving pic-
tures was also exhibited.

Nineteen new members were elected to the
society, bringing the total membership up to
three hundrd and ninety. The society elected
to honorary membership Professor H. H.
Turner, director of the University Observatory,
Oxford, England. :

Officers for the ensuing year are as follows:

President: W. W. Campbell.

Vice-presidents: John A. Miller, Henry Norris
Russell.

Secretary: Joel Stebbins.

Treasurer: Benjamin Boss.

Councilors: Philip Fox, Caroline E. Furness,
A. O. Leuschner, John M. Poor, Charles E. St.
John, Frank Schlesinger, Frederick Slocum.

Members of the National Research Council:
W. W. Campbell, Edwin B. Frost, Henry Norris
Russell.

The next meeting of the society will be held
in affiliation with the American Association for
the Advancement of Science at Boston and
Cambridge in December, 1922.

The program of papers was as follows:

A spectroscopic method of deriving the paral-
laxes of A-type stars: Water S. Apams and
A. H. Joy.

Partial ecaplanation, by wave-lengths, of the
K-term in the B-types: SEBASTIAN ALBRECHT.

Trigonometric parallax of the Pleiades: Har-
oup L. ALDEN.

The variable star, M 5, Bailey 33: E, E. Bar-
NARD.

Saturn’s rings when the earth passed through
their plane in 1920-1921: E. HE. Barnarp.

Redetermination “of secondary standards of
wave-length from the new international iron arc:
Kerrvin Burns, C. C. Kizss and W. F. Mrccers.

The orbit of the spectroscopic binary H. hk.
6532: J. W. CAMPBELL.

Nova Scorpii No. 3 (1922): ANNIE J. CANNON.

Measurements of planetary radiation: W. W.
CoBLENTZ and C. O. LAMPLAND.

On the light variations of Beta Lyre and Deita
Cephei: R. H. Curtiss.

The parallax of Capella from
plates: ZACCHEUS DANIEL.

desentitized

460 ea

A new spectrocomparator: RaupH KE. Drury.

The Steward Observatory of the University of
Arizona: A. E. DoucGLass.

The variable double star X Ophiuchi: C. H.
GINGRICH.

Parallax of the nebula
B.D.1-31°643: C. H. GInericu.

The orbits of the spectroscopic components of
Boss 8793 (foll.): W. HE. HARPER.

Two long period spectroscopic binaries: W. E.
HARPER.

The relation between the stars of the Beta
Canis Majoris type and the Cepheid variables:
FE. HENROTEAU.

Proper motions of stars
measures: LAURA E. Hinu.
A table of « — sin a: Herpert A. Howr.

The variable star SX Herculis: M. F. Jorpan.

Wave-lengths in the red and infra-red spectra
of oxygen and nitrogen: C. C. Kress.

Photometry of moon: Epwarp 8S. Kina.

Color-index apparatus: Epwarp 8. KInea.

Photographic observations of nebule:
LAMPLAND.

surrounding

from micrometric

Cc. O.

A new scouting spectroscope for prominences:
Ouiver J. LEE.

On the determination of magnitude error by
Kapteyn’s ‘‘spot’’ method: Outver J. LEE.

The distribution of nove: KNut LUNDMARK.

Historical note concerning the fundamental
equations in stellar statistics: KNuT LUNDMARK.

The proper motions and mean parallax of spiral
nebule: Kwur LUNDMARK.

The influence of a general cosmic curvature on
the Einstein phenomena in the solar system:
A. C. LUNN.

Internal motion in the spiral nebule: N. G. C.
2408, 4736 and 5055: A. VAN MAANEN.

The quantum theory of photographic exposure:
C. E. K. Mess.

The graininess of
C. E. K. Merxrs.

Some new sensitizing dyes: C. E. K. MErss.

The relation between intensity and exposure:
C. E. K. Mrrs.

Interferometer measurements of the longer
waves in the iron are spectrum: W. F. Mraerrs
and C. C. Kiss.

Recent advances in nebule: D. H. MENZEL.

Interferometer measures of star diameters:
A; A. MICHELSON and F. G. PEASE.

photographic negatives:

Trigonometric parallaxes of Cepheids and early
type stars determined by photography at the
Leander McCormick Observatory: S. A. MrrcHELL.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1451

On the daily variation in clock corrections:
H. R. Morean. ;

Photometric results in certain Kapteyn areas:
J. A. PARKHURST. }

The total radiation of variable stars observed
with the vacuum thermocouple at Mt. Wilson:
Epison Prerrir and SetH B. NicHOoLson.

A pendulum method of recording radio time
signals: EDWARD C. PHILLIPS.

The ultra-violet spectrograph
telescope: J. S. PLASKETT.

The spectra of three O-type stars:
PLASKETT.

Some fine occultations: coming: WituiAM. FP.
Rieen. ‘ ,

Planetary photography: PRANK EH. Ross.

Accuracy ‘of photographic registration: FRANK
BE. Ross. 3

Notes on ionization and pressure in the stars:
Henry Norris RUSSELL. ¢

Further observations on: wave-lengths in the
spectrum of Venus: Cuartes E. Sr. JOHN and
SrerH B. NicHoLson. :

The problem of three bodies and the spectrum
of neutral helium: LUDWIKk SILBERSTEIN.

A possible new method of stellar photometry:
LuDWIK SILBERSTEIN.

Observation of temporary white areas on Mars:
E. C. SuipuEr.

The star fields for the 1923 and 1925 total
eclipses of the sun: FREDERICK SLOCUM.

On ionization in stars: JOHN Q. STEWART.

On the spectroscopic binary Gamma Urse
Minoris: Orro StTRUVE.

Chronographic recording of wireless time sig-
nals: R. MeEbpruM Stewart and J. P. HEn-
DERSON. f

Comparison between Paris and Washington
time services based on chronographic registration
of Bordeaux, Annapolis, and Arlington radio
time signals: F. D. URiE.

Observations of Jupiter’s faint satellites, and
of Phebe, with the two-foot reflector of the -
Yerkes Observatory: G. VAN BIESBROECK.

of the 72-inch

if, Jel,

Radial velocity of the Prasepe cluster from ob-
jective-prism neodymium plates: H. C. WILSON.

Eclipsing variables showing two spectra: C. C.
WYLIE. f

Proper motions of some faint. stars: Eyrrrrr I.
YOWELL.

Uniform clock rates for a period of an entire
year: M. L. ZrmMeEr.

JOEL STEBBINS,
Secretary

CIENCE

New SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1452 Fripay, Octoser 27, 1922 .*

Sina@ue Copies, 15 Ors.

EDGAR PURDUM RAPID ELECTROLYSIS CELL
According to Dr. Graham Edgar and R. B. Purdum

See Jour. of Amer. Chem. Soc., June, 1922

This is a simple glass apparatus in which stirring of
the electrolyte is effected by a current of air. Results have
been obtained as rapid and accurate as those afforded by
the use of rotating electrodes. The apparatus consists of a
tube of Pyrex glass to which are sealed three glass “air lifts,”
connecting in a single tube at the bottom, and entering sym-
metrically about half way up the wide tube, the upper seals
being made tangentially. When the apparatus is half filled

y with liquid and a current of air is forced (or drawn. by -suc-
‘Som through the injectors, stirring is effected in two ways. First a con-
tinuous current of liquid is carried upward by the air Jifts.. Secondly, the
liquid (with the air bubbles) is delivered into the wide tube in sucha way
as to cause rotational stirring. For electrolytic determinations the wide tube
is fitted with a rubber stopper carrying a glass tube and the electrodes. Deter-
minations have been made upon solutions of copper sulfate, also on copper
in the presence of zinc, lead, and other metals. 110 volts D. C. reduced by
resistance lamps is satisfactory. The use of this apparatus for the determina-
tion of lead in baking powders will be discussed at the convention of Official
Agricultural Chemists to be held in Washington, November 15-17.

Write for Bulletin No. 201 which

gives details of the apparatus.

AND

ZED
ey vt z
NEW YORK CITY B ¥s/ PITTSBURGH BRANCH
3rd Ave., 18th—19th St. \& > 4048 Jenkins Arcade
ESTABLISHED 1851

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemicals
Washington, D. C., Display Room, Suite 601, Evening Star Building, Pennsylvania Avenue and 11th Street.

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

THE OESTROUS CYCLE
IN THE RAT

And Its Associated Phenomena
By
Lone anp Evans
148 pages, 11 plates, 7 figures in text; paper, $3.75

The profound importance of an_ infallible
method of detecting in the Mammalia the periodic
function of the ovary, and the possibility, through
the possession of such a method, of the investiga-
tion of disturbances of the ovarian function are
matters of interest to students of the subject.
Before proceeding to such investigation, it would
be necessary to establish clearly all the charac-
teristics of what has been called the normal
oestrous or reproductive cycle in the animal chosen
for investigation. To that task the present mono-
graph is devoted.

University of California Press
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

BIOLOGY REFERENCE TEXTS

ATWOOD. Civic And Economic Biology
Cloth, $1.68. High School Grade.

DAVISON. Mammalian Anatomy. 3d Edi.
Cloth, $2.25. College Grade.

BENSLEY. Practical Anatomy Of The
Rabbit. 3d Edition. Cloth, $2.50.
College Grade.

FOLSOM. Entomology. 3d Edition.
Cloth, $4.00. College Grade.

GALLOWAY. Zoology. 4th Edition.

Cloth, $2.75. College Grade.

KINGSLEY. Comparative Anatomy Of
The Vetebrates. 2d Edi. Cloth, $3.25.-
College Grade.

LOCHHEAD. Economic Entomology
Cloth, $2.75. College Grade.

PATTEN. Embryology Of The Chick
Cloth, $2.25. College Grade.

REESE. Economic Zoology. Cloth, $2.00.
College Grade.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.
Philadelphia, Pa.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS, ENGLAND
Announces the following NEW SCIENTIFIC BOOKS 7

The Andaman Islanders, A Study in Social Anthropology
By A. R.- Brown, M.A.
“Mr, A. R. Brown has written a most thorough and careful work on the ethnology of the
islands, on the manners and customs, myths, legends, religious beliefs of the Andamese.”

—Sir Harry Johnston in The Westminster Gazette.

Illustrated, $12.50

A History of the Arabs in the Sudan, and Some Account of the People Who
Preceded Them and of the Tribes Inhabiting Darfur. In two volumes.
By H. A. Macmicuaegt, D. S. D., Sudan Political Service
“Mr. Macmichael’s book is of the kind which is the delight of the specialist, the terror
of the general reader, and the despair of the critical reviewer!”’—The London Times Litt.

Sup pt.
The Growth of British Policy

Sets only $30.00

By Sir JJ 5R.) SEELEY, ithe DD), KC) Me G:

“Tt is a most stimulating review of a great period in our history, considered in relation

to Europe and the New World.”—Spectator.

Vrice, $5.50

The Naturalization of Animals and Plants in New Zealand
By Hon. Geo. M. THomson, M.L.C., F.L.S., F.N.Z. Inst.
“Mr. Thomson has spent years of labor, with expert assistance, and has produced a re-
markable study, more complete than any book on naturalization with which weeare ac-

quainted.”—London Times Litt. Suppt.

Illustrated, $14.00

For Sale by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, American Agents

64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York
Prairie Avenue and 25th Street, Chicago
Huntington Chambers, Copley Sq., Boston

609 Mission Street, San Francisco
330 South Harwood Street, Dallas
17 Houston Street, Atlanta

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal
Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

Vou. LVI OctToBER 27, 1922 No. 1452
CONTENTS

William Stewart Halsted: WH. C.....2.222:.2.-.-------- 461

Earth Currents and Magnetic Variations:

PROFESSOR FERNANDO SANFORD...------:------------ 464

Research at the Tortugas Laboratory: PRo-
FESSOR A. A. SCHAEFFER : 468
The Mount Everest Hxpedition...............-..------- 470
Scientific Hvents:
Nitrates in Southeastern California; The
Dedication of the Sterling Laboratory of
Yale University; The Joseph Sullivant
Medal; Installation of the President of

LOANS) LORE OGTSOUD [ee cet 471
Scientific Notes and News...:..1-2-..-.-.---c-eceeeecese 474
University and Educational Notes..............------ 477

Discussion and Correspondence:
Some Seismological Evidence that is not
evident: Dr. JAMES B. MaceLwane. The
Beginnings of American Geology: Dr.
Marcus BengamMin. An Opportunity: Dr.
WVAERN ONG PETA TOG Gea ce iene nen sees eee ne eel 478
Scientific Books:
Emil Fischer’s Aus meinem Leben: Dr.
IBN GT AUMOLN ELAR IR OyW ie eeeee eats ocean ene ROA 482
Notes on Meteorology and Climatology:
A New Aerological Summary: Dr. LeRoy
TEMG TSIN GER Has UNIAN BALA VRAIN 482
Special Articles:
Deficiency of Atmospheric Dust in Coal:
Dr. WALDO 8. GLOCE.....
The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
L. Parsons

WILLIAM STEWART HALSTED,
1852-1922

Proressor Hausrep, certainly one of the
most cultivated, and regarded by many as the
most eminent surgeon of his time, in view of
the character of bis contributions, died at noon
on Thursday, the seventh of September, in the
Johns Hopkins Hospital, of which he had been
surgeon-in-chief since soon after its opening.
At that time, in 1889, neither he nor his clinic-
al colleagues, Osler and Kelly, had as yet
turned forty.

A man of unique personality, shy, some-
thing of a recluse, fastidious in his tastes and
in his friendships, an aristocrat in his breed-
ing, scholarly in his habits, the victim for
many years of indifferent health, he neverthe-
less was one of the few American surgeons
who may be considered to have established a
school of surgery, comparable, in a sense, to
the school of Billroth in Vienna. He had few
of the qualities supposed to accompany what
the world regards as a suecessful surgeon.
Over-modest about his work, indifferent to mat-
ters of priority, caring little for the gregarious
gatherings of medical men, unassuming, hav-
ing little interest in private practice, he spent
his medical life avoiding patients—even stu-
dents, when ‘this was possible—and, when
health permitted, working in clinic and labora-
tory at the solution of a succession of prob-
lems which aroused his interest. He had that
rare form of imagination which sees prob-
lems, and the technical ability combined with
persistence which enabled him to attack them
with promise of a successful issue. Many of
his contributions, not only to his craft but to
the science of medicine in general, were funda-
mental in character and of enduring import-
ance.

As a schoolboy at Phillips-Andover and as
an undergraduate at Yale, he was prominent in
sports rather than in the class-room, and in

462

his senior year was captain of one of the early
university football teams. Like many other
young men his ambition was not fired until
his entrance into a professional school, and
when, after his graduation in 1874, he entered
the College of Physicians and Surgeons
(Columbia) in New York, he settled down to
prove his mettle with the result that three
years later, on getting his degree, he was
awarded a prize for leading his class in scholar-
ship. After serving as interne at Bellevue he
was appointed house physician to the newly
erected New York Hospital. Subsequently,
two years were passed in Europe where he
devoted himself more especially to the sub-
jects of anatomy and embryology. He studied
at Vienna, Leipzig and Wiirtzburg, and his
later surgical trend and investigative proclivi-
ties were distinctly colored by the German and
Austrian surgery of the day.

On his return from abroad in 1880, he was
made assistant demonstrator and subsequently
demonstrator of anatomy at the College of
Physicians and Surgeons. He also held a
number of hospital positions, first at the Chari-
ty Hospital where from 1881 to 1887 he was
an attending surgeon and director of the
out-patient department. For three years he
was also surgeon-in-chief to the Emigrant Hos-
pital, Ward’s Island; and later, from 1885 to
1887, an attending surgeon to both the Belle-
yue and Presbyterian Hospitals. During this
period in New York, following his return from
abroad, he supported himself mainly by teach-
ing, and with Dr. George E. Munroe he or-
ganized a famous extramural course for stu-
dents, consisting of practical exercises in the
laboratory and at the bedside, to take the place
of the time-honored quizzes which it was long
the fashion for the New York students with
hospital aspirations to attend.

During his last few years in New York he
undertook an anatomico-surgical investigation
on the anesthetizing effect of the then little-
known and newly introduced drug, cocaine. In
this research, which had been begun in 1885,
he was the first to utilize for surgical pur-
poses the principle of nerve blocking, and was
accustomed to demonstrate to dentists how

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1452

painless extractions or even more extensive
operations on the jaws might thus be carried
out. He was the first, also, at this time, to
demonstrate spinal anesthesia by introducing
the drug into the lumbar meninges. In the
course of these studies he used himself as a
subject, injecting his own peripheral nerves
in order to map out the areas of anthesia, and,
unaware of the danger he was running, con-
tracted an habituation to the drug, from which,
with the help of a devoted professional friend,
he eifectually broke himself.

It was natural enough that cocaine was sub-
sequently abhorred by him, and after Schleich’s
solution came to be generally employed as a
local anesthetic, he usually preferred to in-
filtrate with salt solution alone, which has cer-
tain anesthetizing properties, rather than use
even the diluted drug. Fifteen years later
when the writer of this note, as Dr. Halsted’s
resident surgeon, stumbled anew upon the prin-
ciple of nerve blocking for operations on
hernia and published a paper on the subject,
he was utterly unaware that his chief had ever
made studies -with cocaine of any sort, so re-
ticent was he about this particular matter and
so little did questions of priority interest him.
It has remained for the dentists ‘to call atten-
tion to his original work on regional anesthesia,
and a few months before his death they made
due public acknowledgment of what Dr. Hal-
sted himself had never laid claim to, and the
knowledge of which he had even withheld, at
least until recent years, from his house officers.

Before this tragie episode interrupted what
would doubtless have been a brilliant career
in New York, he had published a number of
papers which showed promise of his technical
gifts and abilities as an investigator, but it
was not until he was brought to Baltimore in
the late eighties by William H. Welch and got
to work in the original pathological building
there with Franklin P. Mall, Councilman, Flex-
ner and others, that his unusual capacity for
research was shown at its full worth.

The studies of compensatory thyroid hyper-
trophy, one of his early researches, published
in the first volume of the Johns Hopkins Hos-
pital Reports, remained for twenty years the

OcToBER 27, 1922]

basis of our views regarding exophthalmic
goitre as an expression of functional over-
activity. The correctness of his observations
and interpretation of them, indeed, remained
unquestioned until he himself repeated the ex-
periments and, failing to corroborate his origi-
nal results, promptly reported the fact before
one of the biological societies. It was a strik-
ing example of his scientific honesty, and it re-
mained for someone else to point out, on the
basis of new facts relating to iodine, how it
was that his original interpretation had been
nearer the truth than his later one.

Another of his early studies was on intestinal
resection and suture, and he introduced a
method of anastomosis of the bowel, ‘based on
the distribution of the blood supply and on
the correct placement of the sutures, far su-
perior to that of any of his predecessors.
These two subjects, the surgery of the thyroid
and intestine, continued to engage his atten-
tion to the end, and among his last publica-
tions was a monograph entitled “The Operative
Story of Goitre” published two years before
his death; and another on the bulkhead prin-
ciple of intestinal anatomosis.

His interest lay not in the number of cases
he might operate upon ‘but in working at cer-
tain principles of surgery, and in the course
of his experiments upon the thyroid and para-
thyroid bodies, he hit upon what is known as
Halsted’s Law, namely, that “a transplant of
a portion of a ductless gland will survive only
when a physiological deficit has been pro-
duced.”

On the opening of the hospital in 1889 he
turned his attention to questions of technique,
and was among the first American surgeons
to grasp fully the principle of the new aseptic
surgery. The introduction of silver as suture
material and as a covering for wounds be-
cause of its bactericidal qualities was due to
him. He studied the healing of an aseptic
blood-clot in closed wounds.
gutta-percha in the form of “protective” as
a dressing for open wounds. He showed how
silk could be safely buried in the tissues, an
important principle many surgeons are in-
capable of learning. He was among the first

SCIENCE

He introduced *

463

to insist upon absolute blood-stilling in the
course of operations in days when operations
were bloody affairs, and he introduced the form
of delicate pointed forceps for hemostosis now
universally in use. He also introduced rubber
gloves into surgery in the early nineties, and,
being himself a painstaking rather than a bril-
liant or spectacular operator, it was long be-
fore gloves came into use in other clinics—
indeed, for years they were very much scoffed
at as clumsy impediments to manipulation.

His operation for cancer of the breast revo-
lutionized the treatment of these cases, and the
same might be said of his hernia operation,
though in this he shared the honors with Bas-
sini, an Italian, who introduced a high in-
guinal operation with repair of the canal at
about the same time. In the late nineties his
attention was chiefly centered upon the dis-
eases of the gall-bladder and its ducts, and the
early radical operation on the common duet
emanated from his clinic. Possibly few men
in ‘the country knew more than did he about
the condition from which he was destined to
succumb—a stone in the ampulla of Vater.

In later years he devoted himself chiefly to
studies relating to the blood-vessels and evolved
a method whereby in cases of aneurysm the
major trunks could be slowly constricted, and
in this as in all other subjects which his studies
illuminated, his inventive genius was displayed,
as well as his thorough knowledge of anatomy
and pathology. He was the first successfully
to ligate the left subclavian artery in its first
portion for aneurysm and the only surgeon
who is recorded to have performed this rare
procedure twice.

Halsted’s honors were many. In 1900 at the
centennary of the Royal College of Surgeons
of England he, with J. C. Warren of Boston,
W. W. Keen of Philadelphia, and Robert F.
Weir of New York, were the four Americans
chosen to receive an honorary fellowship. A
few years later he was made an F. R. C. S. of
Edinburgh, and also an LL. D. both of Hdin-
burgh and of his alma mater, Yale. Columbia
gave him a D. Se. and he was a member of the
National Academy of Sciences as well as of
many other foreign and American scientific

464 SCIENCE

bodies. Though his publications were com-
paratively few—rarely more than one or two
a year—he wrote well and painstakingly, and
many of his papers will remain among our
surgical classics. The one surgeon he perhaps
admired more than any other was the late
Theodore Kocher of Berne, Switzerland, and
the two men, in manner and methods surgical,
in imagination and ideals, had very much in
common. Both of them held their professor-
ships for an unusual number of years—Kocher
for forty-five years, Halsted for thirty-three.

Halsted was a man who taught by example
rather than precept. He was a safe, fastidious
and finished surgeon, by no means a brillant
and showy operator after the style cultivated
by many of his contemporaries. He cared
nothing for administration, and up to ten years
ago at least, his staff never met as a body.

e was not a successful teacher of under-
graduates. A bed-to-bed ward visit was almost
an impossibility for him. If he was interested
he would spend an interminable time over a
single patient, reviewing the history, taking
notes, having sketches made, carrying the prob-
lem to the laboratory and perhaps working
on it for weeks. Meanwhile his associates and
assistants would run his clinie as best they
could. In this way his school developed—
none of his pupils after his own fashion, to
be sure—it would have been impossible to imi-
tate him—all of ‘them, nevertheless, influenced
enormously by his attitude toward surgery,
and by his operative methods.

His loss to the Johns Hopkins Hospital
which he served so faithfully and long, and to
whieh he bequeathed his property, will be ir-
reparable. Tt will be equally so to his many
and devoted disciples. One of his long series
of resident-surgeons, who, as others have done,
eame to know him better after leaving his
service, just as many sons learn to know their
fathers not until after they have grown up,
has in all respect and affection written this in-
adequate note of appreciation.

‘Who knows whether the best of men be
known, whether there be not more remarkable
persons forgot than any that stand remembered
in the known account of time?’’

Tab, (Op

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

EARTH CURRENTS AND MAGNETIC
VARIATIONS

WHENEVER two metallic conductors are
buried in the earth and are connected by a wire
through a galvanometer a current is found to
flow through the galvanometer.

Such a current may be (and sometimes is)
caused by a difference of electrolytic action
upon, or a difference of temperature of the
ground plates, but it is often much stronger
than cculd possibly be produced by such
action. It is also regularly the case that the
farther apart are the ground connections the
greater is their potential difference, and this
would riot ibe the case if the currents were due
to elec.rvolysis. Since no one has been able to
explain these currents by any of the properties
of the metallie part of the circuit, it has come
to be believed that the currents are flowing in
the earth before the two ends of the wire are
grounded, and that the wire merely serves as
another conducting path between the two earth
connections and acts as a shunt for a part of
the current. Thus the currents are not re-
garded as flowing around a circuit consisting
partly of the metallic conductor and partly of
the earth between its terminals, as they would
flow if they were electrolytic or thermo-electric
currents, but they are believed to flow in the
same direction in both the earth and the me-
tallic conductor.

Since no place has been found, either on
land or sea, where these currents will not flow
through a long conductor whose ends are
earthed, it is believed that there are currents
flowing everywhere in the outer layers of the
earth’s crust and in the sea.

As soon as telegraph lines began to be estab-
lished it was observed that currents were often
set up in these lines when no battery was con-
nected in the circuit. In 1847, a brillant
aurora was observed in Europe and simultane-
ously with this telegraph lines were greatly dis-
turbed. This led to a careful observation of
the diurnal and seasonal variations of the earth
currents which were known to be always
present in the lines, and to the establishment
of a correspondence between these variations
and the diurnal and seasonal variations of the
magnetic elements of the earth. Since that

October 27, 1922]

time it has been known that the two phenomena
are physically related, but there is, as yet, no
agreement as to the exact nature of this rela-
tion.

In this connection it should be mentioned
that two classes of magnetic and electric varia-
tions have been observed and are frequently, if
not universally, assumed to have the same ex-
planation. It is well known that at times of
great sun-spot and auroral disturbances there
are also very great and irregular magnetic and
earth-current disturbances. It was these ab-
normal earth-currents which first attracted the
attention of physicists, and it is these which
have received the most attention from writers
on the subject. But in addition to these there
is a regular diurnal variation in both the mag-
netie declination and inclination and in the
direction and intensity of the earth-currents.
In the literature of terrestrial magnetism,
variations of the irregular class are called mag-
netic disturbances while the regular daily and
seasonal changes are known as the magnetic
variations. The relation between the magnetic

changes and the earth-current changes seems

to be different in the two cases. Thus in the
case of the magnetic disturbances the corre-
sponding earth-current changes seem to be
simultaneous with the magnetic changes, while
in the case of the’regular diurnal variations
the magnetic changes seem to lag behind the
corresponding earth-current changes by a
period which may be as great as two or three
hours.

This would seem to suggest that if the reg-
ular variations in terrestrial magnetism and
earth-currents are related in the sense of cause
and effect the irregular magnetic and earth-
current disturbances are not so related, but are
both apparently due to some external phe-
nomenon which acts simultaneously upon both
classes of phenomena. This fact seems not to
have been heretofore recognized by writers
upon the subject.

The first extensive study of the relation of
earth-currents to terrestrial magnetism seems
to have been started at the Greenwich Observa-
tory in 1863. Two earth-current lines, one
north and south and the other east and west,
were established in that year, and continuous

SCIENCE

465

records of the earth-currents in these two direc-
tions were made. In 1868, Airy, the astronomer
royal, published the results of his comparisons
of these variations with accompanying mag-
netic changes. As a result of this comparison,
he says:

I think that on repeatedly examining the agree-
ment of the two systems of curves, it is impossi-
ble to avoid the conclusions that the magnetic
disturbances are produced by terrestrial galvanic
currents below the magnets. ... At the present
time we are unable to say whether the records of
the galvanic currents throw any light upon the
origin of the diurnal variations in the magnetic
elements.

In 1870 Airy published another paper in
which he undertook to account for the diurnal
magnetic variation, as well as the magnetic dis-
turbances, by earth-currents; but the theoret-
ical curve of magnetic variation which he con-
structed from earth-current data, while agree-
ing in general shape with the observed curve
of variation, is not coincident with it in time.

Since the work of Airy, the most extensive
comparison of the variations in earth-currents
and in the magnetic elements of the earth has
been made in Germany. In 1883, two under-
ground telegraph lines, one from Berlin to
Thorn and the other from Berlin to Dresden,
were set apart for the measurement of earth
currents, and continuous records of these cur-
rents were kept from that time until 1891. The
material thus collected was turned over to Pro-
fessor B. Weinstein, who, with a corps of com-
petent assistants, went over all the records and
established for the five years 1884-1883 what
he regarded as the constant resultant earth-
current in the region between these cities. The
diurnal and seasonal variations of this current
were then compared with the corresponding
variations in the magnetic elements at Vienna
and Wilhelmshaven. As a result of this com-
parison, Weinstein says:

Personally, I have arrived at the conviction
that almost the whole of the changes observed by
means of a magnetometer and classed as terres-
trial magnetic variations are due to earth-currents
which act upon the magnetometer as a galvano-
meter.

Notwithstanding the very close relation
which the curves published by Weinstein show

466

between the two classes of phenomena, his con-
elusions as to the immediate relation of the
two have not met with universal acceptance.
Very few physicists have given any attention
to the study of earth-currents in recent times,
and most of these have been influenced largely
by their theories as to the cause back of both
earth-currents and terrestrial magnetism. Some
physicists, of whom Balfour Stewart is per-
haps the most important, have gone so far as
to reach conclusions the reverse of those of
Airy and Weinstein, and to attribute the earth

currents to the magnetic variations. The fact
that the diurnal variations in magnetic
direction and intensity which would seem

to follow from the changes in the earth-
currents regularly lag behind the latter cer-
tainly indicates that the current does not imme-
diately act upon the magnetic needle, as in the
case of the current and needle of a galvano-
meter, and as is maintained by Weinstein in
the quotation given above; but that the varia-
tions of the needle follow changes in the mag-
netic field of the earth, and that whatever
effects are produced upon the needle by earth-
currents must be due to changes which these
currents have produced in the magnetic field
of the earth at that place.

Looked at in this way, a time lag between
the changes in current and the magnetic varia-
tions growing out of them does not seem im-
probable. Ewing has shown that in the case
of a soft iron wire placed in a magnetizing
coil an appreciable time is required for the
wire to become fully magnetized. Rayleigh
found that with a piece of annealed iron wire
only 1.6 mm. in diameter and 17 em. long the
time for complete magnetization in a weak
field was from 15 to 20 seconds. Hopkinson,
after an extensive study of the rate at which
magnetic induction penetrates iron, says:

Suppose a magnet such as we have here con-
structed, but of the dimensions of the earth, and
that some almighty electrician reversed its cur-
rents in the copper coils, the magnetizing force
being 2 or 3. It would take some thousands of
millions of years before the rate of change of
induction at the center of its core would attain a
maximum.

It is perhaps not allowable to compare the
earth magnetically with a sphere of soft iron,

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

and it is plain that the variation in the mag-
netic elements at a given place are not due to
changes in the whole magnetic field of the
earth, as in that case they would occur simul-
taneously over the whole earth instead of
moving around with the sun, as they do, but it
does not seem incredible that a change in the
direction or magnitude of an earth-current at a
given place should require two or three hours
to produce its maximum effect upon the mag-
netic elements at that place. In such a con-
tingeney, it seems almost certain that the rate
of change of the magnetic field at a given time
would be proportional to the current intensity
at that time. If we assume this to be the case,
it is possible to compute from the curve of
magnetic variation the direction and relative
intensity of the current which is the cause of
this magnetic variation.

Thus, when a current flows from north to
south below a compass needle it deflects the
north end of the needle toward the west. The
north-south component of the earth current at
Berlin was usually toward the south, and was
much stronger in the day time than at night.
Its greatest intensity was usually just before
noon, and its least intensity in the morning
and evening. In Figure 1, the curve A is
Weinstein’s curve for average diurnal variation
in the north-south component of the observed
earth-current for the year 1884. Curve B
gives the average diurnal variation in the west
component of the earth’s magnetic field at
Vienna for the same period. It will be seen

Figure 1

Ocroser 27, 1922]

that the earth-current toward the south was
strongest between eleven o’clock and noon,
while the magnetic force toward the west was
at its maximum between one and two P.M.

If a curve be drawn showing the rate of
change of magnetic force throughout the
twenty-four hours, we have the dotted curve,
which resembles Curve A so closely as to give
probability to our assumption that the mag-
netic deviation is caused by the earth-current,
and that the magnetic force is always changing
at a rate which is proportional to the intensity
of the earth-current.

This relation between the rate of change of
the magnetic declination and the intensity of
the north-south earth-current has also been ob-
served by Bauer? in data taken from the
records of Observatorio Del Ebro, at Tortosa,
Spain, but his conclusion drawn from this rela-
tion differs from that given above. Bauer says:

The general conclusion is that the north-south
earth-current might be the result of electro-mag-
netic induction, caused by the fluctuation during
the day of the west-east component of the earth’s
magnetism.

In reaching this conclusion Bauer has over-
looked a very elementary and very fundamental
law of electromagnetic induction, viz., that a
current induced by a change in a magnetic
field is in the opposite direction to the current
which would be required to produce the given
change in the magnetic field. If the north-
south earth-current and the westward deflection
of the magnetic needle are causally related, the
magnetie deviation is induced by the current.
The contrary can not ‘be true.

In the case of the west-east component of
the earth-current conditions are somewhat dif-
ferent. This current weakens the magnetic
component toward the north by a very small
fraction of its total force, the diurnal range
of this weakening being less than one two-
thousandth part of the whole, and probably
not all of this is attributable directly to the
earth current. The resultant effect of the total
earth current at a given place is to make the
day side of the earth electropositive to the
night side, and this condition would, of itself,
weaken the north magnetie force on the day

1 Terr. Mag., XXVII, 14 (March-June, 1922).

SCIENCE

467

side of the earth. That is, a positive charge
carried around by the earth’s rotation from
west to east would set wp a north-south mag-
netic field in the opposite direction to the prin-
cipal magnetic field of the earth. Such a
charge would not, however, affect the east-west
magnetic field of the earth.

That the day side of the earth is, on the
whole, electropositive to the night side is plain-
ly shown by a series of observations which the
present writer has carried on for about three
years, and for which he has continuous photo-
graphie records for more than two years. That
this difference’ of electric potential on the oppo-
site sides of the earth is due to the electrostatic
induction of the negative charge of the sun
seems beyond question. A smaller, but still a
very definite effect of the moon’s induction is
also shown by the records.

In Figure 2, Curve A shows the diurnal
variation of the earth’s potential at Palo Alto
for one year, from August, 1920, to July,
1921. Curve B shows the corresponding mean
variation of the west-east earth current at
Berlin for the year 1884. It is seen that while
the earth-current reaches its maximum inten-
sity at between ten and eleven A.M., the elec-
tropositive potential of the earth is at its maxi-
mum at between one and two P.M. In both
cases the time of maximum has a seasonal
variation. The same may be said of the varia-
tion in the north-south magnetic component of
the earth’s magnetic field, which for the year
1884 attained its maximum between eleven
o’clock and noon at Vienna and Wilhelmshaven,
as shown by the dotted curve C. In this case,
as in the ease of the variation in magnetic

FIGURE 2

468

declination, the change in the earth’s magnetic
field is in the direction that would be produced
by the change in the earth-current intensity
and in the electric potential of the earth, hence
the current can not be caused by the variation
in the magnetic intensity.

Both the earth-currents and the diurnal mag-
netic variations are in the direction which they
would take if they were caused by the electro-
Static induction of the sun’s negative charge,
while the permanent magnetic field of the earth
is such as would be caused by the rotation of its
own permanent negative charge.

Figure 3 shows the relation between the ob-
served mean diurnal variation of the earth-eur-
rent in a line about two miles long at Palo Alto
and the diurnal variation of the earth’s poten-
tial for the same three days, as shown by the
photographie record. On account of the dis-
turbanees in the earth due to trolley lines and
other causes, and to possible disturbances in the
line, which has been kindly put at my disposal
by the Pacifie Telephone and Telegraph Com-
pany, it is impossible to record the earth-eur-
rents photographically with any instrument at
my command, and I have been compelled to
make all the observations visually. As I have
no assistance, I am compelled to make the con-
tinuous twenty-four hour runs myself, and for
this reason I have at the present time but three
such complete records, viz., for June 2, July 18
and August 10, of the present year. The mean

on 6 P.M,

FIGURE 3

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

diurnal variation for these three days is shown
in Curve A in Figure 3, while the mean diurnal
variation in earth potential for the same three
days is shown by the dotted curve, B. In this
curve the signs of the potential are inverted to
show better the agreement of the two curves.
Both curves show many irregularities which
would probably disappear in the mean of a
large number of observations, but their similar-
ity in general outline is such as to make it hard
to doubt that they are physically related.
Their time relation seems to indicate that the
positive charge on the day side of the earth is
due to the movement of electrons away from

the sun.
FERNANDO SANFORD

STANFORD UNIVERSITY

RESEARCH AT THE TORTUGAS
LABORATORY

THE untimely death of Alfred Goldsborough
Mayor and the consequent interruption of the
plans of the Tortugas Laboratory of the Car-
negie Institution of Washington naturally
arouses renewed interest in the work of the
laboratory and especially in the investigations
now being carried on there. It may therefore
be desirable to bring to general notice a brief
résumé of the activities of the laboratory and
also to point out the purposes of some of the
researches now in progress.

The laboratory has been in existence for
eighteen years and during that time it has
published seventeen large volumes of “Papers
from the Tortugas Laboratory,’ with one or
two volumes more in preparation. In addi-
tion, a large number of papers, based in whole
or in part on work done at the laboratory,
were published elsewhere, one of the most im-
portant of these beimg Mayor’s own work of
three volumes on the Meduse. (Further dis-
cussion of Mayor’s researches is found in
Davenport’s interesting paper in SCIENCE,
August 4, 1922). Among the contributors of
these papers are many of America’s most pro-
ductive biologists. In estimating the produc-
tive activity of the laboratory it is necessary
to remember that the laboratory has been open
only from eight to fourteen weeks each year
and that the greater part of the work has been

OctToser 27, 1922]

done by university and college men who were
busy with professional duties during the rest
of the year.

An examination of these papers shows that
they may be placed, for convenience, into three
groups, as follows: 1, Systematics and Dis-
tribution. The works of Mayor on the Meduse,
Vaughan on the Corals, H. L. Clark on the
Echinoderms, Treadwell on the Annelids, Cush-

man on the Foraminifera and others show.

that, contrary to general belief, the tropics
still offer extraordinarily rich fields for this
fundamental and important branch of biology.
Work of this character, which necessarily pre-
cedes all other biological work on the organisms
involved, has been carried on continuously
since the establishment of the Department of
Marine Biology by the Carnegie Institution.
2, Embryology. In the earlier years of the
existence of the laboratory numerous papers
were published on embryological subjects, but
latterly this phase of biology has received rela-
tively little attention, although there has been
no abatement of facility or opportunity for
this kind of work. The explanation of this is
near at hand. It will be recalled that the
laboratory was established at the time when the
chief, interest of biologists generally was in
embryology, but that soon thereafter more and
more attention was given to genetics, almost
wholly at the expense of embryology. At the
present time a relatively small number of
deseriptive embryological researches are being
prosecuted. 3, Crucial Physiological Experi-
ments and Observations. It frequently hap-
pens that some general conclusion based on a
considerable amount of experimental or ob-
servational work already completed by one or
more investigators, depends for its validity
upon some crucial experiment or observation.
It seems that because of the organisms, the
climate or other conditions peculiar to the
tropics, a large number of experimental or
descriptive papers depended for their crucial
data on work done at the Tortugas laboratory,
or on expeditions from that laboratory to other
points in the tropics.

Owing to the brief season during which the
laboratory has been open each year, problems
in the science of genetics, which at present

SCIENCE

these researches.

469

occupies so large a place in biology, can not
be carried on with entire satisfaction because
of the fact that such work as a rule requires
continuous attention for long periods.

Of the researches now in progress at Tor-
tugas may be mentioned, first, that of Professor
Longley, of Goucher College, on the coloration
of reef fishes, an investigation which he has
been carrying on for a number of years by
means of a specially designed diving hood
which enables him to study the habits of fishes
in their natural environment. In addition to
making important contributions to the general
subject of animal coloration, he has collected
what is perhaps the largest body of data in
existence on feeding and other fundamental re-
actions of coral reef fishes. Doctor Bartsch,
of the National Museum, has been engaged in
breeding experiments on Cerion, a genus of
land snails inhabiting the Florida Keys and the
Bahamas, with a view to determining their
specific relationships and their evolutionary
history. Professor Lipman, of the University
of California, has begun a comprehensive study
of the activities of marine bacteria. The in-
dications are that bacteria play as large a part
in the life of the sea as they have been found
to play in the life on land. It is consequently
difficult to overestimate either the importance
or the magnitude of this investigation. Cap-
tain Potts, of Cambridge, England, is continu-
ing his studies, begun elsewhere, on ‘factors
influencing growth rates among various species
of invertebrates. Dr. Morgulis, of the Uni-
versity of Nebraska Medical School, has begun
a biochemical study of the blood of certain
crustaceans, and finally, I may mention my
own work on marine amebas, of which a mono-
graph is now ready for the press.

A number of researches which were inaugu-
rated at Tortugas require traveling to dis-
tant points for the successful prosecution of
Among such investigations
which are in progress at present may be men-
tioned those on marine Annelids by Professor
Treadwell, who has visited a number of the
West Indian Islands, Hawaii and several of the
South Sea groups; Professor Harvey, who has
visited various parts of the world in search of
luminous organisms for his studies in bio-

470

luminescence; Professor. Setchell, who has
spent several seasons in the South Pacific in
floristic studies. And in this connection must
be mentioned also the unfinished researches of
Doctor Mayor himself, who visited the Samoan
Islands for the purpose of making observations
on the rate and the conditions of the growth of

corals, and who was laying plans, up to within |.

a few days of his death, for another expedi-
tion to the South Pacifie for the purpose of
continuing his own and other investigations.

The life of the tropical sea presents unlimit-
ed opportunities for fruitful scientific investi-
gation and it is the stated purpose of the la-
boratory to provide facilities for such in-
vestigations from a broad point of view. The
published results clearly indicate that this pur-
pose is being achieved in full measure. Stu-
dents of marine biology confidently hope that
the Carnegie Institution of Washington will
continue to support the Department of Marine
Biology so that the study of life in the sea
may be continued with undiminished energy
and with unrestricted scope.

A. A. SCHAEFFER
UNIVERSITY OF TENNESSEE, KNOXVILLE

THE MOUNT EVEREST EXPEDITION

In an account of the expedition The Geo-
graphical Journal says that the early climbing
season of 1922 was very brief. The expedition
reached its base eamp below the Rongbuk gla-
cier at the end of April, when winter still held
in the valley: and in the first days of June the
monsoon broke and the season was over—at
any rate until September. In the few weeks
available there were two highly suecessful
climbs, and a third which ended badly in the
avalanche. Within six weeks most of the best
climbers were out of action by frostbite, and
the whole party so exhausted by the prolonged
exertion above 16,000 feet that there could be
no thought of renewing the attack in the
autumn.

The final conquest of the mountain must
wait, then, for a third year’s campaign, organ-
ized in the light of this year’s experience and
this year’s great though not complete success.
Closer acquaintance with the mountain has
shown that the physical difficulties ave more

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

formidable, the physiological difficulties de-
cidedly less, than had been supposed: the or-
ganization and equipment were on the right
lines and in most respects perfect. But the
weather introduces each year an inealeulable
factor, against which the best schemes may be
laid in vain.

In October those members of the expedition
who went out from England will reassemble on

the platform of the Central Hall to recount

their adventures and to receive the hearty con-
gratulations they have earned so well. The
meeting will regret that they can not welcome
and congratulate with them the four officers of
the Indian service whose duty will keep them
in India.

By the last reports we are glad to learn that

-Major Morshead is doing well, and that he will

lose no more than the tips of three fingers of
the frost-bitten hand. The other members of
the party who suffered less are already quite
recovered: several are already home and others
well on their way. General Bruce with head-
quarters arrived in Darjeeling on August 2,
and the only member of the expedition left in
Tibet is Captain Noel, who has established a
photographie dark-room at Gyantse, and is
hard at work developing many thousands of
feet of cinematograph film and a great quan-
tity of plates and panoram films. His leisure
he spends in “filming” Tibetan life and cus-
toms; and he is not due in England until the
middle of October. It will therefore not be
possible to show any of the film at the joint
meeting of the society and the Alpine Club at
the Central Hall on Monday, October 16, when
General Bruce and several members of the
party will give the first account of their work.
A second joint meeting will be held on Novem-
ber 21 for the first show of the film, which will
be awaited with great interest. Captain Noel
did extraordinarily well in getting his cinemato-
graph camera, fitted with an enormous tele-
photo lens, to 23,000 feet on the Chang La,
and photographing the climbing to about
26,000 fect. He writes that the Sinclair camera
and the big lens by Tayler, Taylor & Hobson
have been a great success. The latter was a
heavy addition to the outfit, but it saved his
life in the diaster which befell the third climb-

OctToBER 27, 1922]

ing party, for it proved too heavy for the
climb in the new soft snow below the Chang
La, and he had been compelled to turn back
from the rear of the party only a few minutes
before the train of porters was carried away
by the avalanche.

Captain Noel in his letters mentions many
difficulties in photography at extreme alti-
tudes: the most ‘curious is the effect of the dry
Tibetan climate on the cinematograph film,
which cracks and sparkles with electrie sparks
when pulled through the hand, so that it is
necessary to’ work with a wet hand when
threading the film on the developing frames.
Happily this effect was anticipated, and the
makers of the Newman-Sinclair camera suc-
ceeded in making the film run through the gate
without friction, and provided open-mouthed
film boxes, so that damage from electrical
roarkings is reduced to a minimum.

The official photographs which have come
home from the expedition up to the time of
writing comprise about 200 auarter-plate nega-
tives on glass, a certain number of large pan-
orama films, and two small V.P.K. films. These
are supplemented by good series of pictures
taken by Dr. Longstaff and Captain Finch,
which have been placed at the disposal of the
committee. A selection of enlargements is
shown in the Photograph Room of the society,
but the record must be very incomplete until
the arrival of Captain Noel in October with all
the larger plates. Enlargements from these
will be shown as soon as possible, and the
Mount Everest Committee will probably ar-
range for a public exhibition of the pictures
in the Alpine Club Hall after Christmas, as
was done last January.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
NITRATES IN SOUTHEASTERN CALIFORNIA

NitroGen is needed in large quantities for
use in fertilizers, in explosives required in
engineering and mining, and in munitions made
for national defense in war. During the war
the demand for nitrates became so urgent that
every known source of them in the United
States was ransacked to find enough to supply
our ever-increasing needs. The world’s store-

SCIENCE

471

house for nitrates is Chile, but the growing
menace of the submarine made it imperative
to divert to other uses the shipping then en-
gaged in the Chile nitrate trade.

Small quantites of nitrates are found in
almost every region where the rainfall is very
small. The most promising deposits in the
United States were those in the Amargosa re-
gion, in southeastern California. Before the
war some of these deposits had been examined
several times, chiefly by private companies that
sought to obtain capital for their exploitation,
but the reports made were so conflicting that
the United States Geological Survey, Depart-
ment of the Interior, decided to make a careful
study of all the deposits in that region.

The nitrate-bearing material, or “caliche,’” as
it is called in California, resembles in character
and mode of occurrence the well-known ealiche
found in Chile, but it is much poorer and
thinner. It forms a layer a few inches thick
that les less than a foot below the surface, at
the plane of contact ‘between the unaltered
bedrock, which there consists chiefly of beds of
Tertiary clay shale and the overlying clay soil.
A white powdery layer, composed chiefly of
sulphate of sodium and caleium, nearly every-
where lies between the caliche and the clay
soil. The caliche cuts across successive tilted
beds of the underlying clay shale and is thus
clearly independent of the geologic structure.

In the examination made by the Geological
Survey maps and cross sections were made at
many places. Scores of trenches and hundreds
of pits were dug down to or into the bedrock,
and the soil, caliche and bedrock were then
systematically sampled. Many hundred quali-
tative tests and nearly a thousand quantitative
analyses of the ealiche were made. The com-
mercial development of the deposits, though
they are the most promising in the country,
was found to be impracticable, but the results
of the investigation should set at rest any
uncertainties as to the nature or quantity of
the nitrates in the areas examined and should
serve as a guide in the exploration of other
supposedly nitrate-bearing regions.

An account of this investigation is given in
the Geological Survey’s Bulletin 724, on
“Nitrate Deposits in the Amargosa Region,

472

Southeastern California,” by L. F. Noble, G. R.
Mansfield and others.

THE DEDICATION OF THE STERLING LABO-
RATORY OF YALE UNIVERSITY

THE dedication of the new Sterling Chemical
Laboratory of Yale University will occur on
April 4, 1923, during the spring meeting of
the American Chemical Society at New Haven.
This arrangement has just been completed by
national officers of the society and officials of
the Yale Corporation.

The scientific meeting will be under the
auspices of the New Haven and Connecticut
Valley sections of the society. Professor Treat
B. Johnson, of Yale University, is chairman
of the executive committee in charge, chosen
from members of the two sections.

The dedication ceremony, with probably
1,500 or 2,000 members of the American
Chemical ‘Society in attendance, as well as the
Yale faculty and student body, will be impres-
sive. The new building is one of the finest in
the world and is built on an entirely new
architectural principle. The main building is
constructed on three sides of a square, three
stories high and is in harmony with other
buildings on the campus. In this building are
class and lecture rooms, private laboratories
and offices.

Inclosed in the square is a one-story, saw-
tooth roof type of factory building, with mova-
ble partitions. This structure can be varied to
suit the various needs of the teaching staff. It
is constructed to give the maximum of light
and air and is equipped so that it can be con-
verted into several small workshops or one
large shop, equal in size to a small commercial
chemical plant.

The following are chairmen of the several
committees for the meeting: Program, T. B.
Johnson; Finance, J. 8. Gravely; Dedication,
John Johnston; Registration, Blair Saxton;
Arrangement, A. J. Hill; Hotels and Trans-
portation, Ralph Langley; Smoker, P. TT.
Walden; Reception and Entertainment, C. H.
Matthewson; Publicity, W. T. Read; Ladies’
Entertainment, Mrs. John Johnson. The Chi
chapter of Alpha Chi Sigma is to have charge
of the information service of the meeting.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

THE JOSEPH SULLIVANT MEDAL

Mr. BensamiIn Garver Lamour, chief engi-
neer of the Westinghouse Electrie and Manu-
facturing Company, has been nominated to be
the first recipient of the Joseph Sullivant
Medal of the Ohio State University. In Octo-
ber, 1920, on the occasion of the celebration of
the fiftieth anniversary of the founding of the
university, Dr. T. C. Mendenhall, a trustee and
emeritus professor of physics of the univer-
sity, presented a sum of money, the income of
which is to be used for a gold medal to be
known as the Joseph Sullivant Medal of the
Ohio State University.

The conditions of the gift provide that this
medal shall serve as a memorial of the eminent
services in behalf of the university of Mr.
Joseph Sullivant who, as a member of the first
board of trustees, was influential in determin-
ing the character and future of the university.
The medal is to be awarded once in five years
in recognition of an admittedly notable achieve-
ment on the part of a son or daughter of the
university, whether that achievement be in the
form of an important invention, discovery or
contribution to science, the practical solution
of a significant engineering, economic or agri-
cultural problem; or the production of a valu-
able, literary, artistic, historical, philosophical
or other work.

Persons eligible to receive the medal shall .
be, in the order of preference, as follows:
graduates of the university; non-graduates who
have studied at the university not less than two
years; members of the faculty who are not
graduates of the university, who have served as
such for at least ten years, when the work
offered as entitling them to the award has been
done during their connection with the institu-
tion.

From the list of nominations made by the
faculties of the different colleges of the uni-
versity, the graduate council selected three, viz.,
George Wesley Bellows, artist; Benjamin
Garver Lamme, chief engineer, Westinghouse
Hlectrie and Manufacturing Company; Herbert
Osborn, research professor in the department
of zoology and entomology, the Ohio State
University.

The names of these three candidates were

OcroBrr 27, 1922]

then presented to a committee selected by the
graduate council and composed of the follow-
ing members: Chairman, Dr. Elihu Thompson,
of West Lynn, Mass., electrical engineer; Mr.
Arthur Fairbanks, director of the Museum of
Fine Arts, Boston, Mass.; Dr. William Morton
Wheeler, director of the Bussey Institution,
Boston, Mass.

This committee, after making a thorough
study of the achievements of the three candi-
dates proposed by the graduate council, unani-
mously selected Mr. Benjamin Garver Lamme
as the one who should receive the Joseph Sulli-
vant Medal. The medal will be awarded to
Mr. Lamme later in the year at a special meet-
ing to be held in honor of the occasion.

INSTALLATION OF THE PRESIDENT OF
LEHIGH UNIVERSITY

BeErore an audience of delegates from other
institutions, alumni and undergraduates of Le-
high University and friends of the university
which crowded the Packer Memorial Chapel,
Dr. Charles Russ Richards, former dean of the
College of Engineering of the University of
Illinois, was on October 14 inaugurated presi-
dent of Lehigh University.

It was Founder’s Day at Lehigh and on that
day commemorating the founding of the uni-
versity by Judge Asa Packer its presidents
have been inaugurated. Dr. Henry R. Price,
president of the board of trustees, presided.
After the induction address by Bishop Ethel-
bert Talbot and the greetings from the alumni
by Dr. Henry §. Drinker, president emeritus,
and from the faculty by Professor John L.
Stewart, Dr. Richards delivered an address
which indicated his plans for Lehigh’s future.

Dr. Richards outlined the influence on human
history of discoveries and inventions. He made
clear how the lack of scientific knowledge has
retarded, sometimes for centuries, the utiliza-
tion of known forces of nature. He traced the
history of our present civilization and indi-
cated the specific discoveries on which it rests.
He outlined also the trend of education from
the establishment of the University of Alex-
andria, and argued that industry and educa-
tion must go hand in hand if we are to be
saved in the future from the wasteful methods
of the past. .

SCIENCE

473

Dr. Richards told his audience that Lehigh,
for sixty years a teaching college, was to em-
bark in the great work of engineering research
when he stated, “While teaching is the obvious
and apparently the chief function of a univer-
sity, it should be its purpose to place scientific
research in a position of equal importance with
the work of instruction for the world must
largely depend upon it to extend the bounda-
ries of knowledge and to show its applications
to the affairs of life.”

Lehigh: took this occasion to honor some of
her distinguished alumni with doctor degrees.
The list is as follows:

DOCTOR OF SCIENCE

William Bowie, C.E., 795, M.A., Se.D., chief
of the Division of Geodesy, U. S. Coast and
Geodetic Survey.

Morris Llewellyn Cooke, M.E., ’95, former com-
missioner of public works, Philadelphia.

Walter Savage Landis, Met.E., ’02, M.S., ’06,
chief technologist American Cyanamid Company,
New York City.

Harlan Sherman Miner, B.8., ’88, Se.D., chief
chemist, Welsbach Light Company, Gloucester,
N. J:

Harvey Harkness Stoek, B.S., ’87, H.M., 788,
Se.D., head of the department of mining engineer-
ing, University of Illinois.

Richard Hawley Tucker, C.E., ’79, astronomer,
Lick Observatory, Mt. Hamilton, California.

DOCTOR OF LAWS

Manuel Victor Domenech, C.E., ’88, former
commissioner of the interior, Porto Rico.

Charles William Macfarlane, C.E., ’76, Ph.D.,
economist and author, Philadelphia.

DOCTOk OF ENGINEERING
Henry Gerber Reist, M.E., ’86, mechanical and
electrical engineer, General Electric Company,
Schenectady, N. Y.

After the inaugural ceremonies a luncheon
was served to the guests of the university and
later in the afternoon a reception and tea was
given to President and Mrs. Richards in
Drown Memorial Hall. In the evening the
Lehigh Home Club gave a dinner to Dr. and
Mrs. Richards in the new Hotel Bethlehem.
The principal speakers at this dinner were
President David Kinley, of the University of
Illinois, and E. G. Grace (Lehigh ’99), presi-
dent of the Bethlehem Steel Corporation.

474

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

THe American College of Surgeons met this
week in Boston with Dr. John B. Deaver, of
the University of Pennsylvania, as president,
and Dr. Harvey Cushing, of Harvard Univer-
sity, as president-elect.

Av a meeting of the Swedish Society of
Physicians at Stockholm on October 3, it was
decided to bestow the Anders Reizius’ Medal
on Professor Sir Charles Sherrington, of the
University of Oxford, for his researches in
physiology and the nervous system.

Proressor Borret, director of the Institute
of Hygiene and Bacteriology at Strasbourg,
formerly connected with the Pasteur Institute
at Paris, has been appointed director of the
Exposition of Hygiene to be held at Stras-
bourg on the occasion of the centenary of
Pasteur.

A TABLET bearing the name “Fernow Hall”
was unveiled on October 5 over the main en-
tranee of the Forestry Building of Cornell
University. This name is given in recognition
of the services rendered forestry in America
by Dr. Bernhard E. Fernow, who was dean and
director of the first school of forestry on the
American continent, the former New York
State College of Forestry. Serious ill health
prevented Professor Fernow being present at
the ceremonies.

Own the occasion of the fiftieth anniversary of
the professional eareer of Professor Domenico
Barduzzi and his retirement from the chair of
skin diseases and syphilis at the University of
Siena, a gold medal was presented to him and
a history of his career was published and pre-
sented to him by his students.

Tue following Latin American surgeons
attended the meeting of the American College
of Surgeons held this week in Boston: Dr.
José A. Presno and Dr. Rafael Menoeal, of
Havana, Cuba; Dr. Gabriel M. Malda and Dr.
Unises Valdes, of Mexico; Dr. Jose Arce of
Buenos Aires, Argentina; Dr. Claudio J. San-
jines, of La Paz, Bolivia; Dr. Olympia da
Fonseca, of Rio de Janeiro, Brazil; Dr. Gre-
gorio Amunotegui and Dr. Lucas Sierra, of
Santiago, Chile; Surgeon General Alberto

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVE, No. 1452

Adriasola and Dr. Guillermo E. Muennich, of
Valparaiso, Chile; Dr. Pompilio Martinez, of
Bogota, Colombia; Dr. Francisco Graoa, of
Lima, Peru; Dr. Enrique Pouey, of Monte- -
video, Uruguay, and Dr. Louis Razetti, of
Caracas, Venezuela.

Tue Harvard faculty of medicine held a
reception on October 16 for the delegation of
visiting professors from the medical depart-
ment of the University of Strasbourg. The
visiting group is made up of Dean George
Weiss and Drs. Camille Duverge, Leon Blum,
Paul Masson and Maurice Nicleux. They are
making under the auspices of the Rockefeller
Foundation a study of the methods used in
American medical schools.

Proressor Ernest Merrirr, head of the de-
partment of physies of Cornell University, has
been granted leave of absence for the second
half of the present academic year. His place
will be taken by Professor Frederick Bedell.

Proressor L. A. Frrz, head of the depart-
ment of milling industry at Kansas State Agri-
cultural College, has been granted a leave of
absence for one year to work in the research
laboratories of the Fleischmann Company in
New York City.

Gzorce F. Weser, Ph.D. (Wisconsin, 722),
has been appointed assistant plant pathologist
in the Agricultural Experiment Station of
Florida-at Gainesville.

Dr. H. J. Hampurcer, professor of physi-
ology, University of Groningen, Holland, de-
livered an address on October 19 on “The
increasing significance of chemistry in medical
thought and practice” before a joint meeting
of the Washington Academy of Sciences, the
Biological Society of Washington and the
Chemical Society of Washington. Dr. Ham-
burger will give an address on the same subject
as the first Harvey Society lecture at the New
York Academy of Medicine, on Friday evening,
November 3.

Dr. ArtHur L. Day, director of the Geo-
physical Laboratory of the Carnegie Institu-
tion, lectured on October 8 on “The study of
earth movements in California” before the
Franklin Institute of Philadelphia.

Ocrobrr 27, 1922]

Dr. C. E. K. Muss, director of the research
laboratory, Hastman Kodak Company, gave an
illustrated lecture entitled “Chemistry and the
motion picture” before the Society of Engi-
neers at Troy, N. Y., on November 14; the
Detroit Section of the American Chemical
Society on November 15; the Purdue Section,
American Chemical Society, at Lafayette,
Indiana, on November 16; and the Chicago

Section, American Chemical Society, on No- |

vember 17.

Dr. W. R. Ham, head of the department of
physies, addressed the Pennsylvania State Col-
lege Branch of the American Association for
the Advancement of Science October 18 on
“Hxperimental evidence for and against the
variation of mass with velocity and its bearing
on the special theory of relativity.”

L. E. Warren addressed the American Asso-
ciation of Food, Dairy and Drug Officials at
its twenty-sixth annual convention, at Kansas
City from October 3 to 6, on the subject, “The
laboratory of the American Medical Associa-
tion and its work.”

A state university for Massachusetts was
the subject discussed at a public dinner meeting
arranged by the Boston Ethical Society on Octo-
ber 16. Among the speakers were Dr. Paul H.
Hanus, professor of education at Harvard
University, and Dr. Arthur Gordon Webster,
professor of physics at Clark University.

THE new building for the Institute of Pathol-
ogy for the University of Freiburg was inau-
gurated in September. The address was given
by Dr. Ludwig Aschoff, professor of pathology
and pathological anatomy in the university,
on “The importance of pathological anatomy
for social medicine.”

A MEMORIAL tablet was placed on the house
at Tulle of the late Edmond Perrier, on Sep-
tember 24. The Paris Academy of Sciences
was represented at the ceremonies by M. Ch.
Gravier.

It is proposed that the new 50-centime
stamp which France is about to issue in com-
pliance with the Madrid Postal Convention
shall bear the portrait of Louis Pasteur, in
honor of the hundredth anniversary of his
birth.

SCIENCE

475

Dr. Guy Henry Cox, for many years pro-
fessor of geology at the Missouri School of
Mines, and more recently geologist for the
Josey Oil Company, was killed on August 20,
in an automobile accident near Bristow, Okla-
homa.

Joun Forrest Kunuy, the electrical engi-
neer, died on October 15, aged sixty-three
years.

LAWRENCE REYNOLDS, an entomologist and
collector in Central and South America, has
died in Boston at the age of forty-four years.

Tue death is announced of Professor B.
Bergmann, director of the Chemisch-Technische
Reichsanstalt, Berlin.

Proressor Eminio Nogutinc, for many years
director of the Chemical School at Miilhausen,
died on August 7 aged seventy-one years.

THRouGH the will of Dr. William Frear, late
vice-director of the Agricultural Experiment
Station, the Pennsylvania State College has
received a valuable collection of scientific books
and reports which will be given a permanent
place in the library of the School of Agricul-
ture.

THE department of pathology of Columbia
University has received a gift of $4,000 from
the Commonwealth Fund, to be used for re-
search into the causes of rickets.

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation states that the Supreme Lodge, Knights
of Pythias, has donated $1,000,000 for the lepers
on Culion Island. This money is to be used
for the following purposes: (1) Permanent
living quarters to be known as “Stevens Memo-
rial Hall” for all white lepers at the colony.
(2) Erection of an experimental laboratory
with full equipment to carry on experimenis
in search of an absolute cure. (3) Establish-
ment of an endowment fund amounting to ap-
proximately $900,000, to provide money for
carrying on the experimental work and to fur-
ther the benefit work at the colony among all
lepers. The amount represents an assessment
of $1 on every member of the lodge, which has
a membership of nearly 1,000,000 men.

Iv is announced in the British Medical Jour-
nal that the National Council for the Promotion

476

of Race-renewal, which established the National
Birthrate Commission, is organizing an Inter-
national Congress for the Reaffirmation of the
World’s Moral Ideal to be held in London,
October 15 to 22. The congress will be opened
at Caxton Hall, under the presidency of the
Bishop of Southwark, on Tuesday morning.
The afternoon session, presided over by Dr.
Mary Scharlieb, will discuss marriage and
parenthood and the relation of the sexes, the
speakers including Dr. H. Crichton Miller, Mr.
C. J. Bond, F.R.C.S., and Dr. J. W. Ballan-
tyne. On Wednesday morning the subject for
consideration will be the economie, social and
racial aspects of morality and the rise and fall
of population, migration, ete., the speakers
including Sir Arthur Newsholme, K.C.B., M.D.,
Dr. C. W. Saleeby and Professor William Cald-
well, D.Se., of McGill University.

THE returns of births in the ten largest towns
in France for the first quarter of 1922 show a
falling off of 10 per cent. as compared with
the corresponding quarter of last year, the total
figures being 48,528 and 53,551 respectively.
No individual town shows an increase. Paris
had 24,238 births, as compared with 27,489,
Marseilles 6,176, as against 6,303, and Lyons
4,583, as against 5,088. It is estimated that the
second quarter of the year will show a further
lowering of the birth rate, as the marriage rate
has been falling heavily for two years.

The Geographical Journal notes that the cele-
bration, in April, 1921, of the death of Ma-
gellan in the Philippines, was virtually a cele-
bration of the first cireumnavigation of the
globe, by far the greater part of the task—the
first crossing of the vast Pacifie Ocean—having
been successfully accomplished solely through
the initiative and hardihood of the great navi-
gator who, by his tragic death before the fin-
ishing of the enterprise, failed to reap the ulti-
mate reward of his achievement. But the
actual first cireuit of the globe was only com-
pleted on the return to Spain of the Victoria
under the command of Juan Sebastian del
Cano. This happy return of the survivors of
the expedition was celebrated with much cere-
mony in Spain on September 5, 6 and 7, the
sum of 250,000 pesetas having been voted by
the Spanish government for the purpose. The

SCIENCE

_ expected to be present at ‘the celebration.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

celebrations took place at San Sebastian, and
at Guetaria, a small fishing village some 30 kilo-
meters to the west, which was the birthplace of
Del Cano. This strip of the Spanish coast has
further associations with the great voyage in
that the Victoria, the only vessel of Magellan’s
fleet to complete the cireuit of the globe, was
built at Zarauz, which lies between Guetaria
and San Sebastian. The king of Spain was -
In-
stitutions in other countries concerned with the
progress of navigation and discovery were in-
vited to send representatives.

Tue London Times reports that the Danish
biologists, Dr. T. H. Martensen and Dr.
Hjalmar Jensen, who went in November last
on an expedition to the Kei Islands, in the
Malay Archipelago, with the main object of.
finding a suitable site for a marine biological
station planned by Scandinavian biologists for
the study of deep-sea fauna, have now returned
to Java. The Challenger and Siboga expedi-
tions had found in dredging operations near
these islands an extraordinarily rich deep-sea
fauna in comparatively shallow water. It was
expected that the Kei Islands would prove a
suitable spot for a laboratory. Closer investi-
gation of the sea was, however, necessary before
the site could be definitely chosen. The expe-
dition, after having completed its task, reports
considerable suecess. Hitherto only very few
soundings had been made in the neighborhood
of the islands outside the one hundred meter
[fifty fathom] line. The expedition has dis-
covered an extensive area two to four hundred
meters [one hundred to two hundred fathoms]
deep, near which a rich and varied deep-sea
fauna may be found. It includes, beside the
forms found by the Challenger and Siboga,
many others new to science. It is met with at
a distance of six to eight miles from the site
proposed for the future station. The study of
the living deep-sea animals will thus be possi-
ble with a relatively small outlay. Although,
of course, a rather remote place, the Kei
Islands are within easy reach. There is a reg-
ular monthly mail service from Java. The
expedition carried out research work at Am-
boina and the Bunda Islands. These spots
proved far inferior to the Kei Islands. The ex-

OcToBER 27, 1922]

pedition received much courteous help from
the administration of the Dutch East Indies.
It was accompanied by two Dutch biologists,
Dr. Siebers, ornithologist of the Buitenzorg
Museum, and Dr. Boschma, who paid special
attention to corals. The rich collections made
by the expedition are being sent to the Copen-
hagen Museum.

In connection with its studies of the distribu-
tion and movements of larval fishes and other
pelagic marine organisms, the Bureau of Fish-
eries recently has undertaken the investigation
of ocean currents of the north Atlantic coast
and for that purpose has deposited about 1,500
drift bottles. These have been dropped on
three lines, running, respectively, for a distance
about 75 miles off Cape Elizabeth, 150 miles
seaward from Chatham, Mass., and 150 miles
seaward from Sandy Hook. The stations are
at intervals of about one half mile, two bottles
being dropped at each, with drags at different
depths, the bottles being weighted so as to
float with but a small part of the neck exposed.
Each bottle contains a card offering a reward
of 25 cents if sent to the bureau with informa-
tion concerning the date and location at which
it was found. Upwards of 200 of these cards
have been received already. This work is being
conducted in cooperation with the Interna-
tional Committee on Marine Fisheries Investi-
gations, on which, in addition to the United
States, the Canadian and Newfoundland gov-
ernments are represented.

Tue Fisheries Service Bulletin reports that
after a period of scarcity for about twenty
years menhaden have reappeared in the Gulf
of Maine in considerable abundance. On the
Maine coast this fishery attained its greatest
importance about thirty-five years ago, with
factories at various points along the coast;
that is, Boothbay Harbor, Pemaquid and
Round Pond. According to the bureau’s local
agent at Portland, the main body of fish this
year were found between Portland, Me., and
Massachusetts Bay, and it is doubtful whether
many large schools appeared farther east than
Boothbay Harbor, where about 2,500 barrels
were frozen. There were landed at Portland
during the month of July 1,564,800 pounds by
fishing vessels and many more by smaller craft.
The landings at Portland would have been

SCIENCE

477

much larger had not the freezers refused to
accept more. A report from Boston early in
August states that about 18 menhaden steam--
ers from southern factories were operating in
Massachusetts Bay. As the herring fishery this
season has been a comparative failure, the
stocks of menhaden were welcome to the
freezers for bait, bringing nearly as much as
the herring for this purpose. For bait pur-
poses the menhaden will be used chiefly by the
halibut fleet and to a lesser degree by line
trawlers, cod and haddock fishermen. Reports
of the presence of schools of menhaden in these
waters caused the bureau to send the steamer
Halcyon to conduct an investigation under the
direction of Dr. H. B. Bigelow. Preliminary
reports indicate the presence of larger quan-
tities of diatoms, on which the menhaden feeds,
than are normally found in Massachusetts Bay
at this season, and it is probable that the un-
usually good food supply has controlled the
movements of the fish into those waters.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tue will of the late Winthrop Cowdin, of
Mount Kisco, N. Y., disposes of an estate esti-
mated at more than $1,000,000. After pro-
viding for Winthrop Cowdin memorials at
Harvard University and at the St. Paul’s
School, Concord, N. H., Harvard University
receives $50,000 and the entire residuary estate,
the income to be used for general purposes.

Proressor Henry Gorpon Gaus, of the de-
partment of physics of the University of Chi-
cago and for ten years dean of the College of
Science, has been appointed dean of the Ogden
Graduate School of Science, to succeed the late
Dean Rollin D. Salisbury, who occupied the
position for over twenty years. ;

Prorsssor Mito 8. Krrcuum, professor of
civil engineering in the University of Pennsyl-
vania, has resigned to become dean of the Col-
lege of Engineering and director of the Engi-
neering Experiment Station of the University
of Illinois. He will be succeeded at Pennsyl-
vania by Professor H. C. Berry.

Dr. A. M. Greene, formerly of the Rensse-
laer Polytechnic Institute, has been elected dean
of the Engineering School of Princeton Uni-
versity.

478

Dr. G. R. Lyman has been appointed dean
of the College of Agriculture of West Virginia
University. Dr. Lyman is at present in charge
of the Plant Disease Survey of the United
States Department of Agriculture and will
assume his new position on January 1. Dr.
N. J. Giddings has been acting dean of the
West Virginia College of Agriculture since the
resignation of Dr. John Lee Coulter on Sep-
tember 15, 1921.

Prorsssor ALFRED Tennyson DeLury, head
of the department of mathematics, University
of Toronto, has been appointed dean of the
faculty of arts. Sir Robert Falconer called a
meeting of the council of the faculty of arts
and announced that, while the appointment of
a dean was by statute in his hands, he would
like to receive nominations from the council.
Nominations were then made and balloting was
carried.on by mail during the next week. The
result was that Professor DeLury was the
choice of the council and he was appointed by
the president.

Dr. Bowman C. Crowe, formerly connect-
ed with the Oswaldo Cruz Institute of Rio de
Janeiro, and with the Bureau of Science of the
Philippine Islands, has been appointed pro-
fessor of pathology at the medical college of
the University of South Carolina.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

30ME SEISMOLOGICAL EVIDENCE THAT IS
NOT EVIDENT

In the June number of the American Jour-
nal of Science an article appeared under the
title “A Critical Review of Chamberlin’s
Groundwork for the Study of Megadiasiro-
phism.”? In it a number of statements are
made in regard to seismological facts which
would seem to require experimental proof.

In the early part of ithe article the author
sums up what he considers the evidence of
seismic transmission for a viscous liquid state

1Art. XXXVII, ‘‘A Critical Review of Cham-
berlin’s Groundwork for the Study of Megadiastro-
phism’’ by William F. Jones. Amer. Journ. Sci.,
Fifth Ser., Vol. III, No. 18, June, 1922.

SCIENCE’

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

of ‘the core of the earth at depths below 0.6 of
the earth’s radius. Describing the types of
waves sent out by an earthquake, he says:
“Seismic disturbances send out vibrations of
two types, compressional and distortional.
These are called the primary and secondary
waves respectively. The former waves are de-
pendent on the elasticity cr compressibility of
the transmitting medium, while the latter waves
are dependent both on the rigidity and the
elasticity of the transmitting medium for their
propagation.” In the first place, it is not clear
what the author means by elasticity. He would
seem to use it as synonymous with compressi-
bility, whereas it is usually taken as a generic-
term including both volume elasticity and
rigidity as species. But, passing over that
point, does not the author’s statement require
both mathematical and experimental proof,
since it is in direct opposition to the aecepted
theory of elasticity,? borne out as the latter is
to a great extent by observations on earthquake
records? As is well known, the theory of elas-
ticity teaches that compressional, or dilata-
tional, or longitudinal waves involve not only
the modulus of compression or bulk modulus
of the medium but also its shear modulus or
coefficient of rigidity; and on the other hand,
that the distortional, or shear, or transverse
elastic waves involve the modulus of rigidity
of the medium but not its modulus of com-
pression. Thus the formula for the velocity
of the longitudinal waves is

A+ 2u
2a \

o being the density of the medium, , Lamé’s
compression constant, and y. the modulus of
rigidity. In the case of transverse waves, the
formula for the velocity is

Ve a"
4 ie}

Another statement that would seem to be far
from evident is the following: “The two types
of waves travel at different velocities but can
only become distinctly separated out in a

2 Cfr. e. g. A. H. H. Love: ‘‘A Treatise on the
Mathematical Theory of Elasticity,’’ Rev. Ed.,
1920, Cambr. U. Press.

OcToBER 27, 1922]

homogeneous medium; that is, homogeneous as
to stress effects or, in other words, isotropic.
The resultant vibrations which travel cireum-
ferentially from the shock center pass through
what we know is a heterogeneous medium.”
Rudzki® has shown that a disturbance in a
heterogeneous but stratified elastic solid will
send out distinet types of waves. These waves
will be propagated through the stratified me-
dium at different velocities and will appear in
separate groups. First a nearly longitudinal
phase will arrive at a given point, then a
double, approximately transverse phase, and
finally a group of surface waves will travel on
the free surface.

But when the author of the article goes on
to say: “The wave types are not separated in
the earth’s surficial shell. At 2 minimum dis-
tanee of 700 miles, or 10 degrees of are, from
the epicenter a three-phase record becomes de-
cipherable,” he is unfortunately allowing him-
self to be betrayed into statements at variance
with a great and ever-increasing mass of ob-
served. and published facts. The reports of
any of the better seismographic stations,
equipped with modern damped apparatus,
would have furnished him with examples to the
contrary. So, too, would any of the bulletins
that are being issued by the Seismological
Committee of the British Association*, or
Angenheister’s® recent study on Pacifie earth-
quakes and the upper layers of the earth’s
erust. The Chittenden,® California, earthquake

3M. P. Rudzki: 1. ‘‘Parametrische Darstellung
der elastischen Welle in anistropen Medien,’’
Bull. Acad. d. Sciences de Cracovie, 1911, pp.
503-536.

2. ‘Sur la propagation d’une onde élastique
superficielle dans un milieu transversalement iso-
trope,’’ Ibid., 1912, pp. 47-58.

4‘«The-Large Narthquakes of 1917,’? Oxford,
1921.

5G. Angenheister: ‘‘Beobachtungen an pazi-
fischen Beben. Hin Beitrag zum Studium der
obersten Erdkruste,’’ Nachr. d. Ges. d. Wiss. zu
Gottingen, Math.-Phys. Kl., 1921.

6 Located at Chittenden, Santa Cruz Co., Cal.,
by Wm. J. Kemnitzer. See: William J. Kemnit-
zer, ‘‘The Chittenden Earthquake of July 24,
1921,’’ Bull. Seism. Soc. Am., Vol. XI, pp. 189-
191, September-December, 1921.

SCIENCE if

479

of July 24, 1921, was an unusually beautiful
example of clean-cut separation of the three
phases at very short distances. As published
in the Bulletin’ of the Seismographie Stations
of the University of California, the epicentral
distance obtained from the Berkeley seismo-
grams was only 125 km. (78 mi.) and that
measured on the Lick records was but 46 km.
(29 mi.), both of which agree very well with
the location of the epicenter at Chittenden on
macroseismic evidence.

There is another argument in the paper that
is open to controversy. Relying on the state-
ments of Professors Knott and Oldham that
compression waves are transmitted through the
core of the earth while shear waves are not, the
author argues to a viscous fluid state of the
interior. Now it is by no means certain that
the transverse waves do not pass through the
core of the earth. Neither, on the other hand,
is it an observed fact that the longitudinal
waves do so penetrate. In fact, the evidence
seems rather strong to the contrary. Weichert
and Zoeppritz,® Zeissig? and Mohorovitic?®
were not able to trace the direct longitudinal
waves much more than half way to the
antipodes. Gutenberg! in 1914 followed them
up to about 106° and thought he had evidenee
for their reappearance between 143° and 180°.

7 James B. Macelwane: ‘‘The Registration of
Harthquakes at the Berkeley Station and at the
Lick Observatory Station, April-September,
1921,’’? Univ. of California Publ., Bull. of the
Seism. Stat., Vol. 2, No. 2, 1922.

8H. Wiechert und K. Zoeppritz: ‘‘Uber Erd-
bebenwellen I u. II,’’ Nachr. d. K. Ges. Wiss. eu
Gottingen, Math.-Phys. Kl., 1907.

9K. Zeissig: ‘‘Tabelle,’? Akad. Nauk, St. Pe-
tersburg, Comptes rendus des séances de la Com-
mission sismique permanente, Tome III, Liv. III.

108. Mohorovitie: ‘‘Die reduzierte Laufzeit-
kurve. II. Mitteilung: Die Ausbreitung der Erd-
bebenstrahlen in den tiefen Schichten der Erde,’’
Gerlands Beitrage zur Geophysik, Bd. XIV, Heft
3, 1916.

11B. Gutenberg: ‘‘Uber Erdbebenwellen VII
A. Beobachtungen an Registrierungen von Fern-
beben in Gottingen und Folgerungen iiber die
Konstitution des Erdkorpers (mit Tafel),’’ Nachr.
d. K. Ges. d. Wiss. zu Gétt., Math.-Phys. K1.,
1914.

480

But Rudolf and Szirtes!? and Angenheister?
have since shown that the latter belong to a
branch of the first reflected waves. However,
Angenheister was able to follow the direct com-
pressional waves to about 145°, which is a great
achievement. Beyond this we have no proof
for their existence as yet. Hence it will be
seen how weak is the author’s argument for a
viscous fluid state of the earth’s core. If it isa
viscous fluid, the longitudinal waves should be
transmitted and the transverse waves should
not. If it is an elastic solid, both the longitu-
dinal and the transverse waves should be able
to traverse it along some path, not necessarily
a straight one. Do they? Future investiga-
tion may tell us. For the present, modern
seismologists and geophysicists't suppose the
core of the earth to be a rigid solid.

JamES B. MaceLwanEe
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

THE BEGINNING CF AMERICAN GEOLOGY

To tHE Eprror or Science: I have been
reading with very great pleasure Dr. J. M.
Clarke’s interesting account of the beginnings
of American geology in his life of James Hall,
which has recently been published.

On page 218 he refers to the statement that
Charles T. Jackson “drew a plan for the New
York Survey, a statement repeated in Apple-
ton’s Cyclopedia of American Biography” but
concerning which he (Clarke) has “never seen
documentary evidence.”

Without in any way desiring to dispute Dr.
Clarke’s contention it may be worth while to
say that the sketch in the Cyclopedia referred
to was written by me and that a proof of the
sketch received the approval of one member of
Jackson’s family. The circumstances are quite

12H, Rudolf und S. Szirtes, Phys. Zeitschr.,
August 1, 1914.

13 Op. cit., pp. 11, 24, 27.

Also: G. Angenheister: ‘‘A study of Pacific
Earthquakes,’’ The New Zealand Journal of
Science and Technology, Vol. IV, No. 5, 1921, pp.
216-217, 224.

14 Cfr. A. Sieberg: ‘‘ Aufbau und physikalische
Verhaltnisse des Erdkérpers unter besonderer
Beriicksichtigung der Erdrinde,’’ Geologische
Rundschau, Band XII, Heft 6/8, 1922, pp. 346-
359.

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1452

clear in my memory. Owing to Jackson’s
death I did not know to whom to send the
proof until, telling my trouble to Henry Car-
rington Bolton, he called my attention to the
fact that Jackson’s son or nephew had been
with him in the class of ’62 in Columbia. This
information resulted in my submitting the
sketch to some proper person who not only
approved the article but sent me a portrait
of Jackson showing him seated on a chair with
both hands on his knees extending outward
holding medals.

It is possible that the item about the New
York Survey came from the younger Silliman’s
masterly article on the “Contributions of
American Chemists” that he delivered at the
Centennial of Chemistry held in Northumber-
land in 1874, and which was published in the
American Chemist. If so, then the informa-
tion came to Silliman directly from Jackson.
_ May I add for the information of students
of the history of chemistry in America that
Jackson received pupils in his laboratory in
Boston, just as Booth and Garrett did in Phila-
delphia, and that it was in his laboratory that
Charles A. Joy, who later held professorial
appointments in Union and Columbia, re-
ceived his early knowledge of chemistry before
going to Gottingen.

Dr. Clarke persists in writing O. M. Mitchel’s
name with ‘two l’s. Mitchel was a very remark-
able man and like Jackson was conspicuous for
not being able to carry out the great things
that he had in his mind. He died of yellow
fever during the Civil War, and, while holding
important commands, so persistently pestered
Halleck with plans and recommendations to eut
the Confederacy in two that he was removed
and sent to Hilton Head.

If Dr. Clarke should issue a second edition
of his valuable contribution to the history of
science, I would suggest that Newberry’s con-
nection with the Sanitary Commission was
rather administrative than medical, as can be
seen by his printed report of which a digest
appears in the article on Newberry in the
“Cyclopedia of American Biography.”

The unfortunate experiences of many of the
early State surveys has been very fully told
by Merrill in his valuable “History of Ameri-

OcrToBER 27, 1922]

can State Geological and Natural History Sur-
veys” but those of us who were so fortunate
as to be students under Newberry can never
forget the time when, owing to the changes in
political administration in Ohio, he found him-
self displaced by one of his subordinates. New-
berry had chosen from his pupils promising
young men such as Hooker, Irving, Newton
and others who worked up the results of their
field work at Columbia under Newberry’s im-
mediate supervision. That the work was not
done in Ohio was urged against it and he was
forced out of his office as state geologist. It
was the beginning of the end, and dear “old
Uncle John” never recovered from the blow.

Perhaps in connection with these statements
about Newberry it may be worth while to re-
call the first time I ever saw Hall. The Na-
tional Academy of Sciences held its fall meet-
ing in 1877 at Columbia University, and it was
the last meeting over whicn the distinguished
and venerable Henry presided. It was the only
time that I ever saw that great outstanding
figure in American science and I shall never
forget the dignified manner with which he held
the chair. I also recall the dapper appearance
of T. Sterry Hunt, who never missed an op-
portunity of saying something about every
paper presented.

In the afternoon a meeting had been ar-
ranged for the geologists in Newberry’s lecture
room in the old School of Mines building on
Fourth Avenue, at which Hall was to present a
paper. As I recall the experience, he spoke
without notes and undertook to explain the re-
lation between certain strata in New York
State and how they extended into the neighbor-
ing State of Ohio. When he had finished,
Newberry promptly contradicted his assertions,
contending that while Hall might know all
about the geology of the State of New York,
yet the conditions in Ohio were not as he repre-
sented them to be. Then followed a scene
somewhat similar to the one described by Dr.
Clarke, in which Hall agreed to eat his hat,
for in this outburst he expressed a willingness
to wager any am unt on the correctness of
his assumptions. To which Newberry retorted
that it was not a question of a wager or money
but simply a question of facts, and that in

SCIENCE

481

this case the facts in Ohio failed to substan-
tiate Hall’s point of view.

Of course our sympathies were all with New-
berry, for we felt. that as state geologist of
Ohio he ought to know what the conditions
were in Ohio better than any one else. I won-

der who was right?
Marcus BengaMin

AN OPPORTUNITY

Proressor W. N. Boupyrerr, M.D., for ten
years chief assistant to the famous Russian
physiologist, Pavlov, in Petrograd; from 1912
to 1918 professor of pharmacology in Kazan
University and for two years lecturer in physi-
ology in the universities of Tokyo, Kyoto and
Osaka; recipient of several Russian and German
prizes and honors for scientifie work; author
of about fifty scientific papers mostly on the
physiology of digestion, some of which have
been translated into English, French, German,
Swedish, Spanish, Czech and Japanese, and as-
sociate editor of several Russian, German and
English medical and pharmacological journals,
is now in this country, without a position, and
in real distress. He is most anxious to find a
place in some American university or medical
school. His special lines of work are physiol-
ogy, biochemistry and pharmacology. He. has
also worked in therapeutics and surgery and
analyses of water, foods and medicines. He
has an offer of a position in a European uni-
versity, but is unable to find means to go to
Europe. He would be glad to receive even a
temporary position as professor, lecturer or
laboratory worker.

I have written to the heads of several Amer-
ican universities on behalf of Dr. Boldyreff,
but his need is so urgent that there is no longer
time for me to continue, by correspondence,
the rounds of our institutions. Hence I take
this means of calling the attention of univer-
sity and medical school authorities to what
seems to me an admirable opportunity not only
to obtain the services of an unusuty com-
petent physiologist and pharmacologis:, but to
save a scientific man of merit from utter
depair and whatever its consequences may be.

Vernon KELLOGG

NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL,

WASHINGTON, D. C.

482

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Aus meinem Lieben. Von Emil
Verlag von Julius Springer, Berlin.
pages. 3 figs. Price $2 (about).
Fischer wrote this biographical sketch while

recuperating from the “flu.” “Geschrieben in

dem Ungliicksjahre 1918,” he writes; and this
sentence gives us an idea of what Germany’s
downfall meant to Germany’s greatest chemist.

The sketch is an incomplete autobiography; he

died in the midst of writing it; but it gives us

a very intimate and, to me, fascinating picture

of one of the great ones in our field. Not much

is said of the chemistry of the sugars, fats and
purines, but very much is said of the labora-
tories in which the chemistry of these sub-
stances was elucidated, and very much more is
said of the men, aside from Fischer, who were
active in these laboratories. With ‘this book in
our hands we need not cross the ocean to know
all about Munich, Strassburg, Erlangen, Wiirz-
burg and Berlin. Noteworthy pen pictures of

Fischer’s intimates, such as Baeyer and Victor

Meyer, are also given us.

Two paragraphs in the book that are of
peculiar interest to Americans must receive
comment here. We shall make a free transla-
tion of both these paragraphs:

“One day an American professor of physi-
ology made his appearance. A rich man had
entrusted some money to him with the object
of founding a university in Worcester, U. S. A.
The professor had the rather romantic notion
of filling an entire ship with European pro-
fessors, assistants, apparatus, chemicals, ete.,
and bringing the ship and baggage to America.
He opened his conyersation with me by asking
me whether I would be willing to accompany
him to America, there to become one of the
professors at the new institution. I was too
amazed to reply, and thought the whole thing
a huge joke until he very carefully and very
earnestly outlined his entire plan to me. He
proved to be a worthy gentleman, and had
much of interest to tell me.

“Soon after this an American lady, ‘Miss
Helene Abott,’ appeared on the scene. <A per-
sonal attendant who accompanied her proved
to be a negress. The lady wanted to enroll as
a student, and was quite astounded to find that
women were not admitted to the courses. I

Fischer.
201

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

showed her around the laboratory and intro-
duced her to the younger men, Knorr, Wisli-
cenus and Tafel. Her intelligent comment
showed that she possessed a sound theoretical
background. After her departure the discus-
sion arose among us as to whether we ought
to approach the university senate so as to get
the necessary permission to allow the girl to
work in the laboratory. One or two individuals
were very much for her, but it did seem to the
rest that the introduction of the female element
into the laboratory would disturb the other-
wise harmonious surroundings. Since the ma-
jority ruled against her, I wrote her to that
effect. Her letter in reply was courteous, but
it did not lack energy. She commented rather
the backwardness of Germany
women from getting a higher

severely upon
in preventing
education.”
The book is a treasure “for those who like
that kind of thing.” Can he call himself a
chemist who does not?
BENJAMIN Harrow

NOTES ON METEOROLOGY AND
CLIMATOLOGY
A NEW AEROLOGICAL SUMMARY

For many years, the free air has been rec-
ognized as the abode of many interesting phe-
nomena, and much information has been gained
concerning the distribution of the meteorolog-
ical elements above the earth’s surface. But,
in the United States, with the two exceptions
of the Blue Hill Observatory, associated with
Harvard College, and the Mount Weather Ob-
servatory, maintained for about seven years
by the United States Weather Bureau, there
had been only sporadic efforts at upper-air
investigation previous to the World War.

Free-air data stand in close relation to aero-
nautical activities, but their usefulness is by
no means so restricted. The relation between
surface weather and conditions in the free air
is one that is coming ito ‘be recognized by the
weather forecaster to an inereasing degree,
although the lack of aerological stations 1s a
serious obstacle to a comprehensive correla-
tive knowledge of these conditions. It is neces-
sary, therefore, to extend, as rapidly as pos-
sible, the network of aerological stations in the

OcroBeR 27, 1922]

United States, and to summarize and publish
the accumulated data at such intervals as seem
convenient. In this way, we need not sit idly
awaiting that golden day when we may trace
upon the daily chart the coursing of the air
streams above our country, but may study the
results of observations thus far obtained.

The Aerological Division of the Weather
Bureau, Mr. W. R. Gregg in charge, has re-
cently summarized and published the results of
observations at the several kite stations of the
Weather Bureau, under the title “An Aerolog-
ical Survey of the United States, Part I. Re-
sults of observations by means of kites.t

In addition to the summarizing of data, a
useful contribution has been made in the por-
tion dealing with the “standard atmosphere.”
The “standard atmosphere” is a term which has
come into general use among aeronautical
engineers and artillerists, and denotes the gen-
eral or average condition of the atmosphere
with respect to temperature, pressure, and
density, to as great heights as are employed in
the several fields. As far as aviation is con-
cerned, there is a relatively large amount of
data available for the maximum height at
which flying is likely to oceur, but the great
maximum ordinates employed in ballistics re-
quire a knowledge of conditions to much
greater heights.

It is true that at no time does the standard
atmosphere exist, but it does afford at all times
a standard from which the departures will be
quite small. Several plans have been offered

in various countries to satisfy ‘the need for |

such an average atmosphere, as, for example,

1 Monthly Weather Review Supplement No. 20.
Copies of this Supplement may be obtained from
the superintendent of documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington, D. C., at 25 cents
each. Mr. Gregg has made a very full abstract
of this work and published it in the Monthly
Weather Review for May, 1922. Reprints of this
abstract may be obtained gratis upon application
to the chief of the Weather Bureau, Washington,
D. C. It is believed that this abstract will sat-
isfy the needs of all those who have an academic
or popular interest in the work. Many of the
charts are reproduced, but the tables are omitted
and the discussion of the standard atmosphere is
very much condensed.

SCIENCE

483

the “isothermal atmosphere.” But, owing to
the dependence of atmospheric pressure and
density upon the vertical distribution of tem-
perature, and the importance of the tempera-
ture factor in power production calculations
with reference to air-crafit engines, as well as
in the design of air-craft instruments, it has
been thought best to base the standard atmos-
phere upon the standard lapse rate of tem-
perature.

Up to 10 kilometers, Toussaint’s formula,

= 15 — 0.00652,
in which T is the temperature in degrees, Cen-
tigrade, and Z the altitude in meters, holds for
the mean annual values, and is very satisfac-
tory, providing, as Mr. Gregg says, “one set
is deemed sufficient for use throughout the
year.” This formula has ‘been adopted in
France, Italy and England. Where values are
needed for both winter and summer, new tables
have been provided which will be more satis-
factory than Toussaint’s formula.

It happens that the aeronautical research
stations and artillery proving grounds of the
army and navy are all within three degrees of
latitude 40° N. Moreover, three of the
Weather Bureau kite stations are equally close
to this parallel, and from these ‘three stations,
means have been computed up to five kilo-
meters. Above five kilometers, sounding bal-
loon data obtained at St. Louis (1904-1907)
and at Fort Omaha (1911 and 1914) have
been used. From the base of the stratosphere
(about twelve kilometers) up to twenty kilo-
meters, the greatest altitude ‘considered, a con-
stant temperature of —55° C. has been used.

'The pressures for the various levels were then

computed by means of the hypsometric for-
mula, making proper allowance for the water
vapor content of the ai and the variation of
gravity with altitude and latitude.

The discussion of the standard atmosphere
appears in both the Aerological Survey and in
Report No. 147 of the National Advisory Com-
mittee for Aeronautics,? the latter being in

2Gregg, Willis Ray: ‘‘Standard Atmosphere.’’
11 pp., 4 figs., 6 tables. Copies may be obtained
from the Superintendent of Documents, Govern-
ment Printing Office, Washington, D. C., at five
cents each.

484

somewhat greater detail than the former.
These publications bring together ithe best data
available approximately representative of lati-
tude 40° in central and eastern United States;
they carry the values to altitudes that are much
higher than aviation will ever need, and which
will only be exceeded by the ordinates of the
most extraordinary trajectories in artillery
practice.

Turning again to the Survey, we find that
the information is conveyed largely by charts
and tables. The former present the matter as a
whole, showing the vertical and geographical
distribution of the several meteorological ele-
ments over the entire central and eastern United
States. The latter are more precise, and are so
conveniently arranged that the basie computa-
tional material for innumerable aerological
studies may be found there awaiting the stu-
dent. The text is brief, but clear and cogent,
and calls attention to the significant features
of the “survey.”

The summary is ‘based not only upon the
kite stations of the Weather Bureau at present
operating (Due West, 8. C., excepted, since
this station has been in operation only about a
year and a half) but also upon the records of
the Blue Hill Observatory and the Mount
Weather Observatory. Thus data from eight
aerological stations fairly well distributed,
whose records vary from about two to seven
years, have formed the basis of the survey.

The author shows that the values based upon
a five-year record do not vary to any significant

extent from those based upon a three-year -

record. As one might expect, the differences
between the averages of the three and five-year
record

. are greatest at or near the surface, where
they amount in a few cases to 2° C., in tempera-
ture, 1 mb. in barometric pressure and vapor
pressure, and 10 per cent. in relative humidity.
Differences in density are in no case significant.
The seasonal means of all elements naturally
show better agreement than the monthly means,
and the annual means for the shorter and longer
period are almost identical. It is thus evident
that for the determination of normal values, par-
ticularly those for the months, a longer series of
observations is necessary than that upon which
the present summary is based.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

Nevertheless, it is deemed satisfactory, for
practical purposes, to regard the present means
as normals. The author explains further that
a longer record is necessary for the northern
than for the southern stations, for the winter
than for the summer (owing to the greater
variability at the colder stations and in the
colder season), and at lower than at higher
altitudes above the surface. Thus, while 20 to
40 years are desirable lengths of record for sur-
face data, a much shorter period is necessary
for the upper levels.

To attempt to present in abstract the many
striking and interesting features of the
numerous diagrams would be impossible, owing
to the concise presentation in the original. The
large field of information is indicated by the
following topics selected from the legends:
Seasonal average temperatures, relative humidi-
ties, vapor pressures, for each station from
the surface to about five kilometers; geograph-
ical distribution of mean summer and winter
and annual {barometric pressures, tempera-
tures, relative humidity, vapor pressure, den-
sity and resultant winds; means seasonal wind
velocities and the percentage frequency of dif-
ferent wind directions. All of these data ex-
tend from the surface to levels three to five
kilometers above sea-level.

The study of aerological data is two-fold,
embracing average conditions and current data.
This publication from the Aerological Division
of the Weather Bureau forms an admirable
contribution to the former field. Such con-
tributions form a setting for the study of eur-
rent data. But, in spite of the resounding
challenge of the upper air to the forecaster,
the adequate and complete application of eur-
rent aerological data must await the extension
and amplification of the aerological réseau.

C. LeRoy MEIsincer

WasuHinetTon, D. C.

SPECIAL ARTICLES
DEFICIENCY OF ATMOSPHERIC DUST IN
COAL

In connection with studies in eolian sedi-
mentation the writer recently has become inter-
ested in an apparent discrepancy among (1)
the rate of deposition of atmospheric dust, (2)

OcToBER 27, 1922]

the amount of ash in coal and (3) the rate of
accumulation of vegetation leading to the
formation of coal. To the casual observer it
appears that there is not enough mineral
matter in average coal to allow for the amount
of atmospheric dust which would be deposited
with the vegetation in the time ordinarily as-
sumed to be required for the accumulation of
vegetable matter in coal.

From everyday observation the universal
presence of atmospheric dust is apparent. The
work of Free, Huntington,? Reid? and others
emphasizes the quantity as being much greater
than commonly supposed. However, it is not
the amount of dust 2m the air, buf the amount
that is caught in standing water or by vegeta-
tion that is significant in the present connec-
tion.

An average of the analyses of ash content
for representative coals of the United States
given by M. R. Campbell* shows the following:

GRADE OF COAL PERCENTAGE OF ASH

ATT NGG py ea eens tear sc sco 8.25
Sibi oop umm yoa ebay HIS y eee ee 7.8
PES UG UNTO US ysetee sees eee ee earn 8.7
Semi-bituminous) 222s. 8.7
Siomeabeenaynaweenigs) Goatees 11.75
PALIT UP GLC i yasroc eee acento ee eee 13.7

The last two averages are based only upon a
few analyses.

It has been stated in text-books that about
9,000 years is required for the accumulation of
sufficient vegetable matter to make one foot of
bituminous coal. There is no reason to believe
that this estimate is not at least approximately
correct.

If dust was deposited from air during the
coal-making periods at a rate of Yooo inch per
year—which at the present does not seem ex-
cessive—9 inches of dust would be accumulated
during the period of 9,000 years. Conse-

1Free, EH. E.: ‘‘Movement of Soil Material by
the Wind,’’ U. 8. Dept. of Agriculture, Bull. 68.

2 Huntington, E.: ‘‘The Pulse of Asia.’’

3 Reid, Clement: ‘‘ Dust and Soils,’’ Geol. Mag.,
N. S., December, III, Vol. I, 1884, p. 165.

4Campbell, M. R.: ‘‘The Coal Fields of the
United States.’? General Introduction, U. S.
Geol. Survey, Professional Paper 100-A.

SCIENCE

485

quently, with every foot of bituminous coal
there should be 9 inches of atmospheric dust;
that is, every foot of average coal would be
about 75 per cent. dust. Even ooo inch of
dust a year would result in coal with 71% per
cent. dust. And this does not take into ac-
count the vegetable mineral matter!

Apparently the problem leads to three ques-
tions: (1) Is the importance of dust grossly
exaggerated? (2) Has the time so commonly
assigned to the accumulation of a foot of coal
been overestimated? (3) Were the areas
which would serve as sources for dust during
the coal-forming periods—and especially the
Pennsylvanian—exceedingly restricted? The
articles cited above emphasize the presence of
dust in a way to induce the reader to believe
that the importance of atmospheric dust has
been overlooked rather than overestimated. If
the time allotted for coal formation is fairly
accurate, we would be led to believe that the
sources and perhaps the means of transporta-
tion of dust were very much restricted and that
the current evidence for a fairly moist, uniform
climate on a land surface heavily covered by
vegetation and restricted in area, becomes
better established.

Watpo 8. GLock
Tue Stare University or Iowa

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL

SOCIETY
(Continued)

DIvIsION OF ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
H. T. Clarke, chairman

Frank C. Whitmore, secretary
The selective activation of alumina for decar-
boxylation or dehydration: Homer Apxins. In
seeking experimental verification of the idea that
the activity of a catalyst for an organic reaction
in a heterogeneous system is conditioned by the
magnitude of the distance between the atomic
nuclei of the solid catalyst, five distinct kinds of
alumina have been prepared from the aluminum
alkoxides, aluminum hydroxide and _ hydrated
alumina. It has been shown that the size and
shape of the alkoxyl group is a determining factor
in the relative extent to which decarboxylation or
dehydration is induced in esters, alcohols and
acids by the alumina prepared from the solid
alkoxides. An increase in ‘‘molecular porosity,’’

486

1. e., of the distances between aluminum atoms in
the solid, is favorable to decarboxylation and
unfavorable to alkene formation.

On the synthesis of thiazolidine and thiazane
derivatives: F. B. Dans, R. Q. Brewster, J. S.
Buair and W. C. THompson. The present report
is part of a larger investigation. The immediate
object of this part of the work was to devise
methods for the synthesis of thiazolidine and
thiazane derivatives of known structure. This
was accomplished as follows: (1) The addition
of mustard oils, RNCS, to aryl-allylamines,
RNHC;H;, formed diaryl-allyl-thioureas, which
by the action of acids were converted to 2-aryl-
imino-3-aryl-5-methyl thiazolidines. (2) Aryl-N-
ethanols, RNHCH,CH,OH, gave with arylisothio-

eyanates and cyanates ureas which condensed
easily to thiazolidines and oxazolidines. (3)
From aryl-N-propanols and mustard oils

were obtained thioureas and then thiazanes,
SC(NR)NRCH,CH2CH,. (4) Alpha-arylamino-
beta-hydroxl-gamma-chloro-propane combined with
aryl mustard oils to give 5-hydroxythiazanes.
Urethanes from chlorine-substituted secondary
and tertiary alcohols: Lrstrr Yoprr. Certain
tertiary alcohols, for example, trichlorotertiary
butyl aleohol, which do not react directly with
phosgene, give the chlorocarbonates when the
dilute solution in benzene is treated with sodium
and then with phosgene. The products react
readily with ammonia and with aniline chloral
condenses with glycerol to form a_ substituted
1,3-dioxole. The readiness with which this
product reacts with phosgene indicates a primary
tather than a secondary hydroxyl, hence the as-
sumption of a five-membered rather than a six-
membered ring. This dioxole derivative and
some of the chlorine substituted urethanes pre-
pared were found to have hypnotic properties.
Gamma-chloropropyl urethanes and a synthesis
of the 1,3-oxazine ring: ArrHuR W. Dox and
Lester Yoprr. Gamma-chloropropyl alcohol re-
acts readily with phosgene to form a chlorocar-
bonate, and the latter reacts ammonia and with
aniline to form the carbamate and the carbanilate
respectively. Removal of hydrochloric acid from
gamma-chloropropyl carbanilate results in the
formation of the six-membered 1,3-oxazine ring.
This reaction is analogous to that studied by Otto
and by Johnson and Langley in which the beta-
halogen alkyl carbanilates lose hydrochloric acid
and form the five-membered 1, 3-oxazole ring.
Removal of iodine from aromatic todo com-
pounds, and its bearing on electromerism: BEN
H. Nicoter and Rrusen B. Sanpin. Several new
derivatives of 2-iodo-4-aminotoluene are described.

SCIENCE

[Vout. LVI, No. 1452

With stannous chloride and hydrochloric acid,
iodine is removed from m-iodoamino derivatives,
as well as from o-iodoamino compounds; but the
rate of removal is some hundreds of times slower.

‘The results are explained on the basis of a one-

sided reaction taking place on a mixture of elec-
tromers. The behavior of such a mixture is dis-
cussed.

The spontaneous decomposition of unsaturated
aliphatic iodochlorides: L. B. HowxruL. Previous
work (J. A. C. S., 42, 997-9) upon iodochloride-
1, 2-dichloro-2-iodoethylene and iodochloride-2-
chloroethylene has shown that their spontaneous
decompositiion is not accompanied by loss of
chlorine (cf. Ann. 369, 185). Further investiga-
tion has shown that the expected shift of the 2 Cl
atoms from the group —ICly to the double bond
is not the only change involved. Thus, when
CHCl — CHICly decomposes the products include
C,HI,Cl, and C,H,Cl, as well as O,H,C11 (in
addition to iodine monochloride and reel Aisin),
Evidently either iodine chloride or chlorine may
add to the residue —CHCL—CHCL— or iodine
may be entirely replaced and the residue chlo-
rinated. The compound ClgICCI=CCII upon de-
composition gives C,Cl,I,, C\CII, and what is ap-
parently a constant * yates mixture of CoCl, and
CoClgI. Constants for the new halo-ethanes and
ethenes have been determined.

The chlorination of 2-amino-p-cymene: A. S.
WHEELER and J. V. Gites. p-Cymene was ob-
tained from spruce turpentine. It was nitrated
at 0° and reduced. The acetyl derivative was
chlorinated at room temperature in carbon tetra-

chloride solution. The product contains one
chlorine. This is in position 5 as shown by its
conversion into 2,5-dichloro-terephthalie acid.

Salts of the chloro aminocymene were prepared.
By diazo reaction a new chloro carvacrol was pre-
pared. The amino group was also replaced by
the carboxyl group, yielding a new benzoic acid.
A new series of dyes was prepared by coupling
with the following: phenol, resorcinol, salicylic
acid, alpha naphthol, beta naphthol, naphthol-2-
sulfonic acid, 1-naphthol-4-sulfonic acid, 2-naph-
thol-7-sulfonie acid. A variety of colors was ob-
tained, some of great brilliancy. The amino
chlorocymene was also coupled with itself, form-
ing a neutral compound. By oxidation a new
cuminic acid was obtained.

The catulytic preparation of divinylacetylene:
J. A. Nrzuwianp. Acetylene is passed into a
solution of cuprous chloride (three parts), am-
monius chloride (one part) and water (one part).
The absorption takes place indefinitely, and when
subsequently distilled, a mixture of oils comes

OcToBER 27, 1922]

over. The one which distills over at 54° C. is
presumably vinylacetylene of the formula,
CH,.—CH—C—CH. Between 75° and 95° a
highly refractive oil, of formula CgH¢, supposed
to be divinylacetylene, comes over. About one
kilo of the above liquid is used in each flask.
‘After repeated distillations the mixture continues
to absorb the gas even for years without deteriora-
tion of the catalyst. About 80 to 110 g. of
product are obtained at each distillation. The
divinylacetylene forms stable tetra and oetobro-
mides which crystallize well from alcohol and
have definite melting points. When allowed to
stand even in sealed tubes the oil slowly changes
to a gel and finally to a solid which is extremely
explosive. If the original substance is put back
into the copper mixture mentioned above it can
be kept indefinitely for use when needed by dis-
tilling it off at a temperature not exceeding 13°
C. When cupric chloride is added to the mixture
dichloroethylene is formed, and no hydrocarbons.

The application of the Friedel and Craft reac-
tion to non-benzenoid compounds: JAMES F.
Norris and Ram Prasap. Continuation of pre-
vious work showed that benzoyl chloride con-
denses, under the influence of aluminium chloride,
with ethylene, propylene, butylene, isobutylene,
trimethylethylene and isopropylethylene. The
product of the reaction in each case was the un-
saturated ketone formed as the result of the re-
placement of one hydrogen atom in the hydro-
carbon by a benzoyl group. Hydrogen chloride
addition products of the unsaturated ketones were
also formed. Condensation was also effected be-
tween benzoyl chloride and malonic ester and
diisopropyl. The study of the application of the
reaction to saturated hydrocarbons is being con-
tinued.

Some condensations with olefines. A contribu-
tion to our knowledge of the Friedel-Craft reac-
tion: ©. E. Boorp and R. S. Hanson.
Olefines condense in the presence of anhydrous
aluminum or ferrie chloride to form oily addition
products. These addition products are very re-
active, undergoing the following series of trans-
-formation: (1) With benzene they form inter-
mediate condensation products which upon hy-
drolysis yield alkyl benzenes; (2) with phenol
they form intermediate condensation products
which upon hydrolysis yield alkyl phenols; (3)
by direct hydrolysis by cold concentrated hydro-
chlorie acid they yield alkyl chlorides; (4) with
acetyl chloride they yield chloro and unsaturated
ketones. Ethylene, butylene and amylene give
similar results. A scheme of reactions is given

SCIENCE

487

as a simple explanation of the above reactions as
well as of the Friedel-Craft synthesis of hydro-
carbons. The explanation offered agrees per-
fectly with that given by Steele for the formation

‘of aromatic ketones by the Friedel-Craft reaction.

The action of titanium tetrachloride upon cer-
tain organic compounds: JosrpuH F. Haskins and
WiturAM McPurrson. The work described in
this paper is the outgrowth of an attempt to pre-
pare an optically active compound of titanium.
In the course of this work it was found necessary
to study more in detail the fundamental reactions
between titanium tetrachloride and representatives
of the important groups of organic compounds.
The paper gives the results of some of these ex-
periments. Among other reactions, it was found
that titanium tetrachloride could be substituted
for aluminum chloride with advantage in the ~
synthesis of certain compounds by the Friedel-
Craft reaction. For example, benzoyl chloride
and benzene in the presence of titanium tetra-
chloride react to give benzophenone a reaction
which serves as a good laboratory method for
preparing this substance. The work is being con-
tinued.

A comparison of ferric and aluminum chlorides
in their action on chloral, bromal and organic
compounds: G. B. FRANKFoRTER and EH. Ei. Har-
Ris. <A continuation of the work of Frankforter
and Kritchevsky. The two chlorides have been
compared in their condensing properties, using
chloral and bromal with the phenolic ethers and
other organic compounds. Among the most im-
portant compounds prepared are the following:
Diphenetyltribromoethane, tetrabromodiphenetyl-
tetrabromoethane, diphenetyldibromoethylene, di-
phenetyldiethoxythylene, diphenetyldiacetoacetyl-
ethylene, dibromophenetyldibromoethylene, tetra-
phenetyldimethylacetylene. The properties of
these compounds have been carefully worked out
in addition to the comparison of the action of the
two chlorides in their preparation.

Optically active dyes: A. W. INGERSOLL and
Rocer Apams. A study of the action of opti-
cally active dyes on fibers should throw light on
the mechanism of dyeing. The preliminary work
of which this is a report has involved the study
of an easy method for preparing pairs of active
dyes. An extremely convenient way has been
found by first synthesizing and resolving into
optically active isomers certain amino acids, in
particular phenyl amino acetic acid. These
amino acids can be converted into dyes by the
following general reactions which take place very
satisfactorily in the laboratory:

488
R-CH-CO.H -B-CH-CO,H
NH, NHCOCgH,NOo(p)
R-CH-CO.H R-CH-CO,H
NHC,H,NH NHCOC,H,NoCl
Dyes.

The osidation of lactose, d-glucose and 4d-
galactose with potassium permanganate: O. A.
Burner and W. L. Evans. (a) These carbo-
hydrates are oxidized by permanganate solutions
to carbon dioxide, acetic acid and oxalic acid, the
presence of the latter being determined by the
concentration of the alkali present and also by
the time of the reaction. The oxalic acid produe-
tion shows a maximum point and the carbon
dioxide a minimum point. (b) Mixtures of d-
glucose and d-galactose equivalent to a lactose
solution of a given concentration are not oxidized
to the same amounts of the reaction products as
the disaccharide at the same concentration of
alkali. (c) The amounts of the reaction products
obtained from the two hexoses at 25° and 50° are
not the same, while at 75° they are nearly equal.

Some relationships of the work on halogenated
phenols: W. H. Hunter. The work on halo-
genated phenols at the University of Minnesota
gives promise of giving information on the fol-
lowing problems: (1) Substitutes in phenols;
(2) oxidation of phenols; (3) reactions of un-
saturated radio; (4) rearrangements related to
the benzidine rearrangement; (5) relation be-
tween para (and ortho) groupings.

A method of measuring the reactivity of the
halogen atoms in organic chlorides: J. B. Conant,
W. R. Kirnrr and A. C. Guenni. In order to
compare the reactivity of a series of chlorides of
the types RCH,Cl, R(CH,),Cl and R(CH,) Cl,
it is necessary to have some reaction whose speed
can easily be measured and which will not be
attended by side reactions. Alkaline reagents and
nitrogen compounds are unsuitable, as they cause
the formation of unsaturated and cyclic com-
pounds. Potassium iodide in acetone solution has
been found satisfactory. The reaction giving the
corresponding organic iodide proceeds smoothly.
The amount of inorganic iodide used up ean be
determined by titration. The results show that
the reaction is bimolecular. The temperature co-
efficient is about normal. The values so far ob-
tained indicate the following relative reactivities
at 25° as compared to butyl chloride: BuCl 1.00,
MeS(CH,),Cl 1.64, MeS(CH,),Cl 4.5, PhCH, Cl
149, NO,C,H,CH,Cl 11,800, PhCOCH,Cl 33,200.

2

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

Molecular structure: Benzene, cyclohexane and
naphthalene: JARED KIRTLAND Morse. Molecular
space is considered discontinuous is such a way
that the ratio of the distances between any three
points on a straight line is rational. For a given
molecule the number of these point positions is
restricted by the valency condition that all sat-
urated atoms (carbon and above in atomic num-
ber) have eight valency electrons equidistant from
the nucleus. By applying these criteria, models
have been constructed for cyclohexane, benzene
and naphthalene, from which can be derived the
geometric properties of the dynamic isomers, the
relations between chemically related compounds
and the mechanism by which molecules form
erystal lattices. For naphthalene the crystal lat-
tice agrees with Bragg’s X-ray measurements but
not with his molecular theory. Cyclohexane has a
simple cubic lattice containing one molecule, ben-
zene a centered orthorhombic lattice containing
two molecules. A method for calculating the lat-
tice constants, axial ratios and densities of solid
benzene and cyclohexane from the density and
crystallographic data for naphthalene is given.
Cyclohexane: Cale.—lattice constant 5.697 >< 10-8
em., density (solid) 0.75. Obs. density (liquid)
Young 10.7° 0.78715 M.P. 4.7°. Benzene: Caleu-
lated; lattice constants 5.697 > 10-8 em.; 6.996
> 10-8 em.; 6.137 > 10-8 cm.; density 1.0531;

xial ratios 0.814:1:0.877. Observed; axial
ratios Groth 0.799: 1:0.891; density Richards
1.0513. Caleulated diameter spherical benzene gas
molecule 6.86 10-8 em. Effective diameter on
collision from kinetic theory using Schumann’s
viscosity measurements vapor 20°, 6.78 >< 10-8
em.

Some derivatives of the lactone produced by
condensing cyclo-hexene oxide with malonic ester:
E. ©. Kenpatt and A. E. Osrerpere. Tetra-
hydro benzene adds hypochlorous acid to form
ortho-chloro-eyelohexanol. This with sodium hy-
droxide forms cyclo-hexene oxide, which condenses
with sodium malonic ester in the same way that
ethylene oxide does. The resulting lactone reacts
with additional sodium ethylate giving a product
which will react with alkyl halides. The proper-
ties of the resulting compounds as well as those
of certain nitrogen derivatives obtained from the
lactones and ammonia have been studied.

Derivatives of 2, £-dinitrobenzaldehyde: T. B.
DowNnry with ALEXANDER Lowy. 2,4-Dinitroben-
zaldehyde was condensed with a number of aro-
matie amines, phenols and their derivatives, giv-
ing monomolecular and dimolecular condensation

OctTopER 27, 1922]

products. Monomolecular condensations were
effected with tolidine (also addition product),
p-aminoazobenzene, chloroanilines, ete. Dimolecu-
lar condensations were effected with phenol,
o-chlorophenol, resorcinol, bromoresorcinol, guaia-
col, dimethylaniline, diethylaniline, ete. Some of
the products are dyes and indicators.

The quantitative determination of acetic anhy-
dride: G. C. Spencer. The proposed method is
based upon the action of acetie anhydride and
aniline in cold chloroform. An equivalent amount
of acetanilide forms. Slight amounts of alcohol
and water as found in U. S. P. chloroform do not
interfere. The first attempts were made to sep-
arate the acetanilide by washing the chloroform
solution with dilute sulfuric acid to remove aniline
separating the chloroform solution, and evap-
orating to dryness in a tared beaker. The gravi-
metric method was unsatisfactory. The method
adopted was to hydrolyze the residual acetanilide
with 10 per cent. sulfuric acid and titrate the
resulting aniline sulfate with half-normal potas-
sium bromate-bromide solution. Results satisfac-
tory for both high and low concentrations of
acetic anhydride.

The estimation of aliphatic nitrate esters in
the presence of certain nitro-aromatic compounds:
Witserr J. Hurr and Ricuarp D. Lerrcr.

On the basis for the physiological activity of
certain oniwm compounds. I. Nitrogen deriva-
ties: R. R. RensHaw and J. C. Wart. The pos-
sible bases for the different types of physiological
action of the simple and the substituted tetra-
alkyl ammonium compounds are briefly consid-
ered. The following new substances are described:
Iodo methyl acetate, acetyl formocholine salts,
methoxymethyl dimethyl amine, beta-dichloro-
arsine-ethyl trimethyl ammonium chloride, beta-
arsenous oxide-ethyl trimethyl ammonium chloride.
Improved methods for the preparation of formo-
choline and certain other choline derivatives are
given.

Deaminization of methyl-cis-8-amino-1,212-iri-
methyl pentanoate: GLENN S. Sxinner. The de-
composition of this ester with nitrous acid has
been carried out on a large scale. Reaction prod-
ucts are formed in the following proportions:
Methyl esters of unsaturated acids, 62 per cent.;
methyl esters of hydroxy acids, 36 per cent.; me-
thyl esters of chloroacids, 2 per cent. The unsat-
urated ester upon saponification gave lauronolic
acid which was identified by conversion to the
bromolactone. Three crystalline hydroxy acids
have been isolated from the saponification prod-
uets of the various fractions obtained by distilla-

SCIENCE

489

tion under diminished pressure. One of these
acids has a tertiary beta-hydroxyl and is identical
with the acid of M. P. 101-2°, obtained by the
decomposition of the methyl ester of the trans-
isomeric amino acid. A second hydroxy acid of
M. P. 121° has a secondary hydroxyl as shown by
oxidation with Beckmann’s chromic acid mixture.
The third hydroxy acid of M. P. 208-10° also has
a secondary hydroxyl and is optically inactive.
d-Ciseamphonolie acid could not be isolated. No
ether acid was formed whereas the methyl ether
d-ciscamphonolie acid constitutes 13 per cent. of
the decomposition product of the methyl ester of
the trans isomerie amino acid.

Ammono formaldenydes: Epywarp OC. FRANKLIN.
The ammonia analog of formaldehyde, compound
of the formula CH »=N—CH,—N=CHp, is only
known in the form of its dimer, hexamethylene
tetramine. The methods of formation and the
properties of hexamethylenetetramine are in har-
mony with the view that it is a polymeric form
of an ammono formaldehyde. Hydrocyanic acid,
represented by the form HCN, is also to be looked
upon as an ammono formaldehyde. It undergoes
polymerizations and condensations, reacts with
acid sulfites and hydroxylamine, and otherwise
behaves in a manner closely resembling the well-
known behavior of ordinary formaldehyde.

International numberings of ring complexes:
Austin M. Parrerson and Carnrron FE. Curran.
There is at present no uniform system for num-
bering parent cyclic compounds. The authors
have drawn up a simple set of rules for such num-
bering, with the avowed purpose of preserving as
many as possible of the accepted numberings,
while achieving consistency. About three fourths
of the numberings used in Richter’s ‘‘Lexikon,?’
Meyer and Jacobson’s ‘‘Lehrbuch,’’ and the
Chemical Abstracts indexes conform to the pro-
posed rules. The matter has been taken up with
the proper committees of foreign chemists with
encouraging results. If their cooperation can be
secured it is proposed to publish a classified collec-
tion of known ring complexes, the number of
which now approaches a thousand.

Steric hindrance in the migration of acetyl:
L. Cuas. Rarrorp and CHas. M. Wootronx. In
previous work (J. A. C. §., 41, 2068) one of us
has shown that when an ortho acetylaminophenol
is benzoylated by the Schotten-Baumann reaction,
benzoyl goes to nitrogen, while the acetyl shifts
to oxyxgen. In further study of this behavior
the present work was done to learn whether this
rearrangement would be prevented by the pres-
ence of bromine atoms adjacent to the reacting

490
groups. Acetyl-benzoyl derivatives were prepared
from 2-amino-3, 6-dibromo-4-methylphenol, —2-

amino-3, 5, 6-tribromo-4-methylphenol, and 2-
amino-3, 4, 5-tribromo‘6-methylphenol. In
case the migration was observed, which seems to
indicate that the bromine atoms cause no hin-
drance. The amino cresols used in this work were
secured through the nitration of the corresponding
brominated ortho and para cresols. When tetra-
bromo-o-cresol was nitrated by Zincke’s method
(J. Pr. Ch., (2) 61, 564) we obtained two iso-
merie mononitrotribromo-o-cresols, in which we
were able to prove that the hydroxyl and nitro
radicals oecupied ortho and para relationships,
respectively, in the two compounds. In this nitra-
tion Zincke was able to isolate only one of these
substances—the ortho product.

The hydrolysis of alkyl sulfates. II: RussELu
Morean and H. F. Lewis. The hydrolysis of
dimethyl sulfate under the influence of acids,
alkalis and salts is described and the following
conclusions are drawn: (1) The higher the di-
methyl sulfate : water ratio in the water hydrol-
ysis, the more rapid the hydrolysis; (2) strong
acids in low concentration increase the rate of
hydrolysis, but in high concentration retard it;
(3) the tendency in alkaline solution is for the
second alkyl to come off less easily. No differ-
ence between NaOH and KOH in low concentra-
tion; (4) acetie acid greatly depresses hydrolysis;
(5) salts depress the rate of hydrolysis, even pre-
venting the splitting off of the first group; (6)
the only substances acting as positive catalysts
are the dilute mineral acids, a large number of
which have been studied.

The interaction of primary aliphatic alcohols
and beta-gamma-dibromopropyl-thiocarbimide :
RaymMonp M. Hann. Primary aliphatic alcohols
react with this substance to form 2-hydroxy-5-
BrCH,—CH—S

CH,—_N=C—OH
This result is contrary to that assumed by Dixon
and also to the correction of Dixon’s work by
Gabriel, who assumed that the product was
BrCH,—CH—S
CH,—N=C—OEt

Aluminum arylamines: M. L. Crossuey. Alum-
jnum reacts with primary and secondary aryl-
amines producing aluminum arylamines and hy-
drogen. Tertiary amines do not react with alum-
inum. Mixtures of the three types of amines can
be separated by refluxing with aluminum, dis-
tilling off the tertiary amine and recovering the
primary and secondary amines from the residue.

every

bromomethyl-thiazoline,

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

The aluminum compounds are readily decomposed
by water and aleohol, giving the original amines,
aluminum hydroxides and small quantities of sec-
ondary products such as diphenylamine. The
aluminum compound is very reactive and makes
possible the introduction of alkyl and aryl groups
under atmospheric pressure.

The action of nitrogen trichloride upon unsat-
urated hydrocarbons: G. H. ConeMAN and H. P.
Howe tts. Nitrogen trichloride reacts with amyl-
ene in carbon tetrachloride to form ammonium
chloride and nitrogen gas. No more than traces
of other nitrogen compounds are obtained. With
butylene nitrogen forms, in addition to ammonium
chloride and nitrogen, a n-chloroamine in about
20 per cent. yield. When this product is shaken
with concentrated hydrochlorie acid the chlorine
atoms attached to nitrogen are replaced by hydro-
gen. The resulting amine still contains chlorine
attached to carbon. With propylene the reaction
takes place more slowly but the products are sim-
ilar to those from butylene. A possible explana-
tion of the failure of amine formation in case of
amylene is offered. :

The equilibrium between benzoin and benzalde-
hyde: Ernust ANpDrERSON, R. A. JAcoBSoN and
M. J. Srurzman. The benzoin condensation is
found to be reversible. An equilibrium is reached
between benzaldehyde and benzoin when either
substance is dissolved in alcoholic sodium eya-
nide. Both pure substances can be recovered
from such solutions. The equilibrium is of the
general type A = 2B. The amounts of benzalde-
hyde and benzoin present at equilibrium in vari-
ous mixtures check closely with the amounts cal-
culated from the equilibrium constant.

Di-beta-hydroxyethyl aniline and some of tts
derivatives: FE. W. Upson and D. W. McLaren.
This substance has been obtained in 70 per cent.
yield by refluxing one mol. of aniline with three
mols. of ethylene chlorohydrine in the presence of
30 per cent. aqueous sodium hydroxide. The
product is obtained by ether extraction and frac-
tional distillation of the extract under reduced
pressure. Phenyl morpholine has been obtained
by a similar process from _ beta-beta-dichloro
diethyl ether. Di-beta hydroxyethyl aniline and
phomo-morpholine have been coupled with diazo-
tized sulfanilic acid giving color substances re-
lated to methyl orange.

The preparation of pure ortho and para aylenes:
H. T. Cuarxe and E. R. Taytor. The literature
dealing with the separation of the xylenes is con-
tradictory and misleading. It has been found

OcToBER 27, 1922]

that fractional distillation, selective sulfonation,
crystallization of the sulfonic acids and selective
hydrolysis of the xylene sulfonie acids all tend
to bring about a partial separation of the three
xylenes present in coal tar xylene, but that none
of these processes alone is entirely suitable for
the isolation of the ortho and para derivatives.
A satisfactory procedure is described in which the
above processes are combined.

The preparation of tetramethylene bromide:
C. S. Marvrn and A. L. TanenBpaum. Tetra-
methylene bromide is a research chemical often
needed. Several methods have been devised for
its synthesis, but none of these is satisfactory.
It has been found possible to obtain the sub-
stance easily by the following reactions:
Br(CH.)3Br + CgH;ONa = Ph-O(CHo.)s3Br, +
NaCN + EtOH + H.SO4 — Ph-O(CH,)3CO.Et,
+ Na + EtOH — Ph-O(CH»,)3CH,OH, + HBr
— Ph-O(CH»y)sCH2Br + Br(CHe2)4Br. The
yields in the steps are 80, 90, 80, 65, 40 and 40
per cent. respectively. As will be noticed the
yields are good in every step except the last,
where equal amounts of phenoxybutyl bromide
and tetramethylene bromide are obtained. The
former can be converted into the latter by pro-
longed treatment with hydrobromic acid. Hydri-
odie acid reacts like hydrobromie acid, giving
about the same yields of the iodine compounds.

Some derivatives of ethylbenzene: F. W. Sut-
LIVAN, JR. Ethylbenzene was prepared in good
yield by the action of ethylene on benzene in the
presence of aluminum trichloride. It was found
that chlorine acts on boiling ethylbenzene giving
alpha chloroethyl benzene and not the beta com-
pound as is stated in the literature. The cor-
responding bromide was prepared. Both give
phenyl methyl carbinol on hydrolysis. They also
give an acetate when boiled with sodium acetate
in glacial acetic acid. Styrene is obtained by
passing the vapors of chloroethyl benzene over
soda lime. The same substance is obtained in
quantitative yield when the chloro compound is
heated with quinoline. Ethyl benzene gives very
good yields of the nitro derivatives when nitrated
according -to the standard ‘procedure for the
nitration of toluene.

The preparation of aromatic alpha hydroxy
acids and their esters from the cyanhydrins:
G. E. Sem and Is. Kanuear. Seil’s method of
hydrolysis of the cyanhydrins by means of sul-
furie acid dihydrate was used on mandelic nitrile
prepared from benzaldehyde. The yield of man-
delic acid was 83 per cent. The ethyl ester was
prepared by different methods. The isopropyl

SCIENCE

491

ester of mandelic acid was synthesized and its
properties were determined.

The preparation of methyl red: A. W. Scuor-
Ger. Methyl red is prepared by diazotizing an-
thranilic acid and coupling with dimethylaniline,
following in general the procedure of Tizard and
Winmill. Free methyl red in the form of violet
crystals is best obtained by crystallization from |
acetic acid, the crystals retaining two molecules
of the solvent. From the standpoint of ease of
erystallization and purity of product, the best
procedure is to crystallize from dilute ‘hydro-
chloric acid, obtaining the hydrochloride of
methyl red. The sodium salt has also been pre-
pared and like the analogous compound, methyl
orange, is readily soluble in water.

New heterocyclic arsente compounds: ©. 8.
Paumer. In the presense of two moles of sodium
ethylate, one mole of primary arsine condenses
with one mole of beta-beta-dichlorodiethyl ether

or gamma-gamma-dichlorodipropyl ether to give

compounds such ag
CH,—CHy

Ar—As O
Nae

The products are high-boiling, stable oils. They
give the reactions of tertiary arsines, the arsenic
readily passing to the pentavalent state by the
addition of oxygen, sulfur, halogens, alkyl halides.
Chloroplatinates and mereurichlorides are also
formed. The above synthesis is a new reaction
of primary arsines. Preliminary experiments
show that the method can be applied to secondary
arsines and to other halides as well as to dihalo-
genoethers.

Action of arsenious chloride on quinoline :
Joun H. Scummr. (By title). Carbostyril and
a product which preliminary analyses indicate to
be tricarbostyril arsonic acid have been prepared
by the action of arsenious chloride upon quinoline
at comparatively high temperatures. Further
investigation of this reaction is in progress.

On the basis for the physiological activity of
certain onium compounds. II. Arsenic deriva-
tives: R. R. RENSHAW and E. R. WacGner. Sey-
eral new arsonium compounds are described. Tri-
methyl arsine dihalides condensed with ethylene
and with formaldehyde to form the arsenic analog
of neurine and formaldehydo trimethyl arsonium
halides respectively.

The behavior of the mercuric salts of car-
boazylic acids toward heat and the structure of

mercurte cyanide: Morris S. KuarascnH and

492

FREDERICK W. StTaveLy. The behavior of the
mercuric salts of various substituted acetic acids
toward heat has been investigated. It has been
found that the reaction products depend to a
very large extent upon the nature of the substi-
tuted groups. In the case of the mercury salts
of alkyl substituted acetic acids the mercury
either replaces a hydrogen of the alpha carbon
atom, or, if there is none available, no reaction
takes place (compare, however, the behavior of
trichloroacetic acid). In the case of the mercury
salts of the phenylated acetic acids the mercury
enters the ortho position in the benzene ring.
However, upon heating the mercury salts of sub-
stituted acetic acids, which lose carbon dioxide
upon heating rather easily, a different reaction
takes place: the mereury usually taking the place
originally occupied by the carboxyl groups. Thus,
dimethyl and diethyl acetoacetie acids behave that
way. The stability of the various compounds,
prepared in the course of this work, towards
various reagents has also been studied, and the
significance of the tests pointed out.

The action of mercury on certain alkyl iodides
and substituted alkyl iodides: J. Louis MAyNanp.
During the present work it has been shown that
the direct union of metallie mercury and methyl
iodide is not hastened by ultraviolet light but is
hastened by a specially arranged are light. The
reaction is preceded by the formation of a small
amount of mercurous iodide. If mercurous
jodide is used with methyl iodide, methyl mer-
curie iodide is formed rapidly. The action of
metallic mercury is confined almost entirely to
methyl iodide. The use of mercurous iodide
makes possible the extension of the reaction to
higher iodides and even to benzyl iodide. The
work is being extended both to a study of the
limits of the reaction and of the particular wave
lengths which increase the speed of the reaction.

The structure of the compounds from mercuric
salts and olefines: Rocrr ApaMs, F. L. Roman,
W. M. Sperry. Two different general formulas
have been suggested for the products of mercury
salts and olefines, true addition compounds such
as HOCH,CH».HeX, and moleular compounds such
as CH j:CH2:Hg(OH)X. The former have been
shown to be correct by a study of the action of
mercury salts on o-allyl phenols, which give
products for which no reasonable ‘‘molecular’’
formulas can be written. o-Allyl phenol reacts
with mercurie chloride to form 2-chloromercuri-
methyl-2, 3-dihydro-benzofuran and hydrochloric
acid. Treatment of this product with sodium

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI,, No. 1452

amalgam gives the corresponding mercuribis com-
pound. Treatment with potassium iodide and
iodine gives the corresponding iodomethyl com-
pound which, on reduction, gives 2-methyl-2, 3-
dihydrobenzofuran. Allyl amine and mercuric
chloride give a substance of the following strue-
ture, which also can not be easily explained on
the basis of a ‘‘molecular’’ formula:
ClHg—CH,—CH—CH,NH.HCl—
HCI—_NH—CH,.—CH—CH».—H¢gCl

The electromotive force of organic compounds:
Aldehydes: 8. B. ArnrENson and D. J. Brown.

The polymerization of the amylenes: JamMus F.
Norris and J. M. Jousrrt. The action of yari-
ous concentrations of sulfuric acid on the five
amylenes was studied. Trimethylethylene and un-
symmetrical methylethylethylene were the most
soluble and the most readily polymerized. In the
case of these hydrocarbons no alkyl sulfuric acids
were formed. The mechanism of the polymeriza-
tion appears to consist in the dehydration of the
alcohol first formed from the hydrocarbon. Iso-
propylethylene was the only isomer which was
polymerized without previous solution in the acid.
The study of the products formed as the result
of the decomposition of the ozonides of the
polymers led to conclusions as to the structure of
the dimers of trimethylethylene and isopropyl-
ethylene. Improved methods of preparation of
the compounds studied were found.

The relationship between structure and osxida-
tion potential of quinones: J. B. Conant and
L. F. Fizsrr. The oxidation-reduction potential
of a number of quinones is being measured in
alcoholic hydrochloric acid by a titration method.
The results at 25°, expressed on the hydrogen
electrode seale for certain typical quinones are:
benzoquinone 0.711, 1,2-naphthoquinone 0.579,
1,4-naphthoquinone 0.484, phenanthraquinone
0.471, anthraquinone 0.155. Measurements of
various derivatives show that substitution of
hydrogen by Cl, SO3H, COjH or COR increases
the potential, substitution by alkyl lowers it. The
effect of substituents is not entirely cumulative as
the following values obtained with chloroquinones

show: monochloro 0.736, 2,6-dichloro 0.746,
2, 5-dichloro 0.707, tetrachloro 0.695.
The oxidation of tribromoaniline: W. H.

Hunter and A. G. Mayrrs. The oxidation of
2,4,6-tribromoaniline by chromie acid yields
almost quantitatively the 2,4, 6-tribromoanil of
2,6-dibromquinone. This reaction may be formu-
lated as a benzidine rearrangement, or as a reac-
tion of unsaturated radicals.

OcToBER 27, 1922]

The oxidation of d-mannose with potassium
permanganate: W. L. Evans and R. A. Craw-
ForD. The oxidation of d-mannose with alkaline
potassium permanganate at 50° proceeds with the
production of carbon dioxide, oxalic acid and
acetic acid. The relative amounts of these prod-
ucts depend on the concentration of alkali used.
In neutral solutions only carbon dioxide and
acetic acid are formed. At low alkalinities,
all three are formed, the carbon dioxide fall-
ing off rapidly and the oxalic acid rising
rapidly with an increase in alkalinity to
about 0.15 N, after which carbon dioxide in-
creases slowly and the oxalic acid decreases slowly
to 1.0 N alkali: Above this point the relative
amounts of carbon dioxide and oxalic acid re-
main practically constant. Acetic acid remains
almost constant over the whole range.

Catalytic ammonolysis of beta-naphthol in the
vapor state: A. M. Howaup with ALEXANDER
Lowy. Mixtures of ammonia gas and _beta-
naphthol vapor were passed over a number of
anhydrous oxide catalysts in a Pyrex tube at
definite temperatures. A study of the yield of
beta-naphthylamine was made as dependent on
temperature, catalyst, rate of flow and ratio of
reactants. Over a considerable range of condi-
tions, yields in excess of 90 per cent. were ob-
tained, together with some beta-dinaphthylamine.
Curves illustrating a marked effect of tempera-
ture on catalyst efficiency are shown.

Deaminization of the methyl and ethyl esters
of dl-alanine and aminoisobutyric acid: A. L.
BarkKeER and GLENN 8. SKINNER. The methyl and
ethyl esters of aminoisobutyric acid yielded
largely the esters of alpha-methyl acrylie acid to-
gether with a small amount of hydroxy isobutyric
acid. The methyl ester yielded 3 per cent. of
acid material which contained, according to the
Zeisel determination, 70 per cent. of the ether
acid. The ethyl ester yielded 0.5 per cent. of
acid material which contained 30 per cent. of
ether acid. The esters of alanine yielded the un-
saturated, chloro and hydroxy esters together with
a high boiling nitrogenous residue. The methyl
ester gave 15 per cent. of acid material, of which
60 per cent. was the ether acid. The ethyl ester
gave 2 per cent. of acid material containing 70
per cent. of ether acid.

The recovery and refining of pyridine: WILBERT
J. Hurr.

Intermediate complex formation and electronic
valence: Bren H. Nicotrr. Ortho and para iodo-
amines have their iodine in a mobile state which
may be described by calling the iodine ‘‘posi-

SCIENCE

493

tive.’’ Two nitro groups, when o-p, produce an
even more recognizably negative halogen. But,
although two nitro groups thus exceed one amino
group, 3, 5-dinitroiodobenzene shows no test for
positive iodine; and yet, 3, 5-diamino-chloroben-
zene, boiled with alcoholic sodium ethylate, shows
no trace of negative chlorine. It is concluded
that certain conditions favoring formation of
necessary ‘‘intermediate complexes’’ are neces-
sary for reaction, and that such considerations
must be taken into account in judging electronic
structures.

The catalytic synthesis of the acetals and their
halogenation: JosrpH S. Reicurert, James H.
Baitry and J. A. NiruwLanp. The acetals were
prepared by passing acetylene into the corre-
sponding alcohols in the presence of concentrated
sulfuric acid and a mercury salt as a catalyst.
The products of the chlorination and bromination
of dimethyl and diethyl acetals were determined.
The chlorination of diethyl acetal gave a good
yield of chloral. Chloral was also prepared by
the successive action of acetylene and chlorine
on ethyl alcohol. After the required amount of
acetylene had been absorbed, the reaction mix-
ture was chlorinated directly without the separa-
tion of the acetal. In this process one mol, of
acetylene takes the place of one mol. each of
aleohol and chlorine as compared to the ordinary
process of making chloral from alcohol.

New derivatives of 2-bromo-6-hydroaxy-1, 4-
naphthoquinone: Auyin §S. WHEELER and B.
Narman. The preparation of 2-bromo-juglone as
given by Wheeler and Scott was improved upon.
Its benzoate was prepared. Its bromine was re-
placed by chlorine by means of alcoholic hydro-
chlorie acid. The benzoate of the chloro com-
pound was prepared. A dibromojuglone was
made by brominating a hot glacial acetic acid
solution of the monobromo compound. The sec-
ond bromine entered the quinone ring and none
entered the phenol ring in spite of the faet that
juglone readily takes up two in the quinone and
one in the phenol ring. Both bromines can be
replaced by chlorine by means of alcoholic hy-
drochloric acid. Acctates and benzoates were
prepared.

The polymers of pinene. II: G. B. FRANK-
FoRTER and Berry SuuuivAN. Improved methods
have been worked out for the preparation of the
compounds already described, namely, colophene,
(Cy¢Hi6) 2, and colophonene, (Cy Hi) 5, to-
gether with new derivatives of the same. In ad-
dition to the above, new compounds have been
obtained which complete the series, namely, the

494

sesquicolophene, (Cy 9H g)g, and the dicolophene,
(CyoH16)4-. The properties of the latter resemble
the former in their remarkable stability and in
the difficulty with which they form derivatives.
Some sulfonic acid esters of phenylazophenol
and its substitution derivatives: C. E. Boorp,
M. D. Counter and HeLen L. Wikorr. (Lan-
tern). Several esters of benzene sulfonic acid,
p-toluene sulfonic acid and alpha naphthalene
sulfonic acid with phenylazophenol and its sub-
stitution products were prepared by the Bau-
mann-Schotten method. The twenty-one esters
thus prepared for the first time, together with
the fourteen previously described (Ber., 28, 800,
31, 1782, 2116; J. Pr. Ch., 78, 386), are all sta-
ble, easily purified, beautifully erystalline com-
pounds melting between 50° and 200°. It is sug-
gested that this type of derivative may be of
value in characterizing the sulfonic acids. The
para derivatives such as p-tolylazophenol and
p-chlorophenylazophenol seem best adapted to this

purpose.
Practical preparation of oxalic acid from
acetylene: SistrR Mary Lucretia, Lro J.

Hetser and J. A. Nreuwtanp. Oxalie acid can
be prepared on a practical scale by passing
acetylene into a mixture containing three vol-
umes of nitric acid to one volume of water and
about two per cent. mercuric nitrate. The forma-
tion and loss of nitrogen oxides in the reaction
prevents the commercial use of the process. The
reaction proceeds through the formation of an
intermediate compound which yields aldehyde,
which is then oxidized to oxalic acid. Oxalie acid

can be prepared by the direct action of nitrogen:

oxides on acetylene, by the action of acetaldehyde
with nitric acid (3:1), and by the action of
nitrogen oxides on aldehyde vapor. Acetaldehyde
can be prepared by the action of acetylene on dry
mercuric nitrate, by the action of acetylene on
the compound obtained by treating metallic mer-
cury with nitrogen oxides.

The oxidation of propylene glycol with lithium,
sodium and potassium permenganates: E. OC.
Hytree and W. L. Evans. (a) Propylene glycol
is oxidized by neutral permanganate solutions to
carbon dioxide and acetic acid at 25° and 50°.
Above certain minimum concentrations of alkali
oxalic acid is also obtained. (b) The amount of
each oxidation product at low alkalinities is influ-
enced not only by the concentration of the alkali,
but also by the use of either lithium, sodium and
potassium hydroxides in connection with each of
the several permanganates.

Hexabromodiphenyldisulfide: W. H. Hunter

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1452

and A. H. KouuHasre. This compound is ob-
tained by treating the silver salt of tribromothio-
phenol with iodine in benzene solution. This ac-
tion is normal, and by so much is contrary to the
action of iodine on the salts of halogenated
phenols to form polyphenylene oxides. Further,
molecular weight determinations .in various
solvents give consistently low results, apparently
showing dissociation of the substance and conse-
quent existence of the free radical CgH2BrsS,
which does not lose halogen spontaneously.

Formation of gouwmaric acids and substituted
gamma-butyric acids from resorcinol, orcinol and
phloroglucinol: W. D. Laneury and RoGEr
Apams. While attempting to prepare certain
complex ketones, it was found that beta-chloro-
propionitrile and gamma-chlorobutyronitrile do
not condense with resorcinol, orcinol or phloro-
glucinol in the presence of zine chloride and
hydrogen chloride as nitriles ordinarily do to give
ketones, but instead condense to give acids,
(HO )oCgH3CH CH 2COoH, ete. Alpha-beta-
unsaturated nitriles give the same type of con-
densation product, indicating without doubt that
with these compounds the first step is the addition
of hydrogen chloride to the double bond.

A new method of preparing unsaturated 1, 4-
diketones: J. B. Conant and R. E. Lurz. Sub-
stances of the general type RCOCH=CHCOR are
of interest because they contain the characteristic
linkage of quinone and indigo. Only a relatively
few representatives have been previously pre-
pared and the methods of preparation are diffi-

eult. We have prepared a number of aryl unSat-

urated 1,4-diketones by the action of fumaryl

chloride, aluminum chloride, and an aromatic

hydrocarbon. The yields are good. It is inter-

esting that these substances are all smoothly re-—

duced to the corresponding ethane derivatives by
sodium hydrosulfite or titanous chloride in con-

trast to ketones of the type RCH—CHCOR, or™

acids of the type HOgCCH=CHCOH, which are
not reduced by these reagents.

The preparation of hydroxypyruvic acid: W. L.
Evans and G. P. Horr. The following steps
were used: (1) pyruvic acid, (2) monobromo-
pyruvic acid, (3) its methyl ester, (4) methyl
ester of hydroxypyruvie acid, (5) hydroxypyruvie
acid. The conversion of (3) to (4) was accom-
plished by means of methyl alcohol and potassium
formate, (5) is easily obtained from a slightly
acidulated aqueous solution of (4).

CuarLes L. PARSONS,
Secretary

NEw SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1453 Fray, Novemser 3, 1922 SinaLE Coprss, 15 Ors.

Saunders’ Books

Lusk’s Seience of Nutrition THIRD EDITION

Professor Lusk’s book gives you the reasons why certain changes and certain diseases are
due to altered metabolic processes. It tells you how to remove the underlying causes of the
external complaints, how to exclude the possibility of recurrence, how to obtain permanent
relief for your patients. It gives you the influence on metabolism of protein food, fat, carbo-
hydrates, and work; the normal diet, the nutritive value of various foods, food requirement
during growth, influence of certain drugs on metabolism.

Octavo of 641 pages. By GRAHAM LUSK, Ph.D., Sc. D., Professor of Physiology, Cornell Medical School.
Cloth, $6,50 net.

Pirquet’s System ef Nuirition JUST READY

This book explains the principal facts of the author’s system of nutrition and its practical
application to pediatric practice. The nem values of the principal food-stuffs are given, and
a table of Pelidisi Indices. There are chapters on body measurements and nutrition, calories
and nems, feeding in the first year, nutritional treatment of tuberculosis, proper feeding as
a preventive, and a complete bibliography. f

By DR. CLEMENS PIRQUET, Professor of Pediatrics at the University of Vienna, Austria. 16mo of
96 pages. Cloth, $2.00 net.

Stokes’ Third Great Plague

Written “for every-day people,” this book puts the facts concerning the infection, prophylaxis,
progress, diagnosis, and treatment of syphilis so that they will readily “become matters of
common knowledge. It is a timely book for the physician, social econdmist, and the general
public, especially for all those interested in welfare work. £

By JOHN H. STOKES, A. B., M. D., Head of Section on Dermatology and Syphilology, Division of Medi-
cine in The Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minnesota. 12mo of 204 pages, 4 portraits. Cloth, $2.50 net.

Ranson’s Anatomy of the Nervous System

Dr. Ranson presents anatomy of the nervous system from the dynamic rather than the static
point of view; that is to say, he lays emphasis on the developmental and functional sig-
nificance of structure. The student is thus led at the very beginning of his neurologic studies
to think of the nervous system in its relation to the rest of the living organism. An outline

for a laboratory course in neuro-anatomy is included.
Octavo of 395 pages, illustrated. By STEPHEN W. RANSON, M.D., Ph.D., Professor of Anatomy in
Northwestern University Medical School, Chicago. Cloth, $6.50 net. :

Brill’s Psycho-analysis THIRD EDITION

In this edition have been added new chapters on masturbation, paraphrenia, and homo-
sexuality. The entire book has virtually been rewritten, necessitating its resetting. It is
based on many years of close application to the study of psychopathology. Dr. Brill stresses

the use of psycho-analysis in practice. ;
Octavo of 468 pages. By A. A. BRILL, M.D., Lecturer on Psycho-Analysis and Abnormal Psychology, New
York University. Cloth, $5.00 net.

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.
Please send me the books checked (V) and charge to my account :—

es Tanta ey t. _-
Woah eee UE OD SS eae tae EAT eS a ee50 ne Ranson’s Anatomy of Nervous Sy
Pirquet’s System of Nutrition____-__---__ $2.00 net. Brill’s Psycho-analysis _______.__________

IN AUiii eeeneena e aeeeeeaeeee ENDL OR ap ap a re

il SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

NOW READY—

General and Professional Biology

WITH SPECIAL REFERENCE TO MAN

(Including Introductory Embryology of the Chick and Frog, a briet »
discussion of Mammalian Embryology, and Comparative Anatomy)

BY

EpWARD J. MENGE, PH.D.

Director of the Department of Zoology in Marquette University
and late Professor of Biology in the University of Dallas.

ATHOLEATHER, FLEXIBLE, 935 PAGES 6x9 PRICE, $6.50 NET
495 ILLUSTRATIONS OVER 1700 FIGURES

DISTINCTIVE FEATURES:
@ Original in conception.

@ Causes the student to understand and appreciate biological work
rather than thinking it but a, required subject.

@ Co-ordinates the various subjects in the college curriculum.

@ No undue emphasis on either Typeforms or Principles, but evenly
balanced, furnishing all the detailed laboratory evidence for the
Principles stated.

@j It saves the student purchasing three or four texts, as “GENERAL
AND PROFESSIONAL BIOLOGY” covers all General Biology,
all Introductory Embryology and all Comparative Anatomy that
students of medicine need.

@] It has probably the most extensive pronouncing Index-Glossary
compiled for any text-book.

THE BRUCE PUBLISHING COMPANY

354 MILWAUKEE STREET es MILWAUKEE, WISCONSIN

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS iii

YOU WILL BE INTERESTED IN

A Naturalist in the Great Lakes Region
By Exuiorr R. Downine

A new type of illustrated Nature-guide that will help the student to identify
the living things he sees on the earth and in the air and water by showing
how Nature, following a definite system, has combined plant and animal life
into groups or associations. A book for the hiker’s knapsack and the
nature-study class.

Educational Edition, cloth, $2.50; postpaid, $2.60

De Luxe Edition, flexible binding, $3.50; postpaid, $3.60

Methods n P ant Histology
By CuHarues JosepPH CHAMBERLAIN

This book (third edition, completely revised) contains directions for ecollect-
ing and preparing plant material for microscopic investigation. Killing
and fixing, freehand sectioning, the paraffin method, the Venetian turpen-
time method, the celloidin method, and the glycerin method are treated in
detail, and chapters on making photo-micrographs and lantern slides have
been added. Methods in Plant Histology may be used in classes under an
instructor, but the directions are so explicit that students working alone
should soon learn to make first-class preparations.

Illustrated, $3.25; postpaid, $3.37

Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of
Rock—Forming Minerals and Rocks

By Abert JOHANNSEN

A laboratory manual designed to provide students of petrology with in-
formation on methods of determining microscopically the points of separa-
tion between similar minerals and their modes of occurrence. In addition,
this new manual, which is the only volume of its kind in the field, contains
in the back of the book a folding alphabetical list im such a position that
reference may be made without turning pages, making possible a presenta-
tion in condensed form of the optical constants of the minerals, many points
of separation between similar minerals, and the modes of occurrence of
most of them. Cloth, $2.00; postpaid, $2.15

A Laboratory Manual for Comparative Vertebrate

Anatomy By Lissis H. Hyman

After some general chapters on animal form, the characters and classifica-
tion of the chordates, and vertebrate development, the manual takes up in
a comparative way each system of vertebrates beginning with the exo-
skeleton and ending with the nervous system. An important feature of the
volume is the explanatory matter which accompanies each system. The de-
scription of the anatomy of these systems is preceded by a general account
of their evolution in order that the student may understand better the con-
ditions in the specimens which he dissects. Cloth, $2.50; postpaid, $2.62

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

5811 Ellis Avenue Chicago, Illinois

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

Carotinoids and Related Pigments

THE CHROMOLIPOIDS

By Leroy S..PALMEr, PH.D.
PROFESSOR OF AGRICULTURAL BIOCHEMISTRY, UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA

A. C. S. MONOGRAPH No. 9

Ready November 10th, 1922.

PRICE: $4.50

CONTENTS:

Cuap. 1. GENERAL DIstTRIBUTION OF CARO-
TINOIDS. THE PIGMENTS DEFINED.
Luteins. — Lipochromes. — Lipoxanthins.
—Chromolipoids. — Carotinoids. — Non-
carotinoid plant pigments.—Non-caroti-
noid animal pigments.

CuHap. 2. CAROTINOIDS IN THE PHANERO-

GAMS.
The pigments of the carrot.—Carotinoids
in other roots.—Carotinoids in the chloro-
plastids.—Separation of yellow pigments
from chlorophyll.—Crystalline carotinoids
from chloroplastids.—Pleurality of yellow
pigments in chloroplastids.——Carotinoids
in etiolated leaves——Carotinoids in nat-
urally yellow leaves—Carotinoids in yel-
low autumn leaves.—Carotinoids in au-
tumn and winter reddening.—Carotinoids
in flowers.—Carotinoids in fruits——Caro-
tinoids in seeds and grains.

CHAP. 3. CAROTINOIDS IN THE CRYPTOGAMS.
Carotinoids in the alge—The Phzo-
phycee.—Fucoxanthin. — The Rhodo-
phycee. — The Charales. — The Chloro-
phycee.—The Baccilariaea (Diatomacee).
—The Peridiniee.—The Flagellata—The
Myxophycee (Cyanophycee). — Caroti-
noids in the fungi—The Basidiomycetes.
—The Ascomycetes.—The Phycomycetes.

——The Myxomycetes.—The Imperfects.—
—Carotinoids in Bacteria.

CHAP. 4. CAROTINOIDS IN THE VERTEBRATES.
Carotinoids in mammals.—Corpus luteum.
—Blood serum.—Milk fat—Adipose tis-
sue.—Internal organs.—Nerves.—Skin.—
Carotinoids in birds.—Egg yolk—Body
tissues. — Retina. — Feathers. — Caroti-
noids in fishes.—Carotinoids in amphi-
bians.—Carotinoids in reptiles.

CuHap. 5. CARoTINOIDS IN INVERTEBRATES.
Carotinoids in insects. — Lepidoptera.—
Rhynchota. — Coleoptera. — Orthoptera.
—Acerata. — Carotinoids in Crustacea. —
Carotinoids in Echinoderms.—Carotinoids
in molluscs—Carotinoids in worms.—
Carotinoids in sponges.

Cuap. 6. CHEMICAL RELATIONS BETWEEN
PLANT AND ANIMAL CAROTINOIDS.

Egg yolk xanthophyll.—Corpus luteum
carotin.—Crustacea carotin.

Cuap. 7. BrorocicaL Rerations BETWEEN
PLANT AND ANIMAL CaroTINOIDs.
Earlier views for and against a biological
relationship—Isolated facts supporting a
biological relationship. — Experiments
proving a_ biological relationship—In-
sects. — Cattle. — Fowls. — Man. — Dis-
tributions of carotinoids among different
species.

CuHap. 8. Mertuops oF IsoLaTiIon oF CARo-
TINOIDS.
Isolation of carotin—From carrots.—
From green Jeaves——From animal fat—
From blood serum.—Isolation of xan-
thophylls—From green leaves.—From
egg yolk—From blood serum.—Isolation
of lycopin.—Isolation of fucoxanthin.—
Isolation of rhodoxanthin.

CHAP. 9. GENERAL PROPERTIES AND METH-
ops OF IDENTIFICATION OF CAROTINOIDS.
Properties of carotinoid solutions.—Caro-
tin. — Lycopin. — Xanthophylls. — Rho-
doxanthin. — Fucoxanthin. — Properties
of crystalline carotinoids. — Carotin. —
Other pigmented hydrocarbons.—Xan-
thophyll. — Lycopin. — Fucoxanthin. —
Methods of identification in biological
products.—Plant tissues.—Animal tissues.

CHAP. 10, QUANTITATIVE ESTIMATION OF
CAROTINOIDS.
Estimation of carotin and xanthophyll.—
Method of Arnaud.—Arnaud’s results.—
Method of Monteverde and Lubimenko.
— Monteverde’s results. — Methods of
Willstatter and Stoll—Results by Will-
statter and Stoll’s method.—Estimation
of fucoxanthin—Application to other
biological materials.

Cuap. 11. FuNctTION OF CAROTINOIDS IN
PLANTS AND ANIMALS.
Possible function in plants.—Possible
function in animals.—Possible relations to
vitamins.—Relation between yellow pig-
mentation of fowls and egg laying—
Possible relation between yellow pigmen-
tation of cattle and milk secretion.
Bibliography—Index to Authors—Index
to Subjects.

The CHEMICAL CATALOG COMPANY, Inc.

19 East 24th Street

New York, U. S. A.

SCIE

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
proceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

Vou. LVI NovemBeER 3, 1922 No. 1453
CONTENTS
The Abstracting and Indexing of Biological
TAteraure: Dr. J. R. SCHRAMM.................... 495

Does Nitrification occur in Sea Water: PrRo-
MESSORMCEAS) By MuTPMCAN Secs e ewe eres oe 501
A Recent Scientific Expedition to the Islands

off the West Coast of Lower California:
DDR Gra ATT ASEAN NAC ee ee ee 503

Aid to Russian Scientists: Dr. VERNON KEL-

OGG ge 2 OCR OEE Os ee ee 504
Scientific Hvents:

The Recovery of Heliwm; The Use of Oxy-

gen in Metallurgical Operations ; Acoustical

Research; The American Society of Zoolo-

(Of ESTES RSS ORS ae a ee GL ys LAS ee 505
Scientific Notes and News....2.2--2:..-.-.:-.ssee-ce-oee 507
University and Educational Notes..........-...-.--- 511
Discussion and Correspondence:

The Dissociation of Carbon in the Intensive

Arc: Dr. Louis Brett and P. R. Basserr.

The Determination of Fat in Cream: PrRo-

Fressors E. G. Maurin and R. H. Carr.

Note on a Daylight Meteorite: Dr. Nor-

MAN Mach. Harris. Howard on Chemical

Spelling: Dr. H. W. W1ILEY. 512
Quotations :

BUS CAI CTI Se Oueatitrt a niasan cn are BE EU 514.

Scientific Books:
Parker on Smell, Taste and Allied Senses
in the Vertebrates: PRoFrEssorR C. JUDSON
AERRICK Berit

Special Articles:
Perigenesis: HAROLD C. SANDS..-.-----2222--.- 517

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
TE DUAR SON Stacie OR UA EO SE a Pls 518

THE ABSTRACTING AND INDEXING
OF BIOLOGICAL LITERATURE}

Wuew Dr. Lillie asked me to discuss some
phase of the general abstracts-indexes-bibliog-
raphies problem in one of these evenings I hesi-
tated considerably before accepting because it
appeared to me such a discussion would be
rather foreign to the general character of these
evenings, occupied, as they are, primarily with
the results of biological or related research.
However, it was rather because of this differ-
ence that I ventured to accept. I found a cer-
tain justification on the ground that if in the
main these evenings are given over to the re-
porting of advances in knowledge, one evening
might conceivably be profitably devoted to a
consideration of whether we are preserving
these advances in such a way that the greatest
use may be made of them with a minimum ex-
penditure of time, energy, and funds. We ex-
pend considerable funds and enormous amounts
of energy and time in ascertaining new facts
and publishing them in extenso. I believe it
is pertinent to inquire whether we have estab-
lished adequate means for so recording these
facts that the greatest and most economical
use is made of them and progress made as
largely cumulative as possible.

No doubt some of you are wondering what
special license I have to discuss this problem.
I can answer only that I have none. My con-
tact with the subject has been a brief one. I
happen to ‘be one of a number who for the past
four years have been carrying some of the
responsibility in connection with Botanical Ab-
stracts, and as such have been impressed with
the magnitude of the problem of properly re-
cording our information and have become con-
vineed that in a large measure we have not in

1 An invitation paper given at the Marine Bio-
logical Laboratory, Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
August 4, 1922.

496

our present methods reached a fundamentally
correct solution of this important problem.

The ideal—I take it all are agreed here—is
to have all new information so recorded that
any part of it, major or minor, can be located
promptly and certainly. Classified bibliogra-
phies and indexes, in book or ecard form, ab-
stracts with subject and author indexes in book
form, ete., are some of the means in use to
approximate this ideal. I should make it clear
that I am here discussing only the recording of
information, not criticism.

A review of most of these agencies, at least
the biological ones, shows that they have been
very inadequately supported, have been able at
best to do the work incompletely, great as has
been the service they have rendered. And, per-
haps more important, continuity, because of
inadequate financial support, has not been
guaranteed, with the result that agencies have
arisen, grown to great usefulness, declined, and
disappeared, to be followed by gaps before
other agencies have got under way. The result
is that biological literature is not only inade-
quately recorded, but it is recorded in so many
places that the task of rather exhaustively con-
sulting the literature on many biological sub-
jects is indeed exhausting. Moreover, an enor-
mous amount of duplication exists, all agencies
in the same general field covering the literature
in well-known journals, but frequently being
forced to neglect that in the less well known.

I believe it is worth while to inquire into
the fundamental causes of the difficulty and
just what sort of service the present worker
demands. As the number of research journals
and the amount of material published have
steadily increased it has become more and more
impossible for the individual worker personally
to subseribe for an appreciable amount of the
literature in his field. More and more he is
depending wpon bibliographie and abstract
services to bring to his attention the contribu-
tions he must consult evitically. It could not
be otherwise. But in general the workers
desire to own these bibliographies or abstracts,
especially the latter, as they constitute, if well
done, a sort of master key to the literature. I
believe I am correct in saying that usually
workers prefer a good abstract journal cover-
ing their field to a single or even several re-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

search journals. Granting that workers need
and want most of all adequate abstract and
index services, it is clear that if they are to
avail themselves fully of such agencies these
must be procurable at prices within their reach.
In other words, the cost of the service must be
relatively low—very low for most of us. See-
ondly, the service must approximate complete-
ness. It should be of such character that reli-
ance can be continuously placed on it to report
adequately practically all the literature.
Thirdly, the service must be prompt; the de-
mands of the worker on his abstract journal
are much like those on the newspaper. Fourth-
ly, there should be reasonable guarantees of
the continuity of the service. é

As regards completeness and adequacy, I be-
lieve only one type of service has been devel-
oped which is generally satisfactory and that is
the abstract journal with detailed indexes.
Classified bibliographies, even though based on
an examination of the texts, can at best but
incompletely record the new information,
though their utility has been and is very great,
especially for libraries. In some instances,
notably in the case of libraries, classified bib-
liographies in card form are preferred; but for
individuals the expense and labor involved in
filing and files have not made these very popu-
lar. Moreover, such bibliographies are cumu-
lative and not periodic. The same objections
presumably hold for abstracts in card form.
Another objection to the latter is that it is
difficult to accompany them by a usable de-
tailed subject index.

The reason for the popularity of abstracts
with detailed indexes is obvious. Unlike bib-
liographies, abstracts, if well prepared, quickly
give the reader definite information as to the
exact content of contributions. In many eases
the titles can not do this even though formu-
lated with care; and many of them are not
formulated with care. Indeed, many are dis-
tinetly cryptic. From complete abstracts vir-
tually complete subject imdexes can be pre-
pared, based, of course, on a careful analysis
of the abstract as well as of the title. By and
large, the complete. subject index is perhaps of
the greatest importance. But its preparation
necessitates complete abstracts, unless indeed
the indexing should be done wholly from the

Novemeer 3, 1922

originals—which would not at the same time
yield the much desired abstracts, indispensable
for current and reference use. It seems logical,
therefore, to prepare the abstracts, and from
them the indexes. Annual indexes furnish
periodic reference sources which may be cumu-
lated from time to time, as desired, to furnish
the cumulative reference sources.

If we are correct that the most useful instru-
ment in general is the abstract journal, how are
we to produce it completely, thoroughly,
promptly, continuously and sufficiently cheaply
to answer the requirements? Obviously the
task requires funds.

At present there are a great many abstract-
ing journals in biology, not to mention scores
of research journals that make more or less
abortive attempts at abstracting. The sub-
seription list of each is small, as most of them
serve small groups. We have set up a great
many special abstracting journals—in bacteri-
ology, physiology, entomology, endocrinology,
systematics, phytopathology, ete., ete..—in most
eases without correlation, with the result that
each can claim only a small list of subscribers
and is forced to charge a high subscription
rate. It is a fact too often lost sight of that
composition, or type-setting, is expensive and
that its cost per page is the same whether one
or one hundred thousand copies are printed.
The fewer the subscribers, the larger the share
of composition charge each must bear. With
a large subscription list, the amount borne by
each becomes negligible and a copy costs little
more than the paper, press work, binding, and
distribution. An abstracting journal with a
subscription list of one thousand or fifteen hun-
dred, as is the case with most of them at
present, can not hope to yield a surplus suffi-
cient to carry on the large amount of exacting
routine necessary in a good abstracting journal.
Little wonder, then, that almost all our special
biological services are embarrassed financially
and unable to carry their work forward as it
should be carried.

Let us at this juncture examine what has
been and is being accomplished by another
science group going at the problem in another
way. I refer to the chemists, who are probably
handling the proposition more successfully

SCIENCE

497

than any other group. Instead of abstracts of
industrial chemistry, organic chemistry, phar-
maceutical chemistry, analytical chemistry,
inorganic chemistry, ete., ete., they have one
chemical abstracts. They have made it one of
the official organs of the American Chemical
Society and thus insured a minimum circula-
tion of well over 13,000. The following are
the remarkable facts in this undertaking:
Chemical Abstracts publishes annually approx-
imately 5,000 pages of probably the best ab-
stracts and indexes produced anywhere; it
maintains an editorial office, consisting of an
editor-in-chief, two associate editors and a
clerical staff, and pays its abstractors at a per
page rate, at an annual cost of approximately
$26,000; but even so, the journal is produced
at an annual cost of about $6.80 per member,
this including entire cost of manufacture and
distribution, support of the editorial office and
compensation of abstractors.

Consider for a moment another journal,
Botanical Abstracts, with which I happen to
be familiar. It prints about 1,200 pages of
abstracts annually at a cost of $12.00 to each
of its 1,100 subscribers, and has not only
yielded no income for editorial purposes or for
compensating abstractors, but instead has ‘been
accumulating a deficit. In other words, Chem-
ical Abstracts publishes four times as much
material at less than half the price and is able
to carry its work forward continuously and
efficiently and be relatively free from serious
financial embarrassment. Most of our special
abstracting journals are being carried on by a
few enthusiasts willing to devote much time
and energy without compensation. But, how-
ever willing these individuals may be, such or-
ganizations are subject to frequent partial or
complete breakdowns. Their continuity and
uniform quality have no reasonable guarantees.

Is it possible for the biologists to profit by
the experience of the chemists and achieve
something equally good or better in the way of
this important accessory mechanism? At once
we realize that the biologists lack an organiza-
tion sufficiently comprehensive and strong to
grapple with so large and difficult a problem.
There are in this country fifteen to twenty soci-
eties of biologists with an aggregate member-

498

ship of over 6,000, but, with the exception of
the Federation of American Societies for Ex-
perimental Biology which involves four socie-
ties, these have been almost wholly uncorre-
lated.

Recently, however, there has developed a
movement which may provide an organization
comprehensive enough to measure up to the
task. I refer to the proposed federation of
American biological organizations which are of
a research character and which are essentially
national in scope. This movement, as seems
not generally realized, began over a year ago
when the Botanical Society of America, the
American Society of Zoologists, and the Amer-
ican Society of Naturalists endeavored to work
out some plan to provide for the organization
desired by the geneticists without at the same
time increasing the already large number of
separate and distinct biological organizations
and thereby making it still more difficult to
handle problems of common concern to all
biologists. It was recognized that the oppor-
tunity for the organization of special groups
must be provided, but also that there are cer-
tain large problems which can be properly
handled only by a larger, stronger organization,
including, if possible, all the societies. As re-
gards the immediate problem of the genetics
organization, the committee of the three socie-
ties recommended that sections in genetics with
common officers be created in both the Amer-
ican Society of Zoologists and the Botanical
Society of America. This recommendation was
carried out by both societies, and programs of
the joint sections were held at Toronto.

The committee went further, however. It
recognized that similar organization problems
would continue to arise and that something
should be done to make such organization of
special groups possible and at the same time
maintain a certain solidarity of biologists for
handling problems of common concern requiring
concerted action for their successful solution.
It was felt that this could be accomplished by
a federation of at least the national research
biological organizations.

The Division of Biology and Agriculture of
the National Research Council was requested
to call an informal conference at Toronto of
officers of the national societies to consider the

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1453

possibility of a federation. This meeting was
held? and, after a general discussion, it was
voted to hold an adjourned meeting in Wash-
ington in the spring. This was held in April
of this year* and was participated in by official
representatives from the following organiza-
tions:

American Society of Zoologists.

American Genetie Association.

American Society of Naturalists.

American Phytopathological Society.

Ecological Society of America.

Botanical Society of America.

American Society for Horticultural Science.

Society of American Foresters.

Society of American Bacteriologists.

American Association for the Advancement of
Science, and its Sections G, F, O, and N.

American Association of Economic Entomolo-
gists.

American Society of Agronomy.

Entomological Society of America.

Federation of American Societies for Experi-
mental Biology.

Amenican Dairy Science Association.

American Society of Animal Production.

An executive committee pro tem. was ap-
pointed to draw up a constitution to be sub-
mitted this fall to the societies represented in
the federation conference. While I am not
authorized to speak for the committee, I think
it may be said with perfect propriety that the
federation, if established, will not in the least
affect the autonomy of the member societies
and that it will concern itself with problems
of common concern to biologists.* The Wash-
ington conference recognized that one of these
problems, perhaps the chief one at present, is
publication, and, in particular, abstracts. It
therefore appointed a committee to study the
problem of providing all of biology with ade-
quate abstracting and indexing services. This
committee is a joint one, half appointed by
the Conference and half by the Division of

2See Shull, A. F.: ‘‘The Proposed Federation
of Biological Societies,’? Science, 55, 245-246,
1922.

3See Shull, A. F.: ‘‘Proposed Federation of
American Biological Societies,’’ ScrmNncE, 56, 184-
185, 1922.

+See Shull, A. F.: ‘*Proposed Federation of
Biological Societies,’’ ScrENcE, 56, 359-361, 1922.

NOVEMBER 3, 1922]

Biology and Agriculture of the National Re-
search Council, and consists of the following:

Representing the proposed federation: A.
Parker Hitchens, D. R. Hooker, C. A. Kofoid,
I. F. Lewis.

Representing the Division of Biology and Agri-
culture: E. D. Ball, C. E. McClung, J. R.
Schramm, A. F. Woods.

This committee is at work ascertaining the
exact situation in abstracting, indexing, and
other agencies for recording biological infor-
mation throughout the world. Several facts
are already obvious. Considering for the mo-
ment only the agencies published in English,
we have in this country Abstracts of Bacteri-
ology, Index to the Literature of American

Economic Entomology, Botanical Abstracts
(containing in addition to plant research
animal cytology amd_ genetics), EHndo-

erinology, ete.; in England, Physiological Ab-
stracts, Review of Applied Entomology, Review
of Applied Mycology, Zoological Record (Part
N of the International Catalogue of Scientific
Literature), ete. The subscription list of each
is small and in many eases the financial sup-
port is inadequate to insure that the work will
be done thoroughly and in perpetuity. Zoology
especially seems in a precarious position since
the breakdown of continental agencies and the
suspension of the International Catalogue,
with the exception of Part N (Zoology), which,
however, is financially handicapped. Only in
physiology and entomology, and perhaps
genetics, is the situation reasonably satisfactory
at present. Many of the agencies are hanging
on a relatively slender thread; some are likely
to break down at almost any moment, indeed,
are breaking down. The question is, shall we
continue to leave the recording of biological
information, only a mechanism, to be sure, but
an absolutely indispensable one, to such a pre-
carious existence?

Primarily there appear to be two methods
of handling the situation. (1) The present
one of a large number of special abstracting
journals or bibliographie services. For such
special journals there is a relatively small de-
mand and a correspondingly small support.
Here, too, it should be pointed out that the
more numerous the journals and the narrower

SCIENCE

499

the field covered by each, the greater the
amount of duplication—necessary duplication
under this system since each specialty grades
insensibly into neighboring ones on which it
depends to a large extent. Furthermore, the
conventional line so often drawn between plants
and animals is no longer recognized in many
lines of work, and rightly so. Separate botan-
ical and zoological abstracting journals will not
satisfy the geneticist or eytologist, and only im-
perfectly many pathologists, physiologists, and
ecologists. (2) The other method is the pub-
lication of a single comprehensive biological
abstracts, corresponding to Chemical Abstracts.
Let us consider the second alternative in more
detail.

(1) Cost. The joint committee has not yet
completely determined the approximate volume
of biological literature, after delimiting it
roughly from clinical medicine, chemistry,
physies, geology, psychology, ete. But it is
safe to assume that it is at least as large as
chemical literature. Let us assume, then, that
a journal fully as large as Chemical Abstracts
(5,000 pages annually) would be required. If
such a journal were made the official organ of
the proposed Federation, going to each mem-
ber of the constituent societies as Chemical Ab-
stracts goes to each member of the various sec-
tions of the American Chemical Society (thus
insuring a subscription list of 7,000 or 8,000),
I believe I am safe in saying on the basis of
information in our hands on manufacturing
costs that such a journal would cost little or
no more than most of the special abstracting
journals and considerably less than some of the
larger ones like Botanical Abstracts. In other
words, a very large journal with a large sub-
scription list would cost less per subscriber
than a small one with a small subscription list.
Let me remind you again of Chemical Ab-
stracts with its 5,000 pages annually and an
overhead of $26,000 yearly produced at a cost
of $6.80 for each member.

It may be objected that most biologists would
be interested in but a small part of such a
comprehensive journal. The same thing may
be said of Chemical Abstracts. I doubt whether
there would be greater diversity than in Chemi-
cal Abstracts, which includes anything from

500

routine commercial analysis to theoretical
physical chemistry. The material would, of
course, be organized into sections according to
the judgment of the biologists and the section
or sections of interest could be as easily con-
sulted as in a special journal. This objection
resolves itself, I believe, into the relatively small
item of space occupied on the shelf; this may
perhaps be met by some plan of issuing parts
without involving a sacrifice of the fundament-
ally important principle of uniform support
by all members of the constituent societies of
the proposed Federation.

(2) Duplication. Most of the duplication
existing in special abstracting journals would
be done away with and the problem would nar-
row itself down to the necessary overlapping
with a few large abstracting journals in ‘the
other major fields—chemistry, physics, ete.
Moreover, with such a widely distributed ab-
stract journal, research journals might well dis-
continue their abstract sections and either de-
vote such space to the publication of addition-
al research, or to criticism, or both; or effect a
reduction in size, and consequently in cost.

(3) Cross referencing. Though the ma-
terial be segregated into special sections, as
many as necessary, suggestive and pertinent
material from other sections could be conveni-
ently referred to by cross references, each sec-
tional editor having complete control over cross
references by having access to a complete dupli-
cate galley proof. (In the special journals
this can be done only by duplicating in large
measure the abstracts appearing in other spec-
jalized journals.) This cross-referencing would
make possible the very complete utilization, with
practically no expense, of the valuable leads
from related fields on which so much of prog-
ress depends.

(4) Current files. A single, large, strong
journal could aequire by exchange or purchase
much of the current serial literature in which
its material appears. Chemical Abstracts now
receives 550 serial publications, by exchange
and purchase, which are available for abstract-
ing purposes. The small journal does not have
the resources to accomplish this, and yet such
files are indispensable for properly carrying on
the work. It is to be hoped that some day all

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

American abstracting agencies at least may be
brought into correlation in order that they may
share each other’s facilities; all the services
would inevitably profit by such correlation.

(5) Support. Fundamental to the ultimate
success of such a comprehensive undertaking
would be the adoption of the journal as an of-
ficial organ of the proposed Federation. Grant-
ing that it can be manufactured, as I believe
it ean, for from $6.00 to $8.00 annually, I am
inclined to believe that practically all of us
would be willing to pay that amount annually
for a virtually complete abstracting and index-
ing service of the world’s literature in our re-
spective fields, especially when it brings in ad-
dition equal service in other biological fields
in which we have an interest. If this were
done, in other words, if a Biological Abstracts,
or whatever you choose to eall it, had the solid
backing of the biologists of America at least,
support, perhaps a permanent endowment,
might be secured sufficient to cover the over-
head, in which ease the journal could be sold
for practically manufacturing cost. Moreover,
such an endowment would reasonably guarantee
that the work would go forward properly un-
der practically all conditions. There is little
hope that the numerous separate journals with
small backing can command such support. In-
deed, the history of these shows that they can
not.

Let me make it clear, however, that the joint
publications committee has no power. Its fune-
tion is to ascertain and report the facts. The
decision rests with the societies. The committee
is by no means ready to report, and I have
little idea as to what will be the nature of its
report when all factors have been taken into
consideration. But I personaliy venture to pre-
dict that the permanent solution of the problem
lies in the direction of the establishment of a
single biological abstracting journal having the
unified support of all, or practically all, Ameri-
ean biological organizations at least. Obvious-
ly, such a solution would necessitate the merg-
ing of several existing biological abstracting
and bibliographic agencies, and this, of course,
should not be done unless it is certam that a
real improvement will be effected thereby. We
may rest assured that those controlling the ex-

NovemMsrr 3, 1922]

isting journals will not proceed in this direction
until such guarantees are forthcoming.
J. R. Scuramu
National RESEARCH CoUNCIL,
WASHINGTON, D. C.

DOES NITRIFICATION OCCUR IN
SEA WATER

Despite the meager, observational and ex-
perimental data which are available on the sub-
ject, the idea of the occurrence and activity of
nitrifying bacteria in the opea sea is widely
prevalent among bacteriologists and botanists.
This idea is based, in part, on the reasoning
that ocean water should contain the bacteria
discharged into it by the sediments and the
drainage waters from terrestrial sources; more
particularly, however, it is an outgrowth of
certain studies which have been made in recent
years on the bacterial flora of sea water which,
as above indicated, are far from exhaustive and
satisfying. for example, Thomsen? has dis-
covered nitrite and nitrate producing bacteria
in the ooze of the bottom of Kiel Fjord. It
has also been reported that nitrite and nitrate
forming bacteria have been found in the slime
at the bottom of the Bay of Naples. In both
cases, however, it is definitely pointed out that

the samples studied were obtained from near .

land surfaces. Moreover, Thomsen failed to
discover the nitrite or nitrate forming organ-
isms in sea water or in the plankton or the
fixed alge. In commenting on the studies of
Keding? and Keutner* on nitrogen-fixing bac-
teria of the sea, Drew* made the following
statement which shows him to have been con-
fused on the subject of two distinet groups of

‘“Ueber das Vorkommen von
Mess. Meeresunters,

1 Thomsen, R.:
Nitrobakterien im Meere,
Vol. XI, Riel.

2 Keding, M.: ‘‘ Weitere Untersuchungen iiber
stickstoffbindende Bakterien,’’ Meeresun-
ters, Vol. IX, Kiel.

3 Keutner, J.: ‘‘Ueber das Vorkommen und
Verbreitung stickstoffbindende Bakterien im
Meere,’’ Ibid., Vol. IX, Kiel.

4 Drew, G. Harold: ‘‘On the Precipitation of
Calcium Oarbonate in the Sea, etc.’’ Papers
from Tortugas Laboratory, Carnegie Inst., Wash.,
Vol. 5, 1914.

Wiss.

SCIENCE

501

bacteria wholly different from each other in all
respects. He said, “The existence of nitrify-
ing bacteria which are capable of absorbing
and combining with the free nitrogen of the
air> and eventually give rise to nitrates, has
been shown by Keding and Keutner, but these
have so far only been found in the bottom
close to shore or apparently living in symbiosis
with alge or plankton organisms.” Later on,
however, Issatchenko,* whose original papers
are not available to me, claims to have found
nitrifying bacteria in the Gulf Stream near
Ekaterininsk 72° N. He observed, however,
that the presence of such bacteria in the Arctic
Seas is still unproved. Issatchenko made this
statement eight years after having stated, as
reported in a brief note,’ that he had discov-
ered a nitrifying bacterium in Arctic sea water.
With these unsatisfactory results before him,
Berkeley’ decided, in the course of other
studies on marine bacteria, to make some tests
for a possible nitrifying power of sea water.
He inoculated 2 per cent. solutions of ammo-
nium sulfate in sea water with samples of the
sea water to be studied. He does not state
how much inoculum was employed, nor any-
thing else relative to the technique of the ex-
periments, but the result was that even after
three months none of the cultures showed even
traces of nitrite or nitrate.

In connection with a series of critical studies
on the possible connection of bacteria with
CaCOs3 precipitation in sea water, which are to
appear in the reports of the Department of
Marine Biology of the Carnegie Institution of
Washington, the writer of this note, unaware
of Berkeley’s work which appeared at about
that time, determined to make some tests for
the possible nitrifying power of sea water.

5 Italics mine.

6Issatchenko, B. L.: ‘‘Nitrogen Fixation,
Nitrification, Denitrification and Production of
Hydrogen Sulphide by Bacteria in the Arctic
Ocean.’? Rev. Agr. Expts., Vol. 17, pp. 175-9.
Cited in Bull. Agr. Intelligence, 7, 1753 (1916).

7Issatchenko, B. L. Cited from Centr. Bakt.
etc., 2th Abt., No. 13-14, p. 430, 1908.

8 Berkeley, Cyril: ‘‘A Study of Marine Bae-
teria, Straits of Georgia, B. C.’’ Trans. Roy
Soc. Can., Vol. 13, p. 15.

502

The first tests were carried out at Pago Pago
in American Samoa, but they were later sup-
plemented by several tests at Berkeley, Cali-
fornia, with material collected in Samoa. In
the tests just mentioned, the ordinary Omelian-
sky solutions for nitrite and nitrate formation
were employed, and they were inoculated in
two series, one with sea water and the other
with caleareous sand taken from beneath that
same sea water. Twenty-five ce. portions of
sea water and about one gram of the calcareous
sand were used as inocula. After three weeks,
there was no trace of nitrite or nitrate in the
sea water inoculation, but very good nitrifica-
tion in the caleareous sand inoculations. The

first result is, therefore, in agreement with

that of Berkeley, though reached in ignorance
of Berkeley’s experiments. It will be noted,
however, that Berkeley used sea water media
containing 2 per cent. of (NH4)2SOu., which is
very different from the weak salt media of the
Omeliansky solution which contains only .1 per
cent. (NH4)2SOs. In fact, there seems to be
no real reason for the use of such high concen-
trations of ammonium sulfate, and especially
in the presence of a concentrated salt solution
like sea water. Nevertheless, the agreement in
the results of the two tests is noteworthy. Be-
fore discussing further the significance of my
second result, namely, with the caleareous sand
inoculations, it is best to deseribe some sub-
sequent experiments. Thinking that the period
of incubation may have been too short in the
sea water cultures above described, since the
nitrifying bacteria could not in any case be
expected to be present in sea water in great
numbers, I repeated the experiments on my
return to California from Samoa, and allowed
the culture to run for eight months in one ease.
The results were, however, just the same as in
the first series. The inoculations with sea
water gave no tests for nitrite or nitrate, and
the inoculations with caleareous sand taken
directly below that sea water gave marked
nitrification.

Even these tests did not entirely satisfy me,
however, because I still thought that the num-
ber of nitrifying bacteria in sea water might
be so small as to render possible their total
absence from a 25 ec. sea water inoculum. An

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

opportunity to make further tests came, how-
ever, during my continued studies on marine
bacteria and the lime precipitation problem
during the past summer (1922), this time at
the Tortugas Laboratory of the Carnegie In-
stitution of Washington. On June 9, two 150
ee. portions of Omeliansky’s solution were
placed in one liter Erlenmeyer flasks and ster-
ilized. When the culture solutions were cool,
they were inoculated as follows: one with
about ten grams of calcareous sand obtained
from the sea bottom near the Loggerhead Key
shore; the other with 150 ce. of sea water ob-
tained immediately above the calcareous sand.
On June 16, tests were made with Tromms-
dorff’s reagent of the cultures, which were
incubated at room temperature (about 27° to
31° C. constantly). No test for nitrite was
obtained in either culture. On June 22, the
tests were made again. This time, the eal-
eareous sand inoculation showed marked
nitrite production, whereas the other culture
showed nothing. A further test made on July
21 gave the same results as that on June 22.
All of these itests, taken in conjunction with
those of Berkeley and possibly those of Isaat-
chenko, compel us to the conclusion that either
the nitrifying bacteria are absent from the sea

water, or they can not function in such concen-

trated salt solutions. The former alternative is
probably the correct one, since it will be re-
membered that my first tests were with much
weaker salt solutions, and as Miss Meek and
I have shown in a paper soon to appear in the
Journal of General Physiology, the nitrifying
bacteria can withstand very high salt concen-
trations. It may, therefore, be concluded with
reasonable safety that the nitrifying bacteria
are absent from open sea water and that, there-
fore, no nitrification occurs in such sea water.
What may be the state of affairs in small areas
of the sea close to land and harboring much
organic matter is not directly relevant to this
particular inquiry. I hope to secure some
information on that point soon.

Not tne least interesting feature of my tests
on this question, however, is the result ob-
tained with the calcareous sand inoculations.
It is remarkable that calcareous sand, which is
in constant contact with sea water, should har-

NoveMBrErR 3, 1922]

bor vigorous nitrifying organisms, whereas
that sea water with which it is in equilibrium
in the system should not. It is difficult to
account for this, except by assuming that the
solution surrounding the sand particles is of a
very different nature from that in the sea
water above, and yet the possibility of that
seems rather remote. Of course small amounts
of organic matter covering the sand particles
may afford protection for the bacteria. Fur-
ther experiments which I am conducting may
throw some light on this question.

Cuas. B. Lipman
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

A RECENT SCIENTIFIC EXPEDITION
TO THE ISLANDS OFF THE WEST
COAST OF LOWER CALIFORNIA

At the Berkeley meeting of the Pacifie Divi-
sion of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science in 1921 there was ap-
pointed a Committee on Conservation of the
Marine Life of the Pacific, Dr. Barton Warren
Evermann, chairman. One of the first tasks
which the committee undertook was the making
of recommendations for the protection of cer-
tain of the marine mammals or for the gather-
ing of necessary information which would make
it possible to advocate a concrete plan in the
future. With regard to certain species, there
already existed sufficient data so that definite
action could be undertaken at once, but with
other species practically nothing was known of
their present status. This was notably true of
the Guadalupe elephant seal, Guadalupe fur
seal and southern sea otter, all of which once
existed in great abundance along the shores of
California and Lower California.

Through the activities of the committee, an
expedition was dispatched from San Diego to
the islands off the west coast of Lower Cali-
fornia on July 9, 1922, for the primary pur-
pose of securing data on the three above men-
tioned species of mammals. The government
of Mexico provided the fisheries patrol boat
Tecate for the work and met all expenses while
the party was in the field. Professor Carlos
Cuesta Terron, curator of fishes and reptiles
of the National Museum of Mexico, was in
charge of the expedition and the Mexican gov-

SCIENCE

503

ernment was further represented by Professor
José M® Gallegos, of the National Museum,
Sis. Joaquin Palacios, inspector, and Rudolfo
Lascano, assistant inspector of lighthouses, Sr.
Enrique Gonzalez, fisheries inspector, and Sr.
Luis Rubio, taxidermist.

Through the intercession of Dr. A. L. Bar-
rows, of the National Research Council, the
National Geographic Soeiety rendered financial
assistance which made it possible for the com-
mittee to enlarge the scope of its work by
securing the cooperation of the California
Academy of Sciences, represented by Myr.
Joseph R. Slevin, assistant curator of herpetol-
ogy, Mr. Frank Tose, chief taxidermist, and
the writer; of the San Diego Society of Nat-
ural History, which sent Mr. A. W. Anthony,
curator of vertebrates, and Mr. Ernest Hinkley,
assistant; and the Scripps Institution for Bio-
logical Research, represented by Mr. P. S.
Barnhart. Mr. Anthony and ‘the writer were
placed in charge of the scientific investigations.

The motor ship Tecate was admirably suited
to the work in hand and the success of the
expedition was in no small measure due to the
constant interest of Captain Victor Angulo
and his well trained crew. Everything possible
was done to aid the observers and collectors
during the five weeks in the field.

The expedition returned to San Diego on
August 16, after having visited the following
islands: Guadalupe, San Martin, Cedros, the
San Benitos, Natividad, San Roque, Asuncion,
Magdalena and Santa Margarita. Landings
were also made at Ensenada, San Quintin Bay,
San Bartoleme Bay and Abreojos Point on the
Lower California peninsula. Besides making
collections at all of these places the coast line
was studied at close range for considerable dis-
tances from the vessel, particularly the bighi,
known as San Cristobal Bay, where elephant
seals are known to have once hauled out in
numbers.

The herd of elephant seals on Guadalupe
Island was carefully studied and counted and,
although ‘the results can not as yet be an-
nounced, it -may be stated that conditions were
very encouraging for the perpetuation of this
remarkable species. Many interesting photo-
graphs, including motion pictures, were taken
of the animals.

504

The entire coast lines of Guadalupe and sevy-
‘eral of the other islands were examined care-
fully for evidence of the existence of the
Guadalupe fur seal but not a single animal was
seen. Many inquiries were ‘also made regarding
the species but no information was obtained
which would indicate that there remained a
living representative. It has apparently gone
the way of the great auk, Steller’s sea cow and
several other valuable species; commercial
hunters can cut another notch on their gun-
stock.

The old fur-seal rookery grounds of Guada-
lupe were examined carefully. Three of these
were found and the lava rocks were polished as
smoothly as though they had been deserted but
yesterday. An estimate based upon knowledge
gained on the Alaska fur-seal rookeries placed
the original number of animals on Guadalupe
at 100,000. The great killing took place in the
early part of the nineteenth century and we
must look with remorse upon our ancestors
who were so thoughtness as to destroy so val-
uable an animal. In 1892 and subsequently
several expeditions have visited Guadalupe
Tsland in the hope of securing specimens for
museum purposes but met with no success.
Four incomplete skulls upon which the species
was founded and possibly a few disassociated
bones (yet unidentified) taken by the last ex-
pedition seem to represent all there is of it
except regrets.

No southern sea otters were seen by the mem-
bers of the expedition, but information ob-
tained would indicate that there are still alive
a very few of these excessively valuable ani-
mals.

The natural history collections made by the
expedition were large considering that the
islands were visited during the dry season.
Specimens in various groups were obtained in
approximately the following numbers: birds
and mammals, 300; reptiles and ‘amphibians,
1,000; insects, 1,100; land shells, 2,000; marine
fossils, many; and miscellaneous fishes, inver-
tebrates and plants.

The representatives of the Mexican govern-
ment are thoroughly alive to the necessity of
conserving the natural resources of their
western territory. It is not expected that
measures will be adopted which will throttle

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

the proper commercial development of the vast
wealth of marine life of those waters but it is
expected that the Mexican government will
provide laws and regulations which will prop-
erly safeguard and conserve those resources so
that they may continue for all time valuable
assets of that government.
G. Datuas Hanna
CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF SCIENCES

AID TO RUSSIAN SCIENTISTS

Tue American Committee to Aid Russian
Scientists with Scientific Literature made an
appeal through Scrence (June 23, 1922) to
the scientific men and organizations of the
United States for gifts of American scientifie
books, journals and papers to be sent, by aid
of the generous cooperation of the American
Relief Administration, of which Mr. Herbert
Hoover is chairman, to Russia for distribution
among Russian universities, scientific organiza-
tions and individual workers. In addition to
the general appeal through Sctmnce, the com-
mittee made a special appeal by letter to vari-
ous commercial publishing houses, university
presses and scientific organizations which pub-
lish journals, memoirs, bulletins, ete.

The response to this appeal has been wide-
spread and generous. Up to date nearly nine
tons of American scientific books, journals and
papers published since January 1, 1915, have
been collected and sent to Russia. The con-
tributors include 70 government and_ state
bureaus and experiment stations, 40 universi-
ties and colleges and university presses, 25
national and state scientific societies and about
120 private individuals. To make special men-
tion of any contributors among the many who
have made such generous response to the appeal
may seem unfair, but to reveal the interesting
fact that commercial publishing houses, which
are presumably not primarily philanthropic,
or, at least, immediately benevolent in their
aims, have exhibited a generosity not inferior
to that shown by the more strictly science-
supporting organizations, I want to call atten-
tion to such examples of good will as shown by
the Yale University Press in its contribution
of six copies each of twenty-four first class.
scientific books published by it, and by Double-
day, Page and Company in submitting a list

NoveMBER 3, 1922]

of their publications and requesting the com-
mittee to choose what books it desired.

The only disappointment to the committee is
that caused by the comparatively small number
of private individuals so far represented in the
list of donors. A partial explanation of this
is undoubtedly to be found in the fact that the
appeal was issued at just about the end of the
academic year when many professors had left
their laboratories for their summer vacation.

The committee wishes to express its thanks
to all those organizations and persons who
have responded to its call and to make known
to these contributors an expression, recently
received by cable, of the great gratitude of the
Moscow representative committee of Russian
scientists.

It also wishes to repeat its appeal to indi-
vidual scientifie workers for contributions of
reprints to the number of six each, if pos-
sible, of their published papers since January
1, 1915. The committee has at its disposal
only a limited fund to cover the necessary
clerical work. It asks, therefore, that con-
tributors of literature eover the cost of its
transportation to New York, from which point
all cost of handling and shipment will be borne
by the American Relief Administration. Con-
tributors should send, with each consignment,
one copy of a list of the publications sent by
them and five copies of this list (apart from
the consignment) together with all letters con-
taining advices of shipments, express and
shipping receipts to the American Relief Ad-
ministration, Russian Scientific Aid, 42 Broad-
way, New York City. The publications them-
selves should be sent by parcels post or express,
or if very heavy, by freight, to the American
Relief Administration, care Gertzen and Com-
pany, 70 West Street, New York City. Re-
quests for further information should be sent
to the American Committee to Aid Russian
Scientists, 1701 Massachusetts Avenue, Wash-
ington, D. C. i

The answer to one such request for informa-
tion which has been received from numerous
inquiries may be given here and now. The
contributed material is not turned over to the
Soviet government, nor is the distribution of
this material determined by the Soviet govern-
ment. The distribution is effected under the

SCIENCE 50

Or

general direction of the American ‘Committee
by the American Relief Administration work-
ing in cooperation with a special committee in
Moscow of Russian scientists representing
various Russian universities and scientific or-
ganizations. The extraordinary independence
of the American Relief Administration, extra-
ordinary in the light of the existent cireum-
stances, as regards its activities in Russia, is
perhaps not generally realized here in America.
Vernon I<ELioae,
Chairman
L. O. Howarp
Davin WHITE
RapHaEeL Zon
American Commitice to Aid Russian Scien-
tists with Scientific Literature

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
THE RECOVERY OF HELIUM

SATISFACTORY operation on a laboratory
scale of a simplified and much cheaper method
of recovering helium is reported through the
American Chemical Society by H. Foster Bain,
director of the U. S. Bureau of Mines. In a
test made within the last month at the eryo-
genic laboratory in the Interior Department
building, helium was recovered from natural

gas in one operation in sufficient purity for

use in dimigubles or balloons.

“This development,’ Mr. Bain said, “indi-
cates that very soon commercial production of
hehum for lighter-than-air craft is probably
feasible.” Not only will this work insure safe-
ty from fire and explosions, but it is almost
certain to result in an entirely new type of
airship design. The motor, for instance, could
be placed inside the envelope of a helium ship
if necessary.

The research work leading up to this achieve-
ment was directed by the United States Helium
Board, composed of Lieutenant Commander
IF. M. Kraus, representing the Navy, Colonel
R. F. Favel, representing the Army, and Dr.
R. B. Moore chief chemist of the U. S. Bureau
of Mines, H. 8. Mulliken, production engineer,
alternate. The actual work of development was
directed by a group of men known as the
Board of Helium Engineers, with the follow-
ing membership: M. H. Roberts, Franklin
Railway Supply Company; R. C. Tolman, of

506

the California Institute of Technology; W. L.
DeBaufre, University of Nebraska; Edgar
Buckingham, of the U. 8. Bureau of Standards,
and John W. Davis, of the U. S. Bureau of
Mines. The government also had the assistance
ot Dr. Frederick Keyes, Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology, and Dr. Harvey N. Davis,
Harvard.

Helium recovery as carried on at govern-
ment plants in Texas, results in a gas of about
64 per cent. purity, and necessitates a second
operation to remove impurities. By the old
method the flow from the natural gas wells is
directed through a series of compressors which
reduce the various gases in the mixture to
liquid form. Methane (illuminating gas) be-
coming liquid at a higher temperature is taken
off first. The remaining gases are then, one by
one, liquified and helium, having an exceeding-
ly low liquefying point, remains. The difficulty
with this method is to liquefy all of the nitro-
gen in the mixture.

THE USE OF OXYGEN IN METALLURGICAL
OPERATIONS

Use of oxygen in connection with the en-
richment of the blast in the blast furnace and
in practically all phases of pyro-metallurgical
work will furnish the key to success in the
further development of such metallurgical
operations, according to Dr. F. G. Cottrell,
formerly director and now consulting metallur-
gist of the United States Bureau of Mines,
who first directed the bureau’s attention to this
subject. Through this enrichment process, it
is hoped to increase the efficiency of metallur-
gical operation with a resultant production of
metals at lower cost and possibly the use of
lower grade ores.

The Bureau of Mines now has outlined plans
for two studies which will be carried on simul-
taneously. The first will cover the present-day
processes for the production of oxygen, in
order to determine the feasibility of attempt-
ing to produce oxygen, or oxygenated air, in
such amounts and at such a cost as to permit
of its use in metallurgical operations. The
second study will be devoted to the feasibility
of using oxygen, or oxygenated air, in metal-
lurgical operations.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

Because of his interest in this investigation,
M. H. Roberts, vice-president of the Franklin
Railway Supply Company, was asked to select
an advisory committee to work with the Bureau
of Mines and to act as chairman of this com-
mittee. The committee will consist of Dr.
F. G. Cottrell, director of the Fixed Nitrogen
Research Laboratory; Professor W. UL.
DeBaufre, chairman of the mechanical engi-
neering department of the University of Ne-
braska; Dr. D. A. Lyon, chief metallurgist of
the Bureau of Mines; Dr. R. B. Moore, chief
chemist of the Bureau of Mines; Dr. R. C.
Tolman, professor of physical chemistry and
mathematical physics, California Institute of
Technology; J. W. Davis, mechanical engineer
of the Bureau of Mines; F. W. Davis, metal-
lurgist of the Bureau of Mines; Frank Hodson,
president of the Electrie Furnace Construction
Company, and P. H. Royster, assistant metal-
lurgist of the Bureau of Mines.

Previous to the war, some work was done in
Belgium on the enrichment of the blast with
oxygen in connection with the smelting of iron
ores in the blast furnace. In the United States,
the late J. E. Johnson, Jr., was interested in
the possible use of oxygen in metallurgical
operations and carried on some experimental
work along these lines previous to his death.

ACOUSTICAL RESEARCH

Tue London Times writes editorially in re-
gard to the desirability of cooperation in the
conduct of acoustical research as follows:

Architects are still unable to predict with cer-
tainty the acoustic properties of the halls and
chambers they design. Commenting a few weeks
ago on the failure in this respect of the new
London County Hall, we suggested that bodies
such as the Royal Institute of British Architects
and the National Physical Laboratory might get
together for the devising and conduct of experi-
ments for future guidance. But, so far as we
are aware, no practical steps have been taken in
this country. Meantime similar problems are en-
gaging attention in the United States, where,
indeed, the late Professor Sabine, of Harvard,
had already made valuable progress in explora-
tion of the acoustic properties of architectural
interiors. A scheme is on foot to establish an
American Institute for Acoustie Research. Pro-

.

NovemBer 3, 1922]

fessor CG. A. Ruckmick, of Wellesley College,
Massachusetts, to whom the proposal is due, calls
attention to the progress which has followed com-
bined intensive research in the photographie and
lighting industries, and thinks that the time has
come when equal advantages might be gained for
acoustics. Already there exist more than a dozen
American laboratories where investigations into
different branches of the subject are in progress,
but these could be encouraged and expanded by
cooperation and concerted attacks on special
problems. There is no doubt as to the scope of
the work that might be undertaken. The acoustic
qualities of confined areas, such as halls and
chambers, improvements in telephone and phono-
graph reproducers, sound localization, consonance
and dissonance are the mere headings of sections
covering many subjects of scientific interest and
practical value. We wish well to the American
scheme, and would give a still more hearty wel-
come toa similar British scheme.

THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF ZOOLOGISTS
Tue American Society of Zoologists, in con-
junction with Section F of the American Asso-
ciation and in association with other biological
societies, will hold its twentieth annual meeting
under the auspices of the Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology on Wednesday, Thursday
and Friday, December 27, 28 and 29, 1922.

Zoological papers by persons not members
of the society may be placed on the program
on recommendation of ‘a member of the organ-
ization. All titles should be in the hands of
the secretary by November 22, accompanied by
an abstract of not more than 250 words. Titles
and abstracts for the genetics program should
be sent to Professor L. J. Cole, Madison, Wis-
consin, secretary of the genetics section of the
society.

Abstracts of papers to be presented will be
published for distribution before the meeting
and will appear in The Anatomical Record for
January, 1923. Non-members of the society
who desire copies of the preliminary program
‘and abstracts should notify the secretary imme-
diately.

The biologists’ smoker will be held on
Wednesday evening in the Walker Memorial
Building of the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology. All biologists are invited. The
zoologists’ dinner will occur at the Parker

SCIENCE

507

House on Thursday evening. Professor Kofoid
will give the address. All zoologists are
invited.

The Parker House will be the hotel head-
quarters of the society. Fifty rooms ‘are avail-
able at rates from $2.50 up. Reservations
should be made directly with the hotel man-
agement.

W. C. ALLEE,

Secretar
ZOOLOGY BUILDING, Yy

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Dr. Jacques Lors, member of the Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research, has been
elected an honorary member of the Société
Royale des Sciences Médicale et Naturelles of
Brussels.

Dr. Castmir Funk, associate in biological
chemistry at the College of Physicians and
Surgeons, Columbia University, has been
elected a foreign member of the Halle Academy
of Science in the division of scientific medicine.

Dr. FrepertcK Brnpinc Power, of the U.S.
Bureau of Chemistry, has been awarded the
Flueckinger gold medal by the Society of Swiss
Chemists for “invaluable work on alkaloids
and etheral oil.”

Tue first Warren Triennial Prize of $500
has been awarded for an essay on “The Cireu-
lation in the Mammalian Bone-Marrow,” by
Drs. Cecil K. Drinker, Katherine M. Drinker
and Charles C. Lund, of Boston. A second
prize was awarded to an essay on “The Effect
of Roentgen Rays on the Nuclear Division,”
by Dr. James Mott Mavor, Union College. A
second prize of $250 was awarded this year
because of the difficulty in determining the
relative merits of the first two papers.

Lapy Manson was the recipient on Septem-
ber 26 of the first presentation of the medal
struck in memory of Sir Patrick Manson, from
funds collected by the Manson Memorial Fund.
This medal, which is in bronze, bears on the
obverse a profile of Sir Patrick, and the device
“Tropical Medicine and Hygiene.” It will be
presented triennially to any specially distin-
guished worked in tropical medicine, the re-

508

cipient to be selected by the council of the
Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and
Hygiene.

Kiye Haakon of Norway has bestowed the
Medal of Merit in gold on Dr. Ingeborg Ras-
mussen of Chicago, in recognition of her work
among the Norwegians in this country.

Proressor P. J. van RuigN has been ap-
pointed director of the Astronomical Labora-
tory at Groningen.

Dr. M. Dorset, chief of the Biochemie Divi-
sion, Bureau of Animal Industry, Department
of Agriculture, has been appointed by the
United States government to cooperate in an
unofficial and consultative capacity with the
advisory committee on anthrax set up by the
International Labor Organization.

Ir is announced in Nature that at a meeting
of the Chemical Society on October 5 Professor
J. F. Thorpe had been nominated to fill, until
the next annual meeting, the office of treasurer,
rendered vacant by the resignation of Dr. M. O.
Forster, recently appointed director of the
Indian Institute of Science at Bangalore. Dr.
J. T. Hewitt was nominated to fill the vacancy
in the list of vice-presidents caused by Pro-
fessor Thorpe’s appointment.

Av a meeting of medical women held re-
cently in Toronto preliminary steps were taken
to form a Canadian Medical Women’s Asso-
ciation. Dr. Sproule-Mason was appointed
acting president and Dr. Isabel Ayre, of
Toronto, was appointed acting secretary. Dr.
Jennie ‘Smillie attended the recent Interna-
tional Conference of Medical Women at
Geneva as a delegate from this Canadian asso-
ciation.

Av the Cleveland meeting of the American
Pharmaceutical Association, the following
grants were made from the Research Fund:
To D. I. Macht, of the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, for pharmacological work on benzyl
compounds, $200; to Albert Schneider, Port-
land, Oregon, for chemical and pharmacological
work on chaparro amargosa and on sodium
cinnamate, $200.

Francis Matz, of the National Museum of
Vienna, has been appointed curator of the

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1453

department of entomology at Cornell Univer-
sity.

Dr. Bengamin C. GRUENBERG has resigned
from the United States Public Health Service,
Washington, where he has for the past two
years worked on the government’s program of
sex education in high schools and colleges, to
study the problems of the educational use of
motion pictures with the Urban Institute,
Iryington-on-Hudson, New York.

PROFESSOR WILLIAM TRELEASE, head of the
department of botany of the University of
Tilinois, spent the past summer in a study of
types of American peppers at the botanical
centers of Kew, Brussels, Paris, Geneva, Berlin
and Copenhagen.

Dr. Barton WARREN EVERMANN, director of
ithe California Academy of Sciences and the
Steinhart Aquarium, sailed from San Francisco
on the S. S. Maui, on October 18, to attend the
Pan-Pacifie Commercial Conference held in
Honolulu from October 25 to November 8. Dr.
Evermann was appointed the official delegate to
represent the following institutions: National
Research Council, National Academy of Sci-
ences, California Academy of Sciences, Pacific
Division of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science and the San Francisco
Chamber of Commerce. A paper was pre-
sented by him at the conference entitled “Con-
servation of the marine life of the Pacific.”

Dr. AnD Mrs. ALEXANDER HaAminton RIcE
are planning another expedition to South
America during the coming winter, to continue
their explorations.

ProressoR EMMANUEL Dr MarcrErig, direc-
tor of the Geological Survey of Alsace and
Lorraine, who has just arrived in the United
States, will deliver a lecture on “France’s con-
tribution to geology and geography in the last
hundred years,’ before the Section of Geology
and Mineralogy of the New York Academy of
Sciences on the evening of November 6, at the
American Museum of Natural History. At the
last meeting of the section on October 2, Pro-
fessor E. W. Berry, of the Johns Hopkins
University, lectured on “The geological history
of South America.”

Dr. Avcustus Trowsringr, of Princeton

NovemBerr 3, 1922]

University, on October 26 lectured before the
Franklin Institute on “Highspeed photography
of vibrations.”

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation states that the faculty of medicine of
the City of Mexico recently organized a
ceremony in honor of Laveran, the French
army surgeon who discovered the malaria para-
site. Representatives of various scientific socie-
ties, the directors of the faculties and the dean
of the university took part in the tribute.
Layeran died in May.

THE library committee of the New York
Academy of Medicine will be glad to receive
memorabilia, such as letters, manuscripts, pho-
tographs, engravings or ‘pictures of any kind
relating to the life or work of Louis Pasteur.
These will be used for the academy Pasteur
celebration from December 27 to January 10.
All communications should be addressed to Mr.
J. S. Browne, librarian.

Dr. Apert AVERN STURLEY, instructor in
physics at Yale University and formerly pro-
fessor of physies at the University of King’s
College, Windsor, N. S., died in New Haven
on October 22, at the age of thirty-five years.

ContonrL E. H. Grove-Hius, F. R. §&.,
treasurer ‘and ex-president of the Royal Astro-
nomical Society, died on October 2.

Tue death is announced of Dr. Tourneux,
professor of histology at ‘the University of
Toulouse.

Proressor H. Barrerman, formerly pro-
fessor of astronomy at Konigsberg University
and director of the University Observatory, has
died at the age of sixty-two years.

We learn from Nature that in the will of
Prinee Albert of Monaco, who died on June 26
last, there are several gifts for scientifie pur-
poses. His farm at Sainte Suzanne is left ‘o
the French Academy of Agriculture, and the
wish is expressed that the estate should remain
a place for agricultural experiments, to demon-
strate what science can obtain from sterile
lands. Dr. Jules Richard will receive 600,000
franes to enable him ito complete literary and
scientific works in progress, including the re-

SCIENCE

509

sults of the oceanographic cruises and the
preparation of the Bathymetric Chart of the
Oceans. The pnoceeds of the sale of the yacht
Hirondelle, all books and publications of a
scientific nature, as well as certain personal
effects, will go to the Oceanographic Institutes
at Paris and Monaco, while the Institute of
Human Paleontology in Paris is to receive any
personal effects relating to the work carried on
there. The Paris Academy of Sciences will
receive a million frances, the income of which
is to provide a prize to be awarded every two
years, the nature of the prize to be indicated
by the academy, according to the needs of the
moment; a like sum is bequeathed to the Acad-
emy of Medicine for a similar prize.

Proressor Hrram BinGHAM has presented to
Yale University the anthropological and archeo-
logical collections of the Peruvian Expeditions.
These collections are to be deposited in the
Peabody Museum when the new building is
erected. i

Tue International Congress of Americanists,
which met recently at Rio de Janeiro, decided
to hold the twenty-first session of the congress
in 1924 in Holland. In 1925 tthe meeting will
be held at Gothenburg, and in 1926 in Phila-
delphia.

Av a recent meeting of the International
Commission on Eugenics, held in Bruxelles, and
at which there were present representatives
from France, Belgium, England, Holland, Den-
mark, Norway and the United States, 1t was
voted unanimously to invite the German genet-
icists to send representatives to the commission.

Tue first number has appeared of the Jour-
nal of Biochemistry, published at Tokyo. It
contains contributions written in Enghsh,
French and German. It is published quarterly
under the editorship of Samuro Kakiuchi, pro-
fessor in the Tokyo Imperial University.

‘Ir is reported in the New York Times that
at a conference in St. Paul, Minn., the Twin
City pastors, representing Baptist, Congrega-
tional, Presbyterian and Lutheran churches, on
October 26 voted to issue a call for a state-wide
meeting of protestant ministers next week to
oppose ithe teaching of evolution in the. public

510

schools of Minnesota. Condemning evolution
as “a program of infidelity masquerading under
the name of science,” resolutions were adopted
urging that “Christians throughout the state
appeal to the legislature to eliminate from all
tax supported schools this anti-scientifie and
anti-seriptural theory of the origin of man and
the universe.” The Reverend W. B. Riley, pas-
tor of the First Baptist Church of Minneapolis,
the head of the committee calling the state
gathering, said that it would be urged to start
an injunction suit to prevent public schools,
normal schools and the State University from
receiving funds from ‘Christian taxpayers for
the teaching of evolution. This decision is re-
ported to be the direct result of an address
given on the preceding Sunday in St. Paul by
Wilham Jennings Bryan, in which the adher-
ents of evolution were denounced.

A FEDERAL statute discontinued on December
1, 1921, all serial publications issued by execu-
tive branches of the government, excepting those
especially authorized by law. Accordingly, the
latest issue of the Journal of Agricultural Re-
search was November 26, 1921. This journal
carries reports of original research conducted
by investigators of the Department of Agricul-
ture and cooperating state experiment stations.
During the last congress, an amendment to the
statute was passed providing for the printing
of journals or other serial publications under
certain limitations, among which was included
the approval of the Bureau of the Budget.
Under date of October 19, 1922, General H. M.
Lord, director of the Bureau of the Budget, has
informed the secretary of agriculture that the
use of funds from the appropriation for print-
ing and binding of the Department of Agricul-
ture is approved for the ‘printing of the Jowr-
nal of Agriculiural Research, to be published
weekly in the standard octavo size. Manu-
seripts which are now on ‘hand will accordingly
be forwarded to the Government Printing Office
immediately, and it is believed that the first
issue of the Journal of the forthcoming new
volume will appear on January 6, 1923.

In 1921 Stanford University received a grant
of $20,300 from the Commonwealth Fund for a
study of gifted children, to be conducted by
Professor Lewis M. Terman. During the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

school year of 1921-1922 approximately 1,000
children of the desired degree of superiority
were located and extensive data concerning
them were secured. This grant has now been
supplemented by a second grant of $14,000
from the same source, on the condition that
Stanford University contribute an equal
amount, which it has agreed to do. The second
grant is chiefly for the purpose of securing
medical, anthropological and additional psycho-
logical data, but a part of the sum is being
devoted to a parallel biographical study of the
childhood of men and women of genius. The
total cost of the Stanford investigation will be
in the neighborhood of $50,000.

Mr. Samven G. Lancaster, of Portland,
Oregon, Columbia Highway engineer, has pur-
chased and improved a tract of seventy-three
acres, on the Columbia Highway, about fonty
miles east of Portland, known as Laneaster
Camp. The home economics and service in
camp is in charge of Reed College, the per-
sonnel consisting during the summer months
of Reed students. Ten per cent. of the first
$1,000 earned from dining service goes to the
college for scholarships, with an increase of ten
per cent. for each successive $1,000, up ito the
first $4,000 earned, fifty per cent. of all such
earnings thereafter going ito the scholarship
fund, the remainder to be used in beautifying
the grounds, which are to be kept in perpetuity.
The scheme was put in operation in the spring
of 1922. .

Av the recent meeting of the American
Electrochemical Society, in Montreal, an ad-
visory committee was appointed to consult with
the Bureau of Mines on its electrometallur-
gical research work and to recommend tto the
bureau lines of research and investigation. The
membership of the committee is made up of the
following, who are also members of the Hlectro-
thermie Division of the American Electro-
chemical Society: Robert Turnbull. chairman,
J. A. Seede, Dorsey A. Lyon, F. W. Brooke,
H. L. Crosby, Acheson Smith, Colin G. Fink,
C. A. Schluederberg. The bureau will send
monthly progress reports of its electrometallur-
gical work to the members of this committee.
Among the suggestions for research work which
the committee has already made to Dorsey A.

NovEMBER 3, 1922]

Lyon, chief metallurgist of the Bureau of
Mines, are: specific heats at different tempera-
tures, refractories, expanding of refractories,
and spalling of refractories.

Art the annual meeting of ‘the State Federa-
tion of Pennsylvania Women on October 12,
at which more than 600 women were present,
the following resolution, with possibly fifteen
or twenty dissenting votes, was adopted:

Whereas, It has been conclusively demonstrated
that the health and happiness of hundreds of
thousands of animals, and of many millions of
human beings, have been promoted and their lives
prolonged by the application of knowledge ob-
tained through scientific experiments on animals;
and

Whereas, These researches are conferring a
wonderful boon upon the starving nations by con-
stantly adding greatly to the food supply of the
world; therefore be it

Resolwed, That the State Federation of Penn-
sylvania Women, assembled in annual general con-
vention in the city of Reading, Pennsylvania, on
the twelfth day of October, 1922, hereby put on
record their gratitude to medical science for past
discoveries so profoundly beneficial to human
beings and to animals, and we believe that such
beneficent researches should be continued and en-
couraged.

Tue State Department has issued invitations
to one hundred and fifty countries to take part
in an international congress on dairying to be
held in this country in October, 1923. The
program, in addition to topics of interest to
the industry at large, will include recent ad-
vances in the sciences related to dairying and
particularly the significance of milk and milk
products in nutrition. The chairman of the
program committee is L. A. Rogers, Dairy
Division, United States Department of Agricul-
ture, and the chairmen of the four sub-com-
mittees are: C. H. Hickles, University of Minne-
sota, St. Paul, Minnesota; O. F. Hunziker,
Blue Valley Creamery Company, Chicago,
Illinois; Fred Rasmussen, secretary of agricul-
ture, Harrisburg, Pa.; H. C. Sherman, Colum-
bia University, New York.

Ar the meeting of the League of Nations
committee which was held at Geneva, it was
decided that arrangements should be made to
hold an international congress of the universi-
ties of all countries. The subcommittee

SCIENCE

511

charged with the arrangement of this congress
was instructed to prepare a report on the fol-
lowing topics: The exchange of professors and
of students; the equivalent values of univer-
sity courses and degrees; thé institution of
international scholarships, of international
vacation courses, and of a central office for
information on university matters.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Foster Haun, the chemical laboratory of the
University of Buffalo, designed especially to
meet the needs of the electro-chemical, hydro-
eleatric, dye and steel industries on the Niagara
frontier, was dedicated on October 27 in con-
nection with the installation of Dr. Samuel P.
Capen, of Washington, as chancellor of the
university. Dr. Edgar F. Smith, president of
the American Chemical Society, and Dr. Edwin
E. Slosson, of Science Service, were speakers
at the ceremony. The laboratory, erected at a
cost of a million dollars, is the gift of O. E.
Foster, of Buffalo.

Dr. Jonn Srewart, dean of the faculty of
medicine of Dalhousie University, Halifax, laid
the cornerstone of the new medical science
building for Dalhousie University on Septem-
ber 29.

Ar the meeting of the Yale Corporation held
on October 14, Professor Richard Swann Lull
was appointed director of the Peabody Museum
of Natural History for a term of five years.
Professor William Ebenezer Ford was elected
curator of mineralogy in the museum, to suc-
ceed Professor Edward Salisbury Dana, whe
retires from the curatorship after a service of
nearly fifty years. The corporation passed a
vote in appreciation of Professor Dana’s
services.

Dr. G. R. Lyman, plant pathologist in
charge of the Plant Disease Survey of the
U. S. Department of Agriculture, has been ap-
pointed dean of the College of Agriculture of
West Virginia University, where he will have
supervision of the three divisions of agricul-
tural work of that institution, which include
the resident instruction in the College of Agri-
culture, the work of the Agricultural Experi-
ment Station, and of the Extension Service.

512

Dr. Lyman will enter upon his new duties on
January 1.

Proressor Leroy Parron, formerly of
Muskingum College, Ohio, has been appointed
associate geologist of the Bureau of Economic
Geology in the University of Texas. Dr. BE. H.
Sellards, who has been with this bureau several
years, thas been promoted to be chief geologist,
Professor T. L. Bailey, from the University of
California, has accepted the position of as-
sistant geologist, vacated by Professor W. S.
Adkins a year ago, and Miss Dorothy Shoaf,
from the University of Chicago, has been ap-
pointed curator of the collections.

Dr. J. L. SHELLsHEAR, of Sydney, Australia,
has been appointed to the chair of anatomy in
the new College of Medicine of Hongkong Uni-
versity.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
NOTE ON THE DISSOCIATION OF CARBON
IN THE INTENSIVE ARC

Some two years ago while experimenting
with the extremely powerful ares used in the
Sperry search lights we noted the singular
color and peculiar spectrum in the “negative
tongue” which appears at currents of 100 am-
peres and upwards. It develops rather sud-
denly as a core of the negative flame, suggest-
ing the inner cone of a blast lamp save in
color, which is pale purplish.

The spectroscope disclosed a small number
of clearly marked lines superimposed on
fainter hazy and complex bands, due to the
surrounding are flame. [Examining the tongue
spectrum of the lines from time to time, we
found substantially the same spectrum from
various makes of unmineralized carbons, for-
eign and domestic. Finally, using a five inch
achromatic condenser to throw the image of
the tongue on a ground glass we examined it in
detail with a direct vision spectroscope
equipped with a scale, comparison prism and
holder for spectrum tubes.

We thus found as characteristic of the
tongue spectrum, some fifteen well defined lines.
Of these, seven were good coincidences with
the most conspicuous of the well known helium
lines, and two others with Ha and H£.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

The He lines were wl: 7066, 6678, 5876,
5048, 5016, 4922, 4388.

Five of these lines belong to the single line,
so-called Parhelium series, being the brightest
lines of the principal and second subordinate
series, and the three of the first subordinate
series. :

Of the doublet system the chief lines of the
sharp and diffuse series respectively appear,
not very brilliantly, while we have not yet
detected any of the enhanced series. All indi-
cations point to the dissociation of a certain
proportion of carbon nuclei with the conse-
quent appearance of He due to the immense
concentration of energy in this 150 ampere
are. The H lines may be due to water-vapor
absorbed by the soft carbon core, or perhaps
to further dissociation. We are now setting
up a concave grating spectrograph for the
closer examination of the tongue spectrum
under much higher dispersion, and hence with
a less obtrusive background. We hope that the
evidentiy very high ionization power here
manifested may lead us to interesting develop-
ments with still other elements.

Our thanks are due to the courtesy of Mr.
Sperry in extending the great facilities of his
laboratory.

Lovis Brtu
P. R. Bassett

THE DETERMINATION OF FAT IN CREAM:
To THE Epiror or Science: The authors
(EK. G. Mahin and R. H. Carr) of a paper on
“Hrrors in the Determination of Fat in
Cream,” read at the Birmingham meeting of the
American Chemical Society, have experienced
considerable surprise at the tone of a letter by
H. W. Gregory, appearing in the issue of
Science for September 15, 1922, in which he
discusses our work upon this subject. Profes-
sor Gregory has based his criticisms upon a
mere advance abstract, containing no details
of experiment or reasoning, and without ade-
quate knowledge of the real points at issue.
In the original paper by Mahin and Carr
(not yet published) we have simply called at-
tention to a hitherto unsuspected error in the
almost universally used “glymol’’ method for
making fat readings in the Babeock tests on

NovEMBER 38, 1922]

cream, and we have stated very plainly that
there is little or no error if the glymol is added
slowly, with the tip of the pipette resting
against the neck of the bottle near the butter
fat layer but (and this is the important point)
that by the manner in which the glymol is like-
ly to be added by the average dairy helper
there is nearly always an error in the direction
of low readings.

That this conclusion was entirely justified
will, we believe, be apparent when we state that
the results quoted in the original paper were
obtained in Professor Gregory’s own labora-
tory, both of the authors watching the tests as
they were made in a purely routine manner, by
the regular tester and upon creams as they
were received in the laboratory. We made no
suggestions to the tester, merely asking per-
mission to take readings before and after each
addition of glymol. Our observations were
confirmed by the tester at the time they were
made.

That this is not to be taken as a criticism of
the work of the tester, or as a charge of care-
lessness or wilful negligence, or of lax admini-
stration of any laws bearing upon the subject,
should be evident when we state that it was
only after a considerable amount of subsequent
experimentation that we stumbled upon the ex-
planation of the error, which is to be found in
the fact that the tester usually follows the very
natural method of placing the tip of the pipette
just inside the top of the bottle neck, then al-
lowing the oil to flow at the full delivery speed
of the pipette into the bottle. This cause of
error was discovered in March, 1922, and it
seems obvious that Professor Gregory’s in-
spectors could not have found and checked the
incorrect method for 1,800 or more testers dur-
ing the past year, when neither they nor we
nor (so far as is known) any one else knew
that the method was incorrect.

We regret very much that our statement re-
garding the importance of the error in Indiana
was interpreted as a charge that Indiana
creameries “are beating our producers out of
$20,000 worth of cream per year.” The case
of ten Indiana creameries was cited merely be-
cause we happened to have approximate figures
on production for 1917 and no charge of this

SCIENCE

513

kind was made or even remotely intended.
However, because of possible similar misin-
terpretation by others, we shall gladly delete
this paragraph from the paper, as it adds noth-
ing to the scientific value of the latter.

One further misquotation should be noted.
In the discussion of the use of various non-
miscible oils for this purpose we mentioned
the trial of several of these, citing the work
of Eckles on fat-saturated amyl alcohol. Of
all of the liquids tried, we found that amyl
alcohol so prepared was the only one that did
not cause a change in readings and we so stated
but, far from recommending the use of this
liquid, we stated various objections to it and
finally concluded that the use of all such fluids
should be abandoned. Professor Gregory has
cited an experiment in which amyl alcohol
lowered the fat reading after standing ten
minutes but in this experiment, according to
his own oral statement, he omitted the very
important detail of first saturating the alcohol
with butter fat. The conclusion seems fairly
obvious. The advance abstract of our paper
did not mention this point. but, as already

noted, an abstract can not go into experimental

details.

We understand that quite lately the labora-
tory in which our observations were made has
begun the use of a much lighter hydrocarbon
oil than the one formerly used. We do not
know whether this has diminished the error but
we think it quite likely. If so, we have here
another variable, in ithe variation in specific
gravity and viscosity of the oils in general use
for the purpose, where limits are not speci-
fied for these properties.

In conclusion, we do not believe that this,
or any other scientific question, can be settled
by denials or display of feeling, but that the
laboratory is the only place where a decision
can be reached and we offer, as the simple
solution of the matter, that each one who is
interested shall try the two methods of adding
glymol, making observations for himself. We
have no doubt that evidence will be found both
for and against our conclusions because the
essential defect of the glymol method les in tis
variable possibility of error. But if our state-
ments are “incorrect truths,” polemics will not

514

be required to prove them so. Laboratory ex-
periments are far more reliable.

EK. G. Maury,
R. H. Carr

PURDUE UNIVERSITY

NOTE ON A DAYLIGHT METEORITE

THINKING that it might be of interest to
readers of these columns, the writer calls atten-
tion to the following phenomenon observed by
him while traveling by canoe on Lake Kipawa,
Quebec, on August 31 last.

The day was particularly bright and cloud-
less, with a southerly wind blowing at about
eight miles an hour. The time of the observa-
tion was 9:50 a. m., and the course of the canoe
was almost directly south. The meteorite was
suddenly seen to shoot across the course of the
canoe from east to west, about 50° above the
horizon, and, as far as could be judged, be-
tween 200 and 300 feet above the surface of the
lake. Its passage lasted approximately three
seconds from the time that it was first noted
a little to the left of the bow of the canoe.
The general impression received was that of a
briliant Roman candle shooting across the sky,
of a vivid copper-green color. The size of the
incandescent head of the body appeared to be
a trifle larger than a golf ball with a bright
incandescent streamer of nearly three feet in
length behind it and of a like color. In the
wake of the body trailed a curling wreath of
white vapor of considerable length which be-
came quickly dissipated.

The passage of the meteorite was accom-
panied by no detectable noise whatever, so that
the other occupant of the canoe, whose gaze
was directed elsewhere at the time, failed to
see the occurrence. The body suddenly vanish-
ed about a hundred yards to ithe west about the
original altitude, leaving a small cloud of white
vapor behind that dissolved rapidly away. AI-
though watch was kept on the surface of the
lake beyond, no trace of a body falling into
the water was noted. It is possible that either
it was completely combusted at that moment,
or it passed out of sight rapidly along its
westerly course.

Norman Mach. Harris

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH OF CANADA,

Orrawa, ONTARIO

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

HOWARD ON CHEMICAL SPELLING
O Leland tell me, tell me true,
The explanation’s up to you,
Why did you break the portals down
And jump into the Chemist’s town?
But wait a minute: Now I see,
To solve the riddle’s up to me;
You still are in your own domain
Where you without a rival reign,
For as the fact appears to me
You’re trying to catch that spelling bee.

H. W. WILEY

QUOTATIONS
“BAYER 205”

A curious illustration of the German desire,
not unnatural in itself, to regain the tropical
colonies lost by the folly of the rulers of the
German Empire, is afforded by a discussion
which took place at a meeting of the German
Association of Tropical Medicine at Hamburg.
We have not seen a full report of the meeting,
but the Times correspondent in Hamburg re-
ports that one of the speakers said that “Bayer
205 is the key to tropical Africa, and conse-
quently the key to all the colonies. The Ger-
man government must, therefore, be required to
safeguard this discovery for Germany. Its
value is such that any privilege of a share in
it granted to other nations must be made con-
ditional upon the restoration to Germany of
her colonial empire.” Some account of the
drug manufactured by the Bayerische Farb-
werke and provisionally named “205” was
given in our issue of May 20 (p. 807), when we
quoted Dr. H. H. Dale’s opinion that it was a
remarkable curative agent in trypanosome in-
fections. A general account of the probable
chemical relationship of “205” is given by Dr.
King in the sixth Annual Report of the Society
of Chemical Industry (1921).

In 1904 Ehrlich and Shiga discovered the
trypanocidal action of trypan red, a compound
formed by combining one molecule of tetra-
zotized benzidine-mono-sulfonic acid with two
molecules of sodium naphthylamine disul-
fonate. In 1906 Mesnil and Nicolle investi-
gated a series of dyes containing amino-naph-

1 Ann. Instit. Pasteur, 417 and 518 xx, 1906.

NovEMBER 3, 1922]

thalene-sulfonic acid and found that the most
active trypanocidal agent was a dye prepared
by the Bayer firm. Little notice was taken of
this work, and the discovery of salvarsan
diverted attention from the trypanocidal dyes
to the organic arsenic compounds. The Bayer
firm, however, continued to investigate the
trypanocidal dyes and discovered that com-
pounds of this type which were not dyes might
still be active trypanocidal agents. They took
out a large number of patents, and the type of
compound to which the firm has paid special
attention is represented by the following

formula:
op eo] ,-co-f eo], 3g
S0_H son
80,8 Bors 5 3

A number of substances of this type have
been found to be very active trypanocides, and
probably Bayer 205 is a derivative of this type.
Bayer 205 is a white powder, freely soluble in
water, forming a colorless solution, which can
be sterilized. Animal experiments? have shown
that it is an extraordinarily powerful trypano-
cidal agent, and that a single dose of it will
produce immunity to trypanosomes for several
weeks or even months. Mayer and Zeiss, for
instance, found it cured infection with five
different kinds of trypanosomes, that the ratio
between the minimal lethal and minimal cura-
tive doses was as high as 167 to 1, and that a
single dose of 3 mg. rendered a mouse immune
to trypanosomes for three months. Recur-
rences were found to be extremely rare when
infected mice were given a single curative dose
of the drug.

The various workers have reported curative
effects on trypanosomal infections in mice, rats,
guinea-pigs, rabbits, dogs and horses. In Eng-
land Wenyon® found that the drug was an ex-
traordinarily effective trypanocidal agent. A

2Haendel and Joetten, Bull. Instit. Pasteur,
131, 19, 1921; Mayer and Zeiss, ibid., 133, 19,
1921; Walther and Pfeiler, tbid., 380, 19, 1921;
Miessner and Berge, ibid., 380, 19, 1921; Mayer,
ibid., 248, 20, 1922; Schuckmann, ibid., 247, 20,
1922.

3 Wenyon, British Medical Journal, 1921, ii,
746.

SCIENCE

015

brilliant suecess has been reported in a case of
sleeping sickness.t> The case was of a year’s
standing, and had been treated unsuccessfully
with arsenic, antimony and emetine. Four
doses of “205,” making a total of 3.5 grams,
were given. A few hours after the first dose
the fever disappeared, and a complete cure ap-
pears to have been produced, for four months
later there were no signs of recurrence of the
disease.

The drug therefore appears to be a trypano-
cidal remedy of ‘the first importance, and the
fact that a single dose confers prolonged immu-
nity to trypanosomes suggests that it will be of
the greatest value as a prophylactic. A com-
mission of German doctors is now in Rhodesia
testing the drug, and our knowledge as to its
action in man will soon be much more exten-
sive. The discovery of “205” promises to mark
a great advance in tropical medicine, but it is a
remarkable fact that England should be de-
pendent on Germany for this advance in trop-
ical medicine, for at present Germany has not a
single colony, while England has the largest
tropical empire in the world. It is not a posi-
tion of which we have any reason to be proud,
but its cause is simple. Germany appreciates
the value of pharmacological research and we
do not.—Lhe British Medical Journal.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in the Verte-
brates. G. H. Parker. Philadelphia and
London, J. B. Lippincott Co., 1922, 192
pages, $2.50.

This little volume includes chapters on the
Nature of Sense Organs, Anatomy of the Olfac-
tory Organ, Physiology of Olfaction, Vomero-
nasal Organ or Organ of Jacobson, The Com-
mon Chemical Sense, Anatomy of the Gusta-
tory Organ, Physiology of Gustation, and
Interrelation of the Chemical Senses. In view
of the author’s long sustained interest in prob-
lems of integration of structure and function

and his numerous successful experimental

4Muhlens and Menk, Muench. med. Woch.,
1488, 46, 1921.

5 Yorke, Ann. Trop. Med. and Paras., 479, 15,
1921.

516

attacks upon problems of this sort in the field
of sense physiology, it is needless to say that
his survey of the chemical senses is accurate,
authoritative and judicious. So bref a sum-
mary naturally can make no claim to complete-
ness, but it is a well balanced selection of
topies of significance to students of physiology,
psychology and allied sciences.

The more theoretical discussions, especially
those centering about the genetic relationships
of the receptors, naturally enter debatable ter-
ritory. In summarizing his well-known ob-
servations on the organization of sponges,
which “possess muscles but are devoid of ner-
yous tissue,” Dr. Parker reiterates (p. 21) his
belief that in phylogeny differentiated muscles
probably preceded nervous tissue. “So far as
ean be judged these [nervous] elements orig-
inated in connection with the previously dif-
ferentiated muscle and as a special means of
exciting it to contraction.” This conclusion
seems both unphysiological and unsupported
by the facts.

That muscle should be differentiated in ad-
vance of the receptive apparatus through which
it is activated seems a priori as improbable as
that receptors should be developed in advance
of the appropriate effectors. And Parker’s
own experiments strongly suggest that the so-
called muscles of sponges are really excito-
motor organs with lowered excitation threshold
and that the excitation mechanism is elaborated
within them parallel with the contractile
mechanism rather than apart and subsequently.
Ordinary protoplasm is, of course, both excita-
ble and contractile, and in some unicellar
forms (e. g., Diplodinium, Euplotes, Parame-
cium and others recently described at the Uni-
versity of California) there are excito-motor
masses of protoplasm in which these two func-
tions are both highly developed and in various
stages of separation physiologically and struc-
turally. In sponges, as in other lowly multi-
cellular forms, the excitation factor can not be
regarded as lagging behind the contractile
factor in the differentiation of the process and
apparatus of reaction, even though the tissue
involved may look more like muscle than like
nerve.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

In the concluding discussion (chapter 8) all
receptors are arranged in three groups: (1)
mechanicoreceptors (organs of touch, hearing,
equilibration, and probably organs of muscle,
tendon and joint sensitivity, lateral line organs
of fishes and some others); (2) radioreceptors
(organs of vision and temperature); (3)
chemoreceptors (organs of smell, taste, general
chemical sensitivity, and probably some others).
This classification is natural and so far as it
goes very satisfactory. But when the author
adds (p. 180), “To ascertain into which of
these three groups a receptor falls it is neces-
sary to know how it is stimulated after which
its classification is simple and immediate,” one
begins to question how far the simplicity and
immediacy of the procedure really takes us.

Rays of the solar spectrum with wave length
of say .0008 mm. falling upon the retina and
upon the skin produce very different excita-
tions. Both organs are by definition radio-
receptors, but just “how it is stimulated” we
do not know in either case, nor do we know
how it comes about that, if sensation follows
the excitation, it is of red in one case and
warmth in the other.

Similarly, it has been shown by Parker that
ethyl alcohol is an excitant of the organ of
smell, the organ of taste and general mucous
surfaces and by Carlson of the mucous lining
of ‘the stomach also. The threshold is different
in each of these cases, the typical-reactions are
very characteristic in each case, and the sensa-
tions (if any) are likewise distinct. Now the
fact that these four organs are all chemo-
receptors, while important, is less significant
biologically than any one of the other three
criteria mentioned. In fact, the classification
of receptors in terms of the effective stimulus
has a very limited range of usefulness and the
ultimate goal of our endeavors should be to add
to the simple determination of the adequate
stimulus of a sense organ the physiologically
far more significant knowledge of the real na-
ture of the excitation (that is, of the immediate
protoplasmic response to the stimulus) and
also a codified statement of the typical or
physiologically “normal” more remote effects
(reaction, sensation). We are at present very

NovEMBER 3, 1922]

far from the attainment of this ideal, for, as
Parker says (p. 180), “The real difficulty lies
in the fact that the numerous receptors that we
“now recognize have undergone varying degrees
of differentiation and hence their mutual affini-
ties are extremely diverse.”

On the morphological side the difficulties are
even greater, and the various attempts which
have been made to determine which of the vari-
ous anatomical patterns of end-organs are more
primitive seem rather futile. Protoplasm in
general seems to be sensitive to all of the three
kinds of stimuli of Parker’s classification and
morphologically homologous organs seem capa-
ble of transgressing our artificial ‘biological
laws and “uniformities” in fashion most dis-
quieting to the systematist. This is illustrated
by Whitman’s description (since confirmed by
Hachloy) of the cutaneous sensille of leeches,
which are tactile in function on the body but
in the head become gradually metamorphosed
into visual organs, and also by the way in
which both olfactory and gustatory organs may
serve on occasion as either interoceptors or

exteroceptors, with characteristically different —

central connections and reaction types in the
two cases.

No better summary of this phase of the
matter can be given than the concluding sen-
tences of Parker’s book: “It is because of the
repeated differentiations that characterize the
evolution not only of the chemoreceptors but
of the other groups of like organs that a classi-
fication of them or even a simple enumeration
proves to be so unsatisfactory. For they are
not unitary elements that can be counted like
the fingers on the hand nor are they sufficiently
co-ordinated to make classifications easy and
natural. They are like the whole organism
itself in that they exhibit that kind of diversity
that characterizes evolutionary flux.”

C. Jupson Herrick

SPECIAL ARTICLES
PERIGENESIS
I am presenting here a short preliminary ac-
count of the results of a study of the division
figures in Tradescantia virginica L.
With the methods used, the structure of the

SCIENCE

517

chromosome is that of an achromatic cylinder
of jelly-like consistency as described by
Vejdovsky (1912) in which the chromatin,
however, is imbedded in the form of chromo-
meres rather than a spiral. These bodies are
so distinct that in any one optical plane, they
can be counted.

They are made up of flocculated chromatin
particles which associate together in rather
dense masses which are arranged inside of the
periphery of the linin cylinder in such a man-
ner that there results a central core of achro-
matic substance.

The relationships of the chromomeres one to
the other seem to be somewhat variable
although the chromosome often shows a quad-
ripartite cross-section as figured by Merriman
(1904), Bonnevie (1908), and by Nawaschin
(1910).

The effect of fixing, imbedding, and staining
this structure gives appearances which have
doubtless led to the interpretation that it is
longitudinally split.

The arrangement of the chromatin particles

‘within the achromatie eylinder may be traced

back, in the vegetative stages especially, to the
earliest prophases and I do not find anywhere,
either in the vegetative or reduction divisions,
any further evidence of a longitudinal split so
that for the reductions, I agree with Meves and
others that there is no side by side pairing of
the chromosomes in these stages.

I find as did Suessenguth (1921), in spite of
the recent evidence in favor of a parallel con-
jugation, that the continuous prophase spireme
is constricted into the chromosomes in end to
end relationships.

Muller (1921), in diseussing the work of
Troland (1917) says, “If he is right, each dif-
ferent portion of the gene structure must—
like a erystal—attract to itself from the proto-
plasm, materials of a similar kind thus mould-
ing next to the original gene another structure
of similar parts, identically arranged, which
then become bound together to form another
gene, a replica of the first.”

From the’ phenomena in all metaphase fig-
ures, inasmuch as I find the separation is not by
longitudinal division, I would limit the above
quoted process to the stages beginning with

518

the close of the telophase and closing with the
first tendency towards the formation of the

spireme or, in other words, to the so-called’

resting condition.

E. Haeckel described such a process of
growth as the perigenesis of the plastidules
though perigenesis as described by Haeckel is
not referred to by Muller.

The sporophyte cell, from the end of the
telophase to the beginning of the next pro-
phase, would therefore become, normally, a
tetraploid unit with the chromatic contents
merely in need of distribution in the case of
the vegetative division or, in the case of the
reduction division, of random segregation.
Actual return to the gametophytic condition is
not accomplished till the second division since
dyads are separated on the first or so-calied
heterotypic spindle.

It is assumed that the genes after the genesis
of itheir like, reassemble in such a fashion that
they form a continuous prophase spireme
thread. It is during this reassembling of the
genes, this reorganization of the nucleus, that
the phenomena of crossing over may occur as
well as perhaps some mutations not due ito
such factors as non-disjunction, re-duplication,
deficiency, etc.

My material was examined in the living con-
dition, by special staining methods of the
living cells in sugar suspensions, by intra-
vitam staining, and, as a check, by the standard
fixing, hardening, and imbedding methods.

Detailed descriptions, drawings, and photo-
graphs will be published in the near future.

Haroup C. Sanps

CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

(Continued)
DIVISION OF RUBBER CHEMISTRY
C. W. Bedford, chairman
Arnold H. Smith, secretary
Committee reports:
Executive: C. W. Brprorp, chairman.
Accelerator: J. B. TUTTLE, chairman.
Physical testing: C. O. NortH, chairman.
Discusion of ‘‘Methods of Research Testing’’
by committee.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

Analytical Standardization: S.

chairman.

COLLIER,

American conclusions regarding crude rubber:
(By title): O. pr Vrizs.

Chemical reactions of sulfur terpenes with
rubber. I: JOHN B. TUTTLE.

Studies in vulcanization: mechanism of the ac-
celeration of vulcanization of zinc ethyl xantho-
genate: H. A. WINKELMANN and Haroup GRAY.
The gaseous, liquid and solid decomposition
products of zine ethyl xanthogenate are shown to
have no accelerating value. The activity of zine
ethyl xanthogenate as an accelerator is due to the
unchanged molecule.

Liffect of certain tread pigments on tempera-
ture developed in pneumatic tires: D. F. CRAVER.
The paper is a short description of tread com-
pounds used, stress-strain curves of same, the-
oretical conductivity as calculated by Williams
formula, and the actual heating up of tire built
with such treads when run on the road, tempera-
tures being taken by means of thermo couple
inserted by ‘the awl which was devised by the
research department of the New Jersey Zine
Company.

Disubstituted guanidines: WINFIELD Scort.
Disubsubstituted guanidines function as accelera-
tors as amines and belong to the class of hydro-
sulfide accelerators only. Diphenylguanidine reacts
with hydrogen sulfide and carbon bisulfide to form
a trithiocarbonate, with aniline and carbon bisul-
fide to form a dithiocarbamate and with carbo-
diphenylimide to form tetraphenylbiguanide. The
effect of small amounts of zine oxide and zine
carbonate on the tensile strength of rubber cured
with disubstituted guanidines is quite marked.
The relative curing powers of di-p-tolylguanidine,
di-o-tolylguanidine and diphenylguanidine are in
the order named, the first being the most efficient.
It requires 25 per cent. more diphenylguanidine
than di-o-tolylguanidine to produce the same ac-
celeration.

Studies in
W. W. Voert.

Thermal changes during vulcanization: Ira
WaLtiaMs and D. J. Braver. The measnrement
of the temperature developed in the center of a
cylinder of rubber sulfur mixture which is im-
mersed in a constant temperature bath shows that
heat is liberated during the first stages of the
reaction. An absorption of heat is indicated
during the later stages. The extent of these
thermal changes has been estimated when stocks
of different sulfur and accelerator content were

hysteresis of rubber compounds:

NovEMBER 3, 1922]

eured at different temperatures. The relationship
between the temperature developed and the per
cent. combined sulfur is given.

Zinc oxide in a new. physical condition—its

effect upon rubber compounds: FRANK G. BREYER.-

Reactions of accelerators during vulcanization.
V. Dithiocarbamates and thiuram disulfides:
G. W. Beprorp and Haroitp Gray. The metallic
dithiocarbamates are true accelerators of vulcan-
ization. Metallic oxides are necessary to prevent
the decomposition of the metallic salts by hydro-
gen sulfide or to reform them after decomposition.
Hydrogen sulfide changes thiuram disulfides to
dithiocarbamates and decomposes the metallic
salts. Ammonia increases the curing power of
both thiurams and zine dithiocarbamates. These
views are supported by chemical data obtained in
the laboratory in the absence of rubber.

A method for the measurement of resistance to
tear in vulcanized rubber: ERLE C. ZIMMERMAN.
A method is presented for measuring the re-
sistance to tear of vuleanized rubber in terms of
work. In this test a sheet of rubber 0.1 inch
thick is supported between hooks on the ordinary
tensile testing machine, and an autographie chart
is taken as the rubber is torn. Resistance to tear
is expressed as inch-pounds per square inch of
rubber torn, in the formula,

Fe
WE I

Lt
in which ‘‘K’’ is a constant, ‘‘A’’ is the work
area on chart, ‘‘L’’ is the distance torn, ‘‘t’’ is
the thickness, ‘‘e’’ and ‘‘F’’ are the elongation
and force in equilibrium at the end of the test.
Some data are given of resistance to tear in zine
oxide and pure gum stocks.

The results of variation in the sulfur and hexa-
methylenetetramine content on some of the prop-
erties of compounded rubber: H. A. DEpEw. A
non-blooming compound must not contain more
than 1 per cent. of free sulfur calculated on the

rubber. Using hexamethylenetetramine as an ac-
celerator, the tensile strength, elongation and
maximal area under the stress-strain curve

increase with a decrease in the amount of sulfur
used, and to a lesser extent are increased by
using a large amount of accelerator. The shape
of the stress-strain curve is not affected by the
sulfur and accelerator content. The vuleaniza-
tion coefficient at the optimum cure depends on
the sulfur content.

An abrasion machine by which comparative
wear tests can be made-on laboratory test pieces

SCIENCE

‘dients in hard rubber: W. E. Guancy.

519

or on sections cut from tire treads: H. A. DEPEW.
A simple abrasion machine is described, on which
laboratory test pieces or sections cut from tire
treads can be tested for comparative resistance
to the abrading or rasping influence of surfaces
of known composition. The test pieces fastened
at one end, only, are held against a common,
uniformly moving, abrading surface with a def-
inite uniform pressure. The effect of pressure
upon the test piece and the effects of speed and
composition of the abrading surface are dis-
cussed. A comparison of this method of testing
with the loose abrasive method is given. Com-
parisons by service tests (tires and heels) are
also made.

The influence of certain compounding ingre-
Several
articles have been published showing the action of
compounding ingredients in soft rubber goods.
Very little has been published thus far with re-
gard to the principles of hard rubber compound-
ing. Graphs are shown which indicate the mass
action effect of sulfur, the curing properties of
lime and magnesia and the loading qualities of
M. R., tire reelaim and resin in hard rubber mix-
tures.

A convenient nomograph for rubber chemists:
W. R. Hickuer and W. E. Guancy. Rubber
chemists have frequently use for tables which
will be available for converting the cure of a
rubber stock from a known temperature and time
to a different temperature with corresponding
time.. A formula has been worked out from ex-
perimental values and a nomograph constructed
whereby it is possible to quickly find the desired
cure.

Rubber softeners: P. M. AuurMan and C. O.
Nortu. The action of rubber softeners on rubber
itself has received very scant attention from
rubber chemists. The writers in an effort to find
out this action heated vulcanized rubber in each
of a large number of softeners until total disinte-
gration ensued. The comparative rate of dis-
integration was also observed by means of a test
in which the swelling of the rubber in the soft-
enérs was measured. This method was checked
roughly. Sulfur, accelerators and both together
were added successively to the softeners to find
out their effect on the action, with the results
that in each case there was an increase in the
rate of solvation. The state of cure was also
found to have'an effect on the results, as the
rate of solvation was found: to be inversely pro-
portional to the cure. Mixtures of softeners were
found to have, in many cases, the average proper-

520

ties of their components. From these and com-
pounding results, the writers are of the opinion
that a definite relation can be worked out between
solvating action and the effects of softeners on
the stress-strain curve.

The measurement of temperature in rubber
articles by means of thermocouples: ELuwoop B.
Spear and J. F. Purpy. Measurements of the
temperature in rubber articles by thermocouples
are all too low where the depth of insertion is
not great, 1-3 inches, and where there is at the
same time a temperature differential along the
buried portion of the thermocouple wires. The
correction to be applied depends upon the depth
of insertion, the size of the wires constituting the
thermocouple, and the temperature differential.

A new method is given for measuring the tem+~*

perature in pneumatic and solid tires. Correction
curves are given for use where ordinary thermo-
couples have been employed.

The limitations of the obscuring power test for
compounding materials: ELLwoop B. Sprar and
H. A. Enpres. Experimental evidence is pre-
sented in this article that the obscuring power
test for compounding materials is unreliable and
often misleading in the region where the diameter
of the particles is in the neighborhood of one
fourth the wave length of light, viz., O.1 mu.

The crystallization of sulfur in rubber and the
phenomenon of ‘‘blooming.’’? I: Herperr A.
Enpres. A solution of sulfur in rubber exhibits
the same phenomena of diffusion, crystallization
and super-saturation as are shown by solutions of
sulfur in other solvents. When rubber saturated
with sulfur at calendering or vulcanizing tem-
peratures is cooled, the solubility is exceeded and
the excess sulfur separates as super-cooled
globules, dendrites or stable rhombic crystals, de-
pending upon the rate of cooling. Sulfur bloom
is always composed of rhombje sulfur; the stable
It may be caused by
crystallization at the surface of the rubber, either
directly from solution or by transformation from
super-cooled globules or dendrites.

The microscopic examination of rubber com-
pounds containing antimony pigments: A. -F.
HarpMAN. To secure a section of a rubber com-
pound sufficiently thin for microscopic examina-
tion, some method of hardening must be employed
previous to sectioning. Sulfur monochloride has
been successfully used for this purpose, but the
reagent attacks and destroys the identity of the
A bath of
may be used to produce the required rigidity
without materially

form at room temperature.

sulfides of antimony. molten sulfur

altering the appearance of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1453

the antimony pigments. Photomicrographs illus-
trating the new method are shown.

The resilient energy and abrasion resistance of
vulcanized rubber: H. W. Greer. A study has
-been made of the effects of several compounding
pigments upon the abrasion resistance of vul-
canized rubber. It was found that gas black
gives the greatest resistance to abrasion, followed
by light magnesium carbonate, china clay, zine
oxide, colloidal barium sulfate and lithopone, in
the order named. There is found to be a rela-
tionship, but not a direct proportionality, between
tensile strength and abrasion resistance for
rubber compounded with reinforcing pigments.
Resilient energy gives an approximate index of
abrasion resistance with gas black, magnesium
carbonate, china clay and zine oxide, but it is not
a measure of abrasion resistance with colloidal
barium sulfate or lithopone. The data appear to
show that hardness (or rigidity) is also a factor
in resistance to abrasive wear. The product of
resilient energy and hardness is suggested as an
index of toughness. Some principles are sug-
gested which may be of value in compounding
rubber to obtain high resistance to abrasion,
including the use of high-grade accelerated mix-
ings and combinations of reinforcing pigments
in such proportions by volume as to give proper
rigidity combined with high resilient energy.
Combinations of gas black and magnesium car-
bonate in suitable proportions are found to give
high resistance to abrasion, high resilient energy
and considerable hardness and rigidity.

Persistence of calender grain after vulcaniza-
tion. (Lantern): W. B. WieGanp and H. A.
BRAENDLE. ;

A study of the relation of the structure of
mercaptobenzothiazole and its derivatives to their
value as accelerators of vulcanization. (Lantern) :
L. B. Sesrent and C. E. Boorp. The preparation
of mereaptobenzothiazole derivatives by the
methods reported in a previous paper has been
extended to include several new mercaptothiazoles
not previously described. Other compounds hav-
ing a similar structure have been prepared and
their curing power compared with that of mer-
eaptobenzothiazole. In this way the particular
grouping responsible for the activity of mercapto-
benzothiazole as an accelerator has been identi-
fied. The effect of substitutents in the benzene
nucleus of mercaptobenzothiazole upon its activity
as an accelerator has also been studied.

Cuares L. Parsons,
Secretary

New SERIES

o 4 ANN BRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 145% Fripay, Novempbrr 10, 1922 AANUAUISUESE Di

SINGLE Cops, 15 Crs.

“ gown seg
New Blakiston Texts
HOYT—Concise Physics for Engineering Studerits’ aay alias
179 Illustrations. Cloth, $2.50. ete eel

By Joun KE. Hoyt, Ph.D., Head of Physics Department, Drexel Evening School;
Assisted by CHartus A. Barrutuer, B.S. C.E., and N. M. CHAMBERLAIN,
B.S., A.M., of the Faculty Drexel Evening School, Philadelphia.

The text is free from hair-splitting theoretical distinctions, and detailed descriptions of
mechanical or electrical devices which properly belong to advanced engineering.

Characteristic features are the conciseness of treatment of fundamental principles, with
special reference to their application to engineering; the solution of illustrative problems,
and the large number of practical problems, mostly new, submitted for solution by the
student.

Some special features are—a simple and practical chapter on meastirements, errors, ac-
curacy and precision and significant figure,—fundamental subjects not often introduced out-
side technical books—involving advanced mathematics: a general treatment of physical com-
putations, principles and methods of curve plotting and use of vectors, with applications later.
as the need arises; logical treatment of Mechanics under the headings of Kinematics, Dy-
namics and Statics. The chapter on Electrostatics has been reduced to the minimum amount
required to familiarize the student with such ideas as “Potential,” “capacity” and other fun-
damental conceptions. Insistence upon the distinctiori between potential difference and elec-
tromotive force. This distinction has been found by the author, in common with others
who have insisted upon the same discrimination, to aid in preventing confusion, especially
when the student considers the potential difference at the terminals of a battery, a dynamo,
or a motor.

Attention is called, all through, to the fact that all formulas are merely mathematical ex-
pressions of definitions or laws, true under certain stated conditions. If these conditions be
observed “theory and practice” must always agree.

BRUBAKER—Textbook of Human Physiology = ““"""

Revised. Enlarged. 367 Illustrations. Cloth, $4.75.

By Ausert P. BrusaKer, A.M., M.D., LL.D, Professor of Physiology and Medi-
eal Jurisprudence, Jefferson Medical College, Philadelphia.

In this edition are many new facts which throw light on hitherto obscure problems.
They relate to vitamins; chemistry of blood; physiological action of the heart; action of
vagus nerve on the heart; chemic relations of oxygen and carbon dioxide in blood; respira-
tion. in high altitudes; modern colorimetric appliances; secretion of urine; acidosis; basal
metabolism; nerve activities and coordination, etc.

P. BLAKISTORN’S SON & CO.
Publishers Philadelphia

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

THE OESTROUS CYCLE
IN THE RAT

And Its Associated Phenomena
By
Lone anp Evans
148 pages, II plates, 7 figures in text; paper, $3.75

The profound importance of an _ infallible
method of detecting in the Mammalia the periodic
function of the ovary, and the possibility, through
the possession of such a method, of the investiga-
tion of disturbances of the ovarian function are
matters of interest to students of the subject.
Before proceeding to such investigation, it would
be necessary to establish clearly all the charac-
teristics of what has been called the normal
oestrous or reproductive cycle in the animal chosen
for investigation. To that task the present mono-
graph is devoted.

‘University of California Press
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

produced.

HIGH VACUUM PUMPS

Whenever in lecture-room or laboratory practice, really high
vacuum is required, we recommend the Condensation . Pump devel-
oped by Dr. Irving Langmuir of the General Electric Company—believ-
ing it to be superior to any other as yet obtainable.

The Langmuir Pump operates with surprising rapidity, and there
seems to be no practical limit to the degree of exhaustion that can be

Some form of auxiliary pump must be used; and for that purpose
) we offer a special G.E. two-stage oil-sealed mechanical pump, which

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY

Devoted to Ali Branches of Botanical Science
Established 1914. Monthly, except August and September.
Ofmcial Publication of the Botanical Society of America.

Subscription, $6 a year. Volumes 1-8 complete, $58
post free. Single numbers, 75 cents, post free. Prices of
odd yolumes on request.

Foreign postage: To Canada, 20 cents; to other coun-
tries, 40 cents.

ECOLOGY

Devoted to All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment

Established 1920. Quarterly.
Official Publication of the Ecological Society of America.
Subscription, $4 a year. Back volumes 1-3, $3.50 post free.

Single numbers, $1.15 post free.
Foreign postage: To Canada, 10 cents; to other coun-
tries, 20 cents.

GENETICS

A Periodical Record of Investigations in Heredity and
Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.
Subscription, $6 a year. Single numbers, $1.15 .post free.

Foreign postage: To Canada, 25 cents; to other coun-
tries, 50 cents.

BROCKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume One contains 33 contributions on genetics,
pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant geog-
raphy, morphology, and systematic botany.

38 plates, 41 text figures.

Price $3.50 plus postage. Weight, 4 pounds.
Published irregularly.

: Orders should be placed direct with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
BROOKLYN, N. Y., U. S. A.

is capable of producing a vacuum of
0.001 mm. when used alone.

The picture shows a complete out-
fit comprising Langmuir Condensation
Pump, two-stage auxiliary pump and
1% H.P. motor—all mounted together on
one base.

Write for descriptive bulletin S-965

JAMES G. BIDDLE
1211-13 Arch St., Philadelphia

A Weekly Journal devoted to the Advancement
of Science, publishing the official notices and
wroceedings of the American Association for the
Advancement of Science, edited by J. McKeen
Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
{1 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the

Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

Vou. LVI

NovemBer 10, 1922

No. 1454

CONTENTS
Enternational and Interstate Aspects of the
River Problem: Dr. C. E.

Colorado
GRUNSKY
Progress in Polynesian Research: PROFESSOR
RIOR RM se GING ON eee ee cceneee re reaae HAS 527
Scientific Hvents:
A Forest wider the City of Washington;
Opposition to Dvolution in Minnesota; The
Administration of the United States Geo-
logical Survey; Lhe New Building of tive
National Academy of Sciences and the
National Research Cownetl.....2/22.-22.2-s....--- 529
Scientific Notes and News........------:------ Pee 532
University and Educational Notes.............-..--. 584
Discussion and Correspondence :
Stellar Diameters: Dr. H. T. Srevrson.
Tingitide or DRawWelidl
Houtann. A Miniature Photographic Dark
Room: Dr. A. L. Menanper. The Value of
Cost Accounting in Analytical. and Con-
sulting Laboratories: Dr. FRep W. FEUER-
BACHER
Quotations:
Protecting Scientific Research at the Polls.. 538

Tingide again:

St Resa A ease eae eh i ete ES IE NS oy

Scientific Books:
Bancroft on Applied Colloid Chemistry:
PRorussor HH. I. BuRTON ee. 539
Special Articles:

The Ordei of Scientific Merit: Dr. J.
IW Wel Chagos aC OPN IND DIC} pe eee al een ar oa 541

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
EA DARSON Sh co leoe AAA UE NUE Sp at 547

INTERNATIONAL AND INTERSTATE
ASPECTS OF THE COLORADO
RIVER PROBLEM!

Tue Colorado River has a drainage basin
244,000 square miles in extent. Parts of seven
states and a small section of Mexico are em-
braced within this watershed. But the amount
of water contributed to the discharge of the
river by the several states and by Mexico hears
no definite relation to the extent of watershed
in each. This will be seen from the following
figures compiled from records of the United
States Geological Survey:

Watershed Area

Political Subdivision

sq. miles

Colorado 39,000
Wyoming 19,000
Utah 40,000
Neyada 12,000
New Mexico 23,000
Arizona 103,000
California 6,000
Total United States 242,000
Mexico 2,000
Total 244,000

The mean annual discharge of Colorado
River and its tributaries as indicated by the
following figures:

Name of Stream Drainage Area Discharge
square miles acre-feet
Green River 44,000) 5,510,000
Grand River (Upper ;
Colorado) - 26,000 6,940,000
San Juan River 26,000 2,700,000
Other tributaries, not
ineluding the Gila 91,000 1,560,000
Gila River 47,000 1,070,900
Colorado River at
Laguna Dam, 16,400,090

Symposium on ‘‘The Problems of the Colo-
rado River,’’? American Association for the Ad-
yanecement of Science, Salt Lake City.

922

Beneficial use of the waters of Colorado
River commenced many years ago. No attempt
will be made in this sketch to do more than
to give the briefest outline of historical facts.

The extent to which the water of Colorado
River is being used for irrigation will appear
from the following figures compiled by Mr.
H. C. LaRue for 1913.

Colorado; area irrigated in 1913 was
acres.

Wyoming; area irrigated in 1913 was 280,000
acres.
Utah; area irrigated in 1913 was
acres.

Nevada; area irrigated in 1913 was 5,000
acres. :

New Mexico; area irrigated in 1913 was 40,000
acres. :

Arizona; area irrigated in 1913 was 315,000
acres.

California; area irrigated in 1913 was 297,000
acres.

Mexico ;
acres.

440,000

204,000

area irrigated in 1913 was 50,000
In California the irrigated area now ap-
proaches 500,000 acres and in Mexico it is
about 190,000 acres. There has, of course,
also, been extension of irrigation in the upper
states but later figures are not at hand.

No Colorado River water was used for ir-
rigation in Mexico prior to the construction of
the Imperial Canal from which water began
to be used in 1901. By 1905 there were about
5,000 acres of land in Lower California being
irrigated. In 1910 the area was probably
about 20,000 acres and in 1920 had reached
about 150,000 acres.

The potential use of water from this river
and its tributaries can not be stated with any
great degree of precision. Some allowances
must be made for the fact that just at present
each of the several interested states is endeavor-
ing to secure recognition of extreme ultimate
possibilities in this connection rather than of
early future probabilities. For the purpose of
"a guide in this discussion the following figures
ave noted—the endeavor being to include in
the areas noted as irrigable only such as would
seem to justify construction of works within
the next thirty years.

Jn the Green River Basin the extent of ir-
rigation in 1913 was about 500,000 acres and

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

expansion within thirty years to about 900,000
acres is to be expected; in the Grand River
Basin from about 300,000 to about 420,000
acres; on the lower Colorado from about
400,000 acres to 1,500,000 acres; in the Gila
River Basin from 280,000 to some uncertain
extent possibly 400,000 acres; in the San Juan
River Basin from 117,000 to 500,000 acres; in
the basins of the lesser tributaries of Colorado.
River from about 61,000 acres in 1913 to about
160,000 acres, and in Mexico from 50,000 in
1913 and 190,000 in 1921 to 600,000 acres.
After the war between the United States and
Mexico the boundary line between the two
countries had to be fixed. This was done in a
conference resulting in a boundary line treaty
consummated in 1848. But it was soon found
that portions of the line westerly from the Rio
Grande should have been placed further south
and negotiations were commenced for a modifi-
cation of the line. The result of these negotia-
tions (in 1853) was the acquisition of a strip
of land, now the south portion of New Mexico.
and Arizona known as the Gadsden Purchase.
There is a story current, though probably im-
possible of verification and to be considered
for the present as without foundation in fact,
to the effect that the Commissioners of the
United States who made the purchase were
given the choice of three locations for a new
line. According to this story the line furthest
to the south touches the head of the Gulf; but
the payments to be made by the United States:
to Mexico were graded according to the dis-
tance that the boundary would be shifted south-
ward and the line requiring the least payment
was selected by the United States Commission-
ers. Whether this story be true or not we can
now see how unfortunate it was to have fixed
the line in its established position. It should
have been as far south as the head of the Gulf
of California so that the entire delta of the
Colorado River would have been in the United
States. The Commissioners accepted a loca-
tion of the line which may at any time become
a source of friction and which has already be-
come a matter of great inconvenience and some
embarrassment to the United States. The
boundary divides the delta of the river not
along a channel, which would be bad enough,
but in such a way that most of the delta slope

NovEMBER 10, 1922]

toward the south and some of the slope toward
the north remains in Mexico. —

The absurdity of the resulting situation is
daily becoming more apparent and the inter-
ruption of diplomatic relations with Mexico
(from 1913 to date) has thus far prevented
the taking of steps to ameliorate a situation,
involving river work in Mexico for the joint
benefit of the two countries, which is fast be-
coming intolerable. It may be remarked, too,
that the seriousness of the situation and the im-
portance of having adequate control of the
delta section of the river vested in some agency
which can accomplish results is not generally
recognized.

Recall for a clearer understanding of this
international political matter the essential
physical facts:

The Colorado River was found on a course

to the Gulf of California 400 years ago by
Spanish explorers.
a dry Salton Basin.
required to evaporate the water from this basin
after the river ceased to discharge into it, there
is, therefore, positive evidence that for over
450 years and probably for over 500 years the
Colorado River has been flowing down the
south slope of its delta cone. There is physi-
cal evidence, too, easily read, that in recent
geological time the river has repeatedly changed
its point of outfall from the Gulf to the Basin
and back again to the Gulf. The following
reference to the Salton Basin is found in the
report of G. W. Blake, geologist of the trans-
continental railroad survey, 1853:

These explorers, too, found
As about 50 years were

“The present outflows, though but very
slight, are probably similar (referring to In-
dian traditions of a great flood), and yet it is
possible that the interior of the desert might
be deluged at the present day, provided no
elevation of the Iand has taken place and the
river should remain at a great height for a
long time—long enough to cause the excavation
of a deep channel for New River.”

The Indian tradition relating to the ancient
lake is thus given by Dr. Blake:

“The great water (agua Grande) covered the
whole valley and was filled with fine fish.
There were also plenty of ducks and geese.
Their fathers lived in the mountains and used

SCIENCE

0235

to come down to the lake to fish and hunt.
The water gradually subsided “poco poco”
(little by little) and their villages were moved
down from the mountains into the valley it
had left. They also said that the waters once
returned very suddenly and overwhelmed many
of their people and drove the rest back into
the mountains.”

This aneient lake had a total length from
northwest to southeast of 100 miles. Its
northern limit was several miles above Indic
and its southern margin was 15 miles south of
the international boundary in Mexico. It has
a mean width of 20 miles. The evaporation
of this great body of water, after inflow ceased,
caused the mineral contents of the water to be
gradually carried to the lowest portion of the
basin, where a crust of salts, mainly common.
salt, was left in sufficient quantity and of suf-
ficient value to justify the establishment of salt
works, which were operated for some years by
the New Liverpool Salt Company.

{t is within the area once covered by the an-
cient lake that all of the improved area of Im-
perial Valley lies. Calexico, at the Mexican
boundary, is at sea level. Imperial, 12 miles
farther north, is about 60 feet below sea level,
and the cultivated lands near Brawley extend
from about 100 to 200 feet below sea level.

' At the northern end of the basin is Coachella

Valley with Indio farthest north, and Mecca
190 feet below sea-level near the shore of the
lake, when the lake was at its greatest extent
in February, 1907.

And then there was another Indian tradi-
tion to the effect that the Colorado River flowed
into a hole in the ground. The explanation of
this tradition oecurred to the author of this
paper a few years ago and seems simple
enough. When the Salton Sea was full, its
surface extent was about 2,000 square miles.
From this large area of water the annual
evaporation was nearly 8,000,000 acre feet of
water. This is one half of the normal annual
discharge of Colorado River and more than the
river’s discharge in a year of light run-off.
There were, therefore, probably periods of time
sometimes exceeding a year in duration, aside
from the filling period, when the Indian saw a
river flowing into Salton Basin and saw no

924

water flowing out from this basin. What more
natural than that he should assume a hole in
the ground through which the river poured its
waters into the bowels of the earth?

But of particular interest, because of its
bearing upon the present discussion, is the
main fact that periodically, say for a period
ot 500 to 1,000 years, the Colorado River had
an outfall into the Salton Basin, that is, down
the northern slope of its delta cone and again
for a similar period of time the river has dis-
charged into the ocean through the Gulf of
California.

With this fact in mind let the boundary line
be traced from the south boundary of Arizona
following up the Colorado River for some 20
miles to Pilot Knob, and thence a little south
of west in a straight line to the Pacifie Ocean.
This boundary line leaves a part of the Colo-
vado River delta, Yuma Valley, in Arizona.
It leaves the head of the Gulf of California
and the main south slope of the river’s delta
cone in Mexico; and it leaves the major por-
tion of the north slope of the delta cone, in-
cluding what is now known as Imperial Valley
and also the Coachella Valley, which was once
deep under. the waters of the ancient sea, in
California.

From the earliest studies made of this re-
gion by citizens of the United States it is
known that the Colorado River originally
flowed from near Yuma to the Gulf of Cali-
fornia in a meandering channel, having un-
stable banks, and inadequate capacity to carry
all the water presented at flood stages. The
distance in an air line from the head of the
river’s delia to the Gulf is in round figures 80
miles. In this distance the river falls 100
feet. It is about the same distance from the
head of the delta to the lowest portions of
Salton Basin but as the lowest part of the basin
is over 280 feet below sea-level the fall in this
«lirection is nearly 400 feet. If the river should
be permitted to flow into the basin it would
take 20 or 30 years to fill it up. There was no
immediate danger of the river making a change
in its course under the natural conditions that
prevailed 50 to 75 years ago ‘because at each
flood stage the river banks were overtopped;
they were well watered far back from the edge
of the stream, and carried a luxuriant growth

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

of trees, brush and grass and they were being
constantly warped up by the sediment which
the muddy water of the river spread out over
the land.

But as soon as human activities modified
these natural conditions, as soon as a small
dredger cut invited the river down the steep
northern delta slope, the river broke from its
channel and temporarily abandoned its course
to the Gulf. This happened in 1905 and it
took a little more than a year to put the river
back into its old channel. But while this was
being accomplished the delta channels went
dvy. The vegetation on the parched bank land
died out and fire destroyed the plant growth in
large part which had, theretofore, protected the
area nearest the river against erosion. And so,
at the subsequent high stages of the river, there
Was more overbank flow and greater concentra-
tion of water in the swales leading away from
the river and therefore increased danger of the
river breaking out of its original channel. 1907
and 1908 passed without this happening, \but
in 1909 the river broke a new channel toward
the west following the course of what was
known as the Rio Abejas or Bee River. The
point where this abandonment of the original
river channel occurred was about opposite the
south boundary line of Arizona.

The river has ever since, except for a fer
weeks while checked by a levee, been sending
its water southwesterly in a round about way,
through Voleano Lake and the Hardy Colo-
rado into the Gulf. But its flow westerly was
on or near the erest line of the river’s very
flat delta cone. Its channel is a broad shallow
bed of sand of irregular alignment. At flood
stages its water submerges ‘broad stretches of
country. Its flood waters would preferably
drop off the delta cone to the north ‘but have
been prevented from doing this by levees.
Herein lies the purpose of this statement of
physical facts. The levees along the river and
along the crest of its delta were and are re-
quired for the protection of property in the
United States. All of Imperial Valley and of
Coachella Valley are menaced. This does not
mean that if a breach in the levees occurred
and the river again discharged into Salton
Basin that all of these valleys would be flood

swept. Not at all. The river would simply

WoveMBER 10, 1922]

flow for a time into Salton Sea doing some
damage but it would be turned back again
toward the Gulf long before it could make any
great headway toward filling the basin.

The interesting fact is that the levees which
wrevent the river from thus turning to the
north and the great undertakings in 1906 and
1907 of turning the river from an erratic
course back into its old bed, had to be done in
foreign territory, and, moreover, without per-
mission or sanetion to do the work by any
treaty arrangement. This will be explained by
going back a little. When the Colorado River
Land and Water Company (after reorganiza-
tion the California Development Company)
determined to put Colorado River water upon
California lands it acquired a large tract of
land in Lower California just south of and
paralleling the boundary line. It organized in
Mexico a subsidiary company, the “Compania
de Terrenos y Riegos” and through the agency
of this company constructed a few miles of

canal from the boundary line, near the river, *

southerly and southwesterly, to a connection
with a flood water slough known as Carters,
or Salton or Alamo River. Meanwhile a di-
verting canal was constructed in California
tapping Colorado River a few hundred yards
north of the boundary line and leading into
the upper end of the Mexican Canal. When
water was turned into the canal in California
it flowed to the Mexican Canal and thence to
the Alamo channel and thence back into Cali-
fernia, This became the nucleus of the Im-
pevial Canal system. However, after a few
years there was trouble at the head of the
canal. Its upper section was too flat to pass
all the silt entering from the river. And so
in 1904 the Mexican Corporation made appli-
cation to the Mexican Government for a water
coneession and the right to construet and main-
fain canals in Mexico. This was granted and
provides that water may be diverted from the
Colorado River in Mexico or may be brought
into Mexico from California and conveyed
across Mexican territory back into California,
subject, however, to the condition that, to the
extent of one half of the water in the canal,
the landowners of Mexico shall have the right
to use this water for irrigation.

SCIENCE

525

When Imperial Irrigation District was or-
ganized and acquired the canal system of the
California Development Company, it accepted
the same subject to the conditions of the Mexi-
can concession and for the purpose of doing
work in Mexico it operates through its sub-
sidiary, the Mexican Corporation.

It will ‘be recalled that in 1909 when the
Colorado broke from its channel into Bee River
the Congress of the United States appropriated
$1,000,000 to be used in protecting the Salton
Basin against ultimate submersion. The Colo-
rado River was to be turned back into its old
bed and held there. As there was no treaty
for the contemplated operations in Mexico, the
President designated Mr. J. A. Ockerson to
undertake the work. He in turn made the
Mexican Corporation his agent and the work
went on.. It included not only the turning of
the river but also the enlargement and exten-
sion of the levee north of Voleano Lake which
has since become an increasingly important
line of defense for the Imperial Valley.

When it is now considered that the control
of the floods of the Lower Colorado will benefit
about 800,000 acres of delta lands in Mexico
and a somewhat larger area in California,—
much of this, however, still in wild unimproved
condition—the faet will be realized that there
should be friendly consultation and coopera-
tion between the United States and Mexico in
order that the control of the lower river which
must be put in a direct course to the Gulf and
which must be kept there, may be placed in the
hands of a competent agency, preferably the
United States, and that arrangements may be
made for reducing the flood menace by storing
the waters of the Colorado at some point such
as Boulder Canyon.

And then there is needed, too, some under-
standing between the two countries as to the
quantity of water which will be allowed to flow
into Mexico. It is probable that under regula-
tion of stream flow by storage there will be
enough water for all the lands in the two coun-
tries which may reasonably expect it. But
practically all of the water which flows in the
Colorado River originates in the United States
and if the United States should choose to do
so and physical conditions permitted, all of

926

the water could be withdrawn from the river
for use within the United States. This will
never happen, but negotiations in relation to
this matter of giving definiteness to what Mexi-
«o may expect have already been too long de-
ferred.

Not only is this the situation with reference
to the irrigation use of water but immediate
action in the matter of flood control is of para-
mount importance. On this phase of the prob-
Jem only a word more need be said. Ever since
the river changed its course in 1909 it has
been depositing its load of silt, about 112,000
acre feet per year, in the Voleano Lake ‘re-
gion. Drift and silt have filled depressions
and choked old drainage channels. The first
effect of the river’s change in alignment was
to depress the river’s flood plane at the head of
the Bee River six or seven feet and thence up-
stream by
Yuma.

decreasing amounts to and above
But as the years rolled by and the
warping up of the Voleano Lake regions has
continued, the flood plane has been at a mean
rate of about one foot per annum. Where no
levee was required before 1908, to the north of
the site of the lake (the lake itself has already
been filled up with silt and obliterated) there
is now a levee 14 feet high, with a railroad on
top and with its water slope well faced with
rock. And yet last year, 1921, the water at
some points rose to the top of this levee. At-
tempt is now being made to coax the river into
a more southerly course, but, even it this should
sueceed, the outfall of the flood waters will
then be on a broad flat area which will quickly
be filled to delta crest elevation and the same
problem as the one of to-day will remain to
be solved. The solution of this problem as
already stated is comparatively simple when
physical elements alone are considered. It is
the international aspect which renders it com-
plex. Action, at once, I repeat, by the United
States is imperative.

It may ‘be noted in this connection that about
70,000 people live in the area which is to be
protected. Property values of $100,000,000 to
$200,000,000 are involved. There are several
hundred miles of railroads within the area that
must be protected against the floods of the
Colorado River.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

In the matter of developing and putting to
beneficial use the water resources of the Colo-
vado River, it seems self-evident that the great-
est ultimate good should be the main considera-
tion. State lines cut but little figure in this
matter. Opportunity by any state to divert and
deprive earlier down-stream users of their water
can carry no right to do so unless this be
plainly in the public interest and unless it ibe
done with due compensation for property
values that are thereby destroyed.

It is wise, therefore, that steps have jbeen
taken for discussion of the river’s problem as
it affects the seven states within which the
The Colorado
River Commission is the medium for bringing
these states into conference. What the outcome
of this conference will be remains to ‘be seen.
Fortunately the production of water in the
watershed of the river is so great that, despite

waters of the river originate.

all that can be done on its ‘headwaters, to
hold back and use the water locally, there will

. still enough water get by to make the storage on

the lower river and the.extension of irrigation
in Arizona, California and Mexico desirable
and economically feasible.

The development on the lower river is an’
interstate and international matter. It should
‘be undertaken iby the United States. The con-
trol of such a reservoir as that which is pro-
posed for the Boulder Canyon site, for ex-
ample, should never be relinquished to private
interests whatever the agency by which the
project is carried out. Boulder Canyon dam-
site is located on Colorado River just above the
point where the river makes its abrupt turn
from a westerly to a southerly course. It is
some 60 miles in an air line above the point
where California’s east boundary line strikes
the river and is but a few miles below the
mouth of Virgin River. The Colorado River
at this point forms the boundary between
Nevada on the north and Arizona on the south.
The canyon is narrow, being generally report-
ed as about 250 feet in width for a distance of
one half mile. The sides of the gorge are steep.
The rock is granite. The project for storage
at this site as now favored by the United States
Reclamation Service involves the construction
of a dam that would rise to a height of about

NovEMBER 10, 1922

550 feet above the water surface of the river.
The storage capacity of the reservoir to be
‘ereated ‘by such a dam would be in excess of
25,000,000 acre feet. The discharge of Colo-
yvado River at this point may be noted, in, ap-
proximate figures, as ranging from 7,000,000
to 22,000,000 acre feet per year. The mean
annual discharge may be about 15,000,000 acre
feet. The surface area of the reservoir would
reach 125,000 acres.

The feasibility of a dam of the dimensions
proposed seems now to be generally accepted
by the engineers who have investigated the
dam site. A reservoir at Boulder Canyon would
control the flow of Colorado River except the
contributions by the Gila River, and the stor-
age could be so manipulated that it would
eliminate the lower river flood menace to the
extent that this menace is due to up river high
stages. Such a reservoir would also regulate
the flow of the river for irrigation purposes,
thereby permitting the extension of the ir-
rvigated area, and would generate upward of
600,000 horse power for electrical transmission.

It is not enough to know that this reservoir
should be constructed. Equally important is
the matter of urgency. And this applies with
equal force to the reservoir control of the river
and to the placing of the lower river upon a
‘direct course to the Gulf.

C. HE. Grunsky
PROGRESS IN POLYNESIAN
RESEARCH

In view of the many inquiries regarding the
status of the anthropological studies in Poly-
nesia, undertaken by the Bishop Museum, a
summary statement of progress and results ap-
pears to be appropriate.

Systematic investigations of the origin and
culture of the Polynesian peoples have been
condueted by the Bayard, Dominick Expedition
and made possible by a generous gift of Bay-
ard Dominick, Jr., of New York—funds given
to Yale University and placed by the university
at the disposal of Bishop Museum. During the
summer of 1920 four field parties began their
work—the first in Tonga, the second in the
Marquesas, the third in Rurutu, Raivaivai,
Tubuai and Rapa of the Austral Islands, the

SCIENCE ‘ 527

fourth in selected islands of the Hawatian
group. Through cooperative arrangements
with scientists of New Zealand, physical meas-
urements of the Maori and a complete survey
of the Maoriori of Chatham Tslands forms part
of the program. By the end of this year all
the field parties will have returned to Hono-
lulu. These surveys supplemented by investi-
gations in Tahiti and adjacent islands organ-
ized for 1923, will complete the present plans
of the Bayard Dominick Wxpedition. Con-
tributions to the physical anthropology of
Samoa and of Tonga have been published by
the museum; other papers are in press or in
preparation for publication.

The prosecution of this search for Polynesian
origins aims at the solution of two distinct
problems: (1) the souree of the physical racial
characteristics, which have combined to make
the Polynesian physical types; and (2) the
source of ‘the original elements which formed
the basis of the ancient culture of the people.
Dependent upon the solution of these is a third
problem: the degree in which racial and cul-
tural transplantation and stratification are cor-
related.

Dr. Louis R. Sullivan, physical anthropolo-
gist of the American Museum of Natural His-
tory, is devoting himself to the study of the
racial data secured by himself and by other
members of the expedition. He makes the fol-
lowing tentative classification of the physical
characters which go to make up the two basic
elements in the Polynesian peoples:

Type 1 is characterized by (1) tall stature,
(2) moderately long heads, (3) relatively high,
narrow faces, (4) relatively high, narrow noses,
(5) straight or wavy black hair of medium
texture, (6) well-developed moustache and
moderate beard on the chin, (7) moderate
amount of hair on the body and limbs, (8)
light brown skin, (9) incisor rim present occa-
sionally, (10) femur flattened (platymeric),
(11) tibia flattened (platyenemic), (12) ulna
flattened (platolenic), (13) dips above average
in thickness. Type I is the so-called ‘Caucasoid
element in Polynesia; sometimes spoken of as
Pseudo-Caucasian or Psendo-Mediterranean.
Maemillan Brown regards it as Nordic. In its
characteristics it is intermediate between some

528

Caucasians and some Mongols. It may eventu-
ally prove to be a very primitive Caneasoid
type, probably related to primitive inhabitants
of Micronesia, Indonesia, and to the Aino and
some of the primitive American Indians. It is
probably the oldest type in Polynesia (except
where it was possibly preceded by the Melanc-
siams), and it oceupied all of the Polynesian
Islands. At present it seems to be strongest
in the southern part of Polynesia.

Type II is characterized by (1) shorter
stature, (2) shorter heads, (3) low, broad
faces, (4) low, broad noses, (5) wavier hair,
(6) undeveloped beard, (7) body hair rare ex-
cept on the legs, (8) darker brown skin, (9)
incisor rim rare, (10), (11), (12) long bones
less flattened (data meager, results inferred),
(13) lips well above the average in thickness.
Type Il is the element so often referred to as
Malay, and is undoubtedly the one which has
been traced to the region of the Celebes by
linguists and ethnologists. Malay is not a
suitable name for it, since it is usually restrict-
ed to groups more definitely Mongoloid. It ap-
proaches somewhat closely Giuffrida-Ruggeri’s
Indonesian type. This element has contributed
some of the negroid characteristics (full lips,
dark skin, broad flat noses), usually attributed
to Melanesian mixture. The type is strongest
in northern and central Polynesia.

Edward $8. Handy, ethnologist of the Bishop
Museum staff, and a member of the Dominick
Expedition to Tahiti and the Marquesas in
1920-21, has come to the following conclusions
with regard to the general ethnology of Poly-
nesia.

There is a basie Polynesian cultural complex,
some of the most important elements in which
are: (1) cooking by means of heated stones in
ground ovens; (2) the use of stone pestles for
pounding food; (3) the use of wood, gourd,
and cocoanut shell, rather than pottery, for
containers; (4) skillful woodworking and
carving; (5) tattooing; (6) the making of
tapa, or bark cloth; (7) a characteristic rela-
tionship system; (8) the customs of adopting
and betrothing children; (9) systematie agri-
culture and fishing, taro and potato cultures;
(10) professional eraftsmanship and leader-
ship in industry; (11) tribal government of
simple patriarchal communism; (12) presery-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454.

ing heads of enemies as trophies, and canni-
balism; (13) ancestor worship, the preserva-
tion of genealogies, and the hiding of skeletat
remains; (14) inspirational diviners; (15) a
speculative creation mythology conceived on,
the principle of dualism, expressed in terms of
male and female agencies. This complex was.
universally distributed throughout Polynesia:
but it is most clearly to be distinguished in the
historie culiuves of New Zealand and the Mar-
quesas, both of which groups may be charac-
terized as outposts. These elements being uni-
versal, and sbest preserved in the marginal
region, may be taken to represent the prunitive,,
in the sense of original, Polynesian eculture..
This we may call Culture A.

Superimposed on this original culture are.
certain other elements, some of the most im-
portant of which are: (1) organized govern~
ment; (2) a wigid social classification; (3):
complicated systems of land division and own-
ership; (4) great sacredness of chiefs and
elaborate etiquette; (5) organized dancing as a
social and religious institution; (6) organized
yeligious ceremonial and priesthood; (7) a
generation cult and seasonal rites; (8) haru-
spication. As compared with Culture A, this.
culture appears to have been characterized by-
a higher social and religious, rather than higher
technical, development. This group, with other:
associated elements, too numerous to include.
here, may be called Culture B.

t is possible that the elements in Culiure B.
may have resulted by a natural evolution from
the primitive Culture A. But it is far more
provable that they represent the culture of a
second immigrating wave of a people, closely
related culturally to those of the first wave.
Churehill’s analysis of the language led him to.
the conclusion that the dialect spoken by the
second wave of migrators to Tonga and Samoa
was very closely related to that of the original
settlers.

A study of Polynesian ethnology recently
completed by Ralph Linton indicates ‘that the —
material culture of the Marquesans and re-
lated groups suppont entirely the theory of an,
original culture and later overlay.
important elements which his study adds to
the classification given by Dr. Handy are: to
Culture A, (1) a rectangular house with en&

The’ more

Novemsrr 10, 1922]

posts and bed-space; (2) a canoe made of five
parts; and (3) the tanged adze; to Culture B,
(1) the oval house; and (2) wooden head rests
and utensils with legs.

It is interesting to note that the basal Poly-
nesian physical type (Type I), as worked out
by Sullivan, is universally distributed, but
strongest in the south, and the original culture
(Culture A), also universally distributed, is
clearest in the south (New Zealand) and east
(the Marquesas). Also physical Type II is
strongest in north and central Polynesia, the
same region in which elements in Culture B
are dominant. This demonstrated parallelism
of racial types and cultural stratification rests
on conclusions arrived at independently by
members of the museum staff working in widely
separated fields with no opportunity for con-
sultation. It is regarded as a very important
contribution to the attack on the Polynesian
problem. Another contribution is the defini-
tion of characteristics and elements belonging
to the respective types and cultures—a pre-
requisite to comparative studies.

As regards the sources of these racial types
and cultural elements and the routes by which
they came to Polynesia, the evidence in hand
indicates the region of the Malay archipeiago
(Indonesia) and southeast Asia as that from
which the Polynesian ancestors commenced
their eastward drift. Whither, beyond that
region the search for ultimate origims may
jead, ean not be foreseen. The writing of the
earliest chapters in the history of the Poly-
nesians and of other Pacifie races must await
the definition of ancient and modern Asiatic
types and cultures and the determination of
early stages revealed through archeology.

The work of the acheologists of the Bayard
Dominick Expeditions revealed no very ancient
human habitation in the central and south
Pacific. For the Polynesian settlement the evi-
dence serves to substantiate the conclusions of
William Churehill, based on linguistie and cul-
tural study. The following dates are consid-
ered reasonable estimates: A.D. 0, the first
Polynesian migratory movement; A.D. 600, a
second migration; and A.D. 1000, a period of
great Polynesian expansion. According to 8.
Perey Smith and other Maori scholars, New

SCIENCE

529

Zealand was already in possession of original
settlers by the tenth century although the main
Maori migration did not occur until the thir-
teenth and fourteenth centuries. Dr. Handy
has concluded that the Marquesas Islands were
first settled in the tenth century or slightly
earlier, and Fornander presents good reasons
for the belief that the original settlers of
Hawaii experienced the coming of a migratory
wave at the beginning of the eleventh century.

At least three general routes of migration
appear to have ‘been used through Indonesia:
(1) along the coasts of New Guinea, (2)

‘through Micronesia, (3) through and along

the marginal region east of Melanesia.

Two years of organized study has shown
that the history of Polynesia is fundamentally
a field problem and that progress depends
upon the accumulation of facts by trained stu-

dents.
Herpert EK. GREGORY,

Director
BrErnicE P. Bishop MusEuM

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

A FOREST UNDER THE CITY OF WASH-
INGTON

Evinence of ‘the existence of an ancient
swamp in which great trees flourished in days
long past, possibly contemporaneous with
earliest man in America, has been discov-
ered in a deep excavation made for the founda-
tion of a hotel under construction in Washing-
ton, D. C. Alt a depth of about twenty-five
feet below the street level the excavation dis-
closed a layer of black swamp muck, contain-
ing large quantities of wood, tree trunks and
stumps. Some of the stumps are of great size,
a few of them reaching a diameter of nine or
ten feet. Much of the wood is well preserved,
showing clearly the woody structure and the
external markings of the bark. A preliminary
examination indicates that one of ‘the more
common ‘trees of this ancient swamp ‘was
eypress.

The story of ithese \trees, however, is only a
brief chapter of the whole geologic history
shown in the excavation, which has just ‘been
examined by Chester K. Wentworth for the

530

United States Geological Survey. Ages ago
this part of the Atlantic Coastal Plain was
from time ito time covered by ithe sea, into
which streams swept vast quantities of mud,
sand and gravel and boulders which formed
thick deposits that covered large areas. When
ithe region finally emerged from ‘the sea the
Potomac River cut its valley in these deposits,
which were carried about here and ithere also by
smaller streams. The larger boulders are de-
rived from the granite on which the gravel lies,
but some of ithe smaller pebbles come from
parts of the Potomac basin beyond the Blue

Ridge and olthers from veins of quartz in the

granites of the Piedmont Plateau.

Over the layer of plant débris and muck in
this old swamp fine clay and pebbles were laid
down {by streams of water during the glacial
epoch, when (the northern part of North
America, as far south as northern Pennsyl-
vania, was covered with immense sheets of
thick ice, showing that ithe trees lived in the
latter part of the Grealt Ice Age, which is vari-
ously estimated to have ended from 20,000 to
30,000 years ago.

OPPOSITION TO EVOLUTION IN
MINNESOTA

Ir was reported in Scrence last week that
at a conference in St. Paul, Minn., of pastors
representing Baptist, Congregational, Presby-
terian and Lutheran churches, it was decided
to issue a call for a state-wide meeting of
Protestant ministers to oppose the teaching of
evolution in the public schools of Minnesota.

At this meeting, which was held on October
26, the following resolutions were passed:

Preamble—As American citizens we believe in
the complete separation of church and state, and
are opposed to publie
schools—higher or lower.

As those. who wish to teach Christianity must
support their private schools, we believe it but
just that those who wish to teach anti-Christian
theories should be forbidden the use of tax sup-

religious ‘teaching in

ported schools for propagating their opinions.

Whereas, The evolutionary hypothesis has come
to be accepted by many American teachers, and is
increasingly taught in the public schools of Minne-
sota, including high schools, our state normals
and state university, and

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1454

Whereas, This hypothesis, after sixty-three
years of study, remains wholly unproven, and
has increasingly shown itself to be a foe to the
Christian faith, denying as it does the veracity of
the Scriptures,

Therefore be it resolved, That we, citizens of
Minnesota, representing thousands of our fellow
citizens, hereby utter our protest against this
propaganda of infidelity,.palmed off in tthe name
of science, and we call upon the trustees of state
institutions to demand of teachers a cessation of
such teaching and the removal from our schools
of such text-books as favorably present the same.

We do this in the interest of true science vs.
science falsely so-called; and in the interest of
fair dealing. °

We hold that the first amendment to the con-
stitution of the United States, ‘‘Congress shall
make no law respecting an establishment of reli-
gion,’’ was never intended to be interpreted that
the state should become sponsor for irreligion;
and that it is manifestly unfair to impose taxes
upon Christian taxpayers to inculeate teaching
inimical to the Bible and destructive of civiliza-
tion itself.

We have waited patiently for this hypothesis to
either prove a truth or to pass from public in-
struction. Having now no prospect of either, we
demand that the state shall prove its impartiality
toward its citizens by dispensing with a subject
that is utterly divisive; and is, in the judgment
of thousands of its taxpayers, utterly false.

And we declare that if the school authorities
prove derelict in the enforcement of the law re-
lating to the teaching of religion or of theories
subversive of the Christian faith, we will appeal
to the legislature for the enactment of such laws
as shall eliminate from our tax-supported school
system this antiscientifie and antiscriptural
theory of the origin of man and the universe.

THE ADMINISTRATION OF THE UNITED
STATES GEOLOGIC SURVEY

On November 15, David White completes
ten years service as chief geologist. This con-
tribution to \the administration of the survey
has been at the expense of his own scientific
work, even though he has thereby increased the
scientific value of the work of his associates.
Tt scems fair that his oft-repeated request for
permission to return to his own geological
studies should now be granted, not only te
gratify the natural desire of an investigator

November 10, 1922

who has laid aside research problems, one after
another, but also to promote the advancement
of our science.

Effective November 16, W. C. Mendenhall,
for more than ten years the geologist in charge
of the Lang Classification Board, will be chief
geologist. Mr. Mendenhall’s twenty-eight
years service in the Survey as assistant geolo-
gist and geologist, with field experience ex-
tending from the Southern Appalachians to
Alaska, is a promise of his broad sympathy
with all the problems tthat will come under his
direction, and his notable success in using the
data contiibuied by ‘the field branches in the
classification of the public-lands is equally a
promise of effective administration.

Mr. Mendenhall will be succeeded as chief
of the Land Classification Board by Herman
Stabler, his close associate in that branch
during the past decade. Mr. Stabler’s demon-
strated capacity both in research and in admin-
istration assures the continuance of the suc-
cessful application of geologic and engineering
facts and principles to public land adminis-
tration.

The return of Mr. White to productive re-
search suggests anew the sacrifice involved in
the administration of scientific work. Admin-
istration by scientists is the key-note of the
Survey’s policy, yet the intellectual cost item
involved in this drafting of our ‘best investiga-
tors must be kept down to a minimum. Had
I been free from other demands on my time
this past summer, I should have ltaken this
occasion to start a somewhat radical reorgan-
ization of the Geologic Branch, the chief pur-
pose of which would be to reduce its adminis-
trative overhead—too many geologists are giv-
ing valuable time to work for which they were
not trained. Necessarily now, this task of sim-
plifying the organization must be left to the
new chief geologist and the acting director, but
I ask for them a sympathetic acceptance of the
proposal for a less elaborate but more elastic
grouping of the activities of the branch. Not
machinery but product is the measure of eft-
ciency in a government scientific bureau.

Go. Oris Smiru,
Director

SCIENCE 531

THE NEW BUILDING OF THE NATIONAL.
ACADEMY OF SCIENCES AND THE
NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL

On the afternoon of Monday, October 30,,
the cornerstone was laid of the new building of

the National Academy of Sciences and of the
National Research Council at Washington, D. C..

This building, construction of which has now

been carried above the main floor, oceupies a.
desirable location upon an entire block of land.
north of the Lincoln Memorial at the western.
end of the Mall, commanding an excellent and
permanent view of the Memorial, the Riverside:
Park and the bank of the Potomac beyond..
The land for this building was purchased.
through contributions from a group of twenty-
friends of science.

The building is designed for two main pur--
poses: To house ithe offices of the two organ-
izations for which it is erected, and to provide:
space for the exhibition of materials repre--
senting certain of the great achievements of°
science in the past and especially of recent
contributions of particular significance in the:
progress of science. The building presents a.
fagade to the southward 260 feet in length, and.
will rise to a height of 60 feet above the first
floor. In this section there will be three floors.
for offices, library and special exhibits rooms..
Behind this will be a rotunda for general ex-
hibition purposes which will be convertible at
need into a lecture room accommodating, with.
its galleries, over 400 people. The plans per--
mit ‘the addition of other units similar to the
southern facade, to complete a quadrangle
around the rotunda. The building is being:
faced with white Dover marble of fine quality
and color which makes it in keeping with the ~
other monumental buildings of ‘the city. The-
cost of the unit at present under eonstruction.
will be over $1,000,000. The funds for the
erection of the building were provided by the:
Carnegie Corporation of New York.

The laying of the cornerstone was ‘a ceremony
of the simplest kind without ‘the presentation.
of any addresses. It was attended by officers.
and members of the academy and of the Re-
search Council, among whom was the Honor-
able Herbert Hoover, secretary of commerce...

532

The stone, itself, bearing the date “1922” and
the initials “N. A. S.” and “N. R. C.,” occupies
a position high in the wall of ithe first story at
the southwestern corner of ithe building.
Within a copper box in the stone were placed
significant documents connected with the
founding of the National Academy and of the
Research Council and lists of the members of
both organizations. It is expected that the
building will be ready for occupancy in the
fall of 1923.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Tr National Academy of Sciences will hold
its autumn meeting in New York on Tuesday,
Wednesday and Thursday, November 14-16,
1922. The meetings on Tuesday will be at
Columbia University, and, so far as possible,
papers from the sections of astronomy, chem-
istry, geology and paleontology will be as-
signed to this day. On Wednesday the meet-
ings will be at the Rockefeller Institute, with
papers from the sections of botany, zoology and
animal morphology, physiology and pathology,
and anthropology and psychology. On Thurs-
day the meetings will be in the auditorium of
the United Engineering Societies Building with
papers from the sections of mathematics,
physics and engineering. The local committee
for the meeting consists of J. F. Kemp, chair-
“man, T. H. Morgan, Simon Flexner, J. J.
Carty, F. B. Jewett and F. M. Chapman.

Tue Henry Jacob Bigelow medal of the
Boston Surgical Society was presented ito Dr.
William W. Keen, of Philadelphia “for con-
spicuous contributions to the advancement of
surgery,” on the evening of October 25, when
Dr. Keen addressed the society on “Sixty years
of surgery, 1862-1922.”

Mempers of the faculty and alumni of the
University of Chicago recently contributed a
fund for a portrait of Professor A. A. Michel-
son, who for thirty years has been head of the
department of physics in the university. The
portrait has been completed by Ralph Clarkson.

On the occasion of ithe celebration of the
fiftieth anniversary of the Dutch Zoological
Soaiety there were admitted as honorary mem-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

bers: Professor O. Abel, Vienna; Professor M.
Caullery, Paris; Professor L. Dollo, Brussels;
Professor B. Grassi, Rome; Professor V.
Hacker, Halle; Professor S. J. Hickson, Man-
chester; Professor N. Holmgren, Stockholm,
Professor T. H. Morgan, New York; Dr. F.
Sarasin, Basle, and Dr. J. Schmidt, Copen-
hagen.

Tue British Institution of Mining and
Metallurgy has awarded its gold medal to Sir
Alfred Keogh, “on the occasion of his retire-
ment from the rectorship of the Imperial Col-
lege of Science and Technology, in recognition
of his great services in the advancement of
technological education.”

Dr. Grorce Ottgs SmirH has resigned the
directorship of the United States Geological
Survey, in order that he may qualify legally
as a member of the United States Coal Com-
mission. It is understood that the President
hopes that Dr. Smith will be willing to resume
his work as director of the survey when his
service as member of the coal commission comes
to an end.

We learn from Nature that Mr. EK. Leonard
Gill has been appointed ‘to fill the vacant as-
sistantship in the Natural History Department
of the Royal Scottish Museum, Edinburgh. Mr.
Gill has already had museum. experience in
Leicester and Manchester, and for almost
twenty years has been in charge of the Han-
cock Museum at Neweastle-on-Tyne.

Mr. T. Russett Gopparp, assistant curator
at the Sunderland Museum, has been appointed
curator of the Hancock Museum, Neweastle-
upon-Tyne.

Dr. C. R. Orton, plant pathologist at the
Pennsylvania State College, has been appoint-
ed a member of the division of biology and
agriculture of the National Research Council.

THE board of managers of the Wistar Insti-
tute has elected Dr. J. A. Detlefsen to a pro-
fessorship for the duration of his sabbatical
year as a courtesy and to make possible the
continuation of investigations carried on at the
College of Agriculture of lthe University of
Illinois.

NovreMser 10, 1922]

Dr. SeLig Hecut, national research fellow
in chemistry, has been appointed research
fellow in physical chemistry at the Harvard
Medical School, where he will continue his
investigations.

Proressor Wiuuram A. Rinny, chief of the
division of entomology in the University of
Minnesota, returned in September from a
three months stay in Porto Rico, where he
made an intensive study of ithe relation of soil
conditions to the propagation of parasites,

Prorgessor Huss J. Duranp, of the depart-
ment of botany of the University of Minnesota,
is on leave this year because of ill health.

Dr. W. W. Stirter has accepted an ap-
pointment from the China Medical Board of
the Rockefeller Foundation and the trustees of
Canton Christian College as visiting professor
of physics at Canton Christian College for-the
academic year 1922-1923. Mr. Stifler has been
associated with the Peking Union Medical Col-
lege, since its reorganization in 1917 by the
China Medical Board, as head of the physies
department and dean of the Premedical School
in Peking. After his year in Canton he ex-
pects to return to the United Stattes.

Dr. ArtHuR Buiss Dayton, associate in med-
icine at the Yale School of Medicine, has been
given a year’s leave of absence to serve as pro-
fessor of medicine at the Medical School of
Yale-in-China. Dr. and Mrs. Dayton are now
in Changsha.

Dr. G. R. Bissy has returned to the Manitoba
Agricultural College, Winnipeg, after a year
with the Imperial Bureau of Mycology, Kew
Gardens, England.

Issre1 YAMAMOTO, assistant professor in the
Kyoto University Observatory, Japan, has re-
cently received appointment as volunteer re-
search assistant in the Yerkes Observatory.
He has been sent to the United States by the
Japanese government to spend about a year in
several of our observatories.

Dr. Lupwik Siuperstetn, of the Research
Laboratory of the Eastman Kodak Company at
Rochester, N. Y., addressed the Franklin Insti-
tute of Philadelphia on November 2, on “The

SCIENCE

533

spectrum of neutral helium and the behavior of
its two electrons.”

Dr. August Krogu, professor of physiology
at \the University of Copenhagen and Silliman
lecturer at Yale University, will deliver the
second Harvey Society lecture, at the New
York Academy of Medicine, on Saturday, No-
vember 11, on “Nervous and hormonal control
of capillary contractility.”

In continuation of the series of evening lec-
tures given in the spring and fall in the ad-
ministration building of the Carnegie Institu-
tion of Washington, 16th and P Streets, Wash-
ington, D. C., a lecture was given on November
7 by Dr. C. G. Abbot, collaborator of the
Mount Wilson Observatory and assistant sec-
retary of the Smithsonian Institution, on “The
heat of the sun and other stars.” On Novem-
ber 21 Dr. Louis A. Bauer, director of the De-
partment of Terrestrial Magnetism, will give a
lecture on “The greater problems of the earth’s
magnetism and electricity, and their ‘bearings
in astronomy, geology and physics.” . Three
additional lectures will be given on succeeding
Tuesday evenings, announcements of which
will appear later.

Proressor Z. B. Jurrery delivered a lecture
on October 9 on Hinstein’s theory of relativ-
ity, at King’s College, London, as an introduc-
tion to a course of twenty-five lectures to be
given at the college on “The Mathematical
Theory of Relativity.”

As noted in Sctmnce recently the exercises
in connection with the dedication of the Ster-
ling Chemistry Laboratory will be held on
Wednesday, April 4, 1923. This date is the
anniversary of the first lecture in chemistry at
Yale by Professor Benjamin Silliman on April
4, 1804.

Lapy Lockyrr and Miss Lockyer are pre-
paring a biography of Sir Norman Lockyer,
the distinguished astronomer and editor of
Nature.

Tue unveiling of the tablet in memory of
the late Professor Sir William Ramsay,
K.C.B., F.R.S., in Westminster Abbey by the
Prince of Wales, as patron of the Ramsay

084

Memorial Fund, took place on November 3.
Afterwards, in the Jerusalem Chamber, the
French ambassador, the Count de Saint-
Aulaire, as one of the vice-presidents of the
fund, presented to the pmnce the Ramsay Me-
morial Gold Medal, which has been executed
by the French sculptor, Monsieur Bottee.

Rovert WHEELER WILLSON, professor of as-
tronomy, emeritus, at Harvard University, died
cat his home in Cambridge on November 1, in
the seventieth year of his age.

Dr. C. W. Waaaoner, head of the depart-
ment of physics in West Virginia University,
has died from the effects of a fall from a horse,
at Shreveport, Louisiana.

FraNK SHERMAN WASHBURN, chairman of
the board of directors of the American Cyana-
mid Company, a leader in American engineer-
ing, died at his home in Rye, N. Y., on October
9, aged sixty-two years.

Proressor C. Micuiz Situ, government
astronomer of Madras, 1891-1911, and director
of the Kodaikanal and Madras Observatories,
1899-1911, died on September 27.

J. K. A. Werruerm Satomonson, professor
of neurology and radiology in the University
of Amsterdam, has died at the age of fifty-
eight years.

THE death is announced, as the result of an
accident while on holiday in the Alps, of Herr
Leo Madrnozka, professor of electrical engi-
neering at the Technical High School, Munich.

THE speakers who aré expected at the Pas-
teur celebration of the New York Academy of
Medicine are: Professor Russell H. Chitten-
den, Dr. William H. Welch, Dr. Erwin Smith,
Dr. Simon Flexner, Dr. Herman Biggs and
Dr. W. W. Keen. The exhibition of books,
photographs, medalions, manuseripts, ete., re-
ferring to the life work of Pasteur, is to be
open to the public at the New York Academy
of Medicine, 17 West Forty-third Street, New
York, for two weeks, commencing December
27, 1922. The public addresses are to be given
at the academy on the evening of January 10,
1923. Any one having souvenirs or memora-
bilia connected with Pasteur’s work is invited

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

to loan them for the academy exhibition, and
address, for this purpose, the librarian of the
academy, Mr. J. S. Brownne.

Tue National Committee for Mental Hy-
giene was engaged during August, September
and October in making a mental hygiene survey
in North Dakota. This is one of several state
surveys being conducted by the national com-
mittee. Recommendations are made to the
governor and legislature for appropriate ac-
tion. Those conducting the North Dakota sur-
vey were: Dr. Thomas H. Haines, consultant
for the National Committee for Mental Hy-
giene, director; Dr. Ward G. Reeder, assistant
professor of school administration in the Ohio
State University; C. L. Hultgren, psychologist
for the national committee, and Mina A. Ses-
sions and Lucille Martin, psychiatric social
workers for the committee.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

THE departments of civil engineering and
electrical engineering of the South Dakota
Sitate School of Mines have been transferred to
the new ‘building erected for ithem, for which
the legislature made appropriation of $130,000
for building and $15,000 for furnishing. Addi-
tional funds were provided for machinery and
apparatus.

Mr. anp Mrs. Leon E. Scowartz have given
$20,000 to the School of Medicine of Tulane
University for the establishment of ithe David
Trautman Schwartz Research Fund.

THe directors of the University of Cincinnati
have received a letter from the chairman of the
General Educaition Board, asking that action
taken to name a chair in ithe College of Medi-
cine after John D. Rockefeller be deferred be-
cause of Mr. Rockefeller’s objection to such a
course. The communivation said that “Mr.
Rockefeller would prefer to have his name re-
corded in the hearts and lives of those using
the improvements which donations from him
have made possible rather than having it carved
in stone or officially connected with the build-

ing.”

NovEMBER 10, 1922

Dr. Manrrep Catn, formerly professor of
clinical medicine, has been elected dean of the
medical department of the Medical College of
Virginia, at Richmond.

Dr. H. M. Jennison, for several years as-
sistant. professor of botany at the Montana
Agricultural College, Bozeman, has become
associate professor of botany in the University
of Tennessee.

Anprew Karsten (Ph.D., University of
Ohio), has recently entered upon his work as
head of the department of chemistry at tthe
South Dakota Schcol of Mines.

FREDERICK P. Vickery, formerly of Leland
Stanford, Jr., University, has been appointed
assistant professor of geology and head of the
department at the Southern Branch of the
University of California, at Los Angeles.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
STELLAR DIAMETERS

THs determination of star
been a matter of considerable interest since the
first measures of Betlegeuse were published
from the Mount Wilson Observatory. Various
predictions have been made for the apparent
diameter of stars by Eddington,
Wilsing and Hertzsprung, based directly or
indirectly upon visual estimates of brightness,
eolor and spectral type. The recent work of
Coblentz at the Lowell Observatory has afford-
ed means of determining new curves of spectral
intensities giving data for a revised correla-
tion of temperatures and spectral types. Such
information, together with the direct thermo-
electric measures of stellar radiation made by
Coblentz both at the Lick and the Lowell
Observatories, affords the basis for the calcula-
tion of a star’s surface area if its distance is
known, or, wanting aceurate parallax deter-
minations, the apparent angular diameter can
be computed on the grounds of black body
radiation. This serves at least as an inde-
pendent method of checking star diameters, and
the results of its application to the three stars
whose diameters have thus far been measured
by the interferometer method may be of gen-
eral interest, and are given below:

diameters has

Russell,

SCIENCE

5385

DIAM. FROM MT. WILSON

STAR COBLENTZ’ MEASURES PREDICTED DIAMETERS

DATA

Eddington Russell

a Orionis
(Betlegeuse) .... 0.045” 0.047” 0.051” 0.031”

a Scorpii
(Antares)... 0.036” 0.040” 0.043” 0.028”

a Bootis
(Arcturus) ...... OOS” .0:022/2)0:020%)) (OL0197

The agreement between the diameters com-
puted from the galvanometer deflection deter-
mined by Coblentz (Sci. Papers Bureau of
Standards, Nos. 244, 438) and the actual
measured diameters is surprisingly good. It as
not easy to suppose that a star can radiate
as a black body. Since, however, this assump-
tion is fundamental in applying the laws of
radiation from which ithe diameter is com-
puted, it is rather remarkable to find stars
radiate as nearly like black bodies as the bit of
evidence herein contained would seem to show.

H. T. Stetson
HARVARD UNIVERSITY,

ASTRONOMICAL LABORATORY

TINGITIDAZ OR ‘TINGIDFE AGAIN
“To be or not to be’—Tingitide or Tingide?

Logomachy is a “war about words.” It seems

.that I have involved myself in such a ‘merry

war, driven thereto by my desire as a scientific
editor to get at the bottom facts as to what is
the correct scientific family-name to give to
those insignificant, but very interesting and
beautiful little creatures, commonly known as
“lace-bugs.” In a little article published in
Science (N. S.), LVI, 1922, pp. 334-335, I
found in favor of the family name Tingitide.
Now comes that excellent entomologist, Pro-
fessor H. M. Parshley, of Smith College, and
reminds us that in an article published in
Psyche, XXIII, 1916, p. 129, he had found in
favor of Tingide. His argument in brief is
founded upon the statements:

1. “We ean not be sure that Fabricius did
in fact adopt the Greek word Tiyyts, the name
of a city.”

2. “His use of the genitive Tingis [in a foot-
note] shows us that he considered the word his
own and indicates what its Latin declension
should be.” .

I regret that I had completely overlooked
Professor Parshley’s article, and duly apolo-
gize for the oversight. I am, however, con-

536

strained to state in brief that what he says
does not carry conviction to my mind. -

As to his first postulate I may indeed say
that “we can not be sure” of anything.
Fabricius has been dead for over a century, and
not even through Sir Oliver Lodge or Conan
Doyle can we get into touch with him and
ascertain definitely what he was thinking about
when he first coined the generic name we still
use. But we do know that he had the habit
of coining generic names from those of ancient
towns and cities. The word Tingis had been
in existence two thousand years before
Fabricius was born and in its Greek form
Tiyyts and in its Latin forms Tingi or Tinge
could be found in any dictionary Fabricius
might have consulted. The word was no more
“his own” than hundreds of other words he
used in his writings. It is difficult for me to
believe that Fabricius out of the depths of his
subconscicus mind fished up an altogether arbi-
trary combination of letters, T-i-n-g-i-s, making
out of them, as Professor Parshley says, “his
own word.” The nomenclatorists of the time
of Fabricius had not yet reached the stage
attained at a later date by some of their succes-
sors, who took random combinations of letters
and then by various transpositions and com-
binations manufactured words without mean-
ing, which they employed for generie and spe-
cific terms. Fabricius was a disciple of the old
Linnean school and used the Latin language.
I question whether he had a sense of “proprie-
torship” in words.

The fact that he employs Tingis as the geni-
tive only shows that he thought that this was
the genitive, after the analogy of some other
words in the Latin language, and that he did
not take the trouble to ascertain what was the
true declension of the noun he was employing.
Humanum est errare. The genitive of the
Latin noun Tingi or Tinge (the equivalent of
the Greek Ttyytc, must have been Tingitis, as
shown by the adjectival form tingitanus, used
by Pomponius Mela, Claudius Mamertinus,
et al. Fabricius simply made a slip in his de-
clension, which it was easy enough to do.

With all due respect to the conclusions of
Professor Parshley I contend that we are deal-
ing with an old Latin word (found also in the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454.

Greek, where it has an i-stem) and that

Tingitide is the correct form of the family

name, sanctioned by the use of such eminently
capable scholars as Stal (by the way, an ex-
cellent linguist), Champion, Oshanin, Horvath,
Osborn, Drake and a multitude of others.

W. J. Houtanp
Carnrciz MUSEUM,

A MINIATURE PHOTOGRAPHIC DARKROOM

Necessity has mothered many an inspira-
tion. This trite exclamation was brought to
mind by the sudden need of providing dark-
room facilities when our commodious attie
quarters were closed in order to lessen fire risk.
Two alternatives suggested themselves, either
to partition off a eorner of a room or ‘to con-
struct a portable light-proof developing box.
Past experience with small stuffy darkrooms
was recalled, and the writer accordingly under-
took to build a dark box as a venture. The con-
venience of this box, its adaptability to many
photographic purposes, and the successful
results following its use have led to the pub-
lication of this announcement in the hope that
others, at present deterred from attempting

‘photography through lack of facilities, may find

that the way is easily open.

This miniature darkroom is constructed of
pressed wood-pulp board nailed over a light
wooden frame. Dimensions of 36 inches for
width 24 inches for depth and 20 inches for
height have proved to be entirely satisfactory.
At the lower part of the front face an opening
of about 24 by 10 inches admits the arms and
hands of the operator. This opening is ren-
dered light-proof by two thicknesses of close-
woven black sateen cloth continuous with two
sleeves. By having the cloth considerably
larger than the opening and shirring the
edges, free movement of the arms is afforded
by the bulging central portion. The ends of
the sleeves are made close fitting by elastic
bands. Black sateen bloomers can be bought
ready made and are of the exact pattern and
size, with shirring and elastic fittings ready for
attachment to the box. Because of looseness of
weave, two superposed layers of cloth should
be used.

The top of the box has a removable light-

NovEMBER 10, 1922

tight cover. This is made possible by tacking
a tongue of half-inch stripping around the edge
of the cover to fit into a trough at the top of
the walls. The tongue and trough are painted
matt black, a little Jampblack in weak alco-
holic shellac answering for this purpose. The
interior of the box need, not be painted,
although a white coat affords a better view of
manipulations in the interior.

To view what is going on inside the box two
small windows are provided at the level of the
eye when the box is set on a table. The window
in front is of clear ruby photo-safe glass, the
one opposite is either of ruby glass or trans-
lucent ruby fabric. Behind the rear window
is placed an electric bulb operated by a switch
inside. Another inside switch controls a socket
on one wall which may interchangeably have a
low eandle-power light for lantern slide making
or a high power light for exposing develop-
ment papers. <A shelf located midway across
the end is an added convenience. The entire
cost for materials is five dollars; a few hours
of labor can construct the box.

A secret of continued success in using this
small darkroom is to keep hypo away and thus
avoid contamination. This is possible by hav-
ing a tray containing weak acetie acid, about
2 per cent., into which is to be immersed
plates, slides, films or prints as fast as they
are developed. The acid checks the action of
the developer and permits the quick removal
of the light-sensitive materials from the de-
veloping box to the hypo bath outside without
danger of fogging. Developed material can be
left in the acid bath until it is convenient to
open the box.

The idea of a developing box is not new.
There are small developing tanks and boxes on
the market for daylight use by the time method
of development. Convenient changing bags of
cloth have long been employed by the traveler.
Developing boxes equipped with sleeves and
ruby glass are available with X-ray outfits.
Undoubtedly the urgency of the war period for
rapid photographic production led to the con-
struction of portable darkrooms. But the sim-
plicity, adaptability and convenience of the
above-described miniature darkroom are so
great that the writer will be pardoned, even

SCIENCE

537

though his discovery is not new, if this an-
nouncement will acquaint others with a worth-
while piece of equipment.
A. L. MELANDER
Stare COLLEGE of WASHINGTON

THE VALUE OF COST ACCOUNTING IN
ANALYTICAL AND CONSULTING
LABORATORIES
Tus subject has had very little, if any, eon-
sideration in the past. The probable reason
for this neglect appears to be the comparative-
ly small field for analytical and consulting

laboratories.

Through the long association with this field
the writer has worked out an elaborate system
of cost records which have proved most valu-
able in’ the determination of a fair price to
clients as well as a fair return to the owners.
This system produces such information as will
show what work is profitable and what kinds
of analytical tests are unprofitable; the reasons
for the profits or losses are readily revealed
after a persistent tabulation of the records.

The latter information serves to permit the
preparation of sliding scale prices, 2. e., for
one test, for ‘two tests, for three tests, ete. It
also reveals the comparative fluctuations in the
costs on a given test. This variation in costs
should always be treated with the utmost eare,
as when a worker becomes so proficient that he
does not require the assistance of any of the
usual factors in a laboratory, and finishes the
job in record time, the owner as well as the
client is entitled to a little of this efficieney in
dollars and cents. The owner should weigh
the costs in these cases against the reasons why
that worker is proficient in making these cer-
tain tests and allow himself leeway for either
the replacing of that man or the increasing of
his salary. An efficient and speedy worker
generally secures his knowledge by repetition
principally, by use of the owners’ books and the
supervision and advice of his chiefs. In other
words, the speed and efficiency of one worker
is not the only ‘basis for costs.

The costs when compiled in a comparative
form will readily show the variations, the
causes being numerous. Some of them are
represented in the unfamiliarity with the

538

methods of analysis, the necessity of preparing
the apparatus for the work, the difference im
wages and the necessity for accuracy and not
speed. The latter case appears when there
is a legal matter involved and several repeat
tests are made. ;

The costs are primarily based on the. pro-
ductive amount. Between the period when a
worker starts his job and when he finishes it
his time is estimated and placed on a card.
Each day he completes a Daily Time Report,
filling in the laboratory number, work done
and the estimated time required. It is im-
possible to accurately determine the amount of
time spent on the job, as from start to finish.
The reason. for this being the number of jobs
a worker can do at one time, namely, start
one and get that job in a condition where it
will work while he is away from it, in the mean-
time, start another, watching both at the same
time.

After the worker fills in his card it is ap-
proved by the man in charge and sent to the
accounting department daily. The department
chiefs and assistants are given cards which
permit them to record their time from start to
finish. The nature of jtheir work, which eon-
sists mainly in consultation work, permits a re-
cording of their time accurately.

The time cards of both the workers and chiefs
are then summarized by the addition of the per
hour rate, and the amounts chargeable to any
particular job are entered on a cost-ledger card.

The productive amount as shown on the cost
ledger card is increased by its proportionate
share of the overhead as determined by the dis-
tribution of overhead. Materials used are so
small in comparison with the other factors that
to determine the amount used on each job
would cost more than the results would war-
rant. The total amount of materials used, as
determined by a check against the inventory
on the yearly basis, is charged directly into
the overhead.

In the beginning it is necessary to appraise
the inventory as accurately as possible, also
the location of the various items as to depart-
ments. ‘The space occupied by each depart-
ment must be known so as to properly dis-
tribute the rent charges. The question of in-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

surance can be distributed according to its risk,
i. e., fire—on the basis of the inventory.

The value of this work is evidenced in more
than one direction. It presents a basis for
setting a figure for a fair price for analytical
and consulting work, a check on the comparison
of costs so as to quote on large amounts of
tests (viz., more than one at a time), keep a
close watch on the speed and efficiency of the
various workers, determine the value of un-
finished work, have a complete record at all
times of the costs of promotion of prospectives,
a perpetual record of the costs on contracts,
and the value of the various kinds of income
and their cost.

The difference in keeping these costs in a
laboratory is apparent within two to three
months after the installation. The operation
of these records does not require any large
force to keep it running and the time in pre-
paring the cards by the employes does not in
any way interfere with their regular work.

Frep W. FrvERBACHER

QUOTATIONS

PROTECTING SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH AT
THE POLLS

Av the polls in November, in California,
Colorado and Washington, scientific medicine
will be tried at the bar of public opinion. The
verdict will depend in part on public knowl-
edge of the attainments and conduet of physi-
cians in the past. The true physician, as attor-
ney for ‘the defense, will be actively campaign-
ing against the antis of all kinds, and he will
be especially active on election day, when the
case goes to the jury.

In Colorado and in California, the people
will decide by popular vote whether medical
research involving the use of living animals
shall be prevented. The ‘antivivisectionists in
these states, mistrusting or despising their
legislatures, are seeking, through the initiative,
to bring about the enactment of such measures
by playing on the ignorance and the emotions
of the people. No properly informed person
ean vote in favor of the antivivisectionist
measures proposed.

In Washington, the contest is being fought

Novemprr 10, 1922

under the referendum to restrict the activities
of the health authorities with respect to the
sanitary and hygienic control of the public
schools. The foes of scientific medicine, among
them those who even deny the existence of
disease, procured the passage of an act in 1921
granting to parents the privilege of forbidding
examination of their children in school by the
health authorities. The publie health forces of
the state, recognizing the danger to public
health inherent in this measure, have procured
its submission to the people, and it will be
voted on, November 7. The demand for this
uncivilized legislation was presumably due to
recognition, by the enemies of medical science,
that medical mysticism and quackery can not
thrive in a community enlightened with respect
to modern medicine, and that the public schools
constitute the great channel through which the
people can be enlightened and future genera-
tions gain from ithe past. In fact, opposition
to the rejection of this measure is an attempt
to destroy one of the most effective methods of
teaching facts concerning disease, namely, by
their active application in school administra-
tion.

In California, members of two of the cults
that now infest the medical underworld are
fighting through the initiative to free them-
selves from control. The liberal and fair-
minded provisions for licensing their practi-
tioners do not satisfy them. Chiropractors
have been defying the law, and, when convict-
ed and sentenced, have gone to jail rather than
pay fines, thus posing as martyrs. Appar-
ently neither cult will be satisfied by any
measure that does not allow it to pursue its
own course at its own sweet will.

The medical profession must see that no
ground ds lost to the enemies of scientific medi-
cine and particularly of preventive medicine.
The debt of the physician to his patient and
his community ean not be discharged by proxy.
Personal service, intelligently, enengetically and
loyally rendered, is absolutely essential to suc-
cess, if the results of the contest are to ‘be cer-
tain and complete. Every physician in each
of the communities now laboring under the
threat of this dangerous legislation should de-

SCIENCE

539

vote an hour or two each day between now
and election to enlightening his patients and
friends, to informing them as to what is right
and to urging them to act on behalf of the
right. Thus he will not only be doing his
proper part as a true physician but also as a
good citizen—Journal of the American Med-
cal Association.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

Applied Colloid Chemistry: General Theory.
By Wiper D. Bancrort, professor of phys-
ical chemistry at Cornell University. First
edition (1921), International Chemical Se-
ries. H. P. Talbot, consulting editor.
McGraw-Hill Book Company, Inc, New
York.

In this volume Professor Bancroft professes
to deal with the general theory of colloidal
solutions in a new way; he says, “I have
written this book deduetively.” By this one is
led to understand that the author sets out to
deal with general principles which later may
be applied to the particular case involved in
the. study of colloidal solutions. One should
not, then, object that colloidal solution is hardly
mentioned in the first third of the book.

In carrying out his plan, the author devotes
the first three chapters—or considerably more
than one third of the book—to the treatment of
the phenomena of absorption in all its phases.
This subject is dealt with in the encyclopedic
manner so frequently found in German texts,
but the style 1s illuminated and made interest-
ing by that piquaney of suggestion and com-
ment which makes Professor Baneroft’s lec-
tures and papers especially attractive. Un-
doubtedly there is here a valuable summary of
the present state of our knowledge of absorp-
tion; if any criticism is to be offered, it is tiat
some of the matters dealt with, while im-
portant from the point of view of general ab-
sorption phenomena, seem to have very little
application to the study of colloidal solutions:
as, for example, the outlines of various com-
mercial chemical operations at the end of
the first chapter.

The fourth chapter is devoted to surface
tension and the Brownian movement. After

540

the minute attention devoted to absorption it is
a disappointment that such a meagre treatment
is given of the general relations involved under
the head of surface tension. This treatment is
confined practically to dealing with the appli-
cation of the Willard Gibbs surface concentra-
tion law to colloidal particles. One wonders
why the Brownian movement phenomenon is
attached to this chapter as. there is given merely
a sketchy account which would fit in better
under the chapter dealing with “properties of
colloidal solutions.”

The remaining chapter (V) of the general
theory is on “coalescence.” This chapter ap-
peals to one as ideal in its scope in that it
fulfils the aim iaid down by the author in his
preface. General phenomena are adequately
treated and the application to colloidal work is
admirably clinched at its close.

Thus slightly more than one half of the book
is devoted to a more or less general treatment
of absorption, surface tension, Brownian move-
ment and coalescence. The remainder deals
with the preparation and peculiar properties
of the following classes of colloidal solutions:
(1) suspensoids (Ch. VI and VII); (2) emul-
soids (Ch. VIII and IX); (3) non-aqueous
colloidal solutions (Ch. X); (4) fog and smoke
(Ch. XI); and (5) solid colloidal solutions
(Ch. XII). The last chapter (XIII) contains
a card catalog account of the thickness of films.

The chapter on the properties of colloidal
solutions seems to be quite inadequate for a
volume which professes to be a complete treat-
ment of the general theory. While many inter-
esting facts regarding these solutions are given,
there is a lack of logical method and per-
spective in their arrangement. For example,
a rather long and intrinsically interesting sec-
tion is devoted to color phenomena; but the
colloidal chemist will hardly admit that this
particular property is as important as the elec-
trical properties of these solutions or as the
phenomenon of coagulation by electrolytes,
each of which is given rather less space.

Perusal of the chapter on gelatinous pre-
cipitates and jellies justifies the author’s state-
ment in the preface that there is not much
known about these materials. What is known
is given in a very readable shape. More might

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

have been given regarding the evidences of the
existence of a structure in protein solutions as
outlined by Professor Brailsford Robertson.
It is interesting to have the criticism of a
physical chemist on the recent work of Loeb,
as given in this chapter.

The remainder of the book consists in gen-
eral of an eneyclopedic account of experi-
mental facts regarding emulsions, foams, fog
and smoke: regarding this phase of colloidal
work there is known very little more than a
series of interesting, but more or less detached,
experiments, coupled with some very important
commercial applications such as ore flotation
and the Cottrell process. It is sometimes an-
noying to find the practical application of ex-
perimental facts so far in advance of our the-
oretical knowledge of their causes.

The book can be recommended as a mine of
information on most of the subjects dealt with.
However, from the point of view of an attempt
to give a final treatment of the general theory
of colloidal solutions it is rather disappointing.
Such a general treatise demands not only the
excellent treatment here given of absorption
phenomena but just as ample treatment of such
questions as (1) the relation of surface tension
phenomena to small divisions of matter, (2)
the Brownian movement of small particles, (3)
the electrical charges of small suspended parti-
cles, electro-endosmose phenomena, and coagu-
lation of electrolytes, and, say, (4) the physical
properties of jellies. One would be justified
in expecting in addition an attempt to account
for the limiting size attained by these particles
in suspension in any given case. In fact one
can hardly say “the general theory of the sub-
ject once cleared up” with the conviction that
such a desirable state of affairs is yet accom-
plished.

As is true with all the volumes of this series
(International Chemical Series), the workman-
ship is excellent, the references very ample,
and the appearance of the whole very attractive
indeed. This particular volume will be read
with interest and pleasure.

E. F. Burton

UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO,

CANADA,
OcrosEr 14, 1922

NovEeMBER 10, 1922]

SPECIAL ARTICLES
THE ORDER OF SCIENTIFIC MERIT

In selecting groups of one thousand Amer-
icean'men of science for statistical study in
1903 and 1909, the workers in each of twelve
sciences were arranged in the order of merit for
their work \by ten of their leading colleagues.
The average positions gave the order, and, as
there were ten observations of the position of
each individual, its probable error could be eal-
culated.

As the writer of this paper is a psychologist
and the ultimate object of the work is the study
of behavior with a view to advancing scientific
research, the psychologists may be used for
illustrations of method. William James was
placed first in 1903 by the independent judg-
ment of each of the ten observers. The psy-
chologist who stood second had an average po-
sition of 3.7 with a probable error of 0.5; the
chances are even that his position was between
3.2 and 4.2. The psychologists who stood
third, fourth and fifth were assigned, respect-
ively, positions of 4.0, 4.4 and 7.5, with prob-
able errors of 0.5, 0.6 and 1.0. It follows that
the relative order of Nos. II, IIT and IV is not
determined definitely, whereas the chances are
some 10,000 to 1 that each of these stood below
No. I and above No. V. The probable errors
increase in size as the work of the men becomes
less significant; it is on the average 0.65 places
for the first ten of the fifty psychologists and
10.7 places for the last ten. Consequently No.
XL on the list would have about one chance in
four of falling out of the group of fifty, if the
number participating in the arrangement had
been very large.

The figures determine not only the validity
of the positions, ‘but also the differences in
scientific merit among the psychologists, these
varying inversely as the probable errors. As
men who are about 6 ft. 2 in. tall are likely to
differ from each other about ten times as much
as men who are about 5 ft. 8 in. tall, so the
more distinguished scientific men at the top of
the list differ from each other about ten times
as much as those toward the bottom, and a unit

1ScrencE, November 23, November 30 and
December 6, 1906, ‘‘American Men of Science,’’
The Science Press, 1910.

SCIENCE

041

can be adopted for measuring the differesces.
This method for converting relative positions
into degrees of quantitative differences, which
was first used by the writer? to measure sub-
jective differences in the intensity of lights has
proved to be of wide application.

For a third selection of our thousand leading
men of science it seemed desirable, in order to
avoid the inbreeding that might occur through
selection by a limited group, to obtain a gen-
eral vote from those competent, and, as before,
the new methodological problems have proved
to be of interest. The validity of votes appears
not to have ‘been considered, yet the problem is
wide-reaching and is closely related to the
drawing of balls from an urn, which has
largely occupied students of the theory of
probabilities.

If, for example, the council of the American
Psychological Association, which consists of
eight members, decides without consultation in
favor of a given measure by a vote of 6 to 2,
how likely is this ‘to represent -the majority
opinion of the 432 members? We do not know
the distribution of this “population,” but if
from an urn containing 216 white and 216 black
balls, 8 are drawn, the chances are about one in

‘nine that 6 will be white and about one in

seven that 6 or more will be white. These may
be regarded as approximately the chances that
when the membership is about evenly divided a
vote of that character will be obtained from
the council; and on this basis the desirability
of a plebiscite vote may be decided.

In 1916 Mr. Wilson was elected president by
the vote in California, which was in his favor
by 466,300 to 462,394, giving him a majority
of 3,906. It might be supposed that this small
majority would readily have been reversed by
an indefinitely large electorate, but if the pop-
ulation were equally divided this would prob-
ably occur only once if an election were held
every day for a hundred years.

If the members of a jury reached their deci-

2 Philosophische Studien, 1902. See also
“*Studies by the Method of Relative Position,’’
H. L. Hollingworth, in ‘‘The Psychological Re-
searches of James McKeen Cattell,’’ a review by
some of his pupils, on the occasion of the twenty-
fifth anniversary of his professorship. New
York, 1914.

542

sion without consultation and stood eleven to
one for conviction, many would conclude that
the chances are eleven to one that the defendant
is guilty. As a matter of fact if the total pop-
ulation is divided in the same ratio and the
legal fiction is followed that a man is proved
guilty or innocent only by unanimous vote of
twelve peers, the chance of obtaining a jury
which without consultation will be unanimous
for conviction are about one in three, of ob-
taining a jury unanimous for acquittal, only
one in many billions. The practise of the
courts must ultimately adjust itself to such con-
ditions, and learn whether the unanimous vote
of three or five jurymen without consultation
is more or less valid than the unanimous vote
of twelve after consultation. It must be de-
cided on what probabilities a man shail be con-
victed and to what extent the chances of inno-
cence shall be considered in imposing sentence.

When our rulers are selected and their legis-
lation is determined by votes, it seems strange
that knowledge concerning the variable and
constant errors is so completely lacking. <A
decision of the supreme court, which may
involve the welfare of hundreds of thousands
of children or taxation amounting to billions of
dollars, is equally binding whether the vote is
unanimous or by a majority of one. It would
apparently ibe as reasonable to require a three
fourths vote of the supreme court to invalidate
a law passed by both houses of the congress
and signed by the president, as to require a
unanimous vote of a jury to award petty dam-
ages.

The method of voting used to select scientific
men might have useful applications in indus-
try. For example, if a bank employs 100
clexks, some of whom will be promoted from
time to time, all of them might be asked to
check the fifty per cent. and the five per cent.
most deserving of promotion. I'rom the rec-
ords an order of merit for promotion would be
obtained, together with the relative value ot
the men to the bank and the salaries deserved.
The data would also throw light on those
voting, for the value of the judgment of each
is measured by its departure from the average;
if any were prejudiced or unfair in their treat-
ment of friends or rivals this would be dis-

SCIENCE

{Vou. LVI, No. 1454

covered. The combined judgment of associates
is probably a more valid method of selection
than the choice of a superior and would pre-
sumably lead to better service.

In hke manner a group of factory workers
or of laboring men might select a boss or
leader ‘by vote. If the employer would agree
to take one of the five men receiving the most
votes, the employees would understand and
probably approve the method. Not only would
a good selection free from favoritism be made,
but the men would share in the control of their
work and would be more loyal and more effi-
cient.

The writer has proposed a compromise be-
tween ‘the competitive and the semi-communis-
tic systems for payment of the salaries of uni-
versity professors, according to which, say, five
super-professorships with relatively large
salaries and large freedom should be estab-
lished. The difficulty under our present
method is that the appointments would be by
favor of the administration. If, however, a
vote of the teachers in the university, and per-
haps of the students, were taken on the basis
of desert for research, teaching and service, a
meihod of selection would be used probably

‘more accurate than the choice of the president

and at the same time more conducive to co-
operation and goodwill.

In the selection by votes of one thousand sci-
entific men the same number for each of the
twelve sciences was retained as in the two pre-
vious studies, this being nearly proportional to
the total number of workers in each science.
In the first edition of “American Men of
Science” there were listed about 4,000 scien-
tific men, in the second edition about 5,500,
and in the present edition, published some fif-
teen years after the first, the number is about
9,600. The present writer was in 1888 the
only professor of psychology in the world. The
number of members of the American Psycho-
logieal Association, which has a professional
qualification, increased from 127 in 1903, when
the first selection was made, to 432 in 1920.
The average number of doctorates conferred in
psychology during the five years prior to 1903
was 12.6; it was 40 in 1920. Competition for
inclusion among our fifty leading psycholo-

November 10, 1922]

TOM Om ere ee G
THE DISTRIBUTION OF VOTES FOR GNE HUNDRED PSYCHOLOGISTS

gists or among our thousand leading men of
science is thus much more severe at present
than was the case when the selections were first
made. There are -now about 500. working
psychologists and about 10,000 scientific men
in the United States; the present selection con-
sists approximately of those who form in each
science the upper tenth in merit of their work.

In the case of the psychologists, here used
as an example, those in the two earher groups
of fifty (except five no longer oecupied with
psychology or no longer residents of the United
States), numbering 48, were asked to send the
names of 10 or a smaller number of others
whose work warranted their inclusion in such
a group. Then those who received two or
more nominations were in like manner asked
to propose 10 or fewer names.. The 52 wh
received the most votes were added to the
original 48 to form a group of 100. These
names were placed in alphabetical order on a
list, which was sent to them all, with the re-
quest to “check (./) about 50 (namely, about
one half) of the names to indicate those who

SCIENCE li

ro) 60 70 80 $0

543

100

have done the best work in psychology, placing
a double check (1/1) before about five of
those whose work has been the most impor-
tant.” Highty-three (besides one who replied
too late) of the 100 returned the blank and, as
cach was asked not to consider himself, there
were 82 votes. When more than five double
‘ks were assigned they were weighted in-
versely as the number. The result of the votes
ean be conveniently shown by curves such as
are here reproduced. The middle curve gives
the distribution of the 82 votes for the 100
psychologists, the vertical ordinates repre-
senting the number of votes, while the indi-
viduals are ranged serially along the hori-
zontal axis. The bottom curve shows the num-
ber of double cheeks for each individual,
namely, the opinion that he is one of the five
psychologists whose work is the most im-
portant. The top curve represents the sum of
two votes, and the individuals are arranged in
order in accordance with this vote.%

Che

® Similar results have heen obtained in each of
the twelve sciences, the number of scientific men

544

As indicated on the eurve and shown on the
tables (which it seems unnecessary in this place
to print) two and only two psychologists were
included among ‘the fifty leading psychologists
by unanimous vote of their eighty-two col-
leagues. The psychologist at the bottom of
the fifty received 35 votes; three were given
for the psychologist who stands last in the
hundred. Sixty-two of the 82 voting include
among the five whose work has been most im-
portant the two psychologists who received a
unanimous vote for inclusion among the fifty
and 20 do not. Such differences in judgment
are legitimate and significant. Thus the psy-
chologist placed eleventh is held by 22 of his
colleagues to belong to the first five and by 21
not to belong to the group of 50, and similar
conditions obtained for the one placed twen-
tieth. The names could be guessed by one
familiar with the situation. They are men of
distinction whose more important work is by
some judged not to fall within the field of
psychology.

The attitude of those voting is of scientific
significance, for it measures the validity of
judgments. If we assume the average judg-
ment of the 82 psychologists to be nearly cor-
rect, the departure from this average measures
the competence of the individuals to form such
judgments. There do not appear to be group
differences dependent on distinction or age,

ranging from 175 chemists to 20 anthropologists.
The returns, however, were most complete for
psychology, the writer being personally aequaint-
ed with nearly all psychologists and a second
request having been sent to those who did not
reply to the first. There were in all some 130,000
votes to be collected, counted and tabulated. For
the treatment of this material I am mainly
indebted to my daughter, Miss Psyche Cattell.
Dr. Dean R. Brimhall and Dr. Alexander Wein-
stein have also assisted in the revision of the
material and in the computations.

I am under very great obligations to Professor
Raymond L. Pearl, of the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, and to Professor H. L. Rietz, of the State
University of Iowa, for their kindness in reading
the manuscript of the paper and for the useful
suggestions that they have made. This acknowl-
edgment should not, of course, be construed as
involving responsibility on their part.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

but individuals, as shown in the previous study,
differ in the ratio of about two to one.
There will be an extraordinary change in
our attitude toward political, social and busi-
ness problems when we learn to look upon our
observations, recollections, beliefs and judg-
ments objectively, measuring the probability of
their correctness and assigning probable errors
to them.

The top curve represents the sum of the two
votes and the order there given is the one used.
A different weighting of the two votes would
not considerably affect the order. The vote for
the five leading psychologists in the main dis-
criminates only the positions of the men in the
upper quartile. In place of the double vote
for the five and the fifty per cent. of the 100
psychologists whose work has the most merit, a
satisfactory distribution might be obtained by
a vote for 25, or one fourth of the whole num-
ber. In view of the constant use of votes for
elections and decisions, the problems involved
deserve more complete investigation.

A probable error can be found for the posi-
tions of the individuals by a method that was
apparently first used by the present writer.
When eighty of those voting are divided into
ten groups of eight each, we have the separate
votes of each of these groups and from their
variation the probable error of the average vote
can be ealeulated. Thus the-psychologist No. L,
in the ten groups of eight votes each received,
respectively, 4, 4, 2, 1, 4, 7, 4, 3, 2, and 2 votes.
The probalble error is 0.363, and for the group
of eighty votes it is 3.63. The position on the
curve assigned by each of the small groups can
also be found and a probable error caleulated
from these ten positions.

The probable errors based on 80 votes (as a
rule for each fifth individual) are indicated by
the broken vertical line on the curve and when
referred to the order of merit by the broken
horizontal lines. The probable errors of the
votes of the five psychologists last in the fifty
are, respectively, 3.4, 2.8, 2.8, 3.1 and 3.6, an
average of 3.14. The curve from No. X to
No. C is nearly a straight line, the vote de-
creasing from 79 for No. X to 3 for No. ©.
Consequently the probable error of the vote
when referred ‘to the order is increased by

Novrmsrmr 1@, 1922]

about one sixth. The probable error of posi-
tion at the bottom of the group of fifty is 3.6;
there are thus only three or four for whom
there would be as much as one chance in four
of being dropped from the list if the arrange-
ment were made by an indefinitely large elec-
torate of the same character.

In the first study of the psychologists, the
probable error at ‘the lower end of the fifty
was 10.7, that is, there were 10 or 11 for whom
there was one chance in four that they should
not be included on the list. There were then
ten arrangements in order of merit; now ‘there
are eighty votes. The probable error decreases
as the square root of the number of observa-
tions, and the probable errors in ithe two cases,
other things being equal, should be about as
3:1, which is in fact almost exactly the case.
The probable error of a single vote for the
psychologists low in the group of fifty at the
present ‘time is thus the same as by order of
merit in the group of 1903.

In the first study, however, we were con-
cerned with the upper quartile, and we are
now concerned with the upper decile of the
group of American psychologists. If we as-
swine distributions in accordance with the curve
of error, the men who now stand at the bottom
of the fifty in the present selection will be as
able as those who stood about twenty in the
An examination of the rela-

first arrangement.
tive positions of the individuals who are in
each of the two arrangements indicates that
this tends to be the case. The probable error
at the bottom of the fifty selected by votes
should be in the neighborhood of those who
stood about twenty in the first arrangements.
This would make a single vote one half as
valid (the ratio of the probable errors in the
first arrangement for those near the bottom of
the fourth hundred and in the tenth hundred
of the thousand being 64:125) as a single
judgment of order of merit. The figures given
should, however, be regarded as indications of
method rather than as exact determinations,
for they are subject to various errors.

The average position oi the survivors of the
first group of psychologists in the arrangement
of 1903 was (after deaths have been eliminated)
4; it is now for the same individuals 14.8.

SCIENCE

o45

Those in the four following groups of ten have
dropped, respectively, from 11.5 to 18.1; 20 to
27.4; 29.5 to 59.2, and 39.5 to 64.9. This
dvop in position is on ‘the average less than
would be expected if the 10,000 scientific men
of to-day are as able and have as good oppor-
tunity as the 4,000 scientific men of 1903. The
inference is that as the total number increases
the proportion of men of distinction decreases.
This may be due to the faet that men of special
ability find their level apart from the size of
the group ox ‘because the scientific career
attracts less able men or gives them less oppor-
tunity than formerly. Both factors ave prob-
ably present; it is apparent that the situation
deserves further investigation. In the pre-

‘vious study it was shown thait in the increased

competition of a five-year period, those between
40 and 44 years of age remained on the average
about stationary; those below 40 gained; those
above 44 lost, the loss being in direct propor-
tion to the age.

As the work of the men becomes more im-
portant, the differences between the indi-
viduals as measured by the probable error of
position become greater, the distribution cor-
responding in a general way to the upper end
of ithe curve of error. In the case of the votes
there are complications, for the votes for dif-
ferent men do not have the same weight. The
ten who receive the most votes receive nearly
all the votes, and in the cases of the few who
do not vote for them poor judgment or an error
in checking is indicated. Some votes mean that
a psychologist stands first or near the top of the
list, whereas others mean that he is barely
included. Consequently the order and the
probable errors in the case of such a vote for
one half of the group do not have great validity
for the upper part of the distribution. The
order is obtained in a satisfactory manner by
the double vote, but this introduces further
complieations in the probable error. In all
cases of votes, we have asymmetrical distribu-
tions and skew curves. The quantitative rela-
tions should be worked out in the first instance
for less complicated material than that with
which we are here concerned.

In nearly all cases in which probable errors
have been applied to psychological data, the

546

determinations are more exact than common
sense would presuppose. Thus the writer
found* that in grading traits of character by
ten individuals on a seale of 100, a position was
assigned with probable errors varying from
4.6 for physical health and cheerfulness to 3
for originality and efficiency. All other traits,
such as energy, courage, judgment and integ-
rity, were assigned positions with intermediate
probable errors, the average being 4, which is
nearly the same as the probable error of posi-
tion as determined by 80 votes of the psycholo-
gists near the middle of the 100 in order of
merit.

The comparatively small probable errors ap-
pear to be due to the fact that there are con-
stant errors which affect the whole group. The
psychologists who vote are subject to the same
kind of influences, not making in fact inde-
pendent judgments, -but being influenced as a
group by the knowledge of what others think
and by all sorts of conditions, conventions and
restrictions. If a similar vote were taken ten
years hence the work of the same psychologists
would be viewed from new standpoints and the
positions would change to a much greater de-
gree than the probable errors warrant. ‘“Con-
stant” errors are in fact more inconstant and
variable than “variable” errors.

In the case of a vote (as in any series of
measurements) there are two factors entering
into the probable error, one dependent on the
quantitative conditions prescribed in advanee,
the other on the behavior of the individuals.
The former may be called the deductive prob-
able error and when the latter is determined by
experiment and added to it the whole is the
inductive or actual probable error. Thus, if
from an indefinitely large number of balls
equally distributed between black and white,
some are drawn, the most frequent distribution
will be an equal number of black and white,
but the average departure from equality will
increase as the square root of the number
dvawn and the ratio of departure from equality
will decrease as the square root of the number.

If large numbers of white and black balls are

+ Address of the president of the American
Society of Naturalists, Screncr, April 10, 1903.

SCIENCE

[ Von. LVI, No. 1454

distributed in ithe ratio of 33 white to 47 black,
and we draw 80 balls, the most probable num-
ber of white balls will be 33. The standard
deviation from 33 in a large number of draws
will be 4.40, and the quartile deviation or prob-
able error will be 2.97; ‘that is, in one case out
of four there will be more than three white
balls. The psychologist at the bottom of the
fifty received 33 votes out of a possible 80. If
an indefinitely large number of psychologists
were distributed in ratio the deductive
probable error or error of sampling would be
2.97. The actual probable error, namely, 3.63,
is composed of (the square root of the sum of
the squares of the two) this deductive probable
error and an error or deviation due to the
groupings of the psychologists into different
as The

this

species” with different points of view.
psychologist who stood XIL had a probable
error of 3.1. The deductive probable errors
are approximately the same for the two indi-
viduals, but it is more difficult to form a judg-
ment regarding No. L than regarding No. XIL.®

The situation may be illustrated by an in-
stance of general importance. Death rates,
birth rates and marriage rates are continually
used, but always without probable errors.
Thus, for example, the Bureau of the Census
issues weekly a bulletin that contains the death
rates of the leading cities of the United States,
but the figures have no meaning because one
does not know whether the different rates are
due to chance fluctuations with a limited popu-
lation or to causes such as a large proportion
of infants or an epidemic of influenza.© If the

5In these cases the actual and the deductive
probable errors have probable errors of the order
of magnitude of the differences between them,
and these differences have only moderate validity.
The writer has purposely ‘‘not minded his p’s
and his q’s,’’ for it seems that equations are not
becoming to one who is not a mathematician.

6In the last report received (for the week end-
ing September 2, 1922) the death rate of New
Haven is given as 5.8 and of Houston as 13.9. In
the same week a year ago the death rate of New
Haven was 10 and of Houston 7.6. Without
probable these figures give no useful
information in regard to the conditions in the two

errors

cities.

-NovEMBER 10, 1922)

caverage death rate is 12 per thousand, in a city
‘of 100,000 population there will be about 23
deaths in a week. If ‘black and white balls in
indefinitely large numbers are distributed in
the ratio of 23 black to 99,977 white and
100,000 are drawn, the most probable number
-of black balls is 23, but one time in four there
will be more than 27. Thus the recorded death
rate for a week for a city of 100,000 will nor-
mally fluctuate. If it is on the average 12, it
will in half the weeks be approximately either
cas lange as 15 or as small as 9.

If the death rate exceeds 15 in two consecu-
tive weeks then the chances are fifteen out of
sixteen that it is due to some cause such as an
‘epidemic. The conditions are obviously of
practical importance for physicians and health
-officers. The situation for death rates is nicely
illustrated by the illustration that has been
used of the distribution of black and white
alls in an urn. If the population of the
‘country were 100,000,000 and the death rate
were 12 (as it should be, but is not), then

1,200,000 people would die during a year. °

Among 100,000,000 black and white balls there
are 1,200,000 black. But if we draw 100,000

(i. e., take a town of that population) there:

swill be a chance fluctuation as described above.
It is also the case that the balls are not com-
yletely mixed, there being more black balls in
‘some part of the urn than others. In some
solaces we shall draw a larger proportion of
‘black balls. When there is a negro population
«ov a tenement house population or a large pop-
ulation of very young or very old people, there
care relatively more black balls. There are tem-
porarily more black balls in one place when
there is an epidemie or the like. In that case
we have the analogy of the black balls attract-
dng one another.

This paper has been written to explain the
methods used to select the thousand leading
American men of science by votes. The psy-
-chologists have been taken as an example; if
space and time permitted tables and curves
might be given for the other sciences and a
study of the data might yield results of inter-
‘est. Such treatment must, however, be post-
poned or left to others. The object of the

SCIENCE

547

present paper will be accomplished if it makes
clear that the scientific men have been selected
and placed in the order of merit for their work
by valid objective methods and that the meth-
ods used have wide application. In a subse-
quent paper the distribution of the scientific
men will be considered with special reference
to the changes that have occurred in the course
of ten years,
J. McKurn Carrera
THE PSYCHOLOGICAL CORPORATION,
Aveust 1, 1922

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY
(Continued )
DIVISION OF LEATHER CHEMISTRY
John Arthur Wilson, chairman
Arthur W. Thomas, secretary

The mechanism of unhairing: JOHN ARTHUR
Witson and Guipo Daus. A series of detailed
studies was made of the mechanism of the unhair-
ing of skins by means of the sweating process,
lime liquors and caustic sulfide liquors. Sections
of skin were examined under the microscope at
different stages. In liming and in sweating, the
first action on the skin itself is the hydrolysis of
the epithelial cells of the Malpighian layer of the
epidermis, once the cells are destroyed, the remain-
der of the epidermis, the hair and the sebaceous
and sudoriferous glands are completely separated
from the derma and can then be removed mechan-
ically. In the sulfide method, the alkali destroys
the corneous layer of the epidermis and the skin
appears to be freed from epidermal matters on its
surface long before the alkali has penetrated to
the depth of the hair bulbs. Where this method
has been employed, the hair bulbs are usually
found intact in the finished leather. The paper is
illustrated with photomicrographs.

Pancreatin as an unhairing agent: JOHN
Arruur Wi~son and Apert F. GALLUN, JR.
When ealf skin is swollen in dilute caustic soda,
neutralized with sodium bicarbonate, and then
put into a suitable solution of pancreatin at 25°
C. exposed to air, the hair is completely loosened
in 24 hours, but the action is not due to the
enzyme, since it is checked by covering the solu-
tions with a layer of toluene. At 40° a solution
of panereatin fails to cause a loosening of the
hair of fresh skin because the corneous layer of
the epidermis is impermeable to the enzyme and

348

thus prevents it from attacking the soft Mal-
pighian layer below. When a skin has previously
been swollen by acid or alkali, and the corneous
layer rendered softer and more permeable, a solu-
tion of pancreatin at 40°, even under toluene,
will not only destroy the Malpighian layer of the
epidermis and loosen the hair, but it will also dis-
solve the elastin fibers of the skin, thus effecting
both unhairing and bating in a single bath.

A study of the strength of proteolytic enzymes
in the process of bating: CHARLES S. HOLLANDER.
During comparative tests of bating with dung
bates and with pure enzymes, tests were made at
intervals of the strength of enzyme in the liquors,
by the casein method. The concentration varied
considerably with time in the case of the dung
but remained practically constant
enzyme preparations were used.

The hydrolysis of collagen by trypsin: ARTHUR
W. THomMas and FRANK L. Srxmour-Jonrs. It
is shown that collagen is readily digested by
trypsin under proper conditions, and that it is
unnecessary to subject collagen to chemical or
pepsin pretreatment in order to render it vul-
nerable to tryptic action. This refutes the gen-
erally accepted belief based on the statement of
Kuehne (1887) that trypsin can not hydrolyze
collagen.

The points of minimum plumping of calf skin:
JoHN ARTHUR WILSON and ALBERT F. GALLUN,
Jr. A study was made of the change in degree
of plumping of calf skin at different acidities
and alkalinities. There are two points of mini-
mum plumping, one occurring at a value of 5.1
and the other at 7.6 on the p,, scale. Available
data seem to indicate that these two points of
minimum represent two different forms of skin
protein, one stable only in acid solution and the
other in alkaline solution.

Direct determination of plumving power of tan
liquors: JOHN ArtHUR WuiLson and ALBERT F.
GALLUN, JR. The degree of plumping of skin in
a given tan liquor is measured by the ratio of its
resistance to compression when taken from the
tan liquor to its resistance to compression under
standard conditions. The method can be eon-
ducted with extreme sensitivity and is capable of

when pure

making the measurement in actual tannery prac-
tice.
Effect of hydrogen-ion concentration upon the

analysis of vegeleble tanning materials: JOHN
Artaur WILSON and ERwin J. Kern. The per

cent. of tannin found by the A. L. C. A. official
method increases with p,, value to a maximum at
8 and then decreases rapidly towards zero. On

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1454

the other hand, p,, value appears to have no.
effect upon the determination by the Wilson-Kern
method over the range 3.6 to 7.3, but the rate of
tanning of hide powder decreases rapidly with,
increasing p,, value above 7. The rate of filtra-
tion of tan liquors is markedly affected by change-
of p,, value, which may be attributed to changing
degrees of dispersion of some of the solid matter.
The addition of lime to tan liquors causes a pre-
cipitation of tannin,
above 7.2.

Stability of the hide-tannin compound at dif-
ferent p,, values: JOHN ARTHUR WILSON and
Erwin J. Kern. Leather is resistant to washing
in neutral or acid solutions, but is broken up into.
protein and tannin by alkaline solutions. The.
decomposition begins at p,, = 7.7 and proceeds
at an increasing rate as the p,, value is raised
above this value.

The concentration factor in the fixation of tan-
nins by hide substance: MarGarrt W. KELLY.
The relationship between degree of fixation of
tannin by hide substance and the concentration,
of the vegetable tanning liquors has been worked
out for a number of important extracts. Al!
show a steady increase in tannin fixed, as con-.
centration increases, up to a maximum tannage-
followed by a sharp drop in more concentrated
liquors.

The hydrogen-ion and time factors in the fixa-
tion of tannins by hide substance: MarGarrr W.
Keniy. The combination of vegetable tannins.
With hide substance is shown to depend upon the.
hydrogen-ion concentration of the liquor to a
most pronounced degree. Over a broad range of
hydrogen-ion concentration, an M-shaped tannage-
curve is obtained. In acid solutions the greatest
fixation is obtained at p,,t- = 2 to 3, falling off
at greater acidities. On the less acid side of
Py+ = 2 to 3, the fixation decreases to a mini-
mum at p,,+- = 5, the isoelectric point of col~
lagen, then increases to a second maximum at
Put = 8, and at greater alkalinities falls off

but only at p,, values.

approaching zero. The second maximum at
Pyt = 8 is much lower than the principal maxi- i
mum fixation at pj = 2 to 3. Explanation for-

this behavior is submitted in the original paper.

The influence of neutral salts wpon the fixation.
of tannins by hide substance: ARTHUR W.
PHOMAS and MarGarrer W. Kenty. Both sodium,
chloride and sodium sulfate decrease the fixation

of vegetable tannins by hide substance at
Pyt = 35 sodium sulfate to a greater extent than
sodium chloride. At p+ = 5, sodium chloride

in low concentrations promotes the fixation; at

NovemBer 10, 1922]

higher concentrations it inhibits fixation, as
sodium sulfate does at all concentrations. At

Pyt+ = §, both salts decrease the fixation, but
not to the same extent. Explanations for the
‘differences in behavior are given based on the
Donnan effect on the collagen and the action of
the salts in altering the degree of dispersion and
-diffusibility of the tannin particles.

The difference in kind or degree of tannin
fixation as a function of the hydrogen-ion con-
centration: ArrHuR W. THoMAS and MarGaret
W. Kenuty. It has been shown that after remoy-
ing all water soluble substances from freshly pre-
‘pared leather, treatment with aleohol will extract
Varying amounts of tannin depending upon the
hhydrogen-ion concentration at which the leather
was tanned. For example, hemlock and gambier
leathers tanned at p,,+ = 3 will yield about 25
per cent. of their fixed tannins to alcohol extrac-
tion, a smaller amount when tanned at Pyt = 4,
and practically none when tanned on the alkaline
side of p,,+ = 5. If the leathers are drastically
dried before alcohol extraction, very little alcohol
soluble matter is found. These preliminary ex-
periments are to be continued with the view of
‘throwing more light upon the differences in kind
‘or degree of tannage at differing hydrogen-ion
‘concentrations.

The tannin-gelatin reaction: ArtHuR W.
‘THOMAS and ALEXANDER FRieprn.. The mutual
precipitation of tannin and gelatin depends to a
very large degree upon the hydrogen-ion concen-
tration of the solution. It has been shown that
‘the gelatin-salt test for tannin is sensitive to one
part of tannin in 110,000 to 200,000 parts of
water, depending upon the source of the tannin,
und provided the hydrogen-ion concentration of
the solution is adjusted to its optimum. This
‘optimum varies with different extracts, ranging
from p,,+ = 3.5 to 45. The details are given
in the original paper. It is also shown that it is
unnecessary to prepare the gelatin-salt test
reagent daily. This reagent kept for two months
at summer temperature when covered with a
layer of toluene and its delicacy was not impaired
in that time. How much longer it would keep
is unknown. y

Ave vegetable tannins amphoteric? ArrHur W.
‘Tuomas and Sruarr B. Foster. Six common
vegetable tanning materials were investigated by
‘the electrophoresis method indicating that all are
amphoteric, i. e., changing from anodic migrating
to cathodic in the p,,+ range of 2.5 to 2.0. Hy-
drogen-ion concentration precipitation curves are
also given for the extracts studied.

SCIENCE

549

The practical color measurement of vegetable
tan liquors: R. O. PHinuips and L. R. Brown. It
is suggested that color measurements are best
made by tanning pieces of skin under standard
conditions.

The acidity of synthetic tans: S. Kony, J.
Brerpis and E. Crepe. The active principles of
most synthetic tans are sulfonic acids in the
preparation of which an excess of sulfuric acid
is used. It is relatively easy to find out whether
or not sufficient alkali has been added to nen-
tralize this excess. But sulfuric acid being
neither the sole nor the worst of the undesirable
ingredients occurring in some syntans, it is im-
portant to devise methods by which preparations
containing undesirable ingredients can be de-
tected. To the methods suggested previously a
new one is added which is based upon compara-
tive observations of the part played by the acidity
of syntans in the precipitation of gelatin.

The colloid chemistry of basie chromic solu-
tions: Prank L. Srymour-Jones. <A review of
the literature upon the nature of chromic solu-
tions showing their very complex and as yet un-
settled condition of solution. Ultrafiltration ex-
periments failed to show the presence of any col-
loidally dispersed chromium compound in the
ordinary single bath chrome liquor. The experi-
ments are preliminary in nature and further —
investigation is contemplated.

The electrophoresis of chromic solutions:
Frank LL. Srymour-Jones. The Thompson-
Atkin theory of chrome tanning, which postulates
a negatively charged chromium complex as the
tanning agent, is criticized and shown not to be
of general application, if at all, since chromie
solutions which did not show any evidence of
negatively charged chromium complexes tanned
hide powder. It is true, however, that in certain
basic solutions of chromic sulfate, part of the
chromium exists in a negatively charged complex,
while this does not occur in the basice chloride nor
yet chrome alum.

The interpretation of the influence of acid on
the osmotic pressure of protein solutions: JACQUES
Logs. When osmotic equilibrium is established
between a solution of casein and hydrochloric
acid enclosed in a collodion bag and an outside
aqueous solution free from protein, the hydrogen-
ion concentration is always greater in the outside
solution than in the ecdsein solution. The ob-
served osmotic pressure is accounted for quanti-
tatively by the difference in concentration of
hydrochloric acid in the two solutions, without
taking into consideration any possible osmotie

550 f
pressure of the casein itself. The observed poten-
tial difference between the two solutions in milli-
volts always has the numerical value equal to 59
times the difference in p,, value between the two
solutions at 24°, proving that the inequality in
Pj; Value is determined by Donnan’s equation for
membrane equilibria.

A preliminary study of a plunger type of jelly
strength tester: S. E. SHepparD and 8. S. Sweet.
In previous papers the authors have described an
instrument for measuring in absolute units the
rigidity of gelatin jellies. They have used the
results to check the performance of plunger types
of jelly strength testers. In these instruments a
plunger resting on the jelly is loaded to produce
a fixed arbitrary depression or distortion. The
authors have devised an instrument with a bal-
aneed beam, and continuous chainomatic loading.
Hence the load : deflection, or stress : strain
curves can be plotted for constant rate of loading.
The points investigated were: (1) Effect of
shape of plunger. It is found that with plungers
having a rounded base the area of contact varies
with the load, and unreliable load : deflection
curves are produced. The most satisfactory
plunger is a’ frustum of a cone, with the larger
base resting on the jelly surface. Families of
straight lines passing through the origin are ob-
tained in good agreement with Hooke’s law.
(2) Ratio of diameter of plunger to diameter of
yessel. Using plunger heads of above shape, this
ratio should be less than a certain value, or
spurious rigidity; hence spurious jelly strength
will be obtained. This is a function of the abso-
lute jelly strength (rigidity) so that comparisons
for grading may be vitiated. (3) Ratio of de-
pression to height of jelly. Similarly the depth
of jelly must be large compared with the depres-
These
recent

sion, using the same plunger diameter.
results are discussed in connection with
work on the structure of jellies.

On the non-isotropic swelling of thin sheets of
gelatin: S. E. Suppparp and 8S. 8. Swezr. By
coating definite amounts of gelatin solution of
various concentrations, ete., on suitably prepared
glass plates, after drying flat sheets of definite
thickness and area can be stripped off. The
swelling of these in water and aqueous solution
is not isotropic, %. ¢., not uniform in all directions,
but greatest for the thickness. It is found that
the ratio of volume increase to area increase dif-
fers for different gelatins, and also depends upon
the treatment, becoming lower, for example, on
hardening with formaldehyde.

The preparation of gelatin free from ash and

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

hydrolytic decomposition products: S. E. SHEP-~
PARD, Fenix A. Extiorr and Miss A. J. BENE-
pict. A 5 per cent. solution of commercial gela-
tin is electrolyzed in a cell of electrofiltros for-
three to four weeks, the salts passing through the.
cell into the electrode chambers. This reduces.
the ash to ca. 0.10 per cent. This deashed solu-
tion is then precipitated with acetone, thus re-.
moving hydrolytic decomposition products and;
further reducing the ash to ca. 0.01 per cent.
This gelatin is then redissolved in conduetivity-
water, chilled in sheets and dried. The reaction,
of a solution of such gelatin in solution is about
4.8 H-ion. This gelatin is useful for all research,
work on gelatin as well as providing a definite.
material for culture media which ean be brought
to any particular reaction with complete knowl.
edge of salts present.

The hygroscopicity of hide glues and the rela--
tion of tensile strength of glue to its moisture.
content: EK. BaTrMan and G. G. Town.

The two forms of gelatin and their isoelectric-
points: JOHN ARTHUR WiLSoN and Erwin J.
Kern. In a tenth-molar phosphate solution of-
increasing p,, value, gelatin shows two points of
minimum swelling, one at 4.7 and the other at
7.7. It is suggested that the two points of mini-
mum represent the isoelectric points of the gek
and sol forms of gelatine, respectively.

Some modern problems in leather chemistry :-
EpmMunp Stiasny. The striking feature of mod-.
ern research in leather chemistry is the entirely-
different point of view in the choice and treat-
ment of problems as compared with the period,
previous to ten years ago. The older experimenta-
tion was entirely from the standpoint of direct
practical investigation, while in pure research for-
the purpose of deep understanding of the pro-
cesses, entirely unfettered by any thought of im-
mediate practical utility, im which the entire.
structure of modern science is employed, activity
has become evident only within the past decade.
Professor Procter is the connecting link between
these two eras and the example set by him in his
scientific attitude is especially evident in the
United States. A few of the problems of timely
interest are the chemical nature of collagen, the
mechanism of bating and what is called the.
astringency of vegetable tannins. (The author
reviews the results: of his experimentation upon
these problems which will be published in full
later). The ultimate aim of all research in
leather chemistry is the widening and deepening
of our fundamental knowledge of this as yet
very undeveloped field.

NovemsBer 10, 1922]

DIVISION OF GAS AND FUEL CHEMISTRY
A. ©. Bieldner, chairman
R. 8S. McBripe, secretary

Chemistry of combustion: W. K. Lewis. The
present state of knowledge of combustion is re-
viewed, the field being divided into, first, com-
bustion within the fuel bed; second, distillation
of the volatile matter in the fuel; and, third, the
burning of the combustible gases over the fuel
bed. The composition of ‘the gases within the
fuel bed is discussed and the effect of increased
rate of combustion shown. The velocity of the
reaction of C plus Oy equals CO» is shown to be
dependent on the speed of diffusion and not on
the specific reaction rate. The modern concepts
of the combustion of hydrocarbons are also dis-
cussed.

Combustion of powdered coal: Wenry Kret-
SINGER and JOHN Buizarp. This paper considers
essential factors in burning powdered coal, and
gives a review of some tests carried out by the
U. S. Bureau of Mines and the Combustion En-
gineering Corporation. The size of the particles,
their motion relative to the surrounding air and
methods of bringing them into contact with fresh
supphes of air as they burn are discussed. <A
furnace and burner designed for burning pow-
dered coal are shown and the principles of the
design explained. The principal results of tests
carried out on a large boiler are shown graph-
ically.

Simultaneous combustion of CO and hydrogen:
‘R. T. Hasna. A review of the literature shows
that doubt exists whether the combustion of hy-
drogen and carbon monoxide is of the second or
third order. Experimental evidence is offered to

show that when canbon monoxide and hydrogen’

burn simultaneously with oxygen in free space
the combustion reactions are both trimolecular
and that the ratio of the reaction velocity con-

d
stants in the equation fae) = K,(CO)2(0o)
C
ad ; i ky pu
and —(H2) = M2(H»)?(O2) is — = 0.35.
dt To

Some aspects of combustion of gases: HEnry
L. REAp. }

A study of the water gas reactions: R. T. Has-
LAM, FP. L. Hircucock and BE. W. Rupow. The
action of steam on carbon through the tempera-
ture range of 650 degrees centigrade to 1200
degrees centigrade was studied by means of vary-
ing the pressure of the steam and results indi-
cated: First, that below 900 degrees the major
reactions are (B) C plus 2H.50 equals COs plus
25; (D) C plus CO,g equals 2CO; whereas above

SCIENCE

dol

900 degrees the reactions are (A) CG plus H.O
equals CO plus Hy; (B) C plus 2H.0 equals
CO» plus 2H,; (D) C plus CO, equals 200; sec-
ond, that the undecomposed steam is shown to be
the controlling factor in the CO and COs ratio
rather than the temperature at which reactions take
place; third, equations are given showing the per
cent. of COs as a function of the undecomposed
water; fourth, considering the rate of reaction (B)
as unity it was found that (A) at temperature be-
low 900 degrees centigrade reaction (A) is prae-
tically non-existent and that the velocity constant
of reaction (B) is 2.0; (B) at temperature above
900 degrees the velocity constant of reaction (A)
is 1.0 and that of (D) is 2.18,

Producer gas reactions: W. K. Lewis. Appli-
cation of equations in previous article (water gas
reactions—Haslam, Hitcheock and Rudow) show-
ing effect of temperature, steam-air ratio and
time of contact on composition of producer gas.

The combustion of gaseous fuels: Grorcre F.
Movunron. Gas fuels commonly distributed for
domestic and industrial purposes by gas ecompa-
nies vary in heating value from 450 to 1,100
B.T.U. per cubic foot. These gases vary in spe-
cifie gravity from 0.35 to 0.70, and the pressures
at which they are delivered to the consumer ’s
appliance vary from 2 to 12 inches of water.
The result of these large variations in heating
value, specific gravity and pressure is that the
manufacture of efficient gas appliances has been
greatly retarded; the knowledge of correct ad-
justment of appliances is very vague, and modi-
fication of existing standards of quality has been
made difficult because the effect of these changes
on quality of service, efficiency of utilization and
safety of operation has been difficult to deter-
mine. The range of operation of burners as well
as the efficiency that can be secured will depend
primarily on the characteristics of the flame.
This paper shows how these flame characteristics
are modified by a change of injection of primary
air which may be caused by variations in gas
rate, pressure, composition of gas, ete.

Combustion in engine cylinders: H. C. Drcx-
INsON. The process of combustion in engine
cylinders presents some very interesting problems
which demand a radical departure from the usual
methods of reasoning and experiment. When a
combustible mixture of gases burns at constant
volume no two successive portions of it are burned
at the same pressure or the same temperature or
at the time. The reactions do not take
place simultaneously throughout the mass and the

same

law of mass action does not apply, except to

infinitesimal clements of the charge. The times
involved are excessively short and it is doubtful
if chemical equilibrium is ever attained at any
point until the important phases of the process
are passed. The importance of the internal com-
bustion engine in the present scheme of things
demands much more precise knowledge of the
chemistry involved in its operation.

Tactors governing the seiection and use of fwel
for industrial heating operations: J. A. DoyLe.
This paper deals with factors governing the selec-
tion and use of fuels in the production of chem-
ical products subjected to the action of heat in
the process of manufacture. The necessity for
considering the physical form and chemical asso-
ciation of a given form of fuel, in addition to the
heating value of that fuel and the mechanical
characteristics of the appliance for generating,
applying and utilizing heat in the product is
stressed. The influence of excess air upon the
heating value of the different fuels, the com-
position of the atmosphere surrounding the mate-
rial to be heated, the changes in composition of
the combustible mixtures and the products of
combustion of the different fuels with varying
amounts of air are shown. ‘The influence of
process requirements and plant conditions upon
the choice of fuel is outlined. The above points
are illustrated by graphic: charts showing the
relation of the various factors and their influence
upon the final result. The paper is in substance
a plea for a broader consideration of the problem
of fuel utilization from the standpoint of the
quality and cost of the finished product, and the
necessity for developing a better understanding
on the part of those concerned with industrial
heating operations of the influence of the condi-
tions governing combustion upon the use of fuel
and the utilization of heat.

Methods of utilizing the coke produced by low
temperature carbonization of coal: Harry A.
Curis. The coke obtained by low temperature
carbonization of coal is soft, light and quite un-
suited for general use as a smokeless fuel. At-
tempts have been made to increase the density
of the coke by compressing the coking coal mass
in the retort, but these methods have not attained
commercial success. By pulverizing the soft coke
jt can be burned efficiently in powdered fuel
equipment, but preliminary tests of the fuel on a
Coxe stoker gave unsatisfactory results. By
grinding the coke, briquetting it and carbonizing
the briquets a very high grade smokeless fuel is
obtained, but the cost of these operations is high.

SCIENCE

_ temperature tars.

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454

The forms of suifur in coke—a physico-chemical
study of the sulfur held by carbon at high teim-
peratures: Aurrep R. Powernn. <A phase rule
study of the system, carbon-sulfur, at high tem-
peratures showed that the sulfur exists in two
distinctive forms: (1) a very stable form which
exhibits all the properties of a solid solution, and
(2) free sulfur physically absorbed by the earbon.
Coke may contain both of these forms in addition
to some sulfur combined with iron as ferrous sul-
fide. At temperatures in the neighborhood of
500° C. the ferrous sulfide of coke oxidizes very
readily in the presence of air to ferrie oxide and
free sulfur. This reaction seems to occur during
the quenching of coke and explains the disap-
pearance of rerrous sulfide from coke rather than
any reaction which occurs during the coking
process.

A specific apparatus for gases: Te R. Wry-
MouTH, R. P. ANDERSON and J. R. Fay. This
new device consists of a thin orifice and a small
capillary tube in series and makes use of the fact
that the differential pressure resulting from the
steam-line flow of gas through a capillary tube is
independent of the specific gravity of the gas
while the differential pressure resulting from the
flow of gas through a thin orifice varies directly
with the specific gravity of the gas. The flow of
gas through the orifice is kept constant by holding
a certain differential pressure on the capillary
tube and the differential pressure on the orifice
is calibrated to read specific gravity of the gas.

The examination of low-temperature coal tars:
JuRoME J. MorGsn and Rouanp P. Sovunn. A
critical review of the adaptability and limitations
of procedures available for examination of low-
The lower boiling phenols are
determined by Raschig’s nitration method to-
gether with methods based upon freezing point
and densities of binary and ternary mixtures.
Paraffins and naphthenes are freed from unsat-
urates and aromatics by 98 per cent. sulfuric
acid. The proportions of paraffins and naph-
thenes in their mixture are found from density-
boiling point curves.
tion non-saturated hydrocarbons are separated by
liquid sulfur dioxide. No method is known for
estimation of unsaturates in presence of aro-
matics.

The Becker combination coke oven: Haroup J.
Ross. The latest advance in by-product coke
oven design is represented by the Becker ecom-
bination oven, a modification of the Koppers oven.
Greater heating efficiency, better coke quality and

For qualitative examina-

Novemser 10, 1922]

increased strength of construction are obtained by
a novel design which provides for the heating and
tegeneration of the coke and pusher ends of each
oven as separate units. In this construction, gases
of combustion pass over the top of each oven and
down through the opposite flues of the same end,
instead of passing longitudinally to the end of
the same line of flues. Details of design will be
fully illustrated by means of lantern slides.

Methods for studying the macrostructure of
coke: Haroup J. Rosr. The study of the strue-
ture of coke has been greatly neglected, due
largely to the difficulties involved in preparing
specimens, and in satisfactorily reproducing the
structure photographically. This paper opens the
way to the comprehensive study of coke maero-
structure, by the use of novel methods. After
sectioning the coke, the author impregnates the
eut surface with a white hydraulically hardening
compound, after which it may be polished to any
desired degree. The excellent contrast of black
eoke with white impregnating compound makes
detailed study and reproduction an easy method.
Another novel method is the direct reproduction
of the coke surface as obtained by inking the
polished coke surface and printing with it on
enameled paper. The article is copiously illus-
trated with macrophotographs.

A new electric furnace for the determination of
the by-product yields of coal: Haroutp J. Rose.
The by-product yields obtainable from coal when
eoked in a by-product coke oven. may be deter-
mined by laboratory distillation tests. Since the
yield of by-products is seriously affected by small
variations in distillation conditions, the labora-
tory determination requires the most rigidly con-
trolled testing conditions. For this purpose a
furnace, consisting of a deep trough formed from
a number of U-shaped electrical heating units
with individual control, has keen developed, and
is in regular use for research and testing pur-
poses. Typical results: are given to show the
agreement of duplicate determinations made with
this apparatus. The furnace is described and
fully illustrated.

The combustion of coal which has been a long
time in storage: S. W. Parr and T. E. Layne.
It has been fairly well demonstrated that coal in
storage does not lose any appreciable number of
heat units. Previous investigations show the
seeming loss in B.T.U. to be due to a correspond-
ing increase of weight resulting from absorbed
However, when coal, especially fine ma-
terial which has been long in storage, is burned,
the result is very likely to show a low efficiency

oxygen.

SCIENCE

593

and indeed such coal sometimes seems to be un-
willing to burn at all. The results noted in this
paper account for the behavior of such coal to
be due to the fact that coal in the finer sizes,
especially coal of the mid-continental type, has a
very large absorptive capacity for oxygen, that,
because of the colloidal character of the coal sub-
stance such absorbed or adsorbed oxygen is held
so tenaciously that when discharged by heat it has
reached the combining stage and goes off as COs.
The blanketing effect of this gas over the fuel bed
results in a deadening of the fire and a loss of
efficiency.

A study of solvents for the separation of coal
into its type constituents: R. 8. FisHer with
S. W. Parr. The greatest advance in coal studies
during recent years has resulted from the use of
solvents which separate the coal into its type
constituents without decomposition of their chem-
ical structure. British and continental investiga-
tors have made much use of pyridine, which, how-
ever, seems to lack this prime requirement of a
true solvent in that it enters into chemical reac-
tion with certain of the coal constituents. The
work here described gives data in the use of ben-
zene, toluene and xylene, with methods for the
use of the latter solvent which excels all others
in the amount and completeness of removal of
the soluble material. This is a preliminary report
only as the work is being actively followed up be-
cause of the promise of larger yields more easily
recovered than by methods in vogue heretofore.

The softening point of coal—its determination
and ‘significance: T. E. Layne, W. 8. HawtHorNE
and A. W. CorrMAN, with 8. W. Parr. Refer-
ences to the softening point of coal are frequent
in fuel literature. The term heretofore has had
a very vague meaning. This paper describes a
method for its determination at once simple and
accurate. The interesting fact has been devel-
oped that under uniform conditions the softening
point repeats itself with marked constancy. More-
over, it is evidently a characteristic factor for
varying types of coal as also for coal which has
been for different lengths of time in storage.
That is to say, it is a value which runs parallel
with the oxygen content. No less striking is the
solidifying temperatures, which result in a curve
symmetrical with the range exhibited for the
softening-temperatures. Description of the ap-
paratus with results on numerous coals are given.
The results are exceedingly interesting and may
answer such questions as: What is the type of
coal? What would be its behavior in storage?
What kind of coke would it make and what modi-

do -

fication of existing methods would improve its
coking qualities? The report is preliminary only
and further experiments are in progress.

The fractional decomposition of coal and coal
components: S. W. Parr and T. BE. Layne. Next
to the fractionation of coal by solvents the frac-
tional decomposition of coal in its combined form
and also of its separate type constituents has
furnished the most valuable data concerning the
character of different types of coal and their be-
havior in the process of decomposition. Investi-
gators in this field heretofore have failed to ap-
preciate the significance of oxygen either com-
bined or absorbed, but especially the réle of the
oxygen held in some form of absorption. The
results as interpreted from the standpoint of this
investigation have an entirely new meaning and
are of fundamental importance in connection
with studies along the line of coal carbonization.

A proposed theory of coal carbonization: S. W.
Parr and T. E. Layne. This paper presents the
summarized results of the several contributory
lines of investigation on topics directly related to
the carbonization of coal. The evidence seems to
be conclusive that a correct theory for coal car-
bonization has yet to be written. It is not to be
inferred that its final formulation is attempted in
this paper. However, the results now in. hand
point out the general outline. The basic prin-
ciple seems to be that the bonding effect which
results in the production of a coherent mass is
due not only to the presence of bituminic mate-
rial, but to the absence or control of deleterious
products of decomposition from the cellulosic. sub-
stanee, which under certain conditions may
weaken or completely nullify the bonding prop-
erty of the bituminic bodies. The production of
coke is therefore not a simple matter of destrue-
tive decomposition of organic matter, but a
destructive decomposition accompanied by cross
reactions which may, under varying circumstances,
produce an altogether different result as to the
physical character of the final product. The
paper is a preliminary report only.

Utilization of gas at low pressures: ANNA P.
Warren. So much has been said about the use
of gas and so little information of practical value
to the domestic consumer is available that ex-
periments under actual home conditions are in
progress to determine the conditions necessary for
maximum thermal as well as practical efficiency
at the minimum pressure and rate of consump-
tion of gases varying in heating value from 1,150
B.T.U. to 500 B.T.U. per eubie foot. Up to the
present time, under standard conditions, natural

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1454
4

gas is the only commercial gaseous fuel that will
give relative high thermal as well as practical effi-
ciency undey. one ounce pressure.

Available hydrogen in coal and a direct method
for its estimation: JosrpH# D. Davis. Available
hydrogen, called ‘‘disponsible’’? hydrogen by
German writers, is hydrogen contained in coal in
excess of that required to satisfy the total oxygen
caleulated to water. It is customary to calculate
the available hydrogen of a coal from its ultimate
analysis. The method described in the paper is
volumetric. It is similar to that used for the
analysis of combustible gases wherein the slow
combustion pipette is used. The coal is burned #-
in a known volume of oxygen and the volume
contraction observed after the combustion has’
taken place is due to oxygen consumed in burn-
ing the available hydrogen to water.

Thermal operation of modern regenerator coke
ovens: D. W. Witson, H. O. Forrrst and C. H.
Herty, Jr. Briefly stated, there have been
included in this report: first, discussion of data
needed to show completely the thermal opera-
tion of a modern regenerator coke oven battery;
second, description of the experimental methods
employed to obtain the needed data together with
a table giving experimental figures obtained;
third, a table balancing total heat input against
total heat output is given, with a discussion of
this and a calculation of the efficiency of the
ovens; fourth, a so-called sensible heat balance
is tabulated, the net heat effect of the coking
process is discussed and the relation between the
sensible heat balance and the exothermicity of the
conversion from coal to coke is indicated.

Producer gas from powdered coal: R. T. Has-
LAM and L, Harris. Aside from the possibility
of using a low grade fuel, the use of powdered
coul for the manufacture of producer gas would
give a constant composition gas free from tar,
thus being easily cleaned, and the producer would
be flexible, rapidly handling changes im load up
to full capacity. As a result of experimental
work not yet completed a gas of 12.0 per cent.
CO and 7.0 per cent. COs has been generated.
Theoretical and experimental considerations show
that the main factors are, first, high temperature
in the combustion chamber (1,100-1,300° C.);
second, air for combustion highly pre-heated (900-
1,000° ©.); third, coal finely pulverized, and
fourth, air and coal well mixed together and so
maintained until the end of the reaction.

CHARLES ‘L. PARSONS,
Secretary

New SERIES
Vou. LVI, No. 1455

A Bausch & Lomb ° ou
BALOPTICON |

Fripay, NovEMBER 17, 1922

CIENCE

ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
SINGLE Copies, 15 Crs.

Sewsvtiiag, yp

Designed Especially for Schone:

YHE Model BC Balopticon
is an unusually practical
outfit for classrooms or me-
dium size school auditoriums,
as it can be used for long pro-
jection distances when neces-
sary. It is equipped with a
600-watt Mazda lamp, the
most powerful that can be at-

tached to an ordinary lamp
socket, so that it can be used
where only regular current is
available.

Operation is entirely au-
tomatic. The construction
throughout is of the same
high standard that character-
izes all Bausch & Lomb pro-
jection apparatus.

Bausch & Lomb Optical Company
409 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.

New York Washington

Chicago

San Francisco London

Leading American Makers of Optical! Measuring Instruments, Photomicrographic Apparatus, Photographic

Lenses, Microscopes, Projection Apparatus (Balopticons), Ophthalmic Lenses and _ Instruments,

Range Finders. and Gun-Sights for Army and

Navy, Searchlight Reflectors, Stereo-Prism

Binoculars, Telescopes, Magnifiers, Automobile Lenses and other High-Grade
Optical Products.

= ~ that eyes may i) sce.
= better in firth ter =

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

Earth Inductor «4 Dynamo
Analysis Apparatus

No. 1898 No. 2410

1898—EARTH INDUCTOR, New Design. The coil contains 1,000 turns of wire of
about 250 ohms resistance and is wound on a mahogany finished ring 22 cm. in diameter.
It is mounted so that pressing the release button causes the coil to quickly turn 180 de-
grees automatically by means of a strong spring. It is arrested at 180 degrees. This
automatic arrangement avoids the errors previously encountered due to not turning the
coil at uniform speed in separate determinations. This coil is mounted so that it may
be used in either a vertical or horizontal position and cut either component of the earth’s
field. All metal parts of brass or non-magnetic. Handsomely finished and very durably
made. With instruction sheets. }

2410—DYNAMO ANALYSIS APPARATUS. For showing the wave form of the
induced current when a coil rotates in the magnetic field. This instrument embodies
the ideal dynamo for showing induced current in the generator at any part of its revolu-
tion. It consists of very powerful horseshoe magnets mounted so as to produce an intense
and yet a uniform magnetic field within the space in which the coil is made to turn. By
means of the graduated arc the amount of current through a galvanometer can be
measured for each ten degrees of turning of the coil. This wiil show the gradual increase
of the generator electromotive force and its rise to a maximum and its decrease to zero
and the reversal in the other direction as a coil rotates. Very durably made, and hand-
somely finished, and a complete instrument for demonstrating this important principle.
Designed especially according to specifications of Millikan & Mills “Electricity, Sound and
Light,” Exp. 12. Length over ail about 30 cm. With instruction sheets outlining de-
tails of experiment. i

COMPLETE CATALOG OF PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY APPARATUS
CATALOG “GQ”

New edition 448 pages, including new Welch Specialties. Sent upon request. Give your official position.

ELC ELT See hon eo a
A Seon of Quality A Mark of Service

Jeu

W. M. -W. M. WELCH SCIENTIFIC COMPANY

Manufacturers, Importers and Exporters of
Laboratory Apparatus and School Supplies

1515 ORLEANS STREET CHICAGO, ILL., U.S.A.

IENC

Vou. LVI NovemMBer 17, 1922 No. 1455
CONTENTS

Changes of Latitude: Proressor R. H.

IDRO KOMEN, etn eee te eed te erro a terse mune Sec Rae 555
Conservation and Modern Life: Dr. JAMES

TS) pe Sy al mers 559
The Present Supply of Biological Stains:

VD Ya TE i i OLOMN asals See 562
Lowery Laymon Lewis: Dr. JOHN E. GUBER-

Topo ed ss i 2 A ei LSE eee ae oes 563
Scientific Events:

Precise Standardization of Radio Frequen-

cies; The Devonian Forest at Gilboa,

N. Y.; The Boylston Medical Prizes; Anti-

vivisection Legislation in California; The

American Association for the Advancement

ORES CUCTUC Cmte ane ene ere reek ee anatase neenaa 564
Scientific Notes and News............---- ca eee iu ata 567
University and Educational Notes... 570
Discussion and Correspondence:

The Evolution of Climates: Dr. MarsDEN

Manson. The Effects of Captivity on a

Sea Character: IpA M. MELuEN. Misuse

of the Questionnaire: Dr. Huprrt LYMAN

(CREATES er an per eet 571
Quotations :

Motorless Flight in England...........-.----.-------- 573

Scientific Books:
Hobson on The Theory of Functions of a
Real Variable: Proressor HENRY BLUM-
BERG. Veblen on Analysis Situs: PRo-
RESSOR WE. fos) IRDET Zi se eee ee 574

Special Articles:
Zostera marina in its Relation to Tempera-
ture: PROFESSOR WILLIAM ALBERT SETCHELL 575

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
TU PTE ES ON FS se oes ea ae ae 577

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by.
J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

CHANGES OF LATITUDE

In this era of changes of every description,
the question of changes of position of our
astronomical observing stations on the surface
of ithe earth has recently become a live issue.
The question is still an open one, and its ulti-
mate decision may rest upon a comparison of
the precision of the results of observation with
the size of the changes predicted or adopted
by geologists.

California has undergone some severe earth-
quake shocks, of which we commonly talk but
little and endeavor to think not at all. Of the
modern disturbances, that of 1906 was clearly
due to a slip at the surface of the earth along
a geological fault line. At the location of this
fault the relative slip of the two opposite
sides was as much as twenty feet in some
places. There is no such evidence available
for any other earthquake, but it may be as-
sumed that other shocks in this coastal region
were of similar nature.

In Japan, where some five hundred earth-
quakes of sensible character have been recorded
in twenty years, the shocks are presumably not
due to slips at the surface along geological
faults.

The only extensive results of astronomical
observations in this region are those at the
Lick Observatory, where meridian cirele work
has been prosecuted for nearly thirty years,
and at Ukiah, about a hundred and fifty miles
northwest of us, where zenith telescope work
has been carried on continuously for twenty
years. There have been isolated zenith tele-
seope determinations of latitude, but they
would contribute little of importance to the
discussion of progressive or abrupt changes,
owing to the uncertain errors of. the star
declinations adopted.

For instance, the latitude of our instrument,
as furnished by the U. S. Coast and Geodetic
Survey in the early days, was 37° 20’ 24.48”.

506

This value is more than a second of are smaller
than the one derived from our meridian circle
observations, beginning in 1893. KHrrors of
the old observations, including those of the
star declinations, the lack of corrections for
latitude variations, and the errors of the geodet-
ic triangulation probably account fully for this
difference. It appears not to have been quoted
as an illustration of geological change. Pos-
sibly it is so large as to be out of bounds. The
range of movements under discussion at present
is usually from one to five feet. There was a
notable earthquake in 1868, possibly. due to a
fault slip. It would, however, be difficult to
assign the proper proportions of a difference
of a second of are to the errors of observation
and to the slipping, if the 1868 shock is to be
made responsible for its part.

The meridian circle results include the epochs
of the earthquakes of 1895, 1903, 1906 and
1911. The first one of these was less intense
than the others. The observaitions at Ukiah
include the epochs of the last three.

On request for our data, the results given in
the column Observed go below were originally
compiled in quarterly values, the observations
of each month having been combined into
means of the values of two or three months.
The table gives the number of successive quar-
terly values that make up the respective annual
values of go. In the annual go some of the
periodic errors due to declination have been
eliminated. There are some gaps in the se-
quence of observations, one from 1908 to 1912
due to my absence at San Luis, Argentina, for
the work of the Carnegie Southern Observa-
tory.

The system of standard stars in use varied
from time to time, for special reasons of pro-
gram and international projects of observation,
and in the column of Corrected go the sys-
tematic corrections derived from the various
authorities have been applied as far as is pos-
sible. The reduction has thus been made to
the system of auwers, for which a correction
of approximately +-0.1” may still be required,
to give us the true astronomical latitude of our
instrument. The average residual of the last
column is two thirds the size of that of the
column preceding.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

There are more stars in the catalog of
Newcomb, and rigorous systematic correc-
tions can not be derived for the extra stars. The
latitude results during the use of his system, in
the years 1901 to 1904, are nearly 0.1” higher
than those of the remaining years.. Some
additional results are included in the last
column. :

Treated as a consecutive series, from 1893 to
1921, there is no sensible continuous progres-
sive change of latitude from the mean,
37° 20’ 25.6”. To illustrate the effect of
abrupt changes at the epochs of earthquakes,
the yearly results have been combined in
groups, corresponding to each of three shocks.
The small differences thus exhibited are such as
would be expected, from the accidental errors
of the yearly means. The influence of the high
point in the series, where the declinations of
Newcomb were employed, is felt in the com-
binations. There will be an apparent progres-
sive rate up to that point and a drop there-
after which are probably fictitious. The mean
values of go preceding 1901 and following
1904 have excluded the effect of the systematic
difference due to Newcomb.

The errors in determining the declinations of
stars are smaller than those involved in lati-
tudes, since some of the important systematic
errors can be eliminated. The probable error
of the annual go is evidently too large to permit
the detection of real changes that do not ex-
ceed 0.05”. Differences of 0.1” would be an-
ticipated for half the comparisons between sep-
arate yearly means, according to the iaw of
distribution of errors, and three differences as
large as 0.2” might occur in a run of 18 dif-
ferences.

The following computed latitudes for Ukiah
differ from the true values by a systematic
constant. The effect of the fourteen month
term is eliminated in the mean of any fourteen
consecutive monthly values. The effect of the
annual term is eliminated in twelve. By taking
means of fourteen consecutive values, be-
ginning each series with the first month of a
year, each mean below is subject to a correction
for two extra months of the annual term—a
small constant for all of them. No correc-
tions need be computed for either term in this

NovEMBER 17, 1922]

method, and no assumption need be made as
to the invariability of the coefficients of either
term. The means are thus well adapted to
show progressive or abrupt changes in latitude.
The annual rate is quite precisely the mean
rate for all the international zenith telescope
stations, +0.005” per year. A systematic cor-
rection to the proper motions, as originally
computed for their star list, would account for
this common rate. Its application gives the
last column of the Ukiah results, and its effect
is to diminish the average residual from 0.034”
to 0.027”.

LICK OBSERVATORY LATITUDE
MERIDIAN CIRCLE

Epoch No. Obs. (Fe) Corr. oo

1894.2 4 25.52” 25.52”
5.2 4 53 53
6.1 3 70 70
7.0 4 46 58
8.0 4 72 57
9.2 4 76 59
1901.1 4 83 74
2.3 4 81 74
3.2 4 74 67
4.1 3 50 47
6.0 4 47 47
7.3 3 she 61
8.0 2 37 42
12.6 4 64 64
13.3 2 50 50
14.5 4 61 61
16.7 4 56
17.6 5 50 55
21.6 3 aes 17
I IGYET EA aed A a a 25.60 25.59
Ay. residual ...... +#0.12 £0.08
IPTOCECIN Gail OOS fase snetenswesecnereestecsc ase aseeneceneceese 25.62
Following 1903 .... 56
Preceding 1906 .... 25.61
Following 1906 -.. .58
Preceding 1911... 25.59
Following 1911 ............... 60
Newcomb, 1901 to 1904. 25.65
Preceding 1901 .... 25.58
Following 1904 -.......2..--..-s-cecssesececceecesceeneseeesene 57

UKIAH, ZENITH TELESCOPE
FOURTHEN MONTH MEANS

Epoch (go) Rate
1902.6 12.08” 12.12”

3.6 12 16

4.6 12 15

5.6 11 14

6.6 11 13

7.6 11 13

8.6 09 10

9.6 15 16

10.6 16 16

11.6 16 16

12.6 14 13

13.6 13 12

14.6 19 17

SCIENCE

507
15.6 24 22
16.6 21 18
19.6 16 12
20.6 10 05
Meanie 25.14 12.14
Ay. residual... 0.034 =£0.027
Preceding 1906.......... 14.107 14.142
Following 1906. * 153 142
Preceding 1911. . 14.117 14.139
Following 1911.......... 167 141

Rate +0.005” per year.

The probable error of a yearly zenith tele-
scope latitude is evidently about one third that
of the meridian circle results. There are ap-
proximately 3,000 observations per year in the
former, and 800 in the latter. Both classes of
observations are subject to systematie errors
that produce larger errors in the mean results
than would be due to accidental errors of ob-
servation only. The purely accidental error of
a single meridian circle observation of a star is
closely +0.2”. With graduation ertor, and
the error of nadir reading included, the prob-
able error of a single latitude observation is
closely + 0.3”. The single zenith telescope
observations have probable errors of about half
this size. The same list of stars was used
throughout at Ukiah, while the list varies for
nearly every year at Lick.

There is no evidence at Ukiah of an abrupt
change in latitude at the epochs of the 1906
and 1911 earthquakes. An average difference
of 0.04” would be expected between any two
yearly results. Ukiah lies 26 miles east of the
1906 fault line, and Mount Hamilton is 22
miles east. These distances have generally been
concluded to be too large to show any indica-
tion of movement at the stations. The posi-
tions of the faults responsible for the 1903
and 1911 shocks do not appear to be on record.

Without implying anything in the nature
of an apology for the quality of modern as-
tronomical work, we must conclude that it is
hardly a criterion for such small changes as are
at issue in this ease. The principle of natural
selection, useful as it may have been in the
domain of biology, must be used sparingly, if
at all, in astronomical results. This does not
preclude taking note of systematic errors, for
the existence of which there is evidence all too
ample for our purpose of as high precision as
we can reach.

558

The differential results of the triangulation of
the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, covering
many points in the neighborhood of the 1906
fault, appear to furnish a more precise eri-
terion. The closing error of each triangle
represents the errors of observation. No one
questions the usefulness of this device, nor its
validity, for the purpose of deriving the best
individual results available. We commonly
follow the same process in fundamental as-
tronomical work, when we derive systematic
corrections to right ascensions, by closing a
eycle of a year of continuous differential re-
sults. An apt illustration, also, is the measure
of graduation errors. The sum of the errors
of the divisions of one circle must be exactly
zero, when we arrive at the starting point of
the measures, having gone round the circle.
The average closing error for primary triangu-
lation work appears to be about two seconds.
Its proportional part must be assigned, as ac-
cidental error, to any absolute determination
of a point, by the triangulation.

The probable error of an observed direction,
for primary work, appears to be less than one
second of are. For secondary triangulation it
is between one and two seconds, and for terti-
ary work it may be as much as five seconds.

One should guard against the assumption
that the probable errors are small for any
special triangle, when its closing error is small.
This error is made up of several constituent
parts, and they may balance in the sum of
their effects; just as we have zeros in any list
of residual errors and also have some residuals
as large as three or four times the probable
error of the individual results.

The following data have been taken from
the reports for 1907 and 1910.

The test of changes in position at several
miles from the fault line may be assumed to
rest on the triangulation net from the base
line between Mocho and Mt. Diablo. This is
not a measured base, but has been connected
up with the Pulgas base, south of San Fran-
cisco. The base line is about 36 miles long,
and it, lies 33 miles east of the fault, with which
it is approximately parallel.

The changes of the tabulated latitudes of
41 stations, between measures before and after

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

1906, have been summarized below. Hach
group includes points on both sides of the
fault at nearly the same distances. On the
east side the average change is 0.02” south, and
on the west the average is 0.05” north. The
average of all changes is 0.04”, and all. groups
show a plus relative displacement for west

minus east. The latitude of the center of the
base line is 37.7°.
No. © From Fault Rel. Dis.
7 37.8° 11 miles 0.03”
81 ano 3 miles 0.07”
12 38.5° 1 mile 0.09”
10 38.9° 3 miles 0.11”
4 BL? 14 miles --0.03”

The Mocho-Diablo base line, being 33 miles
from the fault, one second of are in the ob-
served direction is represented by nearly a
foot lineal measure, (0.01”), at the fault line.
At 80 miles, a second of are is represented by
two feet. The average displacements of the
groups are from two to eight times the lineal
measure of a second of are, at the respective
distances. Farallon is the only station west
of the fault showing a sensible change
(0.027”) at a relatively great distance, 22
miles. The change of 2.7 feet is quite precise-
ly twice the lineal measure of a second of are,
at its distance from the base line.

No change of latitude was found for the
station, Mount Hamilton. This point is 12
miles southwest of Mocho, and at this distance
one foot on the surface is represented by over
three seconds of are, in the observed direction.
This result would indicate also that there was
no sensible change at the date of the 1903
earthquake, unless the station returned to its
original position by an almost equally precipi-
tate movement.

These lineal equivalents are of course only
true for ares measured at right angles to the
respective lines of sight. But the relative posi-
tions of the base line and points along the
fault are in general favorable for the measure-
ment of displacements in latitude, especially
for the stations between 37° and 38°. Farallon
lies almost due west from the center of the line,
but was not observed from either end, its posi-
tion being fixed by directions from stations

1 One omitted, residual ten times the average.

NovEMBER 17, 1922]

close to the Coast, in the succeeding net of tri-
angles.
_ The criterion then is whether the directions
of the points in the neighborhood of the fault
have been measured within accumulated errors
of observation of the order of a second of are.
Apparently, for all stations which are close
to each other, though distributed on both sides
of the fault, any errors in the adopted posi-
tions of Mocho and Diablo would be systematic
in their effect upon relative displacements, af-
fecting all stations alike.

In the summations of the changes at the
various stations in groups, the computed prob-
able error of a mean displacement is +0.005”,
or half a foot. Such precision is apparently
five times that of the yearly zenith telescope
results.

In the astronomical observations, one foot on
the surface is closely equivalent to one one-hun-
dredth of a second in latitude. In geodetic tri-
angulation, one foot on the surface is equi-
valent to one second of are, in the direction of
a point forty miles distant.

On these grounds we may conclude that the
precise differential results of triangulation are
better tests for very small changes on the sur-
face than astronomical observations of an ab-

solute character. ROH. TocEe

Lick OBSERVATORY,
SEPTEMBER 30, 1922

CONSERVATION AND MODERN
LIFE?

TuHIs is an age of high pressure living, of
seemingly increasing complexity. Our modern
civilization is making such insistent demands
upon us that unless we counter by equally
insistent measures of self-restraint we must be
overwhelmed. Am I drawing too dark a pic-
ture or using too strong words? Look into
your own experience and see if your success
has not been due, in part, at least, to your
resistance of certain tendencies and demands,
or your failure in some particular to your
inability or disinclination to combat some urge,
external or internal. It is true, of course, that

1 Presidential address read before the Iowa
Conservation Association at the Charles City
meeting, July 13, 1922.

SCIENCE

509

our lives must be shaped by the culture in
which we live, but it is equally true that we
must do our share in shaping that culture.
Mere following the line of least resistance,
passive floating with the tide helps neither our
civilization, our fellows nor ourselves.

This is an era of conservation. Its spirit is
in the air. We are coming to realize more and
more that we must conserve our resources if
we are to maintain a high place in the present
organization of the community. This state-
ment holds true whether we consider our mate-
rial resources or our immaterial assets, whether
we look to the preservation of our own status
or to the maintenance of society. It is with
this necessity in mind, then, that I venture to
call to your attention a few facts and princi-
ples upon which we may base our attitude
toward the broader aspects of conservation.
And because there is just as urgent need for
conserving the elements which shall minister to
our inner lives and experiences as there is for
guarding those resources of more material
nature I shall not confine myself strictly to those
ponderable and tangible features which are
usually grouped under the conservation move-
ment.

Now whether we call ourselves conserva-
tionists or conservatives is just now of little
moment. We shall find much in common in the
two terms and the values they subserve. Do
not both of them imply the clinging to and the
preservation of all that is best in the heritage
which has been bequeathed us? And what a
rich heritage that has been! To what a wealth
of treasure have we become heirs, whether we
count our physical resources or those of spir-
itual natures and use. But with the conserva-
tive spirit there must also be mingled a real
progressivism. Conservatism easily becomes
reactionism, as progressivism is in danger of
becoming radicalism if they are not actuated
by a keen sense of balance. We find abundant
exemplification of these statements in present
day politics and in history, in the wastage of
natural resources or in their undue withholding
from proper use, in extreme tendencies in
social life and customs, whether it be a cling-
ing to the habits of the past or a hasty adop-
tion of the fads of the present.

560

That there is real need for the conserving of
our material resources no one, I feel confident,
will dispute. We may classify these resources
as those which subserve the necessities of our
physical beings and those which minister to
our inner and higher needs. I realize, of
course, that no hard and fast line can be drawn
between these. There is a sense in which all
are necessary, since symmetrical development
and well-poised usefulness of the human life
can be attained only when all the ministry of
nature has been offered and received. There
are, however, a few materials which are basic
and necessary for bodily existence. Such are
the soil, the water supply, the coal and iron
reserves, the vegetal and animal kingdoms,
together with other less conspicuous but per-
haps equally vital components of the earth’s
structure. Life in any form, much less in the
highly complex types, can continue and thrive
only where these are abundantly available and
are put to constant use. Because of this their
intelligent application to the needs of modern
living and their equally intelligent reservation
for the needs of future generations are alike
imperative.

I do not propose to burden you with a mass
of statisties but I do wish to present just a
few facts and figures to show you how
important a matter the careful use and hus-
banding of our natural resources has become.
The soil is, of course, the basis of all wealth
and civilization. Upon its intelligent cultiva-
tion depends the very life of the people. The
United States proper includes 1,937,144,960
acres of land, of which 838,591,774 acres are
classed as farm land. About 50 per cent. of
this area is under cultivation, or about one
fifth of the total acreage of the country. On
this one fifth, then, the population must de-
pend in large measure for its sustenance. How
careful the tillers of the soil should be that this
small fraction is put to its best use. Intensive
farming, proper rotation of crops, more intelli-
gent tillage, prevention of soil wastage, both
mechanical and chemical, increased use of fer-
tilizers—all means must be utilized if the neces-
sary crop yields are to be maintained. At
present the western states and Canada are
among the foremost exporters of foodstuffs for

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

other lands. What will happen when our own
population demands all the food our farms
can produce? What will happen when a still
further increased population finds that the
farming states can not supply its needs? It
will not suffice to say that that day will never
come. Unless our farms maintain and increase.
their yields that day will most surely come to
us as it has come to other nations. The means
I have already suggested will help to postpone
that unfortunate time, and in addition the till-
able acreage may be inereased by irrigation
and drainage, the losses due to injurious in-
sects and mammals and to plant diseases may
be lessened by inereased knowledge, care and
skill, and increasingly intelligent animal hus-
bandry may improve the quality and quantity
of our meat and dairy products.

Iowa may be proud of having both the
largest acreage of improved land of any state
in the Union, about 30,000,000 acres, and also
the largest percentage of improved land to
total area, nearly 90 per cent. This improved
acreage is about one and one half times that
of Texas and about two and one half times
that of California. While Texas may boast of
her oil booms and California of her climate
Iowa must nevertheless produce the crops that
shall help feed the world, for she is in the
center of the richest land of the globe. The
yield of the farms of the Union in 1920,
including live stock on the farms, was
$12,974,461,000 and that of Iowa during the
game year was $1,175,504,318, about one twelfth
of the total. My point in citing these figures
is to emphasize Iowa’s importance as a food
producer and the necessity of maintaining and
raising the high standard already set.

In mineral resources our country is wonder-
fully supplied. Probably no other land has
such wide variety in such great abundance.
This places upon us a stewardship of mag-
nificent proportions and the responsibility is
increased by the fact that to a degree far be-
yond what is true of the soil, these resources
if once dissipated are gone forever. The field
that has just raised a crop of oats may raise
an equally good crop of corn next year, but
the land from which our coal was mined last
winter will never yield another such harvest.

NovEMBER 17, 1922]

The water which drives the turbines of Niagara
may some day repeat its cycle but the gasoline
that drove your car to this conference will
never serve that purpose again. Yet in face
of these facts millions of gallons of oil are used
needlessly or are wasted in other ways. It is
estimated that for every ton of coal mined
thus far one half ton to one and a half tons
have been wasted. We all know how carelessly
iron products are handled. Machinery is ex-
posed to the weather, tin cans are allowed to
rust away, though the tin is worth large sums,
and in many other ways there is a constant
loss. It has been estimated that our petroleum
supplies will be practically exhausted in a
quarter of a century, that the available coal
resources will be mined out in another hun-
dred years and that perhaps half a century
will see the exploitation of the best and most
accessible of our iron ores. These estimates
are based on productions similar to those. of
recent years. Should the output largely
increase, the periods of availability will be cor-
respondingly shortened. In this connection it
may be well to state that mineral production
in the United States advanced from a value of
nearly $2,400,000,000 in 1915 to a value of
over $6,700,000,000 in 1920, an increase of
nearly 300 per cent.

In connection with the minerals and their
consumption let me call your attention to the
great field of service in the improvement of
power-saving machinery. It is said that our
steam engines utilize only 20 per cent. of the
available power in the coal used. Our systems
of heating are equally wasteful and must be
improved if we or our posterity are not to
suffer. It will not do to be thoughtless opti-
mists. We must mingle foresight and pru-
dence with our typical American hopeful front
toward the future.

Other resources which must be held in higher
esteem and cherished with greater care and
foresight are our water supplies, our forests
and other timber resources, together with all
other beneficial plants and flowers and native
animals. I shall only mention these, as they
are to be discussed by more able advocates
later at these sessions. I may call your atten-
tion in passing, however, to the recent news

SCIENCE

561

dispatches reporting nearly 400 forest fires in
the far west, many of which, no doubt, were
preventable, and to recent statements that
insects annually destroy a billion dollars’ worth
of crops, a waste which the native birds would
greatly reduce if given a free hand. I wish
chiefly to emphasize here the point which I
made earlier, that the beauties and creatures of
nature which minister to our ethical and
esthetic senses are as truly worthy of our care
and attention as are these material necessities
of which I have spoken. The world would be
a cheerless habitation if it contained only iron
and coal and oil and similar basie articles, so-
called. Our bodies must be eared for, it is
true, but are not our minds and our spirits of
equal value? Shall we not then care for the
things which help them to grow as well as for
these others?

This leads me to another thought akin to
that with which I began this address. This is
an age of high-pressure living. Is it not of
even greater importance that we conserve our-
selves than that we care for the things of the
world about us? Let me dwell for a moment
then on this topic. We need to conserve our
physical powers—by correct living, by judi-
cious husbanding of all the gifts with which
we are blessed, by scornful repudiation of all
things which tend to weaken or break down
our bodily endowments. They are ours not to
waste but to use. Service is one of the pass
words of the day. But service demands pre-
paredness, and preparedness means careful
training, self-restraint, symmetrical develop-
ment. Again, we must conserve our mental
powers and faculties. Never was there greater
need of well-directed judgment, of poise, of
balance, of a high sense of personal responsi-
bility. I feel well-nigh heartsick at times at
the inaneness and mental vacuity of such a
mass of our young people, at their shallowness
of thought and feeling, at the seeming lack of
any sense of responsibility and obligation to
the world in which they live and to generations
yet to come.. I can only hope that experience
will deepen and broaden their minds and make
them more fitted to fulfill those duties which
must rest upon them. We are passing through
a period of revulsion and reaction from the

562

tension of the past few years, which may ac-
count in part for the condition of which I have
just spoken. Financially, industrially, polit-
ically, socially we are being driven by shifting
winds and carried by changing currents. Ship-
wreck may be avoided, but clear thinking, cool
judging, wise acting must be the pilots at the
wheel.

Once more, we must conserve our spiritual
ideals and attainments. This is no time for
narrowness of outlook. If ever there was a
time when broadness of vision was demanded
it is to-day. I wonder if you realize to what
extent intolerance, the backward look, narrow
minded conservativeness are dominating or
attempting to dominate the spiritual life of the
day. This too, doubtless, is a passing wave, a
manifestation of the reaction which is affecting
other aspects of life. But its tendencies are
dangerous. They are destructive rather than
constructive. They tend to shut men out from
the higher realms of spiritual life and thought
rather than to welcome them and to incite them
to the greatest attainment. The founders of
our faith and the builders of our nation were
men and women whose heads were set forward
on their shoulders, not backward. They ad-
vanced into the unknown and made of it a
patrimony for those who followed them. They
held fast the freedom they had obtained and
persistently aspired for more. Had it not been
so, picture to yourselves, if you please, the
history of the past three hundred years. If we
abate the struggle or lose the winnings they
have made, picture for yourselves again, if you
please, the history of the future. Broad-
mindedness, altruism, charity, faith, com-
pounded with intelligence and a rational ap-
preciation of the temper and needs of the time,
these must be components in the lives of the
men and women of to-day who are to shape
the destinies of to-morrow.

I have attempted very briefly to summarize
some of our resources, the dangers of their
abuse and our obligation for their careful
utilization. I have also tried to make clear our
debt to the future, in the necessity of preserv-
ing to posterity as much as possible of the
splendid gifts which we have received from a
bountiful Creator. I have given you an im-
pressionistic sketch rather than a detailed por-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

trait. I am not a prophet of disaster and I
fully believe that as new emergencies arise they
will be met by new resources. But I do be-
lieve that the duty is laid heavily on each of
us to do what in us lies to avert or at least to
postpone these emergencies and by living hope-
fully, bravely, carefully and with our faces
toward the light of the future, to conserve
every resource, material and spiritual, that may
contribute to an aspiring and inspiring life.
James H. LEEs
Iowa GEOLOGICAL SURVEY,
Des Moines, Iowa

THE PRESENT SUPPLY OF BIO-
LOGICAL STAINS

As many requests have been received for in-
formation as to where stains can be obtained
at present it seems well to publish a brief note
listing the various manufacturers and dealers
in this line at present.

Frequent inquiries concerning
Griibler’s stains. In this connection it can be
said that there are at present on the market
some stains of undoubted Griibler origin and
others that are reputed to come from this source.
There will undoubtedly be longer lists of
Griibler’s stains to be obtained as soon as it is
easier to import them than at present; but as
all of the recent investigations on stains point
to the equal quality if not superiority of the
American stains, there is no need of looking
speciaily for the reintroduction of the German
products. For this reason the domestic market
conditions are most important at present. To
understand these conditions it must be re-
membered that there are three different classes
of concerns to deal with in this matter: (1)
the basic manufacturers, (2) the specialists in
biological stains and closely related chemicals,
and (3) the dealers in general laboratory sup-
plies.

The basie dye manufacturers are of little
concern to the biologists, with two exceptions.
These two are:

Caleo Chemical Co., 136 Liberty Street, New
York City.

National Aniline and Chemical Co., 40 Rector
Street, New York City.

Both of these have departments that prepare

are made

NOVEMBER 17, 1922]

special dyes for biological purposes. The Na-
tional Aniline Company puts out an especially
long list, so much so that this department of
the company deserves to be considered with the
specialists in biological stains to be mentioned
below. Three other basic manufacturers—
Dieks, David and Co., Varick and N. Moore
Streets; Heller and Merz, 505 Hudson Street,
New York City; McAndrews and Forbes, Cam-
den, New Jersey—have shown a great deal of
interest in the work and put on the market
certain products that deserve to rank with the
biological dyes and are handled by all the con-
cerns mentioned below.

The specialists in biological stains either
manufacture their products from the inter-
mediates or else, whenever they know of a good
source of some dye, buy it of the basic manu-
facturers and see that it comes up to their tests.
This was and probably still is the function of
Gritbler and Holburn in Germany. The do-
mestie concerns falling in this list that are at
present in the business are:

Coleman and Bell, Norwood, Ohio.

Empire Biochemical Co., 920 Whitlock Avenue,
New York City.

Harmer Laboratories, Lansdowne, Pa.

D. H. Pond, Blackstone Bldg., Cleveland, Ohio.

Providence Chemical Co., Providence, R. I.

as well as the Pharmaceutical Division of the
National Aniline and Chemical Company, as
mentioned above.

The last mentioned concern needs a further
word of explanation because of a certain mis-
understanding that is prevalent. In some of
the earlier tests made by a committee of the
Bacteriological Society, National Aniline prod-
ucts were listed, and they rank rather un-
favorably. These, however, were the textile
dyes, the only ones then sold by this com-
pany. The company has since then decided to
specialize in biological stains and their present
line of stains is entirely different from those
mentioned in the earlier report. Another mis-
understanding comes from the faet that when
the Heyl laboratories failed, Dr. Heyl entered
the employ of the National Aniline and Chemi-
eal Co., and the latter concern began market-

ing biological stains. This naturally gave rise

SCIENCE

563

to the impression that the National Aniline Co.
has taken over the Heyl Laboratories. Such
is not the case, however, and the National Ani-
line line is distinctly different from those pre-
viously marketed by the Heyl Laboratories.

The third class of firms mentioned above
needs very little mention here because they are
quite well known to the biologist. Some of
these laboratory supply houses like Central
Scientific Co., A. H. Thomas Co., and HK. Leitz
Co. buy some one line of stains from the spe-
cialists in that line and advertise this fact;
others buy dyes from the basic manufacturers
and sell them as stains under their own name.
Among the latter the Will Corporation de-
serves special mention because in the past they
have manufactured stains where necessary and
have standardized those that they have bought
exactly as done by the specialists listed above.
They are at present, however, stopping the
manufacture of these products, now that sat-
isfactory American stains are readily obtain-
able.

This article is published in the hope that it
will assist users of stains in understanding the
market and buying intelligently. All the con-
cerns mentioned as dealing particularly in this
lhne of business have given the committee
hearty cooperation and are doing* their best
to market a satisfactory line of stains.

H. J. Conn, Chairman
COMMISSION ON STANDARDIZATION OF
BrIoLoGicaL STAINS

LOWERY LAYMON LEWIS

Tue death of Dr. Lowery Laymon Lewis, of
ithe Oklahoma Agricultural and Mechanical
College and Experiment Station, on September
26, has taken from the institution and the edu-
cational circles of the state a faithful worker
and scientist whose loss will be keenly felt.

Dr. Lewis was born at Newport, Tennessee,
on September 3, 1869. He received the B.S.
degree at the Texas Agricultural and Mechan-
ical College in 1893, and the M.S. in 1894 from
the same institution. His studies were con-
tinued at the Iowa State College and in 1896
was granted the degree of .D.V.M. During
that year he came ito the Oklahoma Agrieul-

064

tural and Mechanical College as professor of
veterinary medicine and state veterinarian. In
1899 he also became professor of zoology and
experiment station wbacteriologist. He gave
himself up entirely to his work not only in the
departments in which he was interested but to
the school as a whole. That he was highly
esteemed was manifested by the fact that in
1900, in addition to his other duties, he was
made dean of the School of Veterinary Medi-
cine, and, in 1913, was also made dean of the
School of Science and Literature. During the
year 1915 he was made acting president and
director of the experiment station. In 1921
he was made dean of the faculty.

Dr. Lewis was for a time a member of the
American Association and was a working mem-
ber of many scientific societies. Although
quiet and retiring in personality, he was always
ready to do his part in any enterprise of edu-
cational value for public welfare.

His research work was directed chiefly
toward the diseases and the improvement of
the livestock industry. In his earlier work he
was .much interested in parasiticides, anthel-
mintics and disinfectants. Later, he carried
on a great deal of work toward the prevention
and control of hog cholera and the prevention
of tuberculosis in livestock. His most recent
experimental work has been with the problem
of sterility in domestic animals. In this con-
nection he has shown some of the influences of
a concentrated protein diet upon the potency
of germ cells.

Dr. Lewis was at his best in his work about
his laboratory surrounded by his students and
associates. His personal interests were the last
0 be considered and he made it easy, and a

for his associates who
His own high ideals of
service and love for the truth were the source
of inspiration for many college generations.
Many students went forth from his classroom
filled with the love of science and guided by
‘the example of his calm and thoughtful leader-
ship to meet the problems of life with the same
determination, standards and ideals that he
imparted to them. Mere words can not sum-
rendered to the

source of pleasure,
worked with ‘him.

marize services such as he

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

school and state. He left an inspiration in the
field of altruistic endeavor which will always
be held in high esteem by his students, friends
and colleagues.
JoHN KE. GUBERLET
OKLAHOMA AGRICULTURAL
EXPERIMENT STATION

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
PRECISE STANDARDIZATION OF RADIO
FREQUENCIES
THe Bureau of Standards has developed a
very precise method of standardization of
radio wave lengths and frequencies, which is
the fundamental basis of radio measurements
in this country. By the process used, the fre-
quency of radio waves is compared with that
of an audible musical note. A tuning fork is
mounted in such a way that it may be made to
control the frequency of an oscillatory circuit.
The frequency of another oscillatory cireuit
operating at much higher frequencies is then
compared with it by means of a cathode-ray

osaillograph.

This latter instrument consists of the
cathode-ray tube, a special kind of vacuum
tube in which the narrow stream of electrons
is subjected to the action of electric fields ap-
plied by the two alternating-current genera-
tors. When neither generator is operating, the
electrons, impinging on the active screen at
the end of the tube, cause a single luminous
spot. If one generator is connected, the spot
is deflected back and forth along a single line,
horizontal or vertical as the case may be, with
such rapidity that it appears as a solid line.
If both generators are applied simultaneously,
the spot oscillates both horizontally and verti-
cally and appears, in general, as a blurred
luminous rectangle. If, however, the frequen-
cies of the two generators bear a simple ratio,
such as four to one, the spot traverses and
retraverses a definite simple path, forming a
figure by which the frequency ratio may be
recognized. It has been found possible to com-
pare frequency ratios as high as twenty-one
to one.

The ‘bureau is at present engaged in the
standardization of a high precision standard

NOVEMBER 17, 1922]

wavemeter by this means. A tuning fork of
known frequency, approximately 1,000 cycles
per second, is used as the basis of the stand-
ardization. A low-frequency generator is tuned
to suecessive multiples of this frequency by
means of the cathode-ray oscillograph and cor-
‘responding settings of the wavemeter are ob-
tained. A third generator is similarly tuned
‘to multiples of these frequencies and thus by
successive stages the standardization iis ex-
tended to include frequencies as high as 5,000
kilocyeles (60 meters). It is intended that this
wavemeter be used as the basic standard for
the standardization of commercial wavemeters.

THE DEVONIAN FOREST AT GILBOA,.N. Y.

CoNTINUED operations of the New York
Board of Water Supply have brought to light
20 to thirty additional specimens of these
earliest trees, all of which, by courtesy of the
commissioners, have come to the State Museum,
with the exception of one specimen presented
‘to the American Museum of Natural History.
These great stumps have now been located at
three distinct horizons in the sandstones of
late Devonian age, at or near Gilboa, and thus
indicate the rising and falling of the shore land
on which they grew. The botanical interest
attached to this extraordinary occurrence is
intensified by the fact that no satisfactory
solution has ‘been offered of the relationships
of these trees, though they have been known
for many years. The character of the stumps
themselves and such portions of their tissue as
remain have not proved a satisfactory clue
to their nature, but Winifred Goldring, paleo-
botanist, has found in their foliation and fruc-
tification evidence which has led to the belief
that they are seed ferns (Pteridospermophyta),
partaking of the character of Lyginopteris and
allied forms, but of a simpler organization.
That trees of such magnitude, rising to heights
of 30 to 40 feet, should appear so abruptly
in geological history is sufficient to indicate
what a long unobserved record lies back of this
majestic plant growth, the oldest of known
forests. In due time an effort will be made to
reproduce in the State Museum the conditions
under which these trees grew on the sloping
shores of the Appalachian.

SCIENCE

565

THE BOYLSTON MEDICAL PRIZES

THESE prizes, which are open to public com-
petition, are offered for the best dissertation
on questions in medical science proposed by
the Boylston Medical Committee. At the an-
nual meeting held in Boston in 1920 a prize of
$300 was awarded to an essay entitled “Acute
Inflammation of the Nose, Pharynx and Ton-
sils’ by Mr. Stuart Mudd, of St. Louis. For
1922 there is offered a prize of $500 and the
Boyston Prize Medal for the best dissertation
on the results of original research in medicine,
the subject to be chosen by the writer. The
Boylston Prize Medal will be added to the
money prize only in case the winning essay
shows special originality in the investigations
detailed. Dissertations entered for this prize
must be in the hands of the secretary on or
before February 1, 1923.

In awarding these prizes, preference will be
given to dissertations which exhibit original
work, but if no dissertation is considered
worthy of a prize, the award may be withheld.
Each dissertation must bear, in place of the
author’s name, some sentence or device, and
must be accompanied by a sealed packet, bear-
ing the same sentence or device, and containing
the author’s name and residence within. Any
clew by which the authorship of a dissertation
is made known to the committee will debar
such dissertation from competition. Disserta-
tions must be ‘printed or typewritten, and their
pages must be bound in book form. All un-
successful dissertations are deposited with the
secretary, from whom they may be obtained,
with the sealed packet unopened, if called for
within one year after they have been received.

By an order adopted in 1826 the secretary
was directed to publish annually the following
votes: (1) That the board does not consider
itself as approving the doctrines contained in
any of the dissertations to which premiums
may be adjudged. (2) That, in case of pub-
leation of a successful dissertation, the author
be considered as bound to print the above vote
in connection therewith.

The Boylston Medical Committee is appoint-
ed by the president and fellows of Harvard
College, and consists of the following physi-
cians; Reid Hunt, M.D., secretary; William T.

566

Porter, M.D., Edward H. Nichols, M.D., Henry
A. Christian, M.D., John Warren, M.D. The
address of the secretary of the Boylston Med-
ical Committee is Reid Hunt, M.D., Harvard
Medical School, Boston, Mass.

ANTI-VIVISECTION LEGISLATION IN
CALIFORNIA

Tue proposed law prohibiting vivisection in
California was defeated at the recent election
by an overwhelming majority. Prior to the
election the regents of the University of Cali-
fornia, by President David P. Barrows, and
the board of trustees of Stanford University,
by President Ray Lyman Wilbur, issued the
statement which follows:

The advance of sanitation, modern medicine
and physiology, nutrition, the teaching of biology
and the protection of our industries and agricul-
ture all rest on animal experimentation. The
eontrol of the epidemic diseases of man and of
animals, the management of surgical operations
and of childbirth, and the certification” of milk,
food and water supplies would be impossible
without the knowledge gained by such studies.
In fact, the present-day protection of the public
from diseases, which is vital to our community
life, rests on animal experimentation. The Uni-
versity of California and Stanford University are
vitally interested in the defeat of ‘this initiative
measure, since its passage would be a state-wide
ealamity.

Not only would it stop the research work now
going on in the medical schools, hospitals and
laboratories and in the Bureau of Animal Indus-
try, but it would damage the market for most of
California’s food products and markedly reduce
the confidence of visitors coming into the state.
If California could not certify to its food and
water supplies, could not guarantee protection
against contagious diseases, could not provide
certified milk, the effect on agriculture and indus-
try in the state would be disastrous. The near
collapse of the olive industry, due to the poison-
ing of a few people in eastern states, and the
way in which the industry was saved by the re-
searches carnied on in the laboratories of the
two universities, indicate the imperative necessity
of freedom for the universities in animal experi-
mentation. California food, instead of being
looked to as an example of purity, would be
shunned.

The initiative measure would make it impossible

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1455

‘to test with birds for deadly gases in the mines
of the state. It would stop the manufacture of
serum for the prevention of hog cholera, the
preparation of vaccine for anthrax and the vari-
ous other products that are required for the pro-
tection of our industries in agriculture and that
annually save millions of dollars and prevent
great mortality among domestic animals. Under
the act, operations on various farm animals could
be carried on without anesthetics to increase the
palatability of foods, but no animals could be
used in experimental work if the information ob-
tained is for the benefit of a person or of the
human race.

We feel that no worse attack on the welfare of
the state and on the right of the universities to
seek and teach tthe truth could be made. Every
man, woman and child, every unborn babe, every
domestic animal in the state, would be affected if
this measure becomes a law. It strikes at all. It
is unnecessary special legislation, due to preju-
dice and misinformation. No one will tolerate
cruelty to animals. The present laws of the state
are drastie and sufficient to control any abuse.
We know that there is no eruelty to animals in
the laboratories of the universities. They are in
charge of men and women of the highest charac-
ter who are unselfishly working tto better the lot
of their fellowmen and to advance the interests
of their community and of the state. Anesthetics
are always used for animals in the laboratory in
exactly the same way that jthey are used by sur-
geons in the operating rooms.

We urge upon the citizens of the state the im-
perative necessity of defeating this initiative
measure.

THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE
ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE

Repucep railway rates for those attending
the fourth Boston meeting of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science
(to be held mainly in the buildings of the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cam-
bridge, Mass., from December 26 to 30) have
‘been fully granted by all of the railway pas-
senger associations excepting the Trans-
continental. Furthermore, in the territory of
the last-named passenger association the privi-
lege of reduced rates on this occasion extends
westward on Montana lines to points in
Oregon and Washington (excepting Portland),
by routes through the Missouri River’ and- St,

NoveMBER 17, 1922]

Paul. The eastern lines of the Canadian Pas-
senger Association have granted this privilege
also. The railway fare for any one attending
the Boston meeting from authorized points
will be a fare and a half for the round trip, on
the certificate plan, as in the case of last year’s
Toronto meeting. From unauthorized points
(all an the far west) attractive excursion rates
will be available. The preliminary announce-
ment for the Boston meeting will shortly he
mailed to all members of the association.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

ANNOUNCEMENT is made that the Nobel
prize in physies for the year 1921 has been
awarded to Professor Albert Hinstein, of the
University of Berlin, and for the year 1922 to
Professor Neils Bohr, of the University of
Copenhagen. The Nobel prize in chemistry for
the year 1921 has been awarded to Professor
Frederick Soddy, of the University of Oxford,
and for the year 1922 to Professor F. W.
Ashton, of the University of Cambridge. The
prizes for medicine have not been awarded.

Dr. Royan 8. Copetanp has been elected
United States Senator from New York by a
very large majority. Dr. Copeland, who has
been commissioner of public health for New
York City, was professor of ophthalmology in
the University of Michigan from 1895 to 1908.

Dr. CHartes P. Steinmetz, of the General
Electric Company, who was candidate for state
engineer in New York on the tickets of the
socialist and labor parties, received about three
times as many votes as the candidate for gov-
ernor. The vote for Dr. Steinmetz in New
York City was 207,138.

Dr. Wituram H. Nicuots, chairman of the
General Chemical Company, and Dr. John J.
Carty, vice-president of the American Tele-
phone and Telegraph Company, have been
elected members of ‘the council of New York
University.

Tue Grasselli Medal, awarded every year by
the Grasselli Chemical Company ‘to the author
of the best paper presented before the Society
of Chemical Industry during the previous year,
was presented to W. H. Fulweiler, chemical

SCIENCE

067

engineer of the United Gas Improvement Com-
pany, of Philadelphia, at the regular meeting
of the section at the Chemists’ Club, New York,
on October 20.

Tur Pharmaceutical Society, London, has
presented the Hanbury Medal, awarded every
two years for the promotion of research in the
chemistry and natural history of drugs, to
M. Emile Perrot, professor of materia medica
in the University of Paris.

Drs. Ramén y Casa, of Madrid, and Ber-
nardo Houssay, of Buenos Aires, have been
elected honorary members of the Mexican Soci-
ety of Biology. Dr. E. B. Krumbhaar, of
Philadelphia, has been elected a corresponding
member.

Tue Bavarian Academy of Sciences has
elected as Dr. R.
Tigerstedt, professor emeritus of physiology at
Helsingfors, and Dr. Ramén y Cajal, professor
emeritus of histology at Madrid.

corresponding members,

Dr. Frank R. Lie, of the University of
Chicago and chairman of the Division of
Biology and Agriculture of the National Re-
search Council for the year 1922-23, will be
in residence in Washington from January 1
until about the end of March. During the
period before the expiration of his term on
June 30, 1923, he-will make occasional visits
to Washington, but the major portion of his
time will be spent in Chicago.

Dr. Pup §. Smiru, administrative geolo-
gist of the United States Geological Survey,
has been appointed acting director.

Dr. Percy Lonemuir, of Sheffield, has been
appointed director of research to the British
Cast-Iron Research Association.

Dr. A. Loewy, professor of physiology at
the University of Berlin, has accepted the
charge of the institute for study of the physi-
ology of altitudes recently founded at Davos
by the Swiss government.

Mr. R. E. Primstiny, of Christ’s College,
Cambridge University, has been elected a fellow
of Clare College. He was a member of Sir
Ernest Shackleton’s Antaretie Expedition fif-
‘teen -years ago, and also of Captain Scott’s

568

expedition in 1913. He has published numer-
ous papers dealing with the geology of the
Antarctic.

Proressor ARTHUR SMITHELLS, who has held
the chair of chemistry at Yorkshire College and
Leeds University since 1885, is to retire at the
end of the current session and will take up
special research work in chemistry in London.

Dr. Leon W. Parsons has resigned as as-
sistant director of the Research Laboratory of
Applied. Chemistry of the Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology to accept a position as
chief chemist of the Tidewater Oil Company,
Bayonne, N. J.

EpucATIONAL programs of the various insti-
tutions offering courses in chemical engineer-
ing are to be investigated by a committee of
eleven appointed by the council of the Amer-
ican Institute of Chemical Engineers, with a
view to standardizing the training required for
the degree of (Ch.E. The program of the com-
mittee contemplates three years’ work in ob-
taining the adoption of recommendations of a
previous committee and the publication of a
list of approved schools at the end of this
period. The committee consists of H. C.
Parmalee, chairman; five representative edu-
cators: Joseph H. James, W. K. Lewis, A. H.
White, R. H. McKee and §. W. Parr; and five
representative industrialists: C. E. K. Mees,
A. D. Little, C. L. Reese, W. C. Geer and
W. R. Whitney.

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation reports that the close of twenty-five
years of teaching and research in physiology
by Professor H. Zwaardemaker has been cele-
brated by friends and students at the physi-
ological institute of the University of Utrecht.
His contributions to science include additions
to our knowledge of the organs of sense, of the
transformations of energy, and of the im-
portance of potassium for the automatism of
the organs. He is now studying physiologic
radioactivity, and how to help the deaf. He
was presented with a feestbundel of ninety-five
scientific articles from international sources,
which, with an introductory article describing
his life work, form a volume of 591 pages of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No, 1455

the Netherlands Archives of Exact and Natural
Sciences. His portrait was also presented, to
be installed in the institute.

Tue Pasteur Lecture for 1922 of the Insti-
tute of Medicine of Chicago will ‘be delivered
by Dr. Jacques Loeb, of the Rockefeller Insti-
tute, on Friday, November 24, 1922. Pro-.
fessor August Krogh, of Copenhagen, lec-
tured before the institute on October 27 on
“The exchange of substances through the capil-
lary wall, with some applications to patholog-
ieal problems.” Dr. Robert Barany, professor
of otology at the University of Upsala, also
addressed the meeting.

In continuation of the series of illustrated
evening lectures given in the Administration
Building of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington, Dr. T. H. Morgan, research associate
in biology and professor of experimental
zoology at Columbia University, will speak on
November 28 on “The constitution of the
hereditary material and its relation to devel-
opment.”

Dr. Maynarp M. Metcaur has been speaking
at Purdue University, DePauw University,
University of Indiana and Butler College
during the first ten days of November, dis-
cussing research, the origin and future of man,
animal distribution and industrial problems
from the biological (humanistic) standpoint.
He has held also conferences with small groups
of persons specially interested in research,
either from the standpoint of pupils looking
forward to graduate study, or from- the stand-
point of institutions in their relations to re-
search.

Dr. JosepH C. Broopcoop, of the Johns
Hopkins Medical School, addressed the dentists
of Boston at a special meeting on November
10, preliminary to the opening of the “Na-
tional Cancer Week,” on “Lesions of the oral
cavity.”

Dr. Irving Langmuir, research physicist
with ithe General Electric Company at Schenec-
tady, will give a series of three lectures at the
Carnegie Institute of Technology on November
27, 28 and 29. The lectures will be given to
students and executives in industiial-and seien-

NoveMBER 17, 1922]

tifie fields in the Pittsburgh district. The sub-
jects of lectures will be: (1) “Electron emis-
sion from heated metals’; (2) “Hlectron emis-
sion from thoriated filaments”; (3) “Methods
of controlling electron currents in high
vacuum.”

Dr. James Ewin, professor of pathology at
Cornell University Medical College, New York,
delivered the 1922 Miitter lecture on surgical
pathology, before the College of Physicians of
Philadelphia, on November 1. His subject was
“The principles of the radiation treatment of
cancer.”

Hopart Couuece has recently formed a
Science Club, the purpose of which is to pro-
mote science among the students of Hobart by
means of lectures to which the people of
Geneva are invited. The first lecture was held
on October 31, when Dr. C. E. K. Mees spoke
on “The road to wealth.”

Dr. Rosert Barany, professor of otology of
the University of Upsala, Sweden, and winner
of the Nobel prize in medicine in 1914, gave a
two weeks’ lecture course and several clinics
for eye specialists and neurologists in St.
Louis from October 9 to 21. Dr. Barany was
the guest of honor of the American Academy of
Ophthalmology and Otology, which held its
annual meeting in Minneapolis, last month.
Dr. -Barany will give a similar course of lec-
tures in Chicago, Denver, Los Angeles, Hous-
ton, Cincinnati, Cleveland, Boston and New
York.

Tue Huxley lecture on “Evolutionary tend-
encies in man’s body’ was given at the
Charing Cross Hospital Medical School by Sir
Arthur Keith, M.D., F.R.S., on November 8.

Tue Netherlands Medical Association has
arranged to celebrate the Pasteur centennial at
Amsterdam on November 25. Addresses will
be made by specialists in medicine, chemistry
and microbiologic technic. Dr. A. Calmette,
of the Pasteur Institute at Paris, will deliver
an address.

A FORMAL university function eommemora-
ting the centenaries of both Mendel and Pas-
teur will ‘be held by St. Louis University on
the evening of December 14. The address on

SCIENCE

569

Mendel will be delivered by Professor H. S.
Jennings and the address on Pasteur by Pro-
fessor Victor C. Vaughan. The ceremony will
be held in the university auditomum.

W. H. Westey, for forty-seven years as-
sistant secretary of the Royal Astronomical
Society, died on Ocober 27, in his eighty-
second year.

Tue death is announced of Dr. Alexander
‘Crum Brown, professor of chemistry in Edin-
burgh University from 1869 until his retire-
ment in 1908.

Prorsessor A. V. Vassinierr, of the Uni-
versity of Petrograd, writes: “Through the
death on September 23, 1922, of Dr. Lev
Alexandrovitch Tchugaiev, professor of chem-
istry in Petrograd University and director of
the Institute for the Study of Platinum, the
science of chemistry has lost a most devoted
student. Professor Tchugaiev died at the age
of forty-nine years from typhoid fever. The
premature death of this energetic scholar pos-
sessing great knowledge and a broad mind and
whose conduct has been always guided by the
high ideal of devotion to science adds a new
great loss to so many suffered by Russian
science within the few past years. The first
studies of Tchugaiev had for their object the
groups of terpenes and of camphor as well as
optical properties of organic compounds. But
his most important researches, published in
the Comptes Rendus, in the Journal of the
Chemical Society, in the Zeitschrift fiir Anor-
ganische Chemie and in the Journal of the
Physico-Chemical Society of Russia, related to
the study of complex compounds of cobalt,
nickel and platinum. The last years of his
indefatigable work were especially devoted to
the study of platinum compounds, their elec-
trie conductivity, isomerism, ete. Perhaps
the most important of all his investigations
relate to the coordination theory of Alfred
Werner, to the development of which Tchugaiev
contributed rfot a little.”

THE one hundred and seventeenth regular
meeting of the American Physical Society will
be held in Chicago, at the Ryerson Physical
Laboratory, on Saturday, December 2. If the
length of the program requires it, there will

070

also be sessions on Friday, December 1. The
annual meeting will be held in Boston, Decem-
ber 26 to 30.

Tue second annual meeting of the Deutsche
Gesellschaft fiir WVererbungswissenschaft was
held in Vienna on September 25-27. A report
in Nature says that, though technically a meet-

ing of the German society only, in fact the-

congress was largely international in character,
the visitors including representatives from
England, America, Italy, Switzerland, Japan,
Holland and the Scandinavian countries. Pro-
fessor R. Wettstein presided, and the opening
address was delivered by Professor EH. Baur
(Berlin). The principal discussions were
opened by Professor Goldschmidt (Berlin) on
“The Mutation Problem,’ and by Professor
Ruedin (Munich) on “The Inheritance of
Mental Defects.” Demonstrations ‘were ar-
ranged in the zoological laboratory of the uni-
versity and in the Natural History Museum.
Visits were made ito the Biologische Versuch-
sanstalt (where Professor Steinach demon-
strated his transplantation experiments in rats
and guinea pigs) and to the principal libraries
and art galleries in tthe town. Professor R.
Hertwig was elected president for the ensuing
year, and the society accepted his invitation to
meet at Munich in 1923.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tue Joint Administrative Board of Colum-
bia University and the Presbyterian Hospital
has announced that the site for the new medical
center has been transferred to the university
and the hospital. The land site extends ‘be-
tween One Hundred and Sixty-fifth and One
Hundred and Sixty-eighth Streets from
Broadway to the Hudson River. It is in ex-
cess of twenty acres, and is valued at
$4,000,000. It is the gift of Mrs. Stephen V.
Harkness and Kdward §.- Harkness. It was
also announced that an agreement has been
confirmed ‘between the Presbyterian Hospital,
Columbia University and Mrs. Harkness, as
donor, for the transfer of a fund of $1,300,000
to Columbia University, for the endowment of
educational and scientifie work in the School of
Medicine and the Presbyterian Hospital. An

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

additional $1,000,000 has been given by Mr.
Harkness toward the construction of the new
Presbyterian Hospital, and $1,000,000 for the
school of medicine.

We learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association that the first building for
the new University of Rochester Medical
School, a laboratory building, will be com-—
pleted this month. Temporary offices of ad-
ministration will tbe established in it. An ap-
propriation of $1,000,000 has been made by
the city government for the new municipal hos-
pital, which will adjoin the Strong Memorial
Hospital. They will have a combined capacity
of 460 beds. The university is to furnish the
professional staff and the city the nonprofes-
sional employees, under a contract recently ap-
proved.

Mr. Cuarites C. SHarp has given $17,000 to
the Ohio State University as an endowment
fund for the library of the department of
chemistry. Mr. Sharp received the degree in
civil engineering from the university in 1888.

Tue new dairy industry and horticulture
buildings at the branch of the University of
California College of Agriculture at the Uni-
versity Farm, Davis, were formally dedicated
on October 24. The principal addresses were
given by President R. A. Pearson, of the Iowa
State College, on “Dairy research and educa-
tion,’ by Dr. W. H. Chandler, professor of
pomology and vice-direetor of research in the
New York State College of Agriculture at Cor-
nell University, on “The outlook of agricul-
tural research,’ and by President David P.
Barrows, of the University of California.

Dr. Epson SunDERLAND Bastin, professor
of economic geology in the University of Chi-
cago, has been made chairman of the depart-
ment to succeed the late head, Dean Rollin D.
Salisbury.

Aw the New York Homeopathic Medical
College and Flower Hospital the following ap-
pointments are announced: Israel S. Kleiner,
Ph.D., dean; Wm. E. Youland, Jr., M.D., head
of the department of pathology; Archibald
MeNeil, M.D., professor of bacteriology; Annis
E. Thomson, M.D., instructor in bacteriology;
Jenny Drennan, M.D., resident pathologist.

NoveMBER 17, 1922]

Winuiam Wawpen Rusey, B.A., has been
appointed instructor in geology by the Yale
Corporation, with assignment to Yale College.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

THE EVOLUTION OF CLIMATES:
A REJOINDER

Two articles criticising and disagreeing
with the writer’s interpretation of the climatic
history of the earth, and Dr. F. H. Knowlton’s
endorsement thereof, have been lately published
in the American Journal of Science.*

Some of these criticisms are based upon
misconceptions of the writer’s interpretations
and others upon a radical difference as to the
source of climatic control prior to the modern
era.

In “The Evolution of Climates”? and in pre-
vious publications the following theses are ad-
vanced :

(1) That prior to the Modern Era, of com-
plete solar control, a dual control prevailed,
in which the heating effects of solar radiation
were largely intercepted by a denser and more
persistent mantle of clouds than has prevailed
since the Pleistocene; and that solar heating
effects were principally exercised upon and
above the upper surface of this cloud-sphere,
and were, therefore, conservative of the lesser
source beneath.

(2) That wide variations in the intensity of
“The Solar Constant of Radiation’ may have
occurred during geologic time, but these did
not directly affect climates—for the order of
the distributions of temperatures and of glacia-
tions were not conformable to solar control.

(3) That during geologic time earth heat
was made available by deformations and rup-
tures of the crust, ete. which from time to
time inaugurated activities of great heat lib-
erating potentiality, namely, the erosion of
warm crustal materials and the exposure and
transformation of radioactive substances.

1 Professor A. P. Coleman (5) Vol. 1, No. 4,
315-319. Professor Chas. Schuchert, ib., 320-324.
This article is abridged from a rejoinder to
these criticisms, which was denied publication in
that journal.

2 Baltimore, 1922.

SCIENCE

571

(4) That upon the partial exhaustion of
these increments, the quickly cooling continents
frequently reached low temperatures and were
glaciated (a) in the interiors and easterly sides,
as least affected by ocean influences, as in
Huronian and Cretacic times; (6b) under belts
or zones of maximum anti-cyclonic circulation,
as in Permo-Carboniferous time; and, later, in
the final chill of Pleistocene time, under belts
of maximum cloudiness and precipitation. That
oceans, by reason of high specific heat, stored
successive increments of earth heat and_ flue-
tuated between narrower limits than continents
until Pleistocene time, when they reached
glacial temperatures in polar and middle lati-
tudes. At this stage, they ceased to yield
sufficient water vapor to maintain the integrity
of the previous mantle of clouds in any lati-
tude, and the earth having lost its last available
inerement of its original or planetary heat,
ceased to be a cooling body and became a warm-
ing body by direct exposure to and the trap-
ping of solar radiation converted into heat by
contact with the surface. That land areas fluc-
tuated through much wider limits or, as ap-
proximately fixed by Professor Schuchert,
from 110° F. to —60° F., or through 170°,
while oceans fluctuated between 85° and 55°.

(5) That in this process of slow and inter-
mittent cooling by the loss of available inere-
ments of earth heat, water was a circulating
agent of high efficiency, continuously cooling
land areas, and, in part, bearing the heat thus
derived to the oceans; the other part became
latent in water vapor.

The writer does not consider the nebular
hypothesis as part of his interpretation of
geologic climates and their merging into those
of the Modern .Hra, as indicated by Professor
Coleman [1. c., p. 316].

No glaciation is compatible with a warm
earth (Professor Coleman, I. ¢., p. 316) and
the writer nowhere claims that it is; on the con-
trary, he holds that the earth having been
sereened from solar radiation by clouds, its
continents were subject to such climatic varia-
tions as the available increments of earth heat
were competent to maintain inside the layers
of moist air and clouds which its warm oceans
were capable of sustaining. Beneath this

572

screen glaciations frequently occurred non-
conformable to solar control; all of which, ex-
cept the last, merged into a non-zonal distribu-
tion of milder climates; while the last merged
into the zonally distributed climates of to-day
distinctly under solar control.

A uniform and steady supply of heat from
the earth’s interior under the assumed screen
of clouds is not held in the theory which Pro-
fessor Coleman criticises. On the contrary, it
is held that this supply was neither. uniform
nor steady, but highly variable in both supply
and exhaustion.

The periods of glaciation as compiled by
Professor Schuchert®? are accepted as marking
variation of climate of greater or less extent
and severity in various localities and zones
throughout known geologic time. None of
these can be reconciled with a mild and equable
climate controlled by any source or sources of
heat and particularly not to a climate con-
trolled by solar energy; for no glaciation has
been recorded conformably to solar control.
All were non-conformable thereto and contra-
dictory thereof, but they can be reconciled with
periods during which the available increments
of the internal heat were exhausted to such an
extent that land masses in various latitudes
cooled below 31° F. The glaciation of tropical
latitudes during Permo-Carboniferous time is
particularly fatal to any assumption of solar
control; for had this, or any other glaciation,
been imposed under solar control it would
have commenced in polar latitudes and ad-
vanced equatorward, and would have retreated
poleward. No glaciation has been so laid down
and none except the Pleistocene has so receded
and given place to a disposition of climates
distinctly zonal and as distinctly under solar
control; and the fluctuating advances and re-
treats were at such short intervals that corre-
sponding fluctuations in solar energy could not
be reasonably assumed.

The mantle of clouds need be neither sup-
posed nor assumed. It recorded its effects in
glaciations and reglaciations in nearly a score
of instances, and it recorded its failures in each
interglacial epoch and in the present progres-
sive deglaciations. By no other known means

3 Smithsonian Inst. Report, 1914, 305-306.

SCIENCE

[Vov. LVI, No. 1455

could solar energy have been intercepted to
such an extent as to permit frequent glacia-
tions of portions of the earth in latitudes which
could not have been sufficiently chilled without
such interception.

The writer accepts the variability of climates
on continental areas from the dawn to the close
of geologic time, as presented by Professor
Schuchert [Smithsonian Inst. Report, 1914, p.
305]. This variability is well established.*

It is also well established in Permo-Carbon-
iferous® and Pleistocene glaciations that max-
ima were attained along quite well-defined zonal
lines.

Continental temperatures in tropical and in
polar regions now vary within the limits of
110° F. and —60° F., or a range of 170° F.;
and ocean temperatures range between 85° and
31° F. or through 54° F. It is a reasonable
inference that during geologic climates con-
tinental temperatures had approximately the
same extreme range, but the range of ocean
temperatures for the greater part of geologic
time, as admitted by Professor Schuchert, was
between 85° F. and 55° F., or through 30° F.
But it manifestly took from Proterozoic until
Pliocene for oceans to pass through these ex-
tremes and only in the Pleistocene did oceans of
polar and middle latitudes reach the present
lower limit, with their extreme range of 54° F.
The present extreme range of continental tem-
peratures between tropical and polar latitudes
of 170° F. is ‘the same as the annual range in
central Canada and Siberia, and the annual
range of ocean temperatures in the same lati-
tude is less than one tenth (%o0) of this.

The comparison of the range of ocean tem-
peratures prior to the Pliocene of 30° F. with
the present range of 54°, and the ease with
which continental temperatures can range with-
in twelve months through 170° F. supports the
writer’s views regarding geologic climates.

The prime and radical difference between
the conclusions of Professor Sechuchert and
those of the writer are, as to the source of con-
trol, namely, that until oceans chilled to the
temperatures marked in Pleistocene time, a
dual source of climatic control prevailed, and

4 Osborn, ‘‘The Age of Mammals,’’ pp. 372-3.
5 Schuchert, ib., 280-282.

NoveMBER 17, 1922]

this control was distinetly different from the
zonal climatic arrangement of to-day, as mani-
fested by the climatic phenomena recorded in
Permo-Carboniferous and in Pleistocene times.
The greater part of the “plexus of problems
of unparallel difficulty” presented in the Per-
mian is involved in the attempts to fit Permo-
Carboniferous glaciations and the concurrent
climatic phenomena to the unproved assump-
tion of solar control. This is true of all glacia-
tions, and of the reglaciations following inter-
glacial warmth which so distinctly contradict
solar control that it is difficult to understand
why the assumption of solar control has been
held with such rigid orthodoxy. Neither critic
meets the prime question of a dual versus a
solar control of geologic climates.
Marspen Manson
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA,
OcroBER 9, 1922

THE EFFECTS OF CAPTIVITY ON A SEX
CHARACTER

Late last winter I noticed a gravid female
in a tank containing European brown trout at
the New York Aquarium, and suggested that
‘she be removed and stripped.

As is well known, the males of many sal-
monidx, including salmon and most trout, de-
velop a hook on the lower jaw in the breeding
season, which is serviceable in their fights at
the spawning grounds. Specimens with hooked
jaws were therefore selected from the brown
trout tank for milt to fertilize the eggs.

Then it was discovered that a hook-jawed
individual might be a female. This phenom-
enon was unknown to us, and as far as we
know has never been recorded. But we soon
found that we had made no unique discovery,
for about the time the brown trout eggs were
changing into fry in the hatching troughs, the
Aquarium received a visit from Dr. Francis
G. Macnaughton of Dunshire, St. Andrews,
Scotland, who has experimented largely with
European trout. When the writer told him of
the females with hooked jaws, he said that in
Europe this phenomenon has not infrequently
oceurred as a result of captivity.

Precisely what effect captivity may have
upon the somaplasm to bring about this curious

SCIENCE 573

condition, we leave to conjecture; but what a
startling biological event it would be if a lion-
ess were to grow a mane and other female
animals in captivity developed the secondary
sexual characters of the male!

; Ipa M. Meuien
THE NEw YorRK AQUARIUM

MISUSE OF THE QUESTIONNAIRE

To THe Eprror or Science: A questionnaire
is being mailed to “persons whose addresses
are given in the book ‘American Men of
Science’” to ascertain “what proportion of
American men of science are believers in the
current religion, what proportion are not,” ete.
As the questions are in many cases like the
famous “Will you leave off beating your
mother?” probably the majority of us will
ignore them. The bias of the questionnaire is
so obvious, it might well be ignored were it
not that we shall probably hear. before many
months that 97 per cent. of American men of
science are utterly without religious beliefs,
“as shown by a recent careful investigation.”
Hence I wish to make this early protest against
this particular questionnaire and the possibility
of drawing any reliable conclusions from the
replies received.

Houpert Lyman Cuark
OctoBER 25, 1922

QUOTATIONS
MOTORLESS FLIGHT IN ENGLAND

THe French airman, M. Maneyrolle, won the
prize of £1,000 offered by the Daily Mail, by a
wind flight on October 21 lasting three hours
and twenty-two minutes. The notable suc-
cesses registered during the recent French con-
tests, and especially during the German con-
tests, raised the question whether British fliers
could rival the feats of their foreign colleagues,
and the offer of a prize of £1,000 by the Daily
Mail led to the organization, at Itford Hill
and Firle Beacon on the South Downs, of the
first British gliding contests since the war,
which commenced on October 16 and continued
through the week. Additional prizes were
offered by the Royal Aero Club and others.
The entry of British machines and pilots was

574

very encouraging, there being some two score
British fliers, besides foreign aviators, notably
the Dutch airman, M. Fokker. A large num-
ber of short flights and some quite long flights
were made; yet on the whole the results of the
meeting were not of a sensational nature until
the last day of the meeting. The general con-
clusion is that British aviators do not fall
behind those of Germany, and that it is possi-
ble to find suitable arenas in this country for
the practice and display of motorless flight.
The most notable achievement of the first day
of the contest was a thirty-seven-minute glide
by M. Fokker, but this was surpassed by a
fine flight executed by Mr. F. P. Raynham.
This aviator had already taken a place in the
front rank of British pilots in the recent air-
race round England: he added to his laurels
by remaining in the air in a motorless machine
for one hour and fifty-three minutes, thus
putting himself in the same category as the
German record-makers, Martens and Hentzen.
But on the last day, Saturday, two world-
records were nevertheless established. J. R.
Olley went up in a Fokker biplane, and re-
mained in the air with a passenger for forty-
nine minutes, while M. Maneyrolle, in a tandem
monoplane glider, succeeded in remaining in
the air for three hours twenty-two minutes,
thus winning the Daily Mail prize and beating
the previous record, that of Hentzen, by twelve
minutes. During the last ninety minutes of his
flight, M. Maneyrolle was accompanied by a
monoplane glider flown by Squadron-Leader
A. Gray, and it was night when the two ma-
chines landed within 100 yards of the point
from which they started. These competitions
on the South Downs will serve as an encour-
agement to motorless flight in this country, and
will help in the accumulation of knowledge and
experience on one of the most interesting de-
velopments in modern aeronautics.—Nature.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

The Theory of Functions of a Real Variable.
By E. W. Hozsson, Se.D., LL.D., F.RB.S.,
Sadleirian Professor of Pure Mathematics
and Fellow of Christ’s College, in the Uni-
versity of Cambridge. Second edition, Vol.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

1. Cambridge at the University Press, 1921.

Pp. xvi + 671.

Because of the war and relativity, we are at
present in a period of increasing scepticism
towards so-called established principles and
facts. Mamy still believe, however, that mathe-
matical knowledge, at any rate, is beyond dis-
pute. For these there will be great disap-
pointment in the pages of Hobson. The book
reads in places like unconvincing philosophy;
and instead of statements made with full per-
sonal conviction, we find, at times, conflicting
opinions of “authorities’—hbeings supposed, by
some, to be unknown to mathematicians—and
inconclusive attempts at mediation. And yet
it is on the Theory of Functions of a Real
Variable that rigor in Mathematical Analysis
depends. The first edition appeared in the
course of Zermelo’s work on Wohlordnung,
when mathematicians were just beginning to
get their bearings on certain controversial mat-
ters; after a lapse of fourteen years, there is
the same indecision. Other writers on Real
Variables and Point Sets—for example, Haus-
dorff, Carathéodory and Hahn—adopt a single
point of view and proceed joyfully without
misgiving. Professor Hobson wants to give a
comprehensive report—his book is the most
voluminous treatment of the subject—to in-
clude historical matter, and to be as fair as
possible, “no attempt has been made to give
dogmatic decisions between opposed opinions.”
This wish to be fair makes Professor Hobson
exchange, at times, the réle of mathematician
for that of reporter; it has the advantage, how-
ever, of making the reader independent of the
author—a significant advantage when we ob-
serve that even among mathematicians in-
stances are observable of opinions held not on
their merits but on the ground of personal and
nationalistic associations.

The role of the mediator, however, is apt to
be a hard one, not only in industrial, but even
in mathematical affairs. For fear of being
one-sided, he may lose vivacity. Thus we
read on page 238 [author’s italics], “In order
that a transfinite aggregate ... may be capa-
ble of being ordered, a principle of order must
be explicitly or implicitly contained in the

NovEeMBER 17, 1922]

norm by which the aggregate is defined. Or
again, page 239, “ ... an aggregate has a car-
dinal number only when it is one of a plurality
of equivalent aggregates, distinct from one an-
other.” .Again, what success can be expected
from an attempt to clarify the notion of ag-
gregate by the introduction of a new word,
“norm,” itself of debatable meaning? Pro-
fessor Hobson intimates that something must
be “universally accepted” to be admitted as
mathematical knowledge; but he does not men-
tion the attack made by Brouwer and Weyl
upon some of the fundamental theorems in
Analysis. Still again, it may be asked, if
(page 6) “the justification [for a certain as-
sumption] is to be found in the fact that no
contradiction arises in the theory based on it,”
why is not the multiplicative axiom justified?
Zermelo’s Grundlagen have led to no contra-
diction.

The present edition is “revised throughout” ;
“the parts of the subject dealt with in the first
five chapters of the first edition have been ex-
panded into the eight chapters of the present
volume.” This expansion is due chiefly to the
recent developments in the Theory of Integra-
tion. The theories of Hellinger, Young and
Denjoy are also included. The mathematical
world owes a debt of gratitude to Professor
Hobson for presenting in a smooth, connected
exposition a huge mass of research, a consid-
erable part of which is of recent origin.

The style is, on the whole, very lucid, great
pains being taken to prepare the reader’s mind
for the reception of new ideas. However, here
and there we find a lack of compactness—wit-
ness the proofs that cover pages 97 and 98,
and which may be compressed into one tenth of
the space by the use of points with rational co-
ordinates. The treatment retains, in part,
something of the freshness of a memoir and
will thus prove more stimulating, in one way,
than treatises written with a constraining
finish.

At this late date, strange to say, the defini-
tion of cardinal number as given by Professor
Hobson is not without an objectionable fea-
ture. Russel is right. Professor Hobson’s
reference to the “degree of plurality” is like

SCIENCE

575

saying, “You know what I mean’’; it does not
make his definition mathematically acceptable.
On page 259 occurs the following statement:
“No elaborate theory is required for functions
which retain their complete generality, .. .
since few deductions of importance can be made
from that definition which will be valid for all
functions.” It may be of interest to remark
that this view is rendered untenable in the
light of the results to be announced soon in the
Proceedings of the National Academy of Sci-
ences in a paper by the reviewer, entitled “New
Properties of All Real Functions.”

Henry BuumMsBerG
UNIVERSITY oF ILLINOIS

Analysis Situs. The Cambridge Colloquium
Lectures, Part II, Vol. V. By Oswatp
Vesiten. Published by the American Math-
ematical Society, 501 West 116th Street,
New York. 150 pp., octavo. 1922.

The Cambridge Colloquium: lectures on
Analysis Situs were delivered in 1916, but the
publication having been postponed because of
the war, the lectures were completely rewritten
before publication, and the resulting book is a
treatise on the elements of Analysis Situs. It
is furthermore the only modern book on the
subject. By a study of this book it is possible
to acquire a knowledge of Analysis Situs with-
out going through the many widely scattered
memoirs as was formerly the case. Every one
interested in Analysis Situs will weleome Pro-
fessor Veblen’s book as an important and use-
ful contribution to the subject. Part I by
G. C. Evans on Functionals and their Applica-
tions was published in 1918.

H. L. Riztz

SPECIAL ARTICLES

ZOSTERA MARINA IN ITS RELATION TO
TEMPERATURE!

In connection with some work on the tem-
perature control. of the geographical distribu-
tion of the marine alg, it seems to be demon-
strated that the terms eurythermal and steno-
thermal apply only to the power of endurance
of a wider or narrower range of temperature

1 Preliminary communication.

576

without indicating definitely, as least in the
ease of the eurythermal species, just what tem-
perature limits are vitally concerned with the
persistence of the species. An attempt has
been made to establish definite temperature
zones, to each of which certain species are nor-
mal, and to explain the presence of any species,
normal to one zone, in a zone of different tem-
perature, by the fact that the invaded zone, as it
was designated, has its temperature raised or
lowered to that of the normal zone of the species
by some agency or condition, local or general,
and for a sufficient length of time to allow of
the reproductive processes of the invading spe-
cies to be effectively carried on. This idea has
been set forth in an article entitled “Steno-
thermy and Zone Invasion.” (Amer. Nat., Vol.
54, pp. 385-397, 1920.)

Tn connection with this investigation, it
seemed very desirable to attempt to determine
the behavior of a group of aquatic plants
other than the Alge and I turned my attention
to the marine spermatophytes, popularly
knowm as sea grasses, eel grasses, Or grass
wrack. The inquiry, at first, was purely sta-
tistical, merely assembling what was known of
these plants as to their distribution, their
times of flowering, and the relation of their
distribution and flowering to isothermal lines
of temperature, especially to those of the max-
ima. The results of this inquiry are set forth
in a paper entitled “Geographical Distribution
of the Marine Spermatophytes” (Bull. Torrey
Bot. Club, Vol. 47, pp. 563-579, 1920). It
seems, from the data available, that out of 34
known species, 26 are stenothermal, ¢. e., con-
fined to a single zone of temperature of 5° C.
amplitude of the maxima; 6 are somewhat
eurythermal, occurring in two such zones; and
2 are broadly eurythermal, occupying 3 or
more of such zones. Of the last category,
Zostera marina L., the common eel-grass of
the north Atlantic coasts, is the most pro-
nounced and the most puzzling. After assem-
bling such data as were readily available as to
season of reproduction in different portions of
its range, I ventured to suggest that the normal
zone of Zostera marina L. must be the North
Temperate, whose waters possess a summer
temperature of 15° to 20° C., and that the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

extension of the distribution of this species as
far north as the Upper Boreal is due to the
effect of insolation upon the shallow, enclosed
waters of its habitat in the invaded zones, and,
on the other hand, that the invasion southward
into the northern portion of the Tropical Zone
is possible on account of the seasonal lowering
of the temperature of the waters during the
winter and spring.

Since I am able to visit the Atlantic Coast
only at very infrequent intervals, I appealed
to correspondents and to the U. S. Commis-
sioner of Fisheries to assist in determining the
exact status of the temperature conditions of
the life-history of Zostera marina L. The Com-
missioner promptly and favorably responded
and issued instructions to make the collections
desired at the stations at Key West, Florida,
Beaufort, N. C., and Woods Hole, Mass. At
the Key West station, Ezra Stiles, Jr., early
demonstrated that Zostera marina L. is absent
but that the Turtle Grass, Thalassia testudi-
num, is abundant and presents certain prob-
lems. With the transfer of Mr. Stiles to an
inland station these observations came to an
end. At the Beaufort station, Charles Hatsel,
and at two very different localities at Woods
Hole, R. A. Goffin have made collections
monthly or bi-monthly for some seventeen or
eighteen months, together with the proper tem-
perature data. I am deeply indebted to these
members of the staff of the Bureau of Fisheries
for their most valuable and painstaking co-
operation.

I, myself, was able to supplement the ob-
servations at the stations of the Bureau of
Fisheries by collections made at various sta-
tions about Narragansett Bay, R. I., in May,
June and July of 1921, and Professor Thurlow
C. Nelson of the New Jersey Agricultural Ex-
periment Station kindly made collections
throughout the year at stations of the Oyster
Commission on the coast of New Jersey.

Since Zostera marina L. grows in extensive
patches, whose individual plants are fairly uni-
form in behavior, all that is necessary is te
gather a fair sized bunch of plants, dry and
forward with the proper data. The extensive
mass of material accumulated has not been
critically gone over as yet, but sufficient exam-

NovEeMBER 17, 1922]

ination has been made to show that it will
assist greatly in unraveling the intricacies of
the life history of this species from the point
of view of morphological changes and their
relation to temperature variation. One fact,
indeed, is clearly apparent and that is this:
the reproductive season begins at 15° C. or
very close to it and extends only to 20° C. or
closely in its neighborhood. The vegetative
processes preceding anthesis and maturing of
seed have also fairly narrow, but different,
temperature relations, as do also those suc-
ceeding the maturing of seed. The active
period of growth and reproduction seems to
be normally included within an interval of
10° C., i. e., from 10° C. to 20°. During the
colder as well as during the warmer periods of
the year, according to the particular zone, nor-
mal or invaded, Zostera marina L. enters into
a state of quiescence, total or nearly so, but
revives when the proper temperature for vege-
tative activity of one sort or the other comes
again. The material now in my hands as the
result of this cooperation seems ample for
clearing up these points, and a more detailed
report is in preparation.

There seems to be no dependence on a par-
ticular period of illumination in the case of
the various stages of growth and reproduction
—in other words, no photo-periodism in the
sense of Garner and Allard. This. negation
stands out very clearly.

Wiuuiam ALBert SETCHELL

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA,

Avuaust 23, 1922

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

DIVISION OF PHYSICAL AND INORGANIC CHEMISTRY
S. E. Sheppard, chairman
Robert E. Wilson, secretary
Experimental studies of the radiation hypothe-
sis: Farrincton Daniets. The decomposition
of nitrogen pentoxide is a favorable reaction for
testing deductions from the radiation hypothesis,
since it is a unimolecular, gas phase reaction
which takes place at room temperature. The
influence of the temperature of the walls of the
containing vessel and their optical nature have
been investigated. Nitrogen dioxide is an im-

SCIENCE

577

portant factor in determining its velocity. The
influence of various solvents has been studied.
The effect of visible and infra red light has been
investigated. Experiments have been carried out
to determine whether the vessel walls can supply
sufficient energy to cause the reaction. A search
has been made for the emission of light pre-
dicted on the basis of the radiation hypothesis.

Some deductions from. statistical mechanics:
W. H. RoprsusH. Marcelin derived an equation
for the temperature coefficient of the rate of a
chemical reaction which agreed with the em-
pirical Arrhenius equation. Tolman has shown
that this derivation was incorrect. A rigorous
derivation of a similar equation is given. By
combining this equation with the assumptions of
the quantum theory a physical basis is obtained
for the empirical equation of Dushman, which
has been shown to have considerable validity.
The equation contains a constant which is charac-
teristic for the molecule involved so that complete
validity of the Dushman equation for all different
kinds of molecules could not be expected.

The ‘‘creepage’’ corona, a new, type of silent
discharge: F. O. ANDEREGG and H. E. Bowers.
The effect of a dielectric material in an electric
field has been studied by ©. W. Rice (Proc. Am.
Inst. Elec. Eng., 1917). K. B. McEachron has
found that glass rods may increase the yield of
ozone (Purdue Univ. Eng. Expt. Sta. Bull. 7). A
study of their results shows that the action of
the dielectric material in the ‘‘creepage’’ dis-
charge is probably partly catalytic. Experiments
have been made with a variety of dielectric mate-
rials including fragments of ordinary glass,
quartz glass and of earthenware, with and with-
out beeswax impregnation; also blue and white
flint and of hematite. The effect of these mate-
rials upon air and upon carbon monoxide sub-
jected to a silent discharge has been studied
under a variety of conditions. Preliminary re-
sults are given, strongly supporting the conten-
tion that catalytic action and ionic activation are
superimposed in this type of discharge.

The effect of container walls on chemical reac-
tions in the corona: F. O. ANDEREGG and K. B.
McEacuron. In the effort to trace out the causes
which eontribute to the common lack of reproduci-
bility in results, in the study of chemical reae-
tions in the corona discharge, experiments have
been extended over a considerable period of time.
The surface of metallic electrodes is disinte-
grated so that ‘‘polarization’’ and variation in
chemical action may result. If a dielectrie mate-

578

rial is placed between the electrodes, the variable
effects of internal and surface changes of the
dielectric may be superimposed upon the dis-
charge, the result being variable yields. Some of
the products of the reactions in the discharge are
liable to be absorbed on the walls, the amount ab-
sorbed depending upon the condition of the walls.
Under certain conditions complete inhibition of
the usual reactions results.

A comparative study of the absorption spectra
of phenylazophenol derivatives in the visible re-
gion of the spectrum: C. S. ApAmMs, C. E. Boorp
and ALpHEUS W. SmirH. This paper is a con-
tinuation of the work previously published by
Smith and Boord. The present study includes
fifty-seven azoderivatives, fourteen of which have
not been previously described. Alkali salt causes
a displacement of the absorption band toward
the red end of the spectrum, the degree of dis-
placement varying with the solvent medium.
Substitution causes displacement toward the
longer wave lengths, the order for substitution in
the phenyl nucleus being, in ascending scale,
para meta ortho and in the phenol nucleus being
ortho meta. The nitrophenyl derivatives form an
exception to this rule. Weighting of the molecule
by substituents follows Nietzki’s rule. This is
particularly true of the methyl derivatives. For
the halogens Cl Br I, symmetry of the molecule
seems to have a marked effect upon the absorp-
tion. Restoration of the symmetry of azobenzene
by substitution of the same group in both para
positions produces a marked hypso-chromic effect.

The potentials of silver: Silver halide—halide
electrodes in light. Part I: S. E. SHEPPARD and
Freurx A. Huuiorr. Single potentials of an
jlluminated electrode were measured by the po-
tentiometer compensation method, in a cell com-
posed according to the system:

Light KBr aq
Ag, AgBr, x KBr aq sat.

‘Dark
x KBr, AgBr:Ag

or

0.1 N HBr, Ho, Pt

Hence an illuminated electrode could be coupled
with an identical unilluminated electrode, or with
a standard hydrogen electrode. The following
factors in the preparation have to be controlled
to secure reproducibility: (1) preparation of the
silver surface; (2) halogenizing the electrode;
(3) ‘‘ripening’’ the halogenized surface, and
aging. With electrodes thus prepared it was
found that the potentials, at an illumination of
16 C. M., were reduced as the concentration of
bromide was increased, and also by increased
bromination in preparing. With constant inten-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

sity of light the electrodes rapidly attained a
maximum potential, which then fell off (solariza-
tion). Repeated intermittent exposure and dark-
ening, up to 160 minutes, showed no noticeable
fatigue.

Oxidation potentials of permanganates with
other manganese compounds: D. J. Brown and
S. B. ARONSON.

Energy changes in the reduction of quinones:

J. B. Conant and L. F. Fimsmr. The free energy,
total energy and latent heat of reduction of a
number of derivatives of benzoquinone, naphtho-
quinone and anthraquinone have been determined
by measuring the oxidation-reduction potential
and its temperature coefficient. The free and
total energy changes are very different for dif-
ferent types of quinones. The latent heat of re-
duction is approximately the same for all the
quinones measured. A method has been developed
for measuring the potential in alcoholic solutions
and applied to a number of substances too insolu-
ble to be measured in aqueous solution. The
potential of a given quinone is somewhat greater
in alcoholic than in aqueous solution but essen-
tially constant in 50, 75 and 95 per cent. alcohol.
The potentials in two different solvents are re-
lated by an equation involving the solubilities of
the oxidized and reduced compounds.
_ The effect of substitution on the free energy of
reduction. I. Benzoquinone derivatives: VICTOK
K. La Mer and Linnian HE. Baksr. The repro-
dueibility and validity of the electro-metric titra-
tion method of measuring oxidation-reduction
potentials has been established as less than
+0.2 My., when precautions are taken or correc-
tions made for errors, such as removal of H+
during the reaction, dissolved oxygen, variation in
contact potential, ete. (see below). A ground
glass stopper makes an excellent junction for
titration work, reproducible to +0.05 Mv. for
dilute HCl against saturated KCl. Measure-
ments on homologous quinones in acid solutions
where the activity ratio quinone hydroquinone is
unity show that halogen substitution raises, while
alkyl substitution lowers the value of [Jo, the
normal potential of reduction in the order Cl >
Br > None > Methyl > dimethyl > methyl,
isopropyl > m dimethoxy > phenylene (naptho-
quinone).

Electrometric Ozidation—reduction titrations
of pure compounds and mixtures: Linn E.
Baker and Vicror K. LA Mer. Calculation and
experiment show that complex formation (quin-
hydrone) in the case of nine substituted quinone-

NoveMBErR 17, 1922]

hydroquinone systems, is not sufficient to cause
any perceptible drift in the values of [[o at least
in acid solution when the latter is determined
over a wide range of concentrations by the method
of Clark, the concentration of the quinone sub-
stances yarying between .001 to .003 M. Impuri-
ties whose potentials approximate that of the
system under examination so closely as to evade
detection by differential titration cause pro-
nounced drifts, the extent of which depends upon
the amount of impurity present as well as
whether the impurity has the higher or lower
potential.

Hlectrometric titrations of silicic acid: WILLIAM
STERICKER. Silicic acid was titrated with sodium
hydroxide in order to determine what salts it
formed. The sol was prepared from ‘reerystallized
sodium metasilicate and was carefully purified by
dialysis. The pure sol gelled readily. There was
no indication of the presence of hydrogen ions or
of the formation of any salts. The titration of a
sodium silicate solution indicated that this may
have been due to polymerization of the acid.
Although the first results would indicate that
sodium silicate is completely hydrolyzed in dilute
solution, titrations with phenolphthalein indicator
show this is not so.

Synthesis of urea with the enzyme urease: Ep-
WARD Mack and DonaLp 8. Vi~tars. The rever-
sible action of enzymes has been already shown
in several cases, but has never been demonstrated
for urease. In the present paper, it is proved
beyond any doubt that the equilibrium in the re-
action (NH»).CO + 2H20 =>» (NHy4)oCOg can
be approached from the (NH4)9COg side, and
that the presence of urease hastens very decidedly
the attainment of equilibrium. Previous failure
to detect the effect was due to (1) starting with
too dilute a solution of (NH4).CO3 and (2) not
waiting a long enough time for the action, which
even in the presence of urease is slow.

The action of urease in the decomposition of
urea: Epwarp. Mack and Donaup 8. VILLARS.
‘From the work of E. A. Werner and others it
seems probable that urea in its reaction with
water to form ammonium carbonate takes two
courses: (1) it forms ammonium cynanate as an
intermediate product, which is itself changed to
ammonium carbonate; and (2) it forms ammo-
nium carbamate, which is hydrolyzed to car-
bonate. By a process of elimination, it has been
possible, in the present paper, to show that it is
the transformation of urea into ammonium car-
bamate which is catalyzed by the presence of the

SCIENCE

579

enzyme. Process (1) is not affected by urease.
It proceeds at its normal rate in the presence of
the enzyme.
’ The acceleration of the hydrolysis of mustard
gas by alkaline colloidal solutions: Roprrr E.
Witson and Evrerrrr W. Fouuure. A careful
series of experiments was carried out to deter-
mine the mechanism by which alkaline colloidal
solutions, such as those of sulfonated corn oil,
so greatly accelerate the removal of mustard gas
from contaminated clothing. It was found that
these accelerating solutions do not increase the
solubility of the mustard gas in the aqueous
phase nor the specific rate of hydrolysis, but that
in solutions of proper alkalinity they act as car-.
riers of mustard gas. The acid produced by the
hydrolysis precipitates out tiny oil globules in
the aqueous film adjacent to the liquid mustard.
gas, and these globules rapidly dissolve unhydro-
lyzed mustard gas, and are then swept up into
the alkaline portion of the solution and redis-
solved, thus permitting rapid hydrolysis of the
mustard gas which they carry. Part of the ac-
celeration is also due to the fact that these col-
loidal solutions keep the mustard gas spread out
jn a thin film on the cloth, instead of causing it
to draw up into globules, as happens in the pres-
ence of solutions of higher interfacial tension.
Hydrogen ion concentration and photochemical
reaction velocity: G. S. Forsrs and J. C. Woop-
HouSE. The speed of photochemical oxidation of
quinine by OrO3 in unvaried concentrations is
nearly constant from 0.5NH SO, at least to
2.5NH»SO,4. Below 0.5N, the order of reaction
with respect to hydrogen ion N,, increases. At
0.01N (the lowest concentration practicable) it is
about 1 and is rapidly increasing, presumably
toward 2° the value of N,, in the dark.

Previously N .,, had been shown, as small con-
3

centrations were reached, to increase from 0 to 1,
its value in the dark. The conclusion follows
that the oxidation is a reaction stage separate
from a preceding stage of photochemical sensi-
tization, and slow with respect to it only at low
concentrations. Such relations are doubtless more
common than suspected.

The inhibition of the photochemical decompost-
tion of hydrogen peroxide solutions: Wm. T.
ANDERSON, JR., and HueH 8. Taytor. (1) The
inhibitory effects of 25 typical organic com-
pounds on the photochemical decomposition of
hydrogen peroxide solutions have been studied im
four definite spectral regions of the ultra-violet;
(2) The inhibition by such agents has been asso-

580

ciated with the absorptive capacity of the organic

compounds for ultra-violet light. A striking eor-
relation between these factors has been obtained
in the case of benzene, several esters, acids,
amides, ketones and alkaloids. The retarding ae-
tion of amines and alcohols requires an explana-
tion based on other causes than adsorption of
light; (3) It has been shown that the inhibitors
act more efficiently when in the peroxide solutions
than when in a sereening solution of’ similar
thickness and concentration.

The reduction of copper oxide by carbon mon-
oxide and the interaction of carbon monomide
and oxygen in the presence of copper and of
copper oxide: H. A, Jones and Hueu S. Taytor.
(1) The reduction of copper oxide by carbon
monoxide has been shown to be an autocatalytic
process, copper being the autocatalyst; the reduc-
tion occurs at a copper-copperoxide interface; (2)
The retarding action of carbon dioxide and of
oxygen on the primary reaction of the reduction
process, i. ¢., the formation of the copper nuclei,
has been pointed out; (3) The mechanism of the
carbon monoxide-oxygen catalysis over copper
oxide has been shown to be alternate reduction
and oxidation of the copper oxide; (4) The
mechanism of the catalysis in the presence of
copper has been shown to be oxidation of an ad-
sorbed layer of carbon monoxide; (5) It has
been established that oxygen is a poison in the
combination of carbon monoxide and oxygen over
copper. \

The calculation of critical values for binary
mixtures: A. G. Loomis.’ One of the greatest ex-
perimental difficulties in the study of the pressure-
temperature composition surface for binary mix-
tures in the accurate determination of the critical
values for the various mixtures. It is shown in
this paper that by employing the equation of
Dieterici, which is quite accurate in the critical
region, the entire critical line may be very closely
calculated; this equation leads to better results
than the equation of van der Waals. The com-
position of the mixture with minimum critical
temperature can be very accurately caleulated by

ax
finding the expression which makes — a minimum,

where az and ba are the attraction and volume
constants, each expressed as a quadratic function
of the composition. By employing the conditions
for phase equilibrium on the critical line and
introducing the equation of state in the expression
for the free energy of the system, the composition
of the mixture with maximum vapor pressure is
accurately calculated when the values 7y and Vo

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1455

of each phase are equated and put equal to 2b, as
demanded by the equation of Dieterici.

Compound formation and ionization in fused
salt mixtures: JAMES KENDALL, E. D. OrirrEen.
DEN and H. K. Miuimr. A study of the freezing.
point curves for a large number of systems of
the types aluminum chloride—metal chloride,
aluminum bromide—metal bromide, antimony tri-
chloride—metal chloride has shown that here, as
in other fields, the extent of compound forma-
tion between the two components is primarily
dependent upon the diversity of their constituent
radicals. The effect of subsidiary factors, such
as valence, unsaturation, internal pressure and
atomic volume, has also been investigated.
Ionization is found to run parallel with com-
pound formation in the few systems for which
data are now available. The work is being con-
tinued.

A low temperature electrolyte: W. H. Ropz-
BUSH and THEODORE: 0. YNTEMA. Hydrogen
chlorid and nitric oxid form a compound at low
temperatures of an intense purple color. This is
of interest because G. N. Lewis has pointed out
that nitric oxid is the only molecule. containing
an odd number of electrons that is not colored.
It was predicted that this compound would show
conductivity in the liquid state. This prediction
was verified, a conductivity of 10-3 being easily
obtained at 130° K. This is believed to be the
lowest temperature at which electrolytic conduc-
tion will be obtained. Speculations are offered as
to the nature of the compound.

Transference numbers of sodium and potassium
in miged chloride solution: R. F. SCHNEIDER and
S. A. Bratey. The transference numbers of
sodium and potassium have been determined in
solutions with a total concentration varying from
0.1 to 1.6 N and with varying salts ratios of
from 3 KCl and 1 NaCl to 1 Kel and 3 NaCl.
While the conductance of such solutions conform
to calculated values on the basis of the isohydric
principle the ratios of the transference are widely
different from the calculated. At a total concen- —
tration of 0.2 N and a salt ratio of 3 Kel to
1 NaCl the transference number of the sodium
becomes practically zero, indicating that the
sodium is not only transported as the cation but
is also tied up in a complex anion to such an
extent that it moves in both directions at the
same rate. The data show that the theory of
complete dissociation as advocated by Ghosh can
not possibly hold.

CHARLES L. Parsons,
Secretary

Nzw SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1456 Fripay, NoveMBer 24, 1922 SineLe Cortes, 15 Crs.

MORGAN MOISTURE DETERMINATION CHAMBER

According to Dr. J. J. Morgan of Columbia University

This chamber is designed primarily for the determina-
tion of moisture in coal as per A. S. T. M. specifications. The
material is brass, nickel-plated. The chamber is arranged
for four or six crucibles and is intended to be used -in-con-
nection with a standard drying oven, as for7example the
Freas’ automatically controlled electrically heated oven. By
means of the coiled tube uniformly heated air or, hydrogen,
is brought over the samples to remove the eet

Ney We +
Morgan Moisture Determination Chamber for four) \)\
GHBIDIGH ONE KSe au et eA eT auch te nama LUC dL $30.00

Morgan Moisture Determination Gi atier for six
CHC T LES anny OS ete NR NNR 3 AMRrRmUMU STN TS LS 8 Pais se $35.00

NEW YORK | CITY | PITTSBURGH BRANCH
3rd Ave., 18th—19th St. 4048 Jenkins Arcade

ESTABLISHED 1851

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemicals

Washington, D. C., Display Room, Suite 601, Evening Star Building, Pennsylvania Avenue and 11th Street.

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

THE OESTROUS CYCLE
IN THE RAT

And Its Associated Phenomena
By
Lone anp Evans
148 pages, II plates, 7 figures in text; aes, $3.75

The profound importance of an_ infallible
method of detecting in the Mammalia the periodic
function of the ovary, and the possibility, through
the possession of such a method, of the investiga-
tion of disturbances of the ovarian function are
matters of interest to students of the subject.
Before proceeding to such investigation, it would
be necessary to establish clearly all the charac-
teristics of what has been called the normal
oestrous or reproductive cycle in the animal chosen
for investigation. To that task the present mono-
graph is devoted.

University of California Press
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

BLAKISTON BOOKS

‘LoveTt—Lateral Curvature of
the Spine and Round Shoulders

4th Edition, Revised. 8vo.; xv+217 Pages.
Cloth, $2.50

By ROBERT W. LOVETT, M.D., Sc.D.
Professor of Orthopedic Surgery, Harvard
University, Boston

In the revision of this book more em-
phasis has been placed upon those meth-
ods which have stood the test of time. A
good deal of new material has been added.

Contents in Brief.—History of Scoliosis,
The Anatomy of the Vertebral Column
and the Thorax,: The Movements of the
Spine, The Mechanism cf Scoliosis, De-
scription and Symptoms, Examination and

ecord of Scoliosis, Pathology, Etiology,
Occurrence, Relation of Scoliosis to
School Life, Diagnosis, Prognosis, Treat-
ment, and Faulty Attitude.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.
Philadelphia, Pa.

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS, ENGLAND

Announces the following NEW SCIENTIFIC BOOKS:

THREE LECTURES ON FERMAT’S LAST THEOREM
By L. J. Morpeti !

“Mr. Mordell’s lectures give a clear and interesting account of the history and present

state of this subject...

ought to do much to stimulate our rising mathemaiticians.’—Nature.

INSTINCT IN MAN
By JAmes Drever, Ph.D.

Full references are given to the original papers... It

Price, $1.40

“Dr. Drever’s important book on “Instinct in Man,” which was reviewed in Nature
of January 1018, is enriched in this second edition with an appendix which will be
read with great interest by all who have followed the controversy over the nature of

the human instincts and their relation to the emotions.”—Nature.

ON GROWTH AND FORM

By D’Arcy WreNntWortH THOMPSON

Price, $4.00

“An easy introduction to the study of organic Form, by methods which are the com-
mon-places of physical science, which are by no means novel in their application to
natural history, but which nevertheless naturalists are little accustomed to employ.”—

From the Preface.

A MANUAL OF SEISMOLOGY
By C. Davison, Sc.D.

Illustrated, $12.00

“Written by one of the very foremost scientists in this department, it presents the
whole subject in clear arrangement and language, with every device of illustration, and
all the recent investigations on points that fall strictly within the domain of seismology.”

—Aberdeen Free Press.

Price, $7.00

For Sale by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, American Agents

64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York
Prairie Avenue and 25th Street, Chicago
Huntington Chambers, Copley Sq., Boston

699 Mission Street, San Francisco
330 South Harweod Street, Dallas
17 Houston Street, Atlanta

SCIENCE

Vou. LVI NovemMBer 24, 1922 No. 1456
CONTENTS
Trends of Modern Biology: Proressor Ray-
BN ACOW NTO) (al PADUA a Soa eee ners 581

Earth Current Observations: Dr. L. A. BAUER 592

Collaborators in the Standardization of Bio-
logical Stains: Dr. H. W. CoNnNn........-.-..------ 594

Scientific Events:
The Ramsay Memorial; The Zeitschrift fiir
Praktische Geologie; Sigma Xi at the
University of Idaho; Association of Amer-
ican Geographers; The Ecological Society
of America; The American Society of Nat-

OTIS? ee ee ery 596
Scientific Notes and NeW6...............-.--1-+--00---+ 599
Unwersity and Educational Notes......--.-.--------- 602

Discussion and Correspondence:
Relatiwwity: Dr. W. J. HUMPHREYS. Tingi-
tide or Tingide: Dr. A. ©. Baker. A
Chemical. Spelling Match: Dr. C. E.
Waters. Muscina pascuorum Meigen in
New England: CHartes W. JOHNSON......... 603

Scientific Books:
Hornaday’s Minds and Manners of Wild
Animals: Dr. RoperT M. YERKES..............---- 604
Special Articles:
The Power of the Wheat Plant to fix At-
mospheric Nitrogen: PRoFEssor C. B. Lip-
TMDAINE EERNGL Ag. 1kG3 AMIN (0) ees penn 605

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
TU) TENS ASK ONS FS) aaa ee aera ee 607

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of. Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by
J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal
Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.

Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

TRENDS OF MODERN BIOLOGY!
I

AN occasion such as this is thought-pro-
voking. Why should anybody endow a chair
of biology? When I began the study of the
subject a little more than a quarter of a cen-
tury ago such things were not done. In most
of our large universities biology had a fairly
secure position, but in all but a very few of
the small colleges, at one of which I am proud
to say I had the privilege to study, if present
at all it was so distinctly only on sufferance.
Much doubt existed and was often expressed as
to whether this novel subject had any disci-
plinary value in the training of the youthful
mind, or had any particular cultural worth in
the producing of better citizens. Those of us
who were irresistibly lured, by the fascination
of the wonderful field opened to our vision, to
spend most of our time in the biological lab-
oratory, were looked upon by our fellow colle-
gians as queer freaks of nature, and would
certainly have been called Bolsheviks had that
overworked appellation been current verbal
coin in those days. For the subject distinetly
lacked respectability. It was thought by those
who pursued the eclassies or other orthodox lines
of educational conduct to be a messy business,
was known to be smelly, and was generally held
to be low. This attitude inevitably called forth
a defense reaction on the part of its callow
devotees, which resulted in distinctly worse
messes and smells than were really requisite for
the suecessful pursuit of knowledge in the field.

Now all this has changed. Biology has come

1 Papers from the Department of Biometry and
Vital Statisties, School of Hygiene and Public
Health, Johns Hopkins University. No. 80.

An address delivered at Mount Union College,
Allianee, Ohio, October 20, 1922, on the occasion
of the dedication of the Milton J. Lichty Chair
of Biology in that college.

582

into its own, and the security of its position in
the educational world can not be shaken even
by so doughty a champion of the powers of
intellectual darkness as Mr. Bryan. What has
happened in these twenty-five years in biology?
And what of the present and of the future?
Can we find in the efforts and achievements in
this field due warrant for that intellectual
respectability that biology has now gained, and
for that clear faith in the future which is im-
plied in Dr. John A. Lichty’s splendid endow-
ment which we are here gathered to dedicate?

Perhaps as good a method as any of getting
light on this matter will be to attempt a review
of the major trends of biology in the past and
the present. In doing this we shall find that
in every case these trends of ‘thought and
research have been responses to some quite
naive and simple bit of intellectual curiosity,
of the sort likely to arise in a child’s mind, if
he turned his thought at all to living nature
about him. It may fairly be said that up to
the time of Darwin and Wallace and the
“Origin of the Species,” all biology busied
itself with the answering of one phase or an-
other of the following two naive questions:

First, how many and what different kinds of
animals and plants exist, or have existed, on
the face of the earth.

Second, regarding living animals and plants
as ingenious and complex contrivances, but
after all not fundamentally unlike other con-
trivances, how are they put together and how
do they work?

Every boy and girl who collects butterflies,
or who pulls a wasp to pieces in order to locate
and with safety observe the behavior of i's
“stinger,” is in a rough and ready way repeat-
ing in his own development the history of the
growth of our present knowledge of biology.
He is trying on the one hand to get together a
collection of the different kinds of living things
about him, and on the other hand to inform
himself as to their structures and functions.

Since the publication of the “Origin of
Species” a third question, essentially just as
naive, ‘but less easy to deal with objectively
and practically, has occupied a great part of
‘he attention and effort of biologists. But that
it indieates a sort of intellectual curiosity not

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456;

essentially one bit more sophisticated than the
other two, is plain enough if we remember that
all peoples to the remotest historical time, and’
including even savages, have not only thought
about it, but also have had theories about it.
This question we may put in this way:

Third, whence, why, and how came the ani-
mals and plants which inhabit the earth to be-
here at all?

It is, as I have said, in an attempt to answer
these three questions, in some one or other of
their aspects, that all we know to-day about
biology has developed and grown. It is an im-
pressive fact, recently discussed with great
brillianey by James Harvey Robinson? that
always in science, biology no less ‘than all the
rest, the motivating problems which have led
to the advancement of knowledge have been.
simple naive questions about quite common-
place things. He says:

Those to whom a commonplace appears to be:
most extraordinary are very rare, but they are
very precious, since they and they alone have-
made our minds. It is they who have through
hundreds of thousands of years gradually en-
riched human thought and widened the gap that
separates man from his animal congeners. With-
out them the mind as we know it would never~
have come into existence. They are the creators.
of human intelligence. The mass of mankind
must perforce wait for some specially wide-eyed:
individual to point out to them what they have-
hitherto accepted as a matter of routine or failed
altogether to notice. These mind-makers are the
questioners and seers. We classify them roughly
as poets, religious leaders, moralists, story-
tellers, philosophers, theologians, artists, scien-
tists, inventors. They all are discoverers and
pointers-out. What eludes the attention of others
catches theirs. They form the noble band of
wonderers. Commonly unnoticed things excite a
strange and compelling curiosity in them, and
each new question sets them on a new quest.
They see where others are blind, they hear where
others are deaf. They point out profundities,
complexities, involutions, analogies, differences.
and dependencies where everything had seemed as
plain as a pike staff.

Robinson, in what I have quoted, lays em-

2Robinson, J. H.: ‘‘The Humanizing ef

Knowledge,’’ Scrmnce, N. 8., Vol. 56, pp. 89-100,.,
1922.

NovemBer 24, 1922]

phasis on the kind of man who sees the prob-
lem. Perhaps it may help by ever so little in
the production of such men in this laboratory
which we are starting on an enlarged career of
usefulness to-day, to emphasize the importance
for suecess in biology of bemg simple-minded.

II

Our first question about the different kinds
of living things which people this earth led to
the important branch of biology which is called
taxonomy or classification. This was for a
long time the dominant trend of the subject.
The first step toward a proper knowledge of
the phenomenal world is obviously to get the
phenomena classified in an orderly scheme. In
piology this takes the practical form of getting
different kinds of plants and animals described,
named and classified. Linneus was able to
classify all the plants and animals known up
to 1735. Nowadays no one person would think
of attempting so colossal a task, and if he did
would fail by virtue of the inadequacy of the
human life span. Instead we find thé worker
in the branch of biology to-day devoting his
life to one, or at most a few, groups of animals.

From its onee dominant position taxonomy
has apparently fallen to-day, one must reluc-
tantly confess, into rather lower repute in the
mind of the general biological public. Neither
our professors nor our students of biology ap-
pear, with a few brilliant exceptions, to be
interested in it. One forms the impression
that perhaps four fifths of the Ph.D.’s turned
out in zoology at ‘the present time not only
never have, but probably never will, for them-
selves, identify an animal strange to them, and
as for deciding whether the unknown creature
has been previously described, or placing it in
proper taxonomic relation to its nearest rela-
tives, such a problem would be as far beyond
their powers as it is beyond their desires. By
a curious paradox many modern biologists take
precisely that attitude towards and about the
living world around them in the practical con-
duct of their every day working life, which they
would logically be expected to take if it were
their deepest conviction ‘that each living thing
were the product of an act of special creation—

SCIENCE

583:

God-given and therefore not to be worried
about—and that such a process as evolution
had never oceurred.

Yet it is beyond question that if a young
man embarking on a biological career has a
desire to make an enduring contribution to
knowledge, of permanent value, and incapable
of ‘being upset by any future developments of
the subject, his best chance of doing this lauda-
ble thing is by becoming a careful, accurate
taxonomist. If he describes accurately, care-
fully and completely a hitherto undescribed.
species of animal or plant, in such a way that
any one who reads carefully the description can
recognize and identify the thing described, he
has chiseled for himself an indelible record in
the history of man’s intellectual progress.

Some there are who will argue that while
what has just been said may be true, the niche
in the tablets of history carved in this way is
too slight to be of any significance, that, in
short, systematic or taxonomic work has only
a small and unimportant intellectual content,
as compared with other sorts of biological
study. Such a view of the case seems to me to
be singularly lacking in vision. It means that.
the commonplace elements in taxonomic, work
have been allowed to overwhelm in their view
its broad and deep significance. The labors of
the taxonomists have alone given us such pic-
ture as we have of the inter-relationships, unity
in diversity, and diversity in unity, of animate
nature as a whole. It is the systematist who
has furnished the bricks with which the whole
structure of ‘biological knowledge has been
reared. Without his labors the fact of organic
evolution could scarcely have been perceived,
and it is he who to-day really sets the basic
problems for the geneticist and the student of
experimental evolution. His facts are the raw
material from which the laws of organie evo-
lution, in the sense that we speak of physical
laws, must ‘be worked out. An example of
what is apparently a real law of organic evo-
Intion, deduced directly from the simplest
taxonomic statistics, is found in the fact that
the sizes of genera of plants and animals, as
measured by the number of species each con-
tains, are not distributed in frequency accord-

584

ing to the normal curve of error, as most chance
determined phenomena are, but instead obey
with extraordinary exactness, as has been
shown by Willis and Yule,? the rule that the
logarithms of the frequency of genera plotted
to the logarithms of the size of the same genera
(i. e., the number of species in each), give a
straight line.

It is with much satisfaction that we find the
leading exponent of the reigning mode in
present-day biology, Bateson,* saying of tax-
onomy :

I had expected that genetics would provide at
once common ground for the systematist and the
laboratory worker. This hope has been disap-
pointed. Each still keeps apart. Systematic
literature grows precisely as if the genetical dis-
coveries had never been made and the geneticists
more and more withdraw each into his special
““elaim’’—a most lamentable result. Both are
to blame. If we can not persuade the systemat-
ists to come to us, at least we can go to them.
They too have built up a vast edifice of knowl-
edge which they are willing to share with us, and
which we greatly need. They too have never lost
that longing for the truth about evolution which
to men of my date is the salt of biology, and the
impulse which made us biologists. It is from
them that the raw materials for our researches
are to be drawn, which alone can give eatholicity
and breadth to our studies. We and the sys-
tematists have to devise a common language.

The separation between the laboratory men
and the systematists already imperils the work.
I might almost say the sanity, of both. The sys-
tematists will feel the ground fall from beneath
their feet, when they learn and realize what
genetics has accomplished, and we close students
of specially chosen examples may find our eyes
dazzled and blinded when we look up from our
work-tables to contemplate the brilliant vision of
the natural world in its boundless complexity.

It seems probable that we shall before long
witness a return to a saner attitude than has
prevailed in the last quarter of a century in

3 Willis, J. C., and Yule, G. U.: ‘*Some Sta-°

tistics of Evolution and Geographical Distribu-
tion in Plants and Animals, and Their Signifi-
eance,’’ Nature, February 9, 1922, pp. 177-179.

4 Bateson, W.: ‘‘Evolutionary Faith and Mod-
ern Doubts,’’ Screncr, N. S., Vol. 55, pp. 55-61,
1922.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

regard to systematic zoology and botany; and
in the training of our students, by not be-
ginning specialization too soon and too vio-
lently, give them a more adequate conception
than they now get of the orderliness and the
diversity which together characterize animate
nature as a whole.

III

The dominant mode in biology in my student
days was morphology. I was nurtured on the
somewhat arid problems of vertebrate cephalo-
genesis and the components of the cranial
nerves. Probably few students in these days
are excited by such problems. A vague aware-
ness that there are such things as cranial
nerves no doubt suffices and everyone is just
as happy. The whole subject of pure mor-
phology, as it was cultivated twenty-five years
ago, seems singularly sterile now. It was a
highly developed discipline, with a set of rules
as rigid, and also be it said about as soul-
stirring, as those of the Greek grammar. In
its fine spun theories about homology, meta-
merism and the like, biology got off on a wrong
track, which, as is now practically universally
admitted, had only a blind ending.

But this does not mean, as those of the
younger generation are apt rashly to conclude,
that the old morphology was of no value.
Intrinsically it was of great value. Few things
will transcend in importance in the study of
biology, the finding out of all that ean be
learned about the way in which living machines
are put together. As long as this purely
descriptive purpose was the primary and essen-
tial object of morphological study, all was
well. The business only began to go bankrupt
when it took on an essentially metaphysical
purpose, and a logically bad, not to say hope-
less one, at that. For what the pure morpholo-
gists of the eighties and early nineties were
trying to do was to infer from purely static
phenomena (the intimate structure of the
body) the dynamic relations in a course of
events (organic evolution). Such a _ task
would have been perceived to be hopeless long
before it was, except for the seductive lure of
certain rules by which the game was played,
which rules (such as ontogenetic recapitulation

NOVEMBER 24, 1922]

of phylogeny, certain aspects of homology,
ete.) were mistakenly supposed to be natural
laws, whereas in point of fact, at the best they
were only imperfect expressions of certain
inherent necessities of the philosophic principle
of organization, and at the worst just plain
buncombe.

It is unfortunate that in the reaction against
this sort of thing which has occurred in the last
quarter-century the pendulum has swung so far
as to deprive the present day student of
biology of a good deal of the exact rigid
morphological training that he got im earlier
days. There never has been any better train-
ing for hand and eye and mind than that which
went with the getting of an adequate under-
standing of the comparative anatomy of the
vertebrates, no matter what field of biology the
student subsequently entered upon as a spe-
cialty. So generally inadequate is the training
in this field, now, I am told, that several of our
best medical schools have found it necessary to
devote a not inconsiderable part of the time
allotted to.anatomy in the medical curriculum,
to the study of vertebrate comparative anatomy,
because it is essential to the right understand-
ing of human anatomy, and the students do
not have it when they come, although they have
the bachelor’s degree and have been required
to take biology. ;

We have seen, in the brief sketch which has
so far been given of the course of biological
events, that two trends of thought and research
that were formerly of major importance have
on the whole fallen somewhat into a state of
desuetude. It will pay us to inquire a little
more carefully into the reasons for this change
of interest and esteem, because otherwise we
are apt to reach the erroneous conclusion that
taxonomy and morphology were never of any
real importance or significance in the develop-
ment of human knowledge, and that our fore-
fathers only deluded themselves in thinking
that they were. The fundamental reason for
the decline in the cultivation of these two
disciplines has already been touched upon. It
is found in the fact that taxonomy and mor-
phology, as originally practised in their pris-
tine purity, dealt solely with static aspects of
vital phenomena. Now the only thing of really

SCIENCE

585

compelling interest and significance about life
is its dynamic character. Organisms live and
do things. It is only this which makes them
more interesting than bricks or paving stones.
But by a eurious quirk of the evolution of
intellectual matters, the only group of people,
before the publication of the “Origin of Spe-
cies,” who, as a group if they perceived this
somewhat obvious fact, did anything about it,
were the physiologists.

The historical development of physiology
was bound up with and a part of that of
medicine, rather than what we now call general
biology. The first systematic treatise pro-
fessedly dealing with physiology as an integral
part of general biology was Claude Bernard’s
“Physiologie générale” and appeared only in
1872. The significance of this is that, in the
main, and with only a few notable exceptions,
those who prior to that time had been interested
in, physiology had been almost wholly con-
cerned with workings of the mechanisms solely
of the human body, and even in this somewhat
narrow field, the significance of the findings for
the science and art of medicine held the fore-
most place in esteem. All this has, of course,
changed with the considerable development dur-
ing the last quarter of a century, of general
physiology under the leadership of such men as
Loeb in this country, Bayliss in England, and
Verworn in Germany.

But at its best physiology concerns itself
chiefiy with only certain of the internal dynamie
phenomena of living things, and this is only a
small part of the sum total of the activities
which constitute life. That all biology should
primarily be concerned with dynamic matzers
was first brought powerfully to the attention
of thinking men by Darwin. The significance
of Charles Darwin’s work upon the intellectual
development of his and subsequent times has
been variously described and estimated. If we
go down to real fundamentals it seems to me
that we must conclude that one of the most im-
portant elements, at least, lies in the making it
so plain as never again to be misunderstood,
that ithe essential problems of biology are ques-
tions of dynamic relationships and not of static
phenomena.

The immediate effect of Darwin’s work, at

586

least so far as zoology was concerned, was a
curious one. If led to an enormous develop-
ment of research in what is perhaps the most
essentially static branch of biology, namely,
pure morphology. The process of reasoning
was something like this. Since evolution leaves
a record of its progress in the structures of ani-
mals, by studying these structures intensively
it ought to be possible to reconstruct not only
the course, but even also the method, of evolu-
tion. Von Baer’s so-called law, to the effect
that ontogeny repeats phylogeny, was held to
be the key that would unlock all the secret
places of organic evolution, and the biological
world went more or less mad over embryology.

But as has already been pointed out, this
line of attack proved to be sterile, so far as the
problem of evolution is concerned. Ontogeny
does not repeat phylogeny with anything like
that degree of fidelity which would ‘be required
if it were to be the means of unravelling the
tangled thread of evolutionary progress. And
the observed static end results given by the
structures of existing animals are capable of
being produced in too many different ways, as
we now know, to make possible any precise con-
clusions from ithe mere study of their form as
to the dynamic course of events which led to
their existence.

IV

When this fact had become evident and sunk
deeply into the consciousness of the working
biologists, the way was cleared for the begin-
ning of the great movement towards modern
general biology. It is an odd mischance of fate
that Darwin, who is the real founder of modern
general biology, should not have seen any of its
fruits in the declining years of his life, but in-
stead only an abortive development resting on a
ridiculously unsound philosophy. When bi-
ology, at the very end of the nineteenth cen-
tury, got once more on the right track (for

much earlier in its history it had been
there, and only got diverted by a _ bad
philosophy as to how the iproblems of

evolution could be solved) a new world was
indeed opened to our vision. And the pass-
word to it was experimentation. To the work-
ing biologist organisms once more became living

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

things, not desiccated or pickled corpses. I
cannot recall that in my undergraduate days
there ever was a living animal in the labora-
tory, with ‘the exception of protozoa. Cer-
tainly none was ever studied in any but a
thoroughly pickled condition. As one looks
back now on those days he is horrified not alone ~
at the tortuosity of the intellectual pathway by
which we attempted to come upon a knowledge
of life, but also at the awful waste of alcohol!

The keynote of the new biology was dynamic
and its methods were, in the main, experimen-
tal. Hach of the old disciplines took on a new
life. Morphology became experimental mor-
phology; evolution became experimental evolu-
tion; a new shoot, ecology, sprang up from the
gnarled old root of the taxonomic tree; and in
some sense as the crowning glory of the whole
edifice, animal behavior and comparative psy-
chology began to flourish and attain a respecta-
bility never enjoyed by the labors of the old-
fashioned naturalist, who observed what he
called the “habits” of animals and plants.

Since these movements I have named com-
prise nearly the whole of the major trends of
biology in the twentieth century it will perhaps
be worth our while to examine a little more
carefully into the philosophy and significance
of each of them. For on and out of them is to
grow the biology of the future, with all the
great advances in knowledge which it has in
store.

NY

Modern experimental morphology may fairly
be said to begin with Roux. His philosophy
may be summarized in this way: organisms are
machines which in their operations follow the
laws of mechanics. Their structures are as
they are because of the operation of these laws
upon the plastic and adaptable material of
which they are composed. It is the task of de-
velopmental mechanics to discover the specific
physical and chemical laws which determine
the form of particular structures of the living
body. On the whole the most feasible way to
go about accomplishing this result is to ob-
serve the results which follow upon the experi-
mental modification of the physical and chemi-
eal conditions which environ the embryonic de-

“NoveMBER 24, 1922]

velopment of particular structures. Then in
the favorable case we shall be able definitely
to connect and correlate particular physico-
chemical events with particular biological
events in a causal way. We shall replace
metaphysical speculation in the field of mor-
‘phology with observed physical causation.

The results of the last quarter century have
abundantly justified the faith of Roux and his
followers in soundness of this philosophy. So
close are we to the events themselves, however,
that we cannot justly appreciate, I ‘believe, the
enormous significance of the advance in our
knowledge of the fundamentals of biology
which have come as the result of the labors in
this field of a host of workers, under the leader-
ship of Roux in Germany and of Morgan in
this country. The important advances in this
field have, in the main, come from these two
countries.

The great activity in the fields of experi-
mental morphology and developmental me-
chanics has also been in considerable degree re-
sponsible for the growth and healthy condition
of another major trend in modern biology,
namely cytology. This is pure morphology at
its best, resting on the sound philosophical pur-
pose of the exact description of the minute
anatomy of the cell. In this field America has
again been a leader. HE. B. Wilson’s book,‘ ‘The
Cell in Development and Inheritance,” may
well be said to mark an epoch, at least in Am-
erican biology. The achievements of cytology
in the last quarter century have been of no
mean importance. This field of research, for
example, has played the leading role in clearing
up the age old problem of the determination of
sex. The discovery by McClung of a mechan-
ism in the germ cells, the accessory or sex
chromosomes, and the subsequent great exten-
sion and solid grounding of this knowledge by
Wilson and his students, have served to take
out of the realm of mysticism and put into the
clear light of ascertained fact the answer to
one of the great biological riddles. Again, in
this same period cytological research has laid
the structural foundation of the mechanism of
heredity. The student of the history of science
will note here an interesting fact. Discoveries

SCIENCE 587

of major importance in regard to dynamic bio-
logical events have here been made by a purely
static, descriptive mode of research. This is
unusual. Why it has happened so fortunately
is because the American workers in cytology,
in the period of which we are speaking, have
at every stage worked in the closest touch with
the experimentalists, and have directed their
descriptive studies to problems which have
made themselves compellingly obvious from and
in the experimental work which was going on
at the same time, and in many cases in the same
laboratory. A static method has worked in cor-
relation and cooperation with a dynamic experi-
mental method. We see beautifully exemplified
here one of the main functions of descriptive
science in general, in relation to experimental
science. The descriptive worker endeavors to
lay the structural foundation of the dynamic
events with which the experimentalist directly
concerns himself. The fruitfulness of this
method and ideal of work in ‘morphology, as
compared with sad sterility of the point of
view which vainly attempts to solve in toto
dynamic problems by a purely static mode of
research as the older morphology did, is ap-
parent in the recent history of biology.

VI

Jennings has somewhere said that “An ani-
mal is something that happens.” While this
happy phrase might well be taken as the slogan
for all modern biology, it expresses with par-
ticular aptness the point of view of that
major trend in recent biological history im
which its author was the one of the most con-
siderable pioneers and leaders, namely the study
of animal behavior. The development of this
subject into the prominence it has enjoyed in
the last quarter of a century does not repre-
sent altogether quite so sharp a break with
the philosophy of an earlier time as was the
case in the development of experimental mor-
phology. The field naturalist had always
properly esteemed the importance of things
which happened, and there exists, in the older
literature of popular and amateur natural his-
tory, a considerable mine of rather accurate
observations about the behavior and habits of

588

animals under natural conditions. Perhaps
some day students of animal behavior from the
modern view-point will adequately work this
body of ore. It will not be an easy, nor a
completely profitable task. The trouble of
course is that, generally speaking, the naturalist

of the old school was not analytical, but rather

anecdotal, in his interest in the behavior and
habits of animals.

It was just this difference that marked off
the new school of animal behavior from the old.
If what living things do is the most important
consideration in distinguishing them from non-
living things, it would seem clear that our
knowledge of biology in general is bound to be
increased if we apply to the study of what they
do such precise analytical experimental meth-
ods as will give definite knowledge of at least
some of the variables concerned in the determi-
nation of why they do it. In short, instead of
interpreting what animals do in terms of a
crude anthropopsychism why not be objective,
and by experimentally modifying and control-
ling the animal’s behavior learn something of
the biological processes back of it?

Around 1900 it was pretty unanimously
agreed that this was the thing to do, and it was
done. For a few years a glib familiarity with
“tropisms” and “reflex movements” was as es-
sential to biological respectability as a corre-
sponding acquaintance with “genes” and “cross-
ing-over” is now. Two schools of thought and
opinion erystallized, the one led by Loeb and
the other by Jennings. They may be charac-
terized, with perhaps the least chance of giving
offense to anybody, as respectively the more
simply mechanistic and the less simply mechan-
istic ways of regarding the happenings called
life. The two cohorts of followers fought and
bled on the battle-fields of “foreed movements,”
“trial and error,’ and so on, with the utmost
nobility and sacrifice of ink.

Quite unfortunately, as it seems to me, this
fundamentally important line of research so
brilliantly inaugurated, began after a decade or
so to languish. Loeb turned off to physical
chemistry and Jennings to genetics, and with
the generals gone the armies melted away, to
ally themselves to what they supposed to be

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

more auspicious, or at least more fashionable
movements. The case well illustrates the po-
tency of the sheepish elements in human be-
havior. For no informed person supposes for
a moment that all the problems of animal be-
havior and comparative psychology have been
completely solved. Quite on the contrary the
field has just been well opened up. And it~
is my conviction, based on some personal ex-
perience, that there is no other discipline which
gives the student such an insight and grasp
of fundamentals in the philosophy of biology
as does the first-hand study of animal behavior.
Every student in training for a career in any
field of biology will find it extremely valuable
in his future work to have done a piece of care-
ful work in animal behavior under competent
direction and guidance.

VII

We come now to the consideration of what,
directly and in its numerous ramifications, is the
dominant mode in present-day biology. I refer,
of course, to experimental evolution. Begin-
ning philosophically as a reaction against the
sterility of pure morphology as a method of
solving the great problems of organic evolution,
it owes its actual origin as a major move-
ment in biological thought to two cireum-
stances, first, the bringing to light of ‘the long-
forgotten papers on the mode of inheritance
of characters in certain plants by the Austrian
monk, Gregor Mendel; and second, to the in-
auguration of the biometric method in biology
by Francis Galton, Karl Pearson, and W. F.
R. Weldon. It was plain enough to the writers
of the Neo-Darwinian school, as indeed to
everybody else who had grasped anything of
the meaning of Darwin’s work, that the basic
factors in organic evolution were variation and
heredity. Why not, then, study these factors
directly, intensively, experimentally, and quan-
titatively? There could possibly be but one
sensible answer to this question. And because
this is so is the reason that genetics and bi-
ometry came upon us with such a rush, and
have grown and prospered so vigorously.

Bateson, in the address to which I have al-
ready referred, tells the story of this change

NoveMBrER 24, 1922

in viewpoint in the study of evolution very
well, and I cannot do better than quote him
again:

Discussion of evolution came to an end prima-
tily because it was obvious that no progress was
being made. Morphology having been explored in
its minutest corners, we turned elsewhere. Varia-
tion and heredity the two components of the evo-
lutionary path, were next tried. The geneticist
is the successor of the morphologist. We became
geneticists in the conviction that there at least
must evolutionary wisdom be found. We got on
fast. So soon as a critical study of variation was
undertaken, evidence came in as to the way in
which varieties do actually arise in descent. The
unacceptable doctrine of the secular transforma-
tion of masses by the accumulation of. impalpable
changes became not only unlikely but gratuitous.
An examination in the field of the interrelations
of pairs of well characterized but closely allied
““species’’ next proved, almost wherever such an
inquiry could be instituted, that neither could
both have been gradually evolved by natural selee-
tion from a common intermediate progenitor, nor
either from the other by such a process. Searcely
ever where such pairs co-exist in nature, or occupy
conterminous areas do we find an intermediate
normal population as the theory demands. The
ignorance of common facts bearing on this part
of the inquiry which prevailed among evolution-
ists, was, as one looked back, astonishing and in-
explicable. It had been decreed that when vari-
eties of a species co-exist in nature, they must be
connected by all intergradations, and it was an
article of faith of almost equal validity that the
intermediate form must be statistically the ma-
jority, and the extremes comparatively rare. The
plant breeder might declare that he had varieties
of Primula or some other plant, lately constituted,
uniform in every varietal character breeding
strictly true in those respects, or the entomologist
might state that a polymorphic species of a beetle
or of a moth fell obviously into definite types,
but the evolutionary philosopher knew better. To
him such statements merely showed that the re-
porter was a bad observer, and not improbably a
destroyer of inconvenient material. Systematists
had sound information but no one consulted them
on such matters or cared to hear what they might
have to say. The evolutionist of the eighties was
perfectly certain that species were a figment of
the systematist’s mind, not worthy of enlightened
attention.

Then came the Mendelian clue.
varieties arising.

We saw the
Segregation maintained their

SCLENCE

589

identity. The discontinuity of variation was rec-
ognized in abundance. Plenty of the Mendelian
combinations would in nature pass the serutiny
of even an exacting systematist and be given
‘“specifie rank.’’ In the light of such facts the
origin of species was no doubt a similar pheno-
menon.

Now while it is true that genetics has by no
means solved the problem of evolution as yet,
and probably by itself never can and never
should have hoped to, the intensive pursuit of
this line of inquiry during the last decade has
enormously advanced our knowledge of general
biology. In the first place, thanks to the bril-
liant work of Morgan and his students with
Drosophila, we have firmly welded the last links
in the chain of a definite proof of ithe causal
connection between particular visible details of
nuclear structure in the germ cells and particu-
lar somatie characters transmitted from parent
to offspring in inheritance. The “mechanism
of heredity” is no longer a thing to speculate
and build broad nebulous hypotheses about.
We definitely know a good deal about this
mechanism and how it works.

In the second place genetics, with cytology
as a working partner, as we have already noted,
has solved at least in broad outline, the prob-
lem of the causation of sex. In the third place,
the general results of modern genetic study
taken as a whole, and particularly the intensive
study of the breeding of animals and plants
which the getting of these results has entailed,
have made it highly probable, as I think most
geneticists, at least, will agree, that natural
selection as postulated by Darwin, has had but
little if anything directly to do with the causa-
tion of the evolution of the living things about
us. That natural selection is a process always
and everywhere going on in nature (except
in the case of civilized man, where its operation
has been in large degree suspended by virtue
of certain attributes of civilization itself) no
competent observer of nature can possibly
deny. But that it either does or could bring
about evolutionary results attributed to it by
Darwin seems in the light of our present knowl-
edge, indefinitely more improbable than it did
twenty-five years ago. To give all the reasons
which exist to support this view. would be

590

wholly impossible with my time limitations.
But that these reasons have been convincing to
a great number of the most distinguished stu-
dents of biology in recent years is certain.
Because some of them have frankly given ex-
pression to their doubts, has led many well-
meaning, but wholly uninformed, and somewhat
unintelligent, persons to conclude that leading
biologists no longer “believe in evolution.”
Nothing could be more hopelessly wrong than
this conclusion. Every biologist who has got
beyond a first elementary course in the subject
knows that organic evolution is an observed
and observable fact of nature, of something
like the same obviousness and certainty as the
fact that unsupported pieces of matter fall to
the earth. I suppose that no one, even a “Fun-
damentalist,” would think of asking a physicist
if he “believed in gravitation.” It is equally
absurd to ask a biologist if he “believes in evo-
lution.” But just as one may appropriately
discuss today the relative merits of Newton’s
and Hinstein’s views as to certain phases of
the problems presented by the phenomenon of
gravitation, so may he with propriety debate
the significance of Darwin’s theory of natural
selection as a causative agent in the pheno-
menon of organic evolution.

It must seem to a young man or woman em-
barking now upon a eareer in biology that
the only thing in the subject of any particu-
lar importance is genetics. I wish to point
out, with a gravity as becoming as it is difficult
to maintain while emitting such a platitude,
that this is not true. There is a great deal in
biology about which we are abysmally ignorant
which partakes neither of chromosomes, nor
Mendelism, nor yet of “crossing-over.” And,
if I mistake not, little light is likely to be shed
on these dark places by the just now so bril-
liantly flaring torches that I have mentioned.
The advancement of biology has at least one
point in common with another fascinating sub-
ject, the adornment of women. Both progress
evolutionally by a series of waves of fashion.
Just now genetics is the reigning mode in
biology. Nothing could be more charming, but
it is neither the only nor the final word in
charm.

It is apparently hopeless to expect anything

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

like a reasonably balanced development in bio-
logical research, and, in consequence, of teach-
ing. And perhaps if we had it we should all
be bored. But it can do no harm if we think
once in a while about some of the fundamental
problems of biology which practically no one is
even making an attempt to investigate experi-
mentally, and towards the solution of which we _
are apparently making little progress. Time
will not permit to say all that I should like to
on this point, but I feel that I must in some de-
gree indicate that what I have just said about
the inadequacy of genetics as at present pur-
sued, is not merely an idle gibe. To this end I
shall diseuss briefly two matters, adaptation
and heredity.

The really difficult problem of evolution is
adaptation. The original student of adaptation
as a biological problem was Lamarck. It was
the problem that lay behind and beneath all of
Darwin’s work, and he was almost the last in-
vestigator who in any systematic way busied
himself with the problem. It seems to me
that there are only two later students of this
problem whose work is of very considerable im-
portance, Hans Driesch and Lawrence J. Hen-
derson. There is an objectively manifest
teleology in animate nature. No thoughtful
person can fail to be deeply impressed with
the ingenuity and beauty with which organisms
and their parts are adapted to the attainment
of certain ends beneficial to the individual and
the race. How came these adaptations about?
What is the explanation? In the principle of
natural selection Darwin put forward the first
and, so far, the only mechanistic explanation
of adaptation, though to Hume not Darwin
should be given the credit of origination so far
as this particular phase of the problem is con-
cerned. It took away, if correct, at one stroke
any necessity for the operation of supernatural
causes in the explanation of the living world.
It was this aspeet of Darwin’s theory of natural
selection which disturbed thoughtful theo-
logians vastly more than the fact of evolution
itself, the descent of man from lower animals.
For it was and is always possible, even if not
plausible, to argue that tthe Creator chose to
work in an evolutionary manner in the build-
ing of the world. But a strictly mechanistic

NovreMBER 24, 1922]

explanation of adaptation, if adequate, destroys
completely the very keystone of the arch of any
theistic philosophy. Nothing could undermine
more completely the prestige of a theistic
agency than to prove that it is unnecessary—
than to show, in short, that the supposed re-
sults of its infinite wisdom and omniscience not
only would have occurred, but actually did hap-
pen as a result purely of natural, mechanical
causes without any external, supernatural inter-
vention.

The question, however, is: did the manifold
adaptations which we see in living nature in
actual fact arise through the operation of the
processes of trial and error and natural selec-
tion? A final answer to this question seems
to me impossible in the present state of knowl-
edge. In the eighties and nineties the answer
would have been, among biologists if not among
philosophers, almost unanimously affirmative.
Today the case seems much more doubtful.
Formally it is posstble to explain many par-
ticular adaptations by natural selection. Some
it appears impossible to explain in this way,
even formally. What wants intensive investi-
gation is the whole biology, from every con-
ceivable angle, of particular adaptations. No
more important problem exists. And its diffi-
culty should act as a stimulus rather than a
deterrent to its study. To solve it, or indeed
to contribute significantly to its solution, will
require a different point of view and a differ-
ent method from that of present-day genetics.

It may seem a little ungracious to suggest,
in view of the brilliant results of genetic work
which I have already mentioned, and which I
yield to no one in admiration of, that the
present dominant mode of research in genetics
can give us only an incomplete and, philo-
sophically considered, somewhat superficial
knowledge of heredity, but I am unable to
convince myself that such is not the fact. My
views on this point have not changed since I
discussed it in detail some seven years ago. I
then said®:—

Mendelism finds its limitations, just as did the

6 Pearl, R. Modes of Research
New York (Maemillan), 1915.

in Genetics.

SCIENCE

591

biometric methods in the fact that from the logi-
cal standpoint it is essentially a statistical meth-
od which studies only the laws of distribution of
things given or assumed. It examines only the
distribution of hereditary specificities, and not
at all, directly, their origin or determination. The
former aim cannot be the goal of genetic science.
A method which can travel only so far cannot
hope to say the last word in the discussion of the
problem of heredity. As a mode of research the
Mendelian method of analyzing the progeny dis-
tributions rather than the ancestral will always
be used. It was indeed one of the most brilliant
methodological discoveries in the history of sci-
ence. But it has limitations in the direction of
what it can accomplish per se in elucidating the
problem of heredity.

It is altogether usual in current discussions of
variation and heredity to neglect completely
everything which comes between the two end terms
of the ontogenetic series, the germ cell on the one
hand and the adult soma on the other. But clearly
what goes between is a most essential part of
heredity itself. It is astonishing how little has
been done on these extremely obvious problems.

Two of the four general methods which have
been employed in the investigations of the prob-
lem of heredity have been seen to be essentially
statistical, and two essentially biological. The
statistical methods—the biometric and the Men-
delian—differ fundamentally only in that the
former investigates primarily the ancestry and
the latter primarily the progeny. Logically ex-
actly the same distinction was found between the
two purely biological methods—the cytological
and the embryological. The former studies the
ancestry of the germ cell (gametogenesis), the
latter the progeny of the germ cell .(somato-
genesis).

All ‘of these methods are valuable, and each
has contributed to our present knowledge of
heredity. No one of the methods alone can, how-
ever, solve the problem. They all have at least
one fundamental limitation in common. This is
that they offer no means of directly getting at
any definite information regarding the origin,
cause, or real nature of that specificity of living
material which is the very foundation of the
phenomenon of heredity. The distribution of
hereditary specificities, their putative morphologi-
eal ‘‘bearers,’’?’ and many other things about
them have been studied more or less exhaustively.
The things themselves have been speculated about,
but not investigated to any but the slightest ex-
tent.

592

VUul

In bringing to a close this brief and. inade-
quate review of the major trends of biology I
want to say a few words about a purely practi-
cal movement which is rapidly gaining force
and seems likely shortly to have a pronounced
effect upon the development of the whole sub-
ject, including its theoretical aspects, and par-
I refer to the rapidly
growing recognition of the fact that all of the
activities of all living things, including man,
are properly a part of biology in a greater or
The practical importance of this
lies in its corollary that the biologist may and
probably does have something important to con-
tribute towards the solution of ‘the most various
sorts of human problems, agricultural, medical,
social, economic, and so on. During the last
quarter of a century it has been increasingly
forced upon the attention of university teach-
ers of biology that students of sociology, of
philosophy, of medicine, of economics, and of
many other subjects, who had no intention to
become professional biologists, not only wanted
to, but needed to know something about biology.
At first covertly resisted, this need is now
frankly being recognized and in some degrees
met by the reorganization of courses, and de-
partures of varying degree from the traditional
method of teaching this subject. This is, I
think, entirely hhealthy and desirable. There
is going along with this broadening of the view-
point of biological teaching a welcome broaden-
ing of the opportunities for a useful and profit-
able career in biology. There are already many
kinds of applied biology attracting young men
and women. And quite beyond the range of
these somewhat narrow specialties, we are wit-
nessing such phenomena as the employment of
research workers in general biology by a great
corporation manufacturing electrical appli-
ances, to mention but a single instance.

To one who embarked upon a. biological
career twenty-five years ago, solely because he
was seduced by the charm of the subject, and
who in yielding renounced, against the advice
of family and friends, the supposedly certain
and considerable rewards which would come if
he continued, as he had tentatively started, on

ticularly its teaching.

less degree.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

a career in which he might finally become a
teacher of Greek, the opportunities for the
biologist of the present day seem somehow
humorously magnificent.

If in what I have said I have succeeded in
any degree in indicating the intellectual justifi-
cation of Dr. John A. Lichty’s splendid gift to
Mount Union College for the endowment of its
flourishing department of biology, my principal
object will have been achieved. Under the able
leadership of Professor M. J. Seott we may
confidently expect the work of the department
to go forward in close touch with each new
and promising field of endeavor which biology
presents. I can not allow myself to close with-
out expressing, as a biologist, my deep admira-
tion and profound respect for the breadth of
vision and deep philosophical imsight which is
implied in the endowment by a worker of the
field of medicine of a chair of general biology.
The Milton J. Lichty Chair of Biology is an-
other enduring demonstration of the fact that
the most enchanting of all the sciences has
really come into its own.

RayMOND PEARL

ScHooL or HYGIENE AND PUBLIC HEALTH,
THE JOHNS HopKINS UNIVERSITY

EARTH-CURRENT OBSERVATIONS!

Tue Department of Terrestrial Magnetism of
the Carnegie Institution of Washington is plan-
ning to install earth-current lines for system-
atic observations: at its magnetie observatories.
During this year such lines are being installed
at the Watheroo Magnetic Observatory, about
120 miles north of Perth, Western Australia,
and some time later similar installations will
be made at the Huaneayo Magnetic Observa-
tory, about 125 miles east of Lima, Peru; both
of these magnetic observatories are conducted
under the auspices of the Department of Ter-
restrial Magnetism. Various initial investiga-
tions concerning best methods of eanth-current

1Presented before the Philosophical Society of
Washington, February 25, 1922. The full paper is
published in the March-June, 1922, issue of Ter-
restrial Magnetism and Atmospheric Electricity,
pp. 1-30.

NOVEMBER 24, 1922]

measurements are at present in progress at the
Department’s laboratory in Washington.

In order to take advantage of the previous
experience gained in earth-current work, and
to ascertain the direction in which further study
is desirable, the writer undertook a discussion
of the available data, especially of the 11-year
series, 1910-1920, obtained at the Observatorio
del Ebro, Tortosa, Spain. For tthe first time
comparisons could be made between the phen-
omena of terrestrial magnetism, eanth currents,
and atmospheric electricity, as dependent upon
extensive observations at the same station. Ac-
cordingly, it has been possible not only to con-
firm and extend certain results previously
reached ‘by others, but also to draw important
new conclusions.

It is hoped ithat the present investigation,
which had to be confined to a discussion of the
observational data on magnetically-calm, or on
electrically-ealm days, may ‘be supplemented
later by a discussion of eanth-current data on
disturbed days.

lows:

(a) The resultant horizontal earth-currents,
as observed at the Ebro Observatory, flow, on
the average for the year, in the direction from
about 29° west of North to 29° east of South,
or, approximately, in the direction from the
Magnetic North Pole towards south-southeast.
The average value, for the magnetically-calm
days during 1914-1918, of the potential gra-
dient of the component of the current flowing
from true North to South was 0.20 volt per

kilometer, and that of the component towards _

geographic Hast was 0.11 volt per kilometer,
or about one half of the north-south component.
The resultant horizontal potential-gradient was
0.23 volt per kilometer, which during electric
or magnetic storms may reach a value 0.8 to
1.0 volt per kilometer.

(b) The annual variations of the earth-eur-
rent potential-gradients and of the components
of the Harth’s magnetism, as observed at the
Ebro Observatory, may be related to one an-
other as cause and effect only to a very minor
extent; both sets of variations may have to be

SCIENCE

The chief conclusions may be stated as fol-.

593

referred, more or less, to common causes. The
range of the annual variation of the north-south
electric component is about 2.5 times that of
the west-east component.

(c) The diurnal variation of earth currents
as observed at the Ebro Observatory along lines
somewhat over one kilometer long is remark-
ably similar to that observed at Berlin along
telegraph lines, 120 and 262 kilometers in
length, from 1884-1887. In both eases the di-
urnal variations for the component of the cur-
rent along the meridian is considerably more
pronounced (2-3 times) than that along the
parallel of latitude. The diurnal variation in
the north component of the earth’s magnetism
is not such as to correspond to the direct mag-
netic effect of the diurnal variation of the west-
east component of the earth currents. A simi-
lar conclusion had to be reached with regard
to the east component of the earth’s magnetism
and the north-south component of the earth
currents. The general conclusion was that the
north-south earth-current might be the result
of electro-magnetic induction, caused by the
fluctuation during the day of the west-east com-
ponent of the earth’s magnetism. If it be re-
called that all analyses of the diurnal varia-
tion field of the earth’s magnetism have shown

‘that the magnetic diurnal variation is in part

to be ascribed to electric currents circulating
in the regions overhead and in part to cur-
rents circulating within the earth’s crust, exact
agreements between magnetic variations and
earth-current variations are not to be expected.
Tt further remains to point out that until we
have some knowledge of the actual course or
distribution of the earth currents in the earth’s
crust and as to how the conductivity of the
crust may vary with temperature and other
meteorological causes during the day and at the
actual place of observation, attempts to find a
quantitative relationship between terrestrial-
magnetic and earth-electric effects may be fu-
tile.

(ad) The horizontal vector-diagrams both
for the magnetic and earth-electric components
vary during the sun-spot cycle in about the

same proportion. The earth-current vector-

594

diagram is symmetrical about a line approxi-
mately in the direction of the Magnetic North
Pole.

(e) The extreme diurnal range of the Ebro
earth currents reaches its highest values near
the equinoctial months, and lowest near the
solstitial months. Earth currents, atmospheric
electricity, the Aurora Borealis, and the earth’s
magnetic disturbances, all show similar annual
variations in the ranges of their fluctuations.

(f) The potential gradients of earth cur-
rents and of atmospheric electricity apparently
vary during the sun-spot cycle, the former de-
creasing in the direction of normal flow of ecur-
rent, and the latter increasing with increased
sun-spot activity. The diurnal ranges of the
potential gradients of earth currents, as well
as of atmospheric electricity, just as is the case
for the diurnal variation of terrestrial mag-
netism, increase with increased sun-spot activi-
ty.
(g) There is evidence of a similar six-hour
wave in atmospheric electricity, earth currents
and terrestrial magnetism.

The analyses referred to in (c) are chiefly
those ‘by Schuster, Fritsche, Chapman, Walker,
and Miss van Vleuten, the method of investiga-
tion employed by them being that first suggest-
ed by Gauss, which is based on the well-known
Amperian rules of deflection of a magnetic
needle by an electric current. The general re-
sult reached by these investigators, as stated in
(c), has been accepted by every modern mag-
netician; it post-dates the investigations by
Airy and Weinstein quoted by Dr. Sanford in
his recent article?. In this connection it may be
pointed out that the conclusions drawn by Dr.
Sanford do not depend upon simultaneous
earth-current and magnetic data at the same
station, as was the case in my investigations.

As stated above, my present conclusions ap-
ply only to possible relations between the di-
urnal variation phenomena of earth currents
and of the earth’s magnetism. It does not ap-
pear that definitive conclusions can be safely
reached until we have at the same station un-
questioned coincident magnetic and electric

2Earth currents and magnetic
ScrENCE, October 27, 1922, p. 466.

variations,

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

data, and until we can furthermore consider
in our comparisons only that portion of the
magnetic diurnal variation caused by systems
of forces below the earth’s surface.

A fresh examination is also being made re-
garding the relations between earth currents
and severe disturbances of the earth’s mag-
netism, such as occur during the so-called mag-
netic storms. There are some indications which
may support the views recently advanced by
Satyendra Ray?, though I am not prepared
just now to make a definite statement.

With the view of giving renewed stimulus
to systematic earth-current investigations, a
special committee, “to consider and report on
best methods and instruments,” was formed at
the Rome meeting of the International Section
of Terrestrial Magnetism and Electricity last
May. The chairman of the committee is Sir
Arthur Schuster, and the secretary, Dr. 8S. J.
Mauchly, of the Department of Terrestrial
Magnetism.

Louis A. BavEr

DEPARTMENT OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM,

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON

COLLABORATORS IN THE STAND-
ARDIZATION OF BIOLOGICAL
STAINS

From time to time reports from the Com-
mittee on Standardization of Biological Stains
have appeared, dealing with the investigations
in progress. Many congratulations have been
received by the chairman of the committee on
the results accomplished; but as these accom-
plishments would have been impossible but for
the very hearty collaboration of a long list of
investigators, credit for the work should be
given where it belongs by publishing the fol-
lowing list of committee members and collab-
orators:

COMMITTEE MEMBERS
F. W. Mallory, Boston City Hospital, Boston,

Mass. ,

F, G. Novy, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor,

Michigan.

3 Ray, S., ‘‘Ueber parallele Stérungen von
parallelen erdmagnetischen und erdelektrischen
Elementen,’’ Zs. Physik, Berlin, v. 7, 1921 (201-
205).

NOvEMBER 24, 1922]

S. I. Kornhauser, School of Medicine, Louis-
ville, Kentucky; in charge of the work for the
American Society of Zoologists.

L. W. Sharp, College of Agriculture, Ithaca,
N. Y.; in charge of the work for the Botanical
Society of America.

COLLABORATORS

C, E. Allen, Department of Botany, University
of Wisconsin, Madison, Wisconsin.

KE. Allen, Ursinus College, Collegeville, Pa.

L. B. Arey, Northwestern University, Medical
School, Chicago, Ill.

E, Artschwager, Bureau of Plant Industry, Wash-
ington, D. C.

H. P. Bell, Dalhousie University, Halifax, N. S.

Fred Berry, Department of Health, Columbus,
Ohio.

M. F. Boyd, University of Texas, Galveston,
Texas.

T. E. Buckman, Boston City Hospital, Boston,
Mass.

Victor Burke, State College, Pullman, Washing-
ton.

C. T. Burnett, 608 Majestic Building, Denver,
Colorado.

Gary N. Calkins, Department of Zoology, Colum-
bia University, New York City.

F. W. Carpenter, Trinity College, Hartford, Conn.

P. Castleman, Health Department, Boston, Mass.

J. W. Churchman, Cornell Medical School, New
York City.

R. E. Cleland, Goucher College, Baltimore, Mary-
land.

S. H. Craig, H. K. Mulford Company, Glenolden,
Pa.

U. Dahlgren, Princeton University, Department
of Biology, Princeton, N. J.

H. S. Davis, Department of Biology, University
of Florida, Gainesville, Fla.

M. J. Dorsey, University of West Virginia, Mor-
gantown, W. Va.

F. Eberson, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minn.

A. A. Eisenberg, St. Vincent’s Hospital, Cleve-
land, Ohio.

C. H. Farr, University of Iowa, Iowa City, Iowa.

J. H. Faull, Department of Botany, University of
Toronto, Toronto, Canada.

C. R. Fellers, National
Seattle, Washington.

Margaret C. Ferguson, Wellesley College, Welles-
ley, Mass.

Miss M. J. Fisher, Cornell University, Ithaca,
INS WY:

M. 8S. Fleisher, St. Louis University, School of
Medicine, St. Louis, Mo.

Canners Association,

SCIENCE

595

F. P. Gorham, Brown University, Providence,
R. I.

R. B. H. Gradwohl, Gradwohl Laboratories, 3514
Lucas Avenue, Chicago, Ill.

F. E. Hale, Mt. Prospect Laboratories, Brooklyn,
ING Wee

G. M. Hamel, St. Vincent’s Hospital, Cleveland,
Ohio.

R. T. Hance, North Dakota Agricultural College,
North Dakota.

Edith Hannum, H. K. Mulford Company, Glen-
olden, Pa.

F. C. Harrison and E. Hood, Macdonald College,
Quebec, Canada.

M. J. Harkins, Dermatological Res. Lab., Phila-
delphia, Pa.

G. E. Harmon, Western Reserve Medical School,
Cleveland, Ohio.

D. J. Healy, Agricultural Experiment Station,
Lexington, Kentucky. }

Robert W. Hegner, School of Hygiene and Public
Health, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore,
Maryland.

P. G. Heineman and C. R. Hixon, U. 8S. Standard
Products Company, 111 W. Monroe Street, Chi-
cago, Illinois.

Grace A. Hill, 2143 Cedar Street, Berkeley, Cal.

J. Ben Hill, Department of Botany, Penn. State
College, State College, Pa.

W. A. Hinton, Boston Dispensary, Boston, Mass.

F. W. Hochtel, University of Maryland Medical
School, Baltimore, Maryland.

Davenport Hooker, University of Pittsburgh,
School of Medicine, Department of Anatomy.
G. J. Hucker, Agricultural Experiment Station,

Geneva, New York.

C. A. Hunter, State College, Pa.

F. M. Huntoon, H. K. Mulford Company, Glen-
olden, Pa.

A. H. Hutchinson, Department of Botany, Uni-
versity of British Columbia, Vancouver, B. C.

G. F. Leonard, E. R. Squibb and Sons, New
Brunswick, New Jersey.

M. Levine and L. H. James, Iowa State College,
Towa.

C. B. Lipman, University of California, Berkeley,
California.

H. Macy, University of Minnesota, St. Paul, Minn.

P. Masueci, H. K. Mulford Company, Glenolden,
Pa.

L. H. MacDaniels, Roberts Hall, Cornell Univer-
sity, Ithaca, New York.

M. 8S. Markle, Earlham College, Earlham, Indiana.

F. McAllister, Department of Botany, University
of Texas, Austin, Texas.

596

Blanche McAvoy, Indiana State Normal School,
Muncie, Indiana.

C. E. McClung, University of Pennsylvania, Phila-
delphia, Pa.

G. McConnell, City Hospital, Cleveland, Ohio.

J. T. Meyers, University of Nebraska, Omaha,
Nebraska.

C. Murray, Iowa State College, Ames, Iowa.

J. I. Norton, University of Chicago, Chicago,
Illinois. y

G. H. Parker, Zoological Laboratory, Harvard
University, Cambridge, Mass.

E. M. Pickens, University of Maryland, College
Park, Maryland.

C, A. Ravey, University of Vermont, Burlington,
Vt.

F. O. Reagan, Department of Zoology, University
of California, Berkeley, Calif.

i. Redowitz, H. K. Mulford Company, Glenolden,
Pa.

Neva Ritter, Consumers’ League, Kansas City,
Kansas.

A. H. Robertson, Agricultural Experiment Sta-
tion, Geneva, New York.

W. R. B. Robertson, University of Kansas, Law-
rence, Kansas.

C. Roos, H. K. Mulford Company, Glenolden, Pa.

W. G. Sackett, Agricultural Experiment Station,
Fort Collins, Colorado.

J. E. Simons, College of Agriculture, Corvallis,
Oregon.

G. H. Smith, Cornell University, Ithaca, N. Y.

W. D. Stovall, State Laboratory of Hygiene,
Madison, Wisconsin.

W. G. Stover, Department of Botany, Ohio State
University, Columbus, Ohio.

George L. Streeter, Johns
School, Baltimore, Maryland.

W. R. Taylor, Department of Botany, University
of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.

E. F. Voigt, Board of MHealth, Fort Smith,
Arkansas.

E. M. Wade, Board of Health, Minneapolis, Min-
nesota.

H. B. Ward, Department of Zoology, University
of Illinois, Urbana, Illinois.

Wanda Weniger, N. D. Agricultural Experiment
Station, North Dakota.

Anna W. Williams, Department of Health, Re-
search Laboratory, New York City.

G. B. R. Williams, Paris, Illinois.

C. L. Wilson, Cornell University, Ithaca, New
York.

Hopkins Medical

The work so far accomplished by these col-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1456

laborators includes: an extensive study of
American methylen blues, fuchsins, gentian
violets, and eosins for bacteriological purposes;
a study of eosin, methylene blue, hematoxylin,
orange G and safrdnin for various histological
purposes; while work is in progress at present
on a number of other stains, including methylen
green, Bordeaux red, brilliant green, brilliant —
cresyl blue, cresylecht violet, pyronin, and acid
fuchsin. The results accomplished are so prom-
ising that there is reason to believe that the
most commonly used stains ean be regarded as
standardized before the following winter is
over. It will then be possible to work out
some method of certification of stains which
come up to the standards.

None of this work would have been possible
but for the cooperation of such a large number
of investigators, who have responded to every
call for assistance in a most gratifying way. It
was not anticipated at the start that such a
large number would be found to take part
willingly in an investigation of this sort. The
work, of course, has been entirely voluntary.
The committee would like, whenever reporting
on any stain, to give due credit to all of these
collaborators but as such a course is imprac-
tical the best plan seems to ‘take the present
occasion to make their names publie and ex-
press appreciation for their assistance.

H. J. Conn,
Chairman
CoMMITTEE ON STANDARDIZATION OF STAINS,
NationaL RESEARCH COUNCIL

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

THE RAMSAY MEMORIAL
THE unveiling of the tablet in Westminster
Abbey in memory of Sir William Ramsay, to
which reference has been made in SCIENCE, was
the last act in connection with the memorial, a
history of which is summarized in the London
Times. In 1917 an appeal was issued for
£100,000 by a committee, under the presidency
of Mr. Asquith, and under the chairmanship of
the late Lord Reay. At a subsequent date, the
Prince of Wales became patron of the fund.

The sum collected in cash is £57,645.
In addition, the fund has been augmented

NoveMBER 24, 1922]

by a number of research fellowships instituted
by various dominion and foreign governments,
of which the capitalized value is estimated at
about £60,000, so that the total sum raised in
response to the appeal may be regarded as
being nearly £120,000. This sum is believed to
be the largest ever raised in any country as a
memorial to a man of science.

The sum collected in cash includes subserip-
tions from Great Britain and Ireland, America,
Australia, Canada, Chile, China, Denmark,
France, Greece, Holland, India, Italy, Japan,
New Zealand, Norway, Straits Settlements,
Switzerland and Portugal.

The following governments have instituted
fellowships of the value of £300 a year: Can-
ada, Greece, Italy, Norway, Sweden, Denmark,
Spain, Holland, while the Japanese government
has instituted a fellowship of the value of 4,320
yen (approximately £463). French and Swiss
fellowships have been instituted, part of the
cash contribution in those countries being used
for the purpose.

These fellowships are intended to lead to an
orientation of many of the most promising
young scientists of the world to England.
Chemists from Norway, Sweden, Denmark,
Holland, Switzerland, Japan and the United
States are already at work in England. The
Italian and Greek fellowships are at present
vacant, and the Spanish felowship has not yet
been filled, although it has been provided.
Fellows are studying in London, and at Oxford
and Cambridge, at the Imperial College of Sci-
ence and Technology, Glasgow, and at Liver-
pool. A number of British fellows are also at
work.

The Ramsay Committee has carried out a
number of the objects which were set out in the
original appeal. A sum of £25,000 has been
laid on one side for the purpose of a laboratory
of chemical engineering, to be established at
University College, London, where Sir William
Ramsay held his professorship for twenty-six
years. This building has not yet been erected,
though arrangements are now in progress.

A sum of £14,000 was handed over to a body
of trustees, consisting of Sir George Beilby,

SCIENCE

597

Sir Hugh Bell, Lord Crowe, Mr. H. A. L.
Fisher, Sir Donald MacAlister, Dr. J. C.
Irvine and Sir Robert Hadfield, for the pur-
pose of founding Ramsay Memorial Feilow-
ships in Chemical Science for British students.
Each fellowship is of the value of £300. In
addition, a sum of £6,000 in respect of Glasgow
subscriptions was handed over to the same trus-
tees to provide a fellowship of £300 a year for
a Glasgow candidate.

A medal bas been struck from a design of
the French sculptor, M. L. Bottée. A sum of
£210 has been paid to University College, Lon-
don, for the institution of a Ramsay Medal
from M. Bottée’s design, to be awarded annu-
ally to the most distinguished student of chem-
istry at University College.

There remains a small balance of the Ramsay
Fund, after providing for the cost of the me-
morial tablet, the disposal of which has not yet
been definitely settled.

THE ZEITSCHRIFT FUR PRAKTISCHE
GEOLOGIE

Dr. Puinie §. Smivrx, acting director of the
U. S. Geological Survey, permits us to print
the following letter from Dr. Franz Beyschlag,
president of the Geologischen Landesansialt,
Berlin:

On account of the sad financial. conditions in
our country it is probably known to you that the
question of the existence of the Zettschrift fir
praktische Geologie, published by me and my col-
league Krusch, is at stake. Cost of printing and
postage have risen so high that we shall be com-
pelled to discontinue the Zeitschrift in a short
time, unless help comes. From the request of
your librarian to the publisher of the Zeitschrift,
Wilhelm Knapp in Halle, I gather that there is
a lively demand in America for this Zeitschrift.
From that I conclude with right that there is an
interest in the existence of our publication and
that it is not unlikely that some subscribers can
be obtained. Therefore I would be especially
thankful to you if you would endeavor ~to secure
in the interested circles there a considerable num-
ber of subscriptions. The publisher could send
the numbers regularly through the American
Institute in Berlin so that there would be no
postage. In this way you would render the

598

Zeitschrift an extraordinary service and it might
perhaps be possible to keep it alive. For our
common strivings in the field of practical geology
it would be calamitous if this Zeitschrift, after
so long existence, was now compelled to go under
through financial difficulties. It is a good medium
for scientific publication so that authors also
would suffer through the passing of the publica-
tion. For your efforts in the interest of this
matter, I pledge my highest thanks.

SIGMA XI AT THE UNIVERSITY OF IDAHO
THE thirty-eighth chapter of Sigma Xi, to be
known as the Idaho Chapter, was imstalled at
the University of Idaho on June 5. Fifteen
active members, who were elected to the society
while connected with other educational insti-
tutions, composed the petitioning group.

The installation exercises were conducted by
Dr. Henry B. Ward and Dr. Edward Ellery,
president and secretary of the national society.
The charge to the chapter was delivered by
Dean Ellery and the symposium was con-
ducted by Dr. Ward. Eighteen science men
who were formerly associated with the Uni-
versity of Idaho Sigma Xi Club were invited to
attend the installation ceremonies. Several
active members of the Washington State Col-
lege faculty were also in attendance.

The following officers were elected: Presi-
dent, Dr. J. EH. Wodsedalek; vice-president,
Dr. M. F. Angell; secretary, Dr. Henry
Schmitz; treasurer, Professor C. E. Behre.

A formal banquet was held in the evening
at Lindley Hall, University Campus. Among
one hundred guests of the chapter were Dr.
Ward, Dean Ellery, Dr. A. H. Upham, presi-
dent of the university; Dr. E. A. Bryan, com-
missioner of education of Idaho; Miss Hthel
Redfield, state superintendent of public instruc-
tion; Dr. Melander, of Washington State Col-
lege; members of the Idaho Board of Regents,
the associate members of the former Idaho
Sigma Xi Club, and the deans and heads of the
arts and letters divisions of the university. Dr.
J. K. Wodsedalek acted as toastmaster and
toasts were responded to by Dr. Ward, Dean
lillery, President Upham and Commissioner
Bryan.

The installation took place during com-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

mencement week. Dean Ellery delivered the
baccalaureate sermon and Dr. Ward gave the
commencement address. Dean Ellery’s subject
was “The hills of human help,” while that of
Dr. Ward was “The struggle of man with wild
life in North America.”

THE ASSOCIATION OF AMERICAN
GEOGRAPHERS

THE annual meeting of the association, in
connection with the Geological Society of
America, will be held at tthe University of
Michigan, Ann Arbor, by invitation of the re-
gents of the university, on Wednesday, Thurs-
day and Friday, December 27, 28 and 29, be-
ginning on Wednesday at 1:30 P.M.

The president’s address will be given at the
opening of the session ‘Thursday afternoon and
will be followed by a series of invited papers.
Later in the afternoon, by special invitation,
the association will visit an exhibit of rare
maps belonging to Mr. William §. Clements,
a regent of the university.

Sessions will be held in the natural science
building where exhibition and smoking rooms
are available. Members desiring to exhibit
papers, maps, ete., should inform Professor
C. A. Sauer in advance.

The arrangements include:

Round table conference (open to members and
invited guests), Wednesday evening, Decem-
ber 27.

Smoker tendered by the regents of the univer-
sity, Thursday evening, December 28.

Luncheon, as guests of the university, Friday
noon, December 29.

A joint meeting for physiography papers with
the Geological Society of America.

The secretary will be glad to receive the
names of non-members to whom the prelim-
inary program should be sent. All interested
in geography, or any of its allied subjects, are
welcomed at the program sessions of the asso-
ciation.

Hartan H. Barrows,
President

Ricwarp EK. Dopes,

Secretary
Storrs, CONNECTICUT,
NOVEMBER 7, 1922

NOVEMBER 24, 1922]

THE ECOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA

TuE Heological Society of America will hold
its eighth annual meeting at the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology on Wednesday, Thurs-
day and Friday, December 27, 28 and 29, 1922.
In addition to the general sessions, joint meet-
ings will be held with the American Society of
Zoologists and the Botanical Society of
America.

Titles and abstracts of papers to be placed
on the program should be in the hands of the
secretary by December 1, in order to be print-
ed for distribution before the meeting. Per-
sons not members of the society may present
papers on the recommendation of a member.

A dinner to which all persons interested in
the society and its activities are invited will be
held at the Athens Café, 694 Washington
Street, on Wednesday evening. The — hotel
headquarters will be at the Parker House, Tre-
mont Street, where rooms will be available at
rates from $2.50 up. Reservations should be
made at an early date.

A. O. WEESE,

JAMES MILLIKIN UNIVERSITY, Secretary ©

DECATUR, ILLINOIS

THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF
NATURALISTS
Tue fortieth annual meeting of the American
Society of Naturalists will be held in Boston,

Massachusetts, on Friday, December 29, in the.

buildings of the Massachusetts Institute of
Technology.

The headquarters of the society will be at
the Hotel Somerset, which is also the headquar-
ters of the American Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science. Rates at the Somerset
are as follows: One in a room, with bath, $4 to
$6; two in a room, with bath, $5 to 7. Mem-
bers are advised to make reservations early.
Information concerning other accommodations
will doubtless be available for the final an-
nouncement of the society in December.

The morning session will be devoted to a cele-
bration of the birth of Gregor Mendel and of
Francis Galton in 1822. For this program the
following speakers have been secured: EH. M.
East, T. H. Morgan, J. Arthur Harris and
George H. Shull.

SCIENCE

599

A symposium on Geographical Distribution
has been arranged in conjunction with the
American Society of Zoologists. For this pro-
gram, papers by Glover M. Allen, Thomas
Barbour, E. R. Dunn, C. H. Higenmann, P. P.
Calvert and C. T. Brues have been secured.
It may be possible to announce others later.

A memorial to the late Professor Sedgwick,
in the form of a lecture by Professor E. B.
Wilson, is scheduled for Friday afternoon,
closely following the Naturalists’ symposium on
geographical distribution.

Following instructions given by the Nat-
uralists last year, the officers of the society
participated, durmg the year, in conferences
looking toward federation of the biological soci-
eties of America. Notices concerning these con-
ferences have several times appeared in
Science. The final result of these meetings is
a ‘proposed constitution of such a federation
which was printed in Science for September
29. It is expected that reprints of this article
in Science will be distributed to members of
the ‘society along with the final announcement
in December. The question of accepting mem-
bership in the federation will be presented at
one of the business meetings of the society.

The annual dinner, with the address of the
president, Professor W. M. Wheeler, will be
given on Friday evening at the Hotel Somerset.

Blank forms for the nomination of candi-
dates for membership in the society may be
obtained from the secretary. Attention is
called to the rule that nominations must be in
the hands of the executive committee at least a
year before being acted upon. Accordingly,
nominations to be voted upon in 1923 must
reach the secretary before the close of the meet-

ing (eee A. FRANKLIN SHULL,

Secretary
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN,
Ann Arspor, MICHIGAN

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Av the dinner of the Natiional Academy of
Sciences, held in connection with the New York
meeting on November 15, the Draper Gold
Medal was presented to Professor Henry Norris .
Russell, of Princeton University. Dr. C. G.

600

Abbot, director of the Smithsonian Astro-
physical Observatory and secretary of the
academy, a former recipient of the medal, made
the presentation address and Professor Rus-
sell replied.

Frienps of Professor Chandler presented in
1910 to Columbia University a fund which con-
stitutes the Charles Frederick Chandler Foun-
dation. The income is used to provide a lec-
ture by an eminent chemist and for a medal
to be presented to the lecturer. Previous lec-
turers on this foundation have been Dr. L. H.
Baekeland, W. F. Hillebrand, W. R. Whitney,
F. Gowland Hopkins and Edgar F. Smith.
The lecturer this winter will be Dr. Robert H.
Swain, professor and head of the department
of chemistry, Stanford University, whose sub-
ject will be “Atmospheric pollution by indus-
trial wastes.” The lecture will be in Have-
meyer Hall, Columbia University, on January
9, 1923, at 8:15 P.M.

M. Arrsus, professor of physiology at the
University of Louvain, has been elected cor-
respondent of the Royal Academy of Medicine
of Belgium. Dr. Depage has been chosen the
recipient of the quinquennial prize for the best
work published in the field of medical science
for the period 1916-1920.

PROFESSOR DE Castro, dean of the Medical
School of Rio de Janeiro and delegate from
Brazil to the League of Nations, was given an
ovation recently at Paris, in the presence of
the ambassador from Brazil and many of the
professors and students of the university. De
Castro delivered an address on monoglandular
and pluriglandular dystrophies.

Tue following physical chemists have been
named as editors of the Journal of Physical
Chemistry: By the Chemical Society of Lon-
don, Professors T. M. Lowry, J. W. McBain
and James C. Philip; by tthe Faraday Society,
London, Professor F. G. Donnan; by the
American Chemical Society, Dr. A. L. Day,
Professor G. A. Hulett, Dr. Irving Langmuir
and Professor W. Lash Miller. Through the
efforts last summer of Dr. Charles L. Parsons,
secretary of the American Chemical Society,
this publication, edited by Dr. Wilder D. Ban-
crofit, of Cornell University, hitherto a strictly

SCIENCE

[Von. LVI, No. 1456

American journal, was brought under the
auspices of the two leading British societies
and the American group.

Mr. Kenneto M. Gouin, formerly associate
editor of the American Journal of Public
Health, has severed his connection with the
American Public Health Association and the
American Social Hygiene Association, to be-
come editor of the publications for the Rocke-
feller Foundation. The Journal will be edited
in future by Dr. Henry F. Vaughan, commis-
stoner of health of Detroit, Michigan, assisted
by an editorial board composed of Dr. M. P.
Ravenel, of the University of Missouri, and
Mr. A. W. Hedrich, secretary of the associa-
tion.

Mr. Wituis H. Ric, of California, has been
appointed assistant in charge of the division of
scientific inquiry of the Bureau of Fisheries.
Mr. Rich has been connected with the bureau’s
investigation work on ‘the Pacific Coast salmon
since 1913, having been closely associated with
Dr. Charles H. Gilbert, of Stanford University.

C. Rosert Movutton is leaving the Univer-
sity of Missouri, department of agricultural
chemistry, with which he has been associated
for the past fifteen years, \to become head of
the Bureau of Nutrition for the Institute of
American Meat Packers in Chicago.

Mr. Paut Croun, formerly research chemist
of the New Jersey Zine Company, has been
engaged by the Patton-Pitcairn Division of the
Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company.

THE Journal of the American Medical Asso-
ciation states that Professor Ramén y Cajal
was not able to be present at the recent unveil-
ing of the portrait statue at the medical school
of Zaragoza, but a letter from him was read in
his name, saying that he doubted whether he
would have had courage to witness the unveil-
ing of his statue even if his health had allowed
it. He said he feared tthe statue would ask,
“What have you done to deserve ithis honor?
Are you not ashamed to be so distinguished
when no memorial has been erected to .. .”
and he named several Spaniards who had won
international recognition among the scientists
of ‘their day. He added that the car of Spanish

NoveMBER 24, 1922]

civilization has been running along itoo long on
merely the two golden wheels of ant and litera-
ture. It needs two more wheels to keep abreast
with ‘the vest of the world, a wheel of science
and a wheel of industry.

Epwin F. Hopkins has resigned as plant
pathologist of the University of Missouri to
accept a position as plant physiologist with the
Marble Laboratory, Inc., of Canton, Pa. He
will be engaged in a study of problems related
to cold storage.

Leave of absence has been granted by the
Corporation of Yale University to Dr. Lafay-
ette B. Mendel, Sterling professor of physio-
logical chemisry, to enable him ito deliver a
course of lectures on ithe Hitchcock Foundation
at the University of California in the late
spring of the present university year. It is
the intention of Professor Mendel ito leave New
Haven afiter the dedication of the Sterling
Chemistry Laboratory in April, to join the
faculty of the University of California for the
‘intersession, which continues from May 14 to
June 23, 1923. Professor Mendel has chosen
for his subject “New aspects of the physiology
of nutrition.”

Dr. CHarues H. Griupert, of Stanford Uni-
versity, California, who during the past sum-
mer has made an extensive investigation of the
salmon fisheries in the Alaska Peninsula Fish-
eries Reservation, created in February, 1922,
was in Washington from October 18 to 26
conferring with officers of the Bureau of Fish-
eries regarding conditions tthat he had found
in the reservation, outlining future work to be
taken up there and discussing the regulations
necessary for the calendar year 1923. Dr. Gil-
bert visited Seattle on November 16 and 17
for the purpose of conferring with people
operating in the Alaska Peninsula Reservation
and discussing permits that will be issued for
the operations that will be allowed in the reser-
vation the coming year.

A Danis# scientific mission, under the lead-
ership of Professor Olufson, accompanied by
the French savant, Professor Bourecart, of the
Sorbonne, left Paris early in the present month
on a six months’ expedition in the northern

SCIENCE

601

Sahara, where it will cover a distance of some
3,000 miles. The members of the mission in-
clude ‘the botanist, Dr. Gram, and the geolo-
gists, Drs. Storgaard and Kayser. The party,
which will start from Tunis, intends to make a
detailed study of the Shat-el-Jerid. From
Nefita it will proceed to Tuggurt, and thence to
Wargla, in the Algerian Sahara. Next it will
go to Insalah, and endeavor to explore the
Hoggar Mountains.

Cuas. R. Frrrks, associate professor of
geology and mineralogy at \the Carnegie Insti-
tute of Technology, Pittsburgh, Pa., has com-
pleted an investigation of the oil resources of
the coals and carbonaceous shales of Pennsyl-
vania for the State Bureau of Topographic
and Geological Survey.

Dr. Cartes P. BerKny, professor of geol-
ogy at Columbia University, has returned from
China where he was with the Third Asiatic
Expedition of the American Museum of Nat-
ural History.

Dr. Epear F. Smrru, former provost of the
University of Pennsylvania and president of
the American Chemical Society, gave a lecture
at the University of Pennsylvania on Novem-
ber 3 on Joseph Priestley, under ithe auspices
of the Priestley Club.

A courss of eight lectures on “Secretion and
Internal Secretion” was given by Professor
Swale Vincent, M.D., D.Se., professor of physi-
ology in the University of London, at Middle-
sex Hospital Medical School, during November.

Dr. JosepH 8. Amus, professor of physics at
the Johns Hopkins University, director, Office
of Aeronautical Intelligence of tthe National
Advisory Committee for Aeronautics, spoke on
November 23 before the Franklin Institute of
Philadelphia, on “Recent aeronautic investiga-
tions and the airplane industry.”

Dr. Aucust Krocu, professor of zoophysiol-
ogy in ‘the University of Copenhagen, lectured
at the University of Pennsylvania on Novem-
ber 14 and 15 on “Nervous and hormonel con-
trol of capillary contractility” and on “The ex-
change of substances through the capillary
wall.” Dr. Krogh addressed a special meeting
of the Entomological Society of Washington

602

on November 8 on the subject of insect
respiration.

Dr. HueH Porrer Baker, executive secre-
tary of the American Paper and Pulp Associa-
tion, formerly dean of the New York State
College of Forestry, lectured on “Forests and
forestry in New England” ibefore tthe Middle-
town (Conn.) Scientific Association on Novem-
ber 14.

Proressor Evias JupAH Duranp, chairman
of the department of botany in the University
of Minnesota, died at his home in St. Paul on
October 29, of cancer. He was born in Canan-
daigua, N. Y., in 1870 and afiter graduating
from Cornell University in 1893 became a
fellow, assistant and instructor in botany at
the university. In 1910 he went to the Uni-
versity of Missouri as assistant professor of
botany, being made associate the next year. In
1918 he was called to the University of Minne-
sota as professor of botany. He was the
author of important contributions to mycology.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

THE annual report of ithe treasurer of Yale
University for the year ending June 30 records
an unusually large number of gifts, made to
meet the conditions of the $3,000,000 sub-
scribed to general endowment by Mrs. Stephen
V. Harkness. As a result of these contribu-
tions and the establishment of six new pro-
fessorship funds in memory of John W. Ster-
ling, ’64, of almost $250,000 each, the total of
Yale’s endowment funds is shown to be
$32,662,011.95, an increase of $6,985,001.25 in
the last year. Gifts for building and other
non-permanent funds received in the same
period aggregated $1,651,290.68, while gifts to
income amounted to $740,642.24. Included in
the latter were contributions of $185,000 from
the General Education Board and $30,000 from
the Commonwealth Fund to enable the Yale
School of Medicine to provide funds for the
reconstruction of two wards in the New Haven
Hospital, and to build laboratories in that
institution, with which the school is affiliated;
$70,000 more from the Commonwealth Fund
towards the expenses of the department of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

surgery; and $286,664 received through 9,493
contributors to the Alumni Fund, the principal
of which was also increased by $147,060.41.

THe West Indian Agricultural College,
which was formally opened by Sir Samuel
Wilson, governor of Trinidad and Tobago, on
October 16, has begun its session in a tem-
porary building erected at St. Augustine.
Highteen students have been enrolled, including
three post-graduates, and this is regarded as a
promising start for a new institution of the
kind. Tenders have been invited for the con-
struction of the permanent college building, of
which Major H. C. Corlette, is the architect.

Dr. CHartes WESLEY FLINT was inaugu-
rated as chancellor of Syracuse University on
November 17.

Dr. Epmunp C. Sanrorp, president emeritus
of Clark College and at present head of the
department of psychology, has been appointed
acting president of Clark University in the ab-
sence of President Wallace W. Atwood. The
trustees have granted to President Aittwood a
four months leave of absence for travel in
Europe. President Atwood expects 'to visit the
leading educational institutions of Europe, and
will observe teaching methods in western
Europe.

Dr. StanHope BayNsE-JONES, associate pro-
fessor of bacteriology at Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity, has been appointed professor of bac-
teriology at the University of Rochester.

Dr. Howarp bE Forest, formerly of the
Indianapolis Normal School science depart-
ment, and of the botany department of the
University of Kansas, has been appointed as-
sistant professor of botany at the University of
Southern California in Los Angeles.

Miss ExvizasetaH Evans Lorn, psychologist
for the Chicago Juvenile Court, has been ap-
pointed clinical and research assistant in the
Yale University Psycho-Clinie.

Dr. H. Stantey ALLEN, of the University of
Edinburgh, has been called to the chair of nat-
ural philosophy in the United College of St.
Andrews University, which became vacant at
the end of the last academical year by ithe re-
tirement of Professor Arthur Butler.

NovEMBER 24, 1922]

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
RELATIVITY

To tHe Epitor or Scrence: Like many
others, I commonly read whatever, from books
to mere notes, by Dr. Edwin E. Slosson, comes
to my notice. Generally I am well pleased,
but an exception has just occurred. I very
much dislike that pleasantly written article on
Relativity in the Scientific Monthly for Novem-
ber, 1922. I dislike it because, giving the
words used the only meanings recognized by
layman and scientist alike, save a few special-
ists, several of the assertions are sheer non-
sense. Certainly no system of equations, how-
ever clever, can prove to one of common sense,
the existence of a real fourth dimension; that
time and space are not wholly independent;
that just because we and the Martians may be
unable to synchronize our clocks there is no
‘now’; that time is “curved’’; that a phenom-
enon may be seen before it happens; that the
mere inclusion of gravitation in a more com-
prehensive expression eliminates it from na-
ture; and so forth, and so on, through a long
list of ‘absurdities—absurd, that is, if their
customary meanings be given to the words used.

Such expressions catch the attention, be-
cause they seem to declare the truth of amazing
paradoxes, but they are, after all, mighty poor
paradoxes, for their whole secret is nothing but
the assigning of strange meanings to familiar

words; a sort of cryptic writing. Naturally, ~

all such “crazy” expressions, crazy so long as
unexplained, inevitably breed contempt for
science and the scientist... —

Let us, then, in popularizing the thoughts of
specialists, first understand clearly just what
those thoughts are, and then put them in the
words and cireumlocutions of the other fellow.
The real relativist is not playing hob with our
understanding of nature, however different his
descriptions of certain phenomena may seem;
but if the language of his average popularizer
is to be taken literally, and no hint, as a rule,
is given of any other meaning, more topsy-
turvy indeed than the Land of Alice is this
finite, limitless universe that simultaneously

will be, was, and is. W. J. HuMPHREYS

SCIENCE

603

TINGITIDA. OR TINGID/E

In connection with this subject there are
some other points which I think should be men-
tioned. The Ionic genitive Tiyyro¢ and the
Attic genitive -ewf show without a doubt that
the word Tryy: is an «stem. In Latin it
would be an i-stem, Tingi, and the genitive
Tingis.

That there is a Latin word Tinge of which
the stem is Tingit does not concern us for
Fabricius did not use it. He could easily have
done so had he wished. While these words have
the same root they have different stems. The In-
ternational Rules instruet us to add -ide to the
stem of the name of the type genus. They do
not expect us to worry about other words based
on the same root. Fabricius was a Greek purist
and he based his name on the word Ttyy:d,
-10G (onic, -ewt (Attic). In writing this word
in Latin he did so correctly using Tingis in the
genitive. The stem of the name of the type
genus is, therefore, Tingi. The family name
correctly should be Tingiide.

It is unfortunate that Westwood omitted one
1 in writing the family name but before the days
of the International Commission this was
sometimes done. We often write Mantide for
example based on Mantis, genitive -10¢ (Ionic),
-ewC (Attic). If we follow the International
Rules we must insert the other i and write
Tingiide. And most of us agree that the rules
should be followed.

A. C. BaKeEr
BuREAU OF ENTOMOLOGY

A CHEMICAL SPELLING MATCH

In Science for October 20, Dr. L. O. How-
ard comments in rather facetious vein upon a
chemical spelling match described in the num-
ber for September 29. He mentions his strug-
gles with chemical names during the twenty
years he was permanent secretary of the A. A.
A. §. and rather approvingly drags in a quota-
tion from Forel, who seemed to think that no
true scientist uses long words. Dr. Howard is
more specific and applies this to chemistry. He
arouses not the resentment but the sympathy of
the chemist because of the suspicion that he is
envious of a body of knowledge (call it science

604

for short) that has such a precisely deseriptive
and stable system of nomenclature as chemistry.

The chemist, if diligent, can make at least
one new compound every day or so and in his
spare moments give it a name. Often it is
easier than deciding what to call a mew baby.
The name he gives will generally stick, because
only on rare occasions does some other chemist
come along and show that the harness got twist-
ed when the radicals were hitched up. Then
all that is needed is to rearrange the component
parts of the name or to substitute “ortho” for
“para” or “meta.”

The name tells what the substance is. Doubt
arises when a short and easy name is applied.
For the chemist a good mame is rather to be
chosen than great wealth of description, ‘be-
cause it is self-contained. The naturalist must
have detailed descriptions, preferably with
plates, and is happiest when he can make com-
parison with “type specimens.”

Tn his spare moments the botanist or zoologist
digs around in old books and journals with
the hope of resurrecting an old name for some
familiar plant or animal. This is called stabi-
lizing the nomenclature. It is done because
such and such a congress decided that the race
for supremacy and final adoption shall be won,
not by a name that has come swiftly down the
years and is known by all, but by one that
stayed at scratch, hidden in some dusty volume.

Shuffling the cards for a new deal is another
delightful diversion. For such names as X_.._..
(Smith) Jones comb. nov. special honors
are awarded, particularly to Jones. The pity
of it is that somebody else may come along and
soon the specimen becomes Y........ Des
(Brown) White comb. noviss. In this way the
nomenclature becomes fixed.

What is queer about a chemical spelling
match? To mame a compound for which the
formula is given, or to do the reverse, is good
training for the memory. Can one imagine a
botanical or an entomological spelling match?
Could “aster” or “grasshopper” be drawn in
recognizable detail by the contestants? The
optimistic chemist will concede that the respec-
tive drawings could with some confidence be
labelled ‘flower’ or “bug,” but could an ex-
pert name the species? Yet the pitifully un-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

scientific chemist who uses long words to cloak
his ignorance can at once tell the correct names
of two such closely related species as HeSO3
and H2S0..

TAGS
WASHINGTON, D. C. Ge Bb atm

OctToBER 27, 1922

MUSCINA PASCUORUM MEIGEN IN NEW >
ENGLAND

Tuts Kuropean fly has made its appearance
in considerable numbers this year in Massa-
chusetts and Connecticut. The first specimen
was collected in Connecticut, August 6, and it
is still (November 14) quite common in the
vicinity of Boston. The muscid is about three
times the size of the house fly, bluish black,
with a whitish, pruinose covering. A detailed
account is in preparation and any information
as to its further distribution will be greatly ap-

preciated.
CHARLES W. JOHNSON

Boston Society or Natura History

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

The Minds and Manners of Wild Animals. By
Wiuuram T. Hornapay, Se.D., A.M. New
York: Charles Seribner’s Sons, 1922. Pp.
Xcoaee
If every man devoted to his affairs, and to the

affairs of his city and state, the same measure of
intelligence and honest industry that every warm-
blooded wild animal devotes to its affairs, the
people of this world would abound in good health,
prosperity, peace and happiness.

To assume that every wild beast and bird is a
sacred creature, peacefully dwelling in an earthly
paradise, is a mistake. They have their wisdom
and their folly, their joys and their sorrows, their
trials and tribulations.

As the alleged lord of creation, it is man’s
duty to know the wild animals truly as they are,
in order to enjoy them to the utmost, to utilize
them sensibly and fairly, and to give them a
square deal.

With these reflections, the dean of scientific
directors of American zoological parks pre-
sents his volume on the minds and manners of
wild animals. And with the following picture
—reproduced here only in part—the curtain
falls:

On one side of the heights above the River of

NovEMBER 24, 1922]

Life stand the men of this little world—the fully
developed, the underdone, and the unbaked, in one
struggling, seething mass. On the other side,
and on a level but one step lower down, stands
the vanguard of the long procession of ‘‘Lower’’
Animals, led by the chimpanzee, the orang and
the gorilla. The natural bridge that almost
spans the chasm lacks only the keystone of the

The great Apes have traveled up the River of
Life on the opposite side from Man, but they are
only one lap behind him. Let us not deceive our-
selves about that. Remember that truth is inex-
orable in its demands to be heard.

Into this book Dr. Hornaday has put much
ef his philosophy of life as well as the choicest
of his observations on the behavior of wild
animals in nature and in captivity. The moral
purpose which impelled the writer to expres-
sion is the defense of dumb creatures. Our
author takes special pains to humble man by
dwelling on his shortcomings. The reader is
told that, though endowed richly with mind
and gifts of expression and therefore capable
of noble achievement in service and self-
development, man at his worst is the most
bestial of animals and more brutal than the
so-called brutes.

“The minds and manners of wild animals”
will disappoint not a few scientific students
of animal behavior because it is not an exact
systematic and analytic description of animal
experience and action. It will delight almost
everyone else by its directness, sincerity and
naturalness. For the tens of readers who may
get next to nothing from the book because of
the ‘experimentalist jbias’—to which the re-
viewer must plead somewhat guilty—there will
be thousands who gain useful knowledge,
insight and a more intelligent appreciation of
wild animals.

The book should be taken, in the opinion of
the reviewer, as a notable conitribution to nat-
ural history, not as a scientific treatise on com-
parative psychology. It contains a wealth of
amusing, interesting, thrilling and enlighten-
ing incidents and personal observations, a
somewhat biographical assemblage of reflec-
tions and conclusions and a unique thought-
provoking collection of brief characterizations
of animal intelligence and temperament. Such

SCIENCE 605

is the contribution to animal behavior and
rights which Dr. Hornaday has made from his
almost unexampled wealth of experience as
zoologist, hunter and scientifie director of
zoologieal gardens. The information presented
should be of very considerable practical value
to all who have to do with wild animals.

Ii would be a profitless task to diseuss in
Science the scientific grounds of dissatisfac-
tion with a book which is primarily an account
of personal experiences with wild animals.
Conspicuous among them are terminology, def-
inition, canons of judgment, inferences and
generalizations. Such matters every scientific
reader will note, but will he nevertheless be
able, as ithe layman almost certainly will, to
enter into and profit by the author’s lifetime of
intimate contact with wild animals? Let us
hope so.

More to the point than a recital of the con-
tent of this volume is the injunction, “Read it
and thus enter into the author’s knowledge,
sympathetic appreciation and insights.” Truth
is great. The ways of observing it are as varied
as human intelleet and temperament. It were
a pity to lose the value of the naturalistic in
our praiseworthy attempts to. exalt the expe-
yimental study of animal behavior and _ ex-
perience.

Ropert M. YERKES

SPECIAL ARTICLES
PROOF OF THE POWER OF THE WHEAT
LANT TO FIX ATMOSPHERIC
- NITROGEN

In a series of wheat cultures in solutions, we
have recently proved conclusively that wheat
plants, even in only six weeks of growth, can
fix large quantities of nitrogen from the air.
They possess this power whether nitrogen is
supplied to the reots or not.

Seventeen years ago, Jamieson! made the
startling announcement, based on experiments,
that all green plants possess the power of fix-
ing atmospheric nitrogen. He supplemented
this announcement by another ‘to the effect that

1 Report of Agr. Res. Assn., Aberdeen, 1905,
et seq.

606

special organs exist on the young leaves of
plants whose function it is to fix the air nitro-
gen and he called these organs “albumen gen-
erators.” This supplement to Jamieson’s first
announcement and the somewhat loose state-
ment of his proffered evidence on the nitrogen
fixation, coupled with the indelible impression
of Lawes and Gilbert’s and Boussignault’s ex-
periments and conclusions, caused ithe scienti-
fic world as a whole to scout or ignore Jamie-
son’s evidence and the earlier contentions of
Ville and a few others ito the same effect. In
1911, Mameli and Pollacci? published a state-
ment of experimental results which were not
subject to the criticisms pertinent in Jamie-
son’s case and which proved conclusively that a
variety of green plants possess the power of
fixing atmospheric nitrogen. Later statements
by them® only confirmed their earlier asser-
tions. They did not accept Jamieson’s supple-
mentary statement relative to the mechanism of
the fixation in question.

liven the world of science is so conservative
as not to have caused a general acceptance of
the contentions of Jamieson and Mameli and
Pollacci, despite the fact that Moore and Web-
ster and Moore, Webster and Whitley,® as
well as Wann,® have more recently furnished
ample confirmatory evidence with fresh water
and marine alge as material. In order to fur-
nish further evidence for securing an accep-
tance of this new view of nitrogen fixation
which is directly opposed to the old established
view and to obtain data for the wheat
plant which has not been studied in that
regard, the writers have recently carried
out an experiment resulting as indicated in the
general conclusion introducing this brief note.
Wheat plants were grown in “Shive’s best”
solution of an osmotic pressure of 1.3 atmos-
pheres. These solutions were so constituted as

2 Atti dell’Instituto Botainco della R. Univer-
sita de Paria, Vol. 13, p. 351.

3 Ibid., Vol. 14, p. 159, and Vol. 16, p. 197.

+ Proc. Roy. Soc. Lond., Series B, Vol. 91, p.
201 (1920).

5 Ibid., Vol. 92, p. 51 (1921).

6 Amer. Jour. Bot., Vol. 8, pp. 1-29, January,
1921.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

to have approximately the same concentration
throughout, regardless of whether or not nitro-
gen was present. The containers for the solu-
tion were quart Mason fruit jars and the usual
technique was employed. Five wheat seed-
lings per jar, and six jars of each kind of
solution were employed, thus testing thirty
plants with each solution. In the case of the’
solution containing no nitrogen, twelve jars
were employed, six of them being kept in the
greenhouse until seeds were formed. All the
other plants were grown for a period of six
weeks only. It is impossible now to go into
the many interesting features of this and
other experiments which we are conducting on
the important subject of nitrogen fixation.
Suffice it to say that in a number of series of
wheat plants grown without nitrogen and with
varying quantities of nitrate, definite evidence
was adduced that all the wheat plants fix nitro-
gen from the air. Even excluding the nitro-
gen content of the culture solutions at the end
of the experiment, because of some irregular
data in the analyses, there is a gain of nitro-
gen from the air which varies in different
series from 13 to 21 per cent. of the total
amount of nitrogen found in the plant. With
the nitrogen in the solutions taken into ac-
count, these values will be much larger.

A series of experiments with barley is now
being completed, and promises to yield similar
results to those obtained with wheat. Legumes
and other plants will now be studied, and
many other features of ‘the subject investi-
gated. There can be no question now, how-
ever, that the teaching of all our books, and
nearly all our teachers on the subject to-day
are erroncous and must be changed completely
to accord with the facts presented by us, and
by the other investigators whom we have cited
above. As Moore and Webster have put it,
authority has too long held sway over logic and
experimental fact. It is high time to let those
considerations rule. A full, theoretical and
historical discussion of this problem will be
given in the detailed account of our experi-
ments.

C. B Lipman
J. K, Taytor

NovEMBER 24, 1922

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

DIVISION OF ARGICULTURAL AND FOOD CHEMISTRY
C. 8. Brinton, secretary
T. J. Bryan, chairman
JOINT SYMPOSIUM WITH DIVISION
CHEMISTRY
Subject: Edible Fats and Oils. Part A—Manu-
facturing and Technical
David Wesson, chairman

OF BIOLOGICAL

Manufacture of edible fats and their
pounds: L. M. ToLMAN.

Refining losses in the manufacture of edible
oils: B. H. TuHurman. Each step through the
refining process will be discussed relative to vari-
ous vegetable oils, cotton, peanut, soya bean and
cocoanut. The action of refining materials in
removing undesirable products and impurities is
the largest source of shrinkage on most oils.
Methods for determining the percentage of
impurities, such as lecitro-proteins and _ color-
ing matter, will be given, both from laboratory
and factory determinations. There are emulsions
formed and broken, which are described in detail,
giving some experiences of handling them in the
factory. One that is not yet handled successfully
and causes loss should be interesting to the
colloidal chemist. Another step in the process
illustrates selective absorption by Fuller’s earth
and earbon black. Losses due to volatility and
solubility are accounted for with averages for
different vegetable oils.

Corn otl—its preparation and uses: A. F.
Srevers. Corn oil is produced as a by-product
in the hominy and cornstarch industries. From
eighty to one hundred million pounds are pro-
duced annually, of which about 70 per cent. is
refined for food purposes. Corn oil is classed as
a semi-drying oil but has poor drying qualities
and therefore does not enter largely into the
manufacture of paints. It is used in the mamnu-
facture of soap and in making its greatest
progress for practically serving the same ipur-
poses as cottonseed and peanut oils. Its physical
and chemical properties are similar to cottonseed
and soya bean oils. The oil prepared from dry
process germs is generally lighter in color and
contains less free acid than that made from wet
process germs.

Edible fats in the baking industry: CHARLES
A. GuABAU. This paper is based on the data ob-
tained in our laboratory which to us is quite inter-
esting especially where the homogenizer has en-
tered in. The paper bears the following sub-
titles: (1) Introductory; (2) defining the various

com-

SCIENCE

607

kinds of bakery products in which edible fats are
used; (3) how the fats are introduced and incor-
porated; (4) why fats are added to bakery
products; (5) the results obtained by adding
graduated quantities of fat to bread doughs
(stereopticon plates); (6) tracing the fat
through the dough mass with coal tar derivatives
(stereopticon plates); (7) introducing a new
method of incorporating fat and mixing the
dough; (8) the results obtained by homogenizing
fats used in the bakery; (9) the distribution of
emulsions through the dough mass; (10) deter-
mining the carbon dioxide diffused through
doughs containing prepared emulsions and doughs
in which the fats are incorporated in the general
manner; (11) conclusion.

The action of shortening in the light of the
newer theories of surface phenomena: WASHING-
ToN Puarr and R. S. Fuemine. The following
definition of shortening and shortness is used:
‘¢Shortening is any fat or fixed oil used as an
ingredient in baked products. That material has
the greatest shortening power which, when baked
in a dough under standard conditions, gives to
the product a minimum breaking strength and a
minimum crushing strength.’’ A cookie is seen
to be essentially a mass of gluten and starch,
soaked in a concentrated sugar solution. Short-
ening is the only material in dough not soluble
in water or wetted by it. Shortening brings
about its effects by extending throughout this
dough or cake in layers which separate the par-
ticles of the dough or cake from one another and
prevent the formation of a continuous solid mass.
When care is taken to prevent change of the
specimen on mounting, the fat may be seen
microscopically in the dough and cake, extending
in films around the starch grains. An investiga-
tion was made to determine the cause of the
difference between the shortening power of the
common fats. Viscosity, surface tension vs. air
and melting point considered alone are seen to be
of minor importance. Plasticity is seen to be a
more important factor. The work of Langmuir
and of Harkins on phenomena at liquid inter-
faces is correlated with the differences in shorten-
ing power. The close connection between the
action of shortenings and of lubricants is empha-
sized.

Certain physical and chemical requirements of
fats in the evaporated milk industry: HARPER F.
ZouLER. The evaporation of milk in a vacuum
pan at the temperature and pressure under fac-
tory operation necessitates the consideration of
factors in connection with the constitution and
physical make-up of fats which are uncommon in

608

all other industries in which fats are used. The
fat should have an iodine absorption number be-
low 30. It must contain a minimum of fatty
acid esters which, when hydrolized, will yield
fatty acids possessing unusual flavors or odors
(e. g., arachidie, theobromic, erucic, ricinoleic,
ete.). Its ‘‘ethyl ester value’’ should be quite
high, preferably, in the purified natural fat, above
12. The content of stearin and pulmitin should
not be high enough to raise the melting point
above 50° C. It should be a fat which is readily
purified and should not therefore contain sub-
stance such as phytosterol, sitosterol, alkyl
amines, ete. Happily enough, cocoanut oil and
palm nut oil which are widely used in the mar-
garine industry because of their availability and
physical properties come closer to these require-
ments than do any of the commercial fats save
butter fat. Inasmuch as the margarine industry
used cocoanut oil it was but natural that the
compound milk industry should choose it. From
the standpoint of condensation in the vacuum pan
in the presence of the milk, a good grade of
cocoanut oil works more admirably than does
butter fat itself. The same may be said of palm
nut oil. The high iodine number of some butter
fats, 28-42, renders it subject to slight rancidifi-
cation (hydrolysis) in the vacuum pan and sub-
sequent sterilization. Partially hydrogenated
cotton oil may be used providing its iodine num-
ber is kept about 30, so that its melting point
will not interfere with the pan process.

The analytical detection of rancidity: Roperr
H. Kerr. The analytical tests used for the recog-
nition of rancidity, the chemical and physical
differences between rancid and sweet fats, and
will give some consideration to the mechanism of
tancidity and the changes involved in its develop-
ment.

Rancidity and a method for its detection: H. C.
Basuioum and R. J. Nosir. Rancidity of two
types, ‘‘A’’ and ‘‘B’’—‘‘A due to volatile fatty
acids, ‘‘B’’ due to volatile fatty acids and alde-
hydes. Rancidity ‘‘B’’ detected and compara-
tively estimated by means of Schiff’s Reagent
(pararosaniline acetate dissolved in dilute sul-
furous acid solution). A 0.5-1.0 per cent. solu-
tion of the oil in kerosene or preferably benzene
is shaken with an equal volume of the reagent in
a separatory funnel, continuously or inter-
mittently for 30 minutes. If the oil be rancid, a
violet to blue coloration will appear immediately
or within a few minutes in the benzene or kero-
sene layer. The color developed is proportional,
within limits, to the degree of rancidity. The
test is very delicate and especially suitable for

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

the detection of ‘‘B’’ in cereal products contain-
ing small amounts of oil.

The otl, fat and wax laboratory, Bureau of
Chemistry, Department of Agriculture, and its
relation to the vegetable oil and fat industry:
GxrorcE S. JAMIESON and WALTER F. BAUGHMAN.
An account of the vegetable oil and fat investi-
gations conducted by this laboratory, discussed
under three heads: Olive oil and its substitutes,
supply of fats and oils during the war and funda-
mental investigations. It is almost impossible to
get adulterated olive oil past the barriers at our
ports. The small amount of adulterated oil on
the market is sophisticated in this country by
small firms. During the war our imports of fats
and oils exceeded our exports. The first complete
survey of the fat and oil industry was made. It ©
was not possible to increase production of cot-
tonseed oil, but production and importation of
peanut and soya bean oils were greatly increased.
Many new possible sources of oil were investi-
gated. The chemical composition of some of the
vegetable oils have been determined. A repre-
sentative number of authentic samples of cotton-
seed and peanut oils have been analyzed to
establish the limits of variations in the chemical
and physical characteristics of these two oils.
A new method has been developed for deter-
mining the amount of neutral oil in crude oils.
Work is in progress on the isolation and identifi-
cation of all constituents of cottonseed oil and
their effect on refining.

Colorimetry as applied to the vegetable oil
industry: Daviy Wesson. Cottonseed oil has
always been sold on color and various means have
been devised from time to time for reading and
recording color. Modern conditions have called
for more accurate instruments than those used in
the past, using Levibond Tintometer glasses. The
Eastman Kodak colorimeter furnishes an ideal
instrument for measuring and recording the color
of samples where colorimetric measurements only
are desired. Where it is necessary to analyze a
color as in research work, the new Keuffel and
Esser color analyzer is to be preferred.

A brief note on the examination of the fat from
Theobroma grandiflora: W. C. TABOR.

A rapid quantitative method for the determina-
tion of arachidic-lignoceric acid mixture in peanut
oil: ARTHUR W. THoMAS and CHatr-Lau YU.

The chemical composition of sunflower seed oil:
Grorce 8. JAMIESON and WALTER F, BAUGHMAN.
Sunflower seed oil is used in various foreign coun-
tries as a food oil and in making butter substi-
tutes, soaps, varnishes and enamels. Several
million pounds of the seed are produced annually

Novemser 24, 1922]

in the United States for poultry feed and the
production could be greatly increased. The whole
seed contains 27 per cent. to 30 per cent. oil and
the kernels which constitute about 53 per cent. of
the seed contain approximately 53 per cent. oil.
It is a drying oil. S. G. 25/25 is 0.9193; refrae-
tive index 20°, 1.4736; iodine number (Hanus),
130.8; saponification number, 188.0; unsaponifia-
ble matter, 1.2 per cent.; saturated acids, 7.1 per
cent.; unsaturated acids, 86.6 per cent.; iodine
number of unsaturated acids, 147.9. The oil con-
sists of glycerides of the following acids: oleic,
33.4 per cent; linolic, 57.5 per cent.; palmitic,
3.5 per cent.; stearic, 2.9 per cent.; arachidic, 0.6
per cent.; lignoceric, 0.4 per cent.

The chemical composition of soya bean oil:
Water F, BAUGHMAN and GrorGE S. JAMIESON.
The oil was pressed from mammoth yellow vari-
ety of soya beans by an expeller. Specific gravity,
25°/25°, .9203; refractive index 20°, 1.4736;
iodine number (Hanus), 128.0; saponification
value, 189.5; unsaponifiable matter, 0.6 per cent.;
saturated acids, 11.5 per cent.; unsaturated acids,
83.5 per cent.; iodine number of. unsaturated
acids, 148.7. Bromine addition derivatives of
unsaturated acids were made and analyzed. The

methyl esters of saturated acids were fractionally

distilled under diminished pressure and fractions
analyzed. Oil was found to consist of glycerides
of following acids: linolenic, 2.3 per cent.; linolic,
51.5 per cent.; oleic, 33.4 per cent.; palmitic, 6.8
per cent.; stearic, 4.4 per cent.; arachidic, 0.7
per cent.; lignoceric, 0.1 per cent.

On the use of n-butyl alcohol in the determina-
tion of the titer test of fats and oils: H. A.
ScHureTtTE and J. H. Draize. A study was made
of the effect of substituting n-butyl alcohol for
glycerol or ethyl alcohol as a saponifying medium
in the official methods for determining the solidi-
fying point of the mixed fatty acids, or titer test,
of fats and oils. Inasmuch as the melting point,
iodine absorption number and titer test of the
mixed fatty acids of a series of fats and oils
were found to be substantially the same when
sodium n-butoxide, glycerol potash or a hydro-
alcoholic solution of sodium hydroxide were used
as saponifying agents, it is concluded that the
former may be substituted for the others without
loss of accuracy. A complete and more rapid
saponification, without seorching of the resulting
soap, is possible.

The fat soluble vitamin: H. C. SHERMAN. This
paper constitutes a review of present knowledge
of the fat-soluble vitamin with special reference
to recent advances and practical applications to

some food problems. While the fat-soluble

SCIENCE

609

vitamin has been studied mainly by means of ex-
periments upon rats, it is now known to have
very important functions in the nutrition of ani-
mals generally, including men. It is needed by
adults as well as during growth. A food supply
containing only enough of the fat-soluble vitamin
for growth will not support full vigor. When the
food furnishes too little of the fat-soluble vitamin
the body is weakened and becomes more sensitive
to infection. On the other hand the body is able
to store this vitamin in eases in which the food
furnishes more than is required for current needs.
The vitamin should be reckoned with as an im-
portant factor in food values. The supplementary
relationship between foods of high fuel value and
those of high vitamin value is discussed.

Color vs. vitamin content of fatty foods: Leroy
S. PALMER.

Commercial
TON PLATT.

Thoroughness of digestion of different kinds of
fats and oils: C. F. Lanewortuy.

Studies of the vitamin potency of cod liver oils.
II, The effect of season on the vitamin potency of
cod lwer oil—spring oil. ArtHur D. Houses.
The present paper is one of a series reporting
experiments undertaken to determine the vitamin
“A? potency of cod liver oils obtained at dif-
ferent seasons of the year. To obtain oils of
known origin the author personally obtained oils
of cod livers from cod fish and rendered the oils
under laboratory conditions. Attention is being
given to other factors which vary during the year,
such as physical condition, sexual activity and
diet of fish. Tests with early spring oil from
emaciated fish show that .00202 grams of oil daily
is fully adequate for the vitamin ‘‘A’?’ growth
requirements of albino rats.

The influence of light on the synthesis of
vitamin A in sprouting white and yellow corn:
J. S. Hugues and W. R. Hornacker. A sample
of yellow corn having a high vitamin A content
and one of white corn having a low vitamin A
content were sprouted both in the light and dark.
The vitamin A content of the sprouts not in-
cluding the grain was tested by the usual feeding
test with rats. The sprouts from. both the white
and yellow corn grown in the light had a high
vitamin A content. The sprouts from neither the
white or yellow corn grown in the dark contained
much of this vitamin. The results indicate that
the vitamin A content of the seed has very little
influence on the vitamin A content of the sprout,
but that the sunlight is an important factor in
the synthesis of vitamin A.

Suggestions in technic vitamin work: Epwarp

vitamin preparations: WASHING-

610

F. Kouman. We hear much about the destruc-
tion of vitamins by the action of heat and oxida-
tion. Vitamin A is said to be especially sensitive
to oxidation and vitamin C to both heat and
oxidation. But with the exception of a very few
instances, the experiments from which such con-
clusions are derived do not justify an assumption
as to whether the destruction noted was really the
result of heat or oxidation. No reference has
been found in any experiments relating to the
effect; of heat and oxidation in which the oxygen
content of the product or of the cooking water
has been taken into account. Practically all
fruits contain more or less atmospheric. oxygen
both in solution and mechanically trapped. To
eliminate this a high vacuum is not sufficient un-
less the container is jarred by rather sharp blows.
More important is the oxygen held in solution by
the water used for cooking. This can not be re-
moved with less than five minutes boiling, nor is
a. vacuum effective unless the container is jarred.
For temperatures less than boiling, hours are re-
quired, and during this time the dissolved oxygen
would be more available for oxidation of the
vitamin than the oxygen of the air whichis in
contact with the surface. Air-free water dis-
solves air very readily and therefore must be
kept out of contact with air until used.

The chick as an experimental animal in vitamin
studies. II—With respect to the fat-soluble
vitamins: A. D. EmMmertrr and GAIL PHACOCK.
Continuing the study of comparing the chick with
the rat and pigeon the findings relative to the
fat-soluble vitamins indicate in the case of the
White Leghorn breed that they are fairly suit-
able for test purposes.
the pigeon, the fat-soluble vitamin requirements
of the chicken are very much greater. The most
prominent symptoms are weak legs, partial paral-
ysis, enlarged knee joints, dropping wings, weak
eyes, accompanied by xerophthalmia which stimu-
lates roup, diminished pigmentation of comb, bill,

-legs and feet, labored breathing, poor oxidation
and loss in weight. In other words, the chick
(male or female) needs both the antirachitic and
the antiophthalmie fat-soluble vitamins, while the
pigeon appears to need relatively little of either.
A lack in these requirements is apparently more
markedly evidenced in chicks three to four weeks
old than in those that are six to nine weeks old.
In fact, the onset of the symptoms are so rapid
in the younger animals that it is very difficult to
bring about a correction of the ailments before
death ensues. Jor practical test purposes our

SCIENCE

In marked contrast with

[Vou. LVI, No. 1456

data, which includes some 600 birds, suggest that
chicks about seven weeks old are the most suit-
able. Compared with the rat, the chick has its
limitations as a test animal. It occupies more
space, consumes more food, has a greater range
of variation in rate of growth, being more diffi-
cult to handle and bring through the cary, and
critical period of growth.

Milk and ice cream as fatty foods: JEROME
ALEXANDER. Since milk contains 88 per cent. of.
water, the legal 3 per cent. fat means 25 per cent.
of the total solids, so that milk is a fatty food.
When the casein coagulates it mechanically en-
traps the fat, thus forming a greasy curd which
is hard to digest. Cows’ milk has a low protective
ratio, t. e., the ratio of casein to lactalbumin, and
therefore readily forms greasy curds unsuitable
for the human stomach. Increasing the protective
ratio by adding any colloidal protector (gelatin,
eggs, ete.) prevents this difficulty, and is
of especial importance in ice cream, where the
fat content is much higher than in milk. The
effect of colloidal protection in artificial milks
and cheese is still to be worked out.

A new method for the determination of vanillin:
H. C. BasHioum and Frep Y. Herron. This
method depends upon the properties of the alde-
hyde group rather than those of the phenolic
group as is usually the case. In practice, the
solution containing vanillin is saturated with
hydrogen sulfide in the presence of hydrochloric
acid, whereupon a white precipitate of thio-
vanillin is produced. The precipitate is filtered
off, washed with water and then dissolved in
dilute sodium hydroxide solution in which it easily
dissolves, producing a yellow color, the intensity
of which is proportional, within limits, to the con-
centration of thiovanillin.

The soda equivalent of sour milk used in
baking: Mary P. Witson and H. A. Wess.
Baking soda and sour milk ean not be titrated
together with any known indicator. A method
of preparing alizarine test paper of approximately
N/20 strength (one No. 3 quinine capsule of soda
in 4% standard ecupful of water), drying and
“‘spotting’’ with mixtures of the N/20 soda,
measured in drops, and 14 teaspoon of the sour
milk under examination, was worked out. When
the spot shows no color change, the number of
spots made permit caleulation of the equivalent
amounts of baking soda or baking powder per
cup of milk of any degree of acidity.

CuaRLes L. Parsons,
Secretary

,

Nzw SEr1xzs ‘ ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1457 Frmay, DecemBer 1, 1922 Sinaie Copies, 15 Ors.

Saunders’ Books

° Peis -FOURTH
Wells’ Chemical Pathology foun

This work considers pathology from the standpoint of the chemical processes involved. It

deals with the chemical changes that take place in pathologic conditions. It treats of the

causes of disease and so provides the first step in their treatment.

Octavo of 695 pages. By H. GIDEON WELLS, M_D., Ph.D., Professor of Pathology, University of Chicago.
Cloth, $7.00 net.

5 ° SEVENTH
Jordan’s General Bacteriology SEE

In this work there are extensive chapters on methods of studying bacteria, including stain-
ing, biochemical tests, cultures, etc.; on development and composition of bacteria; on enzymes
and fermentation products; on the bacterial production. of pigment, acid, and alkali; and on
ptomains and toxins.

Octavo of 744 pages, illustrated. By EDWIN O. JORDAN, Ph.D., Professor of Bacteriology in the Uni-
versity of Chicago. ‘ Cloth, $5.00 net.

ate 9 ° ° JUST
Williams’ Personal Hygiene Applied Eee
This book is far more than a recital of information on health. It establishes a new interpre-
tation of health in terms of life. It is personal hygiene applied. There are chapters on
the muscular system, nutrition, the respiratory system, circulatory, excretory, and nervous
systems, sexual aspects of life, prevention in specific diseases, hygiene of the mouth, eye,
and ear.

By JESSE FEIRING WILLIAMS, M.D., Associate Professor of Physical Education, Teachers College,
Columbia University, New York City. 12mo of 412 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $2.50 net.

Smith’s Bacterial Diseases of Plants

This book is the result of thirty-five years of reading and diligent laboratory and field in-
vestigation. It is largely the product of a single laboratory, eight of the organisms here

selected for special study having been named by the author. Meas
By ERWIN F. SMITH, in charge of Laboratory of Plant Pathology, Bureau of Plant Industry, Washing-
ton, D. C. Octavo of 688 pages, illustrated, Cloth, $10.00 net.

Heineman on Milk

This work discusses milk from the viewpoint of the sanitarian, producer, and. physician.
There are chapters on the physiology of lactation, chemical, physical, and bacteriologic ex-
aminations, contamination, fermented milks, pasteurization, certified milk, economic aspect

of production and distribution, etc. ; :
By PAUL G. HEINEMAN, M.D., Wisconsin. Octayo of 684 pages, illustrated. Cloth, $7.00 net.

SIGN AND MAIL THIS ORDER FORM TODAY------------------------------

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.

Please send me the books checked (V) and charge to my account :—

Smith’s Bacterial Diseases of Plants $10.00 net.

Wells’ Chemical Pathology. ---------------$7.00 ete Williams’ Personal Hygiene Applied_- $2.50 net.
Jordan’s General Bacteriology_------------- $5.00 net TSE INE les Doe $7.00 net.
TANT HAND) DRISS Sees esusli cco a es Oo ee

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

MONOGRAPHS ON EXPERIMENTAL BIOLOGY

Just Published

The Biology of Death

By RAYMOND PEARL, Johns Hopkins University
64 Illustrations. 275 Pages. $2.50

The author has endeavored in this volume to bring to-
gether under a unified viewpoint some of the more im-
portant contributions which have been made to our knowl-
edge of natural death, from three widely scattered sources:
namely, general biology, experimental biology, and _ stat-
istical and actuarial science. It is impossible in a limited
amount of space to cover a field so wide with anything
approaching completeness. To do so would require a series
of volumes in place of one. This has not been the au-
thor’s object; he has instead hoped that the very limitation
of this work might stimulate the reader to penetrate for
himself further into the literature of this fascinating and
important field of biology.

Injury, Recovery and Death In Rela-

tion to Conductivity and Permeability

By W. J. V. OSTERHOUT, Harvard University
96 Illustrations. 259 Pages. $2.50

This volume endeavors to treat certain aspects of
biology according to the spirit and methods of the exact
sciences. The treatment is confined to certain fundamen-
tal problems which have been studied quantitatively. These
studies lead to a theory of some aspects of injury, recovery,
and death, as well as of antagonism and permeability. The
behavior of the organism in these respects may be predicted
with a satisfactory degree of accuracy by means of the
eqilations which express the theory in mathematical form.
After an introduction the author takes up the problem of
Methods of Measuring Electrical Conductivity, The Me-
chanism of the Process of Death, Injury and Recovery.
Antagonism, Anesthesia, Conductivity and Permeability,
and concludes with a bibliography.

Smell, Taste and Allied Senses in the

Vertebrates
By G. H. PARKER, Sc.D., Harvard University
37 Illustrations. 192 Pages. $2.50

Sense organs have always excited general interest, for
they are the means of approach to the human mind. With-
out them our intellectual life would be a blank. Although
the ear and the eye have commonly received most atten-
tion, the other sense organs, such as those of smell and of
taste, are in reality equally worthy of consideration. Smell
and taste, together with certain other senses not so well
known, form a more or less natural group in which there
is a certain amount of functional interrelation and genetic
connection, and it is from this standpoint that these senses
are considered in this volume. They illustrate in a way
principles common to other groups of sense organs, and
these principles will be found to be of an essentially dy-
namic character as contrasted with the older conceptions in
which function has been brought into relation less inti-
mately with structure.

Philadelphia J, B. LIPPINCOTT COMPANY

Previously Issued

The Nature of Animal Light
E. NEWTON HARVEY, Ph.D.
Princeton University

“This is exactly the kind of
monograph that is wanted—a
book on an interesting subject
written by an expert.”—Jour-
nal of hysical Chemistry,
itha'casy Nee

Physical Basis of Heredity
THOMAS HUNT MORGAN
Columbia University
“The most complete account
extant of the mechanism of
heredity ... Indispensable to
every serious student of the
subject.”—Paul Popenoe in The
Journal of Heredity, Washing-

ton, D. C.

“Every geneticist and euge-
nicist will want to own, read
through, and digest, Morgan’s
‘Basis of Heredity’.’—Eugent-
cal News.

Forced Movements, Tropisms
and Animal Conduct
JACQUES LOEB, M.D., Ph.D., ScD.
Rockefeller Institute

“The monograph will be read
with interest by all workers in
this field.”—Science.

“The book provides many in-
teresting examples of the ani-
mal behavior... The reader
cannot fail to derive a stimulus
for further inquiries concern-
ing the nature of vital energy.”
—American Journal of Science.

Inbreeding and Outbreeding
EDWARD M. EAST, Ph.D., Har-
vard University, and DONALD F.
JONES, ScD., Conn. Agric. Exp. Sta.

“Altogether this is a noble book
in which American science may well
take pride. It should form a part
of the required reading of every stu-
dent of biology, because nowhere else
is there brought together in such
clear and well digested form the re-
sults of a mass of experimental
work which has successfully lighted
a dark corner of biological science.”
—Science.

The

Elementary Nervous
System
G. H. PARKER, Sc.D.
Harvard University
“The book is invaluable to the be-
haviorist.”—Journal of Psychology.

Each Illustrated, Price $2.50

Descriptive Circular on Request,

London

SCIENC

Vou. LVI DsrcEemBER 1, 1922 ‘No. 1457

CONTENTS

The American Association for the Advance-

ment of Science:

The Boston Meeting; Autumn Meeting of

the Hauecutive Committee; Annual Report

of the Permanent Secretary; Report of the

Committee on Convocation W eel........-.----- 611
Functions of the Division of Geology and

Geography of the National Research Coun-

cil: Proressorn Nevin M. FENNEMAN........ 620
National Research Council Medical Fellow-

SVU Shy eases eae se Se a 624
Scientific Events:

The International Commission of Eugenics ;

The Federation of American Societies for

Experimental Biology; The American

Physical Society; The Mathematical As-

sociation of America; Chemistry at the

Boston Meeting of the Association...........- 626
Scientific Notes: and NGwss sae ccsccesesecccteeee 629
University and Educational Notes.........---.------- 632
Discussion and Correspondence:

Financial Support of Technical Journals:

Dr. C. Stuart GaAGER. Acoustical Re-

search: PROFESSOR THEODORE LYMAN.

Austrian Scientific Publications: Dr. Wit-

uiaM F. Mracrers. An Appeal: Dr. VER-

ENON sO TE Ta Ti OG Geet eee nnn pce see 633
Special Articles: :

Organization of Heterotypic Chromosomes:

Dr. WILLIAM RANDOLPH Taytor. The In-

telligence of Indians: Dr. T. R. GARTH........ 635
The Optical Society of America: Dr. IRwIn

GRINS T Wenn swe etea Asche sett eer wen 636

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by

J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by
THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription; $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR
THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE
THE BOSTON MEETING

Prans for the Fourth Boston Meeting of
the association and associated societies are in a
very satisfactory state of progress. The local
arrangements are being very efficiently cared
for by the local committee, whose chairman is
Dr. S. C. Prescott, of the Massachusetts Insti-
tute. The secretary of the local committee is
Mr. Arthur L. Townsend, also of the Massa-
chusetts Institute. The preliminary announce-
ment for the meeting will be sent, about De-
cember 1, to all whose names are on the roll
of the association. As has been announced
previously, those attending the meeting will
have the benefit of special railway, rates, a fare
and a half for the round trip, on the certificate
plan. This privilege is available for almost all
of the United States and Canada.

The sessions will (be held mainly in the build-
ings of the Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology, in Cambridge. These buildings have a
floor-space of over fifteen acres. Hach society
will be able to have its session rooms near the
rooms of the other societies, and still under
the same roof.

Boston is well provided with good hotels and
transportation facilities are very convenient.
The announcement will contain the usual list of
hotels, prices, ete. Those wishing to make
arrangements for rooms before receiving the
preliminary announcement should address the
local representative of their society, care of
the secretary of the local committee. It is
better to address the hotel directly, which can
be done immediately after receiving the an-
nouncement. The association hotel headquar-
ters will be the Somerset Hotel.

Three general sessions are thus far arranged
for the fourth Boston meeting. The opening
session will be held on'the evening of Tuesday,

612

December 26, in Walker Memorial Hall at the

Massachusetts Institute. At this session the

retiring president of the association, Professor

EK. H. Moore, of the University of Chicago,

will deliver an address on “What is a Number

System?” The president of the association,

Dr. J. Playfair McMurrich, of the University

of Toronto, will preside.

The second general session will be held on
the evening of Wednesday, December 27, in
Walker Memorial Hall. This session is to {be
under ‘the joint auspices of the Society of
Sigma Xi and the A. A. A. S. The address of
the evening will be the Sigma Xi address, this
year by President Livingston Farrand, of Cor-
nell University, on “The Nation and _ its
Health.”

A general session will be held on Friday
afternoon, December 29, in Huntington Hall,
Rogers Building, on the old institute site,
Boylston Street, Boston. On this occasion the
Wilham Thompson Sedgwick Memorial Lec-
ture, under the auspices of the Massachusetts
Institute, will be given by Professor Edmund
B. Wilson, of Columbia University, on “The
Physical Basis of Life.”

The following list shows the societies, and
the names of their secretaries, that have thus
far informed the permanent secretary’s office
that they are planning to meet with the asso-
ciation at Boston:

Section A (Mathematics), William H. Roever,
secretary; Washington University, St. Louis,
Mo.

American Mathematical Society, R. G. D. Rich-
ardson, secretary; Brown University, Provi-
dence, R. I.

Mathematical Association of America, W. D.
Cairns, secretary; Oberlin College, Oberlin,
Ohio.

Section B (Physics), 8. R. Williams, secretary;
Oberlin College, Oberlin, Ohio. (Otto Kop-
pius, of Oberlin College, will act as secretary
for the Boston meeting, in Dr. Williams’ ab-
sence in California).

American Physical Society, Dayton C. Miller,
secretary; Case School of Applied Science,
Cleveland, Ohio.

American Meteorological Society, Charles F.
Brooks, secretary; Clark University, Worces-
ter, Mass.

SCIENCE ©

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

Section C (Chemistry), W. D. Harkins, acting
secretary for the Boston meeting; Univer-
sity of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.

Section D (Astronomy), F. R. Moulton, secre-
tary; University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.
American Astronomical Society, Joel Stebbins,
secretary; Washburn Observatory, Madison,

Wis.

Section E (Geology and Geography), E. S. Moore,
secretary; University of Toronto, Toronto,
Canada.

Section F (Zoologieal Sciences), H. W. Rand,
secretary; Harvard University, Cambridge,
Mass.

American Society of Zoologists, W. C. Allee,
secretary; University of Chicago, Chicago,
Til.

Entomological Society of America, C. L. Met-
calf, secretary; University of Illinois, Ur-
bana, Ill.

American Association of Economie Entomolo-
gists, Albert F. Burgess, secretary; Melrose
Highlands, Mass.

Section G (Botany), Robert B. Wylie, secretary;
State University of Iowa, Iowa City, Lowa.

Botanical Society of America, I. F. Lewis, sec-
retary; University of Virginia, University,
Va.

American Phytopathological Society, G. R.
Lyman, secretary; Bureau of Plant Industry,
Washington, D. C.

American Fern Society, Stewart H. Burnham,
secretary; College of Agriculture, Ithaca,
INS 2%

Sullivant Moss Society, Edward B. Chamber-
lain, secretary; 18 West Highty-ninth Street,
New York, N. Y.

Section F, G (Zoology and Botany).

American Society of Naturalists, A. Franklin
Shull, secretary; University of Michigan,
Ann Arbor, Mich.

Ecological Society of America, A. O. Weese,
secretary; 1321 W. Wood Street, Decatur, Il.

American Microscopical Society, Paul 8S. Welch,
secretary; University of Michigan, Ann
Arbor, Mich.

American Nature-Study Society, Anna Botsford
Comstock, secretary; 123 Roberts Place,
Ithaca, N. Y.

Section H (Anthropology), E. A. Hooton, secre-
tary; Peabody Museum, Cambridge, Mass.
American Anthropological Association, A. V.

Kidder, secretary; 215 Main Street, Andover,
Mass.
Section I (Psychology), Frank N. Freeman, sec-

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

retary; University of Chicago, Chicago, Ill.
American Psychological Association, Edwin G.

Boring, secretary; Clark University, Worces-
ter, Mass.

Section K (Social and Economie Sciences), Fred-
erick L. Hoffman, secretary, Babson Insti-
tute, Wellesley Hills, Mass.

American Metric Association, Howard Richards,
secretary; 156 Fifth Avenue, New York,
Wh i

Section L (Historical and Philological Sciences),
Frederick HK. Brasch, secretary; 6963 Morton
Place, Rogers Park, Chicago, Ill.

Section M (Engineering), L. W. Wallace, secre-
tary; 719 Fifteenth Street, N. W., Wash-
ington, D. C.

Section N (Medical Sciences), A. J. Goldfarb,
secretary; College of the City of New York,
New York, N. Y.

Section O (Agriculture), P. E. Brown, secretary;
Iowa State College, Ames, Iowa.

American Society of Agronomy, P. E. Brown,
secretary; Iowa State College, Ames, Iowa.

Society of American Foresters, W. N. Spar-
hawk, secretary; Forest Service, Washington,
DC.

American Society for Horticultural Science,
C. P. Close, secretary; College Park, Md.

Society for Promotion of Agricultural Science,
J. G. Lipman, secretary; New Brunswick,
N. J.

Section Q- (Education), A. 8S. Barr, secretary;
1924 Hazelwood, Detroit, Mich.

Societies not specially related to any particular
section:

The Society of Sigma Xi, Edward Ellery, sec-
retary; Union College, Schenectady, N. Y.
Gamma Alpha Graduate Scientific Fraternity,

A. H. Wright, secretary; 113 HE. Upland
Road, Ithaca, N. Y.
Phi Kappa Phi, L. H. Pammel, secretary;
Ames, Iowa.
Burton EH. Livineston,
Permanent Secretary

AUTUMN MEETING OF THE EXECUTIVE
COMMITTEE

THE meeting was called to order on October
21 at 2:10, in the office of Science Press, New
York City, with the following members pres-
ent: J. McKeen Cattell, H. L. Fairchild, W. J.
Humphreys, Burton E. Livingston, Herbert
Osborn, Henry B. Ward. Dr. Fairchild was

SCIENCE

613

elected chairman for the session. The follow-
ing are the main items of business transacted:

1. The minutes of the last meeting of the
committee having been already approved by
mail, the permanent secretary read the minutes
of the proceedings by mail and telegraph, in
the interim since the last meeting, which were
approved.

2. The permanent secretary’s annual report
on the affairs of the association was read and
discussed and it was accepted. The principal
features of this report are subjoined.

3. The permanent secretary’s financial report
was accepted and ordered to be audited.

4. A letter from the general secretary was
read, mentioning that preparations are in
progress for a program on the “Origin of
Ideas,” for the Boston meeting, under the lead-
ership of Dr. James Harvey Robinson, and
that preparations are well advanced for a joint
meeting of Section C (Chemistry) with the
Physiological Section of the Botanical Society
of America, with a program on “Photosyn-
thesis and the Light Relations. of Plants.”

5. The treasurer was authorized to exchange
the association’s holdings in U. S. Victory 434
per cent. notes, which are to be retired, for
4% per cent. U. S. Treasury bonds (1947-
1952) of equal face values. i

6. The chairman of the Committee on Con-
vocation Week (Dr. J. McKeen Cattell) pre-
sented an informal report, which was accepted.
This report will appear in Science.

7. Fifty-seven members were elected to fel-
lowship in the association, on regular nomina-
tions approved by their respective section sec-
retaries. The newly elected fellows are dis-
tributed among the sections as follows: F, 40;
I, 15; L, 1; K, 1. (It is highly desirable that
all members who are eligible to fellowship in
the association should be elected. Nominations
are made by any member on special nomina-
tion blanks secured from the permanent secre-
tary’s office or from any section secretary.)

8. Certain editorial features of the journal
ScIENCE were discussed. It was voted that the
present (practice be continued of publishing in
full the retiring presidential and vice-presiden-
tial addresses given at the annual meeting.

614

9. Several communications from the secre-
tary pro tem. of the executive committee for
the proposed federation of American biological
societies were read and a resolution was adopt-
ed stating that the American Association for
the Advancement of Science approves the gen-
eral aims and purposes of the proposed fed-
eration, and wishes to cooperate with the fed-
eration in all possible ways.

10. A communication recommending action
by the association, on the subject of proposed
changes in the copyright laws of the United
States, was received from Dr. M. L. Raney,
librarian of the Johns Hopkins University.
' The questions thus raised were relerred to a
special committee, consisting of: Dr. C. L.
Andrews, chairman (librarian of the John
Crerar Library, Chicago); Dr. W. W. Bishop
(librarian of the University of Michigan); and
Dr. John M. Coulter (head of the department
of botany, the University of Chicago), and this
committee was requested to make recommenda-
tions to the council at the Boston meeting.

11. A communication from Dr. Charles B.
Lipman (University of California), writing for
the Board of Research of the University of
California, and one from Dr. C. A. Kofoid
(also of the University of California) were
read, regarding the great present need for the
preparation and publication éf an up-to-date
list of serial publications in science, with anno-
tations. The executive committee expressed its
approval of these communications but was
obliged to defer definite action on this subject
till some way may be found lby which the asso-
ciation may be able to aid this important
project.

12. A communication was received from Dr.
Henry B. Ward (of the University of Ilh-
nois), recommending that the association adopt
a general resolution strongly favoring the
scrupulous and complete preservation of the
national parks of the United States and
Canada, against any form of desecration by
any commercial interest. Such a resolution
was adopted; its text will appear later in
SCIENCE.

13. The permanent secretary was authorized
to conduct an intensive membership campaign

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

in the states of New England and New York,
just preceding the next annual meeting, this
campaign to be based on a special request ad-
dressed to every member resident in the speci-
fied region, asking him to secure two or more
new members for the association.

14. It was unanimously voted that the per-
manent secretary be instructed to cable and
write to Sir Ernest Rutherford, president of
the British Association for the Advancement of
Science, inviting him to attend the fourth
Boston meeting and to deliver an address, prob-
ably on Thursday evening, December 28, with
the understanding that the association would
meet his expenses.

15. The committee adjourned at 6:30, ito
meet at Boston, at 10 A.M., December 26. The
evening was spent in an informal discussion of
the affairs and prospects of the association.

Burton EH. Livineston,
Permanent Secretary

ANNUAL REPORT OF THE PERMANENT
SECRETARY

Publications.. About 6,200 copies of the
“Booklet of Information” have been sent to
prospective members. About 6,500 copies of
a four-page leaflet have been sent to the med-
ical men of New England, inviting them to be-
come members of the association. At the end
of September a calendar card, emphasizing the
association year (October 1 to September 30)
was sent to each member with the statement of
his dues. About 11,700 copies were sent out.
Along with the calendar card went an explana-
tory leaflet on membership. .

Circularization for new members. During
the fiscal year 1922, 23,933 invitations to join
the association were sent to members of affili-
ated societies. The cards Show that 1,114 new
members have thus far been secured in this
way. The invitations sent out in the circular-
jzation of non-members listed in “American

1A summary of the annual report of the per-
manent secretary, on the affairs of the association,
for the period from October 1, 1921, to Septem-
ber ‘30, 1922. Presented to the Executive’ Com-
mittee at New York City on October 21, 1922.

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

Men of Science” numbered 4,370, and 106 new
members have been secured from that group.
All members of the Society of Sigma Xi have
the privilege of joining the American Associa-
tion for the Advancement of Science without
paying the usual entrance fee, but it has thus
far been found impossible to send a special
invitation to each of these, on account of diffi-
culty in securing the membership lists of all
chapters of the society. All members of the
society who are not already members of the
‘association are asked to send their names and
addresses and the names of their respective
chapters, to the permanent secretary’s Wash-
ington office. He will send them literature that
will be of interest. At the close of the fiscal
year 1922, about 16,200 special invitations to
join the association were sent to members of
affiliated societies. About 6,500 of these invi-
tations went to medical men in New England.

Organization. Each section secretary thas
received a card list of the members enrolled in
his section, with a cabinet for holding the
eards. These lists are duplicated in the Wash-
ington office, and both sets are kept up to date
by additions and alterations.

Each section secretary has been asked to
secure a mail ballot of his section committee,
for at least two nominations for vice-president
and chairman of his section, these nominations
to be returned to the Washington office, for the
use of the council, on a special blank. It will
be remembered that the sections nominate, and
the council elects, section chairmen and section
secretaries. When a section holds a business
session, the nominations secured from the sec-
tion committee are to be acted on by the see-
tion as a whole. More than one nomination
is to be presented to the council, in order that
the latter body may have opportunity for
choice. The council needs also to know how
the votes stood in the section committee.

A constitution for the proposed federation
of American biological societies was adopted at
the Woods Hole meeting, August 4, of the pro
tem. executive committee for the federation, at
which meeting Dr. Herbert Osborn very kindly
represented the association. The proposed con-
stitution has been submitted to the council of

SCIENCE

615

the association, and should be considered at
the Boston meeting, when it will be necessary
to decide whether the association will become a
member of the new federation. The constitu-
tion has been published in Scrmnce (Vol. LVI,
No. 1448, p. 359, September 29, 1922). The
pro tem. committee voted that the aim of the
federation would be to make use of the organ-
ization of the association, avoiding the duph-
cation of organization wherever possible. It
is emphasized by the secretary of the pro tem.
committee that the main activities of the fed-
eration are apt to. concern publications, not
the organization of meetings. The pro tem.
committee expressed its thanks to the associa-
tion for the financial help received in connec-
tion with the Woods Hole meeting, and re-
quests the association to continue help of this
kind during the formative period of the fed-
eration. A similar request has been made of
the National Research Council. Copies of the
proposed constitution for the federation have
been sent by the permanent secretary to all
members of the section committees of the four
biological sections of the American Association
for the Advancement of Science, together with
letters asking each member to wnite to his sec-
tion secretary in regard to the proposed fed-
eration and the attitude that should be taken
by. the association toward it, a carbon copy of
each letter being also sent to the permanent
secretary’s office. A number of replies have
been received and the permanent secretary
hopes, with the aid of the four section secre-
taries concerned, to make a report on this
matter to the Executive Committee at the first
committee session of the Boston meeting. All
members of the biological sections are invited
to write to the proper section secretary in this
connection, sending copies of \their letters to the
permanent secretary. To be considered in his
report, letters should be in the section secre-
tary’s hands before December 1.

Divisions, Local Branch and Affiliated Acad-
emies. The membership and financial rela-
tions, between the association and the divi-
sions, the local branch and the affiliated acad-
emies, are shown for the last 'three years in the
following tabulation:

616

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

PACIFIC DIVISION SOUTHWESTERN DIVISION STATE COLLEGE BRANCH AFFILIATED ACADEMIES
1920 | 1921| 1922 | 1920| 1921 | 1922 1922 1920 | 1921 | 1922
Total number of mem- :
bers, end of year....| ...... UID) DLE) Rese 156| 176 52 851| 1,437] 1,488
Number of new mem-
bers received during
Fear ee eee Nn ees BB im We Glilt eee 57| 34 0 bag alors 182| 101
Allowances made dur-
AMG JOAN eee ee $1,784|$1,007|$1,126 | $108] $131] $149 $27 $818|$1,141/$1,328
Membership. The increase in membership higher than was the corresponding rate of

since September 30, 1920, is summarized in the
following tabulation:

Sept. 30, Sept. 30, Sept. 30,

1920 1921 1922
Number of members
in good standing.. 10,002 10,160 10,566
Total enrollment...... 11,442 11,547 11,646

Changes in membership occurring in the
fiseal year 1922 are shown below:

Sept. 30, Sept. 30,
1921 1922
Total enrollment................--.--- 11,547 11,646
Number of sustaining members 3 om
Number of life members............ 346 352
Number of annual members,
paid up. 9,811 10,211
Total in good standing.......... 10,160 10,566
Number of members in ar-
tears for two years........-.-- 705 455
Number of members in ar-
rears for one year. 682 625
Total enrollment.................--... 11,547 11,646
Gain in membership, October 1, 1921,
to September 30, 1922:
Remstabementts) oa 2. ccecnceceesccecneeenncews 33
New members (11 life, 1,209 an-
PART etl) econ ne ce sanenbnerart Ne ceceeerasnrentee ,220
AN bevlley rainy enn esen sec naeecscecrtencedeesectecmasecnunncsscazacns 1,253
Loss in membership, October 1, 1921,
to September 30, 1922:
Dropped because of non-payment of
CATT eee cate eee cae nee ease eeeeneantene 705
Resigned 362
RUS) pee EN 87
Boy ea ML MG SSES) eae ee rer cere 1,154

Net gain, October 1, 1921, to September 30,
1922
Transfers from annual to life membership... 4

Special attention may be directed to the
marked increase in paid-up membership for
the last two years, owing to the very efficient
work of the executive assistant and his staff.
Paid-up membership for the three years 1920,
1921 and 1922 was 10,002, 10,160 and 10,566.
The rate of increase in paid-up membership
from 1920 to 1921 was about 50.5 per cent.

increase in total membership. From 1921 to
1922 the rate of increase in paid-up member-
ship was about four times as great as was the
corresponding total membership rate of im-
erease. It seems that membership in good
standing is a much better index of our growth
than as total membership, and this feature is
very gratifying.

Financial Affairs. The permanent secre-
tary’s annual financial report for the fiscal
year 1922 will be published in Sctmnce after
the annual meeting, at which time a statement
regarding the permanent secretary’s budget for
1923 will be made.

Burton .E. Livineston,
Permanent Secretary

REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON CON-
VOCATION WEEK!

THE committee on convocation week ap-
pointed by the council of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science at the
Toronto meeting, and consisting of J. McKeen
Cattell, Chairman, Herbert S. Jennings, J.
Playfair MeMurrich, Eliakim Hastings Moore
and Edwin Bidwell Wilson, begs to report as
follows :

Twenty years ago the first convocation week
meeting of our national scientific societies was
held in Washington, from December 29, 1902,
to January 3, 1903. Prior ito that time the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science with the societies affiliated with it had

1 This report has been presented to the executive
committee and approved. It is printed in ad-
vance of the Boston meeting in order that con-
sideration may be given to the recommendations
that are made prior to their presentation to the
council.

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

held annual meetings in the summer; the
American Society of Naturalists, with an affil-
ated group of societies in the natural- sciences,
had met in the Christmas holidays. Others
‘of the national societies had met at various
times and places.

The summer meetings of the American Asso-
ciation were found unsatisfactory owing to the
difficulty of traveling and the wide dispersion
of scientific men at that season. There had
been a gradual development in the direction of
making the American Association an affilation
of scientific societies responsible for their own
programs, and the special programs of the
sections of the association were becoming less
_ important. After long discussion, it was con-
sequently decided to transfer the meeting to the
Christmas holidays, and to make closer the
affiliation with the national scientific societies.

A committee, of which the late Professor
Charles S. Minot was chairman and the chair-
man of the present committee was secretary,
proposed and arranged a convocation week
meeting of the American Association and other
national societies to be held during the week
in which New Year’s day falls. The plan was
to let the meeting follow Christmas day, at a
sufficient interval to allow scientific men to
spend the first part of the Christmas holidays
at home, devoting the second half to the scien-
tific meetings. Extensive correspondence was
conducted with universities and colleges and
about sixty leading institutions agreed either
to let their Christmas holidays include the en-
tire week in which New Year’s day falls, or
in case that, were mot possible to give leave of
absence to those who wished to attend the
meetings.

It was thought that the official recognition
of convocation week would lead the authorities
of the universities and other institutions to
realize that attendance at scientific meetings
is a part of the academic duties and privileges
of their teachers. Efforts, in part successful,
were also made to obtain payment of traveling
expenses by the institutions.

A further part of the plan of convocation
week was to hold a greater convocation of scien-
tific, and perhaps also of learned, societies

SCIENCE

617

once in four years, in alternation in Washing-
ton, New York and Chicago. It was proposed
that at the intervening two-year periods the
association should meet in a large central city,
where there would be accommodation for all
the societies to meet with it. In the alternate
years—the end of the year of odd numbers in
the calendar—the meeting would be held in a
smaller or more remote city, and in this case
it was assumed that many of the scientifie so-
cieties would prefer to meet singly or in groups,
often in smaller university towns. This plan
has since been carried out, the four-year con-
vocation meeting, for example, having been
held at the end of 1920 in Chicago, with a very
large representation of national scientific so-
cieties and scientific men. The meeting last
year was held in Toronto, a smaller city, where,
however, the arrangements were admirable and
the attendance large. The meeting this year
will be at Boston, where the facilities are ample
for a large meeting.

A difficulty has, however, occurred owing to
the prescientific arrangement of the calendar,
according to which the same day of the week
does not coincide with the same day of the
month. When New Year’s day came early in
the week, many institutions resumed their
regular work in the middle of that week, and
scientific men found it difficult to be absent to
attend meetings of scientific societies at the
beginning of their work. The present com-
mittee was appointed with special reference
to this difficulty, but was authorized to report
on other problems connected with convocation
week.

This year Christmas occurs on Monday and
it was not regarded as feasible to postpone the
meetings to the following week. The council
at Toronto appeared to be nearly equally di-
vided among three alternatives—holding the
meeting during Christmas week, extending it
over Sunday, or postponing it to New Year’s
week. It was finally decided to hold the open-
ing session on Tuesday. This has ohvious dis-
advantages—it shortens convocation week by
a day; it requires most members of the soci-
eties who wish to be present at the opening to
leave home on or before Christmas day; it does

618

not allow a day in advance of the meeting for
preparatory meetings of councils and com-
mittees. When Christmas occurs on Tuesday,
as it does next year, the balance of the week
is too short for the meetings of the different
societies, for it is desirable that to a certain
extent they meet successively rather than simul-
taneously im order to avoid conflicts in the
programs.

Our committee has decided to recommend
that when New Year’s day falls on Thursday,
Friday or Saturday, convocation week shall
begin on Monday of that week and extend
through the week; when it falls on Sunday, con-
vocation week shall begin on Tuesday of Christ-
mas week and shall continue five days; when
Christmas day falls on Monday, Tuesday or
Wednesday, convocation week shall begin two
days later, namely, on Wednesday, Thursday
or Friday, the meetings being continued to
include, respectively, Tuesday, Wednesday or
Thursday of New Year’s week.

It is suggested that meetings acceptable to
scientific men and to the community might oc-
eur on Sunday. Such would be meetings of
councils and committees held at headquarter
hotels, and perhaps public lectures. Indeed
lectures might be given in the churches as is
the custom at meetings of the British Associa-
tion which always includes Sunday in its week
of meeting. It may also be suggested that
one of the main objects of scientific meetings
is to \bring scientific men together for acquaint-
ance and conversation, and that Sunday could
be utilized for such personal meetings, as also
for smaller excursions, for informal dinners
and the like.

The situation in which there appears to lbe
most occasion for difference of opinion is when
Christmas day falls on Monday or Wednesday.
It might in these cases be desirable to meet the
day after ‘Christmas, so that in the first case
the meeting could be completed in Christmas
week and in the second case not extend beyond
Wednesday of New Year’s week. The com-
mittee, however, recommends that the official
opening dates be two days after Christmas,
though of course any society could place its
first meetings on the day after Christmas and

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

the council of the association and other councils
and committees must meet on that day.

In addition to the convocation-week meet-
ings during the Christmas ‘holidays, it seems
desirable that the association should resume
regular summer meetings. The sections need
not be fully organized, and it would not be ex-
pected that most of the affiliated societies
would meet. The four summer meetings that
have been held since the establishment of the
winter convocations—in Ithaca, Hanover, San
Francisco and this year in Salt Lake City—
have been enjoyable ‘to those able to be present
and useful to the communities, to science and
to the association.

The country is large; scientific men are many
and have diverse interests. The association
should aim to be of service to all in so far as
this is possible without sacrifice of other inter-
ests. A meeting in summer, smaller and more
informal than the winter meetings, more sec-
tional in character, enables the association to
visit universities and places mot suited to a
large winter meeting or impossible when there
is only one meeting a year. Hxcursions and
social features may be arranged for a summer
meeting, which give it an individual character.

The committee proposes that in addition to
migratory convocation-week meetings during
the Christmas holidays and meetings in sum-
mer, it may be desirable to standardize other
times and places for scientific meetings, more
especially for meetings of committees, boards
and the like. In many such groups, for exam-
ple, in practically all the committees of the
National Research Council, there are men work-
ing in different sciences, and the cost and time
of travel could be economized if several meet-
ings were held on the same or consecutive days.

We consequently suggest that it would be
an advantage to scientific organization and
research if committee and similar meetings were
called in Washington in the fourth week in
April; in New York City in the latter part of
Thanksgiving week; in Chicago about the first
of February, and in Wood’s Hole in August.
This would give a convenient distribution both
in time and place for such meetings.

The committee does not regard convocation

DECEMBER 1, 1922

week meetings during the Christmas holidays
as necessarily final. There is much to be said
for placing convocation week in the scholastic
year, so that attendance at the meetings may
be regarded both by teachers and administra-
tors as part of the privileges and duties of
scientific men. It is doubtful whether students
would suffer by the absence of part of their
teachers for a week, and it is certain that it
would be to their advantage for their teachers
to attend scientifie meetings. It is further the
ease that neither midsummer nor midwinter is
the best time for traveling or for the holding
of meetings. Apart from inconvenience,
dysentery in summer and colds in winter are a
common sequence. A convocation week in
autumn or im spring might be best for scien-
tiie men and ultimately in the interest of the
institutions with which they are connected.

Tt is perhaps not necessary for the com-
mittee to enter into a discussion of the advan-
tages and disadvantages of large meetings.
The inter-relations of the sciences are so fun-
damental, however, that it is difficult to make
separation in time and place of meetings of
societies that is not inconvenient to some and
perhaps adverse to the development of inter-
relations that are important for the advance-
ment of science. It is also the case that a large
meeting may impress the magnitude and
importance of science on the general public.
In addition it may be noted that it is not so
difficult either for executive officers or for
hosts to arrange for one large meeting as for
many small meetings, and there are other ex-
irinsic advantages, such as reduced railway
rates.

On the other hand, it is desirable for men
whose work is in the same science to meet ‘to-
gether intimately, and the social arrangements
for a small and isolated group are usually
more agreeable than those for a large gather-
ing. The compromise that has been worked
out appears to be working with reasonable
success, namely, that there be a general con-
vocation-week meeting once in four years in
three large scientific centers, Washington, New
York and Chicago. In New York and Chicago,
at least, there is ample ‘accommodation, so that
societies can have headquarters and places of

SCIENCE

619

meeting that will give them any desired degree
of isolation.

It might also be useful to arrange a twelve
year schedule for convocation-week meetings of
the second class, say, in Philadelphia, Balti-
more, Pittsburgh or Buffalo four years hence;
in St. Louis, Cincinnati, Columbus or Cleve-
land eight years ‘hence; in Boston again, or in
another New England city, such as Provi-
dence, Worcester or New Haven, twelve years
hence. Then it might be convenient to ar-
range a provisional schedule for minor convo-
cation-week meetings for the alternate years,
including those cities mentioned when not
selected for the twelve-year rotation and cities
such as Montreal, Toronto, Albany, Rochester,
Richmond, Louisville, Atlanta, Nashville, New
Orleans, Houston, Indianapolis, Detroit, Kan-
sas City, Omaha, Minneapolis, Denver, Salt
Lake City, San Francisco, Los Angeles, Port-
land and Seattle.

The committee consequently recommends that
all national scientific societies arrange to meet
in Washington at the end of the year 1924, in
New York in 1928 and in Chicago in 1932, and
arrange their intervening meetings with a view
to this program. The council of the American
Association, which is primarily composed of
representatives of the affiliated societies, will
in accordance with its present policy arrange
places of meeting that will be convenient for
all societies for the intervening even years,
namely, 1926, 1930, ete. For the intervening
odd years the association will arrange a pro-
gram for places of meeting to which the affili-
ated societies will be welcome, but which will,
as a rule, be in cities that are smaller and more
distant from the center of scientific population.
The meeting at the end of 1923 will be in
Cincinnati.

In \pursuance of these considerations the
committee recommends the following resolu-
tions for passage by the council:

Resolved, That the greater convocation-week
meetings of the American Association. for the
Advancement of Science and the affiliated na-
tional scientific societies be continued as for the
past twenty years at four year periods in succes-
sion in Washington, New York and Chicago, and
that all national scientific societies be invited and
urged to join in these meetings.

620

Resolved, That a corresponding twelve-year
eyele of meetings for the intervening two-year
periods be arranged for large cities in succession
in the New England, the Central and the Atlantic
States, in which it is desirable that the national
scientific societies join.

Resolved, That a provisional schedule of meet-
ings in other cities for the odd years be arranged
jn advance for the convenience of the scientific
societies that may find it desirable to meet with
the association.

Resolwed, That arrangements be made for a
summer meeting in 1923.

Resolved, That scientific councils, boards and
committees can to advantage hold their meetings
in Washington during the fourth week of April,
in New York at the end of Thanksgiving week,
in Chieago on or about February 1, and in Wood’s
Hole in August.

Resolved, That Convocation-Week be the week
in which New Year’s day falls when this is
Thursday, Friday or Saturday; that when New
Year’s day falls on Sunday, it be the preceding
week, that when it falls on Monday, Tuesday or
Wednesday, it begin two days after Christmas
and continue into New Year’s week.

J. McKeen CatTeLL
Chairman

FUNCTIONS OF THE DIVISION OF
GEOLOGY AND GEOGRAPHY OF
THE NATIONAL RESEARCH
COUNCIL!

Tue purpose of this paper is ‘to ask the
geologists of the country what ought to be done
with the National Research Council. I do not
mean to imply that there is any trouble, or any
disappointment, or that the right thing is not
being done now. But the council is young,
very young, and also very plastic, as it should
be. It has the possibilities, and the dangers,
of an infant.

It may be well ito state first certain dangers
that do The organization is not
likely to die, in the sense of ceasing to exist.
If it does there will be left a million dollar
building bearing the words National Research

not exist.

1 Published in advance to be discussed at a
round table of the Geological Society of America
at Ann Arbor, December 28. Discussion to be led
by David White.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

Council carved in marble along with the words
National Academy of Sciences. In ‘the second
place there is no immediate danger of its not
having an organization and officers. The
income from a few million dollars of per-
manent endowment is enough to settle the ques-
tion of continued éxistence in some form. So,
for better or for worse, the National Research.
Council is here, probably to stay. But what
the council will be like in ten years or fifty
years from now is what no man knows.

When all foreseeable possibilities have been:
assembled, they gravitate into two main groups.
The council may become, on the one hand, a
dispenser of “grants” or, on the other, an
agency for promoting research in other ways,.
mainly by stimulating, organizing or feder-
ating the research activity which arises with-
out grants. In either case money is paid out
and research comes in, more directly in the
former case, indirectly in the latter. One of
the questions for the future will be whether
research comes higher by direct purchase or by
the more roundabout method.

The above statements apply to the council
ias a whole, but our own interest is in a single
division, Geology and Geography, which is one
of seven covering Science and Technology. It
does not follow that ithe seven will, or ought
to, develop alike. Exactly opposite divisional
tendencies are among the possibilities and may
even prove desirable.

Before setting forth more fully the option
which lies before geologists, it will be well to
describe more exactly several of the possible
functions of a national council of scientific
men. On the approach of war in 1916-17 it
suddenly became necessary to find out what
was known and who knew it; also what had
to be done and who could do it. It was mainly
for such purposes that the National Research
Council was organized under the Council of
National Defense. The details of this war
organization were not suited to itimes of peace,
but the central idea held over, namely, that it
paid to get scientifie men together in groups to
take stock of what had been done and what is
being done and to advise together concerning
the things that remain to be done, especially
those which ought to be done soon.

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

No other purpose can be so basic as this one
of taking stock and surveying ithe field. It is
the most essential business of men acting to-
gether. As a corporate function it can stand
on its own merits with or without other fune-
tions. This step is worth while whether an-
other is taken or not. This is the answer to the
question—What can we do it we do nothing
else? What is worth while 1f we can do only
one thing? It is not yet certain to what extent
this function will be realized by the council. If
it is mot satisfactorily performed, then some
future president of the United States may have
ito send out another call as Lincoln did in 1864
and as Wilson did in 1916, asking scientific
men to get together and tell us where we are
at in science. The function thus described may
hereafter be referred to as that of General
Survey. Its inevitable complement is the giv-
ing out of mformation. This double function
is the basic duty of the Research Information
Service. The figurative term “Clearing House”
is often used and is not imappropriate.

A second function is that of coordinating
researches and of inspiring and organizing new
ones. It is inevitable that any body of men
performing the first function described above
will be consulted by others who have problems
on hand. About the first question a man asks
when face to face with a new problem is:
What has been done on this question by others?
Who else is working on it now? If I am will-
ing to do my share of ‘a task too big for one
man, how can I get the other phases taken
eare of? So the organizing and coordinating
of work follows so naturally on the clearing
house function that it would be difficult to
keep out of it.

A third line of activity is found in financing
projects. Not all valuable projects require
financing. Much valuable energy needs only
organizing and coordinating. The council may
be a vital agency with or without the financial
function. In the original plan the financial
function was nowhere distinctly specified; cer-
tainly not regarded as essential.

It will be well to explain here in just what
sense the council or any one of its divisions
may be said to be paying out money for re-

SCIENCE

621

search. (1) The chairmen of the divisions of
Science and Technology and other necessary
officers are salaried. (2) Within certain limits,
traveling expenses are paid. This applies to.
officers on duty and ito members of divisions
and committees in attending certain meetings
of thei respective bodies; also in some cases
to other men invited to participate in confer-
ences on problems and projects. (3) A staff.
of technical helpers is maintained for the clear-
ing house work of the Research Information.
Service. (4) When all the expenses of run-.
ning the organization (not here enumerated),
have been paid, there remains a moderate sum.
to be allotted in small amounts to committees
for the actual expenses of research. For the
most part such sums are given merely to clear
the way for starting projects which are ex-
pected to be otherwise supported. The expres-
sion “priming the pump” has been used, and
deseribes the intention fairly well.

The great bulk of the money thus far ex-
pended under the auspices of the council has.
been obtained by solicitation by and for the
individual division or committee having change
of a project. Generally the donor gives it for
a specific purpose. Thus the responsibility
for finding the money has been largely on the-
men whose project was to be supported. It is.
necessary to make this point clear, lest ithe im-
pression should prevail that some men are
beneficiaries of the Research Council in a sense:
that other men are not. There is no scramble
to “get in on the deal,” for when the pushers
of a certain project have gotten in, they are
still in large measure responsible for its sup-
port. I say “in large measure”; it is of course
true that they enjoy the advantage of having
their project stamped with the approval of
twenty or more representatives of their own
science, picked from tthe nation, and with the
further approval of a body representing all
sciences, whose business it is to distinguish the
most worth while from the merely desirable.
In addition jto this advantage, there is some-
times some actual aid in solicitation by the
general officers of the council and a special
committee on Funds and Projects.

These are the only ways in which money is

622

dispensed for research. It should be plain
from this that the democratic or representa-
tive character of the council, designed, as it
was, to express ‘the combined judgment of
scientific workers, is not in any way impaired
by the function of making “grants” or select-
ing a list of “beneficiaries.”

If the council is ever to become a dispenser
of funds, the change would no doubt come
about through such a growth of confidence in
its work that much larger donations would be
made with less and less question as to their
use. It is not impossible ‘that this will occur,
but the indications that point that way do not
affect our division and need not be mentioned
here.

As tthe great question before the geologists
of our country is the use which they can make
of their own division, and as the possibility of
raising money is often a part of that question,
it will be wise to examine briefly the sources
of ‘the support thus far obtained for other pur-
poses. The several scientific divisions differ
enormously in the financial support which they
have been able to command. Should this dif-
ference be regarded as a measure of efficiency
or merely as an indication of difference in
method? Ought Geology and Geography with
equal leadership and diligence to have cap-
tured their “share” of the more than half a
million dollars donated for Physies and Chem-
istry, or of the like amount given to Medi-
cine? These questions may not be answered
positively, but it will help some if we inquire
what relation the donors have borne to the ob-
jects of their donations. In other words—
What has been the nature of the “appeal” in
each case? When we have finished this anal-
ysis we may ask whether Geology should be
going to its friends with similar appeals.

The largest donations have come from cor-
porations holding large trust funds whose
income must be distributed. Each one of these
corporations specializes more or less in certain
fields of science and generally elects to make
its donations in fields related to its central
interest. Thus tthe Rockefeller Foundation is
known ito be interested in Medicine and its con-

tributory sciences. In addition to the five mil-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

lion dollars given by the Carnegie Corporation
for endowment and building, well over a mil-
lion dollars have been pledged for research by
various trusts of similar character.

Another lange class of donations, aggre-
gating ito date a few hundred thousand dollars,
have had for their object some improvement of
technique of manufacture or other ultimate ad-
vantage in production. The donors to such
projects generally represent commercial inter-
ests in the corresponding fields of industry.
The researches subsidized are of fundamental
character but their relation to industry or trade
is sufficiently patent to afford a strong appeal
to producers. Examples of this class are
found in the donations for the Critical Tables
of Physical and Chemical Constants and in the
support of the Crop Protection Fellowships.
A slightly different appeal, looking toward
preservation rather than production, is found
in the support of the Marine Piling Investiga-
tion.

A smaller amount must be credited to pure
philanthropy or public spirit. In these cases
the donor can hope for no return in the way
of personal profit, as when a great retail mer-
chant gives the money for a biological fellow-
ship. While less than one hundred ‘thousand
dollars given directly to scientific work comes
under this classification, it is fair to mention
the one hundred and eighty-five thousand dol-
lars contributed by twenty friends to purchase
the site for the building. ‘

Lastly, a few thousand dollars have been
contributed by states toward cooperative re-
searches, such as reforestation and highway
problems. The appeal here is for state aid in
what is properly a state function.

With this classification of donors and ap-
peals before us, geologists should ‘be able to
run down the list and form some idea whether
their science is in position ‘to make effective
appeals for money. The list of great trusts is
not long and the general field that each one
favors is known. Geology is by no means ex-
eluded from ‘their interests (recall, e.g., the
Carnegie Corporation and the Shaler Memorial
Fund) but in no ease is it likely that the
National Research Council would be asked to

DrEcEMBER 1, 1922]

handle their donations. If the measure of use-
fulness of a division is found in the funds it
handles, this would be discouraging. If, on
the other hand, the division is primarily inter-
ested in seeing the science advance, the situa-
tion may be quite ideal. Illustrations might
be given of projects first fostered by the Divi-
sion of Geology and Geography and then
“turned over” to other agencies.

Is there anything in the field of Geology
analogous ‘to the interests which manufac-
turers have in the improvement of production
through study of fundamental principles?
Could mining men be asked to get together and
finance a study of structural geology or geo-
chemistry? To put down the answers which
these questions suggest would take more space
than is permitted. The most obvious answers
would not encourage such hopes for the im-
mediate future.

Can we appeal to men on the basis of pure
public spirit or scientific interest? Certainly
Geography does this, if exploration may be
called geographic investigation. It is quite
true that money thus donated might not gen-
erally pass through the hands of the National
Research Council, but that is a mere detail so
long as the Council inspires the undertaking.

Almost the same may be said of state and
federal funds. Little if any of this will ap-
pear on the accounts of our division, but it
would be surprising and ought to be disap-
pointing if we do not influence the work of
official surveys even to the extent of inducing
them in some cases to take up definite projects.

The general impression from such a casual
analysis might be that our division can not
well expect to be asked to administer large
donations for geologic research. More largely
than any other science, Geology is regarded as
a governmental function and no one likes to
subseribe to a governmental deficit. An ob-
server from the outside might say that Geology
is already pretty well supported. Of course
geologists know it is mot. But ours is not the
only family whose poverty is known better
inside than outside.

As for Geology in private employ, largely
in mining and drilling, there remains a pecu-
liar assumption of private interest and the

SCIENCE

623

value of secrecy. The pooling of interests to
support researches in basic problems has not
gone so far among mining men as among steel
manufacturers, as the Research Council and
the Engineering Foundation have good reason
to know.

On the other hand the United States Geo-
logical Survey and some state surveys, despite
all we say when our humor is bad, do provide
deliberately for some research in pure science,
and the by-product of pure science from both
public and private work is large. The nature
and amount of such by-products is determined
largely by individual interests, as at should be.
But it would be all folly to deny that there is
much fine enthusiasm resulting in scattered
and sometimes fruitless effort; mere lost mo-
tion. There are strategic points and timely
moves in science as in war. The kind of
guidance that comes from cooperation and the
fullest possible knowledge of what others are
doing ought to be profitable. Can the Re-
search Council supply these elements?

The situation here referred to is exemplified
in the work of our committee on Sedimenta-
tion. A few years ago it was tacitly assumed
that the manner of origin of sedimentary rocks
was completely stated in our elementary texts.
Then individual workers began to raise ques-
tions. Interest appeared at many points and
contributions began. When ‘the Research
Council was reorganized on a peace basis one
of the first demands made on this division was
that it organize the study of ‘Sedimentation.
The result has been a tripling of the work and,
better still, a conscious planning ito send work-
ers into ithe darkest parts of the field. Other
sciences have been drawn on for assistance. Men
have been newly inspired by finding that their
own little studies were highly useful in a big
problem. The work may go on a few years
more. ‘There is little doubt that, fifty years
hence, men will point back to ‘the decade em-
bracing these researches as a time in which the
study of sedimentary rocks was raised to a
new scientific level.

Now a point to be emphasized is that the
Research Council is paying out no money for
this research except for occasional conferences.
The work is being done by skilfully appropri-

‘624

ating the opportunities offered by surveys and
universities. It can scarcely be said that men
have left other studies for this work. In most
eases they have merely been asked to direct
their efforts toward a certain point, or to have
in mind their bearings on another principle.

Having set forth something of various ways
in which the Research Council works, it should
‘scarcely be necessary to guard scientific men
against certain misconceptions. There have
deen such and they have done some harm.

The first of these possible misconceptions is
that the council was designed to superintend
research workers and see that they did the
right thing; perhaps to assign problems to this
and that man and to tell others what fields to
keep out of. Such a situation is purely imag-
inary. No doubt some newspaper writers, not
kmowing the ways of science, did give utiter-
ance to such dreams, but ithey should not have
deceived scientific men.

Another assumption, less absurd but just as
wrong, is that the council is an “institution”
@arrying on researches on its own account. It
has no laboratories, not even a library, except
a few reference books. It hires no investiga-
tors. It is merely a mode of cooperation.
There is something almost fallacious about
speaking of the Council as “it”; there is no it;
nothing but we. The council does nothing ex-
cept what men in groups have always been
trying to accomplish. The only valid claim is
that men’s combined efforts are being spent ‘to
better advantage. Geologists always have con-
ferred, analyzed their problems, cooperated
and looked around for help. The only ques-
tion ‘before us is whether such activities can be
facilitated by a bit of machinery for confer-
ence, correspondence, record keeping and ad-
ministration.

To guard against misunderstanding it should
be stated explicitly that it is highly desirable
that the Division of Geology and Geography
should have funds for its own projects. But
the poimt which needs emphasis just now is
that the thing which is to justify the existence
of the Research Council is something quite
different. When the geologists of our country
have definitely adopted the National Research

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

Council as a mode of operation they should by
all means undertake to enlarge its usefulness
by financial aid.

Nevin M. FennNemMAn

NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL,
Wasuineton, D. C.

NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL'S
MEDICAL FELLOWSHIPS

Har.y this year the Rockefeller Foundation
and the General Education Board jointly
pledged to the National Research Council for
the administration, through its Division of
Medical Sciences, of medical fellowships the
total sum of $500,000, payable annually
through a period of five years in sums not to
exceed $100,000 a year.

A special board for administering these fel-
lowships was selected with the approval of the
National Research Council and the two foun-
The board is composed of tthe follow-
ing members with 'the chairman of the Division
of Medical Seiences of the Natiional Research
Couneil (at present Dr. F. P. Gay, professor
of bacteriology, University of California) as
chairman, ex officio; David L. Edsall, pro-
fessor of medicine and dean of the Medical
School, Harvard University; Joseph Erlanger,
professor of physiology, School of Medicine,
Washington University, St. Louis; G. Carl
Huber, professor of anatomy and director of
the anatomic laboratories, University of Michi-
gan; E. O. Jordan, professor of bacteriology,
University of Chicago; W. G. MacCallum, pro-
fessor of pathology and bacteriology, Johns
Hopkins University; Dean D. Lewis, professor
of surgery, Rush Medical School, Chicago; La-
fayette B. Mendel, professor of physiological
chemistry, Yale University; W. W. Palmer,
professor of medicine, Columbia University.

This board met for the first time on April
18, 1922, and in this and subsequent meetings
outlined certain regulations that should govern
their decisions in connection with the appoint-
ment of fellows and the method and place of
their work. Since that time two additional
meetings of the board have been held for the
purpose of appointing fellows from the list of

dations.

DECEMEER 1, 1922]

applications that have been received. The most
essential points decided upon by the board are
the following:

(1) The fellowships are designed primarily for
research as fundamental to a teaching career in
one of the medical sciences. For this latter
reason it is prescribed that the fellow must work
where facilities for, but not obligations in, teach-
ing are afforded.

(2) The fellowships are for full time and basal
salaries of $1,800 for unmarried men and $2,300
for married men have been determined. Salaries
in either of these grades may be larger than the
minimum, depending upon the number of de-
pendents and the locality chosen by the candidate
for work.

(3) The place of work and the subject chosen
for investigation are determined by the candidate
with due consideration for the feasibility of the
plan proposed. It has been decided that the
work may be carried out either in this country
or abroad.

The first fellows have been appointed and
are now at work. In spite of the fact that the
funds for these fellowships generously donated
by the Rockefeller Foundation and General
Education Board were not available and that
announcements concerning the fellowships
could not be made until relatively late in the
year numerous applications have been received
and twenty-six candidates have already been
accepted.

The fellows so far appointed cover the whole
group of the specialities of medicine and are
divided as follows:

Pathology and bacteriology.................... 5
Mie dicin el) tee tes e hs ahr sas eo ese ws teecetee acts 5
SUT C Tey syed ere ET ee ee 6
IP NyS1OLO preys yee ees cae EY 4
Biochemistriyp tee tes eee eae isaeanes 2
FeNG EBON EN Ae 1
Medieal specialties 1
Pharmacology ......... aa
Physical chemistry 4 al

The work is now being carried out in various
medical centers as follows:
Harvard
Columbia...
Chicago ....
Hopkins
Cin ein mahi eee evs ta eee ee etre rae lee ca 2
Ohio

SCIENCE

625

California | ae ON eae eo sh 1
LO iets eT era) Zul
Northwestern . eal
Cornell 1
pYeuleyy ies ge 1
Leipzig 1
New York Post Graduate Hospital........ 1

F. P. Gay,

Chairman, Division of Medical Sciences,
National Research Council

LIST OF FELLOWS

The following is a complete list of fellows
so far appointed:

Albritton, Errett C., A.B. Missouri, M.D. Johns
Hopkins, Mayfield, Ky. Ohio State University;
endocrine physiology.

Andrus, William D., A.B., M.A. Oberlin, M.D.
Johns Hopkins, Oberlin, Ohio. University of
Cincinnati; surgery.

Anson, Barry J., A.B. Wisconsin (has equiva-
lent of Ph.D. degree), Muscatine, Iowa. Har-
vard Medical School; embryology and histology.

Bent, Michael J.. M.D. Meharry, San Andres,
Republic of Colombia. College of Physicians and
Surgeons, New York City; bacteriology and
hygiene.

Cone, William V., B.Se., M.D. Iowa, Iowa City,
Iowa. Jowa State University; neuropathology.

Connor, Charles L., M.D. Baylor College of
Medicine, Forsyth, Montana. Harvard Medical
School; the etiology of Rocky Mountain fever.

Curtis, George M., A.B., M.A., Ph.D. Michigan,
M.D. Rush Medical School, Ann Arbor, Michigan.
The University of Chicago; surgery of the hypo-
physis.

Davis, Loyal E., M.S., M.D. Northwestern, Chi-
cago, Ill. Northwestern University; neuorolgical
surgery.

Derick, Clifford L., A.B. Lachute Academy,
M.D. McGill, Noyan, Quebec, Canada. Harvard
Medical School; medicine.

Ferry, Ronald M., A.B. Harvard, M.D. College
of Physicians and Surgeons, Columbia, Concord,
Mass. Harvard Medical School; biochemistry.

Josephs, Hugh W., A.B. Harvard, M.D. Johns
Hopkins, Baltimore, Md. The University of Chi-
cago; physical chemistry.

Leiter, Louis, B.S., M.S. Chicago, M.D. Rush
Medical School, Los Angeles, Oalifornia. The
University of Chicago; pathology.

Lennox, William G., A.B. Colorado College,
M.D. Harvard, M.A. Denver, Colorado Springs,
Colorado. Harvard Medical School; medicine,
especially epilepsy.

626

MacCready, Paul B., B.S. Princeton, M.D.
Johns Hopkins, New York. Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity; laryngology.

Melver, Monroe A., A.B. North Carolina, M.D.
Harvard Medical School, Gulf, N. C. Harvard
Medical School; pathology.

McLean, Jay, B.S. California, A.M., M.D., M.S.
Pennsylvania, Baltimore, Md. The University of
Leipzig; surgery.

Mills, Clarence A., A.B. South Dakota, Ph.D.
Cincinnati, Cincinnati, Ohio. The University of
Cincinnati Medical School; experimental medicine.

Rapport, David, A.B., M.D. Harvard, Cornell
Medical College, New York, physiology.

Reznikoff, Paul, B.Se. New York University,
M.D. Cornell Medical College, Brooklyn, N. Y.
Harvard Medical School; experimental medicine.

Robinson, Elliott 8., A.B., M.D. Yale, New
Haven, Conn. Yale School of Medicine; bacteri-
ology and immunology.

Rosenthal, Sanford M., M.D. Vanderbilt Med-
ical School, Nashville, Tenn. Johns Hopkins
Medical School; clinical medicine.

Schmitz, Herbert W., B.S. Wisconsin, M.D.
Harvard, Manitowoc, Wis. New York Post
Graduate Hospital; biochemistry.

Shibley, Gerald §S., A.B., M.D. Columbia,
Maplewood, N. J. Columbia University; medi-
cine, especially infectious diseases.

Smith, Beverly C., A.B., M.D. Virginia, Frank-
lin, La. Columbia University; toxemia in intes-
tinal obstruction.

Stieglitz, Edward J., B.S. Chicago, M.D. Rush
Medical School, Chicago, Ill. Johns Hopkins
Hospital; a clinical study of nephritis.

Locke, Charles Edward, Jr., A.B., M.D. Cali-
fornia, Special Doeteur en Chururgie, Brussels,
University of California Hospital, San Fran-
cisco. University of California Hospital; neuro-
logical surgery.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

THE INTERNATIONAL COMMISSION OF
EUGENICS

As has been noted in Science, the Inter-
national Commission of Eugenics met at Brus-
sels on Saturday, October 7, and Monday,
October 9. According to the report in Lugeni-
cal News, there were present Major Leonard
Darwin, chairman; Dr. Almert Govaerts, sec-
retary; Dr. Van Herwerden of Utrecht, Hol-
land; Dr. Winner, Professor of psychiatry,
Copenhagen; Dr. Jon Alfred Mjoen of the

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

Winderen Laboratorium, near Christiania, M.
Lucien March of “Statistique générale de la
France,” and Dr. Pinard, President of the
Société Francaise d’Hugénique, Paris; and Dr.
C. B. Davenport, of Cold Spring Harbor.

It was voted unanimously to invite German
delegates to the commission. It was decided
provisionally to hold the next meeting of the
commission at Lund, Sweden, and the next
meetings of the Eugenics Congress in 1924 at
Prague. ‘These decisions are contingent upon
the possibility of making appropriate arrange-
ments for the meetings.

The occasion of the meeting of the Inier-
national Commission of Eugenics at Bruxelles
was taken advantage of for a meeting of the
Ligue nationale Belge contre le Péril vénérien
at the same place, and an extensive social pro-
gram was arranged.

On October 7, a lecture was given by Dr.
Apert, physician of the hospitals of Paris, en-
titled, “L’Hérédité Morbide.” On October 8,
in the morning a joint congress of the Ligue
contre le Péril vénérien and Fédérations of
Anti-Aleoholic Societies of Belgium was held
in collaboration with the Belgian Hugenics So-
ciety. In the afternoon there was an excur-
sion to Waterloo, where an address was given
by M. Gheude, député permanent, entitled,
“Les buts Eugéniques de Ja Ferme-Ecole.”
This was followed by visits to the battlefield
and to the Ferme-école Provinciale, the new
home for the feeble-minded which it is hoped
will be ready for occupancy in the spring. On
Monday, there was held the second meeting of
the commission, and, at 4 o’clock, a visit to
the Solvay Institute of Sociology where Major
Darwin gave an address entitled “L’Hugénique”
and Professor Wimmer of Copenhagen one on
“Mental Heredity.” At 5 o’clock, the Prison
de Forést and its laboratory of anthropology
were visited. On Tuesday, addresses were
given by Dr. Daisy M. Robinson, by M. Lucien
March, of Paris, and Dr. Berthollet, of Lau-
sanne, on matters partly of anti-veneral and
partly of eugenical interest. At half past two
in the afternoon, a meeting was held in the
large hall of the Solvay Institute of Sociology,
at which was inaugurated the eugenics room

DEcEMBER 1, 1922]

of the institute. Two lectures were given on
the practical organizations of eugenics, “in the
United States” by Dr. Davenport; “in Bel-
gium” by Dr. Govaerts. On Wednesday a
visit was made by the Congress to the city of
Antwerp.

THE FEDERATION OF AMERICAN SO-
CIETIES FOR EXPERIMENTAL
BIOLOGY

Tur 1922 annual meeting of the federation
will be held on Wednesday, Thursday and
Friday, December 27, 28 and 29, at Toronto,
Canada, under the auspices of the University
of Toronto. The program will be sent out
about December 14. An effort to secure special
railroad rates is being made. In case these are
secured members will be notified. The hotel
headquarters are the King Edward. About 100
men can be accommodated, in either single
rooms or in suites each with two bedrooms,
in ithe men’s residences of the university.
About 12 women can be accommodated in one
of the women’s residences. Breakfast for
those living in the residences can be obtained
at Hart House. ‘The charge for these rooms
will be $3.00 for 3 nights, or $2.00 for 2 or 1
night. Luncheons will be provided on the 27,
28, and 29. Dinners will be followed by a
smoker on the evenings of the 27 and 28. All
these will be given in Hart House, the stu-
dent’s club, near the residences and the medi-
cal building.

The Local Committee is anxious to arrange
a large series of demonstrations. As the de-
partments of physiology, biochemistry and
pharmacology are all in the one building, fa-
cilities of all kinds can readily be arranged.
All communications in regard ito the same
should be addressed to Professor J. M. Olmsted,
Medical Building, University of Toronto.

The general meetings will be held in the
Physies Building of the university. Meetings
of the Constituent Societies will be held in the
Medical and Anatomy Buildings of the univer-
sity, which intercommunicate. The lecture
rooms are not distant from each other and it is
hoped to have a notice board system, so that
the papers to be read in each section will be

SCIENCE

627

posted in each other section. Professor An-
drew Hunter is chairman and Professor V. H.
Henderson is secretary of the local committee.

THE AMERICAN PHYSICAL SOCIETY

Tue 24th annual meeting (the 118th regu-
lar meeting) of the American Physical So-
ciety will be held in Boston on December 26-
30, 1922, in affiliation with Section B—Physies
—of the Ameriean Association for the Advance-
ment of Science. The meetings will be held
at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology.

At the session in charge of Section B, Pro-
fessor G. W. Stewart, the retiring vilce-presi-
dent and chairman of Section B, will give the
annual address. This will be followed by a
symposium on “Jonization Potentials and
Atomic Radiation,” and the invited speakers
are to be Dr. Paul D. Foote, of the Bureau of
Standards, and Professors K. T. Compton and
Henry Norris Russell, of Princeton.

Members wishing to present papers at the
Boston meeting are requested to send abstracts
ready for publication to tthe secretary before
December 9. The secretary expects to send
the program to all members before the meet-
ing, but the delays in the mails are so great
at present that members should not depend
upon the program to determine their attend-
ance.

Other meetings for the current season are as
follows:

119. February 27, 1923. New York.

120. April 21, 1923. Washington.

121. Time not determined. Pacifie Coast

Section.
Dayton C. MILLER

Secretary
Case ScHoot or APPLIED SCIENCE,
CLEVELAND, OHIO

THE MATHEMATICAL ASSOCIATION OF
; AMERICA

THE seventh annual meeting of the Mathe-
matical Association of America will be held at
Room 11, Sever Hall, Harvard University,
December 28-29, 1922, in conjunction with the
American Mathematical Soaety and Section A
of the Ameri¢an Association. At a joint ses-
sion of these three bodies the following papers
will be read:

628

Reduction of singularities of plane curves by
birational transformation: Proressor G. A.
Buiss, University of Chicago, retiring president
of the society.

The grafting of the theory of limits on the
calculus of Leibniz: Pxorrssor FiLor1an Cagort,
University of California, representing the asso-
ciation.

Geometry and physics: Prorrssor OSWALD
VEBLEN, Princeton University, retiring vice-
president of Section A of the American Associa-
tion.

At the Friday morning session the follow-
ing papers will be given:

Period of the bifilar pendulum for finite ampli-
tudes: Prorrssor H. 8S. Unuer, Yale University.

Skew squares: Proressor W. H. Ecuous, Uni-
versity of Virginia.

On the averaging of grades: Prorrssor C. F.
GUMMER, Queen’s University. ;

Mathematics at Oxford and the Ph.D. degree:
Proressor W. R. BuRWELL, Brown University.

Some unsolved problems in the theory of
sampling: PRoressor B. H. Camp, Wesleyan Uni-
versity.

Some unsolved problems in solid geometry:
Prorrssor J. L. Cootwwer, Harvard University.

It is of special note that the session on
Friday afternoon will be devoted to a “Sympo-
sium on Mathematical Statistics,” for the pur-
pose of strengthening the existing entente cor-
diale between mathematicians on the one hand
and practicing statisticians on the other. It is
hoped that this symposium will be of real
service, not only to ‘those who are giving courses
in statistics in departments of mathematics,
but also to others who may be interested in the
application of mathematics to statistical prob-
lems. The following papers will be read:

The subject matter of a course in mathematical
statistics: PRroressor H. L. Rimrz, head of the
department of mathematics at the State Univer-
sity of Iowa, and chairman of the National Re-
search Council’s Committee on the Mathematical
Analysis of Statistics.

Time series of economic statistics: their fluc-
tuation and correlation: Warren M. Prrsons,
professor of economics at Harvard University,
and editor of the Review of Economic Statistics,
published by the Harvard Committee on Eeo-
niomic Research.

The fundamental concepts of the calculus of
mass variation: ARNE Fisuer, statistician of the
American Telephone and Telegraph Company, and

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

author of ‘‘The mathematical theory of proba-
bilities and its application to frequency curves
and statistical methods.’’ The discussion will be
opened by RayMoNnD PEARL, professor of biome-
try and vital statistics in the School of Hygiene
and Publie Health, Johns Hopkins University,
and statistician of ithe Johns Hopkins Hospital.

CHEMISTRY AT THE BOSTON MEETING OF
THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION

Tue Boston meeting of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science will
undoubtedly be the most important to chemists
of any of its meetings held for years. Papers
on research work completed or in progress are
now invited from the chemists of the country.
In addition to such papers as may be sub-
mitted there will be a symposium on “The
Progress of Chemistry,’ and a second sym-
posium on “Photochemistry and Plant Physi-
ology,” in which the leading chemists of the
country will discuss these subjects. In ad-
dition the American Physical Society will con-
‘tinue the series of symposia begun last year
jomtly with the Mathematica and Chemical
Societies. The subject will be “Ionization
Potentials and Atomic Radiation,’ and the
speakers will be Paul D. Foote, K. T. Comp-
ton and Henry Norris Russell.

The following list gives the papers already
arranged for in connection with the symposium
on the progress of chemistry: “Compres-
sibilities and the size of atoms,” by Theodore
W. Richards, of Harvard University; “Pro-
teins and the theory of colloidal behavior,”
Jacques Loeb, of the Rockefeller Institute;
“X-rays as related to ithe structure of atoms
and of crystals,” Wiliam Duane and also
George L. Clark, both of Harvard University;
“Changes in volume during the solution of
solids,” Gregory P. Baxter, of Harvard Uni-
versity; “The chemistry of the photographic
process,” C. EH. K. Mees, of the Hastman Kodak
Company; “The present status of the theory
of complete ionization,” D. A. MacInnes, of
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology;
“The present status of the theory of incomplete
lonizaion,” James Kendall, of Columbia Uni-
versity; “Ionization potentials and chemical
action,” W. A. Noyes, Jr., and “The separation

DrceMBER 1, 1922]

of isotopes,’ by R. S. Mulliken, both of the
University of Chicago. In addition a number
of other topics, not yet fully decided upon,
will ‘be discussed by noted chemists.

At the symposium on photochemistry and
plant physiology to be held Thursday, Decem-
ber 28, at 2 p.m., H. A. Spoehr, of the Desert
Laboratory, will discuss “Photosynthesis,” S.
E. Sheppard will speak on “Photochemical re-
actions,” and a third speaker will present the
subject “Carbohydrate metabolism.”

The address of the retiring vice-president
and chairman of Section C will be upon the
subject “The muclei of atoms and the general
system of isotopes.”

It is expected that one or two of the ses-
sions will be provided with a program by
nearby sections of the American Chemical So-
ciety as follows: the Nontheastern, the New
York, the Eastern New York, the Cornell, the
New Haven, the Philadelphia, the Washington,
and the Delaware sections.

Speakers have been invited to present papers
on atomic structure, the electron theory of
valence, the nature of metals, the work of
various great laboratories, and various other
topics of interest to professional chemists. It
should be noted that no specific invitations
have been sent out for papers on the research
work of individuals, but it is hoped that the
chemists of the United States and Canada will
respond in considerable numbers to the general
invitation given in the present notice. The
titles of such papers should be sent as soon
as possible either to the retirmg chairman,
Professor W. D. Harkins, of the University of
Chicago, to the secretary of the Northeastern
Section of the American Chemical Society,
Professor HE. B. Millard, of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass., or
to the vice-president and chairman, Professor
W. Lash Miller, of the University of Toronto.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Av the anniversary meeting of the Royal
Society on November 30, its awards are to be
conferred as follows: Royal medal to Profes-
sor C. T. R. Wilson, for his researches on con-

SCIENCE 629

densation nuclei and atmospheric electricity,
and to Professor J. Barecroft, for his researches
in physiology, especially in respiration; the
Copley medal to Sir Ernest Rutherford, for
his researches in radioactivity and atomic
structure; the Rumford medal to Professor
Pieter Zeeman, for his researches in optics;
the Davy medal to Professor J. F. Thorpe,
for his researches in synthetic organic chem-
istry; the Darwin medal to Professor R. C.
Punnett, for his researches in the science of
genetics; the Buchanan medal to Sir David
Bruce, for his researches and discoveries in
tropical medicine; the Sylvester medal to Pro-
fessor T. Levi-Civita, for his researches in
geometry and mechanies; and the Hughes medal
to Dr. F. W. Aston, for his discovery of iso-
topes by the method of positive rays.

Av the formal opening of the University
of Paris, honorary degrees of doctor of laws
were received by Ambassador Herrick on be-
half of Elihu Root, Esq., Dr. A. Lawrence
Lowell, president of Harvard University, and
Professor Albert A. Michelson, of the Univer-
sity of Chicago.

Dr. M. C. Wurraxer, chemical engineer of
New York City, has been awarded the Per-
kin medal “for the most important contribu-
tion to applied chemistry made by any citizen
of the United States,” by the Society of Chem-
ical Industry. The presentation will be made
by Dr. Charles F. Chandler.

Ar the meeting of the Ophthalmic Section
of the American Medical Association, Dr.
Frederick H. Verhoeff, of Boston, was awarded
the Knapp Medal for his paper on “Ghoinas
of the Optic Nerve.” Dr. Verhoeff is president
of the New England Ophthalmological Society.

Tue British Institution of Mining Engineers
has awarded its medal to Sir George Beilby,
“in recognition of his valuable contributions to
science, with special reference to his researches
on fuel.”

Mr. R. T. A. Innes, the union astronomer
at Johannesburg, has received the degree of
doctor of science from the University of Ley-
den.

630

Dr. ApvotpH Lorwy, professor of physi-
ology at the University of Berlin, has been ap-
pointed director of an institute at Davos,
Switzerland, for research on the physiologic
effects of residence in high altitudes as per-
taining to the treatment of tuberculosis.

Tur November number of the Journal of
Geology at the University of Chicago will bear
the mames of father and son as editor and
managing editor, the former being Thomas C.
Chamberlin, professor emeritus of geology,
and the latter Rollin T. Chamberlin, associate
professor of geology. From the founding of
the journal twenty-nine years ago T. C. Cham-
berlin and the late R. D. Salisbury were the
editors. The other editors are Stuart Weller,
invertebrate paleontology; Edson 8. Bastin,
economic geology; Albert Johannsen, petro-
logy; and J. Harlen Bretz, stratigraphic geol-
ogy. Associate editors include representatives
of Great Britain, France, Germany, Norway,
Sweden, Australia, and Canada.

Dr. Witrrep H. Oscoon, curator of zoology
of the Field Museum of Natural History, and
party, including Mr. H. B. Conover and Mr.
C. C. Sanborn, of the Field Museum, sailed on
November 16 for Valparaiso, Chile. They
will proceed to the forested region of southern
Chile about Corcovado Gulf and, after making
general collections there, will work northward.
Dr. Osgood and Mr. Conover will return via
Argentine, Uruguay and southern Brazil about
the middle of 1923.and Mr. Sanborn will re-
main in the field until 1924.

WE learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association ‘that the U. S. Public
Health Service has begun a study of the meth-
ods used in the United States in the manu-
facture of biologic products. Passed Assistant
Surgeon W. T. Harrison has started a tour
of the country to investigate this subject, go-
ing to Toronto, Canada; Boston; New York,
Otisville and Pearl River, N. Y.; New Bruns-
wick, N. J.; Philadelphia, Swiftwater, Glen-
olden, Ambler and Mariette, Pa.; Asheville,
N. C.; Buffalo, and Baltimore.

Dr. Samurt J. Morris, professor of anatomy

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

at the West Virginia University School of
Medicine, has obtained a year’s leave of ab-
sence to study anatomy at the Harvard Medical
School.

Dr. ALES HrpuiéKa has returned from an ex-
tended trip to Western and Central. Europe
made for the purpose of visiting the more im-
portant recently discovered sites of early man,
and of examining the skeletal remains. As the
result of a special invitation by the minister
of education of the Czechoslovak Republic, he
delivered also a series of lectures on “Anthro-
pology’ and man’s evolution” at the Univer-
sities of Prague, Brno (Brin) and Bratislava
(Pressburg), and at the People’s University
of Plzei (Pilsen).

Prorsssor F. Krauss, of the University of
Berlin, is now in Mexico City giving a course
of lectures on nerve surgery.

Proressor D. Pauur, of the University of
Frankfort, Germany, arrived in Chicago on
November 18. Under the auspices of the
American Society for the Control of Cancer,
he will give a series of demonstrations of the
deep-therapy roentgen-ray machine at the Nor-
wegian-American Hospital.

ProressoR GEORGE C. WHIPPLE, of the de-
partment of sanitary engineering of Harvard
University, will give a series of lectures on
“The philosophy of sanitation” at the Wagner
Free Institute of Science in Philadelphia on
Saturday evenings in January.

The educational committee of the Bureau
of Standards has arranged with Professor A.
Sommerfeld for a ‘course of lectures on “Quan-
tum Theory” and related subjects. These lec-
tures will be given at ‘the Bureau of Standards,
Washington, D. C., early in March, 1923.

Proressor A. J. Caruson, as the guest of
the University of Nebraska Medical College
on November 17, delivered two addresses, one
before the student body and the other before
the faculty.

Tue Harben lectures before the Royal In-
stitute of Public Health will be delivered by
Professor Theodore Madsen, M. D., director of

DrcEMBER 1, 1922]

the State Serum Institute, Copenhagen, on
December 1, 4. and 5. The subjects of the lec-
tures are: “Specific and unspecific antitoxin
production,” “Antitoxic treatment,” and “The
influence of temperature on antigren and anti-
bodies.”

Lorp Batrour has arranged to deliver his
second course of Gifford lectures on natural
theology at Glasgow University. The first will
be given on Friday, November 24, the series
being continued on November 28 and December
1, 5, 8, 12, and 15 and 19, and January 16 and
19. The lectures, which are open to the pub-
lic, were begun during the session before the
war.

Amv Lake Forest College there has recently
been reorganized a Science Club, which has
been dormant since the departure of Dr. James
G. Needham in 1901. The departments of
chemistry, biology and psychology are sponsors
for the club and supervise the bi-weekly pro-
grams, the punpose of which is to stimulate in-
terest in the general problems of the three
fields. All persons in the vicinity interested
in science are invited to attend. The follow-
ing are the topies and leaders for the first
three meetings: “Hypnotism,” by Dr. W. R.
Wells; “The tropism ‘theory as a basis for the
interpretation of human behavior,” by Dr. W.
H. Cole, and “The constitution of matter,” by
Dr. F. B. Coffin.

Tue three concluding addresses in the series
of illustrated evening lectures given this
autumn by the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington, are as follows: November 28, “The con-
stitution of the hereditary material and its
relation to development,’ Dr. T. H. Morgan,
research associate in biology of the Carni, and
professor of experimental zoology at Columbia
University; December 5, “The properties of
matter as illustrated in the stars,’ Dr. Henry
Norris Russell, research associate of the Mount
Wilson Observatory and director of the Prince-
ton University Observatory; December 12,
“The motions of the stars,’ Dr. Walter S.
Adams, acting director of the Mount Wilson
Observatory. p

SCIENCE

631

An Exhibition of Scientific Apparatus and
Products will ‘be an important feature of the
approaching Boston meeting of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science,
to be held in the building of the Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, in Cambridge, Decem-
ber 26 to 30, 1922. Those desiring to take part
by exhibiting apparatus, materials, ete. should
communicate at once with Professor R. P.
Bigelow, Massachusetts Institute of Technol-
ogy, Cambridge, Massachusetts. Professor
Bigelow is chairman of the subcommittee on
exhibits for the Fourth Boston Meeting.

APPLICATION has been made for reduced rail-
road fares, on the certificate plan, for persons
attending the annual meetings of the Geological
Society of America, the Paleontological So-
ciety, the Mineralogical Society of America,
the Society of Economie Geologists, the Asso-
ciation of American Geographers and the
American Association of State Geologists, in
Ann Arbor, Michigan, December 26-31, 1922.
When purchasing tickets-at the regular one-
way fare, certificates of the standard form
should 'be obtained from the railroad ticket
agent. The granting of return tickets at one
half the regular fare is conditional upon there
being 250 persons in attendance upon the
meetings who hold certificates showing that
they have paid 67 cents or more on the go-
ing trip.

For the purpose of commemorating the serv-
ices of William Thompson Sedgwick to the
cause of biology and public health, there has
‘been established a memorial lectureship in the
depariment of the Institute of Technology
which he created. The desire of the founders
is that the Sedgwick Memorial Lectures shall
be given from year to year by men of dis-
tinguished eminence in any one of the sub-
jects comprehended within the general scope
of biology and public health in order that it
may fittingly express the deep and broad sym-
pathy of the man whom the lectureship is de-
signed to honor. The committee in charge of
the ledtureship consists of Samuel C. Prescott,
Massachusetts Institute of Technology; Edwin

632

O. Jordan, University of Chicago; George C.
Whipple, Harvard University; Gary N. Cal-
kins, Columbia University, and Charles-K. A.
Winslow, Yale University. The first William
Thompson Sedgwick Memorial Lecture will be
given in Huntington Hall, 491 Boylston Street,
Boston, on Friday, December 29, at five o’clock,
by Dr. Edmund Beecher Wilson, Da Costa
professor of zoology at Columbia University,
on “The physical basis of life.” The lecture
will form part of the program of the meeting
of the American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science, the American Society of
Naturalists and other societies during econvo-
eation week.

Ir is announced from Stockholm that since it
has been decided not to award the Nobel Prize
for Medicnie for 1921, ithe prize will be added
to the Special Medical Fund. The 1922 prize
is reserved for next year.

Tre Méthane Association, organized in 1916
with the object of advancing industrial chem-
istry in Poland, has been reorganized as an
Institute of Research, and Professor Moscicki
has been appointed director. The government
of Poland has made a grant of land in the
neighborhood of Warsaw, where buildings for
the institute will be erected.

Winuiam Eastman Stanpow, a graduate of
the University of Denver and a graduate stu-
dent at Columbia University, was killed by an
explosion in the chemical laboratory on No-
vember 17, through the explosion of a chamber
containing aniline hydrochloride.

PROFESSOR JEREMIAH Gxoras Mosizr, for
twenty years in charge of the work in soil
physies at the University of Illinois, died on
November 10, 1922, at the age of sixty years. A
correspondent writes: Professor Mosier gradu-
ated from ithe University of Illinois in 1893.
He then became an assistant in geology in tthe
same institution, in which position he served
for three years. After a period spent in high-
school teaching he reentered the service of his
university in 1902 to take up the work in soil
physics, a subject which at that time was
largely undeveloped. Professor Mosier was an
unusually inspiring teacher and he has won
the love and respect of the hundreds of stu-
dents who have come under his instruction. In

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1457

his field of investigation his interest was broad;
but some of the problems which engaged his
especial attention were the prevention of soil
washing on hilly land, the effect of cultivation,
climatological observations, and the soil sur-
vey of Illinois, upon all of which topics he
made notable published contributions. Pro-
fessor Mosier’s chief interest lay, perhaps, in
the soil survey of Tllinois, he having been in
direct charge of the mapping since the begin-
ning of the survey. Under his direction about
four fifths of the state have been mapped.
Through his long experience in this connection,
he acquired an expert knowledge of soil types
that made of him a widely recognized authority
in soil classification.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

THE $1,600,000 financial development pro-
ject for Dickinson College and Pennington
Seminary has been brought to a successful con-
clusion. Of this amount, Dickinson, it is re-
ported, will receive $1,250,000 and Pennington
$350,000. The money will be used for build-
ings, betterment, liquidation and endowment.

Grounp has been broken for the new labora-
tory of the department of hygiene and bac-
teriology of the University of Chicago, which
when completed will be devoted to bacteriologic
and chemical research. It will be erected at a
cost of $50,000.

Unvber the will of the late Sir Wiliam Dunn
a further sum of £45,000 now accrues to the
School of Biochemistry of the University of
Cambridge, making a total gift for the pur-
pose of the school of £210,000.

Paut Martyn Lincotn, of Cleveland, Ohio,
has been elected professor of electrical en-
gineering and director of the School of Hlec-
trical Engineering in Cornell University. Pro-
fessor Lincoln, who is a practicing engineer,
was professor of electrical engineering at the
University of Pittsburgh from 1911 to 1915.
He was president of the American Institute
of Electrical Engineers in 1914.

CuHartes Hartan Apsort, Pu. D. has re-
signed his position at the Massachusetts Agri-
cultural College to accept the professorship of

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

zoology at the University of Redlands, Cali-
fornia.

Dr. J. R. Currie, a senior medical officer of
the Scottish Board of Health, has been ap-
pointed to the chair of preventive medicine in
Queen’s University, Kingston, Ontario.

Dr. H. Strantny ALLEN, of the University of
Edinburgh, has been appoimted to the chair
of natural philosophy in the United College,
St. Andrews, which has become vacant by the
retirement of Professor Butler.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
FINANCIAL SUPPORT OF TECHNICAL
JOURNALS

It is a not uncommon practice for members
of the faculties of our colleges, universities,
and other schools to enrich ithe libraries of these
institutions by donating copies of technical
journals received by tthe individual either by
subseription or by virtue of membership in
some scientific society. This loyalty to ithe local
institution is natural and laudable from the
standpoit of the institution, but it may, per-
haps, not be realized that if every one of our
colleges and universities were to depend upon
such gitts for their files of scientific periodicals
there would shortly, in the case of many such
publications, not be any journal ‘to donate, so
inadequate is the financial support of scientific
publications.

With the exception of ‘those journals, such,
for example, as the chemical journals, which
have a large and financially profitable circula-
tion among practical workers outside of h-
braries and faculties, many of our journals de-
voted to pure science are barely, or not at all,
able !to exist except for generous subsidies.
Outside of members of societies of which the
publications may be the official organ, paid
subscriptions may be expected only from a
very few individuals not members, from a very
small number of public libraries in our larger
cities, and from educational institutions.

It is a matter of record that many of our
journals devoted to publishing the results of
research do not have subscriptions from more
than a small fraction of American institutions

SCIENCE

633

maintaining a department in the given science,
and in many cases {this results because some
member of the departmental staff contributes
his personal copy to the library.

One of our biclogical journals recently faced
the necessity of either securing a generous ad-
ditional subsidy, or of increasing its subserip-
tion rate by one dollar a year, or of suspend-
ing publication. The subsidy was not forth-
coming and so the subscription price was ad-
vanced. Notice to this effect was followed by
cancellation of subscripition, not by one of our
private, struggling, small colleges, but by one
of the largest of our state universities. The
letter of cancellation stated that the institution
would hereafter depend upon a donated copy.

The existence of all of the journals of the
class referred to is a matter of vital importance
to the colleges and universities. None of them
is maintained for its own sake as a business
venture. Practically all of them were estab-
lished because of the impossibility of securing
the publication of the results of research with
any degree of promptness—often not within a
year or eighteen months, or even longer, afiter
the completion of the manuscript.

Our colleges and universities should regard
practically all of these journals as established
primarily for their advantage, and the journals
in turn are justified in expecting support from
these institutions ito the extent of at least one
subscription. The donation of personal copies
by professors to the library of their institution
may help the library to the extent of a few
dollars, but the present extent of this practice
is depriving journals, indispensable to donor
and benefactor alike, of hundreds of dollars
each of support annually.

It is an imteresting but regrettable fact that,
while it is comparatively easy to obtain money
for research, nothing is much more difficult to
seeure funds for than the publication of the
results of research.

C. Stuart GaGcer

ACOUSTICAL RESEARCH
THE quotation from the London Times on
tthe subject of Acoustical Research (November
3, 1922) conveys an impression which seems
to need correction.

634

In justice to the life-long labors of the late
Professor W. C. Sabine, now gathered into a
volume of Collected Papers on Acoustics (Har-
vard University Press), it should be said that
the practical problem of predicting the acous-
tics of an ordinary auditorium in advance of
its construction, or of correcting one already.
built, was solved by Professor Sabine some
twenty years ago. The essential feature to be
considered in such a problem is the reverbera-
tion and Sabine’s papers on ithis subject are
full and complete. Other acoustic questions
are, of course, sometimes involved such as the
transmission of sound through walls, the effect
of resonance, ete. Several of these had also
been ‘the subject of prolonged experimental in-
vestigation by Professor Sabine at the Jeffer-
son Physical Laboratory at Harvard but some
of the results were withheld until the work
could be completed. His untimely death in-
terrupted this program, and since then tthe work
has been continued here and at the Acoustical
Laboratories at Riverbank, Elinois, under the
direction of Dr. Paul E. Sabine, as described
in Mr. Munby’s article in Nature, October 28,
1922.

Architects in this country have become aware
of the importance of Sabine’s results and scores
of eases could be cited in which the appliea-
tion of the principles worked out by him has
Jed to complete success. The opinion that
“Architects are still unable to predict with cer-
tainty ‘the acoustic properties of the halls and
«chambers they design” implies a lack of ‘re-
spect for Sabine’s profoundly accurate and
thorough work which I am sure no one will
maintain who has taken the trouble to acquaint
himself with ‘the subject.

THEopoRE Lyman,
Director
JEFFERSON PHYSICAL LABORATORY,
HLARVARD UNIVERSITY

AUSTRIAN SCIENTIFIC PUBLICATIONS

To tHe Epiror oF Science: The present
financial difficulties of scientifie and technical
journals have no doubt come to ‘the attention of
many readers of Scimrncr. I am tempted to
eall their attention to a specific case by quoting

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

a recent letter from William Ford Upson,
American trade commissioner in Vienna:

On a pathetic appeal of Professor Wilhelm
Exner, an eminent Austrian scientist, president
of the Technisches Versuchsamt, I am sending to
the Bureau of Standards, with my compliments,
the Mitteilungen des Technischen Versuchsamtes
for one year. The publication is in sore straits
for lack of funds and its ambition is to get 100
foreign subscriptions at $1.00 per year each, to.
enable it to continue publication, but its efforts
have proved unavailing except that I am sending
out a few copies at my own expense. Could you
help in the good work in any way?

The Bureau of Standards is already a sub-
seriber to this publication, but I trust that the
above appeal will put other research laborato-
ries or libraries on the subscription list.

Wiuuiam F. Mracers

BUREAU OF STANDARDS

AN APPEAL

One hundred Russian university and profes-
sional men, mostly scientists, many of them
internationally famous, recently exiled from
Russia by the Soviet government, are in Ber-
lin im serious circumstances. Local charity
is housing and feeding them, but they lack
sufficient clothing, shoes and pocket money
ito get through the winter without acute dis-
tress. An appeal has come to the American Re-
lief Administration for one thousand dollars
to provide some relief (averaging only $10 a
man) for these exiles. Unfortunately all of the
A. R. A. funds must be spent for relief inside
of Russia. .The appeal has been turned over
to me. Will the scientific men of America help
these suffering scientific men of Russia?

A generous friend, Princess Cantacuzene, of ©
Washington, has given me one half ($500) of
the sum needed. I shall be glad to be one of
fifty to give $10 each, or one of one hundred
to give $5 each, to make up the other half.
I will undertake to receive the gifts and send
personal receipts for them, and later obtain
and publish in Scrmncg a blanket receipt from
Berlin for the whole amount received and sent

over-seas. ue
VERNON KELLOGG

NationaL RESEARCH COUNCIL,
WASHINGTON, D. C.

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

SPECIAL ARTICLES

ORGANIZATION OF HETEROTYPIC
CHROMOSOMES

In a recent article H. C. Sands! gives a pre-
liminary account of his interpretation of
chromosome structure in Tradescantia. This ac-
count seems to differ much in fundamentals
from the results of a study conducted by the
writer on various species of the South African
Liliaceous genus Gasteria. To ‘consider only
the most interesting’ feature, the heterotypic
chromosomes, we find first that at metaphase
there are three pairs of small chromosomes in
the center of the plate, with four pairs of much
larger ones arranged in radiating fashion
around them. In favorable material it is easy
to see that the metaphase chromosomes are
organized internally into chromomeres, though
these are somewhat irregularly arranged. Even
before they separate the larger chromosomes
each show a cleft at the outer end opposite the
fiber attachment, and before anaphase is far
advanced they are nearly completely divided
longitudinally into two halves. Usually this is
entirely completed before telophase sets in,
and the halves are widely separated. The
smaller chromosomes are slow to split, but
finally do so. Consequently there is at telo-
phase a diploid number of separate chromo-
some-halves and the homotypic division has
been prepared for.

As the larger chromosomes separate in ana-
phase it is clear that in each half-chromosome
there is a double row of rounded chromomeres.
These are few and apparently quite definite
in number, well separated from each other
and stain sharply in contrast to the almost
colorless matrix. As the membrane first ap-
pears around the group of telophase chromo-
somes (which are well separated in this genus
and easily studied) it becomes evident that
there are no longer two rows of chromomeres,
but that four are now present. When the
chromosomes are obliquely placed these can
clearly be distinguished, especially in the later
stages when the chromosomes begin to broaden
at the ends in preparation for a more even dis-
tribution of the chromatin in the interkinetic

nucleus. The smaller roundish chromosomes

1Sands, H. C.: ‘‘Perigenesis,’’ Screncr LVI,
517-518, 1922.

SCIENCE

635

show comparable changes, though less clearly
because of their size. It would seem that this
can only mean that both the gametophyte divi-
sions in the pollen grain have been completely
prepared for. The chromomeres which enter
the construction of the sperm nuclei seem to be
already formed and merely awaiting ithe me-
chanical distribution of these mitoses. Unfor-
tunately it has mot been possible to trace the
history of the chromomeres as such through
these two divisions.

By a method based on smear preparations
it has been possible to largely confirm the re-
sults of sectioned material and to obtain fixa-
tions in. which synizesis (synapsis) has been
almost entirely eiminated. The best results on
the anaphase and telophase stages were ob-
tained when the dividing cells were pressed
from the anther before fixing and embedding.

The writer would consider, then, that the ma-
terial worked upon, Gasteria, tends to demon-
strate a very great precision in the chromo-
mere constitution of the meiotic chromosomes.
It is hoped that it will be possible soon to make
a.full report giving the evidence for the views

here expressed.
P Wm. RanpoutpH TAYLOR

UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA

THE INTELLIGENCE OF INDIANS

THE accompanying tables show that if we
rank mixed bloods of certain heredity with no-
madic and sedentary full blood Indians accord-
ing to intelligence as indicated by Seale A of
National Intelligence Tests the sequence proves
to be:

I. Mixed Bloods.

II. Mexicans.

III. Plains and South Eastern Full Bloods.

IV. Plateau Indians, Full Bloods.

V. Navajos and Apaches, Full Bloods.

While the number of cases is small the indica-
tions of the measures are consistent with this
inference. The results will shortly be reported
more in detail by the writer who has been giv-
ing these tests in United States Indian Schools
of the Southwest.

THE RELATIVE INTELLIGENCE OF INDIANS OF NO-
MADIC AND SEDENTARY TRIBES AND MIXED
BLOOD INDIANS
The scores are of the National Intelligence

Tests, Scale A, Form 1.

636
No. Score Per cent.
° attaining Median
4 Cases Median of PI. & S.E.

12 and 18 years:

Mixed Bloods............ 15 103 80 per cent.
Mexicans .... --145 85 60 per cent.
Piains & 8. E. OES, 76 =

Ruebloymes eee eae 46 64 40 per cent.

Navajo & Apache...... 12 52 10 per cent.
14 and 15 years:

Mixed Bloods............ 39 110 80 per cent.
Mexicans )yeen ens 132 92 70 per cent.
Ilenhng) C9) (Sh Wye 55 85 es

Pueblo; (cee ae 82 80 44 per cent.

Navajo & Apache...... 19 60 20 per cent.
16 and 17 years:
Mixed Bloods... . 41 104 71 per cent.

.- 28 91 54 per cent.

Mexicans ........
Plains & 8. E. .. 60 90 tt
Heb loge ee = 95 78 34 per cent.

Navajo & Apache...... 30 77 23 per cent.
18 and 19 years:

Mixed Bloods............ 31 114 60 per cent.

Mexicansyessessateeme 2

Plains & S. H............. 53 88 we

Ruch lope 26 71 30 per cent.

Navajo & Apache...... 24 77 40 per cent.
T. R. GartH

UNIVERSITY OF TEXAS
JULY 8, 1922.

THE OPTICAL SOCIETY OF
AMERICA
ABRIDGED MINUTES OF THE SEVENTH
ANNUAL MEETING!
THE seventh annual meeting of the Optical
Society of America was held at the National
Bureau of Standards, Washington, on October

25, 26, 27 and 28, President Troland pre-

siding.

One hundred and thirteen persons registered
as in attendance at the meeting. Highty-five
of these were from outside Washington. The
actual number attending at one time or another
was probably about 150. The number in
attendance at any one time at the sessions for
the reading of papers ranged from about
thirty to over one hundred.

1 The complete minutes including abstracts of
papers and descriptions of exhibits will appear in
the January number of the Journal of the Op-
tical Society of America.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No: 1457

An exhibit of optical instruments was held
in connection with this meeting; and visitors
were also given an opportunity to inspect the
optical equipment of the Bureau of Standards.

The condensed program follows:

OcToBER 25

Bureau of Standards laboratory exhibits open to
informal visits.

Business meeting:

Reports of officers and general committees.

Reports of committees on nomenclature and

standards.
OcTOBER 26

Glass Plant open to informal visits.
optical glass being stirred.

General session:

Address of welcome: Dr. S. W. Stratton, direc-

tor, Bureau of Standards.

Response: Dr. Leonard T. Troland, president,

Optical Society.

Papers on miscellaneous optics.

Session on solar, stellar and planetary radiation:
Invited papers by Dr. C. G. Abbot and Dr.

W. W. Coblentz.

Glass Plant open to informal visits.

Moulding, annealing and inspection of optical

glass.

Illustrated address (by invitation): Professor
W. J. Humphreys, U. S. Weather Bureau, on
‘“‘The optics of the atmosphere.’’

Glass Plant open to visitors:

Pot of optical glass removed from furnace.

OcTOBER 27

First session on physiologic optics.

Second session on physiologic optics.

Special: session on physiologic optics for papers
by invitation of the committee.

Pot of

OcToBER: 28
Session on photometry, colorimetry and optical
pyrometry.
The exhibit of optical instruments, October 26,

27 and 28.

A synopsis of the proceedings, papers and
special features of the meeting is given below:

1. Business ;

The report of the secretary and membership
committee was read in part.

The president communicated an informal
report from the treasurer, the formal report to
be submitted at the end of the fiscal year.

The following reports of general committees
were received informally:

Physiologic optics: F. K. Richtmyer, chairman.

DrcEeMBeR 1, 1922]

Combination of Journal with Instrument
Makers’ Journal: J. P. C. Southall, chairman

Ways and means of preparing and publishing
an English translation of Helmholtz’s ‘‘Physi-
ologie Opties’’: J. P. C. Southall, chairman.

Brief oral reports were made by the follow-
ing progress committees (committees on nomen-
elature and standards) :

Reflectometry: A. H. Taylor.

Spectroradiometry: W. W. Coblentz.

Visual refraction: A. Ames, Jr.

Wave-lengths: W. F. Meggers.

Photometry and illumination: E. C. Crittenden.

Optical glass: G. W. Morey.

Photographie materials: R. Davis.

Projection: L. A. Jones.

Pyrometry: C. O. Fairchild.

Refractometry: I. C. Gardner.

Spectrophotometry: K. 8. Gibson.

2. Special Papers

The following papers were given by special
invitation :

Apparatus and results of solar radiation work:
C. G. AsBor, Smithsonian Institution.

Thermocouple measurements of stellar and
planetary radiation: W. W. CoBLENTZ, Bureau of
Standards.

The optics of the atmosphere: W. J. Hum-
pHrEysS, U. S. Weather Bureau.

Photic orientation in organisms: 8. O. Mast,
Johns Hopkins University.

Electrical response of the retina to stimulation
by light: E. L. CHarrer and W. T. Bovir, Har-
vard University.

On reflex visual sensations: FRANK ALLEN, Uni-
versity of Manitoba.

3. Contributed Papers

The following are the titles of papers offered
by members and others, and actually presented
at this meeting:

Reflection of ultra-violet by flowers: F. K.
RicutMyeEr, Cornell University.

Some unusual halos: W. J. Humpureys, U. 8.
Weather Bureau. ;

The excitation of spark spectra of rubidium
and cesium in a low voltage arc: F. L. MouHLEr,
Paut D. Foorn, A. E. RuarKk and’ C. C. Kuxss,
Bureau of Standards.

Some observations on the transformation of
thermal radiant energy into electric current im
molybdenite: W. W. CoBLENTZ, Bureau of Stand-
ards.

Extraordinary diffraction of X-rays:
McKernan, Bell System Laboratories.

L. W.

SCIENCE

637

Simple equipment for detecting the errors of
screws: WiLMER Souprr, Bureau of Standards.

Refraction of a thin pencil by any refracting
surface; generalized meridional and sagittal for-
mulas: E. D. Rox, Jr., Syracuse University.

The dioptrometer, an apparatus for measuring
the power of the commercial lenses: Henry F.
Kurtz, Bausch & Lomb.

The measurement and specification of optical
characteristics in projector performance: G. W.
Morrirt, Frankford Arsenal.

The practical application of parabolic surfaces
in lens construction: W. B. Rayton, Bausch &
Lomb.

Some recent contributions to psycho-physio-
logical optics: LL. T. TRouaNp, Harvard Univer-
sity.

A photo-electric theory of color vision: JANET
Howett Ciark, Johns Hopkins University.

A theory of color vision: Euuior Q. ADAMS,
Nela Research Laboratory. ;

The fundamental facts of color-sensation, being
the minimal requirements of a color sensation
theory, with illustrations in color: CHRISTINE
Lapp-PRANKLIN, Columbia University.

The visibility of radiant energy: K. 8. Gipson
and E. P. T. Tynpaut, Nela Research Laborato-
ries, Bureau of Standards.

On the luminosity ratios of the spectral com-
plementarics, and the subjective saturation of
the spectrum: R. H. Srnpen, Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity.

Further studies of the Abney effect: L. T. TRo-
LAND and C. H. LanerorD, Harvard University.

A critical study of the Snellen letters and the
“‘illiterate’’ E tests for the acuteness of vision
of school children, and a proposed substitute for
these tests: J. M. McCautis, Board of Education,
Trenton, N. J.

A comparison of the Fechner and Munsell
scales of luminous sensation value: E.uioT Q.
Apams, Nela Research Laboratories.

The theory of flicker photometry:
Frrres, Bryn Mawr.

Comparative studies of equality of brightness
and flicker photometry with special reference to
the lag of visual sensation: GERTRUDE RAND,
Bryn Mawr.

Progress on the determination of normal gray
light: Irwin G. Prizst, Bureau of Standards,
Munsell Color Company.

The effect of various conditions upon the deter-
mination of the normal stimulus of gray: IRWIN
G. Prirst and Casper L. Corrrent, Munsell
Color Company, Bureau of Standards.

Cin:

638

New tables and graphs for facilitating the com-
putations of spectral energy distribution by
Planck’s formula: M. KaAtTHERINE FREHAFER,
Bureau of Standards.

Graphical aids to the transformation of color
measurements from one system to another: HER-
BERT E. Ives, Western Electric Company.

A color match photometer for illuminants:
Hersert E. Ives, Western Electric Company.

Comparative color measurements of illuminants
by trichromatic and monochromatic analyses:
Hersert H. Ives, Western Electric Company.

The colorimetry and photometry of daylight
and incandescent illuminants by the method of
rotatory dispersion: IRwin G. Prinst, Bureau of
Standards, Munsell Color Company.

A hemispherical photometric integrator: FRANK
BENForD, General Electric Company.

Improvements in photometric equipment for
integrating spheres: A. H. Taytor, Laboratory of
Applied Science, Nela Research Laboratories.

A variable aperture rotating sectored disc:
HeErsert EH. Ives, Western Electric Company.

The registering microphotometer of the Mount
Wilson Observatory: Epison Prrtrr and Srru B.
NicHotson, Mt. Wilson Observatory.

_ Color mixing and comparing apparatus: HEr-
MANN KELLNER, Bausch & Lomb.

Disappearance of the filament in improved
forms of the disappearing-filament optical
pyrometer: C. O. Farrcuinp and W. H. Hoover,
Bureau of Standards.

The relation between the hiding-power and re-
flection coefficients of white pigments and paints:
A. H. Prunp, Johns Hopkins University.

On the ratio of intrinsic brightness to illumina-
tion: James E. Ives, U. 8. Public Health Service.

Preliminary data on the color of daylight at
Washington: Irwin G. Prizst, Bureau of Stand-
ards, Munsell Color Company.

The shrinkage of photographic films during de-
velopment: H. L. Curtis, Bureau of Standards.

A special sensitometer for the study of the
photographic reciprocity law: Loyp A. JONES,
Eastman Kodak Company Research Laboratory.

An instrument (densitometer) for the measure-
ment of high photographic densities: Loyp A.
Jones, Research Laboratory, Eastman Kodak
Company.

An adaptation of the thalofide cell to the meas-
urement of photographic densities: A. LL. SCHOEN,
Research Laboratory, Eastman Kodak Company.

On the relation between time and intensity im
photographic exposure: Loyp A. JoNES and
Emory Huse, Research Laboratory, Eastman
Kodak Company.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1457

Preliminary note on the spectral energy sensi-
tivity of photographic materials: Loyp A. JONES
and A. L. ScHorn, Research Laboratory, Hastman
Kodak Company.

The following are titles of papers which were
on the supplementary program and whose
authors did not respond when the papers were
called:

The horopter, cyclophoria and apparent vertical
meridian (preliminary report): CHARLES SHEARD,
American Optical Company.

Aspherical lens systems: L. SiuBERSTEIN, East-
man Kodak Company.

The paper by Hermann Kellner entitled

. “Motion analyser” on the advance program

was not read. In place of it, Dr. Kellner com-
municated a paper on stereoscopic vision, ab-
stract of which has not been submitted.

Dr. Frank Benford communicated informally
the substance of a paper on the plotting of
spectrophotometric data which he had present-
ed at the convention of the Illuminating Engi-
neering Society in September.,

4. Exhibit of Optical Instruments

The following is a list of exhibitors, together

with their exhibits. ;
1. MuNSELL CoLor CoMPANY

Munsell color tree.
Atlas of the Munsell color system.
Two enlarged atlas charts.
Neutral value scale, chroma scales.
Munsell daylight photometer.
Munsell crayons.
Munsell water colors.
Color index.
Dise spinning motor for use with Maxwell dises.

.

2. KEUFFEL & Esser COMPANY
Holophane lightmeter.
Aerial sextant.
Prismatic gunsight turret telescope.
Expedition plane table.
Engineer’s Y level.
Engineer’s mountain and mining transit.
Engineer’s transit.
Triangulation theodolite.
Spy glass, U. 8S. Navy pattern.

' 4-inch ship’s telescope.

Anti-aireraft telescope.
Stadimeter.
Color analyzer.
3. ORDNANCE DEPARTMENT, U. S. Army
Instruments of the fire control systems of mobile
artillery, observation and laying.

DECEMBER 1, 1922]

Instruments used in the observation and tracking
of targets for securing data for precision fire
of seacoast batteries.

Observation and computing instruments for use
with anti-aircraft batteries.

(Frankford Arsenal Optical Laboratory)
Instrument for the examination of optical glass
(designed by G. W. Moffitt).
Universal prism testing instrument (designed by
G. W. Moffitt).

4. U. S. Coast anD GEopETIc SuRVEY
Astronomical transit (Bamberg).
Theodolite (Troughton & Simms).
Repeating theodolite (Berger).
Precise level.

Vertical circle.

Vertical collimator.
Navigating sextant.
Electric signal lamp.
Heliograph (heliotrope).
Theodolite-magnetometer.
Dip circle.
Magnetograph.

5. BauscH & Loms OpticaL Company

Large constant deviation spectroscope.
Constant deviation spectroscope for chemists.
Pocket spectroseopes.
Monochromator.
‘Color mixing and comparing apparatus.
‘Two field monochromator.
Comparison photometer.
Martens photometer.
Photometer stand.
New Abbe refractometer.
Dipping refractometers.
‘Colorimeter.
Hemoglobinometer.
Aspheric condenser.
Dioptrometer.
Field telemeter.
6. Dr. Harry 8. GRADLE
Instrument for the determination of areas of
retinal correspondence.
7. Burau or STANDARDS (RADIOMETRY SECTION)
Stellar spectral radiometer (Coblentz).
8. A. Amgs, JR., AND BLANCHE AMES
Color standard. ‘
9. SocikTk GENEVOISE D’INSTRUMENTS DE
PHYSIQUE
Constant deviation spectrometer.
Length comparator for measurements in air.
Automatic machine for graduating micrometer
heads, drums, cylindrical and conical surfaces.

SCIENCE

639

10. Laboratory or APPLIED ScrENcE, NELA
RESEARCH LABORATORIES
Diffuse reflectometer—A. H. Taylor type.
Photometer and special window for integrating
spheres. i
11. Cornina Guass Works
Light filters.

12. Hanovia CHEMICAL AND MANUFACTURING
: CoMPANY
Kalosat soft focus lens for photographic use with
specimens of photographs taken with Kalosat.
Fused quartz optical goods, microscopic slides,
cover glasses, prisms, ete.
Special lenses of fused crystalline quartz.
13. Cooprr-Hrwirr Exrcrric Company
Graded fused-quartz-to-Pyrex and fused-quartz-
to-lead-glass joints.
Quartz-glass apparatus for photophysics and pho-
tochemistry.
Uviare lamps.
Labare.

14. Burzav or Sranparps (ArRonauTIC
INSTRUMENTS SECTION)

Synchronizing type ground speed and drift indi-
cator.

Rate of climb recorder,

15. A. H. Prunp

A precision rotating section, aperture variable and
measurable while in motion.

16. CenTRAL ScrentTiric Company

Ingersoll glarimeter, new model.

17. J. C. Hussarp

Gold-leaf electrometer.

18. Burrau or OrDNANCE, Navy DEPARTMENT

Binocular collimator mark IIT (manufactured by
Naval Gun Factory, Navy Yard, Washington,
DAC)

19. C. P. Gorrz AMERICAN OpricaL Company

Polariscopes and accessories.

Polariscopes for the analysis of sugar solutions
and other polarizing fluids.

Various lamps and accessories.

Refractometers and accessories.

Refractometers, system Abbe, but of new and im-
proved design, for testing fats, oils and other
fluids.

20. WARREN P, VALENTINE

Refractometer—Modified Abbe type, ‘‘ Precision’?
model.

Refractometer—Modified Abbe type.

Refractometer—Improved ‘‘Precision’’ model.

Refractometer—Modified Butyro type, Wat?
model.

21. Burrau or STanparps (F. J. Barns)

640

Adjustable sensibility saccharimeter (made by
J. & J. Fric).
22. BurEAU oF STANDARDS (OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
SECTION )
A yariable power magnifying stereoscope.
23. CHRISTINE LADD-FRANKLIN
Charts illustrating the Ladd-Franklin theory of
color vision.
5. Bureau of Standards Laboratory Exhibits
On account of the limited space in the exhi-
bition room and the inconvenience of disturb-
ing complicated “built-in” apparatus the
Bureau of Standards contributed very little to
the exhibits in the exhibition The
bureau apparatus was, however, open to inspec-
tion in the rooms where it is regularly used.
Instruments and apparatus thought to be of
most interest to the Optical Society were listed
and deseribed in the advance program, which
thus served as a guide to visitors. This list is
given below.
Standard horizontal photometers
B. 8. Willis).

room.

(in charge of

Flicker photometers and colored test solutions.

for photometric observers (in charge of B. S.
Willis).

Photometric distribution apparatus (in charge of
B. S. Willis).

Integrating photometric sphere and Taylor re-
flectometer (in charge of B. 8. Willis).

Koenig-Martens Spectrophotometer (in charge of
M. Katherine Frehafer). ;

Photoelectric spectroradiometer (in charge of
K. 8: Gibson).

Hilger sector photometer with quartz spectro-
graph for ultra-violet spectroradiometry (in
charge of H. J. MeNicholas).

Spectrophotometer (color analyzer) for measuring
spectral reflection (designed by Keuffel &
Esser and the Bureau of Standards) (in charge
of R. E. Lofton).

Exponential spectrophotometer for liquids (in
charge of Irwin G. Priest).

Micrometer-microphotometer for measuring rela-
tive wave-lengths and photographic densities in
spectra (in charge of W. F. Meggers).

Commercial (life-test) photometric equipment (in
charge of Miss R. M. Collins).

Photometer for measurement of brightness of
self-luminous materials (in charge of W. H.
Wadleigh).

Apparatus for the determination of hue sensi-
bility (wave length differences perceptible by

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1457

difference in hue) and the visibility of radiant
energy (in charge of Irwin G. Priest).

Rotatory dispersion colorimetric photometer (in
charge of Irwin G. Priest).

Standard rotatory dispersion apparatus for the
determination of the normal stimulus of gray
(in charge of Irwin G. Priest).

Special apparatus for the determination of the
normal stimulus of gray with full field illumina-
tion (in charge of Irwin G. Priest). .

Fizeau expansion apparatus (in charge of C. G.
Peters).

Dimensional change apparatus (in
C. G. Peters).

Scale ruling machine (in charge of C. G. Peters).

Portable gas interferometer, laboratory gas inter-
ferometers (in charge of E. R. Weaver).

Disappearing filament optical pyrometer (in
charge of C. O. Fairchild).

Universal polarimeter (in charge of A. Q. Tool).

Crystal growing apparatus and various crystals
(in charge of F. P. Phelps).

Photographic sensitometric apparatus (in charge
of Raymond Davis).

Metallographie microscopes (in charge of H. S.
Rawdon and S. Epstein).

Dalby optical load extension recorder (in charge
of John R. Freeman, Jr.).

Photomicrographic apparatus (in charge of R. E.
Lofton).

Microprojection of stratified
charge of P. V. Wells).

Ultramicroseope (Zeiss Slit) (in charge of P. V.
Wells).

General Electrie oscillograph, Bureau of Stand-
ards modifications (in charge of R. A, Web-
ster).

Cathode-ray oscillograph (Braun
charge of Miss F. Kenyon).

Projectile camera (in charge of A. H. Sellman).

Optical glass plant (in charge of A. N. Finn).

Optical shops: Highest precision hand work (in
charge of J. Clacey); Machine grinding and
polishing (in charge of F. C. Weaver).

charge of

soap films (in

Tube) (in

The president announced the election of Pro-
fessor A. A. Michelson and Dr. 8. W. Stratton
to honorary membership in the society.

The meeting was concluded by an informal
dinner at the Hotel Ebbitt.

The next meeting will be held at Cleveland,
in October, 1923.

Irwin G. PRIEST,

WASHINGTON, Secretary

New SERIES ; ~ 9 ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1458. Fripay, DecrmBer 8, 1922 Sivetr Corms, 15 Crs.

New Blak

FOLSOM’S ENTOMOLOGY Phd

With Reference to Its Ecological Aspects

iston Books

The book will cover the growing demand for a biological treat-
ment of entomology, and is planned for use as a text and also for
the general reader. This edition has been brought up to date
by inclusion of much new material and some new illustrations.
A chapter on Insect Ecology has been added.

By Justus Watson Fousom, Se.D., (Harvard), Assistant Professor of Hn-
tomology, University of Mlinois.

3rd Edition. 313 lustrations. Cloth, $4.00

GALLOWAY’S ZOOLOGY fonts
A Textbook for Universities, Colleges and Normal Schools
This text is founded upon definite principles that will secure
good interest and fine spirit. The new edition marks the prog-
ress in the science as it pertains to the instruction of beginners.
Greater accuracy of detail has been accomplished.

By Tuomas Watton GaLtLoway, Ph.D., Litt. D. Formerly Professor of Zoology,
Beloit College, (Wisconsin). With assistance of Paun S. Weucou, Ph.D.,
Associate Professor of Zoology, University of Michigan.

Ath Edition. 255 Illustrations. Cloth, $2.75.

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.
Publishers Philadelphia

pian Weg),
oy

Pe au
oN
EN

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

THE OESTROUS CYCLE
IN THE RAT

And Its Associated Phenomena
By
Lone anp Evans
148 pages, 11 plates, 7 figures in text; paper, $3.75

The profound importance of an infallible
method of detecting in the Mammalia the periodic
function of the ovary, and the possibility, through
the possession of such a method, of the investiga-
tion of disturbances of the ovarian function are
matters of interest to students of the subject.
Before proceeding to such investigation, it would
be necessary to establish clearly all the charac-
teristics of what has been called the normal
oestrous or reproductive cycle in the animal chosen
for investigation. To that task the present mono-
graph is devoted.

University of California Press
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY

Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science
Established 1914. Monthly, except August and September.
Official Publication of the Botanical Society of America.

Subscription, $6 a year. Volumes 1-8 complete, $58
post free. Single numbers, 75 cents, post free. Prices of
odd volumes on request.

Foreign postage: To Canada, 20 cents; to other coun-
tries, 40 cents.

ECOLOGY

Devoted to All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment

Established 1920. Quarterly.
Official Publication of the Ecological Society of America. ~
Subscription, $4 a year. Back volumes 1-3, $3.50 post free.

Single numbers, $1.15 post free.

Foreign postage: To Canada, 10 cents; to other coun-

tries, 20 cents.

GENETICS

A Periodical Record of Investigations in Heredity and
Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.
Subscription, $6 a year. Single numbers, $1.15 post free.

Foreign postage: To Canada, 25 cents; to other coun-
tries, 50 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume Qne contains 33 contributions on genetics,
pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant geog-
raphy, morphology, and systematic botany.

38 plates, 41 text figures.

Price $3.50 plus postage. Weight, 4 pounds.
Published irregularly.

Orders should be placed direct with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
BROOKLYN, N. Y., U. S. A.

Gi Whee a ee ee

Some NEW SCIENTIFIC BOOKS from
THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS, ENGLAND

The Educational Writings of
John Locke
Edited by
JoHn Witt1am ADAMSON

The present volume attempts to make
clear the position of John Locke amongst
the various influences which have shaped
the real history of education—From the

Preface. 2.50
The Groundwork of Social
Reconstruction
By

WILLIAM GLOVER
“The whole book is so marked by width
of outlook and clarity of judgment that
we have no hesitation in recommending it
to our readers’ attention.”—Journal of Edu-

cation. $1.00

Fungi: Ascomycetes, Ustilaginales .
Uredinales
By
Dame HeteN GwYNNE-VAUGHAN
“The author is to be heartily congratu-
lated on her achievement which will place
all interested in this group under a debt

of gratitude to her.”—The Spectator.
Tlustrated, $12.00

The Origin of Tyranny
By

P. N. URE
“Professor Ure has written a fascinating
book on the Greek world in the seventh and
sixth centuries before Christ, with the ob-
ject of showing that its problems were in
some respects comparable to those of our

own day.’—The Spectator.
Illustrated, $12.00

For Sale by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, American Agents

64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York
Prairie Avenue and 25th Street, Chicago
Huntington Chambers, Copley Sq., Boston

609 Mission Street, San Francisco
330 South Harwood Street, Dallas
17 Houston Street, Atlanta

SCIENCE

Vou. LVI Dercemper 8, 1922 No. 1458

The Gifted Student and Research: PROFESSOR
(QUADS, LESH OVASITE (0) 2h Oe i 641
What shall be taught in the First Year of
College Chemistry? Proressor. Harry N.
TS UCONN) ee ee EE 648

On the Existence of a hitherto Unrecognized
Dietary Essential for Reproduction: Pro-
FESSoR Herpert M. Evans and K. Scorr

NES TSE O Poppe eee een Se Soest ae 650
The Recent Scientific Work of Robert
Wheeler Wallsons Ma Hi. Die ee 651

Scientific Events:
Mortality from Cancer; Colors for Traffic
Systems; The Charles A. Coffin Founda-
tion; The Society of Sigma X%.........:.-...

Scientific Notes and N ews........-...2.-c.0-0-------+
University and Educational Notes

a n
oo On
oa bo

for)
Jo}

Discussion and Correspondence:
Weathering under Constant
Proressor HerpMAN F. CLELAND. The
Beginnings of American Geology: Dr.
T. C. MenpEnuALL. The Colloidal State:
Dr. JEROME ALEXANDER. The Fusarium
Wilt Disease of Bananas: Mark ALFRED
CARLETON. Fresh Water Coelenterata in
Kentucky: Harrison GARMAN. An An-
nouncement in SCIENCE: DR. VERNON KEL-
TSO G Gees Ne aaa cia see eect ae Sera eS

Conditions:

Quotations:
Insulin as a Cure for Diabetes; Justice for
EMEP ALED LOL ALON S sect cease eee 665

Special Articles:
Series Regularities in the Arc Spectrum of
Chromium: Dr. C. C. Kress and Harrier
TEGAN DYSON NF SG ESS ee ee 666

Meee 666
BING US foree steno nmin tne andi Seren Supplement

The National Academy of Sciences..
Science

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by
J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE GIFTED STUDENT AND
RESEARCH!

Like the evolution and development of so-
ciety, the development of the individual is
rapidly coming under more and more conscious-
ly and systematically directed control; jwitness
the gigantic educational machinery which is
the product of the last twenty years. It is,
perhaps, safe to say that the systematic direc-
tion of the development of the individual is
inversely proportional to his initiative, natural
gifts and creative power. Morons are cared
for; delinquent students are sorted and served
each according to his individual need; the
average student follows a routine. But what
about the intellectually gifted student? Or-
dinarily he is held in leash. Let me enter a
plea for the emancipation of the gifted stu-
dent, giving him a realization of his powers
and responsibilities, the freedom to soar un-
hampered above the levels of mediocrity, and
to live at his highest level of achievement,
weaving early his bonds of friendship with
scholars. Instead of whipping him into line,
let us whip him out of line.

One of the great contributions from-modern
psychology is the discovery of the individual
and the projection of his profile, here and there
in quantitative terms, bringing to us the reali-
zation that in a given specific mental capacity
one individual may have two, five, ten, twenty-
five or a hundredfold the capacity of another
with whom he is tied up in the educational mold.
Our curriculum and our campus sanctions are
so effectively set that very often these indi-
vidual differences are successfully covered up
or smoothed out so that the gifted individual
as such is lost to himself as well as to society.

A few years ago, particularly during the

1 Read before the Association of American Uni-
versities at Baltimore, Maryland, November 9-11,
1922.

642

war, some of us were interested in finding
from the senior class in college those who
would give the greatest promise of achievement
in research work. The rating blank? I have
placed in your hands was used effectively for
the locating of a certain per cent. of these.
Personally I can testify that the individual
interviews with those selected on the basis of
these ratings furnished one of the most delight-
ful and profitable opportunities for personnel
work in administration. With the charts before
the student and the interviewer, it was possible
to enter into the life plans of the individual
at a erucial stage in his career and cause him
to view the situation in a critical attitude with
profound interest. This is a procedure which
has amply justified itself. But we soon found
that the senior year is too late. At the end
of the senior year the student has already
chosen his career and, sad to say, often un-
wisely, being guided largely by temporary
emoluments, a shortsighted estimate of what is
worth while, or the easiest outlet for activity

at his then recognized level. Business, the in-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

dustries, special interests, and the older pro-
fessions have plucked from the senior class
those who are most promising. Without strong
traditions in their favor and without the prom-
ise of financial rewards, science and art, with
very few exceptions, trusting to luck, get what
is left. It has therefore become clear that
some selection, to be effective, should be made
earlier than in the senior year, first, to give
scholarship an opportunity in the competition
for talent, and, second, to find the gifted stu-
dent early enough to give him the advantages
of preparation that he may crave and deserve.

For this reason, some of us fall back on the
opportunity of using the so-called intelligence
tests and various substitutes for these at college
entrance. These tests should be as much for
the purpose of discovering the gifted student
as for the purpose of culling out at the lower
end. If I may mention a practice which has
gradually found its way into Iowa, I may say
that those who rank in the highest 10 per
cent. at college entrance are summoned by the
Dean of the College of Liberal Arts and told

2ANALYZED RATING OF FITNESS FOR GRADUATE STUDY
Directions: Record your judgment on each capacity by placing a check mark (Vy) at the appro-

priate point in the dotted line.

Grade conservatively, bearing in mind that in the long run, for a
class, there should be as many marks below average as above.

If in serious doubt, put a question

mark above the check. Guard rigorously against giving information (to, or receiving from, others who
are rating independently, but otherwise consult freely with those who know the student well.

At the bottom, cite (1) notable specific evidences of achievements, distinctions, opinions or other
data that may throw light on the character of, ability or fitness for some particular field, if you
know of any; and (2) mention marked negative traits which might be an obstacle in a learned career.

Very Supe-
poor Poor Low average High average Excellent rior
10% 20% 20% 20% 20% 10%

1. REASONING POWER: capacity for solving
problems, both deductive and inductive_-—__-
2. ORIGINALITY: creative imagination, bril-
liancy, planful initiative and fertility of ra-
tional @sideass ess ee eee eon

3. MEMORY: extensive, logical, serviceable,
and ready command of facts_-------------------

4. ALERTNESS: quick, incisive and respon-
sive observation, thought and feeling----._-------

5. ACCURACY: precise, keen, regular and
reliable observation, thought and feeling--_____-

6. APPLICATION: power of concentration,
sustained attention, persistence, and _ well-
repulateduefortes sss seen eee ene

7. COOPERATION: capacity for intellectual
companionship, team work and leadership_------

8. MORAL ATTITUDE: intellectual
wholesome moral standards.
ences

honesty,
ideals and influ-

9. HEALTH: nervous stability, physique, vital-
ity; andwienduxrancess-seseesoee eee ee
10. ZEAL FOR INVESTIGATION: deep in-

terest in and craving for original and creative
work

DECEMBER 8, 1922

that the institution recognizes individual dif-
ferences both in regard to quantity and quali-
ty; that those having given evidence of un-
usually high powers will be expected to show
unusually high achievement through the col-
lege course; that they will be watched with
hopeful interest by members of the faculty;
that an effort will be made to give them such
personal direction and stimulation as they may
need; and that eminent leadership is charac-
terized by modesty and service.

At the beginning of ithe second year, the
Dean of the Graduate College summons them.
Hach one is asked to bring three ratings on
the blank you have seen; one by himself, one
by a student friend, and one by an instructor.
In the light of these analyzed ratings and the
achievement of the freshman year, we talk
over the situation with them individually in
preparation for the selection of their major
This
usually leads to an early introduction to the
most inspiring men in the major subjects which
they are to elect. The selection of a major is
then a distinctive step in the finding process,
and the selection of an adviser ceases to be a
mere form or a mere tool of administration.
This procedure has served also to give mem-
bers of the faculty, who are interested in re-
search, a fresh interest and a clear point of
view in the effort to discover im their classes
other persons who show evidence of talent for
research; because the gifted students do not
necessarily fall in the highest group in mental
tests.

But even this approach in the freshman and
sophomore years has revealed to us the ad-
vantage of beginning still earlier. As was
shown by Book in the Indiana survey, dull stu-
dents are as likely to go to college as bright
students. In ithe interest of scholarship it
would be extremely wholesome if those who are
interested in college entrance could reach down
into the high school and inject into that atmos-
phere the sentiment that the more gifted a
student is in the secondary school work, the
more desirable it is that he should go to col-
lege. It is only by the cultivation of a personal

at the beginning of their junior year.

SCIENCE

643

sentiment of this kind that we can draw into
the college those high school students of su-
perior attainment whose education is now cur-
tailed.

What I have attempted to say so far is that
it is in the interest of creative scholarship as
well as culture in general that we should frank-
ly recognize the enormous magnitude of dif-
ferences in the individual capacity for achieve-
ment. and that this principle should be asserted
early in the course; first, that students may be
found in the adolescent period of enthusiasm
and generous aspiration and wisely protected
from the machinery which is set automatically
to grind high and low to a common grade; and,
second, that instincts of curiosity, criticism,
collecting and comradeship which blossom in
the early adolescent period may be fostered in
an atmosphere of freedom, encouragement and
opportunity for achievement.

Having thus entered upon a program of do-
ing what we can to discover the gifted student,
what can we do to follow up this discovery in
the undergraduate course? This question has
been answered by a very elaborate report pre-
pared for the Association of American Uni-
versity Professors by Professor Wilkins point-
ing out sixty-seven varieties of things that may
work to this end. I shall not here attempt even
to summarize or classify these as they will
undoubtedly appear in a formal report of his
committee.

The Division of Educational Relations, with
Dr. Vernon Kellogg as chairman, in the Na-
tional Research Council, has made a special
project of this problem of the gifted student.
It has various committees at work and aims
to collect and disseminate information on this
subject. I desire to acknowledge my obligation
to this Division for inspiration and facilities
in the work, but the suggestions I am now
about to make are not official; they are purely
personal convictions gained in my own experi-
ence and observation.

In the proposals I am about to make, I shall
scrupulously avoid the recommending of any
procedure which shall in the slightest detract
from the present actual privileges and oppor-

644

tunities that the non-gifted student enjoys. In-
deed, the whole appeal for the recognition of
the individual in education is as much for the
good of the non-gifted as for the gifted stu-
dent. I am speaking here from the point of
view of the intellectually gifted; but we all
know that these have many weaknesses and that

there are many other gifts or talents which
‘supplement intellect and in many imstances
outweigh it. I shall therefore not tolerate any
odious comparisons in terms of superior and
inferior, and my appeal for the gifted shall
not convey the slightest slur or disparagement
of the non-gifted; but the fact is that, in edu-
cation as in charity, there has been a constant
tendency to give the first and most ardent care
to the comparatively helpless. To this I would
add some thoughtful equalization of interest.

The discovery of the individual and the
study of his talents in modern psychology has
brought forth a maxim which may well be
our educational slogan: “Keep each student
busy at his highest level of achievement in or-
der that he may be successful, happy and
good.”

This maxim is so pithy and cogent that we
_ ean afford ito read it and reread it, accenting
in turn each individual word, as every word
of it stands for a principle. Thus, we may
emphasize im reading, each, his, highest,
achievement, successful, happy and good.

Keep the moron busy at his highest level of
achievement and he will be happy, useful and
good; institutions have demonstrated that fact.
Keep the gifted student in musie or art busy
at this highest level of achievement and he may
become an artist; that has been demonstrated.
But science is slow in applying science to its
own procedures. The challenge of educational
psychology to-day is this: “Keep the gifted
student busy at his highest level of achievement
and you may find him a delightful comrade,
a contributor to the world’s store of knowledge,
and a vastly greater man than he could ever
have been but for your thoughtful considera-
tion.” :

To act on the application of this principle, I
would urge the extension of the following pro-
cedures which have all been tried to some ex-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

tent in various institutions but need to be pro-
moted.

1. Sectioning classes on the basis of ability.
We may say in very rough, and conservative
terms that, if we think of a hundred college
freshmen, chosen at random, and match the ex-
tremes against each other, 5 at one end can do
more than 5 times as much as 5 at the other
end. The next 5 at one end can do more than
4 times as much as the next 5 at the other end.
The next 6 at one end can do more than 3 times
as much as the next 6 at the other end. The
next 9 at one end can do more than 2 times
as much as the next 9 at the other end. This
accounts for the highest and lowest quartiles.
The differences at the extreme are much larger
than here represented because one or two at the
upper end may be capable of rendering more
than ten times the average output for the class,
while the one or two at the other extremes are
quite certain to fail. If, then, we seek for a
practical basis for the sectioning of classes, we
shall do well to recognize three levels which we
may call the high, the middle, and the low, the
middle being as large as the other two together.

All too often our educational system is based
upon the assumption that, where the great
Creator failed to make all human beings equal,
it is the business of the school to make them
equal. To justify this procedure, the school
men have found cover in the argument that this
task works toward a democratic ideal; that it
represents the rights of individuals; that it is
necessary for the successful operation of edu-
eational machinery; that it is good for the
lowly individual; that the procedure is justified
by results. Each of these defenses represents a
fundamental error and misconception of fact in
educational procedure.

The democratic ideal in education, as every-
where else in life, is not identical opportunity
for all, but equal opportunity in proportion to
capacity. The genius and the moron do not
have quantitatively the same rights to knowl-
edge; they have equal rights in proportion to
their relevant capacities (quantitative and
qualitative), and one should be as insistent
upon his rights as the other.

Among the advantages of such sectioning we

DrcEeMBER 8, 1922]

may note the following: it becomes possible to
apply in teaching the pedagogical maxim,
“Keep each student at his highest level of
achievement.” This will result in the setting
up of fair standards for quantity, quality, con-

tent, and method of work adapted to a fairly .

homogeneous group. This in turn will estab-
lish a fair basis for praise and blame. The
introduction of fair standards of achievement
creates morale in a class. There will therefore
be a larger output at all three levels; for such
grouping is as advantageous to the untalented
student as to the talented. Such progressive
segregation is one of the best means of dis-
covering and motivating the gifted student; be-
cause he is thrown into vital and effective com-
petition, works at his highest level of achieve-
ment, and enjoys freedom for initiative in self-
expression, and these associations are likely to
awaken in him desire for progress, a sense of
joy in achievement, and a feeling of fellowship.
The introduction of this method, if properly
managed, will not imerease the cost of instruc-
tion, but may reduce it. I have pointed out
in two articles on this topic? that there is no
insuperable difficulty in the way of conflict of
hours and cooperation of staff and that every
institution that has given the method a fair
trial is continuing it.

2. Honor courses. Let each department in
which there are progressive teachers set out
one or more courses to which admission may
be gained only upon evidence of fitness. The
principal factor to take into account should be
high scholarship, or creative achievement, or
both together with health. The standard for
passing should be much higher than in an or-
dinary course. The class may well be socialized
and the work so arranged as to challenge the in-
dividual to wide reading, verification and de-
fense of his findings, experiment, independent
thinking and self-expression. Under no cir-
cumstances should the course be limited to lee-

2I am, of course, speaking of the larger in-
stitutions; indeed, the very necessity for differ-
entiating students may prove to be a decided dis-
advantage to the small college.

3In School and Society.

SCIENCE

645

ture or textbook; nor should formal essays or
papers be read by the student. It should not
furnish an opportunity for the instructor to
recite the findings of his researches, although
the subject of study will most profitably le
within or around his field of research.
Admission to these courses should be in the
hands of a scholarship committee to which re-
commendation for admission and reports of
achievement should be made by teachers. As-
suming as a unit of credit three year hours;
i.e., six semester hours, the exceptional student
might ‘be permitted to take one course in the
sophomore year, two in the junior year and
three in the senior year, but not more than one
course of this kind each year in a given de-
partment. Thus the amount of credit in such
courses might furnish a better basis for de-
signing honor students for graduation than the
present basis of mere credits
courses.

in ordinary
The existence of such courses would
act as a stimulus to the gifted student who
might otherwise be disposed to loaf. Dozens
of varieties of honor courses are being tried in
different institutions. This plan thas the ad-
vantage of flexibility, simplicity of administra-
tion and a salable proposition to the student.

3. Individual work. Shall the freshman
who has read current literature and history
extensively and lives in it be forced to ruminate
the cud of predigested pellets which form the
diet of freshman general history? Shall the
gifted student, who, given the freedom of the
library, can read up in one half to one fifth the
time what is doped out in lectures on special
topies, be forced to acquire a specialized knowl-
edge-in that specific form and at that set pace?
Shall the student who, if given free hands,
could pass all college examinations required in
a year or two be required to mark time for
four years? Or, granted that it is good for
him ito be in college for four years, shall his
horizon be limited to the scope of course units?
Shall the gifted student who can learn the two
hour assignments in science or history or lan-
guage in fifteen minutes be encouraged to loaf
or play the rest of the time? Or shall he be
given a different assignment? Shall the gifted
student who can do independent work in li-

646

brary, laboratory, field, or creative work have
his progress restricted by course units?

Such questions are all the more pertinent
here to-day because American institutions have
answered them in a different way from that in
which they have been answered by the older in-
stitutions in Europe. The American college
coddles the student; laces him into a strait-
jacket of forms, and spanks or rewards him
somewhat in proportion to his conformity to
this corset. Professors talk about academic
freedom. Perhaps it is time that we heard from
the student about academic freedom.

One wholesome practice is to excuse stu-
dents from too elementary courses and give
them more advanced work. But in many eases
there should be another outlet. Students who,
on admission or later, give evidence of high
capacity for achievement should, on recommen-
dation to the department and approval by the
scholarship committee, be permitted to register
for individual work as a substitute for required
courses, work to be counted for credit as in
the course. But ithe standard of passing should
be much higher than for the class work (1) to
prevent rush to this privilege, (2) to call for
high achievement on the part of a gifted stu-
dent, and (3) to allow for the effect of cram-
The test should, however, be more plas-
tie and personal than the formal tests on course

ming.
content. In addition to scholarship, admission
to such registration should be based upon evi-
dence of fitness for such independent work.
The principle of this type of registration once
approved by the faculty, ‘the administration of
it should be left largely to the departments, so
as to make it simple and flexible.

Departments might find it possible to have
syllabi, bibliographies and study hints avail-
able as an invitation to individual work. Oc-
casional interviews should be granted, but not
for the purpose of telling or teaching. In
certain subjects each individual’s work might
be so motivated and organized as to carry a
considerable number of students in this way
rather than in elass, and thereby lighten the
Departments might also
go so far as to recognize voluntary groups of

burden of teaching.

two or more students for cooperative study in

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

preparation for such tests as the department
might set. In every case, the student would
have the advantage of working at the highest
level of achievement, would be free from ithe
lock-step of the class room, free from the bur-
den of being bombarded with matters which
he already knows. Mathematics, history, gov-
ernment and psychology would be good ex-
amples of subjects to pursue in this manner.
Mathematics is peculiarly a personal affair;
it is a skill which the teacher can not impart.
In foreign language there is no reason why a
gifted student should spend two years in the
class room in learning to read French and Ger-
man; ‘but if he is given time and realizes what
it is for, he can read French or German litera-
ture and science and live in it and use it to
best advantage and thereby lay a better founda-
tion than he could by merely taking a course.
Even laboratory courses might well be mastered
in this way. Only gifted students ean profit
‘by this privilege. Inferior, mediocre or aver-
age students need to be nursed and coddled
by the methods we now employ for all. The
privilege is merely an honest recognition of the
fact that there are some who can learn for
themselves, without tutor, lecturer or class
whip.

4. Early contact with mature teachers. Re-
cently, a faculty committee in a auniversity
brought in a report representing essentially
this: (1) that elementary students should be
taught in sections not to exceed twenty-five;
(2) that elementary students should be taught
by the mature men in the department; (3) that
the teaching schedule for these men should be
reduced in order that they may have itime for
research; and (4) that salaries should be raised.
One member of that committee, representing a
very large department, was asked to prepare
a budget for his department embodying these
recommendations. Nothing more has been
It simply can’t be done.

With the present influx of students, there is
a tendency to reserve the most inspiring men
for the most advanced courses and leave lower
courses in the hands of cheap labor. This is
especially demoralizing to ithe gifted student.
When a department has from two to fifty sec-

heard of the report.

DECEMBER 8, 1922

tions in the elementary subject it can afford to
so organize the course ithat the academically
mature and successful man is made responsible
for the content and method and meets every
student in that course at least once a week.
This will probably of necessiity involve the com-
bination of the meeting of the class in large di-
visions for lectures, demonstrations, or formal
exercises under mature men and personal work
with the students in small sections under
younger men.

Let me hasten to say that this must not be
confounded wiith the old-fashioned lecture plan
with quiz sections; that plan is dead, or should
be. But that should not condemn the meeting
of ‘the class part of the ‘time in large divisions
and part of the time in small sections. Har-
vard was one of tthe worst sinners under the
old lecture and quiz systems. But to-day Har-
vard is in some departments setting a model
for this type of organization which imsures in-
spiration and thoroughness in the work. The
sophomore in economics, e.g., may work under
such men as Taussig, Carver, Burbank, Ripley
and Day in a single course and carries away
something which stays by him (through hfe.
The professor in charge of the course himself
carries one section made up of Ithe most gifted
students.

The plan I commend on the basis of my own
experience is to recognize three needs of in-
struction: (1) inspiration, motivation, and or-
ganization of the work; (2) systematic read-
ing, practical exercises, or experiments; (3)
self-expression. The first can be achieved in
divisions of from one to five hundred by ca-
pable men; ithe third must be done in small
sections; and the second may be directed either
from ‘the large division or the small section.
The first can be done only by a relatively ma-
ture teacher who has marked ‘ability in leader-
ship and the power of address. The third may
be done by well-selected, young teachers; the
second should represent the ingenuity of ‘the
mature teacher and the capacity for routine
and detail of the young man.

The organization and conduct of the large
division work may be in \the hands of one man.
But where there are distinct divisions in a de-

SCIENCE

647

partment, as in economics, sociology, botany,
or psychology, the first year course should be
a cooperative affair. There is no need or justi-
fication for electives ttioward a first year course
in a department. There should be only one
economics 1, one American history 1, one
botany 1; for the majority of students take
only one course in the depaytment and a course
of the second level may well be built upon the
general ‘orientation gained in a general survey

course. The finest and most exitreme embodi-

_ment of this principle is perhaps the course

in ontemporary civilization—a five-hour
course required of freshmen in Columbia Uni-
versity.+

5. Time.
that may be done for the gifted student. which
can not be prescribed but may be included in
the general faculty policy of liberality toward
the few students who give unmistakable evi-
dence of exceptional achievement. One of these
factors is time. 6

In diseussing the gifted student problem, a
professor who spoke with a German brogue
said, “Vot do ve professors vant? Ve vant
Vot does the gifted student vant? He
vanilts Itime.”’ And he was right. The gifted
student wants time to pursue his ideal; and
he can best get that by some generous policy
of exemption from formal training. This
comes hard. I well remember what precious
hours our faculty wasted in trying to keep Mr.
Steffanson, the now famous explorer, from sub-
mitting the evidence showing that he could
acquire on short notice those units of learning
which we have so logically prescribed in our
four year course, all of which he could have

There are a number of things

time.

met in a year or two while he was doing some
creative work on the side. (As a matter of
fact he did get permission to do that very thing
and succeeded. ).

This sounds like iconoclasm.
dean and the registrar and tthe professor. As
a practical administrator I am not calling for
any great or sudden revolutionary procedure;

4The October number of the Bulletin of the
Association of American University Professors
contains valuable material on ‘‘Initiatory
Courses for Freshmen.’’

It disturbs the

648

but I should like to enter a plea for the recogni-
tion of opportunity for reasonable treatment
of the gifted student commensurate with his
exceptional powers; and one of the conditions
for achievement is leisure and the privilege of
working at your own pace.

To the now itraditional practice of allowing
excess registration in proportion to quality of
eredit should be added the proviso that an ex-
cess schedule must include an honor course
each year, and general health and social orien-
tation should be taken into account.
is done, the student may combine the saving
of time with the winning of distinection—a type
of distinction which has real value. A flexible
seale of excess registration may then safely
have such range that the very gifted student
could complete the college course in three years
if he so desired.

Comradeship. The first and greatest need of
the gifted student is comradeship or fellow-
ship in the late adolescent pursuit of his ideal
if it be the search for truth. Each of us who
has had any.degree of success in original work
can look back to little incidents where a teacher
or a more advanced fellow student conveyed the
sentiment; you are good enough to be in my
company; see with me this vision; share with
me ithis harvest; let us seek truth first hand;
I want you ‘to fall in love with my problem;
over the mountain top there is hight. This can
not be achieved through any formal academic
procedure. Probably less than one fourth of
the college iteachers in the United States are
capable of participating im this privilege, and
yet the principle needs to be urged upon the
academic community in order that ‘those who
have this interest at heart may not trust the
machinery to do what it can not do; may not
underestimate the great significance of little
things in this direction, or may not in the in-
terest of modesty or academic courtesy hesi-
tate to exercise this privilege. It is a personal
affair and must therefore take the course of
natural, personal values, privileges, and re-
wards, given freely for (the love of it, living
for it asa father lives for his son.

For this reason, formal academic privileges
and procedures can not be prescribed or even

SCIENCE

If this

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1458

enumerated. Comradeship must be personal
and warm, involving privilege. But tthe out-
ward organizations must not be ignored. In-
vitation to the home; participation in small
groups, clubs, and societies; the enjoyment of
special laboratory and library privileges; the
exemption from hampering formalities; the en-
couragement of rewards of all kinds; ithe stimu-:
lation of competition; the organization of
rigorous academic wrangling and criticism; the
participation in the reading of manuscripts,.
‘the conduct of experiments, scientific expedi-
tions, and learned societies. These things are
all of very great value to the student who has
been taken ito comradeship for research as a
neophyte. They come to him because he has
been admitted to comradeship and in return he
gives his best.

He needs counsel to curb his enthusiasms, to
acquire fundamental habits and knowledge, to
lay good foundations through training in the
fundamentals, to fit himself into the social body
in which he lives, to care for his health and
manners, to seek reasonable outlet for his in-
genuity, to keep from being a hermit or a prig,
to keep in the humble attitude of a master who
is not puffed up over his achievement.

C. HE. SEASHORE
Stave UNIVERSITY oF Iowa

WHAT SHALL BE TAUGHT IN THE
FIRST YEAR OF COLLEGE
CHEMISTRY?!

THERE is much uncertainty among college
chemists as to the proper treatment of fresh-
men, some of whom had chemistry in high
school, while some did not. With a class not
exceeding one hundred and a somewhat limited
teaching staff, there is no better method than to
put them all in the same class with the same
text. No apology need be offered for such a
procedure. In such small classes the teacher
can keep in close touch with the individual
student and vary the program ‘to suit individual
possibilities. This is especially easy in the
laboratory drill where the experiments may be

1 Paper presented at the Pittsburgh meeting of
the American Chemical Society.

DECEMBER 8, 1922]

selected to fit the student’s preparation and
ability.

In larger institutions, it is more satisfactory
to group those with no previous training in a
separate class. It is to be hoped they had high
school physics as a seientifie foundation. Gen-
eral chemistry for such a class should be just
what the name implies—a general treatment

including traditional descriptive chemistry,
physical, industrial, organic, analytical and
something of the historical development.

Above all, even above the accumulation of facts,
‘this course should give training in real scien-
tifie thinking.

This seems like a large undertaking, but it
merely means that we take the student up on a
high mountain and show him the promised land.
The fact that the majority of ‘this class will
never study any more chemistry is added rea-
son for a proper breadth of treatment.

The problem is more difficult for students
who may possibly feel satisfied with their
knowledge of high school chemistry. They
enter college to be stimulated and it is fatal to
let them feel that college general chemistry
has but little in the way of novelty for them.
Hence I counsel against a mere hasty review
for one semester by way of itransition to some
advanced course. Such “rush” courses
deadly, dull and unsatisfactory to teacher and
pupil. Nothing short of a full year of rather
stiff general chemistry will serve the needs of
this class and it can be ttaught with all the

are

freshness
- appetites.

The high school course was good discipline.
It furnished information
inspired the student with a liking for chem-

needed to whet jaded intellectual

much useful and
istry. It is no reflection on high school teach-
ing to insist that under no circumstances shall
a year of chemistry be
omitted. The explanation is found in the
immaturity of the student, the high school en-
-vironment and the lack of time given to the
course.

college general

The college course must cover again the same
ground—and much more. It need not, how-
ever, be a dull rehash. The broader general
chemistry in college must present more funda-

SCIENCE

mental views.

649

Much more of physical chem-
istry, more exact quantitative experiments, and
a glimpse of the newer developments such as
radioactivity, atomic structure and colloids are
a proper part of such a course. A very simple
but reasonably complete system of qualitative
analysis may well ‘be used as the laboratory
drill during the second semester. This teaches
system, classification and comparison. The stu-
dent greatly enjoys his quest of the unknown
and sees a definite.use for a somewhat con-
fusing array of facts he may have accumu-
lated. That majority who never take ad-
vanced chemistry have a right to the joys and
benefits of qualitative analysis.

During this difficult freshman year the old
facts of high school chemistry must be dealt
with in an interpretative spirit. When taken
behind the scenes, so to’ speak, the student sees
a new meaning in the subject. There is small

. doubt that unless all ithat has gone before,

more or less loosely held in mind, is worked
over into a solid foundation ‘the student is
chemically crippled for life. A certain amount
of forceful repetition is ‘the essence of good
teaching. Hven in the second, third and fourth
years, we all find it profitable ito repeat and
expand what was presented in the freshman
year of general chemistry. This makes the
thorough chemist.

It may be well to mention a number of spe-
cific topics to be stressed for the class.

The historical development of the system of
molecular and atomic weights is far more con-
vineing to ‘the student than a mere statement
of the system as it now is. In fact a little of
the historical introduction to many _ topies
interests the class and develops the research
attitude of mind. It may seem absolutely
ridiculous to talk of research on the part of a
freshman, yet clever questioning as the steps
of a historical piece of research are discussed
will do much in stimulating the student into a
research attitude of mind.

Structural formulas appal the class on first
sight. Later familiarity breeds, not contempt,
but appreciation. The confusion of
formulas of. mitrogen, arsenic, antimony and

usual

phosphorus compounds is easily cleared up by

650
constant use of structural formulas. With such
practise the study of two chapters of organic
chemistry is not appalling.

A library shelf, easily accessible and espe-
cially selected for students of general chemis-
try, pays goods dividends. Other texts, books
on the applications and special advertising
pamphlets should fill this shelf. Not all will
read but those who do are the ones who take
advanced chemistry.

Stress must be placed on equilibrium, early
and late, on solutions, on that fascinating
chapter about the periodic system, on the
hydrocarbons and their derivations and such
other topics as appeal strongly ‘to ‘the teacher.

* * *% * * =

An informal talk with each student or a
written test on entrance will indicate ‘that some
who have had high school chemistry will do
better in the class with those who had none.

Since high schools vary widely in quality of”

instruction in chemistry (as do colleges also)
the mere name of preparatory chemistry
should not be accepted without some investi-
gation. Usually the record of the school is
sufficient evidence.
Harry N. Houmes
OBERLIN COLLEGE,
OBERLIN, OHIO

ON THE EXISTENCE OF A HITHERTO
UNRECOGNIZED DIETARY FAC-
TOR ESSENTIAL FOR RE-
PRODUCTION!

THe fact has been abundantly demonstrated
that rats may be reared on a dietary regime
consisting of “purified” protein, fiat and earbo-
hydrate to which an appropriate salt mixture
and adequate doses of the growth vitamines
Fat Soluble A and Water Soluble B have been

1 University of California, aided by the Dairy
Division of the Bureau of Animal Industry of
the United States Department of Agriculture, the
Committee for Research on Sex Problems of the
National Research Council and the California
Central Creameries. The writers desire also to
express their especial thanks to Mr. C. E. Gray,
of San Francisco, and Dr. C. W. Larson, of
Washington.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458:

added. We have employed a ration of casei
(18), cornstarch (54) and lard (15) to which
putterfat (9) and salts (4) are added, ithe ani-
mals receiving separately and daily .4 gram
each of dried whole yeast.

Such animals are sterile. They are chiefly
so in the first generation and wholly so in the
next succeeding one. The sterility of dietary
origin yields a highly characteristic picture.
Animals suffering from it do not differ so pro--
foundly from normal ones in their ovarian:
funetion as they do in placental behavior. Ap-
proximately the same number of Graafian fol-
licles mature and rupture per ovulation and!
the ova are fertilized and implanted. The
placente are abnormal. They may persist al-.
most throughout gestation but show as early
as the second day of their establishment begin-
ning blood extravasations which increase in ex-
tent. Resorption invariably overtakes the pro-
ducts of conception.

Natural foodstuffs contain a substance, X,.
which prevents such a sterility or which cures-
the disorder occasioned by the purified dietary
regime. We have thus been able to witness a
comparatively sudden restoration of fertility
‘to animals of proven sterility, and whose con-
trols continued sterile, by the administration:
of fresh green leaves of lettuce. Even ithe dried
leaves of alfalfa appear to possess a similar
potency. The proven efficacy of leaves invites
inquiry into ‘the certainty of segregation of
the new dietary factor from vitamines A and
C. As regards A, at is conceivable that amounts
of A adequate for normal growth, freedom ~
from eye disease and, indeed, vigorous health.
might sill be inadequate for the reproductive:
function. Such a coneeption is apparently
strengthened by the reappearance of fertility
which we have discovered to take place when
the butierfat quota in the above diet is in-
creased so as to constitute 24 per cent. by
weight.? A sufficient answer to this conception,.
however, is afforded by our demonstration that
in some dietaries reproduction may be un-
hindered when the A content is lower than in

2 Drummond (Biochem. Jour., xiii, 77) has, for-
instance, reported two generations of animals:
reared on 20 per cent. butter in this diet.

DECEMBER 8, 1922

our ration. Such a diet is furnished by rolled
oats (40), gelatin (10), casein (5), dextrin
(40.3), butiterfat (1), and salts (3.7) (MeCol-
lum). It is perhaps also pertinent to point
‘out that we have detected an invariable sign of
inadequacy in (the A factor of greater delicacy
than ‘those hitherto employed and may thus
recognize such inadequacy long before growth
impairment, for instance. The sign is con-
stituted by a highly characteristic aberration
of the estrous eycle. And we have been able
to demonstrate tthe persistence of fertility with
a wheat-milk ration (Sherman) even in the
absence of butterfat and when ithe A deficiency
is heralded by the continuous exhibition of the
new sign. The beneficial effect of a very high
percentage of butterfat> consequently, seems

preferably explained ‘by its possession of a,

definite though low quota of the fertility con-
ferring substance. Furthermore, a sample of
cod liver oil tested by us and proven to possess
a much superior A content to butterfat is far
less efficacious than butter in curing or pre-
venting the impairment of the reproductive
function.

The beneficial dietary factor can not be iden-
tical with the antiscorbutic vitamine C, fior
curative effects have been secured when ground
whole wheat was added ito our purified ration,
and the cereals are, of course, notably deficientt
in C. Moreover, although some favorable in-
fluence on growth thas been noted, at thas been
impossible for us to secure with orange juice
the fertility effects so evident with lettuce.

Lastly, we may refer to the suggestions
either implied or expressed in the publications
of some investigators (Osborne and Mendel,

Kennedy and Palmer) that yeast contains some -

toxic substance inimical to the organs of gen-
eration and hence causing sterility or that it
simply does not contain enough of the water
soluble vitamine B. The curative foods could
hardly be assumed to. detoxify. Nor do we
believe our animals suffered from lack of B,
for growth was excellent; and as much as 25
per cent. by weight of yeast (which must have
given a great surplus of B) did not change the
result. Fertility, when wheat germ is used as
a source for B, results not from more B but be-
cause wheat germ is also rich in X.

SCIENCE

651

We have undertaken a senies of experiments
designed to trace further in natural foods the
distribution of ‘the substance thus shown to be
indispensable for ithe production of healthy
young. ;

Hersert M. Evans
K. Scorr BisHop

THE RECENT SCIENTIFIC WORK OF
ROBERT WHEELER WILLSON

Ir must be of interest ito the many friends.
and former students of Professor Robert W.
Willson to know that the last months of his.
life were actively occupied in the successful
solution of certain scientific problems.

Professor Willson died at his home in Cam-
bridge, November 1, 1922, in the seventieth
year of his age. He was a graduate of Har-
vard College in the class of 1873, and took his
Ph.D. at Wiirzburg a few years later, after
specializing in physics, a subject which, in con-
junction with his astronomical experience, gave-
just the right equipment for his solution of
aerial navigation problems at ‘a much later-
dalte.

The main facts of his professional career are
available in the biographical reference books,
while others can speak more fully than I of
his devotion to the building up of a depart--
ment of astronomy in Harvard College. Fol-
lowing his retirement as professor emeritus in
1919, he devoted an increasing amount of time
to his own work in Cambridge along the line
of air navigation instruments, and this later
work is not perhaps so well known.

His development of ithe air-craft sextant was
a notable achievement successfully demon-
strated during the war, and widely adopted
Anti-aircraft trans-Atlantic
flight, and ground speed indicators were only

since. defense,
a few of the subjects which claimed his keen-
est attention and in which definite progress.
had been made. He was fully aware of all the
trying obstacles which must be met in tthe de-
velopment of instruments for practical air-
plane use, and not only had a sound, scientifie
solution in readiness for each ease, but was
equally alert to suggest the most economical
method of construction.

652

Some of ithis material had been prepared
for publication in ‘the form of a paper on
Air Navigation and sent to press early in Octo-
ber, following which his attention was eagerly
concentrated on further problems. So ithe end
came like a ship holding its course accurately,
and passing out of sight with all sails set.

°M. H. D.

PIrTsBURGH, Pa.

NOVEMBER 6, 1922

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
MORTALITY FROM CANCER

THE Department of Commerce announces
that the returns compiled by the Bureau of the
Census show that over 76,000 deaths were due
to cancer in the death registration area of the
United States in 1921, and assuming that the
rest of the United States had as many deaths
from this cause in proportion to the population,
the total number of deaths from cancer in the
entire United States for 1921 was 93,000, while
for 1920 the number is estimated as 89,000 or
4,000 less than for 1921.

The trend of the cancer death rate is upward,
the rate for 1921 being higher than that for
any earlier year in twenty-three of the thirty-
four states. The cancer death rate in the regis-
tration area in 1921 was 86 per 100,000 popu-
lation, against 83.4 for 1920. In comparing
the death rate from cancer in one state with
that in another, the bureau uses “adjusted”
rates in order ito make allowance for differ-
ences in the age and the sex distribution of
the population, because, generally speaking,
only persons in middle life and old age have
cancer, so that a state with many old persons
may be expected to have more deaths from
cancer than a state with comparatively few
old persons.

The highest “adjusted” cancer rate for 1921
is 99.6 per 100,000 population for the state of
Massachusetts, and the lowest is 47.6 for the
state of South Carolina. For a few states ad-
justed rates have been calculated separately for
the white and colored population. In this
group of states the highest adjusted cancer
rate for the white population is 95.9 per

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

100,000 population for New York and the
highest rate for the colored population is 90.6,
also for New York. The lowest adjusted can-
cer rate for the white population is 51.5 for
Tennessee and the lowest for the colored popu-
lation is 36.4 for Florida.

The adjusted rates show that the northern
states have comparatively high and the south-
ern states comparatively low cancer mortality,
while there is little difference between the ad-
justed cancer rates of the white and colored
races of the same states.

COLORS FOR TRAFFIC SIGNALS

THIRTY-NINE men, representing as many ad-
ministrative bodies, trade associations, scien-
tifie or technical societies, and government de-
partments, make up the sectional committee on
colors for traffic signals which was organzed
at ‘a meeting in New York City on November 9
under ‘the auspices of the American Engineer-
ing Standards Committee. In opening the
meeting, P. G. Agnew, secretary of the Amer-
ican Engineering Standards Committee, said
that this was unquestionably the most repre-
sentative group that has ever come together
anywhere in the world to discuss this subject.

The committee elected as its officers the fol-
lowing representatives of the three sponsors
for the code: Chairman, Charles J. Bennett,
state highway commissioner of Connecticut,
representing the American Association of
State Highway Officials; vice-chairman, Dr.
M. G. Lloyd, representing the United States
Bureau of Standards; secretary, Walter S.
Paine, research engineer, Atna Insurance Com-
pany, Hartford, Conn., representing the Na-

tional Safety Council.

Because of the difficulty of ‘bringing the en-
tire sectional committee together at frequent
intervals an executive committee was appointed
with instructions to collect information on the
subjects coming within the scope of the code,
to digest this information, to appoint sub-
committees, to arrange for the necessary re-
search work, and to draft definite reeommenda-
tions for the consideration of the sectional
The executive committee consists
of the following:

committee.

DECEMBER 8, 1922]

Bert Lord, New York State Department of
Motor Vehicles,* Albany, N. Y., representing the
group of administrative officials and departments;

T. D. Pratt, Motor Truck Association, New
York City, representing the owners and operators
of motor vehicles; :

G. G. Keleey, American Gas Accumulator Com-
pany, Newark, N. J., representing the group of
automotive accessory, signs and signal manufac-
turers ;

A. H. Rudd, Safety Section, American Railway
Association, representing the railroads;

W. P. Young, general manager, National Auto-
mobile Underwriters Conference, representing the
group of insurance interests on the sectional com-
mittee ;

W. P. Eno, of the Eno Foundation, Washing-
ton, D. C., representing the group of scientific and
technical societies ;

Harry Meixell, of the Motor Vehicle Confer-
ence Committee, New York City, representing the
motor vehicle manufacturers;

and the three officers of the sectional com-
mittee.

The sectional committee by resolution invited
the Aeronautical Chamber of Commerce of the
United States to participate in the work of
the committee. at the
organization meeting of the sectional committee
to appoint a sub-committee to investigate the
efficiency of all color signals now in use as
traffic signals, and where possible to ascertain
the reasons for adopting certain colors for
specific uses. This committee will investigate
the use of various types of semaphores and
silent policemen. Another committee will make
an original study of specific colors for definite
uses as a check upon previous researches and
to establish certain colors for traffic signals.
A third committee will study non-luminous
signs and signals and propose, after thorough
research, signs of definite colors and shapes for
highways and also for railroad crossings.

It was also decided

THE CHARLES A. COFFIN FOUNDATION

On May 16, 1922, Mr. Charles A. Coffin, in
his seventy-eighth year, retired from the active
leadership of the General Electric Company.
Mr. Coffin has been identified with the develop-
ment of the electrical industry since 1882. He
was the founder and creator of the General

SCIENCE

-mittee appointed by the board.

653

Electric Company, of which he has been the
inspiration and leader for thirty years. As
an expression of appreciation of Mr. Coffin’s
great work not only for the General Electric
Company but also for the entire electrical
industry and with the desire to make this ap-
preciation enduring and constructive as Mr.
Coffin’s life and work have been, the board of
directors of the General Electric Company
created on ‘his retirement and now desire to
announce the “Charles A. Coffin Foundation.”

A fund of $400,000, to be known as the
“Charles A. Coffin Foundation,” has {been set
aside and the income, amounting to approxi-
mately $20,000 per year, will be available for
encouraging and rewarding service in the elec-
trical field by giving prizes to its employees,
recognition to lighting, power and railway
companies for improvement in service to the
public and fellowships to graduate students and
funds for research work at technical schools
and colleges. The foundation will be con-
trolled and administered by a foundation com-
This ¢om-
mittee, within the limits of ithe purposes for
which the foundation is created, will have
power to change the conditions applicable to

“the distribution of the fund and the amounts

for each particular purpose.
The committee proposes to distribute the in-
come of the foundation as follows:

First. Eleven thousand dollars ($11,000) in
prizes for the most signal contributions by. em-

_ployees of the General Electrie Company toward

the increase of its efficiency or progress in the
electrical art. Particularly, the prizes are to
further encourage suggestions from workmen.
With each prize, the company will give a cer-
tificate of award.

Second. A gold medal, to be known as the
“*Charles A. Coffin Medal,’’ will be awarded an-
nually to the public utility operating company
within the United States which, during the year,
has made the greatest contribution towards
increasing the advantages of the use of electric
light and power for the convenience and well-
being of the public and the benefit of the indus-
try. The company receiving the medal will also
receive one thousand ($1,000) for its employees’
benefit or similar fund.

654

Third. A gold medal, to be known as the
*“Charles A. Coffin Medal,’’ will be awarded an-
nually to the electric railway company within the
United States which, during the year, has made
the greatest contribution towards increasing the
advantages of electric transportation for the con-
venience and well-being of the public and the
benefit of the industry. The company receiving
the medal will also receive one thousand dollars
($1,000) for its employees’ benefit or similar
fund.

Fourth. Five thousand dollars ($5,000) is to
be awarded annually for fellowships to graduates
of American colleges and technical schools who,
by the character of their work, and on the recom-
mendation of the faculty of the institution where
they have studied, could with advantage continue
their research work either here or abroad; or
some portion or all of the fund May be used to
further the research work at any of the colleges
_ or technical schools in the United States. The
fields in which these fellowships and funds for
research work are to be awarded are: Electricity;
physics; physical chemistry.

A committee appointed by the foundation com-
mittee will award such fellowships and funds for
research work, with the advice and cooperation
of a committee of three, one to be appointed by
each of the following: The National Academy of
Sciences, Institute of Electrical
Engineers and the Society for the Promotion of
Engineering Education. This committee is to be
known as the ‘‘Charles A. Coffin Fellowship and
Research Fund Committee’? and the fellowships
are to be known as the ‘‘Charles A. Coffin Fel-
lowships.’’

the American

The board of directors of the General Elec-

tric Company has appointed as the “Charles

A. Coffin Foundation Committee” the follow-
ing officers of the company: A. W. Burchard,
J. R. Lovejoy, E. W. Rice, Jr., Gerard Swope
and O. D. Young.

The following committee, to administer the
fund and to aet with organizations outside the
company, have been appointed:

Committee to cooperate with the National Elec-
trie Light Association: A. H. Jackson, J. R.
Lovejoy, vice-presidents.

Committee. to cooperate with the American
Electric Railway Association: J. G. Barry and
A. H. Jackson, vice-presidents. :

Committee to cooperate with the National

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

Academy of Sciences, American Institute of Elee-
trical Engineers and the Societys for the Promo-
‘tion of Engineering Education: E. W. Rice, Jr.,
honorary chairman, A. H. Jackson, vice-president,
and W. R. Whitney, director of research labora-
tory.

THE SOCIETY OF SIGMA XI

THE annual convention of the Society of the
Sigma Xi will be held in Cambridge on Decem-
ber 27, at the time of the meetings of the Amer-
ican Association for the Advancement of
Science. The program of the convention
ineludes the following:

2:30 P.M. Business session.

6:15 P.M. Annual dinner.

8:45 P.M. Joint meeting with the American
Association for the Advancement of Science.
Address, ‘‘The Nation and its Health,’’ by Presi-
dent Farrand of Cornell University.

The chapters of Sigma Xi are entitled to del-
egates with the right to vote at the business
session. Attendance alt the business session or
the dinner or the evening address is not lim-
ited to delegates. All members of the society
are invited to be present and will be welcome
at all the meetings. A special desk for the
registration of members of Sigma Xi will be
provided in the registration bureau of the asso-
ciation, where programs and dinner tickets
may be secured. Clerks will be in attendance
at this registration desk on December 26 and 27.

The (business session of the convention will
be one of unusual importance, since 2? ¢com-
plete revision of the constitution of the society
is to be brought up for adoption. The revision
has been made necessary by the growth of the
society as well as by the expansion of its work.
Sigma Xi is no longer a society of a few
chapters scattered among the educational insti-
tutions of the country, but it is a large organ-
ization numbering thirty-eight chapters im
universities and in some of the research insti-
tutions of the country. In addition to this
active membership there are scattered over the
country and ‘the world some fifteen thousand
members of Sigma Xi, who by the provisions
of the new constitution will be brought into
closer touch with the work of the society. All

‘DECEMBER 8, 1922

members of Sigma Xi, whether delegates from
chapters or not, are invited and urged to take
this occasion to get acquainted with the new
spirit in the organization.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Tue Lalande Medal of the Paris Academy
of Sciences has been awarded to Dr. Henry
Norris Russell, director of the Princeton Ob-
servatory. The Janssen Medal goes to Dr.
Carl Stormer, professor of pure mathematics
at the University of Christiana, for his work
on the aurora borealis.

Dr. Stmon FLExNer, director of the Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research, New
York, was elected an honorary member of the
Copenhagen Medical Society at a recent meet-
ing celebrating the one hundred and fiftieth
anniversary of that body.

AT a general meeting of the Royal Scottish
Geographical Society, held on November 7, the
society’s gold medal was awarded to Professor
J. W. Gregory, University of Glasgow, in
recognition of the scientific importance of re-
sults obtained by him through explorations in
Spitsbergen, Australia, East Africa and south-
west China.

Dr. J. Borpet, professor of bacteriology at
Brussels, has been given an honorary degree
by the University of Paris.

Dr. H. J. KamMertincH Onnes, of the
University of Leiden, celebrated on November
11 the completion of his fortieth
service as professor of physics.

year of

A BANQUET was tendered Dr. Calleja, pro-
fessor of histology at the University of Madrid,
on the occasion of his fiftieth professional
anniversary.

Dr. JoHN W. HarsHpercer, professor of
botany.at the University of Pennsylvania, has
been made a member of the Swedish Linnean
Society and of the Finnish Forestry Society.

Dr. F. W. Peazsopy, of Boston, professor of
medicine at the Medical School of Harvard
University, and physician-in-chief of the Bos-
ton City Hospital, has been elected a member

SCIENCE €55

of the Council on Pharmacy and Chemistry to
fill the vacancy caused by the resignation of
Dr. C. L. Alsberg, formerly chief of the
Bureau of Chemistry, Department of Agricul-
ture, and now director of the Food Research
Institute of Stanford University.

Dr. Kenyon L. Burrerrieup, president of,
the Massachusetts Agricultural College, has
been reelected president of the American
Country Life Association for 1922-23. C. J.
Galpin, of the U. S. Department of Agricul-
ture, is first vice-president.

Tue British Institution of Civil Engineers
has made the following awards for papers
printed in the Proceedings for the session
1921-1922: A George Stephenson gold medal
to Dr. B. C. Laws (London); Telford pre-
miums: to Professor L. Bairstow (London), Dr.
A. J. Sutton Pippard (London), Mr. E. A.
Cullen (Brisbane), Mr. H. H. Dare (Rose-
ville, N.S. W.), and Mr, F. W. Stephen (Aber-
deen). For papers read before meetings of
students in London and the provinces the fol-
lowing awards have been made: A Miller prize
and the James Forrest medal to Mr. F. H.
Bullock (Cardiff); and Miller prizes to Mr.
J. G. Mitchell (London), Mr. A. G. M’Donald
(London) and Mr. Harry Wolf (Manchester).

Proressor E. W. Brown, of Yale University,
will be absent from New Haven until April,
1923. His address will be care of the Bishop
Museum, Honolulu, H. I.

Dr. R. S. Breep, chief in research (bacteri-
ology) at the New York State Agricultural
Station, has been granted six months’ leave of
absence beginning on March 1, 1923, for the
purpose of special study of bacteriological
problems at the Pasteur Institute and of dairy
sanitation in France, Denmark and Holland.

Dr. Louis JI. Dusty, statistician of the
Metropolitan Life’ Insurance Company, will
deliver the third Harvey Society Lecture at the
New York Academy of Medicine, on Saturday
evening, December 16, 1922. His subject will
be “The Possibilities of Human Life.”

At the November meeting of the. Society
of the Sigma Xi of the University of Wiscon-

656

sin, Professor Louis Kahlenberg, of the depart-
ment of chemistry, delivered the address on
the subject, “The separation of erystalloids
from one another by dialysis.”

Proressor Cassius J. Keyser delivered an
address on the “Mathematical obligations of
philosophy and education” at the weekly con-
vocation of Connecticut College on November
14. On December 2 he gave an address on
“Mathematics and man” at the meeting of the
Association of Teachers of Mathematics of the
Middle States and Maryland held at Wilming-
ton, Del.

A statug of Claude Louis Berthollet, the
French chemist, has been erected at his birth-
place, Annecy, on the occasion of the cen-
tenary of his death on November 6, 1822.

Dr. Apert Henry Bucr, from 1887 to 1904
professor of otology in Columbia University,
a leading aurist in New York City, died on
November 16, in his eighty-first year.

Dr. Oscar Hertwie, director of the Institute
of Histology at the University of Berlin, died
on October 27, aged seventy-three years.

Tue death is announced of Dr. Lassar-Cohn,
since 1894 professor of chemistry at Konigs-
berg.

-Mr. James A. Ter, well known for his re-
searches on tthe ethnology of British Columbia,
died on October 30 at Merrit, British Colum-
bia. Mr. Teit carried on researches in connec-
tion with the work of the Jesup North Pacific
Expedition of the American Museum of Nat-
ural History. He contributed to the work of
the Bureau of American Ethnology and to the
Anthropological Department of the Geological
Survey of Canada. During tthe last years of
his life, Mr. Teit succeeded in organizing the
Indians of British Columbia for the purpose of
acting collectively in necessary negotiations
with the Canadian government relating to
questions of land holding, fishing rights and
other matters concerning ithe life of the natives.

Prorressor A. V. Vassturev, of the Univer-
sity of Petrograd, sends us the following note:
“Professor A. A. Markov (1856-1922), emer-
itus professor of the University of Petrograd,
member of the Russian Academy of Science,

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

died at Petrograd ion July 27. A mathematician
of world-wide reputation, Professor Markov
was a graduate of the University of Petrograd,
pupil and follower of Chebyshev, Korkin and
Zolotarev. The main fields of his investigations
were the theory of indefinite binary and ternary
quadratic forms and ithe theory of linear dif-
ferential equation (hypergeometrical equa-:
tion).~ His brilliant achievements brought him
at the age of thirty the honor of being elected.
member of the Russian Academy of Science.
His works on the calculus of finite differences
and on the theory of probabilities were trans-
lated into German and published in 1896 and
1912, respectively.”

PROFESSOR VASSILIEV also writes: “Professor
L. A. Chugaev (1873-1922) died of typhoid
fever at the city of Griazovizy in the province
of Vologda on September 23, One of the most
eminent of Russian chemists, Professor
Chugaev was a professor in ‘the University of
Petrograd, and director of the Institute for the
Investigation of Platinum. His various arti-
cles on camphor, platinum, cobalt and nickel
were published both in Russia (Lhe Journal of
the Physico-Chemical Society of Russia) and
in western Hurope (Journal of the Chemical
Society, Zeitschrift fiir anorganische Chemie,
ete.).”

Tuer fourteenth annual meeting of the Pale-
ontological Society will be held Thursday to
Saturday, December 28 to 30, in the Natural
Science Building, University of Michigan. The
address of Charles Schuchert, retiring presi-
dent of the Geological Society of America, will
be delivered in the closing hour of the morning
session of that society, Thursday, December 28.
The address of W. D. Matthew, retiring presi-
dent of the Paleontological Society, on the sub-
ject “Recent progress and trends in vertebrate
paleontology” will be given at 2 P.M., Friday,
December 29. The members are invited to the
annual smoker at 9 P.M. Thursday and the
annual dinner at 7 P.M. Friday with the
Geological Society of America.

Tue Eleventh International Physiological
Congress will be held in Edinburgh, from July
23 to July 27, 1923, under the presidency of

DECEMBER 8, 1922

Sir Edward Sharpey Schafer, M.D., F.R.S.
Those who desire to ‘be enrolled as members are
requested to forward their names and addresses,
together with the amount of their subscription
(25 shillings), to Miss Charlton, Department
of Physiology, University, Edinburgh, who
will send on request particulars of hotels and
lodgings, and all other necessary information.

In its issue of October 28 Nature says: “In
an article on Lord Incheape’s task in the Swn-
day Times of October 22,
member of the government of India, Lord
Meston, makes an alarming suggestion. Speak-
ing of things ‘useful, but not essential,’ he
says, “many of the. research institutes amd the
like will come under ‘the shears.’ The illiberal
spirit which inspired our domestic wielders of
the axe may thus be carried by one of them ito
India—a country which, more ithan any other,
perhaps, has benefited by the application of
science to ‘useful’ purposes. The plant breed-
ers there, alone, have literally added millions
to the country’s wealth; new wheats and cot-
tons yielding 20 to 30 per cent. more than the
indigenous varieties have already been success-
fully introduced. It must not be forgotten
that, in India, ithe prosperity of agriculture is
a fundamental element of the solvency of the
government, for there, the state, as owner of
the soil, takes one half of the rental value of
the land. The sum thus raised approaches a
moiety of the whole taxation of the country.
It is to be hoped that such a suicidal policy as
that indicated by Lord Meston will not be ad-
vocated iby Lord Incheape, though as a quon-
dam member of the Geddes ‘Committee he may
be inclined to repeat its mistakes.”

Dr. H. M. Quanuger, head of the Institute
for Phytopathology at Wageningen, Holland,
announces that an international phytopatho-
logical conference is being organized to meet
in Holland in June, 1923. The committee in
charge consists of Professor Westerdijk, Mr.
vy. Poeteren, and Dr. v. Slogteren in addition
to Dr. Quanjer. A cordial invitation is ex-
tended to Americans. Detailed announcement
be expected later and meanwhile any
inquiries may be addressed to Dr. Quanjer.

a former finance

may

SCIENCE

657

THE program for the second annual meeting
of the Science Section of the Asscciation of

Colleges and Preparatory Schools of the
Middle States and Maryland held at the

Tower Hill School, Wilmington, Delaware, on
Saturday, December 2, 1922, at 9:45 A.M., was
as follows: Address on “Science teaching in
schools and colleges,’ Dr. Charles L. Reese,
chemical director, E. I. duPont deNemours and
Company. Symposium on “Outstanding Prob-
lems of the Seience Curriculum” (ten-minute
papers): “The present status of science in the
high schools of New York City,” Rosemary F.
Mullen, Washington Irving High School, New
York City; “The ideal science curniculum for
the high school,’ J. M. Arthur, Tome School,
Port Deposit, Md.; “The elective system and
the science curriculum in the secondary
school,” Henry M. Snyder, Wilmington High
School; “Biology in the science curriculum,”
Winifred J. Robinson, dean of Women’s Col-
lege, University of Delaware, Newark, Dela-
ware; “The status of the American Chemical
Society on the correlation of high school and
college chemistry,” Neil E. Gordon, University
of Maryland, secretary of Chemical Education
Section, American Chemical Society. Address
on “The relation between science and modern
religious thought, Dr. 8. C. Schmucker, pro-
fessor of biology, State Normal School, West
Chester, Pa.

Tue University of Paris has published com-
parative statistics of students matriculated in
1921 and 1922, which are quoted in the Journal
of the Medical Association. In July, 1921, the
total matriculation reached 21,185 (17,993 men
and 3,192 women). In 1922 the number had
21,612 (18,066 and 3,546
women), or an inerease of 427 students. The
department most strongly represented in 1922

grown to men

was law. Then came medicine, with 4,639 stu-
dents (738 women); belles-lettres, with 3,381
students (1,450 women); seiences, with 3,179
students (532 women), and pharmacy, with
743 students (234 women). The department in
which the most women are enrolled is that of
belles-lettres (1,450 women as against 1,931

men). From 1921 to 1922 the number of

658

French students at the University of Paris
increased by $59, while the number of for-
eigners decreased by 332.

THE annual report of the general progress of
the British Museum and of the Natural His-
tory Museum during 1921 has been issued.
Notes by Sir F. G. Kenyon and Sir Sidney
F. Harmer deseribe the additions made to the
collections and the rearrangement of rooms.
During the year 901,209 persons visited the
British Museum, of whom 159,177 were read-
ing room students. Visitors to the Natural
History collections in Cromwell Road numbered
479,476.

PRELIMINARY announcements by the Austra-
lian Research Council indicate ‘the scope of the
Pan-Pacifie Scientifie Congress to be held in
Australia in August, 1923. The program calls
for organized conferences on fundamental
topics in anthropology, agriculture, botany, en-
tomology, geography, geology, geodesy and
zoology. Among the discussions in geology
formulated by E. C. Andrews are “Relation of
coral reefs to glaciation,’ “Structure of the

Pacific,’ “Mountain building and igneous
intrusion,” “Carboniferous and Permian strat-
igraphy’ and ‘Mineral resources of the
Pacific.” Arrangements are being made for

excursions to the desert, to the tropical jungles
and to living coral reefs. By request of ‘the
Australian committee, headed by Sir T. Edg-
worth David, the National Research Council,
which organized the First Pan-Pacific Scientific
Conference at Honolulu in 1920, is cooperating
to insure a profitable meeting for 1923.

ReEPoRTS from Commander J. C. Thompson
and Hans G. Hornbostel, representing the
Bishop Museum, indicate successful outcome of
the explorations in Guam and in the southern
Marianne Islands. Much information has been

the culture of vanished
Chamorros, a flourishing race, at the time of
Magellan’s visit in 1521. Under the direction
of M. F. Malcolm, assisted by the governor of
Saipan, the remarkable ruins on the Japanese
island of Tinian, visited by Anson (1749),
Mortimer (1791) and Freyeinel (1817), are
being studied with a view to enlarging the
knowledge of migration routes and inter-rela-
tions of Pacific peoples.

obtained regarding

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

Harvarp University has come into posses-
sion of ithe Farlow botanical library, one of the
most valuable collections of books dealing with
cryptogamic botany in the world, quarters
having been provided for it which meet satis-
factorily the conditions of gift contained in
the will of Professor William G. Farlow, who
died in 1919. Under Prorfessor Farlow’s will,
this collection, comprising 11,000 volumes, was
given to Harvard on condition that, within
three years after the testator’s death, suitable
arrangements should be made for placing it in
fireproof quarters in proximity to the Farlow
herbarium of cryptogamic plants, already
owned by the university. These conditions
have been met by ‘the decision of the Harvard
Corporation to house both the Farlow library
and the herbarium in the Divinity Library
building.

THE expedition sent last July by the Amer-
ican Museum of Natural History ‘to the island
of Santo Domingo to secure, if possible, speci-
mens of the rhinoceros iguana and the giant
tree frog, has returned to New York with a
large collection, including over two hundred
living specimens in addition to the preserved
material. The expedition was financed by the
Angelo Heilprin Fund and the materials which
it collected will be installed in the museum’s
new Hall of Reptiles, at present under con-
struction. Under ithe leadership of Dr. and
Mrs. G. Kingsley Noble, ‘both of the museum
staff, the party crossed the entire length of
the Dominican Republic while pursuing its in-
vestigations. After exploring the Quita
Espuela, an outlying mountain range in the
northeastern part of the island, the expedition
crossed to Constanza, in the heart of the cen-
tral Cordillera. From there it pushed on to
Barahona, and finally to Los Lajas on the
Haitian border.

Tue Sigma Xi Club of Southern California
held its first regular meeting in Los Angeles
on the evening of October 28. About eighty-
SIX persons were present including members
from numerous Southern California towns.
Dr. W. L. Hardin, president of the club, pre-
sided. Professors R. A. Millikan, C. G. Dar- ~
win and Paul Epstein, of the California Insti-
tute of Technology, were guests of the elub and

DECEMBER 8, 1922

were elected honorary members. Professor
Millikan told of ithe activities of the scientific
committee of the League of Nations, of which
he is a member, and discussed what is desira-
ble in international cooperation in scientific
matters. Professor Darwin addressed the club
on “The nucleus of the atom.’’ The following
officers were elected for the ensuing year:
President, W. L. Hardin, Mt. Washington, Los
Angeles; vice-president, L. S. Weatherby, Uni-
versity of Southern California; secretary, P.
W. Merrill, Mt. Wilson Observatory; treasurer,
EK. E. Chandler, Occidental College.

Nature notes the assignment to science of the
proceeds of the first performance of a great
play by a leading dramatist. The play was the
tragedy “Judith,” by M. Henri Bernstein, pro-
duced at the Gymnase Théatre, Paris, on Octo-
ber 12, before a brilliant and distinguished as-
sembly, which comprised ministers of state and
the chief social and intellectual leaders of the
city. The receipts were for the benefit of the
French Confederation of Scientific Societies,
and amounted 'to about $5,000. M. Bernstein
gave /his royalty as author, and Mme. Simone,
who took the ititle part and is said to have ob-
tained the greatest triumph of her career, de-
voted her fee to the same purpose.

WE learn from the Journal of the American
Medical Association that the national alliance
to promote an increase in population in France
is planning a competitive contest with prize
awards totaling 120,000 franes for the best
essays setting forth the eritical demographic
situation and the best means of combating the
danger. The first prize is 50,000 franes; the
second, 10,000 franes; the third, 8,000 frances,
while the balance of the 120,000 franes will be
distributed in small sums. The essay which is
awarded the first prize will be printed by the
national alliance and 500,000 copies will be
distributed throughout the country. The com-
petitors will deal more especially with the fol-
lowing topics, but they will not be confined to
these: (A) The evil as it exists: (1) the de-
crease of the birth rate in France, during the
past century; the inevitable further decrease
in the future if the most energetic measures are
not adopted, and (2) the dangers that lurk in

SCIENCE

659

the fall of the birth rate and the catastrophe
that threatens not only the life of the nation
but also of the individual. (B) The proposea
remedies: (1) the respect due to large families
and the advantages that they deserve; (2) the
reforms needed to raise the birth rate—at the
price of financial sacrifices, if necessary; if by
the expenditure of certain sums an increase in
the number of births ean be brought about, no
money could be better expended, and (3) in-
struction in the matter of the moral, social and
patriotic duty of paternity and maternity—
their joys and their rewards.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Tue University of Pennsylvania will receive
$200,000 for the establishment of a department
of clinical surgery from ‘the estate of Edmund
A. W. Hunter. The (bequest was made with
the provision that the addition to the university
be known tas “The Agnew and Hunter Depart-
ment of Clinical Surgery,” in memory of Dr.
D. Hayes Agnew and Dr. Charles D. Hunter.
The latter was the son of the donor.

A runp of $60,000 for establishing a chair
at Tulane University of tropical -diseases and
hygiene, and one amounting to $30,000 for
constructing an isolation ‘building for the
Charity Hospital will eventually be available
to these institutions under the will of the late
William G. Vincent.

THe trustees of Hamilton College have
authorized the erection of a lbiolegy-geology
and museum building to cost approximately
$225,000, and the construction of an addition
to the chemistry building the estimated cost of
which is $60,000. It may be noted further
that the board of trustees, by unanimous vote,
with twenty-five of the twenty-eight members
of the board present, authorized the fixing of
four hundred as the ultimate and maximum
number of undergraduates in the college, and
directed that all building plans take that num-
ber into account as ithe total for which pro-
vision should ‘be made.

* RurH Oxey, Ph.D., has resigned from the

biochemical laboratory of the University of

660

Towa Hospital, Iowa City, to take up the
teaching of nutrition at the University of Cali-
fornia.

Dr. Witiiam E. Buatz has been appointed
instructor in psychology at the University of
Chicago.

Leopotpo B. UicHanco, Se.D. (Harvard),
has resumed his former work an the University
of the Philippines, where he has been ap-
pointed assistant professor of entomology at
the College of Agriculture, Los Bafios, P. I.
Dr. Uichanco had been on leave for about three
years, as a traveling fellow of the University
of the Philippines in the United States, spend-
ing the larger portion of this period in post-
graduate work at the Bussey Institution of
Harvard University.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
WEATHERING UNDER CONSTANT
CONDITIONS

Durine the past summer the writer visited
a number of the paleolithic caves of southern
France and northern Spain, and there had an
opportunity to study the effects of weathering
upon rocks and upon the works of man where
conditions have apparently remained un-
changed during a time which is variously esti-
mated at from 18,000 to 30,000 years.

Every geologist from his own observations
and reading can give many examples of rapid
weathering, such as that on the western front
of the Amiens Cathedral probably not an orig-
inal stone placed there by the builders in the
fifteenth century can be found; that the out-
side stones of Westminster Abbey have been
renewed five times over; that ithe stone of which
the British Houses of Parliament are built has
crumbled so rapidly that already it has been
necessary to replace many of the stone orna-
ments with cast iron.

On the other hand, so many objects showing
almost no evidence of weathering have been
taken from tombs in Egypt where they were

1J. W. Gregory, ‘‘Geology of To-day,’’ page
31.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

buried for many centuries that little surprise
was evinced when the Metropolitan Museum
Expedition of 1919-1920,? announced the dis-
covery at Thebes, in the chamber of the tomb
of a man of great wealth, of a large number
of remarkably preserved small wooden models
illustrating the daily life of his household:
brewers maling beer, cooks making bread,
boats with their boatmen, cattle fattening in
their stable. These wooden models, which are
“practically as perfect as the day they were
made,” were carved and stored away about
4,000 years ago, but so little have they been
affected by the agents of the weather that even
the finger and thumb prints of the men who
carried the figures up to the tomb are pre-
served as well as fly specks on the models and
spider-webs with dead spiders still in them.

It is perhaps because of the many archeolog-
ical discoveries in arid countries that we have
become accustomed to think of the agents of
the weather as working slowly only where
there is little or no moisture, but the wonder-
fully preserved paintings, engravings and clay
models which are to be seen in the moist caves
of southern France and northern Spain, and
which antedate the works of the Egyptians by
thousands of years, compel a modification of
these views.

When the polychrome paintings on the ceil-
ings of the great chamber of the eave of Alta-
mira, near Santander, Spain, were discovered,
careful observers doubted their authenticity be-
cause they showed so little evidence of great
antiquity: the paint is so fresh that it ean
easily be rubbed off with ‘the finger, the colors
are probably nearly as bright as when first
laid on, and there is no conspicuous flaking of
the surface. Notwithstanding their modern
appearance it is generally agreed that the
paintings were made by paleolithie artists
thousands of years before the pyramids were
built or Babylon founded.

In ithe cave of Combarrelles and in other
caves in the Dordogne region of southern
France the same absence of conspicuous weath-

2 Bull. Metropolitan Museum of Art, XV, De-
cember, 1920, pp. 12-40.

DECEMBER 8, 1922]

ering is marked: the only obvious change in .

the engravings made by paleolithic artists is
that the incisions have taken on the buff color
of the rock and are no longer white as when
first made.

In the cavern of Tue D’Audoubert on the
estate of Count de Begouen, near St. Girons,
in the Pyrenees, is an even more remarkable
example of lack of disintegration. In this
cave are the clay models of bison which are in
nearly as perfect condition as when made. A
clay model is almost a synonym for the
ephemeral for the reason that a short exposure
to ordinary air causes it to dry and erack, and
excessive moisture causes it to collapse. These
models of bison are in fact slightly cracked
but with this exception are unchanged. It is
possible that the cracks were formed within
the first few weeks after the figures were mod-
eled and that none has developed in the 18,000
to 30,000 years that have followed. This seems
incredible, but ‘the proof of very great age ap-
pears to ‘be well established.

The conditions under which the art of pale-
olithie man has been preserved almost un-
changed for thousands of years are to be found
in the uniform temperature, lack of sunlight,
and absence of circulating ground water.
Although the rock in the Altamira cave is sat-
uvated there has been slight movement of ‘the
ground water and consequently little solution
or deposition has been’ possible. In the cave
of Tue d’Audoubert there is now some solution
and ‘the composition of the water which drips
from the roof of the cave has changed slightly
as is shown in some of the stalagmites which
after being built by lime deposited from the
water now have crater-like depressions in their
summits showing ‘that the water is at present
under-saturated. It is probable, however, that
the moisture content of the air has remained
constant and ‘that, because of ‘this, the clay
models have not disintegrated. The remark-

3 Comte de Begouen: ‘‘Les Statues d’Argile
prehistoriques de la Caverne du Tue D’Audou-
bert (Ariége). Comptes rendus des séances de
L’Académie des Inscriptions et Belles Lettres,
1912, p. 532.

4 Macallister, R. S.: ‘‘A Text-book of Euro-
pean Archeology,’’ Vol. 1, 1921, p. 481.

SCIENCE

661

able preservation of the Egyptian wooden
models to which reference has been made is due
to uniform temperature, lack of sunlight and
absence of moisture.

The explanation of such remarkable preser-
vation therefore involves no new principle as
it is due to uniform temperature, absence of
sunlight, and non-cireulation of ground water.
These are, indeed, ‘the conditions under which,
deep down in the rocks, the skeletons of the
vertebrates of the past are preserved.

Herpman F. CLELAND

WILLIAMS COLLEGE

THE BEGINNINGS OF AMERICAN GEOLOGY

To THe Eprror or Scrence: In his letter,
“The Beginnings of American Geology”
(Science, October 27, 1922), Dr. Marcus Ben-
jamin (doubtless quite unintentionally) makes
a statemenit which is not only unsupported by
faets but which most unjustly reflects upon the
character and career of a distinguished Ameri-
can geologist, a president of ‘the Geological
Siociety of America, and also of ‘the American
Association for the Advancement of Saience,
and, I think, the most unselfish, modest and
self-effacing man of science I have ever known.

As in ‘these days whatever appears “in prinit”
is hkely to become material for the future
historian it seems worth while to correct the er-
roneous statement.

In his reference ito Dr. Newbenry’s connection
with the Geological Survey of Ohio there oc-
curs the phrase “owing |to the changes in po-
litical administration in Ohio he (Newberry)
found himself displaced by a subordinate.”

Neither of the two statements dneorporated
in this sentence is true.

No one who had the good fortune to know
Dr. Edward Orton, who was Newberry’s suc-
cessor as director of the survey, will be willing
to admit that there is the slightest foundation
for what is implied in the last phrase; and
those who are familiar with ‘the history of that
peniod of ithe survey know that Dr. Newberry’s
failure ito continue as its head was mot due to
a change in political administration in Ohio.

During twelve of the sixteen years covering
the entire period in which Dr. Newberry may
be supposed to have had any sort of connec:

662

tion with the survey, governors of the stalte
were of the party which was in power when it

was inaugurated through ithe interest and imitia-_

tion of President Hayes, himself twice governor
during ‘those years.

Nor is there any evidence to show an at-
titude of personal unfriendliness itowards Dr.
Newberry or the survey on the part of ‘the two
governors belonging to the other political fac-
tion, each of whom served one term.

The plain truth seems to be that for the
discontinuance of appropriations for the sup-
port of the survey under his administration and
for the final ending of it by legislative enact-
ment in 1882, Dr. Newberry, himself, was large-
ly if mot entirely responsible, though the finan-
cial crisis through which the whole country
was passing during the early 70’s doubtless
had much to do with the limitations put upon
its operations.

The people of Ohio had been led to believe
that the economic and especially the mineral
resources of the state would be developed by
ithe survey and it is mot suprising that ‘there
was impatience when after the lapse of ten
or fifteen years nothing of great value on this
phase of tthe work had appeared.

Instead there had been published elaborate
reports upon paleontology, involving large ex-
pense for beautiful (and valuable) plate illus-
trations, the cost of which for a single volume
being as much as $34,000.

Afiter ithree years Ithe legislature modified the
organization by creating a geological board
consisting of the governor, school commissioner
and the state treasurer, which was charged with
the general supervision of the survey, though
this had, apparently, little effect upon the pro-
gram of its operations.

Volume 4 of the series of reports was pub-
lished in 1882, thirteen years after the begin-
ning of the work and was devoted entirely to
vertebrate zoology.

In the meantime Dr. Orton, who had jbeen
one of Newberry’s principal assistants, had
been especially interested in the economic and
mineral resources of ithe state, the extent of
which was hardly realized at that time, and
material for Volume 5 had been gathered. In
April 1882 ‘the legislature made an appropria-
tion for ‘the cost of publishing this volume

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1458

and at the same time announced that “upon
the publication of said Volume 5 the Geological
Survey of Ohio is hereby declared to be com-
pleted.”

It was also provided in the same Act that the
publication of this volume should be in charge
of a geologist to be appointed by the governor.

The governor, the Hon. Charles Foster,
promptly appointed Dr. Orton, who had recent-
ly resigned the presidency of the Ohio State
University, which he had held from its or-
ganization in 1873, in order (to devote his entire
time to the professorship of geology in that
institution.

In 1884 Volume 5 was published, being de-
voted almost entirely to coal. It has always
been the most sought after publication of the
survey and the reaction tto its appearance was
a provision by the legislature “to extend and
complete :the account of the economic geology
of the state that was begun in Volume 5.” In
1888 Dr. Orton published a volume on petro-
leum ‘and natural gas which has been esteemed
as equal in value ito Volume 5.

The survey became and has continued to be
popular with the people of the state and it
has ever since been “a going concern.” On
the death of Dr. Orton in 1899 he was sue-
ceeded by his son, Edward Orton, Jr., whose
development of ithe ceramic interests and meth-
ods of the state were of nation-wide importance.
Desiring to devote most of his time to this
special field he resigned in 1906 and was suc-
ceeded by the present imeumbent, Professor
J. A. Bownocker who had served as assistant
geologist for several years, and who also fills
a chair of geology an the state university.

It is true that the fact of Dr. Newberry’s
absence during a large part of each year,
especially during the winter when ithe legisla-
ture was in session, had a good deal to do with
‘the dissatisfaction which developed a few years
after his work began. Although born in Con-
necticut he was, at the age of two years,
brought tto Ohio by his parents and the state
in which he grew up and was educated always
regarded ‘him as one of her illustrious sons.

He was a paleontologist rather than a geolo-
gist but if he had been tactful enough to place
the emphasis of the earlier years of the survey
upon those phases of it in which the people

DECEMBER 8, 1922]

were vitally interested the story of his connec-
tion with it might have been different. As it
was Ohio saw adjoining states rapidly develop-
ing their mineral resources as the result of geo-
logical surveys while her own organization
seemed to be producing only beautifully illus-
trated volumes concerning fossils.

There are enough sins legitimately left at the
door of state and national legislatures, im con-
nection with their dealings with science, with-
out adding to their number the failures and
mistakes which should really be charged 'to men
of science themselves.

T. C. MenpENHALI

RAVENNA, OHIO

NOVEMBER 7, 1922

THE COLLOIDAL STATE

Epitor or Science: It seems that one im-
portant basis of the anomalous \behavior of matt-
ter in ithe colloidal state of subdivision les in
the fact that, in the colloidal zone, increase in
dispersion is accompanied by a disproportion-
ately large increase in kinetic activity of the
ultramicrons, which reaches an extreme at
atomic or molecular dispersion. The speed of
motion of ultramicrons is itseif the resultant
of several factors (including size, temperature,
viscosity of dispersion medium, concentraition,
free electronic fields, ete.), but at probably
exercises a very considerable influence in re-
actions where colloids are involved, e.g., dif-
fusion, adsorption, enzyme action, ete.

For some time I have been accumulating data
bearing on ‘this question, and would be pleased
to hear from any readers of SctpncE who know
of pertinent experimental facts. Thus Zsigmon-
dy (“Colloids and the Ultramicroscope”) has
given tthe size of certain gold ultramicrons and
Ultra-
microspi¢c examination indicates that gel forma-
tion involves aggregation with cessation of
visible kinetic activity, and the zone of maxi-
mum degree of colloidality (J. Alexander,
J. Am. Chem. Soc., 43, p. 434, 1921) may be
that zone where the curve of firee

their relative amplitudes of motion.

surface
plotted against particle size, approaches and
erosses the curve of kinetic motion plotted
against particle size.

SCIENCE

663

An investigation will also be made of the
variations in size of ultramicrons and ultra-
microscopic activity with changes in free acidity
(H-ion cencentraition or py value).

JEROME ALEXANDER

50 East Torty-First STREET,

New York City,
NovEMBER 13, 1922

NOTE ON THE FUSARIUM WILT DISEASE
OF BANANAS

In the journal, Phytopathology, of Septem-
ber, 19191, Dr. E. W. Brandes deseribed in
detail his out-door pot inoculation experiment,
demonstrating that Fusarium Cubense, EB. F.
Smith is the cause of the very destructive wilt
disease of ithe banana, heretofore generally
known as the Panama disease. Since then there
has been published in Java a paper by E.
Gaumamm on a vascular disease of the banana?,
in which the author attempts to discredit the
work of American investigators of this dis-
ease, but particularly that of Dr. Brandes. In
a statement by Brandes, of which the writer
has a typewritten copy, he reviews Gaumamm’s
paper and points out various errors and con-
fusion of facts. As the writer, while connected
with the United Fruit Company, recently con-
ducted an experiment of exactly the same kind
as the one by Brandes above mentioned, it may
be important to those interested to briefly
describe this experiment and the results. The
experiment was made just outside the Com-
pany laboratory, in Changuinola, state of Bocas
del Toro, Panama. In this case the common
Gros Michel banana was employed, instead of
the variety Chamaluceo employed by Brandes.
Otherwise the two experiments were almost
perfectly parallel except as to locality.

This experiment was begun November 1,
1921. Twenty-five cement pots were employed,
set in corresponding holes in the ground, and

1 Brandes, E. W., Banana Wilt. Phytopath. 9.
No. 9, pp. 339-389, pl. 22-34, 1919.

2Gaumamm, E., Over een bactericele Vatbun-
delziekte der bananen in Nederlandsch., Indie.
Meded. V. H. Instituut V. Plantenziekten, No. 48,
Dept. N. Landbouw, Nijverheid en Handel, pp.
135, pl. 8, 1921. :

664

the excavated soil afterward returned. They
were square, 3 feet each way at top, 4 feet
deep, and open at bottom. Sterilizing the soil
was done by a Company railway engine, the
soil in each pot being steamed two hours, at
110° C. Fourteen pots were thus sterilized and
the remaining six were neither sterilized nor
inoculated. All the pots were planted with one
“bit?” of a banana tuber having two “eyes” and
in seven of those sterilized these bits were in-
oculated with a laboratory culture of Fusariwm
Cubense, while the other seven were not in-
oculated.
two kinds of culture-mixed at time of applica-
tion—one in corn meal decoction and the other
in Ushehinski’s solution, both originating from
rice tube cultures, three weeks previously. It
was applied in quantity of about one liter to
each pot. Already in February, 1922, one of
the inoculated plants showed signs of disease.
By April 1 every one of the inoculated plants
was diseased and most of them were even then
bad cases. Up to July 12, when the writer
lefit Panama, no one of the plants in the in-
oculated pots, either sterilized or unsterilized,
gave any indication of disease. Besides the
added interest that may be attached to this ex-
periment, with a different variety of banana in
a different locality, the writer is glad, and
others will be, that it confirms the painstaking
work of Dr. Brandes. It should ‘be added that
Dr. J. R. Johnston, director of tropical re-
search for the United Fruit Company pro-
posed the experiment, in which the writer was
also supported and encouraged by the manager,
H. S. Blair, and by H. L. Peck, E. C. Adams,
and other men of the Company.

Mark ALFRED CARLETON
CuyAMEL, HONDURAS

FRESH WATER COELENTERATA IN
KENTUCKY

Ix 1916! the writer called attention to an
extraordinary appearance of the rare fresh-
water medusa, Craspedacusta sowerbyi, in a
Kentucky creek, when it was present literally
by the thousands, and expressed his intention to
make a search for the hydroid stage of the

1 Screncu, Vol. XLIV, page 858.

SCIENCE

The inoculum was a combination of

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

jellyfish, since the indications were that where
so many of the sexual form occurred there
should be a good prospect of finding the asexual
stage. With this in view visits have been made
from time to time to the place where the meduse
In 1917, a year after they were
first observed, they were present again in as
great numbers as in the preceding yeat?; still
no trace of a hydroid condition could be found.
Each year thereafter the place was searched,
but they have not been seen since 1917. It
may be of interest to record, however, that this
year (September 26) when examining the lo-
cality, some fine growths of the hydroid Cor-
dylophora® were obtained in the part of the
stream where Craspedacusta was discovered.
There can be no doubt about this material
representing Cordylophora lacustris, and this
interesting fresh-water hydroid is thus given a
new locality in which it is associated in a way
with Craspedacusta. The growths are attached
to living willow twigs that by the drooping of
branches have become immersed in the water.

were found.

Harrison. GARMAN
UNIVERSITY OF KENTUCKY
LEXINGTON, Ky.

AN ANNOUNCEMENT IN SCIENCE
To THE Epiror oF Science: I am glad to be
able to inform you that in response to my ap-
peal on behalf of Professor W. Boldyreff, puhb-
lished in Science of October 27 under the
heading, “An Opportunity,” I received prompt-
ly a number of requests for special information
concerning Dr. Boldyreft’s qualifications, and
that as a result of these inquiries he has now
received an appointment for a year in a dig-
nified position which will give him excellent
opportunity for research work and an income
to keep himself and family alive.
VERNON [KELLOGG
NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL,
WasHINGTON, D. C.,
NovEMBER 28, 1922

2 Professor Hargitt in commenting on the mat-
ter (Science, L. 1919, page 413) was wrong in
inferring that they disappeared at once.

3 A medusa stage is believed not to be produced
by this hydroid.

DECEMBER 8, 1922]

QUOTATIONS

INSULIN AS A CURE FOR DIABETES

On another page we print an important
communication from the Medical Research
Council relating to a promising remedy for
diabetes recently discovered at Toronto. Dia-
betes is one of the more serious afflictions of
mankind, insidious in its beginnings, debili-
tating in its course, and often fatal. At pres-
ent the treatment is little more than an effort to
prolong life by a regimen of habit and diet so
arduous as to make it very irksome. Dr. F. B.
Banting, a young physician attached to the
University of Toronto, acting on the known
fact that extirpation of 'the pancreas in dogs is
followed by a diabetic condition, thought it
possible that tthe secretion discharged into the
blood by that gland might be the factor
inhibiting the onset of the disease, and that its
administration in some form might prove a
remedy. Experimental work confirmed his
theory, which has, in fact, been thought proba-
ble for many years. A substance, to which the
name “insulin” has been given, extracted from
the panereas of the ox, pig or sheep, when
injected into the veins of human diabetic
patients has frequently given quick relief, and
has appeared to lead towards cure. But the
remedy ds still in an early stage. The exact
constitution of insulin, as, indeed, of many
other of the subtler animal essences, is still un-
known; its preparation demands high skill and
special methods; its administration must be
watched by expert physicians. In the opinion
of the medical faculty of the University of
Toronto, of their American colleagues and of
representatives of our own Medical Research
Council, any premature exploitation of insulin
might gravely disappoint the public, and even
prevent the ripening of the hopes of these high
authorities. It has therefore been decided to
protect and control its manufacture and use
in the United States and in Canada. Similar
protection and control in this country have
been offered to and accepted by the Medical
Research Council. To protect the public and
to perfect a great boon are objects which com-
mand respect. But while recognizing that spe-
cial circumstances may in ‘this case justify it,
we are not entirely reassured about the meth-

SCIENCE

665

od—a feeling 'that seems to have given an
apologetic tone to the communication issued
by the Medical Research Council. For it is
proposed to patent the remedy—a course ex-
cluded from the practice of the Pasteur Insti-
tute. Pasteur and Metchnikov determined that
their discoveries should be offered as a free gift
to the world, although the possibilities of
fraudulent or foolish exploitation ‘by others,
of mistaken use, and even of employing the
revenue from patents for further research were
present to their minds.—The London Times.

JUSTICE FOR THE PUEBLO INDIANS

In formally protesting against ‘the passage
of the Bursum Pueblo Indian Bill the American
Ethnological Society took account only of the
plain facts. It is a thoroughly vicious measure,
designed to put a premium on fraud and ito
commit the United States government to a
sweeping raid on ‘the lands and water rights
of the New Mexico Indians. -The council of
the Peabody Museum of American Archeology
and Ethnology of Harvard uses very moderate
language when it calls public attention to “the
iniquity and hardship” of the bill to the end
that it be defeated.

The Bursum bill was put through the Senate
on the strength of misleading statements. The
scheme could not be worked again. Full pub-
licity would prevent it. For a little publicity
has already rallied to the support of the cause
of the Pueblo Indians disinterested persons and
organizations that will not desert them or be
lulled to sleep as the Senate was.

These Indians, living peacefully in some
twenty tribal groups, have steadily
crowded off lands confirmed to them by the
United States government ‘by outsiders having
no valid titles. The government is bound to
protect them as its wards, but it has failed
‘to do so.

But as it turns out, the Pueblo Indians,
though voteless, are not friendless. It
wholesome sign that before they ‘had united in
voicing their own protest against the Bursum
bill, friends from many quarters had volun-
teered assistance and accepted the burden of
the fight in their behalf. Congress and the
administration ean not afford to be indifferent

been

1S)

666

to the flood of protest pouring in on them
against this betrayal of the Pueblo Indians for
the sake of a few New Mexico land-grabbers.—
The New York World.

SPECIAL ARTICLES

SERIES REGULARITIES IN THE ARC
SPECTRUM OF CHROMIUM

THe detection of two sets of related triplets,
by Meggers and Kiess, in ithe course of their
work on the are spectrum of chromium, induced
the present writers to undertake a more thor-
ough examination of the spectrum, to find, if
possible, other regularities which might lead to
While a detailed discus-
sion of the work has not yet been completed,
enough has been found ito warrant the follow-
statements.

At least three sets of series whose members
are triplets, occur
chromium.

series relationships.

ing

in the are spectrum of
Of these, two sets are composed of
wide triplets, and one set of narrow triplets.
The wide-triplet series are parallel; that is,
there exists a constant difference between the
wave numbers of homologous members. Each
component of the first member of the diffuse
series is itself a narrow triplet. In the table
are given data for the first members of the
principal, sharp and diffuse series of the two
parallel systems:

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

The narrow triplets which constitute the third
set of series are characterized by the frequency
differences Av, = 8.80 and Av, = 5.65. Sev-
eral doublets in which each of these separations
exists and also one with the separation, Ay =
81.37, have hkewise been found. These are
suggestive of inter-series combinations.

C. C. Kress
Harriet KNupSsEN Kigss,

WASHINGTON, D. C.,
OcropEr 10, 1922

THE NATIONAL ACADEMY OF
SCIENCES

THE autumn meeting was held in New York
City on November 14, 15 and 16, on succes-
sive days at Columbia University, the Rocke-
feller Institute for Medical Research and the

United Engineering Societies Building. The
scientific program was as follows:

Biographical memoir of Harmon Northrup
Morse. (By title) Ira ReMsEN.

A catalogue of bright stars, a compilation of all
the known data concerning the 9110 brightest
stars: FRANK SCHLESINGER. The requirements
for an abstract are perhaps sufficiently complied
with by the title itself, but it may be well to
say in addition that the catalogue gives the name
of each star, its position for 1900, the Durehmus-
terung number, magnitude, spectrum, proper mo-

N 1 ING y Ay pCa eas y Ay Separation
(Vacuum) (Vacuum )
| p
23498.84 112.44 3579.69 27935.38 115.10 4436.54
23386.40 3594.50 27820.28 4433.88
23305.02 | 81.38 3606.35 27728.86 91.42 4423.84
|
s
7464.39 13396.94 112.45 11160.2 8960.4 1115.2 4436.5
7402.26 13509.39 11018.6 9075.6 4433.8
7357.95 13590.74 81.35 10908.8 9166.9 Gals 4423.8
d
5331.18 7.57 ihe 6982.79 14320.92 4436.65
5330.58 187 39. 68 6981.75 14323.06 4436.62
5329.80 18762.43 112.78 6980.23 14326.18 [ 115.16 4436.25
Becscsssessl ') A[PV gente sede 6927.90 14434.39 Santana
5299.32 18870.35 6927.09 14436.08 4434.27
5298.81 18872.16 6925.96 14438.43 4433.73
5277.56 18948.15 + 81.29 | 6885.00 14524.33 | 91.54 4423.82
5277.09 18949.84 6884.23 14525.96 4423.88
5276.59 18951.64 | 6883.40 14527.62 | 4424.02

DECEMBER 8, 1922.]

tion, parallax, radial velocity and notes concerning
other points of interest.

The status of research on the perturbations of
minor planets with special reference to its ulti-
mate significance: ARMIN O. LEUSCHNER.

The structure of the Jura Mountains in France.
Lantern: EMANUEL DE MarcGerige (introduced
by J. I. Kemp).

Recently discovered evidence bearing on the age
of the Sierra Nevada. Lantern: Joun C. Mrr-
RIMAN, R. W. CHANEY and C. Sock.

American jade and its archeological bearing.
Lantern: Henry 8S. WASHINGTON. Microscopie
study of many jade objects from Chichen Itza,
Copan and localities in Mexico shows that the
material consists of a jade-like pyroxene and
albite in different proportions; varying from
pure pyroxene to nearly pure albite. The pyrox-
ene is composed of jadeite and diopside, the com-
bination forming a hitherto unrecognized mem-
ber of the pyroxene group. Many chemical
analyses have been made, amd these, as well as
the microscopic thin sections, show that the albite
is soluble in the diopside-jadeite up to a cer-
tain amount, beyond which it crystallizes out sep-
arately. In chemical and mineral characters the
Middle American jades differ markedly from
those of Burma and Tibet, the chief sources of
Chinese jade. These differences, the occurrence
of a complete series of the rocks, and the orig-
inal pebble form of many of the American jade
objects, indicate that the material of the Mexi-
-can and Central American artifacts is of Ameri-
can, and not of Asiatie, provenance; thus being
adverse to the theory of southeastern Asiatic
origin for Middle American races and culture.
This American jade has not yet been found in
place, but it is probable that it comes from
toward the Pacifie coast, and two centers of pro-
duction are suggested as probable, Oaxaca-Guer-
rero in Mexico and Guatemala in Central
America.

Drowned coral reefs of the Liu Kiu Islands,
JOHNSON (introduced by J. F. Kemp).

A genetic description of some New England-
Acadian shorelines. Lantern: Doucias W.
JOHNSON (introduced by J. F. Kemp).

A tentative geological column for central Mon-
golia: Cuartes P. Berkey (introduced by J. F.
Kemp).

Xenoliths in the Stony Creek granite, Connecti-
cut: JAMES F. KEmp.

A chemical investigation of two typical en-
zymes: pancreatic and malt amylases: H. C.
SHERMAN. This paper reviews briefly some of

SCIENCE

667

the results obtained in an investigation carried
out during recent years with the aid of grants
from the Carnegie Institution of Washington, and
describes unpublished experiments which furnish
a new line of evidence that these enzymes, in
their chemical nature, either are proteins or con-
tain proteins as essential constituents. While
alike in this respect, these two starch-splitting
enzymes differ markedly in some of their prop-
erties and are undoubtedly different substances.
Some of the chief points of resemblance and of
difference are briefly summarized and the prob-
lem as to the conclusiveness of the evidence re-
garding the chemical nature of these enzymes is
considered.

The hydration of sodiwm monometaphosphate
to orthophosphate in varying concentrations of
hydrogen ion: H. T. Beans and 8. J. Kiguu.
The preparation of sodium monometaphosphate ;
method of following the hydration; experimental
data; formation of pyrophosphate as an inter-
mediate product; discussion of results.

Saturated Bredig gold sols: H. T. Beans and
L. B. Miuurr. Briefly summarized the paper will
present the results of the continuation of our
work on the study of the influence of electrolytes
on.the composition and behavior of gold sols
made by the Bredig method. We have found
that a very definite quantitative relationship
exists between the maximum amount of gold
which cam be dispersed by the Bredig method, and
the character and concentration of the electrolyte
present. The paper will, therefore, consist in a
demonstration of this relationship with curves and
data which are in support of the conclusions.

Experimental studies on the hydrogen electrode:
H. T. Beans and L. P. Hammerr. A study of
the practical application of the hydrogen elec-
trode and of theoretical questions involved has
shown that the hydrogen electrode must function
not only as an inert electrode, but as a catalyst
for the hydrogen ion reaction. Comparison of
various methods for producing the necessary ac-
tivity is of interest from the general point of
platinum catalysis, and indicates the interesting
problem of the potential difference between active
and inactive electrodes. These results, together
with the results of the study of the effect of
oxygen upon tthe electrode have led to a specifica-
tion of the necessary conditions for precise meas-
urements in buffered solutions, and investigation
of the difficulties inherent in the application of
the electrode to unbuffered solutions has led to the
determination of the reasons underlying these dif-

ficulties, and to a new type of electrode which

668

gives satisfactory results in solutions of potas-
sium chloride.

The interdependence of solvent and solute in
ionization phenomena: JAMES KENDALL and
Matcoum M. Hartne. In a previous communica-
tion (Kendall, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sct. 7, 56, 1921)
it was shown that compound formation and ioniza-
tion in solutions proceed in parallel and that sol-
vent and solute play an equally active part in
ionization phenomena. The present article dis-
cusses the various possible ionic types which may
be produced by the disintegration of compounds
formed when two substances RX and R1Y are
mixed. Rules are deduced for predicting the
relative amount of each type in any particular
case from the character of the radicals concerned,
and these rules are demonstrated to be in ac-
cordance with experimental results chosen from
both aqueous and non-aqueous solutions.

Some unusual freezing-point curves in fused
salt mixtures: JAMES KENDALL, E. D. Critten-
DEN and H. K. Minuer. In the course of a de-
tailed study of the factors influencing compound
formation and solubility in fused salt mixtures,
by which 49 new double salts were isolated, some
rather remarkable freezing-point curves were en-
countered. Two illustrative examples are here de-
scribed. In the first—the system A1Brg:NaBr—
a two liquid layer region exists between 2.6 and
16.3 per cent. NaBr, and the freezing-point curve
on either side of this descends from 95.4° to
a eutectic point. The solid phase in equilibrium
with the two liquid layers must consequently be a
double salt of intermediate composition, unstable
at its true melting-point but melting to give two
immiscible liquids at 95.4°. In the second type
of system, of which SbCl3:SnCly is an example,
_ the two liquid layer region is metastable, but
approaches so closely to the freezing-point ¢urve
as to induce it to become almost horizontal over
a very wide range of composition.

Ferric hydroxide hydrosol: ARTHUR W.
THOMAS and A. FRIEDEN (introduced by M. T.
Bogert).

A citraconic analog of quinophthalone: M. T.
Bogert and K. Asano. The well-known dye
quinoline yellow (quinophthalone) is prepared by
the action of phthalic anhydride upon quinaldine.
It is now found that citraconic anhydride does
not condense smoothly with quinaldine, but that
when the imide is used in place of the anhydride,
a dye analogous to quinoline yellow results.

Diaryl thiophenes and diaryl selenophenes:
M. T. Bogert and J. P. Herrera. 2,4-Diaryl

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1458

thiophenes and diaryl selenophenes may be ob-
tained in fair yields from ketone anils, of aceto-
phenone anil type, ‘by fusion with sulfur or
selenium. The properties of these new compounds
and of various derivatives are described.

Factors governing the distribution of plants in
Porto Rico and the Virgin Islands: NavHANIEL
L. Brirron.

Growth and form: Ropert A. HARPER.

Growth and development of children as in-
fluenced by environmental conditions: FrRAny
Boas.

Dating prehistoric man in America by methods
of distribution and stratigraphy: CLARK WISs-
LER (introduced by F. Boas).

Measurements on the expression of emotion in
music: C. KE. Srasnore. The writer points out
that every emotional effect transmitted by the
singer or other musician through musie is con-
tained in the sound wave. This can be inter-
cepted and recorded with high precision and the
musical effects may then be classified in terms of
the measurable attributes of the wave; namely,
frequency (pitch), duration (time), amplitude
(intensity and volume), form (timbre). All mu-
sical expression through sound may be expressed
in terms of variables in these four factors.

Undernutrition and its influences on the meta-
bolic plane of steers: Francis G. BENEDICT and
Ernest G. RirzmMan. Based upon experiences
with humans, who voluntarily underwent ration
curtailment, and upon the well-known inequali-
ties in the feeding habits of wild animals, a group
of 11 steers were subjected ‘to curtailed rations
amounting to approximately one half of their
normal maintenance requirements, for a period
of about 140 days. Measurements of feces and
urine and feed, as well as an extensive series of
metabolism measurements inside of a specially
constructed respiration chamber, made it possi-
ble to study these animals intensively. The cur-
tailed rations resulted in a distinct loss of nitro-
gen and fat from the body, but the steers recov-
ered their initial state by subsequent feeding
with hay, concentrates or pasture. Although car-
ried through the winter on an extraordinarily low
metabolic plane, they suffered no permanent dam-
age and all were subsequently fattened for mar-
ket.

The acetonitril test for thyroid and of some
alteration of metabolism: Rew Hunt. (@)
Toxicity of acetonitril; effects of undernutrition;
diet; vitamins. (2) The acetonitril test for thy-
roid; the relation between iodin content and

DECEMBER 8, 1922 |

physiological activity. Thyroxin. (38) The reac-
tion as a test for thyroid secretion. Grave’s
disease.

Leucocytic secretions:
duced by S. Flexner).

Experiments with an
Mountain spotted fever:
troduced by 8S. Flexner).

The protection of the newborn against infec-
tion: THEOBALD SMITH.

Experimental herpetic
FYLEXNER.

Hydrohepatosis, a condition analogous to hy-
dronephrosis: Pryrton Rous (introduced by 8.
Flexner ).

Crystalloidal solutions and colloidal suspensions
of proteins: Jacques Logs.

ALEXIS CARREL (intro-

anti-serum for Locky
Hipryo Nocucui (in-

encephalitis : SIMON

The ovary in connection with structural and
metabolic changes in mammals: CHARLES R.
Srockarp. A general description is given of a
method of external examination by which the
several stages of the ovarian cycle may be defi-
nitely located. The moment of discharge of the
ovum from the ovarian follicle may also be ac-
curately determined. The several stages of the
ovarian cycle may be experimentally modified and
ovulation temporarily or permanently suppressed.
The type of modification may be recognized by a
study of the structural reactions of the uterus
and vagina which are indicated by the cellular
composition of smears collected from the wall of
the vagina. The ovary may ibe used as a very
exact and valuable indicator for determining the
general metabolic conditions of the individual.

The mechanism of selective bacteriostasis:
JoHN W. CnuRCHMAN (introduced by 8. Flex-
ner).

The reduction division in haploid, diploid, trip-
loid and tetraploid daturas: JOHN BELLING and
A. F. BLAKESLEE (introduced by C. B. Daven-
port). j

The consequences of different degrees of inter-
mensual correlation for fecundity in the domes-
tic fowl: J. ArrHuR Harris (introduced by C.
B. Davenport).

Recent studies on the relation of metabolism
to sex: Oscar RippLE (introducted by C. B.
Davenport). :

Sex and sex control in Cladocera: (By title.)
ArtHur M. Banta (introduced by C. B. Daven-
port).

The consequences of different degrees of inter-
ference, in the crossing-over of the hereditary
genes: H. S. JENNINGS. The paper gives the
general results of a mathematical study of the

SCIENCE

669

relations exhibited in the socalled crossing-over
of the genes, and compares these with those
bound to occur if the genes are arranged in
series and there is interference between breaks
at points near together in the series. The ob-
served ratios fall into a peculiar and complex
system; by means of a mathematical formula it
is shown that this entire system, even to details,
is, in all essentials, a necessary result of the
serial arrangement with a certain extent of inter-
ference. The marked changes that would result
from different extents of interference are like-
wise shown.

A new type of uroleptus formed by permanent
fusion of two conjugating individuals: Gary N.
CALKINS. :

Restoration of fossil human remains its pos-
sibilities, value and limitations: J. H. Mce-
GRecor (introduced by Edmund B. Wilson).

The role of the golgi apparatus in the forma-
tion of the animal sperm: Rosert B. BowrENn
(introduced by Edmund B. Wilson).

The map of the third chromosome of Droso-
phila: TT. H. Moraan and C. B. Bripgss.

Limiting values of the size of: the genes of
Drosophila: T. H. Morean.

Ultraviolet flowers and their possible bearing
on the problems of pollination by insects: FRANK
EK. Lurz and F. K. RicurmMyrr (introduced
by Frank M. Chapman). The various ¢ol-
ors on the petals of flowers and, indeed, the petals
themselves are rather generally believed to have
arisen in connection with the pollination of flow-
ers by insects. A few experiments, including
some made recently, indicate that insects respond
definitely to ultraviolet rays. This suggested an
investigation of the reflection by flowers of ultra-
violet rays. It was found that some flowers show
ultraviolet while others do not, just as some
show blue while others do not. If flower colors
are important in connection with pollination by
insects, its seems that not only the visible spee-
trum but also the ultraviolet should be con-
sidered.

Recent discoveries of fossil vertebrates in China
and Mongolia: W. D. Marrurw (introduced
by Frank M. Chapman). Important — fos-
sil mammal faunas have been recently discovered
in China by the Chinese Geological Survey and
American Museum party. The American Mu-
seum’s Asiatic Expedition has also been extraor-
dinarily suecessful in Mongolia this summer.
Three important mammal faunas, Eocene, Oligo-
cene and Pliocene were discovered, also. a rich
Cretaceous dinosaur fauna.

Large collections

670

were secured, including complete skulls and skele-
tons and their study is expected to throw much
light on the origin and dispersal of the higher
vertebrates and of men.

The Whitney South Sea expedition of the
American Museum of Natural History: ROBERT
CusHMAN Murprny (introduced by Frank M.

Chapman). For more than two years the Mu-
seum has been conducting ornithological investi-
gations in Polynesia. This paper summarizes the
purposes and accomplishments of the expedition,
and outlines some of the problems involved in
studying oceanie and insular zoology.

Mutations among birds in the genus Buarre-
mon: FRANK M. CHapmMan. From a study of
the 160 specimens of Buarremon brunneinucha
and B. inornata in the American Museum of Nat-
ural History the following conclusions are
reached: (1) That Buarremon inornata is a rep-
resentative of Buarremon brunneinucha. (2)
That the variations in pattern and color occurring
in the underparts of brunneinucha, throughout the
range of that species, are individual and are not
due to age, sex or season, to climate or other ob-
servable environmental factors. (3) That isola-
tion, partial or complete, has alone supplied the
conditions needful to the development and estab-
lishment of these characters as the specific at-
tributes of Buarremon inornata.

On the attraction of a central body in the
theory of relativity: GEORGE D. BirKHOFF.

The equiaffine geometry of paths: OSWALD
VEBLEN.

The cosmological equation of gravitation: Ep-
warp Kasner. It is shown that the two sets of
equations introduced by Einstein in 1917 and
1919 are exactly equivalent in empty space. The
cosmological factor ) can then be proved to be
a constant, instead of being so assumed.

A theory of the various transverse effects of the

magnetic field in several metals: Epwin H.
HALL.
The photo-luminescence of flames: E. L.

Nicuots and H. lL. Howrs. When flames con-
taining salts of Na, Li, Ca, Ba, Sr, ete., are ex-
posed to light the bright bands in their spectra,
in general, are enhanced. The effect, although
large compared to ordinary fluorescence, forms a
small part of the total brightness of the flame
and can not be readily detected except by spectro
photometric methods. As in ordinary photo-
luminescence excitation is by wave-lengths shorter
than those of the band itself. There is a meas-
urable quenching by exposure to the longer wave-
lengths and specifically to ight identical with the

SCIENCE

. terior

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1458

band. So far as now known no new bands are de-
veloped as the result of excitation. The light
sourees thus far used as excitants are the tung-
sten lamp, carbon are, mereury are
spark,

The reflection of X-rays by crystals:
DUANE. :

The analysis of certain erystals by the new
X-ray method: G. L. CnarkK and Wi1aMm
DUANE.

The use of isophelimatic lines in historical geog-
raphy; A new theory of population; A new hy-
drodynamical phenomenon; Further results in in-
ballistics: ArTHUR G. WEBSTER.

The Thermal emissivity of water:
ALLEN.

The determination of ocean depths by acous-
tical methods: J. C. Hayes (introduced by W.
H. Dall and W. M. Davis).

The gyroscope and its practical application in
the arts. Jiantern: O. B. WuiTakeEr (introduced
by J. J. Carty and F. B. Jewett).

Electronic tubes of high power: H. D. Ar-
NOLD, Ph.D. Recent developments in the con-
struction of high vacuum apparatus have made
possible the use of pure electron currents as large
as 30 amperes in single tubes which are capable
of controlling powers of 100 k. w. or more. This
paper discusses some of the problems in physies
and in engineering which were solved in the
course of this development, particularly those
which relate to the construction of glass and metal
apparatus suitable for use with these high powers.
The paper will be illustrated by samples of the
tubes and by slides showing the general features
of their construction.

Carrier type multiplex telephony and teleg-
raphy: E. H. Cowpirrs. The underlying
principles of carrier are discussed particu-
larly as they apply to carrier telephony, first,
where a single channel of communication is pro-
vided, and secondly, where a number of chan-
nels are provided over the same pair of wires.
Apparatus is shown illustrating the
physical steps in the process of transmitting
speech from one terminal station to the other.
Particularly the perfiormance of filters in dis-
-criminating against the passage of currents out-
side of the band which they are designed to
transmit is demonstrated. In these demonstra-
tions use is made of a loud speaking telephone.

Spectrum energy curves of the stars: CHARLES
G. ABBOT.

Affine geometries of paths possessing an in-
variant integral: LutTHER P. EISENHART. °

and iron

WILLIAM

MILDRED

various

Mafra ren

SS si

New SERIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1459 Fripay, Decemper 15, 1922 Stncte Corres, 15 Ors.”

Bausch & Lomb
Photomicrographic
Camera, Type F

A new photomicrographic camera, for use either horizontally
or vertically, with supports thoroughly braced to make it extremely
rigid in both positions. The very moderate price at which it is
offered places it well within the reach of any school or college
laboratory.

Designed for use with any standard make of compound micro-
scope, and ean be used in making unusually large photographs. as
it accommodates 8 x 10-in. plates.

Rear camera frame is fitted with reversible
back with spring door; front frame equipped
with automatic shutter. Supplied with either
Mazda or Tungsare lamps.

Price, with Mazda lamp and transformer, for
110-volt current, without microscope, $235.00

Our new, complete catalogue of Photomicrographic Equipment has just come from the
press. If you are interested in this apparatus, we will be glad to send you @ copy.

Bausch & Lomb Optical Company
409 St. Paul Street, Rochester, N. Y.

New York Washington Chicago San Francisco London

Leading American Makers of Optical Measuring Instruments, Photomicrographic Apparatus, Photographic
Lenses, Microscopes, Projection Apparatus (Balopticons), Ophthalmic Lenses and Instruments,
Range Finders and Gun-Sights for Army and Navy, Searchlight Reflectors, Stereo-Prism
Binoculars, Telescopes, Magnifiers, Automobile Lenses and other High-Grade
Optical Products.

SSRI EE SO MST ITO: PE DHT hs
———— —————— - ——— = a EO TI

that

es inay see a
=. better and farther ae

=~ SS

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

CAMBRIDGE
INSTRUMENTS

BOY’S RADIOMICROMETER

An extremely sensitive instrument
for the measurement of radiant heat.
The suspended system consists of a
single loop of silver wire having
at its lower extremity a sensitive
thermo-couple. The thermojunction
carries a receiving plate of blackened
copper foil. The radiation received
on this plate raises the temperature
of the thermo-junction and causes a
small current to flow in the silver
loop, which is consequently deflected.

Send for list No. 100

Also manufacturers of all types of
Physical and Electrical Instruments.

The Cambrid

LENS: AEN RIGA Ge),
Works r Office 6 Showroom
Ossininc-on-Hupson NEW YOR GrANDCENTRALTERMINAL,

MAN AND THE
COSMOS

By Josep A. Lercuron, L.L.D.
Professor of Philosophy in the Ohio State

University. D
Dr. Leighton in this important and ab-
sorbingly interesting work has for chief aim
the finding in the living universe of a home
and a scope for humanistic values or ideals,
with chief stress laid upon the problems of
mind and knowledge and on the meaning
and value of human personality. $4.50

JUDGING HUMAN
CHARACTER

By H. L. HotitrincwortH,
Professor of Psychology, Barnard College, Col-
umbia University.

A study of the art of reading and judging
the characters of one self and of others, in
which this well-known psychologist surveys
the stage to which the modern science has
progressed. A keen and critical exposition

of practical psychology. $2.00

_ HUGO
MUNSTERBERG

His Life and Work

By MarcareT MUNSTERBERG

“Vividly delineated, alike as a man and
as a contributor to the science which ab-
sorbed the larger part of his working life.
Sets forth with remarkable clearness and
accuracy Miinsterberg’s salient achieve-
ments in psychology; portrays the indi-
vidual characteristics which give biographies
charm.”—The Boston Transcript.

Illustrated, $3.50

SENESCENCE

The Last Half of Life
By G. Stantey Hatt, L.L.D.

“Rich in scholarship and personal experi-
ence, ‘Senescence’ is a comprehensive re-
view of the sum of human knowledge on
this subject, in order to show how the ignor-
ant and the learned, the child, the adult,
and the old, savage and civilized man,
pagans and Christians, the ancient and the
modern world, the representatives of the
various sciences and different individuals,
have viewed the problems of Age.’—The
Annals of the American Academy. $5.00

D. APPLETON AND COMPANY
35 West 32d Street New York

$-12-15,

Vou. LVI DeEcrMBeErR 15, 1922 No. 1459

The Trend of Avian Populations in Cali-
fornia: Dr. JOSEPH GRINNELL.......--.------------ 671

Are Permanent Disturbances of Equilibration
inherited? Dr. C. R. GRIFFITH...............-..------ 676

The Usefulness of Analytic Abstracts: Dr.
GORDON PE ULCHER ee 678

Scientific Events:

Conservation of the Resources of the Pa-
cific; The University of Wyoming and Dr.
Nelson; The Industrial Division of the
American Chemical Society; The Union of
American Biological Societies; Hotels for

ULNEM-BOSTOT IMCCEII Geen attest taee aes 680
Scientific Notes and News.........--....-2.:--s--c------ 682
University and Educational Notes..............-.---- 686

Discussion and Correspondence :
Glaciation in the Cordilleran Region: J. T.
Parprr. Liffects of Copper Wire on Trees:
Dr. GrEorGE B. Rice. Tangent Lines:
PROFESSOR FLORIAN CAJORI........-.-----------+----- 686

Scientific Books:

Hicks on the Analysis of Spectra: Dr.
CHARLES! eHiyiSTs JOH Neeson 687
American Losins: Dr. H. J. CoNnn............-------- 689

Zoological Nomenclature: Dr. CHARLES WaAR-
POY ONEAL) | SYM OU OS a ee ee a ee a 690

Special Articles:

' The Organization of the Nervous Mechan-
ism of Respiration: PRoressor F. H. Pik
and) EenEN (C.)| COOMBS eee eee occa onan 691

The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES
TU id INNES TONS Seas A i 693

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by
J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.

New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE TREND OF AVIAN POPULA-
TIONS IN CALIFORNIA

THERE is one besetting temptation to which
any student fairly advanced in the exploration
of his chosen field would seem justified in yield-
ing. This temptation is to hold up to close
serutiny any stmking generalization given wide
publicity, save it be from the most authorita-
tive souree—to see whether it be really founded
in fact. A case in point has to do with avian
populations.

It has been stated or at least implied with
increasing frequency in late years, in various
publications, especially in those emanating
from organizations concerned with bird pro-
tection, that serious decrease is taking place in
our bird life, and that this decrease is due to
the thoughtlessness or perfidy of man and is
preventable. These statements and implica-
tions are being expressed mot only with regard
to the longer and more thickly settled eastern
United States, but with regard to the west in
general, and to California. Confessedly with
some a priori doubt, but with a view to testing
fairly the truth of these dicta, I have under-
taken an inquiry into the situation in our own
state, for the purpose of finding out what tthe
facts are—of ascertaining whatever changes in
our bird population may, indeed, have become
apparent, and the causes therefor.

To begin with, of course, terms must be de-
fined. In using the word “decrease,” or its
opposite, “increase,” in this connection, one of
two distinet ideas may be in a person’s mind.
He may refer to the number of species, or he
may refer to the aggregate number of indi-
viduals. Or, both of these ideas may be held,
in more or less vague association.

To take up the first concept: There is no
question whatsoever that a certain few species
of birds have become nearly, or quite, extinct,
as far as California is concerned, within ‘the

672

past seventy-five years; as examples, the trum-
peter swan and the whooping crane. But, com-
pensating for these losses, there have become
newly established within our territory during
that same period some species of foreign
souree; as examples, ring-necked pheasant and
English sparrow. Checking up the species of
both categories, we can reach but the one con-
clusion that, as yet, so far as concerns tthe state
as a whole, there has been no real reduction in
the total number of species; our known avi-
fauna at the present moment totals 582 species
and subspecies; I am aware of no good ground
for supposing ‘that 1f was one unit more or
less, seventy-five years ago.

If, however, we narrow our attention to given
restricted localities, we are confronted with
evidence of real and great reduction in species,
up to even forty per cent. of the original num-
ber, I figure, in some places. It is this local
reduction in species, most apparent naturally
in centers of human population, that has im-
pressed so strongly the ardent advocates of the
various sorts of bird protective measures.

An entirely different phenomenon, as already
intimated, is comprised in the fluctuation of
aggregate populations, irrespective of the
various species, few or many, represented in
them. On this point, my impressions are
strong that, throughout the country at large,
wherever human influence has had any marked
effect, there has been increase in the bird life.
In some localities, as pointed out below, this
increase may reach as much as tenfold.

My reader will at once demand something
more tangible than “impressions.” And I am
compelled regretfully to admit that
figures seem to be wanting.

actual

record of censuses taken fifty years ago, or
even twenty-five years ago. This is unfor-
tunate; and it is to be hoped that further lapse
of time will see an improvement in this situa-
tion.
basis or a unit-of-time basis, are now being
taken and recorded. The student of ithe future,
let us hope, will have plenty of statistical data
upon which to base final conclusions.

It seems, then, that, in this discussion, I
must fall back upon less tangible classes of

Numerical censuses, on either an areal

SCIENCE

We have no

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

evidence—upon memory and upon inferences
from other categories of facts. Before citing
this evidence, however, let me introduce some
theoretical considerations.

It is a recognized, established principle that
the presence in a region of any given bird
species is absolutely dependent upon, first,
proper food supply, second, the right kind of
breeding places, and third, appropriate cover
or protection for individuals—each of these
conditions as bound up with the inherent struc-
tural features of the bird under consideration.
Mark ‘that there are three of ‘these factors, each
and all of them essential; if any one of them
in a given region becomes effaced, the bird in
question can no longer exist there. There are,
of course, other factors essential ito avian ex-
istence, but they affect all the birds of a given
fauna alike. We can deplore, wring our hands,
and suffer agonies of regret, but to no avail—
except as active steps be taken to restore the
critical condition. As a matter of cold cireum-
stance, a bird’s disappearance in a given local-
ity may be irretrievable—as happens where
man has densely settled a territory and inci-
dentally or purposely destroyed certain of its
natural features unnecessary or inimical to his
own existence there. Chop down all the trees
and there can be no more woodpeckers; drain
the lakes, ponds and swamps and there can be
no more water birds; remove the chaparral,
and wvren-tits, bush-tits and thrashers ean no
longer find proper food and shelter. Cement
up all the holes in the campus oaks and there
will be no more plain titmouses—for the reason
that roosting and brooding places essential to
their existence are no longer to be found.

Each bird species native in a given region
has a different and very special combination of
requirements. Existence of each is really de-
termined by a very slender thread of cireum-
stances which can, in most species, be broken
readily. Differences must, of course, be recog-
nized in the degree of hardihood, or of via-
bility, in the various species of birds—some
are on the ragged edge of extimetion, this con-
dition in part due to inherent reduction in spe-
cifie vigor—the race is naturally playing out,
we say; others are hardy, with a large reserve

DECEMBER 15, 1922]

of specific energy; some can even stand what
may aptly be called ecologic punishment.

In any one locality the field observer comes
to recognize a few or many rather intangible
units which he calls “ecological niches’”—sep-
arate cubby-holes or dwelling places or habi-
tats (in the narrowest sense), which differ in
essential respects from one another. If the
topography and vegetation be varied, there are
many of these niches; if more uniform, there
are few of them. Hach niche is separately
occupied by a particular kind of bird, and the
locality supports just as many species of birds
as there are niches; furthermore, the numbers
of individuals of each bird are correlated
directly with the degree of prevalence or dom-
inance of the niche to which that particular
bird is adapted. In other words,—and here is
the crux of the idea,—both the number of the
species and the number of the individuals of
each species, in a locality, are directly de-
pendent upon the resources of ithe environment,
from an avian standpoint. The same notion
holds, of course, for all other animals, including
Homo.

Rate of reproduction in any species has been
established down through past time so as to
supply the population needed to keep the ap-
propriate niche filled. This rate varies with
the natural prevalence of the niche, and with
the hazards to which the niche occupant is ex-
posed. Not only that, but a wide mangin above
the normal need is provided to meet that ex-
treme emergency which may arise but once in
a thousand generations; in other words, there
is produced a large surplus—an apparent great
waste—of individuals over and above what is
needed to keep the appropriate territory fully
populated, in order to save the species from
extinction at some critical moment; for ani-
mate nature abhors a vacuum no less than does
inanimate nature. A recent writer in SCIENCE
(LV, May 12, 1922, pp. 497-505), Professor
A. F. Shull, has, in another connection, called
this fact of over-production the “factor of
safety.” He says: “The entire struggle for
existence is based on the principle that security
and advancement are best assured through

wasteful over-production.”’ The employment of

SCIENCE

673

the factor of safety, I would say, is a manifest
device on the part of nature ito insure con-
tinuity of species, and hence also to make evo-
lution possible.

A British ornithologist, Mr. H. E. Howard,
has lately put out a book in which he elab-
orates exhaustively the idea of the importance
of territory to bird life. Kind and availability
of territory determine the kind and amount of
bird life. In final analysis, when a territory,
or, as I would express it, more explicitly, an
ecological niche, becomes full, and this im
normal times comes to pass very quickly, the
individuals within the species constitute each
other’s worst enemies. Continued conflict for
space—for a piece of land, for an area of
meadow, for a section of tree-trunk, for a given
unit of volume of twiggery or foliage—is plain
to be seen by any diligent observer of bird life.
The resulting pressure for territorial expan-
sion reminds one of the same pressure obtain-
ing among humans; only, among birds, there is
no organized warfare. The process is one of
struggle as between individuals or pairs of
individuals, between neighbors, indirectly, per-
haps, as a rule; but also, often, directly, by
personal action. The most fit to compete,
sometimes the most fortunate, will survive; the
less fit will be eliminated. The survival pros-
pects of each single individual are small. Vast
numbers of individuals are poured in. The
“safety factor” in numbers is there in order to
insure the persistence, and continued adaptive
improvement, of the species.

Let us now return to more matter-of-fact
considerations. What have been some of the
effects of the settlement of California by the
white man, upon the environments of birds?
Have any ecological niches been effaced? Have
any niches been added? Have some been re-
duced in prevalence and others increased in
prevalence, relatively? What have been the
effects upon ithe niche-oceupants?

Perhaps the conspicuous changes
wrought in the appearance of the landscape in
the southwest have resulted from irrigation.
In substantiation of this statement, many of
my readers can doubtless appeal to his own
memory. I, myself, recall traversing long

most

674

stretches of the San Joaquin Valley twenty-
five years ago, which were then merely arid
plains. The vegetation consisted of xerophi-
lous grasses and herbs, with here ‘and there
traets of lupine or atriplex bushes. The birds
observed were scattering horned larks, fewer
meadowlarks, and occasional burrowing owls;
it being winter, there were more numerous
Savannah sparrows and, in rain-dampened
places, pipits. Knowing what I do now about
censuses, I doubt if there were then more than
one bird to the acre, on an average, probably
much less than that ratio.

Now, regarding the same territory, it would
be hard to exaggerate the amount of change in
vegetation which has resulted from the water-
ing of the ground. Orchards, alfalfa fields,
green pastures and streams of running water
lined with willows, completely occupy the land.
Instead of a very uniform type of environ-
ment, with only a few niches and correspond-
ingly few species of birds, one finds, upon
analysis, a great variety of niches and a much
increased number of bird species. What is
more, the numbers of individuals are vastly
larger. To be sure, the horned larks and bur-
rowing owls are gone. But the meadowlarks
have multiplied; and, in addition, one sees
great numbers of Brewer blackbirds, of mock-
ingbirds, goldfinches, swallows, phobes and
killdeers. I esitmate the mean population over
large areas of the San Joaquin in April, when
the lowest ebb for the year is reached, at 10
per acre, or over 6,000 per square mile. Here,
obviously, the conditions for abundant avian
population have been markedly improved by
the coming of the white man with his methods
of cultivation.

Even more spectacular has been the faunal
change wrought by irrigation in Imperial
Valley, where luxuriant vegetation with result-
ing abundance of bird life has replaced the
original sparse vegetation of the desert which
supported relatively little animal life.

Another biotic modification is brought about
by deforestation. Close stands of coniferous
trees are replaced by “slashes,” by open young
growths, or by mixed brush land and trees.
Dense forests, it is well known, are sadly lack-

SCIENCE

{[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

ing in bird population. The removal of the
forests has meant, of course, the disappearance
of a few, specialized avian tenants. But in
their place, occupying the clearings and mixed
growths, is a much greater population both as
to individuals and species. Kinglets, pileated
woodpeckers, and hermit thrushes may have
disappeared; but fox sparrows, chipping spar- -
rows, spotted towhees and a host of other birds
of like habitat preferences have come in. Cer-
tain little niches have been done away with;
but the change in the nature of the territory
at the hand of the lumberman has resulted in
there being many more, new niches; each of
these, evidently, of greater amplitude, of great-
er supporting power.

Very definite change in the other direction
has been that made as a result of the draining
of swamp lands. Many species thereby have
been eliminated, locally, many more species
than oceupy the reclaimed land; and, further-
more, I feel sure that the numbers of indi-
viduals, too, have been reduced, though not
in so large proportion. As instances, I would
refer to Nigger Slough and Gospel Swamp in
southern California, and to the region at the
confluence of the Sacramento and San Joaquin
Rivers in west-central California. A swamp is
really a very complicated type of environment;
within it usually may be recognized many
“niches” and a correspondingly large number
of avian occupants. Among these are the
herons, rails, gallinules, song sparrows, yellow-
throats and tule wrens, and, if there be open
water, coots, terns and several species of ducks.

The most serious adverse effect of the human
occupancy of California upon bird-life thus
far has, I believe, resulted from this reclama-
tion of the swamp lands. But, if you will re-
sort to memory, or examine a topographic map,
you will observe that the total area here in-
volved is very small compared with the terri-
tory that has been affected oppositely, by irri-
gation. Irrigated territory, moreover, is sub-
ject to continual and much farther spread,
while the possibilities of drainage are almost
exhausted.

Other modifications of primitive conditions
as a result of the white man’s occupation of

DECEMBER 15, 1922

the country are as follows: By the clearing of
brushlands, for example, in San Fernando
Valley, Los Angeles County; by the planting
of trees, afforestation, as exemplified in the
groves of trees around the Greek Theater and
on the Berkeley hills; by the cultivation of
dry grasslands, as on the coastal benches of
San Diego County; and by the formation of
storage reservoirs and canals, which, irrespec-
tive of the lands which they water, bring into
existence aquatic and riparian types of vege-
tation conducive to an abundant bird life.
Some of these it will be noted, check against
one another, so that status quo, in part of the
country, tends in some measure to be main-
tained.

In general, then, my contention is that there
has been, on the average, as a result of the
settlement. of California, a marked increase in
our bird population. Bird life at large has ben-
efited—and this in spite of various adverse fea-
tures which also have been imposed.
sage should be, therefore, one of optimism to
the bird-lover. It is to be understood that I
refer to birds of all groups together; not to any
particular group. There are vastly more of
the so-called “song birds,’ numerically, than
there are of the “game birds” and “birds-of-
prey.”
ously depleted, unquestionably, from various
causes associated with man; but probably not

My mes-

The latter two groups have been seri-

more than ten ‘per cent. of our original bird
population consisted of game birds and birds-
of-prey combined.

Permit me now to link up with current no-
tions and beliefs in regard to the status of bird
life some of the ideas that I have been en-
deavoring to express. In a lange proportion
of cases the reduction or disappearance of a
cherished species of bird, locally, such as may
have been laid to other entirely different causes,
has really been due simply and inevitably to
the reduction or complete effacement of the
kind of habitat the bird must have for its ex-
istence; in other words, its ecologic niche has
been reduced in volume, or destroyed. No one
could help it; nor can any one now stay the
process, except by restituting the lost factor;
for example, when land is bought or otherwise

SCIENCE

675

preserved from human use and devoted to the
use of the birds, as in national or state bird
or game reserves. Of course, in certain areas,
such as national parks and forest reserves, the
environments and the birds occupying them are
being preserved anyway, incidental to other
interests.

The tendency among sentimentalists has usu-
ally been to seek out a cause for the disappear-
ance of birds that is directly concerned with
their fellow men. The hunter, the boy with
the sling shot, the collector, any one of them
or all, loom wp as the “exterminators of birds”;
whereas, in truth, I believe, it is only in rare
cases and then only very locally, that these
agencies have had any effect at all. In other
words, if my line of reasoning has been cor-
rect, legal protection, with ninety per cent. of
our bird species, is absolutely unnecessary,
save as it applies, and then properly so, to
parks, the suburbs of cities, and to logically
constituted game and wild-life preserves, where
shooting for any purpose is out of order.

Recall the geometrical ratio of reproduc-
tion, and the consequent powerful potentiality
for recovery on the part of bird species. Let
me cite here the case of the eastern bluebird as
reviewed by Mr. P. A. Taverner in a recent
number of the Canadian Field-Naturalist
(XXXVI, April, 1922, pp. 71-72). In the
winter of 1895-96 a cold wave swept the South
Atlantic states, the sole wintering ground of
the eastern bluebird. As a result, famine and
death reduced the total bluebird population
almost, but not quite, to the vanishing point.
But in five years the species had recovered
“from almost nothing to practical normality.”
After reaching normal, a “saturation point of
population” for the species, it ceased to in-
crease; or, as I would express it, its ecologic
niche, of fixed amplitude, was then full. The
operation of the “factor of safety” not only
saved, but very quickly brought ‘back, the
species.

Another catastrophe, recorded by Dr. T. S.
Roberts (4uk, XXIV, 1907, pp. 369-377) hap-
pened to a sparrow-like species, the Lapland
longspur, in southwestern Minnesota, the mid-
dle. of March, 1904. It was migration time,

676

and a peculiarly wet and thick snowstorm that
occurred during the night of the thirteenth is
thought to have overwhelmed the birds when
in flight high overhead, soaking their plumage
and dazing them. At any rate, great numbers
hit the ground with fatal violence. In the
morning dead and injured birds were to be
seen over a wide stretch of country; on the
frozen surfaces of two lakes 750,000 dead long-
spurs were counted, by the method of laying
off sample units of area and checking the birds
to be seen on ‘these units. But in spite of this
spectacular destruction of individuals the Lap-
land longspur was not reported the following
years in the winter range of the species (Kan-
sas, ete.) as obviously less numerous than
usual. Did not the ability of the species to
recover from this extraordinary calamity rest
in the “factor of safety’?

There is good reason to believe that release
of intra-specific pressure on the breeding
grounds of a species is accompanied by greater
productivity on the part of the remaining pop-
ulation. he survival chances for the young
are greater where the safest type of nesting
places is available to all the adults seeking to
breed, and where congestion of population, and
consequent drain on available food supply, has
been relieved. Also, towards the end of the
year, when the annual pinch of food scarcity
comes into play, in the winter range, a larger
proportion of maturing individuals than usual
will survive. In other words, from one point
of view, calamitous reduction of population
benefits the immediately oncoming generations.

Let me center attention now upon the sig-
nificant fact that certain of our birds are, and
always have been, totally unprotected by either
law or sentiment—jays, crows, linnets, shrikes
and blackbirds. The rate of annual increase
in those species is no different, in so far as I
am aware, than it is in the vireos, warblers,
mockingbirds, tanagers, and purple finches,
which latter are looked upon as desirable song-
birds. Yet the former are holding their own
just as well as the latter, protected, species.
Their numbers are always kept up to top-
notch commensurately with the prevalence of
their niches. They have reached the maximum

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1459

population possible to them, consistent with
the nature of the country, and they hold to it.

We all know of the enmity of orchardists,
and agriculturists, and sportsmen toward
linnets, blackbirds and blue jays, respectively.
Now and then, and there is a case on record
as far back as thirty years ago, “blue jay
hunts” are held; in one lately recorded in- .
stance, at Hollister, San Benito County, 1,531
California jays were killed in one day, in a
prize competition for the destruction of so-
called “vermin.” Incidentally, you will note
that feel particular animosity
toward any competitor or rival in their own
field! They are right after anything that can
be called “vermin” from their standpoint. As
far as we can see, as a result of such cam-
paigns—shooting of blue jays, netting of black-
birds, and poisoning of linnets—there has been
only a very temporary and local reduction in
the numbers of these birds; two or ‘three sea-
sons bring them back ‘to normal: that is, to
the maximum numbers which the amplitude of
their respective niches will warrant.

Bird population, in kind and quantity, is
conirolled primarily by conditions of habitat.
It is a matter of food and shelter. The natural
history collector, as a factor against birds, is
only an exceedingly minor influence, one which
like all the others, is allowed for by the “factor
of safety.” My readers will begin to suspect
that I have become sensitive because of the
inveighing that certain well-meaning but unin-
formed people have undertaken against the
killing of birds for specimens. I admit the
score.

sportsmen

JOSEPH GRINNELL

MUSEUM OF VERTEBRATE ZOQLOGY,
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA

ARE PERMANENT DISTURBANCES
OF EQUILIBRATION INHERITED?

Tue writer of this note has just brought to
completion a long series of studies upon the
mechanics of equilibration in the white rat.
During the course of these studies certain facts
appeared which, though incidental to the orig-
inal problem, may be of importance in the

DrcEMBER 15, 1922

field of genetics. The facts were observed un-
der the following conditions. As a part of our
method, we found it necessary to rotate white
rats day’ and night in small revolving cages
over a period of several months. The eylindri-
eal cages, less than a foot in diameter, were ro-
tated in a horizontal plane, some at sixty and
others at ninety times a minute. Several
months after this series of continuous rotations
began, a part of the subjects were removed
from the rotating cylinder (a) in order to make
observations on their behavior subsequent to
their long continued rotation, and (b) in order
to make room for litters which were born from
time to time within the cylinders. Several
weeks (the time has varied from individual to
individual) after these first subjects had been
removed from ithe rotating cylinders, it was
discovered that permanent changes in bodily
movement and posture had taken place. The
most striking changes were (a) circular move-
ments about the nest, usually in the direction
of the long continued rotation, and (b) a de-
cided turning or twisting of the head to the
right or to the left. It was discovered, more-
over, that these changes in posture were oc-
casionally accompanied by swellings and dis-
charges from the region of the ear, and more
frequently, by decreasing bodily tonicity and
finally by death. Further search revealed the
fact that this state of “disequilibration” was
accompanied by important changes in the
character and in the duration of the ocular
movements following short rotation periods (20
turns in 10 seconds).

Before ‘the appearance of this state of “dis-
equilibration,” a few of the subjects with a long
history of rotation were mated with other ro-
tated and unrotated individuals solely for the
purpose of adding to our experimental stock.
Curiously enough, however, individuals began
to appear in successive generations presenting
the same types of disequilibration observed in
the parents. That is to say, rotated individuals
mated weeks after having been taken from the
revolving nests gave ofispring a part of which
were disequilibrated in the same manner as
their parents. Subjects of this kind have con-
tinued to appear at various intervals during

SCIENCE 677

the past two years. They have even been dis-
covered in the third generation after rotation.
Up to this time about sixty disequilibrated in-
dividuals have been counted in a total popula-
tion of approximately five hundred.

Unfortunately, the demands of the experi-
ments upon equilibration made it impossible to
investigate adequately the genetic implications
involved in these materials. Nevertheless, the
facts as such were considered striking enough
to warrant their presentation at a meeting of
the Society of American Naturalists in 1921.
The questions and suggestions received at that
time have led to the conclusion that the biologi-
cal aspects of the problem should be established
and that definite attempts should be made to
discover (a) whether the stock in our labora-
tory may not have given one or more mutations
or segregates which, in turn, became the pro-
genitors of the curious individuals still appar-
ent; (b) whether an experimental method of
modifying the function of an important organ
has been accidentally discovered; and (ce)
whether actual inheritance of such an acquired
bodily change can be demonstrated. The first
suggestion seems improbable because no similar
rats have appeared in a large related control
stock running along with the experimental
stock. Furthermore, the character of the dis-
equilibration has appeared to be regularly de-
pendent upon the direction in which the an-
cestors were rotated. With respect to the third
problem, namely, a possible demonstration of
the inheritance of acquired vestibular changes,
a number of biologists have offered the sugges-
tion that long continued rotation may have
induced the production of toxins or of other
substances which, in operate after
the fashion of the lens anti-bodies, recently de-
scribed by Guyer and Smith.

It seems desirable, then, to institute a new
series of rotations with a new stock and to use,
as well, other means of inducing disturbances
in the semicircular canals so that more reliable
evidence for or against the apparent cases of
inheritance in our own stock may be discovered.
It is also desirable to know what morphological
and structural changes have taken place in the
vestibular areas subsequent to long-continued

turn,

678

excitation. Fortunately, Professor J. A. Det-
lefsen, who has cooperated with the writer ever
since the first eases of disequilibration appear-
ed, is able to devote a sabbatical year at the
Wistar Institute to the further investigation
of the facts above described.
C. R. Grirrita
DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHOLOGY, .
UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS

THE USEFULNESS OF ANALYTIC
ABSTRACTS

THE various ways in which preliminary ab-
stracts should be of service to scientific readers
were pointed out about a year ago!, but whether
such abstracts as actually prepared and pub-
lished would ‘be worth while could be deter-
mined only ‘by experiment. This has been
done. After analytic abstracts had been ap-
pearing in the Astrophysical Journal and the
Physical Review? for over two years the fol-
lowing return post-card questionnaire was sent
by the chairman of the Division of Physical
Sciences of the National Research Council to
each reader, with the request that he under-
score in each parenthesis the word or words
which represent his answer to the question im-
plied: .

I look through (the Astrophysical Journal, the
Physical Review) regularly. Before reading the
articles, I read the abstracts (always, usually,
sometimes, seldom, never). Instead of reading
the articles, I read the abstracts in (many, some,
few, no) cases. The abstracts have helped me
understand the articles in (some, few, no) cases.
The abstracts have proved useful in locating in-
formation in (some, few, no) eases. I read the
subtitles in the abstracts first (sometimes, never).
I find the subtitles of value as an index of the
abstract (sometimes, never). The abstracts in
general give (too much, too little, about enough)
information. I think they should be continued
(yes, no).

IT have the following suggestions to make:

1“* Scientific Abstracting’? by G. S. Fulcher,
Science 54, 291, September 30, 1921.

2 The preliminary abstracts in the Physical Re-
view are called ‘‘Synopses’’ to distinguish them
from the abstracts of papers presented at meet-
ings which are printed in connection with the
proceedings of the Society.

SCIENCE |.

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1459

Replies were received from 805 readers,
including 83 readers of the Astrophysical Jour-
nal, 502 readers of the Physical Review, and
220 readers of both. Although the answers
from the three groups have been tabulated sep-
arately, the results are so nearly the same for
each that only the results for all readers, that
is, the percentages of all readers answering
each question in each alternative way, will be
given here. Since some replies are incom-
plete, the sum of the percentages is usually
less than 100.

1. How frequently are the abstracts read be-
fore the articles?

always by

usually by

41.9 per cent. of readers.
45.9 per cent. of readers.

sometimes by 9.9 per cent. of readers.
seldom by 2.1 per cent. of readers.
never by 0.2 per cent. of readers.

100.0 per cent.

2. How many abstracts are read instead of
the articles?

many by 44.5 per cent. of readers.

some by 39.7 per cent. of readers.

few by 9.5 per cent. of readers.

none by 2.6 per cent. of readers.

96.3 per cent.

2

3. How many abstracts helped in understand-
ing the articles? ;

some helped 58.1 per cent. of readers.
few helped 17.7 per cent. of readers.
none helped 11.8 per cent. of readers.

87.6 per cent.

4. How many abstracts have proved useful in
locating information?
some useful to
few useful to
none useful to

of readers.
of readers.
of readers.

59.3 per cent.
16.6 per cent.
11.4 per cent.

87.3 per cent.
5. Should the abstracts be continued?
yes 92.8 per cent. of readers.
no 4.0 per cent. of readers.

96.8 per cent.

Sinee the abstracts are read, always or usu-
ally, by 88 per cent. of the readers; are read

DECEMBER 15, 1922]

instead of many of the articles »y 45 per cent.;
and have been found helpful in other ways by
59 per cent., they have evidently proved of de-
cided value. In what ways? According to the
testimony of the readers: “They are great time
savers’; “They frequently give all information
necessary about the articles’; “They double a
man’s range of reading.” Moreover, the ab-
stracts have ‘been copied verbatim in Science
Abstracts and have thus reduced the labor of
preparing that abstract journal by ten per
cent. The abstracts have therefore to some
extent fulfilled their purpose of saving the
time of scientific men.

How about other sciences? Are astronomy
and physies essentially different from chem-
istry, botany, zoology, geology, physiology,
ete., in their methods of disseminating scientific
information? If 93 per cent. of the readers
of these astronomical and physical journals
find that preliminary abstracts are useful to
them, would not the great majority of other
scientific readers also find such abstracts use-
ful? The responsibility resting upon the
editors of other scientific journals is clear.

Now as to the nature of the abstracts which
_ should be provided. The abstracts which have
been appearing in the Astrophysical Journal
and Physical Review are of the analytic type
developed by the National Research Council.®
They aim to give a complete description and
adequate summary of the results reported in
each article. The replies to the question:

6. Is the amount of information given, in
general, about enough, too little, or too much?

about enough 79.8 per cent. of readers.

too little - 6.7 per cent. of readers.
too much 4.8 per cent. of readers.

91.3 per cent.

these replies indicate that the abstracts, aver-
aging from 5 to 6 per cent. of the articles, have
been of about the right length, and it is not
believed they could be made much shorter with-
out considerably decreasing their value.

A distinctive feature of the abstracts is that
they contain italicized subtitles which give

3 Deseribed in
ferred to above.

“‘Scientific Abstracting’’ re-

SCIENCE

679

the various subjects involved more completely
and precisely than in general it is possible for
the author’s titles to do. One purpose of these
subtitles is to enable a reader who is not inter-
ested in the subject indicated by the author’s
title to determine by glancing through the sub-
titles whether something of interest to him has
not been incidentally included. Until readers
became accustomed to these subtitles, however,
it was to be expected that most readers would
consider them more of an annoyance than a
help; but the following replies show that a
surprising percentage of the readers have
already found the subtitles useful:

7. Do you ever read the subtitles in the ab-
stracts first?

sometimes

never

64.1 per cent. of readers.
17.5 per cent. of readers.

81.6 per cent.
8. Do you ever find the subtitles of value us
an index of the abstract?
sometimes 63.0 per cent. of readers.
never 12.7-iper cent. of readers.

75.7 per cent.

Since the subtitles also serve the purpose of
assisting in the compilation of a complete sub-
ject index and tend to insure more complete
abstracts, it is believed this feature should be
retained. Only three readers definitely objected
to the form of the analytic abstracts.

It is the practice of both these journals to
submit all authors’ abstracts to an abstract
editor to be revised or if necessary rewritten,
in conformity with the standards adopted.
While a few authors have objected to having
their abstracts “robbed of individuality,” a
number of readers specially called attention to
the importance of having the abstracts edited
so that a uniform standard might be main-
tained. It can safely be affirmed that since
most authors are inexperienced in writing ab-
stracts and also differ widely in their ideas of
the function of the abstract, authors’ abstracts
if not thoroughly edited are sure to fall far
short of rendering the service which prelim-
inary abstracts should render, even if detailed
instructions are furnished. But after the
edited abstracts begin to appear regularly, they

680

gradually establish a standard to which authors
will conform more and more closely as time
goes on, and therefore the amount of editing
required will become less and less.

Finally, mention should be made of the sug-
gestion of several readers that larger type be
used for the abstracts than has been the cus-
tom. Since more people read the abstracts
than read the articles, it would seem obvious
that the type of the abstracts should be at least
as large as that of the articles.

It should not be long before all scientific
journals, in fulfilment of their duty toward
their readers, provide carefully prepared pre-
liminary abstracts of their scientific articles.
There can no longer be any doubt of the value
of such abstracts. It remains only to over-
come the practical obstacles to the introduc-
tion of the new policy.

In conclusion we desire to express our thanks
to the 805 readers whose cooperation gave us
the information herewith reported.

Gorpon 8. FuLCHER

CoRNING GLASS WORKS ©

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

CONSERVATION OF THE RESOURCES OF
THE PACIFIC

The following resolutions were unanimously
adopted by the Pan-Pacifie Union Commercial
Conference, meeting at Honolulu on November
7, 1922:

Whereas, It is known that many valuable spe-
cies of marine mammals such as fur seal, sea
otters, elephant seals and whale, and many spe-
cies of important food fishes such as salmon and
halibut, formerly occurred in the Pacific in such
vast numbers as to constitute the objects of fish-
eries whose annual products were worth more than
one hundred million dollars, and

Whereas, Nearly all of those great natural re-
sources have been seriously depleted, many of
them even to commercial extinction, through greed
and short-sightedness and ill-comsidered fishery
methods, and

Whereas, It is known that small remnants of
fur-seal and sea-otter herds and small numbers of
whales and of other commercially valuable species
still remain in certain places, and

Whereas, The rapid recovery of the Alaska fur-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

seal herd in the short period of ten years from
complete commercial ruin to an annual produc-
tion of more than one million five hundred thou-
sand dollars, as a result of the international fur-
seal treaty of 1911, demonstrates conclusively the
wonderful recuperative power of such depleted
natural resources of the sea under international
cooperation, and justifies the belief that other
depleted fisheries can be rehabilitated through
similar cooperation among the nations concerned,
and

Whereas, It is conservatively estimated that
these resources when rehabilitated will yield to
the world a regular annual product of more than
one half billion dollars in value, therefore be it

Resolved, That the Pan-Pacifie Commercial
Conference strongly recommends that the various
countries bordering on, or interested in, the Pa-
cific, take such steps as may be necessary to bring
about an international treaty for the restoration
of the vanishing resources of the Pacifie to their
former abundance, that they may be maintained
for all time as the objects of great commercial
fisheries of which they are easily capable, and be
it further

Resolved, That this Commercial Conference rec-
ommends that the governments of the countries
bordering on the Pacific enter into correspondence
for the purpose of establishing an jnternational
commission for the scientific study of the biology,
physics and chemistry of the Pacific in the inter-
est of the restoration, proper utilization and con-
servation of its vanishing natural resources.

THE UNIVERSITY OF WYOMING AND
DR. NELSON

Tue trustees of the University of Wyoming
have passed the following resolutions:

Whereas, Dr. Aven Nelson, after five years as
president of the University of Wyoming, resigned
at the June meeting of the board of trustees, and

Whereas, His activities as president ceased
October 2, upon the arrival of his successor, Dr.
Arthur G. Crane, of Edinboro, Pennsylvania, and

Whereas, Dr. Nelson has served this university
in various capacities from the infancy of the
institution, in all of which he has succeeded to a
high degree, and

Whereas, His industry, his patience and his
scholarship were controlling factors in. carrying
the University of Wyoming through the world
war and the reconstruction period thereafter to its
present success.

DECEMBER 15, 1922]

Be it resolved, By the board of trustees of the
University of Wyoming that we appreciate more
fully than we can express his splendid loyalty
and labors; that we extend to him our sincere
wishes for a continued pleasant relationship upon
his return to his former position as professor of
botany; that we bespeak for him and Mrs.
Nelson a long and happy life and all the joy and
satisfaction which come from real service and the
‘knowledge of a duty well done.

Resolved, That this expression of our good will
be made a part of the permanent records of this
board, and a copy thereof be transmitted to Dr.

Nelson.
W. C. DEMING,

President, the Board of Trustees

INDUSTRIAL DIVISION OF THE
AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY

In order that more time can be given to the
presentation and discussion of papers delivered
before the Industrial Division, American
Chemical Society, it has been decided to ask
all who plan to give papers before this division
to submit completed manuscripts not later than
March first to the secretary of the division.
The manuscripts will then be sent to reviewers
in a similar manner as contributed articles now
submitted to any of the journals of the Amer-
ican Chemical Society. Upon favorable recom-
_mendation of the reviewers and the officers of
the division, the papers -will be included in the
final program of ithe division.

It has been keenly felt for some time that
something must be done to raise the standard
of some of the papers which have been given
before the division. No doubt the new method
will reduce the number of papers to be pre-
sented at any one meeting, but it is felt that a
few genuinely good papers followed by a suf-
ficient ‘time for discussion will be what most
chemists desire.
many papers on the program that a time limit
of seven minutes was allotted with three min-
utes for discussion. This time proved to be so
short that a speaker could not present the
paper in the best manner possible, and the
period for discussion was so short that there
was practically no attempt on the part of mem-
bers to diseuss the subject.

THE

SCIENCE

At Pittsburgh there were so .

681

Since the spring meeting occurs at New
Haven from April 3 to 7, inclusive, it is neces-
sary for members of the American Chemical
Society who are planning to present papers
before the industrial division to send their
papers on or before March 1 to the secretary
of the division.

ERLE M. Bruies,

INDUSTRIAL Division, Secretary
AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY,

Kopak Park, Rocuestrr, N. Y.

THE UNION OF AMERICAN BIOLOGICAL
SOCIETIES

THE most important business before many of
the societies concerned at the Christmas meet-
ings is the consideration of the proposed or-
ganization of the Union of American Biological
Societies.1

That there is strength in union has long been
believed. The practical questions before the
biologists of the country are two: first, is it
possikile to achieve effective union in the diver-
sity of biological interests; second, is the pro-
posed Union of American Biological Societies
a sufficiently well thought out plan of organiza-
tion to give fair promise of effectiveness?

The answer to the first question would. seem
to be a clear and obvious “Yes.” More di-
verse groups have already shown that they can
by union achieve cohesiveness and power. The
unbroken record of history, from the time when
Benjamin Franklin said, “We must hang to-
gether or we will hang separately,” to the
present, from ithe first pooling of the common
interests of unlike individuals to the Standard
Oil Company and the American Chemical So-
ciety gives testimony to the real effectiveness
and power of united effort.

As to the second question, that can only be
answered after a study of ‘the plan of organiza-

1 The original name was the Federation of
American Biologial Societies. The word Federa-
tion in the Constitution has been changed by vote
of the temporary executive committee to Union
because of the confusion that some have thought
would be caused by the similarity of the first
provisional name to that of a small group of so-
cieties already organized.

682

tion as published in ScieNcE of September 29.
.The plan has evolved after long discussion as
a matured expression of opinion of the repre-
sentatives of some twenty-five organized groups
of biologists. If this plan fails it seems likely
that we will wait a very long time for any im-
provement to come to biology from the con-
certed efforts of its scattered votaries.

I. F. Lewis,
Chairman Temporary Executive Committee

HOTELS FOR THE BOSTON MEETING

THE local committee for the Boston meeting
has supplied the permanent secretary’s office
with a list of the Boston hotels and their rates,
which is given below. The hotels are con-
veniently considered in five groups, according
to their locations. The following grouping is
employed in the tabular arrangement:

Group 1, north end of Boston Common: Belle-
vue Parker House, Quincy House, Young’s.

Group 2, south end of Boston Common: Adams
House, Touraine, Avery.

Group 38, Copley Square and vicinity: Copley
Square, Copley Plaza, Garrison Hall, Brunswick,
Vendome, Victoria, Westminster, Lenox.

Group 4, Upper Back Bay: Buckminster, Puri-
tan, Somerset. ;

Group 5, other hotels, each within a ten-minute

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

walk of one of the above groups (They furnish
excellent accommodations for those not requiring
a headquarters hotel): Essex (opposite South
Station), Arlington, Savoy (Columbus Avenue,
near West Newton Street), United States (Beach
Street, near South Station).

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

BrocrapHies of members of the National
Aeademy of Sciences who died during the year
1922 will be prepared as follows: A. Graham
Bell, by Dr. John J. Carty; J. C. Branner, by
Professor Bailey Willis; Wm. 8. Halsted, by
Dr. Wm. H. Welch; Henry M. Howe, by Dr.
Edwin H. Hall; Alfred G. Mayor, by Dr.
Charles B. Davenport; Alexander Smith, by
Professor W. A. Noyes.

To Dr. Fridtjof Nansen, the Norwegian
Aretic explorer and zoologist, has been award-
ed the Nobel Peace Prize for his work in re-
lieving the starving populations of Russia and
Asia Minor and for his endeavors to promote
the brotherhood of nations.

At the anniversary meeting of the Royal
Society on November 30, the following members
of the-council were elected: President, Sir
Charles Sherrington; treasurer, Sir David
Prain; secretaries, Mr. W. B. Hardy and Dr.

BOSTON HOTELS
RATES
NAME OF HOTEL Es WITHOUT BATH WITH BATH
NO.
SINGLE DOUBLE SINGLE DOUBLE
= :

Adams House 2 $2.00-$2.50-$3.00 | $3.50-$4.00-$5.00 | $4.00-$4.50-$5.00 $6.00 and up
Copley Square........ 3 $2.50 $3.50 $3.50 $5.00-$6.00 up
Copley Plaza.......... Sera s. on. eee Ls Wey, pea $4.50-$6.00 up $8.00 and up
Garrison Hall........ 3 $2.50 and up. Several suites for 2 to 6 persons. :
Arlington ...... asad eae eens ASK fee ce eres 62.50-$3.00-$3.50 $3.50-$4.00
Bellevue ..... 1 $3.00 and up | $4.00-$5.00 | $4.00-$5.00 $6.00-$10.00
Brunswick ........----- 3 $2.50-$3.50 | $4.50-$6.00 $4.00-$5.00 $6.00-$7.00
Buckminster 4 Residence hotel—Limited accommodations—singly and en suite.
Hissex ...-------- 5 32200-5220 00am) |i anaes $3.00-$4.00 $6.00-$7.00
Puritan eed) el era) | ee $5.00-$7.00 $6.00-$8.00
Savoy ......- BWM ee 8! cere | $2.00-$2.50-$3.00 | $2.50-$3.00-$4.00
Somerset - 4 $4.00 $5.00 $5.00-$6.00-$7.00 | $6.00-$7.00-$8.00
Tounaine meses 2 $3.00-$4.00-$5.00 | — $5.50-$7.00 | $5.00-$7.00 $7.50-$10.00
Vendome ...........----: 3 $7.00-$13.00—American plan.
Victoria ...... 3 $3.00 $5.00 $4.00 $6.00
Westminster -. 3 $2.50 $5.00 $3.50 $6.00-$7.00
Parker House ........ 1 $2.50-$3.50 $4.00-$5.00 $3.50-$5.00 $5.50-$8.00
Quincy House ........ 1 $2700=$2200 Fe |e (ees $320 0Fandsupin es || amet
Young’s Hotel ...... 11a | a et -— ea | | (es $4.50 and up $5.50 and up
United Staes.......... 5 $2.50 $4.00 $3.50-$4.00 $4.50-$5.50

ASN enn IN escent | SL a | cee $5.00-$6.00

3 $3.00-$3.50 $4.00-$5.00 $3.50-$6.00 $5.00-$8.00

DECEMBER 15, 1922]

J. H. Jeans;: foreign secretary, Sir Arthur
Schuster; other members, Professor V. H.
Blackman, Professor H. C. H. Carpenter, Pro-
fessor T. R. Elliott, Professor A. Harden, Sir
Sidney Harmer, Professor W. M. Hicks, Pro-
fessor H. F. Newall, Professor G. H. F. Nut-
tall, Professor D. Noel Paton, Lord Rayleigh,
Professor O. W. Richardson, Sir Ernest
Rutherford, Dr. Alexander Scott, Mr. F. E.
Smith, Sir Aubrey Strahan and Professor J. T.
Wilson.

Dr. WautEeR B. Cannon, professor of physi-
ology in the Harvard Medical School, colonel
of the Medical Officers’ Reserve Corps, has
been awarded a distinguished service medal
citation by the War Department. The citation
reads: “For exceptionally meritorious and dis-
tinguished services as director of physiological
research for the American Expeditionary
Forces in France. His activities in connection
with the development of a standard method for
the resuscitation of the wounded and in organ-
izing, instructing and directing the work of
shock teams in hospitals at the front reflected
professional skill and judgment of the highest
order, and resulted in saving many lives.”

Ernst G. Fisuer, chief mechanical engineer
in the U. S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, has
retired from the service, after over thirty-five
years of active work for the government.

Miss Enanor PHILBRooK CusHING has been
appointed professor emeritus of mathematics
of Smith College.

JosmpH W. Grrec, recently assistant in the
department of mineralogy at Columbia Uni-
versity, has been added to the staff of the Geo-
physical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution of
Washington, as a petrologist.

Dr. J. S. Jorrm has been appointed associate
in research (bacteriology) in the New York
State Agricultural Station, beginning January
1, 1923, vice G. J. Hucker, who has been grant-
ed leave of absence for the academic year
1922-23.

THE official canvass of the vote in New York
State shows that Dr. Charles P. Steinmetz, of

SCIENCE

683

the General Electric Company, who was a can-
didate for state engineer on the socialist and
labor tickets, received 291,763 votes.

Dr. Jan SrAnek has been appointed minis-
ter of health of Czechoslovakia, to succeed Dr.
Bohumil Vrbensky.

Dr. Rupert Buus, former. surgeon-general
of the U. S. Public Health Service, is attending
the Near East Conference at Lausanne,
Switzerland, as technical adviser to the Amer-
ican observers on the question of the control
of maritime quarantine in the Near Kast.

C. P. Lounspury, entomologist of the Union
of South Africa, who has been in official ento-
mological work for twenty-six years at Cape
Town, is visiting the United States.

Dr. Louis Cantor, chief sanitary officer to
the British administration in Palestine, is in
the United States, studying sanitation methods
in the larger cities for use in Palestine. He
states that modern sanitary’ systems are rap-
idly eliminating malaria and trachoma in that
country.

Dr. W. J. Humpureys, meteorological phys-
icist of the U. 8. Weather Bureau, lectured on
“Hogs and clouds” to the Pittsfield, Mass., see-
tion of the American Institute of Electrical
Engineers on November 9. During the follow-
ing week he gave four lectures on the proper-
ties and movements of the atmosphere to the
aviation officers at Langley Field, and on De-
cember 13 he spoke on “Fogs and clouds’ to
the department of physies of the Brooklyn
Institute of Arts and Sciences. i

Dr. C. E. Kennero Mess, director of the
research laboratories of the Eastman Kodak
Company, lectured before the Franklin Insti-
tute of Philadelphia on December 7 on ‘“Re-
cent advances in photographic theory.”

Proressor Victor Lunuer, of the Univer-
sity of Wisconsin, addressed the state branch
of the American Chemical Society during the
last week of November on the subject of
“Selenium oxychloride,” the new solvent which
he has discovered.

A sertes of lectures by John Dewey will be

684

delivered in part (and later published com-
plete) in Union Theological Seminary before
the coming joint meeting of the eastern and
western divisions of the American Philosoph-
ical Association on December 27, 28 and 29.
Under the general caption of “Experience and
Philosophy,” but subject to alteration, Pro-
fessor Dewey proposes the following tentative
outline: (1) Experience and philosophical
method; (2) Experience and reason; (3) Hx-
perience and selves; (4) Experience and the
psychical; (5) Experience and values; (6) Ex-
perience and metaphysics.

Dr. Engar F. Smiru, former provost of the
university and president of
Chemical Society, gave a lecture recently, in
the Harrison Laboratory of the University of
Pennsylvania, on Joseph Priestley. The lec-
ture was under the auspices of the Priestley
Club. Dr. Smith, author of a biography of
Priestley, showed for the first time many ex-
hibits of Priestley and his work.

the American

Srr Cuarues A. Parsons delivered the sec-
ond Joule memorial lecture at the Manchester
Literary and Philosophical Society’s house on
Tuesday, December 5, his subject beimg “The
rise of motive power and the work of Joule.’

Tue Henry Sidgwick memorial lecture at
Newnham College, Cambridge, was delivered by
Lord Rayleigh on December 2, the subject being
“The iridescent colors of natural objects.’

Dr. Vicror C. VaucHan, of the School of
Medicine of the University of Michigan, gave
a public address on December 6 under the
auspices of the chapter of Sigma Xi of the
University of Wisconsin, in commemoration of
the hundredth anniversary of the birth of Pas-
teur.

Ar the ceremonies to be held, December 26,
under the auspices of the Academy of Medi-
cine to commemorate the centenary of Pasteur,
papers dealing with the development of Pas-
teur’s work in the various branches of medical
science will be read by Delezenne, for general
biology; Widal, for medicine; Delbet, for sur-
gery; Wallich, for obstetrics; Barrier, for vet-
erinary medicine, and Calmette, for hygiene.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

CHARLES FRANKLIN Emerson, dean emeritus
of Dartmouth College, and formerly professor
of astronomy and physics, who was at the col-
lege from 1865, when he entered, until 1913,
when he retired as dean at the age of seventy
years, died on December 1. :

CHArtes Apert Fiscuer, professor of
mathematies and astronomy at Trinity College,
died at the Hartford Hospital, following an
operation for appendicitis on December 9, aged

-forty-eight years.

Dr. Emit Hotmeren, professor of histology
at Stockholm, has died at the age of fifty-six
years.

Dr. JOHANNES PETRUS KUENEN, professor
of physies in the University of Leyden, died on
September 25, aged fifty-eight years.

Tux death is announced of M. Barbier, cor-
respondent of the Section of Chemistry of the
Paris Academy of Sciences, at the age of
seventy-five years. ve

In honor of the late Lieutenant Colonel E. F.
Harrison, who shortly before his death on
November 4, 1918, became head of the British
Chemical Warfare Department, a fund amount-
ing to £1,640 has been collected. A memorial
to Colonel Harrison and other members of the
Chemical Society of London who lost their
lives during the war has been erected, and a
prize has been established. for the chemist
under thirty years of age who has carried out
the most meritorious researches in chemistry.

THE executive committee of the Australian
National Research Council has fixed the date of
the Second Pan-Pacific Scientific Congress as
August 13 to September 3, 1923. It is pro-
posed to hold the first session at the University
of Melbourne, and the second session (August
21 to September 3, at the University of Syd-
ney. From Melbourne and Sydney as centers,
excursions are planned as part of the congress
program and, after the adjournment of the
formal meeting, opportunities will be provided
for visits to: more remote parts of the con-
tinent.

Tue tenth annual meeting of the Indian
Science Congress, under the auspices of the

9

DECEMBER 15, 1922]

Asiatic Society of Bengal, will be held at Luck-
now on January 8 to 13, 1923. The congress
will be opened by Sir Spencer Harcourt But-
ler, governor of the United Provinces, who has
consented to be patron. The president of the
congress is Sir M. Visesvaraya, and the presi-
dents of the sections are as follows: Agricul-
ture: Dr. Kunjan Pillai, Trivandrum; physics:
Dr. S. K. Banerji, director of the Observatory,
Colaba, Bombay; chemistry: Dr. A. N. Mel-
drum, Royal Institute, Bombay; botany: Mrs.
Howard, Pusa; zoology: Professor G. Matthai,
Government College, Lahore; geology: Dr.
Pascoe, Indian Museum, Calcutta; medical re-
search: Lieutenant Colonel Sprawson, Luck-
now; anthropology: Dr. J. J. Modi, Bombay.
In addition to the regular program of the
meetings of the scientifie sections, a series of
general scientifie discussions has been organ-
ized, beginning with one on colloids by Dr.
S. S. Bhatnagar, of Benares. A series of illus-
trated public lectures on subjects of popular
scientific imterest has also been arranged, de-
tails of which will be announced later. Fur-
ther particulars regarding tthe congress may be
obtained from Dr. C. V. Raman, general secre-
tary, Indian Science Congress, 210 Bowbazaar
Street, Calcutta.

THE Colorado College science departments
have for two years maintained an under-
graduate honorary society, Delta Epsilon. The
purpose of the organization is to stimulate
interest in scientific research and achievement.
Members are elected on the basis of promise of
research ability. Ait the first meeting of this
academic year R. J. Gilmore, professor of
biology, discussed “Hormones and heredity.”

Unper the will of the late Dr. Carl von
Ruck, Asheville, N. C., approximately $700,000
has been bequeathed for scientific research
work on the prevention and eure of tubercu-
losis. The von Ruck Research Laboratory will
have charge of the fund, and the earnings are
to be expended by the corporation for “scien-
tifie research, study and experiment in tuber-
culosis and for the aid of tuberculous patients
who are unable to procure adequate and satis-
factory treatment.”

SCIENCE

685

Ar the annual dinner of the London School
of Tropical Medicine, held on November 1, it
was announced by Sir Arthur Robinson of the
ministry of health that a scheme was under
consideration whereby the London School of
Tropical Medicine would be incorporated with
the new Institute of Hygiene, which was made
“possible by a gift from the Rockefeller Foun-
dation of New York. Sir Havelock Charles
said that, if the aspirations of the school were
met, the support of the staff and students
would be freely given the new arrangements.

TtrouGH the president, M. Appell, the Mar-
quise of Arconati-Visconti has given the sum
of 100,000 franes to the French National Com-
mittee to Aid Scientific Research.

THE Paris correspondent of the Journal of
the American Medical Association writes that
French laboratories “are lacking in financial
resources, and that they find it difficult to sup-
ply what is indispensable in the way of instru-
ments and to secure the new men needed. This
state of affairs, so profoundly regrettable, was
clearly brought out at a recent meeting of a
group of scientists held under the auspices of
the Bienvenue francaise, to which representa-
tives of the lay press had been invited. Two
ways are open to remedy the situation. Pro-
fessor Appell, rector of the University of Paris,
has announced that a national committee for
the aid of scientific research has been founded.
It is also planned to address an appeal to M.
Poincaré, president of the council of ministers,
to authorize, in connection with the centenary
of Pasteur, a journée nationale in favor of our
laboratories.”

In the course of a field trip the past summer
with a class from the Univetsity of Chicago,
Dr. Adolph C. Noé, assistant professor of
paleobotany, secured from Mr. C. D. Young,
of Morris, Ulinois, a valuable collection of
fossil plants and animals from the Mazon
Creek. Mr. Young, who is master in chancery
of Grundy County, presented the collection to
the University of Chicago. It consists of 900
choice specimens selected from a great number
which Mr. Young has been collecting through
nearly forty years, and is the last great private

686

collection of Illinois fossils available. The col-
lection, which represents a value of several
thousand dollars and was given to the univer-
sity without any conditions or reservations,
will be housed in the Walker Museum of the
university.

Tue Liquid Carbonic Division of the Com- -

pressed Gas Manufacturers’ Association an-
nounces the establishment of an industrial fel-
lowship in the Mellon Institute of Industrial
Research of the University of Pittsburgh, for
the purpose of classifying, studying and de-
veloping the uses for liquid icarbon dioxide.
The founding of this fellowship is im accord
with the desire of the members of the associa-
tion to cooperate with users and prospective
users of liquid carbon dioxide, with the object
of developing efficient means of applying the
gas and of obtaining fundamental data bearing
In addition to
conducting research work, the fellowship will
be made a clearing-house of information re-
garding various uses of liquid carbon dioxide,
and data will be kept on file for the accommo-
dation of prospective users of this product.
The present incumbent of the fellowship is
Charles L. Jones, who will be glad to corre-
spond with any one interested in the use of
liquid carbon dioxide in industry.

on ifs use in various industries.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

Sir Witu1amM Duwn’s trustees have provided
the sum of £100,000 for the establishment of a
school of pathology at Oxford. They have also
endowed with £10,000 a readership in biochem-
istry at Cambridge.

Tue French government has offered a num-
ber of scholarships to Canadian universities,
including the universities of Toronto, McGill,
Laval and Ottawa. The winner of a scholar-
ship will spend the next academie year in
France. The scholarship has a value of 6,000
franes, with an additional 1,000 francs for
traveling expenses.

Masor Generat Lronarp Woop has re-
signed the office of provost of the University

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

of Pennsylvania in order to remain as gov-
ernor general of the Philippine Islands.

Dr. StepHen S. Cotvin, professor of educa-
tional psychology at Brown University, has
been elected professor of education at Teach-
ers College, Columbia University. Dr. George
A. Coe and Dr. Albert Shiels have also been
elected professors of education.

Dr. Apert SaLatHn, of the College of
Pharmacy at Albany, has been appointed head
of the department of chemistry of Sweet Briar
College, and Dr. Frederick William Stacy, for-
merly of the Florida State College for Women,
has been appointed head of the department of
psychology.

A course of lectures on “Animal Psychol-
ogy” will be delivered at Harvard University
during the second half of the current college
year by Dr. Wallace Craig, formerly professor
of philosophy at the University of Maine.

M. AvceEr has been appointed director of the
laboratory of analytical chemistry at the Uni-
versity of Paris, to succeed the late M. Ouvrard.

Proressor Max Boprnstein has been in-
vited to succeed Professor Nernst as head of
the Physical-Chemical Institute of the Univer-
sity of Berlin.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE

GLACIATION IN THE CORDILLERAN
REGION}!

To tHE Epiror or Science: Communica-
tions on the above subject by Thomas Large
and Frank Leverett have appeared, respective-
ly, in the September 22 and October 6 issues
of Science. To these the writer wishes to add
that during May and June, 1922, he found
glacial drift including till with striated stones
similar to that mentioned by Leverett at many
other places on the Columbia Plateau west and
southwest of Spokane. The writer expects to
study the region further and to publish the
results later on, but the information now at
hand is sufficient to warrant the statement that

1 Published by permission of the Director of
the U. S. Geological Survey.

DECEMBER 15, 1922

during one or more comparatively early stages
of the Pleistocene ice from the north advanced
over the Columbia Plateau in a southwesterly
direction far beyond what heretofore has been
regarded as the southern limit of glaciation.
The evidence at hand tends to show that the ice
extended at least over large parts of Spokane,
Lincoln and Adams counties, and less complete
information suggests the possibility that the
glaciation extended much farther.

Concerning the glacial drift, which by the
way is not the only evidence the region affords
that land ice was formerly present, the alterna-
tive ideas that it was brought to place by float-
ing ice or running water have been considered
and rejected. Large patches of the drift may
be seen southwest of Cheney, west of Lantz,
and in the neighborhoods of Winona, Lacrosse
and Kahlotus, these occurrences being selected
for mention at random and not because they
are more typical than scores of others scattered
throughout the region.

The writer wishes to point out that he does
not herein attempt to correlate or otherwise
define the relations between the glaciation de-
seribed and the glaciation already known to
have covered the plateau west of the Grand
Coulee or an ice stream which, as shown by
recent observations, traversed the ecoulee itself.

J. T. PARDEE

U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY

EFFECTS OF COPPER WIRE ON TREES

In 1918 the writer heard it stated that shade
trees were being killed by driving one or two
pieces of copper wire into each. To test the
effects of copper wire six young trees from two
to four inches in diameter were selected, and
on March 21, 1919, there were driven into each
tree five pieces of large copper wire 1.5 inches
long. The end of each wire was left flush with
the outer surface of bark. All wires were with-
in six feet of the base of the tree. The trees
comprised two hemlocks, two alders, one cedar,
one willow.

On July 3, 1922 the trees were examined and
found to be perfectly healthy. In all cases
they had completely healed over the wires, and
their growth was equal to that of other similar

SCIENCE

687

trees in the immediate vicinity. On cutting
into the trees, it was found that there was very
little injury to the wood, merely a brown color
showing for about 1.5 inches above and below
the wire, and about 0.25 inch to each side.
Grorce B. Rica
UNIVERSITY or WASHINGTON

TANGENT LINES

Oscoop and Graustein state in their Analytic
Geometry, page 176: “A tangent to a conic
might then be defined as the limiting position
of a line having two points of intersection with
the conic, when these points approach coin-
cidence in a single point.” This accords with
the ancient idea of a tangent as touching a
conic at only one point. That idea is given in
a paragraph on page 163 of my History of
Mathematics, from which Professor G. A. Mil-
ler quotes! part of a sentence and then criti-
cizes that part. I illustrate this mode of eriti-
cizing by quoting from Professor Miller’s re-
view the following: “Students can usually
prove a large number of theorems which they
do not understand.” Serious-minded readers
would deny this statement, but when they read
the whole sentence and the paragraph from
which this fragment is taken, they will ac-
quiesce.

FLortan Cagort

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS i
A Treatise on the Analysis of Spectra. By
W. M. Hicks, Se.D., F.R.S., emeritus pro-
fessor of physies in the University of Shef-
field, formerly fellow of St. John’s College,
Cambridge. Cambridge University Press,
1922, 231 pp. of text, 92 pp. of tables and
25 figures.
The purpose of the book is twofold, to serve
as an introduction and handbook and to pre-
sent the mature results of the author’s extensive

investigations. The treatise is based on an
Adams prize essay presented in 1921. For the
first purpose the appendix contains the

Meggers and Peters tables for corrections to
be added to the wave-lengths in air to reduce

1This Journal, October 13, page 421.

688

to vacuum, Rydberg’s values of N/(m + »)?,
data for wave-lengths and wave-numbers of
lines allocated to series, and the Hicks formula
constants, in Chapter V in which he considers
the effects of physical conditions, the various
Zeeman patterns so far determined, illustrative
of Preston’s law, are collected for convenient
reference and also the Stark data, and a table
of radiation and ionization potentials is
included.

Chapters II and III give a clear introduc-
tion to types of series and to the series systems
now recognized in the different groups of the
periodic table. In the following chapter Ryd-
berg’s rules are discussed in the light of the
series systems now determined and of the avail-
able spectroscopic data. With the exception
of the constancy of N, he considers that all the
values are valid; as to N he concludes that we
ean not hope to determine exact values of N in
the various series and elements from deter-
mination of formule constants alone, that it is
practically certain that the value in general is
larger than Rydberg’s value and nearer Bohr’s
limit and that changes in N in the different
sequences should not be unexpected.

A distinctive contribution by Hicks to the
study of series is his modification of the Ryd-
berg formula which he writes n = A — N/
(m + p + a/m)? where A is the limit,
p. + a/m the “mantissa,” and N 109675 R. U.
In his notation the separations from the
limit in a series of lines form a “sequence”
of values and a particular value is the
mth “sequent.” Separation is the differ-
ence in the wave-numbers of two lines, v =
doublet separation, A = the difference in the
mantisse of doublet sequences and is shown to
be an integral multiple of the “oun.”

The mantisse play an important role in the
author’s development of the idea of the oun
and “linkages.” He writes A = m q w? where
m is an integer, gq a universal constant, and w
the atomic weight, which for convenience he
divides by 100. From a consideration of the
doublets of Ag he finds that q is 361.78.

The oun is considered to be a fundamental
constituent in spectra and is written oun = 4,

= %6 where 6 = 361w?. The evidence given

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

for the dependence of the oun on the square of
the atomic weight is very strong, but the ex-
istence of isotopes introduces difficulties which
the author recognizes but does not succeed in
disposing of completely.

When a multiple of the oun is added to the
limit mantissa, the modification is called dis-
placement and a displaced line a “collateral.”
This leads to his theory of linkages, “that in
certain elements the spark spectra consist
almost wholly of long sets of lines differing
from one another in succession by certain spe-
cial separations which can be calculated from
the ordinary series limits and A, these separa-
tions may be called links, and a complete set a
linkage. These linkages appear to start from
ordinary series lines.” The subject of linkages
is too complicated for presentation in a review;
it aims ‘to relate the lines which do not belong
to the regular series to lines occurring in the
ordinary series by a set of links. These links
may occur in any order forming chains and
meshes of lines. That “linkage spectra” repre-
sent realities and form a category coordinate
with series and ‘band spectra would seem to be
a matter for further investigation.

The reviewer’s impression is that the author
over-estimaltes tthe accuracy of the spectro-
scopic data and one wonders whether with more
accurate data the evidence for linkages would
be increased or lessened. Professor Hicks is
convinced that links occur with much greater
frequency than a chance arrangement would
suggest, but considers the most conclusive evi-
dence to be furnished by the large number of
regularities, repetitvons, collocations of links
and meshes. It is, however, somewhat sur-
prising that lines in spark spectra should be
related to each other by separations calculated
from the limits and the A of the ordinary
series inasmuch as spark spectra are charac-
terized by their special types of series.

Chapters VIII and IX are devoted to a dis-

_ cussion of the distinguishing properties of the

p and s and of the d and f sequences. For the
p sequence the march of the mantisse and
atomic volumes is so close that he concludes
that the p sequence depends directly on a quan-
tity equivalent to the volume of the atom. On

DEcEMBER 15, 1922].

the other hand the d and f sequents have as
mantisse multiples of the oun. The last two
chapters are given to the monatomic gases and
to the consideration of miscellaneous questions.

This book by Professor Hicks representing
extensive researches for data and extended eal-
culations based on the material collected and
giving the views of one who has studied the
subject so long and thoroughly will prove a
welcome addition to a working library. It pre-
sents a general and connected view, provides a
means of ready reference and suggests lines of
investigation, It is well indexed and replete
with references to original sources.

CuHarues E. St. JoHN

AMERICAN EOSINS

In a recent report of this committee! it was
mentioned that a number of satisfactory sam-
ples of eosin had been obtained from American
sources. At the time this early report was
published no very definite data were at hand
to show how these samples compared with sam-
ples of Griibler’s eosin. At the present time,
however, data have begun to accumulate giving
a more satisfactory survey of the whole situa-
tion and it seems time to publish them.

Kosin is a compound of the phthalein series
with a formula essentially as follows:

a ae
KO VN oO eGR
eee ese |e,
Ne | oN
— CO.Kk

There are an almost innumerable number of
different eosins on the market, differing slightly
in chemical composition and having quite dif-
ferent properties and_ solubilities.
They are usually classed in three or four groups
denoted in Schultz’s Farbstofftabellen, fifth edi-
tion, under the numbers 587, 588, 589 and 590.

Hosin 587 is the stain best known to the

staining

1Committee on Standardization of Stains:
“¢Preliminary Report on American. Biological
Stains,’’? Screncrz, N. 8., LVI, 156-160.

SCIENCE

689

biologist.
formula given above, namely the potassium
salt of tetrabromfluorescein; but the monobrom
and dibrom derivatives are also known, and as
they sometimes occur mixed with ‘the tetrabrom
compound, the composition of this dye varies
somewhat. Its color varies accordingly, be-
cause the more bromine atoms the bluer the
shade. This dye is specified in ithe trade by
such terms as eosin, yellowish eosin, eosin Y,
and eosin G, water-soluble eosin, eosin W, eosin
Y extra, eosin § extra.

Kosin 588 and 589 are both known as alcohol-
soluble eosin, being only slightly soluble in
water, but differ from each other in that 588
contains a methyl group in the place of one
of the potassium atoms in the above formula
while 589 contains an ethyl group in this same
position. Number 588 is more correctly called
methyl eosin while 589 is called eosin S or
primrose. ae

Kosin 590 is a compound in which two of the
bromine atoms have been replaced by NOo-
groups. This compound, like 587, is readily
soluble in water but differs from it
bluish color. It is known as bluish eosin, eosin
B or eosin BN.

It must be understood that with such great
variation in the possible composition, every
manufacturer puts on the market a product
slightly different from that of any other and
as these compounds differ in shade each differ-

It is typically the same as the

in uts

ent product is generally known by its own
trade designation. This gives the very con-
fusing list of designations applied to eosin, of
which those mentioned above are merely the
commoner It simplifies matters, how-
ever, if it is remembered that the terms eosin,
yellowish eosin or water-soluble eosin refer to
587, while alcohol-soluble eosin refers to 588 or
589 and bluish eosin to 590.

No attempt was made in this work to get
uniformity in the technic that was used, each
collaborator being asked to use ‘the samples
for any purpose and according to any technic
with which he was familiar. One of the inves-
tigators, in fact, reponts five different tests to
which he submitted the samples. As a result,
these samples have been tested in a great

ones.

690

variety of ways and although at is hardly to be
expected that the reports would be uniform
under such conditions, it is felt, nevertheless
that they have considerable value on account
of the number of different methods by which
the samples were tested. One of the collab-
orators tested tthe samples by the simple stain-
ing of bacteria; two used them for counter-
staining in the Gram technic for staining bac-
teria. In three cases they have been tested in
blood stains, in one ease with hematoxylin, in
another with methylen blue in the well-known
Wright method, and in the third without com-
bination with any other dye. Three of the
investigators used the samples in tissue stain-
ing as a counter-stain against hematoxylin.
One of~the investigators, besides using the
eosin in blood work and as a counterstain in
the Gram technic, reports results obtained in
staining cultures of Penicillium. These cul-
tures after being killed and fixed were stained
in mass, then mounted and examined. Lastly,
another collaborator reports using the samples
in two indicator media, one with brilliant
green and the other with methylen blue.

The variety of these methods is sufficient so
that there is good reason to feel that any sam-
ple which gave good results in all cases can be
safely recommended. It was very clearly
demonstrated that in the great variety of pur-
poses for which these samples of eosin have
been used, the American samples almost with-
out exception are the best. Some may be
slightly better than others for certain special
purposes but there seems to be no reason for
condemning any of them.

Satisfactory samples were obtained from the
following American concerns: Eimer and
Amend, Harmer Laboratories Company, Heller
and Merz Company, N. Y. Color and Chemical
Company, Providence Chemical Company,
Darwin Chemical Company, Campbell and
Company, Geigy Chemical Laboratory, Cole-
man and Bell Company, H. 8. Laboratories,
E. Leitz, National Aniline and Chemical Com-
pany Company and D. H. Pond.

The chairman of the committee is ready upon
request to furnish investigators with informa-
tion as ‘to the apparent merits of each of these
samples for particular purposes and as to how

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

any particular one of these lots of eosin may
be obtained.
Committee on Standardization of Biological
Stains, National Research Council,
8. I. KornHavuser
F. W. Mattory
F. G. Novy
L. W. SHarp
H. J. Conn, Chairman

ZOOLOGICAL NOMENCLATURE

In accordance with the provisions respecting
the use of “plenary power” by the Interna-
tional Commission on Zoological Nomenclature,
to suspend the rules in cases in which the appli-
cation of the rules will produce more confusion
than uniformity, the secretary has the honor
herewith to notify the zoological profession
that a proposition by Commissioner David
Starr Jordan is now before the commission to
suspend the rules in the following cases and to
“definitely reject the works named below from
consideration under the
namely:

law of priority,”

Gronow, 1763, Museum Ichthyologicum.

Commerson (as footnotes in Lacépéde Hist. nat.
des Poissons, 1803 mostly).

Gesellschaft Schauplatz, 1775 to 1781. An
anonymous dictionary accepting the pre-Linnean
genera of Klein.

Catesby, 1771, Natural History of Carolina,
Florida and the Bahamas (1731 to 1750), revised
reprint by Edwards, 1771.

Browne, 1789, revised reprint of Civil and Nat-
ural History of Jamaica (1766).

Valmont de Bomare, 1768-1775, Dict. Raisionnée
Universelle d’Hist. nat. (several names acciden-
tally binomial).

In connection with these works, attention is
invited to Opinions Nos. 18, 20, 21, 23, 24,
issued by the commission.

The effect of the foregoing proposition is to
reject as unavailable (as of the dates in ques-

1 Notice to zoologists (especially to ichthyolo-
gists) of Consideration of Suspension of Rules of
Nomenelature in cases of Gronow (1763), Com-
merson (MS. names—quoted in footnotes in
Lacépéde, 1803 mostly), Gesellschaft Schauplatz
(1775 to 1781), Catesby (1771 reprint by Ed-
wards), Browne (1789), and Valmont de Bomare
(1768 to 1775).

PEcEMBER 15, 1922]

tion) all systematic (chiefly generic) names
published as new in the foregoing works, but
to leave them as available as of the dates when
they were later adopted by authors whose
nomenclatorial status is unquestioned by zoolo-
gists; thus, a modus operandi is suggested to
solve in a practical way tthe impasse which has
existed for about twenty years in the views
respecting the use of the words “binary” and
“binomial” and while neither side concedes the
principle it supports, both sides unite on an-
other principle, namely, that the important end
in view is to obtain, not to delay, results, and
that the “plenary power,” used judiciously
and discreetly, offers us a practical method to
solve the problems upon which there is such
conscientious difference of opinion as to inter-
pretation that concensus of opinion seems
hopeless.

The secretary is fully persuaded that the ap-
plication of the rules to the foregoing publica-
tions will continue to result in greater confu-
sion than uniformity and he proposes at the
expiration of the proper time (one year) to
recommend to the commission the adoption of
Commissioner Jordan’s proposition.

Zoologists interested in this proposition,
pro or con, are cordially invited to present
their views in writing to any member of the
commission so that they can be given due con-
sideration when this proposition comes to vote
(approximately October 1, 1923). Views, pro
or con, which reach the secretary prior to Sep-
tember 1, 1923, will be manifolded and sub-
mitted to the commission prior to the final vote.

C. W. StILEs,
Secretary to Commission

SPECIAL ARTICLES

THE ORGANIZATION OF THE NERVOUS
MECHANISM OF RESPIRATION

We have been accumulating experimental
data on the nervous mcehanism of respiration
for some years past, but these results have
been for tthe most part presented in preliminary
notes only. Cireumstances have arisen which
make it seem probable that the publication of
the full experimental data must be still further
delayed. We wish, therefore, to present a

SCIENCE

691

brief summary of our general conclusions at
this time.

Gad stated that the nervous mechanism of
respiration extended from the facial nerve to
the lumbar plexus. We must, in all probability,
enlarge ‘the field to include the fifth cranial
nerve. Any. statement of the organization of
this mechanism must take account of all the
pertinent elements found in this rather exten-
sive region.

The primitive nervous mechanism for the
control of respiratory movements in vertebrates
has its central representation in the medulla
oblongata. Against Trevan and Boock’s view?
of a primitive respiratory center in the region
of the corpora quadrigemina we would say,
(1) that we have no evidence of any cells in
this region which are sensitive to carbon di-
oxide in the same sense that the central cells
in the medulla oblongata are sensitive to it;
and (2) since the corpora quadrigemina them-
selves are not primitive, it is difficult to see
how such a primitive mechanism ‘could be lo-
cated there.

The activity of the central respiratory mech-
anism in the medulla is conditioned by (1)
the concentration of substances dissolved in the
blood, e.g., carbon dioxide; (2) the tempera-
ture of the blood flowing through the medulla;
(3) the volume of blood flowing through the
medulla in unit time, and (4) afferent nerve
impulses from various peripheral sensory fields.
All these various conditions are summed al-
gebraically in the central respiratory mech-
anism. This view implies an important exten-
sion of our common idea of the summation of
stimuli.

The afferent nerve impulses arise, in higher
mammals, e.g., the cat, from the lungs and the

1 Pike, F. H. and Coombs, H. C., Soc. Ea. Biol.
and Med., 1917, xv, 55; Am. Journ. Physiol.,
1918, xlv, 569; Coombs, H. C., Am. Journ.
Physiol., 1918, xlvi, 459; Pike, F. H., Coombs,
H. C., and Hastings, A. B., Soc. Ex. Biol. and
Med., 1919, xvi, 49; Am. Journ. Physiol., 1921,
xlvii, 104; Pike, F. H. and Coombs, H. C., Am.
Journ. Physiol., 1922, lix, 472.

2Trevan, J. and Boock, E., Journal of Physi-
ology, 1922, lv, 331-339.

692

respiratory epithelium generally, parts of the
alimentary epithelium, the pleura, and the
muscles of the thoracic wall, the diaphragm,
and the abdominal muscles.

The afferent paths are (1) the vagus (tenth
cranial nerve) from the lungs ‘and ‘trachea, the
fifth cranial from the mucous membrane of the
nose, the glossopharyngeal (ninth cranial) from
the pharynx and the portions of the soft palate,
the phrenic? from ithe diaphragm, the sym-
pathetic* from the thoracic wall, and the dorsal
roots of the spimal nerves from the thoracic
and abdominal muscles.

The central connections of the vagus do not
necessarily extend beyond the medulla oblong-
ata. The central connection of the spinal
tracts arising from dorsal root fibers are pri-
marily with the mid-brain (region of the cor-
pora quadrigemina) and only secondarily with
the medulla oblongata.

We have no evidence of any-itrue respira-
tory mechanisms of an accessory sort in the
spinal cord. The efferent root cells in the
spinal cord have no special sensitiveness to car-
bon dioxide.

The respiratory rate lbecomes slower after
division of both vagi for the reason that affer-
ent impulses over the vagi, which are normally
summed with the carbon: dioxide in the blood
to produce an excitation of the cells of the
medulla, are no longer present, and the exeita-
tion of the central cells is now dependent in
large part upon the carbon dioxide alone. The
form of the respiratory movements changes
for the same reason that the movements of a
limb undergo a change in character when the
afferent nerves from the limb are divided, 2.e.,
both ‘types of movemenits become ataxic.

A further fall in the respiratory rate ensues
when, in addition to, division of the vagi, there
is section of the dorsal roots of the spinal
nerves or ‘transection at the lower border of
the midbrain because there is a still greater loss
of afferent nerve impulses, and excitation of
the efferent cells in the medulla oblongata be-
comes almost wholly dependent upon the car-

3 Mathison, G. C., Review of Neurol. and Psychi-
atry, 1912, x, 553.
4Barry, D. T., Journ. Physiol., 1912, xlv, 473.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

bon dioxide of the blood. The respiratory
movements also become correspondingly more
abaxie.

Costal movements of respiration fail afiter
section of the dorsal roots alone for the reason
that the efferent root cells of the intercostal
nerves, which are normally excited by impulses
from at least two sources—the descending res-
piratory motor fibers and the dorsal roots of
ithe imtercostal nerves—now receive impulses
from the descending fibers only. There is no
actual paralysis of the efferent root cells, since
costal movements are immediately resumed
when contraction of the diaphragm is prevent-
ed. This indicates that von Monakow’s dia-
schisis effect is due to loss of some nervous
impulses normally entering into the process of
excitation of a motor cell.

Our idea of the manner of action of the
nervous mechanism for respiration may be
briefly stated as follows. Afferent impulses
passing into the central mechanism in the
medulla oblongata reach the efferent cells
through connections which do not pass out-
side of the medulla itself. The central path-
ways of afferent impulses over the sympathetic
fibers and the phrenics are at present unknown.
Afferent impulses coming in over the dorsal
roots of the spinal nerves reach ithe efferent
root cells through intra-spimal connections, but
the discharge of these cells is withheld until
the arrival of impulses over the descending
tracts in ‘the spinal cord. Impulses from these
two sources are summed in the excitation of the
efferent root cells. Other impulses from the
dorsal root fibers pass up the spinal cord to
the region of ithe corpora quadrigemina, but
whether over the ventral spino-thalamie fibers?
or over fibers in the spino-cerebellar tracts is
uncertain. From the midbrain, these impulses
are relayed to the cells of tthe respiratory cen-
ter in the medulla oblongata. The excitation
of these cells is dependent upon the summation
of stimuli arising from (1) the concentration
of carbon dioxide in the blood flowing through
these cells, and (2) the nervous impulses com-
ing in over the various afferent pathways. The

5 Ransom, The Anatomy of the Nervous Sys-
tem, Philadelphia, 1920, p. 104.

DECEMBER 15, 1922

afferent nerves thus have the double function
of (1) contributing to the excitation of the
cells in the respiratory center, and (2) of con-
trolling the movements of the muscles arising
from this excitation. While it is undoubtedly
true that the respiratory center may act auto-
matically under conditions which preclude the
effect of afferent impulses® it is our opinion
that its normal activity is not wholly auto-
matic but partly reflex.

F. H. Pixs

Heten C. Coomss

CoLuMBIA UNIVERSITY

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

(Continued)
DIVISION OF AGRICULTURAL AND FOOD CHEMISTRY. II

The application of certain commercial dyes to
the reductase test on milk: M1InNin F. DrESSLAR
and H. A. Wxss. The decolorization of methylene
blue by the reductases in milk furnishes a rapid
approximate determination of its bacterial age.
In order to make the test more convenient for
bakers, grocers, restaurant keepers, cooking classes
or housewives, who might wish to test milk
claimed to be fresh on delivery, eighty-four dye-
stuffs sold under trade names for household use
were tested. By a series of eliminations, the most
satisfactory ones were determined, eight in num-
ber. They are: ‘‘Diamond Dyes’’ (wool and
silk), cardinal, garnet, orange, turkey red; ‘‘ Rit’’
dyes, blue, flesh, lavender, red. The decolorization
times, which vary for each, but are reasonable,
and the effect on various types of milk-whole,
skimmer, eream, pasteurized, boiled, malted, con-
densed, evaporated, were determined. Sugges-
tions for the use of the test by non-technical
people are given.

Data on the thickening of condensed milk:
ALAN LeigHTon and CourTLanp 8. Mupcs.

Use of frozen eggs in mayonnaise: S. K. Ros-
INSON. Comparisons between the fresh and frozen
eggs were made on batches of mayonnaise. No
difference in the product was noticeable, imme-
diately after preparation. Both products were
well emulsified and had good body. The following
physical tests were then applied: microscopical
examination, freezing test, incubation, shaking
test and effect of air and light. Not any of these

6 Stewart, G. N., and Pike, F. H., Am. Journ.
Physiol., 1907, xix, 328.

SCIENCE

693

tests put the frozen egg product at a disadvan-
tage. Mayonnaise made from frozen eggs held
well in a warm room for thirty days.

Changes in hens’ eggs stored in water glass
and in lime solutions: F. C. Cook and J. B.
WILSON. Strictly fresh and commercial eggs,
which were preserved in water glass (1-10, 1-13
and 1-20) and saturated lime solutions. Separate
jars of each were stored in the laboratory and in
a cellar. At the beginning of the experiment and
after various periods samples of the eggs were
examined physically, bacteriologically and chem-
ically. Best results were obtained by holding
strictly fresh eggs in a 1-10 water glass solution
at cellar temperature. Changes of considerable
magnitude were found in water, ash and nitrogen
contents of both whites and yolks. Bacteria were
not found to be a factor in deterioration. Am-
monia nitrogen and acidity of fat proved to be
the best indices of decomposition.

Manganese, aluminium and iron ratio as related
to soil toxicity: R. H. Carr and P. H. Brewer.
Much emphasis has been given in the past to the
isolation of organic toxins which were thought to
be the cause of soil toxicity, while in more recent
times the trend of investigation has been turned
more specifically to soil acidity as the reason for
poor crop yield. Investigations which have been
conducted on a large variety of soils using the
potassium thiocyanate method for soil acidity
and toxicity, described hy one of the writers, indi-
cates that the cause of infertility of many soils,
supplied with sufficient plant food, is due to the
presence of soluble manganese compounds in some
eases, to aluminum compounds in other instances
and sometimes to a combination of the two. The
toxicity of soluble iron is not so apparent, as it
is usually associated with a considerable quantity
of soluble aluminum in an acid soil. The potas-
sium thiocyanate method has been found helpful
in this study, because of the color changes taking
place when these elements are present in the soil
in easily soluble form. If the soil is more acid
than p,, 5.5 a red color of ferric thiocyanate is
produced in the presence of soluble ferric iron
and if this soil solution containing manganese is
made slightly more basic, a green color will de-
velop in the liquor. The depth of the color will
be proportional to the amount of manganese in
the soil solution. This color begins to form when
the soil contains about 0.008 per cent. of soluble
manganese. The green color will be found asso-
ciated with nonproductive acid soils, and since it
is shown that manganese does not precipitate
as a hydroxide until a p,, of about 7.9 is reached,

694

a ‘large amount of limestone (8 to 10 tons in
addition to that required to remove the red color)
will be required. In some instances the cost of
this large amount may be prohibitive.

The effect of selenium compounds wpon the
growth and germination of plants: Victor E.
Leyine. The findings of Gassmann (zs. Physiol-
Chem., 1917, 100, 209) that selenium is a con-
stituent of plants has led to the inquiry as to the
effect of selenium compounds upon germination
and growth. White lupine and timothy seedlings
were used in the experiments. Concentrations of
0.001 per cent. to 0.0001 per cent. show no injuri-
ous effect; in some experiments these concentra-
tions favor growth. Concentrations of 0.01 per
cent. and over are exceedingly inimical to ger-
mination and to growth. The compounds may be
arranged as follows in the order of diminishing
toxieity: selenious acid, selenic acid, sodium
selenite, sodium selenate and potassium seleno-
eyanate. This order agrees well with that ob-
tained with animal experiments testing the rela-
tive toxicity of these compounds. It is evident
from the results obtained that selenium can not
replace sulfur in the nutrition of plants.

The determination of nitric nitrogen in the
soil solution: WaLTrrR THoMAS. The determina-
tion of nitric nitrogen is the béte noir of the soils
chemist. Inasmuch as the phenoldisulfonie acid
method is the one that is the simplest and most
rapid, and therefore more generally used by soil
chemists than any other, the author has carried
out some experiments on the effect of various
flocculating and clarifying agents under carefully
controlled conditions by this method and com-
pared the results with the Devarda reduction
method, which is the only one that has escaped
serious criticism. The results obtained by dif-
ferent investigators have been very conflicting,
but the results of the present investigation indi-
cate that: (1) The use of either potash alum or
alumina cream (even if neutral) results in large
losses of NOg; (2) CaO if freshly ignited is the
most satisfactory floeculating and clarifying
agent; (3) The Devarda alloy method gives ex-
cellent results on the soil solution, but is not ap-
plicable to rapid routine work.

DIVISION OF FERTILIZER CHEMISTRY
F. B. Carpenter, chairman
H. C. Moore, secretary
Water-soluble nitrogen in mixed fertilizers:
R. N. BRACKETT.
Studies on the availability of organic nitro-

genous compounds: C. S. RoBinson.

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1459

Review of methods of determining nitrogen in
fertilizer: E. W. Macruper.

Possibilities in the use and preparation of con-
centrated fertilizers: Wiuuiam H. Ross. The
Haber and other processes for fixing nitrogen
and the volatilization method of preparing phos-
phoric acid all yield materials, directly or by
combination, of different composition and higher
concentration than those ordinarily used in the
manufacture of fertilizers. Some of these mate-
rials, as ammonium phosphate, have chemical and
physical properties which make them admirably
suited for mixing with ordinary fertilizer mate-
rials, or for making mixed fertilizers of higher
concentration than any now in use. Others, as
ammonium nitrate, can not be satisfactorily used
in present fertilizer mixtures unless means can
be devised for eliminating or neutralizing prop-
erties which interfere with their use in this way.
The work of the Bureau of Soils on concentrated
fertilizers and fertilizer materials was therefore
undertaken not with a view to replacing the or-
dinary fertilizer materials, nor of providing high
quality fertilizers which would command higher
prices per unit, but rather with the double pur-
pose of devising means of utilizing new sources
of fertilizer materials and of decreasing the cost
of handling and transporting fertilizers by
increasing the concentration of mixtures which
Tequire shipment to a distance. The advantages
and disadvantages of low-grade fertilizer mix-
tures are discussed and a review given of progress
made in the preparation of concentrated fertilizer
materials.

Recent investigations on the oxidation of
sulfur by micro-organisms: J. G. LipMANn. There
has been isolated at the New Jersey Agricultural
Experiment Station a new sulfur-oxidizing organ-
ism which has been named Thiobacillus thioxidans.
This organism grows readily in purely inorganic
media containing, aside from the usual mineral
salts, elementary sulfur. It derives its energy
from the oxidation of sulfur and obtains its car-
bon from carbon dioxide. It will grow readily
in a medium having a hydrogen-ion concentration
of 4.0 to 5.0 and will continue to multiply when
the hydrogen-ion concentration exponent is below
1.0. The sulfur is oxidized by this organism to
sulfuric acid. The acid so produced may be
utilized for a variety of purposes. Mixtures of
mineral phosphates and sulfur, properly inocu-
lated with Thiobacillus thioxidans, will be con-
verted into acid phosphate. Inoculated sulfur
added to the soil will inerease its acidity to a
point where certain objectionable fungi, like those

DrcEeMBER 15, 1922]

producing scab of potatoes and scurf of sweet
potatoes, may be largely if not entirely sup-
pressed. The transformation of sodium car-
bonate, present in excessive amounts in so-called
black alkali soils, into sodium sulfate may be
similarly accomplished. The direct use of inocu-
lated sulfur for the purpose of supplying sulfates
where these may be, present in inadequate
amounts, or the use of the same material for the
production of potassium sulfate from greensand
marl is indicated. The elimination of soil-infest-
ing insects, or nematodes and of undesirable vege-
tation may also be accomplished by means of
sulfur inoculated with cultures of Thiobacillus
thiowidans.

Trend of modern fertilizer plant construction:
Perer 8. Gincurist. This paper will deal with the
construction features of up-to-date fertilizer plants,
including types of buildings, materials for build-
ing construction, equipment for plants and the
relation of equipment to the building. Especial
attention will be given to the design of plants
with the necessary equipment for the economical
handling of materials, silos or storage bins for
storing phosphate rock, air separation for ground
rock, the development of mechanical dens for
making ecid phosphate and economical methods
of manipulating and bagging finished goods.

Modern trend in fertilizer plant operation:
E. H. Armstronc. The manufacture of sulfuric
acid as the basis of the fertilizer industry. <A
brief résumé of this subject, giving developments
from its inception to the present time. A brief
discussion of the present methods pursued in
operating a modern sulfuric acid plant. A short
discussion of the developments in acid phosphate
manufacture, together with a review of the more
modern methods and the trend toward finer grind-
ing, emphasizing the necessity for close chemical
control. A comparison of the old and new ways
of mixing fertilizer, showing the tendency towards
larger mixing .units and a better conception of
the necessity for more methodical sampling and
for coordination between operating and analytical
departments to insure closer analyses.

Modern trend of chemical control in the fer-
tilizer industry: H. C. Moorr. Chemical control
involves the practical application of chemical
phenomena and laws to the manufacturing opera-
tion, thereby directing or restraining influences
as conditions require. Chemical control is not
chemical analyses alone, but is the sum total of
chemical analyses, chemical knowledge and prac-
tical experience and the correlation and applica-

SCIENCE

695

tion of these with the problems at hand. Chem-
ieal control has pointed the way to remarkable
economy in the manufacture of sulfuric acid; to
economic progress and a greatly improved product
in the manufacture of acid phosphate; and to
the cost, mechanical condition and quality in the
manufacture of mixed fertilizers. The modern
trend of chemical control in the fertilizer indus-
try is to substitute knowing for guessing; to
learn the best working conditions for each type
of plant, and the materials and mixtures it is
required to use or make; to determine the best
and most economical combinations of materials to
be used in the manufacture of fertilizer; to deter-
mine the best methods of formulating and using
the materials so selected; to determine the gen-
eral crop needs and materials most suitable for
supplying it; to determine the combination of
materials which must be avoided or if possible to
see how this may best be done; to determine the
best means of avoiding large unit losses of mate-
tials, of preventing analytical discrepancies and
of sampling all products to insure reliable
analytical results. Thus chemical control prop-
erly becomes both the governor and safety valve
on the whole machinery of the fertilizer industry.
_ Modern trend in state fertilizer control: AN-
DREW J. PATTEN.

Modern trend in fertilizer legislation: J. EB.
BRECKENRIDGE.

Modern trend in fertilizer experimentation:
Dr. H. J. Wuerever. Fertilizer experiments at
Rothamsted on permanent meadows, at Rhode
Island on limed and unlimed soils and with dif-
ferent phosphates and potash salts, coupled with
similar experience elsewhere, and the studies of
lime-magnesia ratios, of the different effects of
iron, magnesia and of manganese, boron, stron-
tium, barium, lithium and other elements not usu-
ally considered plant foods have shown the ne-
eessity for intensive study of the physical, chem-
ical and biological conditions best adapted to each
kind of plant. At the same time, the relation of
soil colloids to problems of fertilization and plant
nutrition has been especially emphasized. Future
investigators will study thoroughly physical and
biological soil properties as related to fertiliza-
tion, correlating them more closely than before
with individual plant requirements and adapta-
tions.

The determination of potash in mixed fertili-
zers: F. B. Carpenter. A brief review of the
methods for the determination of potash in mixed
fertilizers prior to the adoption of the Lindo-

696

Gladding method as official by the Association of
Official Agricultural Chemists, with modifications
which have been made since. The official method,
although popular with analysts, gives low results
and suggestions are made as to modifications,
which may be used to recover all the available
potash. It is recommended that: the fertilizer
division take up the matter and work out an acecu-
rate method, which will be acceptable to the As-
sociation of Official Agricultural Chemists.

Some sources of error in the determination of
insoluble phosphoric acid in acid phosphate and
fertilizers: W. R. AUSTIN.

Some sources of error in the determination of
total phosphoric acid in acid phosphate and fer-
tilizers: W. R. AUSTIN.

A qualitative scheme for the detection of cyan-
amide and related compounds: G. H. BUCHANAN.
Quantitative methods for the determination of
cyanamide and its transformation products are
only of value when preceded by a reliable qualita-
tive examination. A qualitative scheme is pre-
sented, modeled after the ordinary schemes of
inorganic analysis, whereby ten forms of nitrogen
which are commercially related to cyanamide may
be detected. Provision is made for the inter-
ference of the more common inorganic radicles.
The ten forms included in the scheme are as fol-
lows: (1) Ammonia and its salts; (2) Cyana-
mide; (3) Hydrocyanic acid and its salts; (4)
Dicyandiamide; (5) Guanidine and its salts; (6)
Quanylurea and its salts; (7) Nitrie acid and its
salts; (8) Thiocyanic acid and its salts; (9)
Thiourea; (10) Urea. Comments relating to the
behavior of several other less common nitrogenous
forms are also made.

The importance of correct methods of applying
fertilizer: E. J. PraNnKkr. Faulty methods of
applying fertilizer in the seed row in direct con-
tact with the seed frequently causes visible dam-
age to the crops, for which the grower often seeks
to recover compensation from the fertilizer manu-
facturers. There is probably also a great deal of
invisible damage caused by improper method of
applying fertilizer. The effect of the relative
position of seed and fertilizer on the efficiency
of the latter, as developed in extensive researches
conducted during the past three or four years, is
discussed.

Fertilization in relation to plant composition:
H. A. Noyes. Mention was made of different
methods of testing the fertilizer requirements of
soils. A study of these methods showed that the
users of fertilizers measure results, almost en-
tirely, on the increases in the marketable portions

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

of the crop grown. There are many reports of
increased crops resulting from fertilization but
very little information of the character and com-
position of the plants. Industries which manu-
facture food-stuffs from grains and fruits find
the control of their finished products difficult, due
to immense variations in the composition of the
grains and fruits which serve as their raw ma-
terials. Data was presented showing that large
variations exist in the composition of two eco-
nomic plants. A plea was made for a study of
the optimum analyses for each economic agricul-
tural crop. Such a study would cause fertilizer
results to be judged in terms of variations toward
or away from the optimum analyses. As a result
of a long series of investigations of one erop
under field conditions the following hypothesis
was evolved. When the optimum composition for
any two parts of a plant is worked out it will be
possible to determine how to fertilize the soil by
studying the ratio that exists between the analysis
of the different portions of the plant.

Replacement of plant food adsorbed by the
hydrogels of ferric oxide and alumina: A. L.
FLeNNER, A. L. LicHTENWALNER and N. E.
GorDON. The hydrogels of ferric oxide and
alumina were allowed to suffer their maximum ad-
sorption of salts. When this equilibrium had been
reached the gels were subjected to successive
washings with distilled water, and when 50 ce. of
the filtrate failed to give more than a very slight
test for the adsorbed salt, the gel was subjected
to washings with various acid, base and salt solu-
tions, and the resulting filtrates analyzed for the
respective salts. Analysis of the gel was made at
each change of the leaching solution.

Can plants use salts adsorbed by soil colloids:
R. C. Wingy and N. E. Gorpon. Experimental
work was started in order to find if plants were
able to use salts which had been adsorbed by soil
colloids. The soil colloids were artificially pre-
pared, and after they had suffered a maximum
adsorption of the various salts used in plant
nutrition work, the plants were allowed to root
and grow in the colloids. After a certain period
of growth the plants were analyzed for the quan-
tity of different elements which the plants had
been able to take up from the colloids.

Utilization of waste products for organic nitro-
gen: E. H. Armstronc. The comparative abun-
dance of materials carrying organic nitrogen in
available form which were to be had in the early
stages of the fertilizer industry; the gradual
withdrawal of these from the fertilizer materials
market to the feed market; the use of part min-

DECEMBER 15, 1922

eral ammoniates and part organic ammoniates to
offset this shortage; the necessity of conserving
all waste materials carrying organic nitrogen and
of developing methods to render available the
nitrogen in such inert materials as leather, hair,
ete.; a description of the manufacture of leather
meal, its undesirability and a comparison of the
European and American products; a refutation
of the general understanding that the nitrogen in
the inert materials can not be made soluble with-
out loss of ammonia, and the reference to a high
elass product which can be used in any quantity;
a discussion of garbage tankage and other waste.

DIVISION OF PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY
T. G. Delbridge, chairman
W. A. Gruse, secretary

The vapor pressure of solutions of bdenzol,
hexane and cyclohexane in lubricating, gas ab-
sorbent and vegetable oils, with molecular weight
data: Roprrt B. Winson and Epwarp P. WYLpE.
A knowledge of the vapor pressure of volatile
solvents, such as benzol and hexane, dissolved in
various types of relatively non-volatile oils, is of
commercial importance in a considerable number
of applications. Of these the three most im-
portant are (a) the dilution of crank-case oils
with fuels in internal combustion engines; (b)
the complete removal of volatile solvents from
oils and fats obtained by the solvent extraction
processes; and (¢) the recovery of solvents by
serubbing with cold absorbent oils, as in benzol
recovery from coal gas. It was the object of the
work described in this paper to make possible
such generalizations and approximate calculations
for the three general types of volatile hydrocar-
bons—paraffin, napthene, and aromatic—dissolved
in most ofdinary types of oils. Molecular
weights were determined on all of the oils used,
and the amount of vapor pressure lowering for
different combinations was compared with the
theoretical as predicted by Raoult’s law. It ap-
pears that the amount of lowering produced by
different types of combinations is fairly definitely
predictable and that the results for any com-
bination met with in practice can be calculated
with quite satisfactory accuracy for any ordinary
temperature if the vapor pressure of the pure
volatile constituent is accurately known, together
with the molecular weight and type of hydro-
carbons present in the oil. Molecular weight data
included in the article is also of interest in being
the first published data on a fairly wide range of
the higher mineral oil fractions, the results hav-
ing been obtained by measuring the freezing point
lowering in benzol.

SCIENCE

697

Further data on the measurement of the
effective volatility of motor fuels: Rosrrt E.
Witson and Danren P. Barnarp, 4th. This paper
is an extension of the work presented at the Roch-
ester Section where some new methods of deter-
mining the effective volatility were described and
the results on three typical fuels presented in
some detail. This work has been extended to
more than a dozen fuels in this laboratory and
this, combined with data obtained in other labora-
tories, makes it possible to draw certain general-
izations as to the effect of the shape of the dis-
tillation curve on the effective volatility of the
fuel in so far as it affects the completeness of
vaporization and proper distribution in the mani-
fold. In the light of these investigations, the
writers believe that a single specification for the
85 per cent. point should replace all the present
limitations at 50, 90 and 96 per cent., and, simi-
larly, that the effective starting volatility can
best be measured as a routine proposition by a
specification at the 25 per cent. point rather than
at the 5 per cent. or initial point.

Some applications of vapor pressure measure-
ments: Haroup S. Dayrs. An improved differen-
tial-pressure apparatus for measuring vapor
pressure is described. The apparatus can be suc-
cessfully applied to the control of light oil recov-
ery plants. Actual data from plant tests are
given. It has been suggested that oils could be
standardized for efficiency in gas absorption by
preparing solutions containing the same concen-
tration of benzene and measuring their vapor ten-
sions. Experiments on seven representative ab-
sorbent oils have shown no appreciable differences
between them in this respect, and practical varia-
tions in their efficiencies must be attributed to
other factors rather than to their ability to lower
the vapor tensions of dissolved benzene. Some
applications of vapor pressure measurements in
gasoline recovery are discussed.

A rapid test for the decolorizing efficiency of
fuller’s earth: Leon W. Parsons and LEONARD
R. Cuurcuitt. The paper covers the develop-
ment of a rapid test for determining the relative
efficiencies of various samples of fuller’s earth
for decolorizing purposes. This test was desired
to avoid the necessity for resorting to tedious
filtration processes in the laboratory to determine
the quality of the clay, and it serves two pur-
poses: first, to eompare the decolorizing power of
yarious clays used in experimental investigations ;
and second, to serve as a rapid control test for
plant operation. A survey of the properties of
fuller’s earth which would parallel its power to

698

decolorize oils is given and the development of
several different tests is indicated. The most sat-
isfactory test, however, is based on the reaction
between fuller’s earth and pinene. Fuller’s earth
reacts vigorously with pinene to form polymerized
products with the development of a very large
amount of heat. The amount of temperature rise
is used as a measure of the efficiency of the clays
and data is given to show the relation between
this pinene efficiency and the decolorizing power
of such clays. A discussion of the mechanism
of the reaction, the materials used and the appli-
cation of the test for laboratory and plant use
is indicated.

Liffect of certain physical and chemical proper-
ties of emulsifying agents on the stability of. oil-
water emulsions: LEON W. Parsons and Brian
Merap. This paper embodies further studies on
Nujol-water emulsions and a comparison of these
systems and commercial mineral oil emulsions.
The technique of investigating these emulsions,
making use of microphotographic apparatus and
the ultra-microscope, is given. A study has been
made of the following factors of extreme im-
portance in connection with the stability of emul-
sions: Physical characteristics of emulsifying
agents; effect of opposing emulsifying agents in
the same system; action of oil soluble colloids on
the emulsifying agents; and similarity between
behavior of soaps and of finely divided solids.
The importance of relative wetting of the differ-
ent phases by the emulsifying agent is empha-
sized and it has been found that several common
emulsifying agents give abnormal results with
regard to type of emulsions produced. This
latter observation has important bearing on the
mechanism of the behavior of soaps and finely
divided solids as emulsifying agents. Certain
parallelisms have been observed between the be-
havior of the emulsifying agents used for Nujol-
water systems and those present in commercial
oil emulsions.

Engine experiment with high sulfur fuels:
Cart O. Jouns. These experiments were con-
dueted by Professor George Winchester, formerly
in charge of the Engine Research Laboratory of
the Standard Oil Company of New Jersey. A
Hyvyid type of Diesel engine (‘‘Thermoil’’) was
used. Several fuels were tested to ascertain the
effect of both free and organic sulfur. The runs
were continued for 384 hours. The fuels included
high sulfur Mexiean crude and gas oil, and mix-
tures of these with a polymer oil containing about
19 per cent. of combined sulfur, or 10 per cent.

SCIENCE

{Vou. LVI, No. 1459

of sulfur in the mixed fuel. The running time
for these fuels was 180 hours. The compression
in the engine reached 500 pounds. A run of 204
hours duration was made with kerosene contain-
ing 0.85 per cent. of free sulfur in solution. Fre-
quent examinations of the dismantled engine dis-
closed no evidences of corrosion, nor was the
copper tubing affected appreciably. Trouble was
encountered by the excessive formation of carbon
which deposited on the exhaust valve and clogged
the spray holes to the cylinders.

Gasoline saved on government trucks due to
adjusting the carburetors by gas analysis: G. W.
Jones and A. O. FIELDNER. Carburetor adjust-
ments by exhaust gas analysis on 15 trucks, vary-
ing from 2144 to 7144 tons capacity, showed that
all but one were too richly adjusted for maximum
power and economy. The adjustments made gave
an increase of over 20 per cent. in mileage for
the first month after testing and 16 per cent.
increase for the second month. The COs indi-
cator used for making the adjustments while the
trucks were operated was found to be practical
and easily operated by the laymen inexperienced
in the handling of chemical apparatus. An an-
alysis of the exhaust gas under the conditions
which the truck is operated gives an absolute
indication of the carburetor adjustment and re-
moves all guess-work. By adjustment for maxi-
mum power and economy is meant the leanest
adjustment without reduction of power.

Some factors affecting the accuracy of Saybolt
viscosity measurement and their control: P. E.
Kiopstra and W. H. Srannarp. Without a
suitable form of automatic temperature control,
it is impossible to secure experimental conditions
which conform to A. S. T. M. specifications,
namely, that ‘‘the bath shall be held constant
within 0.25° IF. (0.14° C) at such a temperature
as will maintain the desired temperature in the
standard oil tube.’?? At any rate, the require-
ments can not be met with the form of bath
deseribed in the specifications. In this paper,
the development is described of an electric heat-
ing and regulating device which at a temperature
of 212° F. (100° C.) will hold the bath tempera-
ture constant within 0.1° F. (.05° C.) through-
out an entire day’s run without attention. Con-
ditions within the oil tube are also considered,
and it is shown that when the A. 8. T. M. method
of stirring is followed, even with the bath tem-
perature very constant at 212° F., variations of
0.5° F. are observable on a sufficiently sensitive
stirring thermometer. A method of stirring is

DrceMBER 165, 1922]

then described by means of which it was found
possible to hold the temperature of the sample
under test constant to 0.01° F. over a period of
mdny minutes. Tabulated data show the Saybolt
readings at different temperatures, for samples
tested under ‘‘standard’’ conditions, and with the
new apparatus.

Cracking of unsaturated hydrocarbons by heat
to give saturated hydrocarbons: RaupH H. McKrEE
and RaupH T. Goopwin. The real liquid fuel
reserve of America is in its oil shale deposits.
In a study of oil shale we have found that dis-
tillation in vacuum gives an intermediate product
which on heating gives over into petroleum. A
study of this intermediate from various oil shales
shows it always to be highly unsaturated (dis-
solved by 66° Be sulfuric), sometimes 100 per
cent. unsaturated. If this waxy intermediate is
distilled at atmospheric pressure, there is ob-
tained a petroleum containing 48 per cent. sat-
urated hydrocarbons. Redistillation brings about
additional cracking with a further increase of
the percentage of saturated hydrocarbons. Ordi-
narily we expect the cracking of hydrocarbons to
proceed with increase of unsaturated constituents
but here we have the reverse, the unsaturated con-
stituents decreased 48 per cent. on the first dis-
tillation and still more on redistillation.

The refining of gasoline and kerosene by hypo-
chlorite solutions: A. E. Dunstan and B. T.
Brooks. The present paper is a description of
the process developed and perfected by A. E.
Dunstan and his associates in the Anglo-Persian
Oil Company. It is the first successful industrial
utilization of hypochlorite solution for refining of
petroleum oils. Gasoline and kerosene may be
refined in this way with treating losses of less
than one half of one per cent. Malodorous com-
pounds, including sulfur derivatives, are removed.
The treated oil is free from chlorine, is free from
substances which develop acidity, gummy sub-
stances or discolorations on standing, and it elim-
inates obnoxious waste products, such as acid tar,
eliminates acid recovery and the process can be
earried out in the usual form of treating appara-
tus. The new method, therefore, is cleaner and
easier to operate, gives a much better refined
product, and the refining costs are markedly low-
er, particularly when the losses incidental to sul-
furie acid refining are included in the comparison.
The process is particularly adapted to light dis-
tillates from high sulfur crudes and the savings
are greatest in the case of cracked gasolines.

Refining of cracked hydrocarbon oils: JACQUE
C. MorreLtL and Gustav Eeuorr. The various

SCIENCE

699

methods of refining light petroleum distillates
are discussed. The general methods involved are
(a) physical and (b) chemical. The physical
method of refining involving the use of various
adsorbent earths, though giving good results, can
not compete commercially with the chemical meth-
ods of refining. The chief chemical method in
use to-day is the sulfuric acid method of refining,
and it is the use of various modifications of this
method upon which the authors lay the greatest
stress. Applying various modifications of this
method with regard to subsequent treatment as
well as concentration and amounts of reagents,
the authors have successfully refined cracked dis-
tillates from the following raw materials and
have produced water white gasoline of sweet odor,
as well as a product which will pass the corrosion
and doctor test: (a@) California gas oil, (b) Mid-
continent fuel oil, (¢) Midcontinent gas oil, (d)
Mexican gas oil, (e) Texas fuel oil. The raw
oils were cracked on a commercial scale in the
gas-liquid phase. The authors describe in detail
the methods used with full discussion of the
theories involved, especial stress being laid upon
the treatment of hydrocarbons containing sulfur
compounds. The effect of the sulfuric acid treat-
ment upon the unsaturate per cent. is also dis-
cussed. It is concluded that following the meth-
ods and principles laid down by the authors, all
types of cracked hydrocarbons, regardless of the
type of raw oil used to produce them, can be
successfully treated to produce
products of sweet odor.

Fractional distillation of various petroleums
under reduced pressure with new type receiver:
Jacque C. Morrett and Gustav Eciorr. A new
type of receiver for fractional distillation under
reduced pressure is described. The general prin-
ciples and elements of the receiver are as fol-
lows: The receiver is made up of two graduated
chambers, the whole being arranged so that it
can be properly mounted. These chambers are
connected by a stop-cock. The arrangement is
such that one fraction may be drawn off from the
lower chamber, while the next fraction is ‘being
distilled in the upper chamber. The rate of dis-
tillation is always under perfect control. With
regard to the fractional distillation of petroleums
under reduced pressure, following a general dis-
cussion of the theory and experimental method,
comparative distillation of the following crude
oils, under atmospheric distillation and vacuum
distillation, are shown: Kentucky crude, Arkansas
crude, Colorado crude, Ohio crude, California
crude, Texas crude and Mexican crude. A dis-

water-white

700

cussion of the results from the viewpoint of un-
saturate content, percentage of paraffin and vis-
cosity of lubricating stock for both types of dis-
tillation follows the experimental results.

Sulfo-acid bodies in lubricating oils: G. L.
Ourensis. When lubricating oils are over-
treated or prematurely neutralized in the agitator,
some sulfo-acid compounds from the sludge are
re-incorporated in the oil. The breaking of the
resultant emulsion or blowing of the oil to bright-
ness causes some of these compounds to go into
perfect solution in the oil. The Conradson Demul-
sibility and Vacuum Company steam tests then
cause these bodies to precipitate as a soapy layer
below the oil, thus constituting qualitative tests
for such material. Evidence indicates that a
foamy layer differs from a homogeneous layer
only in concentration. It is indicated that this
layer is caused by salts of inorganic acids, ete.
The significance of the presence of such material
and the usefulness of the Conradson test for its
recognition are discussed.

Calculations of flash points: HWpwaxrpD Mack,
Crcrt BE. Boorp and Harotp N. BarHan.

SYMPOSIUM ON ‘‘LUBRICATION FROM THE CHEM-
ISTS’? VIEWPOINT’?

Lubricant and asphaltic hydrocarbons in petro-
leum: C. F. Masery. The work of this paper is
a continuation and expansion of the preliminary
notice presented at the Rochester meeting, in
which it was stated that an investigation had
been begun to ascertain the composition of the
part of petroleum that can not be distilled without
decomposition. This work is now well advanced
and a large number of hydrocarbons have been
identified in typical West Virginia, Pennsylvania,
Mecea, Texas and Baku oils. The more soluble
lubricant hydrocarbons, at least those of lower
molecular weight, collect for the greater part in
the D series (more soluble) and the heavier as-
phalts in the H series (less soluble). The two
series differ widely in viscosity and in lubricant
quality. Tested on a fractional machine, the D’s
are superior in wearing quality to the H’s. The
highest viscosity is shown by the Mecea D No. 8,
the last one of the series, C7gH13s, 5461 seconds,
in an Ostwald tube, water standard 0.25 S. at
38 C., 100° F., 2780 Saybolt. This paper also
gives tables of viscosity, jodine numbers, showing
unsaturated hydrocarbons and values by the
formolite reaction showing internal cyclic unsat-
uration.

Viscosity temperature curves of fractions of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1459

typical American crude oils
F. W. LANE and E. W. DEAN.

Low speed-high pressure friction tesis with a
Kingsbury machine: W. F. FaRacHEr and Ron-
ALD REAmMER. A discussion is given of data ‘on
frictional coefficients obtained with a Kingsbury
oil-testing machine in which speed was main-
tained at 7.4 feet per minute and pressure was
varied over the range of 2,000-4,000 pounds per
square inch. A number of mineral oils and sev-
eral compounded lubricants were studied.

(Second paper):

A graphical study of journal lubrication:
H. A. 8. Howarru. This study is based on W. J.
Harrison’s paper, ‘‘The hydrodynamic theory of
lubrication.’’ The oil pressures and friction are
represented quantitatively by simple diagrams
showing the effects of varying the speed, oil vis-
cosity, eccentricity and clearance. A few exam-
ples are given showing the practical application
of this study to the case of a journal surrounded
by the bearing.

The mechanism of partial lubrication: R. E.
Witson. This subject is presented from the
standpoint of the author’s recently published
papers on the subject, and some additional ma-
terial is brought forward.

Notes on the chemical composition of mineral
lubricating oils: A. DuSTON and THOLE.

The origin of petroleum—origin, migration and
accumulation of oil and gas: R. BE. Somers. The
inorganic theories of origin, such as that of
Mendeleef, are geologically impossible for large
amounts of oil and gas. The organic theories
better account for the commercial pools. Effects
of geologic alteration continue beyond the first
formation of oil and gas and, according to
White’s laws, lighter fractions are added with
increasing pressure and longer time. The geolog-
ically older oils are lighter in weight and the
younger are heavier. Oil passes from the source
bed shales into the reservoirs because of com-
pacting of the shales, and perhaps because of a
differential capillarity. Accumulation into pools
starts when the reservoirs are loose and un-
cemented, and is then due principally to differ-
ences in specific gravity between oil, gas and
water. It continues as the reservoirs become
cemented, but gravitation is either assisted by
other influences, such as gas pressure, or else re-
placed by capillarity.

The probable mother substance of petroleum:
REINHARDT THIESSEN,

CuHaries L. Parsons,

Secretary

— ie

New SERIES j } ; ANNUAL, SUBSCRIPTION $6.00
Vou. LV 1, No. 1460 Frmay, DecemBer 22, 1922 Sinae Copizs, 15 Ors.

The MacLeod Vacuum Gauge

Columbia University Modification

Besides retaining the features of the original Mac-
Leod gauge, namely: Hase of reading and accuracy
to one ten millionth of an atmosphere, the Columbia
University modification, (see cut), is easier to manip-
ulate, simpler, smaller, more compact, and without
ground joints.

Price of the improved form with Aidine mm. scale,
rack, and pinion support and adjustment for
levelling bulb, without mercury........... $37.50

American Rotary Vacuum Pumps have the follow-
‘ne advantages: Compact; operate with small ex-
penditure of power; require no attention when in
operation; not affected by chemically active gases;
not endangered if vacuum is broken.

No. 1—Capacity 95 cu. ft. per mm. Pressure limit
1/50” of mercury. Recommended for general labo-
ratory work.

\ No. 1144—Used with a supporting pump for exhaust-
\ ing the bulbs of tungsten lamps and similar work.

No. 2—Used with supporting pump for high
vacua as required in X-ray work.

Write for mew bulletin No. 288 which gives details
of above apparatus.

NEW YORK en PITTSBURGH BRANCH
3rd Ave., 18th—19th Sé. 4048 Jenkins Arcade

ESTABLISHED 1851

Headquarters for Laboratory Apparatus and Chemicals

Washington, D. C., Display Room, Suite 601, Evening Star Building, Pennsylvania Avenue and 11th Street.

NS
aaa

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

THE OESTROUS CYCLE
IN THE RAT
And Its Associated Phenomena
By
Lonc anp Evans
148 pages, 11 plates, 7 figures in text; paper, $3.75

The profound importance of an_ infallible
method of detecting in the Mammalia the periodic
function of the ovary, and the possibility, through
the possession of such a method, of the investiga-
tion of disturbances of the ovarian function are
matters of interest to students of the subject.
Before proceeding to such investigation, it would
be necessary to establish clearly all the charac-
teristics of what has been called the normal
oestrous or reproductive cycle in the animal chosen
for investigation. To that task the present mono-
graph is devoted.

University of California Press
BERKELEY, CALIFORNIA

BLAKISTON
COPAUX

Introduction To
General Chemistry

This book is a translation of a notable
French text which gives to the gen-
eral reader a clear idea of the science
and the newer interpretations of
chemical phenomena. It should be
available in every library and should
be read by chemical executives and
students.
Illustrated, Cloth, $2.00
By H. Coraux, Paris. Translated by
H. Lerrmann (Philadelphia).

P. BLAKISTON’S SON & CO.

1012 WaLNut Sr. PHILADELPHIA

A TREATISE ON THE ANALYSIS OF
SPECTRA
By W. M. Hicks, Sc.D., F.R.S.

Based on an Essay to which the Adams prize
was awarded in 1921.

“Frofessor Hicks’ object is to present in
a well connected whole, the knowledge al-
ready gained in this difficult department of
spectra.’—London Times. lustrated, $11.00

INSTINCT IN MAN
By James Drever, M.A., B.Sc., D. Phil.
“An extremely able work, and its main
conclusions are not likely to be superseded.”
—Saturday Review. $4.00
TIDES AND TIDAL STREAMS
A Manual Compiled for the Use of Seamen
By Commanper H. D. Warsure, R. N.

Superintendent of Tidal Work, Hydrographic
Department, Admiralty.

“Improved methods working on harmonic
constants, and the explanation of how, from
these constants, the height of the tide may
be calculated at any moment and at any
port in the world.’—The Scotsman.

Illustrated, $2.75

64-66 Fifth Avenue, New York
Prairie Avenue and 25th Street, Chicago
Huntington Chambers, Copley Sq., Boston

THE CAMBRIDGE UNIVERS
Announces the Following NEW SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

ITY PRESS, ENGLAND

BASIC SLAGS AND ROCK

PHOSPHATES

By Gerorce Scorr Rosertson, D.Sc., F.L.C.
“Well written and well arranged. Dr.

Robertson’s testimony to the value of rock

phosphate is of great importance.”—Spec-

tator. With charts, $4.50

THE ANDAMAN ISLANDERS
A Study in Social Anthropology

By A. R. Brown, M. A.

“Of greatest value to ethnologists—most
thorough, it covers ground hitherto little
broken. Each chapter is excellent, repay-
ing in full the labor expended.”’—Jllus-
trated London News.

Illustrated, $12.50

LOGIC—PART fi

Demonstrative Influence: Deductive and Inductive
By W. E. Jounson, M.A.

“Likely the most important work in Logic
in many years; full of clever original
points, throwing new light on almost every
topic with which it deals.”—New Statesman,
London. a $4.50

For Sale by THE MACMILLAN COMPANY, American Agents

609 Mission Street, San Francisco
330 South Harwood Street, Dallas
17 Houston Street, Atlanta

Vou. LVI DercempBrr 22, 1922 No. 1460

The Whitney Sowth Sea Expedition of the
American Museum of Natural History:
ROBERT CUSHMAN MURPHY........-.-2:-c--c----c---- 701

A Menace to the National Parks: Dr. W. G.
AV PARNT HIN GARIOTR SU UA SA OOO aN iL sae wa leg Ane 705

The American Association for the Advance-
ment of Science:
The Medical Sciences; The History of
Science; The Social and Economic Sci-
ences; Raiiway Tickets to Boston............------ 707

Scientific Events:
Louis Pasteur; The Frank Nelson Cole
Prize in Algebra; Colloid Symposium at
the University of Wisconsin; Grants from

THUG) SEXHADG? LAO ae ee are ete 710
Scientific Notes and News .ecccccccecccsscceeecscneeeee 712
University and Hducational Notes.........---------- 715

Discussion and Correspondence:

Radiation a Form of Matter: PRormssor
ArTHUR H. Compron. Russian Scientific

Aid: DR. VERNON KELLOGG.....2...222220-cc 716
Scientific Books:

Noyes’s ‘‘Watchers of the Sky’’: Pro-

FESSOR ERNEST W. BROWN...----2------ccecceesee- Uys
Special Articles:

fodine and Anuran Metamorphosis: Pro-

IESSORMW) Wie) SO WILNGD Esco oie 720
The American Chemical Society: Dr. CHARLES

ET UVNIATR.S ON See NO eG SLs NE 722
The American Mathematical Society: Pro-

FESSOR R. G. D. RICHARDSON........-2--------------+- 730
SICUGTUCCHPNIC1US recente nanan uteseeeLae a Supplement

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by
J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by

THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.
New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879,

THE WHITNEY SOUTH SEA EXPEDI-
TION OF THE AMERICAN MU-
SEUM OF NATURAL HISTORY

TROUGH the personal influence of Dr. Leon-
ard C. Sanford, a trustee and honorary fellow
of the Amencan Museum of Natural History,
Mr. Harry Payne Whitney agreed in 1920 to
finance a zoological expedition in Polynesia.
The main object of the expedition is to collect
birds at the various islands of the South Sea
and on the intervening ocean areas. The sum
generously contributed by Mr. Whitney was
considered sufficient for five years’ work, in-
cluding provision for the purchase of a vessel
which would assure the field workers of the
Museum an opportunity to visit a large num-
ber of islets which are far from the trade routes
or ordinary lines of communication. The ex-
pedition is perhaps the most comprehensive
that ‘has ever been planned and equipped for
ornithological science.

The Whitney South Sea Expedition is under
the direct administration of a committee ap-
pointed by the Trustees of the Museum and
consisting of Doctors Leonard C. Sanford,
Frank M. Chapman and Robert Cushman Mur-
phy. As field representative, the Museum has
been fortunate in securing the services of Mr.
Rollo H. Beck of San José, California, a vet-
eran naturalist and collector of marine birds
who had previously rendered the institution
years of noteworthy service, particularly while
he was in charge of the Brewster-Sanford South
American Expedition of 1912-1916. Mr. Beck
is accompanied in the field by Mrs. Beck, who
was his constant companion during the South
American littoral work, and by an assistant,
Mr. Ernest H. Quayle, whose training at Stan-
ford University has admirably fitted him for
the responsibility. In September, 1920, the
members of the party sailed from San Francis-
co to Tahiti and from the latter base they have

702

since been engaged uninterruptedly in field
work.

An appeal by Professor Henry Fairfield Os-
born, president of The American Museum of
Natural History, to Ambassador Jusserand for
the good offices of the French Government in
the Society Islands, met with a generous re-
ponse, and since the initiation of the work, the
Whitney Expedition has received every courtesy
both from the government and from individuals
at the French Islands.

When Messrs. Beck and Quayle arrived in
Tahiti, they began ‘at once an ornithological re-
connaissance of this classic isle. As opportuni-
ty offered, trips were made to
islands either upon trading vessels or by the
use of sloops carrying copra or other cargoes.
Early in 1921 an invitation from Pére Rougier,
the proprietor of Christmas Island, north of
the Equator, was accepted, and the ornitholo-
gists made a notable journey to this interesting
station, stopping en route for collecting at
three different islands of the Marquesas group.
Subsequently voyages were made to the south-
ward, when the northern islands of the Austral
group were visited, as well as Rapa, the south-
ernmost of the eastern Polynesian islands. In

neighboring
too) be)

September, 1921, a second trip was made to the
Marquesas, followed by a preliminary visit to
the Tuamotu Archipelago, upon eleven islets
of which collecting was undertaken.

During the first year’s work, Mr. Beck was
continually on the lookout for a suitable vessel
which he might purchase, and in this way be-
come independent of the uncertain movements
of trading craft. In December, 1921, after ad-
verse consideration of several vessels, the Com-
mittee purchased the 75-ton schooner “France,”
which is equipped with a sixty horse power en-
gine and which was built at Tahiti three years
ago. Through the unfailing courtesy of the
French Colonial Government, the uswal require-
ment of partial French ownership was waived,
and the schooner was admitted to yacht regis-
try, with permission to carry on work at any
of the French islands. Similar permission for
the British islands was granted by His Ma-
jesty’s Colonial officers, and after the “France”
had been thoroughly refitted, she sailed with

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

Messrs. Beck and Quayle, in Jauuary, 1922, on
a trip to the Austral Islands, Rapa, Gambier
Islands, Pitcairn, Henderson, Oeno, Elizabeth
and Ducie Islands.

While the expedition is primarily ornitholog-
ical, no opportunity has been lost to obtain de-
sirable material and data in other branches of
science, particularly at the many Polynesian
islands where the native peoples and fauna are
rapidly dying out or are altering materially
with changing conditions. With this object in
mind, the Museum has cooperated in all possi-
ble ways with other institutions that are earry-
ing on research in the Pacific. The Bernice
Pauahi Bishop Museum of Honolulu, for ex-
ample, is now a center of Pacifie investigations,
coordinated under the administration of Pro-
fessor Herbert E. Gregory, of Yale, who is
serving as Director of the Bishop Museum.
The Committee of the Whitney Expedition has
been from the beginning in close touch with
Professor Gregory and has sought his advice
on many details. The members of the Expedi-
tion have been instructed to undertake special
lines of collecting which do not interfere with
their main objects, to offer transportation when-
ever possible to the field workers of the Bishop
Museum, and of other scientific organizations,
and in general to further the cause of Pacific
investigation by selecting fields of endeavor
which lead toward cooperation rather than com-
petition. It has been decided, for instance, to
leave the ornithological investigation of the
Hawaiian Islands and of certain neighboring
groups, such as Midway, Johnston, Palmyra
and Washington Islands, to the Bishop Muse-
um, and to confine the efforts of the Whitney
Expedition, for the present at least, to the
southerly and easterly islands of Polynesia,
from Samoa and the Marquesas southward and
eastward to the Austral group and Easter
Island. In order that the American Museum of
Natural History may obtain a full representa-
tion of the avian fauna of the Pacifie Basin,
however, a comprehensive exchange of mate-
rial has been arranged, and) ‘the museum has
already received from Honolulu an important
collection of Hawaiian ‘birds, which gives it a
very nearly complete series of the scarce or ex-

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

tinet Drepanidide as well as other interesting
and peculiar birds of the archipelago.

In addition to the advisory services of Pro-
fessor Gregory and his staff, and of many other
friends of the American Museum, ‘the expedi-
tion has enjoyed the cooperation of Dr. Charles
W. Richmond, of the United States National
Museum, in the preparation of abstracted data
of great value for any research in Polynesia.
Dr. Richmond, who is a distinguished biblio-
phile, has a rare acquaintance wtih geographiec-
al works relating to the Pacific, particularly
with the accounts of ‘both early and recent voy-
ages in this field. Upon the basis of his expen-
ence and his bibliography, Dr. Richmond has
summarized the principal points of geographic
and zoological interest in the writings of dis-
coverers, naturalists, travelers, missionaries,
and others who have visited the Line, Mar-
quesas, Society, Cook, Austral, Tuamotu, and
more easterly groups. Dr. Richmond’s manu-
seript report gives, moreover, all the known
synonyms of the names of the various islands
and their outliers. His data on this score are
based upon hundreds of sources and are far
more complete than the list of designations
given in the pilot books or atlases. The report
also ineludes a full list of the known vertebrate
fauna of each island, with notes on all the ex-
tinct, doubtful or mythical species mentioned
by the early voyagers. Equipped with such in-
formation, the Museum’s field workers are in
a position to investigate each island with a full
knowledge of what they may expect or hope to
find.

Emphasis should be laid upon the fact that
zoological investigation in Polynesia must be
done now if it is to be done at all. Extinction
of the native animals has long been in progress.
The introduction of pigs, dogs, cats, and even
of the mongoose, into islands which had no
native mammalian fauna; the rapid spread of
the alien minah and weaver birds, and of a
hawk transported from Australia; and the peri-
odical concentration of copra workers, or of
pearl or béche-de-mer fishermen, upon small
islets, make it certain that many of the native
birds are doomed as surely as the splendid race

SCIENCE

703

of native people. Dr. Richmond’s report has.
not failed to call attention to the importance of
the rapid completion of such work as the Muse-
um has now undertaken. Some idea of the ex-
traordinary changes taking place in Polynesia
may be gained from the following press quota-
tion referring to an islet of the Tuamotus:

“The opening of the pearl diving season, the
great event of the year in the French settle-
ments, comes in July. Diving is not permitted
for two years in succession at the same island.
The various pearl islands are opened in rota-
tion. This means that all gear, stocks of mer-
chandise and building material must be taken
to a new island each year—no small undertak-
ing when it is remembered that the coral atoll,
which in ordinary times supports less than 200
persons, becomes in the diving season the abid-
ing place of 2,500 or more. This year the open
island is Hikueru, one of the Paumotu archipel-
ago 400 miles to the eastward of Tahiti. Al-
ready this lonely atoll is taking on a metropoli-
tan appearance. The profits to be gained come
not only from the pearl-shell won from the la-
goon, but from the sale of all kinds of wares
dear to the native heart and from the providing
of entertainment to refresh the weary diver and
his women folk after the labors of the day are
over. The average native diver wins a good
sum from the bottom of the lagoon and much
of it goes on expensive silk dresses for his wife
and daughters, on the delectable canned goods
of the “popaa’”’ (white man) and on the “mov-
ies.” This year there are to be, it is said, three
moving pictures theaters, any number of motor
cars for hire—the length of the roadway in
Hikueru is less than a half mile, but that ap-
parently does not make any difference—a brass
band and, it is reported, electric lights along
the “Great White Way” of this little ring of
coral sand. Late advices indicate that the sea-
son this year at Hikueru will be the most active
in many years. It is estimated there will be at
least 1,000 divers at the island. These, together
with their families and the traders with their
staffs, will swell the population of the island
during the season to nearly 4,000.”

The collecting work of the Whitney South

704

Sea Expedition has no more than fairly begun,
but the specimens already received at the Muse-
um have given a foretaste of the remarkable
zoological and geographical results that are to
be anticipated. The material comprises the fol-
lowing:

1. More than 3,000 bird skins, together with
representative collections of birds preserved in
alcohol, nests and eggs, and the stomachs of
specimens prepared as skins. The contents of
the bird stomachs are to analysed and reported
upon by members of the staff of the United
States Biological Survey.

2. A collection of reptiles, including lizards
from nearly all the islands visited, as well as
marine turtles. Although the lizards are rep-
resented by but a small number of species, the
aggregation constitutes one of the few collec-
tions sent to the United ‘States from Polynesia
since the days of the Wilkes Expedition of
1828-1834. A duplicate set of reptiles has been
forwarded to the Bishop Museum.

3. Herbarium collections made by Mr. Quayle
at the Society Islands, Austral Islands and
elsewhere. The plant specimens have, for the
most part, been sent to the Bishop Museum for
determination, only one set of duplicates being
retained in New York.

4. Photographs illustrating not only the birds
and other wild animals of the places visited,
but also interesting features of the topography,
vegetation and the appearance and life of the
native peoples.

5. Approximately 3,500 pages of manuseript
notes, prepared by Messrs Beck and Quayle,
which not only supply a narrative of the expe-
dition, and a running comment upon the or-
nithological field work, but also throw light
upon many phases of Polynesian life condi-
tions.

The birds received from the Whitney South
Sea Expedition demonstrate that Polynesia is
one of the greatest remaining fields for ornitho-
logical investigation. They comprise thus far
about a hundred forms, of not more than twen-
ty-five families, but they are all represented in
splendid series, and some of them are among
the rarest of known birds. Several of the spec-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460,

ies were, in fact, listed in Rothschild’s mono-
graph on “Extinet Birds” (1907). Many of
them are of much historic importance in that
the status of the species has heretofore rested
entirely upon descriptions dating from the
golden age of exploration, when Bougainville,
James Cook, and other discoverers, brought
back to Europe the first collections from Poly-.
nesia. The warbler (Conopoderas equinoctialis)
of Christmas Island, for example, has not here-
tofore been represented in any collection, and
was known only from the faulty description
of Latham. The beautiful fruit pigeon (Péilo-
pus huttoni) of Rapa ‘had previously been
known only from the type skin in the Museum
at Turin; and there are many other examples.
Finally, a relatively large proportion of the
birds obtained prove to be new to science.

The sea birds, as well as many of the insular
land birds, of Polynesia, throw much light upon
broad questions of geographical distribution.
The collections of the Whitney Expedition
show, for instance, that the birds of the tropical
trade wind belt in the South Pacifie are, for the
most part, specifically or racially distinct from
those inhabiting the Horse Latitudes farther
south. The terrestrial avifauna is not partieu-
larly extensive, but it proves highly interesting.
As an example, the warblers of the genus
Conopoderas appear to exhibit on a vastly
larger scale the evolutionary facies of
the Galapagos finches. Hach large insular
group in Polynesia seems to have its peculiar
species of this genus, while in some cases every
islet within a single archipelago has a well-
marked geographic race, the range of which
may not be greater than the isolated surface
of but a few acres.

Since Mr. Beck left the United States he has
from time to time sent home narrative accounts
of great general interest, which have been pub-
lished in “Natural History,” the Journal of
the American Museum. At the present time
Messrs. Beck and Quayle are working from the
“France” among the Marquesas Islands, whence
additional reports and shipments of material
are expected early in 1923.

Rosert CusHMAN MurpHy

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

A MENACE TO THE NATIONAL
PARKS

THROUGH its representation on a committee
entitling itself the “National Parks Commit-
tee,” the American Association for the Ad-
vaneement of Science and all of its members
have been placed in the position of endorsing
and promoting the Barbour Roosevelt-Sequoia
Park Bill (H.R. 7452) now before the House
of Representatives. This bill has good pros-
pects of being passed by the present Congress.

Much inquiry and correspondence have
shown that the greater part of the support of
this measure has been obtained without those
giving it understanding what the bill will do,
as they hold the erroneous idea that the bill is
practically the same as the excellent Roosevelt
Park measure which failed to pass the last
Congress. It therefore seems important to call
attention to the destructive character of the
Barbour Bill.

The following resolution regarding it, passed
on September 9 last by the San Diego Natural
History Society, located in the same region as
the ‘Sequoia Park, and one of the most prom-
iment scientific associations of the west, de-
serves the serious consideration of all scientific
men and conservationists.

Whereas, The Barbour Roosevelt-Sequoia Park

SCIENCE

705

Bill (H.R. 7452), now before Congress, contains,
as one of its provisions, the relinquishment by the
National Park Service of about half of the
present Sequoia Park, in exchange for extensive,
mainly untimbered, tracts in the higher mountain
region.

And whereas, The tract relinquished will, under
the provisions of this bill, pass under the juris-
diction of the Forest Service, with the avowed
object of permitting the cutting of much of the
standing timber,

And whereas, This tract contains about one
third of the total number of giant sequoias con-
tained in the entire park, together with forests of
other majestic trees which are now rapidly dis-
appearing,

And whereas, None of those who are now pub-
licly supporting the Barbour Bill defend this divi-
sion of the present Sequoia Park, and the sacri-
fice of a large part of its area, except as a eom-
promise by which other valuable scenic territory
is to be aequired,

And whereas, This compromise is known to be
the outcome of a factional dispute and a compe-
tition for jurisdiction between the National Park
Service and the Forest Service,

And whereas, As a result of such internecine
strife on the part of those who should be defend-
ing the interests of the public, the country will
lose for all time large areas of primeval forest
which should be preserved for recreation, for
esthetic enjoyment, and for scientifie study,

Map showing effect of the Barbour Bill in cutting off the southern half of the present park, also the
deep bay in the proposed western boundary which will permit commercial exploitation of timber
lands almost in the center of the area added.

706

And whereas, Such a violation of the integrity
of our national park system sets an extremely
dangerous precedent, and gives heart to those
interests which are continually striving to invade
the public domain and to destroy our natural
scenery for the gratification of purely selfish ends,
therefore,

Be it resolved, That the San Diego Natural
History Society strongly opposes the Barbour
Bill, in its present form, as being a serious blow
to our national park system and to the principle
of conservation in general, and that it advises
the amendment of this bill so as to exclude its
provision for the relinquishment of any portion

-of the present Sequoia Park, while retaining its
constructive features, according to which large
tracts of high scenic value would be added to the
present park.

Be it further resolved, That copies of this reso-
lution be sent to the two senators from Califor-
nia, and to the congressman representing this dis-
trict; as well as to such organizations as may
seem appropriate to the society’s conservation
committee.

Designs on the fine forests of the national
parks are not confined to those of the Sequoia
Park. A shifting back of the western boundary
of the Yosemite Park is recommended by the
director of national parks in his report for 1921
(page 72), and if carried out as there recom-
mended, would eliminate from that park all its
three sequoia groves and most of its magnificent
sugar pine and yellow pine forests, while a sim-
ilar treatment of Crater Lake Park has also
been under discussion. These three parks con-
tain most of the forest with really large trees
that the entire national park system possesses.

The wonderful primeval forests of the Pa-
cifie states are disappearing with astonishing
rapidity, and it is of the highest importance
from a scientific as well as from an esthetic
and scenic standpoint that at least the few
tracts of them that are in the national parks
should be preserved. The immense trees of
these forests (there are at least fifteen species
that become under favorable circumstances 200
feet tall or over, and at least four that some-
times reach or exceed 300 feet) were never
found except in tracts of limited extent where
they had good soil and other conditions and
had escaped serious fire damage for long
periods. Those few that still survive are

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

mainly in the hands of the lumber interests
and a few years will see the last of them.

We must not be deceived by the assertion
‘that the forests now in the parks “will be just
as safe in the hands of the Forest Service as
in the Parks.” The totally different purposes
of ithe Park Service and Forest Service
bureaus should not be lost sight of in judging
of the results of such a transfer. The parks
are required to be maintained in as nearly as
possible their natural, wild state. The lands
under Forest Service control are managed from
a purely commercial standpoint to produce as
much lumber as possible, the trees being sold
and cut when mature and all esthetic, scien-
tifie or other considerations being subordinate
to that of dollars and cents. This policy is the
right and necessary one for the greater part
of the national forests, but for areas that are
parks, or will in the future be needed for
parks, it as fatal. The folly and danger of
subjecting things that should be preserved per-
manently in their natural state to a bureau
conducted for purely practical and commercial
purposes and officered by men who by train-
ing, association and interests see in the won-
derful trees of the Pacifie states only so many
feet of lumber, or so many cross ties, and who
moreover will be subjected to constant and
powerful political pressure to allow their sale
and destruction, need not be discussed.

No promise made by the present Forest
Service administration to protect certain of
the trees has any standing in law, nor can it in
any way bind future administrations. No
promise has been made to protect anything ex-
cept the sequoias, which constitute less than
five per cent. of the forest that the Barbour
Ball will open up to the lumbermen. Forest
Service and Park Service officials do not deny
that the magnificent sugar pines and yellow
pines (trees 200 feet tall and 200 to 500 years
old) of the Sequoia Park are to be cut. In
proof of this the following quotations may be
given:

‘*Tn conceding the new territory to the National
Park Service the Forest Service has contended
that those sections which would be eliminated
from the present Sequoia National Park are re-
quired for the commercial needs of that section

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

of California; that is, for grazing purposes and
for timber other than the big sequoia trees, which
will always be preserved.’’ (From a letter by
A. B. Cammerer, acting director National Park
Service, to H. 8S. Watson, of date May 19, 1922).
‘‘The transfer of the three townships now in the
park is not particularly with the avowed object of
permitting the cutting of much of the standing
timber. As a matter of fact, the timber re-
sources do not anywhere nearly compare in value
with those upon other national forest lands read-
ily available for purchase but for which no de-
mand has yet arisen. Some small cuttings might
be necessary to supply local needs, and ultimately
good silvicultural practice would require the har-
vesting of the mature timber. There is no prob-
ability that the timber will be sold or even in
demand for some time to come.’’ (From letter
from L. F. Kneipp, assistant forester U. S. Forest
Service, to C. G. Abbott; date October 2, 1922).
That the park as provided for by the Bar-
bour Bill will contain little in the way of for-
ests, we have the assurance of ‘the chief of the
Forest Service who in addressing the Public
Lands Committee of the House of Representa-
tives at the hearing on the Barbour Bill, De-
eember 13, 1921, said, “Aside from the giant
forests [the sequoia groves] the areas of com-
mercial timber remaining within the area are
of negligible extent and of negligible future
importance to the forest industries of Cali-
fornia.” This includes both the land added
and the part of the present park that the public
is to be allowed to keep. The Barbour Bill,
moreover, will make a park of extraordinary
shape. An immense bay fifteen miles deep and
many miles wide will extend into the very
heart of the park, its object being to avoid
adding to the park some magnificent forests
containing immense pines and sequoias. The
lumbermen can therefore operate almost in the
center of the park, though legally outside it.
The Sequoia Park should not be cut in half.
No reason for doing so has been given other
than the desire of private interests to exploit
the forests of the park and the desire of the
Forest Service to control such exploitation. In
view of these facts, can we regard the severe
condemnation of the measure expressed in the
San Diego Society’s resolution as unwarranted?
Should not its protest be backed up by every

SCIENCE

707

scientific association and every organization
interested in real conservation?
W. G. Van Name

THE AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR
THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE
THE MEDICAL SCIENCES

For a number of years Section N has held a
symposium on subjects of outstanding interest
to medical and allied workers. There were
symposiums on “Growth and Development of
the Child”; “Medical Lessons of the War”;
“Ductless Glands”; “Growth Problems,” ete.
Each of these symposia was an invitation pro-
gram.

These meetings were extraordinarily well
attended, always taxing the capacity of the
large halls provided for the meetings. They
met a real and large demand on the part of the
members of the section, the members of the
association, and the non-members in the fields
of public health, medicine, bacteriology, ete.
The section committee, after mature delibera-
tion, has decided that the section could be
more useful by changing its policy. It has
decided, beginning with the Boston meeting, to
hold a symposium to which will ‘be invited rep-
resentatives from the fields of medicine, para-
sitology and medical entomology. it is planned
that each representative will discuss his re-
searches with the workers in the allied fields.
It is expected that these meetings will afford
the long-sought opportunity for the discussion
of common problems.

The Entomological Society of America and
the Parasitologists have planned to meet with
ithe section at Boston.

The mew plan has met with such a wide-
spread and strong response that it is hoped
more groups may join with ithe section in the
future, to make the annual meeting as broad,
as significant and as useful as possible.

The program for the Boston meeting is to be
held in the Massachusetts Institute of Tech-
nology buildings at 1:30 on December 29. The
program is as follows:

Professor A. B. Macallum, retiring vice-president
of Section N, McGill University, Montreal:

708 ‘

‘«The necessity for advanced research on the
intestinal mucosa, the great gateway of disease
of the body’’ (vice-presidential address).

Cc. T. Brues, Bussey Institution, Harvard Uni-
versity: ‘‘Is poliomyelitis an insect borne dis-
ease???

CG. A. Kofoid, University of California: ‘‘Inci-
dence of the human intestinal protozoan infec-
tions in the United Staites.’’

Richard P. Strong, Harvard University: ‘‘Some
aspects of disease associated with the fields of
zoology, entomology and (parasitology.’’

C. W. Stiles, U. S. Public Health Service: ‘‘Some
medico-zoological phases of our immigration
problems. ’’”

L. O. Howard, U. S. Bureau of Entomology:
(Title to be announced).

The secretary desires an expression of opin-
ion from all interested workers, and extends ‘to
them an invitation to attend.

A. J. GOLDFORB,
Secretary of Section N

THE HISTORY OF SCIENCE

Av the Boston meeting of the American
Association for the Advancement of Science
from December 26 to 30, the development of
science is to be recorded in more than one
aspect. The members of the association will
be given an interesting opportunity to learn
of the value of historical introspection of scien-
tific thoughts in terms of progress. Also some
attempt will be made to discuss the meaning
and philosophy of the idea of ithis progress.

Section L (of which the History of Science
is a part) is tthe youngest of the sections
formed within the American Association, and
will hold its third meeting on December 27.

The first meeting of ‘those interested in the
field of the history of science was held with the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science in Chicago, December, 1920. At this
time plans of organization were formulated.
Ait the Toronto meeting in December, 1921, the
organization became a more definite reality.
Consequently the Boston gathering of the his-
tory of science group will be the second official
meeting.

The progress of ‘the interest in the history
of science has been growing constantly. Not
alone has ithis been manifested among the scien-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

tists, but with the historians as well. The value
of the study of the history of science is thus
greatly emphasized by being cultivated by two
distinct bodies of scholars.

Therefore, at the Boston convocation of sci-
entists the program for the history of science
meeting will be presented by two different
groups, namely, Section L and ithe group inter-
ested in the history of science from the Amer-
ican Historical Association.

On Wednesday, December 27, at 2 P.M.,
Section L will present its program with the
following speakers: Dr. Florian Cajori, Uni-
versity of California; Dr. H. W. Tyler, Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology; Dr. George
Sarton, Carnegie research associate; Dr. Wil-
lam A. Locy, Northwestern University, also
chairman, and the association’s vice-president
for Section L, with two other scholars active in
the ‘history of science movement, to be named
later.

On Thursday, December 28, at 2 P.M., the
joimt conference with the history of science
group from tthe American Historical Associa-
tion wall be held. The following is the pro-
gram:

Chairman: Dr. James Harvey Robinson, New

School for Social Research, New York City.
“‘The origin of ideas’’?: The chairman of the

conference. ’?
“‘Some psychological and social conditions of the
scientific attitude of mind’’: Dr. George H.

Mead, University of Chicago.

“«The historical background of modern science’’:
Dr. Lynn Thorndike, Western Reserve Univer-
sity.

“‘Science in the thirteenth century’’: Dr. George
Sarton, Carnegie research associate.

‘“What science has contributed to people’s think-
ing about life and destiny’’: Mrs. Mary
Hunter Austin, New York City.

General discussion, opened by William A. Locy,
Northwestern University, chairman of Sec-
tion L.

Freperick E. Brascu,
Secretary of Section L

THE SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC SCIENCES

THE program of the section of Social and
Economic Sciences at the Boston meeting will
deal with problems of the development and

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

conservation of natural resources. The aim is
to present the economic background of con-
servation as related to certain of our resources.
An immense amount of misapprehension exists
about conservation and the measures that have
been proposed to secure a better handling of
our resources. The scientific men of the coun-
try can perform a public service by furnishing
the facts regarding our different resources and
their relation to the upbuilding of the naition.
To bring out such facts, so far as the limita-
tions of the meeting will permit, is the purpose
of the symposium to be presented at Boston.

The most precious resource of any nation is
a virile, intelligent and healthy population.
The conservation of health, of the energy and
the working power of the people constitutes
the theme of the morning session on December
27. Papers will be presented by Dr. T. S.
Baker, of Pittsburgh, Mr. W. F. Chamberlain,
of Hartford, and Dr. H. R. Kelley, of Massa-
chusetis.

A second topic closely allied with the fore-
going is (the building up and maintaining of a
strong rural civilization. Problems relating ito
the home and to home life and ‘to conserving
the qualities of the rural population are of
great importance. The questions of home eco-
nomics and of country life, as well as of land
settlement under present conditions, will be
discussed on the afternoon of December 27,
when Section K meets with tthe Section on
Agriculture. The program includes the names
of President Kenyon L. Butterfield, of Am-
herst, Dr. C. F. Langworthy, Dr. Helen W.
Atwater and the Honorable F. H. Newell, of
Washington.

Forestry is tthe subject of the session on the
morning of December 28, which will be in con-
junction with the New England Forestry Con-
gress. There will be brought out some of the
important economic facts that call for a vig-
orous national policy of forestry. The chief
forester, Colonel W. B. Greeley, and a prom-
inent member of his staff, Mr. Raphael Zon,
will present papers on ‘the national and on tthe
international problems of our timber supplies.
Professor R. T. Fisher, of Harvard University,

SCIENCE

709

will discuss certain aspects of forest research,
and the state forest commissioner of Massa-
chusetts, Mr. Bazeley, will speak on the sub-
ject of a state forest policy.

A series of special topics relating to the con-
servation of capital and credit and the reduc-
tion of waste in industry will form ‘the pro-
gram in the afternoon of December 28. Mr.
H. T. Newcomb, of New York, Dr. R. H.
Halsey, of New York, Dr. Frederick L. Hoff-
man, dean of the advanced department of
Babson Institute, Dr. F. B. Gilbreth and Mr.
James G. Dudley, of New York, are tthe
speakers.

The session on the morning of the twenty-
ninth will be a joint meeting with ithe Section
of Hngineers. Problems relating to water re-
sources, power development and flood control
will be the general subject, with papers by
General Harry Taylor, U. 8S. Army; Mr. Wil-
liam §. Murray, of New York; Mr. O. C.
Merrill, of Washington, and Dr. John T. Black,
of Hartford. The conservation of our scenic
resources and of wild life constitutes the topic
of the session on the afternoon of December
29. The national park problems, with special
reference to the present efforts ito open them
up to commercial use will ‘be discussed by Mr.
Robert S. Yard, of Washington. Dr. G. F.
Kunz, of New York, will present certain
aspects of the practical service of the scenic
resources to the public. The conservation of
our whale fisheries will be the subject of a
paper by Dr. John F. Crowell, of New York.

The chairman of ithe sessions will be the vice-
president for ‘the section, Professor Henry §.
Graves, of Yale University. The retiring vice-
president is Professor James W. Mavor, of the
University of Toronto, who will present on the
first day an address on “Certain economic re-

actions of the war.’

The meetings of Section K will for the most
part be in Pratt Building, Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology.

RAILWAY TICKETS TO BOSTON
THosr who are to attend the approaching
Boston meeting of the American Association

710

for the Advancement of Science will have the
benefit of reduced railway rates, as has been
previously announced. The reduced rate of a
fare and a half for the round trip has been
granted by the railway associations represent-
ing almost all of the United States and Canada.
Those intending to go to Boston for this meet-
ing should state to their local railway agents
that they are to attend the Boston meeting of
the American Association for the Advancement
of Science. They should purchase a single,
full fare, one-way ticket to Boston and should
secure from the agent a standard certificate. A
receipt is not needed. On arrival at the meet-
ing railway certificates are to be deposited at
the validation desk in the registration room at
the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. A
card identifying the certificate will be given
out and is to be returned when the certificate 1s
reclaimed. In the meantime, endorsement and
validation of the certificates that have been de-
posited will be cared for. After endorsement
and validation the certificate is to be presented
at the railway ticket office in Boston and the
agent will allow each holder of a certificate to
purchase a continuous return trip ticket from
Boston to the place of starting, at one half of
the regular fare.

Tt is not necessary for those intending to go
to Boston to present to the railway agent when
they purchase their tickets any credentials as
to membership in the association or societies.
Certificates will be endorsed by the American
Association for the Advancement of Science for
all association members in good standing and
also for members of associated societies meet-
ing with the association in Boston, whether or
not the latter are also members of the associa-
tion. Any person having the right 'to have his
certificate validated may also have certificates
validated for personal guests, this being lim-
ited to members of his immediate family, not
including men over twenty-one years of age.
Those who have certificates for validation and
are not members of the association or societies,
nor delegates, nor personal guests, should be-
come associates for the Boston meeting, if they
do not care to become members. As all readers
of Science know, a new member pays an en-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

trance fee ($5) and the first annual dues ($5),
while an associate pays the associate fee only
($5). As far as the validation of railway cer-
tificates is concerned, associates are to be treat-
ed like members in good standing, and members
of associated societies meeting with the asso-
ciation are to be ‘treated in the same way.

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS

LOUIS PASTEUR

Art the December meeting of the Syracuse
chapter of Sigma Xi the following resolutions
were adopted:

Whereas, On December 27, 1922, will occur the
centenary of the birth of Louis Pasteur, whose
life was characterized by tireless industry and
preeminent achievement in research; and

Whereas, These researches conducted on lines
of pure science have found remarkable application
in many departments of economic and social bet-
terment, culminating in the largest advances in
measures of sanitation and consequent conserva-
tion of human life; and

Whereas, The unsparing devotion of his life to
these ends is a challenge and an inspiration to
highest emulation; therefore

Resolved, That the Syracuse Chapter of Sigma
Xi record its high esteem and appreciation of
these epoch-making discoveries in pure and ap-
plied science, and the life of noble devotion
thereto;

Resolved further, That with hearty acclaim we

join the innumerable company of many lands who

gratefully participate in the commemoration of
the centenary of his birth and the masterful and
enduring achievements of his life.

THE FRANK NELSON COLE PRIZE IN
ALGEBRA

At the time of the retirement, in December,
1920, of Professor F. N. Cole as secretary of
the American Mathematical Society and editor
of its Bulletin, a sum of money was collected
from members of the Society by a committee, of
which Professor H. 8. White was chairman,
and was presented to Professor Cole in recogni-
tion of his distinguished services through a
period of twenty-five years. At the next meet-
ing of the Council, Professor Cole donated this
fund to the Society, to be used as the Council
might think best. The committee, consisting of

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

Professors Frank Morley (chairman), T. 8.
Fiske, and H. 8. White, which was appointed
at ‘that meeting to make recommendations to
the council as to the use of the income of this
fund, has presented a report recommending
that this fund shall be used to endow a prize,
to be called the Frank Nelson Cole Prize in
Aigebra. The recommendations of this commit-
tee, which were accepted by the council at its
meeting in October, 1922, follow below:

1. The fund shall accumulate until by inter-
est and contributions it reaches the amount of
one thousand dollars.

2. At the end of every five years thereafter the
Council shall award from the available income not
more than two hundred dollars as a prize for the
best memoir offered in competition upon some
question in the theory of Galois groups, or the
theory of numbers, or some other part of algebra.

3. The question or subject for competitive
memoirs shall be announced by the Council at
least two years in advance of the date for their
submission; and the details of the mode of award
shall be published at the same time.

4. The prize shall be designated as the Frank
Nelson Cole Prize in Algebra. At the time of
each award the names of all previous recipients
of the prize shall be published in the Bulletin of
the Society, together with the name of the suc-
cessful competitor and an abstract of his memoir.

5. The prize may be withheld at the end of any
quinquennium if no sufficiently meritorious
memoir be submitted; and in such case a double
prize may be awarded in the next following quin-
quennium.

6. These conditions may be altered at any time
by a two-thirds vote, in writing, of all members
of the Council.

R. G. D. RrcHarpson,
Secretary.

COLLOID SYMPOSIUM AT THE UNIVERSITY
OF WISCONSIN

Tur most important colloid symposium yet
held in America will ‘take place at the Univer-
sity of Wisconsin next June from the twelfth
to the fifteenth. On this occasion the univer-
sity will be host to a group of the leading col-
loid chemists of the country, who will present
papers on their specialties and indulge in un-
usually full discussion. The university will
publish the proceedings in adequate form. The

SCIENCE

711

whole symposium is in honor of Dr. Thé Sved-
berg, of the University of Upsala, who will
give colloid instruction at Madison during the
entive second semester and during the summer.
Among those who have already announced their
intention of presenting papers are Drs.
Jacques Loeb, S. E. Sheppard, R. E. Wilson,
Jerome Alexander, Martin H. Fischer, J. H.
Matthews, Wilder D. Baneroft, Harry N.
Holmes, I’. E. Bartell, Gortner, Bogue, E. B.
Spear, Hugh Taylor, Weiser, Burton and J. A.
Wilson. Every one interested in colloids is
cordially invited to come. Time will be
allowed for sports and social recreation. This
symposium is strongly endorsed ‘by the Colloid
Committee of the National Research Council.

Harry N. Houmss,

Chairman Committee on Colloids
OBERLIN, OHIO

GRANTS FROM THE BACHE FUND
Grants from the Bache Fund of the Na-

tional Academy of Sciences have been made
as follows:

$200 to Professor N. E. Wheeler, Colby Col-
lege. Bor a study of the relationship of electrical
conduction in concentrated solutions.

$300 to Professor Gregory P. Baxter, Harvard
University. For the determination of the atomic
weights of arsenic, titanium and germanium.

$600 to Dr. W. H. Taliaferro, Johns Hopkins
University. For the study of the variability and
inheritance of size in different species of Trypa-
nosoma.

$500 to Professor lu. L. Woodruff, Yale Uni-
versity. For a study of the significance of en-
domixis and of fertilization in the life history of
Infusoria.

$250 to Professor Roger Adams, University of
INinois. For the study of the oxides of platinum,
palladium and iridium as catalysts.

$400 to Dr. Keivin Burns, Allegheny Observa-
tory. For the determination of wave lengths of
standard lines in the solar speatrum in reference
to the cadmium and neon standards.

$100 to Professor Otto F. Kampmeier, Univer-
sity of Illinois. For a monograph on the evolu-
tion and comparative monphology of the lymphatic
system of vertebrates. }

$650 to Professor R. R. Renshaw, New York
University. For a study of the basis for the

712

physiological activity of substitutes of the choline
type.

#400 to Professor H. I. Schlesinger, University
of Chicago. For an investigation of the absorp-
tion spectra of inorganic compounds, particularly
the oxides of sulphur and the compounds ob-
tained by the interaction of certain salts with
nitric oxide.

Applications for grants will next be consid-
ered in April, 1923, and should be filed, to-
gether with endorsements, with the chairman
of the board, Professor Ross G. Harrison, Os-
born Zoological Laboratory, Yale University,
New Haven, Connecticut, on or before April 1.
Blank forms of application will ‘be sent on re-
quest.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

Dr. Ropert A. Mivuixan, of the California
Institute of Technology, Pasadena, has ‘been
awarded the 1922 Edison medal of the Amer-
ican Institute of Electrical Engineers, for
“meritorious experimental achievement in elec-
trieal science.”

Owine to a severe illness arising from a
wound received during the war in France, Sir
T. W. Edgeworth David has resigned his posi-
tion as president of the Australian National
Research Council. His place has been filled by
the election of Dr. Orme Masson, professor of
chemistry in the University of Melbourne. Pro-
fessor David continues to serve the council as
vice-president.

Str Humpurey Rouiurston has been ap-
pointed representative of the Royal College of
Physicians on the British General Medical
Council in succession to Sir Norman Moore.

Tue diploma of doctor honoris causa of the
University of Strasbourg has been conferred
upon Sir James Frazer, author of “The Golden
Bough.”

Tw recognition of his contributions to resusei-
tation from mine gases, Dr. Yandell Hender-
son, professor of appled physiology at Yale
University, was elected an honorary member of
the Coal Mining Institute of America at its
meeting in Pittsburgh on December 13.

Mr. Grorce H. Ruoprs has resigned as as-

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1460

sistant in the department of chemistry of the
Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cam-
bridge, Mass., to accept a position in the color
laboratory of Cheney Brothers, South Man-
chester, Conn.

H. A. Noyes has been appointed research
chemist for the State Department of Agricul-.
ture at Lansing, Michigan, having severed his.
connection with the Mellon Institute.

Prorressor S. WINOGRADSKY, at one time
director of the Imperial Institute for Hxperi-
mental Medicine in Petrograd, has been re-
cently appointed as chief of a newly organized
division of soil microbiology at the Pasteur
Institute. This division is situated at Brie-
Comte-Robert (Seime-et-Marne), France. Pro-
fessor Winograsky would appreciate literature:
on soil microbiology.

Dr. Louisn W. Farnam, a daughter of Pro-
fessor Henry W. Farnam, of Yale University,
reached Changsha on September 21 and has:
begun her work as head of the department of
pediatrics in the Hunan-Yale Hospital and.
Medical School.

Leavr of absence has been granted to Dr..
A. B. Stout, of the New York Botanical Gar-
den, who will spend the period in southern
California in studies of citrus fruits. He will
also lecture at Pomona College.

Capratn Roatp AMUNDSEN, head of a polar
expedition that left Seattle in June, arrived by
dog-team at Nome, Alaska, on December 14.
He came from Wainwright, near Point Bar-
row, where he is wintering.

Ropert T. ArrKen and John FI. G. Stokes,
of the Bishop Museum, have returned to Hono-
lulu after an absence of two years devoted to
anthropological studies im connection with the
Bayard Dominick Expedition Their field of
work included the islands of Rapa, Rurutu,.
Ravaivai and Tubuai of the Austral group. On
his return journey to Papeete, several islands
of the Tuamotu group were visited by Mr.
Stokes.

At a meeting of the committee on the C. M.
Warren Fund of the American Academy of
Arts and Sciences held on December 8, a grant.

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

of $250 was made to Professor James B.
Conant, of Harvard University, to be used in
furthering his research in connection with the
-electro-chemical study of the reversible reduc-
tion of organic compounds. The next meeting
of the committee for the awarding of grants
will be held on Mareh 1, 1923. Applications
for these grants must be in the hands of the
chairman of the committee, Professor James
F. Norms, Massachusetts Institute of Technol-
ogy, Cambridge, Mass., before this date.

THe Indian Botanical Society took over
ownership and control of the Journal of Indian
Botany in October. Professor P. F. Fyson,
who started the journal in 1919 as a private
enterprise, will continue as editor.

Proressor WIELAND has been appointed to
the editorial board of Liebig’s Annalen in place
of the late Professor Wiashicenus. The board
consists, in addition, of Professors Wallach,
Graebe, Zincke and Willstatter.

At the College of Physicians in Philadelphia
Dr. James Ewing, of the Cornell Medical
School, recently delivered the Muetter Lecture
for 1922 on “The principles of the radiation
treatment of cancer.”

Dr. K. F. Wenckepacu, former professor
of sungery at the University of Strasbourg,
will deliver the twelfth course of Herter lec-
tures in pathology at the Johns Hopkins Uni-
versity Medical School. Dr. Wenekebach will
arrive in this country in April.

THE French committee of organization for
the commemoration of the centenary of Pasteur
recently held its first meeting under the presi-
dency of M. Strauss, minister of marine. The
sum of two million franes has been voted by
the French parliament and an exposition has
been organized at Strasbourg, where a monu-
ment will be erected by public subscription
facing the university buildings. Conferences
for the popularization of the work of Pasteur
will be held throughout France. The celebra-
tions at Panis will take place from May 22 to
June 3. The exposition at Strasbourg, which
is under the direction of Professor Borrel, will
open on June 1.

SCIENCE (a

ie)

THe hundredth anniversary of Pasteur’s
birth will be celebrated on December 27 by
Chicago physicians, chemists and _bacteriolo-
gists at a dinner and meeting under the
auspices of the Chicago Medical Society and
the Chicago section of the American Chemical
Society. Dr. Ludvig Hektoen will preside.
The address on Pasteur will be delivered by
Professor Victor C. Vaughan, and the response
in behalf of France will be made by M. Antonin
Barthelemy, consul for France.

Sir Isaac Barter Batrour, for thirty-four
years professor of botany at the University of
fidinburgh, has died at the age of sixty-nine
years.

Tue death is announced of Henry John
Elwes, past president of the Royal English
Arboricultural Society and of the Royal Ento-
mological Society of London.

Harry J. Powstt, a leader in the scientific
development of the manufacture of glass in
England, died on November 26 at the age of
sixty-nine years.

Dr. Jouyer, formerly professor of physi-
ology of the Bordeaux Medical School, has died
at the age of eighty-two years.

Prorsessor Erasmus Masrwsx1, the Polish
anthropologist, died in Warsaw on Novem-
ber 15.

THE program committee of the Pennsylvania
State College Branch of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science ar-
ranged to have Dr. W. A. Onton, from the
Bureau of Plant Industry, Washington, D. C.,
address the meeting which followed the annual
dinner at the University Club on December 12.
Dr. Orton discussed the newer knowledge of
the properties of plants important in special
diet and the necessity of introducing and dis-
seminating additions to our list of vegetables
and of providing an all-the-year supply.”

Sigma Delta Epsilon, graduate women’s sci-
entifie fraternity, will hold its national conven-
tion in Boston at the time of the meetings of
the American Association for the Advancement
of Science. There will be an informal luncheon
for all scientific women interested in the need

714

of such an organization on Thursday, Decem-
ber 28. At this luncheon Mrs. Anna Botsford
Comstock will speak on “The need of organ-
ization among scientific women,” and Miss
Christianna Smith, national president, on
“Sioma Delta Epsilon, graduate women’s sci-
entific fraternity.”

A Casau prize is offered this year by the
Academy of Medicine and Surgery at Barce-
lona, as part of the tribute to Professor
Ramon y Cajal. The prize, 1,000 pesetas, will
be awarded for the best work describing orig-
inal research on any histologic topic, accom-
panied with slides, photomicrographs, ete.

Joun B. HenpErson, a regent of the Smith-
sonian Institution, has purchased for the Divi-
sion of Mollusks the General Evezard collec-
tion of mollusks estimated at from 7,000 to
10,000 specimens, including a large number of
types.

AN expedition to study seismic disturbances
on ithe bed of the Pacific Ocean under the
auspices of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington and the Hydrographic Office of the
Navy, will leave San Francisco in the near
future. Two American destroyers, the Hull
and the Corry, have been selected for ‘the work.
They will carry the sonic depth finder, by
means of which it is hoped to make continuous
soundings for 7,000 miles along the Pacific
coasts of the United States and Mexico. The
soundings will be made on parallel lines, ap-
proximately at right angles to the 2,000 fathom
curve, at intervals of five to ten miles, extend-
ing from the coast to a point on the deeper
floor of the Pacific Ocean. The expedition,
through a more accurate charting of the bed of
the Pacifie Ocean, aims to throw new light on
the causes and the effects of the seismic dis-
turbances that so often occur off the Pacific
Coast of North America.

We learn from the London Times that a
meeting to consider the question of a memorial
to Mr. William Henry Hudson, the writer on
natural history, who died last August, was held
on November 27 at the offices of his publishers,
Messrs. J. M. Dent and Sons, Limited. Mr.
R. B. Cunninghame Graham presided and was

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1460

supported by Lord Grey of Fallodon. It was
agreed that the memorial should \take ‘the fom
of a drinking and bathing fountain for birds,
to be erected in London, preferably, if the
Office of Works approved, at the entrance to
one of the bird sanctuaries which are being
developed in certain of the public parks, the
sanctuary itself to be dedicated ito Mr.. Hudson.
It was further agreed that |the portrait of Mr.
Hudson painted by Professor A. D. Ruther-
ston should be acquired and presented (subject
to its acceptance by the ‘trustees) to the Na-
tional Portrait Gallery, and such moneys as
might be further subseribed to the memorial
fund should be devoted to objects similar ‘to
those mentioned in Mr. Hudson’s will. Mr.
Hudson left the residue of this property to the
Royal Society for the Protection of Birds, to
be used for the purpose of printing leaflets and
pamphlets designed to excite in children “that
interest in and love of ithe birds which leads to
their protection.”

THe council of the Royal Aeronautical So-
ciety announces that, through the generosity of
the trustees of the Carnegie United Kingdom
Trust, they have been able to arrange for the
purehase of a large number of valuable his-
torical books on aeronautics. This purchase,
together with ‘the works already possessed by
the society, renders its collection of early and
modern aeronautical literature probably unsur-
passed in any country. In recognition of their
generosity, the council of the Royal Aeronau-
fieal Society has, at the request of the Carne-
gie trustees, agreed to make the books in the
society’s library available for any student in
the British Isles through the medium of the
Central Library for Students, 9 Galen Place,
W. C. 1. The library has been formed by the
Carnegie trustees ito provide a loan collection
for students of itechnical books, which are un-
suitable for placing in rural libraries.

Ir is stated in Nature that the suggestion
made by Mr. F. Gill, president of the Institu-
tion of Electrical Engineers, in his recent ad-
dress, that an international European confer-
ence should be held with the view of establish-
ing on a commercial basis a practical system
of long-distance telephony in the European

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

trunk lines, has now been realized by M. Paul
Laffont, the French minister of telegraphs and
telephones. He proposes to invite a confer-
ence at Paris of the technical administrators of
the western European countries, and he urges
that France would naturally be the center of
the vast telephone system formed by combining
the systems of these countries. The long-dis-
tance telephone calls in daily use in America
show that, from an engineering point of view,
the scheme presents few difficulties. Thus ithe
New York-San Francisco eall (3,000 miles) is
equivalent to communication ‘between London
and Baghdad; the Key West (Florida) and
Los Angeles call via New York and San Fran-
cisco is equivalent to a London-Delhi commu-
nication.

THe Department of Commerce announces
that provisional figures compiles by the Bureau
of the Census for the first six months of 1922
indicate higher death rates than for the cor-
responding six months of 1921. For the states
compared the death rate for the six months
was 12.6 in 1922 against 12 for the first six
months of 1921. The Imghest mortality rate
for the half year is shown for Maine (15.7)
and the lowest for Idaho (8.2). These figures
forecast for the year 1922 a somewhat higher
rate for the death registration area than the
record low rate (11.6) for the year 1921. Pro-
visional ‘birth figures for the first six months of
1922 indicate lower birth rates than for the
corresponding six months of 1921. For the
states compared the birth rate for the first six
months was 22.7 in 1922 against 24.8 in 1921.
The highest birth rate for the half year (30)
is shown for North Carolina and the lowest
(18.1) for Vermont. Births so far reported
for the first six months of 1922 indieate a lower
birth rate for the year ‘than the 1921 rate for
the birth registration area (24.3).

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES
A sequest of $100,000 for the erection of a
building for the department of mechanical en-
gimeering at the University of Maine, to be

SCIENCE

715

named for the donor, is made in the will of
Oliver Crosby, head of an engineering firm in
St. Paul, Minn.

Baker UNIVERSITY announces a gift of
$100,000 from Mr. Joab Mulvane, a retired
banker of Topeka, Kansas, and a member of
the board of trustees of the university. The
money will be used in the erection of the Mul-
vane Science Hall.

Tur faculty of Case School of Applied Sci-
ence, Cleveland, Ohio, were notified in October
of a new and advanced scale of salaries, which
took effect at once. Full professors, of whom
there are twelve, will receive $5,000; associate
professors, of whom there are eight, wall re-
ceive $3,300; assistant professors, of whom
there are nine, will receive $2,800; and instruc-
tors, of whom there are thirty-three, will re-
ceive $2,000 to $2,200. The enrollment at Case
this year is shghtly less than a year ago, num-
bering 615, with a freshman class of 198.

Str AucKLAND GeEppES, British ambassador
to the United States, and previously a distin-
gushed professor of anatomy, delivered the ad-
dress in dedication of the J. William White
Surgical Pavilion of the University of Penn-
sylvania, on December 14. The pavilion is
named after the late Dr. J. William White,
who was for many years professor of surgery.
It was built at a cost of $1,000,000, of which
$350,000 was contributed by the state and the
remainder by friends of the university.

Proressor Grorce Davin BirkHorr, of
Harvard University, has been appointed lec-
turer in mathematics at Yale University for
the second term. He will give a course in the
Graduate School during Professor Ernest W.
Brown’s absence.

Louis Agassiz Furrrss, the artist, has been
appointed lecturer in ornithology in Cornell
University.

Dr. H. M. Jennison, who recently received
the degree of Ph.D. from Washington Univer-
sity, has been appointed associate professor of
botany at the University of Tennessee, afiter
having completed eleven years’ service at the
Montana State College.

Dr. A. W. Gisp has been appointed to the

716

newly founded Kilgour chair of geology at
Alberdeen. i

Dr. Fritz Straus, of Berlin, has been ap-
pointed professor of chemistry at the Breslau
School of Technology.

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
RADIATION A FORM OF MATTER

To THE EpiTor oF ScieNcE: One sees the
statement frequently made that, if one accepts
Hinstein’s conclusion that the. mass of a body
is proportional to the total energy which it
possesses, the principle of the conservation of
matter must be abandoned. For if during any
change energy is gained or lost by the body
through radiation, there should ‘be a corre-
sponding gain or loss of mass. It has been
calculated that in the case of radioactive dis-
integration the energy thus lost (or gained)
through radiation represents an appreciable
fraction of the total mass of the radioactive
material. If, however, one takes the point of
view that radiation is a form of matter, and
that the amount of this matter is measured by
the mass or inertia of the radiation, the total
mass of the body plus that of the radiation
emitted is unaltered by such changes. On this
view the principle of the conservation of mass
is strictly valid, being, as has been remarked,
a corollary of the energy principle.

It is perhaps surprising to notice that ac-
cording to the definitions of matter usually
given electromagnetic radiation must be classed
as matter. It is admittedly difficult to find a
satisfactory definition. ‘Matter is that which
occupies space,” “matter is that which pos-
sesses mass or inertia,” “matter is that which
affects the senses,’ are, however, common state-
ments. But radiation certainly occupies space;
that it possesses mass is shown by the mo-
mentum which it imparts to a body which it
strikes, producing radiation pressure; and who
would deny that sunlight affects the senses?
Unless, therefore, we change our idea of what
is meant by the word “matter,” this word
includes not only solids, liquids and gases, but
also the less tangible electromagnetic radiation.

The inclusion of radiation as a form of

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

matter has important bearings in addition to
the fact that it renews the validity of the prin-
ciple of the conservation of matter. Thus, for
example, we can no longer say that matter is
composed wholly of positive and negative elec- .
trons, for the form of matter known as tadia-
tion includes no such electric charges. The
statement that matter is composed of positive
and negative electrons and electromagnetic
radiation is, on the other hand, more complex
than is required. We see rather that the fun-
damental thing in matter is not the electric
charge but ‘the electromagnetic field, for the
electromagnetic field includes both the elec-
trons and the radiation.

If the further simplification is made of con-
sidering the magnetic field as due to the elec-
trie field in motion, we may describe all forms
of matter in terms of the intensity of the elec-
trie field at different points. The mass or
inertia of the matter is proportional to the
integral through the volume considered of the
square of the electric intensity and of the mag-
netic intensity resulting from the motion of
the electric field, whether this electric field is
due to the presence of electrons or to the ex-
istence of electromagnetic radiation. The elec-
trie charge in an element of volume is propor-
tional to the divergence of the electric intensity
at the point. Thus all the fundamental prop-
erties of matter are determined if the intensity
of the electric field throughout space and time
is known. While the electrons can not be con-
sidered the fundamental elements which make
up all matter, we have thus the intensity of the
electric field as that which can be thought of
as composing both the electrons and the radia-
tion. Electric intensity, then, may be consid-
ered as that of which all matter is composed.

According to this point of view, matter is
perfectly continuous. It is true that there are
certain perhaps limited regions, the electrons,
from which electric intensity diverges; but
whether or not these regions of divergence are
limited, the mass of the matter is associated
with the electric intensity and is hence dis-
tributed through all space. Similarly, radia-
tion propagated through space, as for example
light coming from the sun to the earth, is on
this view a continuous series of waves of

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

matter. The old argument for the existence of
an ether because some medium is necessary to
transfer the radiant energy from the sun to
the earth has accordingly no weight. For we
now see that the radiation may be its own
medium, somewhat as the stream of water from
a hose acts as the medium for a wave if the
nozzle is shaken.

Perhaps the only new thing in this letter is
that, according to the common significance of
the word, radiation must be considered a form
of matter. But it has seemed to me that a con-
sideration of this fact shows more clearly than
we have seen before that matter is essentially
continuous, and that the fundamental thing in
matter is not the positive and negative elec-
trons but is rather electric intensity.

ArtHur H. Compron

WASHINGTON UNIVERSITY,

Sr. Louis, Missourt

RUSSIAN SCIENTIFIC AID

At the request of the American Relief Ad-
ministration, which has been receiving, repack-
ing and forwarding the contributions of Amer-
ican scientific books, journals and papers pub-
lished since January 1, 1915, for distribution
in Russia, I wish to ask that any further ship-
ments from contributors to the New York
warehouse (Gertzen and Company, 70 West
Street, New York) of the American Relief
Administration should be made prior to De-
cember 30, 1922. Up to date approximately
eleven tons of scientific literature have been
sent to Russia by the American committee.
This committee wishes to extend its
thanks to all donors.

In response to the appeal for some money
with which to relieve the distress of the hun-
dred Russian intellectual exiles in Berlin, I
have received up to this writing $865, of which
$500 came as a single gift from Princess Canta-
euzene and the rest in five and ten dollar lots
from American scientific men. I have no doubt
that the total of $1,000 asked for will be
reached.

warm

VERNON KELLOGG
NATIONAL RESEARCH COUNCIL,
WASHINGTON, D. C.

SCIENCE

AT,

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS
THE WATCHERS OF THE SKY!

The romance of Science is not an infrequent
phrase and it describes as well as any other the
dramatic and striking phases of one side of
human activity. Its domain is modern because
all science is modern as a recognized pursuit
and one which is of good repute. It is treated
in many forms which vary from the fascina-
ting stories of Jules Verne and H. G. Wells to
the lurid and generally imaccurate articles in
the Sunday Press. In between, we have many
an essay or address which emphasizes the pic-
turesque features of the search for the secrets
of nature. But it is new for a poet of the first
rank amongst those living to recognize its
claims to be classed with love, war, and the
more obvious forms of nature’s works and
human activities for expression in verse. In
one respect Mr. Noyes, who follows the great
poets of the past in taking a single theme, dif-
fers from them. Homer tells of the struggle
of man against man, Virgil of man against na-
ture, Milton of man against the unseen powers;
it is always warfare or struggle in which one
side or the other is to conquer. Here there is
no victory and no defeat. The Torch-bearers
are striving to learn not by defeating nature
but by cooperating with her, and the achieve-
ments of nature are of less importance than
the methods by which she works. He who learns
hands on his knowledge; the torch is passed,
not extinguished.

From the preface we learn that the “Watch-
ers of the Sky” is the astronomical portion of
a trilogy the title of which “The Torch-bearers”
describes the main idea of the treatment. There
is no pretence at completeness—the poem is a
story not a history—but the torch is followed
with some degree of consecutiveness as it passes
from the hands of Copernicus through those of
Tycho, Kepler, Galileo, until Newton held it
high for all the world to see. Later glimpses
show Wiliam Herschel putting out his hand to
take it and Sir John bearing it for a time. The
setting of the whole poem places the first and
last word on the summit of Mount Wilson

1 By Alfred Noyes.
ick A. Stokes Company.

Published by the Freder-

718

where Mr. Noyes joined the group of astrono-
mers, mechanics and laborers for the first mght
on which the hundred inch reflector was ready
for use and took his place with them for a
glance through it at Jupiter and its moons.
This bare outline is but the frame-work which
Mr. Noyes built to contain the ideas he tries to
set forth.
common ground between science and poetry is
the exercise of the creative imagination and in
all his description pays less attention to the
actual discoveries than to the ideas which led to

He recognizes fully that the great

them. Copernicus and Galileo in their interpre-
tations of the motions of the planets and stars,
Tycho in his observations for the use of future
astvonomers, Kepler in framing simple laws,
and Newton in placing the key-stone in the
arch, ave to Mr. Noyes guides who lighted up
the routes rather than discoverers and builders.
Let lesser men string the lights which illuminate
the termtories of knowledge; the torch-bearers
In faet,
Mr. Noyes has succeeded to a considerable ex-
tent in absorbing and emitting thoroughly
modern views of what constitutes the highest
achievement in scientific work.

One is tempted to much quotation to illus-
trate how Mr. Noyes has worked out his theme
and I shall indulge in it to some extent. Some
of his attempts strike the reader as achieving
a high plane of expression.

are those who show the way to them.

He has, it is true,
almost wholly used the medium of blank verse,
which gives him considerable freedom, but the
rhythm rarely fails even when he has set him-
self the difficult task of setting forth some of
the more technical laws of nature. While he
exercises the poet’s right to give such parts
of the truth as will illustrate the whole, in do-
ing so he avoids with some success the danger
of making wrong statements. Kepler’s three
laws are given in detail: his wording of the
third is rather happy:

Third, that although their speed from point to

point
Appeared to change, their radii always moved
Through equal fields of space in equal times.

In describing Newton’s experiments, he tells
how

He caught

The sunbeam striking through that bullet-hole

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

In his closed shutter—a round white spot of light
Upon a small dark screen. He interposed

A prism of glass. He saw the sunbeam break
And spread upon the sereen its rainbow band
Of disentangled colours, all in seale

Like notes in music; first, the violet ray,

And then, after describing how each ray was
bent differently by a second prism,
Last, he took a jens,
And, passing through it all those coloured rays,
Drew them together again, remerging all
On that dark screen, in one white spot of light.

The last steep is not quite clear but it gives the
idea.

Mr. Noyes exhibits considerable skill in
choosing the method by which he shall describe
each of his characters and make them tell of
their work and ideas. For the first of them,
The neighbours gossiped idly at the door.
Copernicus lay dying overhead.

His book has come
From Nuremberg at last; but who would dare
They have altered it!
Though Rome approved in full, this preface, look,
Declares that his discoveries are a dream!
He has asked a thousand times if it has come;

To let him see it now?

While waiting and hoping for it to come he

muses on his life and work:

So, all my life I pondered on that scheme

Which makes this earth the centre of all worlds,

Lighted and wheeled around by sun and moon

And that erystal men
thought

Myriads of lesser stars were fixed like lamps,

Each in its place,—one mighty glittering wheel

great sphere wherein

Revolving round this dark abode of man.

He was puzzled how to account for the mo-
tions of the planets and felt that he must tell
the world his ideas ‘before he goes out. Blind-
ness comes on and they put the book in his
hands:

It is here!
Put out the lamp, now. Draw those curtains back,
And let me die with starlight on my face.

The story of Tycho is told im full from

The boy at Copenhagen, with his mane

‘Of thick red hair, thrusting his freckled face

Out of his upper window, holding the piece
Of glass he blackened above his candle-flame

who later

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

While his tutor slept,
Measured the delicate angles of the stars,
Out of his window, with his compasses,
_His only instrument.

Looking down he sees Christine, “the blue eyed
peasant girl,” who afterwards accompanies him
to Wheen in the Sound where with the King’s

help he
built himself that wonder of the world,

Uraniborg, a fortress for the truth,
A eity of the heavens.

He tells her all his hopes:

There’s one way,
And only one, to knowledge of the law
Whereby the stars are steered, and so to read
The future, even perhaps the destinies
Of men and nations,—only one sure way,
And that’s to watch them, watch them, and record
The truth we know, and not the lies we dream.

Mr. Noyes follows him through the many
years of work on the island to the time when,
under a succeeding ruler, support was with-
drawn. He was exiled and as a result meets
with Kepler who describes his last moments.
The story of Tycho is perhaps the most sue-
cessful effort in the volume.

Kepler is shown in his home expecting a
visitor, Sir Henry Wotton, and discoursing to
his wife about poets and their natures. She
lets him run on and after his longest disquisi-
tion :

‘John, I’m afraid!’
‘Afraid of what, Susannah?’
“Afraid to put those Ducklings on to roast.’

But the ambassador arrives early and Kepler
has to fill in the time talking with him in his
study. It is here he has the opportunity to tell
of his work and to state the laws of planetary
motion. Throughout, however, he gives the
credit to Tycho:
I owed so much
To Tycho Brahe; for it was he who built
The towers from which I hailed those three great
laws.

The story of Galileo is chiefly written round
the famous trial which Mr. Noyes has apparent-
ly investigated with some care. There is here
much less astronomy and physics and more
philosophy. The story of the reception of his
telescope is interestingly told, however, and the

SCIENCE

719

author finds an opportunity to give a_politi-
cian’s view of a scientific discovery:

Whereat old senators, wagging their white beards,
And plucking at golden chains with stiff old claws
Too feeble for the sword-hilt, squeaked at once:
‘This glass will give us great advantages

‘In time of war.’

Mr. Noyes follows Isaac Newton through the
productive period of his life and gives in some
detail the chief of his discoveries. We have
already quoted from the description of his ex-
periments on light. There follow a few lines
about
That first reflecting telescope which should hold
In its deep mirror, as in a breathless pool
The undistorted image of a star.

A long and faithful description of the work
on gravitation follows, incuding ithe incident
where Newton obtained the new value of the
Harth’s diameter and was too excited to finish
the calculations which showed that his theory
was right. Mr. Noyes gets some fun with talk
of Pepys about Newton and his table,
Littered with papers, cups, and greasy plates
Of untouched food. I am told that he would eat
His Monday’s breakfast, sir, on Tuesday morn-

ing,

Such was his absent way!

In the penultimate scene, Newton, now an
old man, muses over his early days and his work
in a letter to an old sweetheart. The last phase
is put into the mouth of Dean Swift.

The “Watchers of the Sky” is probably not
a literary landmark of the first order, but it is
a very important and attractive addition to
the growing list of volumes which are bringing
scientific ideas and their history to the attention
of the general public. Whatever may be said
concerning its merits,—and there are decided
differences of opinion possible on that score—
it has certainly the excellent quality of being
interesting throughout. Many will read it
through for that reason alone. It is essentially
a volume which should be in everyone’s library
especially where theve are boys and girls grow-
ing up. Parents are advised to “leave it about”
but not to recommend their children to read it
if they wish them to enjoy it.

Ernest W. Brown

720

SPECIAL ARTICLES
IODINE AND ANURAN METAMORPHOSIS

Tue following experiment shows clearly the
importance of iodine in inducing anuran meta-
morphosis and indicates that other halogens
such as bromine can not be substituted for it.

Thyroidectomized and hypophysectomized
R. sylvatica, the glands of which had been ex-
tirpated early in embryonic life, were kept
until after the normal time for metamorphosis
had elapsed and the normal controls had trans-
formed, and then divided into three sets for
experimental purposes. It will be recalled that
thyroidless and pituitaryless larve do not meta-
morphose but remain permanent tadpoles unless
fed thyroid derivatives or very large amounts
of iodine. One set of animals was fed quanti-
ties of pure tyrosine CHeCH(NH2)COOH
each day and allowed to remain in weak solu-
tions of this substance six to eight hours every
day. The remainder of the time they were kept
in large glass containers and fed large quan-
tities of spirogyra.

The second lot of animals was fed equal
quantities of tyrosine in which two atoms of
iodine had been substituted for two hydrogen
atoms of the tyrosine—forming the well-known
compound, 3-5-di-iodo-tyrosine. The iodine in
this compound is, of course, an integral part
of the molecule.

Tyrosine

/ \ (H2CH (Nz) COOH

S|

NG
OH
3-5-diiodotyrosine

/ \ HCH (NHz) COOH

NOAA
OH

The third set of tadpoles was fed quantities
of tyrosine equal in amount to that received by
the other two cultures, in which two atoms of
bromine had been substituted for two hydrogen
atoms of the tyrosine molecule forming the
compound 3-5-di-brom-tyrosine.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

/ \ Ci2CH (NH2) COOH

Br NA Br
OH

The di+brom-tyrosine was prepared according
to the method of C. T. Morner, 1913, Zeitschrift
fiir physiologische Chemie, Vol. 88.

The animals fed tyrosine and spirogyra
showed no changes indicative of metamorphosis
after sixty days of continuous feeding, though
the normal growth rate was not interrupted.
After the twenty-fifth day ‘the hind legs differ-
entiated and grew very slowly until they
attained a length of 3 to 5 millimeters. There
were no signs of fore legs, skin autolysis in
the pectoral region, tail shrinkage or anything
suggesting transformation.

The animals fed 3-5-di-brom-tyrosine be-
haved in identical fashion with those of the
tyrosine-fed culture and no metamorphosis re-
sulted. At the end of the second month of
feeding the hind legs of the animals of the
culture averaged five millimeters. The growth
rate of the animals was not interfered with by
the brom-tyrosine compound. Insofar as
the acceleration of metamorphosis is con-
cerned, the results obtained by feeding
tyrosine and 3-5-di-brom-tyrosine are essen-
tially negative.

Conversely the administration of 3-5-di-iodo-
tyrosine to thyroidless and pituitaryless larve
brought about very striking results, and in so
far as metamorphosis is concerned, simulated
the action of thyroid extract, although the
effect of the latter is somewhat more rapid.
Within a few days after feeding iodo-tyrosine
the animals appear thin and emaciated; the
limbs grow rapidly and the other changes inci-
dent to metamorphosis appear. Twenty days
after the date of first feeding the entire culture
of thyroidless animals had completed metamor-
phosis except for the loss of the tail. The
pituitaryless animals developed fore and hind
legs, frog mouths but invariably died before
tail resorbtion was complete. In two pituitary-
less animals the right fore legs broke through
the skin eight days after the animals were
placed upon the iodo-tyrosine diet. These two

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

individuals were exceptional in this respect, the
average time being about twenty days.

These results are of significance for several
reasons: 1. The experiment is clear cut and ad-
mits of but one interpretation, 7. e., that it is
the iodine within the tyrosine molecule that is
essential for Anuran metamorphosis, because
tyrosine without the two atoms of iodine is
incapable of inducing metamorphosis.t

2. Thyroidless and pituitaryless frog larve
do not metamorphose unless fed thyroid sub-
stance or very large quantities of elemental
iodine. Such larve have no thyroid mechanism
for the manufacture of ithe thyroid hormone,
yet apparently are able to utilize inorganic
iodine when administered in very large quanti-
ties along with normal food. The substitution
of the two iodine atoms for two hydrogens of
the tyrosine molecule transforms the tyrosine
into a highly active metamorphosis-inducing
agent far superior to any quantity of ele-
mental iodine in its rate of action and second
only to the thyroid hormone itself. It seems
clear that in tadpoles metamorphosis depends
upon an organic iodine complex of some sort,
and that the iodine to be effective does not need
to undergo transformation within the thyroid
gland. It is evident that when thyroidless
larve metamorphose when fed quantities of
inorganie lodine, the latter to be active must
enter into organic combination with either the
body proteins of the larve or the alge fed
with it.

3. Iodized proteins and amino-acids have
been employed by several investigators in the
treatment of various disorders of the thyroid
in cases of human hypothyroidism, but the

1lLarge axolotls seven inches long were thy-
roidectomized and kept five months following the
operation and then twice injected with iodotyro-
Metamorphosis resulted within seventeen
Similar ani-

sine.
days following the first injection.
mals injected with tyrosine and dibromtyrosine
did not transform. Partially thyroidectomized
axolotls (two thirds of the gland excised) were
kept five months and then twice injected with
iodo-serum globulin. Metamorphosis occurred
within sixteen days. Uhlenhuth’s claim that
Urodele larve differ from Anurans in regard to
metamorphosis and iodine is not sustained.

SCIENCE

721

writer has never heard that such products can
completely take the place of the thyroid hor-
mone. Yet in thyroidless Anuran tadpoles
iodo-tyrosine to all intents and purposes is as
good as the thyroid secretion in transforming
the individual, 7. e., it completely takes the
place of the gland secretion in so far as meta-
morphosis is concerned.

Metamorphosis in Anurans is dependent
upon a peculiar property of the iodine atom
when organically combined in a certain way
and it seems that mammals and Anurans are
not to be compared in regard to their reactions
to iodine. Thyroidless tadpoles promptly
metamorphose when fed iodized amino-acids or
large quantities of elemental iodine, but thy-
roidless mammals and individuals with atro-
phied and very degenerate glands can not
utilize elemental iodine at all, and the same is
probably true of iodized amino acids. Voegthlin
and Strouse (’09, Journal Pharm. and Exp.
Therap.) observed that iodized amino-acid fails
to replace the thyroid function in pathological
cases of hypothyroidism, 7. e., myxedematous’
and eretinous mammals, nor was the nitrogen
metabolism or blood pressure of dogs influ-
enced by administration of this substance.
Furthermore, Miura (’22, Jour. Lab. and Clin-
ical Med., Vol. 7) has made the interesting ob-
servation that di-iodotyrosine gives no protec-
tion to mice against lethal doses of acetonitrile,
whereas thyroid tissue protects these animals
against the poison.

Tt is clear that in so far as the metamor-
phosis of thyroidless and pituitaryless tadpoles
is concerned iodo-tyrosine is practically as
good as the thyroid hormone but this same
substance in mammals can not be substituted
for the glandular ‘tissue itself.

4. The suggestion of some recent writers that
bromine if it could be substituted for the iodine
of the thyroid might prove just as active physi-
ologically, is not borne out by these experi-
ments. Bromine has no influence upon Anuran
transformation and can not be substituted for
iodine.

W. W. SWINGLE

OssorN ZooLoGicaAL LABORATORY,

YALE UNIVERSITY,
OcTosEr 5, 1922

=I
im)
bo

THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

PHYSICAL AND ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
(Continued from November 17)

The conductivities, viscosities and densities of
solutions of mixed electrolytes. (Lantern): C. E.
Rusy and J. Kawat.

The mutual solubility of liquids: Two new
methods for determining the same: ARTHUR BE.
Hitt. The published results on the solubility of
liquids are meagre compared with the voluminous
data on the solubility of solids. It is proposed to
study a number of new cases, and repeat some
determinations which appear to be inaccurate.
No methods have proved to be of universal ap-
plicability. In place of the terms synthetic and
analytic methods, which do not indicate the essen-
tial differences in procedure, the term thermo-
static is proposed for methods in which the tem-
perature is held plethostatie
for methods in concentration is
fixed and the temperature changed to the
point of beginning heterogeneity or homo-
geneity. As a new thermostatic method suitable
to liquids of moderate solubility, the measure-
ment of the volumes obtained in suitable vol-
umetric apparatus in two experiments may be
used, on the basis of the phase rule, to calculate
the solubilities. An accurate determination of the
solubility curves for ether and water has been
made by this method. For liquids dissolving
yery small amounts of water the use of silver per-
chlorate is proposed; the solubility of this salt
rises sharply with the presence of small amounts
of water, so that, after establishment of a refer-
ence curve at a standard temperature (25°), the
solubility of water at any other temperature can
be determined. The solubility of water in ben-
zene and in aniline has been measured by this
second method.

DIVISION OF

constant and

which the

fhe oceurrence of closed solubility curves in
three-component systems: ArtTHUR E. HILL.
Closed solubility curves have been found in sev-
eral two-component systems, such as nicotine and
waiter. Among three-component systems the
closed curve has been found only once, in the case
of silver perchlorate, water-benzene, recently pub-
lished by the author. The same type of curve
bas now been found in the system silver per-
chlorate-water-toluene, and exists from room tem-
perature to some above 100°.
In both cases, the curve for the two
component (silver perchlorate-benzene
and silver perchlorate-toluene) approaches a
perpendicular to the temperature

temperature
these
systems

axis, 0: /e.,

SCIENCE

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1460

the two components just fail of breaking
into two liquids; the addition of the third
component evidently decreases the mutual solu-
bility, causing the formation of two liquid phases.
It is well known that, when there is limited solu-
bility of two liquids, a third component may
either increase or decrease that solubility. Where
there is unlimited solubility of two components
in the fused state (i. e., only one liquid phase
exists), the addition of the third component
should again act either to inerease or decrease
miscibility; but if the two-component system
shows a nearly perpendicular curve, indicating
that the forces existing are only just sufficient to
hold the two components in solution, a third com-
ponent chosen to reduce mutual solubility should
result in a separation into two liquid phases,
which, in the three-component diagram, leads to a
closed curve. We may therefore look for closed
curves in three-component systems most hope-
fully where one of the two-component systems
shows a solubility curve of the type described.

Solubilities up to the critical
P. A. Bonn and M. C. WapDELL.
manipulation. II—Solubilities in sulfur dioxide
at 25° C. A method for determining solubilities
up to tke critical temperature has been devel-
oped. The apparatus and method of manipula-
tion are discussed. Solubilities in sulfur dioxide
at 25° C. have been determined for salts of
potassium, silver, cadmium, tin, antimony, tellu-
rium, manganese and in one case for Ba as the
thiocyanate. Aside from the solubilities as de-
termined, interesting reactions between sulfur
dioxide and chlorates, bromates, iodates and
nitrates were noticed. Also a double layer was
formed in the case of SnBr. Work is to be con-
tinued until salts of all metals have been tried,
and in cases where solubility is shown is to be
carried on at different temperature levels.

Vapor pressures of certain hydrated sulfates:
Cuirrorp D. CARPENTER and Eric R. Jerre. The
vapor pressures of some of the hydrated sulfates
of Cu, Mn, Mg, Co, and Cd have been studied
at a number of temperatures below the transition
points, and the saturated solutions of some of
them at several temperatures above these points.
Some of the determinations have been earried as
high as 90° C. A modification of the Bremer-

temperature:
I—Methods of

Frowe tensimeter was used. All points were
determined by approaching equilibrium from
both a higher and a lower pressure. <A special

thermostat was constructed for the higher tem-
peratures. The results obtained have been used
in plotting the vapor pressure curves, in ealeu-
lating the heats of vaporization, and for plotting

DEcEMBER 22, 1922]

1
the log p — a relation. The log p — oF rela-

tion gave straight lines in every case, and these
lines intersected sharply at the transition points.
Some transition points are definitely located by
the intersection of the vapor pressure curves.
There are certain limitations in using vapor pres-
sure data for interpreting the nature of the phe-
nomenon.

Electroadsorption as a pure chenucal phenome-
non: J. W. ELpEer, E. B. Starkey and N. E.
Gorpon. An investigation to throw more light on
the relation between electroadsorption and pure
ehemical action. The work was carried out with
the hydrogels of ferric oxide and silica acting as
the adsorbents. Such salts were used so as to
have the resulting products of different solubility
provided there was a chemical reaction. The elec-
troendosmosis of each system was investigated in
order to correlate, if possible, any electrochemical
behavior.

Adsorption by activated sugar charcoal. II:
F. E. Barrett and E. J. Minurr. This paper
presents the results obtained in a study of the
nature of adsorption of electrolytes from solu-
tion by activated ash-free sugar charcoal. It
ineludes data on the adsorption of acid dyes,
basie dyes, organic and inorganic acids and inor-
ganic bases. A brief discussion of the theory of
hydrolytic adsorption of clectrolytes is given, fol-
lowed by a consideration of results obtained with
a number of salt solutions with activated sugar
charcoal. The variation of these results from
those obtained by other investigators who have
used charcoals of animal or vegetable origin is
pointed out.

The influence of temperature pressure and cata-
tyst support material upon adsorption by cata-
lytic nickel: A. W. Gaucrr and Hueu 8. Taybor.
(1) Adsorption isotherms of hydrogen on nickel
have been determined, using nitrogen as a refer-
ence gas. A definite saturation capacity of
nickel for hydrogen exists, dependent upon the
tamperature; (2) From the variation of the sat-
uration pressure with temperature the heat of
adsorption of hydrogen on nickel has been caleu-
lated to be approximately 2,500 calories; (3)
The effect of using an inert material for catalyst
support has been found to increase greatly the
adsorptive capacity per gram of nickel and to
yield a catalyst that will stand much more severe
heat treatment without diminution of its adsorb-
ing power.

An instrument for measuring the rate of swell-

SCIENCE

723

ing of gelatine films on rigid supports: 8. E.
SHEPPARD and Fenix A. Exuiorr. An _ instru-
ment was described which consists essentially of
a balance beam resting upon a fulerum which
can be raised and lowered by means of a
micrometer screw. At one end of the balance
beam hangs a slender but rigid quartz rod, the
end of which is flattened to form a foot ca. 2 mm.
in diameter. The weight of this rod is carefully
counterbalanced within a few mgs., allowing just
enough ‘‘out of balance’’ to insure constant but
practically weightless contact between the foot
and the swelling gelatin surface. The gelatin
coated plate is securely clamped in a jacketed
tray just below the quartz rod. An optical
syctem indicates the condition of balance, the ful-
erum is lowered until balance is indicated, a read-
ing made, and solution acting on the gelatin
poured in the tray and the fulerum raised as may
be necessary to maintain balance. Readings are
made periodically. The sensitivity is about 0.001
mm. and the precision 5 to 1 per cent., depending
upon the rigidity of the jelly. Measurements
have been made using glass plates coated with
gelatin and also emulsion coated plates. These
were swollen in acids and alkalis as well as salt
solutions and photographic developing baths.
Although differing in degree all curves indicated
a rapid initial swelling asymptotically approach-
ing an equilibrium.

The effect of gravity and light on the forma-
tion of Liesegang bands in gelatin and _ silicic
acid. (Illustrated): Earn C. H. Davis. Gravity
has but little effect on the formation of periodic
bands in gelatin as shown experimentally. Light
is one of the most important variables in making
rhythmic bands of gold in silicic acid. At the con-
centrations used no bands were formed in the
dark at either 0° C. or at room temperatures.
Periodie variations of strong light and darkness
produce bands in those regions in which there is
still adsorbed molecular gold, excess oxalic acid
and suitable amounts of the products of the
reaction. These by-products make precipitation
in bands possible because they influence the ten-
deney toward imbibition and peptization so that
the gold is precipitated in ‘‘pockets’’ just large
enough to give a colloidal dispersion. There is
no fundamental difference between the bands of
blue gold and those of red. The location of the
colloidal bands can be governed by a black paper
which surrounds the tube and has slits cut in it
at regular intervals. With a Mazda light placed
near such a tube in the dark room for a week
the bands at the openings are coarse particles

724

stead of being colloidal. That is, they are
yellow crystals. Contrary to some previous ob-
servations rhythmic bands of the silver chromate
form in darkness at 0° C. and room temperatures.

Ferric oxide hydrosol. II. The chlorine and
hydrogen ion activities and the heat of coagula-
tion with sodium sulfate: Frrprrick L. BRowNer.
A study has been made of the hydrogen and the
chlorine ion activities in ferric oxide hydrosol
and in hydrolyzed and unhydrolyzed ferrie chlo-
ride solutions. From these data the distribution
of FeClz and HCl between the dispersed phase
and the dispersion medium has been computed.
When the heat of coagulation of these sols with
Na SO, is corrected for the heat of mixing of
Na.SO4 with the FeCl; and HCl present, there
is left a small positive heat effect which is pro-
portional to the amount of Na SO, adsorbed dur-
ing coagulation and amounts to about 1,200 cal.
per g. eq. NagSO, adsorbed.

Ferric ozide hydrosol: AnrtHUR W. THOMAS and
ALEXANDER F'RIEDEN.

A note on quinaldine pink: Hans T. CLark and
Feirx A. ELLIOTT.

The coagulation and repeptization of colloidal
ferric hydroxide by alkalis: Roprrt E. WILSON
and Puinie S. CuarK. In order to improve the
efficiency of removal by filtration of small
amounts of colloidal ferric hydroxide from hot
water which has been passed over sheet iron to
remove dissolved oxygen, a study was made of
various possible coagulating agents for ferric
hydroxide. It was found that alkalis were by far
the most effective precipitating agents in small
amounts, and that as low as .05 per cent. NaOH
effected practically complete coagulation in a very
short time. Larger amounts of alkali were found
to decrease the efficiency of filtration, and this
behavior was eventually shown to be due to the
repeptization of the ferric hydroxide as a nega-
tive colloid, with markedly different properties.

Gum dammar as an emulsifying agent: Harry
N. Hotmes and DonaLp CAMERON. Since gum
dammar is insoluble in water but soluble in
many other liquids its use as an emulsifying
agent forces water to become the internal or dis-
persed phase in the ‘‘ water-in-oil?’ type of emul-
sion. Such emulsions are more stable and may
be made much richer in water than by the use of
caleium soaps. Salve-like emulsions are readily
made by mixing a solution of the gum in benzene
with a relatively large amount of vaseline or
heavy oil and then rubbing in the desired amount

of water. Printers’ or lithograph inks may be

SCIENCE

[VoL. LVI, No. 1460

greatly cheapened by the incorporation of water,
dispersed in minute drops, by the use of this gum
as emulsifying agent. Since much of the drying
oil is used merely to give a proper working body,
the use of water, well emulsified, will give the
requisite body more cheaply while a smaller
amount of the drying oil is adequate for adhesive
purposes. Paints, varnishes and greases may be
diluted in similar: fashion. f

Cupric oxide jellies and the general theory of
jelly formation: Harry B. Weiser. A dilute col-
loidal solution of hydrous cuprie oxide is formed
by adding ammonia short of precipitation te a
saturated solution of cuprie acetate. This col-
loid coagulates on standing, forming a gelatinous:
precipitate of the hydrous oxide. By adding a
suitable small amount of sulfate to the acetate
solution before adding ammonia, a more concen-
trated colloidal solution of hydrous cuprie oxide
may be prepared. This colloid is likewise instable
and, under suitable conditions, coagulates with
the formation of a stable jelly. The sharply de-
fined conditions of formation and the effect of
electrolytes on the stability and rate or precipi-
tation of the colloidal oxide support the author’s
general theory of the formation of inorganic
jellies proposed at the Birmingham meeting.

A rapid method for the preparation of some
dilute silica gels: L. H. Reyrrson and Wm. T.
Morin. It has been found that ammonium hy-
droxide solutions will under certain conditions
cause solutions of sodium silicate, mixed with
hydrochloric or sulfuric acids, to set to gels.
Using this method it has been possible to set gels.
with an SiO» concentration as low as approxi-
mately one half of one per cent. Gels as low as
two per cent. will set almost instantly. The char-
acteristics of these dilute gels are being studied.

Studies on the nature of the reducing action of
charcoals on certain salt solutions. I. Silver
nitrate: L. H. ReyeRson and Max LatsHaw. The
reducing action of various charcoals upon silver
nitrate solutions has been studied. An almost ash-
less charcoal was prepared in order to eliminate
the interferences due to impurities. Neutralization
of surface charges does not account for the redue-
tion to metallie silver. Evidence from Hulett’s
work as. well as our own investigations points to
the fact that an active form of hydrogen, strongly
adsorbed by the charcoal, is the reducing agent.
Silica gel outgassed at 400 C. and cooled in an
atmosphere of hydrogen reduces silver ion in
silver nitrate solutions to silver. This reaction is
being studied in its effect on various cations,

” Ducemsrr 22, 1922]

especially those which lie below hydrogen in the
electromotive force series.

Behavior of aqueous potassium permanganate
in the presence of potassium hydroxide: WILLIAM
Lercu and J. E. Day. The rate of decomposi-
tion of an aqueous solution of potassium perman-
ganate (free from reducing substance) in the
presence of varied amounts of potassium hy-
droxide (free from reducing substances) was ob-
served at the temperatures 75 and 105° Centi-
grade (approximately) For a concentration of
KOH at and below 0.7 M no change in oxidizing
potential occurred at 73° in 182 hours. Increas-
ing temperature and alkalinity resulted in an in-
crease in the per cent. of KMnO, converted to
KyMnO,. At 105° Centigrade and a causticity of
11.7 M the percentage change was 90.3. The rate
of change curves are log curves.

Some properties of arsenic trioxide in aqueous
solution: ERNEST ANDERSON and R. G. Sqory.
The density and refractive index curves of As 03
in aqueous solution were found to be straight
lines. The equation for such a curve is:
W —A4+ BX. The constants A and B for both
curves were accurately determined at 25° C. The
weight of As 903 calculated from either density
or refractive index by the constants A and B
agree exactly with analytical determinations. The
solubility curve, degree of hydration and hydro-
gen ion concentration were also determined for
AsoOz, in aqueous solutions.

Preparation of antimony-free arsenious tri-
ovide: C. W. Founx, P. G. Horron and G. M.
McCuureE. Arsenious trichloride is first prepared
either by heating the oxide with concentrated hy-
drochloric acid and distilling or by adding. sul-
furic acid to the hydrochloric acid solution and
drawing off the layer of trichloride. The separa-
tion from antimony can be effected by several
distillations of the arsenious trichloride or better
and easier by shaking the trichloride two or
three times in a separatory funnel with a little
less than its own volume of concentrated hydro-
chloric acid. The antimony goes into the water-
acid phase.

The determination of lead in lead amalgam:
M. G. Mernion. Lead in lead amalgam may be
displaced by copper from an aqueous solution of
copper nitrate with the formation of copper amal-
gam and lead ‘nitrate. The lead may then be
precipitated and weighed as the chromate. Data
are given to show the accuracy of the method
amd the effect of time, temperature and concen-
tration of copper nitrate upon tthe displacement

SCIENCE 725

reaction. The mercury is not dissolved in the de-
termination, and it may be purified for further
use.

The volumetric determination of phosphorus:
Witutram A. TuRNER. Experiments undertaken
using the Pemberton or Kilgore volumetric meth-
od for phosphorus show a positive error of ap-
proximately 8 per cent. when compared with
results obtained by the gravimetric method. It is
shown that the factor for the phosphorus equiva-
lent of the alkali solution as given in the official
methods of the A. O. A. C. and in many text-
books is derived from an incorrect reaction. The
precipitate of ammonium phosphomolybdate as
ordinarily produced contains acid not removed by
washing with a neutral salt solution. The pre-
cipitate, therefore, is not (NH,)3P04.12MoOs,
as commonly assumed, but (NH4)3PO,4.12Mo00,
-+ 2 mols. HNOs or an equivalent amount of some
other acid. Such a precipitate requires a larger
proportion of alkali.. The correct reaction is,
2 (NH4)3P04. 12M003 .2HNO3] + 50Na0H —
2(NH4)2HPO,y + (NHy4)9Mo004 + 23NaygMoOy +
4NaNozg ++ 26H,O. A factor calculated on this
basis calls for an 8 per cent. reduction in the phos-
phorus equivalent of the alkali solution. Such a
factor gives results which agree very closely with
the gravimetrie method.

Note on apparatus for preparation of conduc-
tivity waters: C. W. FoutK and A. P. BawprEn.
The device is an accessory for conductivity water
stills because its use eliminates corks or rubber
stoppers for connecting glass flasks with con-
densers. Briefly, it consists of a circular tin
block on one end of which an annular depression
is turned to engage the mouth of the flask to be
used. Gaskets of tin-foil can be employed if
necessary. The block is held in place by means
of springs stretched between it and a brass collar
around the meck of the flask. The inner tube of
the condenser passes through a hole in this block,
the connection being made by soldering with tin.

Determination of the specific gravities of mini-
mal amounts of materials by the immiscible bal-
ance: WILLIAM G. Exton. It is often necessary
(blood and other body fluids, scums, dust, ete.)
or expedient (viscosity, expense of materials, ete.)
to determine the specific gravity of minimal
amounts of liquids or solids, and this may be
done rapidly and conveniently with the immiscible
balanee. The material to be tested is suspended
in equilibrium in a mixture of two solutions
(light and heavy) which are miscible with each
other .but not with the sample, i. e., petroleum

726

ether-carbon tetrachloride, benzol-chloroform, aleo-
hol-water, brine-water and other combinations are
suitable. The apparatus consists of a cylindrical
mixing chamber having for its floor a stopeock of
special design which connects with a thistle tube
and a spout. With the cylinder partly filled, a
drop or a fragment of the material to be tested
is immersed, and the specific gravity of the mix-
ture is then varied at will without agitation of
any kind by dropping the heavier component in
from above or forcing the lighter component into
the cylinder from below until the mixture has the
same specific gravity as the material to be tested.
The specific gravity of the mixture is then deter-
mined by Westphal balance or by a hydrometer
of special design. The design of the stopcock
permits the separated discharge of mixing cham-
ber and thistle tube into their respective con-
tainers so that the solutions may be used repeat-
edly or determinations made in series without dis-
charging the contents by removing ithe material.
The method is delicate, has a wide margin of
safety from error and the attainable accuracy
seems limited to the accuracy of the method used
to obtain ‘the specific gravity of the mixture.

A new method for the control of thermostats:
D. J. and J. J. Braver. A method for accu-
rately controlling the temperature of a thermo-
stat for long periods is described in which a very
small current, of the order of 10-5 amperes, is
amplified by a vacuum tube sufficiently to actuate
a magnetic relay. The circuit is so designed that
the chattering of the relay can be prevented by
electrical methods. The effect of an oscillating
point is obtained without an elaborate mechanism
and the back-lash at the mercury contact surface
is prevented by the use of iron wire for the con-
tact point. A sensitive thermoregulator is
described which is made of monel metal tubing
filled with mereury. A simple method of con-
necting glass to metal is described.

Adiabatic calorimetry at high temperatures:
J. W. Winrrams and Farrineron DANIELS.
Adiabatic calorimetry is possible at high tem-
peratures if sufficient precautions are taken to
prevent thermal leakage from the inner calori-
meter to the room. ‘The construction of such a
calorimeter is described. The outer bath, a
glycerine solution of ferric chlorids, is heated
electrolytically. Thermal leakage along the re-
sistance thermometer is difficult to overcome, so
it is placed in the outer bath, and readings are
taken when its temperature is identical with that
of the inner calorimeter as shown by zero reading

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460 ~

on a sensitive thermocouple. The specific heats of
aniline and nitrobenzene in the neighborhood of
100° have been determined.

Black phosphorus: CLAuDE Haines Haut, JR.
The author has collected and analyzed the some-
what extensive and complicated literature relating
to black phosphorus. He has shown that in
reality two distinct substances have been given
this name. The first, discovered by Thenard in
1812, is not a true allotropic modification but is
a colloidal suspension while the second, discovered
by Bridgman in 1914, fis a true modification. He
has devised an apparatus to extend Svedberg’s
method of preparing colloidal suspensions to
phosphorus and has definitely prepared suspen-
sions of copper phosphide and mercury in phos-
phorus. The properties of these suspensions are
described.

Notes on potassium chlorate: H. W. MosEnry.
In this paper the following matters are presented:
first, the preparation of specimens of potassium
chlorate by altogether different and independent
methods; second, the details of the determination
of the melting point of the several specimens with
check results (the literature shows a variation of
40° in this constant), the composition of the bath
necessary for this measurement, and the fact of
no decomposition at the melting point; third, the
determination of the temperature of beginning
decomposition with a study of the decomposition
yeaction up to and including 500° C.

Ozone: electrical preparation and analysis:
A, SILVERMAN and PauL C. SAUNDERS. Ozonizing
unit employed for the generation of ozone is a
modificatiion of the Berthelot apparatus. The
oxygen generator, purifying train, ozonizer, mano-
meter and analyzer are all parts of a single piece
of apparatus. All connections are of glass. The
parts of the unit are so constructed that all read-
ings can be made in a thermostat. Within the
limits of operation employed only Og was ob-
tained. Yields have been caleulated on the basis
of energy consumption. Concordant results have
been obtained under given sets of conditions.
Drawings accompany the article and lantern
slides will be employed in its presentation.

The analysis of gaseous mixtures of nitrogen
peroxide, nitric oxide, nitrous oxide and nitrogen:
Lowrett H. Mintican and OC. HERBERT QUICK.
The gases are conveyed by pure OO, through an
absorption train which removes NO»g and NO, and
then through NaOH soln, which takes out the
CO. and over the surface of which the N»O and
Ne collect. The NO is determined by slow-com-

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

bustion with hydrogen and the No is obtained by
difference. In the absorption train conc. H>SO4
is used to absorb NOs, and part of the NO if the
latter is present with NO . The total nitrogen
and the nitrous nitrogen in the acid are after-
ward determined, and from them the NO» and NO
absorbed are calculated. A definite volume of
std. permanganate soln., acidified with H3P04,
is used to absorb the rest of the NO, and after-
ward the excess permanganate is determined. The
total NO originally present is the sum of that
absorbed in the HpSO, and in the permanganate
soln. The method was tried on known quantities
of the gases, and was found satisfactory.

The action of hydrogen peroxide on photo-
graphic gelatino-silver halide emulsions: S. E.
SHEPPARD and E. P. Wicurman. A detailed
study of the action of hydrogen peroxide on pho-
tographic plates has been made with the idea of
obtaining more complete data on the subject in
order to compare the action with that of light in
the formation of latent images. Both the inten-
sity (concentration) and time factors were consid-
ered as well as development conditions. As a side
problem it was found necessary to consider also
the effect of concentration of the acid (or alkali)
content of the hydrogen peroxide. The effects are
in many ways quite similar to the action of light.
Other conclusions can not be drawn until further
work has been completed. We have proposed the
tentative hypothesis that silver nuclei in the silver-
halide grains serve as catalytic agents for the
decomposition of hydrogen peroxide which is
chemi-luminescent.

Reactions at boundaries of phases; the problem
of promoter action and the theory of the latent
photographic image: HucH S. Taytor. From a
literature study and from investigations it has
been established that the boundaries of two
phases constitute a most reactive portion of a
heterogeneous system. Evidence is available to
show that a number of cases of promoter action
ean be attributed to enhanced reactivity of mixed
catalysts at interfaces between the components of
the catalyst mixture. The analogy between the
development of the latent photographic image
and the reduction of metallic oxides by various
reducing gases at low temperatures can be estab-
lished. Studies of the latter are very suggestive
as to the necessary extent of nuclei production
precedent to the production of a developed image
in the individual grain of the photographic emul-
sion.

Hydrogen ton catalysis in lactone formation:

SCIENCE

727

H. W. Ciosz and Hueu 8. Taynor. A study of
the catalytic conversion of hydroxy-acids to lac-
tones, using acids as catalysts, has been made.
The influence of variation of the catalyzing of
acid and of its concentration, of added neutral
salts and of their concentration, of temperature
and of the solvent, have been made the object of
investigation. It has been shown that it is prob-
ably the non-hydrated hydrogen ion which is the
active catalytic agent. The remarkable results
which this leads to, when ether is used as solvent,
have been outlined and experimentally verified.

The hydrogen ion concentration of buffer solu-
tions at elevated temperatures: Ropert E. Wui-
son. Despite its importance from a number of
aspects, there is practically no data in the litera-
ture as to the hydrogen ion content of the various
recognized ‘‘buffer’’ solutions at temperatures
above 40° Centigrade. Since the Py Of neutral
water and of ordinary solutions of alkalies drops
off markedly with increasing temperature, on ac-
count of the increased donization constant of
water, it was especially desired to determine how
the alkaline buffer solutions behaved in this
respect. Measurements have been made on vari-
ous borate, phosphate and phthalate solutions and
indieate that the change in p,, between 30° to
90° (ealeulated ion the assumption that the Dey
of 0.1 N HCl is constant) is very small, compared
with that of ordinary alkaline solutions. This is,
of course, due to the fact that all owe their buffer
action to the ionization of acid salts of some
polyvalent acid. A phosphate buffer solution has
been prepared which is acid at 30° and alkaline
at 90°, although its p,, remains constant. Most
indicators behave much like the buffer solutions,
and hence a given color may ‘indicate acidity at
low temperatures and alkalinity at higher tem-
peratures. The paper presents the results in
graphical form.

Tracks of alpha particles in gases: B. W. RYAN
and W: D. Harkins.

The ferrocyanide test for zine: R. D. Muu
and A. L. STaLLBAUMER. Potassium ferrocyanide
precipitates a white zine ferrocyanide which,
when treated with bromine water, turns a ehar-
acteristic yellow color. No systematic work has
been done to determine the best conditions for
the test or to compare its sensitiveness with that
of the hydrogen sulfide test. Such work has been
done by the authors and leads to the following
conclusions: (1) K4Fe(Cn)¢g test for zine is ten
times as delicate as the HS test. 0.1 mg. of
zine ion in 50 ee. of solution can be detected,

728

1.0 mg. is about the limit for the sulfide method.
(2) The test should be carried out in a solution
about one half normal with acetic acid and should
contain ammonium salts. Warming to 60 aids
flocculation. (3) The ferrocyanides of the alka-
line earth metals are too soluble to interfere,
other metal ions must be removed. (4) The yellow
color with bromine water is also given by cad-
mium ferrocyanide.

Qualitative analysis without hydrogen sulfide:
R. D. Muuiinix. G. Almkvist has proposed a
method without the use of H»oS, but NaoS fol-
lowed by H.SO4. (Zeit. anor. Chem., 103, 221-
242, 1918). I have used for the past two years
with qualitative classes a method in which, after
the removal of the silver group by HCl, a mix-
ture of NaOH, Na,CO3 and bromine water pre-
cipitates a group of hydroxides and carbonates,
which are then further separated. The As, Sb,
Sn, Pb traces, An, Al and Cr are in the filtrate.
This is divided by HCl followed by NH,OH, and
zine tested for in the presence of chromate and
arsenate by the patassium ferrocyanide method.
This is a preliminary communication and will be
followed by more detailed work on the group
analyses and end tests.

DIVISION OF SUGAR CHEMISTRY
S. J. Osborn, chairman
Frederick Bates, secretary
Detection of sugar in condensed waters by
means of cresol: G. E. Stevens. Fifteen ml. of
eresol (U. S. P. Merck) is dissolved in a eastile
soap solution (6 gms. soap in 100 ¢.c. of distilled
water). The mixture is warmed until a complete
solution is obtained. This solution can be made
up in litre quantities in the above proportions
without deterioration. Approximately one inch
of water to be examined is placed in a 6 inch by
5% inch test tube and five to ten drops of the
eresol solution is added and then thoroughly
mixed. . Cool if the water is hot and then add
concentrated sulfuric acid from a dispensing
burette, holding the tube in ian inclined position
so that the acid will run down to the bottom and
form a separate layer, and continue to add the
acid until the acid layer is %4 inch deep. The
tube is then rolled between the palms of the
hands and if sugar is present a reddish black to
pink color ring will develop, the color depending
upon the concentration of sugar in solution. <A
white translucent screen is recommended, to be
placed between the eye and the source of light,
such that the color reaction will be more easily

SCLENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

Tecognized, especially in solutions containing very
faint traces of sugar.

Hydrogen-ion determination as a method of
refinery control. Preliminary report: H. Z. EH.
PERKINS. Direct control of acidity and alka-
linity in sugar refining is obtained only. at cer-
tain points, chiefly at beginning. After washing,
sugar goes through main process of clarification,
bone-black decolorization and crystallization with-
out material change in ionization. By-products
are unstable in composition, ferment quickly and
are moreover treated with defecating agents, acid
and alkaline. Jonization is variable, being re-
sultant of several factors, natural and artificial.
Main products, highly cerystallizable, light in
color, are easily tested with color indicators, but
appear sluggish and uncertain with potentiometer.
Lower products, dark colored, can not be used in
color reactions, but respond better to electro-
metric tests. Figures are given showing varia-
tions and stability.

A study of the formation of gum levan from
sucrose: W. L. OwEN. The formation of gum
levan from sucrose by bacteria is not, as has
been claimed by previous investigators, dependent
upon its inversion and the utilization of invert
sugar while in the nascent condition. Experi-
ments on the production of gum levan in the
presence of added invertase show that under these
conditions it is decreased to the extent to which
the invertase is active. The decrease is always
greatest where the conditions are most favorable
for invertase action. The optimum p,, for gum
production is between 6.7 and 7.0, but the fer-
mentation can proceed slowly where the p,, is 9.5.
Under the latter conditions the addition of inver-
tase does not reduce the production of levan by
the bacteria. 1

The invertase value of the clerget constant:
R. I’. JAcKSon.

A simple check valve: J. F. BREWSTER. A
check valve for use with the water vacuum pump
to prevent sucking back is made by cutting part
way through a solid rubber stopper at the narrow
end, leaving a thin flap or disk. The stopper is
then bored to receive a piece of glass tubing,
the flap being left intact. The valve stopper is
inserted in a short length of glass tubing wide
enough to allow free play of the valve. By means
of a second one-hole stopper, glass and rubber
tubing the valve is connected between the pump
and the apparatus to be evacuated.

Some notes on activated vegetable chars: C. E.
CoatEs. This article gives some data relative to
the preparation and analysis of vegetable chars

DECEMBER 22, 1922]

from various sources. There are also given some
tentative conclusions as to some of the under-
lying principles in the preparation of decolor-
‘izing chars.

The influence of borax on the polarizing power
of mannitol: C. A. BROWNE.

The contraction in volume of sucrose solutions
upon inversion: R. EB. JACKSON.

The Vallez rotary filter press: W. D. Horne.
This newly introduced filter press differs from
the preceding types of leaf presses in having its
filtering discs set upon a hollow horizontal shaft
which revolves slowly during filtration, insuring
uniformity of deposit of cake upon the leaves.
Paper pulp is used as the filtering medium, which
gives greatly increased speed of filtration, while
the uniformity of the cake allows of sweetening
off with the minimum amount of water and gives
a very low sucrose content in the washed cake.
The washing out is particularly effective, and the
arrangement of parts allows of very rapid dis-
charging, cleamsing and refilling.

Comparative color determinations in cane sirups
and molasses: F. W. ZERBAN and 8. Byauu. The
object of this investigation was to ascertain
whether it was possible with the Hess-Ives tint
photometer to detect any difference in the spe-
cific transmissive index of cane products when
the sample was in one instance dissolved in water
and filtered with a small amount of kieselguhr, as
previously practiced by the authors, and in the
other diluted with white sugar sirup and filtered
according to Peters’ and Phelps’ method. It
was found, with twelve cane products represent-
ing the entire color range, that water dilution
gave too low figures in 70 per cent. of the deter-
minations, and too high figures in the remainder;
the average difference was surprisingly small,
—0.78 per cent. of the color for the red glass,
—2.13 per cent. for the green glass and —6.28
per cent. for the blue glass. Only in a few indi-
vidual determinations did the error due to water
dilution exceed to any extent that attributable
to the permissible error in the readings them-
selves. With the Hess-Ives instrument, therefore,
the method previously used by the authors is
sufficiently exact for practical factory purposes.
Conditions are, of course, different when the
spectrophotometer is used.

The countercurrent application of kelpchar in
the decolorization of sugar and syrup: J. W. Tur-
RENTINE. A process is described for the continu-
ous, automatic and countercurrent application of
kelpchar in the decolorization of sugar and other
solutions and liquids. Use is made of the best

SCIENCE

729

filter practice, the process admitting of the em-
ployment of the most adaptable of modern filters.
Thus vacuum or pressure filters or centrifugals
may be employed, depending on the nature of
the liquid to be filtered. The kelpchar by this
process is admitted at one end of the apparatus,
is applied countercurrent-wise to the liquid under-
going decolorization in as many applications as
desired, and is discharged as spent cake; while
the erude liquid is admitted at the end of the
apparatus at which the spent cake is discharged
and is delivered in a completely purified state at
the other, upon entering the apparatus coming
into contact with the practically spent carbon and
finally before emerging undergoing treatment
with the fresh kelpechar entering. In the one-
stage application of a decolorizing carbon, the
carbon first loads itself up with those impurities
most easily removed, and finally adsorbs those
least easily taken up. Thus an excess of the
reagent is required, and at that an excess prob-
ably out of proportion to the decolorization to be
effected. In the present system kelpchar that has
been used to adsorb the impurities most difficult
to remove is still available with unimpaired
power to adsorb the impurities more easily ad-
sorbed. In this way full use is made of the
decolorizing properties of the kelpchar and the
most efficient application of that material results.
The advantages gained are that smaller quanti-
ties of kelpchar are in use and require reactiva-
ting’ and losses of values are correspondingly re-
duced. The process admits of continuous and
automatic operation, and labor and laboratory
supervision are reduced to a minimum.

Estimation of caramel in sugar products: A
criticism of the Ehrlich method: G. P. Muaps.
Ehrlich bases his method on the claim that sac-
charan, a component of caramel, is not precipi-
tated by lead subacetate. The present investiga-
tion shows that this is true only with saccharan
dissolved in distilled water; if any of the ordinary
impurities are present that form a precipitate
with lead the saccharan is carried down with the
precipitate. Known amounts of saccharan and
of caramel, added to molasses solutions, are
largely removed by Clarification with lead sub-
acetate. Therefore, the Ehrlich method is value-
less.

A steam-heated laboratory vacuum pan: J. F.
Brewster. The body of the vacuum pan con-
sists of an inverted bell jar with open wide neck
fitted with a rubber stopper through which pass
the leads of the %, or %4 inch coil of copper
tubing, the feed and drain-off pipes. A second

730

open neck bell jar, or better, the dome of a porce-
lain vacuum evaporating apparatus fitted to the
body with a rubber gasket forms the top of the
pan. Through the upper rubber stopper passes
the connection to the condenser. The apparatus
is very efficient and may be used for all sorts of
evaporations under diminished pressure.
CHarues L. Parsons,
Secretary

THE AMERICAN MATHEMATICAL
SOCIETY

THE two hundred and twenty-fourth regular
meeting of the American Mathematical Society
was held at Columbia University, New York
City, extending through the usual morning and
afternoon sessions. The attendance included
forty-eight members of the society. The secre-
tary announced the election of twenty-one per-
sons to membership an the society; twenty-two
applications for membership were received.

At the meeting of ithe Council, a list of momi-
nations for officers and other members of the
Council was presented by the Committee on
nominations, and was unanimously aiccepted.
Hx-Seeretary F. N. Cole, who has served twen-
ty-five years as secretary of the society, was
nominated for the presidency. Seeretary Rich-
ardson reported that Professor. Cole, while ap-
preciating the honor done him by the nomina-
tion, found himself unable, on account of the
condition of his health, to accept. The Council
with regret accepted his decision, and adopted
an alternative nomination presented by the
committee. The following
adopted:

We, the Council of the American Mathematical
Society, desire to place on record an expression
of our profound regret that Professor Cole feels
compelled because of ill health to decline the
nomination to the presidency of the Society. We
believe that the members of the Society in general
will share our disappointment that the opportuni-
ty is thus denied us to confer on Professor Cole
the honor which would most suitably express our
high esteem of him and of his signal services to
the Society.

The Committee on the Cole Fund presented a
report recommending that ‘the fund be used to
endow a prize to be called ithe Frank Nelson
Cole Price in Algebra. The recommendations,

resolution was

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1460

which appear elsewhere in SciENCE, were ac-
cepted by the Council.

The following papers were read at this meet-
ing:

Parallels and geodesics in Weyl’s affine geome-
try: EDWARD KaAsner. :

Hinstein’s equations of the second and third
kinds: EDWARD KAsSNER.

Projective and affine geometry of paths: Os-
WALD VEBLEN. ;

Theorems on
PFEIFFER.

On the mapping of dyadic sets: G. A. Prutr-
FER.

On the analysis situs of the plane when the (di-
rected) line is taken as element: JESSE DouGLAS.

Note on the integral of mean curvature over a
surface: JESSE DouGLAs.

Note on quartiles and allied measures: Dun-
HAM JACKSON.

Particle geometry: B. Z. LInFrreLp.

On certain polar curves with applications to the
location of the zeros of the pth derivative of a
rational function: B. Z. LINFIELD.

On the expression of the sum of any two de-
terminants as a determinant of more dimensions:
L. H. Rice.

irreducible continua: G. A.

equation :

A Pythagorean functional HINAR
HILLE.
A class of functional equations. Preliminary

communication: HEINAR HILLE.

Oscillation theorems in the complex domain:
E1narR HIue.

Note on the internal evidence of the reliability
of a test: W. L. Crum.

The use of the median in determining indices of
seasonal variation: W. L. Crum.

A general construction for circular cubics: R.
M. MatHews.

A theorem on conics, with applications: R. M.
MATHEWS.

A property of the characteristic elements of a
group: Louis WEISNER.

Visual intuition in Lobachevsky space: E. L.
Post.

Note on a generalization of the old puzzle of
8, 5 and 8 pint vessels: ELIzABETH B. COWLEY.

The Annual Meeting of the Society will be
held at Harvard University December 27-28,
1922, in connection with the meeting of the
American Association for the Advancement of
Science.

R. G. D. RicHarpson,
Secretary

New SeRIES ANNUAL SUBSCRIPTION, $6.00
Vou. LVI, No. 1461 Fripay, DecemBer 29, 1922 SINGLE Copims, 15 Crs.

Saunders Books

THIRD EDITION

Lusk’s Science of Nutrition
Professor Lusk’s book gives you the reason why certain changes and certain diseases are
due to altered metabolic processes. It tells you how to remove the underlying causes of the
external complaints, how to exclude the possibility of recurrence, how to obtain permanent
relief for your patients. It gives you the influence on metabolism of protein food, fat, carbo-
hydrates, and work; the nor rmal diet, the nutritive value of various foods, food requirement

during growth, influence of certain drugs on metabolism.
Qctavo, oF 641 pages. By GRAHAM LUSK, Ph.D, Sc.D., Professor of Physiology, Cornell Medical School.
oth, 6.50 net.

Pirguet’s System of Nutrition JUST READY

This book explains the principal facts of the author’s system of nutrition and its practical
application to pediatric practice. The nem values of the principal food-stuffs are given, and
a table of Pelidisi Indices. There are chapters on body measurements and nutrition; calories
and nems, feeding in the first year, nutritional treatment of tuberculosis, proper feeding as

a preventive, and a complete bibliography.
By DR. CLEMENS PIRQUET, Professor of Pediatrics at the University of Vienna, Austria. 16mo of
96 pages. Cloth, $2.00 net.

Stokes’ Third Great Plague

Written “for every-day people,” this book puts the facts concerning the infection, prophylaxis,
progress, diagnosis, and treatment of syphilis so that they will readily become matters of
common knowledge. It is a timely book for the physician, social economist, and the general

public, cone catly ‘for all those interested in welfare work.
By JOHN H. STOKES, A. B, M. D., Head of Section on Dermatology and Syphilology, Division of Medi-
cine in The Mayo Clinic, Rochester, Minnesota. 12mo of 204 pages, 4 portraits. Cloth, $2.50 net.

Ranson’s Anatomy of the Nervous System

Dr. Ranson presents anatomy of the nervous system from the dynamic rather than the static
point of view; that is to say, he lays emphasis on the developmental and functional sig-
nificance of structure. The student is thus led at the very beginning of his neurologic studies
to think of the nervous system in its relation to the rest of the living organism. An outline

for a laboratory course in neuro-anatomy is included.
Octavo of 395 pages, illustrated. By STEPHEN W. RANSON, M.D., Ph.D., Professor of Anatomy in
Northwestern University Medical School, Chicago. Cloth, $6.50 net.

_Brill’s Psycho-analysis imceal Tauris

In this edition have been added new chapters: on masturbation, paraphrenia, and homo-
sexuality. The entire book has virtually been rewritten, necessitating its resetting. It is
based on many years of close application to the study of psychopathology. Dr. Brill stresses

the use of psycho-analysis in practice.
Octavo of 468 pages. By A. A. BRILL, M.D., Lecturer on Psycho-Analysis and Abnormal Psychology, New
York University. Cloth, $5.00 net.

eecececer--------+------------SIGN AND) MAIL THIS) ORDER FORM TODAY2ke+----------_-------------_-

W. B. SAUNDERS COMPANY, West Washington Sq., Phila.

Please send me the books checked (V) and charge to my account :—

Lusk’s Nutrition $6.50 net. Stokes’ Third Great Plague__---.--------- $2.50 net.
; . Ranson’s Anatomy of Nervous System__--$6.50 net.
Pirquet’s System of Nutrition------------- $2.00 net. Brill’s Psycho-analysis __---.------_------ $5.00 net.

NU epee ee eee eee ADDRESS Sassen saan aaa coe one

ii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

FOUNDATIONS OF BIOLOGY
BY LORANDE LOSS WOODRUFF

Professor of Biclogy, Yale University

“The book has so many points of excellence that it is not too much to say
that its careful reading will give to those who pursue the subject no further
a clear, broad, comprehensive and well-balanced conception of life and its
evolution, while to those who contemplate further work in biology it will fur-
nish an ideal foundation for their more advanced studies.”’—The American
Journal of Science.

“T like its emphasis of principles, its good glossary and bibliography—two
essentials so often omitted in texts.’—Prof. T. L. Hankinson, Michigan
State Normal College.

“Splendid presentation of the nature of a living cell and its connections in
multicellular aggregates and in descent.”—Prof. Henry L. Osborn, Hamline
University.

Cloth, Crown Octavo, 455 Pages, 21 Illustrations, $3.50

REVISED EDITION

FUNDAMENTALS OF PSYCHOLOGY

BY W. B. PILLSBURY
Director of the Psychological Laboratory, University of Michigan

“T regard the new book as a marked improvement over the old one and would
certainly be inclined to use it were it'‘not for the fact that we are using my
own book.”—Prof. W. S. Hunter, University of Kansas.

“The book is a very substantial piece of work—perhaps the solidest of all
recent textbooks in psychology with the exception of Titchener.”—Prof. J.
B. Pratt, Williams College.

“T am highly pleased with the revision. Pillsbury has a very happy way of
writing both to the level and interests of college students. The new edition
has been properly expanded to include the important developments of the
past five years.”—Dean L. A. Pechstein, University of Cincinnati.

Cloth, Crown Octavo, 589 Pages, $2.75

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY

64-66 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK

SCIE

C

Vou. LVI DEcEmMBER 29, 1922 No. 1461

The Explanation of the Colloidal Behavior of
Proteins; Dr. JACQUES TOnB.....2..2..0.002..2....-.. 731

The Award of the Henry Draper Medal.......... 741

Appeal on behalf of the League of Nations
for Aid to Austrian Intellectual Workers.... 743

Scientific Events:

London Bird Sanctuaries; The American
Electrochemical Society; Professor Max
Weber; Officers of the American Chenvical
Society; The Hayden Award of the Phila-

Gelpliva PA Cad eye eens eee 744
Scientific Notes and News........- eter ae eae TAT
University and Educational Notes.........--..----- 750

Discussion and Correspondence:
Research in Marine Biology: PROFESSOR
W. J. Crozimr. On Translating Einstein:
Dr. E. E. Stosson. On the Formation of
Family Names like Tingide: Dr. H. M.

PARSHLEY. The Beginnings of American
Geology: Dr. Marcus BENJAMIN............-..--- 751
Quotations:

The Federal Budget; The Appreciation of

ISICUCN CE races esas ol eee Rrra SI PRL SE 755
Scientific Books:

Glover’s United States Life Tables: Pro-

FESSOR RAYMOND PHARL..--...----.-::-s-10-ecteeeeeeee 756
Special Articles:

X-ray Crystallometry; X-ray Wave

Lengths; Space-lattice Dimensions and

Atomic Masses: Dr. L. W. McKrrnan.

Peripheral Migration of a Centriole Deriva-

tive in the Spermatogenesis of Cicanthus:

IDR, JEL Sl, DGVEHNSON Se 757

SCIENCE: A Weekly Journal devoted to the
Advancement of Science, publishing the official
notices and proceedings of the American Asso-
ciation for the Advancement of Science, edited by

J. McKeen Cattell and published every Friday by
THE SCIENCE PRESS
11 Liberty St., Utica, N. Y. Garrison, N. Y.

New York City: Grand Central Terminal

Annual Subscription, $6.00 Single Copies, 15 Cts.
Entered as second-class matter January 21, 1922, at the
Post Office at Utica, N. Y., Under the Act of March 3, 1879.

THE EXPLANATION OF THE COL-
LOIDAL BEHAVIOR OF
PROTEINS!

I

Tus year’s Pasteur lecture coincides with
the commemoration of the hundredth anniver-
sary of Pasteur’s birth. The application of
Pasteur’s ideas and discoveries has benefited
humanity to such an extent that they have be-
come part of ‘the consciousness of civ-
ized mankind. What is, perhaps, less
widely understood is the fact that Pasteur
changed the method of medical research. In
the study of infectious diseases Pasteur substi-
tuted for the method of hit or miss (with the
chances infinitely in favor of missing) ‘the
method of a definitely oniented search which

never fails to give results when properly ap-

pled. Thousands of physicians had studied
infectious diseases before Pasteur, but they
tried to solve their problem (by starting from
observations of the symptoms of some special
disease. This led to no result for the simple
reason that without knowing beforehand for
what ‘to look—or, in other words, without know-
ing the general cause of infectious diseases—
it was impossible to discover the cause of any
special infectious process. Pasteur reversed
this method by his discovery of the action and
omnipresence of microorganisms, leaving it to
the medical men to look for the special agency
in the individual cases.

There is little doubt that the old empiricism,
still in vogue in some other fields of medicine
and in ‘the physiological sciences, must be re-
placed by the more rationalistie method of
Pasteur of knowing the general fundamental
principles before attempting to explain the
more special phenomena, since, unless we
follow this method, we never know which of

1 Pasteur Lecture delivered before the Institute
of Medicine of Chicago on November 24, 1922.

732

the details we observe are significant and whieh
are negligible.
II

Living matter is essentially colloidal in char-
acter and we can not well conceive of an organ-
ism consisting exclusively of crystalloidal
matter. This fact suggests that life phenomena
depend upon or are intrinsically linked with
certain characteristics of colloidal behavior. It
is, therefore, natural that a systematic study
of the nature of special life phenomena should
be preceded ‘by a scientific theory of colloidal
behavior. By a scientific theory, however, we
do not understand speculations or guesses built
on qualitative experiments or no experiments
at all, but the derivation of the results from a
rationalistic, mathematical formula which per-
mits us to caleulate, with an adequate degree
of accuracy, the quantitative measurements of
colloidal ‘behavior.

Proteins are amphoteric electrolytes which
are capable of forming salts with either alka-
les or acids. With alkalies they form salts
like Na proteinate, Ca proteinate, ete, and
with acids they form salts like protein chloride,
protein sulfate, etc. Whether they do the one
or the other depends on the hydrogen ion con-
centration of the protein solution. There is
one definite hydrogen ion concentration at
which a protein can combine practically with
neither acid nor alkali, and this hydrogen ion
concentration, which may be different for dif-
ferent proteins, is called the isoelectric point.
The isoelectric point is (in terms of Sdrensen’s
logarithmic symbol) for gelatin and casein at
Pu 4.7; for crystalline egg albumin at py 4.8.
Gelatin can combine with acid only or prac-
tically only when the py is less than 4.7 and
with alkali only or practically only when the
Pu is higher than 4.7. Or in other words,
when a salt, e. g., NiClz, is added to gela-
tin solutions of different py, Ni gelatinate can
only be formed when the py is greater than
4.7; and when K4Fe(CN)e6 is added gelatin-
Fe(CN)e6 can only be formed when the py is
less than 4.7. This can be shown by methods
discussed in a recent book.?

2 Loeb, J.: ‘‘Proteins and the Theory of Col-
loidal Behavior,’’?’ New York and London, 1922.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

The proof that proteins combine stoichiomet-
rically with acids and alkalies can be fur-
hished by titration curves. For this purpose
(and perhaps for work with proteins in gen-
eral) it is necessary to use ‘as standard mate-
rial protein of the py of the isoelectric point.
We have seen that proteins combine with acids
only at a py below that of the isoelectric point,
which for gelatin or casein is about py 4.7
and for erystalline egg albumin 4.8. It hap-
pens that at a py below 4.7 most of the weak
dibasic and tribasie acids dissociate as mono-
basie acids. Thus HgPO.4 dissociates into H+
and the monovalent anion H,PO;. Henee if
acids combine stoichiometrically with isoelectric
protein, it should require exactly three times
as many ce. of 0.1 N HsPOs to bring a 1 per
cent. solution of an isoelectric protein, e. g.,
gelatin or crystalline egg albumin or casein, to
the same hydrogen ion concentration, e. 9) Pu
3.0, as it requires of 0.1 N HCl or HNOs.
Titration experiments show that this is the
case. Furthermore, since H2SO4 is a strong
acid, splitting off both hydrogen ions even at a
Px below 4.7, the same number of ce. of 0.1
N H2S0s4 as of HCl should be required to bring
1 gm. of isoelectric protein in 100 ec. of solu-
tion to the same py, e. g., 3.0, and this was
found also to be true.

Fig. 1 gives the titration curves for erystal-
line egg albumin for four acids, HCl, HeS04,
H3PO4, and oxalic acid. One gram of isoelec-
trie albumin was in 100 ec. H20 containing

: ol eu
: et all

peal
4

cone

y)

Se Sneeeo

Cc.01N acid in 190cc.1% solution of isoetectric allburnin
Ses

Q
| | |
PH 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 48 40 42 44 46 48

Fig. 1

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

various ec. of 0.1 N acid. These ce. of 0.1
N acid in 100 ce. solution are the ordinates of
the curves in Fig. 1. The abscisse are the py
to which the protein solution was brought by
the addition of acid. It takes always exactly
three times as many ee. of 0.1 N H3POs4 as it
takes ce. of 0.1 N HCl or HeSO« to bring
1 gm. of isoelectric albumin in 100 ec. solution
to the same py. In order to bring the 1 per
cent. solution of originally isoelectric albumin
to py 3.2, 5 ec. of 0.1 N HCl or HgSO4 and
15 ce. of 0.1 N HsPO4 must tbe contained in
100 ec. of the solution. To bring the albumin
to py 3.4, 4 ec. of 0.1 N HCl or H2eSO4 and
12 ce. of 0.1 N HsPO4 must be contained in
the solution, and so on.

Oxalic acid is, according to Hildebrand, a
monobasic acid at a py of 3.0 or below, but
begins to split off the second hydrogen ion in
increasing proportion above py 3.0. The titra-
tion curves show that about twice as many ce.
of 0.1 N oxalic acid as 0.1 N HCl are required
to bring the 1 per cent. solution of isoelectric
albumin to the same py, ‘below 3.0, while it
takes less than twice as many ee. of 0.1 N
oxalic acid as 0.1 N HCl to bring the albumin
solution to the same py, if the py is above 3.0.

It can be shown in the same way with the
aid of titration curves that isoelectric albumin
combines with alkalies in the same stoichiomet-
rical way as any acid, e. g., acetic acid, would
combine with the same alkalies. If the ce. of
0.1 N KOH, NaOH, Ca(OH)2, or Ba(OH)2
in 100 ce. solution required to ‘bring a 1 per
cent. solution of isoelectric protein to the same
Py are plotted as ordinates over the py, of the
protein solution as abscisse, it is found that
the values for all four alkalies fall on one
curve as they should if the combination oc-
curred strictly stoichiometrically.

The same stoichiometrical results were ob-
tained also with casein and gelatin iby the
writer, and with edestin and serum globulin
by Hitchcock. There is little doubt that they
will be obtained in the case of all proteins. It
follows from this that proteins react with acids
and alkalies in the same way as do amphoteric
erystalloids like amino-acids. If the methods
for measuring the hydrogen ion concentrations

SCIENCE

733

of protein solutions had been employed by the
colloid chemists nobody would have thought of
suggesting that proteins react with acids and
alkalies according to the empirical adsorption
formula of Freundlich instead of stoichiomet-
rically.

The purely chemical character of the com-
bination of proteins with hydrochloric acid can
also ‘be demonstrated by measuring the chlorine
ion concentration of the solutions of protein
chloride. When HCl is added to NH3 (accord-
ing to Werner) the H ions of the HCl are at-
tracted to the nitrogen of the ammonia, while
the Cl ions remain unaltered. The same type of
reaction occurs when HCl is added to a solution
of isoelectric gelatin.
measurements of the po, of solutions of
gelatin chloride. Different ec. of 0.1 N HCl
were contained in 100 cc. of 1 per cent. solu-

This was proven by

‘tions of originally dsoelectrie gelatin and the Pu

and Pe, Of the solutions were measured, the
P, With the hydrogen electrode and the 1D ay
with the calomel electrode. It was fonnd
that the Pc, was the same as if no gelatin had
been present while the py, was, of course,
higher; thus showing that part of the hydro-
gen combines with the NH2 and NH groups of
the protein molecule while the Cl remains free
(Table I). Dr. Hitchcock thas obtained sim-
ilar results with crystalline egg albumin,
edestin, casein, and serum globulin, by using a
silver chloride electrode, so that it is possible
to state that these results are true for most if
not all proteins.

TABLE I

Cubic centi- | Solution containing 1

meters of Solution containing no | ym. of isoelectric gela-
0.1 N HCl in gelatin tin in 100 cc.

100 ce.

solution PE Pa Py Pa
2 Size) WMlbi7el inate 2.68
3 2.52 2.54 4.0 2.53
4 2.41 eo O Le nil laine eed) eh Mesa
5 2.31 2.29 3.60 2.33
6 2.24 2.26 3.41 2.25
u 2.16 2.18 3.23 2.18
8 2.11 2.12 3.07 2.11
10 2.01 2.01 2.78 2.025
15 1.85 1.85 2.30 1.845
20 1.72 1.76 2.06 1.76
3 1.55 1.59 1.78 1.60
40 1.43 AWAITS) |e, 1 GIL 1.47

734.

The titration curves prove another fact,
namely, that the salts of proteins are strongly
hydrolyzed. When we add aaid, e. g., HCl, to
isoelectric protein, part of the acid combines
with the protein giving rise to protein chloride,
while the rest of the acid remains free. There
is then an equilibrium between free HCl, pro-
(tein chloride, and non-ionogenie (or isoelec-
tric) protein. ‘The more acid is added to
originally isoelectrie protein, the more protein
chloride is formed until finally all the protein
exists in the form of protein chloride. It is
possible to find out from the py measurements
how much of the acid added is free and by de-
ducting this value we know how much is in
combination with the protein. By saturating
the protein with acid the combining weight of
a protein with acid can be found. Hitchcock
found in this way that the combining weight of
gelatin is ‘about 1090.

II

The colloidal ‘behavior of proteins shows
itself in a peculiar effect of eleatrolytes—acids,
alkalies or salts—on such properties as the
swelling of gels or the osmotic pressure or vis-
cosity of protein solutions. All these proper-
ties, swelling, osmotie pressure, viscosity, are
affeeted by electrolytes in ‘a very similar way;
suggesting (that all are due to the same cause.
We shall see that by giving the explanation for
one of these properties, osmotic pressure, we
shall by implication give the explanation for
all of them.

Measurements of the osmotic pressure of
solutions of a protein—gelatin, crystalline egg
albumin, casein and edestin—were made with
solutions containing 1 gm. dry weight of onrig-
inally isoelectric protein in 100 cc. of solution;
‘and the 100 ce. of solution included also vary-
ing concentrations of 0.1 N acid. These solu-
ihions were put into collodion bags suspended in
water free from protein. The outside water
was at the beginning of tthe experiment brought
to the same p,; as that of the protein solution,
using always the same acid as that added to
‘the protein.
pressure were read after 18 hours when osmoti¢
equilibrium was established. It was found that

SCIENCE

The measurements of the osmotic ’

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

the osmotic pressure varied in a characteristic
way with the p,; of ithe protein solution and
ithe valency of |the anion of the acid used. This
effect is shown in the eurves in Fig. 2 which
were obtained from gelatin solutions. But the
curves are similar in the ease of other pro-
teins such as crystalline egg albumin, casein or
edestin. These curves show that the osmotic
pressure of a protein solution is ‘a minimum at
the isoelectric point, tthat it increases when
little acid is added until a maximum is reached,
and ithat on the further addition of acid the
osmotie pressure is again diminished. They
show, moreover, that only the valency and not
the nature of the anion of the acid influences
the osmotic pressure of a protein solution. We
know from ‘the titration curves that in the case
of H3PO4 the anion in combination with the
protein is not the trivalent POs but the mono-
valent H2PO4; and the curves in Fig. 2 show
that the influence of phosphoric acid and
hydrochloric acid on the osmotic pressure is
the same if measured for ithe same py of the
protein solution. Oxalic acid is a monobasic
acid below py 3.0 and we notice that the de-
seending branch of the oxalic acid curve below
Pr 3.0 practically coimeides with the descend-
ing branch of the HCl curve. The curve for
the influence of H2SOz is only about half as
high as that for HCl and we know from the
titration curves that the anion of protein sul-
fate is bivalent. Tt was found that all mono-
basic acids, e. g., HBr, HNOs, acetic acid, etc.,
and all weak dibasic or tribasic acids, e. g.,
Oy
SECC aS REC

PS 1

350 ey, <
325 3 .

+

8
a
El
IEE

sO)

a fans

ae

pti 20 22 2a 26 28 00 a2 34 36 38 40 42 44 46
Fie. 2

DEcEMBER 29, 1922]

tantaric, malic, citric, etc., which below py 4.7
dissociate as monobasic acids, give osmotic
pressure curves identical with those for HCl
and Hs3P04. We may, therefore, draw the con-
clusion that only the valency but not the nature
of the acid influences the osmotic pressure of
protein solutions, that all acids which are
monobasic on the acid side of the isoelectric
point of a protein influence its osmotic pres-
sure in the same way, and that this influence is
considerably greater than ithe influence of
strong dibasie acids like HaSO..

If alkali is added to a solution of isoelectric
protein it can be shown that the addition of
little alkali increases the osmotic pressure until
a maximum is reached when the addition of
more alkali depresses ithe osmotic pressure
again. All alkalies with monobasic cation like
Li, Na, K, NH, have the same effect at the
same py, While alkalies and all dibasic cations
like Ca or Ba act alike, the curve for the
effect of the alkalies with divalent cation bemg
only about half as high as that of the allzalies
with monovalent cation.

A third fact (discovered by R. S. Lillie)
is that the addition of salts to a solution of a
protein salt always depresses tthe osmotic
pressure.

The curves representing the influence of
acids and salts on the osmotic pressure are
almost identical or very similar to those repre-
senting tthe influence of the same acids and
salts on swelling and viscosity. These results
are specific for colloidal behavior and any
theory of colloidal behavior will have to give
not only a qualitative but a quantitative theory
of these curves.

It was suggested by Zsigmondy that the
influence of acid on osmotic pressure was due
to an dnfluence on the degree of dispersien of
the protein in solution, but since the degree of
dispersion ean not ‘be accurately measured, this
suggestion is only a qualitative speculation.
But it is of no use even as a qualitative specu-
lation since it fails to account for the fact that
viscosity and swelling are affected in a similar
way as osmotic pressure. The correct explana-
tion is as follows: When acid (or alkali) is
added to a solution of an isoelectric protein,

SCIENCE

735

part or all of this is transformed into an
ionizable protein salt according to the amount
of acid added. This ionization of the protein
causes the colloidal behavior on account of ithe
inability of protem ions to diffuse through
membranes which are easily permeable to
erystalloidal ions, such as collodion or pareh-
ment membranes or the walls of capillaries or
probably of all cells. Now it was shown by
Donnan that whenever the diffusion of one
type of ions such as colloidal ions is prevented
by a membrane which is readily permeable to
erystalloidal ions, an unequal distribution of
the diffusible erystalloidal ions results on the
opposite sides of the membrane. This unequal
distribution of diffusible erystalloidal ions is
the cause of the colloidal behavior of proteins.
IV
When a collodion bag is filled with a solution
of gelatin chloride of py 3.0 and the bag is
immersed in an aqueous solution of HCl also
of py 3.0 but free from protein, acid is driven
from the protein solution into the outside
aqueous solution free from protein. Donnan
has shown thermodynamically that when os-
motie equilibrium is established ithe products of
the concentrations of each pair of oppositely
charged diffusible ions (e. g., H and Cl in the
case of gelatin chlroide) are equal on the oppo-
site sides of the membrane. Let x be the molar
concentration of the H and Cl ions on the out-
side, y the molar concentration of the free H
and Cl ions inside the protein solution, and z
the concentration of the Cl ions in combination
with the protein; then equilibrium is defined by
the following equation, first used by Procter
and Wilson to explain the influence of acid on
swelling,
x2, — y(y + 2) (1)
The first step in an attempt to explain the
influence of acids, alkalies and salts on the
osmotic pressure of protein solutions is to find
out whether the variations in osmotic pressure
under the influence of acids as shown in Fig. 2
are accompanied by corresponding differences
in the concentration of diffusible ions inside
and outside the protein solution and whether
these differences can be calculated from Don-
nan’s equilibrium equation (1).

736

The writer was able to show that this is true
by making measurements of a property of pro-
tein solutions, which had received little if any
attention in colloid chemistry, namely, the
measurements of the membrane potentials ex-
isting between a protein solution and the sur-
rounding aqueous solution at the dime of
osmotie equilibrium.

Donnan’s equilibrium formula can be written
in the form

Eyer

y by

x .
where i is the ratio of the molar concentration

of the hydrogen ions outside to the concen-
tration of the hydrogen ions inside, while

y+ 2
a

is the ratio of the molar concentration

of the chlorine dons inside to that outside.
Donnan had shown that there should exist a
potential difference between the inside and out-
side solutions, which at 24° C. should be equal
y+ #4

x
to 59 X log 5 millivolts or 59 X log

millivolts. Since py imside is = —log y and

x
Pr outside is = —log a, log i is equal to py

inside minus p,; outside. py inside and py; out-
side can be determined directly with the aid of
y+ 4

the hydrogen electrode; log Fs

is equal to

Pc; outside minus pc; inside and this quantity
can be measured directly by titration or with
the silver chloride electrode.

On the other hand, the P.D. between the pro-
tein solution and the surrounding aqueous solu-
tion across a collodion membrane can be
measured directly with the aid of a Compton
electrometer and a pair of identical indifferent
calomel electrodes (and saturated KCl). If
the unequal distribution of diffusible erystal-
loidal ions (e. g., H and Cl in the case of gela-
tin chloride) on the opposite sides of the mem-
brane is really determined by the Donnan
equilibrium, then the P.D. observed directly
with the pair of identical calomel electrodes
should be equal to the P.D. caleulated in milli-
volts from the values 59 X (py inside minus
Py outside) or from 59 X (pc; outside minus

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

Deg inside), where Pq OF Pu may be obtained
iby titration or by the silver chloride or hydro-
gen electrodes respectively. The writer has
made these measuremeents and found that when
various quantities of acid are added to solu-
tions of isoelectric protein—e. g., crystalline egg
albumin, or gelatin, or casein—the observed.
membrane potentials always agree with the
membrane potentials caleulated on the basis of
Donnan’s equation within one or two millivolts,
2. e., within the limits of accuracy of the meas-
urements.

The net result of extensive measurements of
membrane potentials was, first, that when a
protein solution, enclosed in a collodion bag
(impermeable to protein ions but permeable ito
erystalloidal ions), is in osmotie equilibrium
with an outside aqueous solution, the concen-
trations of erystalloidal ions in ithe protein
solution and in the outside aqueous solution
are not the same; and second, that the differ-
ence in (tthe two concentrations can be caleu-
lated from Donnan’s equilibrium equation.

v

We are now in a position to explain the
osmotic pressure curves in Fig. 2. The colloid
chemists would have taken it for granted that
such curves were due to an influence of the
acids on the state of dispersion or on some
other real or imaginary colloidal property of
proteins. Before we have a right to indulge in
such speculations we must realize that these
curves of observed osmotic pressure are not
exclusively the expression of the osmotic pres-
sure due to the protein particles, or protein
molecules, and protein ions alone, but are also
the result of the demonstrable unequal concen-
trations of ‘the erystalloidal ions on the oppo-
site sides of the membrane, caused by the
establishment of a Donnan equilibrium. In
other words, the observed osmotic pressure of
a protein solution needs a correction due to the
Donnan equilibrium before we can begin to
speculate on the cause of ithe influence of acid
on these curves, and it is our purpose to calcu-
late the value of this correction.

We begin with the curve expressing the influ-
ence of HCl on the osmotie pressure of a 1 per

DECEMBER 29, 1922

cent. solution of originally isoelectric gelatin
and we consider ithe distribution of ions inside
the protein solution and in the aqueous solu-
tion outside the collodion bag containing the
We
also assume complete electrolytic dissociation
of gelatin chloride as well as HCl. Let
a be the molar concentration of the pro-
teim molecules and ions, let z be the molar
concentration of the Cl ions in combina-
tion with the ionized protein, let y be the molar
concentration of the hydrogen ions of the free
HCl inside the protein solution; ‘the molar con-
centration of the Cl ions of this HCl is also y.
In that case the osmotic pressure of the protein
solution is determined by
a+ 2y + 2

From this must be deducted the osmotic pres-
sure of the HCl of the outside aqueous solu-
tion. If wis the molar concentration of the H
ions of the outside solution, it is also the molar
concentration of the Cl ions. Hence the ob-
served osmotic pressure of a protein solution

protein solution at osmotie equilibrium.

is determined by the following molar concen-
tration,
a+ 2y + 2 -—— 2a
Fig. 2 shows how this value varies with ithe
Pu of the protein solution (7. e., y).
to arrive at a theory concerning the influence
of HCl on 'the osmotie pressure of protein solu-
tions it is necessary to calculate ‘the value of
2y + 2 — 2x and to deduct it from the ob-
served osmotic pressure of the protein solution.
The term 2y -+- 2 — 2x we will eall the Donnan
correction.
lated from the measurements of the py, Pu
inside being —log y and py outside being
can be caleulated from 2 and y
with ithe aid of the Donnan equation (1)
Ge ae OER rel BD)
ni y

since we now know that « and y are deter-
mined by the Donnan equilibrium. If the value
of 2y + z — 2 is ealeulated for different py
of a gelatin chloride solution (of the same con-
centration of originally isoelectric gelatin which
in this case was 1 per cent.); and if from this
value is caleulated the osmotic pressure due to
this exeess of the molar concentration of

In order

In this term y and x can be caleu-

—log w. 2

SCIENCE

737

arystalloidal ions inside the protein solution
over that outside, it is found that the curve for.
the Donnan correction is almost identical with
the curve for the observed osmotie pressure.
In other words, it turns out ‘that the imerease
in osmotic pressure of a 1 per cent. solution
of originaly isoelectrie gelatin upon the addi-
tion of little acid until a maximum is reached,
and the diminution of osmotic pressure upon
the addition of further acid are not due to any
variation in the state of dispersion of the pro-
tein, or any other real or imaginary “colloidal”
property of the protein, but purely to the fact
that protein ions can not diffuse through the

-collodion membrane which is easily permeable

to erystalloidal ions; as a consequence of which
the molar concentration of the erystalloidal
tons must always be greater inside the protein
solution than outside. What varies with the
Pu Of the gelatin solution is the quantity of
the excess of 2y + z over 27. This follows
from the Donnan equation (1) according to
which
ch Vv + yz or 24 = V *v? + 4yz

while

2y + 2 = y/4y? + 4y2 age

Now it is obvious that

v/ ty? + 4y2 + 2 > y/4y? + 4yz
i. e., the concentration of the erystalloidal ions
inside the protein solution 2y + ¢ is always
greater than the concentration of the erystal-
loidal ions 2% outside, when zis not 0 or ©.
If we substitute for the term 2y + 2 — 2a of
the Donnan correction the identical term

V ty? + 4yz +22 — \/4y? + 4yz
we can visualize why the osmotic pressure is a
why it

minimum at the isoelectric point,
increases with the addition of little acid, reach-
ing a maximum, and why it diminishes again
with the addition of more acid.

At the isoelectrie point no protein is ionized
and z being zero, the whole term

v/4y2 + 4yz 22 — v/ ty? + 4yz
becomes zero. Hence at the isoelectric point
the observed osmotic pressure is purely ‘that
due to the protein, which is very low on ac-
count of the high molecular weight of gelatin.

738

When little acid, e. g., HCl, is added to the
solution of isoelectric gelatin, gelatin chloride
is formed and some free acid remains, due to
hydrolytic dissociation. Hence both z (the
concentration of Cl ions in combination with
protein) and y (the Cl ions of the free HCl
existing through hydrolysis) imerease, but z
increases at first more rapidly than y and hence
the excess of concentration of ions inside over
that of ions outside inereases until the greater
part of protein is transformed tmto protein
chloride, when the excess of erystalloidal ions
inside over those outside reaches a maximum.
From then on z increases comparatively little
while y increases considerably with further
addition of acid, so that z becomes negligible
in comparison with y. This explains why the
Donnan correction becomes zero again when
enough acid is added, and why the observed
osmotic pressure becomes as low again as at
the isoelectrie point.

In the same way it can be shown why the
addition of salt has only a depressing effect on
the osmotic pressure. Let us assume that there
is inside the bag a gelatin chloride solution of
Py 3.0 to which NaCl is added. z (the concen-
tration of Cl ions in combination with ‘the
gelatin) will not increase with the addition of
salt, while y (the concentration of the Cl ions
not in combination with gelatin) will increase.
Hence with the increase in the concentration
of the salt the value of

y/ fy? 4yz 22 — y/4y? + 4yz

will become smaller, finally approaching zero.
geen

]

T
425 > 7 Ly ast
400 |—}- a ee
375 a A , |

Laval,
?

Osmotic pressure mm. H,0
8
&
>.

1
100 |}
15 |

|
|
ea

— g
Mpgelatin solution | [|

oa

t
jae oe
PH 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 SB 40 42 44 46

Fig. 3

50 +—

25 +

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

When another salt than a chloride, e. g.,
NaNOs, is added to a solution of gelatin chlo-
ride, we may assume that the gelatin in solu-
tion is gelatin nitrate.

Fig. 3 gives a comparison of the curves for
the observed osmotic pressure and for the
Donnan correction. Both curves rise in a par-
allel way from the isoelectric point reaching a
maximum which is 450 mm. H2O pressure in
the case of the observed osmotic pressure and
slightly lower in the case of the Donnan cor-
rection. The observed osmotic pressure should
be higher than the Donnan correction by the
osmotic pressure due to the protein solution
itself. A difference exists in the values
between py 4.6 and 3.2 but disappears later,
and this difference is in all probability the ex-
pression of value a, 7. e., the osmotic pressure
due to ‘the protein itself. The disappearance
of this difference at p,;,; below 3.2 is probably
due to the fact that an error of one unit in the
second decimal of the p,;,; causes a considerable
error in the calculations of z which increases
when the p,, is too low.

Fig. 3 shows that when we correct the ob-
served osmotic pressure for the Donnan effect
it follows that the influence of the p,, of the
acid on the osmotie pressure is entirely or prac-
tically entirely due to the excess of the con-
centration of erystalloidal ions inside the mem-
brane over that outside and that this excess is
caused by the Donnan equilibrium. The
osmotic pressure of the protein itself is either
not altered at all by the addition of acid or if
it is altered ‘the effect is too small to be no-
ticeable. There is then nothing left for the
“dispersion theory” or for any other of the
colloidal speculations to explain. These re-
sults were confirmed for crystalline egg albu-
min and casein by the writer and for edestin
by Hitcheock. We now understand why only
the valency and not the nature of the ion plays -
a role in the osmotic pressure of protein solu-
tions. The equilibrium equation is one of the
second degree when the ion with which the pro-
tein is in combination is monovalent while it is
of the third degree when the ion is divalent.
Only the valency of the ion and not its nature
enters into the Donnan equation.

We can therefore summarize these results by

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

stating that the so-called colloidal behavior of
protein solutions, as far as osmotic pressure is
concerned, is merely the result of an equilib-
rium condition of classical chemistry which re-
sults in an excess of the concentration of
erystalloidal ions inside the protein solution
over that of an outside aqueous solution, when
the two solutions are separated by a membrane
which is permeable to crystalloidal ions but
impermeable to protein ions. The colloidal
behavior of proteins depends therefore entirely
on the relative non-diffusibility of protein ions
through membranes which are easily permeable
to erystalloidal ions. Since the majority of
membranes in plants and animals belong to this
dlass, it can easily be surmised how great a
role the proteins must play in the regulation of
osmotic pressure in the body.

VI

It remains to show briefly why swelling and
viscosity of protein solutions are affected in a
similar way by electrolytes as is the osmotic
pressure. The answer is that we are dealing
in both cases with the same fundamental prop-
erty, namely, osmotic pressure.

In 1910 Procter made the ingenious sugges-
tion that the swelling of gelatin might be an
osmotic phenomenon and in subsequent papers
he and J. A. Wilson put this theory on a quan-
titative basis by deriving it from the Donnan
equilibrium. They showed that the swelling of
a solid gel of gelatin in hydrochlorie acid can
be explained quantitatively on the ‘basis of the
Donnan equilibrium on the assumption that
there exists an excess of concentration of
erystalloidal ions inside (in this case H and Cl)
over the concentration of the same ions outside,
and that the excess of osmotic pressure inside

the gel over that outside due to this Donnan
effect accounts for that share of the swelling
which is caused by the influence of the acid. The
agreement of their caleulated values with the
observed values’ is excellent. The writer is
inclined to consider Procter’s theory of swell-
ing and the proof of this theory by Procter
and J. A. Wilson as the most brilliant con-
tribution to the theory of collaidal behavior
next in importance only to Donnan’s theory of

SCIENCE 739

membrane equilibria. There was only one de-
tail left by these authors, namely, to prove the
existence of membrane potentials ‘between the
gel and the surrounding aqueous solution at
equilibrium. The writer was able to fill this
gap and to show that the observed P.D. between
gel and surrounding aqueous solution can be
calculated with a fair degree of accuracy from
the value py inside minus p,;, outside with the
aid of Nernst’s logarithmic formula.

VII

It may seem strange that the influence of
electrolytes on the viscosity of certain protein
solutions should be explained in the same way,
but this seems to be the case. According to
Einstein’s formula, the viscosity of an aqueous
protein solution is a linear function of the
relative volume of the solute occupied in the
solution, as expressed in the formula

4 = 1 (1 + 2.59)
where 7 is the viscosity of the solution, y, that
of pure water, and 9% the proportion of the
volume of the solute to that of the solution.
If, therefore, the addition of little acid to a
1 per cent. solution of isoelectric gelatin
inereases the viscosity of the solution until a
maximum is reached and if the addition of
more acid depresses the viscosity again, it fol-
lows that the addition of acid changes the rela-
tive volume occupied by the gelatin in water.
This is only possible by water being absorbed
by the protein and the question is how to ac-
count for this absorption of water by the pro-
tein under the influence of acid. Pauli assumed
that the ionized protein surrounds itself with a
jacket of water which is lacking in the non-
ionized protein. If this were true, all the pro-
teins and amino-acids should show such an
influence of acid on the viscosity of their solu-
tions. The writer found that no such influence
exists in the case of amino-acids and at least
one protein, namely, crystalline egg albumin;
if Pauli’s assumption were correct, there is no
reason why crystalline egg albumin should not
show the same influence of acid on viscosity
which is found in the case of gelatin. The dif-
ference between gelatin and crystalline egg
albumin is that the former sets to a solid gel

740

if the temperature is not too high while the
latter does not. The formation of a continuous
gel in the gelatin solution is preceded by the
formation of submicroscopic aggregates which
occlude water and which are capable of swell-
ing and these aggregates or precursors of the
continuous gel increase in size and number on
standing. To test this idea the writer made
experiments of powdered
gelatin in water and found that such suspen-
sions of powdered gelatin had a much higher
wiscosity than a freshly prepared solution of
This was to be expected if the influ-
ence of acid on the viscosity of proteins is due

with suspensions

gelatin.

to the swelling of submicroscopie particles of
gel. It harmonizes with this fact that the vis-
cosity of solutions of crystalline egg albumin
is of a low order of magnitude, which was to
be expected if solutions of erystalline egg
albumin contain few or no micelle. It was
found, moreover, that the viscosity of suspen-
sions of powdered gelatin increased under the
influence of acid or alkali in the same way as
did the swelling of jellies or the osmotic pres-
sure of protein solutions. The viscosities were
measured at 20° C. When the suspension of
powdered gelatin was melted, it was found
upon rapid cooling to 20° C. that the viscosity
was considerably lower and that the influence
of acid had almost disappeared. By these and
a number of similar experiments it was pos-
sible to prove that the similarity between the
influence of electrolytes on the viscosity of
gelatin solution and the influence of electro-
lytes on osmotic pressure is due to the fact
that the influence on viscosity in such cases is
in reality an influence on the swelling of sub-
microscopic protein particles. This proof was
made complete by showing that there exists a
Donnan equilibrium between powdered parti-
cles of gelatin and a surrounding weak gelatin
solution.
VIII
It may not be amiss to illustrate by way of an
example why it is that the neglect of measuring
the hydrogen ion concentration of protein solu-
tions necessarily leads into errors. In a paper
published in 1921 by Kuhn,’ it was intended to
3 Kuhn, A.: Kolloidchem. Beihefte, 1921, xiv,
147.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

show that different acids of the same valency
have different effects on the swelling of gelatin.
In order to furnish such a proof it is necessary
to start with dsoelectric gelatin and to compare
the effect of different acids on the swelling of
this isoelectric gelatin at the same hydrogen ion
concentration of the gel, since only in that case
have the gels the same concentration of gelatin
ions. Instead of starting with isoelectric gelatin —
or gelatin of a measured PP,» Kuhn failed to
measure the p,, of his gelatin, though it makes
quite a difference whether acid is added to igso-
electrie gelatin or to gelatin at another Py:
Purther, instead of measuring the Py of the gel
with the hydrogen electrode, Kuhn ecaleulated the
hydrogen ion concentrations from Kohlrausch’s.
tables as if acid had been added to water free
from gelatin and as if the presence of the protein
did not alter the hydrogen ion concentration. Our
titration curves, however, show that when acid is.
added to isoelectric gelatin the hydrogen ion con-
centration is less than when acid is added to water
free from protein. And finally, on aceount of
the Donnan equilibrium the p,, inside and outside
the gel are entirely different; yet no mention is
made of the Donnan equilibrium in the paper
referred to. The hydrogen ion concentrations of
protein solutions which were considered as equal
by Kuhn were on account of all these errors en-
tirely different, and it is quite natural that Kuhn
came to the conclusion that different monobasic
acids have different effects on swelling, since it
would have been a miracle if with his faulty
methods he had ever compared two acids of the
same p,,, The same criticism applies to all the
older experiments on the influence of electrolytes
on swelling in which the authors reached the con-
clusions that different anions of the same valency
have different effects on swelling (Hofmeister
series). In all these experiments the authors
failed to measure the p,, of their gels and errone-
ously attributed effects due to differences of the
Py of the gels to the difference in the nature
of the anion.
Ix

We therefore come to the conclusion that the
chemistry of proteins does not differ from the
chemistry of crystalloids, and that proteins
combine stoichiometrically with acids and alka-
lies forming protein salts which dissociate elec-
trolytically. The enormously large protein
ions and molecules can not diffuse freely
through gels or many membranes which are
easily permeable to small erystalloidal ions.

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

This fact leads, under proper conditions, to
an unequal distribution of the diffusible erystal-
loidal ions between a protein solution and an
outside aqueous solution; or between a protein
gel and an aqueous solution. In this distribu-
tion the total concentration of erystalloidal ions
is always greater inside the protein solution or
inside a gel than in the surrounding aqueous
solution. This is the eause of the colloidal be-
havior of protein solutions and protein gels.
Measurements of membrane potentials have
shown that this excess of the concentration of
erystalloidal ions inside over the concentration
of the erystalloidal ions outside the protein
solution or the gel, and consequently all the
effects of electrolytes on osmotic pressure,
swelling and viscosity of proteins, can ‘be eal-
culated with a satisfactory degree of accuracy
from Donnan’s equilibrium equation, which is
not an empirical but a rationalistic mathe-
matical formula. We can therefore state that
it is possible to explain the colloidal behavior
of proteins quantitatively on the basis of a
rationalistic mathematical formula. What ap-
peared at first as a new chemistry, the so-called
colloid chemistry, now seems to have been only
an overlooked equilibrium condition of classical
chemistry; at least as far as the proteins are
concerned. The oversight was due to two facts,
first, to the failure of colloid chemists to
measure the hydrogen ion concentration of
their solutions, which happens to ‘be the chief
variable in the case, and second, to their negleet
of measuring and taking into consideration the
membrane potentials of protein solutions and
protein gels, which furnish the proof that the
theory of membrane equilibria must be used to
explain the colloidal behavior of proteins.
Jacques Lozrs
THE ROCKEFELLER INSTITUTE
For MEpicAL RESEARCH,
New York

THE AWARD OF THE HENRY
DRAPER MEDAL

Tue Henry Draper medal for 1921, awarded
by the National Academy of Sciences to Pro-
fessor Henry Norris Russell, professor of as-
tronomy at Princeton University, was pre-

SCIENCE

741

sented to him by Dr. C. G.. Abbot, assistant
director of the Smithsonian Institution at the
annual dinner in New York City on November
15. Dr. Abbot spoke as follows:

The brilliant and penetrating insight of Dr.
Henry Norris Russell, of Princeton University,
has led dn recent years to a development of as-
tronomy so rapid that it has proved thus far
impossible to publish really up-to-date text-books
on the subject. Before the manuscript of a text
on astronomy can be prepared, much less carried
through ‘the press, new knowledge renders the
treatment. sbale.

Dr. Russell has made basic contributions to the
great problem of stellar evolution. He saw
clearly that the brightness of a star as we see it
depends on several factors. First, there is the
intrinsic brightness of the star as a source of
light. What the tallow candle is to the electric
are, so one star may be to another in the bright-
ness of its shining surface. Secondly, the total
amount of ght which a star sends out depends
upon its diameter. Quite recently it has been
shown, for instance, that the star Alpha Orionis
is three hundred times the diameter of the sun,
and accordingly its cross-sectional area is ninety
thousand times the cross-sectional area of the sun.
Hence, if they were of equal surface brighitness,
the star Alpha Orionis would send out ninety
thousand times as much light as the sun. In tthe
third place, the brightness of the star depends
upon its distance from the earth and falls off as
the square of that distance. Thus, the sun, which
is so near that it takes light eight minutes to
come from it, being about two hundred thousand
times as near as ‘the next nearest star which takes
light three or four years to reach the earth will
appear forty million times brighter on that ac-
count.

With these conditions in mind, Dr. Russell, in
collaboration with Dr. Hinks, of England, began
by the application of a new photographic method
of determining the distance of stars, and in 1910
published the results showing the approximate
distance of 55 stars. With this and other such
information which had been laboriously acquired
by others, he was able to show that the red stars
evidently must fall into ttwo classes: one class.
sending out very much more ght itthan our sun,
and another sending out very much less, and that
between these ‘two very widely separated extremes
there are no red stars intervening.

Going on, he applied the, until then little used,
knowledge of the eclipsing variable stars with the

742

most penetrating theoretical ability. For many
years measurements have been going on at Har-
vard Observatory and elsewhere on the march of
brightness of such stars as Algol, in which we
see a pair of objects which im their rotation about
their common center of gravity periodically
eclipse each other. Dr. Russell showed how the
elements of the eclipse, comprising the observed
brightness and the corresponding jtimes, could be
treated in ‘order to give probable relative values
of the densities of stars in the different eclipsing
systems, and with his pupil and collaborator, Dr.
Shapley, who applied Russell’s methods, the re-
sults for 87 stars were obtained and published in
1913.

In the meanwhile, many additional stars had
been measured for distance from tthe earth, and by
combining ‘the information then available, Russell
showed in 1913 that the stars may be divided into
two extraordinary sequences which, following
Hertzsprung, he called the ‘‘ giants and dwarfs.’’

In short, the ‘‘giants’’ beginning with the red
and going on to the yellow, white and blue, form
a series of substantially equal output of light far
in excess of that which is expended by our sun,
and their densities, beginning with the red stars
which are so rare that (the maiterial of which they
are composed is more to be compared to a fairly
high vacuum than to ordinary gaseous, liquid or
solid densities, increase as the sequence goes on
until with the blue stars the density has become
much more considerable.

From this point tthe descending series of the
dwarfs begins, and the density reaches in our
yellow sun about one and one half times that of
water and from this goes on to the very red and
small stars whose density is as great or greater
than that of the earth itself.

So regular is the light progress of this fascinat-
img series of dwarf stars thait if one merely ob-
serves the type of spectrum which one of its mem-
bers possesses he can tell with reasonable limits
the total amount of light which is emitted and
therefore, in connection with its apparent bright-
ness, can determine tthe probable distance away
from the earth in space.

On the other hand, if a cluster, such, for in-
stance, as the great cluster in Hercules which are
known to be stars of substanitially equal distance
from the earth, contains a group of stars of ap-
proximately equal brightness ranging through all
the types of spectrum from jthe blue to the red, it
follows that (they are all giants and therefore
emitting light of a roughly known quantity thou-
sands of times in excess of that emitted by the
sun, and from this the distance of the cluster

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

ean be fairly well estimated. Such considerations
have been pursued by Dr. Shapley in regard to a
great many of tthe clusters of stars, and have led
him to assign distances in the stellar system some
tenfold in excess of those which have been gen-
erally assumed before.

Professor Russell, taking as his text the
frescoes on the walls of the banquet hail which,
being known as tthe “College Room,” was dec-
orated exclusively with scenes of college sport,
replied as follows:

Team work wins in science as well as in games.
But there is this important difference, that scien-
tifie team work is free cooperation; there is no
coaching and no central control.

If I have done anything to deserve this medal,
it is because of the many men who have con-
tributed to these investigations. I was particu-
larly indebted to Professor Pickering of Harvard
for the encouragement that he gave to a young
and unknown instructor in his science. When I
talked to him about my proposed work on stellar
parallaxes, he volunteered his aid and provided
me with observations of the magnitudes and
spectra of 300 stars, which gave me the first evi-
dence of the existence of giant and dwarf stars.
Robert Ball says that ‘‘astronomy consists in
sitting up all night and doing arithmetic all day.’’
Some men like the one thing better than the
other. My part has been largely doing arithmetic.
But this would not have amounted to anything
without the men who were willing to sit up ail
night. Here, again, is scientific team work.

At Princeton we are working on double stars.
If you can guess how massive a star is, you can
calculate how far away it is. If you can guess
at the mass of a double star you can caleulate iits
distance. Now double stars—at least, those with
spectra of ithe same sort—are remarkably alike
in mass, so tthat the guess that those which we
have not yet investigated are similar to those
which we know about is likely to be a very good
guess. In this way we have nearly finished caleu-
lating the distances of about 1,600 double stars.
To calibrate our formule, we use parallaxes de-
termined in other ways, which have been gen-
erously sent us (published and unpublished ma-
terial alike) by Drs. Adams and Schlesinger. All
the investigators of stellar distances are now
playing on the same team.

Not only must astronomers cooperate in re-
search, but they must have the aid of the phys-
icists and chemists. To know more about the
stars we must know more about atoms. In fact,
we would not know anything about ithe stars, even

DECEMBER 29, 1922)

their existence, if it were not for the atoms,
which send us infiormaition by means of light. As
we now know, each particular kind of light comes
from one particular atom behaving in a particular
way, each line in the spectrum is due to a special
kind of atomic behavior.

As seen with the spectrascope, the white or
hotitest stars seem to be made of permanent gases,
and the red and cooler stars to consist of metallic
vapors. The difference in the character of the
stars is probably not due so much to differences
in constitution as jto tthe character of the radia-
tion given off by tthe atoms. If an electron is
knocked off by an atom we get a new set of spec-
tral lines. If another electron is knocked off, we
may get an ultra violet spectrum, which can not
be seen or even photographed, since the air is
opaque to such short wave lengths. Such gases
as oxygen, nitrogen and helium are hard to ex-
cite, so they do nat show at low temperatures.
But in the hot stars they get stirred up and be-
come visible. In this case the metals are so
knocked to pieces that they do not make them-
selves visible at all. All the stars may have sim-
ilar composition, but, since the physical condi-
tions are different, different elements reveal their
presence in the spectra.

The relative degree of ionization of different
elements (which determines the appearance of the
spectra) depends on an equilibrium under the law
of mass action.

I had always supposed that this law was the
exclusive property of the chemist; but now it
appears to be of fundamental importance in
agtro-physics. We need the chemist on our
team, and we may help in their game too. By
comparing ithe spectroscopic behavior of their
lines in the sun, sun-spots and stars, it appears
that the ionization potentials of all the elements
in the periodic table between calcium and nickel
are between 6 and 9 volts, increasing steadily
along the series. So here astronomy gives infor-
mation about properties of atoms, which have not
as yet been measured in our laborajtories, owing
to practical difficulties. There is no limit in sight
to the possibilities of team work such as this.

APPEAL ON BEHALF OF THE
LEAGUE OF NATIONS FOR AID TO
AUSTRIAN INTELLECTUAL
WORKERS

No greater danger can threaten a civilization
than the successive destruction of its homes of
learning. It is beyond dispute that the war

SCIENCE 743

and its economic consequences have brought
intellectual life in one entire region of Europe
into an extremely precarious position. The
machinery of intellectual life has been seriously
impaired in almost all those nations of eastern
Europe, to say nothing of Russia, which ex-
tend from the Baltie to the Algean. One of
them—Austria—is suffering from economic dis-
tress to 'a degree which threatens soon to bring
all intellectual work to a standstill in the
winter of 1922-1923.

The truth of this statement is demonstrated
by the report which we attach to this letter.
Since the report was drawn up, the situation
has been greatly aggravated, and its conse-
quences are: (1) intellectual isolation; (2) a
complete lack of all the appliances which are
indispensable for intellectual work; (3) the
formation of an intellectual proletariat, less
favorably situated than the working-class pro-
letariat—for muscle commands better wages
than brain; (4) diminishing numbers of stu-
dents and a dearth of recruits of the cultured
classes for the liberal professions and for the
teaching staffs.

The committee on intellectual cooperation,
constituted by the League of Nations, decided,
at its first meeting on August 1, 1922, “ex-
pressly to call the attention of the Council of
the League of Nations to the desperate situa-
tion of intellectual life in certain European
countries and the urgent need of intervention.”
These words had special reference to the case
of Austria.

At its meeting of October 4, the Council of
the League of Nations requested the committee
to launch an urgent appeal to universities,
academies and learned 'societies in all countries
in aid of Austrian intellectual workers and
intellectual life in Austria. We have accord-
ingly the honor, in the present Jetter, to invite
you to organize measures of relief as soon as
possible, with the object of saving one of the
most cultured countries in Europe—a country
which formerly possessed one of the chief
centers of European civilization—from the
fate of seeing its higher education and learning
disappear from sheer want.

We leave it to your judgment to organize

744

such relief measures as you may deem most
practical and to employ such methods as you
may consider most efficacious; we are prepared
to supply you, through our secretariat, with
any information or explanations which you
may require. We merely beg to draw your
attention to the following points:

As a result of the depreciation in the Aus-
trian exchange, quite insignificant sums, if con-
verted into crowns, amount to very. consider-
able figures. For instanee, we have pointed
out in the attached report that, with the aid of
1,000 Swiss franes, the Academy of Science in
Vienna could resume its publications, and that
asum of 500 Swiss franes would enable almost
any of the great scientific associations—such as
the Anthropological Society or the Society for
Modern Philology—to recommence their work.

We earnestly invite the universities, acade-
mies and learned societies of the whole world
to send their publications to the Austrian uni-
versities, academies and learned societies, or to
organize systems of exchange with them. We
urge them to conclude with the Amba (the
Austrian “office fior providing books and
instruments”) agreements for cooperation sim-
ilar to that established with England. Such
agreements would provide an excellent basis
for the organization of intellectual relief and
might be extended, with suitable adaptations,
to other countries whose needs are similar to
those of Austria.

As regards the supply of purely material
requirements (such as clothing, boots, articles
of primary necessity, etc.) it is suggested that
agreements should be concluded with the Zegam
(the “Central Purchase Organization for Asso-
ciations of Intellectual Workers”).

We further invite universities, academies
and learned societies to organize the exchange
of professors and lecturers with similar estab-
lishments in Austria, and we suggest that men
of science should either visit Austria them-
selves or endeavor by means of personal inter-
course to break down the wall of intellectual
isolation with which that unfortunate country
is surrounded.

In order to relieve the unhappy condition of
Austrian professors, men of science, writers

SCIENCE

‘be helping

[ Vou. LVI, No. 1461

and artists, who are suffering increasingly from
under-feeding, we would urge you to assist
them and their families to spend their holidays
abroad.

It might even be possible—and no form of
assistance could be more useful or more ur-
gently desirable—to place certain immediately
available funds or foundations at the disposal
of Austrian men of science and students in
order to enable them to continue their re-
searches and studies.

The aim of these suggestions, which are put
forward at the beginning of a winter which
may well prove decisive for the fate of Aus-
tria, is to encourage to the utmost the organ-
ization of relief measures from as wide a field
and in as uniform a manner as possible.

Much ean be accomplished with small means.

In coming to the assistance of Austria, and
of other nations whose intellectual life is in
danger, you will be strengthening that sense
of professional brotherhood which shouid
unite all brain-workers, you will be taking
effective and practical action to promote intel-
lectual cooperation, and, above all, you will
to support civilization in the
struggle against the most serious peril which
threatens it. Kor these reasons we are con-
fident that our appeal will not be launched
in vain.

For the committee on intellectual coopera-

tion:
H. Bereson,

of the “Académie Franeaise,”
President
G. DE REeYNOLD,
Professor of Berne University,
Rapporteur
O. pE HALEcKI,
Professor of Warsaw University,
GENEVA, Secretary
NovEeMBER 4, 1922

SCIENTIFIC EVENTS
LONDON BIRD SANCTUARIES!
THE committee on the establishment of bird
sanctuaries in the royal parks, appointed by

1 From the London Times.

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

Lord Crawford last year, has already added to
the amenities of London. THarly this spring

small enclosures in Hyde Park and Kensington
' Gardens were prepared by suitable fencing, a
small amount of planting, and exclusion of
tidying gardeners. The ‘birds accepted the hos-
pitality; no fewer than twenty species, in-
eluding willow wrens, great and blue tits, red-
breasts and lesser whitethroats, spotted fly-
catchers, carrion crows, tawny owls, pheasants
and moorhen nested there this year. Accord-
ing to a report just issued by the committee, it
is proposed to extend these successful experi-
ments. In Hyde Park the bank near the frame-
house and an enclosure beside the magazine are
to be allowed to grow wild, and some planting
of suitable shrubs is to be carried out. The
area on ithe east side of the Long Water in
Kensington Gardens and a smaller enclosure
on the west side are to be sanctuaries. The
Dueck Island in St. James’s Park, two or three
sites in Buckingham Palace Gardens, by con-
sent of His Majesty, the islands in ithe lake
in Regent’s Park, the wilderness in Greenwich
Park, and the Isabella Plantation in Richmond
Park are all to be prepared and reserved.
These admirable sanctuaries, due to the imitia-
tion of Mr. Harold Russell, a well-known Lon-
don ornithologist, cost little, give pleasure to
many, and will not incommode a single human
being. They are not to incommode even the
London eats, for the committee, after consul-
tation with the Office of Works, decided that
there was no practical cat-proof fence. But
war is declared against the grey squirrels, ab-
solute ito extermination in Richmond Park, and
intermittent in Hyde Park and Kensington
Gardens. Public sentiment will be on the side
of these pleasant rogues. The charge against
them, of being habitual robbers of nests, is not
proven, but, were it so, there are fences in the
London Zoo which retained them, and which,
therefore, could exclude them from the sanc-
tuaries. Their charm persists through the year,
and is, indeed, even greater in the bleak months
when the migrant birds have left their sanc-
tuaries bare. But perhaps ithey will succeed
in defeating even Lord Crawford’s competent
committee.

SCIENCE 745

THE AMERICAN ELECTROCHEMICAL
SOCIETY

Tue forty-third semi-annual meeting of the
American Hlectrochemical Society will be held
in New York City, at the Hotel Commodore,
on May 3, 4 and 5, 1923. The principal attrac-
‘ions of the technical program will be a whole
day session on the general topic: “The Pro-
duction and Application of the Rarer Metals.”
The arrangements for this session are in charge
of Dr. F. M. Becket, of the Electrometallur-
gical Corporation, New York City. There will
be papers on vanadium, tungsten, cobalt,
molybdenum, zirconium, cerium, uranium,
tantalum, calcium, magnesium sand others.

Among the speakers will be:

H. N. MeCoy, president of the Carnotite Re-
duction Company, of Chicago. ;

H. W. Gillett, of the Bureau of Mines, Ithaca,
ING? NY

B. D. Saklatwalla, of the Vamadium Corpora-
tion. . i
F. E. Carter, of the Baker Platinum Works,
Newark, N. J. (paper on platinum).

HS. Cooper (paper on zirconium metal).

J. A. Holladay, of the Eletrometallurgical Cor-
poration (paper on analyses).

M. A. Hunter, of the Rensselaer Polytechnic
Institute, Troy, N. Y. (itwo papers; one on Ti).
Mr. Claney (paper on alloys as catalyzers)
Mr. Cutter, of the Climax Molybdenum Com-

pany.

Russel Lowe, Bario Metal Corporation (paper
on bario metal).

Colin G. Fink, secretary of the society (paper
on tungsten ).

C. E. Minor, Aravaipo Leasing Company, Klon-
dyke, Graham County, Arizona.

W. R. Whitney, director of research laborato-
ries, General Electric, Company, Schenectady,
INN ME

Another session will be devoted to a discus-
sion of “Electrode potentials,” headed by Dr.
Wm. G. Horsch, of the Chile Exploration Com-
pany, New York. The papers will cover
studies on:

(a) Reversible electromotive force.

(b) Overvoltage.

(c) Ion activities and dissociations.

(d) Electro-titration.

(e) p,, determinations.

746

The headquarters of the society are at Co-
lumbia University, New York City.

PROFESSOR MAX WEBER

THERE is printed in Nature the following
letter addressed on December 5 to Professor
Max Weber, of Amsterdam:

You celebrate your seventieth birthday to-day,
and we, who are your colleagues and are but a
few of your many friends in England, join to-
gether to congratulate you and to wish you many
years to come of work and happiness. By your
long life of teaching aand research, by your lead-
ership of the Siboga Expedition, by your great
handbook of the Mammalia, and by innumerable
other important publications, you have come to be
the acknowledged leader of zoology in the Nether-
lands and to be recognized far and wide as one of
the most distinguished naturalists of our time.
Your solid learning has upheld the great scientific
traditions of your country, your investigations
have influenced and stimulated many of us, your
broad interests, your singleness of purpose, the
simplicity of your life, and your genius for friend-
ship, have set an example to us all.

The letter is signed by the following leading
British naturalists:

A. Aleock, E. J. Allen, Chas. W. Andrews, J. H.
Ashworth, W. Bateson, Gilbert C. Bourne, W. T.
Calman, Geo. H. Carpenter, Wm. J. Dakin, Arthur
Dendy, J. C. Ewart, F. W. Gamble, J. Stanley
Gardiner, Walter Garstang, James FP. Gemmill,
Sidney F. Harmer, J. R. Henderson, W. A. Herd-
man, Sidney J. Hickson, Jas. P. Hill, Wm. Evans
Hoyle, J. Graham Kerr, E. W. MacBride, W. C.
McIntosh, Doris L. Mackinnon, P. Chalmers
Mitchell, C. Lloyd Morgan, Edward B. Poulton,
R. C. Punnett, C. Tate Regan, G. Elliot Smith,
Oldfield Thomas, D’Arey W. Thompson, D. M. 8S.
Watson, A. Smith Woodward.

OFFICERS OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL
SOCIETY

Dr. Epwarp C. FRANKLIN, professor of or-
ganic chemistry of Leland Stanford Junior
University, has been elected, as already an-
nounced, president of the American Chemical
Society, succeeding Dr. Edgar F. Smith, for-
merly provost of the University of Pennsyl-
vania.

Dr. Wilder D. Baneroft, of Cornell Univer-
sity, was reelected a director of the society and

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

William Hoskns, consulting chemist, of Chi-
cago, was made a new director of the society.
The following councilors-at-large for the period
from 1923 to 1925 also were elected: Drs.
Roger Adams, University of Illinois; G. N.
Lewis, University of California; Ralph H. Me-
Kee, Columbia University, and William Me-
Pherson, the Ohio State University.

Dr. Franklin was born at Geary City, Kan-
sas, in 1862. He was graduated from the Uni-
versity of Kansas in 1888 and received his
master’s degree in 1890. He was a student at
the University of Berlin in 1890-91; he re-
ceived the degree of doctor of philosophy at
Johns Hopkins University in 1894. He was a
member of the advisory board of the U. S.
Bureau of Mines in 1917-18; physical chemist
of the U. S. Bureau of Standards and consult-
ing chemist of the Ordnance Bureau of the
Army during the war. Dr. Franklin’s work on
hqud ammonia as an electrolitie solvent is
familar to all chemists. In addition to his
university work, he also was in industrial work
for a number of years, serving in the sugar
industry and also in the gold mining industry.
In the latter work he was stationed at Miramar,
Costa Rica, in 1897.

Dr. Franklin was chosen from among the
four nominees for president of the society who
received the largest number of votes from mem-
bers of the society. The choice among these
four was determined by a vote of the coun-
cilors. The three other leading candidates were
Dr. James F. Norris, of Massachusetts Institute _
of Technology, Professor Samuel 8. Parr, of
the University of Ilhinois, and Dr. Charles L.
Reece, chemical director of H. I. du Pont de
Nemours and Company, of Wilmington, Dela-
ware.

THE HAYDEN AWARD OF THE PHILADEL-
PHIA ACADEMY

Tur Academy of Natural Sciences of Phil-
delphia announces the selection of Professor
Alfred Lacroix, president of the Geological
Society of France, as the recipient of the
“Hayden Memorial Geological Award’ for
1923. This award was created by a deed of
trust made with the academy, on April 11,
1888, by Mrs. Emma W. Hayden, widow of Dr.

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

Ferdinand V. Hayden, one time director of the
United States Geological Survey, “as a reward
for the best publication, exploration, discovery
or research in the sciences of geology and pale-
ontology.” The award consists of a gold medal,
and is made every three years. Previous to
1900 the award consisted of a bronze medal and
was made annually.

Professor Lacroix was born February 4,
1863, at Macon, province of Sadne-et-Loire,
France. Educated at the Lycée of Macon, at
the Sorbonne and at the Collége of France, he
received the degree of doctor of science in 1889.
In 1893 he was made professeur at the Muséum
d'Histoire Naturelle, and in 1896, director of
the Laboratoire de Minéralogie, Ecole des
Hautes Etudes. In 1904 he was elected a mem-
iber of tthe Académie des Sciences, and ten years
later he became Seecrétaire perpetual of the
Section of Physics of the Académie. Pro-
fessor Lacroix’s numerous and important pub-
lications and discoveries, as well as his ex-
haustive studies of Mont Pelée, of the phe-
nomena ot contact metamorphism and endo-
morphic metamorphism are familiar to all
geologists.

The committee by whom the nominee for the
1923 award was selected consisted of Dr. Rich-
ard A. F. Penrose, Jr., chairman, Dr. John M.
Clarke, Dr. Henry Fairfield Osborn, Dr.
Charles D. Waleott and Dr. Edgar T. Wherry.

Previous recipients of the Hayden award
were: 1890, James Hall; 1891, Edward D.
Cope; 1892, Eduard Suess; 1893, Thomas H.
Huxley; 1894, Gabriel August Daubrée; 1895,
Karl A. von Zittel; 1896, Giovanni Capellini;
1897, A. Karpinski; 1898, Otto Torrell; 1899,
Gilles Joseph Gustave Dewalque; 1902, Archi-
bald Geikie; 1905, Charles D. Walcott; 1908,
John Mason Clarke; 1911, John C. Branner;
1904, Henry Fairfield Osborn; 1917, William
M. Davis; 1920, Thomas Chrowder Chamberlin.

SCIENTIFIC NOTES AND NEWS

A portrait of Sir Joseph Thomson, by Mr.
Fiddes Watt, has been presented by a number
of subseribers to the Royal Society.

Dr. Friptsor NANSEN, who recenty received
the Nobel peace prize, received a further award

SCIENCE — 747

when it was announced by the Nobel Committee
that Christian Erichsen, of Copenhagen, had
granted another award to Dr. Nansen equal in
value to the Nobel peace prize, in recognition
of his work on behalf of the starving millions
of Europe. Dr. Nansen proposes to use the
prizes for relief work.

Dr. Irvine Lanemurr, research chemist of
the General Electric (Company, has been elected
an honorary member of the Royal Institution,
London.

Epwarp LONGSTRETH MEDALS were presented
by the Franklin Institute, Philadelphia, on De-
cember 20 to Dr. A. H. Pfund, of Baltimore,
for his eryptometer, paint film gauge, colori-
meter and rotating sector, and to Mr. Edward
J. Brandt, of Watertown, Wis., for his auto-
matic cashier.

WE learn from the Bulletin of the American
Mathematical Society that on the occasion of
the celebration of its seven hundredth anniver-
sary the University of Padua conferred its hon-
orary doctorate on Professors R. C. Archibald,
of Brown University, J. Lipka, of the Massa-
chusetts Institute of Technology, and V. Sny-
der, of Cornell University.

Tue University of Frankfort and the Zurich
Technical School have conferred honorary de-
erees on Dr. David Hilbert, professor of math-
ematics at G6ttingen, on the occasion of his
sixtieth birthday.

Dr. E. H. Srarzrna, professor of physiology
in the University of London, has been ap-
pointed the first Foulerton professor under the
foundation of the Royal Society created by
the will of the late Miss L. A. Foulerton.

Sir Grorce GREENHILL has been awarded a
pension by the British government in recogni-
tion of his services to science and his ballistie
work. ¢

On December 8 the members of the depart-
ment of botany of the Ohio State University
and friends celebrated with a dinner the com-
pletion of twenty-five years of service of Pro-
fessor John H. Schaffner in the department.

Dr. Francis Carter Woon, director of the
Institute of Cancer Research, Columbia Uni-

7148

versity, received an “honorary degree” from
the Radiological Society of North America, on
December 7, 1922, in recognition of his experi-
mental researches on X-ray and cancer.

FRANKLIN THOMAS, professor of civil engi-
neering at the California Institute of Tech-
nology, was recently elected a member and vice-
chairman of the Board of Directors of the City
of Pasadena, Calif. He is first vice-president
of the Pasadena Chamber ot Commerce.

Proressor Epson 8. Bastin, chairman of
the department of geology in the University of
Chicago, has been appointed a member of the
State Board of Natural Resources and Conser-
vation by the governor of Illinois. Professor
John Merle Couler, head of the department of
botany, is already a member of the board.

Proressor JOSEPH EHuGENE Rowe, head of
the department of mathematics in the College
of William and Mary, was the official delegate
from the State of Virginia at the annual meet-
ing of the American Society of Mechanical
Engineers held in New York City during the
week of December 4.

Ar the annual general meeting of the Fara-
day Society, London, held on November 20, Sir
Robert Robertson was elected president. The
vice-presidents are: Professor C. H. Desch,
Professor F. G. Donnan, Dr. J. A. Harker,
Professor T. M. Lowry, W. Murray Morrison,
Professor J. R. Partington and Dr. G. Senter.

JOHN Ottver LA Gorcs, associate editor of
the National Geographic Magazine and trustee
of the National Geographic Society was
elected a vice-president. of the society on De-
cember 13.

Av a general meeting of the members of the
Royal Institution held on December 4, Sir
Arthur Keith was elected secretary in succes-
sion to the late Colon@] E. H. Grove-Hills.

Dr. I. P. Totmacuorr, formerly chief keeper
of the Geological Museum at Petrograd, has
been appointed curator of invertebrate paleon-
tology in the Carnegie Museum at Pittsburgh,
Pa. Dr. Tolmachoff, who has been in Vladi-
vostok for some time, has arrived in Pittsburgh
and assumed his new duties.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

Junius Matz, pathologist of the Insular Sta-
tion of Porto Rico, has been engaged to con-
duet research in agriculture for Central Por-
venior, San Pedro de Macoris, Dominican Re-
publhie.

Proressor L. KAHLENBERG, of the chem-

istry department of the University of Wiscon-

sin, lectured at the University of Illmois on
December 7 on “The chemical replacement of
the metals by one another.”

Tue Academy of Sciences and the Philo-
sophical Society of Washington held a joint
meeting on December 21, when Dr. H. A. Clark,
physicist of the Taylor Instrument Companies,
Rochester, N. Y., delivered an ‘address on “The
manufacture of thermometers.”

Dr. Lupwik SILBERSTEIN, mathematical
physicist, Eastman Kodak Company, Research
Laboratory, gave the following lectures at
Harvard University on December 18, 19 and
20: “Oriented quantum emission and the selec-
tive principle of spectroscopy”; ‘“Perplexities
in the domain of non-hydrogenic spectra”;
“Rotational terrestrial optical experiment and
its bearing upon fundamental physical ques-
tions.”

Dr. Witiiam T. Bovis, assistant professor
of biophysics at Harvard University, will de-
liver the fourth Harvey Society lecture at the
New York Academy of Medicine, on January
13. His subject will be “The physiological
effects of light rays.”

Proressor R. G. Hosxins, head of the de-
partment of physiology of Ohio State Univer-
sity, will deliver the annual address before
the Portland, Oregon, Academy of Medicine on
January 11 and 12.

SpenceR Bairp Newserry died on Novem-
ber 28 at the age of sixty-five years. Dr. New-
berry, a son of John Strong Newberry, was at
one time professor of chemistry at Cornell
University and in 1893 founded the Sandusky
Cement Company. He made important con-
tributions to the scientific study of cement.

Henry JoHn Etwess, distinguished for his
contmbutions to forestry and other sciences,
died on November 26, at the age of seventy-six

DECEMBER 29, 1922

years. Mr. Hlwes was a fellow of the Royal
Society and had been president of the Royal
Entomological Society of London and of the
Royal Hneglish Arboricultural Society.

JoHN Henry Gurney, the English natural-
ist and ornithologist, died at his residence, Kes-
wick Hall, near Norwich, on November 9, aged
seventy-five years.

THe first of the customary lectures arranged
by the Central Ohio Chapter, at the Ohio State
University, of the Society of Sigma Xi, fol-
lowing its usual program for the encourage-
ment of research, was a lecture with experi-
mental demonstrations by Mr. Thomas Millgely,
Jr., and Mr. T. A. Boyd, research fuel engi-
neers of the General Motors Research Corpora-
tion of Dayton, entitled, “The chemical control
by catalysis of detonation.” Experimental
demonstrations of the use of selenium and lead
derivatives were made with internal combus-
tion engines. The program is under the diree-
tion of the new officers of the local chapter,
namely, James R. Withrow, professor indus-
trial chemistry, president; Edward Mack, Jr.,
assistant professor of physical chemistry, sec-
retary, and C. A. Norman, professor of ma-
chine design, retiring secretary.

Tus directors of the Fenger Memorial Fund
have set aside $500 for medical investigation.
The work should have a clinical bearing and if
possible it should be carried out in an institu-
tion that will furnish facilities and ordinary
supplies free of cost. Applications with full
particulars should be sent to Dr. L. Hektoen,
637 S. Wood Street, Chicago, before January
15, 1923.

Mr. Artaur H. Heimer, whose gift to the

Museum of the Brooklyn Institute of Arts and
Sciences of a large collection of Long Island
birds and mammals was announced during the
spring, has been engaged since summer in
affixing labels bearmg name, locality and date
to all of his specimens, which, instead of the
original estimate of 3,000, it has now been
shown number about 4,000. This donation, to-
gether with that of Mr. Peavey, Mr. Putt-
farcken and others, represents the addition of
fully 5,000 specimens, all received during the
present year and this signifies that ithe Brook-

SCIENCE

749

lyn Museum has attained its goal in now pos-
sessing the most exclusive and authentic collec-
tion of ‘birds and mammals from Long Island.

Tse Hurley expedition, which left Australia
in August with a flying boat and seaplane to
explore the country at the head of the Fly
River, Papua, has had its plans dislocated by
climatic conditions. The air pilot, who has
reached Brisbane, reported that the machines
were found unsuitable. Rain every night and

terrific heat lby day destroyed ithe fabric cover-

ing and made it unsafe to proceed. The only
planes possible in such country must be of
metal, with high horse-power.

Tue first number of a new Italian mathe-
matical journal, entitled Bolletino della Unione
Matematica Italiana, was issued under the date
of October, 1922. 8. Pincherle, of Bologna, is
provisional president of the union.

Ir is announced by the United States Geolog-
ical Survey, that the price of radium has de-
creased owing to the discovery of radium bear-
ing ores in Africa, which are easily worked at
a much lower cost than the American mimes.
This caused a drop from $120,000 a gram to
$70,000, which is the lowest price at any time
since radium has been used. In connection
with Cancer Week, the Survey announced, the
state of New York and the city of Philadel-
phia have each bought two grams for the use
of their citizens, and the city of Quebec one
gram.

THe Seismos-Gesellschaft, of Hanover,
Germany, has lately issued a pamphlet on the
determination of underground geological strue-
tures and ore deposits by seismic methods, ap-
parently an outcome of devices used in locating
heavy guns in the war. The needed apparatus
can be carried by two men. The work is said
to be more expeditious and economical than
exploration by borings. A number of sectional
illustrations of investigated structures are in-
eluded.

THe Swedish Parliament, as reported in
Eugenical News, voted, May 13, 1921, to estab-
lish a Swedish Institute for Race-Biology with
82,500 crowns (Swedish) in addition to the
salary of the director. Of this sum, 24,000
crowns are to ‘be utilized for the first equip-

750

ment of the imstitute, 26,500 for working ex-
penses, and the remainder for salaries for as-
sistants during 1922. Work began January 1,
1922. The institute has its own council, ap-
pointed by the king and standing directly under
the government. At present it is located at
Upsala and the director is nominally on the
university staff; but tthe institute is govern-
mental rather than university department or
agency. The first council comprises: H. Ham-
marskjold, lord lieutenant of Upland; A. af
Jocknick, Esq., director general in ‘the Royal
Committee for Pensions, Stockholm; F. Lenn-
mahn, M.D., rector of the “Karolinska Instu-
tet,” Stockholm; Mrs. Emilia Broomé, Stock-
holm; J. V. Hultkranz, M-.D., professor of
anatomy, Upsala University; H. Nilsson-Ehle,
M.D. and Ph.D., professor of heredity in Lund
University (at Akarp); H. Lundborg, M.D.,
director of the institute. The present staff in-
cludes: Dr. I. J. Linders, statistician, archivist
and vice director; G. Dahlberg, M.D., medical
assistant, at present doing anthropometric
work; Dr. W. W. Krauss (formerly of Vien-
na), assistant anthropologist; E. Heckscher,
genealogist; Mrs. G. Dahlberg, who helps her
husband in anthropometric work, recorded as
social worker; and Mr. E. A. Ohlsén, photog-
rapher.

UNIVERSITY AND EDUCATIONAL
NOTES

GrounD has been broken for the new labora-
tory of the department of hygiene and bacteri-
ology at the University of Chicago to stand be-
tween the psychological laboratory on the north
and the university press on the south. The
building, of brick, will'front 110 feet on Ellis
Avenue and will contain a general laboratory, a
laboratory devoted to the bacteriology and
chemistry of water and foods, five research
rooms, a room equipped with sterilizing de-
vices, and an animal room.

By the will of the late General Frank Sher-
win Streeter, Dartmouth College receives
$50,000. A bequest of $10,000 is left to Dr.
Ernest M. Hopkins, president of the college.

Tue council of the senate of the University

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

of Cambridge has issued a report on the allo-
cation of the Special Government Grant, which
has now become a recurrent grant of £30,000.
This is divided as follows: Professorships,
£14,675; readerships, £5,304; university lec-
tureships, £3,750; university officers, £3,240;
grant to Geographical Education Fund, £250;
university library, £2,000; Museum of Classical
Archeology, £750.

At Indiana University, Associate Professor
U. S. Hanna has been promoted to a full pro-
fessorship, and Assistant Professor Cora B.
Hennel to an associate professorship of mathe-
matics.

THE Bulletin of the American Mathematical
Society states that, on the return of pre-war
conditions, the U. 8. Naval Academy has re-
duced the number of its civilian officers of
instruction in academic departments by about
one third. From the department of mathe-
matics, Assistant Processors R. P. Johnson and
G. F. Alrich have accepted assistant professor-
ships at the Carnegie Institute of Technology,
and Mr. L. 8S. Johnston an ‘assistant professor-
ship at Pennsylvania State College.

Dr. Raymonp A. Dart, formerly of Sydney
University, Australia, and recently of the ana-
tomical department, University of London, has
accepted the professorship of anatomy im the
University of Wiutwatersrand, Johannesburg,
South Africa, where a new medical college
pbuilding has recently been completed. Dr.
Dart came to the United States two years ago
on the invitation of the Rockefeller Foundation
to examine American laboratories and methods
of teaching, and to help encourage the develop-
ment of a better understanding ‘and closer rela-
tions between English and American scientists
teaching in medical schools. As traveling fel-
low of the foundation, Dr. Dart spent some
time in our laboratories, and at the Marine
Biological Laboratory at Woods Hole, Mass.,
where he was married to Miss Dora Tyree, as-
sistant in anatomy at the University of Cin-
cinnati.

Dr. Horsurt J. WartneG has been elected
dean of the faculty of medicine of the Univer-
sity of London.

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

DISCUSSION AND CORRESPOND-
ENCE
RESEARCH IN MARINE BIOLOGY

To THe Eprror or Science: Notices of the
death of Dr. Alfred Goldsborough Mayor have
referred to the lamentable possibility that the
undertaking in marine biology which he direct-
ed might fail to be continued. Mr. Potts,! Pro-
fessor Coe,2 Dr. Davenport? and Dr. Schaeffer,*
among others, have voiced or hinted at this
fear, that a chief American instrument for re-
search might be abandoned. Emphasis has
been placed upon the unique opportunities
until now provided by the Carnegie Institution
Department of Marine Biology for investiga-
‘ions involving travel to more or less distant
places, where material of unusually favorable
type might (for a short time) be available to
especially qualified students.

There is another side ito this matter, and
since there seems some likelihood of its being
overlooked, I venture to comment upon it—for
it is an aspect of marine research concerning
which a continuous experience of several
years as resident naturalist at the Bermuda
Biological Station has given me strong con-
victions.

The “easy work” of zoology is ito a large
extent already done—although I have had ex-
pressed to me, by an eminent naturalist of the
elder generation, the thought that “all the hard
problems of zoology have been solved—you
younger men need only to fill im the vacant
spots.” (Those “vacant spots’!) Research is
costly. Adequate return for money and en-
ergy to be invested in biological investigation
demands, and henceforth will increasingly
necessitate, thatthe conditions attending inves-
tigative pursuits be the least unfavorable pos-
sible. Those whose varied experiences have
provided an adequate background for judg-
ment in this matter are unanimous in the con-
viction that the most suitable locations are ito
be found on the shores of tropical or semi-

1 Nature, 110, 224.

2 Amer. Jour. Sci., Ser V, 4, 173.
3 Screncr, N. S., 56, 134.

4 Science, N. 8., 56, 468.

SCIENCE

‘in America is sufficiently demonstrative.

751

tropical seas. Supreme variety and abundance
of animals, ease of access to them throughout
the year, a comparative isolation conducive to
their scholarly and productive treatment—
these can be found in combination only in the
warmer seas. ‘There, some of the wasteful,
merely mechanical, handicaps jbo fruitful re-
search are eliminated.

It is not too much to itake for granted, that
studies of this nature are worth while. The
financial support of numerous marine stations
Yet
if we examine the actual operation of these
existing laboratories, we find that in general
they are utilized for productive work during
but a small portion of the year. The splendid
material possessions of the Woods Hole Lab-
oratory, to take an especially noteworthy in-
stance, are as good as wasted, so far as re-
search is concerned, during some eight to nine
months of the year. The plain fact of the
matter is that the existing American institu-
tions for research in marine biology are either
more or less unfortunately situated, with re-
gard ito ¢himatie conditions or otherwise; or
else overburdened in their potentially produc-
tive seasons by the requirements of elementary
instruction—necessary work, and I speak of
it only with respect; ‘ut it is not enough.

In Mayor’s hands tie Department of Marine
Biology of the Carnegie Institution had before
it two large tasks—the conduct of explorative
expeditions, and ithe upkeep of a fixed labora-
tory serving as a central resort at favorable
seasons. The workers at the Tortugas Labora-
tory: being recruited from college and univer-
sity staffs, and the possible season at Dry Tor-)
tugas ‘brief at best, the actual time of the
laboratory's session each year was necessarily
short. The problems atitackable under such
conditions are limited in kinds. Some truly
fundamental questions can not be faced at all
without intimate knowledge of faunal condi-
tions over extended periods of time. The no-
tion, moreover, that “favorable material” for
one kind of “problem” is to be found here in
this place, for another kind there in that other
place, is largely fallacious. Most naturalists
acquainted with the subtropical marine fauna

752

have come into contact with it during only one
part of the year, and are unaware of its sea-
sonal fluctuations.

A permanent marine laboratory, adequately
located, engaged actively in research during
the whole year, I should suppose to ‘be a ecar-
dinal necessity for biological development. As
Mayor himself realized, the need is so obvious
as to require frequent restatement; ‘his reports,
and letters from him, show that ‘the realization
of such a laboratory was for him a great hope.

In such a laboratory inquiries become pos--

sible which in other situations can hardly be
undertaken at all. Temporary social isolation
would perhaps have to be faced by resident
investigators, and partial loss of contact with
libraries; but there are compensations. Time
to “sit still and think things over,” on the
ground, is of tremendous value in itself. The
zoologist’s business, I take it, is to provide an
account of animals, in terms, ultimately, of
the properties of materials and of their rela-
tions. An enormous segment of this task re-
mains relatively unexplored. <A truly scien-
‘tific natural history of animals, prerequisite
for the stability of biological theory, is still for
the future. There is here a possibility of huge
reward. To grasp it requires intensive work
of a character which existing agencies for
zoological inquiry do mot make possible, for
the work can not be done by means of visits to
the seashore in summertime. A permanent
laboratory in semitropical waters, moderately
equipped, with a stationary staff, not cursed
with a “program,” could justify itself in this
necessary work, and that without great expense.

That the only American institution for re-
search in a position to fill ‘this need may fail
to do so, seems to me the most serious aspect
of the case, rather than the possibility that
another summer laboratory may be closed.

W. J. Crozier
ZOOLOGICAL LABORATORY,
Rureers CoLLEGE

ON TRANSLATING EINSTEIN

To tHe Epitor or Sctmnce: Generally I am
well pleased with whatever Dr. W. J. Hum-
phreys writes but I can’t say I like so much his

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

pleasantly written criticism in Science of No-
vember 24. He says that he very much dis-
hikes my little article on relativity in The Scv-
entific Monthly of November, 1922.

Because, giving the words used the only mean-
ings recognized by layman and scientists alike,
save a few specialists, several of the assertions
are sheer nonsense. Certainly no system of equa-
tions, however clever, can prove to one of common
sense, the existence of a real fourth dimension;
that time and space are not wholly independent;
that just because we and the Martians may be
unable to synchronize our clocks there is no
‘“‘now’’; that time is ‘‘curved’’; that a phe-
nomenon may be seen before it happens; that the
mere inclusion of gravitation in a more compre-
hensive expression eliminates it from nature; and
so forth, and so on, through a long list of ab-
surdities—absurd, that is, if their customary
meanings be given to the words used.

It is my custom, ‘whenever I get a new scien-
tific book to pick out the most perplexing pas-
sage and try to put it into ordinary language.
It is more fun, to my mind, than trying to solve
the problem of three bodies on a billiard table
and pays better. The book I had in hand was
the English version of “Time—Space—Matter’’
by Weyl, the leading exponent of Hinsteinismus
in Germany. ‘The paragraph I selected for
translation into the vernacular was the follow-
ing: (p. 274.)

Every world-point is the origin of the double-
cone of the active future and the passive past.
Whereas in the special theory of relativity these
two portions are separated by an intervening re-
gion, it is certainly possible in the present case
for the cone of the active future to overlap with
that of the passive past; so that, in principle, it
is possible to experience events now that will in
part be an effect of my future resolves and ac-
tions. Moreover, it is not impossible for a world-
line (in particular, that of my body), although it
has a time-like direction at every point, to return
to the neighborhood of a point which it has al-
ready once passed through. The result would be
a spectral image of the world more fearful than
anything the weird fantasy of E. T. A. Hoffman
has ever conjured up. In actual fact the very
considerable fluctuations of the g,,’s that would
be necessary to produce this effect do not occur
in the region of world in which we live. Never-
theless there is a certain amount of interest in

DrceMBER 29, 1922]

speculating on these possibilities inasmuch as they
shed light on the philosophical problem of cosmic
and phenomenal time. Although paradoxes of this
kind appear, nowhere do we find any real contra-
diction to the facts directly presented to us in
experience.

Now I hhave two favors ‘to ask:

First, that any reader who is interested com-
pare my little skit on ‘““Tangling Up the Time
Line” with this and see whether I have made
any serious misuse of the text.

Second, that Dr. Humphreys put this same
idea into five hundred words so that mathema-
ticians would approve of it and editors accept
it. I am proposing this, not because I think
‘that Dr. Humphreys ean’t do it, but because I
know he ean. I greatly admire, and have often
benefited by, his power of clear exposition and
I want him to apply it im this case. I will not
only thank him for it but I will pay him for it.

Somebody must do this job of translating
Einstein and it ought to be done by thorough
mathematicians like Dr. Humphreys rather than
by outsiders like myself. I realize that trans-
‘lating mathematics is like translating music.
Stall I suppose that even the most complicated
‘equation could be put mto ordinary language
though it would be so wordy and involved that
nobody would read it. All that can be done
is to give by illustrations and analogies some
notion of the conception. I may say that, ae-
cording to my custom, I submitted my version
to a professor of mathematics in one of our
leading universities, who specializes in Einstein
and I reworked the wording twice in accordance
with his suggestions although I will not in-
criminate him by mentioning his name.

Most of the “long list of absurdities” that
Dr. Humphreys mentions are not in the article
he eriticizes; for instance, gravitation. I know
that Einstem has not eliminated gravitation
from the universe, for if he had I should have
felt a sense of relief amounting to 187 pounds.
What he has done is well expressed by Lord
Haldane, in his “Reign of Relativity,” when he
says that Hinstein’s doctrine “has banished out
of physics the necessity of attributing an ob-
jective character to gravitation,” and he adds
“a time may arrive when even the good old

SCIENCE

753

name gravitation will not be discoverable in any
respectable textbook.” The way Weyl puts it
is: (p.°226).

We shall find actually that the planets pursue
the courses mapped out for them by the guiding
field, and that we need not have recourse to a
special ‘‘force of gravitation,’’ as did Newton,
to account for the influence which diverts the
planets from their paths as prescribed by Galilei’s
Principle (or Newton’s first law of motion).

Is not Weyl to be taken literally when he
makes such a statement as the following: (p.
278) ?

We conclude that space is closed and hence
finite. If this were not the case, it would scarcely
be possible to imagine how a state of statistical
equilibrium could come about. If the world is
closed, spatially, it becomes possible for an ob-
server to see several pictures of one and the same
star. These depict the star at epochs separated
by enormous intervals of time (during which light
travels once entirely round the world).

Professor Eddington of Cambridge, who
started the Eimstem boom by his report of the
British eclipse expeditions of 1919, puts this
point still more plainly and literally in “Space,
Time and Gravitation”: (p. 161)

Perhaps one or more of the many spiral nebule
are really phantoms of our own stellar system.
Or it may be that only a proportion of the stars
are substantial bodies; the remainder are optical
ghosts revisiting their old haunts. It is, however,
unlikely that the light rays after their long jour-
ney would converge with the accuracy which this
theory would require.

Both Weyl and Eddington are careful to
state that what is theoretically possible may be
a practical impossibility and I imitated their
caution when I said:

Such a thing (as the influence of the future on
the present) is conceivable in the generalized
theory of relativity, though, like most conceivable
things, it does not occur, or is never known to
occur, in reality.

I submit that this is a fair warning to the
reader as to the speculative nature of these de-
ductions and a fair translation of Weyl’s
words:

In actual fact the very considerable fluctuations

7o4

of the g,,.’s that would be necessary to produce
his effect do not oeeur in the region of the world
in which we live.

I did not invent Einstein. I am not responsi-
ble for the theory of relativity or the deductions
made from it by physicists and mathematicians.
It seems to me that Dr. Humphreys’ criticism
should be directed toward them rather than
toward their humble interpreter.

Epwin ff. SLosson
ScIENCE SERVICE, WASHINGTON

ON THE FORMATION OF FAMILY NAMES
LIKE TINGIDZE

Ir is astonishing ito observe how great a dis-
play of erudition may be made in vain, the net
result being error. In recent numbers of
Scrence Dr. Holland, Mr. A. C. Baker and I
have issued manifestoes on how to construct
family names based on third declension 7-stems
not increasing in the genitive, and in each case
the argument has been vitiated by at least one
mistake. However, each author has contributed
an item of truth, and it is now possible ito settle
the matter for good and alll.

As Dr. Holland says, the stem of the Latin
word Tinge is undoubtedly Tingit-; but, as
Mr. Baker points out, Fabricius did not adopt
this word, rather he introduced into the neo-
Latin language the word Tingis, genitive
Tingis, stem Tingi-. This brings us to my con-
tribution, i. e., that Fabricius considered Tingis
“his own and indicated what its declension
should be’—perhaps a somewhat misleading
statement of the idea clearly formulated by
Mr. Baker. My argument, however, had the
merit of reaching the right conclusion, namely,
that Tingide is the correct form for this family
name, and I have no hesitation in diagnosing
as pathological the form Tingitide in this par-
ticular case and Tingiide or its lke im all
similar cases.

I have always had a vague notion, founded
chiefly on unconscious observation, that in
forming patronymics from istems (not in-
creasing in the genitive) the final 7 of the stem
is to be dropped; and, indeed, who ever heard
of such ‘terms as Apiide, Aphiide, Feliide or
Caniidz, until the publication of ithe last num-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

ber of the Proceedings of the Nntomological
Society of Washington?! To confirm or dis-
prove ithis belief and so to settle the matter
beyond question, I lately addressed an appro-
priate question to Mr. Henry Pennypacker,
now of Harvard University and formerly
Greek teacher and headmaster of ithe Boston
Latin School. In reply I received the follow-
ing statement of the grammatical principle con-
cerned, as ithe jomt opinion of my old teacher
and of Professor Clifford H. Moore, head of
the department of ithe classics at Harvard:
Rules regarding the formajtion of family names
which may be described as patronymics are sub-

ject to modification not only in the interest of

convenience but also of euphony, and in spite of
the fact that the stems of the nouns you mention
[Nabis, Apis, Tingis, Coris, Aphis] in Latin end
in §‘i’’ and jthat the termination ‘‘ide’’ is con-
ventional in such cases there seems to be no doubt
that the spelling with a single ‘‘i’’ carries uni-
versal authority and the penultimate ‘‘i’’ is short
in quantitiy.
The authors of the International Code, of
course, were fully conversant with this prin-
ciple and expected it to be applied in connec-
tion with Article 4, as it had been in the past.
Lest my acquaintance with the unexpressed
expectations of the members of the commission
ibe questioned, I should say that it is founded
on three considerations: (1) They were and are
educated men; (2) their own works contain no
such monstrosities as “Feliide” or “Anguiide” ;
(3) authors and editors of standing throughout
the world have unanimously acted upon the
assumption which I have expressed above.
There remains the widely but not universally
accepted belief that priority should obtain in
family names, but tthe Code is not clear on
this point (7. e., What determines the type
genus of a family?) ; however this may be set-
tled in future, we arrive in the present instance
at the following conclusions: (1) that Tingide
is nomenelaturally and philologically correct, as
Westwood was well aware when he proposed
the name in 1840; and (2) ithat it will not be
necessary ito make the change in hundreds of
1The editor, Mr. A. C. Baker, substitutes the

term ‘‘Aphiidw’’ for the tenm ‘‘Aphidide’’ used
by the author of an article.

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

family, subfamily, tribal and divisional names
which Mr. Baker’s novel idea implies.
H. M. ParsHLEy
SMITH COLLEGE

THE BEGINNINGS OF AMERICAN GEOLOGY

To tHe Epitor or Scrence: Referring to
Dr. T. C. Mendenhall’s article on page 661 of
the current volume of ‘ScieNncE, I desire to say
that I have no wish to enter into any contro-
versy in regard to the facts of Newberry’s con-
nection with the Geological Survey of Ohio and
I sincerely hope for the ‘benefit of the history
of American geology that Dr. Mendenhall is
correct. Moreover, I yield to none in my high
regard for both Newberry and Orton. My ref-
erence was entirely to a period prior to Orton’s
accession to the directorship of the survey and
to the feelings which Newberry publicly ex-
pressed at the time I was a student under him
at the Columbia School of Mines.

In confirmation of which I can only add that
Charles A. White, than whom none knew New-
berry better, writes in his memoir that was pub-
lished by the National Academy of Sciences as
follows: ‘In 1874 the work of the survey was
suspended by failure of the legislature to pro-
vide the necessary funds and much dissatisfac-
tion and even bitterness of feeling was engen-
dered among those who had taken part or had
been interested in it. Dr. Newberry thought and
with apparently good reason that injustice had
been done him in his relation to the survey.”

Marcus BENJAMIN

QUOTATIONS
THE FEDERAL BUDGET

Tue estimates of the money needed by the
federal government for 1924 are about
$3,000,000,000, excluding the Post Office, which
it is hoped will be self-supporting. At a very
moderate estimate, over two thirds of this will
be spent on wars past, present or future.
Nearly half a billion goes to the veterans,
about a billion goes into the service of the
debt accumulated in the last war, well over half
a billion to maintaining the army and navy.

Half of the total expenditure is a debt to
veterans and to ‘bondholders. It is fixed. The
other half of the expenditure is for the army,

SCIENCE 755

the mavy and the civil government. Here alone
retrenchment is possible. Assuming that the
administration sees no way to reduce the cost
of the army and navy, but on the contrary, ac-
cording to Secretaries Denby and Weeks,
would ‘ike to increase these costs if possible,
the taxpayer’s position comes to this: If ithe
whole civil government were dismantled or run
free of charge the tax-saving would be less
than 30 cents on a dollar.

Some part of this 30 cents is all that Mr.
Harding has any hope of saving. The part
which he is now thinking about is the part
which goes into “research, improvement and
development.” Less than $11,000,000 goes to
research. If it were all abolished it would save
just a itrifle over one third of a cent on each
dollar. Ten millions goes to education. <Abol-
ish this item and you have eut your budget
.003 per cent. Sixteen millions goes for public
health. Cease this activity and you save half
a cent on a dollar. Abolish all public works,
river and harbor improvements, road construe-
tion, the Reclamation Service, Alaskan railroad
expenditures, hospital construction and other
public improvements and the total saving would
be less than 5 cents on a dollar. Abolish every-
thing in the way of “research, improvement
and development” and the taxpayer would not
save 7 cents on a dollar.

The ‘budget figures are the greatest indict-
ment of modern civilization. They show that
two thirds of the energy of government goes to
the business of fighting, and that less than a
third of the remaining third goes to ithe civ-
ilized business of research, improvement and
development.—The New York World.

THE APPRECIATION OF SCIENCE

At the anniversary dinner of the Royal So-
ciety it is eustomary to imelude among the
guests some public men of distinction in other
fields than those with which scientific men are
concerned. Among such guests this year, at
the dinner held on November 30, were Mr. Jus-
tice Darling, who proposed the toast of “The
Royal Society,” and Mr. L. 8. Amery, first lord
of the Admiralty, who responded to the toast
of “The guests.” If the assembly had consist-
ed of leading representatives of literature or

756

art, music or the drama, neither of these speak-
ers would have professed, facetiously or other-
wise, want of knowledge of the functions of ‘the
institution they honored by their presence, or of
the meaning of subjects surveyeed by it. Mr.
Justice Darling, for example, said he had heard
of the Royal Society as he had heard of the
equator, and had been told that the society
“concerned itself with medicine and biology,
and particularly natural knowledge and natural
philosophy, but the moment the knowledge be-
came unnatural—and so far as he could see
most of it was—then the society had nothing
more to do with it.” Of course, the society was
founded for the promotion of natural knowl-
edge by inquiry as against supernatural by
revelation or authority. Mr. Justice Darling
should understand the distinction, for he re-
ferred to Francis Bacon several times in the
course of his remarks, though always ancor-
rectly, as “Lord” Bacon. As Sir Charles Sher-
rington, who presided, said, “The field of truth
which the society explores is in the realm of
natural knowledge, and the manner of the ex-
ploration of this field is in research.” Sir
Ernest Rutherford was right when, in respond-
ing to the toast of “The Medallists,” he re-
ferred to the spirit of adventure possessed by
every scientific pioneer. In no other depart-
ment of intellectual activity is this spirit more
manifest, and in none are such fertile provinces
being opened. To us it seems strange, there-
fore, that so little is commonly understood of
the origin and purpose of such a body as the
Royal Society, now in its two hundred and
sixtieth year, or of the achievements of modern
science represented by it—Nature.

SCIENTIFIC BOOKS

United States Life Tables 1890, 1901, 1910,
and 1901-1910. Explanatory Text, Mathe-
matical Theory, Computations, Graphs, and
Original Statisties. Also Tables of United
States Life Annuities, Life Tables of Hor-
eign Countries, Mortality Tables of Insur-
ance Companies. Prepared iby James W.
Gnover. Bureau of the Census 1921, pp. 1-
496. 4to.

Since their appearance some years ago Glov-

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

er’s earlier United States Life ‘Tables have been
a standard reference work on mortality in this
country. With characteristic thoroughness, the
author has extended and improved his earlier
work, and has produced what may well be re-
garded ‘as, at the moment at least, the standard
actuarial reference work. For it can be said
that in this present volume so much of actuarial
science as concerns itself with the construction
of mortality tables is covered with meticulous
attention to detail. Nothing is left to the imag-
ination of the reader and little to his inelli-
gence. Every point in regard to the construc-
tion and the interpretation of life tables which
could possiby arise to puzzle a voyager into
these placid, because carefully “smoothed” seas,
is explained thoroughly, comprehensively, and —
completely, with copious illustrations domestic
and foreign in origin.

This is as it should be. Life tables have had
the quite undeserved reputation of beimg mys-
terious documents, capable of being understood
only by the highest order of intellects. As a
matter of fact they are, of course, nothing of
the sort, but only a quite obvious and simple
set of derivative functions from age specific
death rates. Such an exposition of actuarial
arts and science as Glover gives in this volume
will most effectually remove from the mind of
the careful reader any lurking notion that there
is an element of the occult or transcendental in
life tables, and will impress him with the sim-
ple virtues of these documents. He must, how-
ever, be a careful, by which is meant painstak-
ing, reader, because no light or fantastic
touches will cheer his way through ‘the solid,
substantial mass of lucent but lucubratory de-
tails.

To turn to technical matters, it may be said
that in the construction of the United States
tables (based upon Registration Area data vari-
ously subdivided demographically for three dif-
ferent periods) Glover has followed the most
highly approved, orthodox actuarial methods.
The q, values were smoothed between ages 5
and 85 by osculatory interpolation using fifth
differences. The first 5 years of life were dealt
with by a special method based upon German
official procedure, and this section was welded

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

to the main portion by fourth difference inter-
polation formulas. The upper tail end of the
curve was graduated by Wi'ttstein’s formula and
welded ito the main portion ‘by the application
of Spencer’s 21-term formula. Glover felt it
important to alter the raw figures as little as
possible and apologizes in various places for
little roughnesses in ithe tables, especially
around junction or welding points.

Much might be said about the orthodox actu-
arial philosophy regarding the smoothing or
graduation of raw data. The present reviewer
finds himself in disagreement with some of it,
looking at the whole matter from the broad
standpoint of scientific methodology. But this
is clearly not the place to enter upon a discus-
sion of this mathematically recondite and emo-
tionally delicate subject. Suffice it to say that
the reviewer is acquainted with no more honest,
through, and skillful application of the stand-
ard actuarial methods than ‘that of Glover in
the construction of these tables.

Altogether this is a substantial and notable
contribution to American vital statistics. We
may well be proud of it. It stands at least on
a level with the very best that any country, not
excepting tthe Registrar-General’s Office of Eng-
land and Wales, under Farr and Ogle and
Stevenson, has produced in the same line. Every
health officer and vital staitistician should have
a copy of it on his desk. Two features of the
‘book are especially noteworthy. The first is
that ‘the ‘best recent life tables for Australia,
Denmark, England, France, Germany, Holland,
India, Italy, Japan, Norway, Sweden, and
Switzerland are given in full for comparative
purposes. The second is that there are given,
for the United States, tables of life annuities,
premiums and commutations. This last is an
interesting departure for an official government
publication. Hitherto in litigation imvolving
questions of life expectaney in the settlement
of estates, ete., the courts have had to depend
for their actuarial basis in the main upon the
material of insurance companies. Now official
tables based upon (the experience of the original
registration states in 1910 may be used, and all
elements of uncertainty as to bias will be re-
moved. Furthermore, by the use of the premi-

SCIENCE

757

um tables one can make intelligent examination
of the alluring proposals made to him for the
purchase of insurance, whether jby theoretically
grasping commercial institutions or by theoret-
ically eleemosynary foundations.

Finally, it may ‘be pointed out that this vol-
ume makes a first rate text-book for tthe system-
atic study of the basic elements of actuarial
science. The reviewer is using it in this way
at tthe present time, in a course in life table
construction, with great satisfaction. It may be
purchased from the Superintendent of Docu-
ments iat a cost of $1.25 per copy, cloth bound,
a price which is only a small fraction of what
any commercial publisher would have to charge
for a book so expensive to manufacture.

RayMOND PEARL

SPECIAL ARTICLES
X-RAY CRYSTALLOMETRY: X-RAY WAVE
LENGTHS, SPACE-LATTICE DIMEN-
SIONS AND ATOMIC MASSES

THe fundamental equation in X-ray spec-

trometry and erystallometry is

= 2d sin @
wherein d is the perpendicular distance be-
tween adjacent planes in the crystal which re-
flect in the first order at a glancing angle of
imeidence 0, X-rays of wave-length . Since
only 9 in this equation is capable of direct
measurement the absolute magnitudes of A and
d can only be determined if some other relation
between them can ‘be found, or if either can be
determined independently.

The method first used was to obtain a value
of d from the density of the crystal, the number
of molecules in its unit of structure, and the
mass of a single molecule. The first of the
last-named quantities can be measured directly,
the second is an integer the choice of which
can be guided with sufficient accuracy from the
X-ray data, and values for the third have been
obtained by a variety of methods, perhaps best
by the determination of electrochemical equiva-
lents and electronic charge. No other relation
between A and d than that given above is at
present known to exist, 7. e., no other quantity
than 0 is known to depend upon these two vari-
ables only, so that the first suggested method of

758

getting their absolute magnitudes is not
feasible.

An independent method of getting d is to
employ the quantum relation between wave-
length of X-rays and volts required to give
electrons equivalent energy. In using this
method we must take care to leave out of ac-
count those values of h which themselves de-
pend upon X-ray wave-lengths.

Using the first method we select the following
data:

Number of molecules per

mol, VN = 6.0594 1023 (4, 5)

Density of calcite... 2.7116 gm/em3 (2, 5)
Interaxial angle for .calcite........ 101°-55’ = @, 5)
Molecular weight CaCOs.............. 100.07 (4)

The volume of the unit rhombohedron is
1.09626 d® and it contains one half of a mole-
cule® so that the grating constant d = 3.02855
x 10-8 cm. The ratio of the grating constant

of calcite, @oacos to that of rocksalt,
d

vac? bas been determined by Ubler and
Cooksey? and by Siegbahn’, their respective
3.0307 oh -, 3.02904

Distal endo eia00 i
1.076417 (log! 0.0319806), the latter of which
is the more accurately determined and will be
taken as the true ratio. This requires that
dye, be changed to 2.81355 X 10-8 em. The
values given by Duane? for these two con-
stants are 3.028 X 10-8 and 2.814 X 10-8, the
ratio of which, 1.07605, is probably a little low.
To correct Duane’s wave-lengths to the new

values being

1R. T. Birge, Phys. Rev., (2), 14, 365 (1919).

2A. H. Compton, Phys. Rev. (2), 7, 646-685
(1916).

®°P. Groth, Chemische Kristallographie, 2, 204
(1908).

4**Tnternational Atomic Weights,’’ (1921).

5H. S. Uhler, Phys. Rev. (2), 12, 39-46 (1918).

6This is not a true unit of structure, which,
however, is of no importance for these caleula-
tions; cf. R. W. G. Wyckoff, Amer. Jour. Sci., 50,
317-360 (November, 1920).

7H. S. Uhler, C. D. Cooksey, Phys. Rev., (2),
10, 645-652 (1917).

8M. Siegbahn, Phil. Mag., (6), 37, 601-612,
(1919).

9W. Duane, Nat. Res. Counc. Bull., 1, 383-408
(November, 1920).

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

basis we must multiply those ‘based on 3.028 X

3.02855
-8 > — d
10-8 for Geene 302800 1.00018, and
those based on 2.814 X 10° for d., by
2.81355 ;
3.81400 = 0.99984.

It should be noted further that Siegbahn!?
has more recently obtained a value for : =

sin 0 for the Ka, line of copper which does
not agree with that which he obtained at the
time ‘the above-mentioned ratio was obtained.
His new value for 4 is 1537.302 X 10-1 for
d = 3.02904 X 10-8 as compared with the

CaCO3
previous value 1537.36 < 10 for d =

3.028 < 10-8. Referred to the same nee) (GENS
new value of Can = 3.02855 X 10-8) this
means a change from 1537.64 x 101 to
1537.056 X 10-11, a decrease of 0.038 per cent.
Sinee this correction amounts to more than the
difference involved in changing 3.028 X 10-8
to 3.02855 X 10-§ and 2.814 & 10-8 to 2.81355
x 10-8, and since Compton’s value for the
density of rock-salt has been criticized as prob-
ably too low! it seems premature on the basis
of the above evidence to decide in favor of
either of the two constants used by Duane.!?.

A recent note by Davey! bases a similar
analysis upon a value, of N = 6.0642 x 1028
and upon 2.173 gm/em? as the density of rock-
salt, thus getting a.spacing for the (100)
planes in this erystal of only 2.810 < 10-8 em.
Adoption of this value would require extensive
correction of all reported wave-lengths without
any considerable advantage, and observers
agree that rock-salt is a less suitable standard
than calcite, on account of the greater prob-
ability of inclusions leading to abnormally
high densities. The density corresponding to
the value here chosen for dy .,, 2.81385 X 10-8,

10M. Siegbahn, Comptes Rendus, 173, 1350-
1352 (December 19, 1921).

11 R. Ledoux-Lebard, A. Dauvillier, Comptes
Rendus, 169, 965-967 (November 24, 1919); H. S.
Uhler, loc. cit.5.

12 Loc. cit.0; cf. M. Siegbahn, Jahrb. d. Rad. u.
Elektr., 18, 240-292 (1921).

13, W. P. Davey, Screncr, 54, 497-498 (Novem-
ber 18, 1921).

DECEMBER 29, 1922]

and to V = 6.0594 X 108, is 2.166 gm/cm? or
only a little lower than the lowest value quoted
by Davey.14

The value V = 6.0594 105 is equivalent
to a factor 1.65033 < 10-4 (log-1 24.2175704
for converting atomic or molecular weights to
grams.

The second method, depending upon the
value of h, requires in addition a determination
of the potential applied to an X-ray tube. The
work of Blake and Duane!® may be consid-
ered as a determination of d in terms of h.
The values of h collected ‘by Birge!® vary some-
what among themselves but 6.560 xX 10-°7
seems a reasonable mean value of the results
not depending upon X-ray wave-lengths, and
this gives Bencos = 3.0303 X 10-8 or 0.058
per cent. higher than the value given above.
This is within the range permitted by the prob-
able error in the value of h just taken.

The following constants are therefore recom-
mended to be used until other values are agreed
upon, to the accuracy indicated by the log-
arithms.

Grating space of calcite:

3.028 >< 10-8 cm. (log-1 8.48116)

Number of molecules per mol:

6.0594 >< 1023 (log-1 23.78243)

Molybdenum K-radiation wave-lengths:

a1 0.70783 X< 10-8 em. (log-1 9.84993)
ag 0.71212 X% 10-8 em. (log-1 9.85255)
L. W. McKrrHan
RESEARCH LABORATORIES OF THE AMER-

ICAN TELEPHONE AND TELEGRAPH

CoMPANY, AND THE WESTERN ELEC-

TRIC COMPANY, INCORPORATED,

SEPTEMBER 20, 1922

PERIPHERAL MIGRATION OF A CENTRIOLE
DERIVATIVE IN THE SPERMATO-
GENESIS OF CGCANTHUS

In 1920 Mr. Chas. S. Driver began at Colum-
bia University a study of the male germ cells
of a common tree-cricket, @canthus mgricornis
Walker, an Orthopteron insect of the family

14 Loc. cit.,13 assuming the value attributed to
Retgers is 2.167 and not 1.167 as printed.

15 F. C. Blake, W. Duane, Phys. Rev., (2), 10,
624-637 (December, 1917).

16 Loc. cit.

SCIENCE 759

Gryllide. His preliminary study convinced
nim that, during the changes undergone by the
spermatid as it begins to lengthen into the
mature sperm, the entire distal centrole mi-
grates posteriorly along the axial thread,
eventually forming a terminal “plug” for the
caudal sheath at its distal extremity. While a
peripheral migration of part of the central ap-
paratus in the spermatids of invertebrates was
not hitherto entirely unknown, previous ac-
counts are few in number and somewhat con-
flicting in substance. A reexamination of this
phenomenon was, therefore, of considerable
interest. The untimely death of Mr. Driver
left his work incomplete and his material was
delivered to me for further study. Driver de-
serves much credit for the excellence of the
preparations, which are remarkably well fixed
and stained. The method of Benda was used
for fixation, and the sections were stained ac-
cording to the alizarin-crystal violet technique.
My observations were made at a magnification
of 1,100 to 1,650 diameters, somewhat higher
than that used by Driver in his survey of the
material.

After a careful study I have reached a dif-
ferent conclusion in regard to the migrating
“centriole’ from those of Driver and earlier
observers. Although there is in the spermatids
of Gicanthus a peripheral migration of a body
which appears much like a centriole and stains
in a similar manner, I am able to demonstrate
that the migrating body is not an entire cen-
triole, but only a portion or derivative of the
distal centriole.

In early spermatids of Gicanthus the central
apparatus appears as a bar which lies per-
pendicularly to the nuclear membrane. The
axial thread has already appeared at this early
stage. The bar constricts in the center, dividing
into a proximal and a distal centriole. Almost
immediately a small portion of the latter, en-
circling the axial thread, is budded off and
begins a migration along the thread. As it
moves distally it increases rapidly in size, and
eventually becomes as large as both proximal
and distal centrioles combined. It reaches a
permanent position at the distal extremity of
the caudal (mitochondrial) sheath. The re-
mainder of the distal centriole continues to lie

760

in close proximity to the proximal one at the
nuclear wall; and in cells too heavily stained
with crystal violet they appear as a single
body, a fact which may account for Driver’s
view that only the proximal centriole remains
near the nucleus. <A full account of the cr-
cumstances connected with the origin and
migration of the distal centriole derivative will
be incorporated in a later paper.

Accounts of a distal migration of a centriole
or its derivatives in the spermatogenesis of
invertebrates are, as already indicated, rare.
Only among insects have such cases been re-
corded. Perhaps the clearest and most con-
vincing statement is that of Otte (’07)? for
Locusta viridissima. Some of his figures, nota-
bly No. 87 and No. 92, bear a strong super-
ficial resemblance to certain cells to be found
in the Gcanthus preparations. Otte, like most
of the other observers of similar’ phenomena,
considers the migrating body to be an entire
distal centriole. My observations upon the
origin of the migrating body in @canthus
caused me to become skeptical of similar re-
ports in other cases; and through the kindness
of Dr. O. L. Mohr of the University of Kris-
tiania, who has sent me testes of Locusta
viridissima fixed in Benda’s solution, I was
enabled to make a re-examinaion of the sper-
matids of this insect. A preliminary survey
of the material, while not entirely conclusive,
indieates that the centrioles of the “neck-
region” of young spermatids are two in num-
ber prior to, and throughout, the period in
which the centriole-like body performs its
migration to the posterior pole of the cell.
This body, therefore, appears to be a centriole
derivative and not the distal centriole itself.

The discovery in @eanthus of a centriole de-
rivative which migrates along the axial thread
to a position remote from the nucleus is of
interest because it presents certain transitional
features between two previously known and
common types of spermatid metamorphosis.
The first of these types has been reported by
numerous observers upon the spermatogenesis

1 Otte, Heinrich: ‘‘Samenreifung und Samen-
bildung bei Locusta viridissima,’’ Zool. Jahrb.,
Bd. 24, Heft 3, S. 431-521, 1907.

SCIENCE

[Vou. LVI, No. 1461

of various invertebrates, including most of the
insects. In the early spermatids of these ani-
mals two centrioles lie together in the neck-
region of the young spermatid. One of these,
the distal centriole or blepharoplast, spins out
an axial thread. The two centrioles remain
practically unchanged in the same region
throughout the metamorphosis of the sperma-
fid, and no peripheral migration of centriole
derivatives occurs. The second type is charac-
teristie of certain vertebrates, notably the
mammals, and has been described by various
authors for man, rat, guinea-pig, Phalangista,
ete. In the spermatids of these forms two
centrioles also remain in the neck-region, but
the distal, after spinning out the axial thread,
cuts off a ring-shaped body which encireles the
thread and migrates distally, at least as far as
the terminus of the middle-piece. There is no
well-defined middle-piece in the insect sperm,
and, as already stated, the migrating body,
closely analogous to that of the mammal
sperm, passes to the posterior margin of the
caudal sheath.

This study also has a bearing upon certain
phases of the problem of fertilization, notably
the origin of the first cleavage spindle. Many
observers hold that the first cleavage centers
arise from, or in the immediate neighborhood
of, the neck-region of the sperm as it enters
the egg. It is possible that the proximal and
distal centrioles maintain their individuality
and form each a pole of the spindle, but this
must remain a matter of conjecture. It is note-
worthy, however, that in practically every ani-
mal that has been critically studied,? por-
tions of both proximal and distal centrioles
pass into the neck-region of the mature sperm.
In this respect Cicanthus falls directly into
line with the vast majority, and probably also
Locusta.

H. H. Jonnson
CoLUMBIA UNIVERSITY,
Nrw York Criry

2 Apparently an exception obtains in certain
Mollusca; vide Gatenby (718): ‘‘The Cyto-
plasmie Inclusions of the Germ-Cells. Part ITI—
The Spermatogenesis of Some Other Pulmonates.’’
Quart. Jour. Mic. Sci., N. S., Vol. 63, No. 250,
pp. 197-258.

ae) SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT ‘a ix

SCIENCE SERVICE NEWS BULLETIN

The news bulletins prepared by Seience Service will hereafter be printed as a supplement to
Science. As nist scientific men know, Science Service is a corporation not for profit whose capital
has been provided by Mr. E. W. Scripps. The American Association for the Advancement of Science,
The National Academy of Sciences and the National Research Council nominate a majority of the
members and trustees.

The objects of Science Service are to supply current and interesting scientific information to as
large a part of the general pubHe as can be reached. The bulletins are not addressed primarily to
men of science and might not be in place in the regular pages of Science. They will, however, prove
to be of interest, partly because every one is at most an amateur in the sciences that are outside his
own field, and partly because it is one of the objects of science to maintain its relations with the gen-
eral public on which it must depend for recruits and for support.

It is hoped that the publication of Science Service Bulletins will prove to be interesting and prof-
itable to scientific men and will lead to their cooperation in maintaining high scientific and literary
standards in the popularization of science. It should be understood that while the editor of ScrENCE —
is responsible for the publication of the bulletins, responsibility for the contents rests with the editor
of Science Service, Dr, E. E. Slosson, and the editor of the bulletin, Mr. Watson Davis, and in the

last resort with the American Association for the Advancement of Science, the National Academy of

Sciences and the National Research Council.

MEASURES FEEBLE HEAT STARS SEND TO
EARTH

By measuring a hundred millionth degree of
temperature and a trillionth of an ampere of elec-
tric current, Dr. C. G. Abbot, of the Smithsonian
Institution, has determined for the first time the
heat spectrum of starlight with great accuracy.

Working with the 100-inch telescope at Mt.
Wilson Observatory this fall, Dr. Abbot measured
the heat at different parts of the spectrum of ten
stars and the sun. The rays were dispersed by a
spectroscope in a band similar to the rainbow.

The bright star Capella, which is very similar
to our own sun in its spectrum, was found to fur-
mish the equivalent of one horse power to an area
on the earth approximately equal to the state of
Minnesota. But this prominent star is feeble
compared with our sun, which is equal to a hun-
dred billion Capellas and sends down on twenty
square feet heat equal to a horse power. On the
whole earth Capella’s heat equals 500 horse power,
and as all the stars together equal 500 Capellas
this would amount to 250,000 horse power over
the whole earth from the stars alone.

Dr. Abbot explained that his work on the heat
of stars, accomplished with the cooperation of
L. B. Aldrich of his staff, is an outgrowth of the
principal work of the Astrophysical Observatory,
which is the investigation of the sun.

“This work was begun about 1890 by Dr. S. P.
Langley whose great pioneer work in measuring
the sun’s heat, its distribution in the spectrum,
and the losses and modifications which it encoun-
ters in passing through the earth’s atmosphere,
were ¢lassic,’’ said Dr. Abbot.

““Tt might be supposed that the investigation
of a heat source whose in-put on the earth’s sur-
face amounts to the equivalent of a horse power
per couple of squawe yards would require only
simple and insensitive apparatus, but such is not
the case. The complexity of the solar beam, made
up of rays of greatly differing wave length which
are all differently transmitted by the earth’s
atmosphere, requires the employment of the spec-
troscope to separate the rays, and for the recog-
nition of their heat the use of highly sensitive
thermometrie apparatus.

“‘The most satisfactory heat instrument for
these purposes is the bolometer, invented by Lang-
ley about 1880. Two hair-like wires of platinum
are placed side by side, the one hidden from the
rays by means of a metallic diaphragm, the other
exposed in the spectrum. The heat absorbed by
the exposed thread, if it be as little as the mil-
Konth of a degree, suffices to disturb a sensitive
electrical balance, and by a beautiful device intro-
duced by Langley in the earliest years at the
Astrophysical Observatory these indications are

x SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

automatically recorded from one end of the spec-
trum to the other. The record takes the shape of
a curve which mounts to different heights with
reference to its base line, and these heights are
proportional to the heat in the various rays of
the spectrum. The absorption bands due +o the
chemical elements in the sun, and those due to
some of the elements and compounds of gaseous
nature in the earth’s atmosphere, are indicated as
depressions in this sinuous curve. In this way the
effects of the earth’s atmosphere upon the sun
rays may be determined and allowed for, so that
the intensity and quality of the rays as they
would be outside the atmosphere, on the moon,
for instance, where there is none, can be com-
puted. When this is done, the intensity of the
sun’s heat freed from atmospheric influences is
found ito be variable.’’

The form of distribution of the solar spectrum
gives an indication of the temperature of the sun.
Just as the blacksmith’s iron as he heats it be-
comes faintly glowing, then a brighter red, then
yellowish, then white hot, so the spectra of the
sun and other stars depend for the arrangement
of the intensities of the different colors upon the
temperatures which prevail in these sources of
light. The measurements of the Smithsonian
Institution indicate a temperature for the sun
approximating 6,000 degrees C.

NO SCIENTIFIC BASIS FOR PREDICTING
CALIFORNIA QUAKE

Tue fact that the earthquake zone in California
is analogous geologically to the devastated region
‘in Chile has raised some apprehension here as to
the probability of a quake or tidal wave in Oali-
fornia.

Since the disaster of 1906, considerable scien-
tifie research on the causes of tthe crust movements
on the west coast has been conducted which may
eventually lead to definite earthquake predictions.

But Dr. H. O. Wood, in charge of investiga-
tions for the Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton, when seen at the Mount Wilson Observatory,
said:

‘<There is no scientific basis for any estimate of
probability of an earthquake in California follow-
ing upon the recent sbock in Chile. No indica-
tions of any impending shock have been noted
here. Sometimes several great earthquakes have
occurred in places far distant from one another
within a relatively short ttime interval so as to
suggest causal group occurrence but more com-
monly there is no such apparent grouping in the
occurrence of great shecks.’’

About 150 miles off the coast of California,
there is a sharp break in the ocean bottom that is
as steep as the east slope of the Sierra Nevadas,
according to Dr. William E. Ritter, director of
the Scripps Institution for Biolegical Research,
who located it by extensive soundings when he
was on the oceanographic expedition of the
Albatross in 1904. It has been suggested that
this is a plane of weakness that might give rise
to an earthquake at sea. Such a erustal slip
would probably create a serious tidal wave such as
that which swept the Chilean coast in the wake
of the recent shocks.

But investigations into the history and folklore
of the country are reassuring. They indicate that
no tidal wave ever swept the California coast, ac-
cording to Dr. Ritter. There is not even a tra-
dition of sudden encroachment of the sea upon
the land.

HOW CHILEAN QUAKE HAPPENED

How Chile’s death-dealing earthquake, which
shattered cities and engulfed their helpless inhab-
itants with tremendous tidal waves, originated at
sea off the coast of that country, is explained by
Dr. W. J. Humphreys, meteorological physicist of
the U. S. Weather Bureau, from the seismographic
records made by the earth’s tremors at this point.
For four hours the pen of the highly sensitive
instrument drew the picture of the movements in
the earth, which wrought such havoc among the
Ohilean towns in.a few minutes.

Earthquakes, Dr. Humphreys said, are pro-
duced by a slipping or breaking of the crust of
the earth as a result of strains. These strains
may be caused by the shrinking of the interior of
the earth through temperature changes, changes
in loads due to rapid erosion taking material from
one place to another in the course of a few hun-
dred years, or from the tendency of higher land to
flow out to sea.

From what is known of the present quake, it
seems to have been caused by higher land moving
out to sea. The actual break in the crust oc-
curred at some distance from shore, and this sud-
den change in the ocean floor at that point pro-
duced a tidal wave. As there were several such
waves, there must have been several faults or
breaks in the earth’s crust at the sea bottom
which ereated the different huge billows in the
incompressible water. It is probable that this
erack extended for a hundred miles or more and
that the wave created was detected in the Philip-
pines or other distant Pacific points.

Breaks, such as caused the shocks and waves

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xi

CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MEDICAL COLLEGE

First Avenue’ and Twenty-eighth Street
NEW YORK CITY

The first year of the course is also
offered at Ithaca, N. Y., subsequent
years at New York City only.

For Information Address

THE SECRETARY

The Microscope
By SIMON H. GAGE of Cornell University
13th Edition, Published December, 1920

In this edition, special emphasis is put upon the Dark-Field
Microscope. POSTPAID $3.00.

COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.

Marine Biological Laboratory

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Biological Material

reg _1. ZOOLOGY.. Preserved mate-
ms rial of all types of animals for class
work and for the museum.

2. EMBRYOLOGY. Stages of
some invertebrates, fishes (includ-
ing Acanthias, Amia and Lepidos-
tus), Amphibia, reptiles and some
mammals,

3. BOTANY. Preserved mate-
rial of Algae, Fungi, Liverworts,
Mosses, Ferns and Seed Plants.

4. MICROSCOPE SLIDES in Bacteriology,
Botany and Zoology.

5. LIFE HISTORIES, Germination Studies,
and Natural History Groups.

oT OF.
Q cy

Catalogues furnished on application to
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator
WOODS HOLE, MASSACHUSETTS

RUSH MEDICAL COLLEGE

IN AFFILIATION WITH
THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

Curriculum.—The fundamental branches (Anatomy, Phy-

siology, Bacteriology, etc.) are taught in the Depart-
ments of Science at the Hull Biological and the Ricketts
Laboratories, University of Chicago. The courses of
the three clinical years are given in Rush Medical Col-
lege and in the Presbyterian, the Cook County Hos-
pital, the Home for Destitute Crippled Children, and
other hospitals.

Requirements for Admission.—Three years of premedical
college work.

Classes Limited—The number of students admitted to
each class is limited, selection of those to be admitted
is made on the basis of merit in scholarship and other
qualifications requisite for the study and practice of
medicine.

Hospital Year.—The fifth year, consisting of service as an
interne under supervision of the faculty in an approved
hospital, or of advanced work in one of the depart-
ments is prerequisite for graduation.

Summer Quarter.—The college year is divided into four
quarters, three of which constitute an annual session.
The summer quarter in the climate of Chicago is ad-
vantageous for work. Students are admitted to begin
the medical courses only in the Autumn and Spring
quarters.

Elective System.—A considerable freedom of choice of
courses and instructors is open to the student.

Graduate Courses.—Advanced and research courses are
offered in all departments. Students by attending sum-
mer quarters and prolonging their residence at the
University of Chicago in advanced work may secure the
degree of A.M., S.M., or Ph.D., from the University.

Prize Scholarship.—Six prize scholarships—three in the
first two years and three in the last two (clinical)
years—are awarded to college graduates for theses em-
bodying original research.

The Winter quarter commences January 2, 1923.
Tuition—$75.00 per quarter, no laboratory fees.
Complete information may be secured by addressing:
THE MEDICAL DEAN

The University of Chicago Chicago, Illinois

iol) rome

International Review devoted to the
History of Science and Civilization

Edited by GEORGE SARTON, D.Sc.
Associate of the Carnegie Institution
Cambridge, Mass.

Harvard Library 183,

The chief feature of Isis is a Critical Bib-
liography of the History and Philosophy of
Science and of the History of Civilization.
The first three volumes (1882 pages) con-
tain about 5,620 bibliographic notes, 312 re-
views and 43 longer papers. Isis is the main
center of information on the History and
Philosophy of Science, and the organ of the
New Humanism. 2 or 3 parts complete a
volume within 12 to 18 months.

Parts 1 and 2 (454 pp:) of Vol. IV. have
appeared. Each volume costs 50 Belgian
francs (about $3) (ed. de luxe, from vol. II
on, 100 francs).

Publisher: WEISSENBRUCH

49 rue du Poincon Bruxelles, Belgium

xu SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

in Chile, have left their mark on the physical
geography of our own country. For instance
there is a break in the earth’s crust which can be
seen at Great Falls, Va., near Washington. It
has been traced from near Boston, Mass., through
Pennsylvania and New York to the James River
in southern Virginia. The Hudson River valley
was created in the dtstant past by a similar slip-
ping in the earth’s crust.

An earthquake may occur anywhere on the
earth’s surface and no place is immune, yet they
are most likely to happen at the present time in
the newly formed geological regions such as are
found along the western coast of South America,
our own western coast, up to Alaska and down the
other side of the Pacific by way of Japan, the
Philippines, Java, and other islands in the South
Pacific. i

Because an earthquake occurs in one place is no
indication that it will be followed by another in
some other quakey regions. They do not run in
series, unless the changes made in the load at one
point may be so great as to cause additional
strain at another place sufficient to cause a break.
There are sometimes more shivers in the vicinity
of an original break caused by further settling of
the tremendous masses of rocks.

,
PARAFFIN AND POISON PROTECT WOOD
FROM TEREDO

Discovery has been made of a way to seal
poison in wood which promises complete protec-
tion for railroad ties, wharf piling, mining and
ship timbers against the ravages of land and
water creatures like the teredo. Dr. Paul Bartsch,
curator of mollusks of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion at Washington, has found that by forcing
hot paraffin containing copper or arsenic salts
into timbers under pressure the wood ean be pre-
served from damage by shipworms and other de-
structive forms of life. The method of applica-
tion is the same as that now used in treating
timber with creosote.

Heretofore it has been found hard to keep pre-
servatives in the wood. Gradually the poisons
leached out, and left tthe timber unproteced. By
the use of paraffin, which is resistant to water,
acids and alkalis, Dr. Bartsch claims this leaching
can be overcome and the wood protected more
effectively and with less expense than by present
preservatives.

The Forest Products Laboratory reports that
the hot paraffin solutions have a great penetrative
power and blocks treated by the new method with
iodides of copper and arsenie sealed in have been

found by officers at the Key West Naval Station
ito be unaffected by ship worms after three months
exposure in infested waters where the untreated
wood to which they were attached was ptomptly
attacked.

Dr. Bartsch now has a less expensive highly
poisonous copper salt and is working to obtain a
cheaper arsenic preparation, which he believes
will eventually displace present timber preserva-
tives. When the Pamama Canal was built the
greenheart wood was used in the lock gates on
account of it being largely resistant to marine
borers. Some difficulty was experienced in get-
ting men to handle the wood, as on some it has an
effeat similar to that of our poison oak. Recently
it has been found that even this toxic timber is
attacked by the mollusks, which chisel out their
homes inside it with impunity. They use the
tooth-like edges of their shells.

A colony burrowing through ithe wood weakens
the timber and often results in heavy piling being
completely cut in two. Untreated wood shows the
holes which the mollusk makes in three months
and some creosoted timber after two years in the
water has been found to be infested. Copper
solutions of one in 2,000,000 have been found
deadly, and Dr. Bartsch claims that when the
tender tentacles of marine forms come in contact
with his preparation they will curl up like the
victim of a wood alcohol party. When the ship-
worm swallows impregnated sawdust his boring
days will be promptly over. :

Any number of poisons can probably be effee-
tively kept in the wood by mixing them in the
paraffin. So resistant is paraffin to the effect of-
acids that bottles are made of it to hold hydro-
fluorie acid, which eats through glass. Heat alone
would melt it out, but for railroad ties a paraffin
too hard to be affected by the sun’s heat would
be used.

ALUMINUM SULPHATE MAKES RARE
FLOWERS AND FRUIT THRIVE
Maeniricent orchids and vhododendrons and

gigantic blueberries can be grown in ordinary
soil to which aluminum sulphate is added, Dr.
Frederick V. Coville, chief botanist of the U. 8.
Department of Agriculture, has discovered. Such
rare plants will not flourish in untreated soil that
is alkaline.

The farmer applies lime to make his soil alka-
line and capable of raising bumper yields of the
common crops, but the nurseryman can now re-
verse the process and apply aluminum sulphate
to make the soil acid and capable of raising blue-

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

xill

_VAN SLYKE APPARATUS

For the determi-
nation of dioxide
and carbonates in
blood plasma.

153 East 84th Street

CHART MAKING

University and college teachers desiring charts
made up to suit their own special needs, from
figures of their own choosing and arranging, in
black and white, or in colors, at relatively small
cost, are invited to correspond with:

T. W. THOMAS:

Spear Laboratory, Oberlin, Ohio

MUSHROOM BOOK

and large colored chart
postpaid for $2.00

Specially prepared for beginners who wish to
learn the edible and poisonous kinds.
Dr. W. A. Murrill, N. Y. Botanical Garden,
NEW YORK CITY

SCISSORS, FORCEPS, KNIFE, NEEDLE-
HOLDER, CLAMP, DRESSING SHEARS

Refer to 5921.

Handier Than a
Pocket Knife.

Sax
— Medal of Merit, Franklin Institute—

Send for data on latest things.

DR. H. E. WETHERILL’S SPECIALTIES

R. D. 1, PHOENIXVILLE, PA., U. S. A.

FREDERICIA APPARATUS

For the determi-
nation of CO, in
Alveolar Ajr.

New York City

THELCO CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
DRYING OVENS

LARGE DOUBLE WALL THELCO OVEN

In the laboratory as well as in the mill we must con-
If for the work in hand a less
expensive article will do use it by all means. Among our
suitable for the

stantly apply “economics.

products you will find a wide variety
different conditions at hand.

Manufactured by
The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.

8 JoHNson St. Newark, N. J.

Xiv

berries, orchids and rhododendrons, if Dr. Co-
ville’s experiments are applied on a large scale
with continued ‘success.

This treatment gives promise of making easy
the cultivation of all plants requiring an acid soil.

Orchids, azaleas, kalmias and other difficult

plants, Dr. Coville believes, will be made to thrive
in common soils by this means. The discovery is
expected to prove of especial value to nurserymen
in saving them from the necessity of using peaty
lands to raise these flowers.
’ Rhododendrons grow with great luxuriance in
sand mixed with peat, with rotting wood, or with
half rotted leaves, but they die in ordinary garden
soil because its reaction is neutral or alkaline.
Partially rotted leaves are the chief source of soil
acidity. And the rhododendron must have an acid
soil. The alum or aluminum sulphate when first
applied has an acid effect and this acidity is con-
tinued owing to the fact that the lime in the soil,
which would tend to make it neutral, is replaced
in the soil by aluminum and the released lime is
leached away in the form of calcium sulphate.

The growth of the rhododendrons has been stim-
ulated very greatly in this way. In one experi-
ment, Dr. Coville placed three plants in the same
sort of soil. One was untreated, another was
treated with Epsom salts and one with aluminum
sulphate. The untreated one failed to flourish.
The Epsom salts treatment: caused an increase in
diameter of 30 per cent., while the increase due
to the aluminum sulphate treatment was 250 per
cent.

Most American crops are natives of alkaline or
neutral soils, and for that reason the most prom-
inent problem has been to prevent soil acidity by
the addition of lime. This is the first time that an
artificial means of converting an alkaline soil to
acidity has been worked out.

COLD WINTER COMING IS BEST WEATHER
BET

THE coming winter will probably be a cold one,
despite the heralded reports from Norway telling
of warm weather in the Areties. -

Major E. H. Bowie, forecaster of the U. S.
Weather Bureau, says that daily observations re-
ceived by radio from Spitzbergen, Iceland, and
Wrangel Island, as well as from the Amundsen
Polar Expedition north of Alaska indicate tem-
perature conditions contrary to those reported as
prevailing in the eastern Arctie by Consul Ifft at
Bergen, Norway.

The abnormally warm weather said to have
been found in the eastern Aretic is not confirmed

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

by the records received from stations in other sec-
tions of the Circle. Recently there was a big
snow storm on Spitzbergen, and from Wrangel
Island, beyond Bering Straits, reports of exceed-
ingly low temperatures have been made since
August. fiat

About the coming winter, Major Bowie says
that although meteorologists do not make definite
long distance weather forecasts, the chances are
that the approaching winter will be cold. The last
two winters have been abnormally warm, and ac-
cording to the law of probability it is unlikely
that this winter will follow suit.

Whatever effect may have been produced by the
possible greater speed of the equatorial currents
carrying warm waters higher in the Arctic, as
claimed from Norway, this is not likely to modify
the winter in the Northern Hemisphere in general.
U. 5S. Hydrographic officials here say they have
received no reports tending to confirm this greater
warmth of ocean current water and no unusual
ice or water conditions have been found this
season.

ITEMS

Taxicass in Havana use gasoline in preference
to the much cheaper alcohol, because congested
traffic conditions require quick starting ability.

Many a rich Chinese merchant of to-day is
waked up by an American alarm clock, talks over
an American telephone, and rides in an American
motor-car.

THE size and height of rooms in native houses
in Japan are more standardized than the room-
dimensions in the houses of any -other country.

Loné continued exercise of white rats increases
the weight of the heart, kidneys and liver, on an
average of about twenty per cent.

Nosopy on earth has ever seen the other side
of the moon, as that satellite always keeps the
same face toward us.

In 1921 the people of the United States spent
ten dollars a person for candy, nine dollars for
education, fifty cents for chewing-gum, and
twenty-nine cents for health.

RuazeEs, Persian physician of the tenth century,
picked out the site for a hospital in Bagdad by
hanging pieces of meat in different parts of the
city in order to find the place least favorable to
putrefaction.

NEARLY all the varieties of coffee plant in the
western hemisphere are said (to have sprung from
one plant imported by the French at the island
of Martinique in 1717.

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xii

The Fahy Experimental Permeameter

To meet the need of a conveniently
arranged permeameter for making
raagnetic measurements im labora-
tory practice, Mr. Frank P. Fahy
(Consulting Magnetic Engineer) has
designed an outfit that we recom-
mend to Professors of Physics and
Engineering. It comprises a Mag-
netizing Solenoid and Control Box;
and in addition there should be
available a galvanometer, adjustable
resistances and storage battery—all
of which we are ready to supply.

. d Write for Bulletin 990
JAMES Ge BIDDLE, 1211-13 Arch Sif Philadelphia

Third Edition

AMERICAN MEN OF SCIENCE

A BIOGRAPHICAL DIRECTORY
EDITED BY J. McKEEN CATTELL AND DEAN R. BRIMHALL

The third edition of the Directory contains about 9,600 sketches as compared with
4,000 in the first edition and 5,500 in the second edition. The work should be in the
hands of all those who are directly or indirectly interested in scientific work.

(1) Men of science will find it indispensable. It gives not only the names, ad-
dresses, ‘scientific records and the like of their fellow workers, but also an invaluable
summary of the research work of the country, completed and in progress.

(2) Those interested in science, even though they may not be professionally en-
gaged in research work, will find much of interest and value to them in the book.

(3) Executives in institutions of learning and others brought into relations with
scientific men will use the book constantly.

(4) Editors of newspapers and periodicals will find it to be one of the works of
reference that they will need most frequently.

(5) Libraries will find the book to be a necessary addition to their reference

.
anelves.

Price, Ten Dollars, Net, Postage Paid

THE SCIENCE PRESS

Grand Central Terminal, New York, N. Y.

Xiv

chemical reducing properties. It seems to have
no effect upon rubber in the dilution used; at
least, I have never had to replace my rubber hose
connections. There are no objections to glucose
at all that I have found and its inexpensiveness
and the freedom from the annoyance of constant-
ly having to replace a volatile solvent such as
alcohol are unquestioned advantages.’’

FUMIGATING GAS WAVES ITS OWN RED
LANTERN

A NEW fumigating gas which saves human lives
by giving warning of its presence has been de-
veloped by the U. S. Public Health Service in
cooperation with the Chemical Warfare Service of
the War Department, it is announced by a board
appointed to investigate ship fumigation. It will
be used in ridding ships, cars and houses of rats,
bedbugs, lice and other insects.

Hydrocyanie acid gas, the fumigant now used,
has occasionally cost human lives because of lack
of odor, although by killing disease-carrying ver-
min it has prevented serious
sweeping over the country.

The weeping is done by the potential victim,
not by his relatives, when the new gas is used, the
expert explained. Cyanogen chloride, a very ac-
tive tear gas and a by-product of war work, is
mixed with the hydrocyanic acid gas to form the
new combination for fumigating use. The new
poison is easily detected as doses too weak to de-
liver a knockout produce severe weeping. It is
harmless to foods, tobacco, fabrics, leather, and
has no corrosive action on metals that may be on
board. The gas does its work quickly and then
dissipates rapidly. It costs but little more than
the fumigants which are
handle.

epidemics from

more dangerous to

Hydrocyanic acid gas and sulphur dioxide are
the gases which have been used largely in ship
fumigation, the board’s report explained. Sulphur
dioxide, although it gives warning of its presence
in time to allow the escape of any person within
the quarters where it is used, is costly, harmful
to clothing and foodstuffs, and requires from 5 to
12 hours exposure. Hydrocyanie acid gas is
cheaper and more poisonous than the sulphur di-
oxide and does not affect food, clothing, or other
articles. But it is odorless and non-irritating
and leads to fatalities due to failure to detect its
presence in time.

COMBINED DYES KILL BACTERIA
“‘DyE bacteria and they die’’ is one way of
expressing a discovery that Professor John W.

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

Churchman, of Yale University, and surgeon-in-
chief of the New Haven Hospital, has reported to
the National Academy of Sciences.

““Different kinds of aniline dyes have high bac-
tericidal power,’’ Dr. Churchman said. ‘‘By mix-
ing two kinds of dyes of opposite selective power
a mixture results that readily kills all bacteria.
The two dyes may be used together in a mixture
of this kind, and the strength of one fortifies the
weakness of the other. This establishes a new
principle in dye therapeuties.’’ . é

In 1912 Dr. Churchman discovered that the dye,
called gentian violet, kills certain kinds of bac-
teria even when it is as weak as one part in a
million. This fact was applied in treating many
kinds of infections. ‘

Now Dr. Churchman has announced the finding
of another aniline dye, acid fuchsin, which kills
the bacteria which the gentian violet spares and
spares those which the gentian violet kills. The
mixture of the two dyes, which has a royal purple
color, spares none of the bacteria.

““Contrary to what is usually held, dyes may be
effective against bacteria even though they do
not stain them,’’ he said. ‘‘ Bacteria may also
be stained by dyes without injury.’’

He has shown, moreover, that the mechanism by
which dyes ‘‘kill’’ bacteria depends not on their
ability really to kill them, but to paralyze their
reproductive capacity.

ITEMS

Aw American, William Wheelwright, introduced
the telegraphic system into Chili, and organized
the first steamship service between the west coast
of South America and Europe.

‘Many rice crops of the South to-day are di-
rectly descended from a _ pocketful of rice
smuggled out of Italy by Thomas Jefferson.

THOMAS JEFFERSON, author of the Declaration
of Independence, and third president of the United
States, was also an astronomer, physicist, en-
gineer, anatomist, geologist, zoologist, botanist
and paleontologist.

LEONARDO DA VINCI, famous painter of the
woman with the million-dollar smile, was the best
physiologist of his time and made anatomical
drawing of human bodies which he dissected with
his own hands.

THE United States imported 43,365,763 bunches
of bananas in 1921, but this fruit was once sold
in this country as a tropical curiosity at ten cents
apiece with each individual banana wrapped in
tin foil.

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

SCIENCE SERVICE NEWS BULLETIN

Science Service, Washington, D. C1

HELIUM HUNTING IN THE MILKY WAY

By Isasrt M. Lewis,
U. 8S. Naval Observatory

HELIUM, our wonderful non-inflammable balloon
gas, does more than lift airships without danger
from explosion. Much is being learned of the
size, structure and form of the universe by. a
study of the stars containing incandescent helium.

Stars of the helium type give light which when
broken up-by the spectroscope shows prominently
the bright yellow lines of helium, indicating that
this gas is present conspicuously in their atmos-
phere. They are excessively hot and massive and
bluish-white in color, and they occur in abundance
—often as double, triple or multiple stars en-
meshed in nebulosity—in the constellation of
Orion. Hence their name of Orion stars.

It was found some time ago that comparatively
near us in space, that is, so near to our solar
system that light traveling 186,000 miles per sec-
ond would only take a few hundred years to
teach it, there exists a local cluster or group of
these helium stars in the constellation of Orion.
In fact, our sun is a star in the Milky Way and
within this extensive group. It is about fifty light
years to the north of the central plane of that
great galaxy.

Enormous dark tracts of nebulosity in that
thickly star-strewn space, located in the constel-
lations of Centaurus: and Scorpio and shutting
off light from stars beyond, lie between 650,000
and 975,000 light years from the solar system.
This is about the greatest distance that has been
found for any type of celestial object and shows
how enormous is the extent of the Milky Way
along its greatest axis.

Because all the helium stars in the Orion group
are well within the range of vision of the naked
eye or at most no fainter than stars of the
seventh magnitude which lie just beyond the
naked-eye vision, it was assumed that there were
few, if any, fainter helium stars lying beyond this
group.

Recent investigations made at the Harvard Col-
lege Observatory and based upon data furnished

1¥For a statement concerning Science Service
and the reasons for printing its‘news bulletins in
this place, see the issue of Science for Novem-
ber 24.

by the new Henry Draper Catalogue, however,
reveal that there are many faint helium stars be-
yond and independent of this local group. These
fainter stars are confined closely to the vicinity
of the Milky Way, lying within a belt only ten
degrees wide on either side of it. Some of these
stars must be at distances of thousands of light-
years from the earth. It. has been found also
that the distribution of helium stars is not uni-
form along the Milky Way. In some regions they
are grouped more densely than in others and the
southern sky is particularly rich in stars of this
class.

Just as the Columbuses and Magellans by
means of their ships made voyages into the un-
known regions of our earth and brought back
new knowledge of the size and shape of the world
on which we live, so these explorers of the skies
with their spectroscopes seeking out the helium
stars are adding to our knowledge of the star-lit
universe of which our planet is a part.

NEW MUSEUM .INTERPRETS AMERICAN
ABORIGINAL LIFE

New light from all directions breaks in upon
the life of the aborigines of the Western World
through the study of the vast collections of the
Museum of the American Indian, Heye Founda-
tion, New York, which was opened free to the
general public November 15.

This is the only museum in the world devoted
exclusively to the preservation of the records of
the races which were living in the Western World
when Columbus reached these shores, and con-
tain 1,800,000 specimens. The great problems to
which it is dedicated include the unveiling of the
mystery of the origin of the so-called Red Men
themselves. It is within the range of possi-
bility, in the opinion of George G. Heye, the
founder of the museum, that this goal will be
reached.

The building of the Museum of the American
Indian is situated in Broadway at 155th street,
close to the museums of the Hispanic Society and
of the American Numismatic Society and the
quarters of the American Geographical Society.
The rearing of the whole important group was
due primarily to the zeal of Archer M. Hunting-
ton, who gave the site for the Museum of the
American Indian and as one of its trustees gave
liberally to its building fund.

x SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

The specimens are shown on three of the four
floors and at the top of the building is a com-
modious work room given to the cleaning and
preparation of the collections for display. Al-
though this museum is devoted to delving into the
past, it is conducted in accordance with the prin-
ciples of modern business efficiency. The in-
stallations are in the latest types of cases. Al-
teady the storage vaults in the basement are
filled, and many of the bulky specimens which
can not be shown at present, are housed in an-
other building which is almost as large as the
museum itself.

There is a novel system of installation, intro-
duced for the first time in the United States,
* through which the public can see what is not in
open view without asking for it. Under many
cases, there are drawers which the visitors may
pull out and view objects under their glass tops.
The students and the research investigators also
have access to the collections in storage, all of
which have been systematically catalogued by the
director himself. There is not a bit of bone or a
potsherd in the whole institution which can not
be instantly found for purposes of comparison
and research.

If some one should come in with a fanciful
theory that the Australian bushmen and the
American Indians had some relationships because
both used boomerangs, he would see that such
a comparison did not hold good very far. The
Indian rabbit stick is not a boomerang, although
it looks a little like that famous weapon, be-
cause it really does not come back. Fact can
thus be quickly separated from fancy by bring-
ing the objects themselves quickly to the study
of the investigator.

‘<The trustees of the Museum,’’ said Mr. Heye,
‘¢wish to make it clear that the objects which are
assembled here are of great practical value, aside
from the historical and archeological interest at-
taching to them. This is realized, for instance,
by many manufacturers of textiles who have been
making use of ideas gained from our collections.
They have been sending their designers here even
before the museum was officially opened and they
inform us that they have found the inspiration of
many new designs that were adapted from what
was seen here. We think also that the textile in-
dustry will find data to guide it in dyeing opera-
tions, as many of the objects here, centuries old,
were dyed with vegetable colors which to all ap-
pearances are as fresh as they were when first
applied. _We believe also that, although modern
machinery has outdistanced the Indian craftsmen
in speed, the industries of the twentieth century

will find many hints in the synoptic exhibitions
of basketry, ceramics and carving which we have
installed. Im every way the desire to serve the
public is uppermost.’’

The board of the museum consists of Harmon
W. Hendricks, James B. Ford, F. Kingsbury Cur-
tiss, Archer M. Huntington, Minor C. Keith, Clar-
ence B. Moore, F. K. Seward, and Samuel Riker,
Jr.; Mr..Heye, also a trustee, is chairman.

AIRPLANE CAMERA SURVEYS MISSISSIPPI
DELTA

For the first time the great delta of the Father
of Waters, the Mississippi, has been surveyed with
true accuracy, is aunounced by the U. S. Coast
and Geodetic Survey. From the air, by using
cameras, that great fan-shaped marshy region
stretching 600 miles into the Gulf of Mexico was
charted, and important shifts of land and water
were discovered.

Formerly it was necessary to survey it from
boats, using tall signals and special ladders and
tripods, on account of the prevalence of marshes
and tall vegetation. Much of it is inaccessible
on foot. For these reasons the topography of
this area has always been largely a matter of
guesswork on the part of surveyors and engineers.
A seaplane, camera and men were furnished for
the survey by the navy, and pictures were taken
of the delta from.a height of 8,000 feet. Over a
thousand photographs were subsequently formed
into a mosaic or composite picture.

Many totally unknown lakes and ponds were
discovered by the aviators. Old stream-beds and
changes due to over-flowing banks could be traced.
New sub-deltas were found that had formed since
the last survey. Some places existing on the last
chart have either ceased to exist or have altered
completely in form.

The most important of these changes is in the
vicinity of the South Pass, the main entrance to
the river. Former surveys showed the west bank
of this pass as a marshy area extending out into
the gulf for a distance of over four miles. Now,
according to this recent photographic mapping, it
is merely a narrow strip, so narrow that it is giv-
ing the engineers considerable concern as a new
‘“crevasse’’ may break through at any time, com-
pletely altering the mouth of the river.

Owing to the many forces constantly at work
on the delta, changing the contour of the coast
line, producing entirely new areas and completely
wiping out others, it has been necessary to sur-
vey it frequently.. With aerial photography, this
can be accomplished in much less time and with
more accuracy than by the old methods. As it is

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xi

CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MEDICAL COLLEGE

First Avenue and Twenty-eighth Street
NEW YORK CITY

The first year of the course is also
offered at Ithaca, N. Y., subsequent
years at New York City only.

For Information Address

THE SECRETARY

Research Prize of $1,000

The Ellen Richards Research Prize
is offered for award in the year 1923.

Theses by women based on indepen-
dent laboratory research are eligible
and must reach

for competition

the Committee before February 25,
1923.

For circulars of information and
application blank, apply to

DR. LILIAN WELSH,

Goucher College Baltimore, Maryland

For further information apply to
the Secretary, Mrs. Samuel F. Clarke,
Williamstown, Mass.

————l

Northwestern University
MEDICAL SCHOOL

Situated in Chicago in close proximity to im-
portant Hospitals with an abundance of clinical
material.

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS—Two yeare of College credit in-
cluding, a satisfactory course in Physics, Chemistry, Biology
or Zoology, and French or German.

COURSE OF STUDY—leading to the degree of Doctor of Medi-
cine—Four years in the Medical School and a fifth year
either as Interne in an approved hospital or devoted to re-
search in some branch of Medical Science.

GRADUATE INSTRUCTION—in courses leading to the degree of
Master of Arta or Doctor of Philosophy.

RESEARCH FOUNDATION—The James A. Patten Endowment
for Research affords unusual opportunities for advanced
students of Medical Science to pursue special investigations.

RESEARCH FELLOWSHIPS—Four fellowships of the value of
$500 each are awarded annually to promote scholarly re-
search,

| Tuition fees of the first and second years, $190.00 a year.

The third and fourth years, $200.00 a year.

For information address

C. W. PATTERSON, Registrar

2421 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, Illinois

The Microscope
By SIMON H. GAGE of Cornell University
13th Edition, Published December, 1920

In this edition, special emphasis is put upon the Dark-Field!
Microscope. POSTPAID $3.00.

COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.

Marine Biological Laboratory
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Biological Material

4637 OF be 1. ZOOLOGY. Preserved mate-
rial of all types of animals for class
work and for the museum.

2. EMBRYOLOGY. Stages of
some invertebrates, fishes (includ-
ing Acanthias, Amia and Lepidos-
tus), Amphibia, reptiles and some
mammals.

3. BOTANY. Preserved mate-
rial of Algae, Fungi, Liverworts,
Mosses, Ferns and Seed Plants.

4. MICROSCOPE SLIDES in Bacteriology,
Botany and Zoology.

5. LIFE HISTORIES, Germination Studies,
and Natural History Groups.
Catalogues furnished on application to
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator
WOODS HOLE, MASSACHUSETTS

xu ; SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

a region of practically no difference in height
such as would cause errors in seale, it is admir-
ably suited to this method of surveying,
VACCINE. THROAT SPRAY FOR
PNEUMONIA

i? niay soon be possible to spray your throat
and so become immune to pneumonia infection.
Dr. Russell L. Cecil and Gustav I. Steffen of the
Hygienic Laboratory of the U. S. Public Health
Service, working at Bellevue Hospital in New
York City, have completed experiments on mon-
keys that suggest that considerable immunity
against virulent pneumonia can be obtained by the
mere spraying of the throat with pneumococcus
vaccine.

Monkeys can be completely protected against
pneumonia by injections of the vaccine under the
skin, and recent tests prove that injecting the
vaccine directly into the trachea or windpipe, lead-
ing from larynx to lungs, is just as completely
effective. Although throat spraying did not pro-
duce complete immunity in the case of monkeys,
the bacteriologists believe that it may prove ef-
fective when used on a human being. They found
that monkeys when having their throats sprayed
closed the opening into the windpipe and the vac-
cine did not get a fair chance to act. The human
trachea could easily be reached by the spray and
immunity produced.

Protection against pneumonia producad by
‘spraying or injection of vaccine into the wind-
pipe probably extends only as far as the cells
that would be first attached by the microbes pro-
ducing pneumonia, as tests indicate that a pro-
tective substance is not formed in the blood as in
the case of smallpox or similar immunization.
Further tests to amplify the experimental data
and perfect the methods are to be undertaken in
order that practical use of protection against
pneumonia can be achieved at the earliest possible
time and the greatest possible safety.

During the war, Dr. Cecil and collaborators
tested the prophylactic value of pneumococeus
vaccine on recruits in the U. S. Army and found
that the cases of pneumonia were few in the or-
ganizations that were treated with vaccine, in-
jections under the skin. There were some severe
reactions at the time of the inoculations, however,
and further research was thought advisable before
active immunization against pneumonia would be
practical in civil life. For this reason experiments
leading to the spraying method were undertaken.

The yaccine used consists of a salt solution sus-
pension of killed pneumococci, the microbes that

produce pneumonia. As many as 120,000,000,000
pneumococci are used in a single vaccination ex-
periment.

In 1920 pneumonia was responsible for 137.3
deaths out of every 100,000 people in the United
States, and in fatality it was outranked by only
tuberculosis and organic heart disease. In 1918,
when influenza deaths mounted to the high total
of 300.8 per 100,000, frequent pneumonia as an .
after effect caused a pneumonia death rate in that
year of 286.2. =

Through the use of pneumococcus vaccine and
further experimentation, it is probable that these
high rates will be greatly reduced when the vac-
cination against pneumonia is practiced widely.
Eventually it may even be possible to control this
respiratory disease as completely as smallpox, pub-
lic health experts believe.

GLUCOSE. RECOMMENDED AS. AUTO

RADIATOR ANTI-FREEZE CHEMICAL

GLUCOSE is recommended as a preventive of
automobile radiator freezing by Dr. Charles H.
LaWall, Department of Theoretical Pharmacy,
Philadelphia College of Pharmacy and Science.
‘Por four winters past I have successfully em-
ployed commercial glucose with unquestioned ef-
ficaey and with no detrimental results whatever,’’
explaned Dr, LeWab,

He be“eves that glucose is superior to anti-
freezing mixtures containing denatured or wood
alcohol, glycerine, or some chemical salt such as
calcium chloride. The ordinary confectioners’
white glucose is preferred, although on one oe-
casion he used the glucose sold for table use.

The amount necessary is between 15 and 20 per
cent. or about a pint and a half of glucose to a
gallon of water. The glucose may be mixed with
enough warm water to completely dissolve it and
then added to the remainder of the water in the
radiator. No further addition or attention is
necessary except to replace the water lost by
evaporation. When warm weather arrives the
radiator should be emptied, rinsed out and filled
up with plain water.

“Tn addition to using the mixture practically
for four years with satisfactory results I also
performed some experiments to determine the con-
gealing point of such a mixture,’’ said Dr. La-
Wall. ‘‘T found that it begins to get slushy at
about 10 degrees above zero Fahrenheit, but that
it does not actually freeze and harden even at
6 degrees below zero Fahrenheit.’’

**Glucose does not corrode nor affect metals;
in fact, it prevents such action by virtue of its

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT ix

SCIENCE NEWS

LIFE ORIGINATED WHERE TIDES EBB
AND FLOW
Science Service

In a shallow brackish water, warmed by the
sun to temperatures such as occur in tidepools
of to-day, the forerunners of living things as we
knew them must have originated, Dr. D. T. Mae-
Dougal, director of the department of botanical
research of the Carnegie Institution of Wash-
ington, told the Royal Canadian Institute in
describing what the scientist knows of the be-
ginnings of life.

‘The first form of life on this globe must have
been minute masses of primordial jellies,’’ said
Dr. MacDougal. ‘‘The beginnings of life could
not have been in the monotonus immensity of the
seas, which are really a uniformly salt solution
with but minute variations. Where the sea met
the land, however, many new combinations were
possible. There was no soil on the land, for this
is a product of plants and animals. The land-
scape was of bare rocks, sand and water. Rapid
alternations of sunshine and clouds with abun-
dant rains would have characterized such a time,
and voleanoes may have belched out earth encir-
cling volumes of ashes and gases, some of which
would come down with the rains. Hydrocarbons,
ammonia, hydrogen phosphide and other necessary
compounds might thus have been brought to-
gether accidentally but frequently with the result
that there may have been formed countless masses
of matter which might have become the basis of
changes upon which life might be developed.

“‘TIn any case the compounds formed, which
might have been jellies, did not fall into the way
of beginning life as we know it until it became
the seat of changes by which organic compounds
were formed. For this to have happened, the
colloidal or jelly condition must be assumed.
This formation of additional masses of jelly and
retaining them would go on until a certain size
was reached, when fission or division would en-
sue as a drop of water too large divides into two
smaller ones. This would have been the begin-
nings of growth and reproduction which are to-
day the fundamental phases of biology.’’

The basis of all life from moss to men is proto-
plasm, a jelly-like substance, said Dr. Mac-
Dougal. The way in which this delicate jelly
acts is universal, but its make-up is infinitely

complex, although all protoplasm is made up of
four general classes of substances, albumins,
gums or mucilages, lipoids or fatty substances,
and soaps. :

“Somewhere in the ever more complex web of
life the sun-traps or screens of coloring matter,
which absorb and use the energy of certain rays
of light in running the protoplasmie mill of
plant life were made,’’ said Dr. MacDougal.
““These may have been of various colors, absorb-
ing different patterns of the spectrum. The type
of screen which has survived is that of leaf-
green or chlorophyll. The chlorophyll of the
plant cell absorbs radiations of certain wave-
lengths and the derived energy is ultimately used
in the formation of sugars, and other chemical
combinations. Transformations quickly follow,
which result in nitrogenous substances. These
products of the leaf mill are absolutely funda-
mental to the existence of the living world.

“‘The formation of coal beds was the final
result of this photosynthesis of bygone ages, and
when the accumulated remains of millions of
years of the activity of vegetation is used the
race will face the sternest necessity which it has
yet encountered. We may discover other coal
deposits, find new subterranean lakes of oil, get
gasoline from shales, make use of corn cobs and
seaweed, convert the power of our streams and
harness the tides, but these are but petty econo-
mies deferring the day when, all of these proving
inadequate, the major activities of the race,
civilization in its present movement, and indeed
the actual existence of man, will depend upon
direct use of the energy of sunlight.’’

CIVILIZATION MUST FAIL UNLESS SOLAR ~*
ENERGY IS UTILIZED
Science Service

Our great civilization is ‘‘a most squandrous
and profligate one and is using the principal of
its legacy in numberless new ways,’’ Dr. H. A.
Spoehr will declare in the forthcoming issue of
the Journal of Industrial and Engineering Chem-
istry. Dr. Spoehr has been working for many
years at Carmel, California, in the Coastal Lab-
oratory of the Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton, on the ‘question of how plants are able to
make use of the energy of the sun’s rays, and he
has come to the conclusion that the solution of

x SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

this problem is the task of the twentieth century
and demands the cooperative effort of scientists
in all fields.

““The destiny of civilization is guided by and
reflects the amount of available energy,’’ Dr.
Spoehr will say. ‘‘When coal and oil are ex-
hausted the daily ration of solar energy will rep-
resent almost the entire means of livelihood; our
mushroom civilization must pass like the historic
empires of the past and we may expect the re-
appearance in the world once more of galley slaves
and serfs.’’

There is as yet no adequate substitute known
for the fossil fuel that we have been using so
lavishly during the last half century. A year’s
consumption of coal at the present rate. repre-
sents the accumulation of hundreds of years. The
date of depletion of the petroleum supply of the
United States is clearly in sight. Water power
would be insufficient, even if we could use every
drop that fell in the country for running ma-
chinery. Alcohol seems the most promising sub-
stitute for mineral oils as a motor fuel and this
can be made in any quantity by the fermentation
of various kinds of vegetable matter. But this
in any ease requires the setting aside of large
areas of land for the purpose. If, for instance,
corn were to be used for the manufacture of fuel
alcohol it would require more than four states the
size of Ohio to grow the corn necessary to pro-
duce the seven and a half billion gallons of alco-
hol that would be needed to replace the five billion
gallons of gasoline now consumed annually. But
we can not afford to reduce our food to furnish
our fuel.

Nature’s method of utilizing solar energy by
means of the green leaf is, as Dr. Spoehr will
point out, ‘exceedingly inefficient and wasteful.’’
But ‘‘it is the duty of the scientist to learn the
precise manner in which this is accomplished. He
need not be timid about competing with nature.
’ He has many cases to his credit of surpassing the
processes of nature both in efficiency and relia-
bility. The most promising outlook for success
in this field would be offered through an organ-
ization by which information from the various
allied fields can be collected and focussed on the
chemical and energy changes taking place in the
process of photosynthesis. ’’

PEAT MAY SERVE AS LOCAL
EMERGENCY FUEL
Science Service
Factne a cold winter with many consumers
none too. certain of their coal supply, the country

has had its attention called to the fuel resources
of the country as never before. People who
have thought of peat as a product of the bogs
of Ireland and a poor substitute for wood and
coal are beginning to learn that this excellent
fuel lies in rich deposits in New England and
the lake states, the very regions expected to be
hardest hit by the present coal shortage.

About 20,000,000 tons- of peat are used in
Europe every year, but in the United States there”
are deposits estimated to contain 14,000,000,000
tons, an amount sufficient to supply Europe’s
present annual rate of use of this material for
700 years, it has been estimated by geological
experts.

A large part of this peat is well adapted to
power production or for use at the bog for the
generation of electricity. The enormous de-
posits in New England could be used by the lime
and textile industries cheaper than coal, experts
believe, while those private consumers living near
the peat fields could be economically supplied
with peat for open grate fires, fall and spring
furnace fuel, kindling and auxiliary fuel for use
with coal during the severe winter months, and
cooking* range fuel.

Peat represents the arrested decay of vegetable
matter. When plant remains fall upon drained
soil they are promptly attacked by bacteria and
soon disappear, but when the plant falls into
water the change is different from decay when
exposed to air. The acids formed slow up the
decay by destroying the bacteria.

Peat is produced by this arresting of .the de-
composition of roots, trunks of trees, twigs,
shrubs, mosses and other vegetation saturated or
covered with water. It contains a large propor-
tion of the carbon of the original plant material.
It is almost always a surface deposit, formed
under conditions favorable to luxuriant growth
of plants and their incomplete decay.

Most coals were once peats, but it does not
follow that the peats will necessarily become coal
in course of time. When the peat is formed, car-
bonization is largely stopped, unless it starts
again and the peat bed is buried beneath muds,
sandstones, limestones, or other deposits of sedi-
ment and subjected to heat and pressure, coal
will not be created. A twelve or fourteen inch
seam of coal is equivalent to a good peat bog
twenty feet deep. The largest peat deposit in
this country is in Minnesota and covers nearly
4,000 square miles or about 2,500,000 acres.

This fuel has a higher heat value than wood,
is more easily ignited than coal, requires less

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xi

CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MEDICAL COLLEGE

First Avenue and Twenty-eighth Street
NEW YORK CITY

The first year of the course is also
offered at Ithaca, N. Y., subsequent
years at New York City only.

For Information Address

THE SECRETARY

The Microscope
By SIMON H. GAGE of Cornell University
13th Edition, Published December, 1920

In this edition, special emphasis is put upon the Dark-Field
Microscope. POSTPAID $3.00.

COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.

Marine Biological Laboratory

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Biological Material

<7 Pte, _I. ZOOLOGY. Preserved mate-
& » rial of all types of animals for class
work and for the museum.

2. EMBRYOLOGY. Stages of
some invertebrates, fishes (includ-
ing Acanthias, Amia and Lepidos-
tus), Amphibia, reptiles and some
mammals. s
_3: BOTANY. Preserved mate-
rial of Algae, Fungi, Liverworts,
Mosses, Ferns and Seed Plants.

4. MICROSCOPE SLIDES in Bacteriology,
Botany and Zoology.

5. LIFE HISTORIES, Germination Studies,
and Natural History Groups.

Catalogues furnished on application to
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator
WOODS HOLE, MASSACHUSETTS

CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
Publications More Recenily Issued:

313. Hall, H. M., and F. L. Long. Rubber-content of
North American Plants. Octavo, 65 pp., 3 pls.--$1.00

314. Loftfield,,J. V. G. The Behavior of Stomata. c-

oO
tavo, 104 pp., 16 pls., 54 figures__-__------------- ae

315. Clements, F. E. Aeration and Air-conent: The Role
of Oxygen in Root Activity. Octavo, 183 pp., $2.00

316. Weaver, J. E., F. C. Jean, and J. W. Crist. De-
velopment and Activities of Roots of Crop Plants.
Octavo, 122 pp., 14 plates, 42 figures__---_-_---- $2.00

317. Hayford, John F, Effects of Winds and of Baro-
metric Pressures upon the Great Lakes.
189M pp yal Om plateswe eee eee ee ee $2.75

318. Wyckoff, Ralph W. G. The Analytical Expression
the Results of the Theory of Space-Groups. Octavo,
SSO) oo Hy CH) SERERRERY eee ee $3.25

319. Cooper, W. S. The Broad-Sclerophyll Vegetation of

California: An Ecological Study of the Chaparral
and its Related Communities. Octavo, 124 PP., 31
Dlatess SS eph eS 1ines Wee eee eos seein ranean $2.00

320. Castle, W. E. Genetic Studies of Rabbits and Rats.
Octavo, 55 pp., 2 plates, 7 figures______-_____- $1.00

321. Case, E. C. New Reptiles and Stegocephalians from
the Upper Triassic of Western Texas. Quarto, 84
DD-sl 4eplatessmosi heures ee eee ee ee 52.00

Orders for above publications may be made through book-
sellers or sent directiy to the Institution.
All cornmunications should be addressed to:
CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON
WASHINGTON, D. C.

Publications of
The Philippine Bureau of Science

AMPHIBIANS AND TURTLES OF THE PHILIPPINE
ISLANDS. By E. H. Taylor. 193 pages, 17 plates, and
9 text figures; postpaid $1.00.

THE SNAKES OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. By
E. H. Taylor. 316 pages, 37 plates, and 32 text figures:
postpaid $2.50.

THE LIZARDS OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. By
E. H. Taylor. 272 pages, 23 plates, and 53 text figures;
postpaid $2.50. In press.

VEGETATION OF PHILIPPINE MOUNTAINS. By W.

- Brown. 434 pages, 41 plates, and 30 text figures;
postpaid $2.50.

INDEX TO THE GENERA OF BIRDS. By R. C. Mc-
Gregor. 185 pages postpaid $1.00.

SPECIES BLANCOANAE. By E. D. Merrill.
postpaid $2.25.

AN_INTERPRETATION OF RUMPHIUS’S HERBA-
RIUM AMBOINENSE. By E. D. Merrill. 596 pages,
2 maps; postpaid $3.00.

THE PHILIPPINE JOURNAL OF SCIENCE, a monthly
(no longer issued in sections), per year $5.00.

424 pages;

A list of the publications of the Philippine Bureau of
Science and a sample copy of the Philippine Journal of
Science will be sent upon request.

Subscriptions and orders for publications should be sent to

THE BUSINESS MANAGER

Philippine Journal of Science
Manila, P. I.

Bureau of Science,

Xil
draught. Peat burns freely when dry, and makes
a hot fire. It is lower in heat value per pound

than coal but it gives out proportionately more
heat, due to its relatively higher oxygen content.

There is no soot from a peat fire, but if not
handled properly a light smoke carrying the odor
of burning leaves may get into the room. Peat
makes fine kindling for a hard coal fire and is
especially good to wake up such a fire quickly
without shaking down the furnace. If a few
blocks of peat are thrown on top of the fire and
the draughts opened, surprising results are ob-
tained.

Too much of this fuel should not be put on at
atime. Peat is about twice as bulky as coal and
can not be transported long distances at a price
that is economical, but it does offer a good emer-
gency substitute for coal and is especially useful
as a supplementary fuel for use with coal.

OYSTER CHANGES SEX THREE TIMES A
YEAR
Science Service

THE remarkable and long disputed changes in
the sex of tthe edible oyster are settled by re-
searches of Dr. J. H. Orton, of the British Marine
Biological Association at Plymouth, and Dr. R.
Sparck, of the Danish Biological Station at
Limfjord. Working independently, both these
naturalists announced that these bivalves may be
male, then female, then male again all within one
year. The rate of change, Dr. Sparck believes,
depends largely upon the temperature of the
water.

The oyster either never has possessed, or more
probably has discarded, all the trappings of sex.
There is a single genital gland and a single duct.
At one time male cells are produced and dis-
charged into the sea-water in clouds. At another
time egg cells are produced and are fertilized by
male cells drawn in from the surrounding water.

There is no difference in the external appear-
ance of the oyster in its male and female phases,
although if the shells be opened, microscopical
examination of the sexual gland shows the dif-
ference between mobile sperm cells and the large
inactive egg cells. When it is sexually mature
for the first time the oyster is‘male. Next, after
a varying period, it becomes a female, and very
soon after the discharge of the embryos it again
begins to liberate male cells. One oyster has been
known to change three times in a single season.

Dr. Sparck, however, thinks that the duration
of the male stage depends on the temperature.
The colder it is the longer the male stage lasts.

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

The oysters in Southern Europe have been found
to begin breeding at an earlier age than those of
Northern Europe. Oysters in the northern waters
can produce young only every third or fourth
year, and therefore only three or four times in
their whole life.

USEFUL POWDERS FROM WASTE LIQUIDS
A. C. 8S. News Service

THE atomizer has gone into business for itself
and is making big dividends out of wastes. Such
evil-looking liquids, as the greasy waters from
fish oil plants, waste sulfite liquors from paper
mills, and the waters in which raw-wool has been
washed, yield wealth when forced through the
atomizer.

Walter H. Dickerson, a member of the New
York Section of the American Chemical Society,
gives a description of the recently invented ma-
chinery which reduces materials from a liquid to
a dry powder condition. The process is described,
briefly, as one of ‘‘reducing the material to be
dried to a finely divided state by spraying or
atomizing; exposing the spray to heated air or
gas and quickly effecting the evaporation of the
moisture contents.’’

Mr. Dickerson believes that some day the Chi-
cago River may be run through such a machine,
to the greater beauty of the stream itself and to
good economic advantage. ‘‘Indeed, this would
be entirely possible and advantageous,’’ said he,
“Gf the waste heat that escapes up the flues of
manufacturing plants in the industrial district of
Chicago near the river could be utilized for dry-
ing operations. ’’

In paper manufacture, chemists have found,
only about fifty per cent. of the wood used in
making pulp goes into the paper. The remaining
portion of the wood passes off in the waste waters
from the plant. Analyses showed that these
waste waters contained high proportions of
lignin—the adhesive material in wood. This is
not required in paper but is very useful for the
making of binders—cores for use in making molds
used in foundries, and in making coal briquettes.
The spray drying process makes the recovery of
the lignin a profitable ‘operation.

The waste waters from fish oil plants yield
materials good for fertilizer and for poultry food.
Waste waters from wool cleansing plants give
grease, nitrogen and potash. Other industrial
uses of the process include a new method of
making starch, in that it can be reduced to the
form of fine powder, through the atomizer and

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

xiii

THELCO CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
DRYING OVENS

f

LARGE DOUBLE WALL THELCO OVEN

In the laboratory as well as in the mill we must con-
stantly apply economics. If for the work in hand a less
expensive article will do, use it by all means. Among our
products you will find a wide variety suitable for the
different conditions at hand.

Manufactured by

The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.
8 JoHNson Sr. Newark, N. J.

By means of sliding-contacts the resistance value of

JAGABI RHEOSTATS

can be varied from zero to full rating in exceedingly

small steps.

They are eminently suited for, and are largely used

in Educational, Research and Industrial Laboratories.
Write for Illustrated Bulletin § 980

JAMES G. BIDDLE, Puivapecenia
1211-13 ARCH STREET

WANTED
Formulae and Processes for Chemicals
Ad-
dress: G, clo Science, Garrison, N. Y.

CHART MAKING

University and college teachers desiring charts
made up to suit their own special needs, from
figures of their own choosing and arranging, in
black and white, or in colors, at relatively small
cost, are invited to correspond with:

T. W. THOMAS
Spear Laboratory,

used in the Pharmaceutical ‘Trade.

Oberlin, Ohio

Abbe Refractometer

IMMEDIATE DELIVERY FROM
i STOCK

Abbe Refractometer___$220.00 f.0.b.N.Y.

Ordinary Thermometer_ 2.00
$222.00

Dipping Refractometer_$152.00

Auxiliary Prism_____-~— 6.50
Heating Trough A__-_ 16.50
Certified Thermometer_ 9.50
Stem Thermometer____ 1.50

$186.00

CARL ZEISS

HaroLtD M. BENNETT
U. S. AGENT
153 West 23rd St., New York City

Xiv

drier, cheaper and faster than by old methods of
drying.

Wastes from the sugar mills of Cuba and
Louisiana are being made into stock foods and
the pineapple juices which heretofore were
allowed to run into the ocean from the canning
plants in Hawaii, are now being preserved and
converted into fine sugars. In the manufacture
of powdered milk one of the difficulties encoun-
tered has been that of temperature control. The
product often has a burnt or ‘‘caramel’’ taste.
By the spray drying process this has been elim-
inated.

MAKING THE DESERT SAFER
U. S. Geological Survey

To those who have never been on a desert the
word ‘‘desert’’ conveys the impression of a
barren waste incapable of supporting life, a
perilous stretch of waterless, lifeless land that
separates areas of fertile land on either side of
it. The word ‘‘desert,’’ however, may have
diverse meanings, for some deserts are much more
inhospitable than others. Travel through ’ any
wide area of desert is nevertheless fraught with
danger, for in such areas springs, wells and
water-holes are few and far between, and our
American deserts have, year after year, taken
their toll of human life. The recent work of the
United States Geological Survey in mapping cer-
tain desert areas in the southwest and in erecting
at suitable places signposts giving directions and
distances to springs and waterholes is therefore
of special interest. In 1917 the Geological
Survey, under authority contained in an act of
Congress making a ‘small special appropriation,
erected signposts in the most dangerous parts of
our southwestern deserts, giving directions and
distances from watering place to watering place.
The results of this life-saving work of the Geo-
logical Survey are being published in a series of
guidebooks.

One of these guidebooks, the third of the series,
by C. P. Ross, has just been published. It
describes desert watering places in the lower Gila
region, Arizona, including approximately the tri-
angular area between Phoenix, Yuma and Parker.
It contains three large maps of the region,
shaded to indicate the relief and showing the
location of the roads, the wells, springs and other
watering places, and the signposts erected by the
Geological Survey. The maps are the most com-
plete and accurate yet published for this region.
The relief shading brings out strongly the larger
features of the topography and makes the maps

SCILENCE—SUPPLEMENT

readily understandable, even by those who have
no technical training.

The paper contains detailed logs of the roads
in the region, including not only those of the prin-
cipal automobile routes but those of branch roads
that lead to remote parts of the desert, which are
seldom visited and little known. These logs show
in heavy type the points at which water can be
obtained. There is also a list of watering places,
with brief information as to their location and
availability.

The introductory part of the guidebook con-
tains detailed information regarding difficulties
encountered in traveling through the desert and
suggestions for surmounting them. Any one who
intends to travel in this region should consult one
of these guidebooks. Copies of this publication,
which is numbered Water-Supply Paper 490-C,
and entitled ‘‘Routes to desert watering places
in the lower Gila region, Arizona,’’ have been
sent to the post offices, the chambers of com-
merce, and the principal hotels and garages in
the region and can be consulted at many of these
places.’?

SCIENCE ITEMS

Science Service
DentaL of a rumor spreading through this
country that the International Research Council,
the world organization of science, took action at
its Brussels meeting last July excluding Ger-
mans and Austrians from its meetings and those
of the international affiliated unions for twelve
years has been made by Dr. Vernon Kellogg,
permanent secretary of the National Research
Council, which represents the international or-
ganization in America. ‘‘No such action was
proposed or taken,’’ said Dr. Kellogg. ‘‘No Ger-
man or Austrian organizations have as yet been
admitted to the International Research Council,
but their admission is probably a matter of the

near future. ’’

Scors realize that the ladies will have their
furs and that the trappers can not keep up with
the demand. Silver fox raising which was start-
ed in Ross-shire two years ago has proved a suc-
cess and the new industry will be extended. The
Highlanders may seem personally partial to bare
knees, but their well-known racial thrift convinces
them that the fashion for furs should be catered
to. The Scottish Board of Agriculture is en-
couraging the fox breeding.

In order to prevent the spread of the bubonic
and other plagues carried by rat-fleas, 330,000
rats have been captured and examined at Sydney.

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

SCIENCE NEWS

DR. LANGMUIR ON ELECTRON EMISSION

Recent discoveries in electron emission and
current-control were described in a series of three
lectures by Dr. Irving Langmuir at Carnegie
Institute of Technology, Pittsburgh, on Novem-
ber 27, 28 and 29. Dr. Langmuir’s auditors
during the series were scientists, engineers, indus-
trial executives and students of Carnegie Tech,
and his world-wide reputation as a research phys-
iaist with the General Electric Laboratories at
Schenectady attracted capacity audiences. Synop-
ses of Dr. Langmuir’s three lectures follow:

ELECTRON EMISSION FROM HEATED METALS

When metals are heated in high vacuum, elec-
tron, or atoms of negative electricity, evaporate
from their surface. If there is another electrode
in the evacuated space which is given a positive
charge the electrons drift, over to this electrode
(anode) sc that a current flows between the two
electrodes. Dushman has recently derived an
equation which should supersede the well-known
Richardson equation, giving the relation between
the electron current and the temperature of the
eathode. The advantage of this new equation is
that there is only one constant which we need to
know for each different cathode material, instead
of two constants which were necessary for the
Richardson equation.

The electron emission from a large number of
different materials has recently been measured.
The thoriated tungsten cathode gives a current at
a temperature of 1,500° absolute, which is about
130,000 times greater than that from ordinary
tungsten. Measurements have also been made of
eathode materials that have even much greater
emissions.

In order to get all the eurrent that a cathode
is capable of giving, it is necessary to apply to
the anode a high enough voltage to overcome what
is known as the space charge effect. By putting
in gases positive ions are formed in the space
between the electrodes, and these neutralize the
negative space charge and allow the current from
the cathode to pass across the space with much
lower anode voltages. In other words, the effect
of gases is to increase the current-carrying ca-
pacity of the two. Such an effect is used in the
Tungar rectifier. Care must be taken what gas
is used for the purpose, for many gases have the

effect of poisoning the cathode, and cutting down
its emission to a small value.

If very high voltages are used on the anode, so
as to produce intense electric fields, it is possible
to pull electrons out of the cathode. In fact, it is
possible to pull electrons even out of cold cath-
odes, that is, cathodes at ordinary temperatures.
The currents obtained this way from the cathode
come from very minute areas, but in these areas
the current density amounts to more than one
hundred million amperes per square inch.
ELECTRON EMISSION FROM THORIATED FILAMENTS

The thoriated tungsten filament is a tungsten
filament containing one or two per cent. of tho-
rium, usually in the form of oxide. When such a
filament is heated, to about 3,500° Centigrade, a
little of the thorium oxide is changed into metallie
thorium. In the meantime, however, any thorium
on the surface of the filament evaporates off,
leaving only pure tungsten. If the filament tem-
perature is then lowered to about 1,800°, the
thorium gradually wanders or diffuses through the
filament, and when it reaches the surface, if the
vacuum is very perfect, remaims there and gradu-
ally forms a layer of thorium atoms which never
exceeds a single atom in thickness. The thickness
of this film is therefore about 1/100,000,000 of
am inch, and yet this film increases the electron
emission of the filament more than one hundred
thousand fold.

Of course this useful film is very sensitive and
needs some protection to keep it in good condi-
tion. Very slight traces of water vapor or other
gases would oxidize this film and destroy it. This
can be avoided by putting in the bulb some sub-
stance that will combine with the water before
this has a chance to attack the thorium film. Such
a substance is metallic magnesium. Furthermore,
itis necessary to avoid heating the filament to
too high a temperature for otherwise the film
might evaporate off. It is therefore best to oper-
ate such filament within a rather narrow range of
temperature close to 1,700° C., where the ratio
of evaporation is very small, and where the tem-
perature is high enough for the thorium gradually
to diffuse to the surface and continually repair
any damage done by the effect of slight traces of
residual gases.

The thoriated tungsten filament opens up many

new fields of scientific investigation. By measur-

Vili

ing the electron currents, it is possible to deter-
mine accurately exactly how much thorium is
present on the surface. An amount of thorium
corresponding to only 1/1000 of the surface cov-
ered with a layer one atom deep is easily measur-
able in this way. It is possible to knock off a
thorium film by bombarding it with positive ions,
moving at high velocities, and in this way the
true nature of this bombardment can be deter-
mined.

METHODS OF CONTROLLING ELECTRON CURRENTS IN

HIGH VACUUM

Most of the applications of high vacuum tubes
have depended upon the control of electron ecur-
tents, as, for example, by the gnid in the three
electrode tube. The action of the grid is due to
the charge on the grid modifying the space charge
effect. This is tthe action that is employed in
practically all tubes used to-day for radio trans-
mission and receiving. There are many other
methods, however, of controlling electron currents.
A very important method is that used in the mag-
neton, where there are only two electrodes in the
evacuated space amd the control is obtained by
means of a magnetic field generated by an exter-
nal coil of wire. A still simpler form of magneton
suitable particularly to very large power tubes,
consists of a very large filament in the axis of a
eylindical anode with very large straight fila-
ments. The magnetic field produced by the cur-
rent through the filament is enough to prevent
electrons flowing between cathode and anode. By
heating the filament with alternating current, the
current periodically falls to low value and at these
times current can flow to the anode. This gives
a pulsating or oscillating current, which can be
used for radio transmission. A 1,000 kilowatt
tube of this kind is in process of development;
preliminary tests have been in every way satis-
factory.

Another form of tube by which electron cur-
rents can be controlled is the Dynatron. This
depends upon subjecting one of the three elec-
trodes in the tube to electron bombardment in
such a way as ito cause electrons to be splashed
out of it, just as wajter can be splashed out of a
cup by attempting to fill it too rapidly from a
faucet. A tube of this kind acts like a real nega-
tive resistance, and can be used for producing
electrical oscillations with considerable efficiency.

One of the most important applications of elec-
tron discharges from hot cathodes is in the
Coolidge X-ray tube which is now almost univer-
sally used as a source of X-rays. These tubes
were first made about 1913 and are gradually

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

being improved in many respects. The latest
type of tube, suitable for use by dentists, is a
small tube weighing only a few ounces, and only
about three inches long. Because of the special
features of this tube, the entire X-ray outfit,
including the transformer, lead screen, regulating
apparatus, ete., weighs only a few pounds and
takes up a space of only a small fraction of a
cubic foot. One very great advantage of this
new form of tube, besides its convenience, is its
absolute safety, even in the hands of imexperi-
enced operators, for there are no high voltages in
any part of the apparatus which is accessible.

EYE HOLDS SECRET OF TRAFFIC SAFETY
Science Service

A ‘‘LOOK-ONE-WAY’’ traffic system as a pre-
ventive of many of the frightful automobile acci-
dents of America’s deadly streets has been sug-
gested by Dr. Raymond Dodge, authority on
visual psychology and head of the psychological
section of the National Research Council. Traffic
signs, signals and routes should be determined ac-
cording to a thoroughgoing study of what the
human eye can see easiest.

““Tn the present regulaton of traffic, both driver
and pedestrian never cover less than forty-five de-
grees of visual angle and may be required to look
over an angle of over (two hundred degrees. Such
a range of vision is humanly impossible without
moving the head from side to side. This always
involves an interruption in the view of the part
of the street from which trouble may come. One
of the greatest dangers in crossing the street
comes from vehicles that suddenly emerge from
a side street.

‘“As a matter of safety there are grave doubts
as to whether the present regulations that limit
pedestrians to a narrow street crossing at exact
intersections of streets is the best practicable
solution. It may be more convenient for drivers,
but the exact intersection of streets is most dan-
gerous for pedestrians. Behind waiting cars is
safer than in front of them. Twenty feet from a
cross street would diminish the probability of
being surprised by turning cars.

‘*Use of all parallel jstreets as one-way streets
would be a great advantage. There is a slight
but real difference between the sides of the street
for pedestrians. It can be demonstrated that the
lefit-hand sidewalk is safer. When the pedestrian
is on the left sidewalk about to cross a street he
has to watch only automobiles on his left and to
the right of him, while a walker stepping off the
right hand sidewalk across a street has to be alert

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS | ix

CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MEDICAL COLLEGE

First Avenue and Twenty-eighth Street
NEW YORK CITY

The first year of the course is also
offered at Ithaca, N. Y., subsequent
years at New York City only.

For Information Address .

THE SECRETARY

THELCO CONSTANT TEMPERATURE

DRYING OVENS

1

LARGE DOUBLE WALL THELCO OVEN

In the laboratory as well as in the mill we must con-
stantly apply economics. If for the work in hand a less
expensive article will do, use it by all means. Among our
products you will find a wide variety suitable for the
different conditions at hand.

Manufactured by

The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.
8 JoHNnson Sr. NEWARK, ING

RUSH MEDICAL COLLEGE

IN AFFILIATION WITH

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO

Curriculum.—The fundamental branches (Anatomy, Phy-
siology, Bacteriology, etc.) are taught in the Depart-
ments of Science at the Hull Biological and the Ricketts
Laboratories, University of Chicago. The courses of
the three clinical years are given in Rush Medical Col-
lege and in the Presbyterian, the Cook County Hos-
pital, the Home for Destitute Crippled Children, and
other hospitals.

Requirements for Admission.—Three years of premedical
college work.

Classes Limited.—The number of students admitted to
each class is limited, selection of those to be admitted
is made on the basis of merit in scholarship and other
qualifications requisite for the study and practice of
medicine.

Hospital Year.—The fifth year, consisting of service as an
interne under supervision of the faculty in an approved
hospital, or of advanced work in one of the depart-
ments is prerequisite for graduation.

Summer Quarter.—The college year is divided into four
quarters, three of which constitute an annual session.
The summer quarter in the climate of Chicago is ad-
vantageous for work. Students are admitted to begin
the medical courses only in the Autumn and Spring
quarters.

Elective Systera.—A considerable freedom of choice of
courses and instructors is open to the student.

Graduate Courses.—Advanced and research courses are
offered in all departments. Students by attending sum-
mer quarters and prolonging their residence at the
University of Chicago in advanced work may secure the
degree of A.M., S.M., or Ph.D., from the University.

Prize Scholarship.—-Six prize scholarships—three in the
first two years and three in the last two (clinical)
years—are awarded to college graduates for theses em-
bodying original research.

The Winter quarter commences January 2, 1923.
Tuition—$75.00 per quarter, no laboratory fees.
Complete information may be secured by addressing:
THE MEDICAL DEAN

The University of Chicago Chicago, Illinois

The Microscope
By SIMON H. GAGE of Cornell University
13th Edition, Published December, 1920

In this edition, special emphasis is put upon the Dark-Field
Microscope. POSTPAID $3.00.

COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.

Marine Biological Laboratory
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Biological Material

_t, ZOOLOGY. Preserved mate-
rial of all types of animals for class
work and for the museum.

2. EMBRYOLOGY. Stages of
some invertebrates, fishes (includ-
ing Acanthias, Amia and Lepidos-
tus), Amphibia, reptiles and some
mamunals.

_3. BOTANY. Preserved mate-
rial of Algae, Fungi, Liverworts,
Mosses, Ferns and Seed Plants.

4. MICROSCOPE SLIDES in Bacteriology,

Botany and Zoology.

5. LIFE HISTORIES, Germination Studies,

and Natural History Groups.

st OF y
ae
Oye

Catalogues furnished on application to
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator
WOODS HOLE, MASSACHUSETTS:

x SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

to possible danger on his left, to his left rear,
and to his right. It is well known that the left
hand side of the street should be used by pedes-
trians when there is no sidewalk.’’

There is a very real and important problem
with respect to the ideal construction of a traffic
sign. How many words would be read in the
available time? What would be the minimum
size of letters? What should be the structure,
place, color and content of signs? He contends
that there is already a body of practical experi-
ence and scientific information available which
would only need to be adapted to highway use
and experimentally justified.

For instance, he said, it has been thoroughly
demonstrated that adults do not read familiar
words letter by letter but by familiar letter
groups. Yet, here in Washington, we have signs
reading ‘‘Slo.’’ Dr. Dodge said that when he
first saw that strange sign it took him many
times the effort and time to understand and inter-
pret it that would have been sufficient for
$*Slow.’’

‘(The nature and ttime of hand and arm sig-
nals by automobile drivers should be also regu-
lated. They are sometimes short, and sometimes
long, sometimes early and sometimes late. The
continuous indication of a driver’s intentions be-
ginning at least five seconds before a movement
is executed and continuing until a movement is
completed would be a great advantage.’’

Traffie policemen should wear white sashes and
trolley posts should be painted in alternate bands
of white and black to inerease their optical use-
fulness.

PREDICTS WINTER WEATHER BY SUMMER-
TIME TEMPERATURES
Science Service

ForEcastine the rainfall for the coming winter
and spring from the past summer’s ocean tem-
peratures, Dr. Geo. F. McEwen has predicted that
the Southern California coastal region will receive
about one half inch less than its average rainfall
during the season 1922-23. He suggested the pos-
sibility of applying tthe same system to predic-
tions over more extensive areas. Dr. McEwen is
neither a goose-bone prophet nor a erystal gazer,
but the oceanographer connected with the Scripps
Institution for Biological Research. He bases his
system of forecasts on carefully worked out ob-
servations during the last six years.

These observations show that when the ocean
temperature averages colder than usual the rain-
fall is heavier than usual and when the summer
geas are warmer than the average the subsequent

rainfall is smaller than the average rainfall. A
fall of one degree in temperature corresponds on
the average to an increase of about two inches in
the rainfall.

Rainfiall in the Southern California coastal re-
gion depends mainly upon the flow of the mois-
ture-laden air from the Pacific and is propor-
tional to the amount of the air transferred.

This in turn depends on the formation of a belt
of high air pressure over the continent, he ex-
plains. In summer the barometric pressure is
greater over the oean than the land for two
reasons. The wind velocity over ithe smooth
water surface averages two or three times as
great as that over the relatively uneven land and
in summer the air flows from the land. But as
the season advances to winter, air flows over the
land from the water and earries a great mass of
air from the Pacific Ocean to the North Amer-
ican continent.

Enough pressure measurements over the North
Pacific on which to base predictions being un-
available, Dr. McEwen used the known relation
between pressures and surface ocean tempera-
tures. The velocity of the winds which move
clock wise over the Pacific depends on the air
pressure and the upwelling of cold bottom water
along the coast and therefore the rate of cooling
of the surface water is proportional to the wind
velocity. The lower the ocean temperature at or
near the surface during the late summer and
autumn, he declares, the greater must be the in-
tensity of the ocean belt of high air pressure and
accordingly the greater will be the expected sea-
sonal rainfall over the coastal region of Southern
California.

When asked which days would be the rainy
ones, Dr. Ewen explained that long range fore-
casting is only done at the sacrifice of details and
for daily information he advised waiting for the
regular government forecast issued twenty-four
to forty-eight hours in advance.

Another example of successful long range fore-
casting is the prediction of the monsoon rainfall
of India, months in advance, by means of ob-
servations on atmospheric pressure distributions
over vast areas of land and water.

ECLIPSE EXPEDITIONS IN AUSTRALIA

By Isabel M. Lewis, U. 8S. Naval Observatory
Science Service

Never have eclipse expeditions been favored
with fairer skies than spread over the entire con-
tinent of Australia on the eventful day of the
total solar eclipse of last September. From

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS x1

Our New
General Catalog

is ready for distribution. When
requests your copy ask for
Catalog C.

This Polariscope is one of
many new instruments listed for
the first time in our catalog.
Aside from general laboratory
work this instrument is widely
used for urine analysis. Readings
are made by means of the ver-
nier and vernier magnifiers to an
accuracy of 1/10°.

Write for Catalog

PALS COMPANY

Apparatus for Industrial and

Laboratory Use
153 WEST 23rd ST. | NEW YORK, N. Y.

“BECBRO”

RHEOSTATS FOR EVERY CIRCUIT

Screw Adjustment Type

Also Tubular, Stone and Carbon Compression Types
Tubular Type (Single tube) Carried in Steck

Length Resistance Ranges Current Ranges Prices
oe 0.3 to 6000 ohms 25 to 0.2 Amp. $5.50
16” 0.6 to 14000 ~* QaitoOn2) warn $8.00

Write for Catalogue C-10 which illustrates the many types made by us.

BECK BROS.

3640-42 N. Second Street Philadelphia, Pa., U.S. A.

Xil

Wallal on Ninety-Mile Beach in northwestern
Australia to Goondiwindi and Stanthorpe in
Queensland all forms of eclipse observations were
made by a host of astronomers from many lands.

Shadow-bands, fleeting lunar shadow, a never-
to-be-forgotten pearly coronal light, four, enor-
mous, equatorial streamers, petal-formed and
arched, a million and more miles in length, five
brilliant planets and a star of first magnitude,
Spica, near the sun, eclipse paraphernalia of all
kinds and shapes manipulated by leading astron-
omers from many lands, even a governor in
attendance, were features of this eclipse. And
what more was to be desired to make a perfect
success of a perfect eclipse day?

The most important feature of the eclipse from
the astronomical point of view was the successful
exposure of many photographie plates with astro-
graphic telescopes at all points of observation in
Australia. These plates, it is hoped, may reveal
the slight displacements of the star-images from
their normal positions known as the Einstein
effect, due to the bending of light rays by the
sun’s gravitational field, which is a vital test of
the Binstein theory.

At Wallal, where observations were made by
Canadian astronomers, by an expedition from the
Lick Observatory under Director W. W. Camp-
bell, and by observers from New Zealand and
various observatories in Australia, particular
attention was given to this problem. Owing to
the great clouds of dust that arose after totality
was over it was impossible to develop the plates
at Wallal and they were shipped to Broome,
where they were developed later. The sailing of
their ship made it necessary for the American
astronomers to embark for home before these
plates were developed. It is only recently that
these developed plates arrived in the United
States and the scientific world is now awaiting
with the liveliest interest the announcement of
the results of the measurements of these plates
which it is hoped will be fortheoming before
many days have passed.

Astronomers from observatories in eastern Aus-
tralia who made observations at Goondiwindi and
Stanthorpe, though enthusiastic about the eclipse
as a scenic feature, deplore the fact that the
““seeing,’’ as astronomers call that state of the
aitmosphere that is such a vital factor in deter-
mining the value of observations, was particu-
larly bad. As a result they are pessimistic as to
the value of the measurements of the star-images
that will be made on plates taken at these places.
The eclipse oceurred at these points in the late

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

afternoon so the altitude of the sun was much
lower than at Wallal where ithe eclipse occurred
about 1:30 P.M. The effeats of atmospheric re-
fraction and other atmospheric disturbances were
consequently more pronounced in eastern Aus-
tralia than at Wallal. It is generally felt that
the most valuable results will be the ones ob-
tained from plates taken at Wailal, though Direc:
tor Dodwell, of the Government Observatory at
Adelaide, is said to have made some excellent
observations at Cordillo Downs in central Aus-
tralia. ‘

Instruments were transported to this point from
the railroad terminus by camel train, an arduous
undertaking which ttook six weeks time. It is re-
ported to have been attended with complete suc-
cess, though no results of the reductions of plates
in Australia are yet available.

SCIENCE ITEMS

Science Service

A FARM which raises diamond-back terrapin for
the market by thousands has been conducted for
many years near Savannah, Georgia.

ELEVATOR screenings, which grain elevators
have been paying to get rid of, have been suc-
cessfully used to fatten sheep in Canada.

FORTY THOUSAND separate and distinct species
of locusts, the historic pests which annually cost
the world about $100,000,000 have been identified:
and collected by American scientists.

Tue reddish color of Mars is supposed to be
due to great stretches of desert on that planet.

Tur ZR-1, the airship now being built for the
U. S. Navy, will be 680 feet long, 78 feet in
diameter, and have twenty gas bags with a total
capacity of 2,155,200 cubic feet.

By making synthetic thymol, a drug that is
used extensively as an antiseptic and a specific
against the hookworm disease, Department of
Agriculture chemists have vanquished
Nature at her own game. Thymol is now im-
ported from India, where it is found in the seed
of one of the plants growing ‘there. The chemists
have found that artificial thymol identical with
the natural product can be made from ¢ymene, a
waste product in the paper industry. Thymol is
now sold for $4.50 a pound, but it is estimated
that the synthetic product can be made for about
$2.50 a pound. As there are 2,000,000 gallons of
cymene wasted annually in this country and
Canada, chemists expect that this country will
soon be able to produce all the thymol consumed
here.

again

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT ix

SCIENCE NEWS

ALL STARS PROBABLY HAVE SAME
COMPOSITION

Science Service

Contrary to what has formerly been supposed,
hot stars and cool stars probably are very nearly
the same in chemical composition, Dr. Henry Nor-
ris Russell, director of the Princeton University
Observatory and research associate of the Mount
Wilson Observatory, declared in an address before
the Carnegie Institution of Washington here to-
night.

““Recent physical research has told us so much
about the properties of atoms that we have come
to a new understanding of what we observe in the
stars,’’ said Dr. Russell. ‘‘Our knowledge of the
composition of the stars depends upon the lines
which we observe in their spectrum and which
show the presence of many of the familiar chem-
ical elements.

‘‘The atmosphere of the cooler stars are full
of the vapors of metals, while in the hottest stars
the metals seem almost to disappear and to be
replaced by gases such as nitrogen and helium.
It has been supposed that this means that the
stars differ in chemical composition, or that atoms
of one kind are changed into those of another
kind at such high temperatures; but in the lab-
oratory we can subject atoms to far more violent
treatment than they receive in the atmosphere of
the stars without the least sign of their changing
into atoms of other sorts. We can, however,
knock one or two electrons off the atoms, and each
time an electron is removed the spectrum of the
light given by the atom changes entirely. After
two or three such changes there are practically
no lines left in the accessible part of the spec-
trum, though there may be strong radiations of
ultra violet light or X-rays.’’

Dr. Russell said that in the hotter stars the
atoms of the metals are in this condition and
though still present, do not reveal themselves to
the spectroscope. On the other hand, he said,
gases like helium are so hard to set shining that
it is only in the hotter stars that we can tell that
they are there. The most abundant elements, such
as hydrogen, ‘show their presence when less abun-
dant ones would disappear.

‘‘This theory of ionization makes it probable
that all the stars are very similar in actual com-
position—the observed differences arising from

differences in the state in which the atoms find
themselves in their atmospheres,’’ he concluded.
‘On these principles it is already possible to
reach conclusions about the temperature and pres-
sures in the atmospheres of the stars. The pres-
sures seem almost always to be very low and the
gas so rarified that we would almost call it a
vacuum in the laboratory. The temperature in
the hottest stars probably reaches 25,000 de-
grees.’

Deep in the interior of the stars the tempera-
tures are enormously higher and are probably
millions of degrees, Dr. Russell estimated. Here
it is possible that once in a while atoms of one
element do become changed into atoms of an-
other kind. There is reason to believe, he said,
that if hydrogen atoms are changed into others
an enormous amount of heat would be set free,
which would suffice to keep the stars shining for
billions of years.

TRACES OF CHEMICALS DO GOOD AND
HARM
Science Service

NEGLIGIBLE traces or impurities may mar or
make a chemical process or a product, Jerome
Alexander, consulting engineer of New York, told
the American Institute of Chemical Engineers at
its annual meeting.

The Germans scrapped their own poison gas
plant when they learned how the British made
their ‘‘inustard gas’’ or diethyldichlorsulfide
during the war by analyzing it and determining
its impurities, he explained in labeling such
traces telltales.

‘“Among the traces that help are vitamines,’’
he said. ‘‘Also the value of traces of salts in
water, for brewing, baking and other operations,
is beginning to be appreciated, and we hear now
of these being specially added. While 0.216 per
eent. of arsenic reduces the conductivity of
copper 39 per cent., pure copper rolls much less
readily than that containing arsenic, and yields
tubes that corrode ten times more rapidly. A
little lead in brass makes it machine easily and
prevents chattering. The reputation of Swedish
iron is due to the manganese impurities it con-
tains. A little copper inhibits the corrosion of
steel. Small quantities of barium harden lead
and make it ring like a bell. In many alloys

x SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

small quantities of aluminum deoxidize the melt
and prevent atmospheric corrosion of the casting.
In the electrodeposition of metals small quantities
of ‘addition compounds’ which are in many cases
protective colloids, give a desirable cathodic de-
posit. Auer von Welsbach found the great effect
produced by ceria in the thoria mantle, the opti-
mum value being about 1 per cent. Thus in a
certain flame a pure thoria mantle gives 7 candle
power, whereas the standard mantle with 1 per
cent. ceria gives 88 candle power. With 14 per
eent. ceria the luminosity sinks to 56 candle
power, while with 5 per cent. ceria it is only 44
candle power. Goodyear had no trouble in vul-
canizing his rubber because of the various nitro-
genous impurities present in the crude product of
his day. With the advent of modern pure plan-
tation rubber, it has become necessary to add
various accelerators. Old patents show that cellu-
loid dissolved in the ‘‘wood spirits’’ of that day,
which contained ketones in considerable quantity,
but refined wood alcohol is not a solvent for it.
Traces of lead tetra-ethyl will take the ‘gasoline
knock’ out of an internal combustion engine, even
0.06 per cent. being effective.’’

But other ‘traces hinder rather than help, Mr.
Alexander said. Iron was described as powerful
in small amounts. A manufacturer of brewing
sugar came to see how his new product was work-
ing in a brewery and found the brew-master run-
ning an inky black liquid into the sewer, he re-
lated. Being a chemist, he immediately wired his
analytical department that their product was full
of iron, and in reply received a telegram saying
that the batch complained of had only 0.002 per
eent. of iron. But that was enough to make
plenty of ink with the hop tannins.

‘In making dry batteries, traces of iron in the
pyrolusite or of copper in the ammonium chloride
are highly objectionable,’’ he said, giving further
examples. ‘‘One part of sulfur per million in
cocoanut oil is said to create trouble in the soap
making process. In lead burning traces of arsenic
in the hydrogen used to make it impossible to
secure a good joint. Attempts to make a good
nickel steel were for years frustrated by impuri-
ties present in the commercial nickel of the day.’

PLAGUE RATS MENACE HAWAII; BUT

POISON CAKES COMBAT THEM
Science Service
Lives and fortunes are the stake in a tre-
mendous war against field rats now being con-
ducted by the territorial board of health and the
sugar plantations of the Hawaiian Islands. The

results of this war are likely to be of assistance
throughout the world in campaigns against the
rat, one of the worst enemies of mankind.

It is stated by those who have studied the prob-
lem at the experiment station of the Hawaiian
Sugar Planters’ Association that the common
field rat destroys sugar cane ion these islands
valued at $100,000 each year, and probably the
damage is in excess of this sum.

Worse than this huge tax on the industry, how-
ever, is the ever present damger of bubonic plague
from infected rats. Twelve deaths among Jap-
'amese and Filipino plantation laborers occurred
within the past few months on the Hamakua coast,
island of Hawaii.

A new and successful method for wholesale kill-
ing of rats has just been discovered. Poison rat-
cakes are being manufactured by the millions at
Honokaa plantation and are spread broadcast
through more than ten thousand acres of cane
fields and waste areas, resulting in the death of
so many rats that where the board of health pre-
viously trapped over two thousand rats a month,
it now catches only about fifty.

The poison used is barium carbonate, deadly to
rats and field mice, but only slightly poisonous
to human beings, livestock and poultry. The
poison is mixed with flour dough and made into
small round cakes less than an inch in diameter
and about one fourth inch thick.

A new and very important feature, for which
patents have been applied, is the coating of par-
affine over the cakes to protect them. from damp-
ness and moulding, thus insuring their effective-
ness for many months. A very small nibble at
one of these poison cakes will kill a mouse, while
a piece as large as a small pea will kill a rat.
Honokaa Sugar Company is manufacturing these
rat-cakes chiefly for its own use, but it is also
selling some at nominal cost for trial use on other
plantations.

A man on horseback, dropping a rat-cake about
every ten feet, can cover an area of 35 acres in
one day, at a total cost of sixteen cents per acre.
This done two or three times a year is sufficient
to control thoroughly this very serious pest.

Other poisons have been tried at Honokaa. The
best of these is strychnine wheat placed in small
bamboo tubes and wrapped with paraffine paper.
The usual methods of poisoning are intended for
use on a small scale and no effective system has
been evolved previously which is cheap enough to
use over large areas and impervious to the
weather.

Many efforts were made along other lines before

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xi

CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MEDICAL COLLEGE

First Avenue and Twenty-eighth Street
NEW YORK CITY

The first year of the course is also
effered at Ithaca, N. Y., subsequent
years at New York City only.

For Information Address

THE SECRETARY

Northwestern University
MEDICAL SCHOOL

Situated in Chicago in close proximity te im-
portant Hospitals with an abundance of clinical
rnaterial.
4ADMISSIGN REQUiIREMENTS—Two years of College credit in-

cluding # satisfactory course in Physics, Chemistry, Biolegy

or Zoology, and French or German.
COURSE OF STUDY—leading to the degree of Doctor of Medi-
cine—Four years in the Medical School and a fifth year

either aa Interne in an approved hospital or devoted to re-
search in some branch of Medical Science. /

GRADUATE INSTRUCTION—in courses leading to the degree ef
Master of Arta or Doctor of Philosophy.

RESEARCH FOUNDATION—The James A. Patten Endowment
for Research affords unusual opportunities for advanced
students of Medical Science to pursue special investigations.

RESEARCH FELLOWSHIPS—Four fellowshipe of the value of
$500 each are awarded annually to promote acholarly re-
search,

Tuition fees of the first and second years, $190.00 a year.
The third and fourth years, $209.68 a year.

For information address
C. W. PATTERSON, Registrar

2421 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, Illinois

THELCO CONSTANT TEMPERATURE

DRYING OVENS

LARGE DOUBLE WALL THELCO OVEN

In the laboratory as well as in the mill we must con-
stantly apply economics. If for the work in hand a less
expensive article will do, use it by all means. Among our
products you will find a wide variety suitable for the
different conditions at hand.

Manufactured by

The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.
8 JoHNson Sr. Newark, N. J.

@
The Microscope
By SIMON H. GAGE of Cornell University
13th Edition, Published December, 1920

In thia edition, special emphasis ie put upon the Dark-Field
Microscope. POSTPAID $3.00.

COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO., Ithaca, N. Y.

Marine Biological Laboratory

WOODS HOLE, MASS.
Biological Material

1. ZOOLOGY. Preserved mate-
rial of all types of animals for class
work and for the museum.

2. EMBRYOLOGY. Stages of
some invertebrates, fishes (includ-
ing Acanthias, Amia and Lepidos-
tus), Amphibia, reptiles and some
mammals.

3. BOTANY. Preserved mate-
rial of Algae, Fungi, Liverworts,

\ Mosses, Ferns and Seed Plants.

4. MICROSCOPE SLIDES in Bacteriology,
Botany and Zoology.

5. LIFE HISTORIES, Germination Studies,
and Natural History Groups.

Catalogues furnished on application to
GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator
WOODS HOLE, MASSACHUSETTS

oe

xil SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

)

poisoning was decided upon as the one effective
plan. The U. S. army stationed in the islands
had offered assistance in the way of poison gas
experiments, as it realized the seriousness of the
plague situation.

C. E. Pemberton, assistant entomologist at the
sugar planters’ experiment station, was assigned
to investigate this possible means of control, but
he reported:

“‘The use of gas in any form for combatting
rats in the cane fields is wholly impracticable.
Rat burrows, deep, extensive and permanent, are
common, but extremely difficult to find until the
cane has been cut and the trash burned. By then
the rats have left the burrows. A minute search
in any field, before harvesting, would reveal most
of the rat burrows present, but the time required
for such work would be far too great to warrant
such a procedure.’’

Trapping was also experimented with and found
unsuitable for use over so large an area.

The board of health is leaving the experimental
work to the sugar planters, and is using its ener-
gies in cleaning up rat infested places in the
labor camps. The people of Hamakua are giving
the board every assistance in ridding the district
of the menace. Camps are being cleaned up, rub-
bish is being burned and intensive trapping is
conducted around houses and barns. All stray
dogs and cats have been killed as it has been
found that they also are capable of carrying the
plague.

MESOTHORIUM
U. S. Bureau of Mines

THE chemistry of mesothorium, the radio-active
element found in monazite sand and other tho-
tilum minerals, which is used as a substitute for
radium in the manufacture of certain luminous
paints and for medicinal purposes, is discussed
in Technical Paper 265,byHerman Schlundt, just
issued by the United States Bureau of Mines.

Among the thirty-odd radio-active elements,
mesothorium, the first product of thorium, ranks
next to radium in importance, states the author.
Like radium, its disintegration products emit the
three types of radiation that are characteristic of
radio-active substances and that are known as
alpha, beta and gamma rays. Mesothorium decays
at least 250 times faster than radium, and hence
in the pure state its activity, weight for weight,
would greatly exceed that of radium. Although
itself rayless, its first product, which is rapidly
formed after mesothorium has been separated,
gives a powerful beta and gamma radiation; the

alpha radiation of freshly prepared radium at-
tains a maximum within a month, whereas that
of mesothorium inereases comparatively slowly,
and reaches its highest point during tthe fifth year
after separation. Mesothorium preparations
therefore must be ‘‘aged’’ before their full
alpha-ray effect is realized in luminous products.

During the first years of separation, notwith-
standing the comparatively rapid decay of meso-
thorium, its preparations maintain a higher
gamma-ray activity than an equivalent quantity
of radium. Mesothorium may thus serve as a
substitute for radium, both in luminous com-,
pounds of radium and for therapeutic purposes.

Uranium ores, especially carnotite, are worked
primarily for the extraction of radium—uranium,
vanadium, ete., being secondary products. Meso-
thorium, on the other hand, is obtained as a sec-
ondary product or a by-product in the manufac-
ture of thorium for the gas-mantle industry, its
output being governed by the demand for thorium
nitrate.

For a good many years the production of meso-
thorium in Germany, and to some extent in other
countries in Europe, has kept pace with the pro-
duction of radium. The Germans early recog-
nized the value of mesothorium as a substitute for
radium, not only for luminous paint but also for
medical purposes. Only during the last two or
three years, however, has production taken place
in this country. Two companies have been recoy-
ering mesothorium as a by-product in the extrac-
tion of thorium. The Bureau of Mines has had
a cooperative agreement with one of these com-
panies. Very little has been published concerning
the recovery of mesothorium. Methods of meas-
urement have been uncertain and somewhat diffi-
cult, and Dr. Schlund’s paper is intended as a con-
tribution to the chemistry of ‘this useful and inter-
esting element.

Experiments of the Bureau of Mines in deter-
mining the ratio of mesothorium to thorium by
direct comparison’ of gamma activity with radium
are described in this paper.

WOULD REQUIRE PEDESTRIANS TO SIGNAL
AUTO TRAFFIC

Science Service
SIGNALS by pedestrians to show automobile
drivers their street crossing intentions were pro-
posed here to-day by Dr. Raymond Dodge, chair-
man of the psychology section of the National
Research Council, as a means of making city
traffic more safe.

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xiii

“TURTOX” CATALOGS include nee

Aquaria Microscope slides,
Bird glasses (special for High INSTRUMENTS
Charts - Schools)
Chemicals icrotomes A
. . FOR PHYSICISTS AND

rate sats aba repos all lh PHYSICAL CHEMISTS

cial) tions

4 Material EQUIPMENTS SUITABLE FOR RESEARCH
iiises fag Niet natant Em AND INDUSTRIAL LABORATORIES
¥ a
pissecaren | , aes anal We Solicit Inquiries
Patetriatories Insect Mounts LEEDS & NORTHRUP CO.
Reena Ponta Injecting 4901 STENTON AVENUE PHILADELPHIA
'? 1}
(General) Vascula

and many other items.

Items in black type are our own special products.
We are Manufacturers and Preparatora of
Biological Supplies.

MOLocicn,
Ss Se

a /

Mt

meet a definite need in Educational, Re-

search and Industrial Laboratories.

By means of sliding-con- We find greatest demand
tacts the resistance values for Rheostats with tubes
can be varied from zero to 16!’ long, as illustrated
full rating, in exceedingly above. Write for De-
small steps. scriptive Bulletin § 980.

JAMES G. BIDDLE, Puirapecrenia
1211-13 ARCH STREET

Catalogues to Cover any or all of the above items
will be sent on request.

GENERAL BIOLOGICAL SUPPLY HOUSE
1177 EAST 55TH STREET, CHICAGO, ILL.

REACTIONS OF SOILS
May be quickly and accurately determined
through use of the

“LAMOTTE”

WANTED,

Formulae and Processes for Chemicals

used in the Ebarmaceubcal Trade. Ad- St enGeayn Sain Ge
dress: G, clo Science, Garrison, N. Y. Complete with instructions. $4.25 (delivered)
H-lIon concentration of water and solutions
FOR SALE quickly and easily determined by the
Journal of the Washington Academy of “LAMOTTE”

H-ION COMPARATOR SET

Sciences, Volumes 3 to 12 inclusive.
$9.10 (delivered)

These ten volumes, complete, unbound, | Complete and ready for use.

are listed at $6.00 each. They are offered Send for Literature.
here for $50.00. W. A. Orton, Depart- LaMotte Chemical Products Co.
ment of Agriculture, Washington, D. C. | Baltimore, Md., U.S. A.

PRECISION

Tuning Forks

Made in wide range of frequency up to 5000 vibrations. Twenty-five years of experience
have placed us in position to guarantee absolutely accurate rating. In rating our Forks we
use a standard supplied by Dr. D. C. Miller, of the Case School of Applied Science, Cleve-
land, Ohio. Our electrically maintained Forks are well known for their convenient mount-
ings permitting of great range of adaptability.

WM. GAERTNER & CO., 5345-49 Lake Park Ave., Chicago, Ill.

xiv

“*Tt is often quite impossible for a driver to
determine when a pedestrian is going to start
across the street, when he fis goimg to retreat, or
what direction he is going to take,’’ Dr. Dodge
said, and suggested that it would be a great help
to drivers if pedestrians were required to indicate
their intentions in some such way as the chauffeur
is required to do in making turns.

“*A simple scheme for the most desirable stant-
ing time and duration of signals can be worked
out by any psychologist who knows the limitations
of attention and reaction-time and will familiarize
himself with ‘the (traffic situation.

“<Tt is possible that there also ought to be tests
for pedestrians as well as drivers, with distin-
guishing marks for incompetents. It would be
some help if the driver could know that the man
trying to cross the street was partially paralyzed,
partially blind or deaf, had a wooden leg, or some
other disability which made it difficult to take
care of what he had left. As it is now, youth
and old age are the only clearly marked incom-
petents.

Much has already been done to diminish the
sources of confusion, such as the introduction of
traffic signals and the establishment of zones or
islands of safety where pedestrians can take their
problems in smaller doses. But, if I am correctly
informed, a systematic analysis of confusion of
pedestrians or drivers has yet to be made. Such
a study would involve the practical limits of
attention and the facts of human variability. The
sudden appearance of an unheralded vehicle com-
ing around the corner, the convergence of vehicles
on a pedestrian and even the blatant automobile
horns themselves are worth considering as sources
of confusion.

‘¢ Advantages would be derived from one-way
traffic. Confusion would be diminished by uni-
formity of traffie rules, and signals, by better
lighting of cars, and a better system of street
lighting.
of the visual acuity by glare.

Most street lighting involves decrease
Pedestrians should
also have training in time and space estimation.

In addition to the possible services of psychol-
ogy in the regulation of the highway, there is un-
doubtedly need for the services of expert educa-
Dr. Dodge said. ‘‘The pedestrian
must be trained as well as the driver of motor
vehicles and the proper place for that training is
in the school. It seems reasonable to suppose
that one of the most important school functions
in fitting the child for his environment is the
ability to take care of himself on the highway.
This task ean be undertaken only when the regu-

tionalists, ’’

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

lations of the highways have reached a point
where it is uniform in all the states and uni-
formity should only be aimed at when we are
sure that from the standpoint of space and time
as well as from the standpoint of the human
mind the proposed regulations have been thor-
oughly scrutinized and revised.’’ :

““Newspaper and movie campaigns by car-
toons, advice and stories,’? Dr. Dodge added,
‘should be continuous and not limited to one
week in the year.’’

SCIENCE ITEMS
Science Service

SCIENTISTS, government officials, fruit growers
and nurserymen met in Washington on November
20 to discuss means of checking the latest Japan-
ese invasion to gain a foothold in this country.
The camphor scale, a newly discovered crop in-
sect pest, is spreading rapidly among camphor,
satsuma orange, olive, privet, Japanese persim-
mon, fig, plum and pecan trees in Louisiana and
Alabama. Drastic measures to prevent the spread
into other states were suggested as the experts
gathered. The insect has been traced to an im-
portation of satsuma orange trees direct from
Japan just before the plant quarantine barriers
were put up in 1911-12. This scale has been
classed as a menace with the Japanese beetle,
the European corn-borer and the pink boll worm,
which gained a footing about the same time. A
federal quarantine on the two states invaded to
protect the other citrus-growing regions of the
country from attack by prohibiting the movement
of nursery stock and other articles likely to carry
the pest is being considered.

ONE DOLLAR from each of the Knights of
Pythias, $1,000,000 in all, has been donated by
the Supreme Lodge of that order for benefit work
among the lepers of Culion Island and to carry
on the search for an absolute cure for that dread
disease. Part of this fund will be used in the
erection of a fully equipped experimental labora-
tory.

Pastrur, great French bacteriologist, whose
centennial is to be celebrated in December, spent
five years studying the diseases of the silkworm
for the Department of Agriculture of France.

More than seventy per cent. of the world’s pro-
duction of crude rubber is consumed by American
rubber manufacturers.

ALGERIAN sheep are comparatively immune to
anthrax, while all other sheep seem extremely
susceptible to it.

SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT 1x

SCIENCE NEWS

THE PSYCHOLOGY OF AUTO DRIVERS
Science Service

NATION-WIDE standardized mental tests for auto
drivers to determine the kind of machine each
individual shall be permitted to run is the plan
for cutting down our alarming motor-car acci-
dent toll urged by Dr. Raymond Dodge, professor
of psychology in Wesleyan University, and this
year chairman of the division of psychology of
the National Research Council. ,

‘CAll (persons are not equally suited to driving
a car,’’ he said. ‘‘One man in an emergency
gets and acts on an idea quickly, another slowly.
The time that elapses after a danger is seen until
the driver can start the movement that is re-
quired to avoid it is an important factor in safety.
Slow and uncertain or wavering actions are un-
doubtedly the occasion of many accidents. This
slowness is in part due to lack of practice and
training and in part due to the natural tendencies
of the individual. Both of these factors ean be
made matters of test.’’

“«The natural speed with which a person acts,
his ‘reaction time’ can be easily measured and
the relative ability of chauffeurs in this respect
could be determined,’’ Dr. Dodge explained.
“‘The time that it takes for a signal to reach
the eye, be transmitted to the brain, and for the
brain to send its order down through the nerves
of the arm seems instantaneous, but it can be
measured by the reaction time test used in our
psychological laboratories every day. A person is
seated at a table with his finger on a telegraph
key. As soon as he sees a given signal he presses
the key. When the signal flashes, the electric
current also starts a pointer marking off the frac-
tions of a second upon a dial. When the key is
pressed the current is broken and the hand on
the dial stops moving. This gives a record of the
time it took the person to get and act upon the
idea.’’

““Tests for driving ability,’’ he continued,
‘“should be varied according to the sort of tasks
which the drivers are called upon to perform.
Tests for drivers of light, pleasure vehicles might
be very different from tests for drivers of fast
ambulances and fire appliances, and they in turn
might be quite different from tests for drivers of
heavy motor trucks. High powered fast machines

obviously should not be entrusted to poor or rela-
tively untrained chauffeurs. A specific form of
test for various types of machines is good com-
mon sense and good science.

“Tn addition to tests for mechanical expertness,
knowledge of traffie regulations and automobile
limitations should also be required. ’’

Jailing reckless drivers and requiring speeders
to view accident victims in the morgue are hap-
hazard methods. Licenses to drive should not be
issued to persons with such tendencies to motor
manslaughter. It is perfectly possible that the
psychologists will be able to work out tests to
determine the moral tendencies and regard for
common interests of applicants for
licenses.

“Careful analysis and expert thoroughgoing ex-
perimental investigation of these and other prob-
lems involving the mental processes of those who
use the highways should be made,’’ Dr. Dodge
emphasized. ‘‘When there has been a systematic
exploration of the human factor in traffic, tests
can be standardized.

“*Tt ds notorious that tests for drivers in one
community are entirely different from tests in
other communities. Licenses from different local-
ities are quite incomparable in value. It is ob-
vious that the same ability to drive is not re-
quired on a country road as in the city, but if
the farmer is to drive into town, he must be able
to handle his machine under city traffic conditions
or else not be allowed to come in. Standard tests
would help remedy this situation.

‘*iiven now we should have a national blacklist
for chauffeurs so that those who have forfeited
their licenses on account of bad driving in one
state can not go over into another state and con-
tinue their homicidal practices. ’’

driver ’s

CHRISTMAS TREES OLD IN LEGEND AND
EVOLUTION
Science Service
CHRISTMAS trees, as a family, are of the oldest
of our trees to-day. For reasons connected with
their antiquity, experts of the U. S. Forest Service
say that these evergreens have become so popular
for Yule-tide decorations that between four and
five million trees are consumed in this country
every year, while plantations which raise Christe

x SCIENCE—SUPPLEMENT

mas trees as a farm crop are springing up to help
supply the future demand.

These conifers or cone-bearing trees that hold
the bright gifts and cheerful tinsel of this reli-
gious festival and winter holiday were the earliest
of trees, and their direct ancestors were the first
flowering plants on earth. They probably orig-
inated during a period of rigorous climate and
their thin needle-leaves present less surface to cold
and exposure than the broad-leaved trees which
represent a later stage in plant evolution.

And these needles are probably responsible for
the use of the conifers as Christmas trees. They
present only a small surface to the effect of evap-
oration and so enable the tree to retain its mois-
ture and keep green. This \greenness added a
touch of life to the dullness of winter and made
the evergreens popular as decorations. Legends
and custom did the rest.

There are many kinds of these evergreens, but
the principal ones used for Christmas trees in
various parts of the United States are the pines,
spruces, firs and cedars. If you do not know what
kind of a tree it is that bears your gifts, you can
easily tell by looking at the needles on the
branches. In the pines, the needles grow in
bunches of from one to five needles to the bunch.
If the individual needles in these bunches are
pressed together they form a complete cylinder.
Some kinds of pine have two needles to the bunch,
but these two are each half cylinders, while in
those having three needle bunches the three
needles form a cylinder, and so on.

If the tree is a fir, the needles grow out from
the two sides of the stem, while in the spruce the
needles grow out in all diretions around the stems.
In the cedar, the needles are like little twigs
pressed compactly together in a sort of shingle-
like formation.

Joy-killers frequently arise and bewail the cut-
ting of these trees for Christmas use as wasteful.
But aside from the joy they bring the kiddies,
U. S. Forest Service officials believe that properly
done the cutting of Christmas trees can really
be made a Christmas gift to the forests them-
selves.

In Maine and the Adirondacks, the principal
localities that supply Christmas trees, there are
frequently as many as 50,000 to 100,000 seedlings
to the acre. Few of these can reach maturity.
It is essential for the production of tall, clean
timber that there should be at the beginning many
trees to the acre, but unless these are thinned out,
the poorer trees may hamper the development of
the better ones.

Man, by interfering in the struggle and thin-
ning out of all lagging trees, can hasten the
growth of the remaining trees. In many locali-
ties, this work depends on the possibility of find-
ing a market for the small trees to pay for the
cost of the thinning, and the Christmas market
solves the problem.

In Michigan, however, the state agricultural
station several years ago started raising Christmas
trees as a farm crop. They have just issued in-
formation telling how this can be done commer-
cially and encouraging. farmers to plant for this
purpose.

WAITING FOR TREE PLANTERS
New York State College of Forestry

Every home owner in New York State is pay-
ing heavy freight on the lumber of which his
house is made. Every lessee of an apartment or
dwelling is paying in rent large amounts for
freight on the lumber used in the construction of
the building in which he lives, according to the
New York State College of Forestry at Syracuse
University. The people of the Empire State—
relative figures apply to all the eastern states—
are taxed for freight approximately $22 a thou-
sand on yellow pine, $27 on Douglas fir, $12 on
North Carolina pine, $12 on white pine, and $20
on imported hardwoods. The freight rate on
Douglas fir which comes from the Pacific Coast is
more than the lumber costs at the mill.

Thirty-five million dollars are taken from the
pockets of the citizens of New York every year
for freight on imported lumber. In addition to
this freight bill of $35,000,000 on lumber must
be added the cost of shipping 55 per cent. of our
pulpwood into the state from Canada and other
points. The transportation costs are bound to
grow as the depletion of the nearest lumber and
wood supply continues and the demand increases.

Much of the lumber consumed in the east is
shipped from the south. It is estimated that in
the course of ten to fifteen years the southern
field will be exhausted insofar as outside con-
sumption is concerned. Then Oregon, Washington
and California will have a practical monopoly of
the lumber business which will bring about mate-
rially increased freight charges to eastern con-
sumers.

Measures should be taken to overcome this con-
dition as far as it is now possible. A large por-
tion of the lumber and other wood products used
in New York could and should be grown within
the state, and forests should be planted wherever
land is suitable for that purpose. More than

CORNELL UNIVERSITY
MEDICAL COLLEGE

First Avenue and Twenty-eighth Street
NEW YORK CITY

The first year of the course is also
offered at Ithaca, N. Y., subsequent
years at New York City only.

For Information Address

THE SECRETARY

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xi

Northwestern University
MEDICAL SCHOOL

Situated in Chicago in close proximity to im-
portant Hospitals with an abundance of clinical
material.

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTS—Two years of College credit in-

cluding a satisfactory course in Physics, Chemistry, Biology
or Zoology, and French or German.

COURSE OF STUDY—leading to the degree of Doctor of Medi-
cine—Four years in the Medical School and a fifth year
either as Interne in an approved hospital or devoted to re-
search in some branch of Medical Science.

GRADUATE INSTRUCTION—in courses leading to the degree of
Master of Arts or Doctor of Philosophy.

RESEARCH FOUNDATION—The James A. Patten Endowment
for Research affords unusual opportunities for advanced
students of Medical Science to pursue special investigations.

RESEARCH FELLOWSHIPS—Four fellowships of the value of
$500 each are awarded annually to promote scholarly re-
search.

Tuition fees of the first and second years, $190.00 a year.
The third and fourth years, $200.00 a year.

For information address
C. W. PATTERSON, Registrar

2421 South Dearborn Street, Chicago, Illinois

THELCO CONSTANT TEMPERATURE
DRYING OVENS

LARGE DOUBLE WALL THELCO OVEN

In the laboratory as well as in the mill we must con-
stantly apply economics. If for the work in hand a less
expensive article will do, use it by all means. Among our
products you will find a wide variety suitable for the
different conditions at hand.

Manufactured by

The Thermo Electric Instrument Co.
8 JoHNson St. Newark, N. J.

The Microscope

By SIMON H. GAGE of Cornell University
13th Edition, Published December, 1920

fn this edition, special emphasis is put upon the Dark-Field
POSTPAID $3.00.

COMSTOCK PUBLISHING CO.,

Microscope.

Ithaca, N. Y.

Marine Biological Laboratory
WOODS HOLE, MASS.

Biological Material

1. ZOOLOGY. Preserved mate-
rial of all types of animals for class
work and for the museum.

2. EMBRYOLOGY. Stages of
some invertebrates, fishes (includ-
ing Acanthias, Amia and Lepidos-
tus), Amphibia, reptiles and some
mamunals.

3. BOTANY. Preserved mate-
rial of Algae, Fungi, Liverworts,
Mosses, Ferns and Seed Plants.

1 MICROSCOPE SLIDES in Bacteriology,
Botany and Zoology.

5. LIFE HISTORIES, Gertnination Studies,
and Natural History Groups.
Catalogues furnished on application to

GEORGE M. GRAY, Curator
WOODS HOLE, © MASSACHUSETTS

ft SCLENCE—SUPPLEMENT

4,000,000 acres of idle land in New York and
about 85,000,000 acres in the United States (a
tract about as large as New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, Connecticut and New Jersey) are
waiting for tree planters.

THE SPEED OF STARS
Science Service

Two HUNDRED miles a second is the speed at
which some stars are racing through space, Dr.
Walter S. Adams, acting director of the Mount
Wilson Observatory, declared in a lecture at the
Carnegie Institution of Washington.

The rapidity with which the stars move depends
upon their stage of development, their true or
intrinsic brightness and probably their mass. The
giant stars are moving more slowly than the dwarf
stars and the increase of velocity with decreasing
mass is a regular one. But these individual stars,
he pointed out, are not moving at random. They
move in great streams and the speedway of the
heavens is in the plane of the Milky Way.

“‘None of the rapidly moving stars are going in
the same direction as our sun,’’ he said. ‘‘The
speed of the sun is about twelve miles a second
when referred to the slowly moving stars and over
one hundred miles a second with reference to the
exceptionally speedy stars.

“rom a knowledge of the spectrum of stars
we have been able in the past to learn both their
chemical constitution and order of evolution as
regards temperature and physical state, and their
motions toward or away from the earth in miles
a second. In recent years we have been able to
add a third use to which the spectrum may be
put, and we can now determine the true or intrin-
sic brightness of a star directly. This quantity
combined with a knowledge of its brightness as it
appears to us enables us to determine its dis-
tance in a very simple manner.’’

The method has nearly tripled the number of
stars for which we know the distances, Dr. Adams
said, and a knowledge of the distances has made
it possible to determine the true motions of these
stars in space.

FLYING CHEAP TRAVEL
Science Service
Ir airplanes could get enough business, passen-
gers could be carried much more quickly at little
greater cost than by railroad, Archibald Black,
aeronautical engineer of Garden City, N. Y., told
the American Society of Mechanical Engineers
while discussing the proper design for commercial

flying machines. ‘‘For example, the distance

from New York to Chicago by the Pennsylvania
Railroad is 908 miles, or a flying distance of from
750 to 800 miles,’’ he said. ‘‘Were it possible
to load the airplane fully each trip, the operating
cost would be 6.5 cents per passenger mile or
$48.75 to $52 per passenger. This compares with
the railroad rate of $51.30, including fare, excess
fare and Pullman. Allowing for the trip to and
from the fields, as well as an intermediate stop}
the time by air would average about nine hours
as against twenty hours by the Pennsylvania
Railroad’s ‘Broadway Limited.’ The only rea-
son why airplanes can not carry passengers at
such rates to-day is that it costs too much to get
the business.’’

Moderate size machines only, he emphasized,
could be efficiently operated at this low cost and
the requirement of ability to fly on one of two
engines is utterly impractical for commercial air-
planes because of the prohibitive cost. The com-
mercial plane should be designed for jumps last-
ing not over four hours, while high speed is un-
desirable and high climbing ability unnecessary
and impractical for the commercial craft.

A MARVELLOUS ARCHEOLOGICAL
DISCOVERY

London Times

Tne earth holds in her recesses the rich memo-
ries of our race, and sometimes, as though the
effort of the reflective and inquiring mind of
modern man had suddenly flashed forth in a re-
vealing intuition, a discovery comes that lights
up the obscurity of the distant past. One such
discovery we are privileged to record to-day. Our
Cairo correspondent tells us how, after sixteen
years of patient toil and research, Lord Carnarvon
and that distinguished excavator, Mr. Howard
Carter, have been rewarded by a marvelous find
in the Valley of the Kings near Thebes. All the
mysteries of this famous valley had been dis-
closed, so it was thought, long since. Mr. Carter,
with the pertinacity of the gifted archeologist
who seents discoveries from afar, dug on per-
sistently until at last, in the royal necropolis of
the Theban empire, he came across some tempting
signs below the tomb of Rameses VI. Lord Car-
narvon went out from England, and he and Mr.
Carter together opened the sealed doors of a hith-
erto unnoticed chamber. When opened this cham-
ber revealed an amazing spectacle. There were
gilt couches, inlaid with ivory and _ precious
stones; innumerable boxes, inlaid and painted
with entrancing hunting scenes; a wonderful
throne; a chair encrusted with precious stones and

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS xill

BIOLOGICAL STAINS

A Complete List for Bacteriology, Pathology, Botany, Zoology, Etc.
CHEMICAL INDICATORS
Indicators for Every Purpose, including the Hydrogen-lon Indicators
(Clark and Lub’s List, Sorensen’s List, Etc.)
FINE ORGANIC CHEMICALS
Especially Prepared for Laboratory Use

By specifying Coleman & Bell products, you are assured of receiving chemicals manu-
factured under expert supervision and subjected, prior to sale, to the most rigid chemical
and biological tests known. The result of our efforts to produce products of the highest
quality is shown by the report of Dr. H. J. Conn, Chairman of the Committee on Technic,
Society of American Bacteriologists. In the report of the committee upon ‘An Investiga-
tion of American Stains,”’ (J. of Bact., Jan. 1922), it was stated that the Coleman & Bell
stains were entirely satisfactory. In no instance did the product of any other concern
surpass a C. & B. stain. In a number of instances, the marked inferiority of the pre-
war German product to C. & B’s stains was commented upon.

Write for our Catalogue of Biological Stains, Chemical Indicators and Organic Chemicals.

Coleman & Bell Products may be secured from Laboratory Supply Houses throughout
the United States and in foreign countries, or may be ordered direct.

THE COLEMAN & BELL COMPANY

NORWOOD, OHIO, U. S. A.

AMERICAN-MADE WAVELENGTH SPECTROMETERS,

THE WAVELENGTH SPECTROMETER has
become an essential adjunct to the well equipped
Laboratory. Its convenience, accuracy and sturdy
construction make the Wavelength Spectrometer
an ideal instrument for spectrum and _ color
analysis

GAERTNER SPECTROMETERS embody the
results of upward of twenty-five years of experi-
ence gained in the construction of precision optical
instruments.

Prompt Delivery on Standard Instruments
Our Specially Designed
ULTRAVIOLET AND INFRARED SPEC-
TROMETERS
are useful for many investigations. A very valu-
able combination: in conjunction with the Wave-
length Spectrometer is the improved

UTTING PHOTOMETER

Correspondence invited. .

Features:

1—_DESIGN OF THE INSTRUMENT. The de-
sign of the instrument provides for greatest
rigidity and permanence of adjustment as the
composite parts have been reduced to a mini-
mum by joining as many as practicable in a
single casting, at the same time giving the Spec-
trometer a graceful appearance.

2-ACCURACY IN CALIBRATION. Greatest
care is taken in calibrating the wavelength drum
in order to insure the highest possible accuracy.

3-EASY READING OF DRUM. The divisions
are sufficiently heavy and distinct and the fig-
ures ample and spaced to best advantage.

4—ESSENTIAL PARTS INCLUDED:

Protection cap for prism—

Leveling screws in tripod—

Bilateral micrometer slit—

Extra high power eyepiece—are fur-
nished with the instrument and in-
cluded in purchase price.

LABORATORY APPARATUS
INSTRUMENTS OF PRECISION
UNIVERSAL LABORATORY
SUPPORTS

Wm. Gaertner & Co.

5345-49 Lake Park Avenue
CHICAGO, U. S..A.

Xiv

adorned with royal portraits; bituminized statues
of a king, chariots, maces, a footstool, alabaster
vases, and quantities of trussed duck and haunches
of venison, left, according to the ancient custom,
as provision for the great dead. Beyond the first
chamber lay another chamber crowded with a con-
fusion of gold beds, boxes and alabaster vases,
and beyond this, again, lies another chamber
which may prove to be the actual tomb of the
king whose funeral relics lie in bewildering pro-
fusion in the first two rooms. The name of the
king who thus emerges in splendor from the dim
past into the murky light of our troubled day is
Tutankhamen, of the Eighteenth Dynasty, who
reigned in Tel-el Amarna and Thebes over three
thousand years ago. Little was known of him
except that he claimed to be a son of the famous
Amenhotep ITI, and that he married the daughter
of that strange Pharaoh Akhenaten, who revolu-
tionized the Egyptian religion by instituting in
the worship of the rays of the sun a kind of mono-
theism, and at the same time promoted a remark-
able artistic revival. Of Tutankhamen the chief
fact hitherto attested is that in his reign the tra-
ditional religion, with its worship of Amen as the
principal deity, once more claimed its own. He
was, so to speak, the patron of a counter-reforma-
tion. Now, thanks to this remarkable discovery,
we may perhaps learn more of the circumstances
of this strange ebb and flow of religious emotion
in the days when mankind was still young. And
though the world is old now and restless still,
with the craving for power and for a knowledge
of great mysteries, even now when the eastern
lands are trembling between war and peace and
a Europe undreamed of by the Pharaohs is
wrestling with problems that would have been
stranger to them than all their weird panoply is
to us, that figure of the ancient king who thus
suddenly steps out from oblivion has a permanent
significance.‘ On his footstool are figures sym-
bolizing his lordship: over Syria, and the peoples
of Ethiopia owned his sway. Around him are the
confused tokens of a reversion from a groping
after new spiritual ideas to the comfortable forms
of an ancient ritual.

PRELIMINARY TRANS-ATLANTIC RADIO
AMATEUR TESTS SUCCESSFUL
Science Service
MESSAGES broadcasted by amateur radio sta-
tions in preliminary trans-Atlantic tests just com-
pleted were received across the water in England,

reports from that country say.

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

For ten days on predetermined schedules, ama-
teur radio enthusiasts in all parts of Canada and
the United States competed in order to qualify
for a special place in the final trans-Atlantic tests
that will be held between December 12 and 31.
To qualify they had to be heard by a station at
least 1,200 air miles away. Indications are that
many will compete in the final tests.

The way in which the amateurs in the different
radio districts kept within their allotted times
was gratifying, according to officials of the
American Radio Relay League who are managing
the tests.

At least 20,000 radio amateurs are competing in
these tests, it is estimated.

ITEMS
Science Service

Worps from a language which flourished cen-
turies before Columbus are being used for names
of varieties of the fruit, avocado or ‘‘alligator-
pear,’’ which is relatively new to this country.
The U. S. Department of Agriculture has intro-
duced Mayan names along with this salad-making
fruit that its experts have brought from Guate-
mala, where centuries ago an ancient civilization
flourished. Some folks seeing certain kinds of
“Calligator pears’’ taged ‘‘Itzamna,’’ ‘‘Lamat,’’
“¢Hunapuh,’’ ‘‘RKayab,’’ ‘‘Mayapan’’ and others
equally strange, may have thought that the gov-
ernment thas enlisted the services of the namer of
Pullman cars. It has just been explained by the
department that these names are taken from the
Maya who built up in what are now the wilds of
Guatemala great cities and a powerful agricul-
tural civilization hundreds of years before Colum-
bus ever left the old world. The ayocado called
‘*Ttzama’’ is named after the chief Mayan god,
the creator of mankind and the father of all the
other .gods. Such names as ‘‘Lamat’’ and
‘¢Hunapuh’’ designated days in the wonderful
calendar of these ancient people$ ‘who had invent-.
the time systems of the Europeans of their time.
‘‘Mayapan,’’ the name given to another variety
of this salad fruit, was one of the important
cities of this people. It means ‘‘place where
there are Mayas.’’

THE Santa Maria, a commercial flying boat of
the Aeromarine Company of New York, has flown
45,000 miles.

AIRPLANES are carrying mail in Morocco over a
route formerly covered only by means of camels
and donkeys.

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS ill

_ EE nan

MAKE FULL USE OF YOUR
TYPE K POTENTIOMETER

The Type K Potentiometer is in use in nearly all edu-
cational laboratories, but in many-cases it is reserved for
standardization purposes and measurements of extreme
precision.

It is highly desirable that the student become thor-
oughly familiar with the operation of the Type K Po-
tentiometer Equipment which occupies such an import-
ant place and is so widely used in making physical
measurements. This can be done if the student is per-
mitted to take advantage of the ease and rapidity of
operation of the Type K Equipment and make use of
it for laboratory measurements other than those of
standardization. Such a policy may require that there
be available one or more additional Type K Potentio-
meter Equipments to which the student may make fre-
quent reference.

The procurement of an additional Type K Potentio-
meter Equipment for this purpose is a very worth while
investment.

A description of the Type K Potentiometer and
Directions for Operation are given in Catalog S70

LEEDS & NORTHRUP COMPANY
ELECTRICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS

4901 STENTON AVENUE PHILADELPHIA, PA.

iv

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

THE DAYS OF
A MAN

Being Memories of a Naturalist, Teacher,
and Minor Prophet of Democracy

BY DAVID STARR JORDAN

This autobiography of a former president of the American
Association for the ‘Advancement of \Science carries a

special appeal to all men of science.

The author’s extensive biological research, his services and
excursions in many countries, and Agassiz’s great school at
Penikese form themes that are delightfully developed.
The accounts of scientific work include to a large degree
the history of biological science in America.

In addition there are numerous references that throw a new
light on current history, with intimate glimpses of such
persons as Theodore Roosevelt, W. H. Taft, Herbert
Hoover, Lloyd George, Sir William Osler, Hugo De

Viies, to mention only a few.

And underlying the whole is the philosophy of a man
who has established a real science of living.

In two volumes. 1888 pages. Illustrated
Popular Edition. Cloth. $15.00 per set.

De Luxe Edition. Limited, autographed and numbered.
Half leather. Hand-made paper. $40.00 per set.

WORLD BOOK COMPANY

Yonkers-on-Hudson, New York 2126 Prairie Avenue, Chicago

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

A SCIENCE LIBRARY

THREE ADDITIONS
The Physiology of Twinning

By Horatio Hackett NEwMAN

In this book the author develops his theory of the
cause of twinning which was first advanced in 1917 in his
volume, The Biology of Twins. He now uses it as a work-
ing hypothesis to explain a long array of peculiar twin-
ning processes in diverse groups of animals. Interested
primarily in the causes and consequences of ¢winning, he
discusses all known types of complete or partial one-egg
twinning in the animal kingdom. His experiments, which
tend to indicate that twinning is a phenomenon much
more general than previously supposed, are here published
in the hope that study of the biological processes involved
in twinning may solve some of the riddles of life. Ready
January 1. $1.75, postpaid $1.85.

The Antiquity of Disease

By Roy L. Mooprs

A non-technical presentation of geological evidences of |

disease. From the examination of fossil vertebrates and
the bones of early man, a record is here constructed of
prehistoric pathological conditions and, for the first time
in published form, there is given a discussion of the rela-
tion of such evidence to the origin and evolution of dis-
ease. With especially prepared illustrations, this work
will be of particular service to those interested in medical
history, general evolution, zoology, and geology. Ready
February 10. $1.50, postpaid $1.60.

The Story of the Maize Plant

By Pau WrEATHERWAX
The, only complete,- modern exposition of ‘the,. mor-

phology of the maize plant. In this volume Mr. Weather-
wax is interested in giving a well-balanced, reliable sum-
mary of our present botanical knowledge of maize. He
eliminates the influence of the economic point of view
and describes maize as a plant, with problems of its own
to solve, a life of its own to live, and a part of its own
to play in the drama of organic existence. His treatment
of the biological individuality of maize is accompanied by
a brief discussion of the influence of corn upon ancient
and modern American civilizations, and the reciprocal re-
actions of human activities upon the plant. Ready Feb-
ruary 15. $1.75, postpaid $1.85.

The University of Chicago
Science Series

has been designed to occupy a
position between the short arti-
eles of technical journals and
elaborate treatises which attempt
to cover several or all aspects of
a wide field. The volumes of
this series present the complete
results of experiments or series
of investigations which previ-
ously have appeared only in
scattered articles, if published at
all, They confine themselves to
specific problems of current, in-
terest and present the subject in
as summary a manner and with
as little technical detail as is
consistent with sound method.
They are written not only for
the specialist but .for the edu-
eated layman, and are small

| duodecimo volumes bound uni-

formly in maroon cloth. The
following titles are published
and for sale at your bookstore
or the publishers:

The Evolution of Sex in Plants
By John Merle Coulter. $1.25

Individuality in Organisms
By Charles Manning Child.

The Origin of the Earth
By Thomas C. Chamberlin.

$1.50

$1.75

Finite Collineation Groups
By Hans I. Blichfeldt. $1.50

A Chemical Sign of Life
By Shiro Tashiro. $1.25

The Biology of Twins

By Horatio Hackett Newman. $1.50

Food Poisoning
By Edwin Oakes , Jordan.

The Electron,
By Robert Andrews Millikan.

The Living Cycads
By Charles J. Chamberlain.
Problems of Fertilization
By Frank R. Lillie. $1.75
The Origin and Development
of the Nervous System from a
Physiological Viewpoint
By Charles M_ Child.

$1.25

$1.75

$1.50

$1.75

THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO PRESS

5811 ELLIS AVENUE

CHICAGO, ILLINOIS

vi SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

Serological Water Bath of Precision

rE

Electrically heated and temperature controlled serological water baths capable of
operating at 37.5 degrees Centigrade or 56 degrees Centigrade, either temperature may
be obtained by a simple turn of the indicative snap switch. The Wassermann test and
work may be accomplished in the same bath. An Immersion electric heater which is
entirely surrounded by water and extends the full length of the bath is used. The
thermostats are the multiple contact type, capable of repeated heating and cooling without
changing the adjustment. Should other working temperatures be desired the adjustment
screw on the thermostat permits the temperature to be readily changed. Baths may be
had from stock in the following sizes. Specify voltage when ordering:

PORCELAIN BATHS:

1803A—12/ in. x 6 in. x 5 in. Double temperature, Price______ $55.00
1803B—12!4 in. x 6 in. x 5 in. Single temperature, Price______ 50.00
COPPER NICKEL PLATED BATHS; DOUBLE TEMPERATURE:
18010 (—— 8) ins xyli2) pains x) 5) in Prices == ae ee $90.00
1801 A—24 in. x 1244 in. x 5 in. Price______________________ 95.00
SINGLE TEMPERATURE
VSOUB——8ains41 2 intexgo) ine eric eee ee oe ee $75.00
1801C——2;4.inex)2)/4,an: x15) ins, Price eee 80.00
1801D—26 in. x 12% im: x5 im. Priceli_-_-___ 2 ee 85.00

Send for Bulletin ES-1 covering full description.

BRAUN-KNECHT-HEIMANN- CO.

Founded 1852 . 4
584 Mission Street San Francisco, Calif.

LABORATORY SUPPLIES

Apparatus Chemicals
Scientific Instruments
“We know how to pack for export”
Inventors—Manufacturers—Exporters—Distributors
Cable Address, ““BRAUNDRUG” Los Angeles House
All Codes used. The Braun Corporation

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

<<

Scientific workers can very often profit by the experience of others who
have made available the results of their investigations

G-E Research
Laboratory,
Schenectady,
N.Y.

Do you require
high-voltage, direct current?

The G-E Research Laboratory has devel-
oped an apparatus for producing direct
current at pressures up to 200,000 volts,
2kw. ‘This outfit consists of a motor and
2000-cycle alternator, transformers, 100,-
000-volt condensers and kenotrons, and
switchboard assembly.

A small d-c. testing set, also embodying the
use of the kenotron as a rectifier, is avail-
able for supplying 100 milliamperes at 10,-
000 volts. This outfit operates on any 110-
volt, 60-cycle circuit.

Laboratories, colleges or other institutions

70,000-oolt, 700-mae —_ interested in research or other work requiring
eC. Testing Set i os

a high voltage, d-c., should communicate

with the Supply Department, Schenectady

Office.
©
neralvorlectric
i > ny Schenectady, N. Y.

sas iS
35B-52

> sy

Vili SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

A BARGAIN FROM

CLEARANCE SALE LIST NO. 10

21442. Lecture Table Bal-
ance, Freas, constructed entirely
of magnalium and aluminum;
with beam 14 inches long and
with knife edges and bearings of
agate. With two poimters and
two indicators, for observation
from front and rear, easily read
at a distance of 30 feet. Capa-
city 500 grams, with a pointer

| | deviation of 16 divisions for
150 milligrams. (Slightly shop-
[feel ered eerie’ worn from standing in show-
room).
Regular Price_______ $200.00
SPECIAL SALE
PRICE 2 22 as $ 75.00

The above Balance is offered at this special price on our CLEARANCE
SALE LiST NQ. 160, which has just been published, and is an example of the
remarkable reductions in price on the items included in this list. These special
prices are in most instances far below our original costs.

CLEARANCE SALE LIST NO. 10 includes all items in our stocks at the
time of publication of the current 828-page edition of our catalogue which did
not absolutely conform to the specifications and selection of sizes offered in this
catalogue. The list also includes items discontinued as regular stock articles,
a few shop-worn samples and the surplus of some slow-moving stocks, but every
item is in first-class condition unless otherwise noted.

This list is now being distributed and orders should be sent promptly as we can supply
only the quantities indicated at these special prices. Orders are filled in rotation as received.

Copy of CLEARANCE SALE LIST NO. 10 Sent on Request
ARTHUR H. THOMAS COMPANY

WHOLESALE, RETAIL AND EXPORT MERCHANTS

LABORATORY APPARATUS AND REAGENTS

WEST WASHINGTON SQUARE PHILADELPHIA, U. S. A.
CABLE ADDRESS, “BALANCE,” PHILADELPHIA

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

XV

WANTED—Zoologist for a Mission College in
India. Should have a Ph.D. degree and some
teaching experience, and must be a Christian
with Missionary motive. Opportunity for re-

search. Salary sufficient for comfortable living, |

with free travel to and from India. Apply with

full credentials to The Principal, Ewing Christian |

College, Allahabad, India.

ENERGETIC PROFESSOR |

IN ELEMENTARY COLLEGE BOTANY OR
BIOLOGY desires to change position. Seven
years’ teaching experience, M. A., working on
Ph.D. Strong teaching personality. Clear pre-
sentation of subjects. Students’ interest created
and developed. Address K, Science, 2619 Grand
Central Terminal, New York City.

SCIENTIFIC PERIODICALS

Chemical, Medical and allied subjects.
Complete files, volumes and _ copies;
bought and. sold. Please send us a list
of your wants. B. LOGIN & SON, 29
East 21st Street, New York City.

WANTED

Formulae and Processes for Chemicals
Ad-

dress: G, clo Science, Garrison, N. Y.

used in the Pharmaceutical Trade.

AAR

T

are wound on enameled tubes, as illustrated above. By
means of slidinz-contacts the resistance can be varied
from zero to full capacity, in exceedingly small steps.
In resistance ratings, JAGABI Rheostats vary
from 0.34 ohm up to 14,000 ohms, and in cor-
responding current values from 25 amperes
down to .2 ampere.
Especially suited for use in Educational, Research and In-
dustrial Laboratories, Write for Descriptive Bulletins 980.
JAMES G. B!IDDLE,1211-13 ArRcH ST., PHILADELPHIA

REACTIONS OF SOILS
May be quickly and accurately determined
through use of the
“LAMOTTE”
INDICATOR FIELD SET
Complete with instructions. $4.25 (delivered)
H-lIon concentration of water and solutions
quickly and easily determined by the
“LAMOTTE”
H-ION COMPARATOR SET
Complete and ready for use. $9.10 (delivered)
Send for Literature.

LaMotte Chemical Products Co.
Baltimore, Md., U.S. A.

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF BOTANY

Devoted to All Branches of Botanical Science
Established 1914. Monthly, except August and September.
Official Publication of the Botanical Society of America.
Volumes 1-8 complete, $58
Prices of

Subscription, $6 a year.
post free. Single numbers, 75 cents, post free.
odd volumes on request.

_ Foreign postage: To Canada, 20 cents; to other coun-
tries, 40 cents.

ECOLOGY

Devoted to All Forms of Life in Relation to Environment
Established 1920. Quarterly.

Official Publication of the Ecological Society of America.
Subscription, $4 a year. Back volumes 1-3, $3.50 post free.

Single numbers, $1.15 post free.

_ Foreign postage: To Canada, 10 cents; to other coun-
tries, 20 cents.

GENETICS

A Periodical Record of Investigations in Heredity and
Variation

Established 1916. Bimonthly.
Subscription, $6 a year. Single numbers, $1.15 post free.

Foreign postage: To Canada, 25 cents; to other coun-

[ tries, 50 cents.

BROOKLYN BOTANIC GARDEN MEMOIRS

Volume One contains 33 contributions on genetics,
pathology, mycology, physiology, ecology, plant geog-
raphy, morphology, and systematic botany.

38 plates, 41 text figures:

Price $3.50 plus postage. Weight, 4 pounds.
Published irregularly.

Orders should be placed direct with

The Secretary, Brooklyn Botanic Garden,
BROOKLYN, N. Y., U.S. A.

INSTRUCTOR IN
BIOLOGY WANTED

Young man to assist in large classes
of College Zoology and to take
charge of a small class in Mammalian
Anatomy. Salary moderate but the
place offers a good opening to a
capable young man who will work
and grow. Initiative more important
than experience. Opportunity to
work for a higher degree. ~

The candidate must speak and write
English correctly and easily. Those
unable to meet this requirement
should not apply.

Work begins January |, 1923.
Address, with full educational his-
tory and list of persons who would
know about your work:

PROFESSOR OF BIOLOGY,

University of Colorado,
Boulder,

Colorado

Xvl

JAGABI DIAL PATTERN

RESISTANCE BOXES

and

WHEATSTONE BRIDGES

For use in Research, Industrial and Edu-
cational Laboratories these instruments are
recommended—as combining first class ma-
terials, excellent workmanship and moderate
prices.

No plugs are used; and the dials are ar-
ranged to be “direct-reading,’ a matter of
quite some importance. 2

The boxes are dust-proof, with hard rub-
ber tops. The coils are of manganin wire.
wound bi-filar on metal spools and are cali-
brated within 1/10 of I per cent.

In the Resistance Boxes each dial controls
9 coils of like value—which plan eliminates
“kicks” in a telephone receiver or galvano-
meter when the switch is being rotated.

The Wheatstone Bridge includes four sets
of coils, 9 x (1-+10-+100-+1000 ohms), and
the bridge coils have a dial control which
multiplies by .00I, .O1, 0.1, I, 10, 100 or 1000
—thus simplifying construction and opera-
tion as compared with two separate “arms.”

Write for illustrated descriptive
Bulletin S-1000.

JAMES G. BIDDLE
SCIENTIFIC INSTRUMENTS
1211-13 Arch St., Philadelphia

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

CAMBRIDGE
INSTRUMENTS

SS’

BOY’S RADIOMICROMETER

An extremely sensitive instrument
for the measurement of radiant heat.
The suspended system consists of a
single loop of silver wire having
at its lower extremity a sensitive
thermo-couple. The thermojunction
carries a receiving plate of blackened
copper foil. The radiation received
on this plate raises the temperature
of the thermo-junction and causes a
small current to flow in the silver
loop, which is consequently deflected.

Send for list No. 100

Also manufacturers of all types of
Physical and Electrical Instruments.

The Cambridée ana Paul

INSTRUMENT. C2:tAMERICA Wc)
Works va, Office 6 Showroom
Ossintna-on-Hupson N EW YOR K GranDCENTRALTERMINAL

SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS XVll

with
Standardized Vitamine Products

Note the Normal Growth obtained with STANDARDIZED
Brewers’ Yeast as Source of Vitamine-B; and TESTED COD
LIVER OIL-HARRIS as source of Vitamine-A.

DIET
| CaseinHarris 18%

Crisco wer
} Gorn Starch A8%
Salt Mixture Ax

200m¢. dried yeast daily }
furnished Vitamine Bf

H 150m@ Cop Liver O11 - |
H Harris daily furnished |
} Vitamine A H

We are supplying tested and Materials for Y
Standardized Vitamine and other Vitamine Studies

food elements to such Research ilo thescymnterested| im) carrying
: : : out scientific work in experimental
Institutions as the following: nutrition and bacteriology, we can
furnish standardized, biologically
5 9 9 tested vitami itamine-
Johns Hopkins University eae orl Bae) WAU ee
Yale University Meret Vitamine-Harris in Powdered
J 2 orm.
Harvard University Witamine=freeficasein=
3 # 5 Vitamine-free starch.
Columbia University Vitamine-free fats.
: 4 h ue Complete inorganic salt mix (Standard
University of California formulae), or
i Complete food mixture, free from any
Toronto University one Vitamine.
D 5 . We offer advice and services in experi-
University of Pennsylvania mental feeding with especial relation to
U. S. Public Health Service, etc. iret areca

THE HARRIS LABORATORIES
TUCKAHOE, NEW YORK
° ° ° Chart showing Vitamine Content of Com-
Ask for revised price list Pion Goae Wendl Seica ieee iterative ven
Vitamines sent free on request.

‘

xviii SCIENCE—ADVERTISEMENTS

A NEW FORM OF

DEMONSTRATION ORGAN PIPE

am a fl

SWEL = =

Special Features Suesested by PROFESSOR LUNN, University of Chicago

No. 3268.—DEMONSTRATIGN ORGAN PIPE. All Metal. Making it possible to teach a larger

number of the fundamental principles of organ pipes.

The usual method of varying the length of a closed pipe is by a sliding piston. Frequently in
demonstrating this by sliding the piston it is found that one of the overtones will become more marked
than the fundamental and the pipe apparently changes pitch. This may sometimes be delayed by blow-
ing either more or less vehemently. But it has been proven that with the range of lengths usually used
in class demonstration work, it is impossible to make an organ pipe that will not emphasize some ovyer-
tone at some length. To produce the fundamental at different lengths the mouthpiece must be changed
in construction.

This instrument has an adjustable mouthpiece. By operating the two sliding cylindrical sleeves the
amount and direction of the air jet may be changed and also the size of the opening between the
resonance column and the outside air.

By this method a demonstration of the law of lengths may be made without producing overtones
—by adjusting the mouthpiece while operating the piston.

Further, the overtones, first, second, third, etc., may be produced at will, without changing the pres-
sure of the blast of air or the length of the resonance column. In this design of organ pipe these
overtones are brought out by altering the position of the sleeves over the windway. This demon-
strates one of the most technical problems in the art of organ building, and also shows very forcibly
the reason for so-called “lip-positions” in many wind instruments.

The piston is provided with graduations so that the exact length of air column may be readily
known at all times. The air column length is a little more than 40 cm. Therefore the pitch range
will be from about C’ up to very high pitches determined by how short the air column may be made
to resonate. The pitch obtained at any length varies by overtone steps depending upon the positions
of the sleeves about the windway. The lowest note that can be sounded is produced by pulling the
piston all the way out and making an open tube, and is of course an ottave lower than the lowest note
for a closed pipe. The height of the mouth will be found to be required to be less when the pipe is
an open pipe than when it is a closed pipe.

Handsomely Nickel Write for Price

Plated. About 60 cm.
long.

Ask for descriptive circular
of other. new developments
in Scientific Apparatus.

TE SRRET Hp SES ODDS TOTTI eS REST QUALITY
A Sign of Quality ELCH| A Mark of Service

SERVICE

W. M. WELCH SCIENTIFIC COMPANY

Manufacturers, Importers and Exporters of
Scientific Apparatus and School Supplies

1516 Orleans Street : Chicago, Ill, U. S. A.

~—Sh

Ke
SEA ah
nN

~

CS & |
or :

i

ie

<i |

4

wh

i
Pp i

ail >

r i i!

-

%,

Os ss “an

S
apes :

2

Zann

OHA
xs cine
Wed, oh is

Ss

: yy i"

@ al
: “gh

%,
"ay
A

i if S s

wr cf; ,
i

; Y
|
Ae ti
2 WS
SUT
2 at S

~ a
Gs

N,
%

i

“7

Mal,

a

Is

OLN
een ieee

ey

}
0, SEE ae?
oo

“ally

; I

»

<>

i atl

SS EE
aS fest Hse EN

Mey
Sec SS inh ly

ra

Mc

25 S
%

4 i) Fe Or

‘ ML

4) ir -

Sees:

ili |
2 ~ i

Mh
o
"2

5

i_p

LN

\

+h)

i

ay)
cope a
NOs

OLIN

es
[se oty
a0

ye *

[ges eevee e

oa 1) es !
wae eee is er
io ‘A ‘ | i “tl ,
y : = ees vie ce

; "3 & oy)
NE EES Y
Y

Se
PHOS TNO OO!
Sea ae

Sera

4)

"

i

| <

ib, -

“i

i,
Mi

shale

i (i

WO Or, yy, Ax ay
X SHR
Se TE

Ks

i a" as

ctaaoinh seinen oe pa RH es Re a ee “2s = es _ scree a a Ee IM el ot EE a
LY peyete. oe en aepemaar as ew an Avan ge pomnntt = ieee eee an Ne Aone Ae naattmmnnere sary ighantereetremre ne eee See ee, nn ae e's Scream az
elie rennet rears eet neti Pewee SEN Hn tea aren ete eae ee: lace dma dg Ustad pe bs ape oh ale apse reer = = ASSO en a Se serrate Se. eee ~ ay, ore on ae ented Beene

cane tin tngehnnibemte beans

lh

hh

|

a
u
rs
<
x
2
a
z
fe)
=
2
=
=
a
=
z
s
z
°
)
x
=
=
7)